*7.2-7.  /S'. 


***%u 

DPTMrTTTnM  NT  T 


PRINCETON,  N.  J. 


% 


Presented  by 


~Y^(SaS.  \jSrSt) . tb\ni&c\<A<?vn  , 


Division 


D-S653 


v.  Z 


h 1 1.  °1 


Q*sfj-&C7)  ! 7<JU*> 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 
in  2016 


https://archive.org/details/reportofphilippi02unit_0 


0.6.  TV 


>Ve.  cowiwi iss iovn.  1899*16 


R E P 0 R T 


OF  THE 


SEP  07  J9I5 


& 


PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION 


TO 


THE  PRESIDENT. 


VOL.  II. 

(TESTIMONY  AND  EXHIBITS.) 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE. 

1900. 


To  the  Senate  and  1 house  of  Representatives: 

I transmit  herewith,  for  the  information  of  the  Congress,  Volume 
II  of  the  Report  of  the  United  States  Commission  to  the  Philippine 
Islands. 

William  McKinley. 

Executive  Mansion,  May  If  1900. 


n 


LETTER  OF  TRANSMITTAL 


Department  of  State, 

United  States  Commission  to  the 

Philippine  Islands, 

April  27,  1900. 

Sir:  We  have  the  honor  to  hand  you  herewith  Volume  II  of  our 
report,  being  the  testimony  taken  by  this  commission  during  its  stay 
in  Manila. 

Other  volumes  containing  various  papers  on  scientific,  commercial, 
and  other  subjects  of  general  interest  will  hereafter  be  transmitted. 
There  will  also  be  transmitted  a volume  of  maps  of  the  Philippine 
Islands  prepared  in  Manila  by  direction  of  the  commission. 

We  append  hereto  a statement  signed  by  the  commissioners,  bearing 
date  March  29, 1900,  which  more  particularly  explains  the  work  of  the 
commission  and  the  contents  of  the  papers  above  referred  to. 

Owing  to  the  assignment  of  Mr.  Worcester  to  other  duties,  the  plan 
therein  outlined  has  been  to  some  extent  departed  from.  Instead  of 
original  papers  being  furnished  by  him,  as  therein  contemplated, 
translations  have  been  made  of  various  papers  prepared  for  the  com- 
mission by  the  Jesuit  fathers  in  Manila.  These,  together  with  such 
other  papers  as  the  commission  may  have  to  submit,  will  in  due 
course  be  transmitted  to  the  State  Department. 

We  have  the  honor  to  be,  sir,  very  respectfully,  yours, 

Charles  Denby. 

John  R.  MacArthur, 

Secretary. 

The  President. 

hi 


Washington,  D.  C.,  March  £9,  1900. 


To  the  President: 

Sir:  In  issuing  the  remaining  volumes  of  its  report  the  commission 
desires  to  make  some  explanations  in  regard  to  the  method  of  its 
preparation. 

Soon  after  the  organization  of  the  commission  in  Manila  the  work 
of  investigation  was  divided  among  its  members,  each  being  assigned 
a subject  or  number  of  subjects  to  report  upon,  with  the  understand- 
ing that  all  their  reports  should  be  read,  criticised,  and  passed  upon  by 
the  commission  as  a whole.  To  Mr.  Schurman  was  assigned  the  sub- 
ject of  “ The  government  of  the  Philippine  Islands;”  toAmiral  Dewey, 
“ The  condition  and  needs  of  the  United  States  in  the  Philippines  from 
a naval  and  maritime  standpoint,”  and  to  Colonel  Denby,  “ The  judicial 
system,”  “The  secular  clergy  and  religious  orders,”  “ The  registra- 
tion law,”  “The  currency,”  “The  Chinese  in  the  Philippines,”  and 
“Public  health.” 

The  papers  prepared  upon  these  subjects  by  the  members  of  the 
commission  just  named  have,  after  examination  and  adoption  by 
the  commission,  been  published  in  the  first  volume  of  this  report: 
Mr.  Schurman’s  as  Part  IV  (pp.  43-121),  Admiral  Dewey’s  as  Part  VI 
(pp.  127-130),  Colonel  Denby’s  as  Part  V (pp.  122-127)  and  Parts  VII, 
VIII,  IX,  X,  and  XI  (pp.  130-163). 

To  Mr.  Worcester  was  assigned  the  subject  of  the  “Peoples  of  the 
Philippine  Islands  and  the  nature  and  resources  of  their  country.” 
Parts  II  and  III  of  the  first  volume,  dealing  with  the  inhabitants  of 
the  archipelago  and  their  educational  condition,  are  Mr.  Worcester’s 
first  contribution  to  this  subject.  His  remaining  contributions  consti- 
tute the  greater  part  of  this  volume  and  the  whole  of  the  next  volume 
of  the  commission’s  report.1  The  work  was  done  as  follows: 

While  Mr.  Worcester  was  engaged  in  gathering  information  as  to 
the  peoples  of  the  Philippines  and  the  physical  characteristics  and 
resources  of  the  various  islands,  members  of  the  Jesuit  order  were 
repeatedly  requested  to  testify  before  the  commission.  It  was  sug- 
gested by  them  that  such  information  as  they  were  able  to  furnish 

1 As  stated  ha  the  previously  printed  letter  of  transmittal,  dated  April  27,  1900,  the 
plan  herein  set  forth  has  been  to  some  extent  departed  from. 


VI 


LETTER  OF  TRANSMIT  TAL. 


would  be  of  more  permanent  value  if  embodied  in  formal  papers  upon 
the  various  subjects  under  consideration.  An  arrangement  to  this  end 
was  accordingly  entered  into  with  them  by  Mr.  Worcester  whereby  it 
was  agreed  that  they  should  furnish  treatises  on  the  following  subjects: 

I.  Orography. 

II.  Hydrography. 

III.  Geognosj". 

IV.  Phytography. 

V.  Zoograph}r. 

VI.  Climatology. 

VII.  Cyclical  variation  of  terrestrial  magnetism. 

VIII.  Seismic  foci. 

IX.  Ethnography. 

X.  Chorography. 

XI.  State  of  culture. 

XII.  Chronology. 

The  work  of  preparing  these  treatises  occupied  a much  longer  period 
than  was  at  first  anticipated,  and  they  were  not  available  at  the  time 
the  first  volume  of  this  report  was  published,  but  the  additional  time 
was  employed  in  the  securing  and  collating  of  a mass  of  most  interest- 
ing and  valuable  information,  which  could  hardly  have  been  brought 
together  prior  to  the  date  previously  provisionally  agreed  upon  for  its 
transmission  to  Washington. 

The  papers,  as  finally  received,  cover  a very  wide  field.  In  many 
instances  the  subject-matter  and  the  method  employed  in  treating  it 
have  been  such  that  they  could  be  freely  translated  and  utilized  as  they 
stood.  Some  slight  condensation  has  been  deemed  advisable  in  certain 
cases,  and  occasionally  sections  have  been  omitted,  either  because  they 
covered  ground  already  gone  over  in  the  first  volume  of  our  report,  or 
because  the  subject-matter  treated  was  not  sufficiently  pertinent  to  our 
purpose  to  warrant  its  inclusion.  Additional  information  has  been 
inserted  where  it  was  deemed  necessary. 

While  the  papers  on  “climatology,”  “cyclical  variation  of  terres- 
trial magnetism,”  and  “seismic  foci”  are  somewhat  technical,  the 
information  contained  in  them  is  so  extensive,  detailed,  and  accurate, 
and  much  of  it  is  of  so  much  practical  value,  that  it  has  been  thought 
it  should  be  published  in  full,  and  thus  be  made  available  for  purposes 
of  reference. 

The  commission  wishes  to  express  its  indebtedness  to  the  fathers  of 
the  Jesuit  order  at  Manila  for  the  whole  admirable  series  of  treatises, 
which  have  made  available  a large  body  of  information,  not  a little  of 
which  is  new,  and  much  of  which  could  not  possibly  have  been  gath- 
ered by  us  in  the  time  at  our  disposal. 

The  way  in  which  the  various  treatises  have  been  utilized  is  indi- 


LETTER  OF  TRANSMITTAL. 


VII 

<-ated  in  connection  with  each.  Where  condensations  or  omissions 
occur  their  nature  and  extent  may  be  determined  by  comparison  with 
the  original  text,  which  is  published  verbatim  in  Spanish. 

The  translation  and  adaptation  of  these  treatises  for  the  purposes 
of  this  report  have  been  in  charge  of  Mr.  Worcester. 

In  addition  to  these  treatises  of  the  Jesuit  fathers,  the  present  vol- 
ume contains  a paper  on  “Mineral  resources  and  geology,”  for  which 
the  commission  is  indebted  to  I)r.  George  F.  Becker;  a paper  on  “For- 
eign population,”  by  Colonel  Denby,  and  papers  on  “Commerce,” 
“Means  of  communication,”  and  “Land  tenure  and  mortgages,”  by 
Mr.  John  11.  MacArthur,  secretary  and  counsel  of  the  commission. 

In  preparing  their  several  papers  the  members  of  the  commission 
have  derived  data  not  only  from  Spanish  books  and  documents,  which 
they  found  in  unexpected  abundance  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  but 
also  from  evidence  taken  from  witnesses,  who  were  interrogated  on  all 
phases  of  the  Philippine  question,  each  commissioner  tending  by  his 
interrogatories  to  develop  facts  and  views  on  the  topics  in  which  he 
himself  was  specially  interested.  This  testimony  forms  the  conclud- 
ing volume  of  the  commission’s  report.1  It  is  believed  that  it  will  be 
found  of  unusual  interest  to  the  American  public.  The  witnesses 
came  in  freely,  pursuant  to  the  invitation  of  the  commission  in  its 
proclamation  of  April  -I,  1899,  from  all  classes  of  the  people,  and  the}T 
represented  all  varieties  of  opinion.  They  voice  the  sentiments  of  the 
Filipino  peoples  on  all  the  great  questions  of  political,  civil,  and  reli- 
gious liberty.  There  are  interviews  with  emissaries  of  Aguinaldo 
looking  to  the  establishment  of  peace.  There  are  instructive  talks  by 
business  men  on  the  resources,  industries,  finances,  and  means  of  com- 
munication in  the  Philippines.  Every  witness  said  what  he  wanted 
to,  and  the  commission  cordially  invited  all  kinds  of  witnesses  to 
appear.  This  volume  of  testimony  tells  the  causes  of  the  insurrection, 
the  forces  which  inspired  it,  the  ideals  of  the  Philippine  peoples,  and 
the  kind  of  political  arrangement  their  leading  men  desire  to  see  estab- 
lished with  the  United  States. 

The  volume  of  maps,  or  atlas,  now  in  course  of  reproduction  by  the 
Coast  and  Geodetic  Survey,  if  not  issued  with  these  volumes  will 
appear  shortly  thereafter. 

The  commission  desires  to  thank  all  who  have  assisted  it  in  its  labors; 
and  its  especial  gratitude  is  due  to  the  loyal  Filipinos  who,  all  over  the 
archipelago,  aided  it  in  accomplishing  the  object  for  which  it  was 
established.  Thanks  also  are  due  to  Mr.  Rutherford  Corbin,  the 
assistant  secretary,  and  to  all  the  clerks  and  members  of  the  staff  for 
their  loyal,  efficient,  and  helpful  services. 

'Owing  to  the  change  of  plan,  this  testimony  forms  Vol.  II  (the  present  volume) 
of  this  report. 


vm 


LETTER  OF  TRANSMITTAL. 


In  concluding  our  labors  we  beg  to  express  to  you,  sir.  our  high 
appreciation  of  the  uniform  kindness  and  courtesies,  official  and  per- 
sonal, which  you  have  constantly  shown  the  commission. 

J.  G.  ScHURMAN. 

George  Dewey. 

Charles  Denby. 

Dean  C.  Worcester. 

John  R.  MacArthur, 

Secretary  and  Counsel. 


MEETING  OF  THE  COMMISSION  HELD  AT  THE  AUDIENCIA. 


Manila,  April  12 , 1899. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Hon.  Charles  Denby,  and 
Prof.  Dean  C.  Worcester,  commissioners,  and  Mr.  John  R.  Mac  Arthur, 
secretary. 

There  appeared  before  the  commissioners  Air.  J.  F.  Alacleod,  who, 
at  the  request  of  the  commission,  made  the  following  statement: 

TESTIMONY  OF  J.  F.  MACLEOD. 

I think  that  the  policy  of  the  United  States  in  barring  importation 
of  rice  and  thereby  threatening  a famine  in  Tacloban  is  both  inexpe- 
dient and  opposed  to  humanity,  as  95  per  cent  of  the  natives  are  not 
rebellious. 

B}r  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Do  you  refer  to  the  Tagalogs? — A.  AVell,  no;  to  the  people  all 
over  the  islands.  Ninety-live  per  cent  of  the  people  arc  not  rebellious. 
What  they  want  is  good  government. 

Q.  You  think  they  do  not  care  what  kind  of  government  it  is,  so 
long  as  it  is  good? — A.  I think  so.  I was  present  in  Negros  when 
they  were  drawing  up  their  constitution,  and  they  all  seem  satisfied 
with  it.  They  want  a good  government,  these  people.  They  want 
honest  government.  They  don’t  want  to  be  squeezed.  They  have  got 
an  awful  want  of  confidence  in  a white  face,  because  the  Spaniard  has 
squeezed  them  terribly  during  the  last  ten  years.  He  has  alwa}Ts 
squeezed  them,  but  more  so  during  the  last  ten  years  than  ever  before, 
and  they  have  been  told  by  the  priests  and  by  Spaniards  that  the 
Americans  will  do  the  same.  Your  case  has  been  prejudiced  by  those 
people.  They  were  told  that  the  Americans  were  the  same  as  the 
Spaniards  and  would  do  the  same  sort  of  things,  and  they  thought  this 
revolution  was  their  only  means  of  gaining  their  object.  AVell,  of 
course,  you  know  what  these  native  people  are.  Ninety-five  per  cent 
are  a mass  of  ignorance,  but  they  are  obedient  to  anything  that  is 
correct.  AA7hen  the  Spaniards  went  away  they  delivered  the  govern- 
ment over  to  these  principal  men  and  they  established  a revolutionary 
government. 

Q.  Now,  may  I ask,  is  that  revolutionary  government  run  in  con- 
nection with  the  Tagalog  government  up  here? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  As  part  of  it? — A.  They  are  all  waiting  to  find  out  what  the 
resistance  of  Aguinaldo  amounts  to.  AA7hen  he  is  conquered  they  will 
all  draw  out.  Now,  of  course,  they  will  give  him  some  information, 
p c 1 1 


2 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


naturally.  I prefer  to  state  my  views  in  writing,  as  1 think  I can 
write  you  out  a better  report  than  I can  make  orally,  now. 

Q.  Will  you  please  do  that,  too? 

(Written  report  handed  to  the  commission  and  read  by  the  secretary, 
and  is  hereto  appended.) 

Mr.  Macleod.  I say  that  it  is  a pity  to  starve  the  people,  because  I 
can’t  see  why  95  per  cent  should  pay  for  the  sins  of  5 per  cent. 

Q.  Are  they  starving? — A.  I think  they  are  in  a pretty  bad  way. 

Q.  In  Albay? — A.  In  Albay  and  everywhere  else.  They  are  all 
sick  of  it.  The  principal  men  down  there  told  me  that  they  were  sick 
of  this  sort  of  thing  and  want  to  know  when  the  Americans  will  come 
in.  One  of  them  said  the}'  had  got  sick  of  it  and  to  tell  the  Americans 
for  God’s  sake  to  come  down  here  quickly,  because  we  can’t  stay  here 
under  present  conditions. 

Q.  How  many  men  would  it  take? — A.  About  1,500.  I think  that 
would  clear  them  out. 

Q.  And  that  is  only  down  in  Albay? — A.  That  is  in  Albay. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  you  think  there  will  be  any  fighting  down  there? — A.  No; 
they  will  scoot  to  the  hills.  Wo  arrived  in  Calbayog  (Samar)  about  8 
o'clock.  The  Indians  saw  the  lights  on  our  boat  and  they  said  this  is 
some  Government  steamer.  They  are  rather  suspicious  about  a light. 
There  was  a little  steamer,  the  San  Bernardo , which  used  to  visit 
there.  The  people  made  for  the  mountains,  the  soldiers  and  everybody. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Where  was  that? — A.  Albay. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  the  population  of  that  place? — A.  Thirteen  thousand. 
I must  say  that  the  native  officials  are  very  courteous  when  we  go 
around,  pleasant,  affable,  nice,  fair-talking  men,  but  then  their  actions 
belie  them  a little.  There  is  a general  in  Samar  called  Lucban,  who 
chased  the  Spaniards  out.  I went  over  to  Sorsogon  in  September. 
I arrived  there  the  day  after  the  Spaniards  had  cleared  out.  General 
Lucban  had  come,  and  was  stationed  about  10  miles  out  of  town  with 
IT  men.  He  sent  a messenger  in  to  say  that  General  Lucban  was 
coming  with  3,000  men.  The  Spaniards  crowded  onto  their  boats  and 
promptly  left.  I was  in  the  Uranus  and  saw  the  last  of  the  Spaniards 
leave.  I went  down  to  Legaspi  and  I didn’t  find  a Spaniard.  I 
wouldn't  let  the  steamer  go  into  port  until  I got  assurances  from  the 
provisional  government  of  her  and  our  safety;  and  while  the  Uranus 
was  loading  they  transformed  the  provisional  government  into  the 
revolutionary  government;  in  fact,  into  the  Aguinaldo  government 
afterwards.  Soldiers  appeared  on  the  scene,  and  General  Lucban 
with  his  47  men  went  from  Sorsogon  to  Samar  and  did  the  same  trick 
there.  He  cleaned  the  Spaniards  out  in  the  same  way  with  47  men. 
I was  in  Calbayog  a week.  The  same  thing  happened  in  Leyte. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Where  did  the  Spaniards  go  ? — A.  They  went  to  Ilo-Ilo  and  Cebu, 
anywhere  to  get  away  from  these  3,000  imaginary  soldiers.  Lucban 
told  me  all  this  at  Catbalogan.  He  said,  “Here  are  these  47  men;  I 
rhased  the  Spaniards  out  with  them.” 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


3 


Q.  Where  is  he  now? — A.  He  has  got  $100,000  buried  away  in  the 
mountains.  The  soldiers  are  dissatisfied,  because  they  have  not  been 
paid  and  have  been  treated  as  they  should  not  have  been.  Lucban 
found  this  out,  that  they  were  dissatisfied,  and  be  went  to  the  officers 
and  told  them  to  call  the  men  together  and  tell  them  that  they  could 
have  a holiday,  but  to  leave  their  arms  there.  They  went  away,  and 
when  they  came  back  his  47  men  had  the  arms  and  he  gave  them  twenty- 
four  hours  to  leave  the  place.  They  left.  They  went  to  Calbayog, 
where  a Mr.  Scott  very  nicely  got  away  with  them.  From  there  they 
went  farther  north  to  another  place,  where  Mr.  Gibson  appears  to  have 
got  rid  of  them  by  giving  them  a larcha  to  take  them  across  to  Luzon 
and  a heifer  to  eat.  Lucban  is  in  Catbalogan  with  his  men. 

Q.  That  is,  these  47  men  ? — A.  Yes,  these  47  men.  He  has  a body 
guard  and  sends  scouts  out.  There  is  another  defended  place,  Taclo- 
ban.  I went  out  there  and  saw  Colonel  Majica,  who  is  one  of  Agui- 
naldo’s  men.  He  was  an  aid-de-camp  and  friend  of  Aguinaldo.  I 
think  they  are  pretty  strong.  I think  that  is  about  the  strongest 
place.  He  has  about  500  men  there. 

Q.  You  say  it  is  in  Samar,  too? — A.  No;  in  Leyte,  just  across  the 
strait.  There  is  this  strait  between  them.  I asked  him,  “What  are 
you  inclined  to  do  when  the  Americans  come  here?”  He  said,  Oh,  ho 
didn’t  know;  he  supposed  he  would  have  to  tight;  but  I don’t  think  he 
and  his  men  have  any  real  intention  of  fighting.  He  is  under  orders 
from  the  Manila  general,  Belarmino,  who  puts  on  more  pretense  and 
bravado  and  flowers,  but  it  would  take  about  500  Americans  to  knock 
him  out.  From  my  personal  knowledge  of  the  man  I must  say  he 
would  be  about  the  first  man  to  run  away. 

Q.  Where  did  you  see  him;  where  did  you  say  he  was? — A.  In 
Albay  and  Lagaspi.  When  we  arrived  there  in  Lagaspi  and  down  in 
Albay,  the  men  were  all  down  behind  the  trenches.  Mr.  Whiteman 
and  Mr.  Easton,  both  Britishers,  were  not  allowed  to  go  out  to  the 
boat.  Mr.  Whiteman  came  out  to  the  end  of  the  pier  and  told  us  they 
were  awaiting  the  general’s  permission,  and  as  the\r  were  talking  along 
came  four  armed  soldiers  and  marched  Whiteman  off.  That  was  a little 
too  much  for  Captain  Green  to  stand.  Pie  said  “I  am  going  ashore.” 
I said,  “ Look  at  those  fellows  behind  the  trenches;  they  are  an  undisci- 
plined lot  and  may  shoot.”  He  said  “ I can’t  stand  by  and  see  that 
sort  of  thing.  I must  know  why  these  men  came  out.”  As  I didn’t 
like  to  appear  to  be  a coward  I said  I would  go.  I went  on  the  beach 
and  there  was  an  armed  man  jumping  about  whom  I did  not  know. 
The  lieutenant-colonel  went  out  to  the  trenches 

Q.  What  flag  did  you  carry  ? — A.  The  British  naval  flag.  I don’t 
think  the  natives  know  the  naval  flag.  These  fellows  have  never  seen  it. 

Tobaco  is  overland,  I suppose,  about  14  miles,  or  90  miles  around. 
They  telegraphed  over  to  give  us  a good  reception  there  and  not  to 
show  us  any  hostility,  and  in  Tobaco  they  were  very  pleasant. 

Q.  When  were  you  there? — A.  This  trip,  last  week.  We  arrived 
here  on  Sunday. 

Q.  When  were  you  last  in  Samar  and  Leyte? — A.  About  the  30th 
or  31st  of  last  month. 

Q.  You  were  four  or  five  days  in  Albay? — A.  Four  or  five  days  in 
Albay.  I left  Tobaco  on  the  7th,  Gubat  on  the  8th.  I was  in  Legaspi 
on  the  4th. 


4 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Are  there  any  insurgent  forces  at  any  other  place  in  Samar 
than  at  Catbalogan? — A.  There  are  insurgent  forces  at  Catbalogan, 
Legaspi 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Any  in  Samar? — A.  No;  I don't  think  so.  At  Calbayog  there 
are  about  40  men,  some  of  whom  have  wooden  guns  and  wooden  bolos, 
in  the  main,  I believe. 

Q.  You  suggested  that  perhaps  it  woidd  be  better  to  write  this  out  ? — 
A.  Yes;  I think  so,  because  it  would  be  more  full  and  accurate  than 
anything  T could  now  give. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Haven’t  our  ships  been  down  there  ? — A.  The  Bennington,  was  at 
Sorsogon  and  in  Cobias.  I believe  the  Bennington  went  down  there 
and  asked  the  natives  to  hoist  the  American  Hag,  and  they  said  they 
couldn’t  do  it  without  orders  from  Aguinaldo. 

Q.  Do  you  think  it  would  be  beneficial  for  our  ships  to  go  down 
there  ? — A.  Not  unless  you  are  prepared  to  occupy  the  place.  If  you 
go  there  with  any  show  of  force  and  then  retire  they  will  say  that  it 
has  improved  their  cause.  That  is  what  they  have  been  saying  about 
the  Bennington. 

Q.  Then  you  think  we  ought  to  delay  our  naval  operations  until  we 
are  able  to  conduct  our  land  operations?- — A.  I think  if  you  occupy 
Legaspi,  Tobaco,  and  Sorsogon  with  a small  force  of  men  the  insur- 
rection would  very  soon  die  out.  And  you  woidd  cut  communication 
at  Tayabas. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Where  in  that  province? — A.  I am  not  a strategist,  but  I would 
put  enough  men  there  to  cut  off  all  communication  with  Aguinaldo. 

Q.  So  this  southern  province  with  some  Tagalogs  prevents  it? — A. 
Yes;  put  a gunboat  on  each  side,  and  then  you  could  very  easily  pre- 
vent communication. 

Q.  If  we  sent  soldiers  to  all  these  places  there  wouldn't  be  enough, 
would  there? — A.  I don’t  know;  very  few  would  be  required. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  In  the  case  of  the  Spaniards,  they  scattered  small  forces  of 
troops  through  the  islands  and  the  insurgents  whipped  them  in 
detail? — A.  I don’t  think  that  there  is  the  same  feeling  against  the 
Americans  that  there  was  against  the  Spaniards.  They  captured  a 
very  large  number  of  them.  The  Spaniards  could  have  kept  this 
place  very  easily.  I stayed  in  Legaspi  long  after  the  Spaniards  went 
out.  The  people  there  have  been  governed  to  a great  extent  by  the 
priests.  The  priests  have  great  influence  over  the  natives  by  reason 
of  the  superstitions  which  they  have  got  into  the  Indian  mind. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  would  it  do  for  a peaceable  commission  to  go  down  and  talk 
to  these  people  in  the  various  islands? — A.  I don't  think  a peaceable 
commission  would  be  of  any  use  unless  you  had  physical  force 
with  you. 

Q.  Would  it  be  possible  to  get  an  opportunity  to  talk  to  them  and 
say  that  we  did  not  want  to  enslave  them,  but  we  wanted  to  make 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


them  free  citizens,  that  the)'  were  to  govern  themselves,  as  everyone 
is  presumed  to  do  in  our  country? — A.  Unfortunately  they  would  not 
understand  you.  I think  the  Americans  ought  to  pursue  this  policy 
which  I have  outlined. 

Q.  Have  you  read  our  proclamation  ?— A.  1 am  sorry  to  say  I have 
not.  I have  read  General  Otis’s,  but  that  does  not  satisfy  them.  I 
saved  you  a tine  row  over  in  Negros  about  two  or  three  weeks  ago. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  was  that? — A.  There  was  another  rebellion  getting  up 
against  the  local  government.  You  know  Negros  itself  has  no  gov- 
ernment apart  from  Aguinaldo’s.  Colonel  Smith  is  there.  Some  of 
the  people  were  discontented  and  all  Spaniards  had  left,  abandoning 
their  property.  If  they  were  to  leave  permanently  it  would  mean  a 
lot  to  us  and  to  a great  many  other  people.  W e had  6 soldiers  and  6 
sailors  and  Lieutenant  Davidson  in  our  party.  We  told  Colonel  Smith 
what  our  object  was,  and  he  handed  me  the  constitution  of  Negros  in 
printed  form.  We  went  over  and  saw  the  ringleader,  and  we  told  him 
that  was  just  what  }'ou  were  going  to  do;  but  it  would  have  to  be 
approved  by  Washington  first.  We  brought  back  the  ringleader; 
that  is.  I brought  the  ringleader,  who  was  perfectly  satisfied.  He  was 
right  in  it  with  all  his  men,  and  he  actually  apologized  for  not  having 
a band  of  music  ready  to  receive  us. 

Q.  When  was  that  ? — A.  About  three  weeks  ago. 

Q.  What  was  the  condition  of  Negros  then ? — A.  Good;  very  good. 

Q.  What  is  it  now? — A.  It  is  not  so  good,  because  a lot  of  the 
people  in  Panay  have  brothers  and  cousins  in  the  army;  but  I think 
if  Panay  can  be  quieted,  I think  Negros  will  be,  too.  They  have  a 
line  drawn  down  there  which  I attempted  to  cross,  and  they  would  not 
let  me  cross  that.  I told  him  I would  go  out  some  other  night;  I was 
not  going  to  sleep  out  there  that  night.  I came  back  the  next  day 
and  left  in  the  Pigmy. 

Q.  Have  you  been  in  Cebu? — A.  I was  there  about  a month  ago. 

Q.  What  was  the  condition  of  Cebu? — A.  Yerv  good;  I was  there 
when  the  Pennsylvania  arrived. 

Q.  If  we  could  get  peace  here,  Mr.  Macleod,  how  much  self-govern- 
ment could  these  Indians  be  trusted  with? — A.  Well,  there  are  men 
not  in  the  government  who  are  tit  to  be  intrusted  with  the  govern- 
ment. In  fact,  the  people  who  have  gone  into  the  revolutionary  move- 
ment are  not  the  representative  people;  they  are  the  canaile,  the 
exploiters;  the  good  people  have  largely  left. 

Q.  Are  there  good  people  in  all  the  provinces  to  which  you  have 
referred?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  Fit  to  elect  their  own  representatives? — A.  The  question  of 
election  would  be  a difficult  one;  you  see  there  are  a lot  of  feuds  and 
family  jealousies,  as  among  the  okl  Scotch  tribes. 

Q.  Could  they  run  their  own  municipalities? — A.  They  might  run 
their  own  municipalities. 

Q.  All  the  provincial  governors  were  appointed? — A.  Yes;  they 
came  from  Spain,  and  I think  they  were  the  most  cultured  men  in  the 
Philippines,  generally  speaking. 

Q.  Were  these  people  allowed  to  make  their  own  local  laws  ? — A.  No ; 
the}'  were  not  allowed  to  make  their  own  local  laws. 


6 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  For  instance,  if  they  wanted  to  build  a road? — A.  They  had  to 
get  permission  from  Manila. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  If  they  wanted  to  build  a schoolhouse ? — A.  Well,  the  priest  had 
something  to  do  with  that. 

Q.  Could  it  be  done  by  the  people  there? — A.  Yes;  they  were  built 
by  the  people  there,  but  they  had  to  send  up  the  estimates  to  Manila 
to  be  approved  in  the  way  the  directory  saw  lit  here. 

Q.  That  went  through  the  local  government — the  gobernadoreillo  ? — 
A.  First  it  went  to  the  local  authority,  next  to  the  gobernadoreillo  or 
the  civil  governor,  because  the  gobernadoreillo  always  had  supervision 
of  it. 

Q.  Suppose  you  had  a town  of  live  or  ten  thousand  people,  and  they 
wanted  to  build  a schoolhouse  ? — A.  They  would  arrange  their  plans 
and  send  them  down  to  Manila.  Of  course,  the  priests  would  have  to 
do  with  it. 

Q.  How  is  the  money  raised  ? — A.  That  was  taken  out  of  the  poll  tax. 

Q.  Which  came  to  Manila? — A.  Which  came  to  Manila. 

Q.  They  never  retained  any  special  funds? — A.  No. 

Q.  The  money  was  sent  to  Manila  and  then  went  back  again? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  There  was  a poll  tax,  you  say?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  This  cedula,  you  mean? — A.  The  cedula;  yes.  Then  if  (for 
example)  work  was  wanted  on  the  road  he  had  to  pay  an  extra  tax — 
contribution  money.  There  were  licenses  for  carrying  on  businesses, 
all  granted  at  Manila. 

Q.  If  a man  living  in  Negros  wanted  to  carry  on  business  he  would 

have A.  He  would  have  to  go  to  the  capital  of  the  province  to 

get  his  license. 

Q.  He  would  get  that  license,  then,  in  that  place? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  not  send  to  Manila  for  it  ? — A.  He  would  send  to  the  capital 
of  the  province. 

Q.  What  would  be  done  with  the  money  ? — A.  It  would  be  remitted 
up  there. 

Q.  Would  it  come  up  here  and  then  go  back  to  be  used  for  local 
purposes? — A.  If  it  was  required,  yes;  because  they  used  to  remit,  as 
soon  as  they  got  any  money,  to  Manila. 

Q.  You  see,  under  our  system  we  would  change  all  that.  When  they 
received  any  money  there  they  would  spend  it  themselves. — A.  On 
the  other  hand,  they  had  these  trade  taxes,  which  made  the  Spanish 
Government  very  unpopular,  especially  with  the  poorer  classes.  Per- 
haps the  whole  stock  in  trade  of  some  trades  man  or  woman  would  not 
be  worth  more  than  $10,  and  he  or  she  would  be  paying  $12  or  $15  a 
year  tax  on  it.  There  is  no  doubt  but  that  the  continuance  of  these 
taxes  by  the  United  States  made  the  Americans  very  unpopular. 

Q.  AVhat,  abolishing  it  ? — A.  No;  collecting  these  taxes — collecting 
taxes  from  all  these  peddlers.  Then  the  Spaniards  immediately  turned 
around  and  said:  “These  people  are  going  to  squeeze  you  as  much  as 
we  did;  no  difference.”  It  was  a great  mistake  for  the  Americans  to 
collect  these  taxes. 

Q.  Do  you  think  there  would  be  a sufficient  number  of  good  people 
to  organize  a government  and  send  members  to  the  legislature  for 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


i 


themselves  2 — A.  I think  they  are  quite  up  to  that  if  you  can  get  the 
proper  people  to  go  in  for  it. 

Q.  But  do  you  think  they  could  be  found  in  every  locality  ? — A.  Yes; 
even  although  they  do  not  know  Spanish  very  well,  there  are  very 
good  men  who  speak  the  native  language. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  How  would  it  be  in  Mindoro  ? — A.  Well,  in  Mindoro  I don’t  know. 
You  see,  Mindoro  has  been  a neglected  island,  and  used  to  be  a sort  of 
rendezvous  for  all  sorts  of  criminals.  Nor  in  Leyte  would  it  be  prac- 
ticable; I do  not  think  they  are  educated  enough  there. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  How  many  troops  would  it  take,  do  you  think,  to  suppress  the 
insurgents  in  those  places  you  have  mentioned? — A.  Not  very  many. 

By  Professor  Worcester:  * 

Q.  What  do  you  think  about  the  province  of  Mindoro?  Wouldn’t 
it  take  a great  many  there? — A.  I don’t  know  much  about  Mindoro, 
and  the  same  thing  would  hold  with  a good  many  other  places. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  would  be  the  effect  on  these  people  if  we  established  a 
military  line  across  the  island  at  Tayabas ; I take  it  for  granted  Agui- 
naldo  would  be  shut  off,  wouldn’t  he? — A.  They  wouldn’t  hear  any- 
thing from  him.  Let  it  be  known  that  the  gunboats  are  around  and 
you  wouldn’t  see  any  of  these  fellows  crowding  about.  They  are 
inclined  to  give  up  now,  the  real  people  of  the  country,  the  residential 
people. 

Q.  I understand  that  Aguinaldo  is  in  here. — A.  Yes;  in  there  [re- 
ferring to  map,  and  pointing  out  place  to  the  commission];  and  if  he 
has  to  go  south  he  will  very  soon  get  disheartened  himself. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  idea  of  offering  terms  to  these  peo- 
ple?— A.  It  depends;  it  is  a very  difficult  question  that.  What  kind  of 
terms  ? 

Q.  Suppose  we  issued  a proclamation  to-day  that  every  man  who  laid 
down  his  arms  and  came  in  should  not  be  punished,  do  you  think  that 
would  be  the  end  of  it? — A.  I don’t  know  how  it  would  be  taken.  It 
probably  would  be  taken  as  a sign  of  weakness  on  your  part;  I think  it 
would. 

Q.  Not  as  a sign  of  clemency? — A.  They  don’t  understand  clem- 
ency. They  would  consider  that  it  emanated  from  fear. 

Q.  You  think  we  better  destroy  Aguinaldo? — A.  I don’t  think  that 
Aguinaldo  is  to  blame  as  much  as  some  of  his  people. 

Q.  His  troops? — A.  I think  you  ought  to  give  them  a regular  good 
trouncing. 

Q.  You  think  until  that  is  done  there  is  no  use  talking  about  terms  ? — 
A.  No. 

Q.  We  should  give  them  the  beating  first  and  then  offer  terms? — 
A.  Yes;  it  is  better  to  put  them  in  the  position  of  taking  the  initial 
part  in  proposing  terms  than  that  you  should  take  it. 

Q.  Your  plan  would  be  to  send  troops  to  all  these  places? — A.  Five 
hundred  men  in  Legaspi,  and  500  might  be  sent  to  Sorsogon,  and  500 
to  Tabaco. 

Q.  That  would  involve,  then,  only  1,500  men?— A.  Yes. 


8 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  If  successful  in  that  province  that  would  have  the  effect  of  quiet- 
ing- the  feeling  in  the  other  provinces? — A.  Probably. 

Q.  But  these  1,500  men  would  be  placed  in  that  one  province? — A. 
They  would  be  pretty  near  to  each  other  you  see  [indicates  on  map] 

Q.  Then,  as  I understand  it,  your  idea  would  be  to  have  500  men 
at  Tabaco,  500  at  Sosogon,  and  500  at  Legaspi? — A.  Yes;  I think  that 
would  be  the  idea. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  You  would  do  that  even  if  you  had  to  establish  a line  across  the 
narrow  point? — A.  I would  do  that,  too.  It  is  not  the  1,500  men 
there 

Q.  But  this  latter  1,000  or  1,500  men  might  have  to  fight  the  whole 
of  Aguinaldo’s  army.  They  might  then  turn  around  and  try  to  go 
south. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  The  r •my  could  not  go  down,  because  we  control  the  roads. — A. 
They  might  cross  over  and  go  down  by  sea. 

Q.  Have  they  the  means  of  transportation? — A.  They  might  go 
down  the  coast.  I notice  a great  many  more  Indians  in  Manila  than 
when  I was  here  before. 

Q.  How  long  ago  was  that?— A.  In  February,  about  the  11th,  I 
think. 

Q.  You  notice  a change? — A.  Yes;  a tremendous  change.  Manila 
is  looking  more  like  itself  again.  The  battle  of  Caloocan,  when  was 
that  ? 

Q.  The  1th  or  5th  of  February.  Were  you  here  at  the  time  of  the 
conflagration? — A.  No;  I was  not. 

Q.  When  the  town  was  burned,  that  is,  the  lower  part  of  it. — A. 
No;  I have  been  all  over  the  provinces,  and  1 haven’t  seen  any  skir- 
mishing. 

Q.  Do  these  people  know  anything  about  the  United  States  and  its 
form  of  government? — A.  No;  nothing. 

Q.  Don’t  they  know  it  is  a Republic? — A.  Oh,  they  have  a hazy 
idea  about  it,  but  it  does  not  suit  these  people  to  tell  the  natives  that 
the  United  States  has  a good  government,  and  I don't  suppose  they 
believe  it.  They  believe  w hat  their  compatriots  tell  them  and  they 
are  trying  to  sustain  this  constitution;  and  the  Spaniards — I mean  the 
bad  Spaniards — help  along  this  idea.  There  are  a great  many  Span- 
iards, good  Spaniards,  who  desire  that  the  Americans  should  remain; 
people  who  are  interested  in  the  place  and  who  desire  good  govern- 
ment as  much  as  anybody  else.  The  priests,  the  bad  Spaniards,  and 
these  exploiters  are  the  people  who  have  made  all  the  trouble. 

Q.  Are  there  any  Spaniards  who  are  business  men? — A.  Yes;  a 
great  many. 

Q.  Are  they  still  carrying  on  their  business? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Are  there  many  foreigners,  Englishmen  or  others,  in  these  vari- 
ous parts  3rou  have  mentioned? — A.  In  Albay  we  have  one  who  assures 
us  that  the  Spaniards  there  are  all  good  people.  They  are  the  agents 
of  houses  here  in  town.  Smith  & Bell  have  an  agent  in  Cubas,  one  in 
Legaspi,  and  one  in  Cebu. 

Q.  Do  you  know  the  sentiment  of  these  Spaniards  toward  the  United 
States? — A.  It  is  very  good  indeed;  I w ould  sw-ear  for  our  lot;  we  have 
four  of  them. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


9 


Q.  Do  you  think  there  is  the  least  hope  on  the  part  of  the  Spaniards 
or  the  natives  that  Spain  will  ever  get  control  of  these  islands  again?— 
A.  No;  the  natives  would  never  permit  that. 

Q.  Among  the  well-informed  people  is  there  any  idea  that  the 
United  States  is  going  to  leave  the  islands  and  give  them  up  ? — A. 
They  have  no  such  idea.  They  think  you  are  going  to  stay  and  settle 
the  country. 

Q.  It  is  best  for  them  to  have  that  idea,  for  our  interests? — A.  Yes; 
I think  so.  The  good  people  of  the  country  desire  the  United  States 
to  keep  the  country,  but  they  dare  not  say  so  because  every  man  is 
afraid  of  his  life.  We  hear  a great  deal  more  than  anybody  else, 
because  they  know  they  won’t  get  into  trouble  through  us. 

Q.  If  intelligent  people  could  go  around  and  get  up  a meeting  of 
the  better  class  of  these  people  and  explain  to  them  the  objects  and 
purposes  of  the  United  States,  and  that  its  intention,  the  intention  of 
their  Government,  was  to  give  them  in  every  possible  shape  and  form 
all  the  liberty  that  is  consistent  with  order,  would  that  fact  have  a good 
effect  ? — A.  It  is  very  dangerous  going  around  the  way  the  people  are 
at  present.  I would  rather  get  a man  to  invite  them  to  come  to 
Manila — to  have  representatives  from  all  the  provinces  come  here  and 
treat  with  you  here. 

Q.  You  think  that  would  be  better  ? — A.  Yes;  I think  so. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Would  they  come,  Mr.  Macleod? — A.  That  is  just  the  point. 
They  might  not. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Of  course,  that  might  be  a military  question.  Wouldn’t  they  be 
afraid  to  leave  their  homes? — A.  The  people  I am  speaking  about 
have  not  had  anything  to  do  with  the  revolution. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Wouldn’t  the  insurrectionary  authorities  try  to  impede  them? — 
A.  These  people  would  not  talk. 

By  Professor  "Worcester: 

Q.  They  would  be  apt  to  take  vengeance  on  them  after  they  got 
back,  wouldn’t  they  ? — A.  Yes;  probably. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  To  go  back  to  the  conversation  we  started  a moment  ago:  The 
question  was  raised  by  Colonel  Denby  that,  in  attempting  to  govern 
here,  we  naturally  think  in  terms  of  our  own  experience.  At  home 
we  have  a General  Government  for  the  United  States,  a State  govern- 
ment for  each  State;  then  we  have  a county  government  in  connection 
with  each  county,  and  of  course  a municipal  government  for  the  cities 
besides.  We  ask  you  if  jrou  think  these  people  are  capable  of  self- 
government?  We  want  to  know  whether  these  men  to  whom  you  refer 
would  be  capable  of  conducting  the  business  of  a municipality,  of  a 
county,  or  of  the  entire  archipelago?  What  amount  of  self-govern- 
ment are  the  best  people  you  know  capable  of? — A.  In  the  different 
provinces  there  are  lawyers,  and  doctors,  and  professional  men  who 
are  very  well  educated. 

Q.  But  do  you  fear  we  could  not  trust  them  with  self-government? 
Could  they  run  the  provinces  without  American  intervention? — A.  I 


10- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


think  they  could  afterwards;  but  at  first,  no.  I should  say.  first,  get  rid 
of  all  the  cumbrous  Spanish  methods;  start  something  new  and  simple. 
I think  afterwards  they  would  be  quite  able  to  run  the  provinces  them- 
selves. 

Q.  Govern  what  ? — A.  Provincial  government  and  the  government 
of  the  islands. 

Q.  Now,  besides  the  provincial  governors  there  has  been  here  in  the 
past,  and  must  be  in  the  future,  some  general  government  for  the 
archipelago.  To  what  extent  are  these  people  you  know  of  capable  of 
conducting  such  a government  ? — A.  I think  on  the  same  basis  as  your 
own  Government,  a senate  and  congress. 

Q.  And  elect  their  members? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  a judiciary  filled  by  local  judges? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  An  executive,  consisting  of  a governor-general  and  heads  of 
departments — would  these  be  natives  or  Americans  ? — A.  You  would 
have  to  have  an  American  governor-general. 

Q.  What  powers  ought  that  American  governor-general  to  have 
by  way  of  controlling  legislation  in  the  islands? — A.  Absolute  power. 

Q.  You  mean  absolute  veto  power  ? — A.  A veto  power  just  the  same 
as  the  Spaniards  had,  of  course,  to  be  used  judiciously. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  N ow,  Mr.  Maeleod,  the  natives  have  practically  been  independent 
for  some  time  past  and  have  been  running  their  own  affairs  in  a good 
many  of  the  provinces  in  this  island,  and  there  has  been  absolutely  no 
control  over  them  at  all.  So  far  as  you  know,  what  has  been  the  result 
of  that  attempt  of  theirs  to  run  their  own  affairs?  Do  you  know,  for 
instance,  any  man  who  is  governor  of  a province  who  has  shown  him- 
self capable,  who  has  shown  himself  honest  and  fair  in  his  dealings 
with  the  citizens  of  his  province? — A.  I think  I know  of  some. 

Q.  Do  you  know  of  one  single  provincial  governor  who  has  shown 
himself  able  and  willing  to  give  a good  government  to  the  people 
under  him,  as  a matter  of  actual  experience,  now? — A.  Well,  there 
is  nobody  who  has  had  any  great  experience  in  governing;  that  might 
be  the  difficulty;  for  instance,  to  obtain  an  experienced  governor 
would  be  very  difficult  ; but  you  could  hardly  blame  him  for  not  being; 
he  would  want  to  learn  and  would  learn  gradually.  A lawyer  should 
always  take  the  place.  You  know  what  this  Indian  business  has 
always  been.  You  know  that  the  Spaniards  have  paid  him  inade- 
quately. and  we  shall  have  to  pay  him  properly  if  we  wish  him  to  do 
his  work  well. 

Q.  What  I am  getting  at  is  the  abstract  capacity  of  these  people, 
under  existing  conditions,  to  conduct  the  affairs  in  the  provinces 
where  they  now  are,  and  I ask  you  whether  you  can  put  your  hand 
on  one  concrete  example? — A.  Yes.  I have  seen  in  Albay  affairs 
conducted  very  well  during  the  temporary  government  before  the 
military  people  came  there  and  took  hold.  I think  Domingo  Sampson 
a very  capable  fellow  and  quite  capable  not  only  of  conducting  his 
own  government — that  is,  the  government  of  the  province — but  of 
wider  powers. 

Q.  Is  he  honest? — A.  That  is  a different  question. 

Q.  Do  you  think  he  is  honest? — A.  He  belongs  to  a very  good  fam- 
ily. 1 think  the  Indian  is  dishonest  from  the  bad  example  that  he  has 
had  set  him.  With  a good  example,  he  would  be  honest  and  if  espe- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


11 


cially  he  were  paid  sufficient  remuneration.  You  can  not  expect  under- 
paid men  to  be  honest. 

Q.  I share  with  you  your  opinion  of  the  Indian.  I have  a great 
deal  of  faith  in  the  Indian  out  here.  I have  been  out  here  three  or 
four  years  and  have  seen  a great  deal  of  him,  but  the  Indian  has  had  a 
certain  example  set  him  in  the  matter  of  government  in  the  Philip- 
pines. We  have  had  recently  one  of  the  Indians  of  very  good  family 
who  wanted  to  bribe  our  Secretary  of  State  in  Washington.  The  ques- 
tion is  how  we  are  going  to  start  him  aright  and  try  to  bring  out  what 
is  best  in  him,  and  whether  there  would  be  any  prospect  at  all  of  his 
starting  oft'  on  his  own  hook  if  he  were  given  a good  deal  of  liberty 
and  running  a decent  government  from  the  start.  The  impression  we 
have  gained  is  that  there  has  been  a great  deal  of  corruption  among 
these  new  native  officials;  that  they  have  been  worse,  if  anything,  than 
the  Spaniard^  before  them. — A.  That  is  true.  The  natives  themselves 
say  so;  the  good  people  who  could  run  the  government  are  not  in  it 
now.  The  reason  of  the  dissensions  down  in  Albay  is  that  General 
Belermino  is  collaring  all  the  money  and  there  is  nothing  left  for  public 
works  and  improvements. 

Q.  The  question  is  what  sort  of  means  or  methods  we  can  devise  bv 
which  these  competent  people  can  be  gotten  in  the  places  they  ought 
to  get  and  occupy  there. — A.  I think  you  will  have  to  occupy  the 
places  militarily  from  head  to  foot  first. 

Q.  You  mean  until  we  can  establish  a government? — A.  You  must 
get  the  people  disarmed.  All  arms  must  lie  taken  away.  The  natives 
can  not  be  trusted  with  arms  among  themselves. 

Q.  1 want  to  know  whether  you,  as  a business  man,  having  an  interest 
in  any  pueblo  of  5,000  or  10,000  people,  would  really  believe  that 
such  a people  capable  of  self-government  if  under  American  super- 
vision?— A.  Oh,  yes. 

Q.  Suppose  that  pueblo  to  be  in  a certain  province  and  that  province 
to  be  under  American  supervision. — A.  Yes;  with  supervision  from 
Manila. 

Q.  You  think  there  ought  to  be  a supervision  even  of  the  pueblo? — 
A.  You  would  have  to  give  them  as  much  latitude  as  that. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  nature  of  the  intervention  from  the  Manila — 
veto  power  ? — A.  Probably  in  public  works  and  things  of  that  kind. 
Otherwise  I would  let  them  run  their  own  show. 

Q.  Where  would  you  intervene? — A.  Well,  when  things  got  too 
far.  that  would  be  done  by  lighting  among  themselves. 

Q.  Well,  if  it  could  be  done  by  lighting  among  themselves.  I don’t 
know  whether  you  understand  what  I am  getting  at.  I want  to  find 
out  how  much  absolute  self-government  these  people  are  capable  of 
without  any  intervention  on  the  part  of  our  Government;  what  part 
are  the  people  capable  of  taking  in  the  government  of  the  province, 
the  general  government,  the  government  of  the  archipelago.  I ask 
whether  they  are  capable  of  governing  themselves  without  any  inter- 
vention?— A.  I think  there  are  men  capable  of  doing  it. 

Q.  Without  supervision  ? — A.  Not  at  first.  I think  they  ought  to 
be  supervised  for  a certain  term.  I have  the  same  opinion  of  the 
Indian  that  you  have.  I rather  like  the  Indian:  he  is  not  a bad  fellow. 

Q.  Do  you  think  he  can  be  educated? — A.  He  is  very  susceptible 
to  attention,  and  is  a man  who  is  anxious  to  learn.  I think  the  Indian 
is  capable  of  governing  by  himself  if  you  can  find  him  honest  enough; 


12 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


he  has  the  ability,  but  he  should  not  have  anything  to  do  with  the 
financial  matters.  Americans  must  have  control  over  that.  All  the 
funds  must  be  controlled  from  the  center. 

Q.  Mr.  Macleod,  what  is  your  opinion  as  to  the  honest}'  of  the 
Indians?- — A.  I won’t  say  that  they  are  absolutely  dishonest.  I think 
they  are  more  dishonest  than  during  the  Spanish  regime. 

Q.  But  you  would  not  leave  it  to  the  Indians  themselves  to  dis- 
tribute the  funds? — A.  No;  you  couldn’t  leave  it  to  them;  that  is,  so 
far  as  my  opinion  goes  from  what  I have  seen  of  them  in  all  the  prov- 
inces I have  visited. 

Q.  So  in  each  province  you  would  need  control  from  Manila? — 
A.  Yes.  Let  us  say  an  officer  similar  to  the  American  Secretary  of 
the  Treasury.  You  would  require  officials  to  see  how  the  money  was 
distributed  on  the  spot. 

Q.  You  think  we  would  require  inspectors? — A.  You  would  require 
one  inspector  in  each  province  to  go  about  through  the  different  vil- 
lages and  see  that  the  administration  of  the  funds  was  carried  on  there 
in  a proper  manner. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  In  your  opinion,  in  regard  to  the  general  fitness  of  these  people 
for  self-government  you  certainly  would  not  include  the  island  of 
Mindoro? — A.  No;  that  requires  a military  occupation.  1 have  never 
been  around  there. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  You  are  thinking  of  Luzon  and  the  Visayans? — A.  These  islands 
here  (indicating  on  map),  Samar,  Leyte,  Negros,  Panav,  Cebu.  Luzon. 

Q.  You  think  that  in  Legaspi,  for  instance,  you  could  find  people 
who  are  capable  of  governing? — A.  Yes,  I think  so;  they  are  very 
good  people. 

Q.  Marinduque,  I suppose  there  would  be  no  doubt  about? — A. 
There  are  good  people  there,  too. 

Q.  In  the  province  of  Romblon? — A.  It  is  such  a small  place,  the 
Tagalogs  went  there  and  made  it  a military  depot. 

Q.  You  say  it  is  a military  depot? — A.  It  was  their  halting  place  on 
their  way  to  Iloilo.  I was  there  in  November.  There  were  two 
steamers  recently  there  from  Capiz  and  Concepcion,  and  the  Spaniards 
were  leaving  the  place  then.  On  the  appearance  of  the  Americans  I 
have  no  doubt  that  the  insurgents  would  fly  in  all  directions. 

Q.  You  haven’t  been  in  Romblon  since  November? — A.  Not 'since 
November. 

Q.  To  go  back  to  the  military  question;  I understand  it  is  your  view, 
although  you  don’t  claim  to  be  a military  man,  that  in  addition  to  fight- 
ing the  Tagalogs  here  about  Manila — that  is,  in  their  own  province — we 
ought  to  send  out  soldiers  to  the  provinces  you  have  mentioned,  and 
that  recommendation  applies  to  the  provinces  in  which  your  business 
interests  are,  or  do  you  think  that  ought  to  be  the  general  policy  ?— 
A.  I don’t  say  it  from  motives  of  self-interest,  but  1 think  if  you  can 
cut  off  communication  with  Aguinaldo  they  will  very  soon  get  dis- 
heartened down  there,  and  they  will  very  soon  give  up. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  the  same  apply  to  Ilocos;  wouldn’t  they  quiet  down  if 
we  cut  them  off  in  the  same  way? — A.  Yes,  I think  so. 

Q.  My  point  is  whether  it  would  not  be  just  as  practicable  to  send 
a small  detachment  up  there,  and  take  these  provinces,  as  to  send  men 
down  from  here? — A.  Yes. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


13 


Q.  You  would  require  a great  many  troops? — A.  No. 

Q.  You  spoke  about  these  people  being  in  danger  of  famine,  and 
that  danger  being  the  principal  cause  for  alarm.  Before  it  comes  to 
actual  starvation  wouldn’t  the  90  per  cent  of  which  you  spoke  rise  up 

and  stop  this  rebellion A.  The  90  per  cent  have  only  bolos  and 

daggers,  while  the  insurgents  have  firearms. 

Q.  Even  if  the  90  per  cent  have  only  bolos  and  daggers  might  they 
not  control  these  other  people  (the  insurgents)  ? — A.  Possibly ; but  they 
have  a great  deal  more  dread  of  the  report  of  a gun  than  of  the  wound 
of  a bolo  or  dagger. 

Q.  It  wouldn’t  do  to  raise  native  forces  now? — A.  No. 

Q.  It  would  be  regarded  now  as  a sign  of  weakness? — A.  Yes. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  If  it  took  a certain  number  of  men  to  take  these  places,  couldn’t 
that  number  be  pretty  soon  reduced? — A.  Yes,  in  two  or  three  weeks. 

Q.  After  peace  and  quiet  were  restored  a smaller  garrison  would  be 
sufficient? — A.  1 think  so. 


Manila,  April  12,  1899. 

STATEMENT  OF  EDWIN  H.  WARNER  IN  RESPONSE  TO  QUESTIONS 
OF  THE  COMMISSION. 

President  Schurman.  We  should  like  to  hear  any  statement  you 
would  like  to  make  to  us.  If  you  have  any  ideas  which  you  would  like 
to  communicate  we  would  be  very  glad  to  hear  them. 

Q.  In  regard  to  the  capacity  of  the  natives  for  a government,  what 
do  you  think  of  their  having  a senate  and  house  of  representatives? — 
A.  The  idea  would  be  very  flattering  to  them,  no  doubt. 

Q.  Would  it  do  to  have  such  a house  as  that  ? — A.  Subject,  I think, 
to  the  governor-general,  with  an  absolute  veto  power,  at  any  rate  for 
some  years  to  come.  You  see,  the  whole  Indian  character  is  satu- 
rated with  this  Spanish  idea  of  making  all  that  he  can.  A generation 
would  have  to  pass  before  this  example  can  die  out. 

Q.  Would  you  give  them  such  a parliament  as  I have  suggested — a 
senate  and  house  of  representatives — or  do  you  think  the  races  as  well 
as  the  provinces  themselves  would  have  to  have  different  houses? 
Woidd  the  different  races — that  is,  the  Tagalogs,  the  Visayans,  the 
Negritos,  the  Moros,  and  others,  each  have  to  have  their  different 
houses  of  representation? — A.  No;  you  will  find  Tagalogs  all  over 
the  islands. 

Q.  But  they  are  mostly  in  this  central  province? — A.  Y^es;  it  is 
where  they  came  from. 

Q.  But  you  mean,  I suppose,  that  these  provinces  which  are  not  solid 
Tagalog  are  nevertheless  overrun  by  them,  and  in  some  provinces  they 
are  not  the  predominant  race? — A.  That  is  so. 

Q.  If  we  sent  a proclamation  to  these  people  to  lay  down  their 
arms,  saying  that  Malolos  is  already  in  our  hands,  and  if  this  procla- 
mation was  in  both  Spanish  and  Tagalog,  what  effect  do  you  think 
that  would  have? — A.  I would  say  that  Malolos  has  ceased  to  exist 
and  that  Aguinaldo  has  fled,  and  give  them  this  proclamation,  and  at 
the  same  time  say  that  later  on  you  will  go  down  there  and  see  what 
they  have  to  say. 


14 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  There  has  been  some  discussion  about  troops.  Please  tell  us 
what  you  think  about  the  matter  of  troops? — A.  About  troops,  I think 
you  can  do  with  a good  deal  smaller  number  of  troops,  provided  you 
have  a proper  patrol  of  gunboats  to  see  about  taking  Leyte  and 
Samar,  than  if  you  have  not.  Really,  they  scarcely  require  any  troops 
here  in  Manila.  The  people  here  are  perfectly  docile  and  peaceable  as 
long  as  they  are  allowed  to  have  commerce.  Probably  4,000  troops 
would  be  amply  sufficient  around  here.  It  is  absolutely  necessary,  I 
think,  to  put  into  Bulacan  200  or  300  men,  which  place  is  fortified. 
It  is  pretty  well  agreed  that  General  Lueban  will  leave  there  in  a very 
short  time,  and  practically  as  soon  as  he  leaves  the  whole  province  is  in 
the  hands  of  the  natives  themselves.  The  Tagalogs  have  nothing  more 
to  do  with  it.  and  with  a patrol  of  gunboats  to  see  that  the  people  are 
looked  after  I don't  think  that  there  would  be  any  further  trouble. 

Q.  That  is  the  island  of  Samar? — A.  Yes;  and  I think  the  same 
applies  to  Leyte.  In  Albay,  of  course  that  is  a different  province.  I 
don't  know  anything  about  it  just  now.  There  are  troops  down  there, 
I don't  know  to  what  extent.  In  Tarlac  and  Pampanga  the  people  are 
not  in  sympathy  with  the  insurgents.  In  Pangasinan  the  same  condi- 
tion prevails,  because,  as  far  as  we  have  heard  in  Malolos,  the  people 
didn't  have  any  extra  supplies  of  rice. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  There  is  a good  deal  of  rice  produced  there.  I saw,  in  the  differ- 
ent houses  that  we  were  in,  the  Avhole  lower  floor  stacked  with  rice.  I 
would  have  to  go  over  the  whole  place  systematically  to  make  an  esti- 
mate, but  I rather  thought  there  was  a good  deal  of  rice. — A.  li  e 
learned  from  the  people  who  came  down — from  the  Chinamen.  The}7 
said.  No;  that  they  were  pretty  badly  off  for  food. 

Q.  Of  course,  we  can't  have  the  starvation  of  noncombatants,  if  it 
comes  to  a place  where  they  need  it  and  we  can  secure  a supply  of  it. — 
A.  What  I was  trying  to  get  at  is  that  the  people  in  Bataugas  are 
keeping  their  rice  there,  and  that  they  won’t  allow  their  rice  to  come 
out  unless  they  are  paid  for  it. 

Q.  What  is  the  area  in  Luzon  that  produces  the  rice? — A.  Bataugas 
and  Sorsogon,  Neuva  Excija,  Bulacan,  generally  south  in  Camarines, 
Mariquina,  Cavite,  and  Manila. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Do  they  produce  rice  in  Cavite ? — A.  Very  little. 

Q.  Hocos? — A.  Some,  but  not  very  much.  Isnagos,  Maranduquc, 
and  Nueva  Caceres,  that  is  the  great  rice  center.  Then  there  is  a 
province  off  to  the  north,  Ilocos,  that  produces  a great  deal  of  rice. 

Q.  Albay,  I think  you  said  produced  rice? — A.  No;  that  is  hemp 

Bv  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  do  you  know  about  rice  in  other  places? — A.  In  Capiz 
there  is  a very  poor  crop  this  year.  The  tremendous  floods  have 
washed  everything  away.  Some  years  they  have  been  able  to  export 
from  there  besides  supplying  themselves. 

Mr.  Macleod.  There  is  rice  grown  in  Negros  and  in  Panav. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  There  would  be  a great  deal  of  rice  to  be  supplied? — A.  Yes; 
the  second  time  I was  there  I thought  that  they  Avere  principally  rais- 
ing sugar  cane. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


15 


By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Are  there  any  extensive  centers  in  these  islands? — A.  No;  I don’t 
think  you  will  find  a lot  of  rice.  You  will  find  that  it  will  have  to  be 
imported  into  the  islands  this  year.  The  crops  are  very  poor  up  north. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Isn’t  it  true  that  for  some  years  rice  has  always  got  to  be  brought 
in  here?- — A.  The  last  two  or  three  years  it  has  amounted  to  80,000  to 
100,000  piculs,  16  piculs  to  the  ton. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Wasn’t  it  true  that  in  the  old  days  rice  used  to  be  one  of  the 
exports  from  these  islands? — A.  That  was  before  there  was  any  export 
of  sugars,  during  the  40’s  to  GO’s. 

Q.  And  it  has  been  true  since  that  rice  has  been  imported  ? — A.  Only 
the  last  few  years.  In  the  last  few  years,  practically  since  the  railway 
has  been  in  operation  and  has  opened  up  the  northern  provinces,  it  has 
been  made  use  of,  and  they  have  begun  to  cultivate  it  in  the  northern 
provinces,  but  before  the  railway  was  open  it  cost  as  much  to  get  the 
rice  down  from  Tarlac  and  Batangas  as  the  rice  was  worth. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  that  railway  ? Has  it  ever  paid ' — 
A.  It  has  never  paid. 

Q.  What  is  the  reason  ? — A.  The  Spanish  Government  made  an  esti- 
mate on  the  line  that  it  would  cost  a million  dollars,  and  it  really  cost 
the  shareholders  two.  The  Spanish  Government  made  a guarantee  that 
they  were  to  get  8 per  cent  interest.  In  the  first  years  it  didn’t  make 
8 per  cent,  so  the  Spanish  Government  had  to  pay.  The  last  two  years 
it  was  making  over  8 per  cent,  which  had  to  be  returned  to  the  Span- 
ish Government.  Everything  up  to  8 per  cent  goes  to  the  stock- 
holders and  everything  over  that  to  the  Spanish  Government,  Those 
were  the  terms  of  the  concession. 

Q.  Is  there  a time  limit  to  the  concession? — A.  I think  sixty-nine 
years. 

Q.  They  have  been  obliged  to  pay  taxes  and  contributions? — A.  Yes; 
there  are  taxes. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  desirability  and  practicability,  when 
things  quiet  down  a little,  of  starting  public  works  in  these  various 
provinces  for  the  purpose  of  employing  the  natives  who  are  not  other- 
wise engaged? — A.  In  the  Tarlac  province  it  would  be  absolutely  nec- 
essary, otherwise  you  will  have  a large  population  starving,  and  around 
here  it  will  be  necessary  or  you  will  have  a population  starving  here. 
The  annual  crops  will  have  to  be  planted  within  the  next  two  or  three 
months.  They  plant  rice  in  the  rainy  season.  It  is  too  late  to  plant 
sugar,  and  there  has  been  no  sugar  produced  this  year. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Are  they  planting  rice? — A.  No;  the  time  has  not  yet  come.  They 
commence  to  sow  and  prepare  the  fields  in  May  and  June. 

Q.  How  many  crops  of  rice  are  raised  in  these  islands  each  year? — 
A.  Only  one. 

Q.  When  is  it  harvested?— A.  In  December.  They  don't  get  to 
harvesting  before  December,  and  this  year  there  is  going  to  be  a great 
scarcity  on  account  of  the  flood, 


16 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Wouldn’t  that  be  the  time  to  convince  these  people  of  our  good 
intention  by  bringing  in  rice  and  feeding  them? — A.  The  difficulty 
will  be  to  get  to  the  people  first.  If  the  war  still  continues  into 
the  wet  season  you  will  have  to  take  into  account  the  fact  that  the 
longer  the  war  continues  the  more  people  will  be  centering  in  Manila, 
Bulacan,  and  Cavite,  and  the  cities  and  towns. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  railroad’s  commercial  prospect  if  it 
were  decently  administered? — A.  It  would  be  very  profitable. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Take  this  island  of  Luzon.  What  lines  would  pay? — A.  Any 
lines  almost. 

Q.  A line  from  Manila  to  Santa  Cruz? — A.  It  would  open  up  from 
Manila  right  to  the  center  of  the  island.  Do  you  know  where  Aparri 
is  on  the  north  It  would  open  up  all  that  country;  it  would  be  a tre- 
mendous thing. 

Q.  In  the  rice  country? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Into  Bulacan? — A.  No;  Bulacan  is  open. 

Q.  The  country  down  here? — A.  Yes;  it  is  really  Bulacan;  what 
you  want  is  to  get  around  north  of  the  hills  in  Bulacan. 

Q.  What  you  mean  is  we  want  to  open  up  to  Bulacan  and  the  hill 
country? — A.  Yes;  so  they  could  get  supplies  into  Manila. 

Q.  What  would  that  country  produce  ? — A.  Sugar,  coffee,  and  rice. 

Q.  IIow  is  sugar  as  a business  proposition  at  present? 

Mr.  Macleod.  Bright.  They  get  the  best  prices. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  When  times  are  normal — for  instance,  not  at  present  as  it  is  to- 
day, but  in  normal  times — would  it  justify  a man  going  into  that  busi-. 
ness  ? — A.  It  would  pay  him  handsomely.  Labor  is  going  to  be  higher 
in  this  country  than  it  has  ever  been  before.  The  Indian  on  an  estate 
is  getting  a less  wage  to-day  than  he  ever  did  before,  but  things  will 
eventually  adjust  themselves  so  that  he  will  get  back  to  his  old  scale 
of  living. 

Q.  What  about  coffee  ? Haven’t  the  Batangas  plantations  been  pretty 
much  cleaned  out  by  the  borer? — A.  Yes;  there  is  a place  called 
Orbera  where  they  are  planting  it.  All  the  center  of  the  island  is 
given  over  to  it. 

Q.  It  would  not  be  difficult  to  run  a line  from  Zegan  to  Orbera? — 
A.  No. 

Q.  Of  course  you  could  operate  electric  roads  on  greater  grades 
than  you  could  steam  roads,  and  then  you  could  do  away  with  the 
coal  problem  if  you  could  get  water  power? — A.  Yes;  you  could  get 
plenty  of  water  power  to  generate  your  electricity. 

Q.  Private  capital  will  go  into  that,  you  think? — A.  Yes;  when  a 
good  government  is  established. 

Q.  Under  Spanish  rule,  suppose  anybody  promoted  such  an  enter- 
prise; could  he  get  a concession  for  a railway? — A.  Yes. 

Q:  What  would  that  concession  mean — just  permission  to  build  \ — A. 
Well,  the  permission  to  build,  and  the  Government  would  allow  a 
guarantee  of  interest  for  a certain  number  of  years — that  is,  for  rail- 
roads; that  is  what  the  Spaniards  did,  but,  then,  the  railroad  now  here 
was  built  under  the  Government  supervision  and  was  run  under  Gov- 
ernment supervision. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


17 


By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  A capitalist  would  want  more  than  permission  to  invest  his  capi- 
tal ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  He  would  ask  for  franchises  as  they  are  given  in  England  or  the 
United  States?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  The  country  gets  nothing  for  these  franchises? — A.  No. 

Q.  You  spoke  of  the  money  question  a moment  ago.  Have  you  any 
idea  that  this  place  is  to  come  to  a gold  basis?  What  would  you  say 
as  to  that  ? — A.  I hope  not  for  the  benefit  of  agriculture,  for  I believe 
in  cheap  money. 

Q.  What  is  your  reason  for  desiring  the  retention  of  the  silver 
basis? — A.  Agriculture,  of  course,  is  the  chief  industry  of  the  Philip- 
pine Islands.  They  have  to  compete  all  the  time  with  their  neighbors, 
and  especially  with  Mexico.  Hemp  is  one  of  the  great  exports  here, 
and  in  that  the}'  have  to  compete  with  the  sisal  grass  produced  in 
Mexico,  and,  as  you  know,  Mexico  is  on  a silver  basis. 

Q.  The  laborers,  they  get  the  same  wages  whether  it  is  paid  in  silver 
or  gold? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  It  is  fixed  by  custom? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Does  the  fact  that  they  have  a silver  basis  in  Asia — in  India  and 
China  and  Hongkong— affect  you? — A.  Yes;  that  influences  the  situa- 
tion. 

Q.  Are  you  a part  of  that  monetary  system? — A.  We  are  now, 
because  they  allow  the  importation  of  Mexican  dollars. 

Q.  Weren’t  they  excluded  by  the  Spaniards,  who  only  allowed  the 
Mexican  dollar  up  to  1878  to  come  in  here  ? — A.  Yes;  consequently  they 
were  often  at  a premium  in  Hongkong,  and  here,  sometimes,  they 
reached  64  to  78. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I would  like  to  know  your  ideas  about  what  restriction  ought 
to  be  placed  upon  bringing  Chinese  into  this  country,  if  any?  You 
are  a business  man  here,  and  I would  like  to  know  your  opinion  from 
a business  man’s  standpoint. — A.  It  is  a very  difficult  problem,  that. 
The  first  thing  that  you  have  got  to  take  into  consideration  is  that  in 
this  province  you  will  find  that  the  Chinese  are  very  unpopular.  On 
the  other  hand,  in  other  provinces  they  are  popular.  The  Chinaman 
is  very  useful,  so  far  as  Manila  goes — that  is,  from  a business  stand- 
point. He  is  a very  useful  man,  because  he  does  most  of  the  coolie 
work. 

Q.  That  same  remark  would  apply  to  Iloilo  and  Cebu.  I mean  the 
general  desirability  of  admitting  him  there  ? — A.  If  you  take  the  China- 
man here  as  a rule  he  is  a very  good  distributor  of  merchandise;  that  is 
to  say,  they  have  had  the  whole  of  the  import  business;  that  lias  all  been 
in  the  hands  of  the  Chinese.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Chinese  are  a great 
drain  on  the  country. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  In  what  way  ? — A.  All  the  money  and  all  the  profits  that  a China- 
man makes  he  remits  it  to  China,  and  that  is  so  much  money  out  of  the 
country;  that  is  to  say,  suppose  you  are  in  favor  of  having  the  Chinese 
in  here,  it  would  be  a much  bigger  drain  on  the  country;  they  would 
remit  all  their  earnings;  all  their  earnings  go  to  China. 

Q.  You  mean  they  do  not  add  to  the  wealth  of  the  islands?— A.  No, 
they  invest  nothing  here. 

■2 


p c- 


18 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I want  to  know  whether  you  think  well  of  them;  whether  it 
would  be  necessary  to  have  them  here.  Suppose  the  mines  were 
opened  up  and  railways  built  and  large  undertakings  in  the  planta- 
tions started,  would  it  be  practicable  to  get  native  labor  that  would 
be  able  to  run  these  things  without  the  Chinese? — A.  We  have  a mine 
in  Bulacan,  and  we  were  never  short  of  men. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  You  used  Indians  entirely?- — A.  These  Tagalogs.  When  the 
railway  was  built  there  was  never  a lack  of  laborers,  and  they  used 
natives.  In  some  parts  of  the  islands  there  is  a shortage  of  labor. 

Q.  I have  read  in  books  that  the  natives  are  lazy,  and  that  if  yrou 
started  a large  industry  you  might  any  day  find  yourself  short  of 
laborers.  How  is  that? — A.  No;  some  of  these  men  have  been  work- 
ing for  ten  years  and  never  have  missed  a day.  They  are  the  most 
docile  men  to  work  with. 

Q.  Is  that  true  of  the  Visayan  as  well  as  of  the  Tagalog  provinces?— 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  is  it  at  Tarlac?  It  is  easy  to  get  laborers  there? — A.  Yes; 
sometimes  it  is  easy,  and  iit  other  times  it  is  difficult. 

Q.  Would  you  say  they'  are  a lazy  lot? — A.  Yes. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Sefior  Montenegi'os,  a friend  of  mine,  told  me  that  he  often 
found  it  necessary-  to  go  over  to  the  other  islands,  and  especially  to 
Bohol,  to  secure  laborers,  and  then  he  had  to  pay  them  a large  part 
of  their  wages  in  advance  before  they'  would  work  for  him;  that 
then  they  would  work  for  him  a certain  length  of  time  and  would 
leave  him;  that  the  pay  was  pretty  good,  and  they  accumulated  money 
very  rapidly,  and  they  soon  got  to  a place  where  theyr  were  ready'  to 
retire  from  business  and  would  leave. — A.  The  greater  part  of  Samar 
and  Leyte  are  really  supplied  from  Bohol. 

Q.  The  Bohol  natives  have  a pretty  good  reputation  for  industry, 
have  they  not? — A.  Yes,  and  the  Ilocos  people.  In  the  harvest  time 
they'  go  down  south  and  take  in  all  the  crops. 

Q.  They  are  a very  hard  working  people ? — A.  Yes;  and  then  they 
go  up  north  and  do  the  same. 

Q.  I have  been  told  that  you  could  not  get  natives  to  do  coolie  work, 
such  as  unloading  steamers,  etc. — A.  Oh.  yres,  you  can. 

By’  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Are  the  Chinese  unpopular? — A.  The  Chinese  are,  especially  of 
late  in  Samar.  They  are  very  much  given  to  cheating.  You  go  in 
one  of  their  shops  to  buy  something  by  weight,  and  their  scales  are 
all  fixed  up;  and  the  Filipinos  are  afraid  of  Chinese  competition,  for 
the  Chinese  are  educated  very  well.  In  many  places  they  won’t  have 
the  Chinese.  In  Batangas  they  won’t  have  them.  The  Chinese  were 
originally  allowed  by'  the  Spaniards  to  come  only  as  coolies  for  work- 
ing in  the  fields. 

Q.  I?i  your  judgment,  would  it  be  well  to  exclude  them  hereafter? — 
A.  I would  carry'  on  the  same  laws  as  the  Spaniards  had — that  every 
Chinaman  who  came  in  had  to  pay  $50  or  $100.  It  keeps  a good  many 
out,  and  the  place  would  not  be  overrun. 

Q.  It  would  not  prevent  any'  exploitation  of  the  country,  such  as  you 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


19 


speak  of;  they  would  continue  to  send  home  their  earnings? — A.  You 
see  the  Chinese  coolies,  some  of  them  who  have  been  coolies  nearly  all 
their  lives,  get  a little  trade  and  employ  other  coolies.  As  soon  as  a 
coolie  can  save  a little  money  he  goes  out  somewhere  and  establishes 
a small  shop. 

Q.  He  is  a Jew? — A.  He  is  the  Jew  of  the  East,  and  any  money  he 
makes  is  remitted  at  once  to  China.  That,  I think,  is  an  unfortunate 
element  of  the  situation,  and  I don’t  see  how  you  can  prevent  it. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  My  observation  was  that  in  all  the  little  villages  the  Chinese 
were  the  distributing  agents,  and  that  the  merchandise  that  came 
from  the  outside  had  to  be  got  from  the  Chinamen,  who,  as  you  say, 
set  up  little  shops.  The  question  is  whether  or  not  if  the  Chinamen 
were  excluded  the  work  would  be  done  by  the  natives? — A.  Yes;  there 
are  not  Chinese  enough  and  they  all  want  to  go  home. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  any  Chinese  women  come  here? — A.  No;  they  are  not  allowed 
to.  That  is  the  trouble. 

Q.  That  promotes  a half-breed  population  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  kind  of  citizens  do  they  make? — A.  The  Chinese  half 
breeds  are  causing  all  the  trouble. 

Q.  Who  are? — A.  The  Chinese  half-breeds. 

Q.  Aguinaldo  is  not,  is  he? — A.  He  has  Chinese  blood  in  him.  His 
sister  is  married  to  General  Paua,  who  collected  $200,000  down  at 
Sorsogon  the  other  day,  contributions  from  the  natives  and  the  Chinese, 
principally. 

Q.  Who  is  he? — A.  He  is  one  of  Aguinaldo’s  staff  officials. 

Q.  What  is  his  status  down  there? — A.  He  is  a general  now.  He 
was  a colonel  here  and  fought  with  Aguinaldo  against  the  Spaniards. 
He  married  Aguinaldo’s  sister.  He  is  a young  chap,  only  27. 

Q.  Have  you  any  further  suggestions  to  make  to  us? — A.  No;  I 
think  not. 

President  Schurman.  We  are  very  much  obliged  to  you  for  the 
information  and  suggestions  you  have  given  to  us,  and  if  any  ideas 
occur  to  you  in  future  we  shall  be  very  glad  to  hear  from  you. 


Manila,  April  7J,  1809. 

TESTIMONY  OF  SEN0R  CAYETAN0  S.  ARELLANO. 

Present : President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Denby,  and 
Professor  Worcester,  commissioners;  John  R.  Mac  Arthur,  Esq., 
secretary. 

Seiior  Arellano  appeared  before  the  commissioners  by  request 
and  made  the  following  statement  through  an  interpreter: 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? — A.  Cayetano  S.  Arellano. 

Q.  What  is  your  profession  ? — A.  I am  a lawyer. 

Q.  How  long  have  }Tou  been  in  Manila? — A.  I was  born  here. 

Q.  Have  you  been  engaged  in  the  administration  of  public  affairs 
as  well  as  in  the  practice  of  law? — A.  Not  in  an  official  character;  but 
1 was  a magistrate  of  the  audiencia  and  a professor  in  the  university. 


20 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  How  long  were  you  magistrate  and  how  long  were  you  a profes- 
sor'— A.  I was  magistrate  two  years  and  professor  fifteen  years  in 
the  university  here.  I was  professor  of  law. 

Q.  We  don’t  want  to  interrupt  you  with  questions  now,  but  we 
want  you  to  stop  occasionally  so  that  what  you  say  can  be  translated 
and  taken  down;  and  we  would  esteem  it  a favor  if  you  would  give 
us  in  a general  way'  a description  of  the  Philippine  Islands  as  they 
were  under  the  Spaniards  before  the  war. — A.  In  the  political  branch 
there  was  a general  governor,  assisted  bv  a council  of  authorities, 
which  was  composed  of  the  president  of  Manila,  the  general  of  marine, 
the  military  governor,  director-general  of  the  civil  administration,  the 
superior  judge  of  the  audiencia,  the  president  of  the  audiencia,  the 
general  manager  of  the  administration  of  the  treasury,  and  the  fiscal 
of  Her  Majesty,  or  what  in  other  countries  would  be  attorney-general. 
These  gentlemen  are  each  one  the  heads  of  different  administrative 
branches  of  the  organization  of  the  island.  Thus  we  have  the  head 
of  the  civil  administration,  who  is  the  director  of  the  civil  administra- 
tion. There  is  likewise  one  who  is  called  the  chief  of  the  treasury, 
the  head  of  the  treasury.  The  head  of  this  department  is  the  chief  in 
general  of  the  treasury.  There  is,  further,  the  administration  of  jus- 
tice, whose  head  is  the  president  of  the  audiencia  of  this  court,  the 
supreme  court.  An  integral  part  of  this  administration  is  the  fiscal 
administrator  or  attorney-general,  who  is  the  procurador-general  of 
Her  Majesty;  but  this  fiscal  administrator  as  chief  is  independent  of  the 
president  of  the  high  court.  This  is  the  organization  of  the  civil  admin- 
istration; there  being  in  addition  the  chief  of  the  military  and  the  chief 
of  the  navy,  and  the  archbishop.  These  are  independent  of  the  civil 
administration  and  in  addition  to  it. 

Now  we  are  going  to  speak  of  the  purely  civil  administration,  which 
is  the  most  important.  The  supreme  chief  is  the  governor -general 
himself.  This  one  exercises  his  functions  in  certain  matters  by  means 
of  different  agents,  as,  for  example,  byr  the  direction  of  the  civil 
administration  in  certain  cases,  in  other  cases  by  means  of  the  general - 
intendente  of  the  treasury,  and  in  other  matters  by  a means  not  here- 
tofore mentioned,  namely,  a secretariat  of  the  general  government. 
These  above  mentioned  are  the  central  official  bureaus  existing  in 
Manila, 

Apart  from  these  central  departments  of  Manila  there  is  a govern- 
ment of  the  provinces. 

In  each  province  there  are  authorities  subordinate  to  those  which 
we  have  already  mentioned;  that  is,  in  each  province  there  is  a gov- 
ernor of  the  province;  there  is  an  administrator  of  the  local  treasury; 
there  is  a judge  and  a fiscal  agent,  or  deputy  attorney,  subject,  of 
course,  to  the  superior  fiscal  agent.  This  is  the  political  organization 
of  the  islands. 

The  attributes,  powers,  and  functions  of  these  several  officers,  or 
functionaries,  are  very  large  and  ample,  and  are  set  forth  in  extensive 
laws  relating  to  the  provinces.  I do  not  set  forth  these  attributes  and 
functions,  because  there  are  very  many  and  they  are  set  forth  in  the 
laws. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  are  those  laws  passed? — A.  Thej"  are  made  in  Madrid,  at 
the  initiative  of  the  minister  for  the  colonies  in  the  Cortes,  and  signed 
by  the  Queen. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


21 


By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Is  no  law  made  by  these  islands,  by  the  governor-general? — A. 
No  law  is  made  here;  they  come,  all,  from  the  office  of  the  minister  of 
the  colonies. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  3rou  mean  that  no  local  regulation  is  made  here? — A.  Of  the 
three  powers — the  legislative,  judicial,  and  executive — the  governor- 
general  has  absolutely  no  power  whatever  over  that  of  the  legislative. 
His  sole  power  is  that  of  being  executive.  In  the  constitution  of 
Spain,  as  well  as  of  the  colonies  and  the  islands,  the  executive  has 
the  power  to  make  regulations  relating  to  the  exercise  of  his  executive 
function.  There  are  regulations  for  the  application  of  the  laws  which 
are  made  in  Madrid;  these  sometimes  come  with  the  law  itself  from 
Madrid,  and  sometimes  the  laws  come  on  with  an  authorization  to  the 
local  authority  here  to  make  proper  regulations  for  their  application. 
Although  the  governor-general  has  no  legislative  powers,  he  may, 
nevertheless,  and  is  given  power  to,  dictate  bandos,  circulars,  and 
proclamations  for  the  execution  of  measures  of  good  government,  but 
he  must  thereafter  submit  them  to  the  approval  of  the  Government  in 
Madrid.  Over  the  judicial  system,  the  judicial  department,  the  gov- 
ernor-general has  no  power. 

Q.  Who  appoints  the  judges? — A.  The  judges  and  the  magistrates 
are  named  b}T  the  secretary  of  the  colonies  at  Madrid,  but  in  the  exer- 
cise of  its  functions  the  judicial  department  is  entirely  independent  of 
the  executive.  In  the  Guia  Oficial  of  the  Philippine  Islands  for  1889, 
which  has  been  brought  here  by  me,  there  stands  a brief  account  of 
each  one  of  these  departmental  centers  which  I have  spoken  of.  At 
the  beginning  of  each  one  of  the  accounts  in  the  book  of  these  several 
departments  there  is  a little  recital  of  the  department  followed  by  the 
personnel  of  the  officials.  It  also  contains  information  in  regard  to 
the  races,  the  dialects,  and  the  languages,  and  with  regard  to  the 
religious  corporations,  and  it  is  generally  a book  of  governmental 
information  in  regard  to  the  Philippines. 

The  laws  which  have  to  do  with  the  application  and  functions  of  the 
several  departments  which  have  been  mentioned  are  very,  very  numer- 
ous, but  an  idea  of  the  general  application  of  them  can  be  had  from 
this  other  book  which  I have  brought  entitled  Derecho  Admin istra- 
tivo  Colonial.  This  is  a very  excellent  book.  There  is  not  a word 
too  much  or  a word  too  little  in  it,  and  it  can  be  translated  literally. 
It  can  not  be  bought  here. 

Q.  Was  there  no  local  legislature  or  council  of  any  kind;  that  is,  a 
parliament  or  a diet? — A.  There  was  no  legislative  body  at  all,  but 
there  was  a consulting  body. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Please  explain  to  us  what  that  bodjr  was? — A.  It  was  called  the 
council  of  administration — the  administrative  council. 

Q.  And  did  the  officials  which  you  have  already  mentioned  compose 
that  body,  or  who  did  compose  it? — A.  It  was  composed  by  men  named 
by  the  Government  at  Madrid,  separate  and  apart  from  those  that  have 
been  mentioned,  and  they  were  individuals  whose  duties  were  of  an 
honorary  nature. 

Q.  What  wei’e  their  duties? — A.  Their  functions  were  those  of  ad- 
vice and  consultation  on  certain  points,  which  are  set  forth  in  the  law 
governing  the  matter. 


22 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  They  were  simply  advisory ? — A.  Yes;  nothing  more. 

Q.  How  did  the  church  come  into  this  government?  Did  it  have 
any  intervention  or  power  in  it? — A.  Yes,  indeed;  all  of  the  superior 
functionaries  of  the  church  had  a particular  and  integral  part  in  this 
consultative  body,  and  the  heads  of  the  religious  orders  and  archbishops 
took  part  in  this  council. 

Q.  How  large  was  that  consultative  body  ? — A.  This  body  was  com- 
posed of  two  classes  of  members;  those  who  were  such,  ex  officio,  by 
virtue  of  their  position,  and  those  who  were  elected. 

Q.  Were  the  members  of  the  clergy  the  actual  holders  of  any  offices 
in  the  Philippines? — A.  As  public  administrative  members,  strictly 
speaking,  no;  but  as  honorary  members  with  consultative  functions  in 
government,  yes.  There  were  honorary  presidents  of  local  bodies 
having  to  do  with  agriculture,  with  the  schools,  and  with  the  inspec- 
tion of  local  affairs,  etc. 

Q.  Was  the  government  honestly  administered? — A.  The  govern- 
ment system  was  good,  but  the  officials  were  bad, 

Q.  1 don’t  think  you  quite  understood  1 1 1 \*  question.  Was  tne  gov- 
ernment honestly  administered? — A.  It  is  necessary  to  make  a distinc- 
tion in  replying  to  this  question.  So  far  as  the  laws  themselves  were 
concerned  the  government  coidd  not  have  been  better.  As  far  as  the 
officials  are  concerned  there  was  much  to  be  said  a'nd  much  to  be  desired. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  In  what  respect  did  the  people  object  to  the  government? — A.  As 
a matter  of  fact  there  were  complaints  in  all  branches  of  justice  and  in 
the  administration  of  the  treasury. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  I want  to  find  out  particularly  what  the  complaints  were,  what 
were  the  defects  in  the  general  government  and  the  provincial  govern- 
ments and  everywhere.  I want  to  find  out  what  in  particular  were  the 
complaints;  what  particular  things  were  complained  of  ?- — A.  The  par- 
ticular cause  of  the  revolution  I can  not  say,  because  I do  not  know, 
and  because  there  are  different  opinions  in  regard  to  it;  but  it  is  said 
that  one  of  the  causes  is  the  aspiration  of  the  people  themselves  to 
secure  reform  and  to  take  an  active  part  in  the  government. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  reforms  do  you  think  the  people  desire,  and  what  do  you 
think  would  be  advisable? — A.  They  desired,  for  example,  to  have  a 
representative  in  the  Cortes  in  Madrid;  they  desired,  furthermore,  a 
part  in  the  administrative  government  of  the  islands  and  the  enjoyment 
of  liberty,  of  which  they  were  deprived.  The  question  of  independence 
was  not  then  raised  among  them  and  not  until  just  now,  of  late. 

* By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Can’t  we  give  these  people  a local  self-government? — A.  In  my 
poor  opinion,  no.  We  do  not  believe  them  capable  of  themselves  form- 
ing a government  of  themselves,  an  autonomous  government.  That  is 
my  opinion. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I don’t  think  he  understands  that  question.  I think  he  understood 
you  to  refer  to  the  general  government  instead  of  the  local  government. 
Colonel  Denby  wishes  to  ask  you  whether  they  would  be  capable  of  a 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


23 


small  amount  of  autonomous  government  in  their  towns,  for  instance, 
or  in  their  provinces? — A.  Oh,  yes;  a considerable  amount  of  it  is 
provided  for  under  the  present  law. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Please  state  whether  they  are  capable  of  governing  their  pueblos 
without  any  intervention  on  the  part  of  the  general  government  at 
Manila.  There  are  pueblos,  there  are  provinces,  and  there  is  the  gen- 
eral government  at  Manila.  I am  beginning  with  pueblos,  large  and 
small,  and  1 ask  you  whether  the  people  are  capable  of  governing  them 
without  any  intervention  on  the  part  of  the  government  at  Manila?— 
A.  No. 

Q.  Do  you  think  the  provinces  are  capable  of  governing  themselves 
without  any  intervention  from  the  Federal  Government  at  Manila? — 
A.  To  a certain  extent,  yes.  In  certain  provinces,  as,  for  example, 
Pampanga,  the  people  are  sufficiently  enlightened  to  govern  themselves 
in  a certain  manner;  but  independent  general  government,  no. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  I wish  you  would  bear  in  mind  that  in  my  questions  I do  not 
contemplate  the  independence  of  the  Philippines.  What  I contemplate 
is,  and  what  I inquire  of  you  about  is,  whether  under  the  direction  and 
control  of  the  United  States  Government,  which  would  have  a governor 
here,  judges,  a secretary  of  state,  and  various  other  officers,  these  people 
are  capable  of  meeting  intelligently  in  a legislative  body  and  passing 
laws  subject  to  the  approval  of  the  governor. — A.  Given  the  sover- 
eignty and  the  superior  direction  of  the  United  States,  yes;  very 
emphatically,  yes.  I consider  these  people  thoroughly  worthy  of  hav- 
ing that  power  intrusted  to  them. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  form  of  government  would  be  better  than 
the  old  form  of  government  simply  of  a colon}'? — A.  Yes;  under  this 
direction  I consider  them  tit  and  worthy  for  the  reforms  which  thev 
have  asked  for. 

Q.  If  there  were  a property  qualification  which  would  secure  the 
election  of  respectable,  well-to-do,  and  intelligent  men  to  the  legisla- 
ture, do  you  think  or  not  that  such  men  could  be  found  sufficiently 
numerous  to  operate  a legislative  body? — A.  In  my  judgment,  I think 
there  are  sufficient.  Yes;  in  my  judgment,  there  are  enough  to  form 
a body  of  this  kind. 

Q.  Could  there  be  found  in  all  the  islands  capable  men  sufficiently 
qualified  to  be  sent  as  representatives  to  a general  parliament? — A.  I 
think  so;  yes. 

Q.  In  all  the  islands? — A.  I do  not  know  all  the  provinces,  but  I 
think  it  very  probable  that  in  each  of  them  there  would  be  found  one 
or  two  men  of  sufficient  enlightenment. 

Q.  I could  well  believe  that  in  the  civilized  provinces,  the  provinces 
inhabited  by  civilized  natives,  you  could,  but  how  about  Palawan,  for 
instance,  where  there  are  only  savages  and  criminals? — A.  Yes; 
because  that  is  not  a true  province;  it  is  really  a separate  penal  colony. 
The  same  thing  applies  to  Tawi  Tawi  and  in  certain  parts  of  Mindanoa, 
Surigao,  and  Misamis. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  many  reforms  would  be  needed  in  the  Span- 
ish system? — A.  I believe  so,  yes;  principally  for  the  purpose  of 


24 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


simplifying  the  system,  because  under  it,  as  it  stands,  there  is  an 
immense  amount  of  legislation. 

Q.  Is  the  system  good,  as  a whole? — A.  Strictly  speaking,  yes;  but 
we  believe  it  would  be  easy  to  adopt  a better  system. 

Q.  What  changes  would  you  make  in  the  executive  branch  of  the 
government? — A.  First  of  all,  and  as  one  of  the  most  important 
reforms,  I would  recommend  a change  in  the  judicial  procedure,  not 
only  criminal  but  civil,  and  in  the  administrative  functions;  likewise 
a great  change  in  the  formalities  for  doing  business,  which  are  now 
very  dilatory. 

Q.  Would  you  make  any  change  in  the  constitution  of  the  council? 
Do  you  like  that  advisory  general  council? — A.  It  should  be  sup- 
pressed; it  is  completely  useless. 

Q.  What  should  take  its  place  ? — A.  The  old  one  should  be  done  away 
with,  because  it  was  composed  chiefly  of  Spaniards.  The  natives  had 
no  representation  in  it,  and  it  was  useless,  but  a new  one  might  be 
formed,  with  the  functions  that  are  laid  down  in  this  book  here, 
“Derecho  Administrative  Colonial.” 

Q.  Could  that  consultative  body  be  replaced  by  the  administrative 
heads  of  the  general  government  we  should  set  up  here? — A.  This 
might  be  done:  Instead  of  the  administrative  council,  which  has  here- 
tofore existed,  there  might  be  established  a council  composed  of  the 
heads  of  the  administrative  departments,  adding  to  it  representatives 
of  certain  of  the  chief  interests  of  the  country,  as,  for  example,  a rep- 
resentative of  the  commercial  interests  and  of  the  professions,  etc. 

Q.  I ask  you  whether  in  addition  to  such  a council  so  constituted  it 
would  be  well  to  have  a legislature,  in  your  opinion? — A.  If  there 
should  be  this  legislative  body  it.  would  seem  to  be  useless  or  super- 
fluous. The  former  consultative  body  of  which  we  were  speaking,  I 
was  thinking  of  as  a little  senate — as  a sort  of  legislature. 

Q.  If  you  added  representatives  of  commerce  and  the  professions 
and  other  interests  of  the  islands,  were  you  thinking  of  making  that 
council  a legislative  body  ?— A.  If  there  were  to  be  no  legislative  body 
in  the  islands  it  would  be  well  to  have  this  advisory  council  at  the 
side  of  the  governor.  If,  however,  a legislative  body  were  to  be 
established  in  which  the  natives  were  given  representation  there 
wouldn’t  be  the  same  need  of  this  advisory  body.  It  would  not, 
however,  necessarily  be  superfluous,  because  the  functions  of  a little 
senate  might  be  accorded  to  it. 

Q.  I want  to  come  back  to  the  courts.  I have  finished  with  the 
executive  and  legislative.  I want  to  come  back  to  the  courts,  and 
ask  you  if  you  have  any  other  reforms  to  suggest  in  addition  to  the 
reforms  of  procedure? — A.  1 can  not  very  well  point  out  what  reforms 
should  be  made  in  this  particular  branch  of  the  department,  because  I 
do  not  yet  know  what  system  of  government  is  going  to  be  established 
here. 

Professor  Worcester.  We  are  asking  these  questions  because  we 
wish  to  make  use,  as  far  as  possible,  of  all  the  good  features  of  the  old 
system. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Would  you  deem  it  desirable  to  retain  the  Spanish  laws  in  gen- 
eral as  they  now  exist? — A.  As  it  is  now  constituted,  of  course,  there 
arc  judges  of  the  first  instance,  judges  of  the  peace,  judges  on  appeal, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


25 


of  the  higher  court,  of  the  audiencias.  Of  course  1 do  not  know 
whether  it  is  the  intention  of  the  United  States  to  form  a supreme 
court  over  all  these,  or  what  its  intention  is;  but  under  the  circum- 
stances in  which  things  now  stand,  I do  not  think  that  the  formation 
of  the  courts  is  bad.  That  which  is  bad  and  which  needs  reformation 
is,  as  I have  said,  the  judicial  procedure.  In  further  explanation  I 
may  say,  that,  for  example,  in  order  to  qualify  a person  to  occupy  the 
position  of  judge,  the  law  is  explicit  as  to  his  qualifications,  as  to  what 
studies  or  what  experience  he  must  have  had,  and  the  preliminary  prep- 
aration he  must  have  had  for  it.  Such  laws  as  those,  relating  to  the 
constitution  of  the  judicial  body,  I think  are  good.  But  the  law  of 
procedure,  as,  for  example,  the  information  of  witnesses,  the  manner 
of  presenting  proofs,  and  the  manner  of  making  complaints,  and  all 
the  papers  relating  to  the  procedure  of  the  courts  are  antiquated  and 
very  long,  cost  much  to  prepare,  and  in  all  these  matters  reform  should 
be  had.  The  form  of  pleading  should  be  changed. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Would  there  be  anything  to  prevent  the  legislative  body,  acting 
in  accordance  with  the  governor,  making  reformation  in  judicial  pro- 
cedure?— A.  There  are  two  manners  of  proceeding  to  make  these 
reforms — by  means  of  legislative  body  itself  or  by  means  of  a special 
technical  commission  for  that  purpose. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Which  do  you  prefer? — A.  My  preference,  in  order  to  expedite 
the  matter  and  to  make  it  the  most  certain,  is  for  a commission. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Under  our  system  commissioners  are  appointed  by  the  legislature 
to  get  up  codes  of  law,  and  do  you  not  think  that  we  might  find  suffi- 
ciently qualified  legal  gentlemen  among  the  Filipinos  who  could  act  on 
such  a commission? — A.  Yes;  I think  that  there  could  be  found  in  the 
Philippines  men  capable  of  serving  on  such  a commission. 

Q.  Would  it  be  possible  for  you  to  act  on  that  commission  yourself 
as  the  head  of  it? — A.  Not  at  the  head,  but  I could  help  on  it. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Is  it  desirable  to  retain  the  present  code  of  laws,  or  should  we 
undertake  to  change  them  in  the  sense  of  American  laws? — A.  I think 
that  the  penal  code  should  be  reformed  in  certain  particulars,  but  I 
find  the  civil  code  very  good,  and  likewise  the  commercial  code.  That 
which  we  need  most  to  reform  in  the  American  sense,  in  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  sense,  is  the  law  of  procedure,  in  order  to  simplify  it. 

Q.  What  language  would  you  use  in  the  courts  of  Manila?  Could 
we  use  the  English  language? — A.  For  the  present  generation  it  is,  I 
think,  difficult  to  change  the  language,  and  for  a court  it  would  be 
very  embarrassing  to  have  an  interpreter  all  the  time. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  We  have  a territory  where  everything  is  done  in  Spanish  from 
top  to  bottom,  and  there  is  not  a word  said  in  English  that  is  not  put 
into  Spanish. 

Q.  What  change  woidd  you  make  in  the  relation  of  the  church  to 
the  state? — A.  That  is  a problem  almost  too  complex,  too  complicated, 
for  me  to  give  an  immediate  answer  to;  and  likewise  it  is  quite  neces- 


26 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


sary  to  know  in  advance  the  principle  or  system  which  it  is  the  inten- 
tion to  establish  here.  That  is  one  of  the  most  complex  and  difficult 
questions  here. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Well,  in  my  opinion  we  couldn’t  have  the  archbishop,  or  any 
other  clergyman,  as  such  clergyman,  a member  of  any  branch  of  the 
Government.  1 speak  of  fiscal  or  legal  relations.— A.  There  should 
be  none. 

Q.  Now,  1 want  to  ask  a word  about  the  tariff  and  the  taxes.  How 
did  the  existing  tariff  and  system  of  taxes  please  the  people?  All 
taxes,  I mean.  Have  there  been  many  complaints?- — A.  Yes;  there 
have  been  many  complaints  in  regard  to  that — as,  for  example,  in 
regard  to  the  cedulas  that  have  been  referred  to. 

Q.  What  other  complaints? — A.  Likewise  in  regard  to  the  indus- 
trial and  commercial  taxation.  There  is  need  of  study  and  reform. 

I believe  that  much  more  money  can  be  got  from  the  tax,  but  that  it 
should  be  obtained  by  a greater  consideration  of  the  difference  between 
the  well-to-do  and  the  poor  producing  classes,  those  who  are  really 
poor.  There  should  be  study  in  order  to  determine  more  explicitly 
the  degree  of  poverty  that  should  exempt  the  poorer  commercial  classes 
from  taxation  on  their  industry. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  If  this  commission  announced  to  the  Filipino  people  that  we 
intended  to  give  them  a representative  republican  government,  giving 
them  the  power  to  vote — to  people  who  had  certain  property  qualifica- 
tions; that  a governor  and  other  officers  would  be  appointed  by  the 
President  of  the  United  States,  some  of  whom,  of  course,  would  be 
Filipinos  and  some  Americans,  what  effect,  in  your  opinion,  would  that 
fact  have  upon  the  followers  of  Aguinaldo? — A.  Among  the  more 
enlightened  classes  of  the  Filipinos — and  it  is  difficult  to  interpret  the 
opinion  of  the  other  classes,  because  the  enlightened  class  stands,  as  it 
were,  a little  separate — I believe  the  system,  as  Indicated,  would  be 
agreeable  to  the  more  enlightened. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  The  particular  question  is,  what  effect  it  would  have  on  the  fol- 
lowers of  Aguinaldo  in  shortening  the  war? — A.  As  to  what  effect  it 
might  produce  upon  the  forces  of  Aguinaldo  1 am  not  able  to  say, 
because  they  wish  heaven  and  earth. 

Q.  What  effect  would  it  have  upon  the  general  Filipino  public,  good 
or  bad? — A.  I have  already  said  it  would  have  a good  effect  upon  the 
better  part  of  the  Filipino  public,  and  the  other  part  can  not  be  spoken 
for. 

Q.  Will  you  state  whether  in  your  opinion  a government,  being  con- 
stituted of  the  kind  we  suppose,  with  a governor-general  appointed  by 
the  President,  and  a legislative  junta  here — such  administration  as  that 
being  presupposed — you  would  give  to  them  all  functions  of  govern- 
ment in  the  Philippine  Islands,  or  whether  some  should  be  reserved  to 
the  United  States;  as,  for  instance,  the  management  of  the  post-office 
and  the  management  of  the  finances? — A.  In  my  own  opinion  it  would 
not  be  disagreeable  to  the  Filipinos,  if  the  matters  which  have  to  do 
with  foreign  relations  or  with  foreign  considerations  should,  like  those 
mentioned,  emanate  from  or  be  governed  by  the  home  Government  at 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


27 


Washington,  but  all  those  relating  to  interior  matters  should  be  gov- 
erned by  the  special  or  interior  government. 

Q.  Do  you  consider  the  post-office  and  custom-house  as  exterior  mat- 
ters or  as  interior  matters?  I want  to  make  this  difference.  Questions 
of  foreign  policy  would,  of  course,  be  dealt  with  by  the  Government  at 
Washington;  questions  affecting  other  States — international  relations 
they  would  belong  to  Washington,  and  we  would  also  assign  to  Wash- 
ington, along  with  those  international  relations,  the  management  of 
the  post-office  and  the  custom-house. — A.  I rather,  in  my  thought,  con- 
nect these  functions  which  you  mention  with  external  relations  than 
with  the  internal  relations;  but,  of  course,  there  are  inferior  functions 
of  these  general  functions,  which  are  necessarily  to  be  exercised  by  sub- 
alterns here. 

Q.  If  it  is  agreeable  to  you,  woidd  you  be  willing  to  come  to  us  again 
another  day,  after  the  stenographer  has  had  time  to  transcribe  your 
remarks  to-day  and  we  have  had  an  opportunity  to  read  them?  Diffi- 
culties may  arise,  or  there  may  be  other  points  about  which  you  have 
not  been  examined  to-day  which  may  occur  to  us,  and  we  may  desire 
to  have  your  opinion. — A.  I should  be  very  glad  to  do  as  you  desire. 
I am  at  your  disposal. 


TESTIMONY  OF  MR.  NEIL  MACLEOD. 

Manila,  April  17,  1899 — 10  a.  m. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Admiral  Dewey,  Colonel 
Denby,  and  Professor  Worcester,  commissioners,  and  John  It.  Mae- 
Arthur,  esq.,  secretary. 

Neil  MacLeod,  who  appeared  before  the  commission,  stated  as  fol- 
lows in  response  to  questions  put  by  the  commissioners: 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  We  may  have  to  ask  you  some  questions  later  on,  but  we  would 
be  very  glad  to  have  you  make  a full  statement  of  your  views  in  regard 
to  the  Philippines.  We  are  here  to  learn  all  we  can  about  these  islands 
and  their  people,  the  proper  methods  of  governing  them,  and  so  on. — 
A.  The  first  thing  to  do  is  to  get  these  natives,  those  who  are  causing 
the  trouble  especially,  and  give  them  a good  thrashing. 

Q.  Such  as  they  have  been  getting? — A.  Yes;  a little  more.  There 
are  only  a handful  of  men  who  are  really  troublesome,  and  they 
are  that  Malolos  crowd.  Aguinaldo  is  a mere  puppet,  and  does  not 
amount  to  a row  of  pins.  They  have  got  a very  bad  crowd  about  him, 
lawyers  and  others,  who  are  putting  him  up  to  all  kinds  of  mischief, 
and  of  course  he  is  a little  god  among  the  people.  They  work  upon 
his  vanity  to  spread  about  this  defection  among  the  natives. 

Q.  Y on  were  saying  that  Aguinaldo  was  a puppet  and  that  these  ambi- 
tious men  were  using  him. — A.  That  is  what  I have  gathered  from  my 
own  observation.  In  fact,  I have  written  the  papers  here,  and  I have 
written  the  papers  in  Hongkong  an  article  that  has  been  reproduced 
here,  which  }rou  may  find  it  interesting  to  read.  I brought  five  copies 
of  the  Times,  the  paper  in  which  the  article  appeared.  I think  this 
gives  the  situation  in  the  Philippines.  The  article  was  written  before 
the  Paris  Commission  met. 


28 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  We  should  be  very  glad  to  have  those  copies  and  file  them.  You 
sent  it  to  the  Times  on  what  date? — A.  The  8th  of  March. 

Q.  Last  month  ? — A.  Last  month.  That  gives  you  my  view  of  the 
natives  as  they  present  themselves  to  me  much  more  concisely  than  I 
can  give  it  to  you  now. 

Q.  So  far  as  that  information  is  concerned  we  shall  take  it  as  you 
have  it  there  and  file  it  in  our  records. — A.  In  regard  to  the  other 
paper,  I have  only  two  sheets  here;  the  other  is  promised  to-morrow. 

Q.  That  is  the  article  in  the  American  ?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  is  the  date  of  the  article  in  the  American  ? — A.  October, 
1898.  It  appeared  to  me  to  be  a good  resume  of  the  situation.  A 
copy  of  it  was  sent  to  a paper  in  New  York,  but  theyr  would  not 
publish  it,  because  they  said  it  would  not  suit  their  politics  at  the  time. 
Some  gentleman  sent  it  to  them,  he  wanted  them  to  publish  it,  and 
they  said  they  could  not  publish  it  at  that  time,  so  I don’t  think  it  has 
appeared  in  any  papers  except  here. 

Q.  In  addition  to  these  articles  in  the  papers,  which  fully  set  forth 
the  situation  here  of  the  people  themselves,  we  would  be  glad  to  hear 
what  else  you  have  to  say. — A.  I have  dealt  with  the  history  of  the 
natives  here  and  the  history  of  the  Spaniards  and  the  probable  future 
of  these  islands  under  decent  government  and  the  observations  I had 
to  make.  If  I were  to  express  all  my  views  on  the  subject  there 
would  be  no  end  to  it.  The  resources  of  the  country  are  so  rich  and 
varied  and  plentiful  that  it  would  take  a long  time  to  go  into  them. 

Q.  Well,  talk  away  freely. — A.  For  instance,  we  have  coal  mines. 
We  have  plenty  of  coal  in  these  islands  suitable  to  the  wants  of  this 
place. 

Q.  Genuine  coal  or  lignite? — A.  It  is  lignite  coal,  like  Japan  coal, 
although  it  is  rather  better  in  quality  than  the  Japan  coal.  In  fact,  1 
have  an  engineer’s  report  which  you  may  be  interested  in  perusing. 

Q.  On  what  island  is  that? — A.  Cebu. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  the  coal  in  Mindoro? — A.  The 
coal  in  Mindoro  is  very  much  the  same  as  the  Japan  coal.  1 have 
had  it  analyzed  in  Hongkong,  both  coals,  what  we  got  from  the  sur- 
face of  the  mines  which  have  been  worked  here.  I suppose  as  you 
go  farther  down  you  get  the  better  coal.  The  coal  I had  analyzed  in 
Hongkong  by  the  Government  analyst  was  2 per  cent  better  than  the 
Yubani  coal;  that  is,  the  analyst  in  Hongkong  made  it  out  to  be  2 
per  cent  better  than  the  Japan  coal.  I have  a concession.  Here  is  an 
article  you  might  peruse — these  two  sheets  of  this  article — and  ask  me 
any  question  you  like  about  anything  that  occurs  to  you. 

Q.  I wanted  to  ask  you  a little  more  about  the  coal,  Mr.  MacLeod. 
Do  you  know  anything  about  the  deposit  in  Masbate? — A.  It  is  a small 
thing,  comparatively,  but  it  has  been  found,  and  we  have  a line  of 
steamers  here,  and  we  have  burned  the  coal  in  our  own  steamers  and 
found  it  better  than  the  Japan  coal. 

Q.  How  far  are  these  Masbate  deposits  from  Palanog? — A.  They 
are  on  one  side  of  the  island.  There  is  a fort  there,  and  there  is  another 
fort  called  the  Catangan. 

Q.  Is  that  on  the  same  side  of  the  island  or  on  the  other  side  ? — A. 
It  is  on  the  northwest  of  the  island  as  far  as  I can  remember.  Have 
you  a chart  of  the  islands  ? 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


29 


Q.  Yes. — A.  The  engineer’s  report  says,  as  far  as  he  can  see 

Q.  I make  that  inquiry  because  I knew  a British  syndicate  was  oper- 
ating the  coal  holds  on  these  islands,  and  there  was  a statement  that 
there  was  160,000  tons  in  sight  in  one  concession  in  Masbate? — A. 
The  report  I have,  which  was  made  seven  or  eight  years  ago,  does  not 
bear  that  out.  I think  it  is  a smaller  quantity  than  that.  Those  figures 
were  too  large.  I have  got  a concession  for  ninety -nine  years  of  these 
lands,  and  I have  been  waiting  to  get  a decent  government  here  to  go 
to  work,  and  I propose  to  bring  a railway  down  here  to  the  coast,  then 
to  Cebu.  Port  Cebu,  you  know,  is  a very  good  port. 

Q.  You  mean  you  woidd  run  a railroad  to  Cebu? — A.  I would  run 
a railroad  from  the  mine  to  the  coast  and  from  there  to  Cebu  for  other 
traffic  and  other  purposes;  that  is  about  16  miles  of  railroad,  I think. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  the  place  where  the  mine  is? — A.  Yuking; 
it  is  in  Cebu. 

Q.  Will  you  state  the  area  where  coal  is  principally  found  through- 
out the  archipelago? — A.  Well,  the  principal  island  is  Cebu.  So  far 
as  we  have  seen  there  is  coal  in  the  south  of  Luzon,  in  the  straits, 
Santa  Granada;  there  is  coal  in  the  southeast,  in  Mindoro,  and  this 
Masbate  mine;  there  are  several  smaller  places,  but  the  country  has 
not  been  explored  thoroughly.  We  do  not  know  for  certain,  but  I 
think  there  is  coal  all  over  the  place. 

Q.  Is  there  any  ground  for  thinking  there  might  be  genuine  coal 
here  as  well  as  lignite? — A.  There  is  good  enough  coal  for  steaming 
purposes.  I believe  those  coals  gone  into  would  be  as  good  as  the  coal 
of  New  South  Wales.  At  present  we  buy  that  within  10  per  cent  of 
the  same  price. 

Q.  What  does  coal  sell  for  per  ton? — A.  $15  to  $16  per  ton — 
Mexican. 

Q.  Native  coal? — A.  Yes;  if  we  had  this  coal  it  would  sell  just  as 
well  as  Japan  coal. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  to  say  that  the  coal  mines  in  the  archipelago  have 
never  been  worked? — A.  No;  not  under  any  scientific  plan;  just  a 
little  lot  taken  out. 

Q.  Enough  to  satisfy  the  locality  in  which  the  mines  are,  or  for 
export? — A.  I don’t  think  the  whole  thing  would  amount  to  25,000 
tons  taken  out  in  the  last  twenty-five  or  thirty  years.  These  Cebu 
mines  were  being  worked  by  the  natives  during  1860  to  1864,  and  they 
took  out  3 or  4 or  5 thousand  tons.  At  that  time  there  were  no  steam- 
ers in  the  archipelago,  and  there  was  no  demand  for  it;  there  was  no 
railroad,  and  there  wras  great  difficulty  in  getting  coal  from  the  mine 
to  the  beach,  and  it  wTas  so  expensive  and  the  lack  of  demand  together 
there  was  no  occasion  to  mine  it. 

Q.  Where  are  the  mines  located  from  the  city  of  Cebu? — A.  Six- 
teen miles  by  railway  from  the  mines  to  the  beach  and  about  6 miles 
direct. 

Q.  Would  the  harbor  of  Cebu  be  the  best  place? — A.  It  woidd  be 
the  natural  place. 

Q.  You  have  concessions  you  say.  From  whom?— A.  From  the 
Spanish  Government. 

Q.  Are  there  other  mines  in  the  island  of  Cebu? — A.  Yes;  I am  on 
the  south  end  of  the  range  of  mountains  and  there  are  mines  in  the 
north  which  I have  the  refusal  of.  I can  merge  them  into  my  company 


30 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Concessions  have  been  granted? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Have  concessions  been  granted  of  all  the  mines  in  the  island  of 
Cebu? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  is  the  nature  of  those  concessions,  what  is  the  quid  pro 
quo? — A.  The  concession  I have  got  is  a very  favorable  one.  I am 
under  an  obligation  to  take  out  100  tons  a day  only;  of  this  100  tons 
I am  obliged  to  give  the  government  the  half  of  it  at  a reduction  on 
the  market  price,  which  reduction  has  been  fixed  at  51  cents  a toil 
(Mexican). 

Q.  That  is,  the  government  gets  half  of  the  output  each  day  at  51 
cents  less  than  the  market  rate? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  That  is,  if  you  put  out  1.000  tons A.  The  government 

would  have  the  right  to  take  over  half  of  this  1,000  tons  (500  tons) 
at  that  reduction. 

Q.  Is  that  51  cents  fixed  in  the  concession? — A.  It  is.  This  conces- 
sion was  put  up  at  auction,  and  the  man  Avho  bid  the  most  as  the 
government  portion  got  the  contract. 

Q.  What  is  the  period  of  that  concession? — A.  Ninety-nine  years  is 
fixed:  and  then  these  concessions  are  generally  carried  on  indefinitely. 
There  has  not  been  a case  otherwise — in  fact,  it  is  a new  thing  altogether. 

Q.  What  it  means  is  that  the  government  gets  a small  royalty  on 
half  of  the  coal  produced? — A.  Exactly;  and  the  coal  mines,  the  gov- 
ernment is  entitled  to  have  its  engineers  go  in  and  inspect  the  mines 
from  time  to  time. 

Q.  What  do  they  inspect  them  for?— A.  That  is  a part  of  the  con- 
tract. to  see  that  everything  is  going  on  properly  within  the  latter. 

Q.  How  long  has  that  concession  been  in  operation  ? — A.  It  has  not 
commenced  jTet.  It  was  granted  a little  less  than  a year  ago;  about 
May  of  last  year. 

Q.  After  the  1st  of  May? — A.  Well,  I got  it  in  January  really;  that 
was  the  option,  but  I only  got  the  concession  definitely  granted  to  me 
on  the  18th  of  May;  it  was  notified  to  me  in  May.  There  has  been  no 
possibility  of  operating  since,  because  there  was  a clause  in  the  con- 
tract which  operates  only  when  things  are  settled. 

Q.  What  was  the  date  of  that  option  ? — A.  The  18th  of  January,  I 
think. 

Q.  1898? — A.  Yes;  I have  got  the  whole  thing  in  printed  form, 
which  I may  give  you  by  and  by. 

Q.  What  is  needed  for  the  development  of  these  mines,  Mr.  Mac- 
Leod?— A.  The  only  thing  that  is  wanted  is  a railway  there — skill, 
capital,  and  a railway. 

Q.  Your  company  proposes  to  build  a railroad  from  there  to  Cebu  ?— 
A.  Yes;  that  is  part  of  the  contract. 

Q.  When,  by  the  terms  of  the  contract,  has  the  railway  to  be  com- 
pleted?— A.  Of  course,  from  the  time  I commence  I have  got  three 
years. 

Q.  That  is,  by  the  concession? — A.  That  is,  by  the  concession;  but 
of  course  T should  propose  to  do  it  in  a much  shorter  time;  they  gave 
us  plenty  of  time;  I should  not  take  more  than  twelve  months. 

Q.  What  gauge  railroad  is  called  for? — A.  Oh,  that  is  a matter  of 
arrangement. 

Q.  No  specifications? — A.  No;  I have  got  to  make  a proposal  that 
I should  make  a railway  suitable,  of  say  3 feet  <5  inch  gauge  or  there- 
abouts— the  same  gauge  as  this  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


31 


Q.  Is  there  any  provision  found  in  the  concession  as  to  the  method 
of  determining-  the  gauge  or  nature  of  that  road  ? — A.  Yes;  I make  a 
proposition  to  them  and  they  accept  or  modify  it.  I take  it  that  the 
American  Government  have  stepped  into  the  shoes  of  the  Spanish,  and 
that  1 am  dealing  now  with  the  American  Government  just  as  1 was 
dealing  with  the  Spaniards  in  this  case.  Isn’t  that  so? 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  1 suppose  the  nature  of  this  concession  is  a thing  that  will  have 
to  be  inquired  into  by  our  Government. — A.  The  concessions  are  sim- 
ply the  ordinary  concessions  that  one  government  succeeding  another 
government  would  have  to  take  over  on  the  same  terms. 

Q.  If  we  choose  to  recognize  the  telegraphic  concessions  which 
have  been  made  in  this  island  we  could  send  all  our  Government  mes- 
sages for  a third  of  what  it  is  costing  us,  but  we  are  paying  full  rates 
at  present.  That  is  a question  left  open  for  future  consideration. — 
A.  In  regard  to  acquired  rights  of  property  of  all  kinds,  I take  it 
that  by  your  treaty  in  Paris  you  respect  them  as  they  were.  Isn’t 
that  so? 

Q.  That  is  a question — the  determination  of  rights,  I take  it.  Those 
duly  ascertained  and  determined  would,  of  course,  be  respected. — 
A.  Rights  that  would  be  recognized  by  the  Spanish  Government 
would  be  recognized  bv  you? 

Q.  As  I say,  I think  this  question  of  the  determination  of  those 
rights  is  not  a question  that  concerns  us  here.  Do  you  say  that  there 
are  other  islands  besides  Cebu  in  ivhich  coal  is  found? — A.  Yes;  the 
island  of  Mindoro  in  the  south,  and  in  Luzon,  in  fact.  There  is  really 
coal  all  over  the  place. 

By  Admiral  Dewey: 

Q.  Is  Professor  Becker  again  here? — A.  He  is  still  here. 

Q.  He  was  sent  out  to  examine  those? — A.  He  made  a little  mineral 
report,  a copy  of  which  I have  got,  sent  out  from  Washington. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  I think  that  is  in  the  Paris  treaty  report.  I have  read  it. 

Q.  Are  there  any  other  natural  resources  of  the  country  in  which 
you  are  specially  interested,  Air.  MacLeod  ? — A.  I have  got  a lot  of  land 
in  and  about  the  port  of  Iloilo,  around  and  about  that  port,  which  I am 
developing  into  buildings  and  wharves,  and  the  only  thing  that  is 
wanted  is  to  let  us  get  in  ships  of  20  or  25  feet  draft.  At  present 
ships  have  to  load  in  the  roads,  and  they  take  about  six  weeks,  some 
of  the  ships,  to  get  away,  from  the  time  they  arrive  until  they  go 
away,  and  by  letting  them  into  the  river  they  get  away  in  about  ten 
or  twelve  days;  and  the  only  thing  that  is  wanted,  I think,  is  to  dredge 
out  the  bar  5 or  6 feet.  The  bottom  is  of  sand  and  mud,  not  stones, 
and  it  is  an  estuary  which  the  action  of  the  tides  only  affects;  it  is  not 
like  a bar  formed  by  a river  coming  from  the  mountains,  which  forms 
a bar  constantly;  this  bar  once  cleaned  would  keep  clean  for  years,  as 
it  is  only  affected  by  the  action  of  the  tide. 

Q.  Wasn’t  there  some  action  on  the  part  of  the  business  men  to  get 
work  done  on  that  bar,  and  wasn’t  there  a subscription  raised  for  that 
purpose? — A.  What  they  called  work,  a little.  The  merchants  there 
subscribed  a lot  of  money  which  went  as  a sort  of  tax  on  the  produce; 
and  the  Spaniards  didn’t  do  much — they  got  out  some  dredges  and 


32 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


started  work,  but  the  rebellion  stopped  it,  and  really  there  has  been 
nothing  done  since;  but  I believe  they  have  got  a good  deal  of  material 
and  a plant  down  there  now,  the  dredges,  etc. ; but  it  is  a very  simple 
matter,  making  this  port  available  for  big  ships  to  go  inside. 

Q.  Is  that  a private  plant  you  spoke  of? — A.  The  plant  that  exists 
in  Iloilo  belongs  to  the  Spanish  Government,  to  the  port  works;  it  is 
the  same  sort  of  arrangement  as  here — the}'  had  port  work  here  which 
never  was  carried  on — but  this  was  taken  up  by  private  people,  among 
them  the  merchants,  and  the}'  agreed  to  take  up  the  tax  money  on  pro- 
duce to  cover  the  outlay.  They  had  secured  about  $80,000  when  it 
stopped. 

Q.  Does  your  business  or  experience  make  you  conversant  with  any 
of  the  other  produce?- — A.  My  business  is  to  buy  produce  and  ship  it 
over  to  the  States,  England,  China,  and  Japan,  and  we  handle  all  kinds 
of  produce  that  is  to  be  had. 

Q.  Sugar,  hemp,  tobacco,  and  coffee?— A.  Sugar  very  little,  and 
coffee  very  little  of  it. 

Q.  Do  you  send  out  raw  tobacco ? A.  The  tobacco  output  is 

principally  sent  by  the  government  to  Spain;  they  pay  a better  price 
than  any  other  European  country,  and  they  ship  through  the  agents, 
the  concessionairs,  to  Spain. 

Q.  Do  you  send  any  to  the  United  States  ? — A.  No. 

Q.  Do  you  send  any  cigars  to  the  United  States? — A.  Very,  very 
few.  I think  the  duty  stands  in  the  way. 

Q.  Do  you  send  any  hemp? — A.  A large  quantity  of  hemp. 

Q.  Do  you  send  much  sugar? — A.  Sugar  also. 

Q.  What  else? — A.  Hemp  and  sugar,  hides  and  hide  cuttings,  and 
little  objects  of  that  kind,  but  hemp  and  sugar  are  the  two  principal 
staples. 

Q.  What  proportion  of  the  hemp  production  goes  to  the  United 
States? — A.  A good  half — 60  per  cent,  I should  say. 

Q.  How  about  sugar? — A.  About  60  or  70  per  cent.  The  States’ 
market  is  more  adapted  to  the  class  of  sugar  we  have  here  than  the 
other  markets.  Lately  the  sugar  has  been  going  principally  to  China 
and  Japan. 

Q.  What  is  the  peculiarity  of  the  sugar  that  adapts  it  to  the  United 
States  market? — A.  It  is  a low  class  of  sugar,  which  goes  through  the 
refinery ; it  is  a sun-dried  sugar,  natural  sugar,  and  put  up  in  light 
bags. 

Q.  What  does  it  sell  for  here? — A.  Five  dollars,  Mexican,  a picul. 

Q.  What  is  a picul  in  pounds? — A.  One  hundred  and  forty  pounds. 

Q.  That  is  wholesale  ? — A.  Yes;  by  cargoes.  Of  course  it  fluctuates 
according  to  the  market,  sometimes  more  and  sometimes  less,  but  I 
think  now  about  $5  a picul. 

Q.  Is  sugar  raising  a profitable  investment  under  the  conditions 
that  have  existed  for  the  last  three  or  four  years? — A.  Very  profitable 
to  people  who  look  after  their  own  interests  and  have  Europeans  in 
charge  to  keep  the  natives  from  pilfering  and  to  keep  them  at  their 
work. 

Q.  Do  the  natives  do  most  of  the  work  in  connection  with  the  pro- 
duction of  sugar,  hemp,  and  these  other  products  of  which  you  have 
spoken? — A.  Yes,  in  the  southern  islands  they  do ; the  natives  are  the 
principal  workers ; elsewhere  Chinese  work  the  hemp  plantations. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  in  the  island  of  Luzon? — Yes;  also  in  Mindanao. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


33 


They  own  hemp  plantations.  They  are  a very  industrious  people,  the 
Chinese,  and  we  want  a few  more  of  them.  The  fact  is,  the  native 
here  is  an  unreliable  and  useless  being'. 

Q.  What  makes  the  great  difference  in  the  natives  of  Luzon  and 
the  natives  of  the  Visayas? — A.  I refer  principally  to  these  fellows 
who  have  taken  up  arms;  they  have  demoralized  themselves  and  oth- 
ers', and  they  live  on  the  earnings  of  their  wives,  principally. 

Q.  What  do  their  wives  do  to  make  money  ? — A.  They  traffic,  and 
they  do  a good  deal  of  hand  weaving — hand-loom  weaving  of  different 
native  fabrics,  you  know. 

Q.  They  are  doing  that  at  present? — A.  Yes;  you  see  some  here  in 
the  stores.  They  ship  it  to  the  States — dress  and  dress  lengths,  that  is 
all  made  by  hand-loom  weaving. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  That  is,  from  Samar— made  in  Samar?  Or  is  Samar  the  port 
from  which  it  is  shipped? — A.  It  comes  from  the  southern  islands,  too, 
but  from  Calamianes  principally.  We  ship  certain  gums  to  the  United 
States. 

Q.  Are  you  under  the  impression  that  that  is  produced  in  Calamianes 
or  that  it  is  produced  in  the  southern  islands  and  brought  there  ? — A.  It 
is  produced  in  both  places.  We  have  obtained  more  from  Calamianes 
than  from  anywhere  else. 

Q.  I have  been  all  over  Calamianes  Islands  without  seeing  any  there. 
There  are  no  forests  where  it  could  be  produced. — A.  It  might  be  pro- 
duced on  the  surrounding  islands  and  shipped  there;  because  in  use 
we  call  it  “Calamianes  gum,”  because  it  is  shipped  from  there. 

Q.  Is  any  camphor  produced  in  the  islands? — A.  There  is  one  island 
near  Leyte  where  a good  deal  of  camphor  is  produced. 

Q.  Is  that  Beleron  ? — A.  Beleron. 

Q.  In  the  production  of  these  commodities — -hemp,  sugar,  gum,  and 
the  like — is  machinery  used  to  any  extent? — A.  In  the  matter  of  hemp, 
it  is  the  most  primitive  thing,  the  way  these  natives  operate.  They 
have  an  apparatus  composed  of  a board,  and  there  is  a knife  strung 
under  a loop,  and  the  man  that  is  feeding  it  brings  down  his  foot  on  the 
fiber  and  pulls  it  through,  and  separates  the  vegetable  from  the  fiber; 
but  it  is  the  most  primitive  thing.  I have  in  London  photographs  of 
the  whole  operation,  from  the  time  the  tree  is  cut  till  it  is  finished.  I 
am  speaking  now,  of  course,  about  hemp. 

Q.  Is  not  the  tree  from  which  hemp  is  extracted  very  similar  in 
appearance  to  an  ordinary  plantain  tree? — A.  It  looks  so  much  like  a 
plantain  tree  that  by  looking  at  the  two  growing  together  only  the 
practiced  eye  would  know  the  difference,  but  the  hemp  tree  has  got  a 
darker  green  leaf  and  it  is  corrugated. 

Q.  It  is  in  corrugations  ? — A.  But  the  edible  plantain  has  got  a plain, 
lighter  green  leaf. 

Q.  And  not  corrugated? — A.  And  not  corrugated. 

Q.  Would  there  be  any  demand  for  better  machinery  here  under 
favorable  conditions  ? — A.  If  a machine  could  be  invented  adaptable 
to  cultivating  hemp  it  would  be  a very,  very  valuable  thing,  but  we 
have  merchants  here  who  have  spent  thousands  of  pounds  in  experi- 
menting, and  we  have  had  American  engineers,  Scotch  engineers,  and 
other  engineers  all  experimenting,  and  we  have  never  yet  got  a ma- 
chine that  would  answer  all  purposes,  that  the  natives  would  take  to. 
p c 3 


34 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Is  machinery  used  in  the  production  of  sugar? — A.  Yes;  both 
machinery  driven  by  cattle  and  by  steam;  and  there  is  some  centrifu- 
gal machinery  in  the  island  of  Negros,  where  they  make  a very  good 
sugar. 

Q.  Isn't  it  in  Negros  that  the  best  sugar  is  produced? — A.  Yes; 
Negros  is  further  advanced  than  any  of  the  other  provinces  in  the 
matter  of  sugar. 

Q.  It  is  a large  sugar  producer — A.  Sugar  is  a very  large  staple 
there.  They  grow  a little  hemp,  too. 

Q.  You  spoke  a little  while  ago  about  the  Chinese.  You  said  that 
the  Yisayans  were  industrious,  and  in  other  parts  of  the  archipelago, 
especially  in  Luzon,  the  Chinese  were  needed;  that  the  natives  could 
not  he  relied  on. — A.  I am  referring  especially  to  the  Tagalogs.  The 
Tagalogs  are  the  disturbing  element.  In  the  north  there  are  indus- 
trious people  that  work  for  their  living,  and  they  don't  bother  them- 
selves about  taking  up  arms  and  all  that;  they  are  all  working  peo- 
ple that  would  like  to  get  rid  of  Aguinaldo,  because  he  sends  gangs  of 
his  men  to  get  those  fellows  to  join  him.  He  has  promised  them  all 
sorts  of  fancy  things.  The}’  take  them  up  to  the  top  of  a hill  and  say, 
“All  that  your  eye  can  see  is  yours  if  you  follow  me,”  and  they  are 
induced  to  follow  him. 

Q.  And  was  this  defect  in  the  Tagalog  people — their  laziness  and 
other  objectionable  qualities — noted  before  the  rebellion  was  started? — 
A.  Not  nearly  so  much  as  now.  There  used  to  he  about  ten  years  ago — ■> 
in  fact  for  the  last  two  or  three  years  it  was  noted  particularly. 

By.  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Before  you  get  off  the  question  of  population,  weren’t  the  Chinese 
imported  here  continuously? — A.  The  coolies  were  allowed  to  come 
here,  and  were  charged  so  much  a head. 

Q.  Were  they  imported  every  year ? — A.  They  came  and  went  by 
every  steamer. 

Q.  They  came  here  and  worked  on  the  sugar  plantations? — A.  Yes; 
and  some  went  back  and  some  remained. 

Q.  Did  they  come  and  go? — A.  They  went  and  came,  and  some  set- 
tled here. 

Q.  After  they  had  made  some  money  here? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Was  there  any  sentiment  against  their  coming  and  going? — A. 
They  did  all  the  coolie  work,  and  the  natives  had  no  chance,  because 
the  Chinese  did  twice  the  work  the  Indio  would  do. 

Q.  Did  the  Indians  make  any  fuss  about  it? — A.  Never  spoke 
about  it. 

Q.  They  supplanted  the  Indians  in  hard  work? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  To-day  they  do  the  work  of  the  army? — A.  Yes;  and  they  do 
all  the  work.  You  can’t  get  anything  done  in  any  shape  or  form 
except  by  Chinamen. 

Q.  Should  the  Chinese  be  excluded,  in  your  opinion,  from  this 
island? — A.  They  should  not  be  excluded.  They  should  he  allowed 
free  entrance. 

Q.  Why  should  they  not  be  excluded? — A.  Simply  because  we  have 
no  people  to  work,  and  we  would  have  no  people  to  build  roads  and 
railways. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  these  people  work — the  natives? — A.  They  will  work 
a little,  but  you  haven’t  got  enough  of  them.  You  see,  the  island  of 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


35 


Luzon,  which  is  the  largest  in  area  of  these  islands,  has  only  3,000,000 
of  inhabitants,  all  told,  against  35,000,000  in  England,  which  is  an 
island  of  about  the  same  size,  and  that  is  only  10  per  cent.  Only  a 
small  fraction  of  the  land  has  been  explored  and  brought  into  use. 

Q.  Well,  you  think  that  you  would  have  to  continue  indefinitely 
this  Chinese  immigration? — A.  I should  make  immigration  for  the 
Chinese  perfectly  free.  Of  course,  the  question  of  supply  and  demand 
would  regulate  it. 

Q.  Are  the}"  orderly  and  good  citizens?— A.  The  Chinamen? 

Q.  Yes.— A.  Oh,  yes;  very  easily  governed. 

Q.  Have  they  taken  any  part  in  this  war? — A.  None  at  all. 

Q.  Have  they  continued  to  do  their  work  as  before? — A.  As  long  as 
they  are  allowed  to,  but,  of  course,  the  Indios  have  been  maltreating 
them  very  much. 

Q.  The  Indios- are  hostile  to  them ? — A.  Yes;  now  hostile  to  every 
foreigner. 

Q.  Do  they  kill  Chinamen  when  they  get  them? — A.  Yes.  The 
Chinese  is  the  most  important  question  that  we  have  to  labor  with 
connected  with  these  islands. 

Q.  I understand  your  position  to  be  that  the  Chinese  should  be  given 
the  same  rights  as  other  people. — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Were  they  allowed  the  same  rights  under  the  Spanish  Govern 
ment? — A.  No;  there  was  a head  tax  of  $20  to  $50. 

Q.  Were  they  allowed  to  bring  their  wives  and  children  ? — A.  Their 
wives  were  not  allowed  to  leave  China.  They  do  not  like  the  women 
to  leave  China. 

Colonel  Dexby.  The  women  very  rarely  emigrate.  When  they  go 
abroad  they  go  for  immoral  purposes.  The  Chinaman  never  takes 
his  wife  because  he  never  intends  to  stay  anywhere  he  goes.  He 
loves  China  better  than  any  other  place,  alive  or  dead. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Doesn't  that  very  fact  explained  bv  Colonel  Denby  make  a dif 
ference  between  the  Chinese  and  other  people.  They  don’t  bring  their 
wives  and  families;  they  come  to  exploit  a country  in  order  that  they 
ultimately  may  go  back  to  China.— A.  That  has  been  the  modus 
operandi  up  till  now.  The  Spanish  did  not  give  them  free  entry, 
because  they  very  heavily  taxed  them  and  made  the  place  unbearable 
for  them. 

Q.  Were  special  taxes  levied  on  the  Chinese? — A.  Yes;  very,  very 
heavy.  They  were  a big  source  of  revenue  to  the  Spaniards. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Wherever  the  Chinese  go  in  the  world  they  supplant  everyone 
else.  You  go  to  Singapore  and  you  find  twenty  or  thirty  thousand 
there;  you  go  to  Colombo  and  you  find  the  same  thing.  They  under 
sell  everybody  and  they  work  cheaper  than  any  other  person,  and 
after  they  have  made  a certain  amount  of  money  they  return  to 
China.  Under  this  statement  do  you  think  that  the  Chinese  should 
be  allowed  to  come  in  without  restriction? — A.  He  should  not  be 
excluded,  but  I think  special  legislation  is  wanted  to  let  a large  number 
of  Chinese  in.  They  should  be  obliged  to  work  in  the  fields  or  do 
coolie  work,  and  licenses  for  trading  Chinese  should  be  restricted. 

Q.  Have  the  Chinese  who  have  come  here  in  the  past  developed  into 
traders? — A.  A great  many  of  them  have.  As  soon  as  they  get  a few 
dollars,  if  they  are  coolies,  they  develop  into  something  else. 


36 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  How  many  of  them ? — A.  In  Manila  now  a very  few  according 
to  what  it  used  to  be;  80,000  here  in  Manila. 

Q.  Is  that  the  normal  number? — -A.  We  have  had  half  a million 
Chinamen  here  in  my  time. 

Q.  What,  in  Manila? — A.  In  Manila  and  the  provinces.  We  have 
had  129,000  here  in  Manila  and  half  a million  all  over  the  islands. 

Q.  You  have  had  120,000  Chinese  in  Manila? — A.  Yes;  in  Manila 
alone  in  my  time. 

Q.  In  what  years? — A.  The  60’s  and  70’s.  I am  quite  an  old  stager 
here. 

Q.  Any  Portuguese  here? — A.  Very,  very  few. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  If  the  Visayan  natives  will  do  their  work  and  the  natives  of  the 
southern  and  northern  sections  of  Luzon  will  do  the  work  in  those 
sections,  you  would  need  Chinese  only  to  take  the  place  of  these 
Tagalogs;  isn’t  that  so? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Isn’t  it  quite  likely  that  the  Tagalogs  will  become  industrious 
under  new  legislative  and  industrial  conditions? — A.  Yes;  if  you  keep 
them  in  place  and  at  work — as  long  as  they  are  kept  at  work.  I think 
after  you  have  read  this  paper  which  I handed  you,  you  will  be  able 
to  ask  me  some  questions  relating  to  the  Chinese  question.  Of  course 
I am  talking  of  going  ahead  with  work  on  roads  and  railroads.  You 
have  got  to  make  roads  where  they  do  not  now  exist,  and  you  have  to 
make  railways  where  they  do  not  exist.  This  is  the  finest  country  for 
railroads  that  I ever  saw. 

Q.  What  effect  has  an  earthquake  on  this  railway  ? — A.  None  what- 
ever. 

Q.  The  only  effect  has  been  that  produced  by  typhoons,  etc.  ? — A. 
Yes;  and  that  is  because  they  have  laid  it  too  low.  The  whole  thing 
is  a mistake.  They  went  on  the  plans  of  the  Spaniards,  and  they 
actually  began  to  build  the  line  on  the  Spanish  plan.  In  some  parts 
they  went  and  laid  the  rails  for  a mile,  and  they  found  they  couldn’t 
go  any  further,  and  then  they  had  to  go  another  route,  expending 
three  oi  four  times  the  money  that  they  ought  to  have  with  a proper 
survey. 

Q.  They  couldn’t  keep  their  grades? — A.  They  had  to  change  their 
direction  and  go  around  another  way.  For  instance,  they  brought  the 
line  down  to  a big  river  at  Calumpit  where,  after  going  down  60  feet, 
they  couldn't  find  a solid  foundation  for  their  caissons,  and  they  had 
to  get  a solid  foundation,  and  they  couldn’t  get  any  bottom  there. 
However,  they  put  the  bridge  down  there  and  the  first  flood  carried  it 
away.  They  had  to  change  the  direction  of  the  railway  and  go  up  the 
river  where  they  could  find  a bottom,  and  that  one  mistake  cost 
$300,000. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  the  entire  cost  of  putting  in  that  road  was? — 
A.  I was  told,  I think,  the  other  day,  that  it  was  £2,000,000.  It  is 
something  under  £2,000,000.  I think  it  must  be  about  £1,600,000. 

Q.  Sterling? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Sixteen  million,  Mexican  ?— A.  The  capital,  yes;  £1,600,000.  Of 
course  at  that  time  the  Mexican  dollar  was  worth  about  1 shillings 
here.  That  would  make  it  about  $8,000,000  gold. 

Q.  Sixteen  million  dollars,  Mexican? — A.  Yes;  at  the  present  gold 
ex  Lange. 

Q.  Now,  Mr.  Macleod,  you  were  speaking  about  roads 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


37 


By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  When  was  it  completed? — A.  It  was  completed  about  1894.  I 
had  been  in  Europe  from  1890  to  1897,  and  it  was  completed  while  I 
was  awaju 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  In  your  enumeration  of  needed  works  on  the  island  you  began 
first  with  railways.  Which  do  you  consider  the  most  needed  railroads, 
and  which  do  you  consider  the  most  likely  to  pay  on  this  island? — A. 
Well,  you  will  have  to  go  and  find  out  by  the  statistics  the  different 
villages  according  to  population;  wherever  there  are  big  populations 
it  is  a certain  thing  that  a railroad  would  pay,  and  the  traffic  would 
very,  very  immensely  increase. 

Q.  If  you  would  excuse  me  a minute;  you  said,  I think,  to  Colonel 
Denbv,  that  this  road  was  built  with  private  capital? — A.  the  Govern- 
ment gave  out  the  contract  to  an  English  company  under  a basis  of 
$5,000,000,  which  at  that  time  was  equivalent  to  £1,000,000  sterling, 
with  a guaranty  of  interest  at  the  rate  of  8 per  cent,  or  such  portion  of 
8 per  cent  as  the  earnings  of  the  company  would  fall  short  of  8 per  cent. 
I haven’t  the  resolution  with  me,  but  that  is  the  substance  of  it;  that 
is  to  say.  if  the  company  could  by  its  earnings  make  4 per  cent  the 
Spanish  Government  would  be  called  upon  to  pay  the  balance  to  make 
good  that  8 per  cent. 

Q.  Would  the  Government  pay  that  now  in  gold  or  silver? — A. 
Silver,  unfortunately,  now. 

Q.  The  road  didn't  make  8 per  cent? — A.  I fanc}T  lately  the  road 
has  been  making  that.  But  the  Government  had  to  make  it  good. 

Q.  The  other  subject  is  railroad  building  in  general.  Please  give 
us  your  views  on  that  subject. — A.  I consider  this  the  finest  country 
in  the  world  for  it,  by  running  your  lines  around  the  populous  vil- 
lages, from  Tarlac.  The  present  lack  of  communication  is  the  reason 
for  the  country  being  so  far  behind,  and  the  moment  you  put  in  a net- 
work of  railroads  there  will  be  an  enormous  improvement. 

Q.  Are  these  villages  nipa  villages  or  have  they  good  houses  ? — A. 
Many  of  them  have  good  houses. 

Q.  Such  as  you  see  around  Manila? — A.  Yes,  and  better.  Among 
the  rich  natives  their  great  idea  is  to  have  a nice  house,  a costly  house. 

Q.  Have  certain  lines  of  railways  suggested  themselves  to  you  as 
preeminently  desirable  ?— A.  Yes;  I could  give  you  a list. 

Q.  Will  you  name  some  of  the  routes  ? — A.  Well,  I told  you  we  had 
an  idea  of  taking  a line  up  to  the  mountains,  where  we  could  have  a 
sanitarium. 

Q.  What  mountains? — A.  Oh,  these  mountains  about  here.  Antipolo 
from  Manila,  as  the  crow  flies,  is  about  6 miles.  We  were  going  to 
take  a line  from  Manila  to  Santa  Ana,  crossing  the  river  at  Santa  Ana, 
and  going  up  to  San  Juan  and  to  Mariquina,  and  from  there  to  Anti- 
polo. By  that  means  we  take  in  the  populuous  villages,  where  there  is 
traffic  all  the  time.  Then  in  May  it  is  a great  place  for  pilgrims.  It 
is  the  shrine  of  the  virgin,  and  crowds  of  people  go  there  from  all 
parts  of  the  country  to  worship.  Our  calculation  was  that  we  could 
take  this  line;  it  was  a private  company  which  I was  interested  in. 
We  calculated  that  we,  without  any  assistance  from  the  Government  at 
all,  could  make  it  pay  from  this  pilgrim  business;  but  when  the  Gov- 
ernment saw  that  we  were  going  to  put  down  the  line  they  exacted  a 
deposit  of  a large  amount,  much  larger  than  we  had  ever  contemplated. 


38 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  As  security? — A.  Yes;  as  a guarantee  that  we  should  carry  out 
our  project,  so  we  stopped  there. 

Q.  Do  you  know  the  height  of  the  Antipolo  elevation? — A.  I should 
say  Antipolo  would  he  600  feet  above  the  sea  level — the  village  of  Anti- 
polo. 

Q.  How  do  you  propose  to  climb  up  that  elevation  ?- — A.  It  is  a very 
easy  ascent.  I have  gone  up  on  horseback,  even. 

Q.  Any  special  arrangement  required  for  trains? — A.  They  could 
take  a zig-zag  course. 

Q.  You  mean  to  say  they  could  ascend  a height  of  600  feet  without 
any  special  arrangement? — A.  The  hills  back  of  it  are  three  or  four 
times  that  height. 

Q.  Do  you  propose  to  extend  your  lines  to  those  hills? — A.  Yes,  we 
intended  to  in  time.  The  idea  was  the  pilgrim  business. 

Q.  That  is  farther  than  6 miles  as  the  crow  flies. — A.  Six  or  7. 

Q.  You  would  make  your  road  longer  than  that? — A.  By  the  road 
it  would  be  perhaps  nearer  20. 

Q.  You  would  lay  down  railways  according  to  population  rather  than 
production? — A.  Population  and  production  go  together  in  this  coun- 
try. You  may  take  that  as  an  axiom. 

Q.  What  other  lines  have  you  in  mind?  Or  have  you  ever  thought 
of  it? — A.  For  instance,  the  continuation  of  this  Dagupan  line  on  the 
north  as  far  as  you  can  go. 

Q.  Along  the  coast  ? — A.  Most  of  the  way  along  the  coast,  then  a 
little  wav  in  the  interior  to  get  to  Cagayan  province.  The  villages — 
the  coast  all  along  is  full  of  villages. 

Q.  The  population  is  along  the  coast  there? — A.  Yes;  not  very  far 
from  the  coast. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  would  be  the  distance  from  the  terminus  of  the  road  now 
to  a point  at  the  end  of  the  island? — A.  About  120  miles,  I calculate. 
I have  heard  it  calculated  at  150  miles. 

Q.  From  130  to  150? — A.  Yes. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  In  order  to  tap  the  tobacco  provinces  where  would  you  stop,  at 
Aparri  ? — A.  Oh,  you  need  not  stop  there,  but  that  is  one  of  the  prin- 
cipal points,  but  you  could  go  farther  into  the  Isabella  province,  where 
there  is  a very  large  production  of  tobacco. 

Q.  Is  Apari  a big  town ? — A.  Yes;  a seaport. 

Q.  You  would  go  through  the  Isabella  province? — A.  Following  the 
Bio  Grande  to  Baguyan. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Is  there  a necessity  for  a railroad  along  that  river;  couldn’t  the 
river  itself  be  used?- — A.  It  is  now  the  only  means,  but  railroad  traffic 
would  be  much  quicker. 

Q.  Is  it  practicable  to  navigate  that  river  during  the  rainy  season  ? — 
A.  At  times  masses  of  trees  are  carried  down  in  the  flood  and  they 
stop  all  navigation.  I hai'e  been  all  through  there  by  a steamer. 

Q.  Twenty-five  miles  or  so  up?— A.  No;  15  miles,  perhaps. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  far  one  can  go  by  that  river  in  a launch? — 
A.  Yes;  when  there  is  no  flood. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  far  one  can  go? — A.  Pretty  far  in  a shallow, 
light-draft  boat. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


39 


By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  One  hundred  miles? — A.  No;  30  or  40  miles  up  any  way.  I 
went  on  horseback  from  that  point  to  Lallo  and  to  Tuguegarao. 

Q.  That  is  the  capital  of  the  province  of  Cagayan? — A.  Yes;  and 
beyond  that  there  is  a very  populous  and  very  rich  village. 

Q.  How  large  is  the  population ? — A.  I should  say  about  50  or  60 
thousand  inhabitants,  with  the  suburbs.  Then  beyond  that  you  go  into 
the  province  of  Isabella.  Those  are  the  two  great  tobacco  provinces. 

Q.  Which  do  you  say  are  the  places  where  tobacco  is  produced  ? — 
A.  In  the  provinces  of  Cagayan  and  Isabella. 

Q.  How  do  they  get  that  tobacco  to  Manila? — A.  They  bring  it 
down  the  river  in  those  boats.  They  have  large  boats,  covered  with 
matting. 

Q.  Called  a cascoe? — A.  No;  bigger  than  cascoes.  They  are  called 
barangayanes.  The}'  bring  the  tobacco  down,  the  natives  bring  it 
there,  and  our  steamers  bring  it  to  this  port. 

Q.  What  other  road  would  you  suggest  from  Manila? — A.  Well, 
you  can  branch  out  feeders  from  the  present  line  to  Dagupan.  Feeder 
lines  covdd  be  extended. 

Q.  East  or  west  ? — A.  Some  of  them  north  and  some  south. 

Q.  To  what  points? — A.  The  line  goes  very  nearly  northwest, 
doesn’t  it. 

Q.  That  is  right — northwest. — A.  On  both  sides  are  big  villages. 

Q.  Will  you  name  some  of  those  villages? — A.  Nueva  Ecija,  San 
Isidro — that  is  a very  important  village — and  then  to  the  south  again 
you  would  tap  some  of  the  big  pueblos  in  Pampanga;  then  after  going- 
up  along  the  coast  with  the  line  as  far  as  San  Fernando,  in  the  province 
of  Union,  of  which  San  Fernando  is  the  capital,  we  get  in  high  ground 
at  a place  where  there  is  a fine  location  for  a sanitarium  above  the  sea. 

Q.  Named? — A.  Benguet. 

Q.  The  railroad  may  then  be  laid  from  San  Fernando  to  Benguet? — 
A.  An  electric  line  should  be  run  from  San  Fernando  to  Benguet.  It 
would  take  from  Manila  to  Benguet  about  twelve  hours. 

Q.  Isn't  it  nearly  30  miles  from  there? — A.  No;  10,  I think;  but 
then,  of  course,  it  is  pretty  steep  climbing. 

Q.  How  high  do  you  say  Benguet  is  ? — A.  Four  thousand  five  hun- 
dred feet. 

Q.  You  would  have  to  have  a special  road  to  reach  there? — A.  Yes; 
an  electric  road.  I have  got  a chart  in  my  office. 

Q.  Don’t  they  use  chairs  in  any  part  of  this  island? — A.  No;  no 
chairs  are  used.  Some  luxurious  Chinese  gentlemen  who  came  out 
here  had  chairs  and  sixteen  coolies. 

Q.  And  they  don't  use  rickshaws? — A.  No;  they  don’t  use  them. 
We  are  very  far  behind  the  times.  When  I first  came  to  this  country 
there  wasn’t  a steam  launch  in  this  country.  I myself  brought  the 
first  steamer  and  the  first  steam  launch. 

Q.  What  about  carriages  ? — A.  There  was  an  American  here  called 
Carls  who  started  a carriage  factory  and  he  made  a lot  of  money.  He 
had  a very  big  business,  and  he  brought  in  all  these  American-shaped 
carriages  which  you  have  seen  out  here.  They  have  changed  the  style 
since  I used  to  be  here,  but  I suppose  there  are  twelve  to  fifteen  thou- 
sand carriages  of  all  styles  in  the  place. 

Q.  They  tax  them,  don’t  they? — A.  There  is  a tax  put  on  them  to 
keep  up  the  road,  but  the  tax  does  not  go  to  the  roads.  It  all  goes 
somewhere  else,  and  the  roads  are  not  attended  to. 


40 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  ’What  roads  would  you  run  south  of  Manila  through  the  lower 
half  of  the  island? — A.  I would  have  other  railroads  all  through  from 
Manila  to  Cavite;  then  to  Santa  Cruz  and  take  in  all  the  pueblos. 

Q.  And  the  villages  along  the  edge  of  the  lake? — A.  Yes;  and  then 
take  the  line  up  the  mountain  called  Majayjay. 

Q.  Why  ? — A.  For  a sanitarium  for  Manila.  It  is  an  excellent  place 
for  a sanitarium,  for  the  climate  there  is  superb. 

Q.  You  say  it  possesses  a fine  climate? — A.  Yes;  it  has  a pine  forest, 
which  makes  it  extremely  healthy,  and  they  grow  all  the  products  you 
can  care  to  have. 

Q.  When  you  speak  of  a sanitarium  do  you  mean  merely  a place  of 
escape  from  the  heat?- — A.  No;  a health  establishment  for  the  troops. 

Q.  Or  for  the  people  of  Manila  to  go  to  during  the  hot  weather — 
A.  Yes;  this  was  an  establishment  provided  by  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment for  their  soldiers. 

Q.  The  one  on  Majayjay  ? — A.  No;  that  is  a new  one;  and  one  I have 
been  having  in  mind.  The  one  in  Benguet  was  projected  by  the  Spaniards 
on  account  of  the  excellency  of  the  climate;  but  it  remained  projected; 
it  didn't  go  beyond  the  stage  of  projection. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  the  people  up  there  in  Benguet? — 
A.  They  are  very  friendly,  the  mountain  fellows.  The}r  come  within 
the  pale  of  civilization  more  than  the  others.  They  are  quite  friendly 
to  the  whites.  There  is  quite  a little  village  there.  Some  of  the  mer- 
chants have  built  bungalows;  but  the  difficulty  of  getting  out  of  there 
is  enormous.  It  will  take  two  days  to  go  by  steamer  to  San  Fernando, 
and  then  half  a day  to  go  up  the  mountains. 

Q.  Y ou  say  you  would  continue  the  road  to  where  ( — A.  To  Tayabas, 
thence  to  Nueva  Caceres,  and  possibly  to  Albay.  A trunk  line  would 
pay  all  the  way  along  from  the  extreme  north  of  the  island  to  the 
extreme  south;  and  then  feeders,  }'ou  really  have  to  calculate  on  them. 

Q.  Of  all  these  roads,  which  do  you  think  the  most  urgent  and  the 
most  likely  to  pay? — A.  Well.  I should  think  the  north  one,  and  that 
one  through  Cavite  ; and  then,  of  course,  it  is  a question  of  continuing 
it,  as  you  find  trade  pointing  up.  You  know  a line  never  shows  its 
full  capacity  until  it  is  finished. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  The  people  here,  are  they  like  the  Chinese  and  the  Japanese;  are 
they  fond  of  traveling;  would  the  road  have  many  passengers ? — A. 
They  are  very  fond  of  traveling.  As  1 say,  when  I came  here  first 
there  wasn’t  a steamer  or  a launch  here.  I got  a little  boat,  which  I 
called  the  Pasig.  It  has  been  seized  by  the  admiral  here  under  the 
name  of  th eJJk  That  is  the  first  boat  we  got,  and  she  got  too  small 
for  the  traffic,  and  they  took  her  to  China,  and  she  is  on  the  Canton 
River.  She  paid  for  herself  the  first  year  we  ran  her.  Now  there 
are  plenty  of  boats  here.  There  are  about  50  here  to-day. 

Q.  She  is  the  first  boat  that  ever  ran  in  the  province? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  There  were  no  Spanish  boats  here? — A.  No. 

Q.  No  steamboats  here  at  all  ? — A.  There  were  five  or  six  little  rotten 
gunboats  that  went  out  in  the  daytime,  but  never  went  out  at  night; 
little  things  of  2 or  3 feet  draft  of  water,  in  bad  condition. 

Q.  What  seems  to  be  the  situation  in  the  Tagalog  provinces  among 
the  insurrectos?  What  are  the  Tagalog  provinces? — A.  The  Tagalog 
provinces  are  Bulacan  to  the  north,  Nueva  Ecija — of  course  they  branch 


REPORT  OE  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


41 


out  beyond  their  own  provinces,  but  those  are  the  provinces  properly 
belonging  to  them — Bulacan  and  Nuera  Ecija,  the  lake  district,  Cavite, 
and  Batangas ; and  in  that  radius  you  have  got  the  Tagalog  proper,  but 
they  have  spread  themselves  all  over  the  place.  Since  this  insurrec- 
tion they  have  sent  out  bands  all  over  the  country,  even  down  to  Iloilo 
and  Cebu — small  bands. 

Q.  Small  numbers? — A.  Bands  of  20  or  30  or  40;  and  the  wa}r  to 
deal  with  this  people,  I should  think,  would  be^to  drive  them  out  of 
the  other  provinces  back  to  their  own. 

Q.  Drive  them  out  of  Negros,  Iloilo,  and  Cebu,  where  they  are 
now? — A.  Negros,  Iloilo,  and  Cebu,  principally,  and  when  you  have 
them  thoroughly  subjugated  here  on  their  own  grounds,  keep  them 
here. 

Q.  Did  you  hear  anything-  regarding  their  present  state  of  mind  in 
these  two  big  provinces  ? — A.  There  is  but  a handful  of  them.  They 
are  very  boisterous,  and  they  talk  about  lighting  to  the  last — to  their 
last  drop  of  blood,  etc.  I think  if  you  got  hold  of  about  20  or  30  of 
these  fellows  and  deported  them  in  some  way  the  whole  thing  would 
fall  to  the  ground  like  a house  of  cards. 

Q.  Did  you  hear  what  kind  of  government  they  are  giving  to  their 
people? — A.  No  government;  none — its  all  rubbish.  There  is  no 
government. 

Q.  What  is  the  relation  between  the  people  and  the  so-called  govern- 
ment?— A.  The  rank  and  tile  are  terrorized  into  taking  up  arms  for  a 
thing  they  don’t  care  a rap  about.  You  will  see  by  the  article  which 
I have  written  that  the  whole  thing  is  a question  of  money.  The  few 
benefit  by  the  money  that  is  forthcoming.  For  instance,  the  Spaniards 
wanted  to  buy  them  out;  the  few  benefit,  and  they  would  leave  the 
rank  and  file  to  take  the  responsibility.  The  disturbing  element  is 
really  of  mixed  blood — the  Chinese  and  Japanese  and  Tagalogs — and 
the  people  have  been  ruled  by  Spanish  priests  for  three  hundred  and 
fifty  years,  and  you  can’t  conceive  of  a people  where  there  is  a worse 
mixture. 

Q.  Do  you  consider  the  Chinese  meztizos  all  bad? — A.  The  Chinese 
mixed  with  the  Japanese  and  Tagalogs,  that  mixture  is  all  bad. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  intermarry  with  the  Tagalogs? — A.  Yes.  The 
Chinese  leaves  his  wife  at  home,  and  he  is  like  the  sailor,  who  has  a 
wife  in  every  port.  He  has  a Tagalog  wife  here  and  his  native  wife 
at  home.  Some  of  them  raise  large  families,  and  a great  many  of 
these  families  are  among  the  insurrectos. 

Q.  Is  there  any  considerable  number  of  Japanese  families  on  the 
islands? — A.  Very  few. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  the  Japanese  work  in  the  fields,  the  sugar  fields? — A.'  There 
are  so  few  of  them  they  are  hardly  worth  considering,  but  they  are 
more  given  to  traffic  than  to  anything  else;  there  is  only  a handful  of 
them. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I never  have  seen  a Japanese  merchant  here. — A.  Only  within 
the  last  few  years.  It  is  only  within  the  last  ten  years  that  we  have 
had  a Japanese  consul  here.  Before  that  I don’t  think  we  had  any  Japs 
at  all.  You  know  these  half-castes  are  very  much  like  the  Japs  to 
look  at — some  of  these  mixtures,  the  Chinese  and  Tagalog  mixtures — 
little,  short,  stout  fellows,  and  just  as  ugly  as  they  make  them. 


42 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  When  the  war  comes  to  a close — that  is,  under  peace — are  these 
hard  people  to  govern? — A.  Hitherto  the  Spaniards  up  to  1896 — up 
to  the  outbreak  of  this  rebellion  in  1896 — never  had  more  than  3,000 
white  troops  here. 

Q.  You  say  the  Spaniards  never  had  more  than  3,000  white  troops 
here? — A.  That  is  the  maximum  number. 

Q.  Of  Spanish  troops? — A.  Yes.  They  have  governed  the  country 
for  three  hundred  and  fifty  years  with  from  1,000  to  1,500  troops. 

Q.  But  these  peo*ple  loved  the  Spaniards,  didn’t  they? — A.  The 
only  difference  between  them,  I would  say,  was  the  priests.  The  priests 
were  the  disturbing  element.  They  got  particular  taxes  because  of 
the  priests,  and  the  priests  misbehaved  with  their  women,  and  squeezed 
them,  and  from  these  priests  has  spread  their  ill  will  to  the  Spaniards, 
and  from  the  Spaniards  to  the  whites  generally. 

Q.  Do  you  know  Mr.  John  Forman  ? — A.  Very  well. 

Q.  Mr.  Forman,  in  his  book,  has  given  the  Tagalog  native  a better 
reputation  than  the  Visayan.  What  have  you  to  say  as  to  that?— A. 
Up  to  the  time  they  began  to  fight  they  were  considered  more  ener- 
getic and  a more  moral  people,  but  now  they  are  demoralized,  and  it  is 
peculiar  the  way  they  have  changed. 

Q.  Was  his  statement  true  at  the  time  it  was  written ? — A.  Yes; 
partially  true.  These  people,  since  1896,  have  got  up  a commotion 
against  the  priests,  and  500  or  so  of  them  went  to  the  civil  governor 
to  have  the  priests  turned  out  of  the  country. 

Q.  They  have  more  wars  here  than  in  any  other  island  of  the 
group? — A.  Money  was  at  the  bottom  of  the  whole  thing.  It  was  a 
tremendous  source  of  revenue  for  the  priests.  Each  priest  had  10  ox- 
20  or  50  priests  about  him,  squeezing  the  natives  and  bringing  in  rev- 
enue to  each  church.  For  the  burial  of  each  child  that  died  the  parents 
had  to  pay  from  $16  to  $20. 

Q.  That  was  under  government  law? — A.  No;  the  pi'iests  had  a gov- 
ernment of  their  own,  the  ecclesiastical  government,  which  is  a practi- 
cal despotism,  and  they  made  the  civil  government  make  laws  which 
were  necessary  for  their  maintenance — they  made  the  civil  government 
believe  that  the}"  were  necessary  for  the  maintenance  of  the  loyalty  of 
the  natives,  and  that  the  Spaniards  would  be  kicked  out  of  the  islands 
but  for  them,  and  they  have  practiced  this  deception  on  the  Spaniards 
for  three  centuries.  They  had  everybody  subsidized,  and  the  priests 
were  so  powerful  that  they  ruled  the  country. 

Q.  W ere  the  different  ordei’s  equally  objectionable? — A.  No;  I 
believe  there  are  degi'ees.  I think  the  Dominicans  are  about  the  worst — - 
the  Dominicans  and  the  Recoletos.  I judge  by  the  money  which  they 
have. 

Q.  What  would  you  consider  the  superior  class  among  them  ? — A. 
You  see,  you  have  the  Augustinians,  which  I used  to  consider  the  best. 
They  are  also  “grabbers,”  and  they  have  very  large  estates  and  very 
large  possessions,  but  we  consider  them  to  be  less  unscrupulous  than 
the  others. 

Q.  The  Augustinians? — Yes. 

Q.  Wei-e  they  Spanish,  or  what? — A.  Spanish. 

Q.  The  Augustinians  and  the  Benedictines? — A.  The  Augustinians, 
the  Benedictines,  the  Dominicans,  the  Recoletos,  and  the  Franciscans. 

Q.  The  Franciscans  are  not  Spanish,  are  they?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  They  are  all  over  China  ? — A.  They  send  missionaries  every- 
where. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


43 


Q.  I understand  the  priests  of  these  orders  are  Spanish? — A.  Yes; 
they  were  Spanish. 

Q.  What  about  the  Jesuits,  what  do  you  think  of  them? — A.  The, 
Jesuits  are  to  me  like  the  locust;  you  know  where  they  settle  down 
they  eat  up  the  roots  of  the  grass,  they  don’t  leave  anything  to  anybody. 

Q.  The  Jesuits? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Well,  they  are  the  most  intelligent  and  the  best  educated,  aren’t 
they? — A.  They  are  the  most  intelligent  and  best  educated,  and  appar- 
ently the  poorest.  Colonel  Denbv,  you  have  seen  locusts  in  China. 
They  light  upon  a plantation  and  they  leave  their  eggs  there  and  in  a 
week  where  those  eggs  have  been  deposited  it  looks  as  if  a fh-e  had 
passed  over  the  ground,  the  very  roots  of  the  grass  are  eaten  out. 

Q.  That  is  the  condition  where  these  Jesuits  have  carried  on  their 
operations? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  have  the  Jesuits  carried  on  their  operations? — A.  Down 
in  Mindanao,  principally.  You  know  they  have  a plan,  these  Jesuits — 
I don’t  know  how  they  manage  it  now — but  it  is  for  each  local  cure 
when  he  gives  up  a parish  or  dies  or  gets  incapacitated  his  parish  is 
taken  hold  of  by  a Jesuit,  and  in  that  way  a good  many  of  them  have 
spread  in  the  last  few  years  all  over  Mindanao. 

Q.  Have  you  read  Forman’s  book? — A.  Yes;  I know  him  personally. 

Q.  You  know  him  personally  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Was  he  a Catholic? — A.  I do  not  know. 

Q.  He  says  so? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  He  is  an  engineer,  isn’t  he  ? — A.  He  has  been  here  frequently 
traveling  all  over  the  country  selling  machinery. 

Q.  You  know  he  attacks  the  church? — A.  He  attacks  the  church 
very  much,  and  he  ought  to  be  very  thankful  to  the  priests,  for  they 
have  been  very  good  to  him;  and  they  would  like  to  shoot  him  if  they 
could  get  hold  of  him,  these  priests,  because  he  has  written  against 
them.  I don’t  know  that  he  said  anything  much  beyond  the  truth, 
but  considering  that  he  availed  himself  of  their  services  and  hospital- 
ity all  over  the  country  he  should  have  thought  twice  before  putting 
a thing  like  that  in  print. 

Q.  He  attacks  the  friars  in  particular? — A.  The  fathers  are  at  the 
bottom  of  the  whole  trouble. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  amount  of  self-government  do  you  think  the  Philippine 
people  coidd  be  safely  intrusted  with  on  the  restoration  of  peace  ? — A. 
I think  a very  minimum  amount. 

Q.  Could  they  govern  their  own  provinces  ? — A.  Their  own  villages, 
perhaps,  not  provinces. 

Q.  Pueblos,  large  and  small ? — A.  Under  supervision. 

Q.  From  Manila? — A.  Well,  supervision  on  the  spot  and  from 
Manila. 

Q.  Supervision  by  whom? — A.  By  the  powers  that  be. 

Q.  By  some  American  authority  ? — A.  By  a white  man. 

Q.  You  would  not  intrust  them  with  the  government  of  their  own 
provinces,  then? — A.  Certainly  not. 

Q.  How  would  you  have  the  governors  of  the  provinces,  elected  or 
appointed  ? — A.  What  the  Spaniards  did  was  a very  good  system. 

Q.  The  people  had  no  say  ? — A.  Not  a bit. 

Q.  You  think  that  a very  good  system? — A.  That  is  the  only  sys- 


44 


■REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


tem.  In  my  article  I gave  them  one  hundred  years  to  begin  to  learn 
something  about  proper  government,  but  I see  by  an  article  in  the 
Spectator  that  it  is  put  at  live  hundred  years.  In  other  words,  in  the 
year  2400. 

Q.  Five  hundred  years  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  you  would  have  the  general  government  at  Manila  purely 
American? — A.  No. 

Q.  But  you  wouldn’t  have  the  Filipinos  in  it? — A.  Not  except  in 
subordinate  positions. 

Q.  Should  there  be  a congress  here,  a parliament  in  which  they 
should  make  laws? — A.  No. 

Q.  How  should  the  laws  be  made  ? — A.  The  supreme  government 
should  make  the  laws. 

Q.  The  governor-general  and  council? — A.  Yes. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  would  you  say  about  the  fitness  of  the  people,  the  Filipinos, 
to  be  put  in  charge  of  the  collecting  and  disbursing  of  taxes? — A. 
That  would  be  very  weak  policy  to  intrust  them  with  money.  You 
know  the  more  you  keep  money  out  of  their  way  the  better  it  is. 
You  want  responsible  people  and  reliable  people  to  do  that.  The  native 
is  not  either.  The  native  at  the  bottom  of  his  heart  is  a gambler,  and 
a gambler  you  know  will  waste  any  money  you  can  put  before  him. 
You  know  there  have  been  very  big  deposits  in  the  treasury  here,  and 
the  natives  having  access  to  the  books  $1,000,000  was  lost.  There  was 
a hue  and  cry  but  nobody  could  find  out  who  was  guilty. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Is  it  your  idea  that  whenever  public  money  has  to  be  collected 
and  disbursed. even  in  the  pueblos  there  should  be  an  American  in 
charge? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  about  the  courts,  would  you  appoint  Filipinos  judges  ? — 
A.  I don't  think  so,  that  would  be  the  very  place  where  they  woidd 
abuse,  you  know. 

Q.  Would  you  appoint  them  magistrates  in  the  local  districts? — 
A.  In  subordinate  positions  where  you  can  control  them,  a few  of 
them  might  be  useful  on  account  of  their  local  knowledge  of  detail,  but 
to  give  them  an}’  voice  in  sentences,  the  native  is  not  educated  up  to  that. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  the  chief  reforms  that  our  government  ought 
to  effect  here? — A.  Well,  the  chief  reforms  would  be  a new  lock, 
stock,  and  barrel.  I don’t  think  I could  put  it  more  explicitly. 

Q.  How  many  troops,  Mr.  Macleod,  under  your  form  of  government 
would  it  take  to  hold  these  people? — A.  I don’t  think  it  would  take 
very  many  if  you  once  got  conditions  settled.  I think  over  the  whole 
island  20,000  at  present,  and  you  could  reduce  that  afterwards  to  half 
that  number. 

Q.  How  many  did  you  say  the  Spaniards  had? — A.  The  Spaniards, 
up  to  1896,  never  had  more  than  3,000. 

Q.  Why  would  it  be  necessary  for  the  United  States  to  have  so  many 
more  troops  than  the  Spaniards  had? — A.  You  would  have  to  have 
that  for  the  first  few  years,  because  they  have  an  enmity  against  the 
white  man  which  they  never  had  before.  The  way  the  country  has 
stuck  out  shows  that.  There  never  was  such  a thing  before. 

Q.  How  many  revolutions  have  you  seen  here? — A.  Only  one,  and 
that  lasted  only  a week.  It  was  put  down  in  1872. 

Q.  And  this  last  one? — A.  Was  commenced  in  August,  1896. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


45 


Q.  When  you  were  in  England? — A.  I was  in  England  from  1890 
to  1897.  You  can  judge  from  seeing  what  they  are  doing  in  Negros 
now. 

Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  till  all  the  offices;  were  all  the  judges  Span- 
iards?— A.  All  Spaniards. 

Q.  And  all  the  local  officers,  were  they  Spaniards? — A.  Yes;  every 
post  of  trust. 

Q.  The  notaries,  were  they  all  Spaniards? — A.  At  first.  Afterwards 
some  of  the  natives  were  notaries.  A native  notary  if  he  was  qualified 
was  considered  quite  as  good  as  a Spaniard;  he  couldn’t  do  any  harm 
as  notary. 

Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  have  any  native  troops? — A.  Yes;  they  had 
14,000  natives  with  these  white  troops. 

Q.  Were  these  men  true  to  the  government,  these  Filipinos?— A. 
Some  of  the  natives  were  and  some  were  not. 

Q.  When  the  rebellion  occurred  in  1890  did  these  men  go  over  to 
the  Filipinos? — A.  About  two-thirds  of  them. 

Q.  Two-thirds  fought  against  the  Spaniards  and  the  other  third 
remained  true  ? — A.  Y es. 

Q.  Something  like  the  Indian  mutiny  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Are  there  any  other  points  you  think  of,  Mr.  Macleod,  that  you 
deem  it  of  importance  for  us  to  know  ? We  have  covered  the  ground 
pretty  fully. — A.  M}t  beginning  in  taking  this  country  would  be  to 
build  roads  and  railroads;  to  admit  Chinese  for  coolie  labor  and  work 
in  the  fields,  and  then  free  religion  and  free  schools. 

Q.  When  you  speak  of  roads,  do  you  mean  ordinary  highways? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  We  haven’t  talked  of  roads  at  all,  and  you  put  them  first  now? — 
A.  Roads  would  be  the  beginning  only. 

Q.  In  the  United  States  we  would  begin  with  the  railroads. — A.  I 
think  that  both  are  wanted  simultaneously.  When  you  get  that  rail- 
road there  done  you  want  the  road,  but  there  are  roads  in  only  one  or 
two  sections. 

Q.  Do  you  deem  the  building  of  roads  as  important  as  the  building 
of  railroads? — A.  No;  railroads  come  first. 

Q.  You  must  have  roads  running  to  the  railroads  in  order  to  get 
your  produce  to  the  markets? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  have  roads  here  now,  haven’t  you? — A.  Very  few  and  far 
between.  There  are  roads,  but  they  are  not  kept  in  proper  order. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  that  you  advise  the  building  of  a new  kind  of 
road — for  instance,  the  Telford  or  Macadam  road,  something  like 
that — which  they  never  had  before? — A.  I would  build  roads  with 
good  solid  foundations,  with  curbs,  so  that  the  water  would  run  off. 

Q.  Would  that  be  an  expensive  road  to  construct  here? — A.  No; 
not  with  the  system  which  here  prevails.  You  could  get  the  village 
people,  each  man  to  make  a section. 

Q.  Is  the  stone  here  good  for  road  making? — A.  You  could  get  the 
stone  in  other  places. 

Q.  Suitable  for  that  purpose? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  do  they  get  the  stone  to  use  on  these  roads? — A.  They 
take  it  from  the  beach  on  the  other  side  of  the  bay  principally.  You 
know  there  is  a patentolip  over  in  Cavite,  and  about  30,000  tons  of 
stone  was  put  underneath  that — all  taken  from  Marivetes. 

Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  construct  any  good  scientific  roads? — A.  The 


46 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


king’s  highways  were  in  some  eases  very  well  constructed  and  in  other 
places  very  badly  constructed. 

Q.  How  were  the  well-constructed  king’s  highways  made? — A.  Made 
of  this  stone  I told  you  about. 

Q.  Any  of  it  about  here  ?• — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  the  road  to  Pasig  one? — A.  No. 

Q.  Do  you  recall  one? — A.  The  road  to  my  place,  to  Santa  Mesa; 
that  is  an  ideal  road.  Colonel  Stotsenbcrg  has  rented  that  place  off- 
hand. There  is  this  little  bit  of  road,  which  would  be  better  if  it  were 
a bigger  one. 

Q.  You  spoke  of  schools  in  this  country  in  your  summary.  Would 
you  have  those  schools  supported  by  local  taxation  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Each  village  would  support  its  own  schools? — A.  Yes;  the}’ all 
pay  for  their  schooling. 

Q.  I would  like  to  make  that  more  definite.- — A.  I think  it  would 
be  better  to  make  them  free. 

Q.  Would  you  make  any  change  in  the  subjects  taught  in  the  schools 
or  not? — A.  My  remark  about  a new  lock,  stock,  and  barrel  applies, 
and  it  applies  especially  here.  You  would  have  to  bring  in  an  entirely 
new  system — the  American,  Scotch,  or  English  system. 

Q.  Would  you  consider  manual  training  important  in  this  country  ? — 
A.  I would  indeed. 

Q.  Would  you  consider  high  schools  necessary  along  with  elemen- 
tary schools? — A.  Yes;  colleges. 

Q.  After  a certain  time? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  But  the  important  thing  is  elementary  schools? — A.  Yes.  You 
see  the  difficulty  now.  The  other  day  I touched  upon  it  in  that  article 
in  the  paper  of  which  I have  spoken.  There  was  a man  turned  up  in 
New  York  and  reported  to  the  Sun  that  the  natives  of  these  islands — 
the  peasantry — could  read  and  write  to  the  extent  of  75  per  cent.  Well, 
I reduce  that  and  I would  not  make  it  5 per  cent.  I think  5 per  cent 
would  be  the  extreme  limit. 

Q.  Aren’t  there  schools  now  in  all  the  important  towns — pueblos? — - 
A.  There  are  schools  of  a kind,  but  the  priests  who  are  in  charge  of 
the  education  of  the  people  are  interested  in  keeping  the  people  in  the 
dark  as  much  as  possible.  Therefore  there  is  nothing  taught.  Lists 
were  sent  home  to  Spain  by  the  village  that  so  many  pupils  were 
taught  to  read  and  write,  but  they  taught  them  as  little  as  they  could. 

Q.  Who  have  charge  of  it? — A.  To  a certain  extent  the  priests  are 
paid  by  the  government. 

Q.  By  the  local  government  or  by  the  Manila  government? — A. 
The  local  government. 

Q.  And  a tax  was  levied  for  that  purpose? — A.  The  priests — they 
are  the  judge;  education  was  entirely  in  the  hands  of  the  priests. 

Q.  In  the  municipal  form  of  government  here  was  there  any  coun- 
cil of  local  government? — A.  Yes;  what  they  called  the  consejo, 
administrative  council. 

Q.  Are  you  speaking  of  the  municipal  government — the  govern- 
ment of  the  peublos? — A.  Yes;  I mean  the  government  of  Manila. 

Q.  How  did  they  govern  this  city  of  Manila? — A.  They  governed 
it  from  this  consejo;  they  had  meetings. 

Q.  Did  they  have  a mayor? — A.  Yes.  • 

Q.  Was  he  appointed  by  the  Governor-General? — A.  Yes. 
Governor-General. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


47 


Q.  And  then  the}'  had  councilmen  from  each  ward  or  district  in  the 
city? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Composed  of  whom  ? — A.  The  principal  inhabitants. 

Q.  Were  they  elected  or  appointed? — A.  The  governor  did  all  that. 

Q.  The  governor  named  all  the  people  to  represent  the  city  ? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  Then  they  made  the  laws  as  to  water,  the  laying  of  streets,  and 
the  establishment  of  schools? — A.  The  schools  were  entirely  in  the 
hands  of  the  priests — that  is,  church  business,  as  I say. 

Q.  And  there  was  no  election  of  all  these  municipal  councilmen  at 
all? — A.  No;  the  governor  was  supreme;  and  that  is  the  only  govern- 
ment that  at  present  can  be  made  a success  of  here. 

Q.  A benevolent  despotism  ? — A.  As  benevolent  as  you  can  afford. 

Q.  You  mean,  primarily,  a just  despotism  ?— A.  Yes;  my  idea  is  that 
the  Spaniards  were  too  lenient  with  these  natives;  while  undoubtedly 
unjust,  they  should  have  been  severer  in  discipline  and  more  just  in 
treatment  and  they  would  have  managed  them  all  right. 

Q.  They  combined  injustice  with  leniency? — A.  Yes;  and  for  that 
for  some  years  to  come  you  will  have  to  be  more  severe  than  the 
Spaniards  were.  The  natives,  as  I told  you,  have  swollen  heads  at 
present,  but  they  have  no  heart;  the  heart  has  never  been  cultivated 
at  all. 

Q.  Suppose  we  gave  them  an  independent  government  here.  What 
would  then  happen  ? — A.  We  should  then  all  migrate.  We  should  all 
clear  out.  There  would  be  no  thinking  twice  about  that. 

By  Colonel  Denby  : 

Q.  Couldn’t  you  get  along  with  exterritoriality,  such  as  you  have 
in  China,  Japan,  and  Siam  ? — A.  We  could  do  with  such  a government 
as  they  have  at  Hongkong. 

Q.  I mean  by  exterritoriality  that  every  foreigner  is  governed  by 
his  own  laws,  by  the  laws  of  his  land;  that  an  Englishman  who  is  tried 
for  a crime,  for  instance,  is  tried  by  the  English  consul,  and  when  he 
owes  a man  money  suit  is  brought  before  the  English  consul;  that  is 
exterritoriality  as  it  exists  in  China,  and  under  that  system  each  for- 
eigner would  be  tried  by  his  own  consul.  Wouldn’t  that  work? — A.  I 
don't  think  it  would  work  at  all,  because,  first  of  all,  you  would  have  to 
have  a head  of  the  government.  These  natives,  they  haven't  got  the 
education,  nor  the  experience,  nor  the  capacity  to  start  that  govern- 
ment in  which  you  could  have  branches  of  that  kind.  In  this  case  you 
Avould  have  to  start  a strong  government,  to  govern  everything. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Do  I understand  you  to  say  that  if  we  gave  them  independence 
there  would  be  chaos  here  ? — A.  It  would  last  about  a month.  I give 
them  about  a month  to  upset  the  whole  thing  themselves.  It  wouldn’t 
last  a month. 

Q.  Have  you  any  impression  as  to  the  capacity  of  these  people  for 
political  education? — A. s There  are  some  of  them  very  clever,  you 
know.  I don't  know  about  politically.  They  are  not  educated  quite 
up  to  that  yet,  because  their  idea  of  politics  is  to  have  in  the  hand, 
to  rob  and  steal,  and,  in  fact,  to  loot  all  around.  A government  of 
Filipinos  would  simply  go  to  work  to  make  money  for  themselves 
under  the  government,  and  it  would  be  a case  of  each  fellow  for  bim- 
self  and  the  devil  take  the  hindermost:  each  man  would  fill  his  pockets 


48 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


as  much  as  he  could.  These  fellows  are  not  fit  for  independence  yet; 
thej'  may  be  in  the  year  2400,  according  to  the  Spectator. 

Q.  Or,  according  to  you,  in  the  year  2200  ? — A.  Yes;  I let  them  down 
as  gently  as  I could.  Now  that  you  are  on  the  spot  you  are  bound  to 
start  a solid  foundation,  and  if  you  start  this  country  on  a sound  basis 
it  will  go  ahead  of  itself,  of  its  own  accord,  without  any  hitch. 

Q.  AY  ill  you  state  what  you  would  consider  a sound  basis  ? — A.  F ree 
education,  religious  and  secular,  roads  all  over  the  place,  and  railroads. 

Q.  And  as  to  government?— A.  AArell,  you  know  the  Queen  of  Eng- 
land was  once  asked  bv  an  African  despot  the  secret  of  England’s 
greatness.  She  presented  him  with  a beautifully  bound  copy  of  the 
English  Bible,  and  she  said.  “That  is  the  secret  of  England’s  great- 
ness.” The  fact  that  the  peoples  here  are  deprived  of  free  education, 
religious  and  otherwise,  has  reduced  them  to  the  condition  in  which 
they  are.  Free  education  is  most  important. 

Q.  And  as  to  the  form  of  government,  you  would  advocate  a cen- 
tralized government? — A.  A centralized  government,  entirely  in  the 
hands  of  the  Americans.  That  would  correct  bad  ideas  and  rebellion, 
because  the  fellows  would  have  nothing  to  complain  about;  they  would 
have  plenty  of  traffic,  and  you  know  we  could  increase  the  produce  of 
this  country  fourfold  in  five  years  by  letting  in  plenty  of  labor  of  the 
proper  kind. 

Q.  The  product  could  be  increased  what  extent?— A.  At  least  four- 
fold. 

Q.  How  would  you  raise  the  revenue  to  support  the  government  ? — 
A.  I put  it  in  that  paper  there.  I would  put  a heavy  tax  on  the 
Chinese.  I have  talked  about  it  there  how  you  could  raise  money  for 
two  years  if  you  would  give  it  a trial.  I put  in  there  if  you  would 
seize  the  priests’  property,  but  I see  you  have  given  it  back  to  them. 

Q.  As  we  have  come  to  this  question,  now  I want  to  know  whether 
you  think  it  would  be  wise  to  tell  these  people  that  some  day  they  can 
have  an  independent  government  of  their  own  ? — A.  The  Spaniards 
have  promised  all  sorts  of  things  and  they  have  never  fulfilled  them 
and  it  would  do  no  good  to  say  anything.  They  would  say  the  same 
thing  about  you 

Q.  AVouldn’t  you  collect  customs  duties? — A.  Oh,  yes;  of  course  if 
you  could  do  away  with  the  customs  that  would  be  a grand  thing  for 
trade.  If  you  had  a free  port  like  Hongkong  or  Singapore,  but  then 
you  would  have  to  raise  the  tax  internally  and  the  tax  would  be  a great 
source  of  discontent. 

Q.  Wouldn't  it  be  less  felt  by  the  people  here  to  raise  most  of  your 
revenue  by  customs? — A.  It  would  be  easier  on  the  producers  of  the 
country,  but  it  restricts  trade  a great  deal.  I fancy  Hongkong  is  about 
the  model. 

Q.  AVell,  if  we  had  the  same  system  here  as  they  have  in  England. 
They  raise  half  their  revenue  in  England  from  duties? — A.  Yes;  they 
raise  a large  amount. 

Q.  AATiat  does  England  tax  to-day  ? — A.  Liquors  of  all  kinds,  teas, 
tobacco,  and  wines,  and  the  luxuries,  you  may  say. 

Q.  From  these  customs  duties,  as  I said  before,  she  raises  about  half 
her  income,  and  they  are  not  restrictions  of  trade? — A.  No;  I suppose 
not. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  She  does  it  to  protect  the  people  that  are  engaged  in  those 
various  occupations?  Those  people  have  to  pay  taxes  and  licenses, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


49 


and  all  that  sort  of  thing,  and  she  equalizes  it  by  levying  duties  on 
these  foreign  liquors? — A.  She  puts  taxes  on  liquors  for  revenue 
principally,  and  she  taxes  alcohol  and  spirits  principally  for  reve- 
nue and  also  to  reduce  drunkenness,  but  of  course  revenue  is  the 
prime  motive. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Would  the  people  of  the  Philippine  Islands  need  protection  in  a 
tariff  ? — A.  I don’t  think  so. 

Q.  They  do  not  produce  anything  in  which  there  would  be  compe- 
tition with  other  nations  of  the  world? — A.  Of  course  the  way  that 
customs  duties  would  affect  them  would  be  on  the  produce. 

Q.  Export  duties  ? — A.  That  is  the  way  it  would  affect  them  directly, 
and  indirectly  on  imports  of  European  commodities  -that  they  import 
and  use  here;  but  of  course  they  never  feel  that.  This  indirect  tax 
would  never  be  felt  at  all. 

Q.  Has  Spain  kept  up  customs  duties? — A.  Yes;  there  is  a duty, 
very  small,  but  an  import  duty  on  almost  all  products. 

Q.  Are  there  objections  to  export  duties  on  hemp  and  their  prod- 
ucts?— A.  No;  there  are  no  special  objections  to  these  duties  so  long 
as  they  are  not  too  heavy,  and  the  lighter  the  duties  are,  both  import 
and  export,  the  quicker  trade  would  extend. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  The  main  objection  would  be  that  the  Constitution  of  the  United 
States  prohibits  export  duties  ? — A.  You  are  beginning  to  colonize,  and 
you  would  have  to  add  a clause  to  that  Constitution  to  tit  in  there  and 
to  allow  other  things.  Isn’t  that  so  ? 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  You  said  that  the  wealth  of  the  country  would  increase  fourfold 
under  a good  American  government.  Wherein  would  that  increase 
of  wealth  be  manifest  ? — A.  In  the  production  of  sugar,  hemp,  tobacco, 
and  coffee. 

Q.  Isn't  the  production  of  hemp  at  the  present  day  determined  bv 
the  demand  for  hemp  in  the  markets  of  the  world? — A.  Yes;  it  would 
always  find  its  level,  but  with  improved  labor  it  would  increase. 

Q.  That  is,  the  world  would  take  more  than  it  is  now  getting  ? — 
A.  At  lower  prices  they  would  take  more. 

Q.  And  you  think  the  price  could  be  lowered? — A.  Yes;  we  could 
produce  hemp  in  these  islands  at  one-third  of  what  is  paid  for  it  in 
the  market  to-day  at  a profit. 

Q.  How  would  you  effect  that  economy  in  production? — A.  By 
increasing  the  labor.  There  are  forests  of  wild  hemp  trees  which  have 
not  been  touched. 

Q.  And  by  invention? — A.  That  would  be  another  element  which 
would  increase  it. 

Q.  I understand  you  to  say  that  labor  would  increase  it? — A.  The 
hemp  plant  is  growing  wild,  as  I before  said,  in  these  islands.  There 
are  whole  mountain  sides  where  hemp  is  growing  wild,  and  on  account 
of  the  place  being  uninhabitable,  from  jungle  fever,  no  one  can  stop 
there. 

Q.  How  would  that  be  changed  by  a good  American  government 
there? — A.  Your  men  could  cut  down  the  jungle  and  make  the  place 

p c 4 


50 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


habitable.  We  have  had  men  over  there,  and  they  were  trying  to  cut 
hemp,  but  they  all  died  of  fever. 

Q.  1 suppose  what  you  mean  is  that  under  a good  American  govern- 
ment there  would  be  enterprising  men  who  would  do  that  sort  of 
work? — A.  Yes;  there  would  be  enterprising  persons  to  do  it,  and 
instead  of  hemp  being  §16  a picul  it  would  be  down  to  §5. 

Q.  A picul  is  100  pounds? — A.  One  hundred  and  forty  pounds;  and 
hemp,  instead  of  being  used  exclusively  for  ropes  for  ships,  would  be 
used  for  a lot  of  things. 

Q.  Would  the  cost  of  production  of  hemp  be  reduced  by  having  bet- 
ter transportation  ? — A.  Decidedly.  That  is  one  of  the  principal  costs 
of  hemp.  It  is  carried  in  these  bullock  carts  from  village  to  village  in 
the  mountains  where  it  is  grown,  and  occupies  days  instead  of  hours 
by  the  present  means  of  transit.  The  most  important  thing  in  this 
country,  to  my  mind,  is  increased  means  of  communication.  That  is 
the  great  thing. 

Q.  Lack  of  means  of  communication  and  justice? — A.  Yes.  Keep 
the  Filipino  in  place  with  a strong  hand.  I want  to  give  you  an  idea 
how  things  ought  to  be  done  in  order  to  start,  and  1 can  not  do  so  bet- 
ter than  bv  asking  you  to  read  the  articles  to  which  I have  referred 
and  the  testimony  I have  given. 

To  the  above  testimony  there  is  attached  an  article  by  Mr.  Macleod 
in  the  Manila  Times  Wednesday,  March  8, 1899,  page  2,  entitled  “The 
situation  in  the  Philippines  from  an  observer,”  also  an  article  written 
by  “Americus.” 

Meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  ENRIQUE  LOPEZ. 

Manila,  Tuesday , April  18 , 1899. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Denby  and  Pro- 
fessor Worcester;  Air.  .John  R.  MacArthur,  secretary. 

Enrique  Lopez,  in  response  to  inquiries  of  the  commissioners,  stated 
as  follows: 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? — A.  Enrique  Lopez. 

Q.  What  is  your  profession? — A.  Physician. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  in  Manila? — A.  All  my  life — forty- 
eight  years. 

Q.  We  received  a communication  from  you  the  other  day,  and  we 
are  much  obliged  to  you  for  it,  and  those  of  us  who  read  Spanish  read 
it  with  much  interest. — A.  The  pleasure  is  mine  to  be  of  any  aid  that 
I can. 

President  Schurman.  Many  thanks. 

Q.  Please  state  briefly  the  scheme  of  government  which  you  recom- 
mend for  the  Philippine  Islands. — A.  I have  seen  in  many  of  the  proc- 
lamations the  word  “autonomy.”  Autonomy  is  a word  that  covers  a. 
great  deal  of  ground;  it  is  a word  of  very  large  scope.  The  Ameri- 
can commission  undoubtedly  has  the  greatest  desire  to  give  proper 
liberties  to  the  people,  and  I wish  to  present  my  plan  to  you.  If  it  is 
not  exactly  what  the  commission  desires,  of  course,  there  will  be  vari- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


51 


ous  changes  in  it — modifications,  but  that  is  for  the  commission  and 
and  not  for  me  to  meddle  with.  The  plan  is  to  have  five  governors, 
under  the  sovereignty  of  America.  The  governor-general  should  be 
an  American,  and  the  sovereignty  undoubtedly  should  be  in  the  United 
States,  without  speaking  of  the  Army  or  Navy,  or  anything  else. 

Q.  The  political  sovereignty? — A.  The  political  sovereignty  and  the 
immediate  government  of  the  islands  should  be  a government  of  the 
country  itself. 

Q.  In  what  way  ? — A.  My  plan  is  to  have  five  ministers.  A minis- 
ter of  the  treasury,  of  internal  affairs — five  different  ministers  of  the 
general  government,  and  they  are  to  be  Filipinos  partly,  Filipinos 
according  to  the  amplitude  of -the  autonomy.  According  as  the  com- 
mission decides,  the  number  of  employees,  Filipinos  and  Americans, 
would  be  raised. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  commission  do  you  mean  ? — A.  This  commission. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  How  would  you  have  the  governor-general  appointed? — A.  An 
American,  from  the  United  States,  by  the  United  States  Government. 

Q.  How  would  you  have  the  five  chiefs  appointed  ? — A.  My  private 
opinion  is  that  for  the  first  time  the  five  ministers  should  be  appointed 
by  this  commission. 

Q.  And  after  the  first  time,  how  would  you  have  them  appointed  ? — 
A.  Afterwards  the  five  ministers  should  be  elected  by  the  people — the 
intelligent  people,  and  people  capable  of  casting  an  intelligent  vote. 

Q.  What  qualification  would  you  have  for  voting? — A.  People  in  a 
good  station  in  life,  well-known  people,  people  who  have  property.  I 
do  not  mean  the  peons  or  lower  classes. 

Q.  That  is,  not  the  lowest  people  ? — A.  No. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  much  property  ought  they  have  to  entitle  them  to  vote? — 
A.  Enough  for  a guarantee. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  How  many  dollars  ?- — A.  I would  not  place  a limit  in  actual  dol- 
lars, but  decent  people. 

Q.  Can't  you  name  a figure  that  would  be  a basis  for  voting,  Si 00, 
Si, 000,  or  So00  ? — A.  A person  that  has  property,  any  property  bring- 
ing in  an  income,  or  any  diploma  of  a profession,  or  license  to  practice 
a profession. 

Q.  If  we  said  all  the  men  who  own  S500  worth  of  property  should 
vote,  how  many  of  them  would  vote  here  in  Manila? — A.  My  idea 
was  to  have  50  men  to  choose  the  ministers,  50  men  to  represent  the 
people. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  We  are  not  after  that  idea  now.  We  want  to  know  what  pro- 
portion of  the  people  could  vote  on  that  basis 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  proportion  of  the  people  are  worth  S500 — 10  per  cent.  20 
per  cent,  or  30  per  cent? — A.  I could  not  sav  what  proportion,  sir; 
but  I am  sure  that  there  are  over  200  people  in  Manila  that  have  S500. 


52 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Professor  Worcester.  Another  point  he  takes  up  on  which  I do  not 
think  we  are  going  to  get  much  information  is  the  question  of  races, 
different  races.  Do  you  want  to  pursue  these  investigations  further? 

Colonel  Denby.  Oh,  yes.  His  idea  was  only  certain  races  should 
vote. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  When  you  speak  of  50  men  to  represent  the  people,  what  sort  of 
representation  do  you  mean  ? For  what  purpose  would  they  be  chosen 
and  how  are  they  to  be  elected  ? — A.  The  50  men  could  be  named  by 
the  governor-general,  the  captain-general,  so  that  the  captain-general 
would  be  the  commanding  power. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Where  would  you  take  these  50  men  from— from  Manila  or  from 
the  provinces  or  from  where  ? — A.  It  would  depend  upon  the  governor- 
general.  From  Manila  and  half  of  them  from  the  provinces  or  what 
proportion  he  saw  fit. 

Q.  Is  it  your  scheme  that  these  50  men  should  make  laws  for  all  the 
islands;  if  not,  for  what  island? — No,  sir;  the  50  are  only  to  elect  the 
5 ministers.  They  are  to  appoint  the  5 ministers. 

Q.  But  these  5 ministers  are  to  conduct  the  affairs  of  all  the  islands, 
are  they? — A.  Yes,  sir;  acting  as  a central  government  in  Manila. 
The  minister  of  Gobernacion  to  appoint  local  presidents  in  the  differ- 
ent towns  and  provinces  to  collect  the  taxes  and  tributes  and  turn 
them  in  to  the  central  government  in  Manila. 

Q.  You  don't  give  the  Philippine  people  much  voice  in  their  own 
affairs? — A.  I have  noticed  that  the  lower  classes,  the  poor,  in  the 
Philippine  Islands  will  obey  the  orders  of  any  government  as  long  as 
it  is  a government;  that  they  will  follow  whatever  they  are  told  to 
follow  by  authority. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  If  it  doesn't  make  much  difference  whether  it  is  one  government 
or  another,  why  not  have  the  ministers  appointed  by  the  government 
in  the  first  instance?- — A.  That  is  my  plan.  Mine  was  simply  a sug- 
gestion, though  if  that  seems  best  I see  no  objections. 

Q.  Why  not  have  the  governor  appoint  these  50  men  who  are  to 
elect  the  5 ministers? — A.  That  is  my  plan.  It  might  be  better  for 
the  people  to  nominate  the  50  representatives  under  the  approval  of 
the  captain-general — subject  to  the  approval  of  the  captain -general. 

Q.  You  would  not  give  the  Philippine  people  more  representation 
than  that  in  their  own  government? — A.  I will  draw  up  a detailed 
plan  of  the  government  I propose  in  regard  to  provinces  and  all  details 
there,  and  will  take  great  pleasure  in  presenting  it  to  you.  This  is 
only  my  plan  which  I shall  submit  to  you  to  change,  of  course,  as  you 
may  see  fit. 

Q.  I wish  you  would  tell  us  something  definite  in  regard  to  the 
property  which  is  owned  by  families  in  the  Philippines,  how  it  is  held. 
We  know  what  the  holdings  are  in  France  and  what  they  are  in  the 
United  States.  If  you  can  give  us  a description  of  what  the  holdings 
of  property  are  in  the  Philippines  generally  as  regards  money,  whether 
they  are  worth  §5,000  or  §1,000  or  §500.  I would  like  to  know  how 
many  people  you  could  find  who  are  worth  §500? — A.  In  Albay,  for 
instance,  there  are  some  300,000  inhabitants,  and  I only  know  of  one 
man  who  is  worth  §40,000,  one  native. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


53 


Q.  How  many  people  are  there  there  who  own  their  own  farms?— 
A.  A great  many,  almost  all  have  a little  piece  of  ground. 

Q.  Do  they  rent  generally  or  do  they  own  their  farms? — A.  The}' 
are  owners. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  How  is  it  near  Manila  in  that  respect?  How  is  it  in  Bulacan? — 
A.  I don’t  know  in  Bulacan,  but  it  is  an  entirely  different  thing.  Albay 
is  much  richer,  for  there  it  is  all  hemp;  Bulacan  is  all  rice;  Bulacan  is 
a poor  country,  Albay  is  very  rich.  They  have  large  towns,  but  the 
people  are  not  hard  workers;  it  is  a poor  country,  although  they  have 
large  towns. 

Q.  These  men  who  are  fighting  for  Aguinaldo,  do  they  own  prop- 
erty. or  are  they  absolutely  worthless? — -A.  No,  sir;  they  are  vaga- 
bonds, people  who  make  what  they  can  wherever  they  go,  except 
some  that  go  because  they  arc  forced.  If  they  do  not  go  they  are 
killed. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  some  account  of  the  different  races  of  the  archi- 
pelago ?■ — -A.  I will  speak  principally  about  the  Tagalogs.  The  people 
of  Manila  are  people  of  mixed  blood,  not  pure  Tagalogs.  They  are 
mestizo  people,  half-castes  and  mixed,  some  with  Chinese  blood,  some 
with  Spanish  blood.  The  true  Tagalogs  are  the  Tagalogs  of  Bulacan 
province,  genuine  Tagalogs  of  Morong,  also  those  of  Tayabas,  Batan- 
gas,  and  Bataan. 

Q.  And  Cavite? — A.  Cavite,  except  the  port,  where  there  is  also  a 
mixture.  These  are  the  genuine  Tagalogs;  and  Nueva  Ecija;  and  Zam- 
bales,  is  inhabited  by  a mixture  of  people  from  llocos  and  Pampanga. 

Q.  The  inhabitants  of  Pampanga  and  Panay  are  entirely  different 
from  the  Tagalogs?- — A.  They  are  entirely  different. 

By  Colonel  Dexby: 

Q.  Do  you  mean  by  that  that  they  have  a different  language  in  each 
province 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  A language  different  from  the  Tagalogs  and  different  from  one 
another? — A.  Yes,  sir;  each  one  has  their  own  language,  distinct  from 
each  other  and  from  the  Tagalog  language.  Albay,  Amboscamarines, 
have  distinct  languages,  different  from  each  other. 

Q.  Has  Albay  a language  and  Amboscamarines  also  a language  of 
its  own? — A.  Amboscamarines  and  Albay  have  the  same  language. 
They  call  it  Bicol,  Avhich  is  different  from  the  languages  in  the  prov- 
inces above  mentioned.  Speaking  of  the  Yisayans,  the  three  provinces 
in  Panay — Iloilo,  Capiiz,  and  Antique.  In  Panay,  which  contains 
these  three  provinces,  and  in  Samar  and  Leyte,  the  same  language  is 
spoken,  namely,  Yisayan. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  they  speak  the  same  language  in  Samar  and  Panay? — A.  Yes, 
sir;  in  Samar  and  in  Panay  they  speak  the  same,  only  a dialect  of 
Visayan. 

Q.  I asked  him  the  question  because  I know  that  there  are  many  dis- 
tinct idioms  spoken  in  the  Visayan  islands,  that  the  idiom  of  Negros 
and  that  of  Cebu  differ. 

Colonel  Denby.  His  reply  to  that  statement  is  that  all  of  those 
idioms  are  Visayan,  only  the  idioms  differ. 


54 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Does  a man  in  Panay  understand  a man  in  Levte? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  of  Samar? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  of  Negros? — A.  Yes;  and  a man  from  Cebu  would  be 
understood,  but  not  so  well  in  Masbate  and  Tigao ; they  speak  a mixture 
of  Bicol  and  Visayan. 

By  Colonel  Denbv: 

Q.  Don’t  the  better  classes  speak  Spanish? — A.  In  some  places. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  W e have  another  gentleman  coming  here  in  a few  minutes  with 
whom  we  have  an  appointment,  and  we  are  very  anxious  to  hear  you 
in  regard  to  the  races  now.  M ill  you  kindly  give  us  your  views  of 
the  Tagalog  ? — A.  In  my  opinion  the  Tagalog  is  the  worst  race  in  the 
Philippine  Islands. 

Q.  Why  ? — A.  They  differ  in  different  places  in  their  customs.  In 
Batangas  they  don’t  care  to  have  anything  to  do  with  anyone  except 
themselves.  If  a foreigner  comes  in,  they  close  their  windows  and 
peep  out;  they  are  very  adverse  to  having  anything  to  do  with  anyone 
except  their  own  race. 

Q.  Have  you  anything  further  to  say  to  us  regarding  the  Tagalogs  ? — 
A.  I would  like  to  describe  the  customs  of  the  Tagalogs  in  their  differ- 
ent provinces.  In  the  province  of  Taal  there  are  two  towns  on  differ- 
ent sides  of  a river.  In  one  there  are  a great  many  Chinese;  in  the 
other  there  are  no  Chinese  at  all.  In  the  town  of  Taal  the  natives  do 
not  like  to  have  anyone  there  except  the  natives  of  the  place  itself. 
Across  the  river  from  Taal,  in  Lemery,  the  people  are  mixed  with 
Chinese,  and  during  the  day  are  permitted  to  cross  to  the  town  of 
Taal,  but  not  at  night. 

President  Schurman.  We  are  very  much  obliged  to  you  for  your 
information.  We  have  found  it  exceedingly  instructive,  and  we  would 
like  to  listen  to  more  of  it  for  the  next  hour,  but,  unfortunately,  we 
have  an  appointment  with  another  gentleman,  and  he  is  now  here.  I 
should  like,  however,  to  ask  you  one  more  question: 

Q.  Why  are  the  Tagalogs  the  worst  people  in  the  islands? — A.  I 
could  not  say  why.  I do  not  know  that. 

Q.  But  it  is  your  impression? — A.  Since  the  year  1896,  when  the 
insurrection  began  against  the  Spanish,  they  have  been  perfectly 
demoralized. 

President  Schurman.  The  commission  desires  to  thank  you  very 
much  for  your  information.  When  you  write  out  the  paper  of  which 
you  spoke  with  regard  to  the  government  we  would  be  glad  to  have  it, 
ontaining  the  details  which  you  promised  to  us. 

TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  MARTINEZ. 

Pablo  Antonio  Martinez,  on  request,  appeared  before  the  com- 
mission, and  in  response  to  the  inquiries  of  the  commissioners  stated: 

President  Schurman.  We  are  very  much  obliged  to  you  for  coming 
before  the  commission,  Sefior  Martinez. 

Senor  Martinez.  It  is  nothing  more  than  fulfilling  a duty.  I am 
glad  to  do  it. 

President  Schurman.  As  we  know  the  value  of  what  you  are  about 


Report  of  the  Philippine  commission. 


55 


to  say  to  us,  it  is  important  that  we  record  what  is  said,  and  therefore 
we  have  our  stenographer  present. 

Q.  What  is  your  name? — A.  Pablo  Antonio  Martinez. 

Q.  What  is  your  profession? — A.  Lawyer. 

Q.  Do  }rou  practice  law  in  Manila?— A.  In  Manila. 

Q.  How  long? — A.  I have  been  a resident  here  twelve  years. 

Q.  And  before  that  time  where  did  you  live? — A.  In  Madrid. 

Q.  Do  you  know  any  other  parts  of  the  archipelago  besides  Manila 
from  personal  experience ? — A.  Personally  I have  only  been  in  Camar- 
ines  on  business. 

Q.  We  have  your  communication  here  regarding  the  registration  of 
property  and  have  read  it  with  much  profit  and  we  are  much  obliged 
to  you  for  it  and  will  file  it  with  our  records 

By  Colonel  Den  by: 

Q.  We  suppose  that  you  have  thoroughly  discussed  the  question  of 
the  registry  of  property,  so  we  need  not  ask  you  any  questions  about 
that,  but  if  you  have  anything  to  add  to  your  paper  we  shall  be  glad 
to  hear  it. — A.  The  law  of  mortgages  in  force  in  the  Philippine 
Islands,  with  slight  modification,  is  the  same  as  similar  laws  in  Spain, 
which  are  the  most  perfect  in  the  world,  whereas  the  civil  law  in  force 
is  very  complicated  and  presents  great  difficulties  in  doing  any  kind  of 
business  and  needs  great  reformation.  The  law  of  mortgages  I con- 
sider the  best  in  existence,  as  it  gives  opportunity  for  realizing  with 
great  rapidity. 

Q.  How  many  courts  were  there  in  Manila,  and  by  whom  were  the 
judges  appointed?  Please  describe  to  us  the  courts,  civil  and  crim- 
inal.— A.  In  Manila  there  were  four  courts  of  the  first  instance. 

Q.  By  whom  were  the  judges  appointed  for  those  four  courts?— A. 
By  the  minister  of  Ultramar  in  Madrid. 

Q.  What  salaries  did  these  judges  get? — A.  I think  $3,000;  I am  not 
certain,  but  I believe  it  was  about  §3,000. 

Q.  How  many  of  these  courts  had  civil  and  how  many  had  criminal 
jurisdiction? — A.  They  united  both  functions.  For  instance,  the 
judge  of  the  court  of  first  instance  of  the  district  of  Binondo  had 
jurisdiction  in  both  civil  and  criminal  matters. 

Q.  Did  you  say  anything  about  the  others?  You  have  spoken  only 
of  one  court  in  Binondo? — A.  For  example,  only;  that  applies  to  all 
four  courts. 

Q.  Have  you  had  any  jury  system  where  they  have  twelve  men  to 
tryT  a case? — A.  No,  sir.  The  jury  system  is  a system  which  we  have 
not  used  as  yet.  We  are  a hundred  years  behind  the  times  in  this 
respect. 

Q.  Did  the  judges  of  these  four  courts  themselves  hear  all  the  cases 
without  a jury? — A.  Personally,  yes;  without  a jury. 

Q.  Did  an  appeal  lie  from  the  judgment  of  these  four  judges? — A. 
There  could  be  an  appeal  made  from  them. 

Q.  Now.  please  tell  us  about  the  appellate  court,  the  higher  court. 
How  many  they'  were  and  byr  whom  yyere  the  judges  appointed? — A. 
The  courts  of  second  instance  or  appellate  court  are  called  the  audi- 
encia  of  the  territory. 

Q.  Was  that  the  supreme  court  or  the  appellate  court  for  the 
island? — A.  Up  to  a certain  amount  this  court  yvas  supreme  ; beyond 
that  amount  there  was  an  appeal  to  the  supreme  court  at  Madrid. 

Q.  How  many  judges  were  there  of  that  court? — A.  It  had  a bench 


56 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


composed  of  a minimum  of  three  magistrates  and  a maximum  of 
five. 

Q.  What  salary  did  they  get? — A.  I think  84,000. 

Q.  Did  they  try  admiralty  cases,  equity  cases,  and  criminal  cases? — 
A.  There  were  eight  magistrates  in  the  audieneia.  There  were  two 
departments,  one  for  criminal  cases  and  one  for  civil  cases,  and  the 
bench  in  each  department  had  a minimum  of  three  judges  and  a max- 
imum of  five,  and  the  president  distributed  the  personnel  between  the 
two  benches. 

Q.  How  do  you  think  the  system  of  having  twelve  men  or  a less 
number  of  citizens  to  try  the  facts  of  a case,  with  a judge  presiding, 
which  we  call  a jury,  would  do  here  in  the  Philippines? — A.  In  civil 
cases  I have  my  doubts;  the  jurymen  would  have  to  be  educated;  the 
people  would  have  to  be  educated  to  be  fit  to  serve  as  jurymen.  In 
criminal  cases  it  would  be  very  suitable — the  jury  system. 

Q.  If  }'ou  could  find  sufficient  intelligent  men  to  try  a criminal  case, 
why  can’t  you  find  sufficient  intelligent  men  to  try  a civil  case? — -A. 
In  criminal  cases  the  jury  has  nothing  to  do  beyond  ascertaining  the 
facts,  they  only  treat  with  the  facts.  In  civil  cases  the  facts  are  made 
plain  and  the  jury  has  a great  deal  to  do  with  the  application  of  the 
facts. 

Q.  Under  our  system  in  general  the  jury  in  a criminal  case  tries 
both  the  facts  and  the  law  and  passes  on  all  the  facts  that  arise  before 
them,  but  the}'  are  instructed  by  the  judge. — A.  In  Spain,  also,  the 
juries  are  instructed  by  the  judge,  but  here  in  the  Philippine  Islands 
there  are  no  juries  in  the  courts,  for  the  reason  that  there  are  so  many 
that  do  not  speak  Spanish— all  business  would  have  to  be  done  through 
interpreters,  and  great  difficulty  would  arise. 

Q.  I)o  you  think  that  there  ought  to  be  a property  qualification  for 
jurors? — A.  I think  it  would  be  a good  thing  to  exact  a qualification 
according  to  the  amount  of  taxes  paid;  that  it  also  would  be  well  to 
make  a jury  largely  of  professional  men,  or  intelligent  men,  without 
regard  to  property  qualification. 

Q.  What  proportion  of  the  people  here,  in  your  opinion,  own  prop- 
erty up  to  the  amount  of  $1,000  Mexican? — A.  In  Manila? 

Q.  Here  in  Manila. — A.  It  is  difficult  to  estimate  it  here  in  Manila, 
because  the  statistics  concerning  the  great  mass  of  natives  are  very 
deficient. 

Q.  Can’t  you  give  us  your  own  opinion  on  that  subject? — A.  I am 
unable  to  give  an  opinion. 

Q.  To  put  it  in  another  way,  what  proportion  of  the  people  here  pay 
$100  taxes? — A.  I believe  that  there  are  2,000  property  owners  who 
pay  $100  in  taxes,  but  as  there  has  never  been  any  accurate  statistics 
of  the  population  of  Manila  made,  I am  unable  to  state  the  proportion 
that  those  represent. 

Q.  Are  those  2,000  people  intelligent  or  otherwise? — A.  I consider 
them  sufficiently  intelligent  to  serve  as  jurymen. 

Q.  If  we  had  an  election  system  here,  would  they  be  intelligent 
enough  to  vote  for  officers  ? — A.  I think  so,  sir. 

Q.  If  we  establish  a municipal  government  here  with  aldermen 
representing  the  various  wards,  could  you  find  enough  intelligent  peo- 
ple in  each  division  of  the  city  to  elect  those  aldermen  ? — A.  I think  so. 

Q.  Don’t  you  think  that  these  same  ideas  would  apply  to  the  prov- 
inces, to  the  interior;  that  is,  could  you  find  intelligent  people  in  the 
interior? — A.  That  is  more  difficult.  In  the  capitals,  the  more  impor- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


57 


tant  capitals,  such  as  Iloilo  and  Cebu,  I think  so;  but  in  other  parts  of 
the  provinces,  no. 

Q.  Have  you  entirely  described  to  us  the  judicial  system,  or  have 
you  anything  to  add  to  that? — A.  Only  that  there  are,  in  small  cases, 
where  less  than  §200  is  involved,  judges  of  the  peace;  the \* are  munic- 
ipal judges.  There  is  one  judge  of  the  peace  for  each  district. 

Q.  Are  the  opinions  of  this  supreme  court  reported  as  they  are  in 
other  countries  ? — A.  They  are  not  published,  they  are  sent  to  Madrid. 

Q.  Are  there  any  Filipinos  in  these  courts? — A.  There  have  been — 
for  instance,  Florentino  Tores,  in  Cebu. 

Q.  Was  there  a body  of  Filipino  lawyers  here  who  practiced  before 
the  courts? — A.  Yes;  there  are  many. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  whether  these  Filipinos  made  good  judges  and 
lawyers? — A.  There  are  some  who  turned  out  well,  but  I could  not 
say  that  they  did  well  in  general. 

Q.  Were  the  fees  of  the  lawyers  taxed  by  the  court  and  paid  by  the 
losing  party,  or  did  each  party  pay  his  own  lawyer? — A.  The  general 
rule  was  that  each  party  to  a case  paid  his  own  lawyer.  Sometimes, 
when  a person  losing  a case  was  not  satisfied  to  pay  the  fee  charged  by 
his  attorne}*,  the  judge  had  power  to  reduce  the  fee. 

Professor  Worcester.  We  are  losing  the  point  of  his  answer.  I 
think  he  said:  In  certain  cases,  the  man  who  loses  a case  is  condemned 
to  pay  the  cost,  and  if  he  then  complains  that  the  costs  are  excessive 
the  judge  can  settle  the  matter. 

Colonel  Denbt.  Did  this  involve  attorney's  fees? 

Professor  Worcester.  I so  understood  him. 

The  Interpreter.  I was  going  to  add  I understood  him  to  say  that 
the  judge  would  reduce  the  honorarium,  which  was  the  fee. 

A.  The  lawyers’  fees  are  taxed,  and  if  they  are  complained  of  the 
judge  has  the  power  to  review  them. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  have  the  kindness  to  write  a paper  on  the  courts? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  With  any  suggestions  you  may  think  proper  to  make  suitable  to 
the  condition  of  these  people,  considering  that  in  our  country  we 
always  have  juries. — A.  Certainly. 

Q.  I wish  you  would  bear  in  mind  that  this  jury  system  does  not 
prevail  in  admiralty  and  does  not  prevail  in  equity,  but  in  ordinary 
civil  cases  and  criminal  cases  no  man  can  be  tried  in  the  United  States 
except  by  a jury.  Admiralty  and  equity  cases  are  tried  by  a court 
without  a jury,  but  cases  for  debt  and  all  criminal  cases  must  be  tried 
by  a jury? — A.  Will  you  be  so  kind  as  to  name  to  me  some  particular 
State  which  I can  refer  to  in  making  my  suggestions,  for  I have  the 
laws  of  a number  of  different  States  which  I have  looked  up. 

Q.  The  State  of  New  York  would  do  as  a model.  New  Yoi'k  is  our 
“■biggest”  State  and  we  have  generally  copied  our  constitutions  from 
New  York. 

President  Schurman.  We  have  now  finished  with  the  courts,  and  I 
will  ask  you  some  questions  on  other  subjects. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  scheme  of  government  would  you  recommend  for  this  archi- 
pelago?— A.  I hesitate  to  speak  of  a plan  of  government,  because  I 
uuderstaud  only  the  administration  of  the  laws. 


58 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  you  think  the  Spanish  system  was  well  adapted  to  the  needs 
of  the  people? — A.  The  fundamental  laws  of  the  Spanish  system  I con- 
sider very  good,  but  the  manner  of  applying  them  and  the  laws  of 
procedure  should  be  reformed  immediately,  because  they  are  very 
much  behind  the  times. 

Q.  I speak  of  the  political,  administrative,  and  financial  branches  of 
the  government.  Do  you  think  the  laws  of  Spain  were  well  adapted 
to  the  needs  of  the  people? — A.  The  financial  branch  I do  not  consider 
was  suitable  to  the  people  or  to  the  country.  There  should  be  a 
reform  started  in  this  direction  immediately. 

Q.  What  is  the  nature  of  that  reform;  what  suggestions  would  you 
make? — A.  In  the  matter  of  taxation,  the  taxes  should  be  smaller,  and 
should  be  very  small  on  the  industries  of  the  country;  much  smaller  on 
the  industries  of  the  country,  particularly  in  the  matter  of  agriculture. 

Q.  Any  further  suggestions?— A.  As  to  what? 

Q.  The  administrative,  the  financial,  and  political  branches  of  the 
government  of  the  Philippines  as  they  existed  formerly? — A.  As  to 
the  political  branch  I could  not  give  an  opinion,  as  it  is  outside  the  scope 
of  my  profession. 

Q.  Do  you  think  the  Philippine  people  capable  of  self-government  ? — 
A.  I do  not  believe  they  are  at  present. 

Q.  Do  you  think  they  are  capable  of  govering  their  own  pueblos  ? — 
A.  No,  sir.. 

By  Colonel  Denby  : 

Q.  Don't  3’ou  think  that  there  could  be  elected  to  a legislature  to 
hold  its  sessions  in  these  islands  enough  intelligent  men  to  pass  local 
laws? — A.  How  large  an  assembly?  I can  answer  your  question  if 
you  will  name  me  the  number. 

Q.  Sa}r  100  for  all  the  islands. — A.  I think  the}*  might  be  found  by 
a careful  search. 

By  Professor  Worcester  : 

Q.  Do  you  think  they  would  be  found  scattered  over  all  the  prov- 
inces or  whether  would  there  be  many  in  some  provinces  and  few  in 
others  ? — A.  They  wouldn’t  be  equally  distributed. 

Q.  What  I want  to  get  at  is  the  distribution  of  these  500 — whether 
we  could  find  100  in  Luzon,  50  in  Mindoro,  or  75  or  100  in  Luzon  and 
none  in  Mindoro? — A.  You  would  find  them  distributed  more  or  less 
in  that  wav,  with  a large  number  here  and  none  in  some  of  the  islands 
like  Mindoro. 

By  President  Schurman  : 

Q.  How  were  laws  made  formerly  for  the  Philippine  Islands? — A. 
Formerly  we  had  the  laws  called  ‘‘The  laws  of  the  Indies.”  They 
were  made  in  Madrid.  They  were  different  laws  made  at  different 
times  and  afterwards  compiled.  Originally  the  laws  of  the  Indies 
applied  here. 

Q.  How  did  they  get  laws  subsequent  to  that  time  ? In  other  words, 
did  the  governor-general  have  the  power  to  make  decrees  which  had 
the  force  of  laws? — A.  Afterwards  the  laws  of  the  Peninsula  of  Spain 
were  applied  here  in  the  courts  with  certain  modifications,  thus  gradu- 
ally making  an  assimilation  of  the  laws  of  the  islands  with  those  of  the 
Peninsula.  The  several  codes  of  the  Peninsula  being  applied  here  in 
the  islands,  some  of  them — as,  for  example,  the  civil  cocle— integrally, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


59 


entirely,  and  the  other  codes  being  applied  with  certain  modifications 
and  changes  adapted  to  the  condition  here — as,  for  example,  in  the 
penal  code,  where  crimes  are  committed  by  Chinamen,  etc.,  the  punish- 
ment was  slightly  modified. 

Q.  But  still  you  haven’t  answered  whether  the  governor-general  had 
the  power  to  make  decrees  which  had  the  force  of  laws. — A.  No  sub- 
stantial laws;  no,  sir. 

Q.  Where  did  substantial  laws  come  from  in  the  latter  years  of 
Spanish  government  here? — A.  They  were  published  in  the  Gazeeter, 
of  Madrid,  and  the}'  were  sent  here  to  the  captain-general  with  a com- 
mand that  he  fulfill  them.  He  ordered  that  they  be  published  in  the 
Gazette,  of  Manila. 

Q.  Now,  had  he  the  power  to  modify  those  laws— had  he  the  power 
to  do  that  here? — A.  They  came  here  already  modified  to  suit  the 
country,  from  Spain. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Were  they  laws  made  bv  the  Cortes,  and  ratified  by  the  Queen, 
or  did  the  minister  of  Ultramar  himself  make  the  laws? — A.  They  were 
made  in  the  Cortes. 

Q.  In  your  opinion,  would  it  be  a good  thing  to  have  a legislative 
body  in  the  Philippine  Islands  themselves? — A.  I think  so;  yes. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Don’t  you  think  we  ought  to  give  these  people  a freer  form  of 
government  than  they  formerly  had  ? — A.  I believe  so — a greater  par- 
ticipation in  public  affairs. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  In  what  directions  would  you  give  them  this  intervention — in 
what  particular  point? — A.  In  municipal  affairs  a much  greater  par- 
ticipation; in  judicial  affairs  more  participation,  but  under  certain 
restrictions.  While  there  are  undoubtedly  people  in  Manila,  Fili- 
pinos. honest  and  capable  of  forming  an  audiencia — a court — I doubt 
whether  a court  composed  of  Filipinos  would  secure  the  confidence 
of  the  general  public.  At  the  same  time,  inasmuch  as  these  offices 
would  not  be  permanent,  and  the  personnel  might  change,  I doubt 
whether  a Filipino  court  would  inspire,  either  in  the  natives  or  the 
foreigners  who  were  to  have  cases  to  bring  before  them,  sufficient 
confidence  unless  there  was  a considerable  intervention  or  intermedia- 
tion on  the  part  of  the  Americans. 

Q.  Why,  these  facts  being  so,  do  you  desire  to  give  the  Filipinos 
more  intervention  in  the  courts? — A.  I spoke  under  the  supposition 
that  there  would  be  established  here  Filipino  courts,  but  it  would  be 
better,  of  course,  to  have  courts  carried  on  by  Americans. 

Q.  What  would  you  think  of  mixed  courts,  partly  American  and 
partly  Filipino? — A.  It  seems  to  me  a very  good  system. 

President  Schurman.  I desire  to  say  on  behalf  of  the  commissioners 
that  we  are  exceedingly  obliged  to  you  for  the  very  valuable  informa- 
tion you  have  given  us. 

Senor  Martinez.  It  is  nothing.  If  the  commission  would  like  me 
to  write  anything  in  regard  to  the  questions  I should  be  most  happy 
to  do  so. 

President  Schurman.  We  will  be  making  some  arrangement  before 
long  for  such  work,  and  we  would  be  very  glad  indeed  to  keep  your 


60 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


kind  offer  in  mind.  Of  course  the  particular  writing  which  you  have 
promised  us  regarding  the  courts  we  would  he  very  glad  to  have  at 
your  convenience. 

The  meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENORS  TAVERA  AND  TOLENTINO. 

Manila,  April  21,  1899. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Denby,  and 
Prof.  Dean  C.  Worcester;  John  K.  MacArthur,  esq.,  secretary  and 
counsel.  Also  Dr.  Pardo  de  Tavera,  and  Sefior  Aurelio  Tolentino. 

President  Schurman.  Gentlemen,  we  are  very  happy  to  receive  you, 
and  hope  that  you  will  state  freely  to  us  whatever  you  have  to  say. 

Dr.  Tavera.  Mr.  President  and  gentlemen  of  the  Commission,  there 
has  been  a commission  formed  of  Filipinos  to  meet  the  American  Com- 
mission and  see  what  would  be  the  most  efficacious  and  rapid  way  of 
bringing  peace  to  this  people.  I am  a member  of  this  commission  and 
I have  the  honor  of  knowing  Sefior  Aurelio  Tolentino,  who  has  asked 
me  to  present  him  that  he  may  meet  you. 

Colonel  Denby.  Is  he  a member  of  the  commission  ? 

Dr.  Tavera.  Sefior  Tolentino  has  been  one  of  the  most  active  mem- 
bers of  the  Filipino  revolution  against  the  Spanish  and  naturally  he 
preserves  the  prestige  among  the  Filipinos  of  being  a decided  patriot. 

President  Schurman.  Is  he  a member  of  your  commission  ? 

Dr.  Tavera.  Yes,  sir.  Now  that  I have  spoken  the  words  present- 
ing Mr.  Tolentino,  the  commission  can  speak  directly  to  him. 

President  Schurman.  Perhaps  we  can  proceed  in  a more  orderly 
manner  if  you  will  permit  us  to  ask  you  a few  questions. 

Sefior  Tolentino.  Certainly,  sir. 

Aurelio  Tolentino,  stated  as  follows,  in  response  to  inquiries  by 
the  commission: 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? — A.  Aurelio  Tolentino. 

Q.  From  what  part  of  the  country  do  you  come? — A.  I have  never 
gone  out  of  Manila. 

Professor  Worcester.  I don't  believe  that  is  what  he  means. 

Question  repeated. — A.  I am  from  the  town  of  Guayo,  in  the 
province  of  Batangas. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  resided  there  ? — A.  1 was  born  there,  but  at 
the  age  of  23  I was  employed  in  the  Spanish  offices.  Afterwards,  as 
a notary  in  Morong. 

Q.  How  long  did  you  stay  in  Morong  ? — A.  One  year. 

Q.  And  since  that  time  where  have  you  lived? — A.  In  September. 
1896,  two  weeks  after  the  breaking  out  of  the  revolution,  they  took 
me  out  of  my  house,  arrested  me,  applied  an  electric  machine  to  me 
and  put  chains  upon  my  feet. 

Q.  They  tortured  you? — A.  Yes,  in  Manila,  in  Bilibid,  the  presidio, 
in  the  penitentiary,  in  the  central  police  station,  and  everywhere. 

Q.  How  long  were  }Tou  a prisoner? — A.  Nine  months. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


61 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Why  did  they  torture  you? — A.  Because  when  an  educated  Fili- 
pino was  not  a friend  of  the  priests  they  always  put  him  in  prison, 
and  in  Morong  I was  not  a great  friend  of  the  priests;  and  the}'  tortured 
me  for  the  purpose  of  getting  a confession  from  me  in  regard  to  the 
occurrences  of  the  revolution. 

Q.  Have  you  been  engaged  with  the  insurrectos? — A.  At  first,  no, 
sir;  afterwards,  yes,  sir;  because  my  heart  demanded  vengeance  for 
having  taken  me  to  jail  when  1 was  not  to  blame. 

Q.  Of  what  profession  are  you? — A.  A notary. 

Q.  How  long  were  you  a Spanish  official  altogether? — A.  From  1891 
to  1896. 

Q.  What  have  you  done  since  1896?— A.  They  put  me  in  jail. 
After  that  I lived  in  my  house,  because  I did  not  wish  to  take  the  field, 
having  m}'  family  with  me,  m3’  mother  and  m3'  wife;  and  then  there 
were  secret  police  of  the  Spanish  living  opposite  my  house,  and  con- 
sidering that  I was  not  safe  with  the  Spanish  secret  police  living  just 
opposite  to  me,  I thought  it  was  necessaiy  to  take  to  the  field. 

President  Schurmax.  Dr.  Tavcra.  I would  like  to  ask  you  a ques- 
tion. I understand  there  are  certain  matters  about  which  this  gentle- 
man would  like  to  speak  to  us.  Is  that  so?  If  it  is,  I would  think  it 
desirable  to  give  him  the  word  and  let  him  state  what  he  wishes  to  say. 

Senor  Tolextixo.  Mv  opinion  is  as  follows,  Mr.  President:  As  a 
true  Filipino,  alwa3's  desiring  the  well-being  of  mv  native  land,  as  a 
son  desires  the  welfare  of  his  mother.  I see  that  war  is  the  same  thing 
for  a nation  as  sickness  for  a man.  It  is  not  an  ordinary  sickness,  but 
a severe  and  dangerous  sickness,  and  I being  a true  Filipino  and  a true 
son,  and  one  that  loves  his  mother,  naturally  love  1113'  native  land,  the 
Philippines,  and  desire  whatever  means  may  be  taken  to  cure  this  sick- 
ness. I do  not  consider  that  I have  the  right  to  give  a remedy  to  my 
native  land,  because,  in  the  first  place,  I am  only  one,  and,  in  the  second 
place.  I have  not  the  capacity  to  do  so;  but,  nevertheless,  a commission 
of  Filipinos  has  been  formed  with  the  object  of  administering  this 
remed3T,  and  whatever  the  opinion  of  the  commission  will  be,  it  will 
be  mv  opinion  also.  I bow  to  that  opinion  always,  when  the  opinion 
does  not  lengthen  the  war,  but  if  the  opinion  of  that  commission  tends 
to  lengthen  the  war.  I am  not  agreeable  to  it,  for  my  desire  is  to 
administer  the  remedy  to  cure  this  sickness.  In  view  of  what  I have 
said,  and,  finally,  of  the  fact  that  I have  been  chosen  b3'  the  commission 
to  be  the  member  to  carry  their  messages  and  letters  to  the  Filipino 
government — that  is,  the  Filipino  commission  has  named  me  to  carr3' 
their  messages  and  letters  to  the  government  of  Aguinaldo 

Q.  To  Aguinaldo  himself  ? — A.  To  Aguinaldo  and  others  who  con- 
stitute the  government. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  When  do  you  expect  to  start  ? — A.  The  sooner  the  better,  for 
every  da3’  of  war  is  a great  damage  to  our  country;  if  I can  go  to-day, 
so  much  the  better.  1 do  not  wish  to  see  another  drop  of  blood  spilled. 

President  Schurmax.  Your  mission  is  a most  important  one  and  we 
wish  you  all  success  in  it. 

Senor  Tolextixo.  Main'  thanks.  When  I come  to  Aguinaldo  it  is 
probable  that  he  and  some  of  the  persons  there  will  ask  me  about  these 
questions,  and  what  answers  can  be  given?  If  they  should  ask  me — 


62 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


and  they  will  ask  me — “ What  does  the  American  Government  want  of 
the  Philippine  people?”  I wish  to  ask  the  gentlemen  who  form  the 
commission,  if  they  see  lit  to  tell  me,  whether  in  reply  to  that  question 
I am  to  remain  with  my  mouth  closed  and  answer  “I  do  not  know,”  or 
whether  they  will  give  me  some  answer  to  make. 

President  Schurman.  Our  answer  to  this  question  is  already  con- 
tained in  our  proclamation  of  the  4th  of  this  month. — A.  Yes,  sir. 

(At  this  point  in  the  proceedings  the  following  members  of  the  Fili- 
pino commission  entered  the  room  and  were  presented  to  the  United 
States  commissioners  by  Dr.  Tavera:  Senors  Tomas  G.  del  Rosario, 
Florentine  Torres,  Luis  R.  Yanco,  and  F.  R.  Yanco.) 

At  the  suggestion  of  President  Schurman,  the  Filipino  commission- 
ers were  informed  of  the  interview  which  had  previously  taken  place 
between  President  Schurman  and  Senor  Tolentino. 

Colonel  Denby.  Senor  Tolentino,  will  you,  or  one  of  your  confreres, 
tell  us  what  you  want  to  know  which  is  not  contained  in  the  procla- 
mation  ? 

Senor  Torres.  Last  Sunday  there  was  a meeting  of  citizens  of 
Manila — lawyers,  doctors,  business  men,  etc. — for  the  purpose  of  com- 
ing to  some  arrangement  with  the  Philippine  government,  in  order  to 
secure  peace,  and  of  sending  a communication  to  them  so  as  to  arrange 
to  meet  some  delegates  of  theirs.  Letters  will  be  sent  from  various 
influential  persons  in  Manila  to  the  Filipinos,  with  the  idea  of  coming 
to  some  arrangement  with  them  by  which  they  will  arrange  peace 
with  the  American  commission. 

President  Schurman.  Your  mission  is  a very  important  one  and  we 
wish  3tou  all  success  in  it. 

Senor  Torres.  Seiior  Tolentino  will  carry  the  letters  and  also  will 
talk  to  them  with  the  idea  of  seeing  if  some  understanding  can  not  be 
arranged.  Senor  Rosario  has  written  asking  permission  that  he  may 
also  go. 

President  Schurman.  Senor  Rosario,  would  you  like  to  say  some- 
thing ? 

Senor  Rosario.  Yes;  I am  writing  two  letters,  one  to  Mr.  Luna, 
who  is  chief  of  the  army,  and  the  other  to  Mr.  Buencamino,  who  is 
the  secretary  of  Don  Emilio  Aguinaldo.  I say  in  these  letters  that 
the  most  influential  citizens  of  Manila  have  come  together  to  try  and 
secure  peace.  I have  stated  in  these  letters  that  if  they  wish  more 
details  I will  not  find  it  inconvenient  to  go  to  them.  I have  also  asked 
them  for  a pass,  for  in  time  of  war  many  people  are  suspected  and 
there  is  danger,  and  I woidd  also  like  to  have  the  American  commis- 
sion tell  me  something  that  1 may  say  to  them  before  I go. 

President  Schurman.  We  desire  to  assure  you  and  your  confreres 
once  more  that  we  hope  you  will  be  successful  in  bringing  about  peace. 

Senor  Rosario.  I,  as  vice-president  of  the  congress  of  Malolos, 
shall  express  to  the  congress  the  impressions  which  I carry  from  here. 

President  Schurman.  We  give  you  to  take  to  them,  as  expressing 
our  views  and  sentiments,  copies  of  our  proclamation.  We  issued  a 
proclamation  on  the  4th  of  this  month,  and  we  thought  that  was  suffi- 
cient. 

Senor  Rosario.  I said  that  T wished  to  take  some  expressions  from 
the  American  commission,  because  the  first  thing  that  they  will  ask 
me  will  be,  “What  sort  of  autonomy  is  this  that  the  American  com- 
mission offers  us  ? ” 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


63 


President  Schurman.  It  is  the  autonomy  described  in  paragraphs 
1 and  2 of  the  proclamation. 

Senor  Rosario.  Very  well.  I have  read  this  (referring  to  the  proc- 
lamation), but  perhaps  they  will  want  some  further  detail.  I wish  to 
say  to  your  commission  that  1 have  come  to  you  as  the  vice-president 
of  the  Filipino  congress,  and  I make  this  as  a personal  statement,  that 
what  they  wish  is  independence  under  the  protection  of  the  United 
States. 

President  Schurman.  It  is  not  possible  to  discuss  the  question  of 
American  sovereignty — that  is  an  established  fact. 

Senor  Rosario.  It  is  not  to  discuss  the  sovereignty  of  America;  I 
only  wish  to  inform  the  commission  of  the  political  atmosphere  which 
exists  there,  and  I perhaps  may  be  able  to  convince  them  that  the 
autonomy  which  your  commission  offers  will  be  a greater  advantage 
than  the  independence  which  they  desire. 

President  Schurman.  We  are  studying  the  question.  We  desire  to 
get  information  from  leading  Filipinos  in  all  parts  of  the  country,  and 
if  a conference  were  held,  that  would  be  the  time  for  details  and  not 
now'.  Only  we  can  say  this,  that  we  do  look  forward  to  giving  them 
an  extremely  liberal  form  of  government.  Gentlemen,  the  question 
you  have  asked  us  is  one  w'hieh  we  w'ould  like  to  consider,  and  we 
must,  therefore,  ask  you  to  excuse  us  for  a few  minutes  for  consultation. 

The  United  States  commissioners  here  retired  from  the  room. 

The  United  States  commissioners,  on  returning  to  the  room,  pre 
sented  to  Dr.  Tavera  a written  statement,  which  is  as  follows:  ■ 

“We  have  to  inform  the  gentlemen  that  this  commission  is  com- 
posed of  five  members,  only  three  of  whom  are  present  to-day,  conse- 
quently it  is  impossible  to  answer  in  detail  the  question  as  to  the  exact 
form  of  government  to  be  established  by  the  United  States  in  the  archi- 
pelago; but  we  have  to  say  that  we  are  studying  the  question,  and.  as 
indicated  in  the  proclamation,  desire  to  consult  with  prominent  Fili- 
pinos from  all  parts  of  the  archipelago,  and  in  the  meantime  can  assert 
that  an  exceedingly  liberal  form  of  government  is  contemplated,  the 
commission  being  opposed  to  the  system  of  colonial  servitude.  The 
commission  desires  also  to  inform  these  gentlemen  that  we  shall  be 
glad  to  consult  with  them  at  any  time  hereafter,  or  with  other  prom- 
inent Filipinos,  and  that  we  shall  be  pleased  to  participate  in  a formal 
conference  when  such  has  been  arranged.” 

The  above  paper  was  translated  into  Spanish  by  Dr.  Tavera,  and  by 
him  read  aloud  in  Spanish  to  the  Filipino  gentlemen,  after  w hich  Dr. 
Tavera  returned  the  paper  to  the  stenographer. 

Senor  Torres.  On  account  of  some  remarks  of  Senor  Rosario,  I 
think  that  the  most  practical  method  would  be  to  establish  an  autono- 
mous constitution.  Some  days  ago  I secured  a meeting  with  General 
Otis,  in  which  I gave  an  account  of  the  meeting  of  Sunday,  and  after 
having  told  him  what  happened  on  last  Sunday  I told  him  of  the  spirit 
of  the  meeting.  I told  him  that  the  predominant  opinion  was  lack  of 
confidence,  as  the  first  question  w hich  was  asked  me,  as  president  of 
the  meeting,  was:  “ What  sort  of  autonomy  is  this  that  the  American 
proclamation  offers  us?”  and,  therefore,  I told  General  Otis  that  the 
best  thing  would  be  for  the  commission  to  give  me  an  organized  project 
of  the  laws  which  they  intended  to  propose;  but  General  Otis  said 
that  it  was  impossible  to  do  this  without  consulting  the  authorities  at 
Washington.  General  Otis  said  that  he  would  admit  of  no  other  gov- 


64 


EE  PORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


eminent,  but  what  I proposed  was  that  he  give  me  a form  of  the  organic 
law,  which  would  be  held  in  abeyance  at  present,  and  that,  given  such 
a scheme,  if  the  commission  saw  fit  to  listen  to  us,  and  if  the  scheme 
fulfilled  our  aspirations,  we  now,  with  arms  in  our  hands,  would  not 
find  it  impossible  to  recognize  the  sovereignty  of  America.  This  sug- 
gestion I again  make  to-day,  and  think  that  the  intended  laws  should 
be  made  up  and  put  into  shape.  I make  this  suggestion  before  the 
commission,  with  the  supposition  that  the  Filipinos  who  are  present 
agree  with  me;  and  I may  add  that  a number  of  people  who  are  out- 
side. and  with  whom  I have  talked,  are  agreeable  to  this,  and  are 
awaiting  for  this. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  When  you  say  outside,  do  you  mean  outside  of  the  building  or 
outside  of  your  junta? — A.  I mean  in  Manila  and  its  suburbs,  people 
outside  of  our  commission;  and  the  suggestion  being  made,  I ask  the 
commission  to  have  the  goodness  to  listen  to  the  Filipinos  in  regard 
to  this. 

Colonel  Denbt.  Please  explain  what  you  mean  by  an  autonomous 
government. 

Senor  Rosario.  The  government  of  the  Filipinos  by  the  Philippine 
people  under  the  direction  or  intervention  of  the  United  States. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Would  you  contemplate  a governor  appointed  by  the  President 
of  the  United  States? — A.  Yes,  sir;  that  is  the  recognition  of  the 
sovereignty. 

Q.  And  the  cabinet? — A.  It  should  be  of  Filipinos. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Appointed  by  the  President  of  the  United  States?- — A.  By  the 
American  governor-general. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  you  mean  by  that  cabinet,  a secretary  of  the  interior,  a sec- 
retary of  war,  postmaster-general,  secretary  of  the  navy,  and  such 
officers  as  we  have  in  our  Cabinet? — A.  Ministers  of  the  interior, 
of  war,  of  public  instruction,  and  everything  except  of  justice. 

Q.  Why  do  you  except  justice ? — A.  For  we  wish  to  have  the  admin- 
istration of  justice  apart  from  the  government — separate  from  the 
government. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  You  do  not  include  the  ministers  of  war  and  marine? — A.  The 
management  of  war  and  of  the  marine  will  be  under  the  immediate 
direction  of  the  United  States. 

B}'  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Who  would  collect  the  customs  ? — A.  I should  wish  that  he  might 
be  a Filipino,  but  I do  not  know  what  are  the  intentions  of  the  United 
States  Government. 

Q.  We  don’t  ask  3*011  what  should  be  the  nationality  of  the  col- 
lector, but  I ask  you  to  whom  should  be  paid  the  customs,  to  the 
Government  of  the  United  States  or  to  the  government  of  the  Philip- 
pines ? — A.  To  the  treasury  of  the  nation — to  the  treasurer. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


65 

Q.  Not  to  the  United  States  ? — A.  For  my  part — I only  speak  for 
myself,  and  I have  not  talked  with  my  companions  over  the  details — 
I am  willing  personally  myself  to  agree  to  anything  jostand  reasonable. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Does  the  autonomous  form  of  government  which  you  have  in 
mind  contemplate  a legislature? — A.  A chamber  of  representatives 
elected  by  suffrage. 

Q.  Universal  suffrage  or  limited  suffrage? — A.  I,  myself,  would  say 
universal,  but  considering  my  colleagues  I am  willing  to  sa}r  it  should 
be  limited  for  the  present. 

Professor  Worcester.  When  you  say  for  yourself  “universal 
suffrage”  would  you  include  the  Igorrotes  in  this  island  —Luzon — the 
Manguianes  of  Mindoro,  and  the  Moros  of  Mindanao? 

Senor  Rosario.  Among  these  Moros  and  Igorrotes  there  are  many 
unenlightened  people,  and  for  this  reason  they  should  have  limited 
suffrage;  but  at  the  same  time  there  are  many  of  them  enlightened 
people.  In  my  province  there  are  Igorrotes  called  Aetas,  who  have 
European  cast  of  features,  but  are  very  black  and  have  curly  hair,  and 
these  have  a government  to  themselves  and  have  always  been  com- 
pletely independent  of  Spanish  rule,  which  government  might  serve 
as  a model.  When  the  commission  wishes  to  go  there  I could  accom- 
pany them,  for  I take  many  people  there  to  show  them  these  people. 

President  Schurman.  Many  thanks. 

Senor  Torres.  I am  now  going  to  answer  the  argument  of  Mr.  Wor- 
cester in  regard  to  universal  suffrage  as  applied  to  the  Igorrotes,  the 
Moros,  etc.  I think  that  if  universal  suffrage  were  conceded  to  the 
Moros  and  Igorrotes  under  certain  conditions  it  would  lie  the  means  of 
bringing  them  to  civilized  life. 

President  Schurman.  I understand  you  gentlemen  to  favor  a limita- 
tion of  the  suffrage.  In  what  way  ivould  you  limit  it? 

Senor  Rosario.  That  all  who  know  how  to  write  should  have  the 
right  to  vote. 

Professor  Worcester.  Even  if  they  have  no  property  and  are 
thieves? 

Senor  Rosario.  It  is  difficult  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  and  in  all 
parts  of  the  world,  for  I have  traveled  a great  deal,  to  find  anybody 
who  owns  property  who  does  not  know  how  to  write. 

Professor  Worcester.  It  is  sometimes  easy  to  find  people  who  know 
how  to  write,  but  who  do  not  know  how  to  vote. 

Senor  Rosario.  But  these  people — thieves  and  such  people — could 
not  vote  anyhow,  because  they  are  incapacitated  by  law. 

Colonel  Denby.  In  your  contemplated  form  of  government  have  you 
made  any  arrangement  as  to  who  should  be  charged  with  the  foreign 
relations  ? 

Senor  Torres.  The  United  States. 

President  Schurman.  And  the  post-office? 

Senor  Torres.  That  is  a detail,  too,  although  a very  important  one; 
but  I think  that  it  might  be  administered  by  a secretary  from  this 
country  under  the  direction,  of  course,  of  the  United  States,  as  all  other 
postal  matters.  The  governor-general  would  hold  the  veto  and  also 
intervention. 

Colonel  Denby.  Could  you  draw  such  a form  of  government  and 
submit  it  to  us  in  writing  as  your  views  with  regard  to  that  question, 
p c 


o 


66 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


and,  of  course,  the  views  of  those  who  join  with  you?  I ask  you  pri- 
marily because  I understand  you  are  a lawyer  and  perfectly  capable 
of  drawing  such  a paper. 

Senor  Torres.  We  will  form  a small  commission  among  ourselves 
to  draw  up  such  a plan,  and  we  appreciate  the  deference  of  the  com- 
mission in  allowing  us  to  do  so. 

President  Schurman.  We  will  have  much  pleasure  in  receiving  it. 

Colonel  Denby.  Because  wc  would  like  to  compare  it  with  our  own 
views. 

Senor  Torres.  The  plan  which  I shall  present  will  not  he  simply 
my  plan,  but  it  will  he  the  plan  of  several  of  us,  because  I have  no 
confidence  in  the  small  man  that  I am. 

Colonel  Denby.  We  want  it  to  compare  with  our  own  views  and  to 
see  if  we  can  not  come  together. 

Senor  Torres.  The  reason  that  we  did  not  put  in  a plan  of  an  autono- 
mous government  was  that  we  were  waiting  for  the  commission  to 
indicate  a plan  to  us. 

Colonel  Denby.  The  object  of  the  commission  is  to  find  out  the 
views  of  all  the  respectable  and  influential  people  whom  we  can  get  to 
tell  them  to  us,  and  when  we  go  over  them  we  will  come  to  some 
conclusion. 

Senor  Torres.  I beg  the  commission  that  they  will  not  wait  to  listen 
to  all  the  ideas  and  plans  of  the  people  in  the  provinces  of  Luzon  and 
Vi  say  a. 

President  Schurman.  We  see  a good  many  of  them  here  in  Manila 
without  going  to  these  provinces,  of  course. 

Senor  Torres.  I wish  to  say  one  word.  I know  more  or  less  the 
opinions  of  those  who  are  in  the  provinces,  and  I have  confidence  in 
saving  that  they  will  be  agreeable  to  what  we  decide  upon,  for  the}' 
think  that  we  know  a little  something  about  affairs. 

Professor  AVorcester.  Will  you  include  in  that  number  those  who 
have  arms  in  their  hands  at  the  present  time ' 

Senor  Torres.  For  that  reason  we  wish  something  in  writing,  to 
be  able  to  convince  them  of  the  granting  of  what  they  consider  right 
and  proper  by  the  American  people.  The  last  thing  I have  to  say  is 
that  the  greatest  enlightenment  among  the  people  will  be  found  in 
Manila  and  not  in  the  provinces. 

Professor  AVorcester.  For  just  that  reason  we  need  to  see  some- 
thing of  the  provinces,  because  we  must  make  a government  that  will 
answer  for  the  enlightened  people  and  for  those  who  are  not  enlightened. 

Senor  Torres.  I will  answer  that.  In  respect  to  the  people  who  are 
not  enlightened,  I think  that  a government  may  be  arranged  for  both 
classes,  for  the  enlightened  and  the  unenlightened,  so  that  the  enlight- 
ened may  be  satisfied,  and  those  who  are  not  enlightened  may  be 
educated. 

Senor  Rosario.  General  Otis  spoke  to  me  about  this  question,  and 
I gave  him  an  easy  solution — that  the  American  commission  come  to 
an  understanding  with  the  Philippine  Assembly,  for  they  are  the  repre- 
sentatives of  all. 

Professor  AVorcester.  Is  there  a representative  there  from  the 
province  of  Calamianis? 

Senor  Rosario.  I think  so;  yes. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Is  there  a representative  there  for  Palawan  or  Paragua? — A.  I 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


67 


could  not  say.  But  General  Otis  said  it  was  inconvenient,  because 
he  asked,  “Where  are  we  to  consult  with  them,  in  Malolos?”  1 
answered  him,  “No;  but  let  them  come  to  Manila.”  I asked  General 
Otis  not  to  go  all  about  into  all  the  provinces;  that  it  would  be  easy 
to  convoke  an  assembly  here  in  Manila.  I should  wish  that  such  an 
assembly  should  meet  here  in  Manila;  and,  if  the  commission  will  give 
me  permission,  1 will  convince  them  that  it  is  the  best  thing  to  come 
here;  I will  persuade  them  to  come  here  when  I go. 

President  Schurman.  That  is  a question  which  the  commission  will 
consider. 

Senor  Rosario.  It  might  be  inconvenient  for  the  commission  to  call 
them  as  an  assembly,  such  as  they  are,  for  it  woidd  be  a sort  of  recog- 
nition of  the  Philippine  government,-  but  I suggested  to  General 
Otis  that  to  summon  them  as  private  persons,  one  by  one,  and  to  give 
each  a guarantee  of  safety  that  he  would  not  be  molested  in  the  city 
would  answer. 

Senor  Torres.  I wish  to  add  a last  word:  That  there  will  be  no  diffi- 
cult}^ over  the  question  of  money.  I speak  not  only  for  myself,  but 
for  others  whom  I have  heard  talk;  that  the  enlightened  people  will 
be  content  if  their  aspirations  are  fulfilled,  even  if  they  spend  more  or 
less.  The  complaint  of  the  people  was  not  that  Spain  took  the  monejq 
but  it  was  that  the  employees  took  their  money  and  spent  it.  There 
are  many  towns  which  are  able  to  pay  taxes  to  an  intelligent  and  moral 
government.  And  if  the  commission  wishes,  I will  tell  the  legislative 
assembly  that  they  come  as  private  persons  to  meet  the  commission 
here  in  Manila. 

President  Schurman.  That  is  a matter,  as  1 said  before,  which  the 
commission  will  consider. 

Senor  Torres.  And  in  regard  to  the  plan  of  an  autonomous  govern- 
ment, do  you  wish  to  wait  or  shall  we  do  it? 

President  Schurman.  Go  to  work  at  it  now. 

Senor  Torres.  1 shall,  then,  visit  my  friends  and  neighbors  who  are 
interested  in  this  thing,  but  we  will  need  some  days  to  do  it. 

President  Schurman.  I want  to  say  with  regard  to  the  constitution, 
to  the  project  of  an  autonomous  government,  that  the  object  of  our 
procuring  such  a draft  from  you  is  to  compare  it  with  our  own  ideas 
and  see  if,  in  our  opinion,  an  adjustment  can  be  made. 

The  meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OE  SENOR  CALDERON. 

Manila,  April  27,  1809 — If.  j>.  in. 

Present:  President  Schurman,  Professor  Worcester,  and  Senor  Felipe 
Goncalez  Calderon. 

Senor  Felipe  Goncalez  Calderon. 

Examined  by  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  is  your  profession  ? — A.  Lawyer  and  farmer. 

Q.  Where  do  you  live  ? — A.  I have  always  lived  in  Manila,  but  I 
have  property  in  the  provinces  of  Batangas  and  Cavite. 

Q.  What  proportion  of  the  people  of  Batangas  can  read  and  write ? — 
A Seventy -live  or  80  per  cent.  The  province  is  the  most  cultured 


68 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


in  the  Archipelago.  I have  some  600  laborers  on  my  plantation  in 
Batangas,  and  of  those  there  are  certainly  not  more  than  20  who  can 
not  read  and  write. 

Q.  If  you  have  anything  to  say  to  us  concerning  the  bettering  of 
conditions  in  your  own  province  and  concerning  the  general  state  of 
affairs  here  in  the  country,  say  it  to  us  frankly. — A.  What  do  you 
desire — my  opinion  as  a private  individual  or  gathered  from  what  I 
have  seen,  or  the  impression  that  I have  gained  from  what  1 have  heard, 
here  in  Manila  since  1 have  arrived  here? 

Q.  Both. — A.  It  is  necessary  to  know  the  character  of  the  archi- 
pelago as  a whole  and  of  Batangas  in  particular.  The  archipelago 
as  a whole  is  composed  of  three  classes  of  individuals:  The  rich  and 
intelligent  element;  the  poorer  element  of  the  country — the  element 
that  is  willing  to  devote  itself  to  work — and  an  element  that  may  be 
called  intermediate,  made  up  of  clerks  and  writers,  who  have  a habit 
of  stirring  up  the  town.  The  first  of  these  elements,  the  wealthier 
class  and  the  diligent  class,  that  by  its  work  produces  sugar,  tobacco, 
etc. , wishes,  by  whatever  means,  peace  and  quiet.  They  have  certain 
wrong  ideas  which  result  from  their  complete  ignorance  of  the  char- 
acter of  the,  Americans.  The  Spaniards  have  given  them  wrong  ideas 
on  this  subject.  The  third,  or  intermediate  class,  do  not  wish  for 
peace  under  any  circumstances,  because  it  goes  against  their  individual 
interests,  and,  apart  from  that,  they  also  have  these  wrong  impressions 
of  Americans.  This  is  the  idea  that  I have  heard  expressed  by  the 
general  public;  it  is  not  my  personal  idea.  I will  now  explain  my  per- 
sonal idea.  The  first  and  second  classes  wish  peace  by  any  means  what- 
ever, because  they  are  weary  of  the  state  of  anarchy  which  exists,  but 
they  are  disturbed  as  to  the  conduct  of  America  in  the  future.  The 
most  important  thing  is  to  show  them  actual  deeds.  The  common 
people  now  lack  confidence  in  the  Americans  because  there  has  in  the 
past  been  enacted  laws  which  have  never  been  carried  out.  The 
Spaniards  made  them  promises  which  have  never  been  fulfilled. 

Q.  It  is  very  natural  that  they  should  wish  for  demonstrations  of 
what  we  intend  to  do. — A.  That  is  what  is  wanting — actual  deeds, 
because  the  town  is  wholly  skeptical  about  promises;  what  they  want 
to  see  is  fulfillment.  And  there  is  this  to  be  remembered  also,  that  the 
Filipino,  like  other  Orientals,  is  not  a man  who  can  be  compelled  by 
force.  I am  going  to  give  you  an  illustration  of  this:  When  he  once 
gets  an  idea  in  his  head  he  wishes  to  carry  it  out;  he  is  determined 
to  carry  it  out.  The  revolution  of  1896  would  not  have  been  developed 
unless  it  had  been  for  the  illegal  and  iniquitous  acts  of  the  Spanish 
Government,  and  lam  going  to  give  an  illustration  to  prove  it.  Gen- 
eral Polavieja  came  here  with  the  reputation  of  being  a man  who  was 
going  to  put  everyone  to  death.  He  distributed  in  all  of  the  tribunals 
a great  many  ropes.  I do  not  know  for  what  purpose,  but  the  com- 
mon people  believed  that  those  ropes  wore  to  be  used  at  the  appointed 
moment  for  tying  up  all  of  the  common  people  in  order  to  shoot  them. 
For  this  reason  the  insurrectionary  force  was  augmented  more  than 
100  per  cent  by  people  who  took  to  the  fields,  believing  that  the  ropes 
were  distributed  for  this  purpose. 

Q.  That  must  have  been  simply  a wrong  impression. — A.  Yes;  it 
was  a stupid  idea,  but  nevertheless  it  had  that  effect.  This  is  an  Ori- 
ental people,  and  when  they  get  an  idea  it  carries  them  away. 

Q.  Imagination  predominates  over  reason,  controls  reason? — 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


69 


A.  They  do  not  stop  to  consider  an  idea,  but  once  get  it  into  their 
heads  and  it  will  run  awa}^  with  them.  The  shooting  of  people  drove 
some  of  them  to  the  field;  the  detention  of  others  had  the  same  effect. 
So  that  the  acts  of  the  Spaniards  contributed  to  the  revolution.  I say 
all  this  to  prove  that  it  is  difficult  to  dominate  the  Philippine  people 
by  force.  It  is  easier  to  dominate  them  by  leading  them  on  by 
attraction.  Furthermore,  it  is  to  be  remembered  that  they  are  very 
suspicious,  and  being,  as  they  are,  very  suspicious,  they  wish  to  see 
actual  acts. 

(At  this  point  President  Schurman  entered  the  room.) 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  And  what  acts  are  possible  now? — A.  Taking,  now,  as  a concrete 
example  the  province  of  Batangas,  the  third  crowd,  namely,  those  who 
wish  the  war  to  go  on — they  say  that  vessels  do  not  come  there  because 
the  Americans  do  not  allow  them  to  come.  I have  maintained  that  this 
was  not  the  cause;  that  the  Americans  were  willing  that  ships  should 
go  there,  but  were  afraid  that  if  they  did  go  they  might  meet  with 
some  injury  at  the  hands  of  the  insurgents,  and,  not  wishing  to  make 
themselves  responsible  for  any  such  injury,  tin*  Americans  have  not 
allowed  them  to  go.  The  people  to  the  southward  hold  the  idea  that 
the  conflagrations  and  crimes  committed  in  Manila  are  the  acts  of  the 
Americans,  and  it  is  necessary  to  prove  to  them  by  kind  deeds  that  this 
is  not  the  case. 

Q.  And  what  acts  can  we  perform  to  give  them  a different  idea? — 
A.  When  a town  is  captured,  for  example,  give  to  the  people  who 
have  lost  all  that  the}-  have  a little  something  for  food,  a little 
something  in  compensation  for  their  houses,  so  that  they  may  escape 
from  their  misery. 

By  Professor  Worcester  : 

Q.  But  don't  you  know  that  the  insurgent  leaders  themselves  give 
orders  to  burn  houses  and  destroy  property — A.  Yes;  I know  it. 

Q.  Do  you  not  know  that  when  Santa  Cruz  was  taken  there  was  no 
burning  and  no  robbery? — A.  Yes. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  You  wish  more  examples  like  this? — A.  Yes;  that  is  what  we 
want.  And  when  it  is  necessary  to  take  a town  which  can  not  be 
defended,  a thing  which  the  exigencies  of  war  may  demand,  burn  it, 
but  give  to  the  people  something  to  recompense  them  for  their  loss — 
not  as  indemnity,  but  as  an  aid,  as  a testimony  of  friendship  or  succor, 
as  an  evidence  of  good  will. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  But  do  you  not  know  that  this  is  difficult,  because  the  people  run 
away  ? — A.  Yes;  I know  it  is  sometimes  impossible;  but  after  you  have 
taken  a town  the  people  soon  begin  to  come  in,  and  then  jrou  can  treat 
them  in  this  fashion  I have  described. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  1 think  myself  that  this  is  very  desirable.  We  ought  first  to 
have  a place  where  those  who  wish  can  come  in  and  live  and  work  in 
peace. — A.  Even  in  the  existing  state  of  affairs  let  business  go  on  as  a 
political  measure.  Yesterday,  when  talking  to  General  Otis,  I sug- 
gested to  him  that  he  allow  a steamer  to  go  to  bring  up  the  families 
that  wished  to  come  from  Leyte.  He  asked  me  whether  the  steamer 


70 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


would  he  in  danger,  and  whether  they  would  be  likely  to  commit  acts 
of  violence  against  it.  I told,  him  no.  He  asked  me  further  what 
percentage  of  export  duty  they  would  charge  on  the  cargo.  I told 
him  5 per  cent.  He  said  it  did  not  seem  feasible  to  him  to  allow  the 
steamer  to  go,  because  that  would  result  in  increasing  the  resources  of 
the  insurrectos;  but,  according  to  my  idea,  the  little  that  you  would 
lose  by  this  means  would  be  of  small  importance,  for  all  they  could  do 
with  the  money  would  be  to  get  a little  more  rice,  whereas  the  politi- 
cal effect  of  having  business  going  on  freely  might  be  very  important. 
Whether  they  have  many  or  few  resources  they  can  not  stand  up 
against  you,  and  if  you  can  win  them  by  such  means  it  would  be  better 
than  it  would  be  to  light  them. 

Q.  But  do  you  not  know  that  this  might  have  another  effect?  If 
the  insurgents  were  to  see  the  steamers  making  their  trips  as  usual, 
might  they  not  say,  ‘*Oh!  things  are  going  very  nicely,  just  as  they 
did  in  time  of  peace;  we  are  not  incommoded  in  any  way;  we  are  not 
losing  anything;  let  the  war  go  on?” — A.  No;  I do  not  believe  it 
would.  The  Indian  always  occupies  himself  with  the  present  moment. 
Let  business  go  on  until  you  are  ready  to  take  Batangas,  then  bring  on 
your  squadron  and  bombard  the  place  if  it  is  necessary,  destroy  the 
houses,  and  show  to  the  natives  you  are  indulgent  up  to  the  point 
where  you  can  be  indulgent,  but  if  they  continue  to  commit  acts  of 
hostility  against  you  they  must  pay  the  penalty.  Another  reason  is 
that  the  subject  of  business  affects  most  severely  the  wealthier  classes, 
because  the  poor  can  go  and  live  in  the  fields  with  a handful  of  rice, 
and  we  know  that  the  wealthy  class  is  the  class  of  all  classes  that  wishes 
peace. 

Q.  But  might  they  not  feel,  if  they  themselves  were  not  losing, 
that  it  was  a matter  of  indifference  to  them  whether  the  war  continued 
or  not,  so  that  they  would  fail  to  exercise  their  influence  in  stopping 
it? — A.  Oh,  no;  because  if  you  were  to  pursue  this  policy  the  result 
might  be  that  wealthy  men  would  have  confirmed  in  their  minds  the 
idea  that  the  common  people  now  hold,  and  a few  might  lend  their 
influence  and  their  resources  to  furthering  the  cause  of  the  revolution. 
The  Indian  can ’not  lie  overcome  bv  force,  and  it  is  better  to  employ  a 
politic  course  in  dealing  ivith  him.  It  is  also  desirable  to  avoid,  so  far 
as  possible,  robbing,  burning,  and  killing  on  the  part  of  the  soldiers, 
because  the  people  have  not  forgotten  the  vile  deeds  of  the  Spaniards, 
and  they  believe  that  you  are  going  in  the  same  way,  and  the  doing  of 
these  things  but  strengthens  this  belief,  and  it  is  desirable  to  avoid  such 
a state  of  affairs  as  far  as  possible. 

Meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  ANGEL  LOPEZ. 

Manila,  May  8 , 1899 — 11  a.  m. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Admiral  Dewey,  Colonel 
Denby,  and  Professor  Worcester,  commissioners,  and  Mr.  John  R. 
Mac  Arthur,  secretary. 

Angel  Lopez  appeared  before  the  commission,  and  in  response  to 
the  interrogatories  of  the  commissioners  stated  as  follows; 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? — A.  Angel  Lopez. 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


71 


Q.  Where  is  your  home? — A.  50  Gastambide  street,  Sampaloc, 
Manila. 

Q.  Where  was  it  formerly  ? — A.  The  same. 

Q.  Have  you  not  lived  in  Ilocos? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  How  long? — A.  I came  to  Manila  in  October  of  last  year. 

Q.  Before  that  time  did  you  live  in  Ilocos  ? — A.  In  Ilocos. 

Q.  In  what  town? — A.  In  the  town  of  Bacnotan,  in  the  province  of 
Union. 

Q.  Did  you  not  also  live  in  the  province  of  Ilocos  Sur? — A.  Yes. 
Before  coming  to  Manila  we  were  in  Yigan,  in  Ilocos  Sur. 

Q.  How  long  did  }rou  live  in  Yigan? — A.  This  last  time,  three 
months. 

Q.  How  long  were  you  a resident  of  Vigan? — A.  1 was  born  in 
Vigan;  I lived  in  Vigan;  I left  Yigan  at  the  age  of  20,  and  came  to 
Manila  and  studied  telegraphy,  and  afterwards  returned  to  the  province 
of  Union. 

Q.  What  is  your  profession  ? — A.  In  Union  I was  the  agent  of  the 
tobacco  factory  finally. 

Q.  Have  you  ever  held  any  government  position? — A.  I was  chief 
of  the  town,  captain  of  Bacnotan.  i 

Q.  How  long  were  you  captain  of  the  town  ? — A.  More  than  one 
year.  The  insurrection  broke  out,  and  I left  Bacnotan. 

Q.  How  do  the  people  of  Union  and  Ilocos  stand  at  the  present 
time;  how  are  they  affected  toward  the  Americans  and  toward  the 
insurrectos  ? — A.  In  Yigan  there  is  no  insurrection;  there  are  Philippine 
troops,  but  they  are  not  insurgent  troops. 

Q.  Where  do  those  troops  come  from? — A.  They  are  from  Vigan 
itself;  they  are  recruits,  new  troops,  reserves.  < 

Q.  Are  there  any  Tagalog  troops  in  Vigan? — A.  There  are  no  Taga- 
log  troops — Ilocanos. 

Q.  Who  conducts  the  government? — A.  A man  from  Vigan. 

Q.  Are  there  Tagalog  troops  in  other  pueblos  up  there  ? — A.  There 
are  none;  all  Ilocanos,  because  all  the  Tagalogs  come  from  here  to 

Malolos. 

Q.  Were  there  Tagalog  troops  up  there  formerly? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  When  did  they  leave? — A.  It  is  a long  time  now.  In  November 
and  December  of  last  year  they  left  for  Malolos. 

Q.  How  does  the  government  of  Ilocos  stand  affected  toward  the 
United  States? — A.  They  are  all  well  disposed,  because  they  do  not 
like  the  Philippine  government. 

Q.  If  Admiral  Dewey  sent  ships  up  there  would  they  welcome 
them? — A.  I am  willing  to  go  with  Admiral  Dewey  in  the  ship,  and  I 
shall  send  a message  ashore,  a proclamation  of  my  own,  that  we  be 
well  received,  and  we  would  lie  well  received;  and  we  should  be,  because 
everyone  there  wishes  a recognized  government — an  American  gov- 
ernment. 

Q.  Do  the  same  conditions  obtain  in  Aparri,  and  in  Cavite?  Are 
they  friendly  to  us  there? — A.  In  Aparri  the  people  are  undecided. 
If  the  American  Government  prevails,  why  they  will  be  friendly  with 
them;  but  if  the  Philippine  government  wins  they  will  be  friendly 
with  the  Philippine  government,  because  they  have  no  arms. 

Q.  There  are  many  pueblos  in  Ilocos  besides  Vigan;  name  some  of 
the  other  pueblos,  large  pueblos? — A.  In  Ilocos  Norte  there  are  large 
towns;  for  instance,  the  capital,  it  is  a large  town — Laoag. 


72 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  It  is  the  capital? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  the  people  in  Laoag  are  disposed  toward  the 
United  States? — A.  In  Laoag  there  is  no  disposition  for  trouble. 
Laoag  is  peaceable  and  wishes  peace,  just  as  Yigan  does. 

Q.  Can  ships  of  war  go  to  Laoag? — A.  In  Urimao  it  is  said  that  a 
war  ship  could  go  there.  In  Laoag  also.  In  Dirigue  a war  ship  could 
go  in.  Into  Union  a war  ship  could  very  well  go  also. 

Q.  What  are  the  other  pueblos  in  Union  to  which  they  could  go? — 
A.  The  capital:  the  capital  is  a good  port.  There  are  no  others.  In 
Union  there  are  insurgent  towns,  but  there  is  no  resistance  in  the 
capital. 

Q.  What  is  the  capital? — A.  San  Fernando. 

Q.  And  in  what  condition  are  they  now?  Have  they  peace  and 
order  in  all  those  towns  now? — A.  There  is  no  order  or  peace.  The 
American  Government  should  put  a strong  government  there.  It  is 
necessary  to  have  a strong  government,  for  the  insurgents  and  those 
who  are  not  insurgents  are  quarreling  among  themselves.  In  a town 
of  9,000  people  there  are  not  1,000  insurgents.  Eight-ninths  are 
opposed  to  the  insurgents. 

Q.  The  great  majority  of  the  people  desire  the  Americans  ? — A. 
Yes.  In  a town  of  from  eight  to  ten  thousand  people  there  arc  not 
more  than  1,000  insurgents.  For  that  reason,  by  the  sending  there  of 
the  proclamation  of  the  Government,  and  another  proclamation  to 
arouse  good  will  and  good  faith  in  the  people,  an  American  govern- 
ment can  be  established  without  trouble. 

Q.  Would  the  people  of  Ilocos  and  Union  desire  much  change  in 
their  form  of  government  if  the  Americans  came  in  and  set  up  a gov- 
ernment?— A.  They  wish  to  change  their  government.  The  honest 
people  of  the  country  do  not  wish  that  the  chief  man  of  the  public 
should  be  an  insurgent. 

Q.  Are  the  Ilocanos  contented  with  their  present  form  of  municipal 
government? — A.  Yes;  with  a little  further  change. 

Q.  What  variations  do  they  desire? — A.  Such  variations  as  are  pro- 
posed in  the  proclamation ; those  would  please  them  very  much. 

Q.  Are  they  contented  with  their  present  form  of  provincial  govern- 
ment--the  provincial  junta? — A.  The}"  are  very  well  content  with  it; 
but  it  should  be  changed,  as  stated  in  the  American  Proclamation. 

Q.  Can  you  mention  any  particular  details — can  you  specify  details  in 
which  they  would  like  their  provincial  junta  changed? — A.  There 
should  be  people  placed  in  the  provincial  government  from  other 
towns,  for  at  present  they  have  in  the  provincial  government  men  who 
have  not  sufficient  intelligence. 

Q.  At  present  the  members  of  the  provincial  junta  all  come  from 
the  capital  towns? — A.  Yes;  they  all  come  from  the  capitals. 

Q.  Was  there  much  corruption — much  waste  of  public  moneys — in 
the  old  days?— A.  There  was  a great  deal.  For  that  reason  they  need 
an  American  for  the  chief  of  the  province,  as  governor  of  the  province. 

Q.  How  would  you  have  the  governor  appointed  ? — A.  The  governor 
of  the  province  should  be  appointed  by  the  Government  at  Washington. 

Q.  Should  that  governor  have  charge  of  all  the  finances  of  the 
pueblos? — A.  There  should  be  one  named  as  chief  magistrate  in  each 
town— a man  of  good  antecedents — of  good  character. 

Q.  Elected  by  the  people? — A.  By  the  town  itself. 

Q.  How  could  you  secure  a nomination  of  so  good  a man? — A.  The 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


73 


governor-general  of  Manila,  knowing  the  governor  of  the  province, 
and  the  governor  of  the  province,  knowing  the  chiefs  of  the  towns, 
could  arrange  that. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  the  system  of  judiciary  that  they  have  in  your  prov- 
ince?— A.  In  every  town  there  is  always  a justice  of  the  peace. 

Q.  Is  there  but  one  justice  of  the  peace  in  a town? — A.  In  each 
town  there  is  one,  and  a chief  of  the  town,  who  undertakes  the  execu- 
tive branch. 

Q.  How  are  those  justices  elected? — A.  They  are  named  by  the 
governor  of  the  province. 

Q.  And  they  are  not  elected  by  the  people  ? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Now  what  has  this  chief  of  the  town  to  do  with  the  matter  of 
justice? — A.  The  chief  of  the  town  does  not  mix  in  judicial  affairs. 

Q.  What  judges  have  you  above  a justice  of  the  peace? — A.  The 
justice  of  the  peace  is  only  considered  in  criminal  matters.  His 
superior  is  the  chief  of  the  pueblo,  who  exercises  executive  functions, 
who  collects  taxes,  all  the  taxes  and  contributions,  and  enrolls  soldiers, 
takes  charge  of  prisoners,  and  of  the  police. 

Q.  Suppose  a man  commits  a murder,  where  is  he  tried  ? — A.  Before 
a judge  of  the  peace. 

Q.  Well,  who  is  the  judgeof  thepeace? — A.  The  justice  of  the  peace 
and  the  justice Tn  the  capital  afterwards. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  “a  judge  of  the  peace;”  do  you  mean 
these  people  you  have  been  talking  about,  justices  of  the  peace? — A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Have  these  magistrates  you  have  been  talking  about  the  right 
to  try  murder  cases? — A.  The}T  have  only  the  power  to  examine  the 
accused  and  indict  him  and  send  him  to  the  judge  in  the  capital. 

Q.  Is  there  no  court  of  superior  jurisdiction  except  in  the  capital? — 
A.  There  is  none.  In  the  capital  is  the  superior  court.  That  is  the 
superior  court  over  all  the  towns. 

Q.  Suppose  a man  wants  to  sue  another  for  a thousand  dollars, 
where  would  he  bring  his  suit? — A.  In  the  capital. 

Q.  Suppose  he  wants  to  sue  for  a smaller  sum,  say,  up  to  $200,  can 
he  sue  before  these  justices  of  the  peace? — A.  Under  the  approval  of 
the  judge  of  the  capital  you  can  sue  for  a small  amount  in  the  justice 
of  the  peace’s  court  in  the  town. 

Q.  What  is  the  jurisdiction  in  amount  of  a justice  of  the  peace? — 
A.  Up  to  $200 — from  $5  to  $200. 

Q.  How  many  judges  do  the3r  have  at  the  capital  to  hear  these 
cases? — A.  One. 

Q.  Who  was  he  appointed  by  under  the  Spaniards  ?- — A.  He  was 
sent  from  Spain. 

Q.  Do  vou  know  what  salary  he  got? — A.  They  vary,  for  there  are 
different  classes  of  judges — the  judges  of  entrada,  ascenso,  and  ter- 
miuo.  The  judges  of  the  first  class  get  $125;  of  the  second  class  $150, 
and  of  the  third  $200. 

Q.  A month? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Does  any  appeal  lie  from  these  judges  to  any  other  court,  and 
where  is  the  court? — A.  To  the  superior  court  of  Manila.  Over  here 
in  Manila  there  is  the  supreme  court. 

Q.  How  many  judges  ? — A.  One  in  Manila. 


74 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  appeals  lie  from  all  the  islands  to  that  one  judge? — A.  They 
appeal  from  all  the  islands  to  this  judge  in  Manila,  and  the}"  appeal 
from  him  to  Spain. 

Q.  Were  the  people  satisfied  with  that  form  of  judicial  procedure? — 
A.  They  were  all  satisfied. 

Q.  Would  you  suggest  any  change  in  it? — A.  It  seems  very  good  to 
me.  I am  satisfied  Avith  it. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  introducing  the  system  of  juries? — A.  No. 
Over  here  in  the  Philippine  Islands  the  Indians  can  not  govern  them- 
selves. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  about  introducing  the  system  of  juries  in 
these  islands — that  is  of  having  12  men  to  try  a case? — A.  It  would 
be  a very  good  thing,  one  juryman  for  each  town. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  have  0 men  sit  Avith  the  judges  and  hear  a 
ease,  and  ha\Te  those  6 men  pass  on  the  facts  and  the  justice  pass  on 
the  law  in  criminal  cases? — A.  It  would  be  a very  good  thing,  for  here 
in  the  Philippines  it  is  often  the  case  that  the  Avrong  party  Avins  the 
suit  bv  bribing  the  judge,  and  under  a system  like  that  of  juries  there 
would  not  be  the  opportunity  for  bribery. 

Q.  IIoav  Avould  it  do  in  civil  cases;  not  only  in  criminal  cases,  but 
civil  cases  Avhere  money  is  involved? — A.  It  would  do  very  Avell. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  How  do  people  in  Ilocos  Norte  and  Ilocos  Sur  get  their  living; 
Avhat  do  they  do  up  there? — A.  By  raising  sugar,  tobacco,  and  rice. 
There  is  only  a little  anil  raised  there  now. 

Q.  What  kind  of  rice  do  they  raise  up  there,  lowland  rice  or 
mountain  rice? — A.  There  are  three  classes  that  they  groAv. 

Q.  Does  abaca  grow  up  there? — A.  No;  there  is  maguey;  it  is  not 
abaca,  it  is  like  abaca. 

Q.  Do  they  raise  large  quantities  of  tobacco  there? — A.  Yes;  a 
great  deal. 

Q.  Is  it  of  good  quality? — A.  In  Ilocos  Norte  and  Union  it  is  of 
good  quality,  and  in  Abra  also. 

Q.  Is  there  very  much  forest  there? — A.  There  is  a good  deal. 

Q.  In  all  the  provinces;  in  Ilocos  Norte,  in  Ilocos  Sur,  Union,  and 
in  Aparri? — A.  There  are  a great  many  forests  and  a great  deal  of 
lumber. 

Q.  What  kinds  of  woods  have  they  there  that  are  particularly  valu- 
able?— A.  Narra,  molave,  dao,  and  contingan. 

Q.  Is  the  timber  still  to  be  had  near  the  sea  and  the  rivers,  or  has  it 
been  cut  oil  there,  so  that  it  is  difficult  to  get  it  out? — A.  In  the  greater 
part  there  is  no  more  near  the  sea  and  near  the  rivers,  but  there  are 
some  parts  where  you  can  get  it  with  great  ease  by  means  of  the  rivers. 

Q.  What  are  those  parts?— A.  In  the  province  of  Abra. 

Q.  What  about  that  large  river,  the  Abra;  about  the  navigation  of 
it;  what  sorts  of  boats  can  go  up  it  ? — A.  The  river  is  very  swift.  For 
that  reason  it  is  very  hard  to  go  up  it. 

Q.  How  far  can  you  go  up  ! — A.  From  Vigan  to  Abra.  They  ha\’e 
got  up  a little  more  or  less  than  2 miles. 

Q.  Hoav  far  can  they  go  with  bancas? — A.  You  can  go  up  the  dis- 
tance that  it  takes  to  go  from  0 o’clock  in  the  morning  to  3 o’clock  in 
the  afternoon. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


75 


By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  To  what  towns  can  they  go? — A.  To  the  capital;  Abra. 

Q.  Are  there  mineral  deposits — copper,  or  gold,  iron,  coal,  and  sil- 
ver?— A.  In  Abra  there  arc  a great  deal,  and  in  Bontoc  and  in  that 
district. 

Q.  More  particularly A.  Copper,  iron,  and  gold. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Is  gold  found  in  the  sand  or  in  the  rocks? — A.  In  the  forests  and 
in  the  mountains,  in  the  rocks. 

Q.  Are  there  wild  people  in  the  mountains? — A.  No. 

Q.  What  name  do  the  people  go  by  in  the  mountains  there? — A. 
lgorrotes;  and  there  are  also  Catholics. 

Q.  The  lgorrotes  and  the  Catholics  are  friendly,  then,  are  they? — 
A.  Yes;  the  lgorrotes  come  down  from  the  mountains  and  do  business 
selling  copper,  gold,  and  iron,  and  do  business  generally. 

Q.  Suppose  white  men  go  up  among  the  lgorrotes;  would  the}'  be 
friendly  to  them  or  not? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Are  there  any  Actas? — A.  There  are  no  Aetas.  White  men  can 
go  up  there,  many  Spaniards,  and  they  ai'e  not  molested. 

Q.  In  times  past  there  were  many  Tulusanes? — A.  There  are  no 
Tulusanes  now. 

Q.  During  what  months  does  it  rain  up  there? — A.  It  begins  in  May; 
from  May  to  October. 

Q.  Does  it  rain  steadily  during  a good  part  of  the  time? — A.  No, 
not  always;  there  are  some  years  when  there  is  a great  deal  of  rain, 
and  there  are  some  years  when  there  is  very  little. 

Q.  How  many  days  continuous  rain  do  they  ever  have  up  there? — 
A.  One  week;  sometimes  one  week  without  stopping;  not  more  than 
that. 

Q.  Can  one  travel  on  horseback  through  this  province  during  those 
rains? — A.  Well,  even  in  time  of  rain  you  can  travel  on  horseback  or 
in  a calesa  or  a carriage.  They  have  got  good  roads. 

Q.  Are  there  any  high  mountains  up  there? — A.  There  are  high 
mountains  in  Lepanto,  in  Benguet,  and  in  Abra. 

Q.  Where  do  these  people  live  that  they  call  Gaddanes,  that  hunt 
heads? — A.  In  Nueva  Ecija,  in  Isabela,  Ilocos,  and  in  Nueva  Viscaya. 

Q.  Do  the  lgorrotes  bring  down  a great  deal  of  gold? — A.  The  Ilo- 
canos  bring  some. 

Q.  Is  it  tine  gold  or  is  it  in  large  pieces? — A.  Sometimes  a great 
deal  of  gold.  They  used  to  bring  more  than  they  do  now,  because  a 
good  many  Spaniards  have  come  in,  and  Germans,  and  French,  and 
others.  In  Benguet,  in  the  province  of  Union,  there  are  gold  mines 
which  have  never  been  exploited,  never  been  worked;  but  they  are 
beginning  to  work  them  now. 

Q.  Is  the  gold  that  the  lgorrotes  bring  down  in  powder  or  in  fair 
size  pieces? — A.  There  is  dust  and  also  nuggets. 

Q.  Have  they  mineral  plants  up  there  that  are  useful  in  case  of  sick- 
ness?— A.  In  Benguet  there  are  many. 

Q.  Is  the  Mangadlao  plant  found  there  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  is  that  good  for? — A.  For  wounds. 

Q.  Do  they  mix  it  with  cocoanut  oil  when  they  use  it? — A.  No. 

Q.  How  do  they  use  it? — A.  They  cut  the  branch  and  take  the  sap 
and  apply  it  to  the  wound. 


76 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Give  me  the  names  of  any  other  important  medicinal  plants  they 
have  there,  and  what  they  are  used  for. — A.  There  is  the  Allogoa,  for 
fever. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Are  there  other  people  here  from  Benguet  or  Ilocos  besides 
you? — A.  There  are  others. 

Q.  Men  of  prominence ? — A.  Yes;  they  are  deported  men,  deported 
for  rebellion. 

Q.  Deported  by  Spain? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  are  they  now? — A.  They  arc  in  Manila,  but  I don’t  know 
where. 

Q.  Are  they  men  of  political  influence  in  their  communities? — A.  In 
their  towns;  yes. 

Q.  And  what  are  some  of  their  names  ? — A.  Mena  Cristolog. 

Q.  From  what  district  did  he  come? — A.  From  Benguet. 

Q.  What  official  position  did  he  have? — A.  Secretary  of  the  palace. 

Q.  Does  he  know  the  disposition  of  those  men  at  all  with  respect  to 
the  Spaniards  or  Americans? — A.  He  is  probably  better  affected 
toward  the  Americans  than  toward  the  Spanish,  because  his  self- 
respect  was  wounded  by  the  Spaniards.  He  was  appointed  governor 
of  Benguet  by  the  Filipinos,  but  did  not  accept  it. 

Q.  What  is  his  profession  ? — A.  He  is  a lawyer. 

Q.  What  other  men  of  importance  do  you  know  of  in  that  district 
or  in  Ilocos  Norte  or  Ilocos  Sur? — A.  That  are  here? 

Q.  Yes;  or  around  here? — A.  In  Yigan  there  is  Estanislao  Donato. 

Q.  What  position  has  he  held? — A.  He  was  mayor  of  Yigan. 

Q.  Under  the  Spanish  regime? — A.  Yes;  under  the  Spanish  regime. 
He  has  never  mixed  up  with  anything  in  reference  to  the  Philippines. 

Q.  I would  like  to  ask  you  something  about  local  taxes.  You  were 
a municipal  captain? — A.  Yes;  of  Bacnotan. 

Q.  In  what  province,  and  what  is  the  population  of  Bacnotan? — A. 
From  nine  to  ten  thousand. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  the  local  funds  amounted  to  per  year?— A. 
The  sum  total  was  $10,000. 

Q.  Was  all  this  money  used  by  the  people,  or  did  part  of  it  go  to 
the  province? — A.  It  was  all  sent  to  the  capital. 

Q.  But  it  came  back  for  use  in  the  pueblo? — A.  No;  none  came 
back;  never  was  used  for  the  pueblo. 

Q.  From  what  sources  did  this  money  come? — A.  From  the  cedula 
personal. 

Q.  How  many  cedulas  were  there  in  Bacnotan? — A.  Three  thousand 
eight  hundred  cedulas  at  $2  each,  and  800  at  $5  each. 

Q.  The  others?— A.  There  were  no  more  cedulas.  There  were  two 
classes  of  cedulas:  $2  for  a man  and  woman,  and  $5  each  for  a man 
alone. 

Q.  What  other  local  imposts  were  there? — A.  There  was  a tax  on 
fishing. 

Q.  Describe  the  fishing  tax? — A.  Net  fishing  paid  a certain  amount. 

Q.  For  what? — A.  For  the  right  to  fish. 

Q.  That  is  with  a net? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  much  did  they  pay  for  the  right  to  fish? — A.  There  were 
four  classes.  The  first  ciass  paid  $2.50,  the  second  class  $1  each,  third 
class  50  cents  each,  and  the  fourth  class  20  cents  each,  per  year. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


77 


Q.  Do  you  know  how  much  revenue  that  tax  brought  in  Bacnotan? — 
A.  One  hundred  and  fifty  dollars.  The  fishing  tax,  altogether,  pro- 
duced £150  a year.  There  was  another  tax  on  slaughterhouses  that 
amounted  to  $125  a year. 

Q.  What  did  each  one  pay  for  the  slaughter  tax  you  mention;  how 
was  it  levied? — A.  Every  man  that  killed  a carabao  paid  $1.25. 

Q.  Was  there  a tax  on  killing  a cow  or  any  other  animal? — A.  For 
killing  a cow  they  paid  the  sum  stated,  or  for  any  other  animal,  except 
a pig  or  hog,  for  which  they  paid  25  cents. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Did  they  pay  $1.25  for  killing  a goat? — A.  For  a goat  they  paid 
25  cents,  and  the  same  for  a sheep,  25  cents. 

By  President  Sciiurman: 

Q.  What  other  sources  of  local  income  were  there? — A.  There  was 
a toll  tax  on  bridges,  which  paid  $500  a year  in  Bacnotan. 

Q.  Was  that  collected  by  the  pueblos  as  a toll? — A.  The  Spanish 
Government  collected  directly  from  every  foot  passenger,  1 cent;  for 
every  horse  or  cow,  1 cent;  a calesa  paid  10  cents,  and  a carriage  20 
cents. 

Q.  What  other  local  tax  was  there? — A.  There  was  a tax  on  the 
certificates  of  property  in  animals. 

Q.  Was  it  necessary  for  every  owner  of  animals  to  possess  a certifi- 
cate of  ownership?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  Why? — A.  To  make  them  pay  a tax. 

Q.  What  was  the  tax? — A.  If  a man  had  50  animals  he  had  to  have 
50  certificates  of  ownership,  and  he  paid  20  cents  for  each  certificate. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Could  he  get  a certificate  for  a horse  for  that  amount? — A.  No; 
25  cents. 

By  President  Schukman: 

Q.  The  same  for  a hog? — A.  It  was  not  necessary.  The  only 
animals  for  which  the  owner  paid  were  carabaos,  cattle,  and  horses. 

Q.  The  tax  was  the  same  on  each  ? — A.  It  was  25  cents  for  each  of 
these. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  much  the  town  of  Bacnotan  receives  from 
this  source? — A.  In  one  year  I took  in  more  than  $100. 

Q.  And  what  other  sources  of  local  taxation  were  there? — A.  The 
direct  tax  on  house  property. 

Q.  Did  every  house  pay  a tax? — A.  Yes ; every  house  of  boards  or 
lumber — wood. 

Q.  Houses  of  nipa? — A.  No. 

Q.  About  how  many  houses  of  wood  were  there  in  Bacnotan? — A. 
There  was  not  more  than  $10  paid  for  those  taxes.  It  was  not  all  the 
same.  Some  houses  paid  $5,  some  paid  $4,  and  some  $3.50. 

Q.  According  to  the  size? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  other  sources  of  local  taxation  were  there? — A.  There 
were  no  others. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  cocoanut  trees  grow  up  there? — A.  Yes;  many. 

Q.  Is  there  a tax  on  them  ? — A.  No. 

Q.  If  a man  wanted  to  make  cocoanut  oil,  had  a mill  for  squeezing 
out  cocoanut  oil,  would  there  be  a tax  on  that  ? — A.  No. 


78 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  There  used  to  be  such  a tax  ? — A.  No.  Formerly  we  paid  taxes 
on  sugar  mills. 

Q.  Was  a man  at  liberty  to  cut  trees,  lumber  in  the  forests,  without 
paying  a tax? — A.  Under  the  Spanish  Government  they  paid  a tax. 

Q.  1 am  asking  all  these  questions  concerning  the  conditions  which 
prevailed  under  the  Spanish  Government. — A.  Yes;  so  I understand. 

Q.  If  one  wanted  to  keep  a shop  and  sell  things — sell  bananas  and 
rice,  and  things  generally — a license  was  necessary,  wasn’t  it? — A. 
Yes;  there  was  always  a necessity  for  a license;  they  had  to  pay  a 
license. 

By  President  Sen  nor  an: 

Q.  What  licenses  were  necessary? — A.  In  the  administration  of  the 
treasury  they  had  a tariff,  a graded  tariff,  for  different  shops,  an 
internal-revenue  office;  for  selling  different  articles  there  were  differ- 
ent licenses;  for  selling  clothes,  for  selling  cocoanut  oil,  there  were 
different  rates. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Was  there  a tax  on  weights  and  measures? — A.  Yes;  there  was 
also  one. 

Q.  How  did  they  keep  order  in  the  pueblo  of  Bacnotan? — A.  By 
the  chief  of  the  town. 

Q.  Could  the  captain  of  the  town  alone  do  it  in  a town  with  a popu- 
lation of  10,000  people?— A.  No;  I had  bailiffs  and  I had  the  police, 
the  guardia  civil. 

Q.  You  had,  then,  the  guardia  civil,  bailiffs,  and  policemen? — A. 
There  were  30  police  in  Bacnotan.  They  had  their  first  and  second 
chiefs. 

Q.  What  pay  did  the  ordinary  policeman  get? — A.  One  dollar  and 
fifty  cents  a week,  the  policemen  there. 

Q.  Did  these  policemen  have  work  of  their  own,  any  other  work? — 
A.  They  were  only  in  reliefs  of  ten  for  a week  at  a time,  and  when 
they  were  off  duty  they  worked. 

Q.  Did  the  ten  men  who  were  policemen  in  any  one  week  give  their 
entire  time  to  policing? — A.  They  were  always  busy. 

Q.  They  could  do  no  private  work  in  that  time  ? — A.  They  could  not. 

Q.  Was  there  a department  or  branch  of  the  guardia  civil  there? — 
A.  In  each  province. 

Q.  Where? — A.  At  the  capital. 

Q.  So  they  had  none  in  Bacnotan? — A.  No. 

Q.  How  many  were  there  at  the  capital  of  the  province? — A.  The 
guardia  civil  (the  civil  guard)  went  out  from  the  capital,  visiting  all 
the  provinces  enforcing  laws. 

Q.  How  many  members  of  the  civil  guard  were  there  in  the  province 
of  Union? — A.  Fifty;  in  the  capital  there  were  25,  on  one  side  of  the 
boundary  of  the  province  12,  and  on  the  other  side  13. 

Q.  Were  there  any  other  soldiers  in  the  province  of  Union? — A. 
There  were  no  more. 

Q.  These  men  you  have  mentioned  were  the  only  ones  required  to 
maintain  order  in  the  province? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Who  owns  the  land  in  the  province  of  Union — individuals?- — A. 
Private  persons. 

Q.  Docs  the  State  own  any  land  in  the  province  of  Union? — A.  The 
wild  lands  arc  the  property  of  the  State,  the  realcugo. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


7(.) 


Q.  The  realengo,  that  is  the  uncultivated  lands? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Belongs  to  the  State? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Was  much  of  that  land  in  Union? — A.  Very  much. 

Q.  What  does  the  State  do  with  it? — A.  In  every  province  there  is 
much  of  this  wild  land. 

Q.  And  this  wild  land  is  always  the  property  of  the  State? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  does  the  state  do  with  it  ? — A.  The  state  sells  it.  When 
a private  person  wishes  to  buy  this  land  he  buys  it  from  the  state. 

Q.  Are  there  surveys  in  the  province  of  Union  which  show  what 
land  is  owned  by  the  state  and  what  by  private  individuals? — A.  When 
anyone  wishes  to  buy  it  the  engineer  or  aid  of  the  government  meas- 
ures the  land  and  makes  a map  of  it. 

Q.  Is  it  possible  in  the  province  of  Union  to-day  to  mark  clearly  the 
state  lands  and  the  private  lands? — A.  You  can  distinguish  this  wild 
land. 

Q.  What  portion  of  the  province  of  Union  belongs  to  the  state; 
half  of  it.  or  a quarter  of  it  ? — A.  More  than  half  the  province  is  wild 
land,  and  among  the  mountains  or  rough  lands  there  is  a great  deal  of 
land  that  is  very  useful  for  growing  rice  and  other  crops. 

President  Schurman.  The  commission  is  very  much  obliged  to  you 
for  your  instructive  information,  and  we  shall  be  very  glad  to  see  you 
at  any  time. 


TESTIMONY  OF  THOMAS  COLLINS. 

Manila,  May  12,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby,  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr.  Mac  Arthur. 

Thomas  Collins,  in  answer  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
testified  as  follows: 

A.  I have  been  here  in  this  country  thirty  years  last  February,  and 
have  been  engaged  in  the  timber  business  some  twenty-five  years. 
M y nationality  is  American.  I was  engaged  in  the  timber  business  in 
the  island  of  Tablas  and  was  working  the  whole  island  pretty  much. 
I have  handled  all  the  following  kinds  of  woods  in  those  days:  Ipil, 
dungan,  and  manganchapuy.  It  is  now  so  long  ago  I almost  forget 
the  names  of  the  woods  I used  to  ship.  These  are  Visavan  names. 
Oyagcee  is  one  wood.  I think  it  would  be  better  if  I had  one  of  those 
government  lists  giving  the  names  of  the  timbers.  The  government 
issues  a list  with  the  different  districts  and  the  different  classes  of 
woods  and  where  they  can  be  found.  It  is  published  by  the  govern- 
ment, by  the  Inspeccion  de  Montes.  I forget  the  name  of  the  book 
now;  it  dealt  with  the  woods  in  the  Philippines  and  the  general  condi- 
tions that  were  to  be  found  in  the  forests,  pretty  much — forest  prod- 
ucts like  damar  and  gums  and  that  sort  of  thing.  I was  sending  out 
woods  principally  for  shipbuilding  and  house  construction — all  kinds. 
For  shipbuilding,  molave  that  grows  in  logs  about  thirty  feet  in 
length,  but  which  is  a crooked  wood,  is  much  used;  it  is  used  for  the 
crooks  and  curves  in  steamboats.  The  gross  diameter  of  a 30-foot  log 
is  sometimes  36  to  40  inches.  It  is  not  an  extra  hard  wood;  it  is  a 
nice  wood  for  cutting,  but  it  rusts — that  is,  it  is  hard  on  iron,  it  eats 


80 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


the  iron;  sea  worms  bore  in  it  and  barnacles  fasten  on  it;  it  is  gener- 
ally used  for  inside  work,  however,  not  for  outside. 

We  used  ipil  and  gijo  for  house  construction.  Ipil  grows  straight; 
it  is  a straight  wood.  The  logs  are  from  100  to  120  feet  long,  and 
square  about  thirty-six  inches;  it  is  used  in  beams  and  scantlings,  or 
anything  of  that  kind;  it  is  a very  hard  wood;  it  is  used  generally  for 
house  building  in  Manila;  the  white  ants  do  not  eat  it  much;  it  is  also 
used  for  corner  posts  and  different  parts  in  the  construction  of  houses 
and  in  masts  for  ships  or  anything  of  that  kind;  it  is  something  simi- 
lar to  teak,  only  a better  wood  than  teak;  it  is  scattered  through  the 
woods,  here  and  there. 

You  do  not  find  groves  of  any  one  kind  of  wood  except  the  mangrove 
along  the  beach,  and  the  mangrove  is  only  good  for  firewood,  although 
it  is  used  for  house  building,  for  these  native  houses. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  When  I was  in  Tawi-Tawi  there  was  mangrove  growing  there 
in  great,  big,  wild  trees,  and  the  governor  of  the  island  told  me  it  was 
very  valuable.  I do  not  remember  for  what  he  said  it  could  be  used. — 
A.  There  is  one  kind  of  wood  found  among  these  mangroves.  It  is  a 
splendid  wood,  but  it  does  not  grow  much  bigger  than  a foot  and  a 
half  in  diameter.  I forget  the  name  of  the  wood  now,  but  it  comes 
the  nearest  to  mahogany  of  any  wood  I have  seen  on  the  island.  It  is 
to  be  found  on  the  river  Paracale  in  Calamianes  and  it  is  also  to  be 
found  in  the  mountain  districts,  too,  of  the  Philippines.  You  will 
find  the  river  banks  are  crowded  with  these  mangrove  woods  on  each 
side  for  miles  and  miles  up  the  river. 

Q.  As  a matter  of  fact,  what  is  used  most  for  firewood  here  in 
Manila? — A.  The  mangrove  wood.  There  are  two  kinds.  It  comes 
in  here  every  day  pretty  much  when  things  are  quiet,  and  the  split 
wood — the  cord  wood — sells  for  about  $22  a raja,  $22  a thousand 
pieces,  ind  sometimes  only  $12.  The  pieces  are  about  3 feet  long. 

Q.  Is  there  any  regular  system  for  supplying  this  place  with  fuel  at 
present? — A.  Well,  they  always  used  to  fetch  it  bv  sailing  vessels  or 
steamers  supplying  the  market  here  in  Manila.  It  came  ch iefly  from 
Tayabas  or  Masbate,  or  anywhere  down  south;  sometimes  from 
Mindoro. 

Q.  Was  there  a permanent  supply,  so  that  people  could  depend  on 
getting  it? — A.  Yes.  The  Chinese  all  pretty  much  run  the  wood 
yards,  and  there  is  another  supply  that  comes  from  the  coast,  by  the 
the  bay.  Those  mangroves  are  allowed  to  grow  seven  or  eight  years, 
then  they  split  it  in  rajas  and  sell  it  in  Manila.  The  Chinese  used  to 
cut  the  old  stock,  and  the  Spanish  Government  used  to  do  it  also  for 
military  purposes.  That  is  where  the  army  got  its  wood. 

Q.  What  kinds  of  woods  are  most  used  in  Manila  in  the  everyday 
general  work  here;  what  kinds  are  mostly  sold  in  the  market  here? — 
A.  Molave,  ipil,  nara. 

Q.  Tell  me  a little  about  nara,  we  have  not  discussed  that.  What 
sort  of  trees  are  they? — A.  Nara  runs  about  35  or  40  feet,  perhaps  a 
little  more,  and  sometimes  if  they  are  shorter  they  are  thicker,  and 
sometimes  they  run  up  to  about  60  feet,  but  not  very  often. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  greatest  diameter  of  a log  like  that? — A. 
Well,  I have  seen  logs  in  the  round,  the  square  of  which  would  give 
you  about  50  inches.  40  inches  sometimes. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


81 


Q.  Is  there  more  than  one  kind  of  nara  hero? — A.  Two  kinds;  there 
is  the  white  and  the  red  nara. 

Q.  Whieh  is  the  more  valuable? — A.  Both  are  sold  exactly  alike — 
the  same  price. 

Q.  Of  what  sort  of  wood  is  this  table  at  which  we  are  sitting  (table 
in  commissioners’  reception  room  in  the  audiencia,  Manila)  made,  Mr. 
Collins? — A.  This  is  red  nara. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Is  this  one  piece? — A.  It  is  one  piece.  To  get  a piece  like  this 
the}'  have  to  sacrifice  a whole  tree,  so  as  to  get  the  wood  from  bark 
to  bark. 

Q.  How  much  is  a good  average  log  worth  when  it  is  laid  down  here 
in  Manila? — A.  It  is  always  sold  by  cubic  measurement,  25  cents  to 
50  cents,  according  to  the  market,  that  is  25  to  50  cents  Mexican,  per 
cubic  foot. 

Q.  How  much  do  these  other  woods  run,  ipil  for  instance? — A. 
About  the  same.  Cedar  is  the  wood  that  brings  the  highest  price 
around  Manila;  sometimes  it  is  up  and  sometimes  down,  but  they  myst 
have  it  in  the  cigar  factories. 

Q.  Where  does  it  come  from  principally  ? — A.  From  Mindoro. 

Q.  Where  do  the  cedar  trees  grow,  on  the  level  ? — A.  Sometimes  on 
the  level  and  sometimes  on  the  mountain  sides. 

Q.  Is  their  foliage  like  the  foliage  of  our  cedars  at  home? — A.  Just 
about  the  same. 

Q.  What  size  stuff  can  be  cut  from  the  cedars  here? — A.  Well,  in 
the  lower  part  you  will  get  sometimes  3 feet,  36  inches  diameter,  a 
square  of  36  inches. 

Q.  And  how  long  will  the  logs  run? — A.  They  run  about  60  or  TO 
feet.  But  this  square  of  36  inches,  that  is  from  the  lower  part  of  the 
tree,  and  that  is  generally  pretty  hard.  The  upper  part  is  what  the 
cigar-box  makers  use;  they  prefer  that  to  the  lower  part. 

Q.  In  what  shape  is  it  sent  here? — A.  In  logs;  they  work  it  up  here. 

Q.  How  does  the  price  run  on  that? — A.  It  generally  runs  about  35 
cents  a cubic  foot  and  sometimes  a great  deal  higher. 

Q.  Are  there  any  hard  woods  like  ebony  here — that  is  to  say,  that 
would  be  valuable  for  inside  finishing  of  handsome  houses  at  home?— 
A.  Yes;  any  quantity.  They  have  a wood  here  that  is  better  than  those, 
it  is  called  Alentato. 

Q.  What  is  the  nature  of  the  wood? — A.  It  is  a wood  that  is  a fit 
wood  for  the  best  furniture,  or  for  any  other  purpose  you  have  a mind 
to  use  it  for;  it  is  a lasting  wood. 

Q.  What  is  the  color  of  it  ? — A.  Dark  red,  with  a fine  grain. 

Q.  In  what  shape  does  it  grow  ? — A.  Straight,  pretty  much;  straight 
timber. 

Q.  Here  is  this  list  of  woods  here,  Mr.  Collins,  and  we  can  go  over 
it,  but  before  we  come  to  it,  tell  me  what  you  know  about  some  of  the 
best  places  at  present  to  get  timber  ? — A.  That  I could  not  exactly 
tell  you. 

Q.  Suppose  we  start  down  in  Tablas,  where  you  used  to  do  business. 
Do  you  know  the  present  condition  down  there? — A.  It  is  some  years 
since  I have  been  down  there.  Tablas  is  a district  of  Romblon;  it 
. belongs  to  Romblon. 

Q.  I was  there  in  18113,  and  there  was  a great  deal  of  timber  on  the 
p c 6 


82 


RKl'OKT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


hills  toward  Iloilo- A.  That  is  the  extreme  end — the  east  end  of 

the  island;  there  is  timber  there,  but  you  have  no  safe  port  for  it. 
Loay  is  the  best  port,  and  Oneingan  is  another,  but  it  is  not  a safe  port; 
still,  you  will  get  some  splendid  timber  right  there,  along  the  coast, 
right  down  to  the  point. 

Q.  Are  there  any  hard  woods  there  valuable  for  inside  finishing, 
furniture,  etc.  ? — A.  Yes;  you  will  get  some  very  splendid  woods  down 
there.  There  is  a very  hard  wood  down  there  called  Dao.  Sometimes 
it  will  square  40  to  50  inches,  but  it  is  very  seldom  you  get  it,  because 
they  have  no  way  of  sawing  it;  but  it  is  big  timber,  and  runs  over  100 
feet — that  is,  up  to  the  lower  branches.  It  is  a splendid  furniture 
wood,  and  a very  heavy  wood. 

Q.  What  is  the  method  of  cutting  these  trees — cutting  them  down 
in  the  forests,  Mr.  Collins? — A.  It  depends  on  what  you  have  to  cut. 
They  cut  with  axes  always.  They  commence  cutting  one  way,  the 
way  they  want  the  tree  to  fall;  they  then  cut  on  the  other  side,  and 
then  return  and  cut  the  way  they  want  the  tree  to  fall,  and  then  they 
cut  from  the  back  and  get  it  to  fall  where  they  want  it.  After  that 
the  timber  is  squared.  They  put  a nose  on  the  log  and  round  it  up, 
and  hitch  these  carabaos  on  it.  They  generally  use  blocks  and  tackles 
and  get  a sufficient  force  of  carabaos  on  it.  An  average  log  will  take 
from  eight  to  ten  caribbaos. 

Q.  You  find  the  timber  scattered  through  the  forests  here  and  there. 
How  do  you  get  the  logs  through  the  woods? — A.  They  will  cut  a 
road  for  it,  and  sometimes  they  will  get  three  or  four  logs  over  one 
road,  sometimes  more.  They  never  go  to  get  but  one  tree,  unless  it 
is  of  the  best  class  of  wood. 

Q.  What  wages  do  the  average  woodcutters  get? — A.  I pay  my 
men  different  from  others.  I pay  them  so  much  a fathom  of,  say,  13 
or  14  inches  square.  I give  them  25  cents  for  each  inch  above  12 
inches. 

Q.  That  is,  you  pay  them  according  to  the  timber  and  the  tree  they 
cut? — A.  Yes.  But  in  Tayabas  it  is  different;  they  cut  the  wood  and 
it  goes  through  two  or  three  hands  before  the  merchant  gets  hold  of 
it,  but  I deal  with  the  men  direct  and  furnish  my  own  tackle  and 
apparatus. 

Q.  There  are  middlemen  in  Tayabas? — A.  Yes;  but  I manage  that 
differently.  I treat  directly  with  the  wood  cutters  themselves. 

Q.  What  about  the  other  men — you  have  to  have  carabao  drivers  to 
handle  the  logs  ? — A.  No;  the  wood  cutters  have  to  do  the  hauling. 
I give  them  all  the  tackle  they  want. 

Q.  Do  you  give  them  so  much  a log  delivered  at  a given  place? — 
A.  Yes;  the  nearest  beach  they  can  get  it  to. 

Q.  Do  the  prices  vary  according  to  the  hardness  of  the  wood  or 
anything  of  that  sort? — A.  No;  only  according  to  size. 

Q.  How  is  it  about  cutting  that  timber,  Mr.  Collins,  do  you  get  it 
off  the  public  land,  or  do  you  have  to  have  concessions? — A.  I get  a 
license — a government  license  from  the  government — for  twelve 
months,  which  is  subject  to  be  renewed  within  twelve  months. 

Q.  You  have  to  get  an  option? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  this  a license  to  cut  over  a given  area? — A.  No;  it  is  a license 
for  any  province.  One  or  more  provinces.  One  license  may  be  for 
three  or  four  provinces,  although  they  may  be  a long  way  off'. 

Q.  Is  there  any  way  to  learn  the  amount  of  timber  a man  cuts  under 
this  license? — A.  No. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


83 


Q.  What  does  such  a license  cost? — A.  About  a dollar  just  for  the 
license  only,  hut  then  you  have  to  pay  before  you  ship  your  timber 
the  inspector  of  the  mountains;  you  have  to  pay  so  much  a cubic  foot, 
according  to  the  group — they  have  them  arranged  in  groups — first, 
second,  third,  fourth,  and  fifth. 

Q.  Tell  us  something  about  that,  please. — A.  Some  would  be  5 cents 
a cubic  foot  and  some  would  be  6 cents  a cubic  foot,  I can  not  tell  you 
exactly  now. 

Q.  That  was  a tax  on  felling  timber,  not  an  export  tax?  A.  When 
I was  in  the  timber  business  that  is  all  I had  to  pay,  but  before  the  war 
the}-  had  to  pay,  besides  that,  a duty — they  had  to  pay  a tax  to  the  Gov- 
ernment, like  what  they  call  an  industrial  tax — that  I don’t  know  any- 
thing about.  I never  paid  that. 

Q.  Do  you  know  the  office  at  which  that  was  levied? — A.  It  is  the 
same  as  any  other  merchant  here  in  Manila;  they  had  to  pay  so  much 
taxes,  according  to  the  amount  of  business. 

Q.  A sort  of  income  tax  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Suppose  you  wanted  to  export  your  timber,  to  send  it  to  China, 
did  you  have  to  pay  an  export  tax? — A.  Yes;  so  much  a cubic  foot. 

Q.  Suppose  you  were  not  going  to  send  it  to  China,  but  from  Ta- 
blas  to  Manila? — A.  Just  the  same. 

Q.  That  is  Infrdly  an  export  duty,  for  it  applies  to  these  islands. 
If  vou  wanted  to  send  it  to  China  you  would  not  have  to  pay  any  more  ? — 
A."  No. 

Q.  Was  it  your  experience  in  getting  wood  cutters  that  you  had  to 
make  them  advances ? — A.  Yes;  about  85  or  $10  to  each  man  when  I 
employed  him. 

Q.  After  that  you  used  to  pa}r  the  men  along  from  time  to  time? — A. 
Well,  after  that  the}-  would  keep  in  debt  the  whole  time,  because  they 
would  have  to  be  supplied  with  dry  goods,  drugs,  and  things  of  that 
kind.-  I kept  generally  a lot  of  dry  goods,  so  as  to  keep  their  families 
supplied.  In  fact,  I always  expect  to  lose  a certain  per  cent  by  my 
advances  to  them. 

Q.  Have  you  any  idea  how  that  percentage  of  loss  would  run  through 
your  advances  to  them? — A.  Well,  I would  say  about  2^-  per  cent. 

Q.  That  came  from  people  running  oil'  and  leaving  you? — A.  No; 
from  people  requiring  more  advances  than  the  work  they  were  doing. 

Q.  Did  they  saw  this  wood  or  cut  it  with  axes  ? — A.  They  cut  it 
with  axes.  There  was  only  one  large  steam  mill  here  in  the  islands. 
Most  of  the  timber  here  is  cut  by  the  Chinese,  and  is  cut  by  a saw  in 
their  hands.  They  object  to  the  sawmill,  because  it  wastes  timber. 
The  way  the  Chinese  cut  it  they  can  cut  a straight  board  out  of  a 
crooked  log.  They  cut  with  a curve,  which  they  say  if  cut  by  a saw- 
mill there  would  be  so  much  loss.  There  was  a sawmill  in  Jalajala. 

Q.  How  long  ago  was  that? — A.  Within  five  years  ago. 

Q.  When  was  that  established"? — A.  Many  years  ago.  I suppose 
over  thirty  years  ago,  but  it  was  only  for  common  timber.  It  did  not 
do  a great  deal  of  business  there. 

Q.  How  did  you  find  the  health  of  the  people  you  were  using  for 
timber  felling? — A.  Splendid;  they  kept  well. 

Q.  When  you  cleared  timber  off  a place  that  was  heavily  wooded, 
did  you  not  create  fever? — A.  I never  noticed  it. 

Q.  Did  you  ever  have  anything  to  do  with  getting  timber  out  of 
Mindoro,  Mr.  Collins? — A.  No. 


84 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  you  know  how  the  people  who  have  worked  there  have  come 
off  in  the  matter  of  fever? — A.  I don’t  know,  but  I don’t  suppose  any 
different  from  elsewhere,  except  the  natives.  Take  them  on  the  whole, 
they  are  pretty  clean.  They  daily  take  their  baths  after  their  work  is 
done,  and  a bath  again,  sometimes. 

Q.  What  kind  of  timber  are  these  immense  big  cascoes  cut  from? — 
A.  An  inferior  kind  of  timber — Tangali. 

Q.  I have  seen  cascoes  that  would  take  sixty  to  a hundred  men,  made 
from  logs  felled  in  North  Panay? — A.  Yes;  I have  seen  some  here, 
too.  Same  kind  of  timber;  also  Loan. 

Q.  Is  there  any  money  in  it? — A.  I never  went  into  that.  The 
natives  used  to  make  them. 

Q.  I have  seen  them  take  a.  crew  to  get  them  out  from  a distance 
inland  ? — A.  They  were  worth  a great  deal  on  account  of  the  difficulty 
of  getting  those  big  trees  down  to  the  beach,  to  the  bank. 

Q.  Do  you  know  those  big,  long  canoes? — A.  Yes;  these  big,  fiat 
boats;  these  flat,  open  boats,  jmd  these  big  ones. 

Q.  Those  long  canoes  are  cut  out  of  one  tree? — A.  Yes,  1 have  seen 
canoes  here  much  wider  than  this  table,  about  half  as  wide  again 
(alluding  to  table  in  audience  room  of  commission  in  Audiencia, 
Manila.) 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  This  table  is  about  50  inches  wide,  is  it  not? — A.  About  50. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  do  you  know  about  the  Chinese  market  for  wood,  Mr. 
Collins  ? — A.  Well,  the  Chinese  market — especially  in  Hongkong — they 
have  got  a union  between  them,  and  if  you  go  to  one  firm  and  they 
offer  you  a price  for  your  wood,  and  then  you  go  to  another  firm  they 
will  offer  you  less  than  the  first,  and  if  you  go  back  to  the  first  firm 
they  will  cut  down  the  first  price  that  they  offered  you. 

Q.  Is  there  a fair  demand  for  timber  over  there? — A.  There  used 
to  be  a fair  demand,  but  it  is  some  years  since  I have  had  anything  to 
do  with  it.  From  the  Philippine  Islands  there  .has  not  been  a great 
deal  of  timber  recently  on  account  of  the  heavy  tax. 

Q.  What  sort  of  timber  do  they  want  there,  principally  ? — A.  For 
house  building  and  shipbuilding. 

Q.  Does  that  timber  have  to  pay  a tax? — A.  In  Foochow. 

Q.  Is  there  any  timber  in  these  islands  suitable  for  railroad  ties? — A. 
Yes,  sir;  quantities. 

Q.  Then  why  did  they  import  railroad  tics  for  this  railroad?— A.  I 
suppose  they  thought  they  could  get  them  cheaper  and  better;  not 
better,  but  cheaper  in  larger  quantities  at  once. 

Q.  Why  was  that,  because  there  was  nobody  here A.  On  account 

of  the  bad  faith  of  these  contractors. 

Q.  Would’nt  the  contractors  live  up  to  their  bargains  after  they 
had  made  them  ? — A.  Sometimes  they  would,  but  generally  it  was  likely 
to  be  a toss  up  whether  they  would  or  not.  Contracts  were  not  bind- 
ing. 

Q.  Do  you  know  why  this  sawmill  at  Lagumtmoc  failed  ? — A.  Well, 
it  failed  on  account  of  bad  management. 

Q.  It  paid  as  long  as  Mr.  Brown  was  in  charge  of  it,  didn’t  it? — A. 
Yes;  he  made  it  and  went  away  to  England  years  ago  to  get  out  of 
the  responsibility  of  it;  and  another  thing  in  which  Mr.  Brown’s 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


85 

policy  was  different  was  because  his  wood  was  cut  by  . steam  he  wanted 
higher  prices  than  were  generally  paid  for  hand  labor,  but  he  could 
not  get  them. 

Q.  I was  told  that  his  business  prospered;  that  it  was  a good  busi- 
ness as  long  as  he  kept  it  in  his  own  hands;  but  that  after  he  left  it  it 
failed  to  pay,  and  I was  told  that  by  Hongkong  people  who  were 
interested  in  it,  and  that  the  men  died  down  there;  that  they  could  not 
keep  their  men  alive  in  that  country. — A.  There  is  only  one  man  that 
I know  of  who  has  died  down  there,  and  that  was  from  sickness  he  got 
in  Manila. 

Q.  Not  fever? — A.  Not  fever. 

Q.  Did  Mr.  Brown  have  any  difficulty  in  getting  saws  that  would 
cut  this  timber  here? — A.  No. 

Q.  Did  he  use  up-and-down  saws  or  circular  saws? — A.  Both. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  he  used  gang  saws  ?— A.  There  is  a saw- 
mill in  Manila  which  uses  gang  saws  and  circular  saws,  but  it  does 
not  pay  to-day.  There  is  another  mill  in  Guneo. 

Q.  Did  I understand  you  to  say  that  they  had  sent  Brown’s  mill  to 
Hongkong? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  If  I understbod  you  correctly,  you  said  that  there  was  no  way 
in  the  old  days  of  a man  getting  the  control  of  the  cutting  of  timber 
on  big  pieces  of  ground  except  by  buying  the  ground  on  which  it  was 
grown  — A.  No;  you  could  get  concessions  from  the  Government  to 
cut  timber  on  the  land  anywhere,  but  you  could  not  cut  on  private 
property  without  making  an  arrangement  with  the  man  who  owned 
the  land;  but  there  were  very  few  people  who  owned  timber  lands. 

Q.  The  land  owned  by  private  individuals  was  mostly  under  cultiva- 
tion?— A.  Mostly  under  cultivation,  or  without  being  under  cultiva- 
tion the  good  timber  has  been  cut  off;  for  instance,  when  he  bought 
the  mountains  and  the  hills  the  timber  was  on  it 

Q.  How  would  that  be,  Mr.  Collins;  suppose  a man  had  a license  to 
cut  in  a given  province,  could  someone  else  with  another  license  come 
in  and  cut  alongside  of  him  ? — A.  There  is  no  help  for  it;  they  could 
not  prevent  him  from  doing  it. 

Q.  They  never  try  using  saws  to  cut  trees  out  here? — A.  No. 

Q.  And  the}'  don’t  use  saws  for  the  squaring  ? — A.  No;  that  is  done 
with  the  ax. 

Q.  What  about  the  shipping  woods  in  the  provinces;  what  sort  of 
conveyances  are  best  suited  to  them  ? — A.  We  have  to  get  a house — either 
bamboo  or  some  of  these  cheap  native  woods  and  build  a house.  The 
ships  have  to  have  ports  to  enter,  and  there  has  to  be  rig  and  tackle  and 
a purchase  in  order  to  get  the  timber  into  them. 

Q.  What  did  this  system  of  inspection  of  mountains  amount  to; 
suppose  a man  started  to  work  cutting  timber  in  Mindoro,  would  anyone 
have  known  about  it  ? — A.  Yes;  the  local  authorities  would  have  a copy 
of  the  license,  and  if  you  went  to  cutting  without  a license  these  fellows 
could  stop  you  unless  they  had  a copy  from  the  government. 

Q.  Could  you  always  have  an  inspector? — A.  He  kept  lookout  after 
that,  because  they  would  never  allow  a ship  to  go  out  without  having 
custom-house  officers  aboard  to  see  that  there  was  no  smuggling.  There 
was  no  possibility  of  there  being.  Nevertheless,  the  inspection  of  moun- 
tains generally  had  a man  there — an  agent.  Besides,  the  custom-house 
officer  would  be  aboard  the  vessel. 

Q.  What  do  you  know  about  the  various  provinces  in  Luzon,  where 


8C> 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


timber  can  be  found  at  the  present  time ? Take  Tayabas,  for  instance. — 
A.  In  every  port  in  Tayabas  you  can  get  timber.  The  principal  thing 
is  to  get  a port  where  the  vessels  can  lay  off — where  you  can  load  your 
timber.  The  townships  are  only  those  on  the  east  coast  and  in  the 
interior  on  the  mountains  where  your  get  your  timber. 

Q.  Of  good  variety  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  that,  you  think,  the  best  place  in  Luzon  at  the  present  time? — 
A.  I would  not  say  it  is  the  best  place.  In  some  parts  of  Zambalez, 
in  Subig,  is  very  good;  and  in  Santa  Cruz  up  the  coast,  in  the  province 
of  Romblon,  there  is  very  good  timber  up  there,  and  also  in  parts  of 
Cagayan,  in  fact  all  through  tin1  island  of  Luzon  there  are  places  where 
there  is  plenty  of  good  timber  to  be  had. 

Q.  Do  you  know  any  places  up  any  of  these  big  rivers?  Take  the 
Rio  Grande  del  Norte. — A.  1 never  was  up  there,  so  I could  not  tell 
you.  I know  about  Cagayan;  there  is  good  timber  up  there,  and  a 
vessel  can  go  to  the  river  and  lay  there  and  load. 

Q.  What  happens  to  this  cleared  ground  after  the  forest  has  been 
weeded  out,  Mr.  Collins,  does  it  grow  up  readily  to  forest  again? — A. 
Very  seldom;  never,  except  one  kind  of  wood,  the  mayapes,  or  another 
kind  of  wood  that  bears  seed.  Here  after  the  tree  is  once  cut  down 
it  never  grows  up  again.  You  might  get  a shoot  off  from  the  roots, 
but  it  takes  some  years  before  it  gets  to  a size  tit  for  use.  The  land 
grows  up  in  a jungle  generally. 

Q.  Is  any  of  it  upon  the  hillside  tit  for  planting  sugar  or  coffee  or 
anything  of  that  kind? — A.  Yes;  they  plant  the  places  where  timber 
was.  In  fact,  you  generally  go  in  and  get  timber,  pick  out  the  best 
timber  and  you  leave  what  you  don't  want,  and  there  is  a lot  of  the 
woods  here  not  even  tit  for  firewood.  You  have  such  a large  variety 
to  pick  from.  If  you  want  a hard  wood  you  can  get  several  kinds;  if 
you  want  a soft  wood  you  can  get  it;  some  of  the  hard  wood  isn't  tit 
for  firewood;  some  of  it  wouldn’t  stand  three  months  in  wet,  it  would 
decay,  so  we  try  to  get  the  best. 

Q.  After  timber  is  felled  is  it  likely  to  be  injured  before  it  is  sawed? 
Does  the  weather  affect  it  or  do  insects  go  for  it? — A.  Sometimes 
insects  do.  Some  kinds  of  wood  are  better  for  being  laid  by.  The 
bark  will  decay  and  leave  the  solid  trunk. 

Q.  Do  these  very  hard  woods,  suitable  for  inside  furniture,  furnish- 
ings, take  fire  readily  ? — A.  Yes;  but  not  as  the  pine  wood  nor  as  the  fir. 

Q.  As  quick  as  pine? — A.  The  same  as  pine,  but  it  is  harder  here. 
These  woods  will  burn,  but  they  require  a lot  of  tire  to  make  them. 
They  would  not  burn  as  quick  as  pine  does,  but  once  they  take  tire 
they  will  burn  down  to  the  last  piece  of  it. 

Q.  What  about  acle? — A.  It  is  a splendid  wood,  used  for  most  any- 
thing. No  particular  use  for  it;  anything;  building,  constructing. 

Q.  What  color  is  it  ? — A.  Dark  red. 

Q.  Is  it  hard  ? — A.  It  is  hard;  it  lasts  well;  it  is  one  of  the  best  Luzon 
woods  for  outside  work  you  can  have. 

Q.  Is  it  handsome  enough  to  use  for  furniture  or  anything  of  that 
sort? — A.  It  is;  it  has  a tine  grain;  it  is  not  quite  as  tine  as  nara;  it 
takes  a good  polish. 

Q.  The  trees — of  what  size  are  they? — A.  They  run  up  to,  say  10 
or  50  feet  in  length — the  logs — and  they  square  about  24  to  30  inches. 

Q.  Is  it  a common  wood? — A.  It  is  common,  but  it  is  a good  wood 
and  is  generally  sought  after. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


87 


Q.  Alintatao? — A.  That  is  a tine  wood  for  furniture  or  any  other 
purpose  you  have  a mind  to  use  it.  It  is  a good,  serviceable,  hard  wood. 

Q.  Tell  me  how  that  grows. — A.  You  have  got  it  there,  I guess. 

By  Mr.  MacArtiiur: 

Q.  Is  it  abundant? — A.  In  some  provinces,  not  others.  Perhaps  if 
you  go  to  Tabayas  you  would  not  get  a tree  in  the  whole  place.  In 
other  places  you  will  find  a pretty  good  lot  of  it.  I know  in  Antique — 

that  is  on  the  west  coast  of  Panay 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Amuguis?—  A.  There  are  three  or  four  different  kinds  of  wood 
bv  the  same  name.  The  amuguis  proper  is  a hard  red  wood  and  very 
useful;  but  they  have  a white  and  a red  and  some  other  inferior  wood 
that  they  call  amuguis. 

Q.  Is  amuguis  good  for  flooring? — A.  Yes;  some  of  this  here  (refer- 
ring to  floor  in  audience  room  of  commission)  is  amuguis,  but  you  have 
got  the  white  and  the  red. 

Q.  What  about  anagap? — A.  I don’t  know  that  wood.  They  have 
got  another  wood  something  similar  to  that.  Anagap — I don’t  know 
that  wood. 

Q.  Antipolo  ? — A.  That  is  a very  good  wood.  It  is  a yellowish  sort 
of  wood,  very  hard;  it  is  very  hard  on  a saw. 

Q.  What  is  it  used  for? — A.  Well,  it  is  not  generally  used.  Well, 
they  use  it,  of  course,  for  these  native  houses,  but  it  is  so  hard  they 
don't  care  about  using  it  for  constructing  buildings  or  anything  of  that 
sort, 

Q.  It  would  turn  the  edge  of  an  ax,  T suppose? — A.  Yes;  and  of 
saws,  too. 

Q.  Will  it  take  a good  polish? — A.  Yes;  I guess  it  will  take  a good 
polish.  I have  not  seen  it  polished. 

Q.  Has  it  a fine  grain  ? — A.  Between  coarse  and  fine;  I don’t  know. 
It  is  a good  furniture  wood. 

Q.  Apiton? — A.  Very  big  timber.  You  get  balao  from  that,  which 
is  a local  gum,  good  for  coarse  varnish,  paints.  You  mix  it  with  paint, 
and  by  heating  it  and  mixing  it  up  a little  you  make  putty  for  cascoes. 
They  get  that  from  living  trees  by  bleeding  the  tree.  They  make  an 
incision  into  the  trees  and  this  gum  runs  out  of  itself;  but  it  is  not  the 
greatest  gum-giving  tree.  They  have  other  classes  of  trees  that  give 
more  gum. 

Q.  What  are  those  other  trees  ? — A.  I forget  now  the  names  of  those 
trees.  It  is  so  many = 

Q.  Does  almacega  grow  here  in  Luzon? — A.  Yes.  It  comes  from 
such  trees  like  apeton,  trees  of  that  kind;  but  they  have  good  big 
names,  which  I forget  now. 

Q.  Is  the  apeton  to  be  found  in  any  quantity  here  in  Luzon  ? — A. 
Farther  back  in  the  forest.  The  biggest  part  of  the  musical  wood 
comes  from  Mindanao,  Davao,  and  this  place. 

Q.  Balao — here  is  another  wood. — A.  That  is  about  the  same  as 
apeton.  Balao  and  apeton  are  pretty  much  the  same. 

Q.  Banaba? — A.  It  is  a fine  wood  for  planks,  for  planking  ships,  or 
for  any  purpose  at  all.  It  is  never  used  much  for  furniture,  but  it  is 
a fine  lasting  wood  for  ships,  for  construction. 

Q.  Baugcal  ? — A.  It  is  a yellow  wood,  and  is  used  for  ceilings  or  for 
most  any  ordinary  purpose.  It  it  used  generally  in  these  harps,  musi- 
cal instruments,  guitars,  banjos,  and  things  of  that  kind. 


88 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Is  it  hard  wood? — A.  It  is  not  extra  hard;  it  is  soft  compared 
with  the  hard  woods  here. 

Q.  Bansalaguy  ? — A.  It  is  one  of  the  hardest  woods  we  have  here. 
It  is  straight  timber,  and  the  natives  like  to  make  their  ax  handles  out 
of  it.  Straight  grain  and  hard,  and  great  for  construction. 

Q.  While  I am  reading  from  here,  if  I come  to  any  wood  that  is 
particularly  fitted  for  furniture  or  inside  furnishing  please  tell  me. 
Baticulin  i A.  That  is  used  for  making  saints;  they  make  images  out 
of  that. 

Q.  Would  it  be  suitable  for  furniture,  etc.  ? — A.  Not  much,  except 
for  carving.  1 have  never  known  of  it  being  used  for  furniture. 

Q.  There  is  another  thing  to  think  about,  whether  this  wood  would 
be  good  for  machinery  for  agricultural  implements.  You  have  spoken 
of  one  wood  that  was  good  for  ax  handles.  Batitinan? — A.  That  is 
a very  good  wood  for  construction;  it  is  very  much  used  here  in 
Manila  in  housebuilding.  ** 

Q.  Betis ? — A.  That  is  a hard  wood  that  list'd  to  be  used  for  the  keels 
of  big  ships  or  vessels  of  all  kinds.  It  is  a hard  wood,  straight  grain, 
and  cut  in  pretty  long  timber. 

Q.  Balongita? — A.  It  is  a wood  something  similar;  it  is  a wood  of 
which  there  is  no  large  amount  anywhere;  it  is  a hard  wood;  it  is  black 
and  white  in  color,  and  generally  it  is  used  mostly  for  firewood. 

Q.  Calan tas? — A.  That  is  cedar. 

Q.  Have  you  told  us  about  it? — A.  Yes: 

Q.  Calumpang? — .V.  I don't  know;  it  is  not  a commercial  wood. 

Q.  Calumpitf — A.  It  is  not  a big  wood,  and  it  is  not  much  used; 
you  might  use  it  if  you  can  not  get  another  wood. 

Q.  Caniogon? — A.  That  comes  next  to  ebony,  but  it  is  a different 
colored  wood;  it  is  along  in  streaks,  white  and  red. 

Q.  Very  hard? — A.  Pretty  hard.  A good  furniture  wood. 

Q.  How  large  does  it  grow  ?-  A.  I have  never  seen  any  big  timber; 
never  seen  any  over  about  12  inches. 

Q.  Does  ebony  grow  here? — A.  Yes;  plenty  of  it. 

Q.  Camuning? — A.  That  is  a small  wood,  only  fit  for  walking  sticks; 
it  is  the  best  walking  stick  you  can  get. 

Q.  Can  that  lie  had  here  in  town  sometimes  ? — A.  Yes;  but  it  is  rare, 
especially  just  now.  It  is  hard  finding  it:  you  can't  get  it. 

Q.  Where  does  it  come  from? — A.  Nearly  all  over  the  island. 

Q.  What  is  its  color,  dark  or  light? — A.  It  is  hard  and  hard  to 
work;  it  is  a hard  wood  and  yellowish  in  color. 

Q.  Does  it  take  a good  polish A.  A very  good  polish,  but  does 
not  grow  large. 

Q.  Is  it  anything  like  our  hickory? — A.  No;  not  exactly.  It  .is  a 
hard  wood;  harder  than  hickory. 

Q.  Dinglas? — A.  I am  not  acquainted  with  that  wood. 

Q.  Dungol? — A.  Well,  that  might  be  denigon  in  some  places,  which 
you  have  mentioned  already.  If  it  is  denigon  you  have  got  that  down. 
It  is  a wood  used  for  most  any  purpose. 

Q.  General  construction? — A.  General  construction. 

Q.  Ihlang-ihlang? — A.  That  is  only  fit  for  floors;  you  have  got  some 
right  here  in  this  place. 

Q.  Now  as  to  coffee  trees;  how  long  does  it  take  to  grow  from  the 
plant? — A.  Some  three  or  four  years;  two  to  four  years. 

Q.  Is  there  anything  in  it  in  a commercial  way  ? — A.  Yes. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


89 


* Q.  Is  it  a safe  thing  to  raise;  is  there  anything  that  kills  the  trees  ? — 
A.  Well,  1 guess  it  is  safe;  a good  many  have  been  planted  in  the 
province  of  Bulacan. 

Q.  What  sort  of  culture  do  you  have  to  give? — A.  Well,  I can’t 
give  you  much  information  about  that,  because  I never  had  any  prac- 
tice in  it  at  all. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anybody  who  has  had  much  experience  with  it? — 
A.  No;  it  is  growing  all  over  the  place,  so  that  they  must  handle  it; 
they  just  plant  the  stem,  or  something  of  that  kind. 

Q.  Do  they  pick  the  flowers  by  hand? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  they  get  the  oil  ? — A.  By  distilling.  They 
pick  the  flowers,  and  put  them  in  a vat;  I don't  know  just  how  they  do 
it.  These  druggists  here  in  Manila  may  tell  you. 

Q.  Ipil? — A.  You  have  information  about  that  already. 

Q.  Lanetc? — A.  It  is  a small  wood;  hard,  light  wood.  It  makes  nice 
chairs,  nice  furnishing. 

Q.  It  is  a common  wood ? — A.  Not  very  common;  it  is  not  commonly 
used,  but  they  make  some  very  nice  furniture  out  of  it;  that  is,  where 
they  don't  require  very  broad  pieces. 

Q.  Is  there  any  place  in  Manila  where  they  use  these  finer  woods  in 
making  furniture  ? — A.  Yes;  the  Chinese  up  the  San  Jacinto  way — the 
furniture  makers — they  use  that  wood  pretty  much. 

Q.  What  would  you  say  was  the  very  finest  of  the  Philippine  woods 
for  furniture,  regardless  of  cost  and  difficulty  of  working  or  anything 
else? — A.  I would  recommend  alintatao  and  nara;  of  course,  there  is 
calamang  and  ebony. 

Q.  I have  heard  a good  deal  about  lauan  ? — A.  A very  poor  wood. 
It  is  used  for  building  bancos  and  cascoes  and  things  of  that  kind.  It 
grows  very  straight. 

Q.  Luyan  ? — A.  1 don't  know  the  wood.  Is  it  ebony  ? In  different 
provinces  they  have  different  names  for  the  same  wood. 

Q.  Is  that  banton  ? — A.  It  is  to  be  found  nearly  all  over  the  islands. 
The  trees  grow  to  be  about  12  inches  in  diameter.  It  is  only  the  heart 
of  the  tree  that  is  black.  You  can  get  about  8 or  10  inches  of  wood, 
which  I have  seen  without  the  bark. 

Q.  How  long  do  you  let  the  wood  lay  after  it  is  cut  before  it  is  sea- 
soned?— A.  I don’t  know  that  I can  tell  you. 

Q.  AVhat  do  they  do  with  their  woods  in  seasoning  them  here;  do 
they  use  acids,  or  do  they  let  them  la}r  on  the  ground  till  they  are  sea- 
soned?— A.  They  never  take  any  trouble;  they  just  get  it  to  the  ship, 
or  anywhere  else  they  can  get  it. 

Q.  Malabonga  ? — A.  A very  poor  wood  indeed. 

Q.  Maladujat? — A.  1 don’t  know  the  wood. 

Q.  Tabay? — A.  That  is  a very  good  wood. 

Q.  What  is  it  good  for? — A.  It  is  good  for  furniture,  too. 

Q.  What  size  ? — A.  I can’t  tell  }rou  exactly  what  size  they  grow. 
That  book  there  gives  a description  of  these  woods. 

Q.  It  does  some  of  them,  but  I would  rather  have  your  statement 
in  regard  to  them  than  that  in  the  book.  Malatapay  ? — A.  That  is 
a very  good  wood,  it  is  something  similar  to  oak,  similar  but  not  as 
good  as  oak.  It  has  a straight  grain. 

Q.  What  is  it  used  for,  construction  ? — A.  Used  for  making  barrels 
and  staves  and  for  most  anything. 

Q.  You  say  it  is  used  mostly  for  barrels  and  staves? — A.  Yes;  that 
is  magachapuy. 


90 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Managasoro ? — A.  It  is  not  a very  good  wood,  still  it  can  be  used 
for  a good  many  things,  for  bunkancas,  dugouts.  The  Spaniards  used 
it  instead  of  mangachapuy,  as  it  cost  less;  they  used  to  pass  it  for  that. 

Q.  Mayapis? — A.  It  is  a very  light  wood,  used  for  inside  work,  for 
ceilings  and  things  of  that  kind  in  houses,  and  for  making  cases,  pack- 
ing cases  for  cigar  boxes,  and  things  of  that  kind,  that  is,  cases  for 
packing  cigar  boxes  in — square  boxes. 

Q.  Molave? — A.  That  is  one  of  the  best  woods  on  the  island;  used 
for  general  purposes. 

Q.  (Mr.  Mac  Arthur.)  What  about  banaba? — A.  There  is  always  a 
market  for  that. 

Q.  Nato? — A.  Nato  is  a good  wood.  I believe.  I have  shipped  that 
wood,  but  I forget  now  the  description  of  it. 

Q.  Palomaria? — A.  It  is  a very  good  wood,  somewhat  similar  to 
mangachapuy;  it  makes  tine  masts  for  ships.  There  is  another  wood 
they  call  palomaria,  plia,  which  makes  splendid  hubs  for  carriages. 
It  is  a tine  wood,  and  it  is  to  be  had  on  the  beach  between  salt  and 
fresh  water. 

Q.  Is  there  any  sap  in  this  wood.  It  says  here  that  they  make  oil 
from  it? — A.  From  the  palomaria? 

Q.  It  says  that  they  make  balsam  to  cure  wounds? — A.  Well,  there 
is  another  wood  that  you  can  get  oil  from ; I forget  the  name  of  it 
now.  But  palomaria  that  I know  is  a very  good  wood  and  something 
similar  to  mangachapuy. 

Q.  Palo-pino? — A.  I don’t  know  the  wood. 

Q.  Pasag? — A.  That  is  a very  hard  wood,  next  to  dungan  anci  used 
for  pretty  much  the  same  purposes. 

Q.  Palayen  or  roble? — A.  I don’t  know  the  wood. 

Q.  Sampalog? — A.  That  is  the  tamarin  tree. 

What  is  it  good  for  ? — A.  Well,  they  don’t  use  it  for  anything  else 
to  get  the  tamarins  off.  The  fruit  is  very  good,  too.  The  natives  use 
the  grown  fruit  for  boiling  with  their  fish  and  meat  or  things  of  that 
kind.  The  dried  tamarins  are  also  used  for  food. 

Q.  Santol? — A.  That  is  a fruit  tree.  They  have  got  another  wood 
called  Malay  santol,  which  is  a better  wood  than  the  santol  itself. 

Q.  What  sort  of  fruit  grows  on  this? — A.  Fruit  about  the  size  of  a 
pipin,  red,  with  big  stones  inside;  they  make  a sort  of  preserve  out 
of  it. 

Q.  Sibucoa? — A.  That  is  a dyewood. 

Q.  Wliat  sort  of  dye? — A.  Red.  They  call  it  callecampechee  in 
Mexico,  and  here  in  Manila  they  make  lots  of  wine  out  of  it,  vinotinto. 

Q.  They  use  it  as  an  adulterant  for  the  wine? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Tangile? — A.  Used  for  building  cascoes  or  bancas. 

Q.  Teca? — A.  Well,  I have  seen  what  they  call  taka  here,  but  I 
never  had  anything  to  do  with  it. 

Q.  They  haven’t  the  taka  wood  in  China? — A.  In  China — they 
haven’t  it  there,  they  have  to  import  it  from  other  places. 

Q.  Tindalo? — A.  Very  fine  wood,  dark-red  wood. 

Q.  What  is  it  used  for? — A.  It  can  be  used  for  furniture,  but  they 
use  it  for  general  construction,  too. 

Q.  Yecal? — A.  A very  good  wood  for  construction. 

Q.  Anusep? — A.  I don’t  know  the  wood. 

Q.  Aranga? — A.  A very  fine  wood  used  for  construction. 

Q.  Cubi? — A.  1 don't  know  it. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


91 


Q.  Macasin  ? — A.  A good  wood  again  for  construction. 

Q.  Malacadios  catmon? — A.  That  is  an  ordinary  sort  of  wood;  it 
is  used  for  different  purposes;  1 don’t  think  it  has  much  value  fpr  com- 
mercial purposes. 

Q.  Marang? — A.  A light  hard  wood  used  sometimes  for  carving 
purposes,  but  it  is  a better  wood  than  baticulin. 

Q.  Do  3rou  know  any  of  these  trees  that  do  produce  gums  or  juices 
that  are  specially  used  ? — A.  The  one  that  produces  most  of  the  gum 
and  most  of  the  oil  is  the  pajo.  It  gives  a fruit  something  like  the 
mango,  and  there  is  another  that  produces  a fruit  about  that  size,  too. 
This  they  crush  and  get  the  oil  out  of  it.  Pajo;  that  is  the  name  of 
the  ti’ce  that  this  oil  is  got  from. 

Q.  Do  you  know  any  plants  around  here  that  they  produce  and  use 
for  medicinal  purposes? — A.  Yes;  there  is  a tremendous  lot  of  them. 
I could  not  begin  to  tell  you. 

Q.  Do  you  know  any  that  are  really  important? — A.  Some  are  very 
good.  There  are  people  who  know  all  about  that  business.  There 
are  lots  of  plants  that  the  natives  use  that  are  actually  worth  nothing 
for  medicinal  purposes,  and  there  are  some  here  which  they  use  for 
blisters — just  touch  your  hand  and,  by  George,  in  a short  time  you 
have  a blister  raised  up  like  a fly  blister. 

Q.  Do  }tou  know  the  name  of  it? — A.  I don’t  know  the  name. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  me  anyone  who  has  taken  an  interest  in  these 
medicinal  plants  who  would  be  likely  to  know  about  them  ? — A.  There 
is  a book  published 

Q.  By  Dr.  Tavera? — A.  I think  it  is.  There  is  a priest  that  pub- 
lished a book,  who  seemed  to  know  a good  deal  about  it;  he  is  about 
the  best  authority.  I forget  the  name  of  the  book  now,  but  there  are 
a Jot  of  fibers,  lots  of  woods  of  different  kinds  and  different  kinds  of 
vines  that  grow  on  the  islands.  The  fibers,  if  they  had  a different 
way  of  getting  them  out  so  that  they  would  not  cost  so  much  labor, 
they  would  be  very  much  more  useful;  indeed,  lots  of  them  for  differ- 
ent things,  very  likely  most  of  them  for  the  same  use  that  you  put 
hemp  to,  and  there  are  some  even  finer  than  hemp. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  that  has  a longer  fiber  than  hemp  has  ? — 
A.  I can  not  tell  3 011  truthfully  about  that. 

Q.  Do  3'ou  know  of  any  that  are  stronger? — A.  There  are  some 
which  are  stronger.  There  is  one  that  they  tell  me  about  up  in  Palte, 
up  in  the  mountains  of  San  Antonio — I forget  the  name  of  it  now. 
But  the3T  have  got  different  kinds  that  can  be  used  for  the  fibers, 
anyway. 

R3r  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  As  a whole,  are  the  islands  well  wooded — is  there  a quantity  of 
wood  upon  them  ? — A.  Well,  the  islands  are  pretty  well  wooded,  but 
the  difficulty  is  that  it  is  such  a haul  to  the  shore  from  where  you 
get  the  timber.  That  is  the  greatest  work  that  they  have  to  do.  You 
always  have  to  look  out  for  a good  port,  and  have  the  timber  hauled 
in  such  a wa3r  that  there  wouldn’t  be  very  much  difficulty  about  it. 

By  Professor  Worcester  : 

Q.  There  is  a great  deal  of  wood  that  is  not  accessible? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Most  of  the  timber  has  been  shipped  in  the  form  of  logs? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  it  pay  to  cut  it  on  the  spot  in  the  shape  in  which  it 


92 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


would  be  used  ? — A.  Yes.  There  is  a place  in  the  interior  where  they 
could  get  timber  and  make  roads,  and  it  is  much  better  to  have  the 
timber  cut  in  proper  shape— it  is  more  easily  transferred. 

Q.  You  could  use  a portable  mill?- — A.  Yes;  and  3tou  would  not 
have  to  go  far — Malolos;  there  is  splendid  timber  up  there. 

Q.  Across  the  bay  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  far  they  have  to  go  to  get  that  timber  now? — 
A.  No. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  how  the  fever  is  there?  Is  there 
very  much  ?—  A.  Why,  there  is  no  more  fever  there  than  there  is  else- 
where. There  is  any  amount  of  coal  and  iron  in  Mindoro;  and  gold, 
too,  by  all  reports.  I have  seen  coal  from  Mindoro;  it  is  very  good, 
too.  Since  1 saw  you  last  I was  up  in  the  gold  districts  of  Paracale. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  any  information  about  that? — A.  There  is 
plenty  of  timber  up  there,  up  that  way,  too,  and  you  take  pretty  near 
the  whole  of  the  Calamianes,  north  Calamianes,  and  you  have  got  any 
amount  of  mines  of  quartz;  alluvial  quartz  mines  are  about  the  prin- 
cipal mines  there  are  up  there. 

Q.  How  are  the  people  in  Calamianes  Norte? — A.  They  are  even 
more  civilized  than  those  down  here  in  Manila,  better  to  get  along 
with,  and  they  will  work.  They  were  getting,  when  I was  down  there 
last,  37^  cents  a day  and  finding  themselves,  but  now,  since  Aguinaldo 
has  raised  the  wages,  they  will  want  more,  very  likely  50  cents  or  Si 
a day. 

Q.  Do  you  know  this  man  Rudolph  Yon  Bosch? — A.  Yes;  for  only 
a few  years.  I have  heard  of  this  man. 

Q.  He  has  been  in  the  timber  business? — A.  He  has  started  in  the 
timber  business;  1 don't  know  that  he  has  done  a great  deal  at  it. 

Meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  MELLIZA. 

Manila,  May  1S00. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Den  by,  and 
Professor  Worcester,  commissioners,  and  Mr.  John  R.  MacArthur, 
secretary,  and  Senors  Rosario  and  Melliza. 

President  Schurman.  The  commission  would  be  glad  to  hear  what 
you  have  to  say  on  the  situation  in  general  and  have  it  taken  down  in 
writing  for  future  use  and  for  reference.  We  understand  you  are  here 
as  private  individuals.  Will  you  kindly  proceed  to  make  any  state- 
ment you  wish.  We  want  to  take  notes  of  it.  Will  you  kindly  repeat 
what  you  have  already  said  in  order  that  we  may  have  it  recorded  for 
future  reference. 

Senor  Melliza.  I understand  that  it  is  possible  to  make  peace  without 
violence  or  without  force  of  arms  by  two  means — one  of  them  by  calling 
the  enlightened  natives  of  tin*  country  together,  in  order  that  they  may 
explain  to  the  natives  who  have  arms  the  good  feeling  which  America 
has  toward  the  Filipinos;  and  the  second  is  to  publish  a constitution, 
in  order  that  the  people  who  are  under  arms  may  see  that  they  are  safe 
to  enter  the  city  and  to  discuss  an  arrangement,  and  that  some  of 
them  may  have  a part  in  the  government  of  the  Philippine  Islands; 
and  L think  it  expedient  to  pay  no  attention  to  the  Spanish  at  all, and, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


93 


if  possible,  to  send  them  out  of  the  country.  The  reason  is  this:  That 
the  friar  is  the  man  who  has  tried  to  dominate  the  people,  and  the 
people  have  a great  repugnance  to  the  friars.  One  of  the  reasons 
that  resistance  to  America  was  decided  on  in  the  Philippine  Islands 
was  the  fact  that  the  friars’  property  was  seen  to  be  respected,  and  they 
remained  here.  You  know  in  the  treaty  of  peace  it  was  promised  that 
the  property  of  the  church  should  be  respected. 

President  Schurman.  It  was  property  rights  in  general  that  should 
be  respected,  and  the  reason  for  that  is  that  under  our  Constitution 
and  laws  all  private  property  is  to  be  respected.  It  was  not  to  satisfy 
the  friars. 

Senor  Melliza.  There  are  means,  if  the  Filipinos  are  to  be  per- 
mitted to  take  part  in  the  government,  to  take  away  the  property  of 
the  friars  from  them  by  pacific  means,  and  to  get  them  out  of  the 
country.  Furthermore,  the  property  of  the  friars  is  not  really  theirs. 
The  properties  that  they  have  were  properties  given  them  by  the 
people,  not  for  the  friars  themselves,  but  for  the  welfare  of  the  givers’ 
souls,  and  for  purposes  of  benefit  to  the  people  and  purposes  of  educa- 
tion and  other  benefits  to  the  people. 

President  Schurman.  If  that  is  a fact  that  can  be  established  by 
law,  of  course  they  must  lose  their  property.  It  is  a matter  of  proof 
in  the  courts. 

Senor  Melliza.  Furthermore,  this  property  was  legally  acquired 
by  the  revolutionists;  for  they;  the  friars,  were  the  enemies  of  the 
revolutionists;  they  took  up  arms  against  the  revolutionists  for  the 
Spanish  Government.  The  reason  that  it  would  not  be  well  to  leave 
the  Spaniards  here  is  that  they  might  make  parties  among  themselves 
and  among  their  descendants  and  among  the  natives  against  the  United 
States,  and  against  its  republican  institutions.  The  reason  for  this  is 
that  the  Spanish  live  very  well  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  and  for  that 
reason  they  need  them,  and  for  that  reason  they  will  not  be  willing  to 
leave  here.  F urthermore,  the  treaty  of  peace  did  not  insure  the  Spanish 
people,  but  the  Spanish  Government  alone;  and  according  to  the 
Spanish  constitution  the  Spanish  people  can  not  lose  any  territory 
without  their  own  consent;  and  for  this  reason  many  Spaniards  who 
remain  here  will  endeavor  to  get  their  government  to  come  here  again 
and  make  trouble  about  their  pretensions. 

Now  I would  like  to  have  a few  questions  put  to  me  in  relation  to 
whatever  difficulties  the  members  of  the  commission  may  see,  so  that 
I may  answer  them. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Down  in  Iloilo  and  Panav  are  the  prospects  for  peace  good  ? — A. 
Yes;  they  are  making  it  known  that  the  desire  of  the  Americans  is  the 
peace  and  well-being  of  the  archipelago. 

Q.  We  have  already  announced  that  in  our  proclamation. — A.  The 
people  look  upon  this  proclamation  as  somewhat  obscure  and  fear 
that  they  may  be  deceived,  because  the  Spanish  Government  has  been 
accustomed,  even  when  stating  things  more  clearly  than  this  proclama- 
tion states  them,  not  to  fulfill  their  promises.  For  this  reason  it  is 
necessary  to  publish  a proclamation  more  clear  than  this,  stating  the 
articles  of  the  constitution  that  will  be  made,  and  assuring  the  natives 
that  the  Americans  are  their  friends  by  giving  them  a part  in  the 
government. 


94 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  There  arc  two  points  raised  by  Sefior  Melliza.  One  is  that  our 
proclamation  is  not  clear.  The  other  is  that  the  Philippine  people  do 
not  trust  us.  The  answer  to  that  is  that  the  natives  of  the  country 
who  are  convinced  that  the  proclamation  is  clear  and  in  good  faith 
will  cause  their  fellow-natives  to  distrust  the  revolution  and  announce 
themselves  as  friends  of  the  American  side,  and  when  they  see  that  the 
country  is  divided  they  will  not  give  confidence  to  the  revolution.  The 
commission  wants  your  confidence  and  the  commission  assures  you 
that  this  is  the  intention  of  the  United  States. — A.  I believe  that,  but 
I do  not  think  the  people  now  believe  it. 

Q.  You  can  be  a missionary,  then,  and  assure  the  people  of  the  good 
intentions  of  the  Americans. — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  In  the  second  place A.  I have  acted  in  this  manner  in 

Iloilo  also,  and  have  held  conferences  with  General  Miller,  and  General 
Miller  has  taken  note  of  it 

Q.  Coming  to  the  second  point,  the  question  of  obscurity;  arc  there 
any  points  in  our  proclamation  which  you  think  obscure  about  which 
you  wish  information? — A.  Yes.  It  seems  to  me  it  is  absolutely  nec- 
essary that  the  law  should  be  published.  The  law  which  will  direct 
the  Philippine  people  should  be  set  forth  in  detail. 

Q.  We  can  only  announce  general  principles  now.  No  law  can  be 
announced  until  Congress  acts.- — A.  Then  the  policy  would  be  not  to 
advance  further,  and  in  case  the  Philippines  should  advance,  why, 
the  Americans  would  be  in  a position  to  punish  them  well,  being  in 
greater  force. 

Q.  That  is  a question  with  which  the  commission  has  nothing  to  do. 
It  is  a military  question. — A.  I have  said  this  because  in  these  times  of 
war  there  is  an  intimate  relation  between  military  and  civil  affairs. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  the  Philippine  people  are  ready  to  accept 
American  sovereignty?  That  is  the  important  point. — A.  The  people 
are  so  accustomed  to  being  deceived  by  the  Spanish  that  when  a thing 
is  told  them  they  wish  to  be  told  all  about  it.  For  my  part,  I under- 
stand what  sovereignty  is,  but  they  do  not,  and  they  think  that  sov- 
ereignty might  be  something  bad  for  them. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  this  form  of  government  being  put  into 
effect  at  once,  supposing  we  had  peace  to-morrow,  to  wit:  A governor- 
general  for  the  archipelago,  appointed  by  the  President  of  the  United 
States;  heads  of  departments  (secretaries)  appointed  by  the  governor- 
general:  all  the  important  judges  appointed  by  the  President  of  the 
United  States;  these  judges  and  heads  of  departments  to  be  either 
Americans  or  Filipinos,  or  both;  and,  lastly,  a consultative  or  general 
advisory  body  which  should  be  elected  by  the  people;  the  governor- 
general  to  have  power  to  veto  without  waiting  for  the  action  of  Con- 
gress; the  suffrage  of  the  people  to  be  hereafter  determined. — A. 
For  our  part — that  is,  for  the  more  enlightened  people — the  form  of 
government  does  not  make  so  much  difference  as  the  acts  of  the  gov- 
ernment. For  example,  the  monarchy  of  Great  Britain,  under  the  rule 
of  Queen  Victoria,  is  much  more  desirable  than  the  Republic  of  Chile. 

Q.  You  have  asked  us  for  a scheme  of  government,  something  that 
would  satisfy  you.  Now  I ask  you,  as  a hypothesis,  how  that  form  of 
government  would  satisfy  3Tou,  supposing  it  went  into  effect  to-morrow 
and  lasted  until  Congress  took  action  ? — A.  For  the  enlightened  people 
the  form  of  government  itself  would  not  make  much  difference,  but  for 
the  common  people,  Avho  are  very  much  inflamed  and  arrayed  against 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


95 


the  Spanish  Government,  and  have  the  idea  of  not  being  governed  at 
all  except  by  themselves,  the  plan  will  be  very  difficult.  It  will  be 
very  difficult  to  get  this  plan  into  their  heads. 

Q.  But,  in  the  first  place,  if  we  can  satisfy  the  enlightened  people, 
we  shall  expect  them  to  convince  the  masses  of  the  people  that  it  is 
good;  and,  secondly,  under  this  scheme  of  government  as  outlined, 
Filipinos  may  have  positions  as  heads  of  departments  and  as  judges, 
and  1 suppose  all  the  positions  in  the  general  advisory  council. — A. 
I. have  said  what  I have  simply  with  regard  to  the  truth,  and  for  no 
private  interests  on  my  part,  for  I now  live  a very  retired  life  on  a 
plantation  of  my  own,  and  in  order  to  make  me  president  of  Visayas 
they  had  to  threaten  me  with  a revolver.  General  Miller  asked  me  to 
be  provost-marshal-general  of  Iloilo,  and  I refused.  I simply  wish 
to  tell  the  truth  as  fairly  as  I know  how. 

Q.  Of  course  this  plan  is  a scheme  of*  general  government  for  the 
Archipelago.  The  plan  of  government  for  the  various  provinces  and 
islands  we  are  not  prepared  to  suggest  even  as  a hypothesis  yet.  We 
are  studying  it. — A.  I am  now  going  to  tell  the  commission,  in  order 
that  they  may  understand  fully  the  causes  tor  the  resistance  in  this 
country. 

Q.  We  want  just  that  and  will  be  much  obliged  to  you  for  it  ? — A. 
AYhat  the  country  wants  is  that  the  country  itself  shall  be  the  one  to 
dictate  its  laws;  it  wishes  to  be  the  one  to  execute  its  laws  by  means 
of  functionaries  who  shall  be  natives.  It  furthermore  wishes  that  the 
United  States  should  only  appoint  a governor  here  who  shall  watch 
the  country  and  see  whether  the  country  fulfills  perfectly  what  the 
laws  have  promised. 

Q.  What  powers  would  you  give  that  governor-general  ? — A.  The 
power  of  a protector  and  the  power  to  interfere  in  case  the  country 
does  not  fulfill  its  laws  as  it  has  made  them;  to  dictate  the  fulfillment 
of  the  law  in  internal  affairs,  that  is  what  we  want.  We  are  willing 
to  leave  international  affairs  to  the  governor-general.  In  international 
affairs  we  are  willing  to  leave  everything  to  America. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Would  }Tou  not  have  with  that  form  of  government  a council  to 
assist  and  advise  the  governor-general,  which  council  would  be  com- 
posed in  part  of  Filipinos?  Would  it  not  lie  a good  thing  to  have  a 
council  composed  of  Filipinos  oi  Americans,  or  both,  to  advise  him 
what  to  do  ? — A.  Yes,  it  would  be  a very  good  plan.  It  would  be 
expedient,  but  the  question  now  is  a question  of  power.  The  country 
has  been  so  oppressed  by  the  Spaniards  that  now  they  wish  to  be 
perfectly  free  in  internal  affairs. 

Q.  As  I understand  from  what  you  have  told  us,  this  governor- 
general  is  to  see  that  the  laws  are  properly  executed,  and  I suppose,  of 
course — as  in  all  forms  of  government — this  governor  would  have  the 
right  to  veto  any  bill  that  he  thought,  or  his  council  thought,  was  not 
for  the  good  of  the  country  ? — A.  Of  course  he  would  have  the  veto 
power;  if  he  did  not  have  the  veto  power  he  would  amount  to  nothing. 

Q.  As  regards  the  courts.  There  would  be  very  great  trouble  if 
there  was  no  tribunal  in  which  a foreigner  could  bring  his  suits,  and 
as  these  courts  exist  in  all  the  countries  of  the  world,  notably  in  China, 
Japan,  Siam,  Korea,  and  all  the  other  countries  of  the  East,  what 
would  you  think  of  having  at  least  one  court  which  would  have  the 


96 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


right  to  try  a case  in  which  foreigners  would  he  interested,  whose 
judges  should  he  appointed  by  the  President  of  the  United  States? 

President  Schurman.  I am  very  sorry  that  we  are  unable,  owing  to 
an  appointment  which  we  have  with  other  gentlemen  at  this  hour,  and 
who  have  arrived  and  are  waiting  for  us,  to  continue  this  interesting 
interview,  which  has  been  very  instructive.  We  are  anxious  to  know 
when  it  will  be  convenient  for  you  to  resume  it,  when  we  shall  be 
delighted  to  conclude  our  talk. 

After  some  discussion  it  was  agreed  that  Wednesday  next  at  half 
past  nine  would  he  a convenient  hour,  at  which  time  the  commission 
expressed  the  hooc  of  seeing  Senors  liosawo  and  Melliza. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  MELLIZA  (continued). 

Manila,  May  17 , 1899. 

Present:  President  Schurman,  in  the  chair;  Colonel  Den  by  and  Pro- 
fessor Worcester,  commissioners,  and  Mr.  John  R.  MacArthur,  secre- 
tary, and  Senors  Rosario  and  Melliza. 

President  Schurman.  Senor  Melliza,  will  }rou  have  the  goodness  to 
go  on  with  your  talk,  informally? 

Senor  Melliza.  Let  us  go  on  talking  about  the  consular  jurisdiction, 
and  I will  explain  why  this  war  seems  very  natural  to  me.  Consular 
jurisdiction  in  this  country  can  not  he  admitted  for  two  reasons.  Under 
American  sovereignty  here  consular  jurisdiction  can  not  possibly  be  in 
force  here,  for  the  American  sovereignty,  which  is  independent,  does 
not  admit  of  this.  If  the  country  is  to  he  governed  by  autonomy,  the 
consular  jurisdiction  can  not  he  admitted  either.  Furthermore,  there 
is  no  reason,  there  are  no  grounds,  for  the  existence  here  of  the  con- 
sular system  which  exists  in  China.  The  intelligence  in  this  country 
is  greater  than  in  China,  in  Japan,  in  Bombay,  and  perhaps  greater 
than  in  Spain  itself.  The  natives  in  this  country  are  more  intelligent 
than  the  natives  in  those  countries. 

Q.  Consular  jurisdiction  results  from  the  demand  of  foreign  powers, 
and  that  is  made  when  they  are  not  contented  with  the  government  of 
the  country,  and  unless  the  United  States  had  not  only  sovereignty,  but 
efficient  control  of  the  courts  and  administration  here,  the  foreign 
powers  would  demand  consular  jurisdiction,  and  although  Japan  is  a 
sovereign  state,  and  has  been  for  many  years,  up  to  this  time  the  great 
nations  of  the  world  have  had  consular  jurisdiction  there;  and  what 
we  want  to  avoid  is  the  possibility  of  foreign  nations  making  any  such 
demand  here. — A.  It  would  take  a long  time  to  speak  of  consulates 
here,  for  we  would  have  to  refer  to  histories  and  treaties  of  times 
gone  by. 

Q.  But,  referring  to  the  present  state  of  affairs,  consulates  did  exis- 
here  under  the  Spanish  Government;  but  those  consulates  had  no 
jurisdiction  or  intervention  in  the  affairs  of  the  country,  hut  only  over 
their  own  subjects,  and  that  was  because  Spain  gave  the  people  of  the 
Philippines  no  liberties,  no  liberty  of  person,  or  government. — A. 
This  may  be  a political  reason,  but  it  is  not  a metaphysical  or  philo- 
sophical reason,  and  when  aws  and  conditions  are  not  based  on 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


97 


philosophical  reasons  they  produce  revolutions  like  this,  and  if  they 
are  not  founded  in  reason  they  are  not  practical.  What  is  desired  is 
a union  of  the  ideal  and  the  practical,  just  as  a man  is  composed  of 
soul  and  body.  That  which  I desire  corresponds  with  reason.  The 
institution  of  consulates  has  been  a matter  of  courtesy  among  nations — 
purely  a matter  of  courtesy — because  in  times  past,  when  there  was  no 
such  thing  as  courtesy  among  nations,  each  ruler  was  absolute  in  his 
own  country,  and  consulates  did  not  exist. 

Q.  International  intercourse  and  relations,  of  which  the  consular 
system  is  a part,  require  the  organization  in  the  Philippines  of  a gov- 
ernment which,  in  its  courts  of  justice  and  in  its  administration,  will 
be  satisfactory  to  the  nations  of  the  world;  otherwise  they  will  demand 
consular  jurisdiction.  Isn't  that  a fact? — A.  For  this  reason  we  think 
the  Filipinos  should  not  be  separated  from  America,  and  that  we  ought 
to  go  hand  in  hand  with  America,  and  associated  with  America;  and  as 
America  is  perfectly  responsible  we  do  not  see  the  necessity  of  admit- 
ting the  consuls  of  other  nations  into  the  affairs  of  the  government. 

Q.  That  is  presisely  what  we  desire  to  secure,  and  the  only  condi- 
tion we  desire  is  that  there  shall  be  here  established  an  economical 
government,  such  as  is  set  forth  in  paragraph  2 of  our  proclamation: 
‘‘The  most  ample  liberty  of  self-government  will  be  granted  to  the 
Philippine  people  which  is  reconcilable  with  the  maintenance  of  a wise, 
just,  stable,  effective,  and  economical  administration  of  public  affairs 
and  compatible  with  the  sovereign  and  international  rights  and  obliga- 
tions of  the  United  States.” — A.  We  have  understood  in  this  discus- 
sion that  the  idea  is  to  permit  these  consuls  to  intervene  in  the  matter 
of  the  government  of  the  islands,  and  for  this  reason  I have  spoken  of 
this  matter. 

Q.  That  is  precisely  the  thing  we  want  to  shun.  The  sovereignty 
of  the  United  States  is  not  compatible  with  consular  jurisdiction  here, 
and  we  must  make  a government  so  good,  so  completely  controlled  by 
the  United  States,  that  foreign  nations  will  not  desire  to  intervene. — 
A.  We  have  talked  with  Don  Cayetano  Arellano  and  Don  Florentino 
Torres  and  have  understood  that  the  United  States  desired  the  inter- 
vention of  foreign  nations  through  their  consuls. 

Q.  It  is  impossible.  That  is  a misunderstanding.  Our  government 
could  never  have  contemplated  any  such  contingency. 

Colonel  Dexby.  We  intend  to  recommend  here  the  establishment  of 
courts  which  will  perform  all  the  functions  of  a consular  court  in 
regard  to  judicial  matters;  and  also  in  the  administration  of  internal 
affairs,  we  desire  so  good  a government  that  foreign  nations  may  never 
have  an  excuse  for  asking  for  consular  jurisdiction. — A.  This  is  the 
very  same  feeling  that  we  have;  and  in  asking  for  this  explanation  we 
did  it  for  the  people. 

President  Schurman.  We  hope  3-011  will  explain  to  the  people  the 
views  of  the  commission,  which  are  also  your  own  views. — A.  These 
views  we  shall  explain  in  the  newspaper  Democracia,  which  was  pub- 
lished yesterday ; and  in  the  constitution  which  we  ai-e  arranging  and 
drawing  up  now,  after  it  has  been  approved  by  the  commission.  It  was 
not  strange  that  war  broke  out  here  for  the  reasons  which  I shall  state. 
One  of  them  is  that  in  the  first  place  the  United  States  appeared  here 
when  the  Filipinos  were  fighting  against  the  Spaniards. 

Colonel  Denby.  I think  you  are  under  some  misapprehension  in 
regard  to  that. 

7 


1’  c 


98 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Senor  Melliza.  I am  simply  explaining  to  the  commission  the 
causes  that  produced  this  war,  in  order  that  it  may  not  seem  strange 
that  the  war  broke  out. 

Q.  We  understand  it  to  be  a fact  that  Aguinaldo  had  received 
$400,000,  and  that  he  and  a number  of  his  chief  people  had  left  and 
made  peace,  and  that  there  was  no  insurrection  here  when  Commodore 
Dewey  came  here  on  May  1. — A.  I don't  know  about  this,  because  1 
was  in  the  provinces  at  the  time.  I only  say  what  is  said  in  the  news- 
papers and  what  I hear.  I will  answer  this.  I understand  that  peace 
may  be  made  at  any  moment  when  the  desire  of  the  United  States  of 
America,  which  is  also  the  desire  of  the  Philippine  people,  is  explained. 
The  Philippine  people  still  are  ignorant  of  what  the  United  States 
wishes  of  them,  and  the  only  way  the  Philippine  people  have  of  judg- 
ing is  from  some  Spanish  newspapers  and  from  conversations  with 
Spaniards  and  friars,  and  the  Philippine  people  suspect  that  what  the 
United  States  wish  is  to  substitute  their  own  rule  in  place  of  that  of 
the  Spaniards. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  newspapers  are  producing  this  effect  ( — A.  all  the  period- 
icals which  are  published  in  the  islands  and  in 'Madrid  from  April  of 
last  year  until  peace  was  concluded  with  the  United  States.  Especially 
El  Comercio  in  Manila  and  the  Porvenir  de  Visayas.  In  the  second 
place,  the  American  squadron  having  come,  and  General  Otis’s  procla- 
mation having  been  issued,  the  Philippine  military  element  was  excited 
and  somewhat  unfriendly,  and  put  a wrong  interpretation  on  it.  And 
this  element  said  that  if  America  had  to  protect  the  Philippine  Islands 
they  should  not  have  given  them  arms  and  taken  their  possession;  that 
it  would  have  been  better  to  allow  the  Filipinos  to  constitute  their 
own  government,  organize  their  own  government,  here  in  Manila, 
where  the  Americans  had  their  administration.  They  could  then 
observe  this  government  and  see  whether  the  Filipinos  carried  it  on 
well  or  not,  and  if  the  government  went  on  ill  they  could  interfere; 
but  for  the  moment,  this  element  said,  America  did  not  allow  them  to 
try  whether  they  were  able  or  not  to  carry  on  a good  government; 
she  showed  her  intention  of  taking  possession  of  all  the  islands. 
This  is  what  the  people  believe,  but  I personally  understand  that  it  is 
a mistaken  idea.  I think  that  we  have  explained  all  the  reasons  and 
the  causes  of  the  war. 

Q.  War  having  been  caused  in  this  way,  how  is  peace  to  be  restored 
at  once? — A.  By  putting  into  practice  at  once  the  good  intentions  of 
the  Americans  for  the  Philippine  people,  who  have  been  accustomed 
to  be  cheated  by  the  Spaniards.  It  is  necessary  for  the  Philippine 
people,  who  have  seen  that  the  Spaniards  did  not  fulfill  their  promises, 
to  see  that  the  Americans  intend  to  keep  faith  with  them. 

Q.  How  shall  we  begin  at  once? — A.  By  publishing  the  constitu- 
tion and  putting  it  into  effect  at  once,  immediately. 

Q.  How  can  you  put  a constitution  into  effect  immediately,  so  long 
as  war  continues? — A.  By  means  of  the  inhabitants,  for  all  of  them 
are  not  encamped — those  who  are  living  in  the  towns  that  are  in  posses- 
sion of  the  Americans.  By  delaying  this  matter  another  danger  may 
arise,  for  now  the  peaceable  citizens,  seeing  that  nothing  results  from 
the  good  intentions  of  the  Americans,  mav  also  be  in  doubt  themselves 
and  may  take  the  field  themselves.  I myself  can  guarantee  that  the 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


99 


Indian’s  normal  condition  is  peaceful,  modest,  and  not  ambitious;  con- 
tented with  little.  I am  going  to  call  up  another  subject  now— the 
expulsion  of  the  Spanish  and  the  friars.  I would  not  say  that  these 
people  should  be  expelled,  banished,  without  reason,  but  a law  of 
vagrancy  can  be  passed,  expelling  people  without  visible  means  of 
support;  such  a law  should  be  passed.  The  greater  part  of  these  peo- 
ple will  remain  in  the  country  without  working  and  without  any  em- 
ployment, and  for  this  reason  they  should  be  banished,  expelled,  as 
prejudicial  to  the  welfare  of  society.  Those  who  have  money  should 
not  be  compelled  to  go,  but  those  who  have  no  industry,  no  business, 
no  family,  no  stores,  no  shops,  are  the  ones  who  should  be  expelled  as 
prejudicial  to  the  well-being  of  society.  These  people  will  live  by  eat- 
ing in  the  house  of  one  friend  one  day  and  another  another  day  and 
sleeping  in  the  house  of  another  friend.  The  Filipino  is  very  hospita- 
ble, and  although  the}'  may  bother  him,  he  entertains  them  to  avoid 
trouble  with  them.  Another  reason  for  expelling  the  friar  is  that  he 
ruins  the  archipelago  by  bad  administration,  and  instead  of  fulfilling 
his  sacred  mission  he  demoralizes  the  people,  as  is  shown  by  the  facts. 
In  the  same  way  in  which  a criminal  is  excluded,  so  a corporation 
shoidd  be  banished  from  the  country  for  the  good  of  the  people. 

Q.  It  is  one  thing  to  get  at  an  individual  and  another  to  get  at  a class. 

Sefior  Rosario.  It  is  impossible  to  retain  here  the  religious  corpo- 
rations as  they  existed  before,  for  they  caused  a great  problem — one 
State  within  another  State.  As  happens  in  every  nation  of  the  world 
in  which  there  is  clerical  domination,  Rome  has  power  over  the  reli- 
gious corporations  and  consequently  intervenes  in  the  affairs  of  the 
nation;  and  it  came  to  pass  in  former  times  here  that  Rome  had  more 
power  in  the  state  than  Spain,  for  there  were  religious  corporations 
here  that  combined  and  were  very  strong,  and  Rome  really  had  more 
power  than  Spain  in  the  country.  The  proclamation  speaks  of  the 
separation  of  church  and  state,  but  this  is  not  enough  for  the  Philip- 
pine Islands.  This  idea,  which  is  very  well  in  free  countries  like  the 
United  States,  is  not  sufficient  here  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  w'hich 
are  very  much  governed  by  the  religious  corporations.  If  the  friars 
remain  here  in  the  country  their  property  must  all  be  thoroughly 
scrutinized — their  right  to  the  property.  If  the  property  is  returned 
to  the  friars  an  agrarian  war  will  result;  that  is,  such  a war  as  we  have 
now,  a war  of  the  agricultural  classes  against  the  property  owners. 
If  their  property  is  taken  away  from  them  and  they  still  remain  here 
they  will  cause  another  war,  for  they  have  the  protection  of  Rome. 
When  I speak  of  Rome  I refer  to  the  Vatican,  to  the  Papal  power. 

Q.  But  their  property  is  protected  by  the  treaty? 

Sefior  Rosario.  It  was  the  cause  of  the  first  revolution  in  the  Philip- 
pine Islands,  that  the  friars  claimed  property  which  was  not  theirs. 
The  property  which  they  said  was  theirs  was  not  theirs. 

Colonel  Denby.  The  courts  will  settle  that. 

Sefior  Rosario.  This  may  be  easily  arranged,  for  everybody  knows, 
all  the  world  knows,  that  these  properties  were  gif ts  and  that  they  (the 
friars)  occupied  them  only  as  managers. 

Professor  Worcester.  Admitting  that  the  old  state  of  affairs  should 
not  be  tolerated,  the  question  is  how  these  abuses  ought  to  be  reme- 
died, and  it  is  certain  that  in  remedying  them  we  must  employ  legal 
measures,  just  measures.  Now,  are  there  not  some  other  ways  in 
which  we  could  get  at  this  result?  You  have  said  that  during  the 


100 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


time  the  friars  remained  here  they  would  bring  about  a war  because 
the  power  of  Rome  which  was  behind  them  would  still  remain.  We 
have  a great  many  Catholics  in  our  country,  and  the  power  of  Rome 
is  behind  them,  and  they  have  produced  no  war  there. 

Senor  Rosario.  The  friar  in  the  Philippines  is  entirely  different 
from  the  friar  in  Europe  and  in  America.  Even  if  the  promises  stated 
in  the  proclamation  are  carried  out  he  would  not  leave  on  account 
of  the  reasons  I am  going  to  state:  The  friar  here  is  not  a religious 
person.  He  is  not  a Catholic  Avho  preaches  religion.  He  has  never 
preached  religion.  The  gentleman  (Professor  Worcester)  has  seen  in 
the  Philippine  Islands  that  the  friars — although  friars  may  not  marry— 
have  large  families,  wives  and  children,  in  a public  manner. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Are  they  all  Spaniards  ? — A.  All. 

Q.  No  Filipino  friars? — A.  No. 

Q.  An}r  Italians? — A.  No. 

Q.  All  Spanish? — A.  All  Spanish.  The  friars  in  the  Philippine 
Islands  form  a commercial  company.  It  is  a matter  of  business;  and 
instead  of  developing  the  land  and  the  resources  of  the  country  they 
do  business  in  souls,  which  is  a very  good  property  to  them.  They 
exploit  purgatory,  heaven,  and  the  future  life,  which  is  a very  good 
business  for  them. 

President  Schurman.  All  these  questions  will  certainly  be  consid- 
ered, but  it  will  be  impossible  at  the  beginning  of  the  establishment 
of  a civil  government  to  settle  them. 

Senor  Rosario.  I give  these  details  to  the  commission  because  the 
friar  here  is  not  the  same  as  the  friar  is  in  America,  who  simply  enters 
into  private  life,  but  here  the  friar  is  a factor  in  public  life  and  is 
capable  of  disturbing  the  public  order. 

President  Schurman.  If  you  have  anything  more  to  say,  we  shall  be 
glad  to  hear  it. 

This  question  was  taken  up  by  the  commission  in  its  proclamation, 
and  there  are  two  points  to  which  I wish  to  call  special  attention,  the 
first  in  section  3,  the  following  words:  “The  civil  rights  of  the  Philip- 
pine people  will  be  guaranteed  and  protected  to  the  fullest  extent; 
religious  freedom  assured;  and  all  persons  shall  have  an  equal  standing 
before  the  law.”  And  further  on,  in  section  11:  “ Reforms  in  all  depart- 
ments of  the  government,  in  all  branches  of  the  public  service,  and  in 
all  corporations  closely  touching  the  common  life  of  the  people  must 
be  undertaken  without  delay  and  effected,  conformably  to  right  and 
justice,  in  a way  that  will  satisfy  the  well-founded  demand  and  the 
highest  sentiments  and  aspirations  of  the  Philippine  people.” 

Senor  Melliza.  All  right.  Very  well.  Iiyshowing  all  these  reasons 
and  in  asking  the  expulsion  of  the  priests  and  the  Spaniards  we  have 
not  expected  that  it  would  be  done  to-morrow,  but  merely  desired  to 
urge  the  commission  to  assure  the  Filipinos  of  the  establishment  of 
justice  and  equal  rights  for  all  and  liberty. 

Colonel  Denby.  This  commission  or  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  can  create  bodies  of  men  like  legislatures  and  a congress  to 
make  the  laws,  but  we  can  not  dictate  the  laws  in  advance  for  this 
people.  If  we  do,  we  take  away  their  liberties  from  them,  and  they 
themselves  should  have  the  right  to  determine  these  questions.  If  we 
dictate  the  laws,  they  would  not  be  free. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


101 


Senor  Melliza.  For  this  reason  we  present  this  constitution  to 
the  commission  for  their  approval,  this  constitution  to  serve  as  a basis 
for  the  formation  of  laws  and  to  be  presented  to  the  Philippine  people 
for  their  consideration;  and  if  the  people  accept  it,  why,  then,  the  United 
States  can  institute  it,  and  it  will  be  accepted  as  a fact  by  the  people. 
If  the  commission  approves  the  constitution  which  is  going  to  be  sub- 
mitted to  it  and  which  is  being  prepared  by  the  committee  of  Filipinos, 
why,  then,  it  will  be  accepted  by  the  Philippine  people  at  large.  The 
constitution  which  we  are  now  preparing,  and  which  we  will  submit  to 
your  commission  for  your  consideration  and  approval,  if  you  approve 
of  it,  we  shall  ask  you  to  publish,  and  when  published  the  Philippine 
people  will  then  submit  themselves  to  you — to  the  American  people — 
holding  as  law  this  constitution. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  When  are  they  going  to  submit  this  constitution  to  us  ? — A.  All 
the  Philippine  people  haven't  arms  in  their  hands  at  present,  and  if 
anyone  doesn't  approve  this  constitution  when  it  is  approved  by  the 
remainder  of  the  people  he  should  be  exterminated,  and  in  that  case 
we  should  be  the  enemies  of  such  people,  namely,  the  Filipinos  who 
did  not  accept  it. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  The  constitution  does  not  execute  itself.  It  is  necessary  to  make 
a lawT  conformable  to  the  constitution.- — A.  If  we  are  authorized,  we 
afterwards  can  make  lawTs  to  execute  the  constitution,  and  it  will  be 
easy  for  us  to  do  so,  for  we  have  all  the  Spanish  laws  as  precedents. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  When  are  you  going  to  submit  that  constitution  to  us  ? — A.  Prob- 
ably Friday  or  Saturday  of  this  week,  because  part  of  it  which  I had 
to  do  I have  finished  now. 

Q.  Who  are  writing  it  ? — A.  Don  Cayetano  Arellano,  Don  Floren- 
tine Torres,  Don  Gregorio  Areneta,  and  Don  Tomas  del  Rosario.  I 
am  perfectly  assured  that  the  peaceful  part  of  the  Philippine  people 
will  approve  of  the  constitution,  for  by  this  explanation  which  I have 
had  with  the  commission  I see  that  the  desire  of  the  Philippine  people 
and  the  desire  of  the  commission  are  one  and  the-same. 

President  Schurman.  I am  very  pleased  to  hear  you  say  so. 

Senor  Melliza.  Regarding  the  people  w ho  have  arms  in  their  hands, 
when  the  constitution  is  published  and  approved,  if  they  do  not  accept 
it,  it  will  be  an  ample  reason  for  exterminating  them. 

Q.  Shouldn’t  we  have  the  same  difficulty  wre  have  had  with  our 
proclamation?  Won’t  the  Filipinos  say:  You  have  promised  this,  but 
we  don't  believe  you  will  carry  it  out,  and  we  wTould  prefer  to  wait 
until  it  were  put  in  force  before  we  would  care  to  yield. 

Senor  Melliza.  It  is  a very  different  thing,  for  a proclamation  is 
not  a law,  it  is  only  a promise;  but  the  constitution  once  approved  by 
America  is  a law. 

Colonel  Denby.  I would  like  to  explain  to  3*011  the  legal  fact  that 
3tou  apparenth'  do  not  bear  in  mind,  that  Congress  has  to  put  it  into 
effect,  and  that  Congress  does  not  meet  until  December.  I don’t  think 
we  ought  to  let  you  leave  here  wdth  the  impression  that  wTe  can  enter 
into  a contract  w ith  you. 

President  Schurman.  The  War  Department  could  put  it  into  effect. 


102 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


but  it  could  only  become  the  constitution  of  the  islands  by  the  act  of 
Congress. 

Senor  Melliza.  1 am  very  sorry  that  America  has  to  succeed  Spain 
in  these  islands,  for  the  Philippine  people  are  apt  to  believe  that  the 
United  States  is  exactly  like  Spain,  which  has  no  law  or  good  legal 
methods.  The  Philippine  people  are  like  a servant  who  has  had  a bad 
master  and  therefore  thinks  that  all  masters  are  bad. 

President  Schurman.  We  are  very  much  obliged  for  what  you  have 
said.  We  have  had  much  instruction  therefrom  and  desire  to  tender 
you  our  thanks  for  the  same. 

Senor  Melliza.  And  1 also  desire  to  thank  you,  gentlemen,  for 
your  kind  reception  and  candid  expression. 

Meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  SASTRON. 

Manila,  May  1 J,  1899 — 11  a.  m. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Denby  and  Pro- 
fessor Worcester,  commissioners;  John  R.  Mac  Arthur,  esq.,  secretary 
and  counsel. 

Manuel  Sastron  appeared  before  the  commissioners,  and  in  re- 
sponse to  interrogatories  stated  as  follows: 

President  Schurman.  Senor  Sastron,  the  commission  is  very  much 
pleased  to  have  so  eminent  a man  come  before  it  to  give  it  informa- 
tion, and  I will  take  the  liberty  of  asking  you  a few  formal  questions, 
that  we  may  have  your  answers  recorded. 

Senor  Sastron.  I shall  consider  it  a great  honor,  and  shall  endeavor 
to  answer  any  questions  you  may  ask. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Please  give  us  your  name. — A.  Manuel  Sastron. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  in  the  Philippine  Islands? — A.  I have 
been  here  many  times.  This  is  my  sixth  voyage  here.  It  is  thirty 
years  since  I have  been  in  this  service.  In  the  year  1869  I en^'-ed  the 
service  of  the  Spanish  Government. 

Q.  In  what  capacity  ? — A.  I have  held  many  offices.  I have  been 
governor  of  provinces  in  Luzon  seven  years;  e.  g.,  in  Tayabas, 
Batangas,  Ilocos,  and  councilor  of  the  administration. 

Q.  How  long  councilor? — A.  Four  years. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  this  council  and  what  are  the  functions  of 
councilor? — A.  The  council  of  the  governor. 

Q.  What  are  the  functions  of  the  council? — A.  All  the  heads  of 
departments  who  are  called  in  consultation  by  the  captain-general 
advise  on  any  subject  which  he  may  place  before  them,  and  all  subjects 
which  the  governor-general  laid  upon  the  table  before  them  were  con- 
sidered by  them. 

Q.  Had  each  man  his  particular  department? — A.  Yes;  it  was  an 
advisory  council  composed  of  26  members,  appointed  by  the  governor- 
general.  Among  the  26  there  were  only  two  salaried  members  paid 
by  the  Government. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


103 


By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Who  were  Ohm,'  ? — A.  They  were  the  two  members  who  did  all 
the  work.  When  they  received  any  matter  of  business,  they  drew  it 
up  in  proper  form  and  put  it  before  the  council  for  the  approval  of  the 
council.  The  council  voted  upon  it,  and  the  result  of  the  business  in 
hand,  whether  it  was  approved  or  not  approved,  was  transmitted  to 
the  captain-general  as  the  result  of  the  consultation. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Did  not  the  captain-general  attend  the  meetings  of  the  council ' — 
A.  When  he  wished  to  attend.  When  he  wished  to  be  present,  he  was; 
but  when  his  duties  prevented  he  was  represented  by  the  vice-president, 
who  was  the  general  of  the  navy,  or  the  senior  councilor  if  the  vice- 
president  were  ill. 

Q.  How  often  did  the  council  meet? — A.  The  council  met  whenever 
the  two  salaried  councilors  had  prepared  sufficient  business  to  warrant 
their  meeting;  but  they  would  advise  the  secretary  of  the  council  when 
he  would  call  a meeting..  In  this  way  we  never  had  less  than  two 
meetings  a month,  and  when  urgent  business  came  up  we  met  oftener. 

Q.  Did  the  members  as  a rule  all  attend,  or  only  a small  number  of 
them? — A.  As  a general  thing  more  than  half  of  them  met,  because 
when  less  than  half  met  we  could  not  do  business.  We  had  to  have 
more  than  half. 

Q.  Did  the  general  council  make  laws? — A.  It  proposed  regulations. 

Q.  Who  executed  the  regulations  ? — A.  The  council  acted  upon  all 
matters  that  were  brought  to  it  for  consultation.  For  instance,  in  my 
last  term  of  office  the  last  business  which  I participated  in  was  the 
business  of  a delegation  from  Iloilo,  who  came  with  a proposition  to 
bring  drinking  water  into  Iloilo.  The  governor-general,  as  an  instance 
of  how  matters  are  carried  on,  proposed  to  put  a tax  of  2 cents  on  the 
dollar  for  each  bale  of  goods  that  went  through  the  custom-house  for 
the  purpose  of  bringing  this  water  into  Iloilo — this  is  simply  an  exam- 
ple. The  governor-general  sent  this  to  the  council  for  its  action  on 
the  matter,  and  it  devolved  upon  me  to  put  it  before  the  council  in 
proper  form,  but  I said,  with  all  due  respect  and  reverence  to  the  cap- 
tain-general, that  it  was  impossible  to  do  this,  because  this  means  for 
bringing  the  water  into  Iloilo  affected  the  laws  of  the  custom-house, 
which  they  had  no  right  to  touch  at  all. 

Q.  Who  made  the  laws  regarding  the  customs  for  the  archipelago  ? — 
A.  Spain.  The  Government  of  Spain  makes  the  custom-house  laws; 
and  for  this  reason  I told  the  captain-general  that  he  should  not  touch 
the  customs  regulations,  for  that  had  to  do  entirely  with  the  Spanish 
Government;  and,  furthermore,  that  matters  of  the  custom-house  had 
relation  to  all  the  different  countries  of  the  world,  both  in  reference 
to  exportation  and  importation,  and  should  lx*  submitted  to  the  Gov- 
ernment of  Spain  for  decision. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  became  of  that  particular  case  ? — A.  The  governor -general 
decided  always  in  complete  accord  with  his  advisory  council. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Could  the  council  make  laws  ? — A.  He  voted  for  or  against  as  he 
saw  tit  when  he  was  in  the  council,  but  he  always  complied  with  the 
desires  of  the  council  in  his  action. 


104 


EEPOET  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Had  he  the  power  to  act  otherwise;  to  veto  their  action? — A. 
No;  but  he  did  consent,  subject  to  the  Spanish  Government.  Of  700 
cases  all  but  17,  submitted  to  the  Spanish  Government,  which  1 drew 
up  for  the  consideration  of  the' council,  were  approved  by  the  Spanish 
Government. 

Q.  Did  you  send  to  Spain  all  the  votes  of  the  council,  or  only  those 
in  which  there  was  a difference  of  opinion  between  the  governor-gen- 
eral and  the  council? — A.  Only  those  in  which  there  was  a difference 
of  opinion,  because  I was  the  executive  officer  here  and  when  there 
was  no  question  there  was  no  occasion  to  send  it. 

Q.  Was  the  governor-general  under  any  obligation  to  bring  matters 
before  the  council,  or  could  he  act  on  all  matters  without  consulting  the 
council  ? — A.  He  was  under  no  such  obligation.  He  had  power  to  act 
alone  on  his  own  responsibility. 

Q.  Did  the  governor-general  have  power  to  make  laws  or  ordinances 
without  consulting  the  council?- — A.  To  make  laws  and  regulations ; 
no.  The  governor-general  alone  hadn’t  the  right  to  make  laws  for 
administrative  application  here  except  in  exceptional  cases  of  war  and 
public  order. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  The  governor-general  had  to  submit  all  his  laws  and  ordinances 
to  this  council  ?— A.  Yes. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  classes  of  laws  were  made  for  the  archipelago  in  Spain  and 
what  class  of  laws  could  the  governor-general  and  his  council  make? — 
A.  The  political  laws,  the  administrative  laws,  the  creation  and  regu- 
lation of  town  halls  and  municipal  government,  also  courts  and  civil 
governments,  organization  and  reform  of  the  constitution  of  the 
Philippines,  the  Government  in  Spain  enacted  through  its  minister  of 
Ultramar  (lands  beyond  the  sea)  the  laws  which  were  expected  to  be 
passed,  and  applied  to  the  colonies.  For  example,  if  the  Spanish 
Government  decided  that  direct  taxes  on  house  property  should  be 
placed  on  the  islands  a general  law  was  sent  here  imposing  a direct 
tax  on  house  property  in  the  Philippines.  The  governor-general  with 
his  council  then  imposed  those  taxes,  and  made  the  regulations  for 
their  collection. 

Q.  Am  1 right,  then,  in  saying  that  the  governor-general  and  his 
council  could  pass  no  law,  but  could  simply  make  regulations  for 
imposing  laws  passed  in  Spain  ? — A.  The  laws  were  made  by  Spain,  the 
making  of  executive  regulations  to  carry  out  these  laws  were  duties 
belonging  to  the  governor  general  and  his  advisory  council. 

Q.  Now  I repeat  my  question.  Am  I right,  then,  in  saying  that 
the  governor  and  his  council  could  pass  no  law,  but  could  simply  make 
regulations  for  enforcing  laws  made  in  Spain?- — A.  There  is  one  thing 
that  1 must  say:  That  the  governor-general  here  would  announce  or 
indicate  to  the  Government  at  home  that  such  and  such  laws  were 
necessary  here,  and  taking  the  initiative  from  the  governor  here  they 
would  indicate  or  communicate  that  legislation  on  such  subjects  would 
be  passed. 

Q.  (Question  repeated.) — A.  No.  The  governor-general  and  his 
council  did  not  have  the  right  to  pass  laws,  but  simply  regulations  for 
the  application  of  the  laws  made  in  Spain. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


105 


By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  were  your  duties  as  governor  of  a province? — A.  The 
governor  of  the  province  was  the.  supreme  representative  of  the  Spanish 
power  in  the  territory  under  his  control.  He  represented  the  governor- 
general. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Who  appointed  him?— A.  The  Government  of  Spain;  the  King 
of  Spain,  by  royal  decree. 

Q.  What  was  the  term? — A.  There  was  no  lixed  term. 

Q.  What  was  the  salary  ? — A.  There  were  three  classes  of  governors 
of  provinces.  The  first  class  had  a salary  of  $4,500  a \ eai , Mexican 
dollars,  silver;  the  second  class,  $4,000,  and  the  third  class,  $3,500; 
they  also  had  1 per  cent  of  the  gross  amount  collected  for  “cedillas 
personates, ” which  made  the  amount  more  or  less  as  follows:  For  the 
first  class,  2,000  to  2,500  pesos  a year;  for  the  second  class,  1,500  to 
1,800  pesos  a year,  and  for  the  third  class,  1,000  to  1,200  pesos  a year. 

' Q.  Consequently,  the  salary  of  a governor  of  a province  of  the  first 
class  would  be  between  $7,000  and  $8,000? — A.  1 es. 

Bv  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Did  he  have  a house?— A.  Yes;  in  Batangas,  for  example,  a 
large  house — a palace. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Did  the  Government  furnish  him  with  servants? — A.  The  house 
was  furnished  complete  by  the  Government. 

Q.  Were  there  any  other  perquisites? — A.  No;  properly  nothing 

more.  , . 

Q.  Was  that  a reasonable  salary,  or  wasn  t it  enough  ? — A.  1 or  the 
interests  of  the  country  at  that  time,  yes;  but  as  affairs  and  matters 
now  are,  no,  because  a chicken  that  cost  5 coppers  then  costs  a dollai 
now,  and  everything  is  in  the  same  proportion. 

Q.  But  that  is  simply  temporary,  due  to  the  war? — A.  5 es,  cer- 
tainly, it  ought  to  pass  away.  . 

Q.  Were  there  Filipinos  appointed  as  governors  of  provinces?  A. 
No;  there  were  judges  and  magistrates  Filipino,  but  not  governors. 

Q.  Everything  considered,  was  the  salary  you  had  as  governor  a 
fair  and  just  salarv,  or  do  you  think  it  ought  to  be  higher  in  a pro\  ince 
of  the  first  class?— A.  It  might  be  better  to  be  better  paid,  but  a man 
who  lives  within  the  laws — the  universal  laws  of  morals — had  plenty 
of  money  with  $7,000  a year  to  live  properly  at  that  time. 

Q.  How  would  it  work  to  have  Filipinos  appointed  governors  of 
provinces? — A.  I think,  gentlemen,  although  we  are  now  entering  into 
a matter  that  is  a very,  very  difficult  one,  that  they  are  not  capable  of 
filling  such  offices. 

Q.  Are  the  Filipinos,  in  your  opinion,  qualified  to  be  judges?— A. 
Thev  have  been  judges  even  of  the  supreme  court  here  in  Manila. 
The  duty  of  a justice  is  much  easier  than  the  duties  of  a governor,  for 
he  has  simply  to  know  the  laws  and  apply  them,  whereas  a governor 
needs  to  be  a man  of  greater  knowledge  and  greater  initiative  ability 
and  more  discretion. 

Q.  Have  you  anv  book  which  details  the  judicial  system  and  describes 
it?  If  you  have,  will  you  let  us  have  it  ?— A.  I have  published  five 
books,  but  they  are  administrative  books — books  on  administrative 
affairs. 


106 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  In  your  opinion,  should  the  Filipinos  be  given  a larger  share  in 
the  government  than  they  had  under  the  Spaniards?  In  other  words, 
do  you  think  the  Filipinos  are  qualified  to  take  a larger  share  in  the 
government  than  the}’  have  heretofore  had? — A.  Yes.  The  Spaniards 
had  ottered  them  even  as  far  as  autonomy.  If  they  should  be  allowed 
to  take  part  in  the  government,  the  Filipinos,  in  the  main,  would 
take  a share  in  the  government,  but  the  men  who  are  now  posing  as 
Filipinos  would  not  be  the  true  Filipinos,  and  the  true  Filipinos  would 
in  time  utterly  retire. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Please  tell  us  briefly,  in  a few  words,  what  were  the  courts  in  the 
provinces?— A.  There  was  one  judge  in  the  capital— in  the  first  place 
there  was  in  each  province  one  judge  and  in  each  town  one  justice 
assigned  to  the  municipal  tribunal,  but  after  reforms  were  made  there 
was  one  judge  in  the  province  as  before,  and  in  each  town  one  justice 
of  the  peace. 

Q.  Was  there  a supreme  court  in  Manila  ? — A.  There  was  a superior 
court. 

Q.  Were  these  judges  Spaniards  or  Filipinos? — A.  They  were  both 
Spaniards  and  Filipinos. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  much  the  judge  in  the  capital  was  paid? — A. 
He  had  $3,000. 

Q.  How  much  were  the  justices  paid  ? — A.  They  got  fees — court  fees. 

Q.  Now  did  an  appeal  lie  from  this  judge  to  the  supreme  court  at 
Manila,  from  the  judges  in  the  capitals  to  the  supreme  court  at 
Manila?— A.  To  the  audiencia  in  Manila.  The  judge,  in  addition  to 
his  salary — that  is,  the  judge  in  the  capital  of  the  province — had  his 
house  allowed  him,  the  residence  of  the  judge  which  belonged  to  the 
State. 

Q.  Suppose  a man  committed  murder,  where  would  he  be  tried  ? — 
A.  In  the  place  where  the  crime  was  committed  by  the  judge  in  the 
capital  of  that  province.  He  was  first  taken  before  the  justice  of  the 
peace  and  then  taken  before  the  judge  of  the  capital  of  the  province. 

Q.  Did  the  judge  try  all  cases,  civil  as  well  as  criminal,  or  was  there 
a jury  to  assist  him? — A.  No;  only  the  judge— there  were  no  juries. 

Q.  How  many  supreme  court  judges  had  they  in  Manila? — A.  In 
the  supreme  tribune  there  were  two  divisions — the  civil  and  the  crim- 
inal; I don’t  know  how  many  there  were. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  much  those  judges  were  paid?— A.  Four 
thousand  dollars  a year. 

Q.  By  whom  were  all  those  judges  appointed? — A.  The  president 
of  the  two  divisions  of  the  supreme  court  had  $5,000  a year.  All 
judges  were  appointed  by  the  Crown. 

Q.  Bv  whom  were  the  justices  of  the  peace  named? — A.  The  judge 
of  the  province  sent  in  the  names  of  three  people  in  each  town,  and 
they  were  appointed  by  the  president  of  the  supreme  court  in  Manila. 

Q.  Was  there  any  appeal  from  the  supreme  court  in  Manila  to 
Spain? — A.  Yes;  to  Madrid. 

Q.  In  all  cases? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Are  you  a lawyer  or  a doctor? — A.  Doctor.  I am  a bachelor  of 
laws. 

By  President  Schukman: 

Q.  Had  the  governor  of  the  province  any  original  powers,  any  inde- 
pendent powers,  or  did  he  stand  m ’ *r  the  governor-general  ? — A.  He 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


107 


was  dependent  on  the  governor-general,  but  as  he  was  ex  officio  head 
of  the  political  municipality  and  at  the  same  time  of  the  junta  provincial 
he  had  the  right  to  propose  different  propositions  for  the  good  of  the 
different  municipalities  or  for  the  province. 

Q.  How  was  the  junta  provincial  constituted? — A.  Of  twelve  mem- 
bers elected  by  the  people. 

Q.  Were  they  all  elected  by  the  people  or  only  some  of  them  ? — A. 
All  elected  by  the  people.  The  promoter  fiscal  and  the  priests  of  the 
capital  were  also  members  of  the  provincial  assembly. 

Q.  What  were  the  functions  of  this  provincial  junta  ? — A.  They  had 
administrative  powers  only.  They  had  charge  of  roads,  lights,  and 
bridges,  cleaning  streets,  and  whatever  pertained  to  the  municipal  life 
of  the  town.  It  was  the  fiscal  agent  of  the  town,  as  it  had  more  to 
do  with  the  money  than  anything  else. 

Q.  Was  it  a supervisory  body  or  did  its  functions  consist  more  in 
advising  than  anything  else  ? — A.  The  provincial  assembly  visited  the 
different  towns  and  reported  on  the  condition  of  them.  Then  when 
they  thought  it  necessary,  they  made  recommendations  to  the  gov- 
ernor of  the  province,  who  applied  the  necessary  remedies. 

Q.  There  was  only  one  junta  in  the  province? — A.  Only  one;  in  the 
capital. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  often  did  they  meet? — A.  When  the  governor  of  the  prov- 
ince called  them  together. 

By  President  Schurmax: 

Q.  Did  they  levy  taxes  ? — A.  Only  those  provided  for  by  the  law. 

Q.  Who  made  that  law? — A.  The  law  was  made  by  Spain  giving  them 
the  right  to  collect  taxes  on  certain  different  things,  such  as  billiard 
tables  and  cats  and  other  small  matters.  They  put  in  a budget  and 
had  to  have  it  approved  by  the  provincial  assembly  before  they  could 
expend  the  sum  so  collected  on  the  town  itself — on  the  municipality 
itself. 

Q.  It  was  simply  a body  to  advise  and  inspect  the  pueblos  ? — A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Q.  Please  give  us  your  address. — A.  Audiencia,  President  of  Span- 
ish Commission  on  Liquidation. 

Q.  You  have  had  experience  as  a provincial  governor.  Have  you  any 
improvement  to  suggest  in  the  existing  law  and  the  existing  organiza- 
tion of  the  provincial  governments,  such  improvements  as  are  adapted 
to  the  condition  of  the  people  and  in  accord  with  the  fact  that  the  United 
States  is  the  owner  of  these  islands? — A.  The  moral  laws  as  they  stood 
under  the  regime  of  the  Spanish  are  well  adapted  to  the  necessities  of 
the  people. 

Q.  Is  there  need  of  reforms  or  changes  in  it? — A.  No;  I think  not. 
It  is  a beautiful  law  and  well  adapted  to  the  people.  I have  said  some- 
thing in  my  book  on  that  subject. 

Q.  You  don’t  think  that  the  introduction  of  a new  government  here 
would  necessitate  serious  changes  in  the  form  of  the  government? — A. 
I think  none  at  all.  It  is  a very  liberal  and  comprehensible  law,  cap- 
able of  great  development.  See  p.  296  and  following  of  mv  book  on 
“ Ba  tangas.” 

President  Schurmax.  Doctor,  we  are  very  much  obliged  to  you  for 
your  valuable  information,  and  we  appreciate  it  and  thank  you  greatly 
for  coming  before  this  commission. 


108 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Senor  Sastron.  I am  very  much  honored  that  the  commission  asked 
me  for  my  views,  and  any  question  that  the  commission  may  wish  to 
ask  me  in  the  future  I shall  be  very  glad  to  answer. 

The  meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  ADOLPH  VON  BOSCH. 

Manila,  May  1899. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Den  by,  and 
Professor  Worcester,  commissioners,  and  Mr.  John  R.  MaeArthur, 
secretary. 

Adolph  von  Bosch,  in  answer  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
testified  as  follows: 

By  the  President: 

Q.  You  are  a Belgian? — A.  Yes.  I have  been  here  nearly  ten  years. 
I was  first  employed  as  accountant  with  an  English  firm  for  nearly 
three  and  a half  years,  and  then  about  six  years  ago  I started  on  my 
own  account  in  the  wood  business.  Before  I came  here  I studied  in 
Europe,  at  Heidelberg,  in  Paris,  and  in  Belgium.  We  lived  in  Ant- 
werp about  ten  years.  I was  sent  to  Hanover  first  at  the  gymnasium, 
and  afterwards  attended  the  University  of  Paris,  and  afterwards  at 
Heidelberg. 

Q.  Have  you  made  any  study  a specialty  ( — A.  No;  I was  only  there 
for  three  semesters,  and  for  four  semesters  in  Paris  I studied  chemistry. 

Q.  I see  you  speak  English  excellently.  Do  you  speak  other 
languages? — A.  Yes;  French,  German,  Italian,  Spanish,  New  Greek, 
Holland  Dutch,  and  Tagalog,  somewhat. 

Q.  I suppose  you  brought  capital  out? — A.  No;  I was  employed, 
and  I saved  about  84,200.  With  that  I started;  had  an  excellent  first 
year,  and  made  about  813,000  the  first  year  in  rice,  in  timber,  and  in 
hemp. 

Q.  You  did  business  in  rice.  hemp,  and  timber? — A.  Yes.  I began 
in  Dalupaon.  where  I am  now.  It  is  an  hacienda,  which  belongs  to 
me.  It  is  in  Ambos  Camarines,  on  Gulf  Ragay. 

Q.  I suppose  you  have  seen  a good  deal  of  the  native  people  here? — 
A.  Yes;  I have  dealt  with  them  almost  exclusively  down  there.  The 
people  down  there  speak  Vicol.  It  is  an  entirely  different  language. 
I understand  it  a little,  although  I do  not  need  Vicol  there,  because  all 
my  men  are  Tagalogs.  The  Vicols  are  not  fit  for  timber  cutting — they 
are  too  slow,  too  lazy,  and  don't  understand  it.  They  are  mentally  far 
behind  the  Tagalogs.  The  Vicol  is  docile  and  lazy  and  never  works 
but  one  day  a week,  and  if  he  has  a peseta  and  good  stealing  he  loafs 
for  a week  and  works  one  day.  They  are  easy  to  govern.  The  Span- 
iards had  no  trouble  with  them.  It  is  only  the  Tagalogs  that  make 
the  trouble.  They  are  a separate  race  and  more  energetic. 

Q.  Did  they  go  down  and  seize  the  government  of  this  province? — 
A.  Yes;  the  Tagalogs  did.  I was  down  there.  General  Lucban  passed 
through  there  with  his  troops.  He  is  now  in  Samar.  He  passed  north 
and  didn't  come  to  my  place.  There  were  two  captains  and  a colonel, 
and  they  passed  with  about  1,000  troops  through  my  place. 

Q.  What  kind  of  government  did  the  Tagalogs  give  you  down 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


109 

there? — A.  I haven’t  seen  any  government  at  all.  They  only  put  up 
a military  government.  They  didn’t  collect  any  taxes;  they  did  not 
make  any  rules — they  left  it  just  as  it  was  before.  Lucban  took  away 
from  $100,000  to  $150,000. 

Q.  They  didn’t  collect  money  by  legal  methods,  you  mean ? — A.  No; 
they  extorted  it  from  the  Spaniards  and  stole  it  from  the  rich  Yicols. 

Q.  You  say  the  Tagalogs  down  in  Camarines  did  not  have  a regular 
government;  they  did  not  collect  taxes,  but  simply  extorted  money 
from  the  people? — A.  They  had  the  lay  of  every  ship  that  went  out, 
and  they  made  it  pay  5 per  cent  ad  valorem,  although  I didn’t  pay  it. 
They  never  troubled  me. 

Q.  Did  the  people  find  this  Tagalog  government  very  oppressive? — 
A.  Yes;  they  did;  the  Vicols  did.  The  Yicols  were  not  satisfied  with 
it,  because  even  the  rich  Vicols  were  obliged  to  pay  to  Lucban. 

By  Colonel  Derby : 

Q.  When  was  this  Tagalog  government  established  there? — A.  It 
was  established  there  on  September  22  of  last  year. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  The  guardia  civil  overthrew  the  Spanish  Government  there, 
which  guard  consists  of  natives? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Vicols? — A.  Yicols  and  Tagalogs  mixed.  I dare  say  a majority 
were  Tagalogs.  It  was  a very  funny  overthrow.  I was  there  two 
days  before,  and  I was  told  to  get  out,  so  I went.  I had  a row  with 
the  Spanish  captain  of  the  guardia  civil,  the  comandante.  I told 
the  governor,  “ You  had  better  ship  off  the  men  and  women  who  are 
Spanish  and  all  your  goods,  because  I am  afraid  you  can’t  hold  it,  any- 
way.” The  captain  of  the  guardia  civil  said  “Where  do  you  get  this 
information?”  Sol  told  him  where  I acquired  it;  and  I said,  “You 
take  the  government  on  your  own  responsibility.” 

Q.  This  government,  then,  is  extorting  money  from  the  people,  is  it, 
and  oppressing  them  in  other  ways? — A.  It  is  not  exactly  oppressing 
them  ; it  is  annoying  them. 

Q.  In  what  way? — A.  Because  if  you  want  to  have  a boat  come  in 
they  come  to  you  with  bayonets  and  ask  for  passports. 

Q.  Do  they  enter  your  house  without  permission ? — A.  No;  they 
did  not  enter  mine,  but  they  entered  other  houses. 

Q.  They  enter  people’s  houses  without  permission?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  they  steal? — A.  Stolen  or  given  to  them,  they  take  what 
they  desire. 

Q.  You  say  the  people  would  be  very  glad  to  be  rid  of  it  ? — A.  Yes; 
very  glad ; anyhow  in  Camarines. 

Q.  Are  they  favorable  to  the  Americans,  the  people? — A.  The 
ordinary  people,  yes.  The  workmen,  the  lower  classes  and  middle 
classes,  those  who  have  interests  there,  are  certainly  most  decidedly  in 
favor  of  the  Americans.  The  leading  military  men  and  those  who 
call  themselves  the  governors  are  decidedly  not. 

Q.  The  military  men  are  against  the  Americans? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Because  they  have  something  to  lose ? — A.  Yes;  they  would  lose 
their  positions.  It  is,  according  to  my  view,  only  a matter  of  interest 
which  dictates  their  conduct. 

Q.  I suppose  the  great  majority  of  the  people,  then,  favor  the 
Americans? — A.  Oh,  yes;  the  entire  mass 

Q.  Eighty  or  90  per  cent  ? — A.  Put  it  down  at  00. 


110 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  You  think  safely  60  per  cent? — A.  Sixty  per  cent.  1 don’t 
think  the  lower  classes  have  any  idea.  The}’  have  no  idea  at  all  about 
it — no  tixed  idea. 

Q.  They  have  not? — A.  But  I am  sure  if  they  get  an  American 
government 

Q.  That  is  to  say,  they  want  a good  government? — A.  Yes;  they 
want  a good  government.  They  want  to  be  fairly  treated. 

Q.  A\  ould  the  Yicols  be  capable  of  governing  themselves? — A.  I 
don't  think  so. 

Q.  Would  the  Tagalogs? — A.  There  are  some  Tagalogs  who  would 
be,  but  it  would  be  a small  minority.  They  would  not  have  sufficient 
men  to  form  a government. 

Q.  But  the  Tagalogs  would  be  tit  to  occupy  subordinate  places  in 
the  government? — A.  Yes;  and  even  the  Vicols  there  would  be — there 
are  some  very  good  men  who  occupied  civil  positions  under  the  Span- 
ish Government. 

Q.  But  you  think  it  would  be  necessary  to  have  Americans  at  the 
head? — A.  Yes.  No  government  could  last  for  six  months  under 
Tagalog  rule,  according  to  my  opinion. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  good  port  is  along  there? — A.  There  is  one  good  port  in 
Bureas,  on  the  island  of  Bureas.  There  is  no  other  on  the  whole  coast. 

Q.  How  far  is  it  from  where  you  are? — A.  About  two  days  by  sail. 
That  is  a good  port,  a safe  port. 

Q.  Any  name  for  it? — A.  No;  it  is  called  Bureas. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Is  there  much  timber  left  in  Bureas  ? — A.  Yes.  In  Bureas  there 
was  only  Brown  cutting,  if  you  recollect  it.  I think  I have  seen  you, 
Professor  Worcester,  here  before. 

Q.  Well,  I have  been  here  twice.  Is  there  any  government  down 
there? — A.  No;  there  is  no  government  down  there.  There  was  a 
governor  named  Marino  Ravalya,  a rich  man,  a millionaire.  He  goes 
there  now.  He  does  nothing  except  forming  Philippine  cooperative 
societies,  where  everybody  has  to  bring  him  so  much  rice,  so  much 
hemp,  so  much  coffee,  so  much  cocoa,  and  that  will  be  sent  up  to 
Manila  under  the  supervision  of  four  directors  and  sold  in  Manila 
and  the  proceeds  distributed  among  them.  It  is  really  a society  of 
mutual  interests. 

Q.  Would  it  be  right  to  say  that  these  provinces  are  under  a mili- 
tary terrorism? — A.  To-day  I think  they  are.  They  were  not  when  I 
was  there.  The  foreigners  were  all  leaving  there,  but  only  the  Span- 
iards were  taken  prisoners. 

Q.  How  did  they  treat  the  friars? — A.  Very  badly.  The  friars  are 
still  in  prison.  They  caught  the  bishop — he  wasn’t  the  bishop  there — 
he  was  the  acting  bishop.  He  is  imprisoned,  and  he  only  gets  a hand- 
ful of  rice,  and  they  make  him  work  at  dirty  work  and  then  go  to 
prison  again. 

Q.  At  what  point  are  they  holding  this  gentleman? — A.  In  Neuva 
Caceres. 

Q.  Do  you  know  at  all  how  many  of  them  they  have  there? — A. 
Maybe  they  have  got  70. 

Q.  Have  they  imprisoned  Spaniards  other  than  the  government  offi- 
cials— private  men  ? — A.  There  are  even  now  live.  One  who  had  been 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Ill 


very  cruel,  you  understand,  tried  to  get  away  and  they  caught  him 
on  the  steamer  and  they  chained  him  up,  and  the\r  make  him  work 
in  the  street  without  a hat  in  the  sun,  and  they  give  him  a thrashing 
every  day,  and  they  make  him  clean  the  water-closets  in  the  prison  and 
all  that  dirty  work,  and  I have  seen  that  with  my  own  eyes.  There 
are  others  treated  just  the  same. 

Q.  They  have  taken  vengeance  on  all  the  Spaniards  they  could  get 
hold  of  ? — A.  Yes;  they  are  very  revengeful. 

Q.  You  say  you  were  associated  with  Mr.  Brown  for  some  time? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  sort  of  success  did  Mr.  Brown  meet  with?  A.  He  was  a 
sort  of  pioneer. 

Q.  In  establishing  the  lumber  business  ?— A.  Yes;  he  was  the  first. 
He  sold  his  business  to  a limited  company  established  in  Hongkong  for 
$300,000.  The  company  went  on  and  had  to  liquidate  in  three  or  four 
years  afterwards. 

Q.  Was  that  due  to  bad  management  ? — A.  Yes;  I think  it  was  due 
to  bad  management. 

Q.  Did  they  have  serious  difficulty  with  the  health  of  their  employees 
over  there? — A.  No;  none. 

Q.  Mr.  Whitehead,  in  Hongkong,  told  me  that  one  reason  of  their 
failure  was  that  their  men  all  died;  that  they  couldn’t  keep  anybody 
there? — A.  I have  been  there  three  years  and  a half  and  I have  never 
experienced  that  trouble.  The  great  mistake  was  that  there  was  no 
more  timber.  Owing  to  the  expense  of  bringing  timber  down  they 
couldn’t  compete  with  anybody.  I think  their  want  of  success  was 
more  due  to  lack  of  timber  than  to  anything  else. 

Q.  Was  the  business  fairly  successful  as  long  as  Mr.  Brown  was 
connected  with  it? — A.  Yes;  he  had  trouble,  too.  especially  with  a 
railroad  company  he  established. 

Q.  Did  he  furnish  the  railroad  company  ties  ? — A.  The  first  three 
years  all  the  ties  came  from  there. 

Q.  And  the  lumber  for  bridge  building,  wagon  building,  and  station 
buildings? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  In  general  what  has  been  your  experience  as  to  the  health  of  men 
engaged  in  that  business — your  woodcutters — the  men  engaged  in 
getting  out  the  logs;  do  they  suffer  much  from  fever  ? — A.  No.  Some- 
times when  there  are  very  heavy  rainfalls  there  is  some  sickness. 
When  it  is  swampy  in  the  roads,  then  of  course  we  get  some  fever,  but 
it  is  not  common;  very  seldom. 

Q.  What  sort  of  arrangement  are  you  able  to  make  with  your 
employees  about  paying  them?  Do  you  pay  them  stumpage,  or  do 
you  pay  them  so  much  for  what  they  cut,  or  a fixed  sum? — A.  No ; it 
is  according  to  the  Tayabas  tariff;  that  means  so  much  per  vara. 

Q.  Does  that  include  longitudinal  measurement? — A.  The  basis  is 
10  by  10  inches  per  vara,  so  much.  In  Nueva  Caceres,  for  instance, 
what  they  call  14  by  12 — that  costs  according  to  the  length  of  the 
timber  and  the  class  of  timber.  A certain  price  extra  is  added  to  it; 
that  was  the  official  tariff  of  the  Spanish  Government  established  about 
thirty  years  ago. 

Q.  Now,  don’t  you  find  that  you  have  to  make  advances  to  your 
people  to  get  them  there? — A.  Always  ; that’s  a great  drawback. 

Q.  And  the  losses  to  some  extent  are  a result  of  that? — A.  Yes;  I 
must  let  them  have  advances.  1 myself  have  about  $11,000  owing  me 


112 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


from  the  woodcutters  on  my  hooks,  but  that  is  guaranteed  by  the  men 
and  their  children.  Their  carabaos  and  their  property  are  mortgaged 
to  me  in  consideration  of  these  advances. 

Q.  About  what  percentage  would  the  loss  bear  to  the  entire  sum 
invested? — A.  I always  put  down  the  first  investment  as  simply 
loss;  it  is  only  amortization  through  their  work. 

Q.  And  as  you  go  along;  do  you  find A.  You  give,  for  instance, 

a man  £100  or  £150  advance  and  he  goes  on  and  works  and  brings  in 
timber,  for  instance,  every  week.  He  brings  in  timber,  say  five  or  six 
logs,  which  are  worth  £50,  and  he  will  go  on  until  he  is  in  need  of  rice 
or  in  want  of  some  cigars  or  any  manufactured  goods,  or  it  might 
happen  that  a child  dies,  or  they  want  to  marry,  or  a child  is  born  and 
has  to  be  baptized,  and  that  means  another  advance.  Of  course  the 
Indian  never  has  a cent  in  his  house. 

Q.  And  they’  are  inclined  to  run  oil'  and  leave  you  and  get  out  of 
their  debts  in  that  way? — A.  Some  of  them,  but  they  won't  do  it  from 
me;  but  they  get  in  quarrels  about  their  wives,  or  a man  wants  to 
marry  a girl  and  he  can’t  have  her,  and  then  he  bolts  with  her,  and 
that  is  how  we  lose  the  men. 

Q.  When  you  are  at  work  how  do  you  proceed;  do  you  sweep  the 
forest  clean  or  do  you  pick  out  portions  of  it  ? — A.  Pick  out  portions. 
There  are  plenty  of  trees  which  are  of  no  commercial  use.  r 

Q.  After  the  trees  are  felled  you  square  them  where  they  are? — 
A.  They  are  squared  where  they  fall. 

Q.  And  then  you  get  them  out  of  there  with  buffaloes? — A.  Yes; 
and  haul  them  down. 

Q.  Is  it  ever  possible  to  use  timber  saws  in  the  country  ? — A.  I 
don’t  think  it  is;  they  are  not  useful  at  all. 

Q.  How  many  carabaos  have  to  be  used  in  handling? — A.  It  is 
according  to  the  size  of  the  log — from  2 to  12  or  11. 

Q.  Is  the  getting  out  of  the  timber  a part  of  the  contract  with  your 
woodcutters? — A.  It  is;  it  has  to  be  delivered  on  the  beach;  that  is 
the  contract.  No  timber  is  received  except  on  the  beach. 

Q.  In  shipping  your  timber  do  you  ship  it  in  logs  or  is  it  sawed 
first? — A.  In  logs.  I had  a contract  with  the  railway  company  here 
for  ties. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  about  that  ? Wouldn’t  it  be  better  in  general 
to  saw  the  timber  on  the  spot  into  the  shape  in  which  it  is  to  be  used 
instead  of  sending  it  out  in  logs? — A.  Certainly;  but  it  has  never  been 
done  down  here. 

Q.  Have  you  had  any  difficulty  in  getting  saws  that  would  cut  your 
hard  timber  ? — A.  No;  no  difficulty  at  all.  I only  used  a circular  saw. 
I intended  to  work  a gang  saw — a gang  of  saws. 

Q.  And  cut  up  the  whole  log  at  once? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  is  the  market? — A.  China  and  Manila — Hongkong,  and 
Shanghai. 

Q.  What  sort  of  timber  is  the  most  practicable  and  serviceable  ? — 
A.  That  for  building  and  shipbuilding. 

Q.  What  have  you  done,  if  anything,  with  the  very  hard  woods  that 
are  capable  of  taking  a high  polish;  there  are  such  woods  here,  aren’t 
there? — A.  Yes;  I have  handled  them  commercially.  For  instance, 
ornate  staircases  and  work  of  that  kind  come  from  those  woods. 

Q.  Have  you  ever  sent  any  of  these  fine  woods  to  England  or  any 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


113 


twice  and  met  with  a bad  experience.  They  did  not  care  for  it.  One 
ship  got  lost  on  the  route  and  the  cargo  of  the  other  was  badly  sold  in 
Bremen. 

Q.  What  sort  of  wood  have  you  found  best  for  railroad  ties? — A. 
Molave  and  ipil. 

Q.  Are  there  an}’  data  in  existence  at  present  on  which  to  base  a 
statement  of  how  long  they  will  last  in  the  ground? — A.  Molave  will 
last  ten  years. 

Q.  And  the  others? — A.  Mr.  Higgins  told  me  some  of  them  last 
six  months. 

Q.  Does  molave  have  to  be  bored  in  order  to  be  spiked  or  can  they 
drive  the  spikes  into  it?— A.  Yes;  it  must  be  bored;  it  is  very  hard. 

Q.  In  general,  what  woods  are  the  most  valuable  here  now? — A. 
Molave,  eacle,  tindola,  batitnan,  mangachapuy. 

Q.  Have  you  been  shipping  in  your  own  vessels  or  in  others,  ves- 
sels?— A.  I freighted  always;  I found  that  more  profitable,  although 
one  pays  high  freight;  the  typhoon  season  here,  if  you  have  bad  luck, 
spoils  everything,  and  makes  it  cheaper  to  freight  than  to  own  your 
own  boats. 

Q,  Do  you  have  distributing  agents  in  Manila  and  in  China  ? — A. 
Yes;  I have  an  agent  here;  Pipoch. 

Q.  Do  you  do  anything  with  firewood  at  all? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  use  a steam  mill,  I suppose? — A.  Yes;  I have  got  a small 
steam  mill. 

Q.  You  use  your  own  chips  and  so  on  for  fuel?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  Under  what  regulations  was  the  timber  business  carried  on  in  the 
old  days,  Mr.  Von  Bosch  ? — A.  There  was  a duty  to  be  paid  per  cubic 
foot,  Spanish. 

Q.  But  they  vary  with  the  various  kinds  of  timber? — A.  Yes;  there 
were  four  classes  or  groups. 

Q.  And  the  different  classes  of  trees? — A.  Were  classified  by  name. 
They  ran  from  5 cents  a cubic  foot  down  to  1 cent. 

Q.  Did  you  have  any  inspectors  to  examine  your  lumber? — A.  Cer- 
tainly. 

Q.  Were  they  sent  to  survey  it  without  any  expense  to  you  ? — A. 
Without  any  expense  to  us. 

Q.  Did  you  have  to  get  a license  to  cut  timber? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  did  the  license  read?  Did  it  give  you  the  privilege  for  a 
certain  limited  area  in  a certain  province  ? — A.  It  was  a license  extend- 
ing over  the  province. 

Q.  Suppose  you  were  cutting  in  a particular  place  and  some  other 
man  who  had  a license  came  alone,  could  he  cut  timber  beside  you? — 
A.  Yes;  but  it  has  never  been  done  because  he  would  find  it  difficult, 
you  see. 

Q.  Suppose  you  actually  owned  a tract  of  land,  could  a man  with  a 
license  come  and  cut  on  your  land? — A.  No;  not  on  private  land. 

Q.  And  in  the  latter  case  would  you  have  to  pay  duty  to  the  govern- 
ment if  you  owned  the  land? — A.  No. 

Q.  Is  there  a considerable  amount  of  available  timber  left  in  the 
region  where  you  are? — A.  Enough  to  last  for  at  least  twenty  years. 
There  are  even  tracts  never  touched  vet — virgin  land. 

Q.  Do  you  get  any  gutta  percha  down  there? — A.  No.  I am  not 
sure  what  you  mean. 

Q.  Do  you  get  alamasaca  there? — A.  Yes;  in  big  quantities, 
p c 8 


114 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  3011  have  to  depend  on  the  natives  to  bring  that  down  for 
you? — A.  Yes;  the  briar,  called  in  English  alamasaca. 

Q.  Is  there  a demand  for  alamasaca? — A.  Yes;  there  is  always  a 
good  demand  for  it. 

Q.  Is  it  of  a good,  clear  quality? — A.  Yes;  pretty  clear. 

Q.  Do  3’ou  know'  how  the  price  runs  at  present  ? — A.  No;  I haven’t 
done  anything  in  it  for  the  last  year,  but  L think  it  is  between  §6  and 
§(>.50  a picul. 

Q.  Do  the  prices  of  timbers  run  pretty  steady,  or  do  they  fluctuate  ? — 
A.  They  fluctuate  immensely.  Cedar  is  sold  at  §1.50  a foot  now,  and 
formerly  we  sold  it  at  35  cents. 

Q.  But  that  is  owing  to  the  interruption  of  trade. — A.  Yes;  but 
even  that  does  not  wholly  account  for  it.  I have  seen  fluctuations  in 
one  year  all  the  way  from  51  cents  dow  n to  21  cents. 

Q.  Is  that  simply  due  to  glutting  the  market? — A.  It  is  due  to  glut- 
ting the  market  and  to  no  building  going  on. 

Q.  In  general,  Avhat  do  you  think  of  the  timber  business? — A.  I 
think  it  is  the  best  business  in  the  Philippines. 

Q.  What  tracts  in  the  island  are  covered  with  timber  that  is  acces- 
sible at  the  present  time,  so  far  as  you  know? — A.  Luzon,  Paragua, 
and  some  portions  of  the  coasts  of  Mindanao  and  Mindoro,  but  in  Min- 
doro very  little.  Mr.  Brown  thought  of  going  there,  but  had  to  give 
it  up  on  account  of  the  hostility"  of  the  natives.  Mindoro  is  a very  bad 
place. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  his  people  suffered  much  from  fever 
there? — A.  Yes;  a great  deal. 

Q.  And  did  the  Tulisanes  trouble  him  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  about  Tablas  and  Cebulon?- — A.  I don't  know  much  about 
them.  In  Bureas  and  Samar  there  is  plenty  of  timber,  and  in  Catan- 
duanes  there  is  plenty  of  timber. 

Q.  Is  the  timber  in  Samar  accessible? — A.  Yes,  it  is;  many  ships 
have  been  loaded  there. 

Q.  In  Panay  I suppose  there  is  little  left,  where  it  can  be  got  at? — 
A.  Very  little. 

Q.  Do  you  know  howr  it  is  in  the  northwest  part  of  the  island? — A. 
No  ; about  here  in  the  north  of  Luzon  an$  Aparri,  there  is  plenty  of 
timber,  so  I have  heard. 

Q.  All  along  the  Rio  Grande,  the  big  river,  there  is  timber?- — A. 
Yes,  the  Rio  Grande  has  timber.  They  float  it  down  the  river. 

Q.  Is  it  possible  to  go  up  and  down  the  river  at  all  times  of  the 
year? — A.  When  the  rain  comes  it  is  sometimes  very  gushing  and 
brings  down  trees  and  makes  it  unsafe  for  any  kind  of  shipping. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  The  Rio  Grande  runs  north  ? — A.  Yes.  I know  very  little  about 
that  country. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Has  any  timber  been  shipped  from  there  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  know  from  what  particular  point? — A.  No,  I can  not  tell; 
but  I remember  very  well  that  ships  have  come  here  from  that  country. 

Q.  I think  it  is  Port  Principe  that  timber  has  been  shipped  from? — 
A.  Very  probably.  1 guess  that  is  right. 

Q.  With  a sufficient  investment  in  the  business  by  a man  who  under- 
stood the  provinces  and  the  people  here,  what  would  be  a fair  average 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


115 


return  on  capital  invested  in  the  timber  business? — A.  Well,  that  all 
depends  on  chance.  We  calculate  generally  that  timber  ought  to  yield 
from  30  to  40  per  cent,  and  sometimes  a hundred  per  cent,  and  then  a 
man  might  lose  everything.  Europeans  and  Americans  can’t  cut  tim- 
ber themselves. 

Q.  Why?— A.  Owing  to  the  climate  and  the  heat. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  use  of  saws  for  felling  trees? — A.  A 
chain  saw  was  tried  by  a gentleman,  but  he  didn’t  get  any  result.  I 
tried  it  myself  but  the  men  would  not  use  it.  You  know,  they  will 
have  their  own  way. 

Q.  In  your  own  experience  have  you  had  serious  trouble  in  getting 
on  with  the  native  workmen?  Have  you  had  any  difficulty  in  getting 
the  risrht  sort  of  labor? — A.  I have  never  had  the  slightest  trouble 
with  anyone. 

Q.  Are  you  able  to  get  all  the  help  you  want? — A.  If  I only  say  I 
want  to  go  anywhere  there  are  40  men  ready  to  go. 

Q.  How  much  a month  or  a year  do  your  woodcutters  average  in 
wages,  as  a matter  of  fact? — A.  A woodcutter  wouldn’t  earn  more  than 
between  $60  and  $100,  Mexican,  a year,  and  that  would  be  paid  him 
in  part  in  dry  goods,  gin,  cigars,  and  rice. 

Q.  And  this  sum  that  you  have  mentioned  is  what  the  dry  goods, 
etc.,  would  actually  cost  you? — A.  Oh,  no;  there  is  50  per  cent  profit 
for  me  on  that.  Of  course,  if  you  want  the  truth  I will  tell  you. 
That  profit  is  on  dry  goods  and  cigars  and  manufactured  goods,  but 
not  on  rice.  The  profit  on  dry  goods  and  cigars  is  50  per  cent. 

Q.  I wanted  to  know  if  this  statement  you  made  as  to  the  value  of 
the  earnings  of  the  natives  was  the  actual  cost  to  you  or  to  them. — 
A.  No;  that  refers  to  the  value  of  his  work. 

Q.  And  what  about  his  family?  To  what  extent  do  you  have  to 
employ  his  wife  and  his  children  ? — A.  The  women  make  mats, 
bay  ones;  others  make  nipa,  bejuca,  and  others  are  engaged  gathering 
brea;  and  the  children,  the  boys,  even  at  ten  years,  go  with  the  cara- 
baos and  haul  the  timber  and  help  their  fathers. 

Q.  Are  the  services  of  the  family  included  in  the  wages  you  men- 
tioned ? — A.  That  is  private.  The  women  do  that  for  themselves. 

Q.  Do  you  assist  them  in  marketing  these  goods  ? — A.  I did.  They 
brought  them  out  to  my  place  and  I bought  the  goods  from  them, 
giving  them  a certain  price  for  them.  Latterly,  I didn’t  want  to  bother 
with  it,  so  they  take  the  goods  to  Bassacao  and  sell  them  there. 

Q.  Do  you  expect  to  go  back  and  take  up  your  business  again  when 
things  quiet  down? — A.  Yes.  I am  here  really  now  waiting.  Iam 
very  unluck}'.  I made  application  to  the  captain  of  the  port  to  give 
me  a permit  to  go  down  there,  having  chartered  two  vessels — the 
Ilelminia  and  the  Carolina^ — and  loaded  them  with  stuff,  and  I wanted 
go  out,  but  1 was  stopped.  In  the  meantime  I have  made  promises 
which  I can  not  fulfill,  and  I am  very  anxious  to  go  as  soon  as  it  is  safe 
for  me  to  do  so. 

Q.  You  are  meaning  to  go  back? — A.  I was  read}'  to  go.  Pipoch 
was  ready  to  go  with  me.  1 don’t  fear  even  now. 

By  Admiral  Dewey: 

Q.  How  long  ago  was  that  ? — A.  We  got  the  permit  about  a montn 
ago,  and  this  occurred  about  a week  later.  Of  course  there  must  be 
some  very  good  reason  for  it.  You  see,  my  home  is  down  there  and  I 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


116 

am  living  here  on  friends.  I have  furnished  a house  here  in  Manila 
in  order  to  live  a little  comfortably.  I have  an  American  gentleman 
living  with  me.  For  some  months  1 have  done  nothing  but  go  around 
to  see  when  I can  go  home. 

Q.  When  was  that  order  recalled? — A.  About  a week  after,  just 
when  we  had  loaded  the  ships  and  were  ready  to  go.  Now  we  can’t  get 
any  ships  loaded  to  go  to  those  parts. 

Q.  They  were  clearing  ships  to  Samar  up  to  ten  days  ago;  that  is, 
a week  ago  last  Saturday  they  were. 

Q.  In  regard  to  planting  coffee,  there  has  been  a great  deal  said 
about  the  destruction  of  the  coffee  plant  by  the  borer.  Have  you  been 
troubled  down  there  b}T  the  borer  ? — A.  No;  I have  never  been  trou- 
bled down  there.  I can  not  speak  from  a large  experience;  my  experi- 
ence dates  only  from  four  years  ago,  when  I began  planting  therewith 
good  success. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  anyone  has  found  any  way  of  combating 
them? — A.  I don’t  know  of  any.  In  Batangas  it  has  been  tried  with 
some  sulphide,  but  without  success. 

Q.  What  quality  of  abaca  do  you  produce  down  there? — A.  Very 
tine. 

Q.  Do  you  find  you  can  clear  timber  from  the  land  and  put  abaca 
in? — A.  Fes. 

Q.  Coffee  must  be  planted  on  the  hillside  ?—  A.  On  the  slopes  of  the 
river;  that  is  both  abaca  and  coffee  land. 

Q.  What  height  do  you  have  to  go,  about,  for  coffee? — A.  Only  a 
few  hundred  feet,  that  is  all,  on  the  inland,  sheltered  by  mountains, 
and  just  on  the  slopes  of  the  river  or  the  rivulets. 

Q.  Do  you  find  that  moisture  makes  any  trouble  with  your  coffee  ? — 
No;  I have  not  met  with  that  experience;  the  contrary  has  been  my 
experience. 


INTERVIEW  WITH  SENORES  GONZAGA,  PILAR.  BARRETO, 

ZIALCITA. 


Manila,  May  22,  1899. 

Present:  President  Jacob  Gould  Schurman,  in  the  chair;  Col.  Charles 
Denby  and  Prof.  Dean  C.  Worcester,  commissioners;  and  Mr.  John  R. 
MacArthur,  secretary.  Also  present:  Senor  Gracio  Gonzaga,  Senor 
Gregorio  del  Pilar,  Senor  Alberto  Barreto,  Capt.  Lorenzo  Zialcita. 

President  Schurman.  Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  state  from 
whom  you  come,  gentlemen. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  We  are  emissaries  of  Gen.  Emilio  Aguinaldo. 

President  Schurman.  Of  course,  you  understand  we  do  not  recognize 
any  government  in  the  Archipelago  except  the  Government  of  the 
United  States. 

(To  this  statement  Senor  Gonzaga  and  his  companions  made  no  reply, 
but  bowed.) 

Nevertheless,  we  are  exceedingly  glad  to  meet  such  distinguished 
gentlemen  and  converse  with  you  on  the  situation  here. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  Many  thanks. 

President  Schurman.  Our  commission  has  something  authoritative 
to  say  from  the  President  of  the  U nited  States. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


117 


Senor  Gonzaga.  Our  commission  has  the  honor 'to  salute  the  Amer- 
ican commission  and  fulfill  its  duty  in  doing  so,  and  also  wishes,  on 
the  part  of  General  Aguinaldo,  to  state  that  the  General  is  anxious  to 
finish  this  war;  that  he  knows  that  war  is  harmful  to  the  country,  and 
that  it  is  his  desire  to  terminate  it. 

President  Schurman.  This  commission,  on  behalf  of  the  President 
of  the  United  States,  desires  to  reciprocate  that  sentiment. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  For  this  reason  the  gentleman  whom  we  repre- 
sent has  sent  this  commission  here  to  hear  the  plan  of  government 
which  your  commission  will  propose,  and  which  they  think  fitting  for 
the  country,  in  order  that  he  may  explain  it  to  the  people. 

President  Schurman.  I will  now  explain  the  plan  definitely  pro- 
posed by  the  President  of-  the  United  States: 

(At  this  juncture  there  was  read  the  cablegram  of  May  5,  1899. 
See  Vol.  I,  p.  9.) 

President  Schurman.  I received  a telegram  in  those  words  from  the 
President  of  the  United  States. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  Our  general,  in  his  ardent  desire  for  the  good  of 
his  people — for  he  has  no  other  desire — wishes  to  present  the  plan  of 
government,  which  the  American  Government  wishes  to  implant  here, 
to  the  people,  in  order  that  the  Philippine  people  may  consider  it  and 
study  it  well;  and  should  they  accept  it  he  himself  is  perfectly  agree- 
able. Whatever  may  be  the  form  of  the  government  which  the 
United  States  may  see  fit  to  establish  in  these  islands,  and  although  we 
know  that  you  do  not  recognize  our  government,  it  should  be  remem- 
bered that  General  Aguinaldo  has  established  a government  here,  of 
which  he  is  the  President,  which  is  a republican  form  of  government,  and 
this  being-  taken  into  account  he  must  consult  the  people,  in  order  that 
peace  may  be  eternal  and  may  be  true  peace.  For,  although  he  might 
make  peace  and  sign  it,  if  the  army  is  not  agreeable  to  this,  or  if  the 
people  are  not  agreeable  to  this,  the  peace  would  not  be  final  and 
eternal;  it  would  only  be  temporary  peace.  With  this  end  in  view, 
he  wishes  to  be  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  plan  of  government  in 
all  its  details,  in  order  that  he  may  explain  it  thoroughly  to  the  Phil- 
ippine people. 

Senor  Barreto.  I wish  to  add  a few  words  to  those  spoken  by  my 
companion.  The  Philippine  people  have  lived  under  an  illusion  in 
the  hope  of  independence,  and  General  Aguinaldo  wishes  that  this 
hope  may  be  realized  in  full,  or  that  the  people  act  by  their  own  will 
in  case  the  hope  is  not  realized. 

President  Schurman.  What  hope? 

Senor  Barreto.  The  people  have  lived  under  this  illusion,  and  in 
order  that  he  may  explain  and  make  clear  this  proposition  there  should 
be  a meeting  of  the  representatives  of  the  Philippine  people  to  make 
plain  this  form  of  government. 

President  Schurman.  A reunion  of  the  people  in  their  congress? 

Senor  Barreto.  Exactly. 

President  Schurman.  Have  you  not  just  had  a meeting  of  your 
congress,  Senor  Barreto? 

Senor  Barreto.  We  have  had  a meeting,  but  there  was  not  a suf- 
ficient number  present  to  represent  the  people.  On  account  of  our 
being  in  a state  of  war,  some  of  the  representatives  were  in  one  prov- 
ince, some  in  another,  and  they  were  not  able  to  meet;  for  that  rea- 
son General  Aguinaldo  has  to  beg  a cessation  of  hostilities,  in  order  to 
call  a meeting. 


118 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Professor  Worcester.  He  didn't  say  that.  He  did  not  say  any- 
thing about  a cessation  of  hostilities.  He  probably  will. 

Mr.  Green  (interpreter).  That  is  the  substance  of  what  he  said. 
He  said  to  “stop  the  war.” 

Senor  Barreto.  We  wish  to  suspend  hostilities,  for  without  a sus- 
pension of  hostilities,  as  the  gentlemen  will  understand,  it  is  impossi- 
ble to  have  a meeting. 

Professor  Worcester.  How  many  men  did  you  get  together,  as  a 
matter  of  fact? 

President  Schurmax.  How  many  persons  were  present  at  your 
congress  ? 

Senor  Barreto.  Fifteen. 

President  Schurmax.  How  many  make  a quorum  \ 

Senor  Barreto.  There  should  be  at  least  32  present.  There  are 
110  members.  In  order  to  hold  a meeting  they  must  have  55. 

Professor  Worcester.  I am  free  to  say  to  them  that,  by  the  new 
rule,  16  can  do  business.  We  would  like  to  know  about  that. 

President  Schurmax.  Haven’t  they  a new  rule  by  which  16  make  a 
quorum  \ 

Senor  Barreto.  I am  speaking  according  to  our  constitution.  No. 
But  General  Aguinaldo  wishes  not  only  to  explain  to  this  congress,  but. 
also  to  all  the  elements,  the  living  forces  of  the  people — all  the  people 
themselves,  including  the  military  force — this  plan  of  government. 

President  Schurmax.  Who  are  the  living  forces  of  the  country? 

Senor  Barreto.  The  military  forces  and  the  most  enlightened  people 
of  the  towns;  and  for  that  reason  we  have  been  sent  here  to  get  the 
most  complete  and  the  greatest  details  of  the  plan  of  government 
which  the  American  Government  wishes  to  establish  here;  not  the  gen- 
eral lines,  because  we  know  those  from  the  proclamation;  for  in  the 
proclamation,  which  we  have  had  the  pleasure  of  reading  since  we  came 
to  Manila,  there  appeared  nothing  more  than  general  lines  on  which  the 
government  will  be  established,  which  it  is  desired  to  establish.  With 
this  in  view,  we  wish  that  the  American  commission  would  give  us 
information  about  the  plan  of  government  which  the  President  of  the 
U nited  States  wishes  to  establish  here. 

President  Schurmax.  It  is  here  [referring  to  cablegram].  We  submit 
it  to  you  here  to-day.  This  is  a scheme  which  the  President  of  the 
United  States  can  put  in  force  immediately.  Of  course,  the  final  mat- 
ter is  in  the  hands  of  Congress,  but  the  President  can  set  up  this  gov- 
ernment now  and  it  will  remain  in  force  pending  the  action  of  Con- 
gress, and  until  Congress  takes  action 

Senor  Barreto.  That  is  to  say,  that  this  plan  of  government  can  be 
established  here  only  for  the  present,  but  that  the  final  plan  of  gov- 
ernment must  be  established  by  resolutions  of  Congress. 

President  Schurmax.  This  government  would  remain  in  force  until 
Congress  acted,  and  this  commission,  after  consulting  with  these  gen- 
tlemen, will  recommend  to  Congress  a permanent  and  definite  form  of 
government. 

Senor  Barreto.  That  is  very  true ; but,  of  course,  the  plan  of  gov- 
ernment will  be  a question  for  discussion  by  the  Congress  of  the  United 
States,  and  we  will  not  be  aware  of  what  will  be  the  definite  and  per- 
manent form  of  government  for  the  Philippine  Islands  until  Congress 
has  made  its  decision. 

President  Schurmax.  Having  this  government  in  force,  which  can 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


119 


go  in  force  to-morrow  if  we  have  peace,  the  Philippine  people  must 
trust  this  commission,  the  President  of  the  United  States,  and  Congress. 

Sefior  Barreto.  1 do  not  comprehend. 

(President  Schurman  repeated  his  last  statement.) 

Sefior  Barreto.  That  is  to  say  that  this  plan  of  government  which 
will  be  submitted  to  us  by  the  commission  will  be  the  plan  to  be  enforced 
until  the  resolution  of  Congress. 

President  Schurman.  Two  things  are  to  be  said.  First,  this  govern- 
ment will  remain  in  force  until  Congress  acts,  and  Congress  need  not 
take  action  this  year  or  next  year ; and  secondly,  this  commission  is 
here  for  the  express  purpose  of  finding  out  what  form  of  government 
the  Philippine  people  desire  and  then  making  recommendations  to  Con- 
gress regarding  the  permanent  form  of  government  which  they  desire 
and  which  they  will  approve.  We  are  here  to  find  out  what  form  of 
government  you  desire,  and  then  to  make  recommendations  thereon  to 
Congress. 

Sefior  Barreto.  The  idea  is,  then,  that  you  are  to  recommend  the 
plan  of  government  which  you  have  considered  here  for  a final  plan  of 
government? 

President  Schurman.  Yes. 

Sefior  Barreto.  This  is  the  plan  of  government  which  is  to  be  in 
force  until  the  action  of  Congress? 

Colonel  Denby.  It  is  the  plan  we  propose,  but  we  are  willing  to 
listen  to  you  and  find  out  what  ideas  }mu  have  on  the  subject. 

Sefior  Gonzaga.  We  can  not  make  suggestions,  because  perhaps  our 
suggestions  would  not  be  acceptable  to  you,  but  what  we  desire  is  to 
take  the  plan  of  government  which  you  have  studied  up  and  have 
thought  tit  for  the  people,  to  take  it  into  our  own  territory  and  sub- 
mit it  to  our  people,  and  if  any  changes  in  this  plan  of  government  seem 
necessary  or  proper  to  bring  back  the  plan  here  with  these  suggestions. 

President  Schurman.  We  will  give  you  a copy  of  this  plan  of  the 
President’s  for  such  consideration. 

Sefior  Gonzaga.  This  plan  is  provisional,  as  we  understand.  This 
plan  is  provisional  until  such  time  as  Congress  acts,  and  we  understand 
also  that  President  McKinley  has  sent  this  commission  here  to  the 
islands  to  consider  and  study  a plan  of  government  for  them,  and  we 
understand  that  the  form  of  government  which  you  think  proper  to 
establish  here  will  be  the  plan  of  government  which  President  McKinley 
will  submit  to  Congress,  and  if  it  meets  the  approval  of  Congress  it  is 
to  be  the  definite  form  for  the  country,  and  we  wish  to  submit  this 
plan  of  government  which  you  have  thought  proper  for  the  islands  to 
our  people,  with  the  end  in  view  of  establishing  peace. 

President  Schurman.  The  President  of  the  United  States  thought  it 
more  important  to  provide  a definite  scheme  of  government  for  the 
present  which  should  be  established  at  once. 

Sefior  Gonzaga.  We  are  not  speaking  of  the  plan  of  government 
which  is  to  be  enforced  at  present,  but  of  the  plan  of  government  which 
will  be  recommended  as  the  permanent  plan. 

President  Schurman.  Until  a permanent  form  of  government  shall 
be  developed,  if  this  plan  be  once  established  and  successful  it  will  be 
the  plan  of  government,  and  our  commission  and  the  President  of  the 
United  States  desire  to  have  this  form  set  up  now  in  order  that  peace 
being  thereby  established  the  commission  may  have  the  benefit  of  the 
advice  of  the  distinguished  gentlemen  who  are  now  in  arms  against  the 


120 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


United  States.  Let  us  stop  the  fighting,  set  up  this  form  of  government, 
and  then  get  together  and  agree  as  to  a future  and  permanent  one.  Con- 
sequently, this  scheme  of  the  President's  is  a first  and  necessary  step.  It 
does  not  matter  how  long  we  fight,  whether  we  fight  one  month,  one 
year,  or  ten  years.  The  settlement  of  this  question  will  be  on  us 
then  as  well  as  now.  You  can  not  resist  our  fighting  and  you  may  as 
well  come  in  at  once  and  help  us  get  a constitution,  but  you  must  stop 
fighting  in  order  to  get  the  question  settled.  The  first  step  is  for  you 
to  stop  fighting,  the  second  a provisional  form  of  government,  the 
third  a definite  form  of  government,  and  finally 

Senor  Gonzaga.  For  this  reason  we  have  come  here  to  put  an  end 
to  the  war,  and  to  put  the  provisional  form  of  government  before  the 
people  for  their  consideration. 

President  Schurman.  There  is  a difference.  We  want  not  a suspension 
of  hostilities,  but  an  absolute  cessation,  a termination  of  fighting,  and 
General  Aguinaldo  can  bring  the  fighting  to  an  end  at  once.  That  is 
what  we  want.  And  war  being  terminated,  next  day  this  form  of 
government  can  be  implanted  ; and  then,  in  the  third  place,  consulta- 
tion between  the  distinguished  Philippine  gentlemen  and  our  commis- 
sion regarding  the  permanent  and  definite  form  of  government  to  be 
recommended  to  our  Congress.  And  if  you  stop  fighting,  you  run  no 
risk  regarding  the  temporary  form  of  government,  for  the  President 
of  the  United  States  has  outlined  it;  and  as  to  the  ultimate  form  of 
government,  you  do  not  run  any  great  risk,  because,  as  you  know,  the 
President’s  idea  is  embodied  in  the  provisional  form  of  government, 
and  you  know  the  intention  of  this  commission  ; and  this  commission 
desires  to  satisfy  the  Philippine  people  so  far  as  possible. 

Senor  Barreto.  That  is  to  say,  it  is  always  a possibility 

President  Schurman.  You  must  trust  us,  as  we  will  have  to  trust 
you.  There  is  the  possibility  of  deception;  but  it  is  not  the  policy  of 
this  commission  or  of  the  United  States  to  deceive  anybody. 

Senor  Barreto.  But  we  have  wished  to  know  how  the  commission 
would  cease  hostilities.  Our  desire  is  that  peace  should  be  eternal,  and 
a good  feeling  should  be  eternal  between  the  United  States  and  the 
Philippine  people. 

President  Schurman.  They  can  terminate  the  war  by  accepting  the 
President’s  plan  of  government.  You  lie  re  have  peace  with  honor. 
Stop  fighting,  and  here  is  an  excellent  scheme  of  government  provided 
by  the  President  of  the  United  States  for  you.  Peace  with  dignity. 

Senor  Barreto.  You  wish  to  say,  then,  that  if  we  accept  this  plan  of 
government  all  hostilities  will  be  at  an  end  ' 

President  Schurman.  We  wish  to  say  that  if  you  stop  fighting  you 
can  have  this  form  of  government.  You  have  the  word  of  the  Presi- 
dent of  the  United  States. 

Senior  Bahreto.  What  I understood  you  to  say  in  the  first  place  was 
that  if  we  accepted  this  plan  of  government  hostilities  would  cease 
immediately. 

President  Schurman.  No;  I said  there  were  three  steps  we  had  to 
consider.  The  first  was  your  stopping  fighting;  the  second,  the  Pres- 
ident of  the  United  States  setting  up  this  form  of  government,  and  the 
President  would  do  it  as  soon  as  you  stop  fighting. 

Senor  Barreto.  Then,  in  the  first  place  we  must  stop  the  war,  and 
in  the  second  place  this  plan  of  government  will  be  established,  and  in 
the  third  place  there  would  be  the  study,  the  consultation,  and  reeom- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


121 


menilations  to  Congress.  1 understand,  then,  that  in  the  first  place  we 
are  to  stop  the  war,  in  the  second  place  that  this  form  of  provisional 
government  will  be  established,  and  in  the  third  place  that  this  form 
of  government  being  in  force  we  are  to  advise  with  and  consult  with 
the  commission  about  the  final  form  of  the  government  which  they 
will  recommend  to  President  McKinley,  and  which  he  will  recommend 
to  Congress  as  the  final  form  of  government  for  these  islands. 

President  Sciiurman.  I should  want  to  add  to  that  statement  this 
other:  This  commission  will,  so  far  as  it  is  by  any  means  possible, 
desire  to  meet  the  views  and  wishes  of  the  distinguished  Filipinos 
regarding  their  permanent  form  of  government,  subject  only  and 
always  to  the  fact  of  American  sovereignty.  We  are  very  anxious  to 
come  to  an  understanding  with  you,  but  only  under  one  condition,  the 
fact  of  American  sovereignty. 

Senor  Barreto.  You  wish,  then,  to  hear  the  desires  of  enlightened 
Filipinos  about  the  definite  form  of  government,  always  considering 
the  sovereignty  of  America? 

President  Schurman.  After  we  have  secured  peace  and  the  provi- 
sional form  of  government  is  established,  because  it  is  not  possible  to 
get  the  views  of  all  these  people  until  peace  is  settled:  that  is  what  we 
want. 

Senor  Barreto.  And  that  is  why  we  have  come. 

President  Schurman.  Why  don't  you  stop  fighting,  then. 

Senor  Barreto.  For  that  reason  we  have  come  now  in  order  that 
we  may  explain  to  the  people  the  plan  of  government  which  you 
propose. 

President  Schurman.  How  does  the  President’s  scheme  of  govern- 
ment please  you? 

Senor  Barreto.  We  have  still  to  consider  it,  to  study  it,  and  our 
intelligence  is  not  sufficient  to  answer  the  question  at  the  moment,  on 
the  spur.  There  are  many  complicated  questions  and  you,  Mr.  Schur- 
man, will  understand  that  we  can  not  give  an  answer  immediately. 

President  Schurman.  W e think  you  underrate  your  own  intelligence. 

Senor  Barreto.  Mr.  Schurman,  you  pay  us  a compliment,  but  you 
know  that  we  are  not  capable  of  giving  an  immediate  answer.  What 
we  desire  is  to  study  this  plan  and  give  an  answer  later. 

President  Schurman.  We  have  already  outlined  almost  the  same 
scheme  to  a former  commissioner  of  General  Aguinaldo. 

Senor  Barreto.  Our  desire  at  present  is  to  know  the  details  of  the 
plan  of  government,  and  to  know  in  what  manner  the  commission 
wishes  the  war  to  be  brought  to  an  end. 

President  Schurman.  When  Colonel  Arguelles  came  in  he  said  the 
Filipinos  “want  peace  with  honor.”  We  said  to  him  there  is  neces- 
sary for  peace  only  this:  The  recognition  of  American  sovereignty; 
second,  an  understanding  regarding  the  form  of  government,  which 
this  commission  would  want  to  reach  with  leading  Filipinos;  and  Colo- 
nel Arguelles  wanted  from  us  some  definite  statement  regarding  the 
form  of  government  proposed,  and  we  telegraphed  to  Washington  and 
the  President  of  the  United  States  sent  back  this. 

Senor  Barreto.  But  not  in  the  nature  of  a definite  form  of  govern- 
ment; only  for  a provisional  form. 

President  Schurman.  Until  Congress  acts  the  President  can  not  do 
more,  and  you  must  trust  the  President  now. 

Sefior  Barreto.  Now,  we  should  like  to  know  from  the  commission 
how  the  war  should  be  terminated. 


122 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


President  Schurman.  IN  e wish  General  Aguinaldo  to  stop  ti^htinof 
immediately. 

Senor  Barreto.  NVell.  we  are  the  people  attacked.  How  can  we 
stop  lighting  !!  NVe  are  doing  nothing  more  than  defending  ourselves. 

President  Schurman.  Lay  down  your  arms  and  the  war  will  stop 
immediately.  The  way  to  end  the  war  is  for  you  to  lay  down  your 
arms,  and  the  details,  that  being  a military  question,  are  all  in  the  hands 
of  General  Otis. 

Senor  Barreto.  NVe  understand  that  this  question  is  not  purely  a 
military  question,  but  it  is  a question  both  military  and  civil;  and 
peace  once  having  been  established  and  hostilities  suspended  we  could 
send  a representative  to  the  commission  to  consult  and  agree  about  a 
definite  form  of  government,  meanwhile  remaining  in  our  own  terri- 
tory with  our  own  form  of  government. 

President  Schurman.  NVe  could  not  recognize  any  such  form  of 
government. 

Senor  Barreto.  NN  e do  not  ask  a recognition  implied  or  in  fact  of 
our  government;  what  we  wish  is  a return  to  the  state  of  affairs  in 
existence  before  the  4th  of  February. 

Colonel  Denby.  If  we  take  a hundred  years  we  will  still  have  these 
questions  with  us.  NVhy  not  settle  them  now! 

Senor  Barreto.  NVe  wish  that,  for  we  understand  that  because  of 
the  generous  wishes  of  the  American  commission  we  coidcl  arrive  at  a 
definite  end. 

President  Schurman.  I think  he  said,  **  NVe  want  to  know  what  form 
the  general  sentiment  of  the  American  commission  will  take.” 

Senor  Barreto.  For  returning  to  the  condition  of  affairs  as  they 
were  before  the  4th  of  February  we  consider  that  we  shall  be  in  a better 
position  to  arrive  at  a good  understanding  of  the  generous  impulses 
and  sentiments  of  the  American  commission  than  we  are  at  present. 

President  Schurman.  That  is  a military  question  on  which  the  com- 
mission could  not  undertake  to  express  an  opinion.  This  commission 
can  tell  the  Philippine  people  on  behalf  of  the  President  of  the  United 
States  Avhat  kind  of  government  he  is  ready  to  give  them,  but  we  have 
nothing  to  do  with  the  military  question. 

Senor  Barreto.  But  the  commission  could  order  that  we  may  arrive 
at  the  end  which  we  both  desire — that  is,  peace  and  a definite  form  of 
government 

Senor  Gonzaga.  The  gentlemen  of  the  commission  have  expressed 
their  desire  to  hear  the  opinion  of  the  enlightened  people  in  the  country 
about  the  form  of  government  which  is  to  be  established,  and  we  under- 
stand that  the  good  desire  of  the  gentlemen  of  the  commission  can  not 
be  attained  without  a cessation  of  hostilities. 

President  Schurman.  Of  course  we  can  hear  people  who  come  to 
us,  but  we  very  much  prefer  fighting  should  cease. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  Then  the  difficulty  arises,  in  the  first  place — the 
people  who  are  fighting  at  present  can  not  come  into  our  lines,  because 
they  are  in  battle,  and  they  should  also  be  hurt.  In  the  second  place, 
there  are  many  people  who  have  retired  to  distant  places  and  can  not 
come  because  they  are  in  peace  there  in  these  distant  places;  and  in 
the  third  place,  there  are  many  unforeseen  things  which  come  up  in  a 
state  of  war.  things  which  can  not  be  foreseen  by  either  side,  and  which 
have  a tendency  to  cause  bitterness  on  both  sides.  For  instance,  the 
American  Armv  mav  sav  we  have  not  followed  the  line  of  conduct 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


123 


which  should  be  observed  according  to  the  rules  of  war,  and  this 
naturally  leads  to  bitterness  on  our  side. 

President  Schurman.  If  General  Aguinaldo  and  two  or  three  of  his 
most  prominent  generals  came  in  and  sat  down  at  this  table  as  you 
are  here,  we  believe  this  whole  business  could  be  settled.  For  exam- 
ple, some  of  his  military  men,  some  of  his  secretaries,  and  some  of 
his  prominent  civil  advisers;  for  example,  Senor  Paterno,  the  head  of 
the  cabinet,  whose  book  I have  been  studying.  The}’  know  the  senti- 
ments of  all  their  people  and  their  moral  influence,  and  sitting  at  this 
table  we  could  settle  the  thing  in  a day. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  General  Aguinaldo  has  no  other  desire  than  the 
prosperity  of  his  country,  and  he  wishes  to  settle  this  plan  of  govern- 
ment, and  he  wishes  to  submit  this  plan  of  government  to  his  people 
in  order  to  be  exempt  from  any  responsibility  afterwards;  for  it  is 
possible  that  if  he  simply  says  I wish  this  or  I wish  that  and  it  does 
not  turn  out  well  afterwards  the  people  may  say  that  he  is  to  blame. 

President  Schurman.  General  Aguinaldo  can  not  have  any  stronger 
desire  for  the  welfare,  prosperity,  and  happiness  of  the  Philippine 
people  than  we. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  I thank  you  on  behalf  of  myself  and  my  com- 
panions. 

President  Schurman.  And  if  General  Aguinaldo,  with  half  a dozen 
of  his  leading  military  and  civil  advisers,  sat  here,  I am  persuaded  we 
could  end  this  matter  immediately. 

Senor  Barreto.  To  this  we  may  answer  that  the  wish  of  General 
Aguinaldo  and  of  his  advisers  would  never  be  the  wish  of  the  entire 
Philippine  people. 

President  Schurman.  The  answer  to  that  is  that  General  Aguinaldo 
does  not  begin  to  control  the  entire  archipelago. 

Senor  Barreto.  We  shall  inform  General  Aguinaldo  as  to  what  the 
desires  of  the  commission  in  this  respect  are. 

Professor  Worcester.  It  is  customary  for  people  who  have  a con- 
trolling influence  in  a country  to  assume  responsibility.  They  are 
trying  to  assume  it  in  the  possession  of  the  government;  and  they 
ought  to  assume  it  now. 

President  Schurman.  General  Aguinaldo  and  his  leaders  are  taking 
the  initiative  in  this  war.  If  they  come  here  and  agree  with  us  we 
would  run  the  risk  for  all  the  rest  of  the  people  agreeing  with  him. 
For  that  reason  it  is  not  necessary  to  call  all  of  the  people  of  the 
archipelago  into  conference.  It  is  not  possible  to  do  it.  We  have 
already  had  communications  from  many  provinces  saying  they  are 
waiting  only  for  the  action  of  General  Aguinaldo;  for  an  agreement 
between  General  Aguinaldo  and  ourselves. 

Senor  Barreto.  We  can  not  give  a definite  answer  to  this,  but  will 
propose  it  to  General  Aguinaldo.  For  we  do  not  know  whether  he 
would  wish  to  come  here,  or  would  accept  this  responsibility. 

President  Schurman.  Of  course,  they  would  come  here  as  private 
individuals,  but  it  wTould  give  us  the  greatest  pleasure  to  welcome 
them,  and  the  communications  which  we  have  from  other  provinces 
show  that  the  Philippine  people  are  very  desirous  that  General  Agui- 
naldo should  reach  an  agreement  with  the  commission. 

Senor  Barreto.  We  could  not  assume  the  responsibility  of  answering 
for  General  Aguinaldo  whether  he  would  be  willing  to  come  here  and 
assume  that  responsibility,  but  we  will  lay  the  matter  before  him. 


124 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


We  first  desire  from  the  commission  their  intercession  with  General 
Otis  in  favor  of  an  arrangement  for  a cessation  of  hostilities  in  order 
that  this  agreement  may  he  reached. 

President  Schurman.  The  commission,  under  its  instructions  from 
the  President,  could  not  mix  in  any  way  with  military  affairs. 

Senor  Barreto.  What  we  wish  the  commission  to  do  is  not  to  act 
in  this  military  matter,  but  only  to  intercede  for  us,  seconding  the 
favorable  desires  of  the  President. 

President  Schurman.  We  think  that  we  have  supplied  the  Philip- 
pine people  with  an  honorable  reason  for  laying  down  their  arms,  viz: 
This  liberal  form  of  government  which  the  President  of  the  United 
States  offers  them  and  the  proclamation  of  the  commission.  The  Presi- 
dent's programme  and  the  proclamation  assure  the  people  of  the 
Philippine  Islands  the  most  liberal  form  of  government  that  the}-  have 
ever  had. 

Senor  Barreto.  Any  government  is  more  liberal  than  Spanish 
government.  I do  not  refer  especially  to  autonomy,  but  any  govern- 
ment whatever  is  more  liberal  than  the  Spanish  form  of  goverr.u:: 

President  Schurman.  The  President’s  programme  and  scheme  of 
government  is  exceedingly  liberal. 

Senor  Barreto.  If  I am  allowed  to  speak  it  is  a very  liberal  pro- 
gramme of  government,  but  more  liberal  forms  of  government  could 
exist. 

President  Schurman.  We  have  promised  in  our  proclamation  an 
ever-increasing  freedom. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  Yes;  liberty  very  much  greater. 

President  Schurman.  What  more  liberal  form  do  you  suggest  ( 

Senor  Barreto.  I would  desire  a form  of  government  more  liberal 
than  anything  that  has  been  proposed  so  far. 

President  Schurman.  In  what  respect  % 

Senor  Barreto.  In  all  the  departments  named. 

President  Schurman.  Kindly  explain  in  detail, 

Senor  Barreto.  We  can  not  explain  this  in  detail  at  present,  for 
we  have  not  come  charged  with  this  mission. 

President  Schurman.  You  say  the  President's  programme  is  not  suf- 
ficiently liberal,  and  yet  you  won’t  tell  us  what  form  of  liberal  govern- 
ment you  desire. 

Senor  Barreto.  As  members  of  this  commission  we  can  not  explain 
ourselves  in  detail,  but  can  only  say  for  the  present  that  while  this 
is  a liberal  programme,  there  might  exist  other  programmes  more 
liberal.  This  is  a much  more  liberal  plan  of  government  than  that 
of  the  Spanish.  It  is  like  comparing  heaven  and  earth. 

President  Schurman.  I think  it  rather  hard  that  you  criticise  the 
President’s  scheme  as  not  liberal  enough,  and  yet  will  not  indicate  any 
points  in  which  it  ought  to  be  more  liberal. 

Senor  Barreto.  The  members  of  this  commission  were  not  author- 
ized to  do  so.  We  are  only  authorized  as  members  of  this  commission 
to  hear  the  proposition  of  the  American  commission. 

President  Schurman.  Then  T infer  the  power  which  authorized  you 
may  think  the  President’s  scheme  is  more  liberal  than  you  think  it 
to  be. 

Senor  Baretto.  As  private  individuals,  and  not  as  members  of  the 
commission,  1 or  any  one  of  my  colleagues  can  say  that  we  consider 
this  plan  very  liberal  and  very  suitable  for  the  country. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


125 


President  Schurman.  i want  to  put  aside  all  minor  questions  and 
come  to  the  principal  point.  The  fundamental  point  is  this : We  all 
desire  peace.. 

Senor  Gonzaga.  Undoubtedly. 

President  Schurman.  For  you  two  courses  are  open,  and  only  two. 
In  the  first  place,  you  can  go  on  fighting.  In  that  case  you  will  ulti- 
mately be  beaten  by  the  superior  power  of  the  United  States,  and  the 
chances  of  getting  good  terms  then  will  not  be  so  good  as  they  are  at 
present.  The  second  course  is  this  : You  can  stop  fighting  at  once, 
and  in  the  Philippines  the  scheme  of  government  authorized  by  the 
President  will  be  set  up.  Meantime  this  commission  will  consult 
with  your  leading  men  and  endeavor  to  reach  a form  of  government 
satisfactory  to  you.  The  question  for  you  to  decide  is  this : Which 
course  is  it  more  profitable  for  you  to  pursue  ? 

Senor  Barreto.  The  second  road  is  undoubtedly  the  better  road 
for  us  to  follow,  and  for  that  reason  we  have  come  to  propose  peace, 
and  for  the  thousand  reasons  which  we  have  stated  to  General  Otis. 
For  war  being  continued,  the  good  feeling  would  be  diminished  and 
hatred  would  be  increased,  for  the  death  of  one  individual  affects  all 
of  his  relatives.  For  this  reason  we  desire  a cessation  of  war. 
America  will  lose  nothing  by  the  cessation  of  hostilities.  America 
knows  with  her  power  that  she  can  annihilate  all  of  our  forces.  We 
understand  that  the  United  States,  by  its  superior  force,  can  recon- 
quer the  country,  although  by  doing  so  it  will  cause  death  and  cause 
hatred,  but  we  have  come  to  bring  peace  about,  so  that  the  Philippine 
people  should  not  lose  and  shall  not  be  prejudiced  in  the  settlement. 

President  Schufman.  The  Philippine  people  are  protected  by  the 
President's  form  of  government  and  by  the  commission's  proclamation. 

Senor  Barreto.  We  wish  also  to  add  that  this  cessation  of  hostilities 
would  reassure  the  people  a great  deal;  they  would  understand  then 
that  the  United  States  wished  nothing  but  their  best  interest.  The 
Philippine  people  would  so  be  better  convinced  of  the  lofty  and  gener- 
ous sentiments  and  desires  of  the  American  people,  having  it  in  their 
power  to  suppress  them  and  at  the  same  time  coming  to  an  amicable 
agreement. 

President  Schurman.  A general  who  makes  war  and  continues  war 
has  also  a right  to  stop  it.  Is  it  not  true  General  del  Pilar? 

General  del  Pilar.  Yes. 

President  Schurman.  And  consequently  General  Aguinaldo  has  that 
power. 

Senor  Barreto.  But  as  there  are  two  generals,  two  different  com- 
mands, although  one  might  stop  war  the  other  might  not. 

General  del  Pilar.  Add  also  that  we  did  nothing  but  defend  our- 
selves. We  are  the  people  attacked. 

President  Schurman.  In  reply  to  General  del  Pilar  we  must  say 
that  we  do  not  admit  that.  We  reject  that  statement,  but  it  is  a mat- 
ter of  history  and  we  will  not  discuss  it  here. 

Professor  Worcester.  The  translation  was  not  correct.  He  said 
there  are  two  generals,  one  of  whom  desires  peace  and  the  other  does 
not. 

President  Schurman.  Are  there  two  generals,  one  desiring  peace 
and  the  other  desiring  war  ? 

Senor  Barreto.  No:  you  (turning  to  Professor  Worcester)  did  not 
understand  me.  What  I said  was,  as  there  were  two  generals  in  the 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


126 

question,  one  general  would  not  assume  without  the  other  to  keep  any 
peace  until  they  came  to  an  agreement. 

President  Schurman.  In  such  a case  somebody  has  to  stop  fighting, 
and  among  civilized  nations  it  is  always  the  one  which  is  beaten,  as, 
for  instance,  Spain. 

Senor  Barreto.  I don’t  understand  that  it  is  absolutely  necessary 
to  put  an  end  to  war  that  one  army  should  be  conquered.  An  arrange- 
ment can  be  made  between  both  armies  before  one  is  conquered. 

President  Schurman.  Generally,  one  is  getting  the  worst  of  it,  and 
the  general  who  is  getting  the  worst  of  it  has  sense  enough  to  knovv 
that  they  are  going  to  be  beaten  and  gives  up  his  arms  as  was  done 
in  the  recent  war  with  Spain,  especially  when  the  conquered  party, 
the  one  that  is  being  beaten,  can  get  all  his  reasonable  desires. 

Senor  Barreto.  This  would  be  a great  humiliation  to  our  army. 
For  our  army  has  shed  its  blood  in  order  to  destroy  the  Spanish  Gov- 
ernment in  making  common  cause  with  the  Americans. 

President  Schurman.  They  have  dinuned  the  luster  and  obscured 
the  glory  of  that  by  fighting  the  United  States. 

General  del  Pilar.  TVhat  can  you  expect  of  us  when  we  are 
attacked  ? 

President  Schurman.  I have  already  denied  that  assertion.  AVe  do 
not  want  to  go  into  that  question  here.  AYe  have  come  here  to  make 
peace  and  to  supply  and  furnish  a free  government  for  the  people  and 
we  want  them  to  regard  us  in  that  light. 

Senor  Barreto.  In  this  way  we  wish  to  regard  you. 

President  Schurman.  If  you  will  stop  fighting  it  is  the  opinion  of 
this  commission  that  there  is  no  reasonable  doubt  about  satisfying 
your  desires.  By  “stop  fighting  ” we  mean  lay  down  your  arms. 
Can  you  find  educated  Filipinos  who  are  fit  for  counselors  and  judges  ? 

Senor  Barreto.  I believe  so.  In  some  of  the  districts  it  would  be 
difficult  to  find  people  from  the  district  itself  suitable,  because  there 
are  some  districts  where  there  is  no  enlightenment — for  instance  in 
Mindanao  — but  doubtless  in  the  islands  would  be  found  people  per- 
fectly fit  for  these  positions;  for  under  the  Spanish  Government, 
although  the  chiefs  of  the  Government  were  Spanish,  the  whole  weight 
of  the  administration  of  these  different  departments  was  borne  by 
Filipinos. 

President  Schurman.  The  policy  of  the  United  States  and  of  the 
President  of  the  United  States  will  be  to  appoint  Filipinos  to  all 
offices  which  they  are  qualified  to  fill — post-offices,  custom-houses,  and 
other  offices,  secretaries,  and  mayors  of  cities.  Naturally  the  direction 
M ould  be  in  the  hands  of  Americans,  but  we  do  not  expect  that  a 
large  number  of  Americans  will  be  necessary  at  all. 

Senor  Barreto.  In  all  branches  of  the  administration,  then,  as, 
for  example,  the  treasury,  Filipinos  of  ability  will  have  admission  ? 

President  Schurman.  Filipinos  of  ability  and  good  character  m ill 
have  the  preference. 

Senor  Barreto.  And  how  will  the  judicial  power  be  organized? 

President  Schurman.  I repeat  that  the  direction  M ill  naturally  be  in 
the  hands  of  the  Americans.  The  heads  of  this  department  will  natural  ly 
be  Americans.  The  courts  will  be  composed  of  both  Americans  and 
Filipinos.  The  President  says  either  Americans  or  Filipinos,  or  both, 
and  also  the  judges.  And  now  General  Otis  is  establishing  civil  courts 
and  the  majority  of  the  judges  are  to  be  Filipinos;  and  I want  you  to 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


127 


judge  of  the  action  of  the  United  States  in  the  future  by  what.  General 
Otis  is  doing  now  and  by  what  the  President  sets  forth  in  his  tele- 
gram and  we  in  our  proclamation;  and  in  the  same  way  we  should 
desire  to  have,  as  soon  as  it  is  practicable,  Filipinos  for  police  service 
and  fora  local  army,  if  a local  army  were  necessary — a local  militia. 

Senor  Barreto.  Are  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  Philippine  Islands 
subject  to  the  jurisdiction  of  these  courts? 

President  Schurman.  Do  you  refer  to  the  courts  General  Otis  is 
about  establishing? 

Senor  Barreto.  Yes;  to  those  provisional  courts  when  he  estab- 
lishes them. 

President  Schurman.  All  over  whom  we  have  effective  jurisdiction, 
and  the  plan  of  the  President  contemplates  courts  with  Filipinos  and 
Americans  as  judges,  which  shall  have  jurisdiction  over  the  entire 
archipelago. 

Senor  Barreto.  There  will  not  be  any  duality  of  courts? 

President  Schurman.  No;  we  desire  to  have  the  same  courts  for  the 
entire  archipelago  and  for  all  citizens  and  residents,  and  that  is  one 
reason  why  it  is  necessary  to  have  some  American  judges  in  order  to 
satisfy  the  foreigners.  Mixed  tribunals,  rather.  We  have  had  the 
idea  of  keeping,  for  the  time  being  at  least,  the  laws  in  force  as  codi- 
fied by  Spain,  subject,  of  course,  to  change  whenever  change  is  neces- 
sary. 

Senor  Barreto.  Of  course  that  should  done. 

The  meeting  here  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  ALBERT. 

Manila,  May  30,  1899. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Denbv,  and 
Mr.  MacArthur. 

Jose  Albert,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
stated  as  follows: 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Will  you  have  the  goodness  to  describe  very  briefly  your  place 
of  residence,  the  place  of  your  birth,  and  your  education? — A.  My 
residence  is  No.  37  San  Nicholas.  I am  from  Manila.  I studied  here 
in  the  College  of  Jesuits.  I matriculated  in  medicine  here  at  the 
age  of  14;  I received  a B.  A.  and  was  entered  in  medicine;  studied 
medicine  four  years,  and  afterwards  I went  to  Madrid;  in  Spain  I 
finished  my  course  and  took  the  licentiate,  and  afterwards  the  doctor’s 
degree  in  three  years,  after  the  four  years  here;  and  afterwards  I went 
to  Paris;  studied  for  the  practice  of  a specialist;  made  a specialty  of 
obstetrics.  I was  six  months  in  Paris.  Afterwards  I went  to  Berlin, 
where  I studied  a year  and  a half  under  Dr.  Olds  Hansen,  in  obstetrics 
and  diseases  of  women.  Afterwards  I returned  to  Paris  and  then  to 
Marseilles  and  to  Manila.  I arrived  here  in  1891  and  have  always 
been  in  the  profession  since  1891  and  without  any  relation  to  matters 
political.  On  account  of  the  revolution  I was  prosecuted  without  any 
reason  whatever,  but  was  cleared  in  eighteen  days.  That  w^as  in  1896, 


128 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


at  the  beginning  of  the  revolution.  I remained  here  until  June  of 
last  year.  At  the  time  of  the  blockade  1 went  to  Maraquina  and  there 
1 had  reasons  to  meet  Aguinaldo  and  talk  with  him  and  to  be  with  him 
ever  since. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Did  you  go  in  the  government  service  there? — A.  In  July  I was 
nominated  by  them,  having  presented  myself  to  the  government  of 
Aguinaldo,  as  his  second  chief  of  military  sanitation,  and  I occupied 
that  post  for  two  months.  Afterwards,  at  the  end  of  that  time,  they 
gave  me  the  post  of  director  of  sanitation;  that  was  on  the  22d  or  23d 
of  September. 

Q.  Was  that  a civil  or  a military  post? — A.  A civil  post. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  And  you  have  retained  that  position  since  ? — A.  Yes,  until  now; 
when  I came  away  I had  this  post. 

Q.  What  were  your  functions? — A.  Inspector  of  sanitation  in  all 
the  provinces.  Afterwards  I was  appointed  and  elected  as  a member 
of  congress. 

Q.  How  many  members  were  in  that  congress  ?— A.  About  91. 

Q.  How  many  were  elected  and  how  many  were  appointed? — A. 
About  half  were  appointed  and  the  others  were  elected.  All  the 
provinces,  all  the  members  in  the  captured  provinces,  were  elected. 
They  elected  their  members. 

Q.  Who  nominated  them?— A.  Appointments  were  always  made  by 
the  ministry  of  government,  the  ministry  of  the  interior,  with  the 
sanction  of  the  president. 

Q.  AYere  you  a member  of  a commission  to  come  here?— A.  1 was 
named  as  a member  of  a commission  but  it  was  not  confirmed.  1 will 
tell  you  the  start  of  it.  The  principal  task  of  the  revolutionary  con- 
gress was  to  form  a constitution.  This  constitution  was  promulgated 
on  the  23d  of  January.  This  was  the  end  of  the  task,  and  the  congress 
forthwith  became  the  congress  of  the  Philippine  republic.  The  con- 
stitution being  promulgated,  the  revolutionary  congress  came  to  an 
end  and  the  republican  congress  began  with  the  same  members.  The 
day  was  fixed  for  the  15th  of  April  for  the  congress  to  begin  its  labors, 
but  as  they  were  not  able  on  the  loth  of  April,  the  day  set  to  meet  in 
Alalolos,  it  was  postponed  until  the  5th  of  May. 

Q.  AA^as  there  any  session  of  the  congress  of  the  Philippine  repub- 
lic prior  to  that  day  in  February  or  March? — A.  No;  no  work  at  all. 

Q.  How  long  did  the  session  last  of  the  congress  of  the  Philippine 
republic  after  the  promulgation  of  the  constitution  ? — A.  Upon  the 
promulgation  of  the  constitution  this  revolutionary  congress  came  to 
an  end  and  the  republican  congress  set  the  day  for  meeting  on  the 
15th  of  April,  but  as  I have  said,  on  the  15th  of  April  they  were  not 
able  to  meet,  consequently  in  January,  February,  and  Alarch  nothing 
was  done  at  all.  So  they  were  not  able  to  do  anything  until  the  5th 
of  May.  On  the  5th  of  May  they  received  a message  from  President 
Aguinaldo.  This  message  you  will  have  read. 

Q.  How  many  members  were  in  that  congress  on  the  5th  of  May  ? — 
A.  There  were  16.  In  reply  to  this  message  of  the  president  we 
thought  that  the  government  of  Alabina  should  be  displaced  and  that 
the  government  should  enter  into  negotiations  with  General  Otis; 
that  we  should  recognize  the  American  sovereignty  according  to  your 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


129 


proclamation  and  enter  into  a discussion  of  an  autonomous  constitu- 
tion. 

Q.  How  many  persons  voted  for  that  programme? — -A.  Fifteen 
votes  were  east  in  favor  of  this;  all  but  one,  who  did  not  vote.  This 
was  explained  by  the  fact  that  he  was  a member  of  the  government, 
of  the  treasury,  and  it  would  not  be  fitting  for  him  to  vote  against  a 
government  of  which  he  was  a member,  but  nevertheless  it  was 
agreed  that  that  policy  should  be  adopted.  That  decision  was  trans- 
mitted to  Aguinaldo,  that  a new  cabinet  be  appointed  who  should 
appoint  a committee  to  enter  into  negotiations  for  peace.  Naturally 
Paterno  went  into  power,  and,  as  you  know,  Buencamino  was  president. 

Q.  Why  'was  Paterno  naturally  the  head  of  the  new  cabinet? — A. 
Paterno  was  called  to  this  duty,  because  Paterno  was  the  man  who 
negotiated  the  treaty  at  Biae-Na-Bato,  and  we  had  more  confidence  in 
him,  and  also  to  inspire  confidence  in  the  American  Government  that 
he  would  arrange  affairs. 

Q.  Was  Paterno  suggested  to  Aguinaldo  by  the  Congress? — A.  No. 

Q.  Who  made  the  selection?— A.  Friends  among  themselves  in  pri- 
vate conversations,  in  which  the  president  also  joined.  It  is  certain 
that  if  Dr.  Agoncillo,  when  the  ballot  was  taken,  had  not  remained 
with  the  Americans  he  would  have  been  the  president  of  the  cabinet. 

Q.  Who  were  the  other  members  of  the  commission? — A.  I will 
indicate  to  you  the  membership  of  the  commission:  President,  Buenca- 
mino, Vice-President,  Florentine  Torres,  from  Manila;  Secretary,  Pablo 
Ocampo,  of  Manila;  Vice-Secretary,  Cruz  Herrera,  and  the  other  mem- 
bers were  Colonel  Arguelles  and  General  Gregorio  del  Pilar,  Maximo  Pa- 
terno, the  brother  of  the  president  of  the  cabinet,  and  I,  Jose  Albert. 

Q.  Who  named  this  commission? — A.  The  government  in  agree- 
ment with  the  president. 

Q.  And  why  didn't  this  commission  come  to  us? — A.  The  following 
is  the  explanation:  The  commission  met  on  the  7th  and  we  had  the 
basis  on  which  we  were  to  act  agreed  on.  On  the  8th  the  commission 
was  all  ready,  had  its  work  all  done,  but  it  was  necessary  for  us  to  get 
the  opinions  of  the  generals.  On  the  9th  or  10th  the  generals  met  in 
session  with  the  commission,  not  all  the  generals,  but  General  Del 
Pilar  and  General  Luna  and  some  colonels  and  lieutenant-colonels  were 
present.  We  had  a great  deal  of  discussion.  The  result  was  that  the 
military  men  said  that  they  would  keep  still;  that  they  were  nothing 
but  military  men  and  would  allow  the  government  to  go  on  where  it 
would.  It  was  plain  that  Luna  was  not  exactly  agreeable,  but  he  said 
nothing  but  that  he  woidd  follow  the  government.  The  government 
consequently  went  on  in  this  mode  of  thought  until  a telegram  came 
from  General  Luna  saying,  “Stop  the  journey  of  the  commissioners; 
1 have  revelations  to  make.”  For  six  or  seven  days  we  waited,  but 
Luna  did  not  come;  he  was  in  Tarlac. 

Q.  Where  were  you?— A.  We  were  in  San  Isidro.  On  the  13th  I 
was  in  San  Isidro.  General  Luna  did  not  come,  and  the  president, 
Aguinaldo,  went  to  Cabanatuan  with  all  his  cabinet  (because  where 
the  president  goes  the  cabinet  goes),  so  I am  not  a witness  as  to  what 
passed  beyond  what  I know  myself,  which  I will  tell  you.  On  the  fol- 
lowing day,  the  17th,  General  Luna  came  to  Cabanatuan  in  the  even- 
ing. On  his  arrival  he  sent  a messenger  looking  for  Buencamino, 
Arguelles,  Paterno,  and  Albert  (myself),  it  was  said,  to  arrest  us,  to 
detain  us.  He  went  to  the  presidency,  where  he  met  Buencamino,  with 
p c 9 


130 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


whom  he  had  a discussion,  he  saying  that  Buencamino  was  going  to 
sell  his  native  land  to  the  traitor.  The  president  intervened  and  the 
matter  was  arranged  and  settled.  Nothing  happened,  and  Luna  went 
back  to  Tarlac,  and  the  government,  to  avoid  ill  feeling  on  the  part  of 
anyone,  appointed  the  commission  which  came  here  with  what  powers 
you  know.  * 

Q,  What  powers  had  your  commission — the  first  commission  ? — A. 
When  we  became  members  of  this  commission  we  exacted  the  follow- 
ing powers  to  arrange  business  with  the  American  Government  on  the 
basis  of  the  recognition  of  American  sovereignty,  because  on  the  basis 
of  such  recognition  of  American  sovereignty  we  were  going  to  treat 
on  the  question  of  autonomy,  or,  to  put  it  better,  we  were  going  to 
arrange  the  economic  constitution  and  discuss  the  matter  of  an  auton- 
omous constitution.  The  following  was  the  basis  of  the  autonomic 
constitution. 

Q.  Did  Aguinaldo  give  to  the  commission  these  powers  which  you 
have  described,  or  were  they  simply  the  powers  that  the  commission 
desired  ( — A.  He  was  disposed  to  give  us  those  powers  when  this  quarrel 
arose.  Everything  was  written  and  ready  and  there  was  wanting  only 
the  signature  at  that  time. 

Q.  What  are  the  bases  of  this  autonomous  constitution? — A.  These 
are  the  fundamental  principles,  bases  of  the  autonomous  constitution: 

First.  The  government  of  the  Philippine  archipelago  is  to  be  popu- 
lar, representative,  and  responsible;  three  distinct  powers  shall  exercise 
it — the  executive,  legislative,  and  judicial.  The  executive  power  shall 
reside  in  the  governor-general,  appointed  b}r  the  President  of  the 
United  States.  This  is  the  sovereignty.  He  shall  exercise  it,  assisted 
by  a council  of  secretaries.  All  the  orders  which  the  governor  shall 
exercise  shall  be  referred  to  and  executed  by  the  respective  secretaries. 
The  governor  shall  have  a relative  veto  power  equal  to  that  held  by 
the  President  of  the  United  States  and  by  the  governors  of  the  differ- 
ent States;  for  instance,  the  governor  of  Pennsylvania  or  the  governor 
of  New  York.  A ma  jority  of  the  secretaries  shall  be  Filipinos — natives — 
and  should  enjoy  the  confidence  of  parliament.  They  should  be  named 
by  the  governor,  and  they  shall  be  charged  by  the  governor  with  put- 
ting in  force  the  laws  passed  by  the  parliament  or  congress  and  respon- 
sible to  the  same. 

Legislative  power:  It  shall  be  organized  under  the  same  conditions 
as  that  of  the  United  States,  and  with  similar  functions.  It  shall  have 
the  power  to  legislate  in  regard  to  everything  that  pertains  to  the 
country — that  refers  to  the  Philippines — and  we  desire  also  a voice  on 
the  question  of  exports. 

Q.  I don’t  understand  clearly  what  is  the  field  of  legislation  for  this 
congress.  Is  it  proposed  that  this  congress  should  legislate  for  cus- 
toms, post-offices,  and  foreign  relations? — A.  I will  explain  this  to 
you  by  degrees.  In  the  matter  of  customs  we  are  especially  emphatic 
on  the  question  of  exportation  of  the  articles  produced  by  the  country. 
In  the  case  of  importation  we  would  ask  a voice  and  a vote;  in  the 
case  of  exports  we  would  also  ask  a voice  and  a vote.  In  regard 
to  the  mails,  cable  lines,  and  that  sort  of  thing,  of  course  this  being  a 
matter  that  has  to  do  with  foreign  nations  and  of  a foreign  character— an 
extra  character — it  belongs  to  the  governing  power,  and  we  should  not 
desire  a voice  nor  a vote  in  it;  but  as  in  the  sixth  article  of  your 
proclamation  it  states  that  the  funds  of  the  treasury  of  the  Philippines 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


131 

shall  be  applied  to  the  Philippines  only  and  not  one  cent  of  them  shall 
go  out  to  America,  we  wish  to  know  whether  this  is  exactly  the  mean- 
ing of  this  article.  To  our  understanding  that  is  what  it  means.  Of 
course  what  we  have  asked  is  based  upon  your  proclamation  of  April 
4.  The  basis  of  everything  we  ask  is  your  proclamation  of  April  4. 
We  want  to  know  if  we  have  rightly  understood  it? 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  The  United  States  does  not  desire  to  make  one  cent  of  money 
out  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  and,  as  the  proclamation  said,  all  money 
raised  by  local  taxes  will  be  spent  locally. — A.  This  matter  about  mails 
and  similar  things  we  leave  to  American  supervision,  which  has  more 
experience  in  such  things  than  we  have.  Concerning  the  judicial 
power,  it  should  be  final,  in  the  sense  that  there  shall  not  be  an  appeal 
from  the  islands  to  any  court  in  the  United  States.  All  cases  should 
end  here. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Suppose  the  United  States  were  interested  in  a case,  would  you 
object  to  an  appeal  to  our  Supreme  Court? — A.  In  the  case  of  an 
American  subject  engaged  in  a suit  here,  do  you  mean? 

Q.  No;  I mean  if  the  United  States  Government  itself  was  a party 
to  an  action.  Suppose  the  action  involved  the  interpretation  of  the  con- 
stitution of  the  Philippines  or  of  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States 
what  objection  could  you  possibly  have  to  such  a case  as  that  being 
appealed  to  the  Supreme  Court,  a case  involving  constitutional  ques- 
tions?— A.  As  the  governor  has  a veto  power  to  intervene  in  all 
matters  of  local  law,  but  in  maritime  cases — admiralty  cases,  for  in- 
stance— .naturally  the  supreme  court  should  be  in  the  United  States, 
belonging  as  it  does  to  the  sovereign  power. 

Q.  Under  our  system  we  have  the  right  to  take  to  the  Supreme 
Court  any  case  involving  a constitutional  question,  that  is,  involving  the 
interpretation  of  the  constitution.  What  earthly  objection  could 
there  be  if  there  was  a case  decided  by  the  supreme  court  of  Manila — 
as  I presume  there  will  be  a supreme  court  here — if  anyone  wanted  to 
appeal  from  that  decision,  to  settle  this  question,  what  objection  could 
there  be  to  appealing  such  a case  to  the  United  States? — A.  I think 
that  undoubtedly  on  this  point  there  would  be  no  objection  made  to 
such  cases  going  to  the  Supreme  Court,  arid  that  our  commission  would 
have  been  so  disposed. 

Q.  In  the  United  States  we  can  not  appeal  to  the  United  States 
Supreme  Court  unless  the  amount  involved  is  $5,000  or  unless  there  is 
a constitutional  question  raised. — A.  In  thatcase,  suppose  twoFilipinos 
had  a suit  in  which  $5,000  were  involved,  would  that  go  to  the  Supreme 
Court  ? 

Q.  No;  they  could  not  go  there  unless  there  was  more  than  $5,000 
involved.— A.  This  discussion,  is  of  no  practical  importance,  because 
there  probably  would  not  be  a case  here  that  anybody  would  want  to 
appeal.  The  supreme  court  here  would  settle  the  question.  It  is  not 
worth  while  discussing  that  question,  because  there  would  be  no  diffi- 
culty, for  that  is  a question  that  lawyers — American  and  Filipino  law- 
yers— could  get  together  and  settle,  and  probably  there  would  not  be 
more  than  one  case  from  Manila  a year  anyway. 

Q.  Criminal  cases  would  be  finally  decided  in  this  island. — A.  The 
president  of  the  supreme  court  and  the  procurador  fiscal  (attorney- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


132 

general)  shall  be  elected  by  both  houses  of  congress.  This  is  a ques- 
tion for  lawyers  and  doubtless  needs  no  discussion,  but  this  was 
suggested  there,  and  I mention  it  as  enumerating  our  bases. 

Q.  Is  there  any  more  about  the  courts  ? — A.  No. 

Q.  Who  would  appoint  the  other  judges,  the  governor-general ? — 
A.  The  president  of  the  supreme  court  shall  propose  them  to  the 
governor-general,  who  shall  appoint  them. 

Q.  Does  the  governor-general  appoint  these  judges  from  the  nomi- 
nation of  the  president  of  the  supreme  court? — A.  Yes;  when  pro- 
posed by  the  president  of  the  supreme  court  the  governor-general 
appoints  them.  Constitutional  guaranties  can  not  be  suspended  upon 
the  supposition  that  there  will  be  a constitution  embodying  the  rights 
and  privileges  of  the  people.  It  is  proposed  that  the  consent  of  the 
house  of  congress,  or  a majority  of  the  cabinet,  when  congress  is  not 
in  session,  shall  be  first  obtained  before  any  constitutional  guaranties 
shall  be  suspended.  Supposing  that  you  have  a constitution,  that 
these  guaranties  shall  not  lie  suspended  except  by  congress  or  by  a 
majority  of  the  cabinet,  when  congress  is  not  in  session.  The  forma- 
tion of  the  army  and  militia,  the  entering  of  the  revolutionary  army 
into  its  ranks  in  the  most  just  and  equitable  manner,  naturally  with 
their  officers  and  chiefs.  As  to  the  Philippine  officers,  all  of  them 
sufficiently  instructed,  to  lie  determined  by  a board  of  American  offi- 
cers, a commission,  as  to  their  fitness,  those  passing  such  boards  to 
become  officers.  If  necessary,  a military  academy  here  for  the  admis- 
sion of  Filipinos  who  might  learn  military  art  and  science  under  the 
instruction  of  American  officers. 

Q.  Suppose  the  United  States  took  over  these  soldiers,  as  you  desire, 
is  it  your  intention  that  the  officers  lie  Americans,  or  any  of  them ? — 
A.  Yes;  it  ought  to  be.  That  is  my  intention.  All  public  offices  are 
to  be  filled  by  natives. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  You  mean  so  far  as  natives  are  found  qualified  to  do  the  work  ? — 
A.  Certainly;  if  they  are  not  fit  they  should  not  remain  two  months. 

Q.  You  recognize  that  was  the  idea  of  the  proclamation,  don’t 
you?  A.  We  are  inspired  in  all  this  by  the  proclamation,  but  under 
the  clauses  of  the  proclamation  there  are  these  bases  of  which  we  want 
to  inquire.  Naturally,  in  coming  here  to  make  inquiries  we  don't  want 
to  ask  for  heaven  and  earth.  There  is  one  thing  more — the  exclusion 
of  religious  orders;  not  only  this,  but  their  expulsion  and  the  prohi- 
bition of  their  return. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  That  is  a question  which  must  be  left  to  the  determination  of 
the  future  government  of  the  Philippine  Islands,  that  being  the  sub- 
ject of  treaties. — A.  But  this,  of  course,  is  an  international  question 
and  in  the  province  of  the  United  States,  but  there  might  be  a 
treaty  by  which  at  the  request  of  the  Vatican  these  people  might  be 
returned,  and  that  is  the  least  of  it.  It  is  our  wish  to  simply  call 
the  attention  of  the  United  States  Government  to  these  people,  that 
they  may  have  no  influence  in  civil  affairs.  Of  course  it  is  an  inter- 
national matter  and  in  the  province  of  the  United  States;  and  further- 
more, another  question  arises  about  the  property  of  these  people,  which 
should  be  paid  in  and  become  the  property  of  the  Filipino  treasury, 
except,  of  course,  in  so  far  as  they  can  show  that  the  property  is  theirs 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


133 


by  right,  in  which  case,  as  property  is  property  and  must  be  respected, 
the  Philippine  government  should  pay  for  it  and  could  not  avoid  paying 
for  it. 

Q.  We  have  had  this  question  of  property  brought  before  us  a great 
many  times,  and  we  wish  to  say  that  the  decision  of  that  question  must 
rest  with  the  courts  under  the  future  government. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  The  Philippine  government  will  have  very  great  control  over 
that  question,  subject  only  to  international  obligation  already  con- 
tracted, and  subject  to  the  construction  of  the  courts  of  any  laws  that 
may  be  passed. — A.  What  are  those  obligations  which  we  have? 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  The  treaty  of  peace  between  Spain  and  the  United  States  pro- 
tects all  property  rights  in  the  archipelago? — A.  What  obligations 
had  the  United  States  contracted  with  foreign  nations  in  virtue  of  its 
sovereignty  ? 

Q.  By  the  treaty  of  peace  between  the  United  States  and  Spain 
all  just  property  rights  in  the  archipelago  must  be  respected. — A. 
We  have  understood  that  all  property  justly  acquired  shall  be  properly 
orotected  and  respected,  and  for  that  reason  the  Philippine  treasury 
will  have  to  pay  for  property  so  justly  acquired.  That  is  a necessary 
proposition.  * 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  If  any  man  attempts  to  take  away  another  man’s  property  he 
has  got  to  go  into  court,  and  then  there  is  a trial,  and  the  court 
determines  the  title  to  the  property. — A.  That  is  the  wish  and  desire 
of  the  Philippine  people — to  pay  for  such  legitimate  claims  and  to 
get  these  people  out  of  the  country,  that  they  may  hold  no  property 
here — and  we  think  that  this  is  very  little  to  ask,  for  we  know  that  in 
some  portions  of  the  United  States  it  is  against  the  law  for  corpora- 
tions to  hold  property  of  the  value  of  more  than  $40,000. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  The  sympathy  of  the  American  people  is  with  the  aspirations  of 
the  Filipino  people  for  freedom. — A.  I think  that  from  this  point  of 
view  the  bases  that  I have  read  do  not  ask  for  heaven  itself.  We  are 
not  asking  for  heaven  itself,  but  for  reasonable  things. 

Q.  Will  you  report  this  conversation  with  us  to-day?  Do  you  come 
here  with  any  authority  now?  Do  you  represent  anybody? — A.  No; 
I do  not.  I had  to  remain  in  San  Isidro  when  the  commission  was 
formed  owing  to  the  ill  health  or  sickness  of  my  child.  The  result 
was  I was  there  when  General  Lawton  arrived  with  his  troops,  and  I 
had  a talk  with  him  and  he  gave  me  the  letter  which  I have  brought 
to  you.  My  exact  position  in  regard  to  the  former  commission  you 
can  understand  yourself  now.  I understood  that  1 was  no  longer  allied 
to  them,  inasmuch  as  the  other  commission  had  come  here  and  I had  not 
been  with  them.  I considered  myself  at  liberty,  therefore,  to  speak 
my  own  opinion,  and  I am  not  representing  anyone.  What  I have 
said  here  are  my  own  ideas,  but  they  are  in  s3Tmpathy  with  the  ideas, 
1 think,  of  the  Philippine  people,  and  if  they  are  ideas  which  are 
acceptable  to  the  Americans  it  seem  to  me  that  peace  is  assured,  for  a 
great  many  people  sympathize  with  this  view,  and  war  is  useless. 


134 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  can  you  utilize  this  interview  looking  toward  peace  ? Can 
you  communicate  it  to  these  people?  What  active  steps  will  you  take 
now  to  get  to  these  people  and  tell  them  what  we  have  said  here 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Is  it  your  intention  to  communicate  with  the  people  up  there  ? — 
A.  I have  wished  to  know  whether  those  propositions  which  I have 
made  to  3-011  are  reasonable. 

Q.  What  do  3-0U  propose  to  do  with  the  answer  to  my  question  ? I 
want  3-011  to  know  that  we  have  a general  sympathy  with  your  plans, 
although  on  some  points  3-ou  have  gone  a great  deal  further  than  the 
President’s  authorized  programme,  but  we  shall  be  glad  to  discuss 
these  matters  with  persons  authorized  as  the  representatives  of  General 
Aguinaldo,  or  General  Aguinaldo  himself.  Of  course  3-011  must  also 
remember  that  the  military  power  is  here  and  that  we  are  not  supreme. 
In  relation  to  the  question  of  the  suspension  of  hostilities,  that  is  one 
belonging  to  the  military  authorities,  and  has  to  lie  determined  by 
them. — A.  This  question  of  the  suspension  of  hostilities  is  purely  a 
political  question,  as  I look  at  it,  and  not  a moral' question.  1, 1113-self, 
in  the  place  of  the  Americans,  would  not  grant  a suspension  of  hostili- 
ties from  a military  point  of  view,  but  it  seems  to  me  it  would  be 
politic  to  grant  a suspension  of  hostilities  from  a political  point  of 
view,  in  order  that  Aguinaldo  might  give  his  people  the  word  to 
recognize  the  sovereignty  of  the  United  States.  For  such  time  as 
there  was  a suspension,  the  military  honor  would  not  suffer,  and  it 
would  be  a matter  of  the  very  highest  political  importance  to  allow 
such  a suspension  for  the  animus  among  the  people  to  die  out.  There 
is  a great  lack  of  confidence,  and  the  nonsuspension  of  hostilities 
would  imply  a great  lack  of  confidence  on  the  part  of  the  Americans. 
The  nonsuspension  of  hostilities  gives  occasion  for  the  opinion  among 
the  Filipinos  who  are  in  the  field  that  the  polk*3'  of  the  United  States 
is  a policy  of  conquest.  Naturally  I think  so,  too. 

B3-  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  can  you  think  that  after  the  proclamation  ? You  have  praised 
the  proclamation.  How  can  3-ou  who  have  read  that  proclamation 
signed  by  Otis  himself,  and  Dewey,  and  the  other  three  commission- 
ers hold  that  opinion? — A.  For  the  proclamation  is  a proclamation, 
and  can  not  go  into  details  and  the  details  are  the  things  which  are 
in  dispute.  It  is  a programme  and  can  not  be  more  than  such. 

Q.  The  question  is  not  a question  of  detail. — A.  1 don't  understand. 
You  said  when  you  came  to  the  Philippines  we  should  have  great 
confidence  in  America.  To  that  the  Filipinos  replied,  We  have  confi- 
dence in  America,  but  we  want  greater  details.  If  3-011  do  not  find 
1113-  propositions  unreasonable,  and  if  General  Otis  will  allow  it,  I.  as  a 
private  citizen  and  neutral  party,  will  have  communication  with  the 
insurgent  camp.  I am  willing  to  act  as  a mediator  to  send  letters  to 
Aguinaldo  and  to  Luna  advising  them  to  show  themselves  more  tracta- 
ble and  giving  them  my  impressions;  that  is,  if  you  wish;  for  my  part 
I do  not  seek  to  impose  un-self  as  a mediator  unless  it  meets  with  3-our 
approval. 

President  Schurman.  (To  the  other  commissioners:  It  is  not  possible 
for  us  to  do  ain’thing  of  that  kind;  it  is  a matter  to  be  arranged 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


135 


between  him  and  General  Otis.)  We  have  been  very  much  interested 
by  this  interview,  and  we  are  exceedingly  grateful  to  you  for  coming 
in,  and  we  sincerely  hope  it.  will  promote  peace,  and  if  you  have  any- 
thing more  to  communicate  we  will  be  very  glad  to  hear  from  you. 

The  meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  FELIPE  CALDERON  AND  ANGEL  FABIE. 

Manila,  June  5,  1899. 

Present:  President  Schurman  (in  the  chair),  Colonel  Denby,  and 
Professor  Worcester,  commissioners,  and  Mr.  John  R.  MacArthur, 
secretary  and  counsel;  Angel  Fabie  and  Felipe  Calderon,  witnesses. 

Felipe  Calderon,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commis- 
sioners, testilied  as  follows: 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  In  conversation  with  us  you  stated  that  Luna  is  the  dictator. 
How  did  Luna  make  himself  dictator? — A.  A person  that  came  from 
there  bringing  letters  to  certain  people  gave  me  this  news. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  You  stated  in  conversation  that  Arguelles,  Paterno,  and  Buenca- 
mino  had  been  expelled  from  the  Philippines  by  Luna.  Do  you  know 
what  the  charges  against  Arguelles  were? — A.  Being  an  annex- 
ationist. 

Q.  And  what  was  the  charge  against  Paterno  ? — A.  The  same. 

Q.  And  what  was  the  charge  against  Buencamino? — A.  As  to  that 
I am  not  certain,  but  I suppose  the  charges  against  Buencamino  were 
the  same,  because  he  wanted  peace. 

Q.  How  does  Aguinaldo  stand  in  this  matter? — A.  We  do  not 
know. 

Q.  Has  Luna  declared  himself  dictator? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Has  he  declared  himself  openly  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Has  he  deposed  Aguinaldo  from  all  authority  ? — A.  I don’t  know. 
We  know  nothing,  except  we  have  news  of  these  facts,  without 
details.  I don’t  know  whether  you  have  this  news  or  not,  that  a ship 
loaded  with  munitions  for  the  rebel  camp  sailed  from  Taiwingfu,  on 
the  west  coast  of  Formosa,  and  it  appears  that  this  ship  has  reached 
her  destination. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  port  she  came  in? — A.  No,  sir.  It  appears 
that  the}'  had  a contract  with  a Belgian  arms  maker,  who  had  taken  a 
contract  to  bring  arms  here,  and  I am  not  sure  whether  they  arrived 
or  not.  There  were  two  ships;  the  first  one  arrived  with  munitions, 
and  the  second  one — I don’t  know  whether  or  not  it  has  arrived,  but 
there  is  a contract  with  the  Belgian  armorer. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  When  did  Luna  declare  himself  dictator? — A.  1 got  the  news 
yesterday.  I did  not  ask  when. 

Q.  What  effect  do  you  think  that  will  have  on  the  revolution  ? — A. 
A bad  effect  for  the  revolution;  contrary  to  their  interests  and  favor- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


136 

able  to  peace,  and  I will  explain  why.  It  is  my  opinion  that  the  effect 
that  this  will  have  will  be  favorable  to  peace,  for  the  old  element  of 
the  revolution  and  the  new  element  of  the  revolution  are  at  odds. 
Luna  represents  the  new  element  in  the  revolution.  It  is  probable 
that  Luna,  on  account  of  his  sanguinary  and  arbitrary  character,  will 
do  d amage — will  oppress  the  older  element  of  the  revolution.  That 
would  give  rise  to  trouble  between  them  and  civil  war  among  the 
revolutionary  party  itself.  Owing  to  this  civil  war  there  will  be  a 
perfect  anarchy  among  the  people,  and  discontent  will  increase,  and 
consequently  they  will  desire  peace. 

Angel  Fabie  answered  as  follows  in  response  to  the  questions  of 
the  commissioners: 

President  Schurman.  We  are  very  glad  to  have  you  before  the  com- 
mission, and  we  will  take  the  liberty  of  asking  you  a few  formal 
questions. 

Q.  Please  give  us  your  name. — A.  Angel  Fabie. 

Q.  I believe  you  are  from  Mindoro? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  part? — A.  The  west  coast  of  Mindoro.  1 was  appointed 
captain  of  the  port  of  that  part  of  Mindoro. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  the  port? — A.  From  Palawan  to  Sablian — 
several  villages. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  captain?- -A.  I delivered  my  appoint- 
ment to  the  captain  of  this  port  immediately. 

Q.  When  were  you  appointed  down  there? — A.  1 was  appointed,  I 
think,  on  the  8th  or  the  15th  of  last  November. 

Q.  By  Aguinaldo? — A.  By  Aguinaldo  and  the  secretary  of  marine. 

Q.  Who  was  the  secretary  of  marine  at  that  time? — A.  Pascualo  Le 
Disma,  who  was  a comrade  of  mine,  because  I was  a captain  and  he  was 
a captain,  too;  and  they  wished  to  give  me  the  portfolio  of  marine,  but 
I wouldn’t  accept  it,  because  I found  them  very  ridiculous. 

Q.  What  have  you  been  doing  there  as  captain  of  the  port?- — A. 
Before  I received  my  appointment  they  assured  me,  everbody  in  the 
ministry,  that  they  never  would  fight  America;  first,  because  the  coun- 
try was  friendly  to  the  Americans,  and,  second,  we  could  not  fight  a 
nation  so  much  larger 

Q.  And  more  powerful — A.  Yes;  and  that  was  my  opinion, 

and  with  that  condition  I accepted  my  office,  and  they  prepared  them 
selves,  not  to  fight  America,  but  to  be  able  to  obtain  the  most  they 
could.  All  the  writers  in  the  republic — they  were  friends  of  mine— 
were  of  the  same  opinion. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  writers,  escritores? — A.  The  newspapers; 
the}7  were  friends  of  mine,  great  friends  of  mine.  One  of  them— he  is 
very  fond  of  America — told  me  that  they  had  to  write  against  America 
because  that  was  their  interest — their  order  from  the  government — but 
no  one  of  them  believed  that;  and  I accepted  my  appointment,  and  I 
went  to  my  place.  When  I was  there  I found  that  the  whole  ministry, 
all  of  them,  were  a gang  of  robbers;  they  were  plundering 

Q.  You  mean  down  in  Mindoro? — A.  Yes;  it  is  a fearful  scene 
down  there.  Thomas  Aguinaldo,  the  minister  of  war’s  brother,  plun- 
dered Calamines,  Masbate,  Romblon,  and  Tablas — made  money 

Q.  What  was  his  office  down  there;  Thomas  Aguinaldo? — A.  He 
was  a captain  in  the  army,  and  brother  to  the  minister  of  war,  Barto- 
meldo  Aguinaldo,  a cousin  of  Emilio.  The  captain  went  to  Mindoro 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


137 


and  organized  a gang  of  robbers,  whose  names  were — I can’t  at  the 
moment  recall — in  order  to  plunder  Calamianes.  He  did  not  call  them 
a gang  of  robbers,  but  they  were  a gang  of  robbers. 

Q.  What  did  they  call  themselves? — A.  An  army  to  deliver  the 
villages  of  Calamianes  from  the  Spanish  Government. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Which  was  not  there  at  all? — A.  The  gang  was  formed  of  21 
men.  The  head  was  Estaban  Causatan;  he  was  accompanied  by  21  rob- 
bers; the  names  of  some  of  them  were  Pascal  de  Silva,  Alfonso  de 
Costa,  from  Cavite — the  others  1 don’t  know,  but  I know  that  they 
were  robbers.  This  Estaban  Causatan  in  the  time  of  the  Spanish 
Government  twice  plundered  Calamianes.  He  was  condemned  here 
in  Bilibid,  and  he  was  in  jail  when  the  Americans  took  the  capital,  and 
he  was  sent  away,  and  he  went  to  Mindoro.  Thomas  Aguinaldo  met 
him  there  and  ordered  him  to  go  over  to  Calamianes  and  to  plunder 
the  villages  there.  Causatan  and  some  others  of  them  knew  very  well 
the  conditions  in  Calamianes,  because  they  had  plundered  it  twice  during 
the  Spanish  Government,  and  they  took  about  $00,000  in  gold.  These 
islands  are  very  rich.  The  gang  left  Mangaring,  the  harbor  south  of 
Mindoro,  about  the  middle  or  the  end  of  November  they  went  to  Cala- 
mianes, and  in  February  they  appeared  again  in  Mindoro,  and  they 
brought  the  boot}'.  The  booty  consisted  of  pearls — a flask  of  pearls, 
a large  bottle  of  pearls — jewels,  gold,  and  silver. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Rough  gold  and  silver,  or  was  it  coined? — A.  Gold  and  silver. 
I could  not  ascertain  the  quantity;  some  people  said  about  $ld,000, 
some  said  more  or  less.  The  booty  they  buried  in  the  grounds  of  the 
Cavite  man,  who  lived  there,  a relation  of  Emilio  Aguinaldo;  his 
name  was  Necasio  Cabrero.  They  buried  their  booty  on  his  grounds. 
This  robber  was  the  son  of  Mamierto  Cabrero,  the  owner  of  the  place 
in  Mamburao,  and  he  was  charged  to  take  care  of  the  booty,  and  that 
booty  was  buried  in  the  grounds  of  his  house. 

Q.  Is  it  there  now? — A.  The  provincial  chief  of  Mindoro,  who  was 
going  to  marry  a sister  of  Thomas  Aguinaldo,  was  in  charge  also  to  save 
for  Thomas  Aguinaldo  that  booty,  but  he  did  not  go  to  Mamburao, 
because  he  knew  I was  there,  and  he  knew  I would  not  consent  to  have  him 
enter,  and  he  tried  to  make  me  trouble,  you  know,  for  this  reason,  and 
he  tried  to  send  against  me  the  robbers,  but  I was  prepared  with  revol- 
vers and  rifles,  and  they  were  afraid. 

Q.  Had  you  soldiers  with  you? — A.  No;  I had  only  four  rifles  and 
an  American  revolver;  a nice  little  revolver.  Well,  when  I was  there 
on  the  15th  of  April  my  agent  there  sent  me  two  vessels  loaded  with 
cargoes  of  timber,  and  those  vessels  had  the  American  flag,  the  Ameri- 
can colors,  and  they  took  action  in  order  to  plunder  those  vessels,  and 
I defended  them  with  rifles,  and  I loaded  the  vessels,  and  I was  obliged 
to  come  with  them  here;  and  do  you  know  why  I came?  Because  the 
people  of  Mindoro — they  know  me;  they  were  not  against  me,  only  the 
governor  and  this  relative  of  Aguinaldo’s;  and  they  told  me,  “You  must 
get  away,  because  that  booty  will  not  be  for  the  provincial  chief; 
because  that  booty  will  be  for  us,” and  I told  them,  “I  can  not  consent 
to  that,  because  their  intention  was  to  kill  the  presidente  local  and  give 
the  booty  to  Agui naldo  and  take  the  booty.  ” I said,  ‘ ‘ I can  not  consent 
to  that,  because  I am  in  authority  here.”  “Well,  you  must  go  away,” 


188 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


they  said,  “ because  we  will  not  be  able  to  avoid  that.”  Well,  I deter- 
mined to  go,  because  1 saw  that  anarchy  was  beginning  there.  They 
formed  a secret  society  called  the  Katapunin,  and  1 determined  to  come 
back  here ; and  I am  sure  now  that  they  killed  the  presidente  local.  They 
killed  that  relative  of  Aguinaldo’s;  and  if  the  chief  of  the  province 
were  there  I don’t  know  but  that  they  would  have  killed  him  also. 

Q.  You  think  so;  you  don't  know  that? — A.  Because  I knew  the 
position  of  the  country  there  was  bad. 

Q.  They  wanted  to  get  you  away  ? — A.  They  advised  me  to  go.  They 
told  me,  “ AVe  have  nothing  against  you.”  They  were  againstthe  native 
goverment,  because  they  preferred  the  domination  of  America  to  that 
of  any  other  country. 

Q.  Have  they  sent  any  soldiers  to  Aguinaldo? — A.  No;  only  about 
sixty. 

Q.  W hat  arms  have  they  down  there  ? — A.  Remingtons  and  Mausers. 

Q.  Plenty? — A.  About  120;  in  all  the  island  of  Mindoro  about  200 
rides. 

Q.  Now  ? — A.  Not  more  than  250. 

Q.  Do  you  know  where  the  arms  are  at  present? — A.  No,  I do  not 
know. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  the  population  of  Mindoro? — A.  Oh,  very  little.  In 
Calapan  about  1.000  only;  it  is  the  capital,  one  of  the  villages;  the 
other  villages  run  from  200,  500,  TOO;  not  more  than  that. 

Q.  How  many  in  the  whole  island? — A.  I don’t  know;  about  5,000 
or  2,000;  no  more  than  that. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  That  is,  there  are  wild  people  in  the  interior? — A.  There  are 
5,000  civilized  people.  It  would  not  reach  15,000  civilized  people. 
Maranduque  is  part  of  the  province.  Mindoro  has  much  less  people 
than  Maranduque. 

Q.  Where  did  you  learn  your  English? — A.  I used  to  speak  it  when 
I was  captain,  but  I forgot  it. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Is  there  an  insurgent  governor  for  the  whole  island  of  Mindoro 
now? — A.  Yes;  his  name  is  Sambon. 

Q.  Where  is  he? — A.  In  Calapan.  I don't  know,  if  you  went  to 
Mindoro,  that  he  would  be  there  now. 

Q.  AYhat  sort  of  a man  is  he;  how  is  he  disposed? — A.  Sambon,  he 
was  a lawyer’s  clerk;  he  is  of  low  people,  vulgar. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Are  the  civilized  people  of  Maranduque  friendly  to  this  insur- 
recto  governor? — A.  No. 

Q.  How  many  of  them  are  friendly  to  us,  do  you  know  ? — A.  I can’t 
tell  you,  because  I don’t  know  that.  I know  that  lie  is  a very  clever 
fellow,  but  the  civilized  people  prefer  the  Americans’  sovereignty  or 
government  to  the  native  government. 

Q.  AArould  there  be  much  opposition  to  the  Americans? — A.  No; 
never;  believe  me.  In  Luban  there  was  formed  a Katapunin,  and  the 
pretext  was  to  avoid  the  arbitrary  influence  of  the  native  government; 
but  the  object  was  vengeance.  They  killed  live  fellows;  killed  about 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


139 


six;  and  they  buried  one  alive,  and  that  kind  of  Katapunin  was 
impressed  in  the  village  of  Mamburao,  and  from  there  it  extended 
itself  into  Palawan,  Abro,  De  He,  and  Mamburao,  and  their  intention 
was  to  kill  the,  presedente  local. 

Q.  And  were  these  six  persons  killed  by  the  Katapunin  Filipinos?— 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  Why  did  they  kill  Filipinos?— A.  Because  they  did  not  agree 
among  themselves  in  opinion. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  the  condition  of  affairs  at  Batan- 
gas? — A.  No;  that  is  a little  better,  because  there  are  very  few 
people  there.  When  I arrived  in  Taal  on  the  1st  of  October  from 
Mindoro,  I met  a friend  of  mine  there,  Capt.  FilemenoE.  Incarnacion, 
and  he  informed  me  that  Thomas  Aguinaldo  was  there  in  September  or 
last  year  with  an  army,  with  the  object  of  delivering  Masbate,  Tab- 
las,  and  Romblon,  but  he  saw  that  Thomas  Aguinaldo  and  his  people 
had  assembled  themselves  to  plunder  these  islands  of  Masbate,  Romblon, 
and  Tablas,  and  he  told  me  that  he  was  ashamed  of  them  and  withdrew 
from  them  and  went  to  Taal,  because  he  could  not  bear  the  conduct  of 
the  government.  And  he  told  me  that  the  Bui  man  was  sunk;  it  was 
armed  with  rifles,  and  when  it  was  sunk  by  the  Spanish  Government 
there  was  $40,000  taken  from  the  Spanish  Government  in  order  to  be 
sent  to  Malolos,  but  besides  that  Thomas  Aguinaldo  and  the  other 
chief  had  $140,000  plundered  from  the  natives  there  for  themselves, 
and  that  money  sunk  with  the  steamer. 

Q.  That  steamer  was  in  Palanoc  in  Masbate? — A.  I don’t  know  the 
place. 

Q.  Have  they  ever  made  any  effort  to  recover  that  money  ? — A.  1 
do  not  know.  They  sent  a diver.  They  saw  that  the  diver  took  a 
little  money  into  his  hand,  and  he,  Captain  Filomeno,  was  ashamed, 
and  withdrew  from  Thomas  Aguinaldo.  The}’  were  very  bad  people, 
and  when  I arrived  here  1 thought  it  my  duty  to  come  to  you  and  say 
what  I have,  because  I belonged  to  that  government — because  I was  the 
second  in  line.  The  first  was  La  Lisma,  the  secretary,  and  the  second 
was  myself.  I was  obliged  to  protest,  because  I could  not  be  a party 

to  it,  and  for  that  reason  I went  to  Captain  — and  delivered  up  my 

appointment. 

Q.  Our  captain  of  the  port? — A.  Yes;  the  American  captain  of  the 
port. 

Q.  1 don’t  understand.  You  were  captain  of  the  port  down  in  Min- 
doro?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  did  that  office  make  you  second  in  the  marine? — A.  I was 
second  in  the  navy,  because  there  is  no  other;  because  I was  the  next 
one  in  succession,  and  they  offered  me  the  command  of  the  first  man- 
of-war,  and  I answered  my  chief,  “That  man-of-war  you  will  make  a 
present  to  the  Americans,  because  the  American  Navy  will  take  it.” 
By  and  by  you  will  see,  for  if  that  vessel  should  arrive  here  the  Ameri- 
can Navy  will  take  it,  and  it  w ill  be  a present  for  them;  you  remember 
that. 

Q.  W hat  business  have  you  been  engaged  in  in  Mindoro?— A.  I had 
an  estate  in  company  with  my  brother.  We  raised  sugar.  Wre  had 
two  engines,  steam  crushers;  and  Gen.  Carrero  Capriles  was  the  gov- 
ernor of  Mindoro.  He  was  in  debt  and  owed  a great  deal  of  money, 


140 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


and  he  tried  to  get  money  from  everybody,  from  Gregorio  Basra,  and 
he  tried  to  get  money  from  us,  too,  and  we  accepted  ruin  instead  of 
giving  him  money.  He  brought  proceedings  against  us,  and  the  charge 
was  that  the  intention  was  to  sell  the  islands  to  Germany;  that  was  his 
charge.  He  made  many  charges,  but  the  principal  charge  was  that  of 
treachery. 

Q.  That  you  wanted  to  sell  the  islands  to  Germany? — A.  Yes;  we 
have  got  no  newspapers  or  letters  to  us  from  Germany,  and  I do  not 
speak  in  German  a single  word,  neither  have  we  a single  German 
friend  here.  It  was  a pretext  only  to  ruin  us.  It  was  assumed  that 
Daracios  would  help  him,  and  because  he  would  not  he  took  Daraeios 
by  the  nose.  He  entered  into  an  arrangement  with  Germany  to  have 
it  appear  that  the  Germans  would  take  the  Caroline  Islands  forcibly; 
that  is,  they  were  to  sell  the  islands  to  the  Germans  and  have  it  appear 
that  the}7  were  taken  forcibly.  Daracios  gave  the  instructions  to 
Capriles,  written  by  his  hand  — Capriles  was  an  officer  of  the  Spanish 
Government — telling  him  that  he  must  make  all  the  delay  he  could  in 
order  not  to  reach  the  islands,  and  make  every  kind  of  pretext,  but 
the  German  schooner  was  very  late,  and  when  the  Vetis  arrived  there 
the  Spanish  schooner  had  already  arrived  there,  had  anchored,  and  the 
Germans  could  not  take  the  islands,  and  then  there  arose  that  question 
that  you  know  about. 

Q.  What  year  was  this? — A.  1887  or  1888.  Oh,  it  was  a scandal- 
ous thing,  known  all  over  Europe.  Capriles  kept  that  paper  from 
Daracios  written  by  his  own  hand,  his  instructions,  so  that  Daracios 
helped  Capriles  to  do  his  pleasure  against  us,  and  he  assisted  Capriles 
in  injuring  us.  We  appealed  to  Spain,  and  we  have  had  there  a rela- 
tion, a Minister  Fabia,  as  our  counsel,  and  he  helped  us.  The  judge 
also  was  a nephew  of  General  Escoria,  a great  friend  of  ours  here,  and 
Escoria  and  Fabia  helped  us,  and  we  beat  Daracios.  Daracios  was 
prosecuted  in  a criminal  action,  and  he  could  not  get  any  appoint- 
ment, because  the  other  gentlemen  would  not  consent  to  him.  He  was 
to  be  the  director  of  the  army  there.  We  got  a judgment  against 
Daracios  for  $60,000.  He  left  here  in  the  hands  of  a friend  of  his 
$80,000.  His  friend’s  name  was  Ortuosti,  and  he  was  a gambler,  and 
he  lost  the  money,  and  I could  not  get  the  $60,000  from  there. 
Capriles  was  a pool1  man.  like  a cat,  and  he  was  married  to  a woman 
who  had  had  a child  by  Minister  Maura,  who  had  an  affair  with  a 
woman  in  Madrid,  and  she  had  a child,  so  he  called  this  man  who  had 
been  the  secretary,  Capriles,  and  who  was  afterwards  the  governor, 
and  he  said,  if  you  wish  to  succeed  in  your  career  why  marry  this  mis- 
tress of  mine  and  I will  take  care  of  the  son,  which  he  did;  it  was 
with  this  sort  of  people  that  we  had  trouble.  We  gained  our  suit 
against  them,  but  there  was  no  money  that  any  of  them  had,  except 
this  $80,000,  which  was  lost  gambling,  and  they  had  also  burned  our  plan- 
tation. We  continued  doing  businessin  timber  only,  because  in  timber 
you  don’t  need  capital  at  all.  We  did  not  invest  any  more  money  for 
fear  that  the  Government  might  take  it  away  from  us.  The  action  of 
the  Americans  in  military  matters  is  very  slow,  very  lenient;  it  is  my 
opinion  to  tight  them  with  dynamite,  because  from  the  consideration 
with  which  they  have  been  fought  they  put  it  down  as  being  caused' 
by  fear. 

Q.  How  many  men  would  it  require  to  take  Mindoro  and  to  hold 
it? — A.  Why,  100  men,  as  I told  tin1  captain  of  the  fort,  and  I would  go 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


141 


there  with  the  first  boat  if  they  would  give  me  a rifle,  and  with  an 
honest  man  it  will  be  possible  to  control  tin'  whole  island,  because  the 
American  army  must  not  go  to  the  villages,  because  they  will  get  sick, 
and  if  I go  with  them  I will  tell  them  of  some  people,  the  honest  people, 
about  20  or  25,  to  maintain  order  in  the  villages  and  to  pursue  the  rob- 
bers; 20  or  25  men  will  be  sufficient.  A Mr.  Havant,  of  Masbate,  told 
me  the  same  thing,  and  he  offered  himself  to  assist  the  American  army 
that  is  there.  Francisco  Havant  is  a rich  man,  who  lives  in  Masbate. 

Q.  Where  is  he  now? — A.  He  is  here  now.  lie  is  a Visayan. 

Q.  Where  does  he  live  now? — A.  He  lives  in  Quiapo. 

Q.  Do  you  know  the  street  and  number? — A.  I do  not  know;  but  if 
3’ou  wish  I will  request  him  to  come  here  and  give  you  his  knowledge 
of  the  island. 

Q.  When  did  he  leave  Masbate? — A.  He  left  Masbate  in  October  or 
November. 

Q.  Where  did  he  live  when  he  was  there,  what  part  of  the  island? — 
A.  I don't  know,  because  I don’t  know  Masbate;  I have  not  been 
down  there.  Some  natives  made  me  the  same  offer.  They  told  me 
the  same  thing;  they  will  help  the  American  army,  and  they  promise 
that  order  will  be  secured,  and  Americans  will  not  be  troubled  there. 
You  should  give  me  some  official  character  in  order  to  give  me  a 
standing.  We  advised  the  captain  of  the  port  to  take  the  Bashee  Chan- 
nel and  the  Batanes  Islands;  it  is  very  easy;  it  is  very  easy  to  send 
arms  there,  and  to  take  them  up  in  bancos;  they  are  between  Formosa 
and  this  island.  All  of  the  sound-minded  people  in  the  country  are 
in  favor  of  America. 

Q.  Is  there  timber  to  be  had,  good  timber,  near  Mamburao? — A. 
Yes;  cedar  and  some  other  timber. 

Q.  Thev  tell  me  that  the  timurao  on  the  west  coast  is  now  very 
scarce.  I used  to  kill  them  there. — A.  It  is  a kind  of  buffalo  which 
is  found  only  in  Mindoro;  no  other  place  in  the  world. 

Q.  How  do  the  natives  kill  them  there?  I have  been  told  they 
hunt  them  on  horseback? — A.  Yes;  they  hunt  them  on  horseback 
and  with  lances.  They  feed  at  night,  but  you  are  obliged  to  take 
with  you  another  carabao,  and  when  the  carabao  is  fighting  against  the 
timurao  3 011  must  shoot  the  timurao. 

Q.  I have  tried  that  a great  many  times,  but  I have  never  killed 
them  that  way. — A.  Where  did  3 011  try  to  find  the  timurao? 

Q.  In  Baco. — A.  The3r  tell  me  thei’e  are  no  timurao  there.  They7 
are  the  samereno. 

Q.  They  are  veiy  difficult  to  kill  ? — A.  The  timurao  is  on  the  west 
coast  and  south  coast  of  Mindoro. 

Colonel  Denby.  What  is  their  size  ? 

Professor  Worcester.  Just  half  as  big  as  a carabao. 

Q.  How  many'  years  have  3'ou  lived  in  Mindoro? — A.  From  1873 
till  now. 

Q.  Were  you  there  at  the  time  those  men  were  killed  who  went  to 
save  the  wreckage  from  a ship  wrecked  over  on  the  west  coast? — A. 
Yes;  I was  there.  The  Tulisanes  plundered  all  the  villages  there.  In 
those  villages  were  my  brother  and  myself;  we  were  there  in  Mamburao, 
where  we  lived;  that  never  has  been  plundered  by  the  robbers  as  long 
as  we  lived  there;  as  I told  y7ou  I had  a revolver  and  rifle,  and  they7 
knew  it. 


142 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  the  Tulisanes  live  bv  plunder? — A.  Yes;  they  plunder  the 
villages  there. 

Q.  Do  they  do  anything — do  they  work? — A.  Yes;  they  work  some- 
times, and  they  live  in  the  mountains. 

Q.  What  work  do  they  do?—  A.  Well,  what  I have  told  you  is  past 
history;  that  was  on  aeeount  of  the  bad  government.  When  theSpanish 
government  went  away,  they  went  to  the  villages,  and  they  are  the 
most  honest  people  in  the  villages  now.  You  will  not  believe  me,  but 
it  is  so. 

Q.  The  Spanish  Government  made  them  Tulisanes  ? — A.  Yes;  became 
there  were  abuses  in  the  Government. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  What  arms  have  they — what  kind,  of  arms? — A.  Rifles,  guns, 
machetes,  and  swords — what  they  can  get.  They  plunder  the  villages 
by  surprise;  they  never  go  straight,  never. 

Q.  Are  there  any  Negritos  in  Mindoro?- — A.  I did  not  see  a Negrito 
there.  No,  we  have  no  Negritos  there.  There  are  Manguianes,  and 
their  history  is  very  interesting. 

Q.  Is  that  what  you  call  the  natives  of  Mindoro,  the  Manguianes? — 
A.  No;  Tagalogs  and  Yisayans. 

Q.  What  language  is  spoken  down  there? — A.  They  speak  Tagalog 
mixed  with  Yisayan. 

Q.  What  language  do  these  natives  speak  ? — A.  Another  language, 
the  language  of  the  Manguianes.  They  have  an  alphabet  like  the 
alphabet  of  the  natives  here. 

Q.  Have  you  it? — A.  No;  I have  not.  I know  very  little  about 
natural  history,  but  I know  more  about  meteorology,  of  which  I am 
very  fond.  By  and  by  you  will  succeed,  and  the  Filipinos  will  be  more 
American  than  the  Americans.  They  are  a peaceful  people,  easily  gov- 
erned. but  you  must  never  allow  the  people  to  think  that  the  Govern- 
ment is  afraid. 

Q.  Are  the  people  capable  of  governing  themselves? — A.  No,  sir; 
they  are  not  educated.  They  are  not  educated  people,  but  by  and 
by,  when  they  are  more  educated  after  the  American  fashion,  they 
will  be  able  to  govern  themselves,  and  the  people  will  be  peaceable  and 
orderly. 

Q.  And  how  much  American  intervention  is  necessary  here  to  gov- 
ern them  now? — A.  I don't  know;  but  I think  that  they  will,  in  my 
opinion,  be  better  under  American  supervision;  they  will  be  better  off 
with  more  American  officials. 

Q.  How  many  American  officials  would  you  need  in  each  province  ? — 
A.  In  each  province  a dozen,  in  each  village  one,  and  an  American 
priest  to  educate  them,  because  you  must  commence  from  the  very 
beginning.  You  see  the  ideas  of  authority  among  the  Spanish  and 
among  American  and  English  are  quite  different.  To  the  Spaniard  the 
meaning  of  authority  is  authority  over  every  moment  of  a man's  life, 
and  this  man  always  continues  in  his  position.  It  is  a very  frequent 
thing  to  see  the  presidente  local  going  to  the  village  of  Bamba  and 
striking  everybody,  because  he  does  it  to  show  he  has  the  authority. 
That  is  nonsense,  you  know,  but  according  to  Spanish  law  it  is  possi- 
ble. The  Spanish  judge  is  a judge  every  moment  of  his  life. 

Q.  You  say  with  our  armies  in  the  capital  in  every  capital  you  would 
have  a dozen  officials.  What  offices  would  you  have  them  in  ? — A.  You 
are  the  men  who  ought  to  know  that. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


143 


Q.  To  supervise  things? — A.  Yes;  assisted  by  the  natives.  The 
more  you  can  employ  the  better,  because  the  people  will  be  educated 
here  very  soon,  and  you  must  not  fail  to  communicate  the  language. 

Q.  The  English  language? — A.  Yes;  yes;  because  that  is  the  best 
band  of  union;  and  my  opinion  is  that  there  ought  to  be  a school  on 
every  corner.  I know  that  the  people  here  are  looking  for  English 
teachers. 

Q.  Are  the  people  ready  to  pay  taxes  for  schools ? — A.  The  rich  peo- 
ple; yes.  1 think  tuition  ought  to  be  free,  but  English  ought  to  be 
taught  in  every  school.  In  a few  years  everybody  in  the  Philippine 
Islands  will  speak  English,  and  you  may  depend  upon  the  people  here. 
They  were  very  fond  of  the  Spaniards,  very  fond  of  the  Spaniards, 
but  the  Spaniards  made  them  very  poor;  they  were  very  scared  of 
Rome.  The  monks  were  the  bad  ones. 

Q.  How  do  the  people  of  Mindoro  feel  toward  the  friars? — A.  Oh, 
they  are  against  the  friars;  they  do  not  want  anything  to  do  with  the 
friars;  they  can  not  bear  to  see  them.  Here  in  Manila  everybody, 
women  and  children,  all  are  looking  for  schools  where  they  can  learn 
English,  and  they  can  not  find  them,  and  the  few  teachers  who  are 
here  are  asking  a great  deal  of  money;  one  teacher  asked  me  $25  a month 
for  an  hour  a day,  and  the  poor  people  can  not  pay  that.  You  will 
succeed,  believe  me,  by  justice  and  education — for  the  people  here 
must  be  educated.  They  have  no  political  education  at  all. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  We  will  have  schools  here  very  soon.  Public  schools  for  all  the 
children. — A.  On  every  corner  you  ought  to  have  them.  I think  the 
country  here  will  assist  a great  deal,  if  you  have  patience. 

Q.  Isn’t  there  some  better  place  for  the  capital  of  Mindoro  than 
Paluan? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  It  is  a bad  place  in  various  ways;  they  can’t  land  there? — A.  If 
it  was  Calapan  it  would  be  very  near  Batangas,  but  the  capital  ought 
to  be  Mansalay;  there  is  a nice  harbor  there,  and  there  is  rich  coal 
land  in  the  south  of  Mindoro;  petroleum  is  found  [indicates  on  map 
where  coal  and  petroleum  are  found].  The  Spanish  naval  officers  used 
to  receive  money  for  coaling  their  vessels  down  there,  and  they  used 
to  come  and  coal  down  in  Mindoro  and  keep  the  money,  and  sometimes 
they  used  to  sell  the  coal.  Mindoro  will  be  a rich  country,  on  account 
of  her  agriculture  and  mines  and  various  things. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  The  only  trouble  with  Mindoro  is  the  fever? — A.  Oh,  never 
mind  the  fever;  follow  my  advice  and  you  can  avoid  it;  believe  me 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  the  natives  suffer  much  with  fever? — A.  Yes;  they  get  fever 
all  the  same. 

Q.  And  the  foreigners  get  it?— A.  Yes;  if  they  don’t 'take  proper 
precautions. 

Q.  What  is  the  worst  time"  of  the  3'ear  down  there? — A.  About 
November — November  and  December.  Now  is  the  best  time 

Q.  Runs  into A.  Yes;  in  the  rainy  season,  but  in  January,  Feb- 

ruary,  March,  and  April  there  is  no  fever  there  on  the  west  coast.  I 
don’t  know  the  east  coast.  My  brother  and  I have  been  there  about 
twenty-five  or  twenty -six  years,  and  for  the  first  ten  years  it  was  every 


144 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


year,  but  we  did  not  understand  the  remedy  to  use.  Upon  the  discov- 
ery by  us  of  the  remedy  we  did  not  take  fever  from  that  time  until  the 
present. 

Q.  You  are  a very  healthy  looking  man.  How  old  are  you?- — A. 
Fifty-seven  years  old.  My  medicine  is  only  quinine. 

Q.  About  how  often  have  you  had  the  fever? — A.  Not  for  fifteen 
years;  formerly  every  year.  In  ten  years  we  took  fever  in  October, 
November,  and  December,  a very  fearful  form,  but  after  that  kind  of 
quinine  arrived  here,  which  came  in  capsules,  why  we  did  not  take  the 
fever — never. 

Q.  Do  the  people  generally  take  quinine  ? — A.  Ah,  they  can’t,  the 
poor  people,  but  when  I give  them  a few  pills  they  become  well.  That 
is  the  only  medicine,  quinine,  nothing  more  than  that:  don’t  carry  any 
other.  One  reason  I am  healthy  is  that  my  food  is  good,  splendid 
milk. 

Q.  Have  you  good  cattle  there? — A.  Yes;  the  cattle  grass  is  very 
rich;  it  is  not  poor;  splendid  grass  for  cattle. 

Q.  What  sort  of  milk  do  you  use? — A.  The  milk  of  the  buffalo, 
which  is  the  best  here  in  the  Philippine  Islands. 

Q.  How  is  the  beef  of  the  buffalo? — A.  The  beef  of  the  buffalo  I do 
not  like,  because  it  smells;  but  the  meat  of  the  timurao  is  a first-class 
meat,  and  does  not  smell;  it  tastes  splendid — better  than  the  beef  of 
the  cow. 

Q.  Isn't  it  pretty  hard  to  get  the  meat  of  the  timurau? — A.  Not 
hard  in  my  place. 

Q.  Do  they  bring  much  of  it  in  there  for  sale?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  is  the  price  of  it.  do  you  know? — A.  They  don’t  sell  it. 
If  you  want  a timurau  you  must  go  out  and  shoot  it,  or  pay  a native 
50  cents  or  SI  to  kill  you  a timurau. 

Senor  Calderon.  I proposed  to  General  Otis  the  issuance  of  a cir- 
cular to  all  the  native  priests  of  the  country  advising  them,  when  the 
Americans  entered,  to  see  if  they  could  quiet  the  minds  of  the  people, 
and  to  advise  them  not  only  at  present,  but  when  the  American  forces 
entered,  that  they  endeavor  to  cause  the  people  not  only  not  to  abandon 
the  American  forces  but  to  understand  them  to  be  friendly,  and  to 
explain  to  them  that  the  friars  are  not  to  remain  here,  because  one  of 
the  principal  causes  of  the  rising  of  the  people  is  their  .saying  that  the 
Americans  are  friendly  to  the  friars.  The  native  priests  are  very  tired 
of  war,  because  the  war  and  the  revolutionists  have  caused  them  a 
great  deal  of  harm,  and  also  they  have  confidence  in  me,  because  they 
have  seen  that  I have  always  defended  them.  I have  proposed  to 
General  Otis  that  I thought  it  would  be  fitting  to  publish  such  a circular. 

Senor  Fabie.  When  I came  here  I went  to  Mr.  Barreto  and  urged 
him  to  write  to  Mr.  McKinley,  the  President  of  the  United  States, 
asking  him  that  the  monks  here  be  sent  away  for  a few  months  until 
peace  be  assured,  and  many  friends  of  mine  also  went  to  Mr.  Barreto, 
but  he  said  no,  it  may  be  a good  thing  or  a bad  thing,  but  I won't  do* 
that.  My  intention  was  that  they  be  sent  away  fora  few  months  only, 
because  I knowT  that  the  American  laws  are  the  most  free  in  the  world. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  you  not  want  all  the  priests  to  go? — A.  No;  the  monks  only. 

Q.  You  mean  the  friars? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  want  the  native  priests  to  stay  ? — A.  Yes. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


145 


Q.  And  the  Spanish  priests?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  want  the  churches  still  to  go  on? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  you  simply  want  the  monks — the  friars — to  go  away  ? — A. 
Yes;  because  the  desire  is  to  see  them  leave — the  Augustinians,  the 
Reeoletos,  the  Dominicans,  and  the  Franciscans;  only  those  four. 

Q.  How  about  the  Jesuits?  Do  they  hate  them ? — A.  No;  I do  not. 

Q.  You  do  not  object  to  them? — A.  No;  only  the  four  I have  named — 
the  Reeoletos,  the  Augustinians,  the  Franciscans,  and  the  Dominicans. 

Q.  You  want  all  four  of  them  to  go  away,  do  you? — A.  Yes;  until 
peace  has  arrived. 

Q.  And  then  the  government  will  allow  them  to  come  back  ? — A.  I 
don’t  know  that.  I can’t  impose  any  terms. 

Q.  What  should  the  government  do  with  their  property? — A.  If  it 
is  your  opinion  to  shoot  them,  I will  consent  to  it. 

Q.  What  do  you  want  the  government  to  do  with  their  property  ? — 
A.  I don’t  care  for  the  property,  but  I don’t  think  the  property  belongs 
to  them.  I think  it  belongs  to  the  people.  I don’t  care  about  that.  I 
want  peace,  which  can  be  secured  only  by  American  domination,  and 
after  that  I don’t  care. 

Q.  If  you  sent  the  monks  away,  you  would  have  to  do  something 
with  the  property.  W ould  you  have  the  State  take  it  or  the  government 
take  it  ? — A.  I did  not  consider  that  question. 

Q.  How  many  monks  would  you  send  out  in  that  way? — A.  All  of 
them. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  How  many  of  them  are  there? — A.  I don’t  know  how  many  of 
them  there  are  here. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Are  they  all  Spaniards? — A.  Yes;  all  Spaniards. 

Q.  You  wouldn’t  send  out  any  Filipinos  ? — A.  There  are  no  Filipinos 
among  them. 

Q.  Nor  Italians? — A.  No. 

Q.  Any  French  ? — A.  No.  They  should  be  sent  away,  because  they 
work  against  America;  they  are  exciting  opinion  against  the  Ameri- 
cans. They  say  you  are  heretical. 

Q.  If  they  openly  say  they  are  our  friends,  why  do  they  work 
against  us?  You  said  a little  while  ago  that  the  Americans  were  the 
friends  of  the  monks;  didn’t  you  say  that? — A.  No. 

Q.  Do  the  people  say  we  are  their  friends,  or  not? — A.  No,  I did 
not  say  that.  W hen  I was  in  Mamburao  I received  there  a circular 
from  the  archbishop  saying  that  the  American  people  were  heretical 
people,  and  that  everybody  in  the  Philippine  Islands  would  go  to  hell 
together. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Have  you  got  that  circular  ? — A.  I took  that  circular  and  wrote 
some  notes,  joking  comments,  on  it. 

Q.  Have  you  one  now? — A.  Yes;  the  notes  are  written  by  me.  I 
showed  it  to  the  people  there  and  the}r  were  laughing  about  it. 

Q.  What  date  was  that? — A.  The  5th  of  May,  when  the  Americans 
came  first. 

Q.  The  people  ought  to  like  us  if  the  priests  attack  us. — A.  Oh,  yes, 
they  like  Americans. 

p c 10 


146 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Because  they  don’t  like  the  monks? — A.  Yes. 

Senor  Calderon.  The  friar  is  the  principal  question  here,  and  I say 
to  you,  Mr.  Schurman,  that  1 am  a Catholic  and  have  defended  the 
Catholic  faith  in  the  congress  at  Malolos,  and  I am  certain  that  the 
friars  must  be  expelled  if  we  are  to  have  peace  in  the  country. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Where  are  the  friars  now?  Are  they  all  within  the  American 
lines? — A.  There  are  many  here,  others  have  gone  to  Spain,  and 
others  are  prisoners;  there  are  also  a good  many  on  the  coast  of  China 
and  in  Macao,  waiting  for  a favorable  opportunity  to  come  back. 

The  President.  The  expulsion  of  any  persons  now  would  be  a mili- 
tary question;  that  would  not  concern  this  commission. 

Senor  Calderon.  If  this  war  had  not  been  between  the  Americans 
and  the  Filipinos,  there  would  have  been  civil  war  between  the  Fili- 
pinos themselves.  Part  of  the  population  woidd  have  risen  in  rebellion 
against  Aguinaldo  and  his  party. 

Senor  Fabia.  The  Filipinos  have  no  political  opinions  and  they  get 
all  their  ideas  from  their  leaders. 

Senor  Calderon.  They  have  no  opinions  of  their  own  and  they  get 
all  from  them,  and  thus  it  is  that  one  can  easily  lead  them. 

President  Schurman.  Gentlemen,  on  behalf  of  the  commission,  I 
desire  to  thank  you  for  the  pleasure  and  instruction  we  have  derived 
from  your  interesting  statements. 

Meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  ARCADIO  ZIALCITA. 

Manila,  June  15,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and 
John  R.  MacArthur,  esq.,  secretary  and  counsel. 

Senor  Arcadio  Zialcita,  accompanied  by  Senor  Neer,  appeared 
before  the  commission. 

Senor  Zialcita  requests  that,  as  he  comes  from  the  Philippine  camps, 
this  interview  be  not  published  until  the  province  has  come  into  the 
hands  of  the  Americans  of  its  own  accord. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  We  never  make  public  any  of  the  testimony. — A.  You  could 
publish  it  perfectly  well  after  the  leading  men  in  commerce  and  agri- 
culture and  representative  men  of  the  provinces  come  in  and  them- 
selves arrange  matters  and  ask  for  better  arrangements. 

Q.  1 will  ask  you  some  questions  about  matters  we  have  already 
discussed,  in  order  that  Colonel  Denby  may  understand  them. — A.  I 
came  here  on  the  15th  of  April  as  a commissioner,  representing  the 
leading  business  men  and  leaders  in  the  industries  of  the  province  of 
Leyte,  to  look  into  the  political  situation,  as  much  among  the  Filipinos 
as  to  find  out  what  autonomy  the  American  Government  offered.  I 
went  out  there  in  the  insurgent  lines  to  find  out  what  impressions  I 
might  get  of  the  situation  there,  and  I came  in  here  to  find  out  about 
autonomy  and  the  state  of  affairs  in  Manila,  and  when  I saw  the  disa- 
greements that  were  going  on  out  there,  the  state  of  affairs  in  general, 
I concluded  that  the  only  thing  to  do  for  the  province  was  to  accept 
the  autonomy  which  was  offered. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


147 


Q.  How  long  were  you  in  the  insurgent  territory? — A.  One  week. 

Q.  Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  give  us  the  impression  you  derived 
from  your  stay  there? — A.  I was  completely  undeceived.  A very  bad 
state  of  affairs  existed,  and  I saw  that  they  would  not  succeed  in  attain- 
ing their  end  and  that  the  whole  matter  was  to  the  great  prejudice  of 
all  the  provinces. 

Q.  In  what  towns  were  you  staying? — A.  I was  all  through  the 
province  of  Bulacan  in  order  to  go  to  the  province  of  Neuva  Ecija, 
and  went  as  far  as  Cabanatuan. 

Q.  What  state  of  affairs  did  you  find  in  the  territory  through  which 
you  passed? — A.  I saw  no  soldiers  until  1 came  to  San  Isidro,  in  Neuva 
Ecija,  where  there  was  a concentration  of  troops  the  day  I arrived. 

Q.  W ere  the  people  suffering  ? — A.  They  certainly  are.  The  people 
are  not  at  all  satisfied  with  their  condition.  There  is  no  business. 
There  is  nothing. 

Q.  Is  food  scarce? — A.  I saw  nothing  but  rice.  I suppose  they  got 
that  from  last  year’s  crop  or  from  the  rice  which  the  Americans  dis- 
tributed in  Baliuag. 

Q.  What  effect  has  the  distribution  of  rice  by  our  troops  had? — A. 
A very  good  impression.  For  that  reason  the  greater  part  of  the 
inhabitants  of  the  town  of  Baliuag  have  returned. 

Q.  What  leading  Filipinos  were  in  Cabanatuan  when  you  were 
there? — A.  The  only  ones  who  were  acquaintances  of  mine  were 
Paterno  and  Filipe  Buencamina. 

Q.  Is  it  true  that  Paterno  has  been  sent  to  North  Luzon? — A.  I 
could  not  say,  but  when  1 saw  him  in  Cabanatuan  he  was  there  with 
his  family,  and  he  told  me  he  had  asked  for  passes  in  order  that  his 
family  could  come  to  Manila,  and  maybe  for  himself  too,  but  I do  not 
know.  His  family,  I suppose,  has  come  back  on  such  pass,  given  by 
General  Otis. 

Q.  When  did  you  leave  Cabanatuan  ? — A.  Saturday. 

Q.  Was  Paterno  in  Cabanatuan  at  that  time  ? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  he  is  disposed  toward  the  American  Govern- 
ment at  present? — A.  I do  not. 

Q.  You  do  not  know  whether  he  wishes  for  peace  or  whether  he  is 
disposed  to  go  on  fighting? — A.  I do  not;  but  day  before  yesterday 
the  pass  from  General  Otis  came  to  the  house  of  Senor  Torres,  and  it 
was  sent  to  a point  in  the  American  lines  where  letters  would  be  sent 
from  there  to  Senor  Paterno,  in  order  that  he  might  come  through 
and  pass  the  lines  at  that  point. 

Q.  Was  it  not  his  family,  and  not  Paterno? — A.  His  family;  as  far 
as  he  is  concerned,  I do  not  know;  but  at  present  his  brother,  Don 
Maximo,  I feel  quite  sure  will  come  in. 

Q.  Did  you  have  any  conversation  with  Paterno  while  there? — 
A.  Yes,  sir;  but  it  was  purely  personal. 

Q.  Do  you  feel  at  liberty  to  tell  us  your  impression  of  his  feel- 
ings?— A.  Certainly;  but  he  said  nothing.  He  was  very  reserved 
with  me,  and  I also  with  him.  We  talked,  but  he  did  not  tell  me 
anything. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  they  have  any  further  negotiations  with 
the  commission  in  mind? — A.  1 do  not  know;  Don  Pedro  did  not  tell 
me;  but  I think  myself,  personally',  that  they  are  more  inclined  for 
peace. 

Q.  Did  you  have  any  conversation  with  Aguinaldo  when  there? — 


148 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION, 


A.  No;  for  1 came  in  Saturday  night,  and  immediately  after  mass  in 
the  morning  he  left  for  San  Isidro. 

Q.  Do  you  know  where  he  was  when  you  left  Cabanatuan  for 
Manila?— A.  No,  sir;  for  when  I left  there  he  had  been  gone  four  or 
live  days,  and  I do  not  know  where  he  went  or  where  he  intended 
going. 

Q.  1\  as  Mabini  in  Cabanatuan  at  this  time?- — A.  No.  sir. 

Q.  Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  give  us  an  account  of  the  killing  of 
General  Luna? — A.  1 told  everything  that  I saw  and  that  1 knew 
about  it  to  a representative  of  El  Progresso.  That  interview  tells  all 
I know. 

Q.  Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  repeat  that  for  our  benefit  ? — A.  I 
saw  his  death,  but  the  occasion  of  his  death  I only  know  from  rumor. 

Q.  Where  were  you? — A.  I was  in  a house  where  I was  waiting,  in 
the  plaza,  where  the  convent  and  the  government  headquarters  and  the 
church  are,  and  commanded  a view  of  the  whole  place.  They  say  that 
Luna  went  up  to  ask  for  Aguinaldo,  with  Francisco  Ramon,  to  visit 
Aguinaldo.  Not  finding  him  there  he  became  angry  and  insulted  the 
guard,  and  when  the  guard  wanted  to  seize  him  and  his  companion  they 
thought  the  man  was  half  crazy  and  immediately  began  shooting,  and 
the  guard  returned  the  fire. 

Q.  Did  the  guard  lire  on  him  ?— A.  All  of  them.  They  wanted  to 
take  him,  but  he  had  saber  and  revolver  to  defend  himself,  and  they 
could  not  do  anything  else. 

Q.  Was  he  killed  by  bullets,  knives,  or  bayonets? — A.  By  knives, 
and  probably  by  bullet  wounds,  too,  for  there  were  three  or  four 
discharges,  and  so  I can  not  say  whether  entirely  by  bolos  or  bullets. 

Q.  What  was  the  effect  of  this  killing  of  General  Luna  there  ? — A. 
I could  not  say  exactly.  At  first  the  people  were  much  surprised,  but 
afterwards  they  said  it  was  better  so,  because  he  was  very  cruel;  he 
killed  a great  many  of  his  own  soldiers,  and  officers  and  was  a great 
tyrant. 

Q.  Aguinaldo  did  not  come  back  when  he  heard  of  the  death  of 
Luna  ? — A.  That  I could  not  say,  whether  he  was  told  of  it  or  whether 
he  returned.  1 did  not  see  his  return  up  to  the  time  I came  away. 

Q.  We  have  heard  his  death  might  have  been  planned  by  Aguinaldo 
on  account  of  jealousy  between  Luna  and  himself.  Did  you  near  any 
such  stories  ? — A.  I could  not  say  whether  it  is  true  or  not,  because  I 
did  not  make  any  investigation.  It  was  not  my  business,  which  was 
simply  to  find  out  the  condition  of  affairs.  I heard  bad  news  here  in 
Manila  and  went  out  to  see  if  it  were  true,  but  the  people  did  not  talk 
freely  to  me,  because  the  greater  part  of  the  people  were  unknown 
to  me. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Who  do  you  think  will  take  the  place  of  Luna  in  the  army? — A. 
That  is  a difficult  thing  to  say.  1 do  not  know  how  many  generals  they 
have.  I do  not  know  anything  of  military  affairs.  I am  a civilian. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  town  in  Leyte  have  you  been  living  in? — A.  In  Tacloban 
itself,  the  capital. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  there? — A.  Since  the  latter  part  of 
1885  or  the  first  of  1886. 

Q.  What  is  your  profession  ? — A.  Notary. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


149 


Q.  IIow  long  have  yon  held  this  position  ? — A.  Five  years  in  Leyte, 
and  afterwards  I was  a notary  in  Cebu,  but  I resigned  to  become  a 
planter. 

Q.  Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  tell  us  all  you  can  of  the  conditions 
in  Leyte,  and  about  your  plan  for  bringing  about  order  in  the 
island? — A.  My  plan  is  this:  1 am  well  known  to  the  people;  my  plan 
is  to  go  on  your  behalf,  getting  a pass  from  here,  and  to  confer  with 
the  people  and  get  some  of  them  to  go  with  me.  I would  like  to  take 
a certain  quantity  of  rice  for  the  benefit  of  the  people  who  are  starv- 
ing. 1 would  like  to  go  down  there  authorized  by  you,  taking  the 
rice,  and  telling  them  that  I come  authorized  by  the  American  Govern- 
ment, bringing  them  rice  in  order  that  the  children  and  the  other  people 
should  not  die  of  hunger. 

Colonel  Denby.  Your  question  contemplated  that  he  should  tell  us 
about  the  conditions  of  the  island,  and  what  he  would  do  for  their 
pacification. 

Professor  Worcester.  He  said  that  he  would  tell  his  people  when 
he  returned  what  he  had  seen  up  here,  and  what  ought  to  be  done, 
and  then  make  up  his  mind  afterwards. 

Q.  Has  there  been  a strong  feeling  to  resist  American  sovereignty 
in  the  island? — A.  1 do  not  think  so  among  the  people  of  Leyte  them- 
selves, but  only  among  the  soldiers  who  come  from  Camarines  and 
Batangas.  The  people  like  that,  who  go  from  island  to  island,  are  the 
ones,  1 believe,  that  feel  that  way. 

Q.  What  is  the  population  of  Tacloban? — A.  Very  small.  It  is  the 
capital  because  it  has  a very  fine  port,  but  has  a small  population— 
about  2,000. 

Q.  I)o  you  know  what  insurgent  troops  there  are  in  the  island  at 
present? — A.  That  is  a question  for  soldiers.  I could  not  say.  As  I 
said,  people  have  come  from  other  provinces  and  have  gone  into  the 
different  towns,  but  I have  managed  never  to  leave  the  capital  on 
account  of  my  family,  to  protect  them  from  injury,  and,  in  case  of 
necessity,  I might  be  able  to  embark  them  on  some  ship. 

Q.  Who  is  the  military  chief  of  Leyte? — A.  Monjijo,  an  old  man, 
very  good  and  honest. 

Q.  Does  this  general  know  of  your  mission  to  Luzon? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  If  you  shoidd  return  to  Leyte  and  tell  the  people  there — A. 

I came  on  the  part  of  the  business  men  and  planters  and  those  engaged 
in  industries  to  find  out  what  would  be  the  proper  thing  to  do — to  find 
out  whether  there  would  be  an  American  fleet  down  there,  or  what  we 
must  do. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  if  the  business  men,  the  planters,  and  other 
wealthy  and  responsible  people  would  decide  in  favor  of  peace  there 
would  be  danger  of  their  being  overpowered  by  the  military  leader 
in  case  American  troops  were  not  sent  there  to  protect  them,  or  would 
the  military  leader  be  reasonable  about  the  matter  and  be  willing  to 
come  to  an  understanding  with  us? — A.  He  is  a very  sensible  man, 
and  an  old  man,  and  I think  that  it  would  not  be  his  part  to  prejudice 
the  province  in  which  he  lives.  For  my  part,  I do  not  expect  to  have 
any  trouble  at  all  when  I go  back,  but  I could  not  give  a definite 
answer  to  the  question.  I shall  have  no  hesitancy  in  telling  what  1 
have  seen  and  what  I think  ought  to  be  done.  After  a short  time,  in 
which  I could  talk  to  the  people  and  find  out  how  they  feel.  I could 
then  inform  the  gentlemen  of  the  co»  mission. 


150 


REPOET  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Is  it  your  idea  to  hold  a meeting? — A.  Not  at  first.  I should 
talk  to  them  one  by  one.  Afterwards,  if  I found  them  in  the  proper 
spirit,  I would  hold  a meeting  of  the  leaders,  and  they  could  talk  and 
spread  their  impressions  and  influence  among  the  people  who  were 
dependent  upon  them,  or  with  whom  they  had  relations,  and  after 
that  resolve  upon  what  would  be  the  best  course  to  take,  and  submit 
it  to  the  Government. 

Q.  You  have  doubtless  heard  herein  Manila  the  state  of  affairs  that 
exists  in  Negros,  and  you  have  seen  the  state  of  affairs  that  exists 
in  the  insurgent  territory.  What  will  you  tell  your  people  about 
that? — A.  I can  not  sa}"  now  what  I will  say.  I shall  fulfill  ni}r  mission, 
tell  the  exact  conditions,  and  let  eveiyone  follow  his  own  conscience. 
My  plan  of  talking  will  depend  on  the  individual  I am  talking  to. 

Q.  Do  you  still  feel  it  important  to  go  to  Negros,  or  are  you  satis- 
fied with  what  you  have  heard  about  affairs  down  there? — A.  When  I 
see  the  condition  of  affairs  here,  the  complexion  of  the  supreme  court, 
and  the  fact  that  all  the  wisest,  richest,  and  most  eminent  men  are  in 
your  favor,  what  answer  do  you  suppose  I could  give  to  such  a 
question  ? 

Q.  We  have  heard  that  a large  number  of  arms  and  a good  deal  of 
ammunition  have  recently  been  sold  to  the  people  of  Leyte  and  Samar 
by  the  Spaniards  at  Zamboanga.- — A.  That  is  a question  for  General 
Lueban.  I wish  to  prevent  Lucban  doing  any  additional  harm,  and  I 
wish  to  arrange  the  affair  secretly,  so  Lucban  may  not  know  about  it, 
because  Lucban  is  another  Luna.  I do  not  care  to  talk  to  him. 

Q.  Would  you  consider  it  advisable  to  send  a gunboat  to  Samar, 
Bohol,  or  Leyte,  while  these  negotiations  are  pending,  to  distract  his 
attention? — A.  That  is  a question  for  you.  As  for  the  island  of 
Samar,  you  might  send  four  or  five.  I have  nothing  to  do  with  it, 
but,  as  for  the  islands  of  Leyte  and  Bohol,  I should  advise  that  no  gun- 
boat be  sent,  for  the  people  would  immediately  take  to  the  mountains, 
and  a great  many  would  die.  They  have  nothing  to  eat;  they  are 
dying  of  hunger,  and  I wish  to  take  right  down  there  and  sell  at  the 
regular  rate,  on  my  own  account,  an  amount  of  rice.  I would  like  a 
pass  for  this  purpose  from  General  Otis,  so  that  if  a gunboat  should 
overtake  the  ship  I was  in  I could  continue  on  by  showing  my  pass, 
and  I could  also  use  it  to  come  back. 

Q.  What  ship  were  you  planning  to  go  down  by? — A.  I have  not 
thought  of  any  ship.  I could  not  very  well  before  I had  a talk  with 
you. 

Q.  How  much  rice  do  you  think  necessary  to  take  down  ? — A.  There 
are  45  towns  in  this  island,  and  this  island  does  not  produce  rice.  The 
crops  down  there  are  hemp  and  cocoa,  and  since  April  1 no  ship  has 
come  with  any  rice,  and  the  people  are  eating  sweet  potatoes  and  other 
such  vegetables. 

Q.  Have  people  actually  died  of  hunger  up  to  the  present  time? — 
A.  1 suppose  so — naturally — because  there  have  always  been  two  ships 
a week  and  they  carried  ail  the  way  from  52,000  to  3,000  piculs  of  rice, 
and  there  has  been  none  for  two  months,  and  with  no  rice  there,  I sup- 
pose they  have. 

Q.  How  would  you  distribute  rice  through  the  various  towns?— A. 
I should  not  distribute  it.  I would  pick  out  the  rich  men  of  the  differ- 
ent towns  and  say,  “'Here  is  the  rice;  pay  me  for  it  in  hemp,  or 
money,  or  some  way,  and  sell  it  to  the  people  at  this  price.”  That  can 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


151 


be  done  because  the  people  are  always  coming  to  the  capital  in  bancos, 
and  by  other  means. 

Q.  Coidd  all  the  people  get  to  the  capital  if  the  rice  were  at  that  one 
point  only? — A.  They  could  come  whenever  they  wanted  to  in  bancos. 

Q.  You  say  that  these  wealthy  men  would  pay  you  in  hemp.  Does 
your  plan  include  bringing  the  hemp  to  Manila  to  market  on  your 
return? — A.  I had  not  thought  of  that,  but  it  seems  to  me  the  most 
proper  system  would  be  to  bring  the  hemp  here  to  Manila  and  exchange 
it  for  more  rice.  1 am  perfectly  willing  to  be  paid  in  money. 

Q.  Would  it  not  have  a good  effect  if  you  would  go  there  and  tell 
what  you  have  seen,  and  say  if  they  were  willing  to  put  themselves  in 
our  hands  with  the  promise  of  fair  and  liberal  treatment,  such  as  we 
have  given  the  natives  in  other  provinces  under  our  control,  we  would 
open  the  ports  and  send  them  rice  right  away  ? Wouldn’t  it  be  the 
best  plan  to  promise  them  that  ? — A.  That  is  what  1 am  going  to  say. 
That  would  be  a great  aid  in  talking  to  these  people. 

Q.  Couldn't  you  say  to  your  people:  The  Americans  want  to  know 
whether  you  are  friends  or  enemies;  that,  if  friendly,  they  will  open 
the  ports  and  send  rice;  but  if  enemies,  the  ports  will  be  blocked 
and  importation  of  rice  prevented;  and  that  the  Americans  want  to 
know  about  it? — A.  That  is  the  very  thing  to  say.  I,  having  been 
here,  am  in  a better  position  to  know  than  they  are,  and  1 came  to  the 
commission  to  get  information  as  to  how  matters  stood. 

Q.  If  your  plan  were  to  result  successfully,  would  it  be  possible  for 
3' ou  to  bring  with  }Tou  some  of  the  representative  and  leading  men, 
who  could  talk  over  conditions  in  Leyte  with  General  Otis  and  arrange 
for  a temporary  form  of  government  in  the  island  down  there  ? — A. 
That  is  m}r  idea;  to  bring  with  me  five  or  six  of  such  men,  provided 
that  1 attain  my  end.  If  not,  why  I can  return  here  and  say  the  result 
was  so  and  so. 

Q.  Do  you  know  that  is  the  plan  which  was  followed  by  the  people 
of  Negros?  Some  of  them  came  here  and  decided  with  General  Otis 
as  to  the  arrangement  in  force  at  present  there. — A.  It  is  a very 
different  matter  with  us  than  with  Negros,  for  the  Americans  were  in 
Iloilo,  so  the}T  came  up  and  arranged  matters;  but  we  have  not  been 
well  informed,  and  I came  up  here  not  knowing  exactly  that  hostilities 
had  broken  out.  Of  course,  we  had  rumors;  but  I came  to  get  the 
true  state  of  affairs,  and  to  arrange  matters  as  they  are  in  Negros. 

Q.  How  did  you  get  here  from  Tacloban? — A.  The  ship  St.  Nich- 
olas was  lost  down  there,  and  Smith,  Bell  &Co.  sent  a ship  to  save  the 
hemp,  and  I came  in  that  steamer. 

Professor  Worcester.  We  have  heard  your  plan  with  a great  deal 
of  interest,  and  we  shall  be  very  glad  indeed  to  see  you  successful  in  it. 

A.  I have  simply  done  it  for  humanity  and  for  the  good  of  the 
people,  and  I wish,  as  I have  said,  to  simply  take  back  urv  impressions 
to  these  people,  and  come  back  to  the  commission  with  a report,  if  I 
can. 

Professor  Worcester.  The  carrying  out  of  your  plan  involves 
questions  over  which  the  commission  has  no  jurisdiction.  You  must 
have  a pass  from  General  Otis,  and  the  Navy  has  instructions  to  stop 
steamers  for  that  port,  so  that  directions  will  have  to  be  issued  also  by 
the  Naiw.  We  shall  be  glad  to  talk  the  matter  over  with  General 
Otis,  and  it  is  probable,  after  we  have  done  so,  the  General  would  like 
to  talk  with  3011  personalty.  We  will  explain  to  the  General  what  you 


152 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


have  said  to  us,  and,  if  you  will  leave  your  address  with  us,  he  can  then 
communicate  what  he  wishes  in  the  matter.  The  General  is  a member 
of  the  commission,  but  is  not  present  this  morning,  being  busy  with 
military  operations. 

Sefior  Zialcita.  I have  myself  hopes  that  the  project  which  I 
have  in  mind  will  be  a success,  because  the  people  there  are  not  like 
the  people  here.  The  people  in  Leyte  and  Bohol  are  peaceful  people, 
as  Mr.  Worcester  knows,  having  been  there.  My  Manila  address  is 
“ Arcadio  Zialcita,  Tondo,  6 Aceytero.” 

Professor  Worcester.  We  wish  you  success,  for  we  ourselves  are 
anxious  for  peace  and  order  and  good  government  and  the  prosperity 
of  the  country  here,  and  we  do  not  wish  that  anyone  should  suffer 
from  hunger,  the  proof  of  which  is  that  we  are  now  sending  food  to 
Los  Pinas  and  Paranaque;  and  3-011  say  that  you  need  no  further  con- 
firmation of  the  good  intentions  of  the  American  Government  than  the 
fact  that  the  best  Filipinos  are  on  our  side. 

Meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  BALBAS. 

Manila,  June  16,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  com- 
missioners, and  Air.  John  R.  MacArthur,  secretary. 

Bernancio  Balbas,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commission- 
ers, stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Please  give  us  your  name  and  address. — A.  Venancio  Balbas; 
residence,  San  Jose  street,  corner  of  Galleria  street,  Ermite. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  in  Manila? — A.  In  Manila  nearly 
twenty-two  years. 

Q.  What  is  your  occupation  ?- — A.  Director  of  the  Spanish  Bank,  of 
the  Banco  Espanol-Filipino.  I was  a merchant. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  a director  of  the  bank? — A.  Now  ten 
years. 

Q.  That  bank  is  still  in  existence? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  It  issues  notes,  does  it  not? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Redeemable  in  silver? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  lines  of  merchandising  have  you  been  engaged  in? — A.  In 
the  bank. 

Q.  You  said  you  were  a merchant  before.  What  business  did  you 
do  ( — A.  1 was  in  the  business  of  hemp,  sugar,  and  coffee. 

Q.  What  is  the  currency  of  Manila? — A.  The  dollar. 

Q.  The  Mexican  dollar  ? — A.  The  Mexican  dollar — the  one  we  have 
got  here. 

Q.  Did  the}-  coin  dollars  here? — A.  Not  during  my  time;  no,  not 
one.  The}7  did  not  coin  dollars,  but  half  dollars,  pesetas,  and  half 
pesetas. 

Q.  They  coined  the  smaller  coins,  did  they? — A.  The  smaller  coins. 

Q.  They  were  coined  here  in  Manila  by  the  Spanish  Government? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  About  what  quantity  was  coined  each  year  ? — A.  1 could  not  tell 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


153 


you,  because  the  Spanish  Government  has  not  published  the  statistics. 

1 don’t  remember;  but  in  the  time  of  General  Blanco — at  the  end  of 
the  term  of  General  Blanco  in  the  year  1893 — I heard  that  they  had 
coined  three  million  four  or  live  hundred  thousand  dollars. 

Q.  Of  subsidiary  coinage?— A.  Yes;  half  dollars. 

Q.  Where  did  they  get  their  dollars  from,  Mexico? — A.  From 
China.  At  the  time  of  the  revolution,  in  1893,  we  wanted  money  here, 
because  in  the  time  of  General  Weyler  there  was  an  exportation  of 
Mexican  dollars  from  here  to  Hongkong  on  account  of  the  exchange. 
In  the  time  of  General  Blanco  we  wanted  money  here  to  pay  the  troops. 
Twenty-five  thousand  men  were  brought  from  Spain,  and  then  the 
Spanish  Bank  brought — I don’t  remember  which  it  was — two  or  four 
million  dollars;  I don’t  remember  now  which;  I could  tell  by  the  books. 
Then  all  these  Mexican  dollars  were  coined  and  they  were  marked, 
and  those  that  were  not  coined,  not  marked,  before  the  year  1877  were 
not  permitted  to  enter,  because  there  was  a law  here  against  it  in  the 
time  of  General  Morianes.  1 think  it  was  in  the  time  of  General 
Morianes,  they  were  not  allowed  to  bring  in  Mexican  dollars  that  had 
been  coined  after  the  year  1877;  but  you  will  observe  them  here  now, 
because  the  American  Government  has  allowed  them  to  bring  in  Mexi- 
can dollars,  so  that  you  can  see  the  year  1899  stamped  now.  Before 
you  could  not  see  a coin  after  the  year  1877;  and  there  was  in  con- 
sequence a premium  on  those  dollars  in  Hongkong  for  sending  over 
here.  The  steamer  Don  Juan  that  you  see  down  there  on  the  beach, 
brought  in  in  the  time  of  General  Blanco  about  five  or  six  hundred 
thousand  dollars;  I don’t  remember  which.  All  that  silver  was  burned. 

Q.  Now  you  have  here  the  dollar? — A.  The  dollar,  the  half  dollar, 
the  cuarto,  the  peseta,  20  cents,  and  the  half  peseta,  10  cents. 

Q.  And  5 cents? — A.  Not  5 cents;  no. 

Q.  And  what  copper  currency  ? — A.  These  [exhibiting  coins  to  the 
commissioners].  They  are  good  for  nothing  in  Spain.  This  coin  is 

2 cuartos. 

Q.  Is  that  Spanish? — A.  That  is  Spanish  of  the  time  of  Ferdinand 
VII,  the  beginning  of  the  century. 

Q.  What  was  the  currency  for  the  last  year  when  the  Americans 
came  here — the  same  as  that? — A.  Just  the  same  as  that;  the  only  dif- 
ference was  that  at  the  end  of  1897  and  the  beginning  of  1898  they 
brought  in  five  or  six  hundred  thousand  cents.  They  were  minted  in 
Spain. 

Q.  Did  you  have  any  copper  currency  ? — A.  This  kind. 

Q.  But  none  made  here  ? — A.  No. 

Q.  Never  had  any  made  here? — A.  No. 

Q.  Always  came  from  Spain  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q..  Of  what  does  it  consist?— A.  Centimosand  2centimos — we  have 
copied  it  from  France — 5 centimos  and  10  centimos. 

Q.  One  hundred  centimes  in  France  make  20  cents? — A.  Make  1 
franc. 

Q.  But  it  is  equal  to  our  20  cents? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Did  }rou  have  in  your  copper  currency  these  centimos? — A. 
Here?  No;  not  in  the  beginning.  In  1897  or  1898  they  put  them  in 
circulation. 

Q.  Let  me  see  that  copper  coin. — A.  This  is  5 cents.  They  are 
very  scarce.  In  twenty-two  years  1 don’t  think  that  I have  seen  over 
a dozen  of  them. 


154 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Four  of  these  (pointing  to  coin  in  his  hand)  make  5 eentimos? — 
A.  Yes.  Each  one  is  5 eentimos  of  a franc.  Four  of  these  make  5 
eentimos — 5 eentimos  of  a dollar. 

Q.  You  have  no  cent  here,  as  we  have? — A.  No;  we  have  1 cent  of 
a dollar.  Now,  Ave  have  had  that  from  the  year  1898,  Avhen  they  put 
them  in  circulation.  They  Avere  minted  in  Spain. 

Q.  Then  the  money  was  all  minted  in  Spain  and  sent  out  here,  except 
subsidiary  coin? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Bank  bills — did  they  circulate  here?— A.  Bank  notes? 

Q.  Yes. — A.  They  were  in  circulation  all  over  the  islands. 

Q.  Where  Avere  they  issued? — A.  Here  in  Manila. 

Q.  Did  any  bank  bills  from  Spain  circulate  here ? — A.  No;  they  did 
not  allow  it. 

Q.  What  bank  has  the  power  of  circulation  ? — A.  The  Bank  of  Spain 
only.  We  call  that  the  Spanish-Filipino  Bank. 

Q.  Those  notes  Avere  got  here  for  them  ? — A.  No. 

Q.  Then  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank  did  not  issue  an  v notes  ? — 
A.  No. 

Q.  The  Chartered  Bank  of  India,  Australia,  and  China? — A.  Not 
here;  no.  In  Manila,  no.  They  don't  issue  notes  in  Manila. 

Q.  Do  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank  notes  circulate  here  in 
Manila? — A.  No. 

Q.  They  are  not  brought  here? — A.  They  are  brought  here  as  a 
draft,  and  the}’  pay  you  according  to  the  exchange  from  here  to 
Hongkong. 

Q.  What  is  the  ordinary  rate  of  exchange  on  a bank  bill  issued  by 
the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank;  what  do  you  have  to  sell  it  for  out 
here  ? — A.  Generally  a half  per  cent  or  1 per  cent. 

Q.  Will  it  ever  bring  more  than  the  face  value?  You  have  a $5  bill 
and  you  want  to  use  it  here;  how  much  do  you  get  for  it? — A.  To-day 
they  will  give  you  about  So. 

Q.  Each? — A.  They  give  it  to  you  in  Manila  money;  they  Avill  give 
you  about  84.95. 

Q.  They  charge  you  5 per  cent  discount? — A.  No;  they  charge 
about  1 per  cent.  2 per  cent.  They  will  give  vou  about  84.90  or 
84.95. 

Q.  Do  any  American  notes  circulate  here? — A.  Yes;  since  you  have 
come;  since  you  have  taken  the  islands  I have  seen  a note  bought  in 
the  bank;  just  United  States  notes,  not  gold.  I bought  a silver  Si 
note,  and  they  told  me  the  other  day  down  in  the  bank  that  some  of 
them  were  false;  not  to  take  them. 

Q.  You  mean  forged? — A.  Bad  money;  so  1 took  only  the  gold 
ones. 

Q.  The  United  States  note  passes  here  the  same  as  gold,  docs  it 
not  ? — A.  Just  the  same. 

Q.  The  currency  of  these  islands  has  always  been  silver,  hasn't  it  ? — 
A.  Silver  from  the  year  1859  or  1860. 

Q.  Any  gold  in  circulation  here? — A.  No;  the  gold  went  away  from 
here  in  the  year — I don't  remember,  I think  it  was  about  '80  or  '81. 
Gold  was  at  a premium  then  of  4 to  8 per  cent. 

Q.  What  has  been  the  effect  on  the  exporter  of  a silver  circulation  ? — 
A.  It  has  increased  exportation. 

Q.  Why  ? — A.  Because  they  get  better  prices  for  the  silver. 

Q.  They  buy  for  silver  and  sell  for  gold,  is  that  it? — A.  No;  they 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


155 


buy  in  silver  the  exchange  and  the  price  in  London  is  the  same  as  the 
price  here— 30  pence  in  London  per  ounce.  Well,  the  exchange  goes 
down  on  account  of  the  silver  that  is  here;  they  get  more  money  with 
the  same  price  in  London. 

Q.  Then  when  they  sell  these  articles  abroad  they7  sell  for  gold,  don’t 
they? — A.  They7  sell  for  drafts  on  London. 

Q.  When  they  sell  in  New  York  or  London  they7  sell  for  gold?— A. 
So  that  they7  buy  for  silver  and  sell  for  gold.  The  export  houses 
take  into  account  the  exchange,  and  supposing  they  bought  sugar  here 
or  hemp  or  goods  in  the  islands,  they7  know  the  price  in  New  York  or 
in  London,  and  they7  take  into  account  the  amount  in  gold  they7  are  to 
receive,  but  the  natives  here  receive  what  is  due  them  in  silver.  For 
that  reason  more  silver  than  before  is  required,  it  being  at  the  same 
price. 

Q.  The  lower  the  exchange  is  the  more  silver  they7  get? — A.  Yes; 
being  the  same  price  in  London. 

Q.  How  does  it  affect  the  import  trade?— A.  The  natives  have  more 
money,  because  they  sell  their  sugar  and  hemp  at  better  prices,  and 
they7  don’t  care  if  they7  have  to  pay  a little  more  for  a piece  of  cloth. 
It  is  an  indirect  tax  for  them.  As  they7  get  more  money'  for  the  goods 
that  they7  have  to  sell  they7  can  buy  more  cloth. 

Q.  But  prices  have  gone  up  of  late,  haven’t  they7;  the  prices  of 
imported  goods  have  gone  up?- — A.  No  doubt  about  it. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  about  how'  much  they'  have  gone  up,  what  percent- 
age?— A.  I can  not  tell  y7ou,  but  not  very7  much.  The  operation  of 
the  customs  law,  which  the  Spanish  Government  has  made  too  high, 
has  put  them  up. 

Q.  Well,  that  affects  prices,  of  course? — A.  Yes;  but  that  is  an 
indirect  tax,  for  the  natives  buy  when  they  have  money,  and  as  they7 
sell  their  sugar  at  a higher  price,  their  hemp  at  a higher  price,  they7 
can  buy  at  a higher  price,  and  can  afford  it. 

Q.  Can  yrou  give  us  the  percentage  that  foreign  goods  have  gone  up 
here  on  account  of  the  depreciation  of  silver? — A.  Imported  goods? 

Q.  How  much  have  they7  gone  up  now;  is  it  20  per  cent? — A.  No 
doubt  about  it;  perhaps  more  on  some  goods.  I could  not  give  to  y7ou 
in  detail  all  the  goods. 

Q.  No;  1 just  wanted  them  in  general. — A.  In  general  they7  have 
gone  up  100  per  cent,  but  medicines — they'  have  gone  up  I don’t  know 
how  much. 

Q.  Is  there  plenty  of  currency  here  to  do  business  ? — A.  Well,  now, 
I think  so,  because  there  is  plenty7  of  money7,  metal,  which  you  have 
allowed  to  be  brought  over  from  Hongkong. 

Q.  Did  they7  bring  Chinese  dollars  here? — A.  No;  Mexican  dollars. 

Q.  You  know  that  they7  use  dollars  in  China? — A.  No;  I have  not 
seen  any7.  I have  seen  20-cent  and  10-cent  pieces;  what  they7  call  Can- 
ton silver,  I have  seen  that. 

Q.  I have  seen  many  thousands  of  Chinese  dollars. — A.  The  Chinese 
dollars — I have  not  seen  them. 

Q.  You  have  not  seen  any7  of  them  here? — A.  No;  never. 

Q.  I don’t  suppose  they7  export  them. — A.  China  wants  a great  deal 
of  money7. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  effect  of  introducing  the  American  dollar 
here,  the  gold  dollar  or  its  equivalent? — A.  Well,  it  would  be  disas- 
trous to  the  country,  I think. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


15G 

Q-  M by  do  you  say  that? — A.  Because  we  have  no  railroads,  no 
means  of  communication,  and  you  pay  here  from  Ilocos  to  Manila  as 
large  a freight  per  ton  as  you  do  from  here  to  London. 

Q.  You  pay  from  here  to  Ilocos . — A.  From  Ilocos  to  Manila 

in  silver— that  is  thirty -six  hours  by  steamer — you  pay  as  much  freight 
per  ton  as  from  here  to  London;  and  if  you  bring  the  gold  standard 
here  that  freight  would  not  go  down;  it  will  not  go  down,  it  will  be 
just  the  same,  because  transporting  goods  in  the  provinces  awav 
from  the  harbors  will  be  very  expensive,  as  it  is  now;  but  now  you 
pay  in  silver,  but  when  the  gold  standard  is  introduced  you  would  pay 
in  gold. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  to  say  that  you  would  pay  the  same  price  in  gold 
that  you  now  pay  in  silver? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Suppose  a man  had  to  pay  a dollar  a ton,  for  instance,  now  he 
would  pay  a silver  dollar,  wouldn’t  he? — A.  A silver  dollar. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  to  say  that  if  the  currency  were  gold  he  would 
have  to  pay  two  silver  dollars? — A.  If  the  price  now  for  bringing 
freight  from  Ilocos  here  is  $5  silver,  in  gold  it  would  lie  just  the 
same,  §5. 

Q.  The  gold  $5  would  lie  worth  $10  in  silver? — A.  Yes;  but  the 
native  would  not  accept  it.  With  a 5-dollar  piece  jTou  could  not  eat 
in  the  provinces,  and  with  half  a dollar  you  can  eat. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  that — that  with  $5  you  can  not  eat  in  the 
provinces,  but  with  half  a dollar  you  can  eat? — A.  1 know  that  with  a 
tive-dollar  gold  piece  it  has  happened  to  me — that  is,  with  the  four- 
dollar  piece  we  had  here—  1 wanted  to  buy  food  for  eating  and  1 could 
not  get  it,  because  the  natives  woidd  not  receive  that  piece.  They 
said,  “No;  because  I can  not  change  it;”  but  you  give  to  them  a half 
dollar  and  they  would  give  you  the  food.  The  Indian,  the  native, 
does  not  want  to  keep  the  gold;  it  is  too  small  for  them. 

Q.  You  think,  then,  that  the  prices  in  Manila  would  remain  the 
same,  do  you? — A.  Just  the  same. 

Q.  If  a man  hired  a native  for  a dollar  a day  he  would  work  for  a 
Mexican  dollar  a day,  and  he  would  know  that  if  he  was  paid  in  gold 
he  would  lie  paid  what  would  lie  equivalent  to  $2? — A.  Just  the  same. 

Q.  What  effect  would  that  have  on  the  general  prosperity  of  the 
country? — A.  I don’t  think  that  it  would  be  for  the  good  and  pros- 
perity of  the  country,  because  supposing  that  I have  a sugar  estate,  if 
I am  going  to  pay  in  gold  the  same  as  1 pay  in  silver  now,  the  first 
year  I would  be  ruined,  because  I could  not  sell  my  sugar  at  the  price 
of  its  cost  to  me;  the  sugar  could  not  be  sold  for  the  additional  cost  to 
me.  If  my  sugar  has  been  $5  gold,  and  I have  paid  everything  in 
gold,  why  the  sugar  in  Europe  will  not  go  up  for  me.  Just  as  hap- 
pened in  Java  and  Sumatra.  Java  and  Sumatra  have  a gold  standard, 
and  the  sugar  estates  in  Java  and  Sumatra  are  now  almost  ruined. 
The  Dutch  Government  is  helping  them  as  much  as  it  can.  They 
had  a tax — a duty  on  the  exportation  of  sugar.  They  have  taken  that 
off  with  a view  to  helping  them,  but  they  can  not  help  them.  Almost 
all  of  them  are  ruined. 

Q.  Well,  why  isn't  it  possible,  if  you  pay  money  of  twice  the  value 
of  silver,  to  get  double  the  equivalent  in  services  or  goods  for  it?- — A. 
It  is  on  account  of  the  character  of  the  native.  He  can't  understand 
when  you  give  him  a small  piece  of  gold  that  it  is  worth  more  than 
silver.  Moreover,  they  don't  care  for  it,  it  is  too  small  for  them.  We 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


157 


had  here  gold  up  to  the  year  1866  or  1867,  and  paid  a premium  of 
■I,  8,  or  10  per  cent  on  copper  coins.  In  a country  like  that  do  you 
think  that  the  gold  eoidd  stand  a year?  The  gold  will  come  here  to 
Manila  and  w ill  go  away  immediately. 

Q.  Heretofore  you  have  spoken  chiefly  of  the  laborers  and  common 
people  Now.  I would  like  to  know  how  it  would  affect  the  merchants. — 
A.  The  merchants  in  no  way.  Supposing  I am  a merchant,  the 
exchange  would  go  up.  Supposing  that  gold  was  the  standard  here, 
exchange  would  go  up  in  London  where  they  fix  exchange.  It  woidd 
go  up  to  d shillings  instead  of  2 shillings  as  now,  and  the  merchant 
would  take  his  account  according  to  d shillings,  and  to  the  natives 
who  have  made  sugar  the  merchant  would  say,  “Well,  I will  pay  you, 
instead  of  $5  as  before,  $2.50,  that  is  all  I can  give  you.”  He  would 
take  care  of  the  exchange.  The  merchant  takes  care  of  the  exchange. 

Q.  Why  wouldn’t  that  be  all  right? — A.  But  that  is  a difficult  thing; 
the  laborer  would  not  accept  it. 

Q.  You  think  the  difficulty  is  in  the  fact  that  the  laborer  would  not 
accept  it  for  its  real  value  as  compared  with  silver? — A.  Yes;  he  would 
be  ruined  altogether.  At  the  same  time,  just  as  in  Java  and  Sumatra, 
freight  from  Manila  to  all  over  the  world  is  dearer  than  from  any 
other  place. 

Q.  Why  is  that? — A.  Because  of  the  distance.  The  principal  mar- 
kets for  this  city  and  these  islands  are  Europe  and  North  America — 
your  country — both  of  which  are  very  far  from  here.  You  can  buy 
the  German  sugar  in  New  York  much  cheaper  than  you  can  the  Philip- 
pine sugar.  The  freight  from  Liverpool  to  New  York,  I have  read 
in  the  Economist, -or  in  the  English  press,  for  the  year  1882  or  1883,  on 
3,000  tons  from  London  to  New  York  of  iron  ingots  was  a shilling  a 
ton;  and  1 have  seen  for  the  year  1802,  I think  it  was,  000  tons  iron 
ingots  for  1 shilling  the  000  tons.  You  have  to  pay  from  here  to 
New  York  $5  gold,  or  $10  silver,  per  ton.  I have  paid  just  now  57 
shillings  and  6 pence  freight  from  here  to  Liverpool. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  that  be  corrected  by  having  a regular  line  of  steamers 
betw'een  here  and  San  Francisco  or  New  York? — A.  No;  because  you 
can’t  make  the  distance  any  shorter.  No;  it  is  the  topography  and  the 
geographical  situation  of  the  Philippine  Islands  to  the  rest  of  the 
wTorld  which  cause  these  high  freights. 

Q.  What  proportion  of  the  products  of  these  islands  does  the  United 
States  take  as  compared  w ith  other  nations? — A.  I could  not  tell  you, 
but  the  principal  part  goes  sometimes  to  America,  because  America 
takes  more  hemp  than  England.  The  hemp  almost  all  goes  to  America 
and  England,  very  little  to  Spain. 

Q.  How  about  sugar? — A.  Of  the  sugar,  I think,  a little  more  goes 
to  England.  I think  so;  I am  not  sure. 

Q.  Well,  I asked  you  what  proportion  do  we  take,  one-fourth,  one- 
tif th  per  cent,  one-half,  or  what? — A.  I can’t  tell  you. 

Q.  You  can’t  give  us  an  idea  as  to  that  ? — A.  Just  now,  no. 

Q.  I had  an  idea  that  we  took  quite  a large  part  of  the  products  of 
the  islands. — A.  You  do  of  heinp  and  you  did  of  sugar;  but  in  the 
last  few  years  the  sugar  has  gone  to  China  and  Japan  from  Iloilo  and 
from.  here. 

Q.  Gone  to  China  and  Japan;  what  is  the  reason  of  that? — A. 
Because  the}’  have  refining  mills  there  for  refining  sugar. 

Q.  Does  japan  do  much  business  with  these  islands  ? — A.  In  sugar. 


158 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Does  China  do  much  business? — A.  Hongkong  does,  in  sugar; 
also  a little  hemp  for  the  mill  that  they  have  there.  They  make  ropes 
in  Hongkong. 

Q.  You  get  a good  many  provisions  from  China,  don’t  you — eata- 
bles?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  In  your  opinion,  then,  it  would  not  be  desirable  to  go  on  a gold 
basis? — A.  No. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  it  would  ever  become  desirable,  or  is  that  an 
opinion  confined  to  a particular  period  of  time  ? — A.  There  are  two  pre- 
cious metals  and  no  more — what  we  call  precious  metals;  because  while 
there  are  other  metals  that  have  more  value  than  gold  and  silver,  yet 
gold  and  silver  are  the  only  precious  metals  for  making  coins — only 
gold  and  silver.  My  opinion  is  what  1 have  said,  and  I have  not  yet 
changed  it.  If  I am  a man  that  produces  something  I want  silver. 
Supposing  I am  a man  who  makes  sugar,  or  who  makes  iron  goods — 
an  industrial  man — I prefer  silver.  But  if  I am  a professor,  or  a doc 
tor,  and  produce  nothing,  I take  the  gold. 

Q.  Well,  why;  give  us  the  reason  for  that. — A.  I prefer  silver  if  I 
am  a man  who  produces  something,  because  I get  more  price  for  it; 
but  if  I am  a doctor,  or  a preacher,  who  does  not  produce  anything,  I 
like  gold 

Q.  You  get  more  money? — A.  I am  a doctor — supposing  I produce 
nothing. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  the  merchants  down  here — the  foreigners — are 
of  the  same  opinion  with  you? — A.  Yes;  I think  so. 

Q.  Isn’t  there  a difference  of  opinion  here  on  that  subject? — A.  No; 
I don’t  think  so.  The  merchant  does  not  produce  anything  at  all. 
The  science  of  political  economy  will  say  that  they  produce  nothing, 
but  they  transport  the  goods  from  here  to  there  for  sale.  They  take 
into  account  the  exchange  and  what  the}’  are  going  to  spend  from  here 
to  there,  and  they  make  their  prices  accordingly,  but  I am  not  on 
the  same  footing  as  they  are.  There  are  three  kinds  of  producers,  the 
economists  tell  us.  The  first  is  the  one  who  produces,  who  makes  the 
sugar,  the  second  is  the  one  who  sells  it,  and  the  third  is  the  one  who 
transports  it.  The  three  are  said  to  produce  the  sugar,  but  in  fact 
only  one  of  them  produces  it,  and  this  one  has  to  pay  everything. 
For  his  goods  he  would  get  less,  because  the  gold  has  appreciated. 

Q.  How  would  an  American  bank  do  here  ? — A.  I think  it  would 
work;  it  could  work  here. 

Q.  How  were  bank  privileges  granted  here;  by  whom  ? — A.  By  the 
Spanish  Government. 

Q.  There  were  no  free  banks? — A.  There  are  three  banks  here.  The 
Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank,  the  Chartered  Bank,  but  they  can  not 
issue  paper,  and  the  Banco  Espanol-Filipino. 

Q.  They  came  here  by  the  consent  of  the  Spanish  Government? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  there  is  but  one  bank  of  issue  here? — A.  Only  one. 

Q.  Is  that  bank  prosperous  ? — A.  Well,  you  know  the  Spanish  Gov- 
ernment owes  us  $1,520,000. 

Q.  Silver  dollars? — A.  Silver  dollars. 

Q.  If  they  paid  you  that,  you  would  be  all  right? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  think  they  will  pay  it? — A.  I think  so,  for  the  last  opinion 
that  we  have  from  Madrid,  from  our  lawyer  there,  Mr.  Mauro,  says 
that  they  will  pay  in  a short  time. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


159 


Q.  Is  it  borrowed  money? — A.  They  are  good  on  borrowing,  you 
know. 

Q.  1 mean  was  this  money  borrowed  from  the  bank? — A.  In  1897, 
in  the  month  of  November,  while  I was  not  here,  the  bank  advanced 
them  $2,000,000,  and  the  governor-general,  Primo  de  Rivera,  from 
Madrid,  wired  that  the  bank  would  be  repaid  all  the  money  that  they 
used;  that  it  would  be  sent  from  Madrid  here  in  drafts  that  they 
would  draw  from  Spain;  but  they  have  not  paid  a cent. 

Q.  lias  that  affected  your  credit? — A.  Yes;  because  from  the  1st  of 
May,  in  the  year  1898,  after  the  battle  of  Cavite,  from  the  2d  to  the 
7th  of  May  in  that  week,  on  the  change  in  notes,  more  than  $1,800,000 
was  paid  out. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  “on  the  change  in  notes?  ” — A.  We  had  a 
run  on  the  bank. 

Q.  Then  you  redeemed  more  than  $1,800,000  of  your  notes? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  In  silver? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Well,  the  other  banks  here;  they  have  supported  you,  have  they 
not? — A.  Yes;  but  what  support  did  they  give  to  me?  They  changed 
the  notes  till  11  o’clock,  and  1 minute  past  11  they  changed  in  silver  on 
the  bank. 

Q.  They  gave  you  back  your  notes? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  that  all  the  support  they  gave  you?  I thought  they  guaran- 
teed your  notes  up  to  a certain  amount? — A.  On  the  13th  of  August, 
after  the  Americans  entered,  there  was  another  run  on  the  bank, 
and  General  Green  asked  the  other  two  banks  to  make  themselves 
responsible  for  $200,000  in  notes  that  the  American  Government 
could  collect  in  the  custom-house,  but  they  knew  that  I had  with 
them  in  London  more  than  $1,000,000  (£110,000).  In  the  month  of 
November,  1 think  it  was,  we  had  another  run.  I think  it  was  a 
good  guarantee. 

Q.  Then  you  think  the  bank,  if  this  money  is  paid  by  Spain,  will 
be  perfectly  right,  perfectly  good? — A.  Yes;  certainly.  Because  I 
have  collected  almost  all  the  notes  till  yesterday.  I have  collected 
$2,160,000. 

Q.  And  how  much  is  your  circulation? — A.  My  circulation  now  is 
$1,978,000. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  effect  on  the  bank  if  we  went  on  a gold 
basis? — A.  On  the  bank,  nothing. 

Q.  It  would  make  no  difference  to  the  bank? — A.  As  I said  before, 
I produce  nothing. 

Q.  You  would  be  obliged  to  pay  everybody  the  notes  in  gold? — A. 
Of  course  we  would  lose  nothing,  because  the  bank  would  be  bound  to 
give  it  to  the  public.  It  would  gain,  certainly,  but  the  exchange  of  a 
private  individual  would  be  just  the  same;  but  excepting  the  money 
itself  it  would  be  just  the  same. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  The  Banco  Espanol-Filipino  is  a corporation  chartered  by  Spain  ? — 
A.  AYhat  do  you  mean  by  chartered? 

Q.  How  was  the  bank  created? — A.  By  the  shareholders,  and  the 
only  difference  from  the  other  banks  is  that  we  have  the  exclusive 
right  to  issue  notes. 

Q.  Are  the  shareholders  of  the  bank  for  the  most  part  Spaniards  ? — 
A.  Yes. 


160 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Are  many  of  them — of  the  shareholders — living  in  Manila  ? — A. 
Yes,  almost  all  of  them  live  here.  They  are  Spaniards  and  Indians; 
two  or  three  foreigners — English. 

Q.  But  most  of  the  stock  is  held  here  in  the  Philippine  Islands ? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  what  proportion  of  it  is  held  here  in  the  Philip- 
pine Islands — what  percentage  of  the  stock  ? — A.  Almost  all.  You 
can  say  99|  per  cent. 

Q.  Has  the  stock  heretofore,  prior  to  the  coming  of  the  Americans, 
been  a dividend-paying  stock? — A.  Yes;  but  we  have  stopped  paying 
dividends  on  account  of  the  Spanish  Government  not  paying  us. 

Q.  What  is  the  authorized  capital  of  the  bank  ? — A.  Three  million 
dollars. 

Q.  And  prior  to  the  coming  of  the  Americans,  what  was  your  note 
circulation — how  many  notes  had  you  outstanding  ? — A.  Four  millions, 
or  a little  more  .han  $400,000 — $4,400,000. 

Q.  This  capital  you  speak  of  was  paid  up  capital? — A.  No;  this 
$3,000,000  is  not  paid;  $1,500,000  is  paid  up,  but  we  can  increase  to 
$3,000,000. 

Q.  So  that  on  an  actual  capital  of  $1,500,000  you  had  in  circulation 
$4,400,000  of  notes? — A.  Yes;  three  times  more  than  the  capital. 

Q.  Why  was  it  that  the  Spanish  Government  permitted  no  importa- 
tion of  Mexican  dollars  of  a coinage  later  than  1877 1 — A.  Because  of 
the  ignorance  of  the  Spanish  Government. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  WILLIAM  A.  DALAND. 

Manila.  June  19,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr. 
John  R.  Mac  Arthur. 

William  A.  Daland,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commis- 
sioners, answered  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Please  state  your  name  and  nationality. — A.  My  name  is  Wil- 
liam A.  Daland;  I am  an  American. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  in  Manila? — A.  I have  been  in  the 
Philippines  nearly  twenty  years. 

Q.  And  in  Manila? — A.  I could  not  tell  you  exactly.  I have  been 
in  the  provinces.  I started  here,  you  see,  as  a clerk  in  an  old  house 
here  and  have  been  coming  and  going,  but  my  residence  has  always 
been  Manila. 

Q.  What  places  outside  of  Manila  have  you  lived  in  ? — A.  The  prov- 
ince of  Albav,  the  towns  of  Legaspi  and  Tabaco,  Saragua  and  Iloilo. 

Q.  What  is  your  occupation  ? — A.  A broker. 

Q.  Being  a broker,  Mr.  Daland.  I suppose  you  are  pretty  well 
posted  on  financial  questions  ? — A.  Pretty  well;  t have  been  a broker 
for  nearly  ten  years. 

Q.  What  has  been  the  currency  of  the  Philippine  Islands? — A. 
When  I first  came  here  it  was  gold.  Since  it  has  been  declining  little 
by  little.  Now  it  is  the  Mexican  dollar. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


161 


Q.  Was  it  due  to  the  introduction  of  the  Mexican  dollar  or  to  any 
Government  action? — A.  No;  it  was  brought  to  a silver  basis  by  the 
exportation  of  gold  and  the  poverty  of  the  Spanish  Government,  and 
they  were  not  able  to  replenish  it  with  gold  money,  silver  coming  in 
in  its  place. 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion,  now,  as  to  the  changing  in  a short  period 
of  time  to  a gold  basis? — A.  I should  not  care  for  it  at  all. 

Q.  Why? — A.  Because  it  would  turn  the  entire  business  of  the 
Philippine  Islands  upside  down,  and  all  the  country  around  about  us. 
China  and  Shanghai,  and  all  around  us  are  on  the  basis  of  the  Mexican 
silver  dollar,  and  it  would  bring  about  a complete  paralysis  of  trade. 
W e are  now  working  on  the  basis  of  two  to  four.  It  would  bring 
prices  down  and  cause  a great  upheaval. 

Q.  You  don’t  think  that  silver  itself  will  depreciate? — A.  Not  as 
long  as  the  demand  and  the  cost  are  on  the  same  basis.  Things  all 
along  the  coast  are  on  the  same  basis. 

Q.  All  over  the  East  it  is  on  the  same  basis? — A.  Yes;  you  have 
sent  the  American  trade  dollar  here,  and  the  British  sent  a dollar;  the 
Japanese  yen  was  tried,  but  they  never  succeeded. 

Q.  Wh}^  didn’t  they  succeed? — A.  On  account  of  the  prejudice  of 
the  Malays  and  of  the  Chinese,  who,  once  accustomed  to  one  coin,  will 
not  take  another  in  its  place. 

Q.  They  have  never  coined  a Philippine  dollar  or  Spanish  dollar  for 
this  market? — A.  Yes,  sir;  they  have.  Spain  sent  out  here  some 
three  or  four  years  ago  what  they  called  a peninsular  dollar;  it  was 
all  right  in  the  Philippines  themselves,  because  Spain  in  the  mean- 
ime  prohibited  the  entrance  of  the  Mexican  dollar  made  later  than 
the  year  1877. 

Q.  And  how  long  did  that  condition  last  here? — A.  Up  to  about  the 
1 3th  of  last  August. 

Q.  Why  did  you  say  that  the  effect  on  prices  would  be  disastrous  ? — 
A.  Because  all  goods  for  export  are  sold  on  a sterling  basis. 

Q.  And  how  does  that  affect  the  question? — A.  That  affects  the 
question  this  way:  That  if  a dollar  is  worth  4 shillings  and  2 pence,  say, 
we  get  $5  for  it;  if  the  dollar  is  worth,  as  it  is  to-day,  about  2 shillings, 
we  get  §10  for  a pound  in  the  money  of  the  country,  therefore  the 
native  gets,  so  far  as  he  is  concerned,  about  double  the  price  on  the 
London  and  New  York  markets. 

Q.  How  does  that  affect  imports? — A.  It  would  decrease  the  price 
of  imports. 

Q.  Well,  wouldn’t  that  be  a good  result? — A.  It  would  be.  If  you 
speak  of  imports — dry  goods  and  that  sort  of  thing — it  wouldn't  amount 
to  very  much,  for  the  ordinary  native  in  the  provinces  does  not  wear 
many  clothes;  he  is  not  a heavy  consumer. 

Q.  How  would  it  affect  the  trade  with  the  United  States,  going  on  a 
gold  basis? — A.  The  export  trade,  you  mean,  because  there  is  no  import 
except  flour.  It  would  have  the  same  effect;  it  would  decrease  prices 
here. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  the  natives  could  in  time  accustom  them- 
selves to  the  American  dollar? — A.  Oh,  certainly. 

Q.  But  you  think  that  there  would  be  a great  loss  somewhere?— A. 
There  would  for  certainly  a year  or  two. 

Q.  Who  would  have  to  sustain  that  loss? — A.  The  natives  of  the 
country — the  agriculturists,  the  men  who  till  the  soil- 
p c 11 


162 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COVMISSIOI  . 


Q.  You  think  if  you  made  a contract  with  the  native  to  pay  him  so 
many  dollars  you  would  have  to  pay  him  as  many  gold  dollars  as  you 
now  pay  him  silver  dollars? — A.  That  would  be  the  native’s  idea;  yes. 

Q.  In  the  matter  of  wages  and  the  price  for  labor? — A.  They  would 
expect  the  same  wages  as  they  get  to-day. 

Q.  The  effect  would  be  that  we  were  paying  them  double  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  would  that  loss  fall? — A.  Well,  directly  on  the  person 
employing  them,  but  it  always  comes  out  of  the  people  of  the  coun- 
try indirectly.  Naturally  it  comes  out  of  the  man  who  pays  the 
wages — comes  out  of  his  pocket — but  he  at  last  gets  square  somehow 
or  another;  he  must  get  square. 

Q.  How  would  it  affect  the  government  ? Suppose  we  paid  out  gold 
dollars  here  to-daAL  the  prices  would  he  enhanced,  j-ou  think? — A. 
The  prices  of  imports. 

Q.  Your  opinion  is  that  we  ought  to  continue  the  system  of  cur- 
rency as  we  have  it  now? — A.  I would  not  say  that,  because  now  we 
haven’t  anything  in  particular,  and  a little  of  everything.  1 would  say 
simply  a silver  basis,  the  basis  of  which  is  the  Mexican  dollar. 

By  Mr.  Worcester: 

Q.  It  would  simplify  the  currency  if  the  old  cuartos  were  called  in  ? — 
A.  You  must  have  the  Philippine  cents  unless  you  think  it  would  pay 
to  take  these  cents  and  send  them  back  to  the  States.  The  Spaniards 
did  that  last  year. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Why  is  it  that  that  will  pay? — A.  Because  if  you  bring  out  100 
cents,  100  of  which  will  represent  a gold  dollar  there  and  only  a 
Mexican  dollar  here,  you  can  see  that  there  is  a profit  in  sending  them 
back. 

By  Mr.  Worcester: 

Q.  There  would  be  no  trouble  in  coining  fractional  currency  ? — A. 
No. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Did  they  coin  fractional  currency? — A.  They  did;  10,  20,  and 
50  cent  pieces,  coined  by  the  State,  in  this  city. 

Q.  And  the  copper  came  from  Spain? — A.  The  copper  is  very  old, 
indeed,  except  this  new  copper  which  Spain  sent  out  recently;  it  was 
all  Spanish,  but  the  2-cent  pieces 

Q.  What  about  an  American  bank  here;  how  do  you  think  it  would 
do  ? — A.  I would  say  that  it  would  do  very  well,  indeed.  In  fact,  it  is 
wanted. 

Q.  Would  you  make  it  a bank  of  issue? — A.  Yes;  the  only  bank  of 
issue  here  at  present  is  the  Spanish  bank,  which  is  not  a healthy  insti- 
tution by  any  means,  although  that  is  not  their  own  fault. 

Q.  Have  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  and  the  Chartered  banks  made 
any  effort  to  issue  notes  here? — A.  No.  They  are  not  allowed  to. 

Q.  Their  notes  do  not  circulate  at  all  here? — A.  They  will  take 
them 

Q.  At  a discount? — A.  At  a discount  on  the  place  where  they  are 
issued  at  the  rate  of  exchange. 

Q.  What  is  the  discount  on  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  notes  at  that 
bank?- — A.  One  and  a half  per  cent  to-day. 

Q.  Has  it  been  more  ? — A.  I have  seen  it  up  to  3 per  cent,  and  I 
have  seen  it  down  to  par. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


1C>3 


Q.  It  varies  every  (lay  ? — A.  According  to  the  price  of  silver. 

Q.  W ill  your  concern  here  receive  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai 
bank  bills? — A.  No. 

Q.  They  won’t  take  them  ? — A.  No;  they  don’t  know  of  them. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Is  there  a deficiency  of  small  change  coinage  now  in  the  islands  ?— 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  class  of  coins?— A.  Of  copper  coins  and  10-cent  pieces. 

Q.  And  the  higher  grades  of  silver  coins,  the  20-cent  pieces  and  the 
half  dollars? — A.  There  are  plenty  of  them. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Would  it  be  possible  to  send  this  old  copper  coinage  back  to 
Spain,  or  would  it  be  worthless? — A.  I don’t  think  that  they  would 
receive  it.  I think  it  has  passed  beyond  the  time  and  would  not  be 
recognized  to-day. 

Q.  What  is  the  basis  of  the  copper  coinage? — A.  Cuartos.  It  is  on 
the  basis  of  160  cuartos  to  a dollar,  every  copper  to  represent  2 cuar- 
tos; or  there  are  80  to  the  dollar. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Would  you  be  good  enough  to  state  for  us  what  is  the  scheme 
of  subsidiary  coinage  now,  and  into  what  divisions  it  is  made? — A. 
There  is  the  Mexican  dollar — there  are  160  cuartos  in  a dollar;  the 
dollar  is  divided  into  half  reals,  1 real,  pesetas,  and  50  cents. 

Q.  There  are  half  pesetas? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  In  establishing  a new  system  of  coinage  would  it  be  your  idea  to 
retain  the  Mexican  dollar  in  the  coinage,  having  the  coinage  on  the 
decimal  basis,  with  the  Mexican  dollar  as  the  unit? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  then  do  away  with  these  reals  and  cuartos  ? — A.  Y"es. 

Q.  And  you  think  that  system  is  one  that  the  people  would  become 
accustomed  to? — A.  Yes;  exactly  the  same  as  in  the  States,  except 
having  the  Mexican  dollar  instead  of  the  gold  one. 

Q.  Dollars  and  cents? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  amount  of  subsidiary  coinage  is  thought  to 
be  necessary  in  the  islands  for  the  necessary  purposes  of  business? — 
A.  No,  sir;  I do  not. 

Q.  There  not  being  banks  throughout  the  islands,  it  requires  more 
money  than  in  a country  where  there  are  banks  and  where  money  is 
rapidly  turned  over? — A.  Yes;  and  a great  deal  is  lost  and  disappears 
from  circulation. 

Q.  Buried  and  hidden  away  ? — A.  I presume  so. 

Q.  Do  you  know  where  we  could  get  statistics  which  would  show 
the  amount,  the  normal  amount,  of  subsidiary  coinage  used  in  the 
islands  ? — A.  I should  sa}T  from  the  two  English  banks. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  I should  like  to  ask  you  some  questions  on  the  Chinese  question. 
About  how  many  Chinese  are  there  in  Manila? — A.  Before  the  break- 
ing out  of  the  war  there  were  supposed  to  be  from  fifty  to  fift}T-five 
thousand. 

Q,  What  were  they  engaged  in? — A.  As  day  laborers  and  store- 
keepers. 

Q.  Do  the  Filipinos  generally  trade  with  them,  or  is  it  confined  only 
to  Chinese  ? — A.  The  Filipinos  do  all  their  trading  with  them. 


164 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  When  you  say  they  are  day  laborers,  do  they  do  the  bulk  of  the 
work?— A.  Yes.  The  natives  do  almost  nothing,  as  far  as  carrying 
heavy  weights  is  concerned,  because  they  are  too  lazy. 

Q.  Is  the  Filipino  physically  as  strong  as  the  Chinee? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  They  could  do  the  work? — A.  I have  had  them  do  work  for  me  in 
the  provinces  for  two  or  three  years,  at  a place  where  there  were  no 
Chinese  laborers. 

Q.  What  is  about  the  pay  of  a Chinese  day -laborer? — A.  That  I 
couldn’t  say.  It  has  changed  altogether  in  a short  time.  Formerly, 
I suppose,  it  was  something  like  40  or  50  cents,  paid  by  the  foreign 
houses  to  the  head  Chinaman. 

Q.  It  has  gone  up? — A.  I should  sav  doubled. 

Q.  The  Chinese  now  do  most  of  the  work  here? — A.  Nearly  all. 

Q.  All  the  work  of  carrying  in  the  city  is  done  by  them  exclusively, 
isn’t  it? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  is  it  in  the  country  on  the  plantations? — A.  The  Indians  do 
that. 

Q.  Don’t  the  Chinese  work  on  the  sugar  plantations  ? — A.  I never 
saw  one. 

Q.  Or  the  Japanese?— A.  Never  saw  one  here. 

Q.  Your  idea  is A.  The  Chinese  remain  in  the  cities  or  go  to  the 

small  towns  as  storekeepers. 

Q.  Is  he  engaged  in  gardening? — A.  Very  little. 

Q.  Washing? — A.  Never. 

Q.  This  is  particularly  his  employment  in  other  countries. — A. 
Never  here.  The  other  day  I saw  a laundry  sign  up  just  above  here, 
the  first  one  I have  ever  seen  here. 

Q.  As  to  his  character  as  a citizen,  as  a resident;  is  it  good  or  bad? — 
A.  I should  say  a little  of  both;  not  very  bad  as  a general  thing. 

Q.  I mean  as  to  whether  he  observes  law  and  order,  and  is  obedient 
and  tractable  ? — A.  Outwardly,  yes. 

Q.  They  have  here  in  Manila  no  government  of  their  own,  but  there 
is  some  government  by  them,  which  they  administer? — A.  Up  to 
within  a few  weeks  ago,  when  the  new  Chinese  consul  came  here,  they 
were  immediately  under  the  control  of  a man  named  Palanca.  Under 
the  Spanish  rule  they  had  a separate  tribunal,  or  a separate  division,  as 
it  were,  for  formerly  Manila  was  divided  up  into  barrios,  and  each  place 
like  Ermita  had  its  governadorcillo,  petty  governor,  who  controlled 
the  natives  in  his  place;  but  all  of  the  Chinese  went  to  one  place,  called 
the  Tribunal  of  San  Glages.  This  man  Palanca  was  always  at  the 
head  of  it,  directly  or  indirectly.  He  was  called  the  boss  of  it. 

Q.  Did  the}'  administer  justice  there? — A.  No;  it  was  rotten  to  the 
core. 

Q.  I mean  justice  in  the  legal,  not  the  ordinary  meaning;  did  they 
try  men  for  offenses  or  for  debt? — A.  When  a Chinaman  was  arrested 
for  petty  crimes  he  would  be  sent  to  this  tribunal  and  from  there  to 
the  Spanish  courts,  but  they  would  always  have  a Chinese  interpreter 
with  them. 

Q.  They  were  sent  there  in  the  ordinary  wav? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Was  there  any  feeling  on  the  part  of  Chinese  against  the  Span- 
iards?-— A.  No;  I don't  think  so. 

Q.  The  Spaniards  regarded  them  as  a desirable  people? — A.  Yes; 
because  they  were  hard  workers  and  cheap. 

Q.  Any  feeling  on  the  part  of  the  Filipinos? — A.  Yes. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


1(55 


Q.  Why? — A.  The  Indian  considers  he  has  a perfect  right  to  knock 
a Chinaman  down  or  throw  a stone  at  him;  he  seems  to  look  upon  him 
as  an  inferior. 

Q.  You  think  it  is  a race  prejudice? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  He  regards  himself  as  superior  to  the  Chinaman  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  you  think  that  feeling  is  general  among  the  Filipinos? — A. 
All  over  the  islands. 

Q.  Then  the  Filipinos,  from  what  you  have  seen,  would  not  like  to 
have  the  Chinaman  remain  here? — A.  Not  save  as  these  small  store- 
keepers, because  the  Filipino  is  too  lazy  to  keep  a store. 

Q.  Are  the  Chinese  coming  here  to-day? — A.  1 understand  that 
some  are  returning  that  Avent  away;  a large  number  left  here  just 
before  the  war. 

Q.  Has  the  United  States  Government  made  arnr  restriction  on  their 
coming?— A.  I have  understood  that  they  have,  but  what  it  is  I can 
not  say. 

Q.  What  would  be  your  general  idea  of  allowing  the  Chinese  to 
come  here  Avithout  restriction? — A.  I should  alloAV  them  to  come  here 
as  day  laborers  and  agriculturists  only. 

Q.  But  not  to  remain  in  the  city  ? — A.  They  would  fuwe  to  remain 
in  the  city. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  But  not  to  keep  shops? — A.  Not  to  keep  shops  or  as  merchants. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Why  Avould  you  make  that  limitation  ? — A.  Because  I thmk  they 
are  always  inclined  to  swindle  all  they  possibly  can. 

Q.  Are  they  successful  in  increasing  trade  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  are  familiar  Avith  the  conditions  in  the  far  east  generally, 
are  you  not? — A.  Somewhat;  yes. 

Q.  WhereArer  they,  the  Chinese,  go  they  control  trade,  do  they  not, 
at  Singapore,  Ceylon,  and  Colombo  ? — A.  Their  greatest  fault  is  that 
they  make  money  and  take  it  away  with  them. 

Q.  Do  they  return  to  their  homes  when  they  make  money  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  They  don’t  remain  in  the  country? — A.  No. 

Q.  Do  they  have  any  rule  as  to  sending  their  bodies  home  when 
they  die? — A.  It  has  not  been  allowed  by  the  Spanish  Government. 

Q.  You  are  aware  that  as  a general  thing  they  insist  on  that? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  But  }Tou  say  that  here  the  GoArernment  has  not  allowed  that  to  be 
done? — A.  No;  never. 

Q.  Do  you  knoAV  whether  any  effort  has  been  made  to  obtain  that 
right? — A.  I can’t  say;  it  was  before  my  time. 

Q.  How  long  have  they  been  in  the  islands? — A.  I was  almost  going 
to  say  before  the  Spaniards;  that  is  Avhat  I have  read  in  the  books,  and 
that  is  all  I knoAV  about  it. 

Q.  They  haATe  been  an  object  of  persecution  at  all  times? — A.  Not 
to  any  great  extent. 

Q.  Has  there  been  any  organized  effort  to  exclude  them  ? — A.  Ten 
years  ago  there  Avas;  it  Avas  mostly  newspaper  agitation. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  they  Avould  be  desirable  here  for  laborers  and  > 
farm  hands? — A.  Agriculturists. 

Q.  Well,  Avould  it  be  possible  to  put  such  a restriction  as  that  upon 
their  coming? — A.  Well,  I should  suppose  it  would,  for  the  reason 


166 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


that  the  original  arrangement  with  the  Spanish  Government  was  that 
Chinamen  could  come  here  only  as  agriculturists. 

Q.  How  would  it  be  to  provide  that  Chinese  might  be  imported  here 
under  the  contract  system  for  given  work  and  then  sent  away  again  ( — 
A.  It  would  do  very  well,  but  wouldn’t  it  rather  disagree  with  Amer- 
ican ideas  in  regard  to  contract  labor? 

Q.  Of  course  I don’t  care  to  go  into  that  argument.  1 just  wanted 
your  opinion.  For  instance,  in  the  United  States,  we  think  the  Chinese 
must  be  excluded,  that  is,  the  laborer;  that  does  not  apply  to  the  mer- 
chant or  the  scholar  or  the  professional  man.  We  exclude  the  Chinese 
laborer  because  he  would  compete  with  our  laborer.  Now,  what 
reason  would  you  give  for  excluding  them  here? — A.  Because  it  is  a 
very  low  class  that  comes  here.  The}'  go  into  business  transactions, 
and  get  into  trouble,  and  they  generally  run  away  and  make  a com- 
plete failure.  A Chinaman  may  have  twenty  names  instead  of  one. 

Q.  But  the  labor  question  in  the  city.  The  natives  won’t  work,  and 
you  must  have  day  laborers? — A.  I agree  with  you  about  that,  that 
you  must  have  them  for  laborers. 

Q.  Then  1 inquired  what  you  thought  of  bringing  them  over  by  con- 
tract?— A.  I think  it  would  be  a very  good  idea  for  work  on  the 
plantations  only. 

Q.  It  would  be  a kind  of  compromise  between  those  persons  who 
want  to  exclude  them  and  those  who  want  to  admit  them? — A.  I think 
it  would  be  a very  good  idea. 

Q.  Would  you  regard  it  as  harmful  to  this  island  to  admit  them  just 
as  we  do  other  races  ? — A.  I think  it  would  deprive  the  island  of  a good 
deal  of  its  natural  wealth. 

Q.  The  question  is  what  you  think  of  admitting  them,  just  as  other 
people  arc  admitted,  without  any  restriction? — A.  I should  not  care  to 
see  them  here  myself  under  those  circumstances,  although  it  would  not 
interfere  with  me  personally. 

Q.  Would  it  be  detrimental  to  the  interests  of  the  country? — A.  I 
should  think  it  would. 

Q.  Of  course,  if  the  Chinese  are  permitted  to  come  here,  you  know 
and  everybody  knows,  that  a million  of  them  might  come,  because  we 
are  so  close  to  China  and  so  close  to  the  most  populous  parts  of  China. 
Now,  if  they  were  allowed  to  come,  do  you  think  it  would  be  detri- 
mental to  the  general  welfare? — A.  I think  it  would  be.  1 think  it 
would  impoverish  the  country. 

Q.  Well,  if  the  Filipino  won’t  work  why  shouldn’t  we  have  some- 
body who  will  work ? — A.  The  Filipino  will  work  in  certain  places 
where  there  are  no  Chinese. 

Q.  Are  they  taxed  all  over  these  islands? — A.  Not  as  laborers;  no. 

Q.  Simply  as  shopkeepers? — A.  Simply  as  shopkeepers. 

Q.  In  the"  other  islands  do  thev  work  on  the  plantations  there  at 
all?— A.  No. 

Q.  Then  that  work  is  done  by  the  Filipino? — A.  That  work  is  done 
by  the  Filipino. 

Q.  Well,  do  you  think  that  if  they  were  allowed  to  come  as  they 
please,  that  that  condition  would  change,  that  is,  that  they  would  go 
on  the  plantations  and  exclude  the  Filipinos  from  work  ? — A.  I don't 
think  they  would. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  harm,  then,  in  allowing  them  to  come  as  they 
have  been  in  the  habit  of  coming? — A.  Simply  as  I have  said  before, 


REPORT  OF  TIIE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


107 


they  go  into  trade,  they  don’t  enrich  the  country,  and  they  are  strong 
competitors  against  the  better  classes  or  more  civilized  people  who 
come  here  and  do  an  honest  business. 

Q.  Then  you  would  have  an  exactly  opposite  idea  from  what  we 
have  at  home.  We  admit  the  merchant,  but  exclude  the  laborer? — A. 
My  idea  is  that  the  Chinese  here  would  become  a merchant,  that  is  his 
tendency  always,  and  he  is  always  of  the  lowest  class;  there  are  none 
of  the  better  class  here. 

Q.  In  general  do  you  think  it  would  be  advantageous  to  exclude  the 
Chinese? — A.  Altogether,  no. 

Q.  Not  altogether? — A.  No. 

Q.  Then  you  would  recommend  that  they  might  come  under  the 
contract  system,  and  go  home  when  their  work  was  done? — A.  I think 
it  w ould  be  a very  good  idea. 

Q.  Or  if  they  were  prevented  from  keeping  store,  or  were  kept 
simply  as  laborers,  you  would  recommend  that? — A.  Yes;  as  laborers 
they  arc  wanted  here,  they  are  of  great  assistance. 

Q.  Have  you  any  idea  of  how  many  come  here  in  a year? — A.  No, 
sir. 

Q.  A great  many  of  them  die  here,  do  the}''  not? — A.  Not  many  of 
them,  because  w hen  they  are  taken  sick  they  almost  invariably  ship 
them  over  to  China. 

Q.  Have  they  any  society  here,  as  they  have  in  San  Francisco, 
having  charge  of  those  matters? — A.  You  mean  the  Six  Companies? 
I don’t  think  so. 

Q.  Do  they  bring  their  women  ? — A.  I don’t  think  so.  There  are 
a few  here. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  policy  of  preventing  the  coming  of 
their  women  ? — A.  If  we  must  have  the  Chinamen,  let  us  have  the 
women,  too. 

Q.  Don’t  you  think  that  would  be  better  as  a matter  of  morality  ? — 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  They  have  largely  intermarried  with  the  native  women,  and  have 
produced  the  worst  race  in  the  countiy,  known  as  the  Chinese  mestizo 
or  half  caste? — A.  Yes;  they  are  the  worst  class  we  have. 

Q.  Why  do  you  say  they  are  the  worst  class? — A.  Because  they 
have  always  been  taken  so;  they  are  treacherous  and  unreliable,  but 
they  are  smart;  the  touch  of  Chinese  blood  seems  to  make  them  more 
cunning.  1 regard  the  Chinese  as  more  intelligent  than  the  Filipinos, 
saving  in  the  upper  classes. 

Q.  I mean  the  lower  classes? — A.  In  certain  ways,  yes;  in  other 
ways,  no.  The  most  ignorant  Filipino  has  more  ideas  of  civilization 
in  him  than  an  ignorant  Chinaman. 

Q.  How  is  it  in  the  matter  of  education?  There  are  Chinese  chil- 
dren here;  are  they  educated? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  But  not  a gi’eat  many? — A.  There  must  be  a fair  number,  I 
would  say,  in  the  Chinese  quarters. 

Q.  Poor  Chinese? — A.  very  few  poor  Chinese. 

Q.  There  are  quite  a number  of  Filipino  women  who  have  married 
Chinamen? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  do  they  get  their  education? — A.  The  schools  are  there 
if  they  care  to  go  to  them.  The}r  are  not  deprived  of  going  to  what 
they  call  the  public  schools  here. 

Q.  While  the  tuition  and  books  are  supposed  to  be  free,  however 


168 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


badly  managed  the  schools  are,  the  Filipinos  in  general  are  somewhat 
educated,  aren’t  they? — A.  Nearly  all  children  can  read  and  write. 

Q.  They  are  taught  in  the  public  schools? — Yes;  average  schools. 

Q.  And  they  are  taught  also  by  the  religious  orders?— Yes;  the 
greatest  fault  heretofore  has  been  in  the  provinces,  where  they  have 
been  taught  in  their  native  dialects. 

Q.  Tagalog? — A.  Tagalog,  Yicol,  or  the  dialect  of  the  province  in 
which  they  may  be. 

Q.  And  the  public  school  uses  the  language  of  the  province,  what- 
ever it  may  be  ? — A.  No,  Spanish;  it  should  be  Spanish,  but  the  priests 
won’t  allow  it.  Indeed,  they  talk  as  if  they  learned  too  much. 

Q.  In  general,  doesn’t  the  Chinese  live  by  himself,  isolated,  taking 
no  part  in  government? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  that  the  case  here? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  are  the  Chinese  here  disposed  toward  the  United  States? — 
A.  1 haven’t  the  slightest  idea. 

Q.  From  the  way  they  act  have  they  manifested  any  antagonism? — 
A.  None  whatever. 

Q.  Just  acquiescence? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  it  a mere  matter  of  indifference,  or  is  it  because  they  prefer 
us? — A.  I think  it  is  ignorance,  save  the  fact  that  they  have  more 
confidence  in  white  men  than  they  have  in  the  Indian. 

Q.  You  think  the  Chinese  would  prefer  that  white  men  should  rule 
this  country? — -A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  like  going  out  in  the  world  except  for  making 
money? — A.  1 don’t  think  so. 

Q.  He  does  not  bother  with  government? — A.  No. 

Q.  Has  he  any  political  ideas? — A.  Never  heard  one  expressed. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  You  say  we  are  having  a lot  of  trouble  with  the  Chinese  mestizos 
now.  Have  you  any  idea  which  ones  of  the  present  leaders  are  Chi- 
nese mestizos? — A.  Aguinaldo  is.  I believe  there  is  Chinese  blood  in 
him,  and  I believe  there  is  in  Mariano  Trias.  I could  not  tell  you  the 
others  unless  I saw  the  long  list  of  their  names. 

Q.  What  about  Mabini,  do  you  know? — A.  I can  not  tell. 

Q.  Do  you  know  about  Pio  and  Gregorio  Del  Pilar? — A.  They  are 
pure  Indians,  both  the  Del  Pilars. 

Q.  Emcabalus? — A.  An  Indian. 

Q.  Suppose  we  were  to  adopt  this  plan  of  allowing  the  Chinese  to 
come  in  as  laborers  and  agriculturists,  what  would  we  do  with  the 
people  who  are  keeping  store  at  present  all  over  the  islands? — A. 
Well,  I should  think  the  best  thing  to  do  would  be  to  allow  them  a cer- 
tain number  of  years  to  close  in;  but  it  would  have  to  be  years,  because 
they  are  all  heavily  indebted  to  the  import  houses  here. 

Q.  They  get  their  goods  on  credit  and  pay  for  them  when  they  are 
sold? — A.  They  get  their  goods  on  credit  and  they  don’t  always  pay 
for  them.  At  the  present  moment  it  is  supposed  to  be  cash. 

Q.  You  said  that  the  Filipinos  are  too  lazy  to  keep  store.  If  you 
exclude  the  Chinese,  who  are  to  keep  the  stores? — A.  The  English, 
the  Americans,  and  civilized  nations  will  come  here  and  keep  store. 

Q.  You  think  as  the  country  improves  and  the  conditions  improve 
that  Americans  and  English  will  come  here  ? — A.  There  used  to  be  two 
Englishmen  here,  a man  named  Spring  and  a man  named  Bell;  they 
kept  dry  goods  and  fancy  goods. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


169 

Q.  Have  Europeans  and  other  foreigners  ever  gone  into  that  busi- 
ness?— A.  Mever,  except  as  peddlers. 

Q.  You  said  our  only  export  here  was  Hour? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  I was  under  the  impression  we  exported  a good  deal  of  petroleum 
to  these  islands? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  do  those  two  make  the  two  only  important  exports  now?— 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  Haven’t  you  forgotten  beer? — A.  That  is  since  the  12th  of 
August.  We  tried  it  before — 1 remember  it;  40  eases — and  couldn’t 
sell  it. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  prospects  of  American  trade? — A.  If 
they  will  make  an  inferior  article,  such  as  the  native  is  used  to,  they 
ought  to  do  a good  business.  And  then  they  would  have  to  make 
prices  something  about  like  what  they  are  now.  There  is  no  use  to 
give  the  native  something  better  and  charge  him  1 cent  more  for  it — 
he  will  never  touch  it. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  introduction  of  machinery — agricul- 
tural machinery,  etc.  ? Will  the  native  stick  to  his  old  spade  or  will  he 
take  a new  implement  ? — A.  There  may  be  a few  agricultural  machines 
of  some  use.  For  instance,  for  cleaning  hemp  there  is  no  instrument 
that  will  do.  There  have  been  a dozen  invented,  and  they  work  all 
right  in  Mexico  with  sisal. 

Q.  I understand  that  all  the  different  contrivances  that  have  been 
brought  out  from  every  direction  have  discolored  the  fiber,  even 
though  it  was  wound  over  glass  cylinders? — A.  1 never  heard  of  it. 
I have  seen,  some  time  ago,  a machine  invented  by  a Spaniard  that 
worked  fairly  well,  but  the  native  objected  to  it  and  could  not  be 
induced  to  use  it.  Again,  you  see,  the  machine  must  be  taken  to  the 
tree. 

Q.  It  has  got  to  be  a thing  that  one  or  tw  o men  can  take  and  walk 
off  with  ? — A.  Yes;  and  he  objects  to  it  as  it  is.  Now  he  takes  some- 
thing similar  to  a bolo  and  a small  piece  of  rattan. 

Q.  Is  there  such  a thing  as  a decent  plow  in  this  country  ? — A.  They 
use  the  old  stick  plow  dowm  in  Negros. 

Q.  Couldn’t  better  plows  than  those  being  used  now,  capable  of 
being  hauled  by  carabaos,  be  used? — A.  I suppose  they  could  be  made 
of  better  material  than  those  used  now.  You  see,  the  great  majority 
of  the  plows  are  used  for  rice  fields. 

Q.  They  plow  for  sugar  cane,  for  corn,  and  for  rice,  don’t  they? — - 
A.  I don’t  know. 

Q.  How  about  sweet  potatoes  ? — A.  The}'  generally  use  a hoe  for 
them. 

Q.  The  hoe  that  they  use  is  tremendously  awkward  and  clumsy. 
W ould  the  native  appreciate  the  difference  between  that  and  some- 
thing infinitely  better  adapted  for  the  purpose? — A.  I think  he  would 
prefer  the  old  hoe. 

Q.  He  wouldn’t  change? — A.  I have  given  him  a spade  and  shovel 
many  a time,  and  he  wouldn’t  use  them. 

Q.  W hat  about  axes? — A.  Axes  would  sell  very  well  here,  espe- 
cially hatchets. 

Q.  What  about  imported  sugar  machinery? — A.  It  has  been  all 
English.  There  is  a little  in  Negros,  Panay,  and  Benguet. 

Q.  WThat  sort  of  success  have  the  men  met  with  who  have  intro- 
duced these  recent  puddling  machines  ? — A.  One  has  made  a fortune, 
comparatively  speaking,  every  day  in  the  year. 


170 


REPORT  OF  TIIE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  What  sort  of  future  would  there  be  for  a good  sawmill  ? — A. 
That  depends  a great  deal  on  the  demand  for  sawed  lumber. 

Q.  How  has  it  been  about  that ? Has  there  been  lumber  here  enough 
to  supply  the  market  at  moderate  prices? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Couldn’t  it  be  gotten  out  cheaper  by  a sawmill? — A.  Brown 
tried  that.  He  incorporated  a company  that  went  to  the  wall. 

Q.  Did  the  company  go  to  the  wall  after  Brown  left  it  or  before? 
A.  -The  chief  trouble  was  that  the  natives  would  not  use  his  machines. 

Q.  I understood  that  he  had  a pretty  good  thing  as  long  as  he  was 
running  it  himself,  and  that  he  sold  the  company  to  a syndicate,  and 
that  it  failed  afterwards.  1 was  told,  too,  that  he  failed  about  the  time 
he  got  nearly  all  the  timber  cut  off  ? — A.  That  was  the  greatest  trouble, 
the  timber  is  so  heavy,  and  there  are  no  roads. 

Q.  Of  course  that  is  no  reason  why  portable  sawing  machinery 
could  not  be  put  in  as  at  home? — A.  No. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  about  railroads  out  here? — A.  1 think  they 
would  open  up  the  country,  but  1 think  it  would  be  a long  time  before 
they  would  pay  ? 

Q.  Do  you  know  about  this  railroad  here;  has  it  ever  paid? — A. 
They  have  not  been  able  to  pay  a dividend. 

Q.  But  that  road  was  very  expensive  in  its  building.  Was  there 
any  need  for  it  ? — A.  Except  the  fact  that  the  Spanish  Government 
built  the  railroad. 

Q.  Suppose  an  American  company  should  come  out  here;  they  could 
build  a road  for  very  much  less  than  that  road  cost? — A.  About  half 
the  money. 

Q.  What  makes  you  think  it  wouldn't  pay  ? Suppose  that  road  was 
put  through  to  Batangas  and  the  populous  districts;  don’t  the  people 
care  to  travel? — A.  Yes;  they  travel  a great  deal  on  this  Manila  and 
Dagupan  Railroad,  but  the  fare  is  very  small;  very  little. 

Q.  What  about  freight? — A.  Well,  say  between  here  and  Batangas, 
you  would  only  have  freight  part  of  the  year,  during  the  sugar  crop, 
which  would  be  six  months  at  the  outside. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  have  electric  tramways,  the  cost  of  which  is 
very  much  less,  chiefly  for  carrying  passengers? — A.  The  electric  tram- 
way ought  to  pay  very  well,  indeed. 

Q.  Suppose  to  Antipolo,  taking  in  some  of  the  large  towns  on  the 
way? — A.  It  would  take  some  time  before  the  people  would  move  out 
there  and  take  houses.  This  being  a center  of  earthquakes  and  typhoons 
foreigners  don't  care  to  own  much  property. 

Q.  There  hasn't  been  much  damage  from  those  causes  recently  ? — A. 
In  1882  was  the  last  bad  typhoon,  and  in  1882  was  the  last  bad  earth- 
quake. 

Q.  What  about  hemp?  Is  all  the  hemp  raised  at  present  that  there 
is  a market  for? — A.  Yes;  I should  think  there  is. 

Q.  There  is  a good  deal  of  land  capable  of  producing  hemp  that  is 
not  under  cultivation  ? — A.  A great  deal. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  result  if  a great  deal  of  land  was  brought 
under  cultivation — more  hemp  would  be  raised?— A.  A decrease  of 
price,  and  the  cultivator  would  lose. 

Q.  Is  the  hemp  produced  on  small  holdings  by  natives? — A.  Nearly 
all  small  cultivators;  a few  moderate-sized  ones. 

Q.  To  whose  hands  does  the  hemp  go  first  when  it  comes  from  the 
producer  ? — A.  Well,  sometimes  it  goes  direct  to  the  man  who  bales 
the  hemp;  other  times  there  is  a Chinese  or  an  Indian  intermediary. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


171 


Q.  If  there  is,  of  course,  he  gets  his  profit? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Aren’t  there  Europeans  who  have  extensive  hemp-producing  inter- 
ests out  here  now  ? — A.  There  are  one  or  two  of  them  left.  There  were 
a number  of  them  (Spaniards),  but  they  have  mostly  died  off. 

Q.  Do  you  think  there  is  any  future  for  that  sort  of  thing  here? — 
A.  Certainly  there  is. 

Q.  What  would  you  think  as  a commercial  speculation  of  a man 
going  into  hemp  planting  extensively? — A.  If  he  has  got  money  he 
will  always  make  money. 

Q.  But  he  must  have  money  to  start  with  ? — A.  He  must  have  money 
to  hold  on  when  prices  fall,  and  not  clean  his  hemp. 

Q.  Doesn’t  he  have  to  clean  it  a certain  time  after  the  plant  is 
gathered? — A.  That  is  seven  years.  The  plants  are  capable  of  bear- 
ing hemp  at  the  end  of  four  years,  and  they  cease  to  bear  fruit  at  the 
end  of  seven  years,  and  he  must  be  able  to  hold  his  hemp  from  four 
to  seven  vears. 

Q Under  what  conditions  can  he  get  labor  at  present? — A.  The  old 
condition  was  that  the  man  who  cleaned  the  hemp  got  half  of  what  it 
was  sold  for. 

Q.  Then  a man  who  sold  hemp  would  have  on  his  estate  quite  a num- 
ber of  natives  to  whom  he  was  responsible  for  a certain  definite  part 
of  it? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  But  these  people  must  live  there,  I suppose? — A.  Not  on  the 
plantation  itself,  as  a general  thing.  Generally  they  live  outside, 
because  they  are  inclined  to  steal. 

Q.  You  have  said  here  that  they  got  half  the  price  of  the  hemp  for 
doing  the  work;  that  includes  not  simply  the  stripping,  but  the  care  of 
the  plants,  that  must  be  provided  for  some  way  ? — A.  That  is  all  paid 
for  separately. 

Q.  And  these  men  are  paid  by  the  day? — A.  It  is  according  to  the 
contract. 

Q.  Advances  have  to  be  made  to  these  people  ? — A.  Yes;  always. 

Q.  And  there  is  more  or  less  loss  as  a result  of  that? — A.  There  Is 
more  or  less  loss,  but  it  also  tends  to  make  slaves  of  them  by  keeping 
a hold  on  them. 

Q.  Is  there  any  trouble  in  actual  practice  in  getting  people  in  the 
hemp-producing  districts? — A.  That  depends  a great  deal  on  the  price 
of  hemp;  the  more  money  they  make  the  less  inclined  they  are  to  work. 

Q.  Well,  how  would  it  be  in  regard  to  labor;  if  a man  were  hold- 
ing on  to  his  hemp  for  a considerable  length  of  time  he  would  have  no 
laborers,  or  he  would  have  to  pay  them  in  advance? — A.  They  would 
fall  away  and  leave  him  unless  he  saw  fit  to  support  them,  but  that  is 
not  an  expensive  job. 

Q.  At  the  present  time  what- are  the  best  agricultural  industries  here 
from  a financial  standpoint — sugar,  hemp,  and  tobacco,  I suppose,  are 
the  main  things? — A.  Hemp. 

Q.  Is  there  anything  in  sugar  under  present  conditions? — A.  It 
depends  entirety  on  the  beet  crop. 

Q.  I suppose  labor  conditions  arc  similar  with  sugar  to  those  you 
have  mentioned  with  hemp  ? — A.  I know  very  little  about  sugar. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  the  work  in  tobacco  here? — A.  No; 
I do  not. 

Q.  You  do  not  know  the  conditions  under  which  the  plantations  are 
run? — A.  No. 


172 


REPOET  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  cocoa  and  coffee? — A.  No;  in  fact 
there  is  very  little  left  of  it  in  the  islands.  Cocoa  comes  from  South 
Mindanoa.  I know  nothing  about  it. 

Q.  Tell  me  a little  about  the  province  of  Albay.  You  have  been 
down  there.  What  is  the  main  industry  there? — A.  Hemp;  nothing 
but  hemp. 

Q.  What  are  the  means  of  communication  down  there? — A.  Very 
fair  roads,  indeed. 

Q.  Can  you  travel  about  the  province  incalesas  or  earromatas? — A. 
Yes;  with  a few  exceptions. 

Q.  Well,  these  people  have  to  get  their  food  from  outside? — A. 
Yes;  the  rice  mostly  from  the  neighboring  provinces. 

Q.  What  province? — A.  Camarines. 

Q.  They  grow  enough  to  keep  them  so;  they  are  not  dependent  on 
the  northern  part  of  this  island? — A.  Yes;  enough  in  Neuva  Caceres 
and  Camarines. 

Q.  Have  you  in  mind  any  new  industries  that  could  be  started  up 
here  under  a decent  regime?— A.  No;  I have  not,  because  I have  not 
thought  of  it. 

Q.  1 was  told  that  long  staple  cotton  used  to  be  grown  a little  by  the 
Spaniards  before  the  days  when  the  tobacco  monopoly  prevented  it  ? — A. 
Nothing  to  what  I have  heard 

Q.  Would  there  be  a good  market  in  China  for  cotton,  if  it  were 
raised  here? — A.  Both  China  and  Japan. 

Q.  You  don’t  happen  to  know  anything  about  the  products  of  the 
province  of  Benguet? — A.  No;  I do  not. 

Q.  I n general,  what  has  been  the  result  of  your  observations  as  to 
the  healthfulness  or  unhealthfulness  of  those  men  who  come  here  and 
take  care  of  themselves,  not  in  Manila,  but  in  the  decent  provincial 
towns  ? — A.  I consider  the  provincial  towns  more  healthy  than  Manila, 

Q.  What  would  you  say  about  Manila  itself  ? — A.  I think  there  is  a 
great  deal  of  luck  about  it.  Only  a year  ago  Mr.  Spring  came  out 
here;  he  was  a healthy  man,  but  he  seemed  to  go  to  the  wall  at  once. 

Q.  When  you  say  “luck,”  do  you  mean  when  a man  is  fortunate 
enough  not  to  get  infected  with  typhoid,  for  instance? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  I suppose  a big  cleaning  up  of  the  city,  if  it  were  practicable, 
would  improve  a man’s  chances'?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  What,  as  a matter  of  fact,  does  carry  oil'  the  most  men  here  who 
die  before  their  time? 

Colonel  Denby.  Whisky,  I guess. — A.  Yes;  most  of  them. 

Q.  That  being  the  first  cause — the  active  or  primary  cause  in  the 
majority  of  cases— what  would  be  the  next? — A.  Well,  1 hardly  know 
two  men  who  have  died  of  the  same  disease.  Say,  smallpox. 

Q.  There  must  be  a variety  of  diseases?- — A.  Well,  of  smallpox  there 
were  one  or  two  cases;  dysentery,  occasionally;  occasionally  diphtheria; 
blood  poisoning  occasionally,  and  epilepsy. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  you  reckon  typhoid  fever  among  the  commonest 
sources  of  death  here  ? — A.  It  was  almost  unknown  before  the  Ameri- 
cans came  here.  It  may  have  had  another  name. 

Q.  They  called  it  enteric  fever? — A.  But  what  we  called  typhoid 
fever  here  in  Manila  there  were  very  few  cases  of. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  What  would  be  the  effect  on  the  future  development  of  the 
island  if  the  agricultural  and  laboring  Chinese  were  excluded? — A.  It 
would  retard  it. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


173 


Q.  Materially  so,  do  you  think? — A.  Unless  some  other  kind  of 
laborer  took  his  place,  for  you  can  not  depend  on  the  ordinary  native. 

Q.  In  other  words,  it  is  your  opinion  that  the  native  is  either  incapa- 
ble or  unwilling  to  devote  himself  sufficiently  to  agriculture  or  laboring 
pursuits  to  develop  the  islands  according  to  their  natural  capacity? — 
A.  Yes. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  1 understood  you  to  say  that  the  Chinese  are  not  agricultural- 
ists?— A.  No;  they  are  not.  If  they  were  they  would  improve  matters 
here. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Do  you  mean  they  would  not  devote  themselves  to  agriculture 
even  if  they  were  admitted  under  that  condition? — A.  They  never  did 
under  the  Spanish  law,  and  under  that  law  they  were  admitted  only  as 
agriculturists. 

Q.  Then,  in  your  opinion,  there  would  be  no  practical  value  in 
admitting  them  if  they  would  not  devote  themselves  to  agriculture? — 
A.  I think  that  with  a little  honest  government  they  would  do  what 
they  were  told  or  be  sent  out  of  the  country. 

Q.  They  understand  agriculture? — A.  Yes;  certainly. 

Q.  And  if  forced  to  obey  the  law  would  devote  themselves  to  it? — 
A.  Certainly.  That  is  the  way  the  majority  of  them  live  in  China. 

Q.  Have  you  any  idea  how  that  could  be  regulated  so  that  a super- 
vision of  their  work  could  be  had?  Could  it  be  done  on  landing;  have 
an  agricultural  survey,  for  example,  have  a contract  and  make  them 
stipulate  that  they  should  devote  themselves  to  agriculture? — A.  And 
nothing  else? 

Q.  And  nothing  else.  Would  that  be  a practical  means  of  regula- 
tion?— A.  It  would  certainly  do  a great  deal  to  assist.  A Chinaman 
is  a man,  under  these  circumstances,  that  needs  watching. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion  as  to  the  necessity  of  having  here  a court 
intended  primarily  to  take  care  of  suits  brought  by  foreigners,  includ- 
ing Americans,  who  do  not  live  here? — A.  I don’t  think  it  at  all  neces- 
sary, sir. 

Q.  What  do  the  foreigners,  generally,  think  on  the  question  of 
courts;  do  you  know? — A.  I understand  they  will  be  perfectly  satis- 
fied, when  the  courts  are  open,  to  have  them  go  on  as  before  under 
American  supervision — as  they  are  now  having  or  are  to  have. 

Q.  As  to  whether  a United  States  court  should  be  established  here  for 
the  purpose  of  adjudging  all  cases  such  as  I have  mentioned,  and  tak- 
ing care  of  the  United  States  interests  generally,  what  would  be  your 
opinion  of  the  feasibility  of  establishing  such  a court? — A.  I should 
really  think  it  would  be  a wise  move.  I should  think  it  might  be  well 
to  refer  matters  from  here  to  Washington. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean? — A.  To  the  Supreme  Court,  for  instance, 
instead  of  having  a court  here. 

Q.  You  mean  simply  to  have  the  Supreme  Court  as  the  only  appel- 
late jurisdiction,  that  would  not  be  possible? — A.  No,  but  try  here 
appeals  at  the  Audiencia,  and  then  be  allowed  to  appeal  to  the  Supreme 
Court  of  the  United  States,  the  same  as  was  done  under  the  Spanish, 
when  appeals  were  taken  to  Madrid. 


174 


BEPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Is  there  any  demand  here  for  any  special  court  by  the  for- 
eigners?— A.  1 don’t  think  so,  sir. 

Q.  Have  you  heard  any  objection  on  the  part  of  the  foreigners  to 
going  before  a Filipino  court? — A.  None  whatever. 

Q.  Have  you  heard  any  expressions  as  to  whether  justice  would  be 
done  by  a Filipino  court? — A.  I have  heard  one  or  two  insinuations 
that  there  should  have  been  a majority  of  Americans  and  not  of  Fili- 
pinos in  the  constitution  of  the  courts. 

Q.  But  as  to  the  establishment  of  a special  court  in  which  the  for- 
eigner would  have  the  primary  right  to  sue,  have  you  heard  anything 
about  that  ? — A.  I think  last  week  certain  American  lawyers  sent  a 
circular  around  among  the  houses  here  with  the  idea  of  establishing  a 
court,  where,  as  they  said,  English  only  was  to  be  spoken,  but  the 
houses  did  not  seem  to  care  anything  about  it.  On  investigation  it 
seemed  that  these  men  were  trying  to  earn  their  daily  bread  more  than 
anything  else. 

Q.  Did  you  understand  that  they  (the  business  men)  were  opposed 
to  such  a court  ? — A.  They  said  it  was  not  necessary. 

Q.  And  that  is  your  opinion? — A.  That  is  my  opinion. 

Q.  You  think  justice  can  be  administered  in  all  its  branches  in  these 
courts  here  ? — A.  I do,  sir. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Is  your  opinion  the  same  as  that  which  you  have  expressed  as 
being  the  opinion  of  others,  that  the  American  element  in  the  court 
should  predominate? — A.  Well,  I think  at  least  it  would  be  well  to 
have  it  half  and  half. 

Q.  What  is  your  idea  in  general  in  regard  to  the  intervention  of  the 
United  States  in  the  functions  of  government  here? — A.  1 should 
think  it  would  be  badly  wanted  for  some  time  to  come. 

Q.  It  is  necessaiy  for  the  stability  of  the  government  that  we  should 
take  a large  control  of  affairs?- — A.  Oh,  yes;  try  and  teach  them 
honesty;  that  has  been  the  great  difficulty — the  bad  example  set  them 
by  the  Spaniards. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  under  the  influence  of  a civilized  government 
in  the  hands  of  Americans  the  native  could  be  taught  to  follow  the 
same  kind  of  government? — A.  Certainly;  I should  say  the  next 
generation  would  be  a marked  improvement  on  this. 

Q.  You  think  them  capable  of  learning  the  methods  of  honest  gov- 
ernment?— A.  They  are  very  quick  to  learn,  and  arc  honest  or  dis- 
honest, as  they  are  taught. 

Q.  ANY  would  have  to  exercise  intervention  over  the  central  govern- 
ment and  also  over  that  of  the  provinces? — A.  You  would  have  to  to 
some  extent,  and  if  all  cases  in  the  provinces  could  be  appealed  to 
Manila  it  would  not  require  so  much  American  intervention. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  the  former  police  and  military 
conditions  of  these  islands? — A.  The  police  we  have  had  in  the  island 
up  to  the  present  time,  known  as  the  Guardia  Civil,  have  been  a set  of 
scoundrels,  who  have  taken  money  directly  or  indirectly  from  all  the 
Indians  in  the  place,  and  many  times  have  forced  them,  when  they 
have  seen  tit,  to  pay  off  a per  capita  sum  charged  against  them. 

Q.  In  time  of  peace  would  it  be  necessary  to  maintain  here  a very 
large  police  force,  provided  they  were  honest  and  good,  always? — A. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


175 


Not  as  far  as  the  work  goes.  I think  we  must  always  have  a certain 
number  here. 

Q.  You  think,  so  far  as  the  militia  is  concerned,  in  ordinary  times 
a large  number  would  be  necessary,  or  would  a small  number  be  suffi- 
cient?— A.  I would  answer  that  question  by  presuming  that  in  times 
of  peace  there  would  be  a certain  amount  of  native  militia,  and  I 
should  say  that  we  ought  to  have  two  Americans  to  every  one  of  them. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Isn’t  it  true  that  the  abuses  of  the  guardia  civil  were  very  great, 
and  that  that  was  one  of  the  causes  of  the  recent  rising?- — A.  No  doubt 
of  it. 

Bir  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Is  there  anything  else  you  would  like  to  say  to  us? — A.  No;  I 
think  there  is  nothing  else. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  establishment  of  a municipal  govern- 
ment in  the  city?  Do  you  know  of  any  call  for  it  at  the  present  time? 
Do  you  think  the  time  is  ripe  for  it?— A.  I don’t  see  any  reason  for  civil 
government  here  as  long  as  we  are  under  military  rule — martial  law. 

Q.  It  has  been  said  to  me  frequently  within  a short  time  that  our 
soldiers  could  not  very  well,  on  account  of  their  lack  of  knowledge  of 
the  language  and  their  ignorance  of  the  city  in  general  and  the  ways 
of  the  people,  run  criminals  down  as  they  ought,  and  that  they  really 
need  natives  to  help  them  out.  Do  }rou  think  Tagalogs  could  be  found 
who,  as  auxiliary  policemen,  would  run  them  down? — A.  To  a certain 
extent  the  same  as  before.  But  to  have  a police  of  that  sort  I would 
have  it  black  and  white. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  that? — A.  I mean  that  formerly  the 
guardia  civil  always  went  in  pairs — a white  man  and  a black  man. 

Q.  General  Hughes  said  to  me  that  the  attempt  to  get  Tagalogs  to 
arrest  Tagalogs  had  been  a failure;  that  they  would  run  the  China- 
men down  every  time,  but  where  it  came  to  looking  after  each  other 
it  did  not  work. — A.  And  for  that  reason  I suggest  have  a black  and 
white 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  their  employment  at  the  present  time  would 
result  in  their  using  such  opportunity  to  take  vengeance  for  private 
grudges 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  do  you  think  about  a civil  governor  here — establishing  a 
civil  government? — A.  In  the  Philippine  Islands?  I think  the  sooner 
it  is  done  the  better. 

Q.  The  governor  to  have  absolute  veto  ? — A.  Absolute  veto  and  con- 
trol over  all  appointments. 

Q.  You  think  that  that  ought  to  be  done  as  soon  as  possible? — A. 
Yes;  I think  the  military  government  ought  to  be  a military  govern- 
ment, and  the  civil  government  a civil  government. 

Colonel  Denby.  W e are  much  obliged  to  you  for  the  information 
you  have  given  us. 

Adjourned. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


176 


TESTIMONY  OE  SENOR  LEGARDA. 

Manila,  June  °20 . 1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr. 
Mac  Arthur. 

Benito  Legarda,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  Commissioners, 
stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  We  will  begin  with  a few  formal  questions.  Please  give  us 
your  name,  residence,  and  how  long  you  have  lived  in  Manila. — A. 
Benito  Legarda;  residence,  16  San  Sebastian.  I was  born  here. 

Q.  What  is  your  occupation  ? — A.  I am  a capitalist;  I have  proper- 
ties here  and  businesses. 

Q.  What  is  the  currency  of  Manila? — A.  Mexican  pesos. 

Q.  You  have  been  engaged  in  business  a long  time.  Wo  would  like 
to  know  your  opinion  as  to  what  effect  it  would  have  going  on  a gold 
basis? — A.  That  is  a very  deep  question.  I would  not  pretend  to  give 
an  opinion  upon  that  question,  as  it  is  not  simply  a question  for  a 
business  man,  it  is  a question  for  bankers  and  men  who  have  made  a 
specialty  of  that  sort  of  thing. 

Q.  We  have  examined  some  bankers,  but  we  want  the  opinion  of 
intelligent,  active  business  men,  and  we  hope  that  you  will  tell  us 
whether  you  think  it  would  be  better  to  adopt  a gold  basis  or  to  retain 
the  silver  basis  that  is  now  existing? — A.  The  opinion  of  the  majority 
of  Filipinos  is  that  we  should  have  a gold  basis. 

Q.  Is  that  your  opinion?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  why  do  you  entertain  that  opinion?— A.  Because  silver  is 
to-day,  as  it  always  has  been,  fluctuating,  and  as  gold  is  the  basis  of 
value  of  silver  there  is  no  security  in  business.  Values  differ  from  day 
to  day. 

Q.  How  would  the  introduction  of  the  gold  basis  affect  prices? — A. 
Prices  would  become  better,  I think. 

Q.  The  chief  objection  to  going  on  the  gold  basis  made  by  the  gen- 
tlemen who  have  appeared  before  us  has  been  that  the  gold  dollar 
would  simply  take  the  place  of  the  silver  dollar  and  the  natives  would 
demand  gold  dollars  where  they  now  get  silver  dollars,  which  would 
result  in  doubling  the  prices?— A.  Everybody  here  knows  that  the 
silver  dollar  is  worth  just  half  of  the  gold  dollar,  and  the  introduction 
of  gold  in  sufficient  quantities  for  the  transaction  of  business  would 
simply  be  the  means  of  fixing  prices  by  gold. 

Q.  But  wouldn’t  it  hurt  the  exporter  if  the  merchant  had  to  pay 
gold  dollars  instead  of  silver  dollars  for  his  products? — A.  I think 
not;  he  would  simply  pay  one-half  of  what  he  pays  now  in  dollars. 

Q.  Would  thatsatisry  the  producer  and  the  laborer — to  get  nominally 
half  as  much  as  he  gets  now? — A.  Yes;  for  the  half  of  what  he 
receives  now,  in  gold,  ne  could  buy  the  same  things,  and  perhaps  more 
cheaply. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  going  on  a gold  basis  would  make  silver 
equal  to  gold  ? — A.  Never.  In  the  U nited  States  they  have  bimetallism, 
and  there  is  one  standard  for  a dollar,  and  a silver  dollar  is  as  good  as 
a gold  dollar.  If  you  had  that  coinage  here  the  American  silver  dol- 
lar would  naturally  be  as  good  as  a gold  dollar,  provided  it  was  a 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


177 


United  States  dollar.  My  opinion  on  this  subject  is  influenced  by  the 
condition  of  things  when  we  had  the  gold  basis  in  the  country.  This 
is  a very  fertile  country,  and  very  rich,  and  everything  Avas  in  very 
good  shape  when  we  had  gold,  and  the  products  were  at  the  best  prices 
also. 

Q.  How  long  ago  Avas  that  ? — A.  Before  the  year  1880. 

Q.  Hoav  was  the  change  made  from  the  gold  basis  to  the  silver 
basis? — A.  There  was  a silver  dollar  here  at  that  time,  but  very  few 
of  them,  and  a decree  of  the  General  Government  was  passed  making 
the  Mexican  dollar  of  the  same  value  as  the  gold  dollar,  and  naturally 
the  good  money  Avas  witkdniAvn  from  the  country  and  taken  out  of 
sight. 

Q.  What  had  been  the  rate  between  the  Mexican  dollar  and  the 
gold  dollar  prior  to  that? — A.  There  were  the  Carlos  dollars  here  then. 

Q.  No  American  dollars  here  then? — A.  No;  they  Avere  not  known. 
There  was  no  money  here  but  the  money  that  Avas  coined  here  of  gold 
and  fractional  money  in  silver. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  It  was  said  to  us  by  our  last  witness  that  the  people  would  not  like 
gold  dollars  because  they  Avere  too  small;  they  would  not  use  them. 
What  do  you  think  about  that? — A.  The  only  way  I can  explain  that 
is  that  it  is  ignorance.  The  gold  dollar  is  very  small,  but  it  is  worth 
more. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Were  gold  dollars  actually  coined  and  in  circulation  here? — 
A.  There  were  some.  I ha\Te  some,  but  they  are  not  in  general  cir- 
culation. 

Q.  But  at  the  time  you  speak  of,  prior  to  1888,  were  they  in  circu- 
lation?— A.  Yes;  a great  deal  in  circulation. 

Q.  What  other  coins  Avere  coined? — A.  There  was  a $1  piece,  a $2 
piece,  a $1  piece,  and  a $10  piece. 

Q.  And  silver?— A.  Yes;  from  Mexico,  media-ounces — half -ounces. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  It  has  been  said  to  us  that  there  would  be  difficulty  in  getting 
things  on  a gold  basis  here,  for  in  China  and  the  China  coast  generally, 
and  in  fact  throughout  the  East,  they  have  the  silver  standard  for  their 
exchanges,  and  the  gold  standard  would  make  trouble  ? — A.  We  under- 
stand that  the  great  difficulty  has  been  that  Spain  did  not  have  suffi- 
cient gold  to  put  into  circulation  here;  but  this  is  a problem  that 
America  could  solve  very  easily,  because  she  has  a great  deal  of  gold. 

Q.  It  has  been  said  to  us  that  the  day  laborer  would  never  accept 
half  the  number  of  dollars  that  he  Avas  getting  at  present,  even  if  he 
knew  they  were  gold  dollars,  and  that  he  would  be  incapable  of  under- 
standing the  fact  that  the  gold  dollar  Avas  worth  tAvice  as  much  as  the 
silver  dollar. — A.  They  are  circulating  to-dav.  They  are  taking  them 
at  the  value  of  gold  to-day,  at  the  present  time,  at  double  the  price  of 
silver. 

Q.  Do  you  know  Avhether  the  American  silver  dollar  is  received 
here  as  equal  to  the  American  gold  dollar? — A.  No;  because  these 
banks  here  are  English  banks,  and  they  do  not  come  up  to  the  same 
value.  When  the  American  silver  dollar  fell  below  the  gold  dollar 
they  took  the  American  silver  dollar  at  $0.90  or  $0.80 — something  of 

p c 12 


178 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


that  kind — and  this  will  he  the  case  here  until  American  banks  come 
here.  That  M ould  send  up  the  value  here,  because  this  being  American 
territory,  the  United  States  would  dictate  the  law  concerning  the 
money  that  is  to  circulate  here. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  While  the  gold  dollar  might  be  used  in  Manila  and  the  large 
cities,  where  the  people  understand  the  value  of  American  dollars, 
M ould  there  not  be  difficulty  in  teaching  its  value  to  the  people  of  the 
country — the  people  in  general — M’ho  are  accustomed  to  the  silver 
basis? — A.  I should  think  so.  Still,  what  is  accepted  in  Manila  will 
be  accepted  in  the  provinces. 

By  Colonel  Denbt: 

Q.  You  are  pretty  well  acquainted  with  the  Chinese,  I suppose? — 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  You  have  been  here  a long  time? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  kind  of  citizens  do  they  make? — A.  In  the  commercial 
competition  into  M’hich  they  enter  they  cause  a loss  in  all  the  objects 
M’hich  they  have  anything  to  do  with. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  that — cause  a loss?  Do  they  undersell 
other  people? — A.  They  discredit  the  products — they  adulterate  the 
products. 

Q.  You  think  the}'  are  not  honest  merchants? — A.  I think  not. 

Q.  Hom'  are  the}’  M’ith  regard  to  labor — M’hether  they  work  well  or 
not? — A.  Oh,  yes;  they  work  better  than  the  Indian. 

Q.  How  are  they  as  agricultural  laborers?— A.  Very  good;  but  they 
do  not  engage  in  that,  because  they  get  greater  remuneration  in 
business.  , 

Q.  Are  there  many  of  them  who  labor  on  farms  and  plantations? — 
A.  None;  they  are  all  engaged  in  commerce. 

Q.  About  how  many  of  them  are  there  in  Manila? — A.  I believe 
that  there  are  something  like  50,000  here.  I am  not  sure. 

Q.  And  these  50,000,  what  proportion  of  them  are  merchants ? — A.  I 
have  used  the  words  “engaged  in  business,”  as  applied  to  the  Chinaman, 
not  meaning  the  men  M’ho  are  the  heads  of  business  houses,  but  every- 
body who  is  engaged  in  business  in  any  capacity;  for  instance,  these 
Chinese  M'ho  have  their  own  little  carts  and  oxen,  I have  said  that 
they  Mere  engaged  in  business.  They  are  employees  of  business  men 
and  depend  upon  them.  There  are  about  50  M’ho  have  their  own  busi- 
ness houses. 

Q.  Do  they  do  business  with  other  people  besides  the  Chinese? — A. 
Yes;  M’ith  the  English  and  with  the  Filipinos — with  everybody. 

Q.  What  is  their  character  as  to  obedience  and  peacefulness? — A. 
They  are  the  most  demoralizing  people  I knoM'  of.  The}'  use  their 
means  in  every  way  to  evade  the  law,  to  get  around  the  law,  to  get  the 
better  of  it. 

Q.  Do  they  administer  the  laMr  among  themselves  outside  of  the 
regular  courts,  as  they  do  in  some  other  places? — A.  Yes;  they  have 
laws  of  their  own;  and  the  Spaniards  used  to  encourage  that.  When 
they  introduced  laws  of  their  own  here  they  had  to  pay  a greater 
amount  of  taxes.  Their  personal  tax  was  a great  deal  larger,  and 
there  were  other  payments. 

Q.  You  know,  I suppose,  that  in  the  United  States  we  exclude  the 
Chinese  laborer — we  do  not  allow  him  to  come  in — and  if  a Chinese 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


179 


laborer  leaves  the  United  States,  we  do  not  allow  him  to  come  back, 
except  under  certain  restrictions,  which  need  not  be  mentioned.  What 
do  you  think  of  that  system  as  applicable  to  the  Philippine  Islands? — 
A.  At  present  you  could  not  establish  so  radical  a system  as  that  here, 
because  there  woidd  probably  be  a disturbance  in  business  if  you  did. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  the  Fillipino  work  if  the  Chinese  were  not  here  ? — A. 
Fes;  but  labor  would  be  a little  more  dear.  The  Indian  would  not  do 
everything  that  the  Chinaman  does. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  he  do  it  by  degrees  if  there  wasn’t  anybody  else  to  do 
the  work? — A.  Yes;  little  by  little. 

Q.  What  is  the  general  sentiment  of  the  Filipinos  as  regards  the 
Chinese? — A.  Terribly  against  the  Chinaman. 

Q.  Then  if  the  Chinese  were  excluded  from  coming  here,  leaving 
those  here  who  are  here  now,  you  think  the  Filipinos  would 
approve  of  it? — A.  1 believe  so;  yes,  indeed,  it  would  be  a very  good 
political  measure. 

Q.  Would  you  take  any  action  with  regard  to  those  that  are  here? — 
A.  It  would  make  a great  deal  of  trouble  in  business  to  send  them 
away,  those  that  are  here,  but  it  would  be  a very  good  plan  to  limit 
the  immigration  of  Chinese  and  to  encourage  their  emigration. 

Q.  Are  there  many  Chinese  born  hereof  Chinese  parents  ? A.  Yes, 
many. 

Q.  What  class  of  people  do  they  make?- — A.  The  mixture  of  Chinese 
and  the  native  makes  a very  good  citizen  and  a very  hard  worker. 

Q.  What  do  you  call  them  in  ordinary  phrase? — A.  Mestizos — 
mestizo  Chinese. 

Q.  Does  the  mestizo  mean  half  Chinese  and  half  Filipino? — A. 
Yes. 

Q,  What  do  you  say  when  it  is  a Spaniard  and  a Filipino? — A. 
Espanol-Filipino. 

Q.  Is  the  word  mestizo  confined  to  Chinese-Filipino  parentage 
exclusively  ?—  A.  Yes.  Ordinarily  the  word  is  used  only  in  regard 
to  the  Chinese  mestizo. 

Q.  When  a man  says  that  another  is  a mestizo,  what  does  he  mean  ? — 
A.  Ordinarily  that  he  is  a mixture  of  Chinese  and  Filipino. 

Q.  If  he  were  the  son  of  a Spaniard  and  a Filipino  woman  what 
would  you  call  him? — A.  Espanol-Filipino. 

Q.  And  English  and  Filipino? — A.  They  call  them  Filipinos.  There 
are  very  few  of  them. 

Q.  In  the  distribution  of  political  rights,  such  as  the  right  of  voting, 
would  you  be  in  favor  of  giving  that  right  to  the  Chinese  who  are 
here?- — A.  Never. 

Q.  Would  you  give  it  to  the  mestizos?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Would  you  give  it  to  the  Chinese  born  on  the  soil  if  the  father 
is  Chinese? — A.  No;  because  he  would  follow  the  nature  of  his  father. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  the  male  Chinese  born  here,  pure  Chinese, 
ought  to  be  refused  the  right  of  suffrage? — A.  I think  so,  for  the  fact 
of  his  birth  here  does  not  affect  his  nationality,  because  they  have  a 
consul  here  and  their  birth  is  registered  with  their  consul. 

Q.  Was  there  any  system  of  naturalization  here  under  the  Spanish 
rule?- — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Could  a foreigner  by  any  process  become  a Spanish  citizen 
here? — A.  Yes;  he  could  by  a Spanish  royal  order.  He  had  to  ask 
it  of  the  Spanish  Government.  1 know  a Chinese  who  was  a Spanish 


180 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


citizen,  and  I know  an  Englishman  who  was  a naturalized  Spaniard — 
Spanish  citizens. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  permit  the  Chinese  to  come  here  under  a 
contract  to  labor  for  a given  length  of  time? — A.  It  would  be  a good 
measure. 

Q.  Would  it  be  better  than  to  exclude  the  labor  altogether? — A. 
Yes;  it  would  not  be  advantageous  to  keep  them  out  completely. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  exclude  Chinese  coming  here  in  order  to  go 
into  business,  and  not  as  laborers? — A.  Do  you  mean  to  keep  the 
merchant  from  coming  here  and  to  allow  the  laborer  ? 

Q.  To  allow  the  laborers  to  come  under  a contract. — A.  I don’t  see 
how  it  could  be  done. 

Q.  It  was  suggested  to  us  by  a gentleman  yesterday  that  that  was 
the  proper  solution  of  the  question. — A.  This  was  the  state  of  affairs 
before,  the  Chinese  could  not  come  here  except  as  laborers. 

Q.  Were  merchants  excluded? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Was  that  law  carried  out? — A.  At  first  it  was  very  strict,  but 
afterwards  they  let  them  come  in.  I suppose  because  the  Chinese 
knew  very  well  how  to  evade  the  law. 

Q.  How  does  it  happen  that  the  native  Filipino  will  not  work? — A. 
In  the  first  place  because  he  has  very  few  necessities.  In  the  second 
place  because  he  is  very  lazy  by  nature. 

Q.  Don't  the  women  work  a great  deal  ? — A.  The  women  work  very 
well;  yes. 

Q.  Who  does  all  the  washing  here,  the  men  or  the  women? — A.  The 
women. 

Q.  How  would  you  correct  that  condition? — A.  By  creating  the 
necessities  that  civilization  brings  with  it. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  good  wages  tend  to  make  them  work? — A.  That  is 
plain;  that  is  certain. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Referring  to  the  matter  of  Chinese  labor,  would  it,  in  your 
opinion,  be  desirable  to  permit  the  Chinese  to  enter  and  devote  them- 
selves to  labor  and  agriculture,  if  a means  could  be  found  for  holding 
them  to  that  work? — A.  Yes;  it  would  be  very  well. 

Q.  And  would  such  a measure,  you  think,  be  satisfactory  to  the 
Philippine  people  ? — A.  Yes. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  do  you  think  about  establishing  a municipal  government  in 
Manila? — A.  It  would  be  very  well,  advantageous,  in  fact  necessary, 
because  to-day  the  municipal  affairs  of  Manila  are  administered  by 
men  who,  although  they  merit  the  greatest  confidence,  have  had  no 
experience  at  all  in  administering  municipal  affairs.  For  instance,  in 
a district  of  the  size  of  Santo  Cristo  and  Elcano,  where  everything 
was  burned  up,  they  are  allowing  people  to  build  and  put  up  all  sorts 
of  buildings  without  any  municipal  regulations  at  all.  They  permit 
them  to  put  up  anjr  sort  of  building  they  care  to  put  up.  There  is  no 
restriction. 

Q.  Would  the  people  take  enough  interest  in  the  question  to  vote 
if  an  election  were  held  for  municipal  officers? — A.  I think  so;  }res. 
The  great  question  is  about  the  sort  of  municipal  government  to  be 
established  here,  whether  it  would  be  the  same  sort  of  municipal 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


181 


government  which  was  in  force  under  the  Spanish,  or  whether  it  would 
be  some  sort  of  home  rule  that  they  have  in  the  United  States. 

Q.  Don't  you  think  that  the  details  of  the  municipal  government 
might  be  left  to  the  administrative  council,  after  it  was  organized? — 
A.  Would  these  municipal  councils  be  chosen  by  election? 

Q.  Not  necessarily.  They  might  be  appointed  by  the  military  power, 
or  there  might  be  an  election  under  proper  safeguard,  of  course,  as  to 
the  qualification  of  the  voters. — A.  To-day,  at  present,  this  municipal 
council  would  have  to  be,  of  necessity,  appointed,  because  it  would 
not  be  advantageous  to  have  them  chosen  by  election. 

Q.  1 don’t  want  to  go  into  these  questions  now  as  to  the  qualifica- 
tion of  voters  or  the  mode  of  appointment.  I simply  want  your  opin- 
ion as  to  whether  it  would  be  desirable  to  establish  municipal  gov- 
ernment here  now,  or  when? — A.  I have  heard  the  opinion  expressed 
among  people  that  they  believed  it  is  necessary  and  desirable  to  estab- 
lish it  as  soon  as  possible. 

Q.  AVhat  is  your  opinion  as  to  the  establishment  of  a civil  govern- 
ment here,  the  appointment  of  a civil  governor-general  with  such 
powers  as  may  be  accorded  to  him,  with  the  appointment  of  the  usual 
secretaries,  a secretary  of  agriculture,  of  construction,  etc.  ? — A.  In 
my  judgment,  it  would  be  very  good.  But  there  are  a great  many 
difficulties  about  doing  that  at  present. 

Q.  AVhat  do  you  think  the  effect  would  be  on  the  body  of  the  public 
as  tending  to  produce  pacification  ? — A.  It  would  be  a very  good  thing 
to  establish  that  here,  for  every  day  1 have  opinions  from  people  who 
come  from  outside  who  say  that  they  wish  to  see  established  here  some- 
thing of  what  the  commission  has  promised. 

Q.  You  spoke  of  difficulties.  AVhat  difficulties  do  you  apprehend  in 
the  way  of  establishing  civil  government? — A.  At  present  we  are 
under  the  burden  of  a war,  and  of  course  military  law  is  in  force,  and 
military  law  is,  or  ought  to  be,  in  force  in  time  of  war.  That  is  the 
principal  difficulty  that  I see. 

Q.  You  know  the  circumstances  and  you  know  the  conditions. 
Taking  into  consideration  the  conditions,  everything,  all  the  circum- 
stances, with  which  you  are  familiar,  do  you  think  that  a civil  govern- 
ment ought  to  be  established  now,  or  when  do  you  think  one  ought  to 
be  established,  if  in  the  future? — A.  I think  just  as  General  Otis  does, 
the  miltary  governor,  and  everybody  else  desires  the  establishment 
of  a civil  government;  but  how  can  we  do  it  while  war  is  going  on? 

Q.  Do  you  think  the  existence  of  war  is  an  insuperable  objection  to 
establishing  civil  government  here? — A.  Not  absolutely. 

Q.  Do  you  think  the  civil  government  ought  to  lie  established  here 
under  the  conditions  which  exist  ? — A.  There  would  be  many  conflicts 
between  the  civil  government  and  the  military  government  about 
questions  of  jurisdiction. 

By  Professor  AVorcester: 

Q.  You  said  a moment  ago  that  everybody  desired  to  see  a civil 
government  established  here  as  soon  as  it  could  be.  You  then  asked 
the  question,  “ How  can  it  be  established  while  a state  of  war  exists  ?” 
with  the  implication  that  it  could  not  be  established  during  the  present 
state  of  things.  And  you  further  stated  that  there  would  be  a conflict 
between  the  military  and  civil  authorities  about  their  jurisdiction. 
Taking  all  these  facts  into  consideration,  do  you,  or  not,  think  that  there 


182 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


might  be  ii  hold  in  which  the  civil  government  would  do  good  here? — 
A.  Who  doubts  it  ? 1 have  the  opinion  of  a great  many  Filipinos,  and 

undoubtedly  it  would  be  a very  good  political  measure  and  very  advan- 
tageous; but  how  is  it  to  be  done? 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  CHARLES  ILDERTON  BARNES. 


Manila,  June  8%,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denbv  (in  tin'  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr. 
MacArthur. 

Charles  Ilderton  Barnes,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  com- 
missioners, stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  your  name? — A.  Charles  Ilderton  Barnes. 

Q.  Where  do  you  reside? — A.  Calle  Real,  Malate. 

Q.  IIow  long  have  you  resided  in  Manila? — A.  Well,  off  and  on, 
with  the  exception  of  two  or  three  holidays,  I have  been  here  twenty- 
four  years. 

Q.  And  you  are  associated  with  Warner  Barnes  & Co.  ? — A.  Yes; 
1 am  a partner  in  the  firm  of  Warner,  Barnes  & Co. 

Q.  Has  that  firm  been  here  all  that  time? — A.  Before  that  I was 
manager  here  for  the  Hongkong  Bank  for  about  ten  years,  and  then  for 
the  last  thirteen  or  fourteen  years  I have  been  in  that  firm. 

Q.  What  is  your  business;  what  is  your  firm  engaged  in — what  busi- 
ness?— A.  Export  business  generally. 

Q.  Exporting  to  foreign  countries  and  selling  to  the  islands? — A. 
Principally  to  the  United  States  and  England. 

Q.  What  are  the  chief  articles  of  export? — A.  Sugar  and  hemp  are 
the  principal  articles  exported. 

Q.  Now,  Mr.  Barnes,  will  you  give  us,  in  your  own  way,  a talk  on 
currency,  what  the  currency  is  here,  how  long  it  existed  in  this  form, 
and  the  recommendations  that  you  may  care  to  make? — A.  When  I 
first  came  here  there  was  gold  currency,  but  there  was  also  at  the  same 
time  a circulation  of  silver  dollars,  and,  as  the  Spanish  Government 
never  limited  the  circulation  of  silver  dollars  to  any  material  extent, 
in  course  of  time,  with  the  dollars  that  were  here  and  the  smuggling, 
which  the  custom-house  officials  carelessly  winked  at,  a lower  value  of 
currency  gradually  replaced  the  gold. 

Q.  About  what  year  was  that,  Mr.  Barnes?— A.  Well,  that  change 
had  been  gradually  coming  on,  but  about,  I suppose,  1880  there  was 
very  little  gold  left. 

Q.  What  effect  did  that  change  have  on  commerce  and  trade? — A. 
It  had  no  effect,  because  it  was  so  gradual.  The  currency  here  had 
been  regulated  by  the  exchange  on  London.  The  effect  was  only  felt 
gradually,  and  spread  over  a great  many  years.  The  rates  may  have 
gone  down,  perhaps,  2 or  3 per  cent  every  year  until  a silver  basis  was 
reached.  It  was  a very  gradual  change. 

Q.  How  does  the  silver  currency  suit  these  islands? — A.  In  my 
opinion  the  silver  currency  suits  the  islands  very  well,  indeed.  We 
have  had  silver  now,  you  may  say,  for  ten  years  or  more;  we  have 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


183 


had  nothing  but  a silver  currency  and  all  the  natives  are  used  to  silver, 
and  all  the  capitalists  arc  used  by  this  time  to  value  their  property  in 
the  currency  of  the  country.  1 don’t  think  that  it  would  be  advanta- 
geous to  go  back  to  gold.  I think  that  silver  suits  the  country  better, 
because  the  wealth  of  the  country,  the  wealth  that  it  produces,  is 
entirely  from  the  soil.  There  are  no  manufactures  or  any  other  inter- 
ests except  purely  agricultural  wealth.  And  you  may  say  that  the 
natives  look  on  silver  here  as  not  having  changed.  Practically  the 
value  of  the  dollar  is  just  the  same  as  it  has  been  for  many  years. 

Q.  In  paying  wages? — A.  In  paying  wages. 

Q.  You  perceive  no  difference  ? — A.  Very  little.  I suppose  that  there 
may  be  some  increase  in  the  cost  of  living,  owing  to  increase  of  wages. 
I am  speaking  more  from  the  point  of  view  of  the  multitude.  There 
has  been  an  increase  in  the  cost  of  food  and  other  articles  which  they 
want  to  live  on,  but  I think  that  is  caused  more  by  the  increase  of 
wealth  in  the  country,  as  there  is  more  taken  up  by  the  prices  of  labor 
than  there  is  by  the  prices  of  ordinary  articles  of  food.  Of  course 
it  is  largely  put  on  the  value  of  clothing  and  that  sort  of  thing. 

Q.  You  mean  the  imports? — A.  Imports;  but  to  the  bulk  of  the 
people  that  is  not  a very  serious  item  in  their  expenditures.  The 
native  does  not  use  a great  deal  of  clothing. 

Q.  As  to  the  prices  of  articles  that  are  exported,  has  there  been  any 
material  change  ? — A.  They  fluctuate  with  the  markets  at  home,  but  I 
suppose  that  the  gold  price  to-day  of  sugar  has  gone  down  perhaps  a 
little,  but  I suppose  a ton  of  sugar  that  before  was  worth  £12  or 
£13  is  to-day  worth  £10  or  £11,  and,  considering  it  from  the  native 
point  of  view,  you  may  conclude  that  the  silver  dollar  has  varied 
very  little  in  value  except  for  an  increase.  As  I have  said  before, 
more  wealth  being  in  the  country,  it  has  had  the  effect  of  increas- 
ing the  value  of  the  different  articles  they  require;  but,  on  the  other 
hand,  they  sell  their  products  on  a gold  basis  and  they  get  a much 
larger  return,  gold  having  appreciated.  That  is  the  rule,  from  our 
point  of  view  here.  Gold  has  appreciated. 

Q.  You  think  that  silver  has  not  depreciated,  but  gold  has  appreci- 
ated?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  do  you  pay  higher  prices  for  products  than  you  did 
before? — A.  We  pay  higher  dollar  prices. 

Q.  The  producer  gets  more  money  ? — A.  He  gets  more  dollars  and 
he  does  not  care  whether  it  is  a gold  dollar  or  a silver  dollar. 

Q.  Does  he  get  anything  like  the  ratio  between  the  metals?  That 
is,  suppose  silver  is  worth  only  45  gold  cents,  does  he  get  more  than 
double? — A.  No.  He  gets  the  value,  up  to  the  value.  You  see  that 
the  competition  here  in  business  now  issuch  you  never  expect  to  make 
more  than  a moderate  commission,  and  of  course  the  commission  and 
charges  and  other  things  for  the  handling  of  the  produce  go  to  him. 

Q.  The  exporter  does  not  get  the  money? — A.  No;  the  money  is 
made  by  the  populace  b}T  the  millions— by  the  people. 

Q.  If  you  went  on  a gold  basis  what  would  be  the  result? — A.  I 
don't  think  it  would  have  a good  effect,  because  instead  of  paying  the 
natives,  as  is  done  to-day,  $5  a picul  for  his  sugar,  you  would  pay  him 
$2.50  in  gold.  In  their  way  of  spending  money  $2.50  gold  would  not 
go  anywhere  near  the  distance  that  $5  would  in  silver,  because  their 
custom  is  to  pay  a man  so  many  reals  for  wages,  and  gold  dollars 
would  have  only  so  many  reals;  the  gold  would  have  the  same  number 


184 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


of  reals  as  the  silver.  You  could  not  have  a silver  dollar  of  8 reals 
and  a gold  dollar  of  16  reals,  and  therefore  he  would  have  to  spend 
more  money.  He  would  not  benefit  by  the  change.  If  you  go  into 
the  market  with  a gold  dollar  you  do  not  buy  so  cheaply  as  the  China- 
man who  goes  into  the  market  with  a string  of  cash;  the  money  is 
not  small  enough.  Gold  money  is  not  small  enough  for  the  business 
here. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  it  be  an  objection  that  the  gold  dollar  would  be  too 
small? — A.  You  mean  the  size.  Men  could  not  change  it  until  they 
had  small  money. 

Q.  You  have  copper  here? — A.  Yes;  but  there  is  very  little  of 
it.  We  did  have  it  here.  I look  at  results.  The  country  has  been 
more  prosperous  on  a low  exchange  than  it  has  ever  been  before. 

Q.  Because  it  has  brought  more  money  here? — A.  It  has  brought 
silver  dollars  here.  And  you  take  the  sugar  grower  in  the  Philippines 
to-day,  and  he  is  a wealthy  man  selling  his  sugar  at  $5  a picul. 

Q.  A picul  is  111*  pounds? — A.  A picul  is  140  pounds  English  and 
133  pounds  Spanish.  1 came  out  with  people  interested  in  Java.  The 
florin  in  Java  is  intrinsically  worth  about  par  with  our  dollar  here 
to-day.  The  florin  is  actually  but  half  of  a dollar,  but  the  Java  cur- 
rency is  on  a gold  basis  instead  of  a silver  basis.  Java  having  a gold 
basis,  with  a silver  currency,  this  florin,  which  is  considered  to  lie  gold, 
is  just  half  the  size  and  half  the  weight  of  our  dollar,  and  circulates 
for  the  same  value,  and  therefore  these  people  are  paid  in  florins  for 
their  sugar,  while  the  people  here  are  paid  in  dollars,  and  they  get 
about  as  many  florins  for  the  same  quantity  of  sugar  as  the  people 
here  would  get  dollars.  They  tell  me,  consequently,  that  these  large 
sugar  estates  can  not  pay  at  the  prices  that  they  get  for  sugar,  whereas 
here,  on  the  silver  basis,  these  natives  grow  sugar  and  get  wealthy. 

Q.  You  think  that  same  thing  would  happen  to  our  silver  dollar — 
that  our  silver  dollar  would  be  taken  for  two  Mexican  dollars? — A. 
Well,  if  your  silver  dollar  here  to-day  is  worth  two  Mexican  dollars 
you  see  you  would  have  to  give  the  same  man  double  the  amount  of 
silver  that  you  give  him  to-day.  If  you  introduced  your  American 
silver  dollars  you  would  have  to  give  two  Mexican  dollars  where  you 
uow  give  one. 

Q.  Our  silver  dollar  to-day  is  the  equivalent  of  gold.  How  would 
that  be? — A.  That  is  what  they  do  in  Java.  It  is  the  same  thing,  but 
I don't  think  it  is  a benefit  to  the  country.  It  is  more  of  a benefit  to 
the  country  to-day  to  have  two  Mexican  dollars  than  to  have  one 
American  silver  dollar  of  exactly  the  same  value. 

Q.  Your  opinion  is  that  there  ought  to  be  no  change? — A.  My 
opinion  is  that  there  can  be  no  better  currency  for  these  islands  than 
the  Mexican  dollar,  unless  the  United  States  cares  to  coin  a dollar  of 
the  same  weight  as  the  Mexican  dollar  and  allow  it  to  circulate  at  its 
value. 

Q.  Are  there  any  Chinese  dollars  here? — A.  There  are  no  Chinese 
dollars  here.  The  Mexican  dollar  is  current  in  China  now.  I have 
never  seen  a Chinese  dollar. 

Q.  I have  paid  out  thousands  of  Chinese  dollars  in  Peking.  The}7 
coin  them  at  a dozen  places. — A.  They  do,  indeed? 

Q.  They  coin  them  at  Canton,  but  they  don't  coin  them  at  Hong- 
kong.— A.  W ell,  they  do  not  circulate  here. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION 


185 


Q.  I thought  perhaps  they  had  reached  here. — A.  No.  Tf  the  coun- 
try actually  wanted  more  money,  my  opinion  is  that  there  would  be 
sufficient  cash  here  if  the  government  allowed  the  free  importation  of 
Mexican  dollars. 

Q.  The  government  has  been  doing  that? — A.  It  is  known  what  they 
are  worth.  It  is  an  honest  coin.  It  is  worth  the  exact  value  of  the 
face  of  it. 

Q.  What  is  the  smallest  denomination  of  bank  bills  issued  here? — 
A.  Five  dollars. 

Q.  There  is  only  one  bank,  I understand,  authorized  to  issue  notes? — 
A.  There  is  only  one  bank.  It  would  be  a great  advantage,  perhaps, 
if  they  allowed  some  further  circulation  of  bank  paper  here. 

Q.  How  would  an  American  bank  do  here? — A.  An  American  bank 
would  have  the  same  prospects  here  as  the  other  banks  have. 

Q.  But  an  American  bank  might  have  the  right  of  issue? — A.  Cer- 
tainly. 

Q.  The  English  banks  have  not?- — A.  The  English  banks  have  not. 
I mean  that  they  could  do  practically  the  same  banking  business,  and 
in  addition  they  might  have  the  right  of  issue  as  well.  Of  course,  there 
are  many  people  who  would  say  that  it  is  better  to  put  the  country  back 
on  the  gold  basis,  but  then  3^011  have  got  to  find  out  whether  they  are 
speaking  for  themselves  or  for  the  country.  As  far  as  we  are  con- 
cerned as  a firm  it  would  be  better  for  us  to  have  the  country  back  on 
a gold  basis,  and  perhaps  for  me  individually.  For  instance,  suppose 
I was  a partner  in  a firm  and  had  $500,000  interest  in  that  firm,  and  I 
sold  out.  Instead  of  getting  $500,000  silver,  as  now,  I would  get$500,000 
gold  on  a gold  basis.  But  it  would  not  benefit  the  country  at  large  to 
have  the  islands  on  a gold  basis,  and  you  don’t  want,  I think,  to  legis- 
late for  the  rich  people,  the  rich  people  can  look  out  for  themselves, 
and,  after  all  is  said  and  done,  their  riches  depend  on  the  prosperity 
of  the  country.  If  the  country  is  prosperous,  then  the  rich  man  gets 
better  prices  for  his  property,  and  prices  follow  values.  And  then  if 
the  country  is  not  prosperous  prices  depreciate,  and  the  same  way  with 
the  government:  if  the  country  is  prosperous  it  can  stand  a large 
amount  of  taxation,  for  they  can  pay  double  the  amount  of  taxation 
in  silver  that  they  can  in  gold.  That  is  my  opinion  about  it.  I may 
be  wrong,  but  this  is  a producing  country,  and  I believe  the  silver 
basis  is  the  best. 

Q.  That  is  about  the  argument  that  is  made  at  home.  There  is  a 
very  strong  silver  party  in  the  agricultural  States. — A.  The  agricultural 
people  say  we  want  a silver  basis,  and  the  rich  people,  the  bankers, 
say  we  want  gold;  we  have  to  pay  our  own  money  out  in  gold  and  we 
must  have  it  returned  to  us  in  gold,  and  the  bankers’  interests,  the 
rich  man’s  interest,  is  the  stronger  with  you,  isn’t  that  so? 

Q.  It  is  a very  difficult  question.  In  this  country,  where  there  are 
no  other  interests  than  agricultural  and  the  whole  wealth  of  the  country 
is  in  agriculture,  you  think  the  people  themselves  woidd  be  dissatisfied 
with  getting  one-half  less  dollars  than  they  did  before,  even  though 
the  dollars  were  worth  double  the  amount  of  the  former  dollars  which 
they  received? — A.  Yes;  I certainly  do. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  The  present  system  of  fractional  currency,  particularly  the  cop- 
per part,  is  very  cumbersome.  You  have  160  coppers  to  the  dollar. — 
A.  You  will  want  a fractional  currency  very  soon.  There  is  a great 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


186 

complaint  now  for  the  want  of  small  money.  Of  course,  there  is  a mint 
here.  I don't  know  whether  they  can  make  copper  coins  or  not. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Is  that  mint  in  operation  now?- — A.  No;  but  I suppose  such  coin 
could  be  minted  here  if  the  mint  was  in  operation. 

Q.  Would  you  see  any  objection  in  the  way  of  using1  a decimal  sys- 
tem for  fractional  currency? — A.  No;  there  wouldn't  be  any  objection 
to  that.  The  people  are  used  to  the  system  of  reals  and  160  cuartos 
in  a dollar. 

Q.  A real  is  12£  cents? — A.  Yes.  You  sec  the  Spaniards  tried  the 
introduction  of  this  decimal  currency  when  they  made  the  50  cent, 
20  cent,  and  10  cent  pieces,  but  they  did  not  carry  it  out  on  the  basis 
of  the  Mexican  dollar.  If  they  had  made  2-cent  coppei’s  and  d-cent 
coppers  instead  of  cuartos,  it  would  have  been  better,  I think.  I don’t 
see  any  objection  to  the  decimal  system.  It  is  simpler,  and  in  the  course 
of  a year  everybody  would  go  into  it.  It  is  only  in  the  markets  where 
the  reals  and  cuartos  are  still  used. 

Q.  Of  course  they  are  used  to  having  d cuartos  to  5 cents?— A.  The 
natives,  among  themselves,  selling  goods  and  fish,  are  used  to  reals,  but 
accounts  are  kept  in  decimals  here  now.  All  invoices  are  made  in  the 
decimal  system. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  You  said  that  in  China  you  could  buy  more  with  a string  of  cash 
than  you  could  for  an  equivalent  value  in  gold?— A.  I mean,  if  you  go 
into  the  market  with  silver,  and  you  try  to  get  change,  and  all  that  sort 
of  thing,  it  seems  to  disappear,  whereas  these  Chinese  can  go  in  with 
a string  of  cash  and  buy  things,  personally,  very  cheap. 

Q.  Do  you  use  that  illustration  for  the  purpose  of  showing  that  in 
some  manner  the  silver  dollar  does  not  pass  for  its  real  value?  Will 
not  products  find  their  equivalent  value  on  a gold  basis  ? — A.  To  a great 
extent.  But  if  the  agriculturists  are  paid  in  gold,  they  can  not  make 
that  gold  go  around  like  twice  the  number  of  dollars  in  silver. 

Q.  It  would  change,  then,  the  value  of  the  dollar  so  far  as  concerns 
the  agricultural  classes,  and  appreciate  the  value  of  money? — A.  I 
suppose  so. 

Q.  Would  what  you  say  as  applying  to  the  agricultural  classes  here 
necessarily  apply  to  mechanics  in  England  or  some  other  country  ? — A. 
No:  perhaps  not.  You  see  their  currency  is  on  a solid  gold  basis. 

Q.  But,  as  I understand,  you  have  not  thought  to  put  this  country 
on  a solid  gold  basis? — A.  You  might  possibly  try  to  run  it  on  the 
understanding  that  it  was  on  a gold  basis  and  put  silver  in  circulation 
instead  of  gold.  In  that  case  a man  would  be  given  the  same  amount 
of  silver  that  he  now  gets  and  be  told  to  consider  it  gold  dollars, 
because  the  country  was  on  a gold  basis. 

Q.  Then,  the  reason  you  think  that  silver  is  better  adapted  to  the  agri- 
cultural class  is  the  fact  that  the  agricultural  class  is  one  that  does  not 
appreciate  the  real  value  of  the  money  that  is  given  to  them  ? — A.  I 
don’t  know  exactly  how  that  is.  I can  not  exactly  explain  how  it  is, 
except  that  the  silver  here  does  not  seem  to  have  depreciated,  but 
seems  to  hold  its  value. 

Q.  It  seems  to  me  that  your  reason  is  good. — A.  If  the  grower  of 
rice  and  the  grower  of  cocoanuts,  and  the  grower  of  different  articles 
of- consumption,  and  the  owner  of  sheep  and  beef  all  agree  to  consider 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


187 


that  silver — that  a dollar  in  silver  should  count  for  so  much  in  pur- 
chases, then  it  has  not  depreciated. 

Q.  But  it  seems  to  me  that  your  reason,  while  it  would  hold  good 
with  a people  like  the  Filipinos,  accustomed  to  money  upon  a silver 
basis,  would  not  hold  good  with  an  agricultural  people  accustomed 
to  a gold  basis. — A.  If  they  were  used  to  having  no  great  changes,  and 
the  country  was  used  to  a gold  basis,  I would  not  advocate  their  going 
on  a silver  basis,  because  it  upsets  everything. 

Q.  If  the  Philippines  were  still  on  the  gold  basis  of  1870  would  you 
hold  the  same  opinion  that  you  do  now,  or  would  you  deem  it  advisable 
to  continue  on  that  basis? — A.  I do  not  know  that  I would  recommend 
a change,  for  I consider  the  prosperity  of  the  country  is  greater  in 
wealth  now  than  it  was  on  a gold  basis. 

Q.  Is  the  Philippine  money  question  dependent  upon  or  influenced 
in  any  wav  by  the  fact  that  the  Archipelago  is  in  close  proximity  to  the 
other  Eastern  countries  which  are  on  a silver  basis? — A.  Very  likely 
that  has  an  effect,  because  the  countries  that  have  a lower  exchange 
are  accustomed  to  consider  the  silver  dollars  worth  so  much.  They 
take  the  silver  as  worth  so  much  money.  And  the  people  who  are 
trading  in  dearer  money — these  silver  people  can  not  compete  with 
favorably.  They  have  shown  that  in  the  case  of  Java,  for  instance; 
they  told  me  so.  I don't  know  about  Java,  but  they  tell  me  that 
although  the  sugar  crop  there  is  very  large  they  get  very  little  out 
of  it.  They  work  very  close  indeed.  They  are  not  so  prosperous  as 
the  people  are  here. 

By  Colonel  Dexby: 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion  of  the  Chinese  as  a race  here  in  Manila,  as 
to  whether  they  are  desirable  citizens  or  not? — A.  I don't  think  they 
are  desirable  citizens.  It  is  a very  difficult  question,  this  Chinese  prob- 
lem. It  is  a very  difficult  problem,  and  everybody  apparently  has  got 
a different  opinion  about  it.  The  man  who  wants  Chinese  coolies  to 
assist  him  wants  you  to  let  the  Chinese  coolies  in,  Chinese  carpenters, 
and  Chinese  cooks,  and  Chinese  servants,  and  so  it  goes  on;  but  I don’t 
think  they  are  favorable  to  other  Chinese  coming  in  whom  they  do  not 
want.  Everybody  wants  his  own  Chinaman,  but  I 'don’t  think  they 
generally  make  good  citizens.  They  take  out  of  the  country  every- 
thing they  make;  they  spend  nothing  in  the  country,  because  they  liv  e 
on  nothing,  and  the}”  intermarry  with  the  people  here,  and  they  produce 
a race  which  are  not  good  citizens,  either.  The  great  trouble,  I think, 
in  the  history  of  the  Islands  has  been  caused  by  the  Chinese  and  Chi- 
nese mestizos. 

Q.  Do  they  intermarry  with  the  natives  to  any  great  extent? — A.  To 
a considerable  extent  around  about  Manila.  They  have  to  some  extent 
affected  the  native.  The  native  has  become,  to  some  extent,  Chinese. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  your  opinion  as  to  what  would  be  beneficial 
along  this  subject — that  is,  as  to  whether  to  exclude  the  laborer 
entirely,  or  whether  to  admit  the  laborer  to  come  in  under  a contract 
system,  to  return  when  the  work  is  over,  finished;  or  whether  to 
exclude  the  merchant?  Would  it  be  well  to  limit  the  coming  of  the 
laborers,  and  especially  the  agricultural  laborers,  and  what  effect 
would  these  various  things  have  on  the  interests  of  the  body  of  the 
people?— A.  It  is  a question  whether  it  would  be  advisable  to  admit 
Chinese  into  the  towns  like  Manila,  Iloilo,  and  Cebu,  but  I don't  think 


188 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


it  would  be  advisable  to  let  them  go  into  the  country.  The  natives  do 
not  like  them, and  there  is  always  trouble;  the}*  always  make  trouble. 
They  won't  settle  down  as  agriculturists  when  they  can  possibly  get 
anything  else  to  do.  They  become  small  traders,  go  over  the  country 
with  packs  on  their  backs,  but  they  won’t  do  agricultural  work.  I 
don't  think  you  will  find  anywhere  in  the  country  real  agricultural 
Chinese  except  around  Manila,  where  they  have  market  gardens. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  There  are  a few  on  the  coast  of  Negros,  so  that  they  are  noth 
producers  and  consumers? — A.  Yes;  there  may  be  a few. 

By  Colonel  Den  by: 

Q.  In  many  places  they  run  market  gardens ? — A.  Yes;  near  Manila, 
where  there  is  demand  for  the  market  produce,  but  in  no  other  part  of 
the  country,  I think.  My  idea  is  that  the  native  can  open  up  the  coun- 
try quite  fast  enough  if  you  give  him  roads  and  railways.  Relative 
to  this  railway  made  to  Dagupan,  the  only  railway  in  the  Islands,  I 
believe  that  the  production  of  rice  along  its  tributary  territory  has 
increased  nearly  100  per  cent  owing  to  the  opening  up  of  the  country 
where  the  railroad  went  through.  I think  the  native  is  quite  capable 
of  developing  his  own  country.  If  you  introduce  the  Chinaman  they 
will  always  tight;  the  native  will  kill  him  and  there  will  always  be 
trouble. 

Q.  Why  do  the  natives  hate  the  Chinese  so? — A.  They  don’t  like  the 
race;  they  don't  like  Chinese.  They  have  an  antipathy  for  them. 

Q.  Is  it  because  they  enter  into  conflict  with  them  as  laborers? — A. 
It  may  be.  When  I first  came  to  Manila  many  of  the  trades,  like  car- 
penters, stone  masons,  builders,  bricklayers,  and  all  of  these  were 
nearly  all  natives;  now  they  are  nearly  all  Chinese.  You  can  hardly 
find  a native  carpenter  or  bricklayer.  Now,  this  takes  so  much  money 
out  of  the  pocket  of  the  Indian,  for  now  the  Chinese  get  all  of  that 
and  they  take  it  over  to  China. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  who  have  married  native  women  go  back  to 
China? — A.  The  fathers  do  very  often  and  leave  families  here.  You 
know  that  here  there  are  more  people  that  go  into  commerce  than  any- 
thing else.  The}’  are  not  generally  looked  upon  as  reliable.  They 
seem  to  be  people  who  seem  to  think  themselves  better  than  their 
fathers  and  better  than  than  their  mothers.  I refer  to  the  mestizos. 
It  is  curious. 

Q.  It  is  a singular  difference,  because  there  are  among  the  Chinese 
unquestionably  some  of  the  most  reliable  people  we  have. — A.  There 
are  Chinese  merchants  here  who  are  very  reliable,  but  there  are  very 
many  of  the  lower  class,  the  coolie  class,  who  come  over  here  as  coolies 
and  gradually  become  merchants;  they  are  not  so  reliable.  They  go 
into  business  and  then  they  fail  and  pay  20  or  30  per  cent  and  disap- 
pear. They  are  not  the  better  class  of  Chinese.  Most  of  them  are 
Amoy  coolies.  They  come  over  as  Amov  coolies  and  gradually  make 
enough  money  to  start  themselves  in  business. 

Q.  I gather  from  what  you  say  that  you  rather  think  it  would  be 
wise  to  exclude  them. — A.  1 would  exclude  them  from  the  country. 
If  you  want  Chinese  in  townsffor  labor  or  for  different  kinds  of  masonry 
and  carpentry  work  and  that  sort  of  thing,  let  them  come  into  the 
towns,  but  let  them  come  under  some  kind  of  restriction  or  arrange- 
ment with  the  Government,  so  that  you  will  know  what  you  have  got 
here,  else  they  will  swamp  the  country. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


189 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  would  you  do  with  the  Chinese  already  in  the  islands? 
There  is  hardly  a place  that  has  not  got  a Chinese  shop. — A.  I don’t 
know  how  many  will  be  left  after  this  war  is  over. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  No  law  would  be  ex  post  facto. — A.  These  men  who  are  here 
now  as  merchants,  you  couldn’t  very  well  turn  out.  You  might  admit 
a certain  number  of  artisans  and  coolies  to  do  the  trade  in  the  dif- 
ferent towns,  but  even  then  you  would  be  taking  the  bread  out  of 
the  mouths  of  the  town  people;  but,  as  I say,  it  is  a very  difficult  ques- 
tion; it  is  a very  difficult  thing  to  give  an  opinion  on,  except  that  I do 
not  believe  it  is  a good  thing  to  let  them  go  into  the  country  districts. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Would  the  town  people  go  to  work  and  earn  their  bread?  You 
have  spoken  of  giving  them  railways  and  highways.  Could  you  get 
them  to  do  the  actual  labor? — A.  Yes;  they  did  before.  They  built 
the  Manila  and  Dagupan  railway. 

Q.  In  the  matter  of  retail  business  in  these  small  towns,  will  the 
natives  do  that  business,  or  are  there  enough  other  outsiders  who 
would  come  in  here  and  take  hold  of  it? — -A.  Yes;  almost  all  the  trade 
in  Manila  was  within  the  hands  of  the  natives  in  my  own  time,  but 
within  a short  time,  the  time  of  which  I have  talked,  it  has  changed. 
When  I first  came  here  there  were  only  one  or  two  Chinese  firms  on 
the  Escolta  and  Rosario. 

Q.  Do  you  know  the  state  of  affairs  outside  at  that  time? — A.  1 
can  not  say,  except  that  the  country  was  possibly 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  the  Chinese  were  in  the  provincial 
towns? — A.  No;  I do  not  know  as  to  that. 

Q.  Do  you  know  at  all  how  that  state  of  affairs  was  brought  about, 
because  the  Chinese  were  here  before  the  Spaniards  were? — A.  Yes, 
they  were;  but  two  or  three  times  there  has  been  trouble  with  the 
Chinese,  and  I believe  once  or  twice  the  natives  slaughtered  them. 

Q.  Yes,  three  times. — A.  That  is  another  trouble  you  have  with  the 
Chinese.  It  is  just  the  same  in  Singapore.  You  remember  that  they 
have  had  a lot  of  trouble  with  the  Chinese  there.  They  rose  and  the 
Government  proceeded  against  them,  and  proceeded  against  them  so 
much  that  there  was  a great  outcry  in  England  about  the  barbarity  of 
the  proceedings. 

Q.  They  seem  to  get  along  pretty  well  with  the  Moros  down  there 
in  Mindanao  and  Sulu. — A.  They  very  likely  do;  I don’t  know  about 
that;  but  in  the  more  settled,  civilized  parts  of  the  islands,  where  the 
natives  are  of  the  Christian  religion,  I don’t  think  they  will  ever  get 
on.  It  is  a question  of  religion,  too,  you  know.  You  may  wantthem 
in  the  towns;  the  people  say  we  must  have  cooks  and  laborers,  and  I 
suppose  you  will  have  to  have  some  of  them. 

Q.  Of  course  there  is  a great  scarcity  of  labor.  In  the  island  of 
Palawan,  for  instance,  there  is  no  one  to  work  for  you  at  the  present 
time. — A.  No,  not  in  Palawan;  but  I think  it  is  a very  unhealthy 
island. 

Q.  No;  I don’t  think  it  is  very  unhealthy;  not  more  so  than  the  other 
islands. — A.  I should  put  a poll  tax  on  them  when  the}T  did  come  in. 
I don’t  think  you  want  to  till  up  the  Islands  with  any  kind  of  a race 


190 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


that  just  comes  to  hand,  but  rather  leave  the  opening  up  of  the  Islands 
to  roads  and  railways,  and  then  as  the  wealth  of  the  country  increases 
the  population  of  the  country  will  increase  with  it  naturally,  as  always 
when  a country  is  prosperous  the  population  seems  to  increase.  You 
don’t  want  to  take  any  measures  to  increase  it  beyond  the  buildi  ng  of 
roads  and  railways. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  You  think,  then,  that  there  are  laborers  enough  already  in  the 
country  to  meet  immediate  demands  in  the  development  of  the  coun- 
try and  the  building  of  roads  and  railways? — A.  I think  so,  unless 
there  are  more  people  killed  than  I know  of.  I think  so.  You  know 
the  native  in  the  interior,  where  he  is  not  contaminated  by  bad  influ- 
ences, is  not  a bad  sort  of  man;  he  is  pretty  honest;  you  don't  gener- 
ally lose  much  money  with  the  natives,  which  is  not  unusual  with  the 
Spanish  and  mestizos.  I think  he  ought  to  have  a chance  to  populate 
these  islands  and  we  should  not  “improve.”  him  off  the  face  of  the 
earth  with  some  combination  of  Chinese  and  natives  which  we  know 
does  not  produce  a very  satisfactory  result. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  The  opinion  is  pretty  general  that  the  Chinese  mestizo  does  not 
make  a good  citizen? — A.  No;  he  does  not  make  a good  citizen.  He 
always  wants  too  much.  You  will  find  out  that  these  gentlemen  up  in 
the  north  who  are  at  the  front  or  pulling  the  strings  are  nearly  all 
Chinese  mestizos. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  about  the  ability  of  these  natives  to  take  part  in  the  gov 
eminent ? — A.  There  are  some  very  fine  natives — very  good  men;  you 
couldn’t  have  better  men;  men  like  Cavetano  Arellano,  now  the  pres- 
ident of  the  supreme  court.  You  couldn’t  have  a better  man,  and 
you  couldn’t  take  a better  opinion  than  his  as  to  some  of  the  various 
people  around,  as  to  whether  they  are  suitable  to  be  intrusted  with 
authority  or  not.  I would  say  his  opinion  was  the  best  yTou  could  take 
on  that  point.  Of  course,  the  natives  have  been  brought  up  in  rather 
a bad  school.  They  have  had  bad  masters  for  a good  many  years, 
and  naturally  they  have  learned  a good  deal  which  they  had  better  not 
have  learned;  and  there  is  no  doubt  that  the  late  government  officials 
used  to  do  a great  deal  of  squeezing,  and  that  they  taught  the  native 
to  do  the  same.  But  still,  you  may  say  there  are  honest  men.  I 
know  there  are  honest  men.  I know  there  are  a good  man}r  honest 
men  among  them  who  are  quite  capable  of  taking  part  in  public 
affairs.  In  fact,  1 don't  see  any  way  out  of  it.  You  can't  put  an 
administrator  into  all  the  towns  all  over  the  provinces.  You  have  got 
to  appoint  a captain  of  the  different  villages  and  make  him  responsible 
to  the  government,  because  the  less  government  there  is  in  the  country 
the  better.  You  all  agree  with  me  there,  I assume. 

Q.  That  is  an  axiom. 

With  thanks,  the  meeting  adjourned. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


11)1 


TESTIMONY  OF  EDWIN  H.  WARNER. 

Manila,  June  °23,  1300. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr. 
M ac  Arthur. 

Edwin  H.  Warner,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commis- 
sioners, stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Mr.  Warner,  will  }’ou  kindly  state  your  name,  age,  residence, 
and  occupation? — A.  Edwin  H.  Warner,  merchant,  member  of  the 
firm  of  Warner,  Barnes  & Co.;  residence,  Manila,  where  1 have  resided 
since  1874 — December,  1874:. 

Q.  You  are  the  head  of  the  firm  of  Warner,  Barnes  & Co.  ? — A.  Yes. " 

Q.  That  firm  has  been  established  here  for  a good  many  years? — 
A.  Since  1887. 

Q.  You  are  engaged  chiefly  in  exporting? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  We  want  to  get  from  you.  in  your  own  way,  without  putting 
unnecessary  questions,  briefly,  your  views  of  the  currency  here — how 
it  is  adapted  to  the  mercantile  conditions  and  the  general  good  of  the 
people  of  the  islands,  and  what  effect  a change  to  a gold  basis  would 
have. — A.  The  first  effect  of  a change  to  a gold  basis  would  be  that 
naturally  you  would  have  to  reduce  prices  of  wages  here,  because  the 
price  of  exports  would  naturally  fall  50  per  cent.  For  example,  if 
you  take  the  price  of  sugar  to-day,  while  sugar  is  not  a specialty  of 
these  islands,  sugar  is  a production  of  all  over  the  world — there  is  a 
universal  market  for  it.  While  here  the  present  price  in — say  Iloilo, 
which  is  the  chief  export  town  of  sugar— is  §5.4:0  a picul,  that  is,  $84: 
to  the  ton,  silver,  the  price  would  have  to  be  reduced  on  a gold  basis 
to  §4:2  a ton.  The  cost  of  producing  the  sugar  is  anywhere  between 
§32,  silver,  and  §36,  and  would  be  the  same  in  gold,  as  the  people  here 
have  no  expensive  plants  like  they  have  in  Cuba.  Of  course  it  is 
all  done  in  a very  rudimentary  way-,  and  assuming  that  the  wages 
average,  I think,  down  there  about  25  cents  a day,  silver,  the  same 
wages  as  they  used  to  get  in  gold.  Their  wages  might  have  increased 
10  or  15  per  cent,  but  have  not  increased  50  per  cent,  consequently  the 
people  who  would  be  the  losers,  would  be  the  producers  of  the  coun- 
try; they  would  not  be  able  to  use  the  difference  between  the  gold 
and  silver  they  bring  into  the  country  here,  and  the\T  have  no  idea  of 
leaving  the  place. 

Q.  Well,  if  they  got  the  gold  couldn’t  they  convert  it  into  silver? — 
A.  Well,  how?  If  you  are  going  to  have  a gold  currency  the  silver 
dollar  would  be  of  the  same  value  as  the  gold  dollar. 

Q.  They  would  get  fewer  dollars,  but  wouldn’t  they  buy  more? — A. 
They  would  in  some  things;  they  would  be  able  to  buy  more  clothes 
and  jewelry,  and  things  like  that  would  be  cheaper,  certainly. 

Q.  You  think  the  prices  of  the  products  of  the  country  would  not 
change  ? — A.  They  would  not  change. 

Q.  And  the  wages  would  not  change?— A.  You  know  it  is  very 
difficult  to  put  wages  down.  They  rise  with  great  facility,  as  they 
have  done  around  here  recently,  but  you  can’t  get  them  back  to  their 
old  standard  again. 

Q.  Were  you  here  when  the  currency  was  gold? — A-  Yes, 


192 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  And  how  did  you  get  from  gold  to  silver? — A.  Well,  it  came 
about  gradually.  First  they  had  gold  here,  and  there  has  been  what 
they  call  an  intendente,  a treasurer.  They  wanted  to  make  a big  deal, 
so  they  said  there  was  a scarcity  of  gold.  They  could  not  get  gold 
coin  in  the  mints,  consequently  they  got  an  order  from  Spain  at  the 
time  to  allow  Mexican  dollars  in.  Well,  the  Mexican  dollar,  1 think, 
then  was  about  4 shillings  and  2 pence,  and  that  of  Hongkong  was  at 
about  3 shillings  and  7 pence.  Well,  they  sent  over  drafts  and  bought 
up  silver  in  Hongkong. 

Q.  Four  shillings  and  2 pence  would  be  above  par? — A.  It  was 
above  par  then. 

Q.  And  3 shillings  7 pence  was  about  what? — A.  Three  shillings  0 
pence  and  7 pence. 

Q.  That  would  be  about  8(1  cents? — A.  Yes;  and  they  got  cargoes 
of  silver,  and  a great  deal  of  the  gold  that  was  coming  in  here  they 
exported  and  got  in  exchange  silver,  by  means  of  some  Spanish  houses, 
as  I think  it  was,  at  that  time,  and  they  made  a little  commission  on 
the  transaction.  Well,  little  by  little  the  gold  went  out — disappeared 
from  here;  and  of  course,  when  the  gold  disappeared  and  bad  times 
came  for  the  islands  there  was  a plethora  of  money,  and  we  were 
obliged  to  export  the  Mexican  dollar,  and  then  down  went  exchange  to 
a par  with  China. 

Q.  They  did  not  coin  dollars  here? — A.  No. 

Q.  They  coined  subsidiary  money? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  how  did  they  get  their  copper? — A.  Most  of  the  copper  was 
old  copper  sent  out  from  Spain. 

Q.  They  have  never  had  any  cents  here? — A.  No;  they  sent  out 
some  gold  money  from  Spain,  but  that  has  been  returned,  as  it  was 
never  changed.  They  sent  out  some  copper,  but  that  was  changed 
from  cents  to  cuartos. 

Q.  Is  there  much  copper  in  circulation  here  now? — A.  A fair 
amount,  but  not  enough  for  the  wants  of  the  place. 

Q.  Then  you  think  a copper  cent  ought  to  be  coined  representing 
the  hundredth  part  of  a dollar? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  think  that  would  be  a good  idea? — A.  Yes;  people  would 
soon  get  in  the  habit  of  using  them.  Now,  of  course,  they  are  in  the 
habit  of  calculating  a purchase  in  Spanish  reals.  A real  is  12£  cents, 
or  1(10  cuartos  of  the  Mexican  dollar. 

Q.  They  are  smaller  than  a cent,  then? — A.  Yes. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  There  were  no  cuarto  pieces  ? — A.  There  were  no  2-cuarto  pieces. 

By  Colonel  Henry: 

Q.  Would  you  approve  of  the  idea  of  making  a copper  currency 
here  of  one  hundred  cents  to  the  dollar? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Well,  in  regard  to  the  balance  of  the  currency,  how  would  you  ar- 
range it — would  you  continue  the  real? — A.  I would  do  away  with 
the  real,  and  make  it  decimal — 10,  20,  and  50  cent  pieces. 

Q.  Would  a 20-cent  piece  be  better  than  a 25-eent  piece? — A.  Yes; 
I think  so.  Virtually,  there  have  been  no  25-ccnt  pieces  in  the  cur- 
rency here  for  the  last  eight  years;  they  were  all  retired  by  the  mint 
here  and  recoined. 

Q.  It  would  make  some  embarrassment,  I should  think,  to  have  a 
20-cent  piece  and  25-cent  piece,  too. — A.  Well,  virtually,  there  haven’t 
been  any  here  for  a long  time. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


193 


Q.  Well,  as  far  as  the  basis  is  concerned,  you  have  spoken  of  the 
effect  on  products,  and,  individually,  on  the  people.  Now,  as  far  as 
general  business  is  concerned,  how  would  that  be  affected  by  the 
change? — A.  I don’t  think  it  would  be  affected  at  all. 

Q.  What  difference  would  it  make  to  the  exporter  to  go  on  a gold 
basis? — A.  It  wouldn't  make  any  difference  to  him  at  all.  It  does  not 
affect  him  one  way  or  the  other — not  the  exporter.  The  people  it 
really  affects  are  the  people  in  the  country — i.  e.,  those  who  produce 
in  the  country. 

Q.  How  have  exports  been  affected  by  the  use  of  silver? — A.  To 
give  you  a practical  illustration:  In  the  year  1879,  I think  it  was, 
hemp  was  down  to  <£20  a ton,  and  the  price  here,  ivith  about  the 
same  conditions  as  are  ruling  now,  was  between  &1.50  and  $5  a picul 
gold.  I was  down  in  the  provinces,  then,  in  Albay,  and  the  natives 
were  paid  down  there  about  $1  gold,  and  they  were  absolutely  starving. 
It  didn’t  pay  them  to  produce  hemp,  but  of  course  they  had  to  work, 
but  at  the  same  time  they  were  living  on  roots  and  could  not  afford  to 
buy  any  rice.  Two  years  ago,  in  1897,  the  same  quality  of  hemp  was 
selling  in  London  at  £11  a ton.  The  price  in  Manila  went  down  to  $ti, 
and  at  §6  the  natives  could  afford  to  produce  the  hemp  and  were  con- 
tented, and  could  buy  rice  and  were  not  obliged  to  live  on  roots;  they 
would  get  $6  instead  of  $1  worth. 

Q.  But  the  $1  they  got  was  gold  and  the  $0  was  silver? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  still  they  were  better  off  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  the  effect  was  to  increase  exportations?— A.  Yes;  this  facili- 
tated exports. 

Q.  How  have  the  exports  been  for  the  last  few  years  since  silver  has 
been  down  so  low  ? — A.  I think  the  export  of  hemp  has  increased  about 
10  or  50  per  cent. 

Q.  How  has  it  been  with  sugar  ? — A.  Sugar  has  kept  about  the  same. 
We  have  also  had  in  the  last  three  years — for  two  years  running  there 
was  a crisis  in  the  sugar  trades  and  the  prices  were  the  lowest  ever- 
known. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  that  was  caused  by? — A.  By  the  overpro- 
duction of  beets. 

Q.  The  condition  to-dav  is  then  that  exports  are  flourishing? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  How  about  imports? — A.  Imports  as  a rule  follow  the  exports; 
if  exports  are  flourshing  imports  are  flourishing. 

Q.  Your  exports  you  buy  for  silver  and  you  sell  for  gold? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Thereby  you  make  money.  Now,  in  the  imports  you  buy  for 
gold  and  sell  for  silver? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  do  you  manage  to  keep  the  price  down  here.  You  buy  in 
London,  for  instance? — A.  You  buy  piece  goods  in  London  and  sup- 
ply the  natives.  You  buy  for  gold  and  sell  it  at  whatever  it  works  out 
plus  the  commission. 

Q.  You  buy  for  gold  and  sell  for  silver? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  can’t  sell  it  at  the  same  price  in  silver  }'ou  buy  for  gold? — 
No.  Suppose  a piece  of  stuff  costs  }Tou  25  cents  a yard,  then  you  sell 
it  for  50  cents  a yard  silver  plus  the  duties. 

Q.  Imports  are  diminished? — A.  Imports  are  diminished,  but  you 
must  take  into  account  that  this  is  a country  where  there  is  a large 
balance  in  ti’ade  in  favor  of  the  country  itself. 

Q.  It  exports  more  than  it  imports? — A.  Yes, 

P c —-43 


194 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  How  are  imports  in  quantity,  and  what  are  they? — A.  The  im- 
ports the  last  few  years  have  been  mostly  piece  goods. 

Q.  The  natives  do  not  wear  many  of  them? — A.  Not  very  much. 

Q.  Do  you  import  any  machinery? — A.  Very  little. 

Q.  (Professor  Worcester.)  How  about  flour? — A.  There  has  been 
a growing  business  here  in  flour;  there  has  always  been  some,  but  the 
last  few  years  I suppose  it  is  getting  less. 

Q.  That  comes  from  California? — A.  Always. 

Q:  You  don't  import  any  wood,  I suppose,  from  Oregon?— A.  No 
wood  has  been  imported  here,  as  the  soft  wood  does  not  stand  the 
climate;  the  white  ants  get  into  it,  and,  as  a rule,  the  price  of  the  wood 
is  cheaper  here  than  you  can  import  it. 

By  Mr.  W orcester: 

Q.  Isn't  petroleum  a more  or  less  important  item? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  does  it  come  from? — A.  The  greater  part  of  it  latterly 
has  come  from  Russia. 

Q.  Brought  in  tank  ships? — A.  In  packed  tins. 

Q.  Is  there  any  native  petroleum  in  Cebu? — A.  They  have  found 
petroleum,  but  they  have  not  been  working  their  discoveries  for  the 
last  two  years,  and  I do  not  think  it  has  been  a success.  They  have 
never  got  as  far  as  putting  up  machinery. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  effect  on  this  question  would  the  contiguousness  of  silver- 
using nations  like  China,  Siam,  Korea,  and  the  Straits  have  on  a gold 
or  silver  basis? — A.  They  are  on  a silver  basis — the  Straits. 

Q.  How  is  Australia? — A.  Australia  is  on  a gold  basis. 

Q.  And  Borneo? — A.  Silver. 

Q.  And  JaAra? — A.  Gold  basis. 

Q.  Well,  you  have  a good  deal  of  dealings  with  Java,  haven't  you? — 
A.  No;  none  at  all. 

Q.  You  have  dealings  with  China? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Largely? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  do  you  get  from  China? — A.  All  these  Chinese  goods.  A 
lot  of  California  flour  is  bought  in  China  by  the  Chinese  and  shipped 
here. 

Q.  You  bring  over  goods  for  the  Chinese  that  arc  peculiar  to  the 
Chinese,  such  as  dried  meats  and  things  of  that  kind? — A.  And  salt 
vegetables  and  Chinese  piece  goods. 

Q.  So  that  element  of  the  contiguity  of  the  nations  with  which  you 
deal,  who  are  silver-using  nations,  has  no  effect  on  the  question  of  the 
silver  or  gold  basis? — A.  As  a rule,  gold  in  China  commands  a fairly 
good  premium.  The  Chinese  absorbed  a good  deal  of  the  gold  that 
was  current  here,  and  the  Chinese  very  often,  instead  of  taking  away 
drafts,  would  take  away  gold  and  sell  it  on  the  other  side. 

Q.  To  what  extent  was  there  such  a use  of  gold  by  the  Chinese? — 
A.  I suppose  the  Chinese  would  take  away  in  a year  from  here,  in 
the  old  days — wo  calculated  that  they  would  take  about  $800,000  in 
gold,  outside  of  what  they  took  in  jars. 

Q.  Well,  you  haven’t  quite  answered  the  question  as  to  what  effect 
the  fact  that  you  deal  chiefly  with  silver-using  nations  would  have  if 
you  went  on  a gold  basis;  whether  it  is  more  advantageous  for  you  to 
continue  on  a silver  basis,  because  you  are  dealing  with  these  people 
who  are  on  a silver  basis? — A.  I should  think  it  would  be. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


105 


Q.  For  their  business  is  all  done  in  silver  here,  and  when  you  do 
business  in  China  in  silver  it  would  be  more  profitable  and  better  than 
to  go  on  a gold  basis. — A.  Well,  there  is  no  question  about  the  profit. 
If  it  came  to  be  a question  of  profit  there  would  be  more  profit  come, 
I think,  in  dealing  on  a gold  basis.  A gold  basis  would  be  more  profit- 
able for  the  banks  in  exchange  than  it  would  be  at  the  present  time, 
i.  e.,  in  dealing  with  silver  countries. 

Q.  Would  you  be  influenced  at  all  by  the  fact  that  you  are  sur- 
rounded by  silver  using  nations? — A.  No;  not  at  all. 

Q.  The  answers  you  have  given  have  been  dictated  not  by  your 
own  special  interests,  but  by  the  general  interests  of  the  Philippine 
Islands? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Because  of  the  fact  that  they  have  to  deal  with  silver  countries  ? — 
A.  That  element  wouldn’t  have  anything  to  do  with  it. 

Q.  You  deal  with  Japan? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  can  you  explain  to  us  the  difference  in  the  case  of  Japan? — - 
A.  Japan,  as  far  as  I can  understand,  has  a gold  currency  that  is  fixed 
on  a standard  of  2 shillings. 

Q.  That  is,  a silver  dollar  that  is  equal  to  2 shillings? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  That  is  made  so  by  law? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  So  that  there  are  no  fluctuations? — A.  There  are  some  fluctua- 
tions; of  course  if  the  price  of  silver  goes  up  every  dollar  goes  up  in 
price. 

Q.  Wouldn't  you  consider  it  advantageous  to  have  a currency  that 
didn’t  fluctuate? — A.  It  would  be  a great  advantage. 

Q.  When  you  make  a contract,  for  instance,  to  buy  goods  six  months 
ahead  in  silver,  you  don’t  know  what  you  have  to  pay  for  it? — A.  If 
oil  wish  you  can  fix  the  exchange  forward  in  the  banks  when  you  sell 
the  products  here. 

Q.  When  you  buy  goods  in  London  you  sell  them  here.  You  pay 
certain  prices  in  London,  but  you  don’t  know  what  price  you  will  get 
here? — A.  In  the  import  business  they  contract  with  the  Chinese  or 
the  dealers  in  exchange  on  the  day  the  contract  is  made. 

Q.  That  is  when  the  contract  is  made  in  advance? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Isn’t  it  a very  great  disadvantage  for  a merchant  not  to  know — 
suppose,  for  instance,  that  silver  is  above  47.  Now,  if  he  makes  his 
contract  on  that  basis  he  loses? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  The  Mexican  dollar  is  worth  47  cents? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Suppose  you  make  3rour  price  to  buy  goods  on  that  basis,  and 
3’ou  bring  them  here,  and  3^011  find  that  the  Mexican  dollar  has  gone 
up  to  99  cents,  and  then  3tou  have  to  sell  those  goods  for  silver,  3rou 
would  lose  enormously,  naturally.  How  can  3’ou  guard  against  that? — 
A.  That  is  impossible;  3Tou  can’t  guard  against  that. 

Q.  You  know  I was  in  China  at  the  time  when  the  Sherman  bill 
passed,  which  provided  that  the  Government  should  buy  $4,000,000 
every  month  of  silver  and  coin,  at  least  with  the  right  to  coin 
$4,000,000.  Then  it  was  that  silver  appreciated,  and  I remember  in 
China  the  Mexican  dollar  went  up  to  more  than  95,  and  it  absolute^ 
stopped  business,  because  the  man  who  had  bought  goods  in  the  inte- 
rior would  take  his  bill  of  lading  to  the  bank  and  would  want  silver 
dollars  to  pay  for  it,  and  instead  of  getting  the  rate  he  would  have 
gotten  before,  sa3T  two  for  one,  he  would  get  a little  less  than  one  for 
one,  so  he  would  say,  “Then  I can’t  send  any  more  goods  forward;” 
and  business  stopped  for  two  or  three  weeks. — A.  That  was  in  export. 


196 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Then  it  took  a turn  and  went  down  until  it  got  something  like 
42  in  Shanghai. — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Don’t  you  consider  these  fluctuations  very  disastrous? — A.  Cer- 
tainly; they  are  detrimental  to  a country  until  the  price  of  silver 
steadies  itself. 

Q.  You  can’t  really  tell.  I suppose — suppose  the  United  States  were 
to  adopt  10  to  1,  silver  would  go  up? — A.  It  would  for  the  time  being. 

Q.  In  London? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  after  a while  would  it  get  back  to  normal  conditions? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  In  the  meantime  wouldn't  it  prove  very  injurious  to  business 
people? — A.  Certainly  it  would.  Silver  is  nothing  more  than  an  arti- 
cle of  merchandise,  like  sugar  or  cotton  or  wheat,  that  you  can  not 
prevent  fluctuations  in. 

Q.  Would  you  avoid  fluctuations  if  you  went  on  a gold  basis? — A. 
Yes;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  you  would  have  the  same  condition  as  in 
China,  when  the  man  came  down  with  his  bill  of  lading  and  expected 
to  get  two  for  one,  but  only  got  one  for  one. 

Q.  This  man,  then,  in  case  he  expected  to  get  $1,000  and  only  gets 
$500  silver,  is  ruined? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  If  you  can  avoid  these  fluctuations  by  a fixed  currency — a fixed 
basis — wouldn’t  it  be  desirable? — A.  It  would  be  very  desirable,  if  you 
had  a fixed  currency  like  they  have  in  Japan.  They  get  away  from 
all  these  enormous  fluctuations  and  get  on  the  gold  basis. 

Q.  Japan  has  estimated  the  ratio  at  32  to  1? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Our  people  at  home  proposed  16  to  1,  which  is  just  one-half.— 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  you  conclude,  Mr.  Warner,  that  it  would  not  do  for  these 
islands  to  be  put  on  a gold  basis? — A.  I don’t  think  so. 

Q.  You  think  that  the  natives  would  be  benefited  by  remaining  as  it 
is? — A.  Yes.  A man  naturally,  if  he  has  a piece  of  property  that  he 
can  get  $20,000  silver  for,  does  not  want  to  sell  it  for  $10,000  gold. 
It  would  mean  that  the  property  would  depreciate  half. 

Q.  Well,  without  any  reference  to  the  general  question  of  worth, 
either  as  applicable  to  these  particular  islands  and  these  present  con- 
ditions. your  judgment  is  that  they  should  remain  as  they  are  with  the 
introduction  of  a decimal  currency;  and  how  would  it  be  about  bank 
bills? — A.  AVe  should  certainly  have,  as  we  have  always  had,  bank 
bills. 

Q.  But  there  is  only  one  bank  of  issue  here?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Suppose  we  had  an  American  bank,  with  the  right  to  issue,  how 
would  that  do? — A.  It  would  do  very  well,  of  course. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  circulate  small  bills  here? — A.  The  smallest 
bills  ever  circulated  here  were  $5  bills. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  introduce  small  bills — ones,  twos,  and 
threes? — A.  AV ell,  to  tell  you  the  truth.  I think,  as  a rule,  the  natives 
prefer  to  have  silver,  because  outside  of  the  line  of  railway  here  bank 
notes  are  very  little  known  and  very  little  used  by  the  natives. 

Q.  But  in  Manila  there  would  be  no  trouble? — A.  In  Manila  there 
would  be  no  trouble;  no. 

Q.  But  outside  they  want  the  silver  dollar? — A.  Yes;  if  you  got  a 
system  of  railways  all  over  the  place,  thejT  would  soon  get  in  the  habit 
of  taking  notes. 

Q.  You  think  the  introduction  of  these  notes  would  be  very  desir- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


197 


able?— A.  T think  the}’  would  be  very  desirable  here.  Of  course,  we 
have  always  found  here  in  buying  produce  up  the  country  we  have 
had  to  buy  notes,  and  had  to  go  into  regular  contracts  and  we  always 
carry  bank  notes,  in  order  not  to  load  up  these  small  carts  with  silver, 
for  safety. 

Q.  If  you  have  $50  in  silver  in  your  pocket,  it  is  pretty  heavy? — 
A.  Yes. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  I judge,  then,  your  opinion  is,  although  I don’t  remember  that  you 
have  clearly  so  stated,  that  you  think  that  for  the  benefit  of  the  islands 
the  silver  basis  ought  to  be  retained.  I don’t  know  that  you  answered, 
categorically,  Colonel  Denby’s  question  in  regard  to  the  feasibility  of 
endeavoring  to  fix  that  silver  basis  on  a certain  ratio  to  the  gold  basis 
in  order  to  avoid,  if  possible,  fluctuations.  Suppose,  for  example,  it 
should  be  endeavored  to  fix  the  relation  of  silver  to  gold  at  32  to  1, 
do  you  think  it  desirable  or  not? — A.  1 should  think,  so  far  as  trade 
goes,  that  it  would  be  very  desirable,  because  it  does  affect  the  fluctu- 
ations in  the  silver  market;  that  is,  exchange  does  not  follow  with 
every  fluctuation  in  the  silver  market. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  effect  upon  the  consumer  and  the  producer, 
the  poorer  classes,  of  fixing  a ratio? — A.  I don’t  think  it  would  affect 
them  either  one  way  or  the  other. 

Q.  If  it  could  be  fixed  and  maintained,  it  would  be  well,  you  think  ? — 
A.  It  would  be  very  just  toward  them  on  the  same  ratio  they  have  in 
Japan.  I think  the  Japanese  are  a very  practical  nation,  and  they 
would  not  have  taken  up  with  this  idea  unless  it  were  of  some  benefit 
to  them. 

Q.  When  the  basis  changed  from  the  gold  basis,  as  it  existed  for- 
merly. to  the  silver  basis,  you  say  it  was  very  gradual? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Was  there  any  marked  change  in  wages  from  time  to  time? — A. 
Not  until  after  the  crisis — the  Baring  crisis  in  1891  and  1892.  That 
was  when  they  stopped  the  coinage  of  silver  in  the  States — about  that 
time. 

Q.  Take  a given  period  of  years,  say,  ten  years,  in  which  this  change 
was  made,  was  there  any  considerable  rise  in  the  wages  of  labor  when 
it  reached  a silver  basis  ? — A.  In  the  last  four  years  there  has  been  a 
slight  rise  in  wages,  a considerable  rise.  They  got 

Q.  Then,  practically,  wages  have  remained  the  same  on  a silver  basis 
as  on  a gold  basis  ? — A.  Practically  wages  have  remained  the  same  on 
a silver  basis  as  on  a gold  basis.  Where  the  native  has  benefited  by 
the  fall  in  silver  it  has  not  been  here;  it  has  been  really  in  the  hemp- 
producing  district  and  in  the  rice-producing  district,  where  the  native 
receives  his  wages.  For  example,  if  he  does  a day’s  work  and  receives 
half  the  profit  of  the  day’s  work 

Q.  The  former  wages  he  received  in  gold  would  purchase  more  for 
him  in  the  way  of  food  and  clothing  than  the  same  wages  would  pur- 
chase for  him  on  a silver  basis  at  present? — A.  Just  about  the  same, 
because  the  native  has  taken  to  wearing  a cheaper  quality  of  clothing 
than  he  did  before. 

Q.  Then,  as  a matter  of  fact,  in  quality  of  the  clothing  or  in  some 
respects,  he  is  getting  less  in  the  way  of  wages  on  a silver  basis  than  he 
did  get  on  a gold  basis? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  So  that  as  a matter  of  fact  his  condition  to-day  on  the  silver  basis 


198 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


is  not  as  satisfactory  as  it  was  on  a gold  basis? — A.  Just  about  the 
same,  if  you  take  the  greater  part  of  the  island.  All  down  south,  in 
the  hemp-producing  districts,  he  is  getting  more,  really. 

Q.  He  is  getting  more  in  bulk? — A.  That  is,  he  gets  more  wages, 
because  his  produce  gets  a better  price. 

Q.  Does  he  himself,  in  return  for  his  labor,  get  more  purchasing 
power? — A.  He  has  just  about  the  same  purchasing  power  that  he 
had  before;  but  as  he  receives  more  money  he  thinks  he  is  getting 
more;  he  always  has  that  idea.  The  native  does  not  look  at  it  from  our 
point  of  view. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  He  can  pay  his  debts  in  the  money,  no  matter  what  kind  of 
money  it  is? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Y ou  know  the  Chinese  as  citizens  and  foreigners.  What  character 
do  3'ou  give  them  in  general  for  qualities  of  good  citizenship? — A. 
Good  citizenship  is  the  general  character  of  the  Chinaman.  In  the 
provinces,  I should  say,  take  him  as  a rule,  he  is  a curse  to  any  province 
he  goes  to,  as  he  systematically  adulterates  everything,  everything  he 
bui’s,  and  cheats  the  native  in  bargaining.  He  has  got  no  system  of 
morality  at  all. 

Q.  How  is  he  as  to  honesti’? — A.  No  idea  as  to  honesty,  either. 

Q.  He  pays  his  debts,  doesn't  he? — A.  Well,  if  you  ask  some  of  the 
traders  they  will  tell  you  more  than  I know  about  them.  I don’t  think 
they  have  been  very  good  at  that  lately.  Of  course  you  have  one  thing 
to  remember.  The  Spanish  law  would  make  them  pay  their  debts, 
but  the  people  would  bear  a good  deal  before  they  went  to  law. 

Q.  How  is  the  laborer  ? — A.  He  is  a first-rate  coolie;  in  fact  he  is 
used  all  around  hei’e  as  a coolie. 

Q.  Does  lie  work  in  agriculture? — A.  No;  not  in  this  country. 

Q.  AVhat  kind  of  work  does  he  ? — A.  As  a rule  the  Chinaman  comes 
here  as  a coolie;  he  saves  a little  mone}’  and  at  once  goes  into  the 
country  and  starts  a small  store. 

Q.  I understand  the  Filipinos  dislike  him  very  much? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  If  the  Chinese  coolie  were  not  here  would  the  natives  do  the 
work  ? — A.  In  the  hemp-producing  districts  the  natives  do  the  work. 
In  one  place  they  do — in  Albay ; Filipino  laborers  are  the  only  ones 
they  have  in  Albay.  Down  in  Legaspi  and  Tabaca  they  found  out  that 
the}’  could  not  work;  they  could  not  do  heavy  work  without  taking 
meat.  They  began  eating  meat  and  they  are  getting  a very  line  race 
down  there  now. 

Q.  Physically  are  they  as  strong  as  the  Chinaman? — A.  I think  so. 

Q.  Well,  as  far  as  government  matters  are  concerned,  I understand 
the  Chinese  do  not  take  any  part  in  it? — A.  No. 

Q.  It  never  makes  a particle  of  difference  to  them  who  rules  the 
country? — A.  No. 

Q.  They  are  quiet  and  never  get  up  insurrections?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  They  get  along  well  with  the  officials  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  That  is,  they  are  a quiet  people?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  Suppose  we  were  to  adopt  the  same  system  as  in  the  United 
States,  excluding  the  coolie  from  coming  here,  but  allowing  merchants, 
scholars,  and  students  and  professional  people  to  come,  only  excluding 
the  laboring  men,  what  do  you  say  as  to  that?- — A.  1 think  you  would 
have  the  same  objection  on  the  part  of  the  Filipinos  that  you  have  got 
to-day. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


199 


Q.  Then  you  think  the  merchants  an  objectionable  class? — A. 
Naturally,  they  are  the  objectionable  people,  because  they  absorb  trade. 
In  the  last  few  years  all  the  small  businesses  that  the  Filipinos  had 
before  have  been  absorbed  by  them. 

Q.  Do  they  live  altogether  in  one  locality  here,  or  do  they  scatter 
about? — A.  Here  in  Manila,  mostly  in  one  locality;  also  in  the  pro- 
vinces and  in  the  provincial  towns  they  mostly  live  in  one  locality. 

Q.  Would  you  advise  that  a law  be  passed  excluding  the  mer- 
chants?— A.  it  is  impossible  to  exclude  them  altogether. 

Q.  Why  ? — A.  They  have  got  every  business  here. 

Q.  1 don’t  mean  as  to  those  that  are  here,  but  as  to  others  coming 
in. — A.  I think  it  would  be  a very  good  idea.  The  Spaniards  adopted 
that  idea. 

Q.  It  would  be  competent  to  pass  a law  that  no  Chinese  should  be 
free  to  come  on  this  soil,  for  every  nation  controls  its  own  citizen- 
ship and  its  own  domiciles. — A.  The  curse  in  this  country  has' been 
that  around  near  Manila  all  the  sugar  plantations  are  mostly  owned  by 
Chinese  mestizos. 

Q.  That  is,  the  sons  of  Chinese? — A.  The  descendants  of  Chinese. 
Their  idea  has  always  been  to  pay  the  laborer  as  little  as  they  can. 

Q.  Are  they  popular  with  the  general  public? — A.  The  mestizo? 
Not  as  a rule. 

Q.  More  so  than  the  original  Chinese? — A.  Not  as  popular. 

Q.  What  is  the  character  of  the  mestizo  ? — A.  Usually  he  is  a very 
mean  sort  of  a man,  and  he  is  a money  lender  as  a rule. 

Q.  And  they  are  always  unpopular  ? — A.  They  are  always  unpopular. 

Q.  Then,  Mr.  Warner,  what  would  be  your  idea  about  suitable  pro- 
visions to  be  made  with  relation  to  Chinese  immigration  ? — A.  I should 
think  it  is  on  a very  good  basis  now,  only  allowing  the  Chinese  who 
have  heretofore  been  in  the  country  to  return. 

Q.  What  would  be  your  idea  as  to  admitting  Chinese  laborers  by 
contract,  to  go  back  after  the  contract  is  over? — A.  That  would  be  an 
excellent  idea. 

Q.  Could  they  be  introduced  on  sugar  plantations  in  that  way? — A. 
In  former  days,  when  the}’  tried  to  introduce  Chinese  as  laborers,  they 
found  that  the  Chinaman  was  always  escaping,  and  the  natives  around 
would  combine  against  the  Chinaman  on  these  Spanish  estates,  and 
there  were  a lot  of  them  murdered  at  the  time. 

Q.  Do  you,  or  not,  think  that  the  Chinese  coolie  ought  to  be 
excluded? — A.  In  Manila  he  is  all  right. 

Q.  You  think  he  ought  to  be  admitted  here? — A.  You  can  admit 
him  into  Manila,  but  not  throughout  the  islands. 

Q.  Aren’t  you  afraid  if  we  throw  open  the  door  wide  we  would  have 
1,000,000  Chinese  here  within  a short  time?  Would  that  be  advan- 
tageous?— A.  No. 

Q.  You  understand,  of  course,  as  I do,  that  the  Chinese  regard  the 
United  States  Government  with  more  favor  than  any  government  in 
the  world? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  They  are  more  inclined  to  come  to  us,  so  much  so  that  it  became 
an  absolute  necessity  for  us  to  prohibit  them.  If  we  open  the  door 
wide  and  allow  these  people  to  come  from  Amoy,  Tientsin,  and  Canton 
wouldn't  they  come  in  enormous  numbers? — A.  They  would,  cer- 
tainly, because  as  soon  as  the  country  was  settled  they  would  have 
better  wages  here  than  in  China. 


200 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  They  kill  other  people,  but  have  never  killed  an  American;  not 
for  the  last  fourteen  years.  No  American  has  been  hurt,  whereas  the 
other  nationalities  were  hurt,  and  it  is  always  so? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  They  would  be  delighted  to  come  here,  but  you  think  their  com- 
ing in  vast  numbers  would  be  disastrous? — A.  I think  it  would  be, 
because  the  whole  of  the  country  would  be  against  you  bringing  them 
in;  the  natives,  at  all  events,  would  be. 

Q.  We  are  a great  distance  away  from  China,  while  you  are  only 
three  days  away  from  China. — A.  Yes,  speaking  for  the  steamboat 
owners,  it  would  be  a great  advantage  to  them  to  have  the  Chinese 
come  in.  They  pay  good  passage,  and  it  would  make  the  boats  very 
profitable,  but  from  the  country’s  point  of  view,  no. 

Q.  The  steamboat  men  would  rather  have  them  come? — A.  Yes;  but 
for  the  country,  the  Indian,  the  poor  people  who  want  work — and  jtou 
have  got  to  look  out  for  them — it  would  be  very  bad.  Here  is  one 
example  for  you:  Since  the  railway  has  been  established  from  here 
to  Dagupan  the  crop  of  rice  has  increased  by  just  50  per  cent,  which 
is  double  what  it  was  before. 

Q.  Who  built  the  railway? — A.  The  natives  did  the  whole  thing. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  What  crops  are  produced  by  the  natives? — A.  Sugar  has  also 
been  produced  in  increased  quantities;  and  in  fact  if  you  take  any  ex- 
port around  here  you  will  find  that  they  are  all  on  the  increase.  The 
native  will  work  as  long  as  he  is  properly  paid.  Around  Manila  and 
Pampanga,  and  Bulacan,  you  can’t  get  a proper  specimen  of  the  na- 
tive, not  the  usual  native  of  the  Philippine  Islands. 

Q.  He  is  a workman  ? — A.  He  is  a workman  as  long  as  he  is  prop- 
erly paid;  he  will  work. 

Q.  You  think  you  express  the  general  opinion  of  the  enlightened 
people  of  Manila  in  giving  your  opinion  of  the  Chinese  as  you  have? — 
A.  I can  not  say  that;  I think  you  will  find  that  people  look  upon  it 
in  different  lights;  I think  if  you  called  a number  of  people  you  would 
find  they  looked  at  it  in  just  as  many  different  lights  as  there  were 
different  people. 

By  Colonel  Denby  : 

Q.  In  regard  to  the  establishment  of  a United  States  court  here — 
you  understand  that  we  have  in  the  United  States  Federal  courts  and 
State  courts?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  that  a foreigner  or  the  inhabitant  of  a different  State — we 
have  forty-five  States — can  go  into  a Federal  court  and  bring  his  action 
there,  and  thereby  do  away  with  local  prejudice,  or  he  can  have  his 
case  tried  in  a State  court,  if  he  prefers  it.  What  do  you  think  of 
the  idea  of  establishing  here  one  or  more  courts  of  this  kind,  where 
English  would  be  spoken,  that  would  give  to  the  foreigner  the  right 
to  bring  his’  action  in  this  court,  and  if  he  sues  in  a Filipino  court  to 
transfer  it  to  this  court;  that  is  a right  we  have  in  the  United  States. 
If  I should  sue  you  in  a State  court,  and  in  the  United  States  court  you 
filed  a petition  that  you  are  a British  subject,  you  can  have  the  case 
transferred  to  the  United  States  court.  Suppose  we  gave  that  right  to 
the  foreigners  or  to  the  persons  who  do  not  live  here;  the  transient 
American  would  go  to  the  Federal  court.  Give  them  ordinary  juris- 
diction of  admiralty,  and  particularly  of  equity  cases,  and  even  if 
a man  were  accused  of  crime,  we  would  allow  him  to  be  tried  in  that 
court,  that  is,  a foreigner.  Would  that  suit  the  Spanish,  the  British, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


201 


and  Germans  who  are  living  here? — A.  I think  that  should  suit  them 
admirably. 

Q.  Is  there  any  feeling  here  on  the  part  of  the  foreign  community 
that  they  might  not  get  justice  in  the  Filipino  courts? — A.  There  is  a 
great  idea  that  they  would  not  get  very  much  justice  in  the  Filipino 
courts  run  under  the  Spanish  system. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Run  under  the  American  system,  with  American  supervision? — 
A.  That  would  be  very  different. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  charge  any  head  money  on  the  Chinese  coming 
here? — A.  Fifty  dollars. 

Q.  A tax  and  surtax;  and  that  was  the  only  limitation? — A.  Yes; 
they  had  to  pay  $50  after  the}'  arrived  here. 

Q.  That  is  about  like  Victoria? — A.  Yes;  and  then  of  course  they 
had  to  pay  the  cedula  on  top  of  that. 

Q.  That  means  the  paper  that  identifies  them? — A.  Yes;  1 think 
there  were  charges  the  Chinese  had  to  pay  amounting  to  about  $50. 
I am  not  certain  what  they  were. 

Q.  Those  were  all  the  taxes  he  had  to  pay  to  come  here? — A.  Yes; 
but  of  course  they  had  to  pay  their  taxes  to  their  own  people,  to  the 
Chinese  Guild.  In  fact,  as  far  as  work  goes,  in  the  rice  mill  we  had 
in  Calumpit  the  natives  turned  out  the  work.  None  of  these  men 
went  back  because  they  knew  that  we  paid  them  every  time.  They 
would  work  up  to  fourteen  or  fifteen  hours  every  day  if  it  was 
required. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  You  don’t  think  the  industries  of  the  islands  would  suffer  if  the 
Chinese  were  excluded? — A.  No. 

Q.  By  a system  of  certificates  or  cedulas  wouldn’t  it  be  very  easy 
to  identify  the  Chinese? — A.  It  is  very  difficult  to  identify  these 
Chinese. 

Meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  R.  W.  BROWN. 

Manila,  June  26,  1899'. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Mr.  John  R.  Mac  Arthur,, 
secretary  and  counsel. 

R.  IV.  Brown,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Please  state  your  name  and  occupation. — A.  R.  W.  Brown;  agent 
of  the  Chartered  Bank  of  India,  China,  and  Australia. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  in  Manila  ? — A.  Twelve  years. 

Q.  Always  connected  with  the  bank? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Had  you  resided  before  that  time  in  the  East  ? — A.  In  Hongkong 
for  three  years  as  junior  in  the  Chartered  Bank. 

Q.  In  the  same  bank? — A.  Yes,  sir. 


202 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Mr.  Brown,  will  you  give  us.  without  questions  being  put  to  you, 
your  views  of  the  currency  in  the  Philippine  Islands  as  it  exists  to-day 
and  any  changes  that  you  recommend  ? — A.  Well,  with  regard  to  the 
quantity  of  the  currency,  silver — that  is,  Mexican  dollars  and  Spanish 
silver  dollars — it  is  very  hard  to  arrive  at  a total  or  aggregate  of  the 
currency  spread  through  the  whole  islands,  owing  to  the  fact  that 
there  are  only  banks  in  Manila  and  Iloilo  and  no  branch  banks  in  any 
of  the  islands  or  adjacent  ports,  and  then  currency  is  often  hoarded  by 
the  natives,  especially  in  times  of  war.  1 have  known  natives  to  tell 
me  that  they  have  had  as  much  as  $20,000  buried  under  their  houses, 
and  it  is  an  old  custom  among  the  richer  natives  to  hoax'd  gold,  of  which 
there  must  be  some  still  left.  With  regard  to  the  currency  itself, 
and  supposing  a change  is  desii'ed  to  be  made,  I should  say  that  the 
best  form  would  be  to  follow  the  system  adopted  in  Japan,  which  was 
carried  out  without  interfering  with  trade  in  any  way. 

Q.  What  system  was  that? — A.  That  is  to  say,  Japan  two  years  ago 
decided  to  go  iix  for  gold,  but  instead  of  raising  silver  to  the  gold  cur- 
rency she  made  a gold  dollar  equal  in  bullion  value  to  a silver  dollar. 

Q.  She  coined  another  gold  dollar  ?— A.  Supposing  silver  was  worth 
28  cents  or  30  ceixts  an  ounce,  she  made  a gold  dollar  equal  to  the  bul- 
lion value  of  silver. 

Q.  She  fixed  the  ratio  at  32  to  1,  so  that  there  is  no  variation  in 
Japan? — A.  Except  when  money  gets  very  scarce.  That  makes 
exchange  go  up  perhaps  three-fourths  per  cent.  Thex'e  should  be  no 
variation  at  all.  That  is  what  they  call  a variation  of  points.  When  the 
gold  is  so  scai'ce,  and  the  trade  free  or  otherwise,  a country  has  got  to  get 
gold  to  make  more  gold  coins,  and  during  that  process  the  exchange 
rises  owing  to  the  bankers  charges,  and  the  interest,  etc.,  until  the  gold 
is  coined.  With  regard  to  the  Philippines,  it  would  be  an  easy  matter 
to  change  this  currency  into  gold  by  following  the  course  adopted  by 
Japan  without  interfering  with  trade  to  any  marked  degree  at  all.  That 
is  to  say,  make  a gold  dollar  here  equal  to  about  2 shillings  sterling, 
which  is  the  present  x-ate  of  exchange. 

Q.  That  is  equal  to  50  cents  of  our  money? — A.  Yes;  and  then  you 
would  call  in  all  the  Mexican  and  Spanish  dollars;  you  would  recoin  the 
recent  subsidiary  silver  coinage  and  the  rest.  You  would  still  have 
gradually  to  get  out  more  gold,  change  always  going  on,  and  that  can 
be  done  without  causing  an  upheaval  in  trade. 

Q.  Would  you  adopt  a decimal  currency  ? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  You  have  not  got  that  here  now,  have  you? — A.  No;  we  have  got 
cents  and  dollars.  Of  course  the  Spaniai'ds  used  reals,  but  in  our  books 
in  the  bank  we  always  use  dollai's  and  cents. 

Q.  You  have  no  actual  cents  in  circulation  ? — A.  There  is  a one  cent, 
copper. 

Q.  Is  that  Spanish? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Wci'e  they  coined  in  these  Islands? — A.  In  Spain. 

Q.  Are  the}'  still  being  coined? — A.  No;  they  were  stopped. 

Q.  When  were  they  stopped? — A.  They  caixxe  out  hei'e  about  two 
years — a year  and  a half  ago — just  befoi'e  the  war. 

Q.  Would  you  recommend  that  system  for  the  Philippines? — A. 
Yes;  if  it  was  decided  to  make  any  change.  The  question  is  whether 
it  is  desirable  or  not.  I would  say  that  it  would  be  very  desirable  for 
the  United  States  to  have  a gold  currency;  it  would  induce  capital 
more  or  less,  you  know.  A silver  currency  is  more  or  less  varying. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


203 


Q.  How  do  the  fluctuations  of  the  silver  dollar  affect  trade? — A. 
Well,  it  is  not  good  for  trade;  really,  some  people  might  be  fortunate 
in  speculating  in  exchange,  but  it  does  not  help  trade. 

Q.  Why  not?— A.  Because  some  merchant  might  have  bought  a lot 
of  produce  on  the  basis  of  2 shillings,  and  then  exchange  may  go  up 
to  2 shillings  and  a penny.  That  is  a loss  of  4 per  cent — that  is,  they 
have  bought  their  produce  for  d per  cent  too  much. 

Q.  They  therefore  lose? — A.  They  lose,  and  the  exact  reverse  hap- 
pens with  an  importing  merchant  who  is  getting  goods  from  America 
or  Europe.  He  calculates  what  he  will  get  in  bullion  when  he  sells 
his  goods  and  collects  for  them.  Say  he  calculates  on  2 shillings  and 
a penny;  instead  of  that  exchange  falls,  and  he  only  gets  2 shillings  for 
his  dollar. 

Q.  Can’t  they  make  contracts  with  the  banks? — A.  They  can  to  a 
certain  extent,  but  they  might  be  wrong  in  making  a contract.  There 
is  always  a certain  amount  of  risk  in  a silver  currency. 

Q.  You  said  that  if  a change  be  made  you  would  recommend  that 
of  Japan.  Now,  would  you  recommend  any  change? — A.  I think  it 
would  be  for  the  good  of  the  country  to  have  a gold  basis  like  that  of 
Japan;  it  Mould  protect  capital. 

Q.  On  the  basis  of  two  for  one? — A.  On  the  basis  of  two  for  one. 
You  would  make  two  silver  dollars  here  equal  to  one  American  gold 
dollar, and  that  M ould  not  disturb  the  country. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Would  that  affect  the  prices  of  labor  or  the  prices  of  commodi- 
ties?— A.  To  a very  small  degree. 

Q.  They  would  remain  about  the  same  as  now? — A.  Yes. 

B\t  Colonel  Denby  : 

Q.  Hom'  Mould  that  affect  the  laborer? — A.  1 don’t  think  it  woidd 
affect  him  at  all. 

Q.  Would  he  get  as  many  dollars  as  he  did  before? — A.  Say  the 
silver  went  up,  sayr,  10  per  cent  within  six  months  from  its  present 
value,  he  Mould  get  10  per  cent  less  in  actual  coin,  although  the  coin 
he  would  be  getting  M ould  be  worth  10  per  cent  more  than  his  present 
silver.  For  instance,  in  importing  rice  from  Saigon  his  gold  dollar 
always  <jets  the  same  exchange. 

Q.  Would  the  fact  that  you  deal  here  largely  with  silver-using  coun- 
tries have  any  effect,  any  influence,  on  this  question  ? — A.  Yes;  it  would 
if  silver  were  to  fall  or  advance  very  much  from  its  present  rate. 

Q.  Would  you  still  have  to  buy  your  silver  in  China? — A.  Yes;  we 
would  have  to  do  all  our  business  M'ith  China  and  the  Straits  in  silver. 
Of  course  M ith  Japan  and  the  United  States  we  Mould  be  dealing  in 
gold,  but  in  our  dealings  with  Singapore,  China,  and  North  China  MTe 
would  be  subject  to  the  fluctuations  of  silver.  The  great  advantage 
to  a country  like  this  in  having  a gold  basis  is  that  it  induces  capital 
to  come  here.  If  a man  is  not  sure  he  will  get  his  exchange  back  he 
will  not  lend  or  invest  ten  or  fifteen  thousand  pounds. 

Q.  The  difficulty  is  in  fixing  the  ratio.  Japan  fixes  it  at  32  to  1. 
You  would  fix  it,  if  I understand  you,  at  50  to  1? — A.  No;  I would 
make  a new  dollar  that  would  be  a little  less  than  half  the  American 
dollar.  1 am  talking  about — — — 

Q.  The  American  dollar  Mould  be  M’orth  two  of  these  dollars? — A. 
Yes;  a little  more — two  and  a fraction. 


204 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  For  practical  purposes  it  would  be  two?- — A.  No;  it  would  not 
be  so  much;  practically  two,  at  a ratio;  taking  the  silver  at  to-day’s 
price,  or  the  date  of  putting  this  operation  through,  I think  it  is  about 
32  to  1. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  It  would  make  the  American  silver  dollar  bear  to  the  silver  cur- 
rency here  in  Manila  now  about  the  same  relation  as  it  bears  to-day— 
about  two  to  one? — A.  Yes;  but  it  would  not  be  a silver  country  any 
more;  it  would  be  a gold  country. 

Q.  You  think  that  desirable  ? — -A.  I think,  now  that  silver  has  gotten 
pretty  low  down,  there  is  considerable  risk  in  adopting  a silver  cur- 
rency. compared  with  what  there  was  ten  years  ago. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  it  might  affect  trade  in  the  interior  and  labor 
in  the  interior,  where  people  have  been  accustomed  to  getting  a Mexi- 
can dollar?  Would  they  be  content  to-day  with  one  of  these  dol- 
lars?— A.  I think  so,  because  prior  to  1878-1881  this  was  really  a gold 
country,  but  the  Spanish  let  in  Mexican  silver  and  drew  out  all  the 
gold. 

Q.  The  change  was  gradual? — A.  It  came  gradually  down;  took 
about  ten  years  to  fall  to  its  present  level. 

Q.  In  your  opinion  is  there  any  prospect  of  silver  appreciating?— A. 
I think  not. 

Q.  Is  there  a prospect  of  its  going  still  lower? — A.  The  chances  are 
that  the  supply  will  exceed  the  demand. 

Q.  Then  it  will  get  lower? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  is  the  rate  to-day,  Mr.  Brown? — A.  27Ifd. 

Q.  That  is  a little  higher  than  it  has  been  recently? — A.  Yes;  it  was 
as  low  in  1897  as  23fd. 

Q.  How  do  you  account  for  these  fluctuations  ? — A.  By  speculations. 

Q.  It  is  all  speculation? — A.  Nearly  all  speculation. 

Q.  Who  lixes  the  rate?— A.  The  big  bullion  brokers  in  New  York 
and  London,  they  arrange  upon  the  rate  for  buying  and  selling.  A 
fair  amount  of  silver  also  comes  from  Australia;  it  is  rather  less  than 
it  was  before. 

Q.  Is  it  the  speculation  in  silver  or  in  gold,  or  in  both,  that  makes 
this  fluctuation? — A.  In  silver.  They  like  the  currency  of  America 
and  make  big  movements,  so  that  they  can  get  in 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  We  want  to  get  your  opinion  on  the  Chinese  question.  You 
understand  that  in  the  United  States  we  exclude  the  Chinese  laborer, 
and  if  he  goes  away  from  the  United  States  he  can't  come  back  any 
more.  Now,  you  are  acquainted  with  the  Chinese  here,  their  habits, 
their  mode  of  life  and  general  character  and  business  qualifications? — 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Please  give  us  your  opinion  of  them. — A.  As  intermediaries  in 
distributing  piece  goods,  larger  goods,  and  various  articles  the  Chinese 
are  of  great  service  to  the  importing  firms  here. 

Q.  As  small  merchants? — A.  As  having  stores  and  small  shops,  etc. 
They  have  more  ability  in  conducting  that  kind  of  thing  than  any 
native  is  capable  of.  Then  as  regards  laborers,  I believe  that  the  orig- 
inal law  in  the  Philippines  was  that  the  Chinese  were  to  come  in  as 
agricultural  laborers,  not  as  merchants,  but  gradually  that  law  was 
allowed  to  drop  into  disuse,  so  that  many  have  become  rich  and  impor- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


205 


tant  merchants,  and  influence  a large  part  of  the  tobacco,  sugar,  and 
hemp  trade. 

Q.  There  are  no  Chinese  laborers  in  the  country,  I understand. — A. 
Very  few  in  the  provinces. 

Q.  If  they  were  introduced  into  the  country  would  it  be  a good 
thing  for  the  country? — A.  To  advance  the  country  it  would  be  almost 
necessary,  I think. 

Q.  Why  do  you  think  it  necessary? — A.  Because  the  Filipinos  are 
not  capable  of  laboring  in  the  same  industrious  way  the  Chinese  arc. 
The  Chinaman  comes  from  China  virtually  without  a cent  in  his  pocket, 
and  all  their  interests  are  devoted  to  making  money;  it  does  not  matter 
how  it  is  done,  that  is  what  they  come  here  for. 

Q.  Then  they  want  to  get  away  again,  don’t  they? — A.  A great 
many  go  away,  but  still  a great  many  make  fortunes  and  end  their  days 
here. 

Q.  Isn’t  the  labor  now  done  in  the  interior  by  the  Filipinos? — A. 
Yes  the  planting  of  rice,  etc. 

Q.  Sugar  and  hemp,  all  done  by  Filipinos? — A.  Yes;  that  is  due 
more  to  the  improvements  in  making  railways,  mining  industries,  and 
those  things,  and  especially  work  about  Manila.  Contracting  is  all 
done  by  the  Chinese. 

Q.  Isn’t  there  a good  deal  of  hostility  on  the  part  of  the  Filipinos 
toward  the  Chinese ? — A.  Yes;  because  the  Indians  thought  the  Chinese 
were  favored. 

Q.  What  is  the  business  character  of  the  Chinese  here,  good  or 
bad? — A.  I should  say  it  is  about  half  and  half.  The  importing  mer- 
chants have  to  trust  them,  they  must  give  them  a fair  amount  of 
credit,  and  assist  them  in  disposing  of  piece  goods,  and  the  Chinaman, 
when  things  are  not  doing  well,  will  get  as  many  things  as  he  can,  and 
he  will  fail  and  make  an  agreement  to  pay  10  or  20  per  cent.  There 
is  no  business  morality  among  them.  It  is  not  as  it  is  in  Hongkong. 
There  is  a far  superior  class  of  Chinese  in  Hongkong. 

Q.  Well,  you  think  that  they  haven’t  much  sense  of  mercantile 
honor? — A.  The  majority  have  not.  I think  perhaps  25  per  cent  you 
can  trust.  I should  say  75  per  cent  should  not  be  trusted. 

Q.  Do  they  take  any  interest  in  political  questions? — A.  I don’t 
think  so;  almost  none. 

Q.  It  is  a matter  of  indifference  to  them  what  the  form  of  govern- 
ment is?- — A.  Quite  indifferent. 

Q.  They  do  not  interest  themselves? — A.  No;  in  Singapore  they 
do,  but  not  here. 

Q.  What  is  the  character  of  the  product  of  the  Chinese  and  the 
Filipinos,  the  Mestizos,  as  you  call  them,  what  kind  of  people  are  they  ? — 
A.  They  make  very  clever  merchants,  but  they  are  very  tricky;  you 
can’t  put  much  confidence  in  them. 

Q.  What  kind  of  citizens  do  they  make,  as  a rule? — A.  They  are 
discontented. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Do  you  think  it  would  be  desirable  to  exclude  the  coolie  from 
coming  here?— A.  I think  it  would  be  almost  necessary  to  let  them 
come  in. 

Q.  On  the  ground  that  the  Filipino  will  not  work? — A.  Yes;  for 
any  new  work  that  has  got  to  be  done  you  must  have  Chinese  labor. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


206 

Q.  Suppose  you  brought  them  in  under  a system  of  contract  and 
sent  them  away  when  the  contract  was  completed,  would  that  do? — 
A.  It  might  be  rather  hard  to  get  them  to  come  under  those  terms. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  the  object  of  having  them  come  to  the  country,  if  tney 
do  not  stay,  but  simply  come  here  to  make  money? — A.  That  is  the 
object.  They  come  here  to  make  money. 

Q.  That  is  the  object  of  the  Chinese? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  that  a good  object? — A.  From  their  point  of  view. 

Q.  For  the  country  ? — A.  To  a certain  extent,  for  this  country.  They 
help  to  carry  on  the  business,  otherwise  it  ivill  cease  altogether. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Don't  you  suppose  they  would  come  for  a limited  period  of  time, 
say,  for  a year  or  two  years,  to  work,  for  example,  upon  railroads 
or  public  works? — A.  Yes;  you  might  engage  to  get  big  contractors 
in  China  to  send  so  many  thousands  here  and  let  what  you  want  of 
them  stay  here  after  that.  They  prefer  this  place  to  their  own  home 
in  the  East,  for  money  is  made  more  easily  here  compared  with  China. 
That  is  why  so  many  come  to  Manila  to  live. 

Q.  Then,  paying  fair  wages,  you  don’t  think  there  would  be  real 
difficulty  in  getting  such  necessary  laborers  as  you  speak  of,  even 
under  a contract  which  would  require  them  to  return,  to  leave  the 
country  at  the  end  of  the  work? — A.  That  could  be  arranged. 

Q.  And  you  say  you  think  that  would  be  necessary,  because  in  this 
kind  of  work  the  Filipinos  can  not  be  had? — A.  They  are  very  unsat- 
isfactory. 

Q.  In  what  way  ? — A.  They  begin  to  work  and  then  they  want 
advances  first;  advances  on  their  salary.  They  work  a few  days  and 
want  to  leave.  They  haven’t  the  same  ability  as  Chinese.  Most  of 
them  do  not  care  to  work  at  all  until  their  money  is  exhausted.  I 
myself  prefer  Filipinos  to  Chinese,  but  we  have  to  recognize  their 
defects  in  that  point. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  On  the  question  of  courts.  Have  you  heard  that  discussed  here  ? — 
A.  No;  nothing  in  particular. 

Q.  As  to  what  kind  of  courts  ought  to  be  established  here.  Have 
you  heard  that  discussed  among  the  businesspeople? — A.  I thought 
they  were  quite  satisfied  to  go  on  with  the  Spanish  courts  in  the  mean- 
time. 

Q.  Have  you  heard  the  question  of  establishing  a United  States 
court  here,  where  the  proceedings  should  be  in  English,  and  where  a 
foreigner  would  have  the  right  to  sue  and  be  sued;  have  you  heard 
that  discussed  among  the  business  people? — A.  Not  much;  but  they 
would  prefer  that,  if  possible,  though  the  people  haven’t  taken  much 
interest  in  the  thing  so  far. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  they  would  be  satisfied  to  try  their  cases 
before  a Filipino  court? — A.  I don’t  think  they  would. 

Q.  They  would  prefer  a United  States  court  and  a United  States 
judge? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Would  they  have  any  fear  of  injustice  being  done  them  by  the 
Filipinos? — A.  That  is  a rather  hard  question  to  answer.  They  would 
object  to  it  on  principle — more  from  sentiment  than  from  any  real 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


207 


cause.  Some  of  the  Filipinos  might  be  trusted.  There  are  some  per- 
fectly honest  men  among  them. 

Q.  Did  they  make  any  objection  to  the  Spanish  courts;  make  any 
effort  to  avoid  them? — A.  Yes;  they  avoided  them  as  far  as  possible. 

Q.  Did  they  adopt  arbitration? — A.  Yes;  they  settled  as  far  as  pos- 
sible extra  judicially. 

Q.  Is  there  much  litigation  by  the  foreigners? — A.  Very  little. 

Q.  In  whose  hands  is  the  business  here,  so  far  as  the  foreigners  are 
concerned? — A.  The  English,  principally,  as  exporters,  and  the  Ger- 
mans do  considerable  import  trade. 

Q.  They  do  a retail  business?- — A.  Yes;  importing  goods  from 
Europe. 

Q.  What  other  nationalities  are  represented  here? — A.  Those  are 
the  chief  traders  here. 

Q.  Have  the  French  any  interest  here? — A.  Very  small,  indeed;  not 
worth  talking  about. 

Q.  Or  the  Portuguese? — A.  None  at  all. 

Q.  Were  there  any  Spanish  merchants  here? — A.  Very  few.  They 
were  chiefly  importers,  and  also  owned  hemp  estates  in  the  provinces 
and  sold  hemp  to  the  British  or  foreign  merchants  for  export. 

Q.  Have  the  Spaniards  remained  or  gone  away  from  here  ? — A.  They 
simply  wish  to  sell  their  provincial  estates,  and  some  have  sold  and 
gone  away  from  here;  they  all  want  to  sell  out.  A big  firm  just 
now  is  offering  estates  for  a million  and  a half  dollars,  and  wants  to 
sell. 

Q.  Is  that  on  account  of  political  considerations  that  they  want  to 
go? — A.  I expect  so.  They  wish  to  reduce  their  business.  It  is  a 
rich  firm. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur  : 

Q.  What  is  the  state  of  the  copper  coinage  now  in  the  islands? — A. 
Very  bad.  It  requires  reformation  very  much. 

Q.  Is  it  adequate  in  quantity?— A.  No;  not  sufficient.  It  has 
always  been  a scarce  coin  here — copper. 

Q.  I am  told  that  the  American  penny,  or  American  cent,  is  pass- 
ing freely  about  here.  Do  you  think  that  the  American  cent  is 
suitable  in  size  and  quantity  of  metal  to  be  introduced  here? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  The  Spanish  penny  was  worth  rather  more  in  bullion  than  it  was 
in  money,  wasn’t  it? — A.  Yes,  sir ; the  price  of  copper  was  very  high 
last  year,  at  least  this  year. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  the  small  form  of  the  American  cent  would 
be  quite  as  acceptable  as  the  larger  penny  or  cent  that  they  had  here?  — 
A.  I don’t  think  that  it  would  make  much  difference. 

Q.  Then  for  silver  coinage,  what  would  you  deem  proper  coin- 
age?— A.  I would  have  a 20-cent  piece  and  a 50-cent  piece  and  a 10-cent 
piece;  that  would  be  quite  sufficient. 

Q.  We  have  at  home  a nickel? — A.  That  is  5 cents. 

Q.  That  is  5 American  cents,  but  it  is  worth  the  same  as  10  cents 
Mexican.— A.  Yes. 

Q.  But  as  they  have  a Mexican  10-cent  piece  here,  that  would  not  be 
required,  perhaps. — A.  I don’t  think  so. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  the  system  adopted  by  Japan,  definitely 
fixing  the  ratio  between  gold  and  silver,  which  is  a fluctuating  quan- 
tity, has  injured  her  trade  in  any  way  with  China  or  other  countries? — 
A.  No;  I don’t  think  so,  because  they  made  the  ratio  on  the  average 


20X 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION 


value  of  silver;  the}-  made  the  basis  on  the  actual  ratio  which  silver  has 
to  gold.  Since  the  change  was  made  silver  has  only  fallen  about  5 or 
6 per  cent;  there  may  be  a difference,  but  not  a serious  difference;  not 
enough  to  handicap  the  trade. 

Q.  Where  does  that  difference  go,  to  the  traders?— A.  That  was  the 
law  of  the  country  when  they  demonetized  silver.  But  you  must  call 
in  all  this  silver  around  you,  and  bring  your  silver  coins  here.  Of 
course  in  Japan  everything  is  sold  according  to  the  yen — the  silver  yen. 

Q.  If  the  value  of  silver  were  to  go  down  further,  it  would  be  per- 
fectly possible  for  Japan  to  change  the  ratio  which  she  has  estab- 
lished.— A.  She  will  not  change  it;  she  will  always  keep  the  one  she 
has. 

Q.  She  might  always  keep  gold,  but  suppose  silver  went  to  1 : 10, 
might  it  not  be  financially  desirable  for  her  to  change  the  ratio? — A. 
No;  I don’t  think  so.  As  long  as  the  currency  is  kept  a bona  fide  cur- 
rency it  is  always  better  than  silver. 

Q.  That  is  true  if  you  can  keep  the  gold  in  the  country. — A.  But 
you  can  keep  the  gold  in  the  country. 

Q.  If  you  try  to  keep  a permanent  ratio  between  gold  and  silver 
right  along,  how  would  that  affect  trade  with  America  or  Europe? — A. 
That  does  not  affect  her  trade  with  America  or  Europe,  where  she  sells 
all  her  silk;  it  affects  Hongkong  trade  and  Shanghai  trade,  not  Amer- 
ican trade.  They  know  exactly  what  they  are  doing.  They  know  that 
their  gold  dollar  is  worth  so  much,  according  to  the  inherent  value  of 
the  dollar. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  something  of  the  banking  operations  in  the  Phil- 
ippines ? What  are  the  sources  of  income  mainly  of  Philippine  banks? 
Is  it  in  exchange  business,  in  advancing  money  upon  consignments, 
or  what? — A.  You  mean  this  Spanish  bank? 

Q.  Banks  in  general,  here  in  the  Philippines;  what  are  their  sources 
of  profit? — A.  Well,  in  two  banks — the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai 
Bank,  and  the  Chartered  Bank — most  of  the  money  is  made  in 
exchange — that  is,  the  buying  and  selling  of  drafts.  The  Banco 
Espanol-Filipino  was  the  government  depository,  and  also  of  the  large 
religious  corporations,  and  sometimes  held  as  much  as  £4.000,000 
without  paying  interest.  They  lent  that  money  out  to  houses  and 
they  made  a profit  of  5 per  cent  a year.  They  made  large  profits  in 
interest  alone,  without  touching  exchange,  because  of  their  favored 
position. 

Q.  Did  the  Hongkong  Bank  and  the  Chartered  Bank  receive  any 
large  deposits  in  that  way  ? — A.  Only  just  now,  on  accountof  the  war  last 
year,  when  the  people  got  alarmed  about  the  Bank  Espanol-Filipino. 

Q.  But  as  a general  rule  the  people  are  not  accustomed  to  deposit 
their  savings  in  bank? — A.  No:  it  does  not  come  under  the  head  of  a 
savings  bank,  although  some  rich  mestizo  may  have,  from  time  to  time 
say,  £100,000  on  deposit  for  say  six  mouths,  without  touching  it. 

Q.  You  know,  one  of  the  considerable  sources  of  profits  of  our  banks 
at  home  is  in  taking  the  running  accounts  of  merchants  with  bank 
balances  from  one  hundred  or  five  hundred  dollars  up  to  any  num- 
ber of  thousands,  and  lending  this  money  to  traders,  dealers,  brokers, 
etc.,  upon  their  personal  notes,  or  good  indorsements  or  security;  is 
that  kind  of  business  done  here  at  all? — A.  No;  not  much. 

Q.  Is  that  due  to  the  fact  that  there  is  not  a demand  for  money  on 
loans  or  that  there  is  not  the  money  out  here  to  place  out  on  loans? — ■ 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


209 


A.  The  Spanish  bank  was  the  only  bank  that  wished  or  desired  to  do 
it.  Of  course,  we  could  do  it  now,  but  we  don’t  care  to  do  it  to  any 
great  extent. 

Q.  Is  there  a demand  for  money  upon  house  property,  produce,  or 
personal  notes? — A.  There  is  a fair  demand  for  money  on  crops  or 
produce,  but  otherwise  not  much.  Of  course  we,  the  two  English 
banks,  the  Hongkong  bank  and  ourselves,  use  a great  deal  of  credits 
on  our  London  office — European  credits.  We  have  brought  money 
out  here  and  financed  the  export  trade  by  owing  money  in  London  not 
so  much  as  by  borrowing  money  here. 

Q.  Your  business  consists  largely  in  the  moving  of  produce? — A. 
Imports  and  exports,  chiefly.  We  are  not  supposed  to  be  local  banks, 
we  are  exchange  banks.  In  fact,  the  chartered  bank  loans  no  money 
against  property,  house  property,  at  all. 

Q.  Have  the  people  here  used  the  one  savings  bank  that  there  was 
here  to  any  considerable  extent? — A.  No;  that  was  more  used  as  a 
pawn  shop. 

Q.  They  did  not  understand  the  value  and  appreciate  the  benefits 
of  a savings  bank?— A.  No. 

Q.  What  do  they  do  with  the  money  when  they  have  earned  it? — 
A.  The}^  like  to  buy  jewelry  with  any  spare  money  that  they  have. 
They  have  a great  passion  for  jewelry.  The  Spanish  pawnbrokers 
made  a lot  of  money  here. 

Q.  I am  told  also  that  they  have  a habit  of  burying  their  surplus 
money  or  putting  it  aside  in  some  way — hoarding.  Is  that  so? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  Does  that  habit  absorb  a considerable  amount  of  the  money  of 
the  country? — A.  Yes;  some  men  keep  as  much  as  $20,000  under 
their  houses. 

Q.  Have  you  any  idea  of  the  amount  of  money  that  is  current,  or  is 
in  the  islands;  are  there  any  statistics  showing  that? — A.  It  is  almost 
impossible  to  arrive  at  anything  like  an  approximate  estimate. 

Q.  You  know  the  amount  of  silver,  perhaps,  that  is  coined?-  A. 
Probably  $50,000,000. 

Q.  But  all  of  that  is  not  in  circulation? — A.  No;  a lot  of  it  is  in 
the  provinces  and  concealed  away. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  H.  D.  C.  JONES. 

Manila,  June  27,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denbv,  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr.  MacArthur. 

H.  D.  C.  Jones,  in  answer  to  the  question  of  the  commissioners, 
stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  state  your  name  and  occupation? — A.  My  name  is  H. 
D.  C.  Jones;  in  charge  of  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  in  Manila  ? — A.  I have  been  here  fourteen 
years. 

Q.  Mr.  Jones,  will  you  give  us,  in  your  own  way,  without  questions, 
some  account  of  the  currency  prevailing  in  these  islands,  and  any  changes 
p c H 


210 


REPORT  OE  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


which,  in  your  opinion,  ought  to  lie  made  for  the  general  good  of  com- 
merce and  the  people? — A.  Well,  as  far  as  the  currency  is  concerned, 
of  course  we  are  virtually  on  the  Mexican -dollar  basis  now,  since  Gen- 
eral Greene  with  the  Americans  came  here  in  August  last.  General 
Greene,  on  the  very  strong  recommendation,  or  rather  the  petition,  of 
the  majority  of  the  merchants  and  bankers — or  rather  General  Mer- 
ritt; General  Greene  acted  for  him — gave  us  the  permission  to  import 
Mexican  dollars  to  an  unlimited  amount,  on  a kind  of  an  arrangement 
which  was  not  written  down.  He  told  us  if  we  would  consent  to  supply 
the  soldiers  Avith  Mexican  dollars  in  exchange  for  gold,  he  Avould  give 
us  a verbal  promise  that,  in  the  event  of  the  American  Government 
going  into  the  question  of  currency,  and  deciding  to  have  a gold  cur- 
rency here,  he  would  allow  us  to  cover  ourselves;  that  is,  to  import 
an  equivalent  amount  of  Mexican  dollars  to  the  amount  of  gold  Ave 
bought.  For  example,  suppose  the  American  GoA  ernmeut  to-morrow 
said,  we  will  stop  the  import  oi  Mexican  dollars,  I Avould  say,  I have 
so  much  gold  in  London,  and  I ought  to  be  allowed  to  import  an  equiva- 
lent in  Mexican  dollars  to  the  gold  I have  in  London;  that  is  to  say, 
the  unco\Tered  amount.  Before  that  the  Mexican  dollar  here  was 
prohibited,  by  the  prohibition  that  1 told  you  of  in  the  report  I 
Avrote  you.  The  prohibition  was  a farce,  because  you  had  only  to 
tempt  the  smugglers,  and  offer  them  10  per  cent,  and  they  would 
always  run  the  risk  of  capture  by  the  custom-house  and  the  carabineros. 
If  captured  they  would  pay  5 per  cent  or  so,  as  you  knoAv,  Mr.  Worces- 
ter, and  it  Avould  just  come  in  as  it  avus  Avanted.  Of  course,  that  was 
Aery  costly.  Then  the  government  used  to  recoin  the  Mexican  dol- 
lars, used  to  take  the  money,  or  part  of  the  Mexican  dollars,  from  us 
and  recoin  them  in  the  mint,  and  they  made  10  per  cent  on  that. 

Q.  Recoined  them  as  what? — A.  For  dollars,  .835  tine.  They  made 
about  10  per  cent  in  the  recoining.  But  in  spite  of  the  large  amount 
of  recoinage  we  were  running  short  of  subsidiary  coinage.  Of  course, 
in  my  opinion,  if  your  Government  is  going  on  the  basis  of  a silver  cur- 
rency— because  I think  it  is  absolutely  necessary  for  the  country  that 
there  should  be  a silver  currency — it  must  be  only  until  the  native  is 
more  educated  and  makes  use  of  more  imported  goods  than  he  has 
done  recently.  He  Avould  gain  no  advantage  from  the  adoption  of  the 
gold  standard  at  present.  Later  on.  when  he  gets  more  educated, 
uses  more  labor-saving  machinery,  and  can  export  his  produce  at  good, 
high  prices,  in  years  to  come,  he  may  get  enough  benefit  out  of  the 
gold  dollar  to  recompense  him  for  giving  over  the  larger  amount  of 
money — of  dollars — he  gets  at  present. 

Q.  Do  you  find  that  business  prospers  under  the  pi'esent  condi- 
tions?—A.  There  is  no  comparison.  The  silver  dollar  has  depreciated, 
and  the  native  has  consequently  received  moi'e  dollars  for  his  work. 
Besides,  the  country  has  never  been  so  prosperous,  and  the  explanation 
is  very  simple.  He  is  paid  in  more  dollars,  and  the  dollar  with  the 
native  is  a token,  and  he  can  get  more  for  the  silver  dollar  than  he 
could  for  the  gold,  and  when  he  has  got  the  Mexican  silver  dollars  he 
naturally  feels  he  has  more  money  in  hand  to  spend,  because  he  pays 
the  native  the  same;  if  there  was  a gold  dollar  he  would  have  to  pay 
the  natiA’e  the  same. 

Q.  Has  the  price  of  the  product  .depreciated  ? — A.  I can  hardly  say 
that.  In  Europe  they  are  not  getting  such  good  prices  for  produce  as 
the}T  used  to  in  gold.  A great  many  gold  people — the  Spaniards,  you 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


211 


see,  stuck  to  the  gold  currency,  which  they  did  for  their  own  personal 
advantage.  That  is  one  of  the  arguments  that  they  bring  forward. 
They  say  it  is  all  very  well  having  a silver  dollar  if  you  want  it,  but 
when  the  gold  was  here  if  you  got  $4  gold  for  a picul  of  hemp,  according 
to  your  own  argument  you  ought  to  get  $8  silver,  but  instead  of  that 
you  get  only  $6.  That  comes,  however,  from  the  fact  of  bigger  pro- 
duction than  in  former  times  and  a corresponding  reduction  in  the 
value  of  the  products.  I know  that  sugar  fifteen  years  ago  was  worth 
better  prices  than  it  is  now,  even  in  Europe,  but  these  people  say, 
“Oh,  it  is  all  very  well  having  a silver  currency,  but  now  you  have  a 
silver  currency  you  don’t  get  double  the  amount  in  silver  dollars  you 
did  in  gold.”  Of  course,  that  is  accounted  for  by  the  fact  that  pur- 
chases generally  in  Europe  and  America,  the  purchasing  places,  are 
cheaper  than  the}'  used  to  be. 

Q.  Are  you  acquainted  with  the  system  in  Japan? — A.  No;  a very 
slight  knowledge.  They  coin  a gold  dollar,  but  their  gold  dollar  is  on 
the  basis  of  the  present  value  of  silver.  They  have  a 2-shilling  gold 
dollar — a very  good  system. 

Q.  How  would  that  do  here? — A.  I should  think  it  might  be  intro- 
duced here  in  a few  years  very  well.  I am  not  posted  on  this  currency 
question,  gentlemen. 

Q.  Don't  you  regard  it  as  an  important  thing  in  business  that  there 
should  be  no  fluctuation?  I am  not  speaking  now  for  the  banks,  but 
for  the  business  men. — A.  Well,  yes;  but  I don't  see  that  it  has  done 
much  damage  heretofore;  even  the  heavy  fall  in  silver — there  is  no 
complaint,  everything  goes  on  the  same. 

Q.  Doesn’t  it  render  the  making  of  contracts  uncertain  ? — A.  To  a 
certain  extent. 

Q.  And  you  don’t  know  how  much  you  are  going  to  get  in  the  end  ? — 
A.  Well,  1 haven’t  found  it  so. 

Q.  What  effect,  Mr.  Jones,  does  this  depreciation  have  upon  the 
wages  paid  here  for  labor;  have  they  increased  or  not? — A.  Oh,  cer- 
tainly they  have  increased. 

Q.  To  what  extent  have  they  increased  ? — A.  I suppose  before  the 
Americans  came  here  they  had  increased  in  the  last  five  or  six  years 
about  25  per  cent. 

Q.  I don’t  mean  as  affected  by  the  coming  of  the  Americans.  Of 
course,  the  coming  of  the  Americans  brought  a vast  amount  of  money 
here,  therefore  everything  appreciated,  as  it  generally  does;  but,  leav- 
ing that  out  of  the  question,  I want  to  know  whether  the  depreciation 
of  silver  has  or  not  affected  wages;  whether  a man  gets  more  silver 
than  he  did  gold. — A.  Decidedly. 

Q.  You  pay  more  to  your  servants,  for  instance? — A.  Yes,  sir;  if 
you  take  the  difference  between  1888  and  1897  I think  there  is  a dif- 
ference of  about  25  per  cent. 

Q.  They  have  demanded  more  wages  on  account  of  this  deprecia- 
tion?— A.  Yes;  I should  rather  say  that  the  people  have  been  in  a 
position  to  pay  higher  wages;  naturally  one  goes  with  the  other. 

Q.  In  your  view  what  would  the  contiguity  of  silver-using  countries 
with  which  you  trade  here  have  to  do  with  this  question?- — A.  I think 
it  is  much  better  that  we  are  on  the  same  basis  as  the  countries  with 
which  we  trade  around  here — for  instance,  China,  Japan,  and  the  Straits 
Settlements.  There  is  no  exchange  to  be  worked,  and  silver-using 
countries  naturally  trade  with  one  another — for  instance,  India  and 


212 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


China.  Now  there  is  a great  deal  bigger  business  done  between  India 
and  China  than  there  used  to  be.  owing  to  the  fact  that  silver  conn 
tries  naturally  keep  together. 

Q.  When  you  came  here  in  1885,  were  they  working  under  a gold 
basis  at  that  time? — A.  There  was  no  silver  question  when  I arrived 
in  the  Philippines.  When  I arrived  in  the  Philippines  silver  was  at 
such  a high  price  that  it  was  on  a par  with  gold;  our  dollar  was  a four- 
shilling  dollar  when  I arrived  here  in  1885. 

Q.  What  is  your  view  as  to  a decimal  currency  ? — A.  Of  course  we 
must  have  that;  that  goes  without  question. 

Q.  What  subsidiary  coin  would  you  recommend? — A.  Ten,  20,  and 
50  cent  pieces. 

Q.  But  not  a 5-cent  piece? — A.  Well,  coppers. 

Q.  What  about  the  nickel,  as  we  have  it  at  home? — A.  Yes, 
exactly  the  same  as  you  have  it  at  home. 

Q.  And  as  to  the  cents,  do  you  think  the  American  cent  would  cir- 
culate here? — A.  Not  if  you  are  going  to  continue  on  a silver  basis. 
You  can't  have  any  coin  unless  it  is  distinctively  Philippine,  because 
if  you  have  a cent  of  American  copper  here  we  would  send  it  back  to 
America  and  get  gold  for  it.  and  if  you  didn't  get  it  in  one  way  you 
would  get  it  in  another;  a man  would  take  400  or  500  in  his  pocket, 
and  they  would  get  back  that  way. 

Q.  We  must  make  a cent  which  would  represent  the  one-hundredth 
part  of  a Mexican  dollar  and  not  the  one-hundredth  part  of  a gold 
dollar? — A.  Yes.  You  see  there  is  a mint  here — a very  good  mint; 
it  might  be  repaired  at  a very  small  cost,  and  I should  think  by  mak- 
ing use  of  it  and  minting  a certain  amount  of  coinage  every  year 
you  would  make  enough  out  of  it  in  that  way  to  keep  the  mint  going. 

Q.  What  do  you  say  as  to  the  introduction  of  small  bills  here— $1 
bills,  $2  bills,  <83  bills? — A.  A note  issue,  you  mean? 

Q.  Yes.— A.  We  must  have  a note  issue,  to  a limited  extent. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  right  ought  to  be  given  to  the  foreign  banks  ? — 
A.  There  is  a question  comes  up  there.  The  Spanish  bank  claimed 
that  privilege  here;  at  the  same  time  I claim  that  the  Spanish  bank  is 
not  in  a position  to  make  use  of  that  privilege,  because  their  present 
financial  condition  would  not  allow  them  to  do  it  under  the  conditions 
in  that  matter.  Yet  I am  afraid  if  your  Government  allowed  any 
•other  bank  to  do  so  it  would  have  the  Spanish  bank  protesting  at 
once. 

Q.  What  bills  does  the  Spanish  bank  issue? — A.  85,  810,  820,  850 
and  8100  bills. 

Q.  Nothing  higher  than  a 8100  bill? — A.  No.  I think  their  note 
issue  was  three  times  their  capital.  Their  capital  was  originally  8600,000, 
while  they  gave  out  a 81,800,000  note  issue,  then  they  ran  their  capital 
up  to  81,500,000  and  their  note  issue  to  84.500,000.  They  never  quite 
issued  all  I think,  not  the  entire  84,500,000. 

Q.  Does  the  Hongkong  bank  confine  its  business  to  exchange,  or  does 
it  lend  money  to  the  people  here? — A.  We  are  what  you  call  an 
exchange  bank,  and  we  only  lend  money  for  the  purpose  of  financing 
produce  and  to  a limited  extent  imports;  that  means  we  do  not  advance 
against  growing  crops;  we  only  advance  against  produce  in  godowns 
pending  a shipment,  and  when  we  advance  money  we,  as  a rule,  fix  the 
exchange  for  the  bills  that  the  produce  will  be  drawn  for. 

Q.  You  advance  on  bills  of  lading  ? — A.  Yes;  we  buy  bills;  bills  of 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


213 


exchange  on  London  and  America  with  bills  of  lading  attached;  some' 
limes  we  advance  against  goods  on  the  way  out  from  the  provinces, 
but  generally  the  principle  is  to  advance  only  on  the  produce. 

Q.  Suppose  I went  to  you  to-day  and  wanted  to  borrow  $10,000, 
and  gave  you  good  security,  could  1 get  it  ? — A.  We  do  it  occasionally, 
but  it  is  not  our  business;  we  are  not  a discounting  bank.  Occasion- 
ally the  Chinese  here 

Q.  Is  the  Australian  bank  in  the  same  condition  ? — A.  No;  I don’t 
think  so.  I think  they  are  more  liberal  than  we  are.  In  Australia 
they  advance  on  growing  crops,  and  besides  that,  I believe  they  will 
advance  against  growing  crops  on  two  signatures. 

Q.  Does  your  bank  pay  any  interest  on  deposits? — A.  Yes;  down 
to  three  years  ago  5 per  cent,  then  we  brought  it  down  to  4,  and  now 
to  3L 

Q.  Do  you  make  any  difference  in  the  amount  of  interest  you  pay, 
owing  to  whether  the  money  is  left  on  deposit  for  a long  or  a short 
time? — A.  For  one,  for  three,  or  for  six  months.  For  six  months, 
at  the  rate  of  per  cent  per  annum;  three  months,  1A  per  cent  per 
annum. 

Q.  How  do  you  account  for  the  fluctuation  of  silver  in  Europe  and 
America;  mere  speculation,  or  what? — A.  Supply  and  demand;  and 
also  it  has  been  effected  recently  by  some  trust,  some  smelting  trust 
they  have  got  up  in  America.  They  sent  it  up  the  other  day,  but 
they  didn't  succeed  in  keeping  it  up. 

Q.  Well,  that  is  simply  gambling,  isn’t  it? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Then,  as  a practical  question,  now,  do  you  think  we  ought  to  go 
on  a gold  basis  here?— A.  On  no  account. 

Q.  Do  you  think  we  ought  to  adopt  the  system  of  Japan  and  fix  the 
ratio  higher?— A.  I think,  myself,  it  is  a very  good  system,  but  I 
would  not  recommend  it  just  now,  as  there  is  no  harm  done  by  wait- 
ing. if  it  is  your  intention  ultimately  to  arrange  to  have  a gold  standard 
on  the  basis  of  the  existing  price  of  silver.  I don't  see,  myself,  that 
there  is  any  urgent  necessity  to  rush  matters.  You  see,  we  might  keep 
on  the  silver  basis  here  for  a }Tear,  or  a year  and  eighteen  months,  or 
for  years,  until  matters  get  fairly  settled  down,  and  when  you  have  all 
the  provinces  in  the  Archipelago  opened  to  trade,  then  you  can  look 
around  and  thoroughly  go  into  the  question  whether  you  want  to  go 
on  a gold  basis.  You  can  take,  then,  the  current  value  of  the  silver 
dollar  and  adopt  a system  like  Japan  did.  I don’t  see  that  there  is 
any  necessity  to  rush  matters. 

Q.  Your  advice,  then,  would  be  to  leave  things  as  they  are  for  the 
present  and  to  make  all  changes  gradually  ? — A.  Very  gradually. 

Q.  You  don’t  recommend  any  change  at  present? — A.  No  change 
at  all. 

Q.  But  you  recommend  the  coinage  of  subsidiary  coins? — A.  Very 
strongly;  and  also  some  arrangement  about  notes.  I was  going  to 
make  a suggestion  in  regard  to  it.  Mr.  Jackson,  in  Hongkong — I 
wrote  him  in  September,  saying  that  it  would  not  be  unlikely  that 
some  proposition  would  be  made  to  us  with  regard  to  a note  issue,  and 
he  rather  threw  cold  water  on  it;  he  said  he  didn't  want  it,  as  far  as 
he  was  concerned,  but  at  the  same  time  that  was  on  the  idea  of,  I 
suppose,  a note  issue,  as  they  have  it  in  Hongkong;  that  is  to  say, 
that  you  keep  an  equivalent  amount  in  silver  in  your  treasury  to  the 
notes  you  have  out;  and  if  I might  be  permitted  to  make  another 


214 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


suggestion  with  regard  to  that,  it  is  this:  That  if  the  banks  were  per- 
mitted to  make  a note  issue,  instead  of  lodging  security  here,  we  should 
lodge  a gold  security  in  Washington,  on  the  rough  principle  of  national 
depositories  without  privileges.  That  is  to  say,  that  if  we  should  get 
permission  to  issue  $2,000,000  Mexican,  we  could  do  so  on  depositing, 
say  $1,000,000  Government  bonds  in  Washington,  or  on  that  basis.  If 
the  Government  wanted  5 per  cent  or  10  per  cent  margin  to  cover  any 
possible  fluctuations  in  the  silver  value,  we  might  do  that.  This  sug- 
gestion is,  of  course,  my  own,  and  it  is  more  or  less  subject  to  approval 
from  higher  quarters. 

Q.  It  is  also  subject  to  the  fact  that  you  are  a foreign  bank  and  we 
can  not  control  you  in  what  you  claim  as  a vested  interest? — A.  As 
long  as  we  are  under  American  law  we  must  follow  the  American  law. 

Q.  As  to  the  establishment  of  American  banks,  you  think  an  Amer- 
ican bank  coming  here  ought  to  deposit  a certain  amount  of  security  in 
Washington? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then,  you  think  the  national  banking  system  could  be  worked  out 
here? — A.  I think  so  on  that  rough  principle.  I think  Sir  Thomas 
Jackson  objects  to  this.  He  does  not  want  to  keep  very  large  reserve 
treasuries  in  silver  like  we  have  in  Hongkong;  it  is  a great  nuisance. 
You  are  tied  up  to  get  the  silver,  and  it  affects  exchange,  the  exchange 
market,  in  a very  adverse  way.  In  depositing,  of  course,  with  the 
Government  the  object  is  to  have  a sufficient  security  for  the  notes  to 
guarantee  the  public  that  those  notes  will  be  taken  up  jvhatever  hap- 
pens. I don’t  see  myself  what  it  matters  under  the  Government  scheme 
whether  the  deposit  is  in  gold  or  in  silver,  so  long  as  the  deposit  is 
kept  up.  Of  course,  the  foreign  banks  would  like  to  come  in,  I should 
think,  in  this  case;  but  they  might  give  us  permission  for  a certain  num- 
ber of  years,  until  such  time  as  other  banks  are  established.  I don’t 
know  that  our  directors  would  approve  of  the  scheme,  but  still  I give 
it  as  my  idea  for  what  it  is  worth;  and  it  would  be  very  useful  in  that 
way,  useful  for  everyone. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  You  find  that  notes  are  useful  in  remitting  funds?  Is  that  the 
object,  so  far  as  a bank  is  concerned,  of  issuing  notes?- — A.  1 don’t 
think  the  banks  get  much  out  of  it.  In  fact,  our  directors  sa}T  a note 
issue  costs  us  money,  but  it  is  only,  naturally,  a convenience,  because 
you  can  not  go  on  carrying  about  silver — Mexican  dollars — in  your 
pocket;  it  would  also  be  very  convenient  for  the  people  sending  money 
down  to  the  provinces.  They  always  take  a certain  amount  of  notes 
for  convenience;  but  our  directors  have  maintained  that  a note  issue 
is  not  a success,  and  we  are  withdrawing  it  in  the  Straits.  "They  don’t 
want  it.  They  are  using  government  notes  instead. 

Q.  I)o  you  know  how  many  notes  are  outstanding  in  the  Philip- 
pines?— A.  I think  I can  give  you  the  exact  figures — $1,500,000. 

Q.  Of  what  banks? — A.  Only  the  Banco  Espanol  Filipino.  Your 
Government  has  never  yet  inquired  of  the  Spanish  bank  whether  they 
are  following  out  their  statutes.  I don’t  know  in  regard  to  that.  I 
haven’t  got  at  my  finger  ends  what  they  have  done,  but  until  their 
financial  position  is  much  improved  I don’t  see  how  they  can  make  any 
use  of  their  concessions.  They  were  a very  sound  bank,  and  were 
all  right  until  they  were  very  heavily  called  on  by  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment. They  are  a sound  bank  in  a way. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


215 


Q.  What  do  you  mean,  ‘‘They  area  sound  bank  in  away?” — A.  If 
you  take  in  as  an  asset  what  the  Spanish  Government  owes  them,  I 
think  that  the  bank  is  quite  solvent  and  in  a sound  position,  but  that 
amount  of  money  is  locked  up.  You  set'  by  their  last  balance  sheet  the 
Government  owed  them  & 1,800, 000.  Of  course,  there  might  be  worked 
out  somescheme  for  sending  out  notes — silver  notes — paying  the  troops 
off  and  paying  contracts  with  them. 

Q.  The  idea  is  that  the  Government  should  send  out  notes  payable  in 
silver? — A.  Yes,  but  that  must  be  its  specific  note;  it  is  quite  clear  as  to 
that.  That  is  where  the  mistake  comes  in  now.  You  see  the  Spaniards 
sent  out  half  a million  dollars  worth  of  copper.  General  Otis  is  keep- 
ing all  the  copper,  that  is,  Spanish  copper;  the  moment  that  copper  is 
put  into  the  market  people  immediately  send  it  to  Spain  and  make  a 
clear  50  per  cent  on  it. 

Q.  Because  of  the  bullion  value? — A.  No;  it  is  current  in  Spain.  It 
is  Spanish  minted;  just  as  for  the  coin  which  you  have  sent  out  here 
as  the  American  silver  dollar  you  get  $2 — the  bullion  value  is  the  same. 
The  Spanish  copper  is  a subsidiary  coin  on  a gold  basis. 

Q.  Is  therer  needed  much  increase  in  the  copper  coinage  here? — A. 
Yes;  you  want  a good  deal.  The  Spanish  Government  had  a mint 
here,  and  to  put  it  in  real  good  order  would  not  take  much  money — 
perhaps  fifty  or  a hundred  thousand  dollars.  You  have  a good  build- 
ing with  plenty  of  room.  These  figures  are  Mexican.  You  could  get 
out  machinery;  it  does  not  cost  much.  They  have  a fine  building;  you 
could  soon  get  to  work.  Copper  to  be  minted  could  be  got  here  in 
plenty  in  the  country. 

Q.  Have  yon  any  idea  of  the  amount  of  copper  coinage  in  circula- 
tion?— A.  I can  not  tell  you  at  all. 

Q.  Or  silver  coinage? — A.  I can  not  tell. 

Q.  Are  there  no  bank  statistics  which  show  what  amount  of  currency 
or  coinage  the  Islands  use  ? — A.  I can  not  tell  you  at  all.  I worked  it 
up,  but  I could  not  tell  you  within  even  millions.  I put  it  at  125,000,000 
Mexican,  between  Mexican  half  dollars  and  subsidiary  coinage;  but 
you  can’t  tell,  it  is  pure  guess. 

Q.  I want  to  ask  you  some  questions  about  the  Chinese.  You  know 
in  our  country  we  excluded  the  Chinese  laborer,  and  if  he  leaves  there 
he  can  not  come  back  again.  Now,  what  is  your  opinion  as  to  the 
character,  business,  and,  in  general,  the  conditions,  the  habits,  and  cus- 
toms of  the  Chinese?  Are  they  desirable  as  residents? — A.  Well,  I 
am  in  favor  of  the  Chinese  being  admitted,  not,  however,  without  cer- 
tain restrictions,  and  I would  make  those  restrictions  rather  strong, 
because  I don’t  think  it  is  advisable  to  have  the  Chinese  to  compete  in 
agriculture  with  the  natives.  I think  the  natives  ought  to  be  left  to 
have  a monopoly  as  far  as  agriculture  is  concerned. 

Q.  You  think  the  natives  would  do  that  work  if  left  to  themselves, 
or  do  they  do  it  now? — A.  Oh,  yes;  they  always  have — that  is,  the  agri- 
cultural labor  here.  They  always  have  done  all  the  agricultural  work, 
except  for  vegetables,  in  this  town  local  vegetables;  but  1 certainly 
think  that  the  Chinese  ought  to  be  allowed  in  here.  I have  heard 
some  people  express  a very  good  idea,  to  allow  them  only  in  the 
towns;  allow  a certain  number  of  Chinese  skilled  laborers.  In  my  opin- 
ion, I don’t  think  the  native  is  good  enough;  I don't  think  he  is  as 
good  a skilled  laborer  as  the  Chinaman.  You  want  Chinese  here  for 
carpenters;  you  must  have  them  here  for  boiler  makers  and  riveters. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


216 

Tlit1  native  men  could  do  good  service  in  market  gardening.  Suppose 
there  was  a big  railway  being  built;  you  might  find  it  necessary  in  cer- 
tain districts  to  employ  Chinese  laborers;  you  might  have  to  do  it; 
also  for  coolie  work.  You  must  have  Chinese  labor  for  working  in 
coal  and  other  mines,  and  by  allowing  the  Chinese  to  do  all  the  work 
in  the  city  you  would  release  a great  many  natives  to  do  work  in  the 
fields. 

Q.  You  speak  of  limitations.  What  would  be  your  limitation,  if  you 
allowed  them  to  do  all  that? — A.  You  might  allow  them  only  in  the 
towns  and  not  in  the  country. 

Q.  Do  you  comprehend  the  fact  that  the  Chinese  are  exceedingly 
fond  of  the  United  States  and  think  they  are  happier  there  than  any- 
where else,  and  that  if  we  opened  these  islands  to  them  they  would 
come  in  in  enormous  numbers  and  swamp  the  native  laborers? — A. 
That  is  where  the  restriction  would  come  in;  you  could  limit  them  to 
a certain  number. 

Q.  Your  limitation  would  be  as  to  number? — A.  By  number. 

Q.  How  would  you  arrive  at  the  number? — A.  Have  some  expert 
figure  out  how  many 

Q.  Lai  Hirers  we  need  ? — A rI  hat  would  be,  of  course,  as  far  as  skilled 
labor  is  concerned;  and  Chinese  receiving  higher  wages,  they  would 
naturally  come  here,  because  a man  will  naturally  go  where  his  work 
is  required.  As  far  as  the  coolie  labor  is  required,  1 think  you  could 
fix  on  so  many,  say  10,000  or  50,000.  You  could  get  those  statistics 
from  flic  Spaniards,  and  confine  them  to  the  cities;  and  another 
important  question  as  regards  the  Chinaman  is  this:  The  native  has  a 
great  antipathy  to  the  Chinaman,  but  the  native  is  too  indolent  to  be 
a merchant,  and  the  Chinaman  is  a great  merchant,  a great  peddler, 
and  if  you  keep  the  Chinaman  out  of  the  country  I don’t  see  who  is 
going  to  do  the  peddling  over  the  country.  There  are  people  who  say 
the  native  will  pull  himself  together,  but  he  has  never  done  it.  Mr. 
Worcester  has  hitherto  been  in  the  country,  and  he  will  toll  you  that 
the  whole  system  of  business  all  over  the  Islands  is  all  dependent  on 
the  Chinese  peddlers. 

Mr.  Worcester.  I brought  that  matter  up  the  other  day,  and  they 
told  me  that  it  was  notso before  the  Chinamen  came  in;  that  before  their 
coming  the  native  did  tin*  peddling  or  retail  business  in  the  towns, 
and  that  he  would  do  it  again  if  he  was  not  obliged  to  compete 
with  the  Chinaman.  They  even  went  so  far  as  to  say  that  for- 
eigners would  find  it  worth  their  while  to  conduct  this  retail  business 
if  it  were  not  for  the  necessity  of  competing  with  the  Chinaman. — A. 
In  towns  like  Albay,  Legaspi,  and  these  places  on  the  coast,  it  would 
be  natural  for  Europeans  to  go  there  and  settle,  but  I don’t  see  how 
they  would  open  up  the  country.  You  know  the  Chinaman  will  go 
everywhere.  I don’t  see  how  the  country  is  going  to  get  on  without 
them.  At  the  same  time  it  is  very  bad,  as  bad  as  you  can  have  it. 
They  intermarry  with  the  women  here  and  the  mixture  is  very  bad. 

Q.  You  think  the  mestizo  is  a bad  character? — A.  A bad  iot  right 
through. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  let  the  Chinese  women  come  in  as  well  as  the 
men? — A.  That  would  help  the  thing;  there  ought  to  be  something 
of  that  kind.  I wouldn’t  make  it  free,  but  you  can’t  close  them  out 
altogether. 

Q.  Isn’t  it  your  opinion  that  if  you  make  it  free  they  would  come 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


217 


over  in  millions? — A.  I wouldn’t  take  that  risk.  1 don’t  think  I would 
risk  it  altogether.  I wouldn't  be  too  strict,  either.  Suppose  there  is  a 
big  railway  to  be  built,  and  you  come  to  districts  where  you  can’t  get 
native  labor,  and  suppose  the  contractor  wants  Chinese  labor,  that  he 
wants  5,000  or  10,000,  you  might  make  special  arrangement  whereby 
that  man  must  guarantee  to  send  them  out  of  the  country  when  the 
business  is  done,  or  make  some  such  restriction  as  that. 

Q.  Unquestionably  the  Filipinos  are  very  hostile  to  and  much 
opposed  to  the  Chinese?— A.  Yes;  they  don’t  like  them,  because  the 
Chinaman  does  better  work  than  they  do. 

Q.  The  suggestion  you  make,  then,  is  that  they  should  be  permitted 
to  come  to  a limited  extent  to  be  fixed  bylaw? — A.  Yes;  and  under 
certain  restrictions,  and  as  regards  country  work  there  might  be  issued 
certain  peddlers’  licenses  to  a limited  amount,  but  I should  not  allow 
them  to  spread  themselves  over  the  country. 

Q.  On  the  question  of  courts,  Mr.  Jones,  just  a question  or  two. 
Are  you  familiar  with  the  system  of  United  States  courts  which  we 
have  at  home? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  establish  a court  here  in  which  the  foreigner 
should  have  the  right  to  sue  or  be  sued  ? — A.  I think  it  would  be  neces- 
sary; most  necessary;  in  fact,  an  absolute  necessity. 

Q.  Why  do  you  think  so? — A.  I think  the  Philippine  court  could 
not  be  depended  on  unless  it  was  under  very  strong  supervision  all 
around.  They  would  be  dishonest;  the  Spaniards  taught  it  to  them. 
1 don’t  think  their  courts  would  be  courts  of  justice.  There  are  good 
men  among  them,  but  very  few. 

Q.  Under  the  present  system  you  understand  they  have  some  Amer- 
ican judges?- — A.  Yes;  but  I don’t  think  that  American  judges,  as 
long  as  the  courts  are  held  in  Spanish,  can  follow  the  Spanish  pro- 
cedure. I don’t  see  how  the  American  judges  can  check  them.  They 
might  check  abuses  brought  specially  before  them,  but  a great  many 
minor  abuses  will  not  be  brought  before  them.  There  will  be  a great 
many  cases  where  ignorant  people  will  be  victimized. 

Q.  Is  it  the  general  sentiment  of  the  mercantile  community  that  the 
foreigners  should  have  such  courts? — A.  I have  heard  it  all  around. 
The  merchants  at  present  were  talking  about  it  the  other  day.  They 
seem  to  think  it  would  not  hurt  to  bring  up  that  question,  because,  as 
they  say,  very  wisely,  the  Government  of  the  United  States  has  not 
decided  what  they  are  going  to  do  finally;  but  I know  it  is  the  inten- 
tion of  the  community,  sooner  or  later,  to  bring  up  a petition  to  that 
effect.  It  is  a matter  in  which  we  are  very  vitally  interested,  and  I should 
be  very  sorry  indeed  if  I had  no  appeal  to  American  judges,  because 
there  is  nobod}’  who  has  suffered  more  injustice  and  robbery  than  we 
have  here,  and  I know  a lot  about  it,  because  I have  been  through  it 
from  the  beginning.  Simply  immorality  from  the  beginning  to  the  end. 

Professor  Worcester.  Do  you  think  it  would  be  sufficient  to  have 
one  such  court  here  in  Manila,  or  would  it  be  necessary,  as  the  coun- 
try opens  up,  to  establish  more;  for  instance,  one  here,  one  in  Negros, 
and  one  down  south  in  Iloilo,  and  one  north — at  what  point  ? — A.  Aparri 
would  be  the  best  place  up  there,  and  there  ought  to  be  a court  in 
Vigan,  you  know. 

Q.  What  I am  figuring  on  is  the  coming  geographical  arrangement, 
so  that  we  won’t  be  compelled  to  put  the  people  to  any  unnecessary 
hardship  in  going  some  distance  from  where  they  can  do  business. — 


218 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


A.  Of  course  it  is  of  great  importance  to  consider  these  hemp  ports, 
because,  in  my  opinion,  the  hemp  ports  down  in  Legaspi,  Albay,  and 
Samar — I believe  that  is  the  finest  bit  of  country  you  have  here;  and 
I believe  this  industry  is  going  ahead.  And  Iloilo  is  not  so  far  from 
those  centers;  I suppose  Iloilo  would  do  for  it. 

Q.  Cebu  is  a hemp  center,  isn’t  it? — A.  Yes;  but  Cebu  and  Manila, 
you  may  say,  are  the  hemp  centers,  because  all  the  hemp  from  Samar, 
Albay,  Sorsogon,  Gubat,  Legaspi,  and  all  the  southern  provinces  comes 
to  Manila.  As  far  as  Aparri  is  concerned,  from  what  I have  heard — 
I have  never  been  up  there — 1 thought  perhaps  it  might  be  advisable 
to  have  a kind  of  government  set  up  in  the  north  of  the  island;  but 
you  have  been  up  there,  perhaps. 

Q.  No;  I haven’t  been  up  there. — A.  The  Spaniards  had  it  at 
Yigan,  you  know.  They  had  their  audiencia  up  there. 

Colonel  Denby.  We  could  provide  for  that  by  authorizing  the 
judges  to  hold  court  where  they  pleased. 

Mr.  MacArthur.  A movable  court. 

A.  Of  course,  there  would  be  a supreme  court  there.  Yes;  we  must 
have  American  courts  here. 

With  thanks,  the  meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  A.  R.  M.  ONGCAKWE. 


Manila,  June  30 , 1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester  and  Mr. 
MacArthur. 

A.  R.  M.  Ongcakwe,  in  answer  to  questions  propounded,  stated  as 
follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  State  your  name,  age,  residence,  and  occupation. — A.  R.  M. 
Ongcakwe;  residence,  Manila;  occupation,  merchant. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  here? — A.  Twenty-two  years. 

Q.  What  business  are  you  engaged  in  ? — A.  Export  sugar  business. 
Q.  You  export  sugar? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  what  else  ? — A.  And  import  rice. 

Q.  And  general  import  business  from  China? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  do  you  import  from  China? — A.  Oh,  Chinese  food. 

Q.  How  many'  Chinese  are  here? — A.  Only'  here  in  Manila? 

Q.  Well,  say  first  in  Manila. — A.  About  25,000  men,  I think. 

Q.  What  business  are  they'  engaged  in? — A.  I can  not  answer  that. 
Mr.  Palanca  will  be  able  to  answer  that  better  than  1 can. 

Q.  Don’t  you  know  what  business  they'  do? — A.  Yes;  I know  some. 
Q.  Tell  us  what  you  know. — A.  In  the  import  business  there  are 
about  20  or  30  people  engaged  here. 

Q.  They  are  merchants  and  peddlers? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  There  are  laborers — -coolies? — A.  About  eight  or  ten  thousand 
men  are  coolies. 

Q.  What  kind  of  people  are  they,  good  people  or  bad  people? — A. 
Good  people.  All  coolies  work  discharging  and  loading  cargoes. 

Q.  Don’t  the  Filipinos  discharge  cargoes? — A.  Yes;  some  Filipinos. 
Q.  They7  do  hard  work,  do  they',  the  Chinese? — A.  Oh,  yres. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


219 


Q.  How  many  of  them  are  there  in  these  islands — all  the  Philippine 
Islands? — A.  About  55,000  Chinese. 

Q.  Where  are  they? — A.  In  all  the  provinces  and  in  Manila,  55,000 
men. 

Q.  Do  they  do  any  agricultural  work? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What?— A.  Gardening  and  sugar  plantations;  vegetable  gardens. 

Q.  They  work  the  hemp  plantations,  too? — A.  Yes;  in  Iloilo. 

Q.  How  are  they  affected  with  regard  to  the  United  States  of 
America?  How  are  they  toward  the  Americans,  friendly  or  un- 
friendly?—A.  Very  friendly. 

Q.  Do  they  do  any  business  with  the  United  States? — A.  Not  at 
present  directly  with  the  United  States;  no. 

Q.  What  kind  of  citizens  do  they  make — quiet,  peaceable,  or  not? — 
A.  Very  law  abiding.  All  those  that  come  here  are  law  abiding  and 
peaceful. 

Q.  How  are  they  about  paying  their  debts? — A.  Excluding  fire  or 
loss  from  ships,  they  generally  pay  their  debts. 

Q.  They  pay  their  debts? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  How  man}'  Chinese  do  you  think  ought  to  be  allowed  to  come 
here  every  year?- — A.  About  12,000. 

Q.  Twelve  thousand  a year? — A.  They  go  back  to  China  seven  or 
eight  thousand  a year. 

Q.  Seven  or  eight  thousand  go  back  to  China  every  year? — A.  Yes; 
besides  the  head  passengers. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  business  would  require  12,000  here  a year? — 
A.  Oh,  yes. 

Q.  Are  you  in  favor  of  allowing  the  Chinese  to  come  here  or  not? — 
A.  We  like  very  much  to  have  the  Chinese  come  here.  There  is  want 
of  Chinese  labor  steadily. 

Q.  Do  you  think  it  would  be  for  the  good  of  the  islands  to  let  the 
Chinese  come  here? — A.  Yes;  if  they  had  plenty  of  Chinese  here 
they  would  do  more  business. 

Q.  If  the  Chinese  were  not  here,  wouldn’t  the  Filipinos  do  the 
work? — A.  I don’t  think  that  the  Filipino  would  work. 

Q.  Why  not? — A.  You  see,  if  the  Filipino,  for  instance,  has  50  cents 
to-dav  he  does  not  want  to  work  again  to-morrow;  he  wants  to  spend 
that  money.  We  Chinamen  no;  we  work  very  hard. 

TESTIMONY  OF  CARLOS  PALANCA. 

Carlos  Palanca  (Chinese  name,  Chan  Quiensien),  in  response  to 
questions,  answered  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby  : 

Q.  Please  give  us  your  name,  residence,  and  occupation. — A.  Carlos 
Palanca;  residence,  Manila;  occupation,  merchant. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  here? — A.  Forty-three  years.  I came 
here  and  commenced  in  the  draper  business,  piece  goods.  At  present 
I am  in  the  sugar  and  rice  business.  I do  every  kind  of  business.  I 
am  a contractor  also. 

Q.  Do  you  do  any  work  for  the  Government,  for  the  United  States  ? — 
A.  I do  a lot  of  work  for  the  United  States. 

Q.  What  do  you  do? — A.  Get  the  coolie  laborers  out  to  the  lines, 
building  barracks. 


220 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  What  else? — A.  I am  also  a ticket  broker. 

Q.  Have  you  anything  to  do  with  carabaos?  Do  you  furnish 
transportation  of  any  kind? — A.  When  the  Americans  came  here  I 
furnished  the  carabaos  on  the  transportation  lines.  In  September, 
October,  and  November  I furnished  all  the  carabaos  and  transpor- 
tation. 

Q.  Was  that  work  done  for  the  Government  of  the  United  States? 
What  other  work  did  you  do? — A.  I used  to  give  a lot  of  information 
to  the  American  Government,  and  assisted  in  getting  houses  in  the 
commencement  for  the  troops,  furnishing  my  own  godowns  out  at  San 
Miguel  for  the  quartering  of  the  troops,  too. 

Q.  You  are  the  most  important  Chinese  merchant  here,  aren’t  you? — 
A.  Every  since  1 have  been  here,  forty-three  years.  I have  twice  been 
the  Chinese  captain. 

Q.  What  is  that? — A.  He  was  appointed  by  the  Spaniards  at  that 
time. 

Q.  That  is,  you  were  the  headman? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  many  Chinamen  have  }rou  got  under  you? — A.  Over  10,000 
men  at  a time. 

Q.  Are  you  the  captain  now? — A.  I am  not  captain  now,  as  there 
is  a consul  now.  I was  acting  consul  four  months  also. 

Q.  When  you  say  40,000  men,  do  you  mean  that  to  cover  all  the 
Chinese  who  are  in  the  Philippine  Islands? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  many  are  there  in  Manila  ? — A.  Twenty-two  or  twenty-three 
thousand  Chinese  in  Manila. 

Q.  How  many  of  them  come  here  every  year  ? — A.  Formerly  in 
the  Spanish  time  the  Chinese  that  came  here  amounted  to  between 
ten  and  twelve  thousand,  and  those  returning  to  China  between  seven 
and  eight  thousand  a year. 

Q.  Do  the  seven  or  eight  thousand  go  for  good — go  to  stay  ? — A. 
They  don't  go  for  good;  they  generally  return  here.  They  go  to 
China  in  the  sixth  moon  and  in  the  eleventh  moon  of  the  Chinese  year 
they  return  to  China.  They  come  back  again  to  Manila  in  the  Chinese 
eiglith  moon  of  the  third  after  spending  the  feast  of  the  seventh  moon 
of  the  Chinese  new  year. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  who  come  here  bring  their  families — their 
wives? — A.  Some  of  them  do  and  some  of  them  don’t. 

Q.  Do  many  of  them  bring  their  wives? — A.  In  Manila  there  are 
about  2,000  women. 

Q.  Married  women? — A.  Some  of  them  are  married;  some  of  them 
are  concubines — like  second  wives. 

Q.  They  are  allowed  to  have  more  than  one  wife  here,  are  thejT? — 
A.  Only  one  here. 

Q.  Well,  they  are  allowed  concubines? — A.  Yes;  even  the  Span- 
iards do  that.  The  Filipinos  do  that.  The  Filipinos  sometimes  have 
as  many  as  four. 

Q.  Are  there  many  children  born  here — Chinese  children? — A. 
About  100  or  200  children  here. 

Q.  Don’t  the  Chinese  marry  Filipino  women? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  they  make  good  husbands? — A.  Yes;  but  there  are  some 
exceptions,  too. 

Q.  Don’t  the}’  generally  take  care  of  their  families  and  their  wives  ? — 
A.  Yes;  I will  mention  just  now  that  there  are  about  300  Chinese 
deaths  here  during  a year. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


221 

Q.  Grown  people  or  children? — A.  Grown-up  men  and  children. 

Q.  How  many  Chinese  come  here  every  year  ? A.  Between  ten  and 
twelve  thousand  men  come  here  every  year. 

Q.  What  is  the  regulation  about  their  coming?  What  was  the  regu- 
lation under  the  Spanish  rule? — A.  They  were  at  liberty  to  come. 
There  was  a year  once,  one  time,  when  15,000  Chinese  came.  In  1803 
15,000  men  came  here. 

Q.  Did  they  have  to  pay  anything  to  get  in? — A.  In  1803,  when  I 
came  here,  there  were  only  about  20,000  Chinese.  In  that  year  15,000 
more  came  over. 

Q.  Did  they  pay  anything  to  the  Spanish  Government  or  was  it 
entirely  free? — A.  In  the  commencement  the  rule  was  that  the  new- 
comers were  allowed  to  come  free  for  a year.  After  the  expiration 
of  the  year  he  had  to  pay  $6. 

Q.  Each  man? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Did  the  women  pay  anything? — A.  When  he  was  18  years  of  age 
he  had  to  pay  $0. 

Q.  Did  the  women  pay  anything? — A.  Three  dollars. 

Q.  Nobody  paid  anything  until  they  had  been  here  a year? — A.  Not 
for  the  first  year.  Then  it  was  altered  to  six  months. 

Q.  Then  the}'  paid  after  six  months? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  do  they  pay  now,  anything? — A.  Now  they  simply  pay 
one  peseta  for  a cedula. 

Q.  They  pay  for  a cedula? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  much  do  they  pay  for  that? — A.  Twenty  cents. 

Q.  They  pay,  then,  like  anybody  else? — A.  Everybody  pays  20 
cents;  yes,  sir. 

Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  He  said  at  the  beginning  they  paid  nothing  for  one  year. — A.  In 
the  commencement  when  the  rule  was  made  they  were  exempt  for  a 
year;  then  it  was  altered  to  six  months;  then  after  1873  Governor 
Carraro  ordered  a fee  to  be  paid  as  soon  as  the  Chinese  landed. 

Q,  How  much? — A.  Six  dollars. 

Q.  Well,  when  the  Americans  came  here— that  is  to  say,  last  summer 
a year  ago — what  was  the  rule?— A.  They  had  to  pay  25  cents. 

Q.  Isn’t  that  all  they  paid  to  the  Spanish  Government?  I mean 
before  the  Americans  came,  what  was  the  rule? — A.  They  had  to 
pay  $6. 

Q.  And  when  the  Americans  came  it  was  put  down  to  20  cents;  is 
that  what  you  mean? — A.  Twenty-five  cents. 

Q.  What  do  they  pay  now? — A.  At  present  they  pay  the  cedula 
personal. 

Q.  Twenty  cents? — A.  Yes. 

By  Professor  Worcester:. 

Q.  Didn’t  they  have  to  pay  $50  apiece  to  get  in  at  one  time? — A. 
That  included  all  the  passage  money  and  all  the  food  and  duties  on 
landing,  etc.,  which  made  up  the  $50. 

Q.  I mean,  didn’t  they  have  to  pay  a tax  to  the  Government  of  $50 
at  one  time? — A.  No;  they  had  to  pay  $0,  and  another  $3  for  the 
industrial  fund,  and  another  sum  of  25  per  cent  on  something  else, 
which  amounted,  in  1889,  to  about  $9.89. 

Q.  Now  they  only  pay  20  cents? — A.  They  pay  20  cents  and  some 
registration  fee  to  the  Chinese  consulate. 


222 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  That  goes  to  the  Chinese  consulate  and  not  to  the  Government  ? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  much  do  they  pay  to  the  Chinese  consulate? — A.  Formerly, 
when  I was  acting  consul,  I got  only  25  cents.  At  present  the  new 
consul — 1 don't  know  what  amount  the  new  consul  is  collecting  from 
the  Chinese  for  registration. 

Q.  The  consul  puts  that  money  in  his  pocket? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  do  the  Chinese  do  after  they  come  here — what  labor? — 
A.  It  is  not  easy  to  mention  all  that  they  do.  However,  when  they 
get  here,  they  go  to  their  trade  or  they  go  to  these  timber  yards,  or 
are  employed  by  these  other  merchants,  or  they  are  employed  for  the 
provinces  in  order  to  go  and  carry  sugar  and  hemp,  and  in  any  kind 
of  work  generally. 

Q.  Are  they  industrious,  good  workmen? — A.  They  are  industrious; 
they  are  good  workmen. 

Q.  If  there  were  no  Chinese  here,  couldn’t  the  Filipinos  do  the  work 
that  the  Chinese  do? — A.  Formerly,  in  the  Spaniards’  time,  about 
seventy  or  eighty  years  ago,  there  were  no  Chinese  here,  and  so  the 
Filipinos  couldn't  do  anything;  they  had  no  vegetables,  they  had  no 
proper  workmen,  they  couldn't  do  anything,  and  Simon  de  Anda,  the 
governor,  asked  somebody  to  go  to  China  and  get  the  Chinese  to  come 
here  and  do  the  gardening  work  in  these  islands.  The  governor  sent 
Mantayou  de  Pico  to  go  to  Canton,  and  he  got  a great  many  Chinese. 

Q.  From  what  part  of  China  did  the  Chinese  come  to  the  Philip- 
pines?— A.  From  the  province  of  Fochien. 

Q.  What  is  the  chief  city? — A.  Foochow. 

Q.  Did  any  come  from  Amoy? — A.  Generally,  every  one  of  them 
come  from  Amoy.  They  go  to  Manila  and  Bulacan. 

Q.  Did  any  come  from  Canton? — A.  Yes;  very  few,  only  about 
3,000  from  Canton  are  here. 

Q.  They  mostly  come  from  Foochow  and  Amoy? — A.  The  capital 
is  Foochow,  the  province  is  Fochien,  but  the  people  come  from  Amoy. 

Q.  Is  Amoy  in  Fochien? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  would  be  the  probabilities  of  their  coming, 
as  to  the  numbers  that  would  come  under  the  American  flag? — A At 
present  in  the  Philippine  Islands  there  are  many  possibilities  of  mines 
silver  mines,  copper  mines — and  there  are  no  men  to  work  them. 

Q.  I ask,  what  do  you  think  of  the  probability  of  their  coming  in 
great  numbers? — A.  Then  the  Philippines  would  be  wealthy. 

Q.  Do  you  think  they  would  come  in  great  numbers  or  not? — A. 
Well,  of  course,  they  have  simply  to  pay  this  one  peseta,  and  I think 
there  will  be  a great  many  Chinese  who  will  come  here.  There  are 
about  400,000  Chinese  in  Singapore  and  all  the  districts  around  about 
Singapore,  down  to  the  Malay  States — 100,000  Chinese  there. 

Q.  How  many  hundred  thousand  do  you  think  would  come  here  from 
China? — A.  I can  not  say  how  many  hundred  thousand  will  come, 
only  that  Chinese  can  not  live  along  with  the  Filipinos,  because  the 
Filipinos  will  kill  them. 

Q.  Why  do  the  Filipinos  object  to  the  Chinese?— A.  The  Filipinos 
have  a lot  of  vices,  cockfighting,  gambling,  etc.,  and  the  Chinese  have 
come  here  to  work  and  get  their  living  in  order  to  provide  for  their 
families  in  China  and  to  lay  by  something  for  themselves. 

Q.  And  is  that  the  reason  the  Filipinos  hate  them? — A.  Yes;  the 
Filipino  does  not  like  the  Chinaman  because  he  goes  in  poor  clothing, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


223 


wears  one  coat  that  costs  him  20  cents,  and  trousers  that  cost  20  cents. 
As  the  Chinese  are  so  miserly  and  do  not  spend  their  money  they 
are  hated  by  the  Filipinos,  because  the  Filipinos  no  doubt  dress  in 
nice  clothes  and  wear  shoes  and  all  sorts  of  things,  and  don't  care  for 
work. 

Q.  How  can  the  Filipino  work  if  the  Chinese  do  all  the  work? — A. 
There  would  be  work  for  500,000  men — there  would  be  much  more  work 
for  them — because  there  is  a lot  of  land  for  agriculture  and  there  are 
no  men  to  do  the  work. 

Q.  Do  you  think  there  woidd  be  plenty  of  work  for  all? — A.  Any 
amount  of  work.  There  will  be  several  hundred  thousand  tons  of 
timber  to  be  worked  up. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  anything  about  the  mines? — A.  In  llocos  there 
are  copper  mines.  There  are  gold  mines  in  Camarines;  also  in  Cagayan. 

Q.  How  about  coal  mines? — A.  There  are  coal  mines  in  Cebu. 

Q.  What  about  copper  mines  ? — A.  There  are  copper  mines  in  llocos. 

Q.  Any  tin  mines? — A.  Tin  in  Bulacan.  There  are  some  iron  mines 
at  Angat. 

Q.  Any  more  mines?  Tell  us  all  about  them. — A.  In  Nueva  Ecija 
there  are  gold  mines,  too.  There  are  other  mines  which  have  not 
been  prospected. 

Q.  Well,  these  mines  that  you  mention;  have  they  been  worked? — 
A.  Only  the  copper  mines  have  been  worked;  but  they  do  the  mining 
work  there  as  long  as  there  are  any  men  to  do  it. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  work  in  any  of  these  mines? — A.  Formerly  when 
the  Spaniards  hired  the  Chinese  they  worked  in  the  mines.  The 
copper  mines  at  llocos  were  worked  by  Don  Tomas  Castro.  The  coal 
mine  at  Cebu  is  worked  by  Don  Rafael  Reyes. 

Q.  Do  these  people  employ  Chinese? — A.  Yes;  they  employ  Chi- 
nese. They  have  no  machinery;  they  simply  work  with  their  hands 
and  pickaxes. 

Q.  Do  3Tou  think  that  we  could  get  Chinese  to  come  over  and  go  into 
the  mining  business? — A.  With  the  employment  of  machinery  you  are 
bound  to  be  successful,  and  if  you  would  employ  Chinese  the}'  are 
bound  to  come,  too. 

Q.  Can’t  the  Filipinos  work  in  these  mines? — A.  The  few  Filipinos 
that  work,  and  get  a certain  amount  of  money  to-day,  won’t  work 
to-morrow;  they  will  stop  work  when  they  have  got  a little  money. 

Q.  Do  you  think  there  could  be  a limit  put  on  the  number  of  Chi- 
nese that  would  come  here? — A.  I don’t  think  that  a limit  should 
be  put. 

Q.  You  think  all  should  be  allowed  to  come -that  want  to  come? — 
A.  I think  they  should  be  allowed  to  come  at  present.  The  situation 
is  not  settled.  As  soon  as  everything  is  settled  and  everything  is  quiet 
and  in  w'orking  order,  there  will  be  any  amount  of  work  required.  At 
present  Smith,  Bell  & Co.  wanted  to  engage  some  Chinese  to  go  down 
to  some  of  the  out  ports,  and  they  had  to  pay  $30  to  each  man. 

Q.  To  whom? — A.  To  each  Chinese,  to  get  them  to  go  down  to 
Iloilo. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  they  had  to  pay  that  as  passage  on  the  ship  ? — A. 
No;  he  had  to  pay  that  for  each  man,  $30  a month  for  a coolie. 

Q.  Is  that  good  wages? — A.  The  wages  are  very  good;  but  then 
take  into  consideration  that  they  have  to  go  down  to  Iloilo. 

Q.  AVhat  are  the  ordinary  wages  of  Chinese  laborers  here  a day? — 


224 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


A.  During  the  loading  of  ships  they  get  from  $1.50  to  $2  a day;  but 
there  are  not  always  ships  loading  here. 

Q.  How  much  do  these  men  get  that  carry  burdens  in  the  streets 
here? — A.  Fifty  cents  to  75  cents  a day.  At  present  there  is  not 
much  work  to  be  done,  so  of  course  they  get  less.  As  soon  as  every- 
thing is  settled  there  will  be  more  work  and  they  will  be  able  to  get 
more. 

Q.  How  much  do  men  get  a day  for  driving  one  of  these  carabaos? — 
A.  At  present  one  cart  load  of  goods  to  be  brought  from  Rosario  down 
to  the  river  side  to  be  shipped  on  board  has  to  pay  a day’s  hire,  and 
that  depends  on  the  amount  of  goods  they  have. 

Q.  They  have  the  cart  and  all? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  I asked  how  much  the  driver  would  get  ? — A.  The  carabao  belongs 
to  the  man,  too. 

Q.  He  gets  a dollar  a load? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  But  the  carabaos  do  not  generally  belong  to  the  men,  do  they? — 
A.  There  are  some  people  who  simply  own  these  carabaos  and  carts 
and  hire  them  to  these  men,  and  they  get  half  of  whatever  is  earned. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  learn  any  other  language  when  they  come  here? — 
A.  Formerly,  during  the  Spanish  time,  when  they  came  here  they 
learned  Spanish  and  Tagalo.  At  present  when  they  come  here  they 
try  to  learn  English  and  Tagalo. 

Q.  Why  do  not  the  Chinese  when  they  come  here  bring  their  fam- 
ilies and  live  here  like  other  people  do? — A.  In  Manila  and  the  Phil- 
ippines generally  the  rent  and  living  are  so  dear,  and  it  is  so  much 
cheaper  to  stay  in  China  and  live  there  that  they  leave  their  families 
there. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  come  here  intending  to  make  this  their  residence 
and  stay  here  for  good? — A.  It  depends  upon  the  state  of  feeling  of 
the  Filipinos.  When  they  are  peaceable  more  of  the  Chinese  will  come 
here  and  stay  for  good,  just  as  they  do  in  Singapore  and  the  Straits; 
they  will  live  here  for  several  generations. 

Q.  What  kind  of  a man  is  the  mestizo,  half  Chinese  and  half  Fili- 
pino?— A.  In  the  commencement  a Chinaman  marries  a Tagalo  woman 
and  they  get  children  from  that  marriage,  and  their  children  marry  in 
time  and  the  descendants  of  that  marriage  are  called  mestizos. 

Q.  Do  they  make  good  citizens  ? — A.  The  mestizos  are  the  wealthiest 
Filipinos  in  the  place. 

Q.  Then  the}7  have  a good  deal  of  intellectual  talent? — A.  They 
haven’t  got  very  good  intellects. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  If  they  haven’t  got  good  intellects  how  can  they  make  money? — 
A.  They  get  profit  out  of  their  wealth — interest,  usurious  profits.  They 
give  a dollar  and  get  four  pots  of  sugar. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Haven’t  they — the  mestizos — got  more  intellect  than  the  ordi- 
nary Chinese? — A.  Those  that  have  been  educated — those  that  have 
got  good  schooling — are  much  better;  but  with  regard  to  very  good 
intellects  there  are  very  few. 

Q.  The  Chinese  that  come  here  are  generally  uneducated,  aren’t 
they? — A.  Yes;  the  well  educated  do  not  come  here;  it  is  only  those 
that  have  very  little  to  begin  with  who  come  here  to  be  clerks.  When 
I came  here  I was  only  14  years  of  age.  1 had  no  education  what- 


REPORT  <>F  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


225 


ever,  and  on  arriving  here  I had  to  learn  any  kind  of  trade  that  was 
handy.  I know  all  about  the  affairs  of  all  the  people  in  the  Philippines. 

Q.  You  have  made  a good  deal  of  money,  haven’t  you?— A.  Yes;  1 
made  a lot  of  money,  but  1 spent  a lot  of  money,  too. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Would  it  be  possible  to  adopt  measures  by  which  the  Chinese 
that  come  here  should  be  identified  and  known  to  the  Government  and 
their  whereabouts  ascertained  at  all  times? — A.  Formerly,  during  the 
Spaniards’ time,  the  Chinese  captain  managed  all  that.  A register  of 
each  man’s  name,  his  residence,  age,  and  all  his  connections,  was  kept  bv 
the  Chinese  captain.  Now,  as  there  is  a Chinese  consul,  all  these  records 
and  registries  have  been  transferred  to  this  consul.  If  anybody  wants 
to  find  out  anything  about  a man  he  can  make  inquiries  there,  and  he 
will  be  informed  where  the  man  lives,  etc.,  and  whenever  the  Govern- 
ment requires  any  man  or  wants  any  information  it  can  simply  write 
to  the  Chinese  consul  and  make  any  inquiries,  and  he  is  bound  to 
supply  the  information  needed.  During  the  Spaniards’  time  the  cap- 
tains of  the  ports,  the  chief  justices,  the  governors,  and  all  those  other 
persons,  if  they  wanted  to  find  out  anything  about  a certain  man  they 
simply  got  the  man’s  name  and  w rote  to  the  captain  of  the  Chinese, 
and  the  captain  of  the  Chinese  would  have  to  forward  the  man  up. 
The  Spaniard  only  governed  a very  small  part  of  the  Philippines.  The 
interior  has  never  been  governed  nor  brought  under  government,  and 
these  interior  people  were  never  baptized,  especially  the  Igorrotes. 
If  the  Americans  will  take  steps  peaceably  to  pacify  them,  they  will 
be  able  to  get  all  of  them.  The  Igorrotes  refused  to  be  baptized, 
because  the}'  said  they  woidd  have  to  pay  certain  fees;  that  they  would 
have  to  pay  fees  for  burials,  etc.,  to  the  priests,  and  therefore  they 
refused  to  be  baptized. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  A.  KTJENSLE. 

Manila,  July  3,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  President  Schurman  (arrived 
during  early  part  of  examination),  John  R.  MacArthur,  secretary. 

Mr.  A.  Kuensle  appeared  before  the  commission,  and  in  answer  to 
its  interrogatories  replied  as  follows  : 

By  Colonel  Denbi  : 

Q.  We  have  been  getting  some  information  from  bankers  and  mer- 
chants, particularly  on  the  question  of  finance  and  on  the  Chinese  ques- 
tion, and  we  would  be  glad  to  have  you  give  us  such  information  as  you 
may  be  able  on  these  questions,  and  in  order  that  the  ground  may  be 
covered  we  would  prefer  it  in  the  form  of  questions  and  answers. 
First,  what  is  your  name?- — A.  A.  Kuensle. 

Q.  You  live  in  Manila  ? — A.  Yes,  sir  ; I have  been  here  nearly  fifteen 
years. 

Q.  A merchant? — A.  Yes,  sir ; importer. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  your  firm? — A.  Kuensle  & Strife,  Swiss 
merchants. 


1*  c 


15 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


226 


Q.  What  lines  are  you  engaged  in  ? — A.  Importing,  exclusively. 

Q.  Will  you,  in  your  own  way,  tell  us  what  is  the  financial  condi- 
tion here  and  suggest  any  modifications  or  changes  you  think  desirable 
for  the  purposes  of  commerce  of  the  country? — A.  What  you  mean  is 
about  the  currency  ? That  is  a very  difficult  question.  I think  people 
have  been  working  and  writing  on  it  for  years  and  can  not  come  to  a 
conclusion.  What  importers  want  is  a stable  exchange.  These  dollars 
here  fluctuate.  When  I came  here  exchange  was  4 shillings,  and  it  has 
gone  down  as  far  as  1 and  10  pence  at  four  months.  This  has  caused 
loss  to  the  importer.  As  far  as  we  are  concerned  we  are  unanimous 
on  that.  I should  say  if  we  had  a gold  currency  it  would  be  a benefit. 
The  exporters  are  against  it.  They  seem  to  be  afraid  that  the  price 
of  produce  will  have  to  lie  reduced,  or,  I should  say,  their  idea  is  if  they 
pay  §16  Mexican  for  a picul  of  hemp  they  coidd  only  give  §8  gold  for 
the  same,  and  that  §8  gold  will  not  go  as  far  as  §16  Mexican.  But,  as  far 
as  I can  see,  the  currency  is  not  what  makes  the  price  of  produce,  but 
the  demand.  I have  seen  the  price  of  hemp  in  the  eighties  up  to  §18, 
a very  high  price,  and  exchange  was  three  and  six  at  the  time,  perhaps 
more;  so  that  shows  it  is  not  exchange  which  makes  market  prices. 
Tobacco  for  another  thing.  I do  not  see  how  it  will  affect  that  because 
most  is  used  here. 

Q.  Do  they  export  cigars  to  Europe? — A.  Cigars  are  exported 
everywhere.  I believe  the  bulk  arc  exported  to  China  and  Australia, 
very  little  to  America  on  account  of  the  high  tariff. 

Q.  How  about  sugar?— A.  Mostly  to  America;  second,  to  London. 
There  is  another  country — Java,  for  instance,  which  has  a gold  currency 
and  they  export  sugar.  If  one  country  can  export  on  the  gold  basis,  I do 
not  see  why  we  can’t.  1 believe  the  great  objection  of  exporters  to  the 
gold  currency  is  the  difference  in  methods  here  and  in  Java.  In  Java 
there  are  very  big  mills,  in  the  center,  say,  of  a province,  and  all  send 
their  sugar  there  to  be  milled,  whereas  here  everything  is  on  a limited 
scale.  Every  grower  of  sugar  has  his  own  mill,  which  is  a matter  of 
great  expense,  and  some  do  it  in  a very  primitive  style,  and,  too,  means 
of  communication  here  are  the  worst  to  be  found  in  the  world.  All 
this  adds  a great  deal  to  the  cost,  but  it  would  simplify  things  if  they 
would  do  as  they  do  in  Java. 

Q.  Are  you  familiar  with  the  Japanese  monetary  system? — A. 
No,  sir. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  adopting  a fixed  price  on  gold  ? The 
Japanese  have  ft  fixed  at  1 to  82. — A.  I think  it  a poor  thing.  I 
should  have  one  or  the  other.  I do  not  know  how  it  works.  They 
have  something  like  that  in  India. 

Q.  What  ratio  would  you  give? — A.  I am  afraid  I can  not  say.  It 
is  too  difficult  a question. 

Q.  The  importing  trade,  as  it  is,  labors  under  a disadvantage  here, 
buying  for  gold  and  selling  for  silver,  doesn’t  it?— A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  How  do  you  manage  about  prices? — A.  We  calculate  prices  on 
the  basis  of  exchange.  The  prices  are  ruled  by  the  demand,  borne- 
times  if  the  exchange  is  very  low  and  business  also  bad  you  will  have 
to  get  rid  of  your  articles  at  a loss.  We  can't  make  the  prices.  If 
the  market  is  short  of  a certain  article,  for  instance,  we  can  make 
money. 

Q.  You  have  put  your  prices  up  recently,  haven't  you? — A.  Cer- 
tainly. We  had  to  put  the  prices  up;  but  1 should  say,  in  most 
instances,  the  quality  of  the  goods  is  worse. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


227 

Q.  Has  the  import  trade  increased  recently  ? — A.  There  are  no 
proper  statistics.  I should  say  that  during  the  past  few  years  imports 
have  fallen  off. 

Q.  Can  the  export  trade  increase  without  the  import  trade  increas- 
ing?— A.  They  go  hand  in  hand. 

Q.  Then,  therefore,  the  import  trade  has  increased? — A.  Certainly; 
if  you  take  a certain  period.  Within  the  last  three  years  everything 
has  been  at  a standstill;  but  say  before  1895,  for  ten  years  before  then 
imports  increased  considerably. 

Q.  What  is  the  condition  of  business  now? — A.  Absolutely  nothing 
at  all  doing. 

Q.  But  if  we  had  peace? — A.  It  would  be  fair  for  exporters  and 
importers,  because  for  the  last  three  years  scarcely  any  goods  have 
been  sent  to  the  provinces,  and  they  must  be  out  of  everything. 

Q.  I understand  that  now  the}7  have  opened  the  ports  and  allow 
goods  to  go  in? — A.  1 have  seen  it  in  the  paper. 

Q.  Do  you  regard  that  as  a good  thing  ? — A.  Certainly,  although  I 
should  say  the  blockading  of  the  ports  has  been  very  impolitic.  If 
they  had  done  the  thing1  at  the  beginning  and  blockaded  all  the  provinces 
without  letting  them  have  any  stuff  it  would  have  been  better,  because 
when  the  war  started  steamers  went  anywhere  and  afterwards  ports 
were  closed,  and  then  opened  later,  and  some  ports  have  been  open  to 
some  firms  and  not  to  others. 

Q.  IIow  would  it  suit  you  to  have  a decimal  currency  ? — A.  We  have 
the  decimal  currency. 

Q.  You  have  12£  cent  pieces,  reals? — A.  There  are  no  such  pieces 
now.  There  used  to  be  25-cent  pieces,  reals,  half  reals,  but  now  they 
are  all  10,  20,  50,  and  a dollar.  It  is  the  language  and  habit  of  the 
people  to  speak  of  reals,  etc.,  but  they  are  not  here  now. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  introduce  the  American  cent  piece  on  a silver 
dollar? — A.  I should  certainly  unify  everything. 

Q.  Have  you  got  enough  copper  currency? — A.  At  present,  no. 
Several  years  ago  there  was  a great  rise  in  copper,  and  the  copper  went 
away.  They  sent  copper  out  again  from  Spain  so  as  to  meet  the  scar- 
city, and  after  the  war,  when  the  exchange  on  Spain  was  so  very  high — 
exchange  on  Barcelona  was  110  or  115;  that  is,  115  Manila  dollars  for 
100  in  Spain,  and  with  the  war  it  went  up  to  170 — the  soldiers  took 
back  the  coppers  and  made  a good  profit.  They  have  gathered  up  the 
coppers  and  exported  them  to  Spain.  That  is  why  we  are  out. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  introduce  bank  bills,  ones  and  twos? — A.  I 
should  say,  a good  idea  to  a limited  extent. 

Mr.  Schurman.  I have  been  away  in  the  south  and  have  just  returned, 
and  have  not  fallen  in  with  the  investigations  now  being  pursued  by 
my  colleagues.  I am  leaving  for  the  States  in  two  or  three  days.  I 
am  glad  I dropped  in  to  hear  you,  but  I am  not  sufficiently  in  touch 
to  ask  you  any  questions  just  at  present. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  about  the  Chinese?  Do  you  do  business  with  them? — A. 
Almost  exclusively. 

Q.  Do  they  pay? — A.  They  used  to  be  bad;  that  was,  of  course, 
with  bad  laws  and  bad  courts,  because  we  had  no  means  of  punishing 
them;  but  through  the  great  losses  we  have  sustained  and  those  of 
other  importers  also  the  system  has  come  down  to  a cash  basis. 


228 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  As  to  their  commercial  integrity,  what  have  you  to  say? — A. 
M ith  good  laws  they  would  be  good  people. 

Q.  I understand  they  do  almost  the  entire  business;  that  the  retail 
business  is  in  the  hands  of  the  Chinese  to  a great  extent  ? — A.  Yes, 
sir;  and  also  the  wholesale  trade  for  the,  provinces.  The  firms  here, 
with  very  few  exceptions,  only  sell  in  Manila  and  to  the  Chinese,  who 
are  the  intermediaries  for  the  provinces.  They  sell  wholesale  to  the 
countrymen. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  do  any  agricultural  work? — A.  Not  much,  because 
the  Indians  in  some  places  are  against  it.  The  vegetable  gardeners  are 
Chinese.  It  is  the  complaint  that  owners  can't  get  on  well  with  big 
plantations,  because  they  haven't  Chinese  labor. 

Q.  Was  this  due  to  a prohibition  on  the  part  of  Spain? — A.  No;  it 
was  due  to  resistance  from  the  Filipinos  and  from  the  priests,  who 
were  the  bosses  in  the  provinces. 

Q.  What  race  does  the  ordinary  labor — the  carrying  and  hauling, 
and  all  the  rough  labor — here  in  Manila? — A.  Certainly  the  Filipinos 
do  it  now,  but  not  to  the  satisfaction  of  anybody,  because  the}r  will 
quit  work  as  soon  as  they  get  a few  dollars  ahead. 

Q.  Why,  I see  the  Chinese  doing  this  work. — A.  You  mean  here  in 
town.  There  have  been  a lot  of  Chinese  here  in  the  past  few  months, 
although  I understand  they  are  not  allowed  to  come. 

Q.  The  military  authorities  have  not  adopted  any  strict  rule  about 
it.  What  would  you  think  the  effect  would  be  upon  the  country  to 
have  unlimited  immigration? — A.  A good  thing.  I would  allow  all 
that  want  to  to  come,  because  if  American  capital  comes  here  they  will 
certainly  want  Chinese  labor. 

Q.  Do  }’ou  take  into  consideration  the  fact  which  I think  is  almost 
notorious,  that  the  Chinese  are  very  fond  of  the  American  Govern- 
ment, very  anxious  to  go  where  the  American  flag  is  raised? — A.  I 
think  they  are  anxious  to  go  to  any  country  where  a civilized  govern- 
ment exists. 

Q.  We  are  so  close,  if  we  allowed  unrestricted  immigration,  don't 
you  think  we  would  be  swamped? — A.  At  the  present  time  there  might 
be  too  many,  but  as  soon  as  the  provinces  are  opened,  and  the  system 
of  government  changes,  1 don't  think  there  will  be  too  many. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  letting  them  come  in  under  the  contract 
system;  say  hire  500  to  work  a given  number  of  years  on  a plantation 
and  then  send  them  back? — A.  That  is  a question  1 have  never  studied, 
but  I should  say  for  the  plantation  it  might  be  just  as  well  to  have 
them  come  over  on  their  own  account.  It  might  secure  them  cheaper. 

Q.  But  that  system  would  prevent  unlimited  immigration  ? — A.  I do 
not  object  to  that.  I should  let  them  in. 

Q.  You  know  in  the  United  States  we  were  obliged  to  pass  an  exclu- 
sion act  because  the  Pacific  coast  would  have  been  overrun  with  Chi- 
nese?— A.  In  my  opinion  you  must  look  at  it  differently  in  a country 
where  there  is  good  white  labor  and  in  a country  where  white  labor 
can  not  exist.  In  America  a white  man  can  do  agricultural  work,  and 
there  I should  sa}T  keep  him  out,  because  the  Chinese  will  work  too 
cheaply  for  the  white  man  to  compete  with  him. 

Q.  Now,  you  come  right  down  to  the  proposition,  and  that  is — won’t 
the  Filipinos  do  the  work  if  the  Chinese  are  not  here? — A.  I do  not 
think  so. 

Q.  Why  ? — A.  Because  they  are  indolent,  and  as  a rule  if  they  have 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


229 

a few  dollars  they  will  say,  I am  going  on  a holiday,  you  had  better 
look  out  for  somebody  else.”  The  Chinaman  is  happy  in  the  thought 
of  making  money  and  never  leaves  off  working. 

Q.  Do  they  go  out  of  the  country  after  getting  money? — A.  Oh, 
sometimes  they  go  home,  but  they  are  more  happy  in  a civilized  country 
than  in  their  own. 

Q.  Then,  your  idea  is  to  allow  them  to  come  in? — A.  Certainly, 
and  I think  it  will  benefit  the  entire  country.  For  importers  and 
exporters  it  would  not  have  been  possible  to  do  any  work  at  all;  in 
fact,  the  trade  of  the  islands,  small  as  it  is  compared  to  what  it  might 
be,  has  depended  entirely  upon  the  Chinese,  because  on  one  side  they 
sell  to  the  men  in  the  interior,  and  barter  with  the  natives  for  produce 
in  exchange  for  imports — they  go  into  the  interior;  they  have  opened 
up  communication;  you  will  see  the  Chinese  hawker  everywhere;  he 
will  go  into  the  last  nook  and  corner,  and  he  will  offer  his  goods  and 
sell  them,  because  if  the  Filipino  sees  a thing  he  must  have  it.  The 
Chinaman  is  the  man  to  develop  the  business.  A European  can  not 
work  outside  here  for  any  length  of  time. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  What  do  you  think  would  be  the  political  effect  of  letting  in  the 
Chinese?  Don't  the  Filipinos  object  to  it? — A.  The  Filipinos  and 
Chinese  get  along  very  well.  Up  to  the  time  the  rebellion  started 
they  were  great  friends,  because  the  Chinese  get  into  the  ways  of 
the  Filipino.  Every  Chinaman  speaks  the  language  and  the  native 
dialects.  They  get  well  into  the  ways  of  the  Filipino  and  get  on 
splendidly.  In  one  province,  Batangas,  there  are  no  Chinamen, 
because  they  won't  allow  them  there,  but  in  other  provinces  I do  not 
believe  there  will  be  any  difficulty. 

Q.  Is  it  not  true  that  the  insurgents  came  out  demanding  the  expul- 
sion of  the  monks  and  the  Chinese? — A.  That  came  from  these  fight- 
ing Filipinos;  they  are  not  worth  much,  because  the  w hole  movement 
is  not  the  patriotic  movement  of  the  Indians,  for  they  have  no  idea  of 
a nation.  They  are  just  a few  rich  meztizoswho  are  in  it  with  a view 
of  making  money. 

Q.  Are  they  making  any  money  out  of  it? — A.  They  did  not  expect 
things  to  turn  out  as  they  did.  They  expected  to  get  positions  as 
governors  of  provinces,  etc.,  as  the  Spaniards  did  The  Filipinos  and 
the  Filipino  government  would  be  worse  than  under  the  Spaniards. 

Q.  Do  you  know  any  people  of  worth  wrho  are  backing  the  insur- 
gents?— A.  They  are  on  lioth  sides.  At  the  beginning  a great  many 
were  behind  them.  They  are  a dangerous  people — those  half-castes 
are  the  very  worst  to  deal  with. 

Q.  Does  that  apply  to  the  Spanish  and  Chinese  half-castes? — A.  I 
should  say  everyone  ? 

Q.  Down  south  in  the  Visayas  the  situation  is  very  encouraging? — 
A.  They  never  wanted  to  fight  from  the  beginning. 

Q.  Only  those  who  are  forced  to  fight  go  in  with  the  insurgents,  but 
the  majority  want  to  remain  neutral.  They  want  food  and  protection, 
and  as  we  settle  things  in  Luzon  they  will  accept? — A.  Outside  of  the 
provinces  occupied  by  the  Tagalogs,  which  are  the  provinces  of 
Manila,  Cavite,  Bulacan,  Laguna,  etc.,  the}"  are  the  worst  people  and 
and  have  caused  the  trouble  which  exists  throughout  the  Archipelago; 
they  caused  the  trouble  in  Albay  and  Cebu,  and  Iloilo,  also.  1 think 
it  wras  a great  mistake  on  the  part  of  General  Otis  not  to  occupy  Iloilo 


230 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


sooner.  They  would  have  been  only  too  glad  to  accept  the  Americans, 
and  everybody  told  him  so.  If  he  had  only  been  two  days  sooner — the 
Spaniards  wanted  him  to  come  down  with  troops  and  it  would  have 
been  an  easy  task.  The  Indians  are  easily  ruled,  but  you  must  always 
have  your  thumb  on  them.  As  soon  as  they  think  you  are  lacking  in 
vigilance,  up  they  go  again. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  From  that  you  would  infer  they  are  not  capable  of  self- 
government'1 — A.  Certainly  not.  Thev  would  have  big  lights  among 
themselves. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  Could  they  govern  themselves  in  the  provinces? — A.  No;  never. 
Those  who  would  govern  would  simply  squeeze  the  people,  and  after 
a while  dissatisfaction  and  internal  squabbles  would  come  on.  They 
are  certainly  unfit  for  self-government. 

Q.  Are  they  capable  of  education  in  that  line? — A.  Certainly.  I 
believe  there  are  few  natives  so  intelligent  as  the  Filipinos,  but  a very 
small  percentage  have  any  education  so  far.  It  might  be  a possibility 
some  thirty  or  forty  }'ears  from  now  for  them  to  know  what  self-gov- 
ernment means. 

Q.  Have  the}*  ever  had  an}'  example  of  good  government  here  ? — A. 
No;  it  has  gone  from  bad  to  worse. 

Q.  So  that  they  will  need  both  example  and  experience? — A.  Yes, 
sir. 

Q.  Do  you  think  they  will  come  to  what  Japan  is?— A.  I think  they 
are  intelligent  enough  for  that.  Of  course  Japan  was  never  dominated 
by  anybody.  I should  sa}r  if  America  gives  them  a good  example  and 
the  country  thrives  I do  not  think  they  would  want  anything  else. 

Q.  What  would  be  your  idea  of  the  kind  of  government  America 
should  give  them — a colonial  government  ? — A.  If  it  could  be  done,  a 
government  on  the  British  style,  the  same  as  the  British  govern  India 
or  the  Straits  Settlements.  It  has  been  proven  that  countries  thrive 
under  such  government. 

Q.  How  long  have  j’ou  been  out  here? — A.  Fifteen  years. 

Q.  Where  did  you  learn  your  English  ? — In  England  and  Australia. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  A question  or  two  about  the  courts — what  would  be  your  idea  of 
establishing  a United  States  court  ? — A.  We  are  all  hoping  for  that.  I 
am  sure  nobody  would  like  to  go  before  this  superior  court.  We 
have  the  same  objection  here  as  foreigners  have  in  Japan. 

Q.  Japan  yesterday  assumed  exclusive  charge  of  the  courts — outside 
jurisdiction  is  gone.  You  think  the  government  of  the  United  States 
ought  to  establish  a United  States  court  in  which  the  language  should 
be  English,  and  in  which  the  foreigner  should  have  the  right  to  sue 
and  be  sued? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  if  he  were  sued  in  a Filipino  court,  he  could  transfer  his 
case  to  a United  States  court? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  the  mercantile  opinion  agrees  with  you? — A.  Yes,  sir.  The 
Europeans  are  comparatively  small  in  number,  but  with  the  establish- 
ment of  a good  government  and  the  consequent  influx  of  more  people 
it  would  be  most  desirable. 

Q.  How  about  a mixed  tribunal? — A.  I should  say  there  is  always 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


231 


a Sort  of  rivalry.  There  is  a great  need  of  a good  police  force 

here . 

Q.  Let  me  ask  you  in  that  connection,  how  would  it  do  to  establish  a 
municipal  government  ? Have  a mayor  and  common  council  appointed 
bv  the  governor-general  now,  and  afterwards  elected  by  the  peo- 
ple  —A.  It  was  a sort  of  municipal  government  here  formerly.  1 

should  say  in  every  civilized  town  improvements  ought  to  be  made, 
and  we  ought  to  have  a civil  government. 

Q.  I mean,  of  course,  now— ultimately  there  will  be?— A.  1 do  not 
see  the  use  of  it  now. 

By  President  Schurman: 

Q.  You  would  leave  things  with  the  military  authorities  for  the 

present? — A.  Yes,  sir.  . 

With  expressions  of  thanks  for  the  information  g'iven,  the  meeting 

adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  DR.  SIMON  FLEXNER  AND  DR.  L.  F.  BARKER. 

Manila,  July  3,  1899 , 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair)  and  Secretary  John  R.  Mac- 

Arthur.  , 

Dr.  Simon  Flexner  and  Dr.  L.  F.  Barker  appeared  before  the 

commission.  . . . 

Dr.  Flexner,  in  response  to  the  interrogatories  of  the  commission, 

testified  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  kindly  give  us  your  name,  residence,  and  occupation  ?— 
A.  Simon  Flexner,  professor  of  pathology;  residence  after  October  1 
will  be  “Medical  Department,  University  of  Pennsylvania,  Philadel- 
phia.” At  present  my  address  is  Baltimore,  Md. 

Q.  You  have  been  in  the  Philippines  some  time  engaged  in  medical 
investigation? — A.  About  two  months. 

Q.  Will  you.  in  your  own  way,  give  us  any  information  with  regard 
to  the  climate,  the  hygiene,  and  the  maladies  that  prevail  here,  and 
anything  else  of  interest  to  enable  us  to  make  our  report?— A.  Shall  1 
speak  of  those  which  are  general,  or  those  which  arc  more  particularly 

maladies  of  the  natives?  ... 

Q.  Of  everything.  Take  your  own  course. — A.  1 would  like  to 
leave  the  question  of  climate  and  hygiene  to  Dr.  Barker.  I think  he 

has  given  it  more  thought  than  I.  , . 

Q.  We  would  like  to  know  particularly  what  effect  the  climate  and 
maladies  would  have  on  Americans  coming  here,  whether  they  could 
endure  the  climate  or  not,  and  what  course  of  living  perhaps  they 
ought  to  adopt,  and  what  maladies  they  would  have  to  encounter.— A. 
We  have  been  associated  so  closely  in  our  work  here,  and  have  dis- 
cussed matters  so  freely,  I am  afraid  I shall  say  things  that  Dr.  Barker 
might  also  wish  to  speak  of.  With  respect  to  the  maladies  that  prevail : 
In  our  experience  we  have  found  that  the  natives  and  the  Europeans 
are  subject  to  some  diseases  in  common,  and  that  the  nati\  es  appaiently 
are  subject  to  some  diseases  which  the  Europeans,  if  at  all,  are  little  sub- 


232 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


jeet  to.  The  diseases  that  prevail  generally  are  the  fevers,  including 
typhoid  and  malarial  fever  and  a rather  more  indefinite  fever  that  may 
be  spoken  of  as  “dengue.”  Then,  besides  those  fevers  there  is  a group 
of  maladies  the  general  form  of  which  are  intestinal — the  general  mani- 
festation of  which  is  associated  with  the  intestines.  They  go  under 
the  name  of  diarrhea  and  dysentery.  The  former  is  very  widely  dis- 
seminated, but  not  necessarily  severe.  It  affects  the  Europeans  and 
the  natives,  but  the  Europeans  more  than  the  natives.  Dysentery  is 
also  widely  disseminated,  and  is  prevalent  both  among  the  natives  and 
Europeans,  but  also  perhaps  more  prevalent  among  Europeans  than 
natives.  Both  of  these  diseases  probably  are  not  more  prevalent 
among  Europeans,  but  assume  a more  virulent  form  in  Europeans  than 
in  natives.  The  dysentery  diseases  are  the  most  severe  and  most  fatal 
ones  in  our  experience  here  in  the  army  hospital.  It  is  possible  to  dis- 
criminate several  forms  which  have  independent  causes,  but  whether 
the  cause  means  much  at  present  with  respect  to  the  natural  history  of 
the  disease,  its  consequences,  etc.,  I think  it  is  too  early  to  say.  In 
our  experience  the  dysentery  diseases  have  arisen  but  to  a small 
extent  in  this  immediate  neighborhood.  Most  have  been  in  men  who 
had  been  exposed  to  rather  severe  conditions,  both  as  to  living  and 
with  respect  to  comforts,  and  particularly  with  respect  to  drinking 
water  which  they  had  been  able  to  obtain;  but  we  have  found 
in  studying  the  dysenteries  that  there  appears  here  a form  of 
dysentery,  or  rather  a form  of  intestinal  disease,  that  runs  a much 
more  serious,  severe,  and  rapid  course  than  any  we  are  familiar 
with  at  home,  excepting  of  course  that  form  of  intestinal  disease 
resulting  from  food  poisoning  or  other  poisoning.  For  example, 
we  have  had  come  under  our  observation  in  the  hospital  a number 
of  instances  of  men  brought  in  suffering  from  intestinal  diseases  who 
died  within  forty-eight  hours,  or  three  or  four  or  five  days;  and  the 
autopsies  in  these  cases  have  been  different  from  those  in  ordinary 
dysentery  and  much  more  extensive,  involving  parts  which  ordinary 
dysentery  leaves  unaffected,  and,  as  far  as  we  discovered,  have  differ- 
ent causes.  We  have  thought,  at  least  I have,  as  I have  studied  that 
group  rather  more  particularly,  that  there  is  a bare  possibility  that 
some  of  those  cases  have  been  due  to  errors  of  diet.  AVe  have  the 
history  of  some  men  who  have  come  into  the  city  after  having  been 
on  the  firing  line  for  some  time  who  overindulged  in  both  meat  and 
drink,  and  who  were  taken  suddenly  with  these  symptoms  and  died  in 
twenty-four  hours.  Whether  that  is  an  accident  that  might  happen 
anyway  from  food  poisoning  I can't  say.  We  have  had  a number  of 
instances  in  which  these  dy  sente  ry  conditions  have  run  a very  long  course, 
and  when  autopsies  were  made  the  lesions  were  extremely  extensive. 
I think,  therefore,  with  respect  to  dysentery  diseases  it  is  clear  that 
here  they  are  a very  severe  consideration.  Whether  it  depends  upon 
a peculiar  cause  in  each  case  or  whether  it  is  due  to  general  causes 
respecting  a large  number,  the  climate,  temperature,  and  so  on,  I think 
it  is  too  early  to  say. 

We  have  been  very  much  interested  here  in  the  outbreak  of  “beri- 
beri.'5 The  chief  outbreak  has  been  at  Cavite,  in  connection  with  the 
prisoners  there,  and  we  have  had  opportunity  of  study  before  and  after 
death.  There  have  been,  I think,  up  to  the  present  time  more  than 
200  cases  of  the  disease  among  the  1,000  or  1,200  prisoners  there.  The 
number  of  deaths  has  been  between  30  and  TO,  at  least  that  was  the 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


233 


number  on  last  Friday.  There  were  3 deaths  last  Saturday  morning. 
That  disease  thus  far  has  confined  itself  entirely  to  the  natives;  the 
Europeans  have  not  suffered,  but  on  inquiry  we  find  that  it  has  appeared 
among  the  Europeans  in  times  gone  by;  that  some  of  the  Spaniards 
developed  it,  and  that  at  one  time  it  prevailed  among  the  troops,  show- 
ing that  it  is  a disease  that  may  attack  Europeans,  but  less  likely  than 
the  natives. 

Q.  What  are  the  characteristics  of  this  disease? — A.  It  appears  in 
several  forms — in  what  is  known  as  the  Gedematous  form,  in  which  the 
person’s  body  becomes  swollen  ;uid  dropsical.  Then  in  the  paralytic 
form,  in  which  the  loss  of  power  in  the  legs  and  arms  is  the  chief 
symptom.  Then  the  mixed  form,  where  both  are  combined.  The 
most  fatal  form  of  the  disease  is  probably  the  cedematous  form.  It 
runs  a chronic  course ; lasts  days,  weeks,  or  even  months,  but  rarely 
acute.  It  has  been  believed  that  the  disease  has  to  do  with  unfavora- 
ble hygienic  conditions,  particularly  with  conditions  of  squalor,  and 
conditions  under  which  the  food  is  improper  in  kind  and  insufficient 
in  amount,  and  it  seems  clear  that  proper  food  and  good  surroundings 
diminish  the  danger  of  the  disease.  Some  think  the  cause  can  be 
directly  traced  to  the  food,  but  the  consensus  of  opinion  is  that  it  has 
a better  opportunity  to  develop  in  persons  reduced  by  improper  food 
and  unfavorable  surroundings,  although,  on  the  other  hand,  it  attacks 
especially  persons  in  the  prime  of  life,  apparently  in  the  best  physical 
condition;  persons  under  10  are  the  ones  generally  attacked.  Among 
the  natives  here  it  is  undoubtedly  a very  serious  disease.  It  is  appar- 
ently constantly  present.  We  have  met  with  it  in  the  hospitals  here, 
and  the  outbreak  at  Cavite  shows  that  it  may  assume  alarming  propor- 
tions; but  it  is  apparently  a disease  Europeans  need  fear  very  little  if 
conditions  of  hygiene  are  favorable. 

Q.  Are  there  any  cases  in  Manila? — A.  Among  the  natives,  yes, 
sir.  Those  cases  in  the  San  Juan  Hospital  are  all  from  Manila.  We 
have  seen  there  20  cases  in  our  stay  of  two  months,  but  we  have  not 
followed  them  very  closely.  It  is  proper  to  remark  that,  inasmuch 
as  the  disease  is  recognized  as  prevalent,  other  diseases  go  by  the 
name  of  beriberi  which  are  not  beriberi.  I should  not  like  to  have 
publicity  given  that  statement,  because  it  is  a question  we  are  still 
studying,  and  hope  to  find  out  whether  it  is  true  or  not  after  making- 
some  examinations;  but  we  have  had  autopsies  upon  so-called  cases  in 
the  San  Juan  Hospital  in  which  the  lesions  we  could  discover  were 
not  closed,  w hich  is  peculiar  to  beriberi.  They  are  all  persons  who 
were  subject  to  tuberculosis,  and  had  it  in  a severe  form,  and  the  sus- 
picion w-as  always  in  our  mind  whether  there  may  not  be  some  error 
as  to  just  what  symptoms  constitute  beriberi.  In  the  paralytic  form 
there  is  a great  deal  of  trouble  in  locomotion,  and  in  the  final  stages 
of  some  of  these  wasting  diseases  there  is  also  dropsy;  and  inasmuch 
as  those  two  groups  of  symptoms — the  dropsy  and  the  error  in  loco- 
motion— are  also  the  cardinal  symptoms  of  beriberi,  it  would  be  easy, 
if  one  did  not  depend  upon  the  autopsy,  to  confound  the  two  troubles. 
I do  not  think  that  anatomical  examinations  have  been  made  in  the 
hospital,  and  I think  it  possible  that  they  have  overexaggerated  the 
prevalence  in  and  around  Manila  of  this  disease;  but  we  may  change 
our  mind  after  our  examinations,  because  the  lesions  are  sufficiently 
characteristic  for  us  to  make  that  out. 

Tuberculosis  is  apparently  very  common  among  the  natives.  That 


234 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


has  come  out  in  our  autopsies  which  we  have  undertaken  hoping  to 
find  beriberi,  but  there  are  other  evidences  which  one  sees  in  the  hip 
joints  and  hunch  backs  which  are  fairly  common  even  as  compared 
with  America;  and  then  upon  inquiry  among  the  natives  and  the  phy- 
sicians at  the  San  Juan  Hospital  we  have  been  told  that  tuberculosis 
is  common,  and  we  have  seen  it  clinically  in  many  cases  in  the  hospital. 
I should  think  that  the  way  the}'  live  would  be  very  favorable  to  the 
propagation  of  tuberculosis,  and  of  course  from  thTc  hygienic  stand- 
point tuberculosis  is  the  most  important  disease  that  prevails.  It  claims 
the  most  victims,  and  it  is  a much  more  distressing  disease  eventually 
than  any  of  the  great  plagues,  such  as  cholera,  etc.,  as  a cause  of  infirm- 
ity and  death  among  all  races  of  people.  The  question  which  comes  in 
my  mind  is  whether,  if  large  numbers  of  Europeans  should  try  to  live 
under  conditions  anything  similar  to  that  of  the  natives,  they  would 
not  find  tuberculosis  one  of  the  most  serious  diseases.  Large  numbers 
of  individuals  closely  congregated,  houses  badly  lighted  and  badly 
ventilated,  moist  air,  carelessness  in  expectorations  and  excrements, 
those  are  conditions  which,  more  than  any  others,  promote  the  preser- 
vation and  dissemination  of  the  bacilli,  and  practically  everybody  is 
subject  to  tuberculosis,  and,  as  a matter  of  fact,  very  few  people  go 
through  life  without  developing  it  in  some  form  or  other.  Most  people 
do  not  know  it,  however.  So  that  disease  seems  to  me  an  important  one 
with  respect  to  the  hygiene  of  this  locality.  Besides  being  disseminated 
by  excrements  and  expectorations,  it  can  also  be  disseminated  through 
the  milk  derived  from  tubercular  animals  and  also  the  consumption 
of  flesh  of  tubercular  animals.  But  experience  has  proven  that  milk 
is  a very  important  source  of  infection,  so  that  it  is  the  custom  in  the 
United  States  to  make  examinations  with  reference  to  the  existence  of 
tuberculosis  in  herds,  and  it  is  a matter  that  can  not  always  be  decided 
by  a mere  inspection  of  the  animal.  They  have  now  a test — the  intro- 
duction of  so-called  “ tuberculi”  into  the  body  of  the  animal — that  aids 
in  this  matter,  and  we  were  very  glad  to  see  that  they  had  started  an 
inspection  here  at  the  slaughterhouse  of  animals  before  they  were 
slaughtered,  and  of  the  flesh  afterwards.  I think  too  much  stress  can  not 
be  laid  upon  the  benefits  to  be  derived  from  this. 

Q.  You  say  that  is  done  here?— A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  On  that  particular  point  would  you  consider  that  our  men,  our 
soldiers  and  our  civilians,  would  be  in  more  danger  of  tuberculosis 
here  than  at  home?— A.  I hope  Dr.  Barker  will  discuss  that.  He 
will  speak  to  you  about  malarial  and  typhoid  fever,  and  I am  of  the 
opinion  he  has  come  to  think  that  Europeans  are  perhaps  less  resistant. 
It  is  hard  to  give  definite  statements  as  to  what  the  factors  are  that 
determine  the  severity  of  infection  in  any  case,  but  it  is  generally 
believed  that,  given  a disease  to  which  all  persons  are  subject,  as  with 
tuberculosis,  and  to  which  all  persons  are  exposed,  which  has  been 
proven  by  the  fact  that  all  persons  have  it — there  is  a German 
expression,  ‘"Everyone  in  the  end  has  slight  tuberculosis” — if  that 
is  true,  and  it  seems  likely,  the  progress  of  the  disease  would  depend, 
at  least  in  part,  upon  the  capacity  of  resistance,  and  then  any  set  of 
conditions  that  would  reduce  his  capacity  of  resistance;  and  if  there 
are  general  causes  the  person  affected  would  develop  the  disease  more 
rapidly  than  otherwise.  That  is  shown  by  the  climatic  conditions  upon 
tuberculosis  in  America.  They  send  anyone  who  develops  it  in  the 
lowlands  to  the  mountains — to  the  Adirondacks — and  if  they  go  in 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


235 


time  they  get  well;  and  it  is  true  they  do  not  get  well  if  the}'  do  not 
seek  change  in  the  climatic  conditions. 

The  question  of  the  regulation  of  prostitution  is  a very  important 
one  to  us — it  is  a matter  which  interests  the  commission. 

Q.  It  is  also  important  to  the  lawmaker,  and  we  would  like  to  hear 
you  on  the  subject. — A.  The  soldiers  here  have  suffered  severely  from 
exposure,  and  it  would  seem  something  ought  to  be  done.  Now,  as  I 
understand  the  matter,  under  Spanish  rule — while  I am  not  sure  there 
was  any  actual  license — there  was  a cursory  sort  of  examination,  and 
it  is  still  in  force,  although  I do  not  think  as  effectually,  but  at  the 
leper  hospital  they  have  a physician  whose  business  is  the  examination 
of  prostitutes.  Those  who  are  found  diseased  are  detained  there.  We 
have  seen  a considerable  number  who  have  been  detained  there.  It  is 
pretty  hard  to  effect  laws  covering  this  matter  even  in  the  United 
States;  whether  it  would  be  easier  here  I do  not  know.  Venereal 
diseases  arc  undoubtedly  quite  prevalent  among  prostitutes.  Whether 
they  are  more  or  less  prevalent  among  the  natives  in  general  than 
among  us  I hardly  know. 

Q.  Are  they  not  more  common  in  tropical  climates? — A.  It  is  the 
general  impression  that  they  are. 

Q.  You  know,  of  course,  this  is  a very  great  question  with  the 
English  Government.  It  appears  that  in  India  a majority  of  the 
troops  are  suffering  from  some  form  of  venereal  trouble. 

What  do  you  think,  Doctor,  troubles  the  soldiers  [to  Dr.  Barker] 
most  here  ? 

Dr.  Barker.  Soft  shankers  and  gonorrhoea,  and  a great  deal  of 
syphilis,  buboes. 

Dr.  Flexner  (continuing).  Perhaps,  finally,  I might  say  a word 
about  leprosy.  The  disease  is  common  in  this  locality.  How  com- 
mon in  the  entire  archipelago  wre  have  been  unable  to  discover.  We 
have  made  inquiry,  but  the  information  is  very  imperfect.  We  had 
hoped  to  get  into  the  interior  when  we  came,  but  it  seems  now  out  of 
the  question.  At  the  San  Rosario  Hospital  they  have  had  during  our 
lesidence  here  anywhere  from  70  to  80  lepers,  both  men  and  women, 
showing  the  various  forms  of  the  disease,  and  on  inquiry  of  the  man 
in  charge,  and  through  him  inquiring  of  the  patients  themselves  as  to 
where  they  came  from,  it  has  developed,  almost  without  exception, 
that  they  are  very  near  the  immediate  neighborhood  of  Manila.  We 
have  leprosy  in  the  United  States,  althi?ugh  it  is  not  generally  known. 
There  are  two  colonies  that  I know  of,  one  in  Louisiana  and  one  in 
South  Carolina.  In  South  Carolina  1 think  it  is  very  exceptional,  but 
within  a year  I have  seen  a young  lady,  a South  Carolina  woman,  who 
had  leprosy.  She  did  not  know  it,  possibly. 

Q.  A native  South  Carolinian? — A.  Yes,  sir;  white,  and  of  a very 
good  family. 

Q.  In  Charleston? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur. 

Q.  Had  she  traveled  much  ? — A.  She  had  not  been  out  of  the  country. 
She  was  married;  under  40  years  of  age;  had  children,  and  had  been 
in  Baltimore  a number  of  years,  engaged  in  nursing.  She  had  applied 
to  a number  of  physicians  for  treatment  of  a peculiar  skin  disease, 
first  on  the  thighs  and  later  on  her  face,  changing  the  aspect  of  her 
countenance.  She  was  treated,  but  not  successfully,  and  continued 


236 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


her  vocation  as  nurse.  She  turned  up  at  Johns  Hopkins  last  fall,  and 
Dr.  Law  examined  a portion  of  the  skin  and  found  that  it  contained 
evidences  of  the  existence  of  leprosy. 

Q.  How  does  leprosy  affect  patients? — A.  It  appears  in  a variety  of 
forms.  There  are  two  general  types  of  it.  One  is  the  tuberculous 
form,  in  which  nodules  appear  under  the  skin,  which  gradually  enlarge 
and  break,  and  the  skin  and  tissue  just  beneath  are  first  affected,  and 
subsequent  to  the  development  of  these  nodules  the  parts  become 
enlarged  and  afterwards  ulcerated.  These  ulcerations  are  followed  by 
healing  scar  forms,  causing  a peculiar  deformity,  and  it  gives  a leonine 
expression  when  affecting  the  face.  Sometimes  the  parts  become 
darker  than  formerly  and  sometimes  have  a white  appearance.  The 
other  form  affects  the  nerves  and  causes  loss  of  sensation.  That  may 
also  be  attended  with  the  development  of  these  nodules. 

Q.  Are  all  the  cases  here  in  the  hospital? — A.  As  fast  as  they  dis- 
cover them  they  are  carried  there. 

Q.  Is  the  hospital  in  the  city? — A.  Out  beyond  Bilibid. 

Q.  Have  any  Europeans  been  attacked  by  it? — A.  There  are  none 
in  the  hospital.  No  Europeans  have  been  attacked  as  far  as  I know. 

Q.  Are  they  generally  attacked  by  it  in  countries  where  it  pre- 
vails?— A.  They  are  subject  to  it. 

Q.  It  is  a condition  of  rotting  away,  isn’t  it? — A.  Yes,  sir;  often 
causing  loss  of  members. 

Q.  I have  seen  it  in  Canton. 

By  Secretary  Mac  Arthur. 

Q.  Would  there  be  danger  of  its  importation  into  the  United 
States  ? — A.  It  has  been  the  belief  for  many  years  that  leprosy  was  a 
source  of  very  little  danger  in  respect  to  its  transmission,  and  there 
are  observations  tending  to  bear  that  out.  There  is  a leper  colony  in 
New  Brunswick,  in  Canada.  I have  read  of  that,  and  heard  people 
speak  of  it.  An  asylum  there  has  been  in  existence  half  a century, 
and  the  nurses  are  Sisters  of  Charity.  In  the  history  of  the  hospital 
an  attendant  has  never  developed  the  disease,  but  on  the  other  hand 
practically  all  of  them  have  died  of  tuberculosis,  and  it  is  a well  known 
fact  that  leprosy  and  tuberculosis  exist  in  the  same  person.  Leprosy 
seems  to  presuppose  tuberculosis.  Within  two  years  there  has  been 
a congress  held  in  Berlin  which  was  attended  by  representatives  from 
all  the  countries,  and  the  delegates  were  those  who  had  most  experi- 
ence in  leprosy,  the  purpose  of  which  congress  was  to  inquire  into 
the  communication  of  leprosy.  'The  upshot  of  the  discussion,  which 
was  the  most  important  discussion  ever  held  in  the  world,  is  to  cause 
a considerable  modification  of  our  former  belief  that  it  is  a disease 
where  little  is  to  be  feared.  It  came  out  that  evidence  of  the  direct 
transmission  from  one  individual  to  another  was  much  more  common 
than  was  formerly  believed.  I have  little  hesitancy  in  saving  I believe 
Europeans  here  exposed  to  the  disease  will  become  affected  with 
leprosy.  I think  it  will  appear  if  they  put  themselves  into  relations 
with  the  individual,  and  as  the  disease  is  at  present  confined  to  natives 
there  will  have  to  be  close  contact  between  the  Europeans  and  the 
natives,  but  I think  they  are  sufficiently  subject  to  it  to  become  a 
source  of  danger.  On  the  other* hand,  I think  leprosy  prevails  in 
India,  where  it  is  confined  to  the  natives. 

At  this  point  the  interrogatories  were  addressed  to  Dr.  L.  E.  Barker, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


237 


professor  of  pathological  anatomy,  Johns  Hopkins  University,  who 
replied  as  follows: 

Q.  Dr.  Barker,  we  would  like  to  have  you  tell  us  something  on  the 
lines  we  have  been  discussing? — A.  1 have  jotted  down  a few  notes 
upon  the  subjects  Dr.  Flexncr  has  touched  upon,  and  which  I need 
not  mention.  I do  not,  however,  remember  that  Dr.  Flexncr  men- 
tioned what  I believe  is  the  most  probable  cause  of  the  transmission  of 
leprosy.  It  is  the  general  opinion  that  leprosy  is  propagated  by  sex- 
ual intercourse,  and  as  long  as  Americans  or  Europeans  keep  away 
from  infected  women  they  will  probably  be  tolerably  safe. 

The  climate,  so  far  as  we  have  been  able  to  observe  it,  is  interesting 
on  account  of  the  continuity  of  the  heat  rather  than  any  extreme. 
That  has  advantages  and  disadvantages  to  Americans.  There  is  very 
little  danger  from  catching  cold  from  sudden  depression  -less  than  in 
America.  On  the  other  hand,  the  continuous  heat  is  very  trying  and 
enervating  and  probably  will  prove  to  be  so  on  Americans.  It  interferes 
with  the  process  of  digestion,  and  unless  one  be  particularly  prudent 
in  regard  to  food,  the  time  and  place  of  taking,  etc.,  he  is  sure,  sooner 
or  later,  to  have  an  attack  of  stomach  trouble.  The  climate,  with  other 
conditions,  seems  to  affect  Americans  especially  with  regard  to  their 
assimilation.  People  who  have  lived  here  a long  time  grow  gradually 
pale.  Of  course  there  are  exceptions — there  are  those  who  retain  their 
vigor.  I do  not  think  the  majority  do.  Women,  especially,  grow 
pale,  and  the  European  children  which  we  have  seen  have  a tendency 
to  anaemia.  Those  who  are  familiar  with  the  climate  tell  us  amemia 
is  one  of  the  common  complaints  in  the  Philippines  and  in  similar 
climates. 

With  regard  to  actual  heat  stroke  it  is  apparently  uncommon,  while 
heat  prostration  is  relatively  common.  The  continual  heat  undoubtedly 
predisposes  one  to  diarrheal  diseases. 

It  might  be  interesting,  perhaps,  to  speak  of  what  we  consider  the 
best  mode  of  living  for  Americans  or  Europeans — what  he  should  do 
to  keep  his  health. 

In  the  matter  of  wearing  apparel,  it  is  probably  best  to  wear  very 
light  woolen  next  to  the  skin.  I wear  very  light-weight  Yaeger  under- 
wear. The  abdominal  band  is  necessary  for  perhaps  50  per  cent  of 
Anglo-Saxons.  One  can  try  to  do  without  it,  but  if  he  develops 
diarrhea  the  best  thing  to  do  is  to  wear  it.  He  may  get  along  by  wear- 
ing it  at  night,  when  the  body  is  more  exposed,  but  generally,  com- 
mencing then,  it  becomes  necessary  to  wear  it  during  the  day.  Having 
light  woolen  next  the  skin,  it  is  probably  very  important  to  wear  as 
light  clothes  as  possible.  The  Americans  have  adopted  a very  appro- 
priate suiting  in  khaki  and  drill  material. 

One  should  take  pains  never  to  become  chilled  and  to  look  out  for 
changes  in  the  temperature.  If  the  weather  turns  cool  after  several 
days  of  extreme  heat  he  should  change  his  clothing  accordingly,  and 
it  is  probably  wiser  in  the  middle  of  the  day  to  dress  more  lightly 
than  in  the  morning  and  evening. 

With  regard  to  baths,  a great  many  make  the  mistake  of  taking  cold 
baths  when  they  are  not  able  to  bear  them.  Bathing  is  essential,  at 
least  one  bath  a day,  but  some  people  may  not  be  able  to  bear  one  cold 
bath  a day  at  the  temperature  of  Manila  water,  although  strong  and 
vigorous.  If,  after  the  bath,  the  individual  has  clammy  skin  and  feels 
depressed,  has  redness  of  the  eyes  and  otherwise  out  of  sorts,  it  would 


238 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


be  well  to  order  warm  water  and  bathe  the  spine.  One  should  never 
bathe  when  very  hot;  that  is,  if  he  conies  in  tired  and  warm  it  is 
unwise  to  take  a bath  at  that  time.  Nor  should  he  bathe  on  a full 
stomach,  but  should  take  his  bath  on  arising,  if  he  is  vigorous;  but  if 
one  does  not  recuperate  readily  afterwards  it  would  be  better  to  take 
a sponge  bath  in  the  afternoon  or  at  11  o’clock  in  the  morning. 

With  regard  to  the  diet  of  Americans  coming  here,  great  care  should 
be  exercised  if  they  wish  to  remain  well.  Too  meager  and  too  free  a 
diet  are  equally  bad.  I think  the  majority  of  Americans  make  the 
mistake  of  overeating,  of  eating  too  much  meat  and  too  largely  of 
vegetables.  The  probability  is  that  a breakfast  of  eggs  and  toast,  a 
small  steak  or  chop,  with  one  cup  of  coffee,  tea,  or  chocolate,  would  be 
good.  The  midday  meal  should  be  light  in  this  climate,  although 
many  take  the  principal  meal  in  the  middle  of  the  day.  However,  I 
am  of  opinion  it  would  be  better  to  take  the  principal  meal  at  night, 
the  midday  one  to  consist  of  cold  meat,  rice,  fruit,  and  so  on,  but  not 
a very  hearty  meal,  especially  if  one  has  work  in  the  afternoon,  for  it 
would  discommode  him.  The  principal  meal  will  then  be  at  night  and 
should  not  consist  of  too  many  courses.  I should  say  a soup,  fish,  and 
one  meat,  certainly  not  more  than  two  meats,  after  the  fish,  and  a light 
dessert.  Much  coffee  and  much  strong  tea  is  to  be  avoided  by  Anglo- 
Saxons.  Those  who  are  accustomed  to  taking  beer  would  find  one  or 
two  glasses  of  beer  here  perhaps  advantageous.  Those  not  accustomed 
to  it  would  find  they  would  be  made  bilious.  Most  English  people  here 
take  as  a stimulant  whisky  and  soda,  generally  Scotch  whisky.  Most 
people  who  drink,  drink  too  much.  As  an  Englishman  said  to  me : “ The 
bad  tropical  climate  comes  from  a climate  in  a glass  bottle.”  Certainly, 
an  excess  of  any  sort  is  more  deleterious  in  this  climate  than  at  home. 
A man  who  could  with  impunity  take  many  drinks  in  a day,  or  go  to 
what  is  reasonably  excessive  at  home  in  other  ways,  would  suffer  if  he 
attempted  the  same  life  here.  The  origin  of  the  excessive  drinking 
here  is  attributed  to  loss  of  appetite.  I am  told  that  nearly  every 
Spanish  officer  who  came  to  the  islands  lost  his  appetite  very  soon 
after  coming,  and  a favorite  drink  with  the  Spaniards  was  gin,  at  least 
I am  told  so — diluted  gin.  This  began  by  taking  a little  gin  for  an 
appetizer,  but  the  quantity  necessarily  had  to  be  increased,  and  a great 
many  men  came  to  use  alcohol  in  excess  as  the  result  of  beginning  in 
that  way. 

Those,  I think,  are  the  main  things  about  personal  hygiene  for  Anglo 
Saxons. 

Q.  How  about  the  effect  of  the  sun?  Tell  us  about  that.— A.  We 
have  come  to  the  conclusion  that  the  custom,  which  is  so  general,  of 
keeping  indoors  from  12  to  3,  is  very  important.  Someone  has  said 
that  here  the  sun  is  always  dangerous,  and  I am  inclined  to  think  so. 
I have  felt  it  very  much. 

Q.  Isn’t  it  bad  from  9 to  12? — A.  It  is  bad  at  any  time,  in  all  prob- 
ability, but  one  feels  it  more  after  noon.  It  may  be  one  has  become 
worn  out  or  exhausted  by  that  time.  In  the  morning,  after  a refresh- 
ing sleep,  he  is  able  to  go  about  without  feeling  it  so  much. 

Q.  Do  you  think  fish  a good  article  of  diet? — A.  Very  good,  pro- 
vided it  is* good  fish.  There  would  be  very  great  danger  from  eating 
tainted  fish,  but  if  one  could  get  fresh  fish  it  would  be  a very  good 
diet.  It  is  very  easily  digested,  and  not  nearly  so  apt  to  accumulate 
substances  in  the  blood  and  clog  the  liver.  Many  people  will  probably 
have  to  limit  their  red  meats  if  they  remain  here. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


239 


Q.  Is  there  any  difference  between  beef  and  mutton  ? — A.  In  then- 
digestibility;  I do  not  know  what  the  tables  indicate,  I am  sorry  to 
say.  There  are  tables  prepared  giving  such  information. 

Q.  I)o  you  think  it  possible  for  Americans  to  come  here  and  live  by 
pursuing  the  very  simple  rules  that  you  have  given? — A.  For  a term 
of  years,  yes,  sir;  provided  they  had  frequent  holidays  away  from  this 
archipelago.  • 

Q.  Do  you  think  the  white  race  could  work  in  the  fields — pursue 
agricultural  pursuits? — A.  I doubt  if  that  could  be  successfully  done. 

Q.  As  a matter  of  fact,  is  it  not  very  well  known  that  the  English- 
man never  changes  his  habits? — A.  So  they  say  in  Hongkong. 

Q.  And  that  the  English  Government  takes  no  account  of  climate, 
but  from  a scientific  point  of  view  you  think  that  climate  must  be  con- 
sidered with  regard  to  diet  and  habits? — A.  Yes,  sir;  and  public  sani- 
tation. I should  think  that  if  the  Government  sent  men  out  here  it 
would  also  be  necessary  to  pay  close  attention  to  the  public  sanita- 
tion, water  supply,  drainage,  removal  of  excrements,  quarantine,  and 
to  make  a special  study  of  the  diseases  the  same  as  the  English,  who 
have  established  a school  of  tropical  diseases,  and  I imagine  it  would 
be  necessary  to  make  a special  study  of  the  mode  of  living.  Malaria 
is  one  of  the  principal  diseases  which  attack  Anglo-Saxons  more  than 
the  natives,  and,  what  is  more,  the  form  is  the  worst — pariciousa — a 
very  severe  form. 

Q.  Even  the  American  living  here,  as  you  have  said,  for  some  years, 
would  become  pale  unless  he  drank  a good  deal  of  whisky,  wouldn't 
he? — A.  I think  it  would  depend  on  the  individual  constitution.  I 
think  a great  many  men  would  sicken,  and  if  they  tried  it  for  two  or 
three  generations  without  replenishment  from  home,  to  use  a slang 
expression,  they  would  “peter  out.” 

Q.  And  that,  you  say,  is  due  to  the  climate? — A.  Yes,  sir;  and  the 
removal  of  home  influences. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  here? — A.  Two  months. 

Q.  In  your  own  personal  experience  have  }Tou  found  this  climate 
trying? — A.  Yes,  sir;  I have  found  that  I had  to  be  careful  as  regards 
diet  and  as  regards  work. 

Q.  You  have  done,  perhaps,  a good  deal  more  work  than  the  ordi- 
nary man? — A.  I have  kept  quiet  from  12  to  3.  We  have  worked  in 
the  forenoon  pretty  hard,  and  at  first  in  the  afternoon,  but  wre  have 
found  the  longer  we  stay  here  the  less  capable  we  are  of  work  of  a 
high  order  for  am"  prolonged  time. 

Q.  Do  you  find  you  perspire  a great  deal? — A.  That  depends  on  the 
drink  and  diet. 

Q.  Doesn’t  it  depend  on  the  exertion? — A.  If  itou  work  out,  of 
course  }tou  perspire. 

Q.  Is  that  desirable  or  not? — A.  To  a certain  extent,  yes.  Exces- 
sive perspiration  from  excessive  exertion  would  soon  weaken  one  very 
much.  We  found,  when  working  hard  mentally,  that  exercise  did  not 
agree  with  us.  I began  with  theories  and  ideas  about  taking  exercise 
morning  and  night,  but  I could  not  stand  it  and  do  mental  work  at  the 
smne  time. 

Q.  What  effect  is  the  rainy  season  going  to  have  on  health  ? — A. 
The  probability  is  that  dysentery  will  be  much  more  common  in  the 
rainy  than  the  dry  season.  Malaria  will  be  less,  unless  at  the  end  of 
the  rainy  season  there  should  be  a great  deal  of  hot,  dry  weather,  mak- 


240 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSIN. 


ing  the  water  grow  stagnant  and  increasing  mosquitoes,  especially 
inasmuch  as  malaria  is  transmitted  by  mosquitoes. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  malaria  ? — A.  We  mean  only  the  diseases 
which  are  caused  by  certain  parasites,  known  as  the  parasite  of  mala- 
ria. of  which  three  forms  are  now*  recognized  as  affecting  human  beings. 
All  other  things  called  malaria  are  not  regarded  as  malaria  by  those 
•who  are  students  of  the  disease. 

Q.  Malaria  is  a fever? — A.  All  malarial  infections  are  accompanied 
at  some  stage  by  attacks  of  fever. 

Q.  Is  it  the  same  as  dengue? — A.  No;  dengue  is  not  malaria.  We 
have  examined  the  blood  of  patients  who  have  what  we  believe  to  be  a 
form  of  dengue,  and  it  does  not  contain  any  variety  of  the  malarial  para- 
site with  which  we  are  familiar  and  none  which  we  can  recognize. 

Q.  Do  they  have  regular  old  chills  and  fever  here? — A.  Yes,  sir; 
and  w ith  the  same  variety  of  parasites  as  occur  in  America.  The  para- 
sites in  blood  here  could  just  as  well  come  from  the  blood  of  patients 
suffering  in  Baltimore. 

Q.  Is  there  anything  else  you  would  like  to  say?  If  so,  vre  would 
like  to  hear  you. — A.  There  is  one  point  with  regard  to  the  health  of 
the  soldiers  at  present,  and  with  regard  to  the  mode  of  living.  Some- 
thing is  wrong,  judging  from  the  patients  who  come  into  the  hospital. 
Whether  it  is  a matter  of  diet,  whether  the  ration  is  not  right,  or 
what  is  the  cause  of  the  lowering  of  resistance  of  the  large  number  of 
soldiers,  is  a matter  which  merits  close  investigation.  No  matter 
from  what  disease  an  individual  suffers  in  the  hospital  he  nearly 
always  shows  signs  of  nonnutrition.  We  notice  it  particularly  in  the 
mouths  of  the  patients.  A large  number  have  foul  tongues,  and  a 
large  number  have  erosions  about  the  teeth,  raw  gums,  etc.  Part  of 
that  can  be  attributed  to  lack  of  opportunity  for  proper  cleansing  of 
the  mouth,  but  I am  inclined  to  think  there  must  be  some  special  cause, 
because  no  matter  howr  carefully  you  take  care  of  the  mouth,  if  subject 
to  bad  influences,  these  abrasions  in  the  mouth  will  occur.  It  became 
so  noticeable  in  examining  patients  in  the  hospital  here  that  I asked  one 
of  the  assistant  surgeons  to  make  a systematic  examination  of  his 
wards,  and  he  did  so:  went  through  examining  the  mouths  of  all  the 
patients,  and  he  told  me  that  fully  90  per  cent  of  the  patients  had  this 
condition  of  the  gums.  I asked  the  individuals  themselves  the  cause 
of  it.  They  attributed  it  to  the  ration,  rightly  or  wrongly  1 do  not 
know.  It  would  seem  probable  that  the  ration  of  the  soldier  in  this 
climate  should  differ  from  the  ration  of  the  soldier  in  temperate  cli- 
mates. 

Q.  In  what  respect? — A.  I think  that  a matter  of  investigation. 

Q.  What  do  you  say  about  beans? — A.  In  a moderate  quantity,  all 
right.  They  get  plenty  of  beans.  But  they'  lack,  on  the  tiring  line, 
fresh  beef. 

Q.  Do  they"  cook  the  beans?  My  army  experience  has  shown  me 
that  oftentimes  the  soldiers  do  not  cook  the  beans,  and  there  was  a 
say  ing  that  “ beans  killed  more  men  than  bullets.”  How  about  that 
here? — A.  We  have  eaten  the  beans  in  some  of  the  messes,  and  I must 
say  where  we  have  been  the  beans  were  well  cooked.  In  the  messes 
where  we  have  taken  meals  they  had  good  cooks. 

Q.  How  about  bacon ? — A.  That  is  disputed.  Ido  not  think  there 
is  any  objection  to  the  material  itself. 

Q.  They  use  now  mostly  Australian  meat,  don’t  they? — A.  Do  they 
get  that  on  the  tiring  line? 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


241 


Q.  Well,  it  is  guaranteed  twenty-four  hours,  so  it  would  seem  they 
might?- — A.  All  I know  is  we  saw  a man  who  asserted  that  for  weeks 
they  had  not  had  any  fresh  beef.  That  may  be  true  or  not. 

Q.  I understand  that  the  proportion  of  sickness  here  is  about  10  per 
cent.  Is  that  excessive? — A.  1 do  not  think  that  we  are  supplied  with 
any  definite  data  as  to  the  percentage  of  sick. 

Q.  Well,  they  have  2,300  sick  people  here,  soldiers?- — A.  And  how 
many  in  the  army  ? 

Q.  I am  counting  23,000,  making  about  10  per  cent.  There  is  one 
thing  I want  to  ask  you  about,  if  A’ou  have  noticed  it  at  all.  We  have 
been  told  here  when  a soldier  gets  sick  he  don’t  get  well.  He  don’t 
seem  to  recuperate.  If  he  once  lies  down  and  gives  up,  it  takes  months 
for  him  to  get  up  again.  Some,  of  course,  attribute  it  to  homesickness, 
which  I know  was  a fact  during  the  civil  war.  What  do  you  think 
about  that? — A.  I think  that  certain  diseases  are  especially  prone  to 
penanty,  and  to  slow  convalescence.  Of  course,  even  with  good  treat- 
ment, convalescence  isslow  in  this  climate.  Syphilis,  1 am  told  by  army 
officers,  is  particularly  pernicious,  and  we  have  a certain  amount  of 
evidence  of  that  in  the  hospital.  Fellows  who  had  had  syphilis  in 
America  and  recovered  appear  to  have  had  outbreaks  here 

Q.  Without  any  contact  again  ? — A.  Yes,  sir;  without  contact  again. 
Of  course,  in  America  if  a man  is  over  his  syphilis  two  years,  and  is 
subject  to  influences  which  lower  his  general  vitality,  he  is  very  apt  to 
have  evidence  of  the  disease  break  out.  The  army  surgeons  tell  us 
that  a number  of  men  who  had  had  syphilis  in  America  have  done  badly 
here.  Some  have  had  to  be  sent  home,  and  those  who  contracted 
syphilis  here  have  done  badly. 

Q.  About  what  proportion  of  that  character  of  cases  have  come 
under  your  observation;  about  how  many? — A.  I do  not  think  syphilis 
is  the  most  common.  Probabl}'  soft  chancres  and  gonorrhea  are  the 
two  most  common  venereal  diseases  here.  I could  not  sav  the  percent- 
age, because  a great  many  who  have  a mild  attack  do  not  go  up  fox- 
treatment.  They  appear  at  sick  l’oll  and  ask  treatment  locally.  If 
they  develop  buboes  or  need  operations,  they  are  sent  to  the  hospital. 
Thei-e  has  been  a great  deal;  I could  not  give  figures. 

Q.  How  would  it  compare  with  other  maladies;  what  is  the  predom- 
inant malady  among  the  soldiei-s? — A.  Distresses  of  digestion,  includ- 
ing diarrhea  and  dysentery.  After  that  I should  say  typhoid  fever, 
then,  perhaps,  malaria. 

Colonel  Denby.  We  have  another  witness,  gentlemen,  I am  sorry  to 
say,  and  unless  you  have  something  further  on  the  subject  which  you 
can  offer  us  I hope  you  will  excuse  us. 

Dr.  Flexnek.  1 would  like  to  say  a word  further  on  a subject  which 
we  consider  of  great  importance.  What  we  regard  as  a keen  necessity 
is  a public  morgue.  We  find  a great  many  cases  of  death  have  been 
unattended  by  a reputable  physician,  and  the  cause  of  death  has  not 
been  made  out.  The  objection  to  burying  anybody  without  establish- 
ing first  the  cause  of  death  is  that  it  fosters  criminality,  and,  too,  3-011 
ma}-  succeed  in  checking  a disease  which  may  become  epidemic.  It 
seems  to  me  there  should  be  established  a public  place  to  which  eveiy 
one  who  has  not  died  under  the  care  of  a reputable  physician  should 
be  taken,  and  that  it  should  be  in  charge  of  experienced  physicians  and 
pathologists. 

Q.  There  is  a morgue  hei-e.  isn’t  there?- — A.  I do  not  know,  sir 
p c lfi 


242 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


There  should  be  a place  to  establish  the  cause  of  all  deaths.  They 
have  such  a public  morgue  in  Hongkong.  Then,  I should  think,  to 
this  public  morgue  all  cases  of  infection  from  which  there  is  danger  of 
spreading  should  be  brought  and  attended  under  the  supervision  of 
skilled  attendants,  so  as  to  prevent  its  spread. 

Now,  a word  about  cholera,  which  has  been  here,  and  possibly,  on 
account  of  communication  with  infected  seaports,  it  might  appear 
again.  The  protection  against  cholera  is  the  protection  of  the  water 
supply.  It  can  hardly  get  a hold  unless  through  the  water  supply. 
The  protection  of  the  water  supply  is  the  first  point  of  consideration. 
1 think  the  plague  might  easily  get  here,  and  if  it  did  get  here,  I am 
of  opinion  it  would  do  a great  deal  of  harm.  Looking  at  the  problem 
in  an  external  aspect,  there  would  be  more  danger  than  in  Hongkong. 
Dr.  Barker  is  inclined  to  think  otherwise,  as  he  says  the  natives  here 
are  not  so  tilth}’  or  closely  housed  as  in  China,  but  we  agreed  there 
would  be  a great  field  here  anyway.  I think  a public  morgue  might 
be  the  means  of  discovering  in  their  inception  these  diseases  and  in 
destroying  them  in  process  of  germination,  nipping  them  in  the  bud, 
and  without  it  I think  there  is  great  danger. 

Q.  There  is  no  plague  here  now? — A.  No,  sir. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SANTIAGO  PAYA. 

Manila,  July  6,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair)  Mr.  Worcester,  and  Mr. 
MacArthur. 

Santiago  Paya,  in  response  to  questions,  stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  We  want  to  ask  you  a few  questions  in  relation  to  education  in 
the  Philippines,  and  would  like  to  have  it  taken  down  in  order  to  pre- 
serve it? — A.  I wish  to  answer  all  the  questions  on  education  which 
you  may  ask. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  your  name  and  residence? — A.  Name:  Santiago 
Paya,  rector  of  the  university;  residence,  Manila. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  the  university? — A.  Santo  Tomas,  Manila. 
It  is  the  only  one  that  has  ever  been  here. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  here? — A.  1 have  been  here  three  times. 
I came  here  the  first  time  in  1871,  and  altogether  I have  been  here 
about  twenty  years,  counting  the  three  trips,  the  three  visits. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  some  account  of  the  university,  how  long  it  has 
been  established,  what  it  teaches,  how  many  students  there  are,  etc.  ? — 
A.  Since  the  first  of  the  seventeenth  century  it  has  been  in  existence. 
It  was  first  known  as  the  College  of  Santo  Tomas,  and  it  was  after- 
wards recognized  as  a university  by  Spain  and  by  the  Pope. 

Q.  Was  it  supported  as  a Government  institution,  or  an  institution 
by  your  order — what  is  your  order? — A.  Santo  Domingo. 

Q.  Was  it  established  by  the  Government  as  a state  institution  or 
established  by  your  order? — A.  It  was  founded  by  the  order  itself. 


REPORT  OE  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


243 


Q.  It  was,  therefore,  a private  institution  ? — A.  It  has  always  been 
so,  but  as  there  was  no  state  university  the  Government  of  Spain  recog- 
nized it  officially,  but  it  has  always  been  sustained  by  the  corporation. 

Q.  What  assistance,  if  any,  did  the  Government  of  Spain  render  to 
it? — A.  It  was  founded  by  the  corporation  itself  and  always  sustained 
by  the  corporation. 

Q.  It  received  no  aid  from  the  Government? — A.  It  received  no  aid 
from  the  Government  of  Spain,  as  its  foundation  was  private,  and  as 
the  Spanish  Government  ought  to  have  established  a university  and 
did  not  do  so,  they  recognized  this  as  a university  officially. 

Q.  Does  the  university  charge  for  admission  and  tuition,  or  is  it  sim- 
ply a charity? — A.  There  are  matriculation  dues,  $8  a year  at  present; 
formerly  it  was  sixteen  Filipino  dollars. 

Q.  What  is  the  course  of  tuition? — A.  Philosophy,  letters,  physi- 
ology, medicine.  Philosophy  and  letters  are  one  course,  and  law, 
pharmacy  and  medicine,  canonical  law  and  theology. 

Q.  Does  it  teach  the  sciences? — A.  Not  the  full  courses  of  the 
sciences,  but  preparatory  courses.  The  full  courses  in  sciences  were 
established,  but  there  were  almost  no  students. 

Q.  Did  they  teach  mathematics? — A.  That  belongs  to  schools  of  the 
second  class,  which  is  under  the  direction  of  the  father  here  present 
with  me.  In  those  they  studied  mathematics  and  chemistry,  natural 
history,  logic,  and  metaphysics. 

Q.  Do  they  teach  the  dead  languages  or  the  modern  languages? — A. 
English  and  French,  Greek  and  Latin. 

Q.  Besides  being  a university,  it  is  a college,  isn’t  it? — A.  The 
greater  courses  which  I have  already  mentioned,  such  as  law,  are 
taught  in  the  University  of  Santo  Tomas  the  others,  secondary  instruc- 
tion, as  we  call  them,  are  taught  in  the  College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran, 
which  is  also  under  the  Dominican  fathers. 

Q.  Have  they  regular  classes  in  the  college;  and  a boy  graduates, 
does  he? — A.  I wish  to  add  that  in  the  College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran 
they  also  have  a mercantile  course. 

Q.  What  other  course  did  you  mention  besides  the  mercantile 
course? — A.  An  agricultural  course;  and  the  mercantile  courses,  and 
preparatory  courses,  and  engineering  courses  I will  furnish  if  the 
commission  wishes  a complete  programme  of  all  our  courses. 

Q.  Is  the  college  open  now?  Are  the  university  and  college  open 
for  scholars? — A.  The  opening  is  announced,  and  it  will  be  one  of 
these  days. 

Q.  What  is  the  prospect  for  students  for  this  year? — A.  The  pros- 
pect is  for  very  few  students,  which  is  due  to  the  fact  that  many  are 
in  the  provinces,  many  of  them  have  spent  a great  deal  of  money  and 
have  not  the  means  to  come  to  Manila,  and  others  are  in  the  insurrec- 
tion with  arms  in  their  hands. 

Q.  What  has  been  about  the  average  number  of  scholars,  in  the 
university  first  and  then  in  the  college?— A.  In  the  university  in  1896, 
for  there  was  no  revolution  then,  there  were  a little  more  than  1,000; 
in  the  college,  4,000. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  something  about  the  capacity? — A.  The}’  were 
not  all  in  the  College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran  itself,  although  they  were 
all  under  it,  as  the  professors  of  San  Juan  de  Letran  had  different 
schools,  but  all  the  students  were  matriculated  and  examined  in  the 
College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran. 


244 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Will  you  tell  us  something  about  the  capacity  of  the  Filipino 
boys  for  acquiring  learning? — A.  They  have  no  great  talent,  but  as  a 
general  rule  they  have  good  memories;  they  have  not  good  talent. 

Q.  How  are  they  for  acquiring  languages? — A.  The}' have  an  apt- 
ness for  that.  They  will  learn  languages  easily,  because  they  have 
good  memories.  . 

Q.  How  are  they  for  mathematics? — A.  No;  some  learn  it  well,  but 
in  general  they  do  not. 

Q.  What  occupation  do  the  alumni  generally  follow?  I mean  by 
that  the  graduates.- — A.  The  majority  of  the  students  are  members  of 
powerful  families,  and  they,  as  a rule,  study  that  they  may  go  into  the 
provinces  and  be  the  most  enlightened  people  in  the  province;  but 
they  don't  engage  in  pursuits,  for  they  have  no  necessity  of  making  a 
living. 

Q.  Don’t  they  engage  in  the  learned  pursuits,  such  as  medicine  and 
law  ? — A.  Some  of  them  devote  themselves  to  medicine,  law,  theology, 
and  other  things,  but  as  a general  thing  they  study  the  secondary 
education,  secondary  instruction,  and  then  when  they  have  acquired 
what  they  wish  to.  that  is,  some  learning  in  Manila,  they  take  a year 
or  two  in  the  university,  but  don’t  go  through  the  university. 

Q.  Does  the  graduate  of  the  law  school  go  and  practice  law  without 
any  further  proceeding? — A.  There  is  no  further  requisite  than  to  be 
a graduate  of  this  university  to  practice  law  here,  in  Spain,  in  Cuba, 
and  in  all  Spanish  possessions. 

Q.  How  is  it  in  medicine  ? — A.  In  medicine,  in  pharmacy,  and  every- 
thing the  same. 

Q.  Have  they  to  pass  any  examination? — A.  The  diploma  which 
they  get  from  the  university  entitles  them  to.  Of  course,  before  they 
acquire  this  diploma  they  must  pass  their  examination  at  the  university. 

Q.  Then  they  have  to  take  out  a license  and  pay  for  it? — A.  I don’t 
know,  but  1 think  not. 

Q.  Do  you  take  any  charity  scholars? — A.  We  have  had  in  the  col- 
lege of  Santo  Tomas  43  students,  places  for  43  students,  that  is,  up  to 
the  last  term,  but  they  must  be  Spaniards. 

Q.  Not  Filipinos? — A.  If  they  were  sons  of  Spaniards,  having 
Spanish  blood;  yes. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Could  Spanish  mestizos  bo  received? — A.  That  is  it;  yes. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  But  the  poor  Filipino  was  not  entitled  to  one  of  these  scholar- 
ships?— A.  In  San  Juan  de  Letran  it  was  for  everybody.  The  educa- 
tion was  for  everybody  and  there  were  some  three  places  for  Filipinos, 
but  not  for  Filipinos  in  the  university. 

Q.  At  what  age  did  they  take  a boy? — A.  In  addition  to  what  I 
have  stated,  in  the  College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran  there  was  a primary 
course  where  children  of  six  or  seven  years  were  received. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Were  they  included  in  the  number  of  students  given  for  San 
Juan  de  Letran? — A.  The  boarders  were;  there  were  about  200  of 
those  in  the  number  of  4,000  students.  Under  the  heading  of  San 
Juan  de  Letran  I include  those. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


245 


By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  In  the  primary  schools  did  the\T  have  to  pay  any  tuition  fee? — 
A.  In  the  primary  instruction  we  have  had  only  to  do  with  the  College 
of  San  Juan  de  Letran  itself.  In  the  secondary  instruction  in  the  Col- 
lege of  San  Juan  de  Letran  there  was  a Si  charge  for  recording — regis- 
tration. There  is  now  a Si  charge  for  registration. 

Q.  That  is  all? — A.  The  day  scholars  in  the  primary  instruction 
paid  S2  a month  in  the  College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran.  The  professors, 
as  I mentioned  before,  had  private  scholars  outside  and  made  their 
own  terms  with  the  parents  of  the  children. 

Q.  How  did  the  institution  support  itself — from  these  tuition  fees 
or  from  other  sources? — A.  No;  for  these  fees  were  very  insignificant — 
Si  for  matriculation — and  other  fees  were  very  insignificant.  They 
did  not  meet  the  expenses  by  a very  great  sum,  and  the  schools  were 
supported  bi"  the  corporation. 

Q.  The  corporation,  then,  owned  lands  or  property  of  some  kind? — 
A.  Yes;  we  had  property. 

Q.  How  long  has  the  order  that  you  belong  to  been  in  these  islands  ? — 
A.  Three  complete  centuries. 

Q.  Can  you  briefly  tell  us  what  the  system  of  public  education  was 
in  addition  to  your  own? — A.  All  the  secondary  instruction  in  the 
Islands  was  subject  to  Santo  Tomas.  There  were,  in  addition  to  the 
private  schools  I have  told  of,  schools  in  the  provinces,  but  all  the  col- 
leges of  secondary  instruction  were  subject  to  Santo  Tomas.  In  Spain 
every  university  has  its  own  district  under  it  and  all  the  colleges  are 
subject  to  the  university,  which  is  the  head  of  that  district. 

Q.  I would  inquire  particularly  what  provision  was  made  bv  the  city 
or  the  municipality  of  Manila  for  the  public  or  free  education  of  chil- 
dren?— A.  Almost  none  at  all — the  primary  school. 

Q.  Were  the  primary  schools — public  schools — sustained  by  the  city 
or  the  State?— A.  There  are  primary  schools  in  all  the  towns  sustained 
by  the  State. 

Q.  In  which  they  furnish  what  kind  of  education? — A.  Very  rudi- 
mentary education — reading  and  writing,  the  catechism,  a little  figur- 
ing, a little  mathematics. 

Q.  Were  there  any  city  schools  in  Manila? — A.  There  was  the  Nor- 
mal School  in  Manila,  which  the  Jesuit  fathers  had,  and  the  Atheneum, 
which  was  also  the  property  of  the  Jesuit  fathers. 

Q.  Were  the  Atheneum  and  this  other  school  sustained  by  the  city 
or  the  State? — A.  The  Normal  School  was  subject  to  and  sustained  by 
the  civil  administration,  and  the  Municipal  Atheneum  was  sustained 
by  the  municipality  of  Manila. 

Q.  About  how  many  scholars  were  in  this  Atheneum? — A.  The  sec- 
ondary instruction  in  the  Atheneum  was  subject,  like  all  the  others  in 
Manila,  to  the  College  of  Santo  Tomas.  Primary  instruction  in  the 
Atheneum  was  subject  to  and  sustained  by  the  municipal  government. 
I don’t  think  thejT  had  more  than  60  or  TO  scholars  in  this  primary 
instruction  in  the  Atheneum;  and  there  were  also  branch  schools  in  all 
different  wards  of  the  city,  which  were  subject  to  and  sustained  by  the 
city. 

Q.  And  these  schools  were  free? — A.  For  the  scholars  thejT  were  free, 
and  the  Government  kept  male  and  female  school-teachers  in  each  town; 
but  there  were  also  schoolmasters  and  schoolmistresses  in  the  villages 
or  towns  of  different  provinces  sustained  by  the  members  of  the  par- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


246 


ishes.  As  the  Government  only  kept  one  schoolmaster  and  one  school- 
mistress, the  members  of  the  different  parishes  themselves  supported 
different  schools  for  the  education  of  the  children  in  the  different  wards 
of  the  different  towns.  Almost  all  of  the  education  in  the  Philippine 
Islands  was  due  to  the  religious  orders;  that  is  to  say,  the  secondary 
instruction  and  the  university  were  sustained  by  the  religious  orders 
and  the  primary  instruction  by  the  members  of  different  parishes  in 
different  towns. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Did  the  University  of  Santo  Tomas  give  a degree  corresponding 
to  each  one  of  the  courses  of  study  which  you  mentioned? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  was  the  number  of  titles  given  in  normal  times,  including 
all  the  courses? — A.  I don’t  remember  at  present. 

Q.  You  spoke  of  the  failure  of  their  scientific  courses— their  courses 
of  scientific  studies  in  the  university.  To  what  do  you  attribute  that 
failure — to  natural  inaptitude  on  the  part  of  the  native?  You  said 
the  students  did  not  enter  those  courses.- — A.  Because  they  were  diffi- 
cult courses,  very  hard  for  them,  mathematical  courses. 

Q.  What  requirements  were  made  for  admission  to  the  courses  of 
secondary  instruction  in  San  Juan  de  Letran? — A.  They  were  subject 
to  an  examination  in  the  first  instance;  if  they  passed  the  examination 
in  reading  and  writing  they"  were  admitted. 

Q.  What  were  the  requirements  for  admission  to  the  University  of 
Santo  Tomas? — A.  It  was  necessary  to  have  learned  all  the  secondary 
instruction,  to  have  passed  an  examination. 

Q.  Were  graduates  from  the  colleges  of  secondary  instruction  in  the 
provinces  which  you  have  mentioned  admitted  to  the  university  on 
the  strength  of  their  graduation  certificates  from  those  colleges? — A. 
Yes,  for  there  was  a board  formed  in  each  place  composed  of  two  mem- 
bers from  the  university  here  Avho  held  examinations  there,  a board  of 
the  local  faculty. 

Q.  How  many  of  these  colleges  of  secondary  instruction  were  there 
and  where  were  they  located  ?; — A.  In  Yigan,  in  Ilocos  Sur,  in  Dagupan, 
in  Pangasinan  province,  in  Nueva  Caceres,  that  is  in  the  province  of 
Guinabatan,  province  of  Albay,  in  Cebu,  the  capital,  in  Jaro,  Visayas 
province,  and  Bacalod,  Negros  province. 

Q.  Were  the  faculties  of  these  colleges  composed  of  fathers  of  the 
Dominican  order,  and  if  not,  who  composed  them? — A.  They  were  of 
all  orders,  that  at  Yigan  was  composed  of  the  Augustinian  fathers, 
that  in  Dagupan  of  the  Dominican  fathers,  in  Guinabatan  of  the  Fran- 
ciscan fathers,  in  Bacalod  of  the  Iiecoletos  fathers,  in  Nueva  Caceres, 
Cebu,  and  Jaro  of  the  Paulist  fathers. 

Q.  Were  the  admission  charges  there  the  same  as  in  San  Juan  de 
Letran,  the  tuition  charges,  I should  say  ? — A.  Yes,  the  same;  they 
were  only  25  cents  formerly. 

Q.  Were  these  institutions,  then,  supported  by  the  various  orders 
that  made  up  their  faculties? — A.  The  day  scholars  only  paid  their 
matriculation  fees,  but  the  boarders  paid  their  regular  monthly  pay- 
ments for  maintenance. 

Q.  What  method  was  followed  in  the  Manila  institution  in  giving 
instruction  in  chemistry,  physics,  and  natural  history  ? Was  it  book 
work  or  laboratory  work,  or  both  ? — A.  A system  of  books,  an  oral 
system,  and  a system  of  practical  illustration  taken  together,  cabinets 
and  specimens. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


247 


Q.  Had  they  a chemical  laboratory  where  the  students  did  this 
work? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  practical  work  had  you  in  your  course  in  agriculture?— 
A.  We  did  almost  nothing,  excepting  to  make  use  of  the  natural 
examples  which  exist  about  here,  but  the  Spanish  Government  had  an 
agricultural  college  in  Ermita. 

Q.  What  was  the  average  age  of  the  students  at  the  time  they  entered 
San  Juan  de  Letran? — A.  In  the  secondary  courses  of  San  Juan  de 
Letran,  the  youngest  were  nine  or  ten  years. 

Q.  And  what  was  the  age  of  the  university  students  at  the  time  of 
entering? — A.  When  they  quitted  the  secondary  instruction? 

Q.  Can’t  you  give  us  an  approximate  statement  of  the  average  age 
of  university  students  when  they  entered  the  university  ? — A.  Six- 
teen to  eighteen  years. 

Q.  How  long  did  it  take  them  to  conclude  one  of  the  university 
courses? — A.  Six  years  in  law  and  medicine,  in  pharmacy  five,  in 
philosophy  four  years,  in  letters  and  philosophy. 

Q.  What  is  your  idea  as  to  the  manual  dexterity  of  the  Filipino, 
his  fitness  for  delicate  manipulation,  to  use  delicate  instruments,  etc.  ? — 
A.  They  have  plenty  of  ability  in  their  hands  to  make  machines,  to 
make  machinery,  or  to  paint,  or  anything  of  that  sort;  to  carve  they 
are  very  good,  or  in  music  they  are  also  very  apt,  but  they  will  never 
make  professors. 

Q.  Do  they  show  originality  in  art  or  mechanical  work,  or  are  they 
simply  copyists? — A.  Almost  no  originality  at  all.  It  is  pure  imitation 
with  them. 

Q.  Do  the  w i Id  tribes  here  have  any  music  of  their  own? — -A.  They 
have  instruments.  In  all  the  towns  they  have  music.  The  Igorrotes 
have  their  own  instruments  and  their  own  music,  as  it  may  be  called; 
it  is  very  rudimentary  music. 

Q.  Is  it  music  from  our  standpoint?  Are  the  sounds  pleasant,  or 
are  they  harsh,  unpleasant  sounds  like  the  Chinese  music? — A.  It  is 
not  exactly  like  Chinese  music,  for  that  is  very  disagreeable  to  our 
ears;  at  the  same  time  it  is  not  to  be  compared  with  our  music. 

Q.  Were  the  students  in  the  colleges  of  secondary  instruction 
included  in  the  estimate  of  the  number  of  students  receiving  secondary 
instruction  under  them? — A.  Yes;  in  all  the  provinces.  1 have  said 
4,000,  and  in  the  books  which  I have  given  the  statistics  are  contained. 

Q.  In  the  primary  parochial  schools  in  the  provinces  you  said  that 
they  learned  to  read  and  write.  What  language  or  languages  did  they 
learn — their  own  dialect  or  Spanish  ? — A.  They  were  taught  to  read 
and  write  Spanish,  but  most  of  them  learned  it  oidy  mechanically. 

Q.  Was  there  any  law  in  regard  to  the  matter,  as  to  whether  they 
should  be  taught  Spanish  or  not? — A.  There  was  a law. 

Q.  Were  there  school  teachers  in  the  provinces  who  themselves  did 
not  know  Spanish? — A.  Some;  }res. 

Q.  W hat  was  the  reason,  then,  that  the  law  was  not  better  carried 
out  ? — A.  Because  the  Indians  did  not  present  themselves.  The  Indians 
were  very  refractory;  even  the  ones  who  could  speak  Spanish  would 
not  do  so.  The  same  thing  is  known  in  Manila  and  the  suburbs.  The 
people  who  can  speak  Spanish  speak  their  own  dialect  in  their  own 
houses. 

Q.  Who  appointed  the  teachers  of  public  schools;  who  was  to  blame 
for  the  fact  that  some  of  these  teachers  could  not  speak  Spanish  ?- — A. 


248 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


The  school-teachers  who  went  from  the  Normal  School  here  in  Manila 
all  understood  the  Spanish  language,  but  in  some  towns  the  masters 
of  the  private  schools  did  not  understand  it,  and  in  some  towns  it  was 
very  difficult  to  find  people  who  could  talk  Spanish. 

Q.  My  question  is,  who  was  responsible  for  the  teaching  of  Spanish? 
I know  that  the  law  provided  that  it  should  be  taught.  Why,  mani- 
festly, when  the  teacher  could  not  speak  Spanish  he  could  not  teach  it. 

I inquire,  who  was  responsible  for  the  naming  of  these  teachers,  and, 
therefore,  who  was  responsible  for  the  breaking  of  the  law? — A.  I said 
before  that  there  were  schoolmasters  appointed  by  the  civil  adminis- 
tration— by  the  government — and  the  masters  whom  they  appointed 
did  understand  the  Spanish  language. 

Q.  Precisely;  but  who  made  those  appointments  in  the  provinces? 
Was  it  the  governor  of  the  province,  or  who  was  it? — A.  The  civil 
administration  here.  The  civil  government. 

Q.  And  what  was  the  nature  of  these  schools  in  which  there  were 
teachers  other  than  those  named?  Were  they  private  schools,  or  the 
regular  government  schools? — A.  They  were  private  schools,  because 
it  was  impossible  to  find  anyone  who  understood  the  Spanish  language. 
In  some  towns  there  was  almost  no  one  who  knew  any  Spanish  at  all. 

Q.  How  much  were  the  teachers  paid  in  the  provincial  schools? — A. 
There  were  three  different  classes.  I don’t  know  exactly;  it  was  a very 
poor  salary.  I couldn’t  say  exactly  at  present,  but  it  was  a very  poor 
salary.  I don't  think  that  the  best  of  them  got  more  than  §20  or  $25 
a month. 

Q.  From  what  source  did  this  money  come? — A.  From  the  govern- 
ment. 

Q.  Could  you  make  an  estimate  of  the  total  sum  expended  annually 
in  salaries,  etc. , on  these  provincial  schools?— A.  No;  it  will  be  found 
in  the  budget. 

Q.  In  the  ‘‘Guia  Oficial  Filipina?” — A.  It  would  be  in  the  esti- 
mates of  the  local  expenses  of  the  different  provinces  of  the  archipel- 
ago; in  the  annual  budgets,  which  were  printed  here,  and  in  that  por- 
tion devoted  to  the  expenses  of  education. 

Q.  Was  there  any  system  of  inspecting  these  local  schools  to  see 
that  the  provisions  of  the  law  were  carried  out? — A.  Yes.  The  par- 
ish priest  was  the  local  inspector  and  the  governor  was  the  provincial 
inspector. 

Q.  What  suggestions  would  you  make,  if  any,  in  order  to  improve 
these  provincial  schools,  to  set  up  a comprehensive  system  of  free  edu- 
cation ? — A.  A great  many  difficulties  will  be  met  with;  for  instance, 
in  the  towns.  The  center  of  the  town  itself  may  be  composed  of  only 
fifty  or  sixty  houses.  The  rest  of  the  town  may  be  scattered  about, 
and  the  facilities  for  instruction  ought  to  be  more  scattered,  more 
diffused;  for  instance,  the  children  often  have  to  go  over  bad  roads  to 
attend  school  a distance  of  5 or  6 kilometers. 

Q.  What  part  of  the  year  are  sessions  held  at  present;  what  portion 
is  given  up  to  vacation? — A.  Officially,  the  schools  are  open  the  whole 
year,  hut  there  are  certain  times  of  the  year — for  instance,  harvest 
time — when  hardly  any  children  attend  school. 

Q.  What  provision  is  made  for  books,  writing  material,  etc.,  for 
scholars  in  these  schools? — A.  There  was  a commission  here  in  Manila 
which  distributed  proportionately  books,  ink,  pen,  paper,  etc.,  to  the 
different  schools. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


249 


Q.  Didn't  the  students  have  to  pay  for  such  things? — A.  No;  they 
gave  them  to  them.  They  have  a wonderful  faculty  of  learning  to 
read  and  write.  In  Europe  it  takes  children  five  or  six  years  to 
read  and  write,  here  they  learn  it  with  extraordinary  facility. 

Q.  Going  back  once  more  to  the  university,  I should  like  to  ask 
whether  they  give  courses  of  lectures  there  or  whether  the  instruction 
is  all  book  instruction?- — A.  The  students  in  the  university  have  their 
text-books;  but  frequently,  in  many  courses,  as  in  the  United  States, 
the  professors  lecture  on  their  various  subjects  and  the  students  take 
notes. 

Q.  Are  the  courses  open  to  visitors  when  the  university  is  in  ses- 
sion? Arc  you  accustomed  to  having  visitors  come  in?— A.  It  is  not 
the  general  thing,  but  if  anyone  wishes  to  visit  the  class  he  may  do  so 
by  getting  permission,  without  disturbing  the  class. 

Colonel  Denby.  We  are  very  much  obliged  to  you,  indeed,  and  we 
would  like  to  put  some  other  questions  to  you  gentlemen,  but  we  have 
a visitor  waiting  for  us  and  we  must  receive  him. — A.  There  has  been 
a great  deal  of  talk  about  education  in  this  country — whether  it  was 
backward  or  whether  it  was  advanced.  As  a matter  of  fact,  consider- 
ing the  state  of  advancement  of  the  country,  education  in  this  country 
is  very  far  advanced,  both  in  the  primary  grades  and  in  the  university 
grades. 


TESTIMONY  OF  0.  F.  WILLIAMS. 

Manila,  July  6 , 1899. 

Present  : Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Commissioner  Worcester,  and 
Secretary  MacArthur. 

O.  F.  Williams  appeared  before  the  commission,  and,  in  response 
to  its  interrogatories,  stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  your  name,  residence,  and  occupation  ? — A.  O.  F. 
Will  iams;  American  residence,  Rochester,  N.  Y. ; acting  as  American 
consul  at  Manila  for  the  entire  group. 

Q.  What  positions,  if  any,  did  you  fill  prior  to  your  appointment  as 
consul  here  ? — A.  1 was  consul  at  Havre,  France. 

Q.  When  were  you  appointed  to  Manila? — A.  On  the  15tli  day  of 
October,  1897. 

Q.  When  did  you  get  here? — A.  On  the  24th  of  January,  1898. 

Q.  Now,  Mr.  Williams,  if  you  care  to  tell  us— I don’t  want  to  press 
you  on  the  matter,  but  if  you  will  give  us  a little  history  of  the  events 
that  transpired  here  during  your  stay  (we  will  be  glad  to  ask  you  your 
views  on  finance  and  the  Chinese  question  later)  we  will  be  obliged. — 
A.  Well,  I am  not  sure  that  I quite  understand  the  intent  of  your 
question.  %If  it  be  what  most  occupied  my  attention  during  the  period 
before  the  war,  I can  readily  give  that.  When  I left  Washington 
there  was  little  or  no  thought  of  war — not  the  least  possible  cloud  in 
the  sky. 

Q.  When  did  you  leave  Washington? — -A.  About  the  5th  of  Decem- 
ber, leaving  my  home  in  Rochester,  N.  Y.,  for  the  Pacific  coast  on  the 
9th  of  December. 

Q.  That  was  in  1897  ? — A.  That  was  in  1897;  and  during  my  trip,  at 


250 


REPORT  OE  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Puget  Sound,  and  later  at  Yokohama,  and  still  later  at  Hongkong,  the 
evidences  of  war  increased,  so  that  when  requested  by  the  Washing- 
ton Government  or  other  parties  to  keep  advised,  1 felt  that  the  best 
service  that  I coidd  render  as  a stranger  here  was  to  get  all  possible 
information  of  the  Spanish  defenses  in  arms,  arsenals,  forts,  and  the 
condition  of  the  fleet;  and  I declined  to  make  official  calls  except  on 
the  Spanish  governor-general  and  Admiral  Montojo,  and  gave  every 
hour  that  1 could  well  spare  from  my  office  to  visiting  all  parts  of  the 
city  and  immediate  environments  here,  and  going  into  the  arsenals  and 
forts;  and  when  I had  the  opportunity  I took  notes  or  made  notes  of 
what  I had  seen  as  to  the  modern  nature  of  the  ordnance  and  the  general 
usefulness  of  the  forts  as  defenses.  I used  to  go  to  Cavite,  and  there 
conducted  like  examinations  in  the  arsenal  and  shipyard  and  visited 
the  Spanish  fleet,  not,  however,  except  in  one  or  two  cases,  aboard  the 
ships.  Remembering  the  lesson  that  I had  had  in  science  when  I was 
asked  to  watch  the  Chilean  ships  during  the  trouble  with  the  Baltimore 
down  on  the  Pacific  coast,  1 concluded  that  the  proper  thing  was  to 
know  the  draft  or  the  change  of  draft  of  the  Spanish  war  ships,  to 
know  if  they  were  taking  on  coal  or  armaments  or  anything  to  lower 
them  in  the  water,  and  I obtained  in  that  way  all  the  information  that 
I could,  and  finally  received  a letter  from  Commodore  (afterwards 
Admiral)  Dewey  asking  me  a number  of  questions  in  relation  to  the 
defenses  here,  and,  fortunately,  1 had  had  forethought  enough  to  have 
the  whole  thing  looked  up  and  minuted,  and  1 at  once  sent  him 
a large  amount  of  information  on  subjects  that  he  was  interested 
in.  And  from  that  time  to  my  leaving  here  we  were  in  constant 
communication  by  letter,  as  long  as  our  letters  were  safe  through  the 
mails;  then  by  letters  sent  by  private  messengers  on  other  ships 
coming  and  going  and  by  cipher  cables.  The  Admiral  cabled  me  that 
he  should  not  leave  Chinese  waters  until  I left  here,  and  the  Washing- 
ton Government  cabled  me  to  leave  on  the  22d  of  April,  the  day  after 
the  declaration  of  war.  I had  the  night  before  packed  my  things,  or 
such  of  them  as  I could  take  with  me,  and  the  following  morning 
received  a telegram  from  Washington  to  leave  immediately.  I also, 
on  my  way  to  the  consulate,  was  met  by  a messenger  with  a letter  from 
the  Spanish  governor-general,  asking  to  see  me  immediately.  I visited 
him  and  was  told  by  him  that  he  could  no  longer  guarantee  my  safety, 
as  a mob  or  an  assassin  might  kill  me  at  any  time,  and  he  advised  me 
to  leave  as  soon  as  possible.  I went  to  the  consulate  and  dispatched 
the  last  American  ship.  1 had  the  day  before  gotten  ready  the  P.  li. 
Thomas , and  that  morning  got  rid  of  the  Great  Admiral , the  last 
American  ship  in  port.  They  both  went  to  Hongkong  for  safety,  and 
I secured  from  the  governor-general  a promise  that  they  should  not 
be  molested  under  three  days,  so  that  they  felt  brave  enough  to  under- 
take the  voyage  to  Hongkong,  thinking  that  they  would  get  into  the 
ocean  and  safety  before  they  would  be  overtaken  by  any  Spanish  war 
ships.  During  this  time  and  for  the  ten  days,  perhaps,  preceding  my 
departure,  the  Spanish  fleet  was  very  active,  dividing  up,  one,  for 
example,  to  go  off  to  Dagupan  and  occupy  Langayen  Gulf,  another  to 
Subig,  and  others  to  the  southern  islands,  and  they  would  move  from 
the  anchorage  over  near  the  breakwater  to  Cavite  and  then  would  come 
back.  Such  of  them  as  could  find  anchorage  would  take  their  places 
behind  the  breakwater,  apparently  to  use  the  breakwater  as  a fort  wall 
in  case  of  attack,  lying  close  to  it  in  order  to  protect  them  from  an 
incoming  fleet.  The  entire  fleet  went  up  to  Subig  at  one  time. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


251 


Q.  How  far  is  Suing  from  here,  Mr.  Williams? — A.  I should  think 
about  60  miles  by  way  of  Corregidor.  It  is  about  25  miles,  25  or  30 
miles  to  the  north  line  of  Subig  Bay,  and  that  was  planned  as  a Span- 
ish naval  station.  They  had  expended  considerable  money  there.  An 
English  concern  was  engaged  when  1 came  here  in  establishing  a float- 
ing dock  of  8,000  tons  capacity,  a very  useful  dock,  indeed,  one 
that  could  be  taken  apart  and  floated  in  sections;  it  could  be  used  for 
raising  ships  or  for  any  such  purpose,  and  the  Spanish  fleet  thought 
for  a time  to  make  its  stand  there,  as  the  harbor  was  an  excellent  one. 
They  sunk  half  a dozen  schooners  and  eascoes  in  the  southern  part, 
the  wider  part,  of  the  Subig  Channel,  leaving  only  a narrow  entrance 
next  the  north  shore,  where  the  water  was  deep  and  suitable,  and 
they  united  to  entice  the  American  fleet  if  it  entered  Subig  Bay  to  get 
on  to  their  sunken  ships;  but  fortunately  I had  a private  detective  with 
the  fleet  when  it  went  to  Subig,  and  he  came  back  and  reported  to  me 
the  conditions  and  gave  me  a map,  which  I afterwards  gave  Commo- 
dore Dewejq  showing  the  position  of  the  sunken  craft,  and  the  blue 
line  made  next  to  the  north  shore  as  the  line  of  entrance  and  exit  from 
the  bay.  So  that,  as  is  known— perhaps  it  may  not  come  up  in  this 
discussion — Admiral  Dewey  headed  out  when  he  came  down  the  coast 
and  sent  the  Raleigh  and  Boston  to  recon noiter  the  bay,  coming  in 
according  to  my  map,  and  directed  the  Baltimore  to  stand  off  the 
mouth  of  the  bay  and  render  succor  if  needed.  The  ships  went  in  on 
the  lines  I had  indicated  and  found  things  according  to  my  map,  but 
they  found  no  Spanish  fleet.  They  found  it  later  on.  But  going  back 
to  the  22d  of  April,  when  1 boarded  the  Esmeralda  to  go  to  Hongkong 
to  meet  the  fleet — I could  not  live  on  board— it  was  not  considered  safe 
for  me.  I held  communication  with  certain  extra  detectives  whom 
I had  engaged  to  visit  forts,  etc.,  and  who  had  to  confine  themselves 
to  communicating  with  me  by  official  and  other  means.  So  that  up  to 
the  moment  of  my  departure  on  the  23d  of  April,  I had  communication, 
even  after  the  Esmeralda  weighed  anchor,  for  my  present  office  mes- 
senger came  to  my  ship  with  a package  of  letters  and  maps,  etc.,  that 
my  detectives  had  prepared  for  me  to  take  to  the  fleet.  I went  to 
Hongkong,  and  as  we  entered  the  harbor  the  captain  of  the  Esmeralda 
told  me  the  fleet  had  gone  away,  and  we  had  a discussion  as  to  the 
probabilities  of  its  campaign  and  that  the  orders  from  Washington 
would  be  imperative.  1 was  properly  systematizing  my  papers.  As 
soon  as  we  came  to  anchor  the  Admiral’s  private  steamer,  in  the  pay- 
master’s  charge,  came  to  see  if  we  were  prepared  at  once  to  join  them. 
But  the  heavy  sea  prevented  it.  After  we  got  to  the  mouth  of  the 
harbor  we  had  to  come  back,  and  only  reached  the  fleet  at  noon  on  the 
27th  of  April;  and  within  two  hours  from  the  time  I reached  the  fleet 
with  my  maps  and  information,  where  I was  met  by  the  captains,  who 
had  been  called  by  the  admiral  to  hear  the  last  news,  orders  were  at 
once  issued  to  start  at  2 o’clock,  and  we  were  all  under  way  at  that 
hour  on  the  voyage  to  Manila. 

Q.  We  won't  trouble  }'ou  to  describe  the  battle.  Is  there  an}Tthing 
that  occurs  to  you  that  you  can  tell  us  about  the  conditions  after  the 
battle,  and  before  the  American  soldiers  came  and  after  they  came? — 
A.  Before  the  war — that  is,  before  the  attack — as  soon  as  the  native 
people  here  had  the  least  idea  that  America  was  coming  here,  the 
question  that  seemed  most  prominent  in  their  minds  was  not  what 
kind  of  government  they  would  have  or  how  much  freedom  they 


252 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


would  have,  but  what  would  America  do  with  the  Chinese,  and  they 
even  before  I left  Manila  showed  a very  deep  interest  in  that  question, 
and  since  then,  after  the  war,  as  we  may  well  jump  over  that  period, 
when  I came  back  to  my  office  after  the  taking  of  Manila,  on  the  13th 
of  August  last,  for  months  and  months,  and  even  until  the  present 
time  there  is  no  question  that  seems  so  much  talked  of. 

Q.  What  day  did  you  come  ashore  ? — A.  I came  ashore  on  the  20th, 
1 think,  of  August,  but  I didn’t  open  my  office  until  the  22d,  for  the 
reason  that  I left  the  22d  of  April,  and  I thought  I would  make  even 
months  to  save  mathematical  calculations  in  business.  So  that  I left 
the  22d  of  April  and  I returned  the  22d  of  August,  being  gone  just 
four  months. 

Q.  Now,  you  were  going  on  to  tell  us  about  the  Chinese.  We 
want  your  opinion  on  the  subject. — A.  I used  to  talk  with  the  people, 
the  Filipinos.  1 always  endeavored  to  be  on  good  terms  with  them. 
I said  that  it  would  be  very  advantageous  to  establish  savings 
banks,  in  which  they  could  put  what  little  they  could  spare  of  their 
earnings,  and  after  a time  own  the  homes  in  which  they  lived,  and  so 
increase  their  wants  from  their  half-developed  state,  and  the  ques- 
tion was  brought  up  at  once  about  the  Chinese.  They  said  that  the 
Chinese  come  over  here  and  work;  that  they  are  very  strong  men; 
that  the}T  are  excellent  servants  in  any  department  of  work;  that 
they  take  their  money  and  hoard  it,  and  that  they  go  back  to  China. 
The  Chinese  women  have  not  been  admitted,  so  that  they  had  Chinese 
wives,  or  girls  in  China  whom  they  wished  to  make  wives;  that  the}r 
simply  hoarded  what  money  they  could  earn  here,  or  what  money 
they  could  spare  from  their  earnings,  and  went  back  to  China  with  it. 
The  question  is  very  similar  to  the  American  situation,  and  the  natives 
held  that  the  Chinese  took  work  from  them  which  they  would  be  glad 
to  do  if  they  had  the  opportunity.  The  Chinese  laborer  is  stronger 
than  the  native,  and  he  is  preferred  for  that  reason,  and  the  exporters 
and  importers  here — the  people  who  employ  laborers — give  these 
Chinese  here  substantially  all  the  coolie  contracts.  They  get  them 
through  this  old  man  Palanca  and  others.  They  are  hired  out  to  these 
shippers,  and  they  work  for  a very  small  price;  they  work  very  faith- 
fully, and  they  are  model  servants,  without  any  question;  but  the 
Filipinos  feel  very  badly  about  it,  as  it  takes  work  from  them  and 
prevents  their  receiving  wages  and  gaining  prosperity,  and  I have 
become  perfectly  satisfied  in  my  own  judgment  that  there  is  no  one 
question  that  would  go  further  toward  peace  here  than  if  it  could  be 
promulgated  that  America  would  apply  Here  the  Chinese  exclusion  act 
as  applied  in  America.  I had  written  the  Department  of  State,  before 
your  honors  came  here  long  ago  in  full  upon  this  subject,  and  I am 
very  deeply  impressed  with  its  importance.  The  coolie  system  is 
worse  than  human  slavery,  though  it  does  not  sound  so  badly.  But 
the  laws  in  America  and  in  other  countries  where  human  slavery  has 
existed  provided  more  or  less  carefully  for  the  protection  of  the  slave 
property  during  childhood,  during  sickness,  and  during  old  age,  but 
the  coolie  system  makes  none  of  those  provisions.  It  simply  uses  the 
man  as  long  as  he  has  got  physical  vigor — that  is,  has  got  any  mark  of 
value — and  then  throws  him  into  beggary. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  coolie  system  arc  you  speaking  of — that  of  bringing  the 
Chinese  here?  You  speak  of  it  as  if  there  were  existing  at  the 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


253 


present  time  such  a system.  I don't  understand  what  you  are  speak- 
ing of.  Is  it  the  machinery  of  the  system  or  really  the  system  of 
which  you  speak  ? — A.  I don’t  understand.  They  come  here  to  Manila 
as  coolies  in  the  first  place.  The  coolie  system  does  not  exist  to-dav 
as  it  does  in  some  other  parts  of  the  world,  but  the  system  as  car- 
ried out  results  in  the  minimum  price  being  paid  for  labor.  When 
I came  here  you  could  get  plenty  of  labor  for  20  cents  (Mexican) 
per  day.  It  has  doubled  since  then,  but  then  yTou  could  get  plenty  of 
labor  for  20  cents  per  day.  For  instance,  the  messenger  in  my 
office — a bright  fellow,  fairly  well  educated,  and  a native — was  getting 
$8  a month  (Mexican).  When  I came  here  Mexicans  were  worth  44 
cents,  and  he  then  got  $3.50,  or  something  like  that  in  American 
money — that  is,  a month’s  wages — and  he  is  a married  man.  Find- 
ing that  the  British  consul  paid  the  same  price,  when  I left  I put 
mv  messenger,  whose  wages  I had  increased,  in  charge  of  the  British 
consul.  The  British  consul  told  me  he  had  reduced  his  wages  to  $8 
again,  because  he  only  paid  his  servants  $8,  and  it  would  not  do  to  dis- 
criminate by  paying  one  more  than  another.  Then  there  is  another  rea- 
son why  1 object  to  the  Chinese  coming  here — a double  reason.  They 
are  polygamists  and  heathens,  and  whatever  we  may  say  of  the  civiliza- 
tion of  the  Filipinos,  they  are  Christians,  as  a rule.  Whenever  they 
have  a religion  it  is  the  Christian  religion.  The  Catholic  fathers  have 
taught  them.  And  the  Chinese,  when  they  are  rich,  keep  as  many 
wives  as  their  inclinations  lead  them  to,  or  they  can  support,  and  when 
they  are  poor  and  can  employ  women  in  any  way  to  increase  their 
wealth  they  keep  as  many  as  they  can  so  employ;  and  the  rule  is  with 
these  Chinese  here  that  they  are  polygamists,  and  their  domestic  system 
is  certainly  something  to  be  avoided  by  us  if  it  is  possible  to  avoid  it. 

Q.  You  mean  that  these  Chinese  who  come  over  here  keep  more 
than  one  woman  after  they  come  here? — A.  Oh,  yes,  sir;  as  a rule.  1 
was  talking  with  Attorney  Levering,  who  had  his  office  with  a leading 
Chinaman,  who  has  been  before  you.  He  had  his  office  with  Ongcakwe. 
He  was  speaking  to  me  about  it,  and  he  says  there  is  no  question  but 
that  all  these  well-to-do  Chinese  keep  as  many  wives  as  they'  are  able 
to  support.  I understand  that  there  is  a man  who  has  four. 

Q.  But  do  they  not  here,  as  they  do  among  some  other  Eastern  peo- 
ple, sometimes  have  four  women  to  one  man  ? — A.  I have  never  been 
into  their  places  to  inspect  them,  and  I would  not  like  to  make  any 
statement  about  anything  that  1 do  not  know;  even  if  I think  it  but 
do  not  absolutely  know  it,  I would  not  say  so.  My  ideas  have  come 
from  talking  with  these  people  and  from  general  information  gained 
from  hearing  others  speak.  There  is  another  idea  in  connection  with 
the  Chinese  question  which  alarms  me,  and  that  is  this:  I can’t  imagine 
how  we  can  exclude  Chinese  from  America  for  many  years  if  we  admit 
them  here,  or  if  we  do  not  apply  rigidly^  the  exclusion  act  here.  I 
believe,  and  have  written  to  Washington,  that  we  can  safely  amalga- 
mate all  the  Chinese  we  have  here.  Their  numbers  have  never  been 
given  to  me  as  over  84,000  in  all  these  Islands,  and  I have  heard  sev 
eral  times  since  the  war  that  there  are  not  more  than  50  or  52  thousand 
in  the  Islands,  but  I suppose  it  is  largely  an  estimate;  but  they  are  in 
Manila  and  the  towns,  and  I conclude  that  the  estimate  is  a fair  one, 
and  that  we  can  safely'  leave  them  here,  and  give  every  one  of  them 
the  fullest  rights.  I would  not  discriminate  against  them  in  any' way. 


254 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


but  I would  still  see  that  the  millions  of  China  should  not  swarm  over 
here. 

Q.  You  think  that  there  is  danger  that  they  will  swarm  over  here  ? — 
A.  I know  that  the  Spaniards  fully  understood  it,  and  they  put  a 
large  price  on  their  coming,  but  changed  it  from  time  to  time,  I think. 
I don't  know  what  their  laws  were. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  the  Chinese  feeling  is  toward  Americans? — 
A.  America  is  looked  upon  as  a heaven  by  them,  and  there  is  not  any- 
thing that  the  Chinese  would  not  do  to  get  into  America.  If  they  could 
come  here  and  from  here  go  to  America,  they  would  be  glad  enough  to 
come  here  and  stay  a time  and  then  go  to  America,  and  I am  alarmed. 
There  is  talk  of  these  people  here  who  want  the  Chinese.  They  have 
come  to  me  and  urged  and  offered  compensation  and  all  that  sort  of 
thing  if  I would  champion  the  free  admission  of  Chinese,  and  one  gentle- 
man wrote  quite  a lengthy  screed  on  the  subject  of  a free  port  and 
Chinese  admission,  and  came  to  see  me  several  times  before  lie  wrote 
it.  I never  encouraged  anything  of  the  sort,  and  finally  a few  copies 
of  the  paper  were  dropped  on  my  desk  without  any  signature,  but  1 
knew  the  author,  and  a day  or  two  afterwards,  after  I had  read  and 
reread  the  screed,  I met  the  old  gentleman  on  the  street.  “Well,”  he 
said,  “ did  you  read  that  article  on  the  open  port  and  the  Chinese  ques- 
tion?” I told  him  I had  carefully  read  and  reread  it,  and  was  com- 
pelled by  my  convictions  to  antagonize  him  on  both  points,  and  we 
have  had  several  earnest  talks  on  the  subject.  He  said:  “Mr.  Jones, 
the  banker,  for  instance,  says,  ‘ Why,  he  can’t  get  anything  done.  We 
can’t  get  houses  built  unless  we  have  the  Chinese.’”  My  judgment  is 
that  in  less  than  three  years  the  American  mechanic  will  practically 
control  the  mechanical  work  of  all  sorts  in  the  Islands,  because  he  has 
got  infinitely  better  tools,  more  skill,  and  better  execution,  and  even 
with  the  cheap  wages  which  prevail  in  mechanical  work  here  he  will 
successfully  compete.  I have  no  fear  that  we  will  lack  servants  or 
mechanics  of  any  sort  or  laborers  if  we  restrict  Chinese  immigration. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Why  do  you  fear  that  if  the  Chinese  were  allowed  to  come 
freely  or  without  more  or  less  limitation  into  the  Philippines  it  would 
be  disastrous? — A.  If  you  please,  sir,  that  rests  upon  this  assump- 
tion: I believe  that  no  other  flag  will  ever  fly  here  but  the  American 
flag.  I believe  that  before  the  time  will  come  that  America  would  be 
disposed  to  give  freedom  and  self-government  to  these  people  the  peo- 
ple will  be  united  against  it.  They  will  desii’e  above  all  things  to  be 
part  and  parcel  of  the  United  States,  under  territorial  or  some  other 
form  of  government,  and  that  there  is  to  be  no  other  flag  here;  and  if 
that  is  to  be  the  case  and  we  have  freedom  of  trade  and  intercourse  of 
all  sorts  in  mails  and  customs  service  between  here  and  the  United 
States,  then  certainly  there  will  be  very  great  difficulty  if  people  who 
are  recognized  as  citizens  here  are  not  recognized  as  citizens  in  the 
United  States.  I can  not  see  where  we  can  put  up  the  bars  between 
these  Islands  and  the  States  any  more  than  we  can  put  up  the  bars 
between  Ohio  and  Pennsylvania. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  You  are  going  on  the  assumption  that  the  Chinese  are  going  to 
be  recognized  as  citizens,  are  you? — A.  Yes,  I think  that  is  bound  to 
come.  1 don't  know  any  reason  why  not. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


‘255 


By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  You  don’t  know  of  any  good  reason  why  the  United  States  should 
not  admit  the  Chinese  as  citizens? — A.  I limit  it  to  the  number  here. 
There  would  be  less  occasion  for  it,  and  that  is  the  reason  for  limiting 
the  number. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

(^.  Why  do  you  say  that  there  is  no  reason  why  these  people  should 
not  be  citizens  here  when  you  regard  them  as  so  very  objectionable  for 
us  at  home? — A.  Well,  that  is  apparently  inconsistent,  but  I think  that 
if  they  are  made  citizens  here,  the  question  of  polygamy  may  be  abol- 
ished here  as  we  have  treated  the  same  thing,  and  succeeded  fairly 
well  with  it  in  America;  and  not  only  that,  T have  a good  idea,  a good 
opinion,  of  very  many  of  the  Chinese  here  as  business  men  and  as 
individuals,  and  simply  dislike  their  want  of  religion  if  you  please, 
and  their  polygamous  practices,  but  certainly  they  are  useful  people 
here;  I don’t  deny  it  at  all.  I think  they  are  very  useful  indeed,  but 
I believe  the  labor  can  be  carried  on  successfully  by  such  Americans 
as  will  come  here,  or  stay  here,  and  by  such  natives  as  are  here  and 
want  to  do  this  work,  and  that  there  is  no  good  reason  why  we  should 
allow  an  increase  of  the  Chinese  element.  But  I don’t  see  how  we  can, 
acquiring  this  territory  under  any  sort  of  agreement,  exclude  those 
who  were  here  when  we  came,  because  under  our  free  government  and 
the  equality  of  races  I would  give  them  the  same  privileges  I would 
give  the  Filipinos.  They  are  just  as  much  a part  of  these  Islands,  so 
far  as  we  are  concerned,  as  the  Filipinos  that  were  here  when  we  came. 
Many  of  them  have  been  here  represented  for  three  generations. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Have  you  looked  into  the  currency  or  financial  question  any? — 
A.  I can  not  say  yes.  I am  not  a financier  and  I question  very  much 
whether  I can  say'  anything  that  will  be  of  the  least  advantage  to  your 
commission  on  the  financial  question  here,  but  I see  every  day  at  my 
hotel,  where  I have  boarded  ever  since  I came  here,  that  a man  can 
come  in  with  an  American  silver  dollar  and  fill  himself  up  with  a dollar 
dinner  until  he  is  perfectly  satisfied,  and  when  he  goes  up  to  the  desk, 
on  his  way  out,  and  lays  down  the  American  silver  dollar  he  is  given 
a Mexican  silver  dollar  in  exchange,  and  he  goes  off  with  more  and 
purer  silver  than  when  he  came  in.  It  is  quite  a lesson  in  finance,  but 
at  the  same  time  I am  not  a financier. 

Q.  Have  you  any  special  views  with  regard  to  the  establishment  of 
a United  States  court  here? — A.  I am  unequivocally  opposed  to  Span- 
ish courts  here,  except  to  finish,  to  close  up  unfinished  business.  I 
believe  that  the  early  future  will  show  the  English  language  prevalent 
here,  and  that  there  will  never  come  a time  when  it  will  be  so  easy  to 
adopt  the  English  language  in  our  courts  as  it  is  to-day. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Why,  if  the  English  language  is  soon  to  become  the  prevalent 
language,  not  wait  until  it  does? — A.  It  will  become  prevalent  by  the 
extension  of  business. 

Q.  Why  won’t  that  be  the  proper  time  to  adopt  the  English  lan- 
guage? If  it  is  going  to  be  the  prevalent  language  in  the  future,  and 
is  not  the  prevalent  language  at  the  present  time,  why  not  adopt  it  in 
the  future  ? — A.  The  law  business  of  the  Philippines  is  a very  small 


256 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


matter  compared  with  what  it  is  likely  to  be  with  the  expansion  of  busi- 
ness. If  we  adopt  the  English  language  in  the  courts  it  will  discour- 
age a certain  amount  of  litigation,  and  bring  in  its  stead  arbitration  of 
the  questions  between  the  Filipinos  and  Spaniards  and  others,  and,  so 
far  as  I can  learn  from  the  banks  and  business  houses — those  Avho  have 
large  cases  in  law — they  are  individually  in  favor  of  the  English- 
speaking  course.  I have  not  found  a single  exception,  and  I know 
that  such  men  as  Mr.  Jones,  of  the  Hongkong  Bank.  Mr.  Brown,  of 
the  Chartered  Bank,  and  the  people  of  Smith.  Bell  & Co.,  and  War- 
ner, Barnes  & Co.  have  even  gone  so  far  as  to  talk  of  consular  courts 
here,  because  they  are  unwilling  to  trust  their  cases  in  a Filipino 
court. 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion,  Mr.  Williams,  of  the  capacity  of  these 
people  for  self-government? — A.  Capacity — 1 think  they  possess  it. 
Perhaps  not  to-day.  Their  education  has  been  very  narrow,  not  so 
limited  as  some  people  think  in  the  numbers  of  people  who  have  been 
somewhat  educated,  but  the  education  of  the  individual  person  has 
been  very  narrow — confined  largely  to  church  lines — and  not  of  suffi- 
cient liberality  and  breadth  to  enable  them  to  appreciate  such  a form  of 
government  as  we  have.  They  have  never  been  taught  any  such  thing. 
It  is  a government  of  the  few  and  submission  by  the  many  that  the}' 
have  been  taught;  but,  so  far  as  1 can  understand  them,  I believe  they 
are  quite  as  capable  people  as  the  Japanese,  and  the  Japanese,  as  we 
know,  in  less  than  forty  years  have  developed  from  a low  grade  of 
civilization  to  become  one  of  the  powers  of  the  earth.  They  seem  to 
me  verv  like  the  Japanese. 

Q.  Now,  in  the  beginning,  then,  you  think  the  government  ought 
to  be  educative  and  somewhat  strong,  but  by  degrees  it  might  develop 
into  a self-government? — A.  Yes. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  You  say  there  has  been  a misapprehension  as  to  the  number 
of  people  who  have  a reasonable  education.  What  is  your  estimate  as 
to  the  percentage  of  people  who  have  had  anything  beyond  a rudi- 
mentary or  primary  education  ? — A.  I am  unable  to  answer  that.  I 
have  not  been  in  the  southern  islands  at  all.  and  have  not  been  50  miles 
from  Manila  on  land,  and  my  answer  would  be  valueless,  I fancy,  but 
little  things  lead  me  to  that  conclusion;  for  example,  a great  many 
natives  come  to  my  office  and  ask  me  for  letters  of  identification — if 
I will  not  give  them  a letter  to  General  MacArthur  or  Colonel  McCoy 
or  somebody — so  they  can  go  through  the  lines  and  come  back  with 
their  horses  and  carriages,  and  I found  that  almost  everyone  of  these 
people  could  write.  People  who  are  barefooted,  and  almost  naked,  still 
have  been  taught  the  rudiments,  and  I believe  that  quite  a large  per 
cent  of  the  people,  so  far  as  1 know  them,  have  a smattering  of 
education. 

Q.  What  1 was  trying  to  get  at  was,  whether  you  based  your  state- 
ment on  what  you  had  seen  in  Manila  or  thereabouts. — A.  Why  you 
have  a hundred  times  as  much  information  on  the  Philippines  as  1 
have. 

Adjourned. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


257 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  CALDERON. 

Manila.  July  7, 1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and 
Mr.  John  R.  MacArthur. 

Felipe  Caldeiion,  in  response  to  questions,  stated  as  follows: 

B\r  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  is  your  name  ( — A.  Felipe  Calderon. 

Q.  Where  do  you  resided — A.  In  Manila.  At  present  in  Ermita, 
San  Jose  street,  No.  18. 

Q.  What  is  your  profession' — A.  Lawyer;  and  1 have  one  term  to 
complete  to  graduate  in  literature  and  philosophy,  and  two  terms 
to  finish  the  course  in  physics  and  chemistry. 

Q.  Where  were  you  educated  l — A.  I have  studied  from  my  earliest 
years  in  the  College  of  the  Jesuits. 

Q.  Have  you  attended  any  other  school  ' — A.  No.  On  finishing  the 
course  of  secondary  instruction,  T entered  the  university  hen*  in 
Manila.  I have  also  studied  in  the  Government  School  of  Agricul- 
ture, when  it  was  established  here  in  the  Philippines. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  in  your  own  words  what  you  know  of  the  edu- 
cational system  of  Manila  and  the  old  educational  system  in  general, 
including  the  part  of  it  which  was  in  the  provinces,  and  then  tell  us 
what  suggestions  you  would  make  ? — A.  It  is  very  unfitting  for  me  to 
say  so,  but  in  all  the  courses  which  I entered  I always  took  the 
highest  marks  and  stood  first  in  my  classes  in  all  the  different  branches 
which  I studied. 

Q.  Now  tell  us  about  the  educational  institutions  here  in  Manila 
and  give  us  vour  suggestions  as  to  the  making  of  such  changes  as  vou 
think  desirable. — A.  In  order  to  understand  thoroughly  the  educa- 
tional system  in  the  Philippines  it  is  necessary  that  we  tell  a little  of 
its  history. 

Q.  Go  ahead. — A.  We  will  take  its  history  from  the  year  1800  up 
to  the  present  time,  and  consider  what  was  done  in  the  question  of 
education  legally  and  what  was  done  illegally,  for,  as  a matter  of  fact, 
the  law  has  not  been  carried  out.  The  law  is  written  one  way,  and  the 
practice  has  been  different;  it  has  not  fulfilled  the  law.  Prior  to  1860, 
at  the  beginning,  there  were  here  three  colleges — the  University  of 
San  Ignacio,  which  was  the  first  one  founded  by  the  Jesuits;  San  Jose, 
by  the  Jesuits,  and  the  third,  the  University  of  Santa  Tomas,  which 
was  under  the  control  of  the  Dominicans,  but  it  was  sustained  by  dona- 
tions made  to  the  university.  This  is  also  true  of  the  Jesuit  universi- 
ties and  institutions.  There  is  nothing  more  to  say  about  this  system 
of  education,  for  it  has  the  same  degrees  which  exist  in  Europe. 
There  was  a great  deal  of  weight  given  to  canonical  matter  and  it  was 
an  education  purely  classical,  canonical,  and  theological.  In  the  year 
1600  Chirino  wrote  the  history  of  the  Philippines,  in  which  he  deplored 
the  fact  that  in  the  universities  there  were  no  chairs  of  science  or 
mathematics.  There  was  also  a board  of  commercial  education,  Avherc 
they  taught  navigation  and  mercantile  pursuits,  which  was  sustained 
by  the  merchants.  To  understand  this  board  of  trade  it  is  necessary 
to  say  that  the  only  business  which  existed  in  former  times  here  was 
the  coming  and  going  of  ships  between  here  and  Mexico  bringing  gold, 
p c 17 


258 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


and  there  were  tickets  issued  to  members  of  this  board  of  trade  for 
space  in  these  ships.  They  divided  up  the  freight  space.  There  was 
also  a little  primary  instruction  in  the  towns,  which  was  entirely  in  the. 
hands  of  the  priests.  The  local  priest  in  the  town  appointed  anyone 
he  pleased  as  schoolmaster,  and  the  result  was  that  the  children  learned 
to  read  a little  and  to  write  on  banana  leaves  or  in  the  sand,  and 
nothing  more.  We  will  not  consider  further  this  first  period  in 
the  history  of  education  in  the  Philippines,  for  it  is  of  very  little 
importance.  During  this  first  period  two  of  the  universities,  San  Jose 
and  San  Ignacio,  were  united  into  one,  called  San  Jose;  and  then  came 
the  expulsion  of  the  Jesuits,  and  their  property  was  all  confiscated. 
The  Government  confiscated  their  property — all  of  it:  but  there  were 
some  of  their  properties  which  were  devoted  to  the  maintenance  of  the 
University  of  San  Jose,  and  these  could  not  be  counted  in  among  their 
other  property,  being  a donation  given  to  them  for  that  express  pur- 
pose. Thus  the  University  of  San  Jose  ceased  to  lie  a university  and 
became  a college  of  secondary  instruction,  under  the  ownership  of  the 
Government,  administered  by  clericos;  consequently  higher  education 
was  entirely  in  the  power  of  the  University  of  Santo  Tomas.  For 
institutions  of  secondary  instruction  we  have  the  College  of  San  .lose 
and  the  College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran,  the  latter  dependent  on  the 
University  of  Santo  Tomas.  Provisional  instruction  and  primary 
instruction  remained  in  tin1  same  condition  in  which  it  was  before.  In 
that  institute  they  taught  three  courses  of  Latin  and  three  courses  of 
philosophy. 

Q.  In  what  institution  i — A.  That  is  in  the  two  colleges,  both  of 
San  Jose  and  San  Juan  de  Letran,  and  so  those  who  studied  there 
understood  Latin,  but  they  did  not  understand  Spanish;  they  under- 
stood philosophy,  that  is,  I say  they  understood  it.  They  studied,  but 
they  did  not  understand,  geography;  they  did  not  know  where  the 
Amazon  River  was.  or  Paris  was,  or  anything  of  that  sort.  They 
didn’t  know  anything  about  mathematics  or  history,  or  anything  prac- 
tical. In  1860,  from  which  date  we  may  say  the  contemporaneous  his- 
tory of  education  in  the  Philippine  Islands  begins,  there  was  a great 
revolution  in  systems  of  instruction  in  the  Philippine  Islands,  due  to 
the  coming  back  of  the  Jesuits— a radical  change.  Let  us  take  the 
course  from  the  primary  grade  to  the  higher  in  order  to  understand  it. 
Then  there  was  a great  question  arose  in  Manila,  and  two  parties  were 
formed  as  to  whether  or  not  the  teaching  of  Spanish  should  be  obliga- 
tory. One  party,  headed  by  the  bishop,  Francisco  Gianza.  who  was 
afterwards  bishop  of  Camarines  and  was  the  author  of  a Latin  gram- 
mar (he  was  a Dominican),  said  that  Spanish  should  not  be  taught  by 
any  means  in  the  Philippines;  and  another  party,  headed  by  Jose  Her- 
nandez Cruz,  who  came  out  at  the  head  of  the  Jesuits,  and  whose  party 
claimed  that  Spanish  should  be  taught  in  the  Philippines — that  the 
teaching  of  Spanish  in  the  Philippines  should  be  obligatory.  There 
were  some  terrible  speeches  made  on  this  question  as  to  which  party 
should  have  the  upper  hand,  and  1 have  some  of  those  speeches,  which 
1 will  be  glad  to  show  the  commission.  The  argument  was  made  that 
if  Spanish  were  taught  the  Filipinos  would  understand  tin*  laws, 
which  they  did  not  think  desirable.  The  party  in  favor  of  the  teach- 
ing of  Spanish  in  the  Philippines  was  triumphant,  and  then  came  acts 
making  tin'  teaching  of  Spanish  obligatory,  and  from  day  to  day  mak- 
ing it  more  and  more  binding.  When  the  obligatory  teaching  of 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


259 


Spanish  was  established  the  normal  school,  for  school-teachers,  was 
established.  It  was  maintained  by  the  Spanish  Government  and 
directed  bv  the  Jesuits.  This  is  the  same  school  which  still  exists  and 
which  has  been  the  most  powerful  means  of  diffusing  the  Spanish  lan- 
guage, because  the  teachers  whom  I spoke  of  before,  who  were  appointed 
by  the  priests,  and  who  taught  the  children  to  write  upon  banana 
leaves,  etc.,  were  suppressed  and  substituted  by  teachers  from  this 
normal  school.  The  board  of  education  was  created  and  presided  over 
by  the  archbishop  and  similar  members  in  the  provinces;  the  local 
inspectors  were  the  parish  priests,  and  the  provincial  inspector  was  the 
governor  of  the  province.  This  is  sufficient  for  the  primary  instruc- 
tion. We  will  now  pass  on  to  the  secondary  instruction. 

The  Jesuits  petitioned  the  municipality  of  Manila  to  establish  the 
municipal  ateneo,  maintained  by  the  municipality  and  directed  by 
themselves,  in  which  the  secondary  courses  of  instruction  began  to  be 
taught  as  they  were  in  Europe,  and  instead  of  paying  the  greatest 
attention  to  theology,  as  they  had  done  before,  and  to  classical  courses, 
they  gave  more  attention  to  history  and  sciences,  as  is  done  in  Europe. 
And  when  this  modification  was  made  San  Juan  de  Letran  followed 
the  example  of  the  Jesuits.  The  university  also  began  to  bestir  itself, 
and  about  this  time,  in  the  year  1870,  the  decree  of  Moret  came,  secu- 
larizing the  University  of  Santo  Tomas.  This  decree  came  from  the 
university  in  Madrid,  and  was  sent  out,  but  the  Governor-General  did 
not  allow  it  to  go  into  effect.  The  friars,  who  were  brought  out  about 
that  time,  worked  against  the  fulfillment  of  the  decree.  This  was 
during  the  Republic  in  Spain;  and,  as  the  Governor-General  here  had 
power  then  to  suspend  the  decree,  he  did  not  allow  it  to  go  into  effect. 
The  suspension  of  the  Governor-General  was  necessarily  temporary, 
and  the  friars  continued  their  work  in  Madrid  with  the  hope  of  making 
it  permanent;  and  as  the  decree  was  suspended,  the  friars  began  to 
change  the  method  of  instruction  here,  and  in  addition  to  the  courses 
in  law  and  philosophy,  which  they. had  before,  they  added  the  courses 
of  medicine  and  pharmacy.  The  college  of  San  Jose  was  suppressed, 
and  the  funds  which  were  formerly  used  to  sustain  the  college  of  San 
dose  were  diverted  to  the  maintenance  of  these  courses  of  medicine 
and  pharmacy  by  the  endeavors  of  the  Dominicans,  and  the  number 
of  men  holding  scholarships  in  the  college  of  San  Jose  was  reduced 
little  by  little,  and  they  were  segregated  in  the  college  of  San  Juan  de 
Letran.  In  this  party  we  had,  in  the  first  place,  the  normal  school, 
which  was  dependent  upon  the  civil  government,  as  the  center,  and 
from  there  the  school  teachers  went  out  into  the  towns.  According 
to  law,  there  should  have  been  in  every  town  a school  for  male  children 
and  a school  for  female  children,  and  in  every  ward  of  500  inhabitants 
there  shoidd  also  have  been  a school  for  boys  and  one  for  girls.  The 
instruction  of  girls  was  intrusted  to  the  Sisters  of  Charity,  who  were 
examined  before  a commission  on  primary  instruction,  which  was 
composed  of  different  people, 

Q.  They  examined  the  school  teachers? — A.  The  teachers  were 
examined  by  this  commission,  the  commission  giving  them  certificates 
according  to  their  merit;  and  furthermore,  in  Camarines,  and  in  Nueva 
Caceres,  there  was  a school,  also  directed  by  the  Sisters  of  Charity, 
for  the  further  instruction  of  schoolmistresses,  the  education  being 
of  the  second  grade.  We  had  the  municipal  ateneo  and  the  College 
of  San  Juan  for  instruction  of  the  second  grade,  and  the  University 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


260 

of  Santo  Tomas  for  higher  education,  in  which  there  were  courses  in 
theology,  and  diplomas  were  issued  also  in  canonical  law  and  in  civil 
law.  medicine,  and  pharmacy. 

In  about  the  year  1880  there  were  also  added  courses  for  qualifying 
as  nurses  and  pharmacists  and  midwives.  That  brings  us  up  to  the 
year  1880. 

In  the  time  of  General  Despujes,  about  1892,  the  primary  instruc- 
tion was  changed  in  this  way:  The  instruction  was  kept  the  "same,  but 
the  teachers  were  given  better  salaries.  They  were  given  better  sal- 
aries and  were  better  classified.  There  was  a competitive  examina- 
tion, and  the  system  of  competitive  examinations  was  introduced 
among  the  applicants  for  school  teachers’  positions.  At  this  time  a 
department  of  departmental  and  professional  instruction  was  estab- 
lished by  the  Government;  also  a school  of  arts  and  trades  was  main- 
tained by  the  Government.  The  first  by  the  Board  of  Trade  was 
suppressed  at  this  time.  The  school  of  navigation,  which  had  for- 
merly been  maintained  bv  them,  and  of  which  we  spoke  before,  was 
from  now  on  maintained  by  the  Government.  That  was  in  Manila, 
and  in  Iloilo  a school  of  arts  and  trades  was  established. 

For  women  there  was  a superior  normal  school  established,  directed 
by  the  nuns  and  sustained  by  the  nuns. 

For  instruction  of  the  secondary  order  we  have  in  Manila  the 
municipal  ateneo  and  the  normal  school.  In  the  ateneo  at  this  time 
great  changes  were  made  also.  For  instance,  courses  which  formerly 
took  five  years  were  made  to  consist  of  six  years,  and  there  were 
only  three  courses  in  mathematics,  and  great  attention  was  given  to 
mathematics,  and  there  was  a course  in  physical  and  chemical  science. 
The  normal  school,  for  schoolmasters,  also  amplified  its  system,  so 
that  it  became  a superior  normal  school,  and  the  university  also,  in 
1896.  established  courses  in  science,  and  in  physics  and  chemistry. 
This  is  the  history  of  education  in  the  Philippines  in  its  legal  aspect. 

Let  us  see  now  what  happened  in  practice.  There  were  also  schools 
of  secondary  instruction  established  in  different  provinces,  directed 
by  friars  and  subject  to  the  seminaries.  These  institutions  had  origi- 
nally been  for  the  education  of  friars  and  priests,  but  their  functions 
were  enlarged  at  this  time  so  as  to  take  in  and  educate  people  also 
who  wished  for  education  but  did  not  wish  to  become  friars.  In  addi- 
tion to  these  schoolmasters  of  secondary  instruction,  there  were  also 
in  the  provinces  certain  schoolmasters  known  as  Teachers  of  the 
Trinity,  who  were  the  greatest  calamity  that  could  happen  ; they  were 
subject  to  the  university  and  were  scattered  about  in  the  provinces, 
and  they  had  to  examine  their  students  at  the  university. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Was  there  any  tuition  fee  paid  by  any  of  the  scholars  ?— A.  No; 
by  those  who  could  well  afford  it,  yes;  but  it  was  not  obligatory.  The 
teachers  were  paid  by  the  Government. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  much  a teacher  was  paid  in  the  common 
schools? — A.  According  to  his  class  and  category. 

Q.  What  was  the  lowest  salary  paid? — A.  Twenty -five  dollars  a 
month,  I think.  This  is  the  legal  aspect  of  the  case.  Now  we  will 
consider  the  practical  side  of  it.  We  will  begin  with  primary  instruc- 
tion. We  will  begin  on  the  subject  of  Spanish.  How  can  it  be 
explained  that  in  spite  of  so  many  provisions  made  for  the  teaching  of 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


261 

Spanish  since  the  year  1860,  or  thereabouts,  there  are  only  about  LO 
per  cent  of  the  population  who  speak  Spanish;  and  how  does  it  happen 
that,  the  Government  spending  as  much  money  as  it  did  spend,  and 
working  as  it  did  work,  so  few  speak  Spanish,  and  that  it  may  be  said 
that  there  is  scarcely  any  culture  in  the  Philippines?  In  saying  cul- 
ture I do  not  mean  the  simple  knowledge  to  read  and  write,  for  there 
are  perhaps  75  per  cent  of  the  population  of  the  Philippines  who 
know  how  to  read  and  write  mechanically,  that  is,  they  know  how 
to  make  the  letters  only,  without  knowing  how  to  read.  They  read, 
they  make  letters  to  write  and  to  read,  but  only  mechanically  they 
can  do  it;  they  don't  understand  the  material  that  they  are  read- 
ing. The  explanation  of  this  is  found  in  the  existence  of  the  two 
parties  when  the  question  arose  about  the  teaching  of  Spanish.  The 
party  of  friars  was  headed  by  Gianea — and  if  a more  eloquent  witness 
is  desired,  one  of  them  by  the  name  of  Miguel  Lucio,  a Franciscan 
friar,  wrote  a book  in  Tagalo,  in  which  he  maintained  that  it  would 
not  be  advisable  for  the  Filipinos  to  understand  Spanish. 

Q.  Do  the  people  who  do  not  speak  Spanish  all  speak  Tagalo,  or 
do  they  speak  other  languages  ? — A.  There  is  a great  variety  of  tongues. 
In  Pampanga  they  talk  Tagalo,  the  Ilocano  talks  Ilocano.  There  are 
many  dialects. 

Q.  How  is  it  here  in  the  province  of  Manila,  what  language? — A. 
Tagalo,  but  Tagalo  mixed  with  Spanish,  adulterated;  it  is  not  the 
pure  Tagalo.  In  many  provinces  they  talk  Tagalo.  In  this  book  by 
Miguel  Lucio  it  was  maintained  that  the  Indians  ought  to  only  learn 
to  say  their  prayers,  and  spend  the  rest  of  their  time  with  their  water 
buffalo,  the  caribao.  It  is  a very  remarkable  book.  By  such  historic 
testimony  it  can  be  explained  why  instruction  was  not  more  diffused 
in  the  Philippines.  Now  for  actual  occurrences:  The  school-teachers 
who  instruct  their  pupils  well  and  in  Spanish  are  all  enemies  of  the 
priests  and  friars. 

Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  these  friars  and  priests  ? — A.  The 
friars  are  religious  orders  which  depend  upon  a general,  and  the  priests 
are  not  members  of  any  religious  order;  they  do  not  have  religious 
orders,  but  depend  upon  the  Pope  directly.  This  is  a canonical  dis- 
tinction; but,  as  a matter  of  fact,  in  the  Philippines  there  is  a distinc- 
tion between  friars  and  friars — there  are  friars  and  friars.  The 
Capuchins  are  friars,  but  they  are  not  such  low  people  as  the  Recoletos, 
the  Franciscans,  the  Dominicans,  and  the  Augustinians. 

Q.  How  about  the  Jesuits? — A.  They  are  very  well  thought  of  in  the 
country.  In  speaking  of  friars  in  the  Philippines  you  are  understood 
to  mean  the  Dominicans,  Franciscans,  Augustinians,  andtheRecoletos. 

Q.  Are  all  the  Dominicans  friars? — A.  All.  And  it  is  against  these 
four  orders  that  the  Philippine  people  are  especially  bitter,  for  they 
are  the  ones  who  have  done  the  great  damage  to  the  country. 

Q.  Well,  have  these  friars  the  right  to  be  parish  priests? — A.  In 
canonical  law  they  have  not. 

Q.  How  did  they  get  to  be  parish  priests,  if  they  did? — A.  The 
friars  came  here  in  the  first  place  under  the  guise  of  missionaries,  and 
Philip  II,  bv  a royal  petition,  obtained  from  the  Pope  the  right  for 
them  to  act  as  parish  priests — that  is  to  say,  to  exercise  the  functions 
of  parish  priests  in  these  parishes  and  for  such  time  as  the  parishes 
were  missions.  But  now  all  these  missions  have  been  converted  into 
parishes;  there  are  no  missions  any  longer;  but  they,  by  corruption, 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


2G2 

continued  acting  as  parish  priests  against  the  canons  of  the  church. 
When  you  wish  a conference  on  the  religious  question  here  in  the 
Philippines  I will  present  myself  with  the  greatest  pleasure. 

In  case  a school-teacher  in  the  province  wished  to  teach  his  scholars 
Spanish,  and  to  teach  them  well,  the  parish  priest  immediately  became 
his  enemy;  he  would  denounce  him  to  the  governor  as  a filibusterer 
or  an  enemy  to  the  government;  and  as  the  Spanish  priest  was  the 
ruler  of  the  governor  one  word  from  him  was  enough  to  make  it 
necessary  for  the  schoolmaster  to  leave.  And  as  the  priest  was  the 
local  inspector  of  the  schoolmaster  and  the  school  he  could  do  as  he 
liked  with  the  schoolmaster.  I do  not  say  that  all  the  schoolmasters 
are  incompetent,  but  I will  say  that  all  of  them  do  not  speak  Spanish, 
and  some  of  them  but  very  little,  and  the  friars  do  not  wish  them  to 
teach  it;  and,  in  spite  of  all  the  acts  and  provisions  that  have  been 
made  for  the  teaching  of  Spanish,  as  a matter  of  fact  it  is  not  taught, 
because  the  friars  are  the  ones  in  power. 

Colonel  Denby.  We  would  like  to  have  a full  and  clear  account 
of  the  relations  of  the  friars  to  the  people;  how  they  began — that  is, 
what  are  their  good  points  and  what  are  their  bad  points.  Let  us  have 
it  all. 

Examination  of  this  witness  was  suspended  at  this  time,  to  be  con- 
tinued on  Tuesday  next,  July  11. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  CALDERON  (recalled). 

Manila,  July  11 , 1899. 

Present  : Colonel  Denby,  in  the  chair;  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr. 
MacArthur. 

Felipe  Calderon,  recalled,  stated: 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  At  the  time  we  closed  we  were  talking  of  the  parish  schools  and 
the  provincial  schools  and  the  relationship  of  the  friars,  and  I ask  you 
to  take  up  your  remarks  and  go  ahead  with  them  in  relation  to  the 
school  question. — A.  We  were  talking  about  the  schools  of  primary 
instruction.  I was  asked  why  the  Spanish  language  was  not  more 
diffused  in  the  country,  and  my  answer  to  that  is  that  the  Spanish 
Government  provided  for  the  diffusion  of  the  Spanish  language  in  the 
country,  but  the  cause  of  its  not  having  been  taught  generally  was  the 
opposition  of  the  clerical  party.  The  opposition  was  by  the  party  I 
have  spoken  of  before,  headed  by  Father  Guincia.  1 have  the  proofs 
of  this,  one  of  which  is  the  speeches  made  by  the  party  headed  bv 
Father  Guincia,  and  another  proof  is  the  book  written  by  a priest, 
Miguel  Lucio.  Now  I will  go  on  and  give  you  some  concrete  exam- 
ples. The  principles  of  the  opposition  of  the  friars  are  as  follows: 
In  the  first  place,  the  friar  being  the  inspector  of  local  instruction,  a 
single  word  from  him  was  sufficient  motive  for  the  governor  to  cause 
a schoolmaster  to  lose  his  position.  It  is  evident  that  when  the  matter 
of  instruction  is  in  the  hands  of  the  priests  they  can  do  as  they  like, 
and  when  they  were;  opposed  to  the  speaking  of  Spanish,  Spanish  was 
not  taught.  I have  known  of  cases  in  which  the  schoolmaster,  because 
lie  wished  to  do  his  duty,  has  been  put  in  jail.  A case  was  made 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE:  COMMISSION. 


263 

against  him  on  slanderous  and  false  accusations,  and  he  was  put  in  jail 
with  the  idea  of  making  him  lose  his  position.  I have  seen  in  the 
town  of  Navotas,  in  the  province  of  Manila,  a school  kept  in  a stable 
where  horses  were  kept.  In  the  stable  of  the  convent,  where  they 
kept  their  horses,  they  also  had  a school.  As  soon  as  a man  w ho 
understood  Spanish  put  in  his  appearance  to  take  a position  as  a school- 
master in  a town,  he  was  denounced  as  a filibusterer  or  an  enemy  of 
Spain,  that  he  was  an  enemy  of  the  priests;  and,  of  course,  if  he  did 
not  understand  Spanish  he  could  not  read  any  books  except  books 
written  in  Tagalog,  and,  as  the  Spanish  had  the  right  of  censorship 
over  all  publications  in  Tagalog,  they  took  care  that  the  publications 
in  Tagalog  were  those  that  they  wished.  The  Government  had  the 
right  of  censorship  over  these  Tagalog  publications,  but  it  is  well 
known  that  the  friars  were  the  only  ones  who  could  censor  Tagalog. 
A great  many  facts  might  be  cited  in  proof  of  what  I say.  and  in  spite 
of  the  acts  of  the  Spanish  Government  from  the  time  of  ”The  Laws 
of  the  Indies,”  the  purpose  of  the  laws  has  been  defeated.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  the  question  of  instruction  has  been  in  the  hands  of 
the  friars  entirely,  and  it  seems  a paradox  that  75  per  cent  of  the 
inhabitants  here  know  how  to  read  and  write,  and  yet  they  have  no 
culture.  They  understand  how  to  read  Tagalog  and  how  to  make  the 
letters,  but  they  have  no  culture,  for  they  have  no  books  and  there 
are  no  means  of  intellectual  communication.  Both  secondary  and 
primary  instruction,  so  far  as  girls  are  concerned,  was  in  a state  of 
abandonment  until  the  Sisters  of  Charity  came;  until  about  the  year 
1870,  when  they  began  to  give  the  girls  instruction  like  the  boys.  This 
is  all  that  1 have  to  say  about  public  primary  instruction. 

I will  now  take  up  secondary  instruction.  Up  to  the  jear  1860 
there  was  no  instruction  of  the  secondary  class  such  as  there  was  in 
Europe.  There  were  three  years  of  Latin  and  three  of  philosophy. 
But  since  the  year  1860,  or  thereabouts,  instruction  of  the  secondary 
class  has  been  taught  here  in  Manila  after  the  style  in  which  it  is  done 
in  Europe.  There  were  two  different  institutions  in  Manila  where  sec- 
ondary instruction  was  taught — the  Municipal  Ateneo  and  the  College 
of  San  Juan  de  Letran.  The  secondary  instruction  given  in  both  these 
institutions,  in  the  first  place,  it  ma\r  be  said,  had  the  fault  of  being 
very  old  fashioned.  It  was  entirely  too  much  a classical  course,  and 
not  practical;  but  in  the  ateneo  they  gave  more  attention  to  the  sciences, 
to  mathematics,  and  cnemistry,  and  other  sciences.  As  I have  said,  the 
ateneo.  giving  more  attention  to  the  sciences  and  enlarging  its  courses — 
the  result  has  been  that  between  the  two  colleges  there  is  a great  dif- 
ference, the  best  students  graduating  from  the  ateneo;  and  the  results 
of  the  teaching-  of  the  ateneo  have  been  very  good,  while  the  result  of 
the  teachings  of  the  College  of  San  Juan  de  Letran  have  been  very  bad. 
This  would  seem  to  be  appreciated  when  I say  that  all  the  most  dis- 
tinguished men  in  Manila,  among  them  Dr.  Rizal  and  other  eminent 
men  here — all  of  these  men — have  graduated  from  the  Municipal 
Ateneo.  And  we  have  the  result,  in  the  year  1896,  which  was  the  last 
year  that  they  graduated  classes,  that  in  that  year  there  were  matricu- 
lated 5,407  students,  and  2,350  passed  the  examinations  in  San  Juande 
Letran.  while  in  the  Municipal  Ateneo,  where  there  were  1,701  stu- 
dents, 1,362  passed  the  examinations;  and  it  can  not  be  said  that  the 
examinations  are  more  easy  in  the  latter  establishment  than  in  the  for- 
mer. because  there  is  much  more  severity  in  the  examinations  held  in 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


204 


the  Municipal  Atenoo  than  in  those  held  in  the  College  of  San  .Tuan 
de  Let  ran. 

The  greater  number  of  those  graduated  from  the  College  of  San  .1  nan 
de  Letran  were  studying  higher  courses,  and  they  left  San  Juan  de 
Letran  on  account  of  the  bad  teaching  there.  On  account  of  the  bad 
teaching  there  they  don't  know  enough  to  write  a letter.  Since  1888 
institutions  of  higher  education  have  been  established  in  the  provinces, 
directed  by  the  friars;  but  the  results  as  to  the  College  of  San  Juan  de 
Letran  have  not  been  good  at  all.  not  only  from  the  lack  of  attention 
to  teaching,  but  also  from  the  incapacity  of  the  teachers  themselves. 
This  is  all  I have  to  say  about  the  instruction  of  the  secondary  grade. 

We  will  pass  on  to  the  higher  instruction.  The  university,  as  we 
said  before,  has  courses  in  law,  canonical  law,  philosophy,  and  letters. 
There  are  also  courses  in  the  sciences  of  medicine  and  pharmacy.  The 
plan  of  study  is  very  inadequate,  because  it  is  antiquated.  As  a 
matter  of  fact,  in  the  plan  of  education  they  do  not  teach  all  the 
courses,  though  their  scheme  of  instruction  calls  for  it.  I will  give 
an  example:  One  of  their  three  courses  is  penal  law.  and  political  and 
administrative  law  and  colonial  legislation,  and  they  have  never  taught 
in  the  classes  more  than  the  penal  code. 

Q.  With  the  other  things  the  students  did  as  they  liked  and  every- 
body did  as  they  liked ? — A.  There  is  another  example  in  medicine. 
One  course  in  medicine  also  is  in  therapeutics,  embracing  therapeutics, 
materia  medica,  prescription  writing,  hydrology,  hydrotherapeutics, 
and  electro-therapeutics,  but  only  one  branch  of  this  is  taught — thera- 
peutics. The  reason  of  this  is  that  it  is  a personal  matter,  for  the  one 
who  is  a graduate  and  a friend  of  the  friars  becomes  a professor.  To 
this  is  due  the  incompetence — that  whoever  is  a friend  of  the  friars 
becomes  a professor.  They  do  not  look  for  a man's  ability,  but  for 
his  sympathy  or  hostility  toward  the  priests.  This  gives  very  poor 
results.  The  number  of  students  who  failed  to  pass  their  examina- 
tions was  greater  than  the  number  of  those  who  passed  them.  I have 
brought  statistics  made  by  them — not  made  by  me.  We  find  in  the 
instruction  and  in  professional  courses:  There  was  a school  of  agri- 
culture and  also  a school  of  arts  and  trades  maintained  by  the  Spanish 
Government,  and  these  two  have  not  given  any  results  whatever.  In 
the  school  of  agriculture,  in  place  of  using  practical  means  of  teach- 
ing. they  have  used  purely  theoretical  means.  I am  competent  to 
speak  of  the  school  of  agriculture,  for  I have  studied  in  it.  The  pro- 
fessors in  the  school  of  agriculture,  instead  of  studying  the  agricultural 
conditions  here,  employ  themselves  in  discussing  the  agricultural 
questions  of  Spain  and  of  Europe  here,  and  teaching  them.  They 
have  a piece  of  ground  for  experiments  and  for  the  use  of  this  agri- 
cultural school,  and  instead  of  planting  it  in  the  agricultural  products 
peculiar  to  the  country  they  planted  it  in  radishes  and  flowers. 

Q.  What  do  you  call  the  agricultural  products  peculiar  to  the 
country? — A.  They  might  study  the  cultivation  of  hemp  or  of  sugar 
cane  or  of  indigo,  which  latter  is  almost  wholly  abandoned,  or  the 
improvement  of  cattle — all  of  which  I consider  advisable.  1 will  give 
a practical  example  of  what  I want  to  say:  In  Batangas  a disease  arose 
among  the  coffee  trees,  and  a commission  was  appointed  from  the  school 
of  agriculture.  After  a long  time  this  commission  made  a report,  but 
thev  made  the  report  after  there  were  no  coffee  trees  left:  and  further- 
more. in  this  report  they  gave  a prescription  for  a preparation  to  fight 


REPORT  OK  TIIE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


265 

this  coffee-tree  pest,  ;iud  it  was  very  much  like  the  preparation  which 
an  Italian  got  up  to  kill  fleas  with.  The  Italian’s  plan  was,  after  having 
made  his  powder,  to  catch  the  flea  and  then  put  the  powder  on  the  flea; 
and  the  plan  recommended  by  this  commission  was  to  inject  the  pow- 
der into  the  coffee  tree.  This  could  be  done  if  a man  had  two  or  three 
coffee  trees  in  his  yard,  but  where  there  were  millions  of  coffee  trees 
on  a plantation  this  could  not  be  done.  Another  example,  in  regard 
to  live  stock:  The  Government  sent  a commission,  composed  of  some 
Spanish  Government  veterinary  surgeons,  to  bring  mules  from  Aus- 
tralia and  other  parts,  and  the  result  was  that  after  the  mules  were 
brought  here  they  developed  the  disease  of  glanders.  Then  they 
appointed  another  commission  to  hunt  up  means  of  combating  the 
glanders,  and  they  were  not  successful  in  finding  a remedy  for  the 
glanders,  for,  after  they  reported,  their  remedy  was  worthless.  And, 
as  a matter  of  fact,  after  the  years  that  the  school  of  agriculture  has 
been  established  here,  they  employ  the  same  means  in  planting  rice 
that  were  employed  before  the  conquest. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  There  is  no  school  of  agriculture  here  now,  is  there? — A.  Not 
since  Manila  was  occupied.  The  method  of  working  sugar  cane,  too, 
is  just  the  same  as  it  formerly  was.  The  improvements  made  are 
entirely  due  to  individual  causes  and  not  to  anything  taught  by  the 
school  of  agriculture,  and  the  school  of  agriculture  has  not  developed 
any  men  with  any  knowledge  of  agriculture  to  speak  of,  or  if  they 
have  had  any  they  have  immediately  taken  other  employment.  The 
people  who  have  graduated  from  the  school  of  agriculture  have  not 
put  their  knowledge  of  agriculture  into  practical  application,  but  have 
got  employment  upon  the  spot.  The  reason  they  did  not  put  their 
knowledge  into  practical  application  was  that  it  was  not  practical 
knowledge. 

The  school  of  arts  and  trades  has  not  given  any  definite  results, 
either,  because  no  one  entered  it.  The  only  people  who  make  furni- 
ture here  are  the  people  from  Paete,  in  Laguna  province,  who  have 
never  studied  in  the  school  of  arts  and  trades,  and  the  Chinese.  There 
were  also  courses  for  master  workmen  in  the  school  of  arts  and  trades, 
but  there  is  only  one  man  who  ever  graduated  from  it,  and  he  was  a 
Spaniard,  and  this  is  his  history:  This  Spaniard  was  an  employee  in  an 
office  and  didn’t  know  anything  about  construction  nor  anything  of 
that  sort,  and  entered  the  course  to  become  a master  workman,  and  he 
graduated  from  the  course,  which  should  have  taken  four  years,  in  one 
year.  This  sort  of  thing  has  also  happened  in  the  university.  It  was 
enough  to  be  a Spaniard  to  get  along  well  in  the  university,  and  the 
very  thing  1 studied  seven  years  for,  the  Spaniard  would  go  and  grad- 
uate in  in  two  years;  and  there  are  many  gentlemen  walking  on  the 
streets' of  Manila  who  have  graduated  as  law}Ters,  I do  not  know  how. 
The  system  of  primary  instruction  is  very  deficient  and  not  at  all  prac- 
tical. The  instruction  of  the  secondary  class  is  very  old-fashioned  and 
entirely  too  classical;  there  is  but  little  attention  given  to  physical 
and  chemical  science,  and  the  other  sciences,  and  as  to  the  university 
of  Santo  Tomas,  the  best  thing  I can  say  for  it  is  to  put  it  and  keep  it  in 
a museum  as  an  archaeological  curiosity.  If  you  would  like  my  opinion 
concerning  public  instruction,  l would  state  simply  what  I think  ought 
to  be  done. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


2<><> 

Iii  regard  to  primary  instruction  I should  be  in  favor  of  making  it 
more  practical,  and  the  same  thing  applies  to  the  school  of  agricul- 
ture— more  practice  and  less  theory.  I would  make  primary  instruc- 
tion more  practical  and  I would  multiply  schools  of  agriculture.  And 
in  the  courses  of  higher  studies  in  the  secondary  instruction  1 would 
be  more  exclusive;  I would  not  admit  whoever  wished  to  be  admitted. 
At  present  the  student  in  the  secondary  instruction  is  obliged  to  know 
as  much  of  one  branch  as  of  another,  but  my  plan  would  be  to  let  a 
man  pick  out  his  course  of  study,  with  a view  to  the  specialty  which 
he  meant  to  take  up;  if  he  intended  to  enter  on  a literary  career,  to 
study  everything  in  relation  to  that.  or.  if  he  was  going  to  take  up  a 
scientific  career,  to  study  the  sciences,  mathematics,  etc.  I would 
recommend  the  modification  of  the  courses  in  higher  instruction  in 
accordance  with  modern  progress,  and  open  courses  in  engineering, 
mining  engineering,  mechanics,  and  similar  courses — of  course,  not 
leaving  the  instruction  in  the  hands  of  the  friars.  There  is  no  need 
to  speak  of  that.  That  is  all  understood. 

Q.  Are  there  sufficient  schoolmasters  and  schoolmistresses  in  the 
archipelago  at  the  present  time  for  primary  instruction? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  The  Dominicans  and  Jesuits  have  both  testified  to  the  contrary. — 
A.  It  is  true  that  there  is  a scarcity  of  schoolmasters  and  school- 
mistresses, but  it  is  not  true  that  there  is  not  enough  of  them.  There 
are  enough  of  them  in  the  towns,  but  they  do  not  appear  to  exercise 
their  profession  because  they  are  badly  treated;  a school-teacher  is 
treated  worse  than  a servant,  and  they  do  not  like  it.  In  the  propor- 
tion of  one  to  each  town  there  are  enough. 

Q.  Taking  into  consideration  the  number  of  inhabitants,  there  are 
enough? — A.  If  you  are  going  to  distribute  them  at  the  rate  of  one 
to  each  town,  there  are  enough. 

Professor  Worcester.  Will  you  kindly  give  us  a discussion,  in 
writing,  of  the  laws  on  the  question  of  education  in  the  Philippines?1 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  FABIE. 

Manila,  July  11 , 1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Den  by  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and 
Mr.  Mac  Arthur. 

Sefior  Anoki,  Fabie,  appearing  before  the  commission  with  Senor 
Calderon,  was  examined  and  stated  as  follows: 

By  Mr.  Worcester: 

Q.  Now,  to  begin  at  the  beginning,  because  the  other  gentlemen 
don’t  know  anything  about  what  was  said  the  other  day.  The  other 
day  vou  said  something  to  me  personally  about  a plan  of  attack  on  the 
American  forces  which  originated  with  the  insurgents  some  time 
before  the  actual  outbreak  of  hostilities,  and  as  that  plan  is  of  historical 
interest,  bearing  on  the  question  of  whether  or  not  we  were  the  aggres- 
sors, I should  be  very  glad  to  have  as  accurate  a statement  in  regard 
to  it  as  possible.  Will  you  begin  at  the  beginning  and  give  us  an 
account  of  this  movement  of  which  you  have  spoken  here  ? — A.  About 


'The  request  was  complied  with.  (See  appendix,  Exhibit  vi,  p.  456.) 


REPORT  OF  TIIK  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


l?<>7 


the  last  of  November  or  the  beginning  of  December  1 became  suspi- 
cious that  the  insurgents  had  bad  intentions,  although  they  had  prom- 
ised me  that  they  would  never  wage  war  against  America,  and  I had 
accepted  my  appointment  under  the  insurgent  government  on  that 
condition,  and  the  reasons  that  I had  were,  first,  my  regard  for  the 
nation,  and.  second,  my  knowledge  that  it  would  be  impossible  for 
them  with  the  means  at  their  disposal  to  wage  war  with  America. 
With  this  idea  1 attempted  to  outwit  Luna,  because  Luna  never  had 
confidence  in  me  and  did  not  explain  his  plans  to  me.  So  I went  to 
him  one  day  and  said,  "Why  don't  you  attack  the  Americans  while 
there  are  only  a few  of  them?”  I told  him  that  I would  undertake  to 
stir  up  the  people  or  to  raise  the  forces  inside  of  Manila,  and  that  they 
and  these  people  outside  should  attack  in  front  and  I behind,  with 
bolos  or  knives  or  anything  of  that  sort.  The  plan  was,  of  course,  an 
impracticable  one.  Luna  told  me  that  it  was  an  admirable  plan,  and 
that  he  would  give  me  his  definite  answer  later.  Later  on  he  told  me 
that  the  idea  was  premature;  that  the  opportune  moment  had  not 
arrived;  that  the  country  was  not  prepared  and  had  not  the  necessary 
arms.  I then  offered  to  introduce  him  to  an  individual  who  was 
employed  in  the  Alhambra  tobacco  factory  whom  he  could  depend 
upon  for  some  300  men  whom  we  could  stir  up  to  revolution  at  any 
time  that  he  pleased.  The  person  whom  I suggested  to  him  was  one 
Antonio  Cavas,  an  employee  of  the  Alhambra. 

I introduced  him  to  Cavas  one  afternoon,  but  Luna  had  just  given  up 
his  position  as  the  director  of  war  on  account  of  trouble  that  he  had  had 
with  Aguinaldo  and  he  told  me  that  it  was  too  late,  that  he  was  very 
sorry,  but  he  could  not  accept  the  proposition  that  I had  made  to  him. 
On  the  other  hand,  I had  said  to  Cavas  and  to  Molena.  another  employee 
there,  not  to  stir  up  the  people,  but  to  hold  them  in  check,  for  they, 
themselves,  would  be  the  first  victims  by  reason  of  the  fact  that  they 
were  mestizos  and  had  the  faces  of  Europeans.  Seeing  that  Luna  did 
not  do  anything  with  the  matter  T directed-myself  to  my  immediate 
chief,  the  head  of  the  navy,  Paseual  Ledesma,  and  Ledesma  told  me  he 
was  prepared,  and  he  could  count  on  a thousand  men,  and  that  he  was 
pleased  with  my  idea,  because  it  was  also  his  idea,  namely,  to  attack 
from  the  rear.  And  then  I went  to  Mindoro,  because  I could  not  pur- 
sue the  matter  further.  On  my  return  I found  that  Luna  had  been  to 
Cavas  and  to  Molena  and  had  offered  each  of  them  an  appointment  as 
a captain  of  infantry.  In  February,  in  Mindoro,  I learned  that  the 
plan  was  to  kill  every  one  of  the  Europeans,  and  all  the  small  children 
in  Ermita  and  the  outlying  districts  were  prepared  with  sacks  in  which 
they  expected  to  put  the  plunder.  This  the  Chinamen  knew  through 
a merchant  who  was  here.  The  Chinese  know  all  about  what  is  going 
on,  and  what  a Chinaman  dosen't  know,  no  one  knows.  Now,  what  1 
propose  to  do  is  to  get  hold  of  these  appointments  and  see  whether 
Cavas  and  Molena  are  willing  to  come  here  and  testify. 

Q.  Did  they  have  a plan  to  attack  at  any  definite  earlier  time? — A. 
No,  they  had  only  received  their  appointments  as  captains.  There  was 
a plan  of  attack,  but  the  plan  was  not  revealed  to  them,  it  being  the  idea 
not  to  reveal  the  plan  until  the  very  last  moment. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  What  date  in  February  did  you  learn  this? — A.  It  was  the  mid- 
dle of  February,  after  the  breaking  out  of  hostilities,  from  a China- 
man coming  here. 


REPORT  (>K  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


268 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I understood  from  you  the  other  day  that  there  was  a plan 
thought  of  in  December  to  bring  off  an  attack  at  that  time? — A.  I 
suspected  that  there  was  a plan  at  that  time,  but  I couldn’t  find  out 
about  it.  Whenever  I asked  Luna  for  his  opinion  he  replied  that  he 
was  a military  man  and  he  had  no  opinions  on  political  matters,  and 
he  would  not  discuss  the  question.  I,  and  all  of  my  friends,  among 
whom  is  the  director  of  a newspaper,  El  Republica,  were  in  favor  of 
the  American  sovereignty,  but  we  consented  to  stand  out  against 
America  simply  with  the  idea  of  getting  the  best  terms  that  could  be 
obtained. 

Senor  Calderon.  1 have  details  that  will  go  to  explain  and  com- 
plete what  Senor  Fabie  hassaid.  The  first  troubles  that  arose  between 
the  Americans  and  the  Filipinos  were  known  to  me,  became  known  to 
me  when  I was  in  Cavite  in  May  of  last  year;  and  I had  heard  them  from 
General  Lucban;  and.  as  one  fact,  he  stated  that  the  Americans  had 
been  the  cause  of  the  detention  of  a shipload  of  arms  which  was  to  have 
come  here;  and  it  was  his  idea  that  at  that  time  the  Americans  were 
likely  to  surround  Aguinaldo  in  Cavite,  and  for  this  reason  Aguinaldo 
had  moved  over  to  Bacoor,  he  believing  that  Aguinaldo  had  made  this 
change  on  account  of  the  fear  that  he  might  be  detained.  Mabini, 
who,  from  the  time  that  the  Katapunin  Society  was  created  here,  had 
been  anxious  for  an  alliance  with  Japan,  was  trying  to  influence  Agui- 
naldo to  make  some  sort  of  arrangement  with  Japan  in  order  to  resist 
America.  At  this  time  Sandico  arrived  also  in  this  city,  clamoring  for 
an  alliance  with  Japan;  so  that  in  the  government  at  Bacoor  there 
were  two  elements,  the  element  in  favor  of  America  and  the  element 
in  favor  of  Japan.  I left  them  and  didn’t  see  them  again  until  I met 
them  at  Malolos.  The  two  elements  continued,  so  much  so  that  one 
night  when  I was  at  a dinner  to  which  Aguinaldo  had  invited  me,  and 
not  knowing  of  the  difference  of  opinion  between  himself  and  Paterno, 
he  said,  “What  is  your  idea;  what  do  you  think  is  best  for  us?”  1 
answered  him,  “Today,  taking  into  consideration  the  condition  in  which 
the  country  is.  I think  it  is  better  for  us  to  keep  on  good  terms  with  the 
Americans.”  To  which  he  replied  with  the  question,  “Do  you  not 
think  it  would  lie  much  better  to  have  absolute  independence ?”  And  I 
replied  to  him,  “In  the  first  place,  who  will  lead  us  to  attack  the  Amer- 
icans ?”  And  he  said  to  me,  “ We  shall  not  lack  for  assistance.  People 
of  some  country,  which  is  near  us,  and  with  racial  characteristics  in 
common  with  ours  (referring  to  Japan)  will  help  us.”  Things  were 
in  this  condition  when  Sandico.  who  was  in  the  habit  of  going  back 
and  forth  between  Malolos,  conceived  the  idea  of  creating  the  so-called 
popular  clubs,  which  had  as  their  excuse  for  being  amusement  and 
instruction  in  agriculture,  English,  etc.,  but  as  a matter  of  fact  were 
true  centers  of  agitation  for  raising  up  the  people — stirring  up  the 
people  against  the  Americans.  I say  this  knowing  that  they  were 
truly  centers  of  agitation  against  the  American  people,  because  one 
day  I went  to  see  Sandico  and  he  asked  me  to  hold  a conference  con- 
cerning political  questions  in  one  of  the  popular  clubs.  I said,  “ What 
do  you  wish  the  character  of  this  conference  to  be?"  because  I had 
my  private  opinion  about  these  matters  and  did  not  wish  to  make  it 
known.  And  he  said  to  me,  “ Bring  it  about  that  it  shall  have  no 
character  favorable  to  the  Americans.  Don’t  under  any  circumstances 
introduce  the  name  of  America  in  your  conferences.  I speak  concern- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


2G9 

ing  the  similarity  of  race  between  the  Filipinos  and  the  Japanese,  and 
the  purport  of  vour  conferences  ought  to  be  a Malayan  federation.” 
Furthermore,  this  club  formed  in  all  towns  chapters  of  a society  which 
had  as  its  object  to  instill  into  the  popular  mind  the  spirit  of  hostility 
toward  the  Americans,  and  to  such  an  extent  was  this  carried  that 
even  in  the  case  of  the  women  and  children  they  succeeded  in  bring- 
ing about  a spirit  of  hostility  toward  the  Americans.  This  went  to 
such  an  extent  that  the  popular  club  of  Santa  Cruz  suggested  to  the 
women  who  kept  fruit  stands  that  they  sell  their  fruit  cheap  to  the 
soldiers  or  give  it  to  them  in  order  that  it  might  make  them  sick. 
They  told  everyone  who  could  do  it  to  prepare  to  make  balos,  and  in 
Manila  they  made  caps  for  cartridges.  The  result  of  this  was  that 
the  whole  country  was  stirred  up  against  the  Americans  because  the 
popular  clubs  contributed  to  this  end.  Along  in  December  they 
became  very  hostile  against  the  Americans,  especially  in  the  provinces 
occupied  on  the  march  by  the  American  troops.  The  men  who  took 
photographs  or  made  sketches  were  arrested.  The  Filipino  who  was 
sent  to  accompany  an  American  was  held  under  close  scrutiny  after- 
wards. In  Manila,  among  other  things,  they  were  preparing  for  an 
attack.  As  to  this  time  1 had  extra  information  from  various  sources, 
because  it  was  a thing  that  was  kept  extremely  quiet,  and  at  that  time 
in  Manila  everyone  had  to  be  very  careful  in  regard  to  his  attitude, 
for  if  he  carried  his  nose  a little  too  high  he  was  the  object  of  sus- 
picion. 

So  far  as  I have  been  able  to  learn,  it  was  planned  to  attack  the 
entire  line  at  one  time,  and  a signal  had  been  agreed  upon  for  this 
attack.  They  were  to  discharge  three  skyrockets.  One  was  to  be  sent 
up  from  Binondo,  one  from  San  Miguel,  and  one  from  Malate.  Pio  del 
Pilar  was  sleeping  inside  Manila,  and  there  was  a large  number  of  peo- 
ple inside  with  bolos,  and  the  attack  was  to  be  made  in  the  city  at  the 
same  time  that  it  was  made  outside.  They  proposed  to  begin  by  start- 
ing a conflagration;  they  had  gotten  ready  kerosene  oil  for  this  pur- 
pose; and  in  order  to  understand  about  this  whole  matter,  I availed 
myself  of  a relative  of  mine,  a second  lieutenant  in  the  Spanish  Army, 
and  put  him  under  Jerez,  who  was  a colonel  of  militia.  I may  men- 
tion in  connection  with  this  matter  of  Jerez,  first,  that  this  relative  or 
friend  of  mine  was  in  favor  of  American  sovereignty,  and  1 consid- 
ered it  probable  that  he  had  been  deceived.  Another  part  of  their 
plan  was  to  set  at  liberty  immediately  the  men  who  were  confined  in 
Bilibid  and  in  the  Zorilla  theater,  and  to  attack  that  theater.  Among 
the  persons  in  prison  there  was  one  Ruiz,  who  had  joined  the  revolu- 
tionary forces  in  1896;  he  was  an  anarchist  and  had  been  with  the  Cuban 
insurgents  for  a considerable  length  of  time  also.  But  the  Chinese 
said  that  Lucban  was  one  of  the  first  to  give  them  information  con- 
cerning the  hatred  of  Americans,  in  the  month  of  May.  My  relative 
was  to  take  command  of  the  prisoners  when  they  were  set  at  liberty 
and  go  and  make  an  attack  on  Fort  Santiago.  They  proposed  to  avail 
themselves  of  the  plan  of  setting  fires,  and  they  proposed  to  use  dyna- 
mite and  use  bolos  to  cut  off  heads  with.  At  that  time  a great  many 
people  had  left  the  city,  fearing  that  there  was  going  to  be  a fearful 
massacre.  If  the  plan  had  been  carried  out  there  would  have  been  a 
horrible  massacre. 

The  Spaniards  also  were  adding  fuel  to  the  flames  by  saving  that 
this  plan  should  be  carried  out  as  soon  as  possible,  before  the  Ameri- 
cans had  time  to  strengthen  their  forces,  while  the  forces  remaining 


270 


HEPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


here  were  small;  and  the  colonel  of  the  revolutionary  army  had  in 
his  possession  many  papers  and  documents.  He  had  a sister,  who 
said  to  me  that  they  did  not  carry  out  the  attack  because  they  were 
waiting  for  reenforcements  which  were  expected  to  arrive  from  the 
Visayan  Islands.  That  was  about  the  close  of  January  or  the  first  of 
February.  She  told  me  that  her  brother  had  knowledge  of  the  fact 
that  the  Americans  had  intended  to  attack  through  a soldier;  that  they 
got  into  a house  and  got  drunk  and  got  to  talking;  that  her  brother 
immediately  went  to  Malolos  and  told  this  news,  and  they  told  him  to 
await  orders.  At  that  time,  in  order  to  aid  the  movement,  they 
created  a militia,  including  all  the  inhabitants  of  the  Philippines 
between  the  ages  of  16  and  50.  The  establishment  of  the  militia  dates 
from  the  1st  of  January.  As  another  detail  in  regard  to  this  attack, 
one  day  about  the  last  of  November,  after  the1  session  of  congress  was 
over,  at  the  special  session  Buencamino  presented  himself  with  an 
urgent  letter  from  Aguinaldo,  in  which  lie  made  the  request  that  con- 
gress would  confine  itself  to  obtaining  the  amount  of  $2,000,000  to  pay 
for  a great  consignment  of  arms  which  would  arrive  some  time  during 
January.  And  inasmuch  as  the  congress  did  not  take  the  matter  up, 
Aguinaldo  proposed  an  issue  of  bonds.  And  this  money,  raised  by 
the  bond  issue  to  the  amount  of  $10,000,000,  which  the}7  accepted  to 
obtain  only  $2,000,000  at  first,  was  to  go  to  the  purchase  of  arms, 
which  were  to  arrive  here  about  the  first  of  the  year.  I,  as  a result 
of  this,  seeing  that  things  were  going  from  bad  to  worse,  on  the  10th 
of  January  left  Malolos  and  went  to  Batangas,  not  only  to  avoid  the 
trouble,  but  also  to  avoid  taking  an  oath  to  support  the  constitution. 

As  another  detail  that  may  be  mentioned,  it  was  stated  in  the  Inten- 
dencia  that  all  the  Filipinos  in  the  island  were  sharpening  their  bolos 
to  bathe  them  in  the  blood  of  white  men. 

Senor  Angel  Fabie.  In  confirmation  of  what  Senor  Calderon  has 
said,  and  in  order  to  prove  that  this  was  to  be  a racial  war,  I am  going 
to  tell  you  the  conversations  that  I had  with  my  immediate  chief,  who 
was  the  minister  of  marine.  I was  talking  to  him  almost  every  even- 
ing. He  told  me  that,  since  the  Philippine  race  was  a very  good 
race,  a superior  race,  he  was  interested  in  preserving  it.  I told  him 
that  the  idea  was  such  a good  one  that  they  ought  to  surround  the 
Philippine  Islands  with  a wall  like  the  Chinese  wall.  This  man  thought 
the  idea  was  a good  one.  He  was  a poor  Indian,  with  a pug  nose  and 
very  black,  and  if  you  had  taken  his  uniform  off  you  could  have  mis- 
taken him  for  his  own  coachman.  The  people  who  were  in  favor  of 
his  idea  were  of  his  own  type. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  CARLOS  PALANCA. 

Manila,  July  8,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Den bv  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and 
John  K.  MacArthur,  secretary. 

Carlos  Palanca,  recalled: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  kindly  give  us  your  Chinese  name? — A.  Don  Chan 
Ouiensien  is  my  Chinese  name,  and  1 am  generally  known  among  the 
Chinese  in  Manila  and  the  Philippines  as  Don  Chuey  Leong. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


271 


By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  How  did  you  come  to  get  the  name  Carlos  Palanca  ? — A.  That 
is  my  Christian  name. 

Q.  Are  you  a Christian  ? — A.  1 am  a Roman  Catholic. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  We  understand  you  have  something  to  say  about  the  condition 
of  trade  and  mining  in  these  islands,  and  we  would  be  glad  to  hear 
what  you  have  to  say. — A.  1 have  written  a statement  about  all  the 
islands,  what  are  the  products  of  these  islands,  and  the  dialects  they 
speak,  which  I hand  to  you. 

Colonel  Denby.  We  are  very  greatly  obliged  to  you  for  taking  that 
trouble. 

(Statement  handed  to  Professor  Worcester.) 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  You  say  that  sugar  is  raised  in  Bulacan  province.  What  sort  of 
machinery  do  they  use  for  refining  their  sugar  there? — A.  Some  of 
the  machinery  is  got  from  Europe  and  some  from  China;  the  grinding 
machinery  is  generally  two  great  blocks  of  stone — it  was  formerly. 
At  present  some  use  water  power,  some  use  carabaos,  and  some  steam. 

Q.  When  it  comes  to  boiling  the  juice  of  the  sugar  cane,  what  con- 
trivance have  they  for  that? — A.  It  is  boiled  in  a big  pan,  some  lime 
is  mixed  along  with  the  juice,  and  from  the  pan  it  is  turned  into  a 
filter. 

Q.  Do  they  stir  their  sugar  or  dry  it  when  putting  it  into  these 
filters  anywhere  in  Luzon? — A.  In  Batangas,  Iloilo,  Bantagana,  Cebu, 
and  Antique,  Negros  Occidental,  and  Mayong. 

Q.  Are  there  any  Chinamen  here  who  have  sugar  estates  in  the 
Philippines? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  In  Luzon? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  long  does  it  take  after  a field  is  planted  before  the  cane  is 
ready  to  cut? — A.  Once  a year  they  crush  the  juice,  dividing  the  field 
into  two  parts,  leaving  one  part  barren  while  they  work  on  the  other. 
From  November  they  work  up  until  Ma}^ — about  six  months. 

Q.  Grinding  the  cane? — A.  Yes;  grinding  the  cane. 

Q.  What  conveniences  are  there  for  getting  their  sugar  to  market? — 
A.  In  Negros,  and  Antique,  and  Capiz,  and  Amos  Occidental,  and  Ori- 
ental, all  these  provinces  send  their  sugar  down  to  Iloilo  and  sell  the 
crude  sugar  there. 

Q.  I low  do  you  get  the  sugar  to  the  coast  before  you  ship  it?— A. 
By  buffalo  carts,  into  the  storehouse  close  to  the  river  side  or  seaside, 
up  to  which  the  steamer  comes. 

Q.  How  do  they  get  it  there  from  the  plantations? — A.  By  bull 
carts. 

Q.  Are  there  sugar  lands  in  Luzon  that  are  not  worked  now  that 
could  be  worked  if  railroads  were  run  to  them? — A.  Y"es. 

Q.  Yrou  have  put  down  here  that  the  vino  del  piez  comes  from 
Bulacan.  What  do  you  mean  by  that? — A.  The  juice  of  the  nipa. 

Q.  What  sort  of  a business  is  it? — A.  Y^ou  tap  the  nipa  palms  and 
get  the  juice  and  make  alcohol. 

Q.  How  does  it  pay  ? — A.  It  is  a very  good  business. 

Q.  What  is  that  alcohol  worth  an  arroba  here  now? — A.  Formerly, 
before  the  war,  from  50  cents  to  62 £ cents;  at  present  the  price  is  up 
to  $1.87. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  You  say  there  are  mines  in  Bulacan.  What  kind  of  mines  ? — A. 
Iron  for  casting1  pans,  at  the  town  of  Angat. 

Q.  What  else? — A.  Also,, besides  pans,  they  make  it  into  plow  heads. 

Q.  Is  that  mine  worked  at  present  ? — A.  At  present  it  is  not  worked, 
because  of  the  war. 

Q.  Was  it  worked  before  the  war? — A.  Yes;  the  Chinese  worked  it. 

Q.  What  per  cent  of  iron  was  there  in  the  ore? — A.  I have  never 
been  to  it  and  don't  know,  but  I think  about  80  per  cent.  I have 
never  been  to  it.  but  I have  heard  there  is  a whole  hill — a whole  lot  of 
it — in  Angat.  There  is  no  other  produce  except  this  and  small  poles 
for  huts,  for  building;  that  is  all  that  Angat  produces. 

Q.  Are  there  any  other  mines  of  any  other  minerals  in  Bulacan? — 
A.  The  only  other  products  of  importance  are  indigo  and  manufac- 
tured hats. 

Q.  Tell  me  how  those  hats  are  made.  Don’t  they  make  many  hats 
there  of  cane — bamboo  ? — A.  Yes;  they  make  many  hats  from  bamboo. 

Q.  Have  the}’  factories,  or  do  the  people  take  their  work  to  their 
houses? — A.  They  make  them  in  their  own  houses. 

Q.  Could  the  people  be  persuaded  to  work  in  factories  if  there  was 
much  sale  for  those  hats,  if  they  were  acceptable  in  America,  for 
instance? — A.  Well,  if  they  are  paid  well  of  course  they  will  go  into  a 
factory  to  work. 

Q.  How  much  will  they  want  ?— A.  At  present  they  get  $20  for  a 
hundred  hats. 

Q.  What  do  those  hats  sell  for  here  in  Manila? — A.  Formerly  the 
Spanish  soldiers  paid  75  cents  each  for  them,  but  there  are  hats 
of  different  qualities.  Some  finer  qualities  get  bigger  prices;  the 
price  varies  according  to  the  quality  of  the  goods.  There  are  bigger 
and  smaller  brims. 

Q.  I am  speaking  of  the  ordinary  hats.  You  say  they  get  $20  a 
hundred.  What  do  those  hats  sell  for? — A.  At  present  these  kinds  of 
hats  are  bought  by  the  people  from  those  men  at  that  preie  to  sell  to 
the  European  firms  for  $25  a hundred,  because  they  have  to  pay  the 
little  expenses  and  have  to  make  a profit  also. 

Q.  What  do  the  European  dealers  get  when  they  sell  to  individu- 
als ? — A.  They  export  them  either  to  Europe  or  somewhere  else. 

Q.  Do  you  know  to  what  countries  those  hats  go?— A.  1 do  not 
know  for  certain  where  they  export  them  to — some  to  America,  some 
to  Europe,  etc.,  but  I do  not  know  definitely. 

Q.  You  say  there  are  gold  mines  in  Nueva  Ecija.  Is  the  gold  in  the 
sands  of  the  river  or  in  quartz  rock? — A.  In  the  town  of  Gapan,  in 
the  province  of  Nueva  Ecija,  it  is  taken  from  the  hills  and  from  the 
mountains.  They  have  got  to  dig  down  into  the  earth  for  it  and  then 
wash  it. 

Q.  Whereabouts  in  Nueva  Ecija  are  these  mines? — A.  In  the  village 
of  Gapan. 

Q.  Are  those  mines  worked  at  present? — A.  No:  not  worked. 
Nobody  is  in  charge,  and  practically  anybody  owns  the  mines  who 
pleases;  they  simply  belong  to  the  people  of  the  village,  and  when 
the}’  have  time  they  go  and  dig  the  gold  and  wash  it. 

Q.  Is  the  earth  rich  in  gold  there  ? — A.  It  is  according  to  the  luck 
of  the  people;  some  of  them  get  some  and  some  of  them  get  less,  and 
the\r  simply  go  and  dig  it  with  their  hands,  using  hoes  and  such  like, 
and  they  can't  expect  to  work  much. 


KEPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


273 


Q.  How  do  they  work  it? — A.  I have  never  been  up  there  to  see 
the  whole  thing — the  mines — it  was  brought  to  me  by  natives,  brought 
from  that  place,  whenever  they  could  wash  it  with  a certain  kind  of 
sieve. 

Q.  You  say  that  tea  grows  in  Nueva  Ecija.  Is  it  good  tea? — A.  At 
Gabonatong,  in  the  same  province. 

Q.  Is  it  good  tea? — A.  If  care  is  taken  with  the  plants  and  in  the 
picking  and  other  work  the  tea  will  be  very  good. 

Q.  Is  it  native  there  or  has  it  been  planted  there? — A.  It  is  native 
there. 

Q.  Can  the  Filipinos  take  care  of  it?— A.  They  don’t  understand  the 
care  of  it.  The  Chinese  go  and  pluck  it  and  they  see  to  the  drying 
and  plucking,  etc.  If  it  falls  upon  the  ground  it  is  lost. 

By  Colonel  Den  by: 

Q.  IIow  high  are  the  shrubs  ? — A.  Some  of  them  are  pretty  high, 
4 or  5 feet. 

Q.  Does  the  tea  grow  on  low  grounds  or  by  the  mountain  side? — A. 
On  high  ground. 

Q.  How  low  down:  how  near  the  sea? — A.  Some  distance  from  the 
river  or  the  streams.  During  the  wet  season  there  will  be  water  in 
the  streams,  but  during  the  dry  season  there  is  no  water  in  them. 

Q.  You  say  that  wood  grows  in  Nueva  Ecija.  Is  there  plenty  of 
good  wood,  and  can  it  be  gotten  out:  is  it  accessible? — A.  It  is  not 
very  difficult,  and  still  it  is  not  easy,  and  of  course  after  the  timber  is 
felled  the  natives  simply  use  these  buffalos  or  carabaos,  and  go  and 
drag  it  to  the  water. 

Q.  Is  tobacco  raised  in  Nueva  Ecija.  good  tobacco,  and  do  they  raise 
much  of  it  ? — A.  Formerly,  when  the  Spaniards  monopolized  the  whole 
tobacco  trade,  it  was  very  good,  but  since  the  monopoly  does  not  exist 
the  quality  has  fallen  off. 

Q.  Do  the  Filipinos  know  how  to  take  care  of  tobacco,  and  how  to 
cure  the  leaves  well  ? — A.  All  this  preparing,  etc.,  is  done  by  Filipinos. 
None  of  it  is  done  by  Chinese. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  know  how  to  do  it  ? — A.  The  Chinese,  some  of 
them,  would  be  able  to  do  it.  because  some  of  them  have  tobacco  plants 
up  in  China,  too. 

Q.  You  say  that  rice  is  one  of  the  great  crops  in  Nueva  Ecija:  what 
is  the  average  return  for  rice? — A.  Twenty  years  ago  that  province 
produced  about  six  or  seven  millions  tubs  of  paddy  in  a year. 

Q.  Is  raising  rice  a good  business  to  go  into  ? — A.  There  is  not  much 
work  in  planting  paddy.  That  business  is  carried  on  principally  by 
the  rich  men.  All  these  people  come  and  get  a dollar  from  him  and 
when  the  harvest  is  in  they  pay  him  three  tubs  for  a dollar.  They  get 
advances  from  him. 

Q.  Is  it  a good  business?  Does  it  pay  for  a man  who  has  money  to 
buy  land  and  raise  rice  ? — A.  1 think  formerly  the  produce  was  so 
great  that  it  did  not  pay,  but  at  present  there  is  not  much  produce, 
and  I think  it  will  pay. 

Q.  Do  the  Filipinos  raise  enough  rice  for  their  own  people,  or  do 
the}’  have  to  import  rice? — A.  The  Filipinos  go  in  for  planting  rice 
enough  for  their  own  consumption,  and  have  something  over  for  sell- 
ing, to  be  exported. 

Q.  As  a matter  of  fact,  have  they  been  exporting  rice  from  these 
r c 18 


274 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


islands ? — A.  Formerly — about  thirty  years  ago — the}’  used  to  export 
rice  from  this  place,  because  there  was  no  hemp  or  tobacco  or  other 
crops  raised;  but  because  hemp  and  sugar  have  taken  a lot  of  the  space 
that  was  used  for  rice  planting,  the  export  of  rice  has  fallen  off. 

Q.  What  is  coffee  worth  here? — A.  Over  §40  a picul  at  present. 
Formerly  the  province  of  Batangas  had  a great  lot. 

Q.  How  much  was  it  worth  when  Batangas  grew  so  much? — A. 
Over  §10;  between  §10  and  §20. 

Q.  Did  the  coffee  plantations  pay  well  when  coffee  was  §10? — A. 
Those  people  in  Batangas  got  rich  from  the  planting  of  coffee. 

Q.  In  Tavabas,  you  say  that  copra  is  one  of  the  products.  How 
much  copra  will  one  cocoanut  tree  produce  in  a year,  and  how  much 
is  it  worth  ? — A.  I can't  tell  exactly.  A tree  M ill  produce  one  year, 
and  then  the  next  it  M ill  not;  but  a lot  of  cocoanuts  come  from  Tayabas. 

Q.  Which  is  there  the  most  money  in,  to  dry  the  meat  and  sell  copra 
or  to  press  the  oil  out  and  sell  the  oil  here  ? — A.  Formerly  they  pressed 
out  the  oil  and  sold  the  oil;  at  present  they  confine  themselves  to  making 
copra  out  of  it. 

Q.  So  copra  pays  better? — A.  Yes,  and  it  takes  less  work. 

Q.  How  long  does  it  take  a cocoanut  tree  to  bear  after  it  is  planted  ? — 
A.  Six  years. 

Q.  I have  seen  many  times  a cocoanut  groMT  where  there  were  no 
nuts  because  they  had  cut  the  blossoms  to  get  tuba.  Does  that  pay 
better  than  to  raise  the  nuts? — A.  The  tuba  is  simply  for  their  own 
private  use  and  they  don't  sell  it. 

Q.  All  these  hats  that  are  made  in  Laguna  Province  are  made  in  the 
same  way,  in  the  huts  of  the  people  Mrho  make  them,  or  have  they  fac- 
tories?— A.  Just  the  same  as  in  Bulacan. 

Q.  And  the  sleeping  mats,  the  pataties,  the  same  way? — A.  Yes; 
the  same  way.  When  the}’  make  a mat  they  go  around  to  the  market 
of  the  day.  Some  of  the  villages  keep  a market  on  certain  fixed  days, 
so  every  different  week  there  is  a market  in  one  place  or  another, 
and  they  take  a great  many  mats  and  sell  them. 

Q.  What  is  the  tintaron  ? — A.  It  is  M et  indigo.  It  is  not  the  dry 
indigo;  aneals  is  the  dry. 

Q.  What  arc  petataps  ? — A.  They  are  cigarette  and  cigar  pasters — 
holders. 

Q.  You  say  that  in  lloeos  Sur  and  Ilocos  Norte  cotton  cloth  is  one  of 
the  products.  Is  the  cotton  grown  there? — A.  Yes;  the  cotton  is 
planted  in  the  fields. 

Q.  Is  it  good  cotton  with  long  fiber  ? — A.  There  are  some  samples 
which  I have.  I M ill  bring  you  a sample. 

Q.  Do  they  grow  much  cotton  there  ? — A.  They  plant  a lot.  They 
must  have  a lot  because  from  that  they  make  their  blankets,  their  cloth. 

Q.  But  they  make  those  on  small  looms  in  their  houses? — A.  Yes; 
their  own  foot  looms. 

Q.  Are  there  any  mechanical  looms,  any  machine  looms? — A.  No; 
but  all  hand  looms  and  foot  looms. 

Q.  You  say  there  is  a copper  mine  there.  What  can  you  tell  me 
about  that? — A.  It  belonged  formerly  to  Tomas  Castro. 

Q.  Has  that  mine  been  worked? — A.  Yes;  that  has  been  worked  by 
Castro,  and  the  produce  from  the  mine  has  been  brought  to  Manila 
and  sold  and  exported  to  Hongkong. 

Q.  Is  the  ore  rich? — A.  They  worked  it  and  cast  it  into  blocks. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


275 


Q.  Is  it  good  ore? — A.  I can  not  say  anything  about  the  quality  of 
the  copper,  as  I have  never  been  there. 

Q.  You  sav  that  in  the  Batanes  Islands  they  raise  cattle.  Is  cattle 
raising  a good  business  here;  is  there  money  in  it  ? — A.  Yes;  there  is 
money  in  it.  The  cattle  are  left  wild  in  the  islands,  and  once  in  a while 
they  give  the  cattle  salt,  and  when  the}'  want  the  cattle  they  catch 
them. 

Q.  Is  there  any  sickness  among  the  cattle  here? — A.  Yes;  there  is 
some  sickness;  many  have  murrain. 

Q.  Don’t  they  have  to  take  care  of  them  to  prevent  them  dying  of 
it? — A.  There  is  a care  taker  in  the  islands  who  takes  care  of  them. 

Q.  Do  they  have  any  foot  disease  among  the  cattle  in  the  islands 
here? — A.  Yes;  they  have  a foot  disease  among  the  cattle  here. 

Q.  AY  hat  are  cattle  worth,  beef  cattle,  put  down  here  in  Manila  in 
ordinary  times? — A.  That  depends  on  the  size  of  the  cattle;  it  runs 
from  $10  to  $20. 

Q.  What  pays  better,  to  raise  cattle  for  beef  or  to  raise  buffalo? — 
A.  For  bullocks  and  such  like  they  use  carabaos  here. 

Q.  Suppose  you  wanted  to  go  into  cattle  raising;  would  you  con- 
sider it  better  to  raise  cattle  for  beef  or  for  carabaos  for  people  who 
wanted  them  for  work? — A.  The  carabao  is  the  better  for  selling;  it 
brings  more;  they  command  a better  price. 

Q.  Do  they  dare  to  let  the  carabao  run  wild,  as  they  do  other  cattle, 
or  do  the  carabao  get  ugly? — A.  The  same  way;  they  are  left  wild; 
only  one  man  looks  after  the  whole. 

Q.  You  haven’t  put  any  mines  down  in  the  island  of  Mindoro; 
don’t  you  know  if  there  are  any  mines  down  there? — A.  I know  of  no 
mines  in  the  island  of  Mindoro,  simply  that  it  produces  some  hemp. 
The  Chinese  haven’t  gone  to  the  other  side  of  Mindoro.  Four  of  them 
went  there  and  all  of  them  died,  saving  two. 

Q.  What  did  they  die  of? — A.  Yellow  fever. 

Q.  Now,  you  say  that  there  is  a gold  mine  in  Mambulao? — A.  In 
Camarines. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  me  about  that,  what  kind  of  mine  it  is  and  how 
they  work  it? — A.  It  is  a gold  mine.  Herman  & Co.  got  up  a gold- 
mine company  to  work  the  mine  and  sent  some  machinery  up  there, 
but  at  last  they  had  to  give  it  up.  The  company  sustained  a loss 
from  it. 

Q.  What  was  the  trouble  ? — A.  Ever  since  that  time  I haven’t  heard 
anything  about  it. 

Q.  What  was  the  trouble;  couldn’t  they  get  laborers? — A.  They 
couldn't  get  laborers,  the  people  didn't  like  the  machinery  and  all  that 
sort  of  thing. 

Q.  Is  that  gold  in  the  earth  or  gold  in  stones? — A.  Both  kinds. 
They  used  machinery  to  go  and  bore  it  out. 

Q.  Is  there  anybody  working  that  mine  now? — A.  I haven't  heard 
anything  about  it. 

Q.  Did  Herman  & Co.  own  it? — A.  Nothing  has  been  said  about 
it  recently. 

Q.  What  is  cemanite? — A.  Fine  silk. 

Q.  AY  hat  does  it  come  from,  what  sort  of  plant  ? — A.  From  the  pine- 
apple. Some  of  them  are  used  to.make  Chinese  silk. 

Q.  What  is  the  difference  between  cemanite  and  pina  ? — A.  Cemanite 
is  Chinese  silk  and  the  pineapple  fiber  mixed,  and  pina  is  simply  the 
pineapple  fiber. 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


27() 


Q.  What  becomes  of  the  baliti  they  get  in  these  islands? — A.  It  is 
foresting.  The  Chinese  like  it.  They  export  it  to  Shanghai.  They 
send  it  to  Shanghai  and  Canton.  Balati  is  the  local  name. 

Q.  Who  goes  into  that  business,  the  balati  business? — A.  The  balati 
is  down  or  5 fathoms  deep,  and  during  the  months  of  April  or  March 
the  water  is  clear,  when  they  go  to  the  brink  and  some  of  them  dive 
down  for  it. 

Q.  Do  the  natives  or  the  Indians  gather  it?- — A.  The  natives,  the 
Filipinos  and  Mandayas,  do  it. 

Q.  What  is  about  the  size  of  one  of  them  ? — A.  About  a foot  long, 
or  about  6 or  8 inches. 

Q.  You  say  that  the  pearl  oyster,  concha,  is  produced  in  Cebu; 
is  that  the  same  kind  of  concha  that  they  get  down  near  Jolo? — A. 
The  pearls  produced  from  these  conchas  at  Jolo  are  much  whiter  ; the 
pearls  are  worth  more  from  Jolo. 

Q.  How  much  is  the  concha  worth  that  comes  from  Jolo? — A.  The 
price  fluctuates  from  $20  to  $60  sometimes. 

Q.  For  what? — A.  For  a picul. 

Q.  Where  do  these  pearl  oysters  go  ? Do  they  go  to  Singapore  or  do 
they  come  here  to  Manila  ? — A.  Formerly  the  shells,  when  there  was 
no  steamer  running  between  Jolo  and  Singapore,  came  here;  but  now 
there  are  steamers  running  between  Jolo  and  Singapore,  so  they  go 
direct  to  Singapore. 

Q.  Who  buys  them  there  ? — A.  Some  English  traders  buy  some  and 
the  Chinese  buy,  too. 

Q.  How  much  are  they  worth  a picul  over  there? — A.  They  barter. 
Bargain  in  a kind  of  barter. 

Q.  They  give  other  things  for  them  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  anybody  dredging  for  pearl  oysters  down  there  now,  or  are 
they  brought  up  by  divers? — A.  In  April  or  March,  when  the  water 
is  clear,  they  can  see  to  some  depth,  about  2 or  3 fathoms  or  -1  fathoms, 
and  they  can  dive  down. 

Q.  Are  there  any  machines  used — any  dredges? — A.  No. 

Q.  What  is  algodon  ? — A.  Algodon  is  cotton  for  pillowcases — for 
making  the  pillows. 

Q.  That  grows  on  trees? — A.  Yes;  it  is  not  fit  for  clothes;  it  is 
especially  for  pillows. 

Q.  What  do  you  know  about  gold  mines  in  Cagayan? — A.  The 
natives  or  any  people  can  go  there  and  work  as  they  like.  This  is  taken 
out  of  the  earth,  too. 

Q.  What  becomes  of  this  gold  that  they  get  in  that  way  ? — A.  Gold 
dust — it  is  sold  in  Manila.  It  is  put  up  in  bottles  and  sold. 

Q.  Who  buys  it,  the  Chinese? — A.  Chinese  and  English  buy  it. 

Q.  I don’t  see  that  you  have  got  gutta-percha  anywhere  here.  Don't 
3’ou  know  that  that  grows  here  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Who  is  working  on  that? — A.  The  Moros,  the  natives. 

Q.  Where  does  it  goto?— A.  The  india  rubber  is  more  valuable. 
Gutta-percha  does  not  cost  much. 

Q.  Do  they  get  india  rubber  down  there? — A.  Formerly  they  had 
india  rubber,  and  they  used  to  send  that  up  here  formerly,  but  now 
they  never  send  it. 

Q.  And  who  is  working  the  gutta-percha  down  there,  the  ( Ihinamen  ? — 
A.  No;  the  natives.  The  Chinese  buy  it  from  them. 

Q.  Don't  they  send  that  up  from  Zamboanga  now  ? They  used  to.— 
A.  At  present  they  ship  from  Cottabato  and  Sulu,  and  from  Sulu  to 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Singapore.  There  are  four  steamers  running  between  those  places 
every  month. 

Q.  You  speak  of  almacego  from  Mindoro  and  Mindanao.  Where 
does  it  go  to?  M ho  buys  it? — A.  The  English  firms  buy  it. 

Q.  Here  in  Manila? — A.  Yes,  sir.  At  present  they  send  down  to 
Jolo. 

Q.  How  much  is  it  worth? — A.  It  depends  on  the  quality;  some  £4 
a picul,  some  £7,  some  $8.  The  clean  qualities  will  fetch  most. 

Q.  How  much  are  the  nests— the  nests  that  they  get  in  the  Calamianes 
Islands — worth  now  ?-^-A.  Three  thousand  dollars  a picul — birds’  nests. 

Q.  Is  there  a market  for  all  they  can  get? — A.  You  can’t  get  much 
of  them,  but  any  man  in  China  will  buy  them. 

Q.  Where  do  the  best  nests  come  from  here? — A.  The  Calamianes. 

Q.  In  these  nests  from  Guiangas,  they  have  grass  in  them.  How  do 
they  get  the  grass? — A.  It  is  only  the  feathers  of  the  bird.  The  nest 
is  made  of  saliva. 

Q.  But  in  the  Calamianes  Islands,  where  they  rob  the  nests  a great 
deal,  the  birds  haven’t  saliva  enough,  and  they  put  in  grass  to  make  the 
nest.  I ask  you  how  they  get  that  grass  out  of  them? — A.  The  grass, 
when  the  nest  is  put  into  the  water,  swells  out  and  you  can  extract  the 
grass  from  the  feathers. 

Q.  The  nests  are  no  good  after  the  little  birds  hatch  out,  are  they  ? — - 
A.  No;  when  the  young  are  out  it  is  no  good  and  they  won't  take  it. 

Q.  What  months  do  they  get  these  nests  in? — A.  I do  not  know. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Do  they  sell  much  here  ? — A.  Formerly  a great  many  places;  two 
or  three  places  down  there  used  to  send  nests  up  here,  but  now  the 
Calamianes  only  send  the  birds’  nests  up  here,  and  no  other  places 
send  any  here. 

Q.  You  can  buy  them  here? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  do  they  sell  for? — A.  Sometimes  we  have  to  pay  $30  and 
sometimes  $32  for  a pound  and  a quarter. 

Q.  How  manv  plates  of  soup  will  that  make  ? — A.  About  40  plates — 
40  bowls. 

Q.  What  do  you  know  about  sharks’  fins  as  an  article  of  commerce  ? — 
A.  There  is  a very  small  quantity  here.  The  greater  part  of  them  are 
from  the  island  of  Jolo. 

Q.  Are  there  many  of  them  down  there  ? Is  there  much  trade  down 
there  in  sharks’  fins? — A.  They  go  right  down  to  Singapore;  they  don't 
come  here. 

Q.  Do  they  go  to  China — to  Singapore — and  are  then  shipped  back 
into  China? — A.  Yes.  There  are  two  qualities — one  white  and  one 
black;  the  white  fin  costs  much  more  money. 

Q.  How  much  does  it  cost  a picul? — A.  Between  $100  and  $200  for 
the  white,  and  those  that  are  black  between  $60.  $70,  or  $80  a picul. 

Q.  Do  the  Chinese  here  eat  them  ? — A.  Yes;  they  come  from  Hong- 
kong. I would  ask  as  a favor  that  the  officers  or  the  provost-marshal 
would  send  their  troops  up  there  and  take  care  of  the  Chinese;  they 
are  killing  the  Chinese  in  all  parts,  a great  many  of  them. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  have  a native  police  here  in  conjunction 
with  the  soldiers  ? — A.  If  they  are  exclusively  natives  it  would  not  do, 
but  if  you  take  one  American  soldier  and  one  Filipino,  that  would  do. 

Q.  Don't  you  think  that  the  Filipinos,  if  they  were  police,  would 


278 


REPORT  <>F  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


be  able  to  protect  the  people  better,  because  they  know  the  town  and 
the  people  and  the  language? — A.  You  can’t  put  any  trust  in  them; 
for  the  least  money  or  anything  of  that  kind,  they  betray  you. 

Q.  What  is  the  reason  that  they  hate  the  Chinese  so?- — A.  The 
Chinese  features  are  something  the  same  in  color  as  theirs,  and  they  want 
the  Chinese  to  cutoff  their  queues  and  join  them;  but  of  course  the 
Chinese  won’t  do  that,  and  if  they  want  contributions  of  money  the 
Chinese  Ayill  not  let  them  have  it. 

Q.  I hope  something  will  be  done  to  stop  these  assassinations  we 
are  having  here  every  day.  There  ought  to  be  something  done,  and 
we  will  use  our  influence  in  that  regard. — A.  A Chinese  in  Toroso,  a 
peddler  .of  cloth,  was  dragged  in,  and  after  one  of  his  knees  was  cut 
and  a wound  inflicted  in  his  bowels  the  man  was  crawling  out;  but  they 
dragged  him  in  again  and  hit  him  in  the  head,  and  buried  him  close  by 
a banana  tree.  That  was  only  day  before  last. 

With  thanks  the  meeting  adjourned. 


Manila.  July  10 , }S99. 

Present:  Colonel  Denbv  (in  the  chair)  and  Mr.  MacArthur. 

TESTIMONY  OF  SENORES  PEDRO  TORRA  AND  MIGUEL  SADERRA. 

Miguel  Saderra,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  your  name  ? — A.  Miguel  Saderra. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  in  these  islands? — A.  Thirteen  years. 

Q.  And  in  what  capacity ? — A.  In  tin*  Atheneum,  engaged  in  instruc- 
tion, and  in  the  observatory. 

Q.  You  belong  to  the  Society  of  Jesus  ? — A.  The  Company  of  Jesus; 
yes. 

Q.  Will  you  please  tell  us  all  about  the  Atheneum? — A.  The  Athe- 
neum is  an  institution  that  was  founded  in  1851*.  and  the  municipal 
government  intrusted  it  to  the  Society  of  Jesus.  It  was  at  that  time 
a primary  school,  with  only  about  30  pupils. 

Q.  And  it  was  supported  at  that  time  by A.  By  the  munici- 

pality. 

Q.  And  then  what  took  place  with  it? — A.  From  that  time  on  the 
number  of  pupils  was  increased  and  the  number  of  courses  was  ampli- 
fied. 

Q.  What  became  of  the  Atheneum  when  the  Jesuits  took  hold  of 
it?- — A.  They  went  to  work  and  changed  it  into  a school  of  secondary 
instruction. 

Q.  Please  tell  us,  in  your  own  wav,  the  kind  of  school  they  started,  and 
all  about  it. — A.  They  went  on  enlarging  the  establishment,  adding  to 
the  courses  of  physics,  mathematics,  natural  history,  agriculture,  and 
mechanics,  and  in  the  year  1874  it  was  made  a school  of  secondary 
instruction. 

Q.  Was  it  made  that  bv  themselves  or  by  the  government? — A. 
By  the  city  government. 

Q.  How  many  pupils  did  they  have? — A.  At  that  time  about  600  or 
700. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


279 


Q.  Did  they  charge  tuition  ? — A.  There  were  two  classes  of  schol- 
ars— resident  scholars  and  scholars  by  the  day.  The  scholars  who  did 
not  live  in  the  school,  the  outside  scholars,  paid  $1  a year  if  they 
belonged  to  rich  families,  and  poor  families  didn’t  pay  anything.  This 
money  was  paid  into  the  city  government.  We  did  not  collect  it. 
That  was  the  primary  department. 

Q.  And  the  boarders,  what  did  they  pay? — A.  In  the  secondary 
instruction  the  pupils  paid  25  cents  a year  for  each  course  to  the  city 
government. 

Q.  How  much  did  it  cost  the  boarders,  the  internals  ?■ — A.  The  board- 
ers paid  $220  a year. 

Q.  How  many  boarders  did  it  have  in  general? — A.  Up  to  1869 
there  were  100,  not  more  than  100,  but  the  number  kept  increasing 
until  finally,  in  the  year  1896,  we  had  220  boarders,  80  who  were  semi- 
boarders,  and  1.000  outside  scholars. 

Q.  Who  fixed  the  course  of  instruction  ? — A.  The  plan  of  education 
was  in  conformity  with  the  plan  in  use  in  Cuba  and  also  with  the  plan 
of  the  university;  it  was  modeled  after  the  university. 

Q.  Will  you  please  tell  us  what  that  plan  was? — A.  And  in  addition 
to  this  we  didn’t  only  give  the  official  course  of  education,  but  we  gave 
extra  courses. 

Q.  Was  the  teaching  of  Spanish  compulsory? — A.  Yes;  it  was  obli- 
gatory in  schools,  and  consequently  the  students  understood  Spanish, 
and  no  other  language  was  used. 

Q.  Was  Spanish  the  official  language  of  the  school? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  they  have  any  graduation,  like  a college,  or  did  the  students 
go  somewhere  else  when  they  got  through  the  course? — A.  Yes;  they 
were  graduated  and  got  diplomas  that  were  issued  by  the  director  of 
the  university. 

Q.  How  many  years  did  it  take  a boy  to  go  through  this  institu- 
tion?— A.  In  the  secondary  instruction,  five  years.  There  were  two 
departments.  To  get  the  degree  of  bachelor  of  arts  it  took  five  years, 
and  then  there  were  three  special  courses — agriculture,  mechanics,  and 
a commercial  course.  For  the  commercial  course  three  years  were 
necessary  for  graduation.  The  other  two  courses  could  be  graduated 
in  whenever  the  student  could  pass  a fixed  examination. 

Q.  When  the  student  graduated  and  got  his  diploma  was  he  finished, 
or  did  he  go  to  the  university? — A.  As  he  was  examined  by  the 
director  of  the  university  it  was  not  necessary  for  him  to  pass  through 
the  university;  he  was  finished  then  when  he  passed  his  examination. 

Q.  Did  they  teach  Latin  and  Greek  ? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  mathematics? — A.  Yes;  they  taught  arithmetic,,  algebra, 
higher  algebra,  plane  and  solid  geometry,  and  analytical  geometry, 
trigonometry,  plane  and  spherical  trigonometry. 

Q.  In  Georgetown  University  very  great  attention  was  paid  to  the 
languages,  the  dead  languages — Latin  and  Greek — and  also  to  French. 
I ask  whether,  under  this  system  here,  you  paid  much  attention  to  the 
languages  or  more  to  the  sciences?- — A.  Here  we  did  the  best  we  could 
in  both  branches,  but  here  the  teaching  of  the  sciences  has  given  better 
results  than  the  teaching  of  letters. 

Q.  What  became  of  the  boys  after  they  graduated  ? — A.  The  ones 
that  graduated,  taking  the  degree  of  bachelor  of  arts,  as  a rule,  studied 
some  profession.  In  the  university  they  exacted  the  degree  of  bach- 
elor of  arts  in  order  for  a student  to  take  up  the  study  of  a profession 


280 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


in  the  university.  The  graduate's  in  the  commercial  course  and  agri- 
cultural course,  as  a rule,  got  positions  in  mercantile  houses  or  became 
surveyors  or  got  positions  which  they  were  able  to  fill  from  the  knowl- 
edge which  they  got  in  the  school. 

Q.  What  was  the  proportion  of  Spanish  boys  to  Filipino  boys? — A. 
Ten  per  cent  of  them  were  Spaniards. 

Q.  And  the  balance? — A.  Filipinos  and  half-castes. 

Q.  Of  course  they  were  all  boys;  no  girls? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Did  you  find  any  difference  in  the  capacity  of  the  Spaniards  and 
the  Filipinos? — A.  They  differed  entirely  in  this  way:  That,  as  a rule, 
the  Filipino  is  a very  bright  child,  but  as  he  grows  older  he  becomes 
duller,  while  the  European  child  increases  in  intelligence  as  he  grows 
older.  The  one  grows  from  greater  to  less  and  the  other  from  less 
to  greater. 

Q.  In  what  branches  do  you  find  the  Filipinos  mostly  excel? — A. 
In  letters  they  did  not  exhibit  a great  deal  of  aptitude,  but  in  the 
sciences  they  had  a great  advantage  over  European  children,  because 
they  have  tremendous  patience;  they  have  no  nerves.  There  are  some 
of  them  who  have  a great  aptitude  for  the  sciences. 

Q.  Then  what  course  of  study  do  you  think  is  best  adapted  for  the 
Filipinos  ? — A.  Primary  instruction  is  pretty  well  diffused  throughout 
the  country;  the  more  widely  diffused  it  is,  of  course,  the  better.  In 
the  secondary  instruction  there  should  be  more  stress  laid  upon  appli- 
cation and  more  practical  instruction  given.  The  secondary  instruc- 
tion consists  of  the  classics  and  the  mercantile,  commercial,  agricultural, 
and  industrial  schools,  and  to  this  latter  I should  think  that  more  atten- 
tion should  be  given  than  to  the  classics.  These  people  also  take  very 
kindly  to  the  arts,  such  as  painting,  sculpture,  and  music,  and  natu- 
rally great  attention  should  be  paid  to  the  teaching  of  these. 

Q.  As  1 understand  you,  the  money  that  was  paid  by  the  scholars 
went  to  the  ayuntamiento,  the  public  treasury  ? — A.  The  money  from 
the  outside,  from  the  day  scholars,  did.  but  from  the  boarders,  no. 

Q.  Did  they  receive  nothing  from  the  State  or  from  the  city  ? — A. 
The  matriculation  fees  were  paid  to  the  city,  but  the  tuition  of  the 
boarders  was  paid  to  the  society. 

Q.  Well,  did  they  receive  nothing  else  except  the  tuition  of  the 
boarders? — A.  We  received  money  from  the  city  government. 

Q.  How  much  did  the  city  government  pay  you? — A.  I have  a 
statement. 

Q.  You  can  give  us  about  the  amount  for  each  year. — A.  I have  it 
here — $10,140  a year. 

Q.  What  year  does  this  represent? — A.  This  is  for  the  last  year, 
1898.  There  is  also  to  be  added  the  sum  of  $50  a month  for  an 
instructor  in  English. 

Q.  Can  you  leave  this  paper  with  us? — A.  Yes. 

(Paper  received  in  evidence  and  marked  Exhibit  A.) 

Q.  Then,  if  I understand  you,  that  is  all  the  money  you  received 
from  the  ayuntamiento? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Was  that  sufficient  to  run  the  school  ? — A.  We  made  this  do, 
together  with  the  funds  that  the  boarders  paid,  but  it  was  not  enough. 

Q.  How  many  professors  did  they  have  there? — A.  According  to 
this  statement  there  were  eight  for  the  course  of  secondary  instruction 
and  three  for  the  primary  instruction,  but,  as  a matter  of  fact,  there 
were  more,  as  there  were  many  who  did  not  draw  any  pay. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


281 


Q.  Now,  in  addition  to  the  Atheneum,  what  other  schools  were 
maintained  by  the  ayuntamiento ? — A.  The  primary  schools  among 
the  people. 

Q.  How  many  of  them  were  there?  Do  you  know  whether  there 
was  one  in  each  ward?— A.  1 could  not  say  exactly  how  many  there 
were,  but  I could  find  out.  For  instance,  in  the  ward  of  Binondo 
there  were  three  or  four.  I have  not  my  notes  with  me. 

Q.  Well,  you  say  in  a general  way  that  there  were  primary  schools 
all  over  the  city  supported  by  the  city? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  became  of  those  schools,  those  primary  schools,  the  schol- 
ars of  those  schools?  Did  they  go  to  the  Atheneum  finally,  or  was 
there  any  other  school  above  that  maintained  by  the  city? — A.  A great 
many  went  to  the  Atheneum,  but  a great  many  of  them  also  went  to 
the  college  of  San  Juan  de  Letran,  which  was  also  a school  of  second- 
ary instruction. 

Q.  That  college  is  run  by  the  Dominicans? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  I want  to  find  out  whether  the  city  had  any  education  above  the 
primary. — A.  No. 

Q.  Then  was  there  no  rule  about  it  that  the  scholars  of  the  city 
schools  should  go  on  up  to  the  Atheneum? — A.  No;  there  was  no 
rule;  it  was  optional. 

Q.  It  was  free? — A.  It  was  free. 

Q.  Then  the  city  can  tell  its  people  to  go  to  its  primary  school? — 
A.  Yes. 

Q.  But  the  city  didn’t  compel  them  to  go  to  the  university  or  to 
the  Atheneum? — A.  No. 

Q.  At  what  age  did  the  Atheneum  take  children? — A.  From  7 
years  up. 

Q.  Was  there  any  limit  to  their  going  there — any  age  limit  to  their 
going  there  ? — A.  No. 

Q.  This  tuition  of  the  city  in  the  primary  schools  was  free? — A. 
Formerly  those  who  were  able  paid  50  cents  a month,  but  this  was 
done  away  with,  for,  as  a matter  of  fact,  they  didn’t  pay  it. 

Q.  Was  the  teaching  of  Spanish  compulsory  in  the  common  schools 
of  the  city? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  was  the  language  of  those  schools,  Spanish  or  Tagalo? — 
A.  According  to  law  it  was  Spanish.  It  was  Spanish  by  law,  and  it 
must  be  said  that  here  in  Manila  the  language  was  Spanish;  but  in 
some  towns  there  was  absolutely  no  one  who  knew  a word  of  Spanish, 
so  the  school-teacher,  in  order  to  make  himself  understood,  had  to  speak 
the  language  of  the  place;  but  little  by  little  they  introduced  Spanish. 

Q.  In  the  Atheneum  did  they  furnish  books  free  to  the  scholars? — 
A.  Sometimes,  yes;  to  the  poor  people  they  gave  them  free. 

Q.  Then  if  a boy  could  buy  his  books  he  had  to  buy  them  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What,  if  anything,  has  the  United  States  Government  done  for 
the  Atheneum? — A.  The  United  States  Government  is  following  the 
same  course  as  the  ayuntamiento  did.  When  we  opened  up  the  Athe- 
neum by  consent  of  the  American  authorities  after  the  13th  of  August 
the  university  at  that  time  was  opened,  and  I asked  if  the  courses  in 
the  Atheneum  would  be  respected  as  official,  and  I was  assured  both 
by  the  inspector  of  schools  and  by  the  provost-marshal,  by  word,  that 
they  would  be. 

Q.  Is  the  Atheneum  in  operation  now? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  many  students  has  it  ? — A.  Seven  hundred. 


282 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Are  they  pursuing  the  same  plan  of  tuition  as  they  did  before? — 
A.  With  the  exception  that  we  have  introduced  in  all  the  schools  and 
in  the  Atheneum  also  a course  in  English. 

Q.  That  teacher,  the  English  teacher,  is  he  paid  by  the  Government 
or  by  the  Atheneum? — A.  There  is  one.  Professor  Gilmore,  who  is 
paid  by  the  provost-marshal-general,  but  we  have  others  who  teach 
English  who  are  paid  by  us. 

Q.  Do  the  professors  in  English  and  Professor  Gilmore  speak 
Spanish? — A.  They  all  speak  Spanish.  Mr.  Gilmore  takes  the  second 
course-in  English;*he  speaks  some  Spanish. 

Q.  How  is  the  school  getting  on  now  ? — A.  Very  well. 

Q.  Has  the  number  of  scholars  fallen  off? — A.  Naturally  the  num- 
ber of  those  who  come  from  outside  the  city  has  fallen  off.  but  the 
number  of  scholars  from  the  city  itself  has  not  decreased. 

Q.  What  proportion  come  from  the  outside  provinces? — A.  A half. 

Q.  Can  you  suggest  to  us  any  improvements  that  might  be  made  in 
the  matter  of  tuition,  or  are  you  satisfied  with  it  as  it  exists  ? — A.  There 
could  be  improvements  made,  and  a perfect  inspection  of  schools  would 
be  better.  There  were  schools  at  one  time  which  had  nothing  to  do 
with  the  ayuntamiento  nor  nothing  to  do  with  us — the  school  of  agri- 
culture. and  the  school  of  arts  and  trades — but  they  are  not  in  existence 
now.  They  were  dependencies  of  the  Government,  but  the  results 
did  not  correspond  to  the  expense,  the}'  were  not  proportionate  to 
the  expense. 

Q.  The  property  held  by  the  Society  of  Jesus  and  used  for  school 
purposes,  does  it  belong  to  the  order? — A.  It  was  the  property  of  the 
Society  of  Jesus  itself. 

Q.  The  city  or  Government  of  Spain  had  nothing  to  do  with  it? — 
A.  No.  In  addition  to  what  I have  stated  there  was  a normal  school, 
of  which  the  father  here  is  director  (referring  to  Father  Torra).  I 
would  advocate  a more  wide  distribution  of  primary  instruction,  an 
enlargement  and  greater  distribution  of  secondary  instruction,  and  the 
changes  which  I indicated  before  in  the  university. 

Q.  Would  you  make  it  compulsory  for  the  scholars  of  the  primary 
school  to  go  to  the  Atheneum  and  complete  their  education  ? — A. 
According  to  the  circumstances.  It  would  not  do  for  everybody, 
because  they  haven't  all  the  same  capacity. 

Q.  Is  the  appropriation  made  by  the  Government  of  the  United 
States,  by  the  military  authorities,  sufficient? — A.  The  inspector  of 
schools  is  studying  that  question  now.  They  are  increasing  it  some. 

Q.  How  many  scholars  could  the  Atheneum  accommodate? — A.  We 
could  accommodate  1,700,  but  it  is  a great  many. 

Q.  How  long  has  the  order — the  Society  of  Jesus — owned  the  prop- 
erty in  which  the  Atheneum  is  situated? — A.  The  property  became 
theirs  in  1859,  but  they  kept  adding  to  it  and  adding  to  it  until  1894. 
Since  then  there  has  been  no  difference. 

Q.  Then,  as  I understand  it,  the  Government  of  Spain  did  not  give 
them  this  property  or  any  part  of  it? — A.  No. 

Q.  What  effect  do  you  anticipate  from  the  teaching  of  English  in 
the  school — a good  effect  or  a bad  one  ? — A.  At  present  it  does  not 
seem  to  me  that  it  will  have  a bad  effect.  That  is,  I understand  you 
to  refer  to  the  scholars  of  the  college.  I understand  you  to  refer  to 
our  college. 

Q.  Do  you  think  it  desirable  to  teach  English,  or  not? — A.  I should 
think  it  would  be. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE:  COMMISSION. 


283 


Q.  Ought  Spanish  also  to  he  taught  in  the  schools l — A.  Now?  I 
think  so. 

Q.  Ought  Tagalo  to  be  taught  ? — A.  That  depends  upon  the  ends  of 
the  government. 

Q.  Do  the  boys- — the  Filipino  boys — have  any  trouble  in  following 
the  Spanish  instruction  ?— A.  No. 

Q.  Do  they  all  speak  Spanish  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  1 suppose  you  get  a better  class  of  students,  don’t  you? — A.  We 
get  students  of  all  classes. 

Q.  In  the  city  here  do  the  people  generally  speak  Spanish,  both 
high  and  low? — A.  It  is  different  in  different  parts  of  the  city.  Iu 
the  walled  city  and  in  Ermita  they  speak  Spanish,  but  in  Tondo  and 
in  Santa  Cruz,  for  example,  it  is  nearly  all  Tagalo;  they  scarcely  speak 
Spanish. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  In  your  instruction  in  physics  and  chemistry,  do  you  use  text- 
books only,  or  have  you  physical  and  chemical  laboratories  where  the 
scholars  actually  perform  work? — A.  We  have  physical  and  chemical 
instruments,  and  use  text-books  also,  but  chemistry  has  not  been  stud- 
ied in  the  last  few  years  to  the  full  extent  which  I wish  it  to  be  studied, 
and  the  course  has  not  the  amplitude  which  I hope  to  give  it. 

Q.  I want  to  know  whether  in  the  actual  work  the  students  use  the 
apparatus  themselves  and  do  work,  or  have  they  simply  text-books 
with  demonstrations? — A.  They  use  the  apparatus  themselves. 

Q.  You  spoke  of  mechanical  instruction.  How  is  that  instruction 
given? — A.  Applied  mechanics. 

Q.  What  conveniences  have  you  for  teaching  that?- — A.  It  is 
explained  to  them;  they  study  and  we  have  apparatus  by  which  we 
give  them  examples,  which  they  study. 

Q.  How  do  the  natives  take  to  that  sort  of  work;  are  they  successful 
about  it  or  not — work  in  practical  mechanics? — A.  Some  of  them  have 
great  aptitude  for  it.  As  a general  thing  the  ones  that  take  up  this 
branch  are  the  ones  who  have  already  taken  the  degree  of  bachelor 
of  arts  and  have  some  grounding  in  mathematics,  have  studied 
mathematics,  and  some  of  those  take  to  it  very  well.  Others  who 
have  not  taken  the  degree  of  bachelor  of  arts  find  it  very  difficult. 
The  ones  who  have  taken  their  degree  in  mathematics  take  to  it  very 
well,  but  the  ones  who  have  not  taken  that  degree  find  it  very  difficult. 

Q.  But  the  natives  learn  languages  very  readily  ? — A.  It  costs  them 
work.  If  the}'  are  beginners,  children,  yes. 

Q.  What  sort  of  instruction  do  you  think  is  really  the  most  valuable 
for  the  natives;  what  are  the}'  best  adapted  to;  what  best  fits  them  to 
go  out  into  the  world  and  make  themselves  useful? — A.  In  the  first 
place  the}"  would  do  best,  I think,  as  artists,  and  then  as  mechanics  or 
agriculturists,  or  as  electricians. 

Q.  Have  they  any  originality  as  artists,  or  are  the}'  simply  copy- 
ists?— A.  The}'  have  very  little  originality. 

Q.  You  spoke  of  their  music.  Do  they  write  music  of  their  own 
or  do  they  simply  follow  others? — A.  In  reality  it  is  only  imitation. 

Q.  In  their  scientific  work  are  they  capable  of  original  work,  orig- 
inal investigation,  or  do  they  simply  follow  what  others  have  done?— 
A.  They  have  no  talent  for  invention;  they  have  no  originality  in  it. 
They  are  very  quick  of  apprehension,  but,  of  course,  invention  is 
another  thing. 


284 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Have  they  manual  dexterity? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  you  think  the  most  practical,  the  best  kind  of  instruction, 
is  practical  instruction  in  applied  sciences,  agriculture,  and  that  sort  of 
thing? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  a school  of  applied  sciences  ora  good  agricul- 
tural school  would  be  of  great  benefit  ? — A.  The  sciences,  yes ; but  the 
agricultural  school  would  depend  on  the  way  that  the}’  took  it.  They 
don't  care  to  devote  themselves  to  agriculture.  There  was  a good 
school  here,  but  it  was  not  well  patronized  by  the  people. 

TESTIMONY  OF  PEDRO  TORRA. 

Pedro  Torra,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
stated  as  follows : 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Has  the  Jesuit  order  had  practical  work  in  managing  parochial 
schools  in  the  provinces? — A.  The  teachers  of  the  parochial  schools 
are  trained  in  the  normal  schools  here,  but  there  are  no  parochial 
schools  just  about  here. 

Q.  In  Mindanao,  have  they  had  anything  to  do  with  the  establish- 
ment of  schools  of  primary  instruction? — A.  Yes.  In  the  parish 
schools  the  government  appointed  the  schoolmasters  and  managers,  and 
the  order  only  had  to  do  with  the  active  missions  among  the  savage 
people  who  were  to  be  converted.  At  places  where  there  were  too  few 
people  for  the  government  to  consider  it  worth  while  to  appoint  an 
official  head  members  of  our  order  were  in  charge. 

Q.  Did  the  Jesuit  fathers  have  any  supervision  over  the  towns  that 
had  been  long  settled,  the  old  towns? — A.  No  more  than  the  other 
priests  in  the  Philippines,  as  parish  priests,  for  all  parish  priests  were 
local  inspectors  of  instruction. 

Q.  Did  the  government  in  Mindanao  put  into  the  parish  schools 
teachers  who  did  not  understand  Spanish? — A.  No;  not  as  a rule, 
because  the  government  appointed  teachers  who  had  their  diplomas  as 
school-teachers;  but  at  times  when  there  were  no  such  masters  to  be 
appointed,  the  government  appointed  men  who  understood  but  very 
little  Spanish,  enough  to  read  and  to  write,  and  these  men  were  only 
appointed  till  there  were  more  capable  schoolmasters  to  take  their 
places. 

Q.  Was  there  any  provision  that  school-teachers  should  be  gradu- 
ates of  the  normal  school,  or  something  of  that  soi*t? — A.  In  this  book 
which  I have  here  all  the  laws  about  education  are  contained  in  a short 
form.  This  is  a book  which  is  part  of  the  course  for  school-teachers 
in  the  normal  school. 

Q.  Are  there  any  definite  requirements  of  teachers,  like  that  of 
graduation,  from  the  normal  schools? — A.  In  order  to  be  a teacher  in 
an  official  school,  a degree  as  master  from  the  normal  school  was 
exacted,  either  as  a master  or  assistant  master,  but  at  times  when  there 
were  no  such  persons  holding  degrees  as  schoolmasters  from  the  nor- 
mal school,  substitutes  were  appointed,  and  only  at  such  times.  For 
private  schools  this  requirement  was  not  so  strict. 

Q.  Was  there  then  a scarcity  or  insufficiency  of  graduates  from  the 
normal  school  to  till  the  places  ? — A.  Yes;  and  there  is  still  a scarcity- — 
a great  scarcity. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


285 


Q.  How  long  has  the  normal  school  been  running? — A.  Thirty- 
four  years. 

Q.  What  salary  did  teachers  receive  who  had  the  title  of  “official 
teachers?” — A.  It  depended  on  the  kind  of  work  that  they  had  done 
in  the  normal  school — to  some  extent,  at  any  rate — the  minute  details 
concerning  which  are  found  in  that  book  here. 

Q.  What  was  done  in  actual  practice;  for  I know  from  observation 
here  that  the  law  was  not  always  lived  up  to,  and  I would  like  to  have 
the  general  statement  about  what  the  teacher  did  receive  in  the 
schools? — A.  As  3rou  have  heretofore  been  in  the  Philippines,  sir,  you 
doubtless  understand  the  fact  that  there  is  a great  difference  between 
towns;  that  there  are  some  towns  very  backward,  where  the  people 
are  not  at  all  advanced,  and  where  it  is  almost  impossible  to  carry 
out  those  plans;  and  it  is  impossible  to  carry  them  out,  as  a matter 
of  fact. 

Q.  lam  trying  to  get  at  what  is  behind  this  scarcity  of  teachers; 
whether  teaching  does  not  present  a good  career,  or  whether  people 
are  not  willing  to  go  into  it,  or  w hether  it  is  not  for  some  other  cause  ? — 
A.  From  1877,  when  the  school  was  established,  to  1890,  some  1,900 
masters  and  mistresses  graduated.  Of  these  some  have  died,  others 
never  cared  to  teach,  having  pursued  the  course  only  to  learn  Span- 
ish and  to  get  a general  education.  Only  a few  of  the  1,900  who  had 
graduated  cared  to  devote  themselves  to  their  profession.  If  they  had 
all  desired  to  teach  there  would  have  been  no  scarcity  of  teachers. 
The  second  reason  is  that  the  career  is  an  arduous  one,  involving  a 
great  deal  of  hard  work,  and  they  do  not  care  to  undertake  it.  The 
salary,  which  would  be  sufficient  in  an  ordinary  walk  of  life,  is  not  suf- 
ficient for  a teacher.  It  does  not  compensate  him  for  the  amount  of 
hard  work  he  has  to  do  to  fit  himself  for  his  profession.  Those  who 
have  actually  taken  up  their  profession  have  done  it  either  because 
they  have  been  encouraged  to  do  it  by  the  fathers,  who  have  always 
been  anxious  that  they  should  practice  their  profession  for  the  honor 
of  the  institution  and  the  good  of  the  people,  or  as  simply  a matter  of 
honor.  If  it  had  not  been  for  the  fathers  hardly  any  of  them  would 
have  put  their  learning  into  practice.  Then,  too,  it  must  be  remem- 
bered that  in  the  towns  there  were  other  things  which  would  bring 
them  much  more  remuneration  than  they  would  receive  as  teachers. 
For  instance,  they  could  serve  as  interpreters  for  the  Gobernadorcillos, 
which,  without  the  hard  w'ork  involved  in  exercising  their  profession, 
would  bring  them  in  a very  much  higher  return. 

Q.  What  is  the  remedy  that  you  would  suggest  for  this  state  of 
affairs?  What  ought  we  to  do  so  that  there  would  be  a supply  of  good 
teachers  here? — A.  We  have  thought  that  the  best  way  to  do  would 
be  to  establish  another  normal  school  in  Visaya,  in  Mindanao,  and  per- 
haps in  Cebu,  so  that  a greater  number  of  graduated  teachers  with 
diplomas  could  be  furnished.  Then  the  other  difficulty  of  inducing  the 
graduates  to  exercise  their  profession  could  be  met  by  giving  them 
better  compensation  for  their  work,  considering  that  they  have  to  be 
present  at  school  both  morning  and  night.  The  way  to  induce  them 
to  exercise  their  profession  would  be  to  give  them  better  compensa- 
tion, more  privileges,  and  make  the  profession  more  attractive  to  them. 

Q.  Do  you  think  those  two  measures  would  be  sufficient — more 
schools  and  better  compensation? — A.  The  government  has  it  in  its 
power  to  give  them  a stimulus  to  exercise  their  profession.  For 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


280 

instance,  giving  them  privileges,  giving  them  orders,  and  when  they 
retire  from  the  exercise  of  their  profession  it  would  be  well  to  make 
some  provision  for  them  from  some  source.  The  government  has  a 
great  many  resources  which  could  be  drawn  upon.  There  are  a great 
many  means  of  stimulating  them  to  follow  the  profession  of  teaching. 

Q.  During  what  months  of  the  year  is  the  Atheneum  in  session'- — 
A.  From  June  to  March. 

Q.  How  is  it  about  the  provincial  schools — during  what  months  are 
they  in  session? — A.  The  rule  is  that  the  provincial  schools  shall  have 
two  months  of  vacation  each  year.  But  these  two  months  of  vacation 
are  not  the  same  in  all  the  different  provinces,  for  it  depends  in  the 
provinces  upon  the  harvest  times.  In  harvest  time  the  scholars  do  not 
go  to  school;  consequently  vacations  vary  in  the  different  provinces, 
but  the  rule  is  that  they  shall  have  two  months’  vacation. 

Q.  The  university  authorities  who  were  here  the  other  day  included 
the  scholars  of  the  Atheneum  as  among  those  taking  the  secondary 
education  among  their  own  students.  I want  to  know  whether  your 
relationship  to  the  university  helps  or  hampers  you,  or  whether  you 
could  get  on  better  alone.  Could  you  get  on  better  if  you  were  free 
to  develop  your  own  system  according  to  your  own  ideas;  do  you 
think  it  would  be  better  for  you? — A.  It  would  be  better. 

Q.  I want  to  know  what  your  actual  experience  is  as  to  the  men  who 
have  gone  out.  having  graduated  from  the  Atheneum;  do  they  put  the 
knowledge  the}"  have  gained  to  practical  application,  or  do  they  go 
back  and  idle  around  the  town  as  Filipinos  illustros,  or  do  they  do  any- 
thing?— A.  The  same  thing  applies  to  the  graduates  of  the  Atheneum 
as  to  the  graduates  of  the  university. 

Q.  We  are  informed  that  many  of  the  graduates  of  the  university 
go  back  to  the  towns  and  spend  their  lives  in  idleness,  passing  them- 
selves off  as  learned  men.  Is  that  true  of  both  institutions — I mean  of 
their  graduates? — A.  It  is  true  to  a certain  extent  of  the  graduates  of 
both  institutions,  and  as  a remedy  I would  suggest  the  making  of  the 
courses  more  difficult.  Some  people  come  here  to  Manila  to  spend 
money,  and  they  wanted  to  idle  away  their  time,  and  they  took  this 
course  and  spent  their  money,  and  they  received  not  a great  deal  of 
practical  good  from  it. 

Q.  Do  you:  hink  there  is  a desire  for  education  among  these  people  ? 
If  there  was  a good  system  of  public  schools,  free  to  them  throughout 
the  provinces,  would  they  avail  themselves  of  that  system  and  profit 
bv  it  or  not? — A.  Yes;  there  is  a desire;  they  have  a great  desire  to 
learn,  and  when  they  can  not  go  to  school,  why,  they  enter  into  the 
house  of  some  Spaniard  to  learn  to  talk  and  to  learn  what  they  can. 
You,  Professor  Worcester,  have  probably  noticed  that  same  fact. 

Q.  I have  observed  it, — A.  In  teaching  the  arts  I think  that  the 
most  practical  way  to  do  would  be  the  establishment  of  a building — for 
instance,  in  teaching  sculpture,  to  build  a building  where  they  could 
practice  sculpture  and  learn  it  practically,  and  at  the  same  time  sup- 
port themselves  by  their  work;  and  with  the  other  arts  the  same  thing 
could  be  don’e — have  buildings  where  they  could  work  under  the  direc- 
tion of  teachers. 

Q.  We  have  in  our  own  country  schools  for  negroes  and  schools  for 
Indians  on  precisely  that  same  principle.  The  carpenters  build  houses, 
and  the  masons  lay  plaster,  and  the  blacksmiths  shoe  horses,  and  the 
people  who  are  to  be  printers  take  in  work  from  outside.  They  do 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


287 


the  work  from  outside  under  the  supervision  of  competent  people. 
That  works  very  well,  and  1 have  been  wondering  whether  it  would 
work  well  here.  Have  you  any  suggestions  that  you  care  to  make  in 
regard  to  methods  of  improving  the  system  of  public  instruction  out 
here  of  any  sort  whatever;  we  would  be  glad  to  hear  them  ? — A.  As  far 
as  the  Atheneum  Municipal  is  concerned,  I thought  of  adding  other 
courses,  such  as  electrical  engineering  and  mining  engineering,  etc.; 
but  so  far  as  the  general  plan  is  concerned  1 have  not  given  my  atten- 
tion to  it  and  have  not  anything  to  suggest. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  please  give  us  your  name  and  vour  position  ? — A.  Pedro 
Torra. 

Q.  And  what  is  your  position ? — A.  Director  of  the  Normal  School. 

Q.  When  was  the  Normal  School  established? — A.  In  January,  1865. 

Q.  Who  was  it  established  by  ? — A.  The  Government  established  it 
and  handed  it  over  to  the  Jesuits  to  manage. 

Q.  Who  paid  the  expenses?— A.  The  Government  paid  them  all. 
The  Government  paid  the  rent  of  the  building  which  the}’-  occupied, 
but  in  1880  this  building  was  overthrown  bv  earthquake,  and  as  there 
was  scarcely  a building  left  in  Manila  of  any  size,  and  certainly  none 
suitable  for  this  purpose,  the  Atheneum  gave  up  the  building  that 
they  had  to  the  normal  school  for  live  years,  and  they  occupied  that 
for  live  years,  and  have  since  been  occupying  a building  in  Ermita, 
waiting  for  the  Government  to  build  a suitable  building.  There  has 
been  no  building  in  Manila  suitable  for  the  school. 

Q.  The  object  of  the  school  w as  to  educate  teachers,  was  it  ? — A.  To 
educate  teachers  for  the  Philippine  Islands. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  To  educate  both  masters  and  mistresses? — A.  There  was  a small 
establishment  run  by  the  Augustinian  nuns  near  the  Normal  School. 
On  the  1st  of  May,  1898,  when  the  battle  of  Cavite  took  place,  the  nuns 
all  left,  consequently  this  was  discontinued.  The  schoolmistresses  w ho 
came  from  this  establishment  studied  in  private  schools  or  wherever 
they  wanted  to,  and  were  examined  in  this  school  by  a commission 
appointed  for  that  purpose. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Was  tuition  free? — A.  Completely,  entirely,  free. 

Q.  Howt  long  have  you  been  director  ? — A.  Nine  years  at  first,  and 
now  two  years. 

Q.  Do  you  educate  ladies  as  well  as  gentlemen  ? — A.  No;  as  a mem- 
ber of  the  board  of  commissioners  I examine  the  graduates — that  is 
about  all  1 ever  have  to  do  with  them. 

Dr.  Taderva.  There  was  a commission  formed,  a superior  commis- 
sion of  education,  and  they  examined  all  the  schoolmistresses.  When- 
ever there  was  a certain  number  of  schoolmistresses  who  wished  to 
obtain  diplomas  as  teachers  this  commission  met  and  examined  them. 

Q.  What  was  about  the  average  number  of  students? — A.  (Father 
Torra).  From  100  to  500.  There  was  also  a school  for  teachers  embod- 
ied in  the  Normal  School,  for  teaching  children  in  the  first  grades — for 
practical  work  by  students  studying  to  be  teachers.  Those,  of  course, 
were  not  included  in  the  Normal  School.  There  were  some  150  of  them. 

Q.  How  long  did  the  course  last? — A.  Three  full  years. 


‘288 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  How  did  the  students  support  themselves  ? — A.  There  were  both 
boarding  scholars  and  day  scholars  in  the  Normal  School.  Among  the 
boarding  scholars  there  were  15  who  were  pensioned  by  the  Govern- 
ment. The  Government  paid  810  a month  for  each  of  them,  and  then 
there  were  other  boarders  who  also  paid  §10  a month — that  was  simply 
for  their  maintenance.  The  day  scholars  didn't  pay  this,  of  course. 

Q.  When  they  graduted  did  they  become  teachers ?■ — A.  On  the  ter- 
mination of  the  course,  and  on  passing  their  examination,  the  Govern- 
ment gave  them  their  diplomas. 

Q.  Was  teaching  made  obligatory  by  the  Government,  or  did  they 
go  into  any  other  business  they  pleased? — A.  Teaching  was  only  bind- 
ing upon  those  for  whom  the  Government  paid  this  pension  of  810  a 
month;  those  the  Government  obliged  to  teach  for  a term  of  years.  I 
think  it  was  ten  years. 

Dr.  Taderva.  And  these,  as  a general  rule,  were  the  ones  who  stood 
highest  in  their  classes  and  examinations;  it  was  a sort  of  a prize. 

Q.  How  did  that  system  work:  did  it  furnish  sufficient  teachers? 

Father  Torra.  No;  in  the  life  of  this  Normal  School  it  has  graduated 
1.900  teachers;  but  one  thing  must  be  taken  into  account,  that  in 
the  beginning  there  was  no  Spanish  spoken  in  the  provinces,  and  a 
great  many  of  these  scholars  presented  themselves  to  the  Normal  School 
without  being  able  to  read  or  speak  a word  of  Spanish,  without  any 
education,  and  of  course  the  course  laid  down  had  to  be  reduced.  We 
had  to  be  contented  with  less;  but  now  the  scholars  presenting  them- 
selves to  enter  the  Normal  School  have  been  improving  all  the  time. 
Scholars  come  who  can  read  and  write,  and  have  more  or  less  other 
education,  and  the  course  must  be  enlarged  and  improved. 

Q.  What  connection  has  the  school  now,  if  any,  with  the  Govern- 
ment of  the  United  States? — A.  Only  that  the}’  have  continued  paying 
us  the  amount  that  the  Spanish  Government  gave  us,  and  the  classes 
are  continuing. 

Q.  How  much  does  it  pay  you? — A.  It  is  set  out  at  length  in  this 
book. 

Q.  You  can  give  us  the  general  amount? — A.  Eight  hundred  dollars 
for  each  professor. 

Q.  How  much  in  the  total Can  you  give  us  how  much  in  the  total 
the  military  authorities  agreed  to  pay  ? — A.  There  are  six  professors, 
at  8800  each. 

Q.  Does  the  United  States  Government  pay  for  these  15  schools  as 
the  Spanish  Government  did — A.  The  Spanish  Government  did  away 
with  them,  because  they  did  not  consider  them  necessary.  There  is  a 
professor  of  drawing. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  about  how  much  the  Government  of  the  United 
States  contributes? — A.  Eight  thousand  eight  hundred  and  eighty 
dollars. 

Q.  Is  the  school  in  operation  now? — A.  Yes,  sir;  but  in  considera- 
tion of  the  fact  that  the  necessaries  of  life  are  a great  deal  more 
expensive  at  present  than  they  were  before,  and  that  everything  is  a 
great  deal  more  expensive  in  Manila,  an  increase  o this  amount  has 
been  asked  for  through  the  inspector  of  schools, an  increase  of  a 
third  or  something  of  that  sort,  considering  them  necessary  for  the 
continuance  of  the  establishment. 

Q.  How  many  students  have  they  now? — A.  Very  few  at  present; 
for  the  scholars  who  come  to  take  the  course  for  school-teachers  gen- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


289 


orally  come  from  the  provinces.  In  Manila  and  about  here  there 
are  plenty  of  school-teachers,  and  the  career  does  not  attract  them. 
They  prefer  to  devote  themselves  to  other  pursuits,  consequently  we 
have  very  few  students  at  present.  In  the  full  course  for  masters 
we  have  only  50  students;  and  in  the  primary  school,  which  is  attached 
to  the  Normal  School,  there  are  100  children. 

Q.  Any  Spaniards  among  them  ? — A.  No;  no  Spaniards.  Formerly 
there  were  a few  Spaniards  entered,  but  generally  of  the  rank  and 
tile  of  the  army. 

Q.  Has  this  school  any  connection  with  the  Atheneum? — A.  No. 
At  present  a class  of  English  has  been  established  in  all  the  schools. 

Q.  Is  there  an  English  professor  appointed  by  the  military  authori- 
ties?— A.  No,  sir.  For  one  class,  the  teacher  is  a father  from  the 
Observatory,  who  is  of  Irish  birth;  and  the  other  teachers  of  English 
are  tin'  fathers  who  speak  English  the  best. 

Q.  IV  hat  suggestions  can  von  make,  if  any,  as  to  the  improvement 
of  the  school?— A.  Some  modifications  in  the  courses,  to  make  English 
more  prominent  than  Spanish,  and  to  change  some  courses  in  some 
ways  and  to  reduce  their  importance  in  others,  but  not  to  change  the 
system.  What  is  done  in  the  Normal  School  has  to  depend  more  or 
less  upon  what  the  authorities  decide  upon.  They  turn  out  teachers, 
turn  out  certain  things,  and  that  necessarily  depends  on  what  is  to  be 
taught. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  entrance  requirements,  if  any,  have  they  for  the  Normal 
School  at  present  for  one  desiring  to  enter  it? — A.  Only  that  they  be 
12  years  of  age  and  know  how  to  read  and  write  and  know  a little 
medicine,  and  almost  nothing  else. 

Q.  How  much  would  teachers  have  to  be  paid  in  order  to  make  the 
profession  a popular  one? — A.  It  is  a very  difficult  question  to  answer, 
because  the  situation  is  so  different  in  different  parts  of  the  Archipelago. 
There  are  some  parts  where  a man  can  live  and  get  on  as  well  as  any- 
body in  the  world  for  $4  or  $5  a month,  and  there  are  other  places 
where  he  can’t.  For  that  reason  there  should  be  different  classes. 
The  masters  should  be  put  into  different  categories  and  the  salaries 
should  be  arranged  according  to  where  they  are.  For  instance,  here 
about  Manila  they  should  get  much  greater  compensation,  for  the  cost 
of  maintaining  a house  and  the  cost  of  living  here  is  much  greater 
than  in  the  provinces.  There  are  some  teachers  here  in  the  suburbs 
of  Manila  who  receive  $30,  and  it  is  not  enough.  It  seems  to  me  that 
$50  would  not  be  too  much,  and  yet  there  are  other  parts  of  the  Islands 
where  any  such  sum  is  not  necessary  at  all;  but  of  course  it  would  be 
desirable  to  arrange  salaries  so  that  there  would  be  an  inducement  for 
the  teachers  to  exercise  their  profession,  although  to  make  a schedule 
of  prices  offhand  is  a very  difficult  matter. 

Q.  Are  you  accustomed  to  have  visitors  come  to  your  classes  in  the 
Atheneum  or  the  Normal  School  ? — A.  Nobodi^  has  come  to  visit  us, 
but  we  will  receive  them  with  pleasure  if  they  come. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Can  you  leave  us  this  book? — A.  Yes,  sir;  I will  hand  you  all 
these  books. 

(Hands  the  commissioners  a package  of  books.) 

A.  (Continued.)  A great  difficulty  that  must  be  contended  with  is  the 

19 


r c 


290 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


nonattendance  of  the  children  at  the  school.  This  comes  from  their 
natural  indifference  and  from  their  poverty,  and  from  the  fact  that  the 
Indians  are  scattered  and  from  their  feeling  of  resistance.  They  never 
say  “ no,”  yet  they  never  do  “yes.”  That  is  a great  difficulty  that  must 
he  overcome.  Another  thing  that  must  he  considered  is  the  question  of 
text-hooks,  whether  they  are  to  he  given  to  the  children  or  whether 
they  are  to  be  sold,  for  it  might  happen  that  a schoolmaster  might  find 
himself  Avith  nothing  hut  an  empty  building. 

Professor  Worcester.  If  you  haven't  any  more  suggestions  or  obser- 
vations to  make  avc  are  through. 

Fathers  Taderva  and  Torra.  No;  we  have  nothing  further. 

Colonel  Denby.  We  are  A ery  much  obliged  to  you  for  your  inter- 
esting discussion  of  these  questions.  It  has  been  very  interesting, 
indeed. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  J.  T.  B.  McCLEOD. 

Manila,  July  U,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester  and 
Mr.  MacArthur. 

John  Thomas  Barrington  Macaulay  McCleod,  in  response  to  the 
questions  of  the  Commissioners,  stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  please  state  your  name? — A.  John  Thomas  Babbing- 
ton  Macaulay  McCleod. 

Q.  You  residence  is  Manila? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  here? — A.  Since  1880 — nineteen  years. 

Q.  What  business  are  you  engaged  in  ? — A.  Managing  La  Compairia 
Maritima. 

Q.  Hoav  long  have  you  been  connected  with  that  company? — A. 
Since  its  foundation  in  189-1. 

Q.  What  business  does  that  company  do? — A.  We  used  to  carryall 
the  Spanish  mails,  and  besides  we  did  a general  commerce  and  coast- 
ing trade  through  all  the  islands.  Al  e also  were  consignees  for  the 
Nippon  Yusen  Kaislia — Japanese  mail  lines. 

Q.  Mr.  McCleod,  will  you  ghTe  us.  some  account  of  the  lines  of 
steamers  running  from  this  port,  and  where  they  go,  and  what  busi- 
ness they  do? — A.  Do  you  mean  with  reference  to  mail  lines.  Colonel 
Denby. 

Q.  We.  would  like  a full  account  of  the  commerce  as  conducted  by 
steamships? — A.  In  the  old  times  avc  had  a mail  contract  under  which 
avc  dispatched  four  steamers  every  tAvo  Aveeks,  and  one  used  to  go — the 
laws  are  here  in  this  book,  and  you  could  have  them  copied;  the  ports 
they  would  go  to.  I may  leave  you  both  these  books,  and  this  [indi- 
cating] gives  the  conditions  of  the  mail  contract  in  the  Archipelago 
here.  I have  also  marked  the  places  with  cross  lines,  in  case  you 
would  like  to  study  it.  This  is  the  whole  thing,  the  full  thing  in  the 
Gaeeta  de  Manila. 

Q.  When  Avas  it  in  force,  the  old  contract? — A.  The  provisional 
one  came  into  force  about  January,  189T. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


291 


Q.  You  carried  all  the  mails,  did  you  ? — A.  Yes;  we  had  the  mail 
contract  from  the  Spanish  Government  for  the  whole  Philippines  and 
the  Carolinas  and  the  Marianas;  we  transported  all  their  troops,  and 
all  their  civil  governors  and  employees  and  cargo. 

Q.  You  do  not  run  to  Hongkong? — A.  We  are  running  a line  to 
Hongkong,  and  have  been  since  the  1st  of  March. 

Q.  What  boats  have  you  on  that  line?— A.  The  Salvador;  but  we 
hope  to  put  better  ones  on  later. 

Q.  Of  course,  we  could  dig  that  out  here,  but  you  could  perhaps 
tell  it  to  us  better.  You  say  you  run  to  all  the  islands.  J ust  state  each 
island  and  toll  us  what  means  of  communication  you  have  with  it,  and 
whether  you  have  contracts  with  the  United  States  to  carry  the  mails  ? — 
A.  No;  we  have  no  contract  with  the  United  States. 

Q.  No  contract  relations  with  the  United  States? — A.  No;  but  we 
do  the  Government  sei’vice.  General  Otis  has  used  our  boats  for  the 
Government.  They  take  our  boats  from  day  to  day  as  they  require 
them.  Under  the  Spanish  contract  six  months’  notice  should  have 
been  given  on  each  side  that  the  provisional  contract  was  to  be  ter- 
minated, because  we  had  finished  the  one  contract,  and  had  taken  up 
the  provisional  contract,  and  under  that  provisional  contract  there  was 
to  be  six  months’  notice  given  on  either  side  to  rescind  the  contract; 
but  we  considered  the  contract  rescinded  by  the  change  of  government, 
and  we  have  not  entered  any  claim  for  its  continuation. 

Q.  How  many  ships  have  you  got? — A.  Eighteen.  We  have  thir- 
teen that  would  suit  for  the  mail  contract,  under  the  provisional  con- 
tract which  was  in  force;  we  just  kept  them  running  to  all  the  ports 
opened  by  the  Americans. 

Q.  In  all  the  islands? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Where  do  you  run? — A.  At  present  from  San  Fernando  north. 
We  have  that  line  open  to  the  north;  that  takes  in  San  Fernando,  Caga- 
yan, Curiamo,  Salomague,  and  Aparri. 

Q.  You  said  from  San  Fernando? — A.  Beginning  at  San  Fernando; 
that  is  the  most  southern  point  they  let  us  call  at.  It  is  in  the  prov- 
ince of  La  Union.  Then  on  the  south  of  the  island  we  run  from 
Sorsogon,  Bulan,  Gubat,  Legaspi,  and  Tabayo;  then  to  the  Masbate 
cattle  ports,  to  Ilacol;  also  Tigao  and  Burias;  also  the  ports  of  Pal- 
anoc,  Uson,  Naro,  and  Cataingan.  The  Masbate  cattle  ports  were  just 
opened  the  other  day,  and  we  sent  the  first  expedition  down,  but  the 
people  refused  to  give  us  the  cattle;  the}’’  were  willing  that  we  should 
take  rice  and  money,  but  they  would  not  allow  the  cattle  to  go.  We 
are  expecting  our  other  steamers. 

Q What  kind  of  cattle  do  3*011  bring  from  there? — A.  The  Masbate 
cattle  are  very  good.  They  kill  from  three  to  four  hundred  pounds 
packed  meat.  They  are  considered  the  second  best  in  the  Islands. 
They  have  a thousand  head  in  the  ports. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  that  island? — A.  Masbate  Island.  I think 
it  was  formerly  under  the  same  governor  as  Tigao  and  Burias,  which 
are  just  opposite.  Then  in  Leyte  toTacloban,  to  Malitbog,  to  Bay  bay, 
to  Mansin,  and  to  Ormoc.  Those  are  in  Leyte,  and  are  the  hemp 
ports.  In  Negros  we  run  to  Demagati,  down  to  Bacolod,  to  Bais. 
Those  are  hemp  and  sugar  ports.  In  Mindanao  we  run  to  Catlabato, 
to  Davao,  to  Surigao,  to  Caraga,  and  to  Banganga.  These  are  hemp, 
coffee,  and  cattle  ports. 


292 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Are  any  boats  running  to  Zamboanga? — A.  No;  you  see  that  is 
still  in  the  hands  of  those  rabid  rebels,  and  Alvarez.  In  Cebu  the 
only  important  port  is  Cebu  itself:  they  have  stopped  the  opposite 
contra  costa.  We  used  to  run  the  steamers  there,  but  they  have 
stopped  that  on  account  of  the  difficulties  with  natives.  In  the  island 
of  Bohol  we  only  run  to  Cbay.  That  is  a cattle  port,  and  has  been 
supplying  the  meat  to  the  troops  lately.  Those  are  all  the  ports  that 
we  have  open  at  the  present  moment. 

Q.  Do  ships  run  from  Manila  to  all  these  places? — A.  Yes;  and 
besides  there  are  intermediate  boats  from  Cebu  to  the  ports  in  Leyte 
and  north  Mindanao. 

Q.  And  these  boats  are  coming  to  Manila  with  freight  from  all 
these  places? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  They  transfer? — A.  No;  they  load  there,  and  then  the  produce 
is  all  delivered  in  Manila  and  repacked  here,  except  hemp,  which  comes 
by  the  bale  and  is  shipped  from  here  as  an  export.  But  Cebu  and 
Iloilo  get  a certain  amount  of  the  produce  by  small  boats  and  export 
from  there,  Iloilo  principally  sugar. 

Q.  You  carry  the  mail  to  all  these  places  you  have  mentioned? — 
A.  No;  not  all  of  these  places.  The  mail  lines  always  call  at  the  head 
government  centers — that  is.  the  capital  of  each  island — and,  as  I was 
explaining  to  Mr.  Worcester  the  other  day,  Aldecoa  & Co.  had  a 
joint  contract  with  us  formerly  for  the  mails,  and  because  of  their 
interests  in  the  hemp  ports  they  managed  to  get  in  a few  ports  which 
were  not  government  centers.  But  my  idea  would  be  that  in  running 
the  mail  service  it  would  be  more  satisfactory  for  the  government  itself 
to  have  the  bigger  steamers  call  at  the  principal  ports.  Where  you 
have  detachments  of  troops  little  lines  should  be  made  connecting 
cable  stations  with  them  so  as  to  carry  information — that  is  to  say, 
from  Cebu  around  some  unimportant  ports  of  Mindanao,  and  from 
Iloilo  to  Negros  and  the  smaller  ports  of  Negros,  the  Calamianes 
Islands,  and  the  opposite  coast  of  Antique.  Because  it  is  really  a 
waste,  taking  a big  steamer  down  from  Manila  and  calling  at  all  these 
places,  where  you  only  carry  one  package  and  get.  perhaps,  live  letters. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I wish  you  would  give  us,  as  well  as  you  can.  in  detail,  your  idea 
of  changes  that  might  be  profitably  made  in  the  new  mail  routes. — A. 
I am  fairly  familiar  with  the  old  routes,  because  I am  familiar  with 
those  places. 

Q.  Suppose  you  take  that  matter  up  and  give  us  your  suggestions. — 
A.  The  northern  line  can  not  be  improved  on  what  it  is,  because  it  is 
a straight  line  right  around  the  islands.  The  southern  line  of  these 
islands  could  hardly  be  improved  either,  because  at  none  of  the  points 
on  the  way  there  is  any  change  of  route  possible.  But  an  improve- 
ment can  probably  be  made  on  the  line  that  goes  to  Romblon  and 
Cebu,  and  it  could  leave  out  the  ports  of  Ormoc,  Hagan,  Misamis,  and 
Dapitan.  Luzon,  in  that  line.  Dumaguete  could  also  be  put  down  for 
a small  steamer.  Maribojoc 

By  Colonel  Dexby: 

Q.  You  mean  that  some  other  company  could  furnish  that  steamer  ?— 
A.  We  have  the  Maribojoc  and  other  small  steamers  that  could  be 
used  in  the  local  service.  Otherwise  you  waste  on  these  small  ports 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


203 


big  steamers,  and  it  takes  up  fully  25  per  cent  of  the  time  of  the  big 
steamers,  at  a much  higher  subsidy  than  would  be  paid  for  the  same 
time  for  the  smaller  steamers.  The  subsidy  for  the  small  steamer 
might  be  a quarter,  for  instance,  of  the  charge  for  the  same  work  by 
a bigger  steamer. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  .Now,  suppose  you  drop  those  places  which  you  have  mentioned, 
what  routes  would  you  plan  to  take  them  in  afterwards,  starting  from 
Iloilo  and  Cebu  with  the  small  steamers? — A.  A great  deal  would 
depend;  the  Spaniards  made  Ilagan  a very  important  point,  on  account 
of  military  operations  they  were  carrying  on,  trying  to  subdue 
Mindanao.  Commercially  speaking,  Ilagan  is  of  no  importance  what- 
ever. The  first  places  of  importance  are  Cagayan  and  Misamis,  in 
the  province  of  Misamis;  those  and  Dapitan  are  the  three  important 
ports.  Dapitan  is  the  principal  port,  but  mail  for  there  can  be  car- 
ried into  Cebu.  The  Spaniards  had  a government  there,  but  it  is  a 
place  of  no  strategical  importance,  and  no  use  to  anybody  at  all. 
It  was  a waste.  Then  on  the  other  line,  the  other  side,  you  could 
have  a line  going  on  to  Java,  also  calling  at  the  Basilan  Islands  and 
all  those  places.  Puerto  Princesa  is  of  no  importance  unless  you 
wish  to  take  up  the  island  of  Paragua  (Palawan),  which  is  only  a 
strategical  point,  calling  at  Cagayan  de  Jolo  also.  Those  are  all  the 
things  I can  think  of  modifying  just  now;  but  what  I should  be  very 
pleased  to  do,  if  you  will  give  me  the  time,  would  be  to  make  out 
proposed  mail  routes  with  the  callings  suitable  to  be  made,  making 
them  on  the  basis  of  the  old  Spanish  centers  of  government.  A great 
many  people  have  wanted  to  make  new  mail  calls,  and  they  are  merely 
new  subsidized  mail  lines,  but  really  the  commerce  itself  would  keep 
up  many  ports  without  a subsidy.  A subsidy  should  only  be  required 
where  the  government  necessitates  steamers  to  go  for  government 
purposes — for  the  taking  of  troops,  etc.  For  outside  of  the  govern- 
ment's use  there  is  no  need  of  supporting  a mail  route  at  all.  If  there 
is  commerce  to  be  done,  the  merchants  will  take  the  boats  there. 

Q.  Can  you  explain  how  that  will  be  done,  and  how  they  will  be 
paid? — A.  They  have  always  taken  them  free  before;  by  Spanish  law 
they  were  obliged  to  carry  the  mails  and  nothing  was  paid,  but  they 
could  be  paid,  taking  it  on  a basis  the  same  as  Hongkong,  say  so 
much  a letter.  The  account  is  kept  in  the  post-office,  and  Mr.  Vail, 
at  Hongkong,  hands  over  to  each  steamer  so  much  at  the  end  of  each 
three  months  or  six  months. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  In  China  they  all  carried  the  mail  for  nothing.  There  were  no 
Government  post-offices,  either.  There  was  an  imperial  maritime 
service,  but  that  only  served  the  principal  cities,  and  the  mails  were 
carried  bv  the  steamers  for  nothing. — A.  It  is  the  same  here,  outside 
of  the  subsidized  mail  lines.  Mr.  Vail  the  other  day  offered  to  pay 
me,  and  I said  no,  we  have  been  in  the  habit  of  carrying  them  around 
free,  and  all  of  the  commercial  steamers  have,  and  wearequite  willing  to 
continue  the  practice,  except  in  the  case  of  subsidized  lines,  where  the 
steamers  are  at  the  Government’s  beck  and  call;  and  those  steamers 
are  practically  Government  boats. 

Q.  I think  it  would  be  a very  good  plan  for  you  to  arrange  your 
ideas  as  to  mail  lines,  the  laying  out  of  lines,  etc.,  and  plan  out  the 


294 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


details  for  us  and  put  the  routes  down,  and  the  ports  of  call  for  the 
large  steamers  and  the  ports  of  call  for  the  small  steamers. — A.  There 
is  one  great  trouble  with  the  small  ports.  Many  of  them  have  rivers 
like  Capiz;  steamers  to  get  into  Capiz  must  not  draw  more  than  T or  8 
feet,  or  they  can  not  go  south.  Then  you  have  Nueva  Caceres  and 
Daet;  they  require  steamers  of  only  10  feet  draft.  Dagupan  is  not 
required,  because  you  have  a railway  there.  But  there  are  many  other 
ports  that  you  can  not  get  anywhere  near;  they  Avould  require  a 
steamer  of  very  light  draft,  a little  steamer  running  from  Iloilo  to 
Cebu  and  intermediate  ports.  That  would  be  a good  line  for  a small 
boat,  you  know.  That  takes  in  all  the  way  down  to  Tanon  Straits, 
and  another  small  line  ought  to  be  started  from  Cebu  to  the  principal 
towns  of  Mindanao. 

Q.  1 was  just  going  to  ask  whether  you  would  start  a line  from 
Iloilo  rather  than  from  Cebu? — A.  Iloilo  would  probably  be  the  best 
center  for  that,  I think. 

Q.  Then,  what  would  you  do  with  the  Calamianes  Islands? — A. 
Tawi  Tawi-Basilan  to  Tawi  Tawi We  don't  use  the  line  from  Tawi 
Tawi. 

Q.  Tanon  is  your  stopping  place,  that  is,  in  Tawi  Tawi? — A.  Basi- 
lan,  Cagayan  de  Jolo. 

Q.  And  Cuyo  ? — A.  That  is  in  the  Calamianes  Islands,  and  that 
would  take  in  Paragua  also.  That  could  all  be  united  in  one  small 
steamer  line  from  Iloilo.  They  have  never  had  but  two  steamers 
calling  at  Antique,  but  they  wanted  to  start  a line  there,  because  the 
place  is  rather  important,  especially  in  military  connections  now  a 
days,  and  that  could  easily  be  included. 

Q.  Yes,  if  you  started  south  and  swung  around  to  the  west  and 
then  around  to  the  coast  of  Paragua,  Antique  would  be  a perfectly 
logical  place  for  your  steamers  to  stop.- — A.  Yes;  it  would  be  very 
little  out  of  their  way. 

Q.  Is  there  anything  at  all.  Mr.  McLeod,  in  these  Dinangon  Islands  ? — 
A.  They  lie  off  to  the  southwest.  They  are  small  affairs  and  never 
have  had  any  connection  with  anything  at  all.  Those  are  fishermen’s 
islands. 

Q.  I suppose  there  are  no  regular  lines  there,  Mr.  McLeod? — A. 
No;  we  want  to  go  where  business  is.  For  instance,  you  have  very 
important  ports  on  the  east  of  Samar,  Borongan,  Guiuan.  Those  two 
ports  supply  the  biggest  part  of  the  copra  which  comes  to  Manila  and 
is  shipped  to  Bremen.  Cagayan  was  nearly  totally  destroyed  in  the 
big  typhoon  by  a tidal  wave,  but  the  trees  are  now  growing  up,  though 
it  will  take  time  to  get  things  going  once  more,  and  then  they  will  be 
very  important  points.  They  were  never  very  important  for  the 
steamers,  but  in  the  old  times  people  tried  to  mislead  the  Spanish  Gov- 
ernment into  going  anywhere  they  could  without  reference  to  com- 
merce. 

Q.  Did  the  Compania  Maritime  do  all  the  business,  or  were  there 
other  boats  here? — A.  In  the  commercial  business  there  were  plenty 
of  other  boats. 

Q.  Tell  us  something  about  those.  A.  They  ran  to  the  same  ports 
we  did. 

Q.  Was  there  any  other  line? — A.  Not  a big  line.  Smith,  Bell  & 
Co.  have  two  steamers  now;  Warner.  Barnes  & Co.  have  two;  Men- 
doza & Co.  have  two  steamers,  and  Guitierrez  Brothers  have  three. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


295 


Sycsvgion  has  two  steamers;  Juan  Rodriguez  has  one.  Angel  Ortiz 
has  one  steamer;  the  Tabacalera — that  is  a company — have  tive,  I 
think,  altogether.  Then,  besides  these,  there  are  in  Cebu  and  Iloilo 
and  several  other  places  small  boats. 

Q.  Altogether,  how  many  regular  boats  regularly  ply  from  this  port; 
can  you  tell  us? — A.  Between  big  and  small,  counting  Batangas,  the 
last  census  taken  showed  36,  but  there  are  more  now.  There  were  36 
plying  from  Manila  without  counting  the  small  boats  down  there  at 
Batangas. 

Q.  IIow  many  are  there  now? — A.  About  4-f,  roughly  speaking. 

Q.  That  are  regularly  going  from  Manila  to  these  islands? — A. 
Counting  the  little  ones  that  carry  only  intermediate  trade. 

Q.  In  the  shipping  of  the  islands,  in  the  steam  shipping? — A.  I 
think  about  44.  I can  easily  send  you  a list. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  That  does  not  include  boats  going  to  Hongkong? — A.  No. 

Q.  What  do  these  boats  take  from  Manila? — A.  Rice,  provisions, 
and  piece  goods.  You  see  there  is  a great  trade  down  there  in  Man- 
chester goods.  They  dress  in  cotton.  The  bulk  of  the  goods  going 
down  are  cotton  dresses  for  the  Indians,  and  the  bulk  of  the  cargo  is 
rice. 

Q.  Where  is  that  rice  raised? — A.  Principally  in  the  country.  It 
used  to  be  imported  from  Sorsogon  and  some  from  China;  the  finest 
kind  of  rice  was  imported  from  China.  Then,  when  the  Manila  and 
Dagupan  Railroad  was  opened  up,  we  had  sufficient  rice  to  supply  the 
whole  wants  of  the  Phillippine  Islands;  that  was  raised  between  here 
and  Dagupan,  and  was  brought  by  the  railroad  and  also  by  these  little 
sailing  vessels  from  Dagupan  and  Sual. 

Q.  Did  these  companies  make  any  arrangement  in  reference  to  the 
trade  to  Manila? — A.  Yes;  and  the  reason  for  the  companies  joining 
together  was  that  rates  had  got  so  low  we  had  to  join  together  to  save 
ourselves. 

Q.  What  did  these  steamers  bring  back  to  Manila? — A.  Hemp, 
tobacco,  and  copra.  Copra  is  the  fruit  of  thecocoanut,  principally  ex- 
ported to  Marseilles.  * 

Q.  What  else? — A.  Coffee,  gum  (damar),  and  shells  also. 

Q.  What  is  damar  ? 

Professor  Worcester.  Damar  is  gum.  They  make  varnish  from 
it,  Colonel. 

A.  And  wood  was  brought  in  in  large  quantities,  and  wood  has  also 
been  exported  directly  from  the  Philippines  to  China,  about  100  dif- 
ferent kinds  of  woods.  They  used  a number  of  woods,  but  molave  and 
ipil  are  the  principal  woods  used  for  the  building  trades.  The  white 
planks  in  this  floor  are  made  of  molave,  and  the  dark  ones  are  ipil. 
They  form  the  flooring  and  the  framework  of  the  house.  Then,  for 
the  boards  and  the  lighter  work,  dindin  and  padacalan  are  largely  used. 

Q.  Those  woods  are  hard  and  durable  ? — A.  The  best  in  the  world. 
They  are  shipped  from  here  to  China  to  make  temples.  Nearly  all 
the  Chinese  temples,  I believe,  have  been  made  from  this  wood. 

Q.  Besides  the  wood,  what  else  do  they  bring  ? — A.  F rom  Batangas 
they  bring  horses  and  buffaloes,  and  they  bring  buffaloes  from  the 
southern  islands,  from  Calamianes,  and  from  Masbate,  and  these  buf- 
faloes are  used  in  all  the  sugar  districts,  and  in  all  the  rice  districts 
also. 


296 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  they  bring  birds’  nests,  sharks’  fins,  and  deche  de  mar  ? — A. 
Yes;  the\T  bring  them  here,  but  not  in  large  quantities.  They  have 
even  crocodile  skins  from  down  in  Calamianes. 

Q.  AN  as  the  business  profitable  ? — A.  The  business  was  profitable 
from  1868  down  to  1881.  Then  Burchill,  Robinson  & Co.  started  a 
firm  here  and  commenced  competing,  and  failed,  but  still  they  injured 
business.  They  only  lasted  a year,  or  a couple  of  years,  and  then 
they  failed.  Afterwards  the  business  was  profitable  again,  until 
about  the  year  1890,  when  we  had  the  mail  line  and  were  competing 
very  heavily  against  the  others.  AVe  made,  of  course,  our  subsidies, 
which  pulled  us  through,  but  it  was  not  a paying  business. 

Q.  In  general,  were  those  subsidies  large? — A.  NAY  got  about 
$360,000  a year  total  on  our  four  mail  lines.  Besides  that,  of  course, 
we  had  the  transport  of  troops  and  government  cargo. 

Q.  You  did  all  that  business  ?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  Then  your  company  prospered  i — A.  Our  company  prospered,  yes. 

Q.  And  is  prosperous  now? — A.  At  present  it  is  very  well  off, 
but  the  Spanish  Government  owes  us  $788,000. 

Q.  AA’hat  do  you  anticipate  would  be  the  effect  of  peace  and  good 
government,  such  as  Ave  propose  to  give  these  islands,  on  railways 
and  shipping? — A.  I think  the  islands  would  increase  \rery  rapidly, 
because  there  is  one  thing  that  trade  has  been  hindered  by.  Take, 
for  instance,  this  fact:  AYe  have  the  Jesuits  in  Mindanao,  and  it  is  most 
difficult  to  do  business.  The  Jesuits,  besides  looking  after  your  soul, 
want  to  look  after  your  hemp  business. 

Q.  You  take  it  for  granted  that  that  would  be  done  a wav  with 
under  our  form  of  government  ( — A.  Yes;  I take  it  for  granted.  And 
also  another  bad  thing  in  the  old  times  was,  that  in  many  of  the  small 
government  places — the  offices — in  these  hemp  regions  a merchant 
Avould  go  in  business  with  the  governor,  and  if  he  didn’t  go  in  busi- 
ness with  the  governor  he  couldn’t  do  any  business;  restrictions  Avere 
placed  on  him;  and  the  goA'ernor  Aery  often,  in  going  doAvn  to  take 
possession  of  his  post,  Avould  make  an  arrangement  with  some  mer- 
chant, A\  ho  would  pay  an  outsider — that  is,  another  man — so  the  gov- 
ernor's name  should  not  appear,  and  he  would  buy  hemp.  That  is 
especially  true  in  Iloilo  ports,  and  in  Dapitan  and  Mindoro  ports. 

Q.  You  take  it  for  granted  that  that  practice  would  be  done  away 
with  under  our  form  of  government? — A.  I don’t  see  how  it  is  pos- 
sible to  a\roid  that  always,  because  it  really  depends  on  the  man;  it  is 
not  really  the  form  of  government.  Not  only  that,  but  complaint 
was  made  in  the  old  times  about  that  being  done,  but  it  Avas  not 
stopped.  I think  under  your  form  of  government,  if  we  made  a 
complaint  the  man  would  be  removed  promptly. 

Q.  Now  can  you  tell  us  what  lines  of  steamers  run  to  other  ports 
outside  of  the  Philippines? — A.  AYe  had  a steady  line  of  steamers  to 
Hongkong  and  Singapore. 

Q.  Is  that  the  only  company? — A.  No;  thei’e  is  the  China  and 
Manila  Steamship  Company,  Jordan  & Mathieson,  and  ourselves — 
there  are  four  of  us,  and  Butterfield  & SAvyer.  The  China  and  Manila 
Company  have  two  boats — the  Diamante  and  the  Esmeralda ; the  Manila 
Steamship  Line  has  only  those  two.  Shewan,  Toraez  & Co.,  Butter- 
field & Swyer,  and  Jordan  & Mathieson  have  the  command  of  many 
boats  on  the  China  coast. 

Q.  You  say  that  Shewan,  Tomez  & Co.,  or  that  the  company  they 
represent,  have  tAvo  boats?— A.  Y es. 


REPORT  F THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


297 


Q.  How  many  do  Jordan  & Mathieson  have  running  here? — A.  ( )ne. 
The  others  do  not  run  here. 

Q.  How  many  have  Butterfield  & Swyer? — A.  Only  one — that  is, 
regularly — outside  of  the  Australian  boats.  The  big  boats  on  the 
Australian  route  are  in  the  habit  of  calling  here.  If  we  did  not  have 
any  quarantine  we  would  have  a steady  monthly  call  of  these  big  lines 
on  the  way  to  Australia  and  on  the  way  back. 

Q.  What  lines  would  they  be? — A.  One  is  Jordan,  Mathieson  & Co., 
and  the  other  is  Butterfield  & Swyer,  and  another  is  the  Japanese  line, 
the  Nippon  Yusen  Kaisha,  of  which  we  are  agents. 

Q.  They  run  to  Hongkong? — A.  On  the  Australian  line.  They  are 
beginning  now.  The  first  trip  will  be  in  August.  They  have  three 
steamers  on  that  route  that  will  call  here  about  once  every  three  weeks 
going  and  once  every  three  weeks  coming;  that  is  the  Japanese  line. 
They  are  beautiful  steamers  of  5,000  or  6,000  tons. 

Q.  And  they  are  going  to  call  here  regularly? — A.  They  are  going 
to  call  here  regularly  about  every  three  weeks. 

Q.  They  come  from  Hongkong  here? — A.  They  start  out  from 
Yokohama  and  stop  at  Kobe,  Nagasaki,  Shanghai,  Hongkong,  Manila, 
and  then  go  on  to  Australian  ports,  and  vice  versa. 

Q.  That  is  the  Japanese  line? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Now,  take  up  Jordan,  Mathieson  & Co. — A.  I think  their  termi- 
nus is  Shanghai,  and  they  come  from  Hongkong  to  Manila  and  then 
go  on  to  Australian  ports;  that  is.  now  since  the  American  Govern- 
ment started  here. 

Q.  They  have  already  commenced? — A.  Yes;  they  have  been  run- 
ning now  several  months. 

Q.  How  many  boats  have  they  got  in  that  trade? — A.  Well,  there 
are  about  six  boats  altogether. 

Q.  And  thei'  all  touch  here? — A.  Yes.  Now  the  quarantine  is  on, 
except  the  call  from  Hongkong;  of  course,  as  they  run  on  schedule 
time,  they  dare  not  waste  three  days  here,  not  while  the  quarantine 
is  on. 

Q.  Take  the  next  line,  Butterfield  & Swyer. — A.  Including  the 
whole  three  boats,  they  run  the  same  as  Jordan.  Mathieson  & Co. 

Q.  Jordan,  Mathieson  & Co.  and  Butterfield  & Swyer  make  two 
lines.  What  are  the  others? — A.  The  Nippon  Yusen  Kaisha.  The 
three  lines  have  nine  boats  in  all  on  this  trade. 

Q.  Then  you  have  nine  boats  now  coming  here  that  never  came  here 
before? — A.  Yes.  The  first  one  to  call  here  was  Butterfield  & Swyer; 
they  initiated  the  thing.  When  the  hemp  crop  was  large  and  hemp 
was  very  plentiful,  those  boats  stopped  here,  because  the  line  had  a 
lot  of  hemp  for  shipment  to  Australia. 

Q.  Are  there  any  tramp  boats  besides  these  regular  lines;  I mean 
running  to  Hongkong  now,  or  on  to  Shanghai,  if  you  please,  or  any- 
where else? — A.  Not  many;  it  is  only  an  accident;  in  case  some  Chi- 
naman is  not  satisfied  with  his  freight  he  gets  a tramp  steamer,  but  it 
is  very  seldom  you  have  tramp  boats. 

Q.  How  about  the  line  to  Singapore?- — A.  The  Tabacalera  used  to 
run  their  big  boats  right  through  to  Barcelona,  calling  at  Singapore. 
They  went  over  in  twenty-eight  days.  They  ran  a line  from  here  to 
Singapore,  a local  line  connecting  with  the  French  mail,  which  gave 
the  Government  two  lines  for  their  mail  service. 

Q.  Was  that  the  only  line  running  to  Singapore? — -A.  Yes. 


298 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  And  they  went  on  to  Europe,  to  Barcelona? — A.  Yes;  it  con- 
nected; the  local  line  connected  at  Singapore  with  the  French  line. 

Q.  And  the  ships  didn’t  go  on  to  Barcelona  ? — A.  No;  only  when  the 
direct  line  made  it  in  twenty-eight  days. 

Q.  That  is  the  Compania  Transatlantique? — A.  They  are  the  agents. 

Q.  Was  there  any  other  line  running  to  Singapore  and  on  to  Eu- 
rope?— A.  No;  there  is  one,  I think,  running  to  India;  Smith,  Bell  & 
Co.  have  the  line,  the  British  India  Company.  They  run,  I think, 
something  like  the  Australian  boats,  every  three  weeks;  I think  that 
is  it.  They  go  to  Bombay  or  Calcutta  or  to  whichever  of  those  two 
termini  the)'  are  making,  calling  at  Singapore  and  Penang  on  the  way. 

Q.  Do  they  call  at  Colombo,  Aden,  and  Bankok? — A.  1 don’t  know 
whether  they  call  at  Penang.  That  is  quite  a line  since  the  American 
Government  has  taken  possession  here;  it  is  entirely  new,  and  it  runs 
regularly,  but  I don’t  see  how  the  line  can  keep  up,  it  seems  to  me  such 
a peculiar  route.  They  are  tine  boats;  these  British-Indian  boats  are 
good,  too.  I think  the  reason  for  introducing  that  line  is  that  they 
are  trying  to  introduce  Indian  cattle.  We  didn’t  find  it  as  good  as  the 
Australian  route. 

Q.  Is  there  any  line  here  from  Australia? — A.  There  is  no  line  here 
from  Australia  direct.  There  is  not  sufficient  business  to  warrant  a 
line  direct.  I don’t  think  it  would  pay.  You  see  the  distance  is  too 
great  for  a direct  line  for  small  steamers;  it  is  about  twenty-two  days 
around.  And  you  see  we  are  on  the  wrong  side.  All  the  ports  like 
Darwin,  etc.,  on  the  west  coast,  are  all  poor  ports,  and  all  the  good 
ports,  like  Sydney  and  Melbourne,  are  on  the  other  side.  I don’t  think 
that  a line  which  was  not  subsidized  would  pay  between  here  and 
Australia. 

Q.  What  is  the  prospect  of  having  a line  from  here  to  San  Fran- 
cisco?— A.  Well,  I heard  the  other  day  that  there  was  a chance  of  it. 
I forget  the  name  of  the  people.  Is  there  a line  called  the  Govern- 
ment line? 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I don’t  know  of  any  such  name. — A.  I forget  the  name,  but  they 
told  me  the  other  day  they  were  going  to  start  a line,  making  Manila 
the  terminus,  and  were  going  to  stop  at  Honolulu  and  all  the  ports  in 
Japan  and  the  Philippines.  That  is  what  I have  heard. 

Q.  Had  the  Pacific  Mail  Steamship  Company  anything  to  do  with  the 
proposition? — A.  No;  it  was  an  outside  company — some  enterprising 
man.  I heard  his  name.  He  has  a well-known  name  in  the  States. 

Q.  Did  you  think  there  was  any  prospect  of  establishing  such  a 
line? — A.  I think  it  likely. 

Q.  Would  it  pay? — A.  I think  so.  There  is  plenty  of  flour,  and  the 
western  coast  of  America  consumes  a good  deal  of  sugar  and  hemp, 
too,  and  that,  instead  of  going  via  Hongkong  as  before,  would  go 
direct.  Spreckels  uses  a good  deal  of  sugar. 

Q.  What  articles  principally  have  been  brought  in  here,  since  the 
American  occupation,  from  America  ? -A.  Canned  goods,  hams,  and 
provisions  principally  are  the  things  that  have  increased. 

Q.  Haven’t  you  left  out  the  chief  of  all,  beer? — A.  Yes.  Beer  has 
increased.  1 have  seen  cargoes  of  over  15,000  barrels  at  a time  from 
Hongkong  for  one  company.  A tremendous  amount  of  beer  has  been 
coming  in. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


299 


Q.  The  effect  of  the  occupation  by  the  Americans,  then,  has  been 
to  benefit  the  local  lines  of  steamers? — A.  No;  1 can  not  say  that  yet. 
We  have  had  the  ports  closed  so  long.  It  has  been  a benefit  to  the 
local  lines  to  Hongkong.  Such  ships  as  the  Esmeralda  and  the  Sung- 
Hang  have  done  a good  business.  I have  only  one  steamer  running  to 
Hongkong,  the  Salvadora.  She  is  the  only  American  boat  on  the  line 
and  is  of  about  1,000  tons  gross.  She  is  too  small  for  the  Hongkong 
trade;  but  the  Nippon  Yusen  Kaisha  promises  to  give  me  two  first- 
class  steamers  to  run  there,  each  with  good  passenger  accommodations. 
They  have  70  steamers,  you  know. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  There  ought  to  be  a call  for  something  that  would  give  good 
passenger  accommodations. — A.  These  steamers  are  very  good.  The 
Sunglciang  and  the  new  Diamante  are  very  well  fitted  up. 

Q.  These  new  Japanese  steamers  would  go  to  Japanese  ports? — A. 
No;  only  to  Hongkong  for  local  cargo,  local  connection.  The  Japan- 
ese company  have  steamers  to  Marseilles,  and  they  are  running  to  San 
Francisco,  too. 

Q.  Their  subsidies  are  enormous,  aren't  they?— A.  Yes;  they  could 
run  against  anybody.  It  is  a question  of  mileage.  The  rest  of  the 
trade  is  done  by  sailing  ships,  and  a great  deal  of  business  is  done  by 
tramp  steamers  as  well. 

Q.  Can  }Tou  give  us  any  idea  about  the  number  of  sailing  vessels 
that  come  into  this  port  from  abroad? — A.  I can  get  you  the  year’s 
statistics. 

Q.  Are  there  any  sailing  vessels  in  the  island? — A.  Yes;  through 
the  islands;  just  the  same  as  steamers,  coasters;  vessels,  some  of  them, 
of  250  tons  gross. 

Q.  Could  you  give  us  a report  on  both  the  steamers  and  the  sailing 
vessels  that  ply  to  this  port? — A.  Yes;  sailing  vessels  are  very  impor- 
tant. They  are  very  important  as  carriers;  of  course,  not  as  regards 
mail. 

Q.  These  sailing  vessels  are  manned  by  Filipinos? — A.  Altogether. 
The  Spaniards  insisted  on  having  a Spanish  captain  when  the  vessel 
was  over  100  tons  register. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Why  was  that? — A.  The  idea  of  that  was,  the  natives  who  were 
examined  were  a very  ignorant  class,  and  they  never  got  certificates 
beyond  what  thei*  call  a patron.  The  patron  is  a man  who  navigates 
practically,  but  can  not  make  the  mathematical  calculations  necessary 
to  take  his  bearings  when  out  of  sight  of  land. 

Q.  Isn’t  that  the  law  of  all  nations?  Do  not  all  nations  require 
that  the  captain  should  be  a citizen  of  its  own  country? — A.  No;  it 
was  not,  because  the  Filipino  was  a citizen  just  the  same  as  the  Span- 
iard. It  was  because  the  captain  of  the  port  found  that  they  were 
never  able  to  pass  their  examinations.  I think  there  were  only  two 
Filipino  captains;  but  lately  we  have  taken  them  on  our  vessels  and 
taught  them.  The  number  has  been  increasing,  and  a great  many  are 
coming  to  the  front  now.  Recently  we  have  engaged  two  or  three 
very  smart  Filipinos,  very  smart  navigators. 

Q.  Your  company  is  a Spanish  company  ? — A.  No;  it  is  an  American 
company  now. 

Q.  It  was  owned  in  England? — A.  The  bulk  of  the  capital  was 
English,  and  a good  deal  of  it  Filipino. 


300 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  But  you  flew  the  Spanish  flag? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Now  you  have  transferred  to  the  American  flag? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Of  what  nationality  do  you  get  your  officers? — A.  Spanish — 
Spanish  and  Filipinos.  You  see  that  is  continued  under  the  old  law, 
the  same  as  in  Mexico.  At  the  time  Mexico  changed  its  form  of 
government  they  allowed  all  the  old  captains  to  remain  under  their  old 
certificates. 

Q.  What  about  your  engineers? — A.  They  are  principally  Spanish. 
The}r  insisted  on  us  having  Spanish  engineers.  We  used  to  have  Scotch 
men  principally. 

Q.  Would  you  change  them  ? — A.  I would  like  to  get  the  Scotchmen 
back.  They  are  the  better  engineers.  They  do  the  ermineerino-  in  the 
whole  East. 

Q.  Would  you  prefer  Scotchmen  to  Americans  as  engineers? — A. 
No;  not  as  man  for  man;  but  I mean  the  Scotchmen  generally  have  the 
best  experience.  1 mean  you  have  got  just  as  good  American  engi 
neers,  but  you  won’t  get  so  many  of  them.  In  Scotland  the  little  boys 
go  into  the  engine  shops,  carrying  rivets,  and  from  carrying  rivets  go 
to  hammering;  then  they  study  engineering,  and  when  they  go  out  of 
the  workshops,  after  ten  or  fifteen  years’  experience,  they  can  construct 
an  engine  from  beginning  to  finish,  and  if  the  steamer  breaks  down 
they  can  repair  it  right  there. 

Q.  Are  there  any  dangers  to  navigation  here? — A.  Yes;  very  great. 

Q.  Plow  many  ships  have  you  lost? — A.  Since  1894  we  have  lost 
three  steamers. 

Q.  And  by  reason  of  what? — A.  One  turned  turtle  out  here  in  bad 
weather.  It  was  bad  navigation,  too;  the}7  didn’t  take  the  right  swing 
coming  into  Manila  Bay.  Then  the  Luzon  was  sunk  in  a collision  with 
the  Santander , and  the  ChisjM  struck  a rock  on  the  north  end  of  Samar. 

Q.  Were  those  accidents  attributable  to  local  causes  or  would  they 
have  happened  anywhere? — A.  The  collision  was  due  to  carelessness. 

Q.  And  the  turning  turtle? — A.  That  was  partially  due  to  the  cargo 
shifting  and  partially  to  carelessness. 

Q.  And  the  running  on  the  rock? — A.  That  was,  1 think,  due  to 
drunkenness,  a very  rare  case  among  the  Spaniards. 

Q.  Then  you  haven’t  mentioned  that  in  any  case  the  loss  has  been  by 
reason  of  storm? — A.  Not  since  our  company  started.  Since  1894 — 1 
forgot  the  Gravina — she  was  lost  at  the  beginning  of  the  company  in 
a typhoon  up  here  by  the  Coponas,  as  far  as  we  could  find  out.  We 
could  not  get  a very  clear  account  of  affairs,  because  onlytwo  men 
were  saved.  She  was  overloaded,  as  Stevens  mentions,  but  they  did 
not  bring  rice  from  the  south.  The  typhoon  was  very  heavy  and  her 
forward  caboose — sort  of  head — was  carried  away,  and  they  tried  to 
run  down  to  the  Coponas  Islands  to  save  her,  hut  the  canvas  was  all 
ripped  off  and  they  couldn’t  get  it  down;  and  then,  as  far  as  we  know, 
a water  spout  struck  her;  she  got  into  where  the  waterspout  was.  It 
simply  sunk  her  and  she  went  straight  down,  so  the  Indians  told  us. 
She  was  about  miles  from  shore.  That  was  in  the  month  of  May  or 
June,  1894,  or  in  April. 

Q.  What  are  the  months  in  which  you  have  typhoons? — A.  Prin- 
cipally in  the  change  of  the  monsoon,  October,  November,  and  Decem- 
ber, and  March,  April,  and  May.  The  monsoon  changes  twice  a year — 
spring  and  f 11.  You  see  now  this  bad  weather  has-been  due  to  the 
change  of  the  monsoon  to  the  southwest.  We  get  the  typhoons  at  all 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


301 

times.  We  have  them  every  month  in  the  year  and  also  in  a lower 
latitude  than  we  are  taught  by  geography  to  expect.  We  are  told  by 
geography  that  they  can  not  form  below  10°  above  the  equator,  but 
we  have  had  them  lower  than  that. 

Q.  Do  you  regard  navigation  in  general  as  dangerous — 1 mean 
more  dangerous  than  in  other  places? — A.  No;  except  the  trouble  we 
have  had  here  every  once  in  a while  of  discovering  a sunken  rock,  also 
many  accidents  from  being  blown  up,  owing  to  carelessness. 

Q.  Then  your  charts  under  the  Spanish  rule  were  no  good  ? — A.  No; 
there  were  always  rocks  not  appearing  in  their  charts,  as  a rule.  The 
principal  surveying  down  here  was  by  the  British  Government.  For 
instance,  one  man  would  discover  a new  rock  and  he  would  locate  it  on 
his  chart,  but  they  were  originally  all  English  surveys. 

Q.  You  know  we  have  a ship  en  route  to  survey  these  islands. — A. 
I am  very  glad  to  hear  it. 

Q.  What  is  the  path  of  the  typhoon? — A.  That  big  map  [indicating] 
was  made  in  our  office.  We  had  that  made  from  our  private  chart. 

Q.  The  Hydrographic  Office  is  sending  out  a ship  for  that  purpose. 
I know  it  because  I was  offered  passage  on  her. — A.  The  Spanish  had 
a hydrographic  station  at  Sorsogon,  but  the  steamer  very  seldom  left 
the  port;  they  didn't  do  any  surveying.  I remember  the  instance,  for 
example,  of  the  Reina  Cristina ; the  man  who  had  discovered  the; 
sunken  rock  did  not  feel  that  he  had  made  sure  of  that  rock,  so  he 
went  there  in  another  vessel  and  ran  on  it  afterwards. 

Q.  What  are  the  best  months  to  go  from  Manila  south  to  visit  the 
islands  ? — A.  From  the  middle  of  December  right  through  to  March. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  in  October? — A.  October  is  not  so  bad.  Octo- 
ber and  November  are  not  bad  months,  except  for  typhoons;  but  the 
best  time  of  the  year  is  always  from  December  through  to  March. 

Q.  By  means  of  the  observatory  here  you  can  know  when  a typhoon 
is  coming? — A.  Yes;  and  when  the  cable  is  all  right  you  can  get  infor- 
mation about  typhoons  from  Iloilo  and  Cebu. 

Q.  But  you  can  go  into  port? — A.  In  former  times,  yes;  but  now 
that  the  revolution  is  on  it  is  not  so  easy.  You  can  go  into  Romblon, 
etc. 

Q.  Assuming  that  the  revolution  is  over  ? — A.  There  are  plenty  of 
ports  within  10  hours  of  Manila.  The  first  place  of  refuge  is  Puerto 
Claro.  Romblon  is  also  another  good  refuge.  That  is  about  20  hours 
from  here.  Then  from  there  it  is  only  16  hours  on  to  Iloilo  or  Cebu. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  about  that  port  in  Masbate?  I have  heard  there  was  a 
very  good  port  there. — A.  What  is  the  name  of  it  ? 

Q.  I don't  remember.  It  is  a great  port  for  typhoons. — A.  I have 
not  heard  of  it. 

Q.  Forman  mentions  it.  The  name  of  the  port  begins  with  M. — A. 
It  must  be  a very  small  port,  I think.  Our  steamers  have  never  used 
it,  and  I know  they  have  been  hunting  for  ports  of  refuge.  They 
have  discovered  a great  many.  Tulet,  in  Legaspi,  Canimo  Island,  is 
another  port  of  refuge.  I forget  the  name  of  the  other  island  in  the 
Calamianes. 

Q.  In  connection  with  navigation,  can  you  give  us  any  idea  of  river 
and  harbor  improvements — of  rivers  and  harbors  that  can  be  improved 
and  made  navigable? — A.  A very  important  one  just  now  is  the  Pasig 


302 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


River.  We  used  to  have  vessels  come  and  go  out  of  that  river  draw- 
ing 154  feet,  but  now  the  river  is  not  dredged  as  it  should  be,  and  ves- 
sels can  only  draw  about  13£  feet  forward  and  2 feet  more  abaft.  In 
case  a boat  shall  be  sent  over  the  bar  it  makes  a great  deal  of  difference. 
I think  if  they  paid  more  attention  to  putting  up  that  north  wall  they 
could  dredge  this  river  so  as  to  bring  vessels  in  of  20  feet — bigger  vessels 
and  better.  They  could  have  done  that  with  a very  small  expense.  In 
case  a breakwater  were  built  Aparri  could  be  made  a good  port.  It  is 
now  all  shifting  sand.  The  river  Cagayan,  which  is  one  of  the  longest 
rivers,  runs  through  that  very  rich  land  where  all  the  tobacco  is  produced, 
and  it  is  a most  important  point.  Well,  the  mouth  of  this  river  is  shifting 
sand.  They  used  to  have  a little  island  right  in  the  center,  and  in  one 
of  the  big  freshets  that  island  was  swept  away.  One  of  our  steamers 
was  in  the  shifting  sand.  The  only  cure  for  that  is  to  cut  timber  down, 
gradually  building  up  the  mouth  until  it  gets  a natural  or  artificial 
bank  on  each  side.  With  shifting  sand  that  could  he  done  in  time, 
though  it  would  take  some  time  to  do  it.  You  can’t  possibly  drive 
piles  into  shifting  sand;  it  would  not  do;  but  on  the  interlacing  timber 
the  refuse  coming  down  would  catch,  and  this  will  always  narrow  the 
bank. 

Q.  Is  there  any  place  where  that  sort  of  thing  has  been  done? — A. 
Eads  is  the  man  who  first  evolved  the  idea  of  narrowing  rivers,  and  it 
was  done  here  on  a small  scale  with  the  Dagupan  River,  but  it  was  not 
done  on  a large  enough  scale  to  deepen  it  as  it  should  have  been. 

Q.  But  the  trouble  inside  the  river  was  with  the  mouth. — A.  dust 
coming  in  over  the  bar  of  the  river.  If  the  bar  were  narrowed  I think 
it  would  make  a good  steady  current,  and  it  would  be  deep  enough  for 
a vessel  of  20  feet  to  come  in.  Now  the  deepest  part  is  16  feet,  and 
that  only  allows  vessels  like  our  coasters  here  to  come  in. 

Q.  How  far  up  the  river  can  you  go  ? — A.  Just  to  Aparri.  I don’t 
know  how  far  it  is  up  the  river. 

Q.  What  about  going  farther  up  that  river  with  steam  launches? — 
A.  With  steam  launches  you  can  go  up  all  the  way  to  Tuguegarao, 
which  was  the  old  center  of  government,  and  they  use  just  now 
wooden — that  is,  ffat-bottomed — boats,  with  a stern-wheel,  like  the 
Covadonga , which  used  to  run  up  there. 

Q.  I have  heard  it  said  that  during  the  freshets  great  trees  come 
down  that  stream,  so  that  it  is  unnavigable.  How  is  it  about  that? — 
A.  When  there  is  too  much  freshet  they  haul  to  the  side  of  the  bank 
and  put  their  fenders  out.  They  are  always  built  with  natural  fenders, 
besides  the  little  things  which  they  carry.  The  Dagupan  River  could 
be  improved  in  the  same  way.  The  Capiz  River,  also,  is  another 
where  improvements  could  be  made.  That  could  be  dredged  out  and 
narrowed,  a stone  wall  built,  and  piles  put  in  then. 

Q.  AYhat  is  the  distance  from  the  mouth  of  that  river  down  to 
Capiz? — A.  Three  or  4 miles. 

Q.  Is  there  trade  enough  there  to  justify  the  expense? — A.  There 
is  a great  deal  of  paddy — rice — grown  there,  and  after  this  port  I sup- 
pose it  is  the  principal  rice  place,  and  tobacco  also,  in  the  country. 

Q.  You  were  speaking  about  the  river  Cottabato,  in  Mindanao. — A. 
That  river  has  a big  swamp  with  several  mouths.  But  most  of  those 
mouths  could  be  closed.  It  could  be  easily  done,  because  it  could  be 
done  with  piles,  as  the  bottom  is  not  of  shifting  sand,  and  there  is 
plenty  of  timber  there.  T spoke  with  General  Blanco  at  one  time 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


303 

about  shutting  up  the  other  mouths  of  the  river,  and  bringing  all  the 
water  down  through  one  mouth.  That  would  deepen  the  bar.  Just 
now  our  steamers  can  only  draw  10  feet  or  they  can  only  get  off  with 
a very  light  load.  I think  if  that  country  was  opened  up  properly,  it  is 
a very  rich  country,  richer  even  than  Luzon. 

Q.  AY  hat  is  the  character  of  the  population;  are  they  peaceable  or 
ugly? — A.  If  you  don’t  interfere  with  their  religion  they  are  all  right. 
The  whole  trouble  the  Spaniards  had  before  with  them  was  they  used 
to  insist  on  shoving  Catholicism  upon  them. 

Q.  There  is  a great  deal  of  difference  in  the  Moros  of  Mindanao  and 
those  around  the  lake.  The}r  were  in  some  parts  very  ugly,  and  in 
some  other  parts  they  were  not.  1 was  wondering  what  the  trouble 
had  been. — A.  In  Cottabato  they  have  always  been  quiet  people.  Our 
steamers  go  down  there  and  they  are  pretty  well  treated.  With 
launches  you  can  go  up  that  stream  20  or  30  miles.  There  are  a great 
many  windings,  but  there  is  plenty  of  water.  You  can’t  go  up  the 
lakes;  there  it  commences  to  get  shallow.  That  stream  comes  right 
from  the  lakes.  You  can  go  away  up  to  Tumbao.  That  was  the  far- 
thest-up point  the  Spaniards  had  there, 

Q.  Is  there  any  other  place  in  Negros  where  harbor  improvements 
could  be  made  so  as  to  get  in  there  comfortably  for  sugar?  A.  Rais. 
I don’t  know  whether  that  could  be  improved;  it  is  before  1 loilo.  Now, 
there  is  a neck  on  the  outer  bay  or  the  inner  one.  It  is  rocky  there, 
and  it  should  be  blown  out;  it  only  needs  the  opening  of  that.  There 
is  no  stream  there;  it  is  just  the  tide  itself,  and  if  that  was  deepened  it 
would  make  a nice  harbor  down  there.  That  is  one  of  the  best  sugar 
places. 

Q.  What  about  Escalanta? — A.  Very  rocky.  I don’t  think  that 
could  be  done.  It  was  of  no  great  importance  except  as  a cable  place. 
There  was  a sugar  place 

Q.  Is  it  a good  port? — A.  Rais  is  the  only  one  down  that  coast. 

Q.  Isn’t  there  a deep  river  at  Escalanta? — A.  I don’t  know. 

Q.  It  is  very  deep  after  you  get  into  it. — A.  It  is  a very  short  stream, 
I think;  more- like  a pool.  Dumaguate,  if  it  could  only  be  improved, 
has  a nice  harbor. 

Q.  Well,  those  are  the  chief  places  that  you  think  of  ? — A.  Yes; 
now.  Two  of  them  I do  not  think  are  feasible;  they  are  too  roekv. 
That  has  a river  which  is  deep.  Then  you  can  go  up  the  Cagayan 
River  quite  a distance  in  launches. 

Q.  You  spoke  of  the  relative  merits  of  Australian  and  Japanese 
coals.  Have  3Tou  had  any  experience  in  the  burning  of  Philippine 
coals  and  lignites  in  your  steamers? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  what  the  result  of  it  was? — A.  Compared  to 
$127  expense  in  one  of  our  steamers  on  getting  our  coal  down  here  at 
the  Cebu  mines,'  $85  about — it  was  about  $85  to  $125,  taking  the  dol- 
lar value  burned  in  one  day,  but  the  burnings  were  much  quicker; 
there  was  much  more  consumption  of  it.  The  Cebu  coal  leaves  a clean 
white  ash,  and  it  burns  much  quicker  than  the  Australian.  We  get  it 
at  $6.25  a ton,  Mexican,  down  at  our  mines. 

Q.  That  means  increased  work  for  the  firemen;  they  have  to  shovel 
more  of  it? — A.  Yes;  but  taking  the  day’s  work,  it  is  an  economy  for 
us  to  use  it. 

Q.  Is  it  a good  coal  for  steam  making? — A.  Yes;  the  coal  is  all  sur- 
face coal  so  far;  they  haven’t  got  down  to  the  good  coal  yet.  It  is 


304 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


very  inflammable;  very  inflammable,  indeed.  They  have  the  bunkers 
alongside  the  boiler  instead  of  forward  ship,  and  it  is  apt  to  catch  fire. 

Q.  It  has  been  said  that  all  of  these  coals  out  here  have  so  much 
sulphur  in  them  that  they  injure  the  grates? — A.  Well,  firebars  are 
not  so  expensive.  Our  engineers  never  reported  against  that.  Our 
superintendent  told  us  that  the  only  thing  the  engineers  complained 
of  was  having  more  work  with  it.  They  have  never  objected  to  it  on 
the  basis  of  injuring  the  grates. 

Q.  Have  you  ever  known  of  any  experiments? — A.  My  uncle,  by 
marriage,  has  coal  down  in  Masbate,  and  he  used  to  use  that  coal  in 
his  own  steamers,  and  then  he  had  an  analysis  made  of  that  coal  here. 
I think  I have  a copy  of  it  in  the  office. 

Q.  Will  you  be  willing  to  allow  us  to  see  it  along  with  the  other 
papers? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Has  a practical  test  been  made  of  the  mines  in  southern  Min- 
doro?— A.  les;  that  is  where  my  mines  are.  We  did  not  dig  down; 
we  dug  out  right  from  the  top — the  surface. 

Q.  It  is  better  than  the  Cebu  coal,  then  ? — A.  It  seems  to  me  to  be  a 
better  coal.  We  used  it  in  our  steamer  Balinao , and  it  gave  a very 
good  result  as  compared  with  Cebu  coal.  It  was  fully  equal  to  it. 
The  engineer  said  he  liked  the  result  of  it.  It  was  a brighter  coal. 

Q.  Are  you  making  any  plans  looking  to  the  development  of  those 
mines? — A.  Yes;  as  soon  as  we  can  get  things  going,  because  Balloca 
is  a very  good  little  harbor  in  Mindoro;  only  18  hours  away  from  here. 
It  is  the  best  situated  of  the  towns,  but  there  is  a little  fever  there.  It 
is  mountainous,  and  from  the  port  of  Balloca  you  go  upstream  about 
5 or  6 kilometers.  This  stream  is  navigable  for  these  small  cascos,  or 
even  for  very  light-draft  steam  launches;  that  is,  between  the  moun- 
tains. The  mountains  are  right  there,  with  high  elevation  of  the  coast, 
until  the  stream  disappears  in  the  foot  of  the  mountains,  and  you  have 
scenery  on  each  side  all  the  way  up  there.  It  is  quite  a healthy  place, 
except  so  far  as  the  natives  are  concerned. 

Q.  What  was  the  range  of  this  scene? — A.  One  was  59  centimeters 
and  another  was  35. 

Q.  Has  an  analysis  been  made  of  that  Mindoro  coal? — A.  No;  I 
have  n't  had  it  analyzed.  I have  samples  in  the  office  of  the  Mindoro 
coal,  the  soft  coal.  In  Mindoro  and  in  Cagayan  de  Misamis  they  have 
very  good  coal,  and  then  there  is  Batangas  coal  and  Sulat  coal;  and 
there  is  coal  up  here  in  Morong,  which  is  up  by  the  lake  there — Tanay. 

Q.  Have  you  given  any  consideration  to  the  question  of  railroads  ? — 
A.  Yes;  I have.  Colonel  Denbv. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  briefly  the  ideas  you  have  as  to  the  opening  of 
railroads  in  this  country? — A.  I think,  in  a general  sense,  they  ought 
to  be  opened  in  every  place  they  can;  but  if  the  expensive  system  on 
which  the  Manila-Dagupan  road  was  built  is  to  be  followed  it  would 
be  better  not  to  subsidize  the  railroads,  but  to  start  them  as  they  are 
started  in  Canada,  building  them  well  enough  for  public  safety,  but 
allowing  them  to  construct  a cheap-built  road,  and  then  it  would  grow 
up  on  account  of  competition  in  the  effort  to  get  trade.  I should  think 
one  of  the  first  roads,  and  the  most  necessary,  would  be  from  here  to 
Batangas.  From  here  to  Batangas  is  about  TO  miles.  They  have  a 
plan  made  of  that:  Mr.  Higgins  has  that. 

Q.  That  is  in  Ilocos? — A.  No;  that  is  around  the  corner  from  the 
entrance  to  the  bay.  And  then  as  to  this  Dagupan  railway,  there  is 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


305 


no  reason  why  that  should  not  bo  extended  on  to  San  Fernando  in  La 
Union.  That  is  the  most  important  town  in  the  north  of  the  prov- 
ince— a seaport. 

Q.  A good  port? — A.  No,  not  such  a good  port  now,  but  it  would 
be  if  the  railway  could  be  continued. 

Q.  How  far  would  that  be  from  Dagupan? — A.  Overdo  miles;  I 
am  not  quite  sure  of  the  distance. 

Q.  You  think  that  is  a pressing  need,  do  you? — A.  I think  every- 
body is  very  anxious  to  have  a sanitarium  up  at  Benguet.  San  Fer- 
nando is  the  nearest  place  to  Benguet.  Another  kind  of  railway  could 
l)e  made  to  Benguet,  which  would  be  in  the  first  place  a very  valuable 
location  for  a hospital  for  troops  and  people.  Instead  of  having  to 
go  home  they  would  be  able  to  rejuvenate  up  there. 

Q.  Tell  us  something  about  Benguet. — A.  Benguet  is  the  healthiest 
place  in  the  Philippine  Islands;  it  is  mountainous,  very  high.  I haven’t 
been  up  there  myself,  but  I think  it  is  about  5,000  feet  above  the  sea 
level.  It  is  a place  with  a climate  something  like  at  home;  they  have 
pine  forests  up  there,  and  the  temperature  goes  down  to  a very  low 
degree.  I have  the  maximum  and  the  minimum  temperatures. 

Q.  Commercially,  what  effect  would  that  road  have? — A.  Com- 
mercially, the}’  have  gold  fields  up  there : they  use  a trying-pan  for 
the  gold.  They  have  mines,  and  tobacco  is  grown  up  there  in  fail- 
quantities  around  about  San  Fernando,  in  the  Benguet  district,  and 
beautiful  potatoes  come  from  there.  It  would  increase  their  use  if  we 
had  an  easy  transport  to  bring  them  down.  Of  course,  commercially 
it  would  not  be  so  important  as  the  other  districts. 

Q.  What  other  lines  would  you  suggest? — A.  A line  could  be  laid 
through  the  valley  of  Cagayan,  which  is  pretty  level  to  Aparri.  This 
valley  commences  on  the  other  side  of  the  cordillera,  which  is  over 
here  by  Bayombong  and  Mo  ban.  and  it  reaches  right  through — well, 
it  does  not  begin  at  Moban,  I mean  these  cordilleras,  they  cut  off 
Moban.  It  begins  at  Bagabag  and  runs  to  the  north,  and  if  the  rail- 
road could  possibly  run  over  the  mountains  to  connect  with  this  other 
line  at  San  Fernando  then  it  would  be  a beautiful  line. 

Q,  Would  there  be  coal  mines  in  that  region? — A.  Yes,  all  through 
the  islands  there  is  coal,  and  coal  mines  up  this  side  of  the  mountain. 

Q.  Are  the  gold  mines  worked? — A.  In  a sort  of  desultory  way, 
but  not  well.  The  native  has  worked  them  with  a pan,  and  gets  12^ 
cents  a day  for  each  working.  Professor  Ashburn  came  out  here 
several  years  ago  and  condemned  a whole  lot  of  mines,  but  I think  his 
condemnation  can  not  be  trusted  altogether,  for  he  was  too  short  a 
time  here  to  give  them  a fair  trial,  and  the  shafts  he  went  into  were 
not  properly  prepared;  they  were  not  sunk  far  enough. 

Q.  What  other  lines  would  you  recommend? — A.  I think  the  next 
important  line  would  be  in  Iloilo,  to  run  through  Panay.  I have  in 
the  house  a translation  in  English  of  a projected  railway  which  we 
wanted  to  start  from  Iloilo  to  Bantayan;  that  is,  through  the  most 
populated  part  of  Panay. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  length  of  that  road? — A.  It  would  not  be  a 
big  one.  It  was  just  to  get  a start.  The  idea  was  to  carry  it  on 
afterwards  to  Capiz.  Negros,  I think,  is  too  mountainous,  except  for 
a coast  line, 
p c 


20 


306 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


By  Professor  Worcester  : 

Q.  The  best  towns  are  always  on  the  coast? — A.  Yes.  For  sugar, 
Negros  is  a very  important  island.  It  produces  about  3,000,000  piculs 
a year  of  sugar,  besides  cattle.  In  Cebu  you  could  always  have  a 
coast  line,  and  Cebu  is  the  most  thickly  populated  island  in  the  whole 
Philippines. 

By  Colonel  Denby  : 

Q.  1 don’t  want  to  detain  you,  but  if  you  have  any  views  on 
currency  and  finance  we  would  be  very  glad  to  get  your  views  on 
those  subjects,  and  to  know  what  you  think  about  going  on  a gold 
basis. — A.  I think  it  would  be  a great  mistake. 

Q.  You  have  already  stated,  Mr.  McLeod,  that  you  had  been  in 
business  here  for  twenty -three  years. — A.  Nineteen  years. 

Q.  And,  of  course,  you  are  familiar  with  the  system  of  currency 
here?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Have  you  made  any  study  of  the  question? — A.  Yes;  I made  a 
study  of  it.  I was  on  the  commission  appointed  for  a general  study 
of  commerce  and  finance  in  the  Philippines,  and  at  that  time  the  board 
studied  the  question  of  the  sufficiency  of  the  currency,  and  we  con- 
sidered it  a very  good  currency.  Then  they  brought  in  the  Mexican 
dollar,  and  exchange  went  down,  and  they  supplied  the  country,  and 
it  has  never  been  changed  for  the  simple  reason  that,  if  we  had  con- 
tinued here  the  gold  basis,  the  general  producer  would  not  have  been 
able  to  carry  on  his  labor.  The  native  is  just  as  satisfied  with  a silver 
as  with  a gold  currency. 

Q.  That  arises  from  the  fact  that  the  products  of  the A.  He 

can  buy  as  much  for  it. 

Q.  How  about  wages  ? — A.  In  the  towns  they  have  gone  up.  In 
the  agricultural  districts,  where  they  have  sugar,  the  wages  are  about 
87^  cents  a week,  and  besides  that  an  allowance  of  rice.  Sugar  has 
practically  maintained  its  old  prices  on  account  of  the  exchange  going 
down.  If  we  had  the  gold  basis,  the  picul  of  sugar  would  only  have 
aoout  its  present  value,  because  it  would  have  to  compete  with  Cuba 
and  Mauritius  and  Java.  You  see,  the  sugar  crop  here  is  very  small 
as  compared  with  those  other  places;  then  the  hemp  would  have  to 
compete  with  jute  and  New  Zealand  flax  and  other  fibers,  and  hemp 
will  never  go  above  its  value  on  a gold*basis;  it  would  have  to  come 
down.  The  other  article  produced,  tobacco,  is  just  the  same;  that 
would  have  to  compete  with  the  Cuban  crop. 

Q.  What  effect  would  that  have  on  the  laborer? — A.  A very  bad 
effect.  1 mean  your  labor  would  cost  you  so  much  that  j'ou  would 
have  to  pay  very  little  to  the  farmer.  It  would  be  ruination. 

Q.  What  effect  would  it  have  on  business  and  commerce? — A.  Very 
bad;  because  if  all  the  estates  were  stopped,  everybody  would  stop  buy- 
ing. The  staples  used  by  the  native  for  food,  like  rice  and  all  those 
things  that  are  found  in  his  own  country,  or  at  least  in  the  East,  where 
the  currency  is  silver,  he  does  not  have  to  pay  so  much  for,  not  twice 
as  much,  as  he  would  have  to  pay  if  the  country  were  on  a gold  basis. 

Q.  Does  the  native  use  many  imported  articles? — A.  He  uses  cloth 
and  such  as  that,  but  clothing  is  the  smallest  part  for  the  native. 

Q.  He  does  not  wear  much  clothing? — A.  No;  you  see  laborers 
dressed  in  these  flour  sacks;  that  is  the  usual  style  of  dress  they  have 
down  in  the  provinces;  they  wear  very  little;  they  buy  cheap  cotton 
stuff. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


807 


Q.  What  effect  would  it  have  on  the  export  trade?  That  is  the 
trade  it  would  affect  most? — A.  It  would  be  very  detrimental  to  the 
export  trade. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  would  be  permanent  or  merely  local — that  bad 
effect  ? — A.  It  might  not  be  permanent.  Of  course,  it  would  certainly 
he  in  the  immediate  future,  and  I think  it'would  be  permanent  for 
fifty  or  sixty  years  at  least.  It  is  so  difficult  to  change  the  native. 
The  native  gets  into  one  rut  and  you  can’t  drag  him  out. 

Q.  He  would  want  as  many  gold  dollars  as  he  now  gets  silver 
dollars? — A.  Exactly.  He  can  not  grasp  the  difference  between  a 
dollar  in  gold  and  a dollar  in  silver.  But  if  instead  of  87£  cents,  you 
were  to  pay  him  43£  cents,  he  would  say,  “No;  there  is  something 
wrong  here.” 

Q.  Were  you  here  under  the  gold  basis? — A.  I was  cashier  of 
McCleod  & Co.,  in  Cebu,  just  before  it  stopped,  in  1880,  and  the  gold 
went  out  of  all  the  country  then;  it  commenced  going  out.  The 
change  was  gradual;  it  was  4,  then  2,  and  as  gold  went  out  it  grad- 
ually fell  until  it  got  to  its  present  value,  2 shillings. 

Q.  That  is  50  cents  of  our  money  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Are  you  familiar  with  the  Japanese  system? — A.  Yes;  they  fixed 
their  basis  on  the  present  value  of  gold  to  silver,  silver  to  gold. 
Well,  if  that  was  done  down  here,  and  you  made  the  American  dollar 
piece  equal  to  your  gold,  and  called  them  $2  pieces,  it  would  come  to 
the  same  thing  actually.  The  value  always  has  been  by  the  gold  basis, 
having  what  we  call  double  values. 

Q.  A ratio  of  about  10  to  1? — A.  Yes;  take  the  pound;  we  always 
consider  the  pound  the  gold  basis,  and  it  would  be  16  to  the  ounce. 

Q.  Now,  the  Mexican  dollar  is  about  equal  to  47  of  our  cents? — A. 
Forty-eight  and  one-half. 

Q.  But  fluctuates  all  the  time? — A.  It  fluctuates  with  supply  and 
demand. 

Q.  It  does  not  cause  any  fluctuation  in  prices? — A.  No.  If  you 
bring  a big  remittance  out  for  the  troops,  the  price  of  gold  goes  down. 
If,  on  the  other  hand,  you  were  to  draw  on  the  bank  for  it,  it  would 
go  the  other  way;  it  is  also  the  same  with  the  shipment  of  produce, 
and  those  fluctuations  could  not  be  helped  in  any  case.  You  see 
exchange  must  exist.  You  can  not  have  an  equal  currency  between 
two  countries.  If  a merchant  in  San  Francisco  owes  a merchant  here 
so  much  money,  and  there  is  so  much  money  in  San  Francisco,  and 
that  merchant  goes  to  the  bank  and  wants  to  get  that  money  there 
from  the  bank,  the  banker  says,  “You  will  have  to  pay  me  to  bring  it 
out,  because  I haven’t  any  money  owing  to  me  there.”  Exchange  can 
not  possibly  be  avoided.  These  fluctuations  are  bound  to  be  through 
all  time. 

Q.  Your  opinion,  then,  is  that  if  we  went  on  a gold  basis  it  would 
be  injurious  to  trade  and  commerce  ? — A.  I think  so. 

Q.  You  think  the  present  prosperity  of  the  silver  basis  would  con- 
tinue?— A.  Yes;  the  only  thing  that  I think  requires  making  over  is 
the  sufficiency  of  the  currency.  There  is  not  sufficient  currency.  For 
instance,  at  one  time  we  were  very  hard  up  for  currency.  It  is  a 
problem  how  to  get  actual  cash  into  circulation.  You  see  we  have  no 
mint,  and  between  wear  and  tear,  and  people  making  the  Mexican 
dollars  into  silver  cups,  and  all  that,  there  is  a tremendous  demand  for 
silver,  and  it  would  require  at  least  $40,000,000. 


308 


REPORT  OB'  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Ilow  would  you  get  that? — A.  If  there  was  a free  importation, 
it  would  come  in.  The  least  difference  in  exchange  between  here  and 
Hongkong  always  brings  it  in. 

Q.  But  there  is  not  a free  entry,  there  is  a tariff  ? — A.  It  is  one  that 
should  not  exist.  Now  is  a good  time  to  stop  it.  The  Manila  dollar 
is  par  now  at  Singapore.  There  may  be  1 per  cent  difference,  and 
it  was  half  a per  cent  the  other  day,  I know.  So  that  while  you  have 
no  mint  here,  the  money  could  be  supplied  by  the  Mexicans,  and  even 
if  the  mint  was  started,  the  same  as  the  Spaniards  did  with  their  half- 
dollar  pieces.  You  could  start  on  the  American  basis  with  the  silver 
as  token 

Q.  How  would  a decimal  currency  do? — A.  Yes,  it  is  far  the  best; 
it  was  practically  decimal  latterly  with  the  Spaniards. 

Q.  Well,  you  would  have  cents  of  the  value  of  one-hundredth  part 
of  a Mexican  dollar? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  But  you  would  not  recommend  any  change  at  all  now? — A.  No; 
1 should  think  it  would  be  very  injurious,  especially  in  the  meantime; 
I should  think  it  would  take  fifty  or  sixty  years  for  the  people  to  get 
accustomed  to  it. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  You  say  about  forty  million  dollars  currency  is  needed  for  the 
business  of  the  islands? — A.  Yes;  for  actual  cash. 

Q.  For  circulating  medium?— A.  Yes.  Because  when  the  sugar  crop 
comes  on  down  to  Negros,  you  have  to  send  down  there  two  or  three 
million  dollars  to  bring  up  the  3,000,000  or  so  piculs;  but  that  money 
will  finally  find  its  way  back.  But  in  the  sugar  season  it  has  got  to  go 
down  there,  and  it  is  about  the  same  thing  with  the  tobacco  crop,  when 
that  is  in;  then  you  have  to  send  money  to  the  tobacco  districts. 
Those  are  the  two  things  that  require  large  quantities  of  money,  and 
there  never  used  to  be  on  hand  as  much  as  was  needed.  The  rice  crop 
fluctuates;  the  hemp  crop  does  not,  it  is  steady  all  the  year  round. 
The  sugar,  coffee,  rice,  and  tobacco  crops  require  at  certain  seasons  of 
the  yea r large  volumes  of  money. 

Q.  If  there  was  8-10,000,000  circulating  medium  here  in  the  islands, 
would  that  quantity  remain  more  or  less  permanently  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Isn’t  there  a tendency  on  the  part  of  the  natives,  on  getting  a 
little  money,  to  put  it  away  and  hoard  it? — A.  That  used  to  be  so  in 
the  old  times  with  gold,  but  not  with  silver.  The  big  men  deposit  in 
banks,  and  the  smaller  men  with  high-class  commercial  houses,  or  with 
the  shopkeepers,  and  those  shopkeepers  circulate  it;  they  deposit  it 
with  the  bigger  houses,  and  the  bigger  houses  deposit  in  the  banks. 

Q.  That  is  what  I wanted  to  find  out,  whether  the  people  understood 
the  value  of  depositing  their  money  with  banks  ? — A.  They  do  now, 
but  you  will  never  find  a native  laborer  who  has  more  than  a dollar  at 
a time.  They  gamble  it  away  and  finally  it  gets  into  circulation. 

Q.  So  eventually  this  currency  gets  into  use  as  a circulating  medium 
here? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  think  there  is  an  opportunity  for  establishing  local  banks 
of  deposit? — A.  It  would  lie  very  good  to  have  savings  banks. 

Q.  Could  you  encourage  the  native  in  the  habit  of  saving  here?— 
A.  I think  so,  if  a fair  interest  was  allowed.  They  would  want  it  at 
particular  times. 

Q.  Would  they  require  that  that  interest  should  be  paid  frequently  ? 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


309 

Wouldn’t  the  fact  that  it  became  secure,  a secure  deposit,  and  that 

they  could  obtain  the  money  at  any  time  they  wanted  it A.  The 

native  thinks  the  money  ought  to  be  earning  something,  and  the 
trouble  is  the}-  place  it  on  loan  with  each  other.  A poor  native  will 
charge  another  native  12i  cents  for  the  use  of  a dollar  for  a week  or  a 
month,  and  sometimes  a dollar  for  the  use  of  a dollar  for  a week  or  a 
month. 

Q.  Would  there  be  any  security  on  the  part  of  the  local  savings 
banks,  or  on  the  part  of  a big  bank  with  local  branches,  in  lending 
money  to  the  natives,  or  would  it  be  very  hazardous? — A.  You  could 
never  lend  money  to  a native  here  unless  you  had  a thorough  guaranty 
in  your  bank. 

Q.  Could  you  upon  land? — A.  Yes;  if  you  are  sure  the  title  is  right. 
It  would  be  a very  good  thing  to  have  a proper  agricultural  bank. 
The  big  vice  in  these  islands  is  to  contract  a debt  and  never  pay  it. 

Q.  Would  it  be  possible  to  secure  good  titles  to  some  of  the  landed 
property? — A.  Yes.  The  trouble  at  present  is  that  all  these  banks 
are  exchange  banks.  The  only  bank  that  lends  money  on  land  is  the 
Espahol-Filipino  Bank,  and  it  is  limited — it  is  limited  to  so  much  in 
Manila  and  so  much  in  Iloilo,  the  only  places  where  they  have  banks; 
and  if  a farmer  has  a bad  crop  and  he  wants  to  raise  money  from  them 
and  the}"  wont  let  him  have  it,  he  has  got  to  go  to  some  money  lender, 
and  he  charges  him  about  18£  per  cent,  and  that  is  about  the  cheapest 
interest,  and  they  charge  often  20  or  25  per  cent,  and  then  force  him 
to  sell  his  goods  or  his  crop  for  cash  under  the  market  price  here;  and 
this  has  been  the  thing  that  has  retarded  very  much  agriculture  in 
these  islands,  and  the  little  men  have  not  been  given  a chance  to  come 
up.  Some  of  the  big  ones  have  been  burdened  in  the  same  way.  And 
so  if  we  had  a first-class  agricultural  bank,  to  assist  within  reasonable 
limits,  it  would  be  a great  benefit.  Men  could  get  improved  machinery 
and  go  to  work  in  a modern  way. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Mr.  McCleod,  will  you  give  us,  briefly,  your  opinion  on  the  Chi- 
nese question?  You  understand  that  in  the  United  States  we  have  an 
exclusion  act  that  keeps  out  the  coolies,  and  does  not  allow  them  to 
return  if  they  go  away  from  the  United  States? — A.  It  is  a very  diffi- 
cult problem.  In  the  old  times  they  gave  free  access  to  Chinese  here; 
then  they  made  a law  that  they  were  to  be  allow'ed  only  as  laborers; 
then  the  Indians  made  such  a fuss  that  they  were  not  allowed  to  go 
into  the  provinces  where  the  natives  objected  to  them.  They  have 
been  employed  here  in  Manila  principally  as  dock  laborers.  Those  in 
the  provinces  all  become  merchants,  and  have  worked  themselves  into 
the  most  influential  places.  They  are  very  useful  as  merchants,  but  1 
think  a limit  ought  to  be  put  on  them. 

Q.  What  class  would  you  admit? — A.  I think  the  laboring  class,  in 
limited  quantities ; so  that  a man  in  a certain  line  of  industry  would 
be  allowed  to  bring  in  so  many  Chinese,  and  they  would  have  to  go  back 
when  he  was  through  with  them. 

Q.  You  mean  the  contract  system? — A.  Yes,  with  regard  to  the 
laborers.  I would  limit  the  number  of  merchants  to  the  present  num- 
ber, and  then  as  so  many  die  I would  admit  so  many  more.  There  is 
quite  a sufficient  number  now  for  intermediate  men,  and  it  is  not  good 
for  them  to  increase,  but  surely  they  are  necessary,  the  ones  that  are 
here. 


310 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  You  think  it  is  necessary  to  bring  in  laborers? — A.  Yes,  for 
cooly  work  and  servants.  It  is  necessary  to  let  them  in  for  servants. 
Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  WILLIAM  KLINE. 

Manila,  July  18,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denbv,  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr.  Mac  Arthur. 

A illiam  Kune,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
stated: 

By  Colonel  Denbv: 

Q.  Will  you  please  state  your  name,  residence,  and  occupation? — 
A.  William  Kline;  name  of  firm,  New  York  and  Java  Trading  Com- 
pany; Water  street,  New  York,  and  Calle  Anloague,  No.  10,  in 
Manila. 

Q.  What  business  are  you  engaged  in? — A.  Chiefly  railways  and 
machinery. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  resided  in  Manila? — A.  This  last  time  only 
since  the  -tth  of  February. 

Q.  Have  you  given  any  special  attention  to  the  delineation  of  new 
lines  of  railway  in  the  Philippines?-  A.  My  firm  has  applied  for  a 
franchise  from  Manila  to  Bayombong,  through  the  center  of  Luzon 
toward  the  north. 

Q.  You  say  it  is  through  the  center  of  Luzon  ? — A.  Due  north  from 
Manila.  I have  mapped  it  out  here  on  this  map  [hands  map  to  Colo- 
nel Denbv].  It  is  the  line  due  north  from  Manila  to  Bayombong. 

Q.  You  say  you  have  applied  for  a franchise.  To  whom  have  you 
applied? — A.  My  partner  in  New  York  was  in  Washington  about  a 
month  ago  and  applied  for  a franchise. 

Q.  Did  he  specify  the  particular  line? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  will  you  tell  us  what  that  line  is,  where  it  commences,  and 
where  it  ends? — A.  Manila  to  Bayombong.  The  present  line  is  from 
Manila  to  Dagupan,  and  this  line  is  from  Manila  to  Bayombong — it  is 
the  marked  route  on  the  map. 

Q.  Bayombong  is  in  what  province? — A.  Nueva  Ecija.  The  line  is 
to  run  as  far  as  Bacolor,  very  likely  parallel  with  the  old  line. 

Q.  What  is  the  length  of  that  line,  Mr.  Kline? — -A.  A little  over 
200  miles. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  do  you  know  about  the  country  along  the  line,  Mr.  Kline  ? — 
A.  It  is  very  difficult  to  give  definite  information.  The  first  thing  that 
will  have  to  be  done  is,  as  soon  as  we  get  the  franchise,  to  get  a staff 
of  engineers  from  the  States  and  have  it  surveyed. 

Q.  Your  survey  has  not  been  made  as  yet?— A.  No  definite  survey; 
it  is  only  a globe  trotter’s  survey  or  an  amateur  survey;  there  has  never 
been  a track  of  railway  surveyed  on  that  line. 

Q.  Who  has  been  over  the  ground? — A.  Old  residents  here;  many 
men  who  went  up  shooting  and  that  sort  of  thing,  but  nobody  went 
over  it  with  instruments;  it  has  never  been  surveyed. 

Q.  Are  there  any  particular  engineering  difficulties  in  the  way? — 
A.  No. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


311 


Q.  Hard  grades  or  anything  of  that  sort? — A.  After  passing  Caba- 
natuan  it  would  not  be  very  difficult. 

Q.  Is  the  country  under  cultivation  at  the  present  time  on  the  route 
you  go  through  ? — A.  Part  of  it. 

Q.  What  with? — A.  Sugar. 

Q.  And  rice? — A.  Yes;  all  the  way  along.  I wish  to  make  these 
latter  statements  with  a good  deal  of  reservation,  for  I have  only  to 
repeat  what  I know  from  hearsay. 

Q.  Would  you  be  opening  up  country  that  had  been  under  cultiva- 
tion before,  or  would  you  be  opening  up  new  country  ? — A.  After 
Cabanatuan  there  is  a great  deal  of  new  country. 

Q.  You  know  that  it  is  said  that  this  Manila-Dagupan  railroad 
doubled  tin'  rice  crop  in  these  Islands,  that  it  increased  100  per  cent 
after  this  line  was  established,  because  new  land  was  cultivated;  the 
land  was  good  for  raising  rice  before,  but  there  were  no  means  of 
exporting  the  crop  in  the  old  days. — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Sugar  and  rice,  then,  you  think,  are  the  principal  things  up  there 
now? — A.  Yes;  it  goes  without  saying  that  eventually  this  line  will 
follow  down  to  Aparri  along  the  old  river  valley;  that  is  the  thing  I 
have  ultimately  in  view,  but  that  is  too  much  of  a line  to  talk  about 
now. 

Q.  How  would  it  lie  to  unite  these  two  lines?  There  is  a pretty 
hard  spot  in  there  between  them,  isn’t  there? — A.  At  present  it  is 
impossible  to  get  any  definite  information  of  what  has  been  done  in 
Washington.  Personally  I am  inclined  to  oppose  no  existing  line,  for 
I do  not  think  it  is  conducive  to  the  good  of  any  railway  scheme  that 
would  be  permitted  here,  to  oppose  a line  already  existing,  not  only 
for  purely  commercial  reasons,  such  as  opposition  in  the  floating  of 
the  company  and  the  taking  of  its  stock,  but  I also  think  that  by  com- 
petition the  price  of  labor,  the  native  labor,  necessary  for  tin'  building 
of  a railway  here  would  very  easily  be  raised  in  an  undue  proportion. 
The  natives  would  avail  themselves  of  anything  of  that  kind.  When 
two  men  are  competing  the  price  will  go  up  nearly  double. 

Q.  You  don't  understand  what  I wish  to  get  at.  I was  thinking  of 
the  eventual  union  of  these  two  lines,  one  from  Manila  running  south 
and  one  from  Manila  northward.  There  would  be  no  reason  to  com- 
pete, but  1 believe  that  there  is  a difficult  country  in  there. — A. 
Between  Bayombong  and  Bagota  there  seems  to  be  a swamp  that  is 
difficult  to  cross,  but  I don't  know;  I wouldn’t  like  to  say  that  because 
I can  only  go  by  what  people  have  told  me  who  have  been  up  there. 
I have  not  been  there  myself.  You  know  how  difficult  it  is  here  to 
get  definite  information  about  that  country;  one  has  to  go  by  what 
people  say  and  one  does  not  know  what  authority  they  have  to  say  so. 

Q.  Is  that  the  only  thing  you  have  in  mind  at  present  in  the  shape 
of  roads? — -A.  Railways,  yes. 

Q.  Is  that  the  best  line,  Mr.  Kline? — A.  In  my  opinion  it  is  the 
best  line,  and  before  fixing  on  that  line  I consulted  as  much  as  pos- 
sible the  military  authorities  here,  and  I understood  from  them  that 
from  a strategic  point  of  view  it  would  be  a very  important  line.  I 
had  a long  conversation  with  General  Hughes  on  the  subject. 

Q.  Are  you  interested  in  anything  else  in  steam  railways,  electric 
trams,  and  things  of  that  sort  ? — A.  Yes,  I am  interested  in  electric  and 
in  steam  plants. 

Q.  Have  you  any  plans  in  regard  to  anything  of  that  kind? — A.  No, 


312 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


sir;  not  that  1 could  name.  1 mean  I could  not  say.  1 would  like  to 
have  a line  from  any  given  point,  except  that  1 think  that  Manila  city 
or  Manila  suburbs  is  the  spot  on  which  an  electric  line  or  a steam 
plant  ought  to  be  got  up. 

Q.  Do  you  know  the  status  of  the  franchise  of  this  street  railway 
company  that  is  here? — A.  No,  sir;  1 have  not  been  able  to  get  at  it. 
All  I could  hear  is  that  the  shares  are  held  in  Madrid.  I can  not  get 
any  information  as  to  how  the  land  lies. 

Q.  It  is  perfectly  evident  that  the  transportation  facilities  are  utterly 
inadequate  at  the  present  time. — A.  Certainly. 

Q.  Have  you  made  up  your  mind  at  all  what  gauge  you  woidd  use  ? — 
A.  Yes.  I do  not  believe  in  breaking  gauges,  and  I think  that,  as 
the  Manila-Dagupan  is  3 feet  6,  and  as  a great  many  of  the  Australian, 
Indian,  Bornean,  and  Java  roads  are  of  that  gauge,  3 feet  (1,  it  is  a 
very  good  gauge.  But  even  if  I were  not  so  convinced  about  the 
advisability  of  3.6,  1 think  the  fact  that  the  Manila-Dagupan  has  3.6, 
and  the  possibility  of  using  a great  terminus  or  some  such  arrangement, 
would  be  alone  a weighty  argument  in  favor  of  3.6.  I suppose  you 
have  seen  what  a long-  discussion  they  are  having  in  England  now  about 
the  difficulty  of  breaking  gauges?  It  raises  a fearful  lot  of  compli- 
cation. 

Q.  Where  would  your  rolling  stock  and  rails  come  from  ? — A.  From 
the  United  States,  entirely. 

Q.  Have  you  any  idea  at  all  of  how  long  it  would  take  to  build  a line 
of  railroad  over  the  route  you  have  indicated  there? — A.  No. 

Q.  Have  you  any  estimate  of  the  cost  per  mile  of  building  it?— A. 
None  that  1 would  care  to  put  my  name  to,  because  it  is  too  much 
guesswork. 

Q.  But  you  think  that  there  is  no  need  of  such  heavy  expenses  as 
were  incurred  in  the  building  of  the  Manila-Dagupan  road? — A.  I 
think,  owing  to  a great  many  petty  detail  regulations  of  the  Spanish 
Government  that  had  to  be  abided  by,  that  the  Manila-Dagupan  Bail- 
road  cost  much  more  than  it  could  be  built  for  now. 

Q.  It  seems  to  me  that  this  was  a very  expensive  road  for  a narrow- 
gauge  road? — A.  Yes;  it  cost  about  £12.000  sterling  a mile. 

Q.  You  don’t  know  anything  about  the  status  of  your  request  for  a 
franchise  ? — A.  I expect  a telegram  almost  daily. 

Q.  When  would  you  commence  operations,  Mr.  Kline  ? — A.  As  soon 
as  we  got  the  franchise  we  would  send  our  people  to  start  surveying 
the  place. 

Q.  Would  you  start  before  peace  was  declared? — A.  If  we  were 
allowed  to.  Between  this  and  San  Isidro  one  can  work  quite  peaceably 
enough. 

Q.  Why  do  you  select  this  route? — A.  Because  1 believe  it  is  the 
future  great  line  of  Luzon. 

Q.  You  think  it  has  commercial  advantages? — A.  Commercial  advan- 
tages. as  well  as  of  great  Government  importance. 

Q.  Have  you  contemplated  at  all  the  building  of  a line  south? — A.. 
A southern  line? 

Q.  Yes.— A.  No;  for  two  reasons.  One  is  that  I believe  that 
Manila  and  Batangas  have  too  heavy  a competition  in  the  waterways — 
the  cheaper  water  rates — and  I know  that  other  people  have  been  after 
it.  This  line  has  been  surveyed  twice  under  Spanish  law.  One  has 
only  got  to  look  at  the  map  to  see  what  commercial  difficulties  the  line 
would  labor  under. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


813 


Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  contemplate  building  this  line  that  you  have 
mentioned? — A.  Yes;  Manila-Batangas  is  a well-known  line. 

Q.  You  speak  of  it  as  the  southern  line  ? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  contemplate  building  vour  line  ? — A.  Not  that 
I know  of;  there  is  no  record  of  it. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  H.  L.  HIGGINS. 

Manila,  July  19,  1899. 

Present,  Colonel  Denby,  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr.  MacArthur. 

Horace  Loxgwood  Higgins,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the 
Commissioners,  stated: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Mr.  Higgins,  will  you  please  give  us  your  name,  residence,  and 
occupation? — A.  Horace  Longwood  Higgins;  my  residence  at  present 
is  in  Sampaloc,  Manila;  occupation,  engineer  and  general  manager  of 
the  railway  company. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  in  Manila? — A.  Since  1887. 

Q.  You  are  the  head  of  the  only  line  of  railroad  in  the  Islands  ? A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  is  its  length.  Mr.  Higgins? — A.  One  hundred  and  twenty- 
two  miles. 

Q.  Where  does  it  run ? — A.  From  Manila  to  Dagupan. 

Q.  One  hundred  and  twenty-two  miles  ? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  When  was  the  road  constructed? — A.  We  commenced  construc- 
tion in  1888,  and  it  was  finished,  all  except  the  Rio  Grande  bridge, 
in  1892,  and  we  finished  the  Rio  Grande  bridge  in  1894. 

Q.  Was  the  engineering  difficult  ? — A.  The  bridge  foundations  were 
very  bad;  we  had  a good  deal  of  difficulty  with  them:  all  the  rest  was 
very  easy. 

Q.  Had  you  many  bridges? — A.  YTes;  especially  in  the  first  section. 

Q.  What  was  the  character  of  construction? — A.  First,  what  we 
call  the  esterros  here — the  old  mouths  of  rivers,  the  old  mouth  of  the 
Rio  Grande,  very  likely — the  delta  has  been  gradually  formed.  I think 
all  this  country  is  a delta  formed  by  the  Rio  Grande.  There  is  very 
little  current  in  the  esterros. 

Q.  They  rise,  of  course,  in  the  rains? — A.  They  rise,  of  course,  in 
the  rains,  but  are  pretty  stagnant,  generally. 

Q.  Are  they  affected  by  the  tide? — A.  Yes;  the  rivers  up  to  San 
Fernando  are  affected  by  the  tide  where  the  railway  crosses. 

Q.  What  is  the  character  of  the  country  between  here  and  Dagu- 
pan ? — A.  Well,  it  varies.  On  the  first  section  we  have  mostly  rice  land 
up  as  far  as  Calumpit,  and  then  from  Calumpit  to  San  Fernando 

Q.  What  is  the  distance  to  Calumpit? — A.  Forty-six  kilometers. 

Q.  You  go  by  kilometers,  not  by  miles? — A.  Yres;  we  go  by  the 
metric  system. 

Q.  A kilometer  is  about  two-thirds  of  a mile  ? — A.  We  always  count 
5 kilometers  for  3 miles.  It  is  five- eighths,  I think,  to  be  exact.  From 
Calumpit  to  San  Fernando  we  have  a marshy  piece,  marshy  land,  but 
some  high  land.  It  is  planted  in  sugar  cane.  Then  from  San  Fer- 
nando to  Mabalacat 


314 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  What  is  the  distance  from  here  to  San  Fernando? — A.  Sixty -one 
kilometers. 

Q.  That  is  about  40  miles. — A.  About. 

Q.  And  what  is  the  distance  from  San  Fernando  to  Mabalacat? — A. 
It  is  about  26  kilometers,  87  from  Manila. 

Q.  Now,  this  swamp  land  you  speak  of,  is  that  cultivated? — A.  Part 
of  it;  yes. 

Q.  Is  there  much  of  that? — A.  No;  only  what  we  call  a tion. 

Q.  Then  from  Mabalacat  what  is  the  character  of  the  land? — A.  It 
is  sugar  and  rice  land  chiefly,  and  there  is  a good  deal  of  forest  land  up 
as  far  as  Tarlac. 

Q.  Good  wood? — A.  No;  the  wood  is  very  inferior. 

Q.  What  effect  did  the  railroad  have  on  the  land — on  the  cultivation  ? — 
A.  It  has  brought  up  the  products  of  the  country — of  the  counties 
served — more  than  100  per  cent. 

Q.  And  in  what  things  did  this  development  take  place;  sugar?— A. 
Increase  in  the  rice  product,  increase  in  sugar,  and,  in  general,  increased 
traffic. 

Q.  How  far  was  the  improvement  felt  on  either  side  of  the  route? — 
A.  I should  think  it  extended  about  a zone  of  10  or  15  kilometers 
Ten  kilometers,  I would  say. 

Q.  What  effect  did  it  have  on  the  population? — A.  That  is  veiy 
difficult  to  say.  I do  not  know. 

Q.  Are  there  towns  along  through  that  section? — A.  Yes;  we  have 
several  very  important  ones.  Malolos  is  a rather  important  one,  and 
San  Fernando  is  another. 

Q.  And  the  population  has  increased? — A.  That  I can  not  tell  you, 
because  there  has  been  no  census  taken.  I have  the  population  of  each 
of  these  villages,  but  I think  it  is  from  a census  made  in  1884. 

Q.  Has  the  road  been  a pecuniary  success? — A.  No. 

Q.  To  what  do  you  ascribe  that  ? — A.  First,  the  cost  of  construction 
and  then  the  fall  of  exchange. 

Q.  Are  you  at  liberty  to  state  what  the  cost  of  construction  was? — 
A.  Our  capital  is  £1,700,000. 

Q.  And  it  cost  that  much? — A.  That  I do  not  know. 

Q.  How  much  a mile  did  it  cost? — A.  Well,  the  length  multiplied 
by  the  cost  makes  it  about  £12,000  per  mile,  taking  the  capital  for 
which  we  are  responsible, 

Q.  Isn’t  that  rather  excessive  for  an  ordinary  railroad? — A.  Very 
costly,  indeed. 

Q.  And  to  what  do  you  ascribe  the  excessive  cost? — A.  Wlmt  do 
you  mean? 

Q.  I mean  do  you  ascribe  it  to  want  of  labor? — A.  No;  it  is  a pio- 
neer line.  Difficulties  were  put  in  the  way  of  construction  by  the 
Spanish  Government,  and  there  were  difficulties  in  raising  the  capital 
to  build  the  line. 

Q.  Is  this  company  chartered  by  the  Spanish  Government? — A.  It 
is  a Spanish  concession,  but  an  English  company. 

Q.  If  the  country  were  prosperous,  is  it  your  opinion  that  the  road 
would  be  prosperous? — A.  I think  so.  I think  the  little  road  is  all 
very  good. 

Q.  You  think  the  road  greatly  tends  to  develop  the  prosperity  of  the 
country? — A.  Oh,  yes;  undoubtedly. 

Q.  What  kind  of  a place — what  kind  of  a port — is  Dagupan? — A. 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


815 


Q.  What  river  runs  in  there? — A.  The  Rio  Agno. 

Q.  What  size  ships  can  cross  the  bar  ? — A.  I think  steamers  drawing 
about  12  feet  can  cross  it;  I forget  exactly.  The  old  Camaguin  used 
to  go  in  there. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  how  far  the  bar  lays  out  from  the  town? — A. 
About  2 miles. 

Q.  Then  ships  would  have  to  lay  off  2 miles  ? — A.  The  town  is  on 
the  mouth  of  the  river.  The  town  is  in  very  close  to  the  mouth  of  the 
river;  in  fact,  it  is  on  the  mouth  of  tin*  river. 

Q.  What  kind  of  a town  is  it  as  to  population  ? — A.  A very 
wretched,  dirty  little  place;  very  dirty. 

Q.  Have  you  ever  had  any  intention  of  improving  it  or  of  improving 
the  harbor? — A.  No,  we  have  not.  There  was  a scheme  for  improve- 
ments under  the  Spanish  Government. 

Q.  If  it  were  improved,  what  effect  would  it  have  on  the  railroad? — 
A.  I should  think  it  would  have  a bad  effect  on  the  railroad,  facili- 
tating water  competition,  and  I think  produce  would  go  out  there. 

Q.  What  suggestion,  Mr.  Higgins,  can  you  make  to  us  as  to  running 
other  lines  of  railroad,  whether  connected  with  your  own  line  or  not? — 
A.  How  do  you  mean,  the  best  sites  for  new  lines? 

Q.  I mean  whether  }tou  have  in  your  mind  now  a line  of  railroad 
that  you  think  woidd  be  desirable  if  constructed  for  the  general  good 
of  the  country? — A.  Yes,  I have. 

Q.  Please  tell  us. — A.  The  Batangas  line  is  one — that  is,  to  the  south. 

Q.  Where  would  that  join  vour  line  ? — A.  They  would  join  our  line 
in  our  central  stations.  We  could  cause  the  road  to  run  to  Pasig,  which 
is  just  south  of  San  Pedro  Macati. 

Q.  How  far  from  Manila  would  that  be? — A.  Not  more  than  about 
3 or  I kilometers. 

Q.  How  far  is  Bantangas  from  here? — A.  I think  it  is  100  kilome- 
ters from  the  terminus. 

Q.  Do  you  fix  upon  that  as  the  best  line  that  now  occurs  to  you  ? — - 
A.  One.  Well,  it  is  one  of  the  most  necessary  lines. 

Q.  Why? — A.  Because  of  its  strategic  position.  It  gives  communi- 
cation with  all  these  rich  provinces,  and  Bantangas  and  Lipi  are  the 
rich  provinces. 

Q.  What  do  they  raise  down  there  particularly? — A.  Sugar  is  the 
largest  export  agricultural  product. 

Q.  Is  that  the  only  line  south  that  you  think  of  ? — A.  A continua- 
tion of  the  coast  route  down  to  the  south  of  the  island. 

Q.  That  is  to  a place  called  Aparri? — A.  No;  that  is  in  the  north, 
sir. 

Q.  IV hat  place  is  there  in  the  south? — A.  Have  you  a map?  Of 
course,  a line  to  Camarines  would  be  an  important  line  and  would  give 
communication  with  all  those  southern  places. 

Q.  (Professor  Worcester.)  Could  a line  down  through  there  com- 
pete with  water  transportation,  Mr.  Higgins? — A.  It  could  if  it  was 
far  enough  off  the  coast;  it  could  not  down  here;  but  in  the  center  of 
the  province  I think  it  could,  in  the  transportation  of  hemp.  Hemp 
is  the  Araluable  product  and  it  would  stand  a good  rate. 

Q.  Would  such  a line  as  that,  Mr.  Higgins,  be  as  expensive  as  your 
line  was? — A.  1 don’t  think  so. 

Q.  You  know  the  character  of  the  country? — A.  I have  been  to 
Bantangas  and  up  as  far  as  here.  This  country  and  Cavite  are  very 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


31(5 

easy  up  as  far  as  Calamba.  Then  from  Calamba  up  to  Batangas 
you  have  sharp  grading,  and  grades  of  1 and  2 per  cent  from  here 
down.  From  Calamba  down  to  Batangas  there  are  heavy  gradings 
ranging  both  ways. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  such  a line  could  be  built  for  by  the  mile? — 
A.  With  rolling  stock  or  without  rolling  stock  ? Do  you  mean  just  the 
construction  of  the  line? 

Q.  Put  it  both  Mays,  if  you  please. — A.  I should  think  that  line 
ought  to  be  constructed  for  about  £8,000  per  mile  or  less;  £8,000  per 
mile,  including  rolling  stock. 

Q.  Is  there  any  other  line  north  that  suggests  itself  to  you? — A. 
Yes,  sir;  there  is  a line  up  here,  up  this  coast,  sir. 

Q.  Up  to  what  ? — A.  Up  the  western  coast. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Through  Ilocos? — A.  Through  Ilocos,  yes. 

Q.  Along  the  coast? — A.  Along  the  coast;  it  would  have  to  go  near 
the  coast,  because  it  is  very  mountainous  land  right  up  to  the  coast. 

Q.  That  northern  line  would  connect  with  you,  wouldn't  it  ? A. 
Yes,  at  Dagupan. 

Q.  What  about  Benguet?  We  have  heard  a good  deal  about  Ben- 
guet;  would  you  have  a line  to  there  ? — A.  We  would  have  a northern 
line  to  a place  called  Aringay  or  Banang.  There  are  two  routes. 
That  would  be  a line  of  about  40  kilometers. 

Q.  And  what  would  be  the  advantages  of  a line  to  Benguet? — A.  For 
a health  resort  chiefly.  The  place  of  Benguet  is  about  four  thousand 
and  odd  feet  above  the  sea  and  can  be  reached  by  the  common  route. 
I visited  it  the  other  day  when  I was  up  there. 

Q.  And  what  is  the  temperature? — A.  The  temperature  is  very  low; 
it  is  like  the  south  of  Europe;  you  want  to  cover  yourself  well  at 
night. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  that  that  is  the  temperature  on  the  top  of  the 
hill? — A.  No;  either  in  Trinidad  or  Baguio. 

Q.  About  the  temperature  of  the  temperate  zone? — A.  Baguio  is 
the  place  where  the  Spanish  Government  were  about  to  put  up  a sani- 
tarium for  their  soldiers.  In  fact,  they  had  selected  the  site. 

Q.  Did  they  contemplate  building  a road? — A.  Yes.  They  have 
most  wonderful  views  there.  In  fact,  I have  copies  of  the  Spanish 
plans  here. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  that  line  that  Mr.  Kline  told  us  about?  Do 
you  know  about  the  line  that  the  New  York  and  Java  Trading  Com- 
pany has  been  talking  about? — A.  I know  a line  that  Mr.  Kline  has 
been  talking  about,  up  on  the  west  side  of  the  central  valley:  that 
is  a very  important  line,  too. 

Q.  What  makes  it  important? — A.  It  taps  the  great  rice  district 
here  from  San  Miguel  to  Calambatan;  it  is  a big  rice  district.  That  is 
the  complement  of  our  present  line. 

Q.  It  would  come  to  Manila? — A.  Yes;  and  join  our  line  about 
Baguio. 

Q.  And  from  there  run  over  your  line? — A.  Yes;  and  run  over  our 
line. 

Q.  Mr.  Higgins,  what  do  you  find  as  to  the  transportation  of  freight; 
is  that  your  most  important  business,  or  is  it  passenger? — A.  Our 
passenger  traffic  has  been  larger  than  our  freight  traffic  up  to  date. 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


317 


Q.  But  the  freight,  traffic  has  shown  a steady  increase  every  year? — 
A.  1 think  you  will  find  this:  1 think  it  comes  to  about  the  value  of 
$40,000  a year  on  the  average. 

Q.  You  mean  Mexican  dollars  ? — A.  Yes. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  It  has  increased? — A.  Yes;  a steady  increase.  One  year  a bit 
more  and  another  a bit  less. 

Q.  You  bring  down  the  products  of  the  country  ? — A.  Yes;  sugar  and 
rice  are  the  principal. 

Q.  And  hemp? — A.  No  hemp;  no. 

Q.  Vegetables? — A.  No;  up  to  now  there  has  been  no  demand  for 
vegetables. 

Q.  Fruits? — A.  Fruits;  yes,  mangoes.  We  have  a very  big  traffic  in 
mangoes. 

Q.  Lumber  ? — A.  Lumber,  very  little. 

Q.  What  is  the  character  of  the  lumber  generally  in  that  region  ? 

A.  A very  good  class  of  timber,  but  there  are  acres  that  have  all  been 
cut  out,  and  the  remaining  timber  is  of  twenty  or  forty  or  fifty  different 
classes  unknown. 

Q.  You  find  the  people  travel  a great  deal  ? — A.  Y es. 

Q.  More  than  in  other  countries? — A.  \"es;  they  are  very  fond  of 
the  train. 

Q.  Your  rates  arc  very  low? — A.  Y'es. 

Q.  Is  it  simply  for  curiosity,  or  does  it  increase? — A.  It  increases, 
and  the  same  people  go  every  day  nearly;  a man  with  a couple  of 
fowls  and  a basket  will  come  down  here  and  make  just  enough  to  go 
back  again. 

Q.  What  articles  do  you  take  up  the  line  ? — A.  Oh,  general  stores, 
general  living  stores,  like  cloths  of  all  kinds,  petroleum,  and  food 
supplies. 

Q.  And  liquors?— A.  Liquor?  A good  deal  of  wine  goes  up  to  the 
native  section.  Bayon,  they  call  it,  and  it  comes  from  Manila.  We 
take  a tremendous  lot  of  bayon  up.  It  is  made  from  the  betel  nut. 

Q.  Howr  does  your  general  traffic  in  freight  pay,  compared  with 
your  passenger  traffic? — A.  Twenty-five  per  cent. 

Q.  Only  25  per  cent? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  are  the  people  through  that  section  with  regard  to  means, 
competence  ? — A.  Well,  in  Bulacan  there  are  no  rich  people,  very  few. 
The  land  is  priest  land.  There  is  a good  deal  of  priest  land  about 
there.  In  Pampanga  all  the  land  is  owned  by  the  natives,  who  are 
very  rich.  In  Tarlae  the  lands  have  been  opened  up  to  the  railroad. 
In  this  province  the}T  did  not  produce  anything  at  all,  because  the 
transportation  charges  were  too  great,  but  since  the  railroad  has  been 
built  that  province  has  gone  ahead.  In  Pangasinan,  which  is  the  last 
province  we  touch,  they  are  all  small  landowners,  and  very  lazy;  they 
do  not  do  anything;  you  can’t  get  them  to  work.  They  live  on  fish 
and  rice;  they  raise  their  own  rice  and  live  on  what  the}1-  can  get.  In 
Pangasinan  they  are  a bad  lot. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Isn’t  it  generally  true  that  on  the  priest  land  the  people  are  poor, 
and  are  better  off  where  they  have  their  own  land? — A.  All  the  people 
who  work  for  owners  here,  or  what  we  call  the  farm  laborers,  are  more 
or  .less  slaves,  owing  to  the  system  that  they  have  here  of  loaning 
money  on  the  off  seasons. 


318 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Do  they  raise  any  tobacco  along  there?— A.  We  have  some 
tobacco  in  Tarlac.  It  is  increasing — the  tobacco  crop  is  increasing.  It 
is,  however,  very  small.  We  have  tobacco  from  Dagupan;  it  comes 
in  by  sailing  vessel  fron  La  Union. 

Q.  Before  this  attempted  revolution  were  the  people  contented  or 
not? — A.  Oh,  yes. 

Q.  Are  they  a character  of  people  that  will  make  any  trouble  if  the 
Government  treats  them  fairly? — A.  No;  I don't  think  so. 

Q.  Do  they  take  any  interest  in  politics? — A.  The  educated  class 
does.  The  class  I have  been  accustomed  to  deal  with  does  not.  The 
mechanics  and  generally  the  class  of  men  you  would  use  on  the  rail- 
road do  not  take  any  interest  at  all. 

Q.  The  educated  class  talks  a good  deal  about  government  and  all 
that  sort  of  thing? — A.  Yes;  they  are  very  big  talkers  as  a rule. 

Q.  Would  the  people  be  satisfied  with  American  rule — the  body  of 
them? — A.  I think  so.  I think  the}r  would. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  this  scheme  to  control  their  local  affairs  ? — 
A.  It  is  very  hard  to  say,  Colonel  Denby;  I know  less  about  the  Indian 
to-day  than  when  I first  came.  I do  not  know. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  a general  opinion  as  to  their  capacity  for  self- 
government? — A.  I do  not  think  they  have  any  capacity  at  all. 

Q.  What  produced  the  trouble  between  them  and  the  Spanish  Gov- 
ernment; what  was  the  first  cause  of  it;  what  was  said  at  the  time  the 
insurrection  began? — A.  The  insurrection  began  close  up  by  my  house 
in  Caloocan,  and  it  was  all  a put-up  job  by  the  priests.  The  priests 
had  been  warning  the  captain-general  here  that  there  was  a revolu- 
tionary movement  on  foot  for  a long  while,  and  the  captain-general 
would  not  take  any  notice  of  it.  He  said  it  was  all  nonsense.  He 
would  not  take  any  notice  of  it,  and  the  priests  got  up  the.  fight  at 
Caloocan.  That  night  Padre  Gil,  of  Tondo,  went  and  gave  the  cap- 
tain-general  a list  of  men  he  thought  were  implicated,  and  these  men 
were  promptly  arrested,  and  the  other  people,  to  save  their  necks, 
simply  went  into  the  field  and  began  the  revolution.  That  is  what 
began  the  revolution.  There  was  a revolutionary  movement  on  foot, 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  why  the  priests  wanted  to  get  up  this  trouble? — 
A.  I think  the  priests  were  against  the  education  of  the  people;  they 
were  against  the  higher  education  of  the  people.  That  is  a very  diffi- 
cult question,  Mr.  Denby,  a very  complicated  question. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  If  any  new  railroads  were  to  be  built  in  the  islands  would  you 
think  it  necessary  that  they  should  be  built  on  the  same  expensive 
specifications  as  your  road? — A.  Certainly  not. 

Q.  Of  course  a due  regard  for  the  safety  of  traffic  and  of  passengers 
would  be  necessary. — A.  That  would  be  necessary,  but  L would  not 
recommend  anything  like  the  expense  of  money  that  has  been  put  into 
that  line  of  ours.  You  see  we  have  stations  where  they  are  not  needed; 
we  have  expensive  sheds  where  they  are  not  needed;  we  have  all  kinds 
of  buildings,  and  had  all  kinds  of  expenses  in  construction.  This  is 
one  item:  Under  the  plans  we  were  compelled  to  use  concrete  instead 
of  using  lime,  and  all  those  things  ran  the  expenses  of  our  line  up. 

Q.  Why  did  you  do  this? — A.  Because  they  were  insisted  upon  by 
the  Government  engineers;  they  were  requirements  of  the  Government. 

Q.  How  were  your  rates  for  hauling  passengers  and  freight  estab- 
lished ? — A.  By  royal  order. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


819 


Q.  And  were  not  controlled  by  the  company  itself  ? — A.  Not  except 
within  our  maximum  rate  limits.  We  had  permission  to  lower  rates, 
but  we  could  not  raise  them.  Then  the  Government  had  a rate.  Every 
five  years  they  revised  the  rates  and  rescinded  any  rate  that  they  con- 
sidered exorbitant.  The  company  had  no  appeal,  except  that  they 
would  hear  the  company. 

Q.  And  you  charged  a rate  relative  to  the  distance  of  hauling  along 
the  line,  or  was  there  a differential  schedule? — A.  We  only  used  the 
differential  rate  in  connection  with  the  traffic  in  Dagupan,  when  we 
came  into  competition  with  water  transportation;  there  we  lowered  the 
rate  to  get  the  traffic. 

Q.  That  was  not  contrary  to  the  regulations  of  the  royal  order? — 

A.  No. 

Q.  What  is  the  gauge  of  your  road? — A.  Three  feet  six. 

Q.  Why  was  that  gauge  adopted? — A.  It  was  the  gauge  generally 
adopted  and  was  considered  generally  to  be  the  most  suitable  for  these 
islands. 

Q.  Has  your  experience  confirmed  you  in  that  opinion? — A.  Yes;  I 
think  so.  I am  very  well  satisfied  with  the  gauge,  You  can  do  nearly 
as  much  work  on  this  gauge  as  you  can  on  a four  eight  and  a half, 
except  in  the  question  of  speed. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  that  is  a proper  gauge  for  railroads  in  these 
islands? — A.  I think  so.  In  all  the  British  colonies — take  Africa,  take 
Tasmania,  New  Zealand,  where  we  have  extensive  railroad  systems — 
they  are  all  3 feet  0.  Of  course,  the  chief  thing  is  the  first  cost  of 
construction,  to  a great  extent. 

Q.  Is  there  a very  great  saving  in  the  cost  of  construction  of  a nar- 
row gauge  as  compared  with  a broad  gauge? — A.  Yes,  there  is,  on 
curves,  of  course;  and  a less  amount  of  banking  is  necessary  and  a less 
length  of  sleeper.  The  rails  you  can  put  in  pretty  much  the  same;  but, 
of  course,  the  rails  are  lighter,  too. 

Q.  Where  did  your  rolling  stock  come  from?— A.  England;  it  is  all 
English  stock. 

Q.  Your  car  bodies  English  stock,  too? — A.  No;  the  bodies  of  the 
freight  cars  were  built  here.  The  passenger  cars  were  built  in  Eng- 
land, but  we  built  the  bodies  of  our  freight  cars  here,  the  iron  work 
only  coming  from  home. 

Q.  Your  engines  are  English? — A.  Our  engines  are  English ; yes. 

Q.  You  have  never  tested  the  American  locomotive,  then  ? — A.  No. 
I see  in  England  we  are  just  getting  over  a consignment  of  about  10 
engines,  20  for  the  Midland  and  20  for  some  other  line. 

Q.  Aren’t  your  locomotives  here  very  small? — A.  Thirty-two  tons. 
We  ought  to  have  tender  engines;  we  ought  to  have  larger  engines, 
really.  We  want  engines  of  10  or  15  tons. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  With  the  present  communication,  what  is  the  best  way  to  go  up 
to  Benguet,  Mr.  Higgins? — A.  You  mean  at  the  present  time? 

Q.  No;  I mean  suppose  we  get  things  quieted  down? — A.  You  can 
go  up  by  rail  to  Dagupan,  then  in  a steam  launch  up  to  San  Fernando, 
down  the  road  from  San  Fernando  to  Bauog,  either  in  a caromatto  or 
on  horseback  to  Naguilian,  which  is  a great  tobacco  place;  then  you 
can  go  from  there  either  on  horseback  or  on  foot. 

Q.  How  long  ought  the  trip  to  take  under  favorable  circum- 


320 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


stances? — A.  You  can  go  to  San  Fernando  in  one  day  and  go  to 
Trinidad  the  next  day. 

Q.  What  sort  of  a town  is  Trinidad? — A.  A few  houses,  that  is  all. 

Q.  Igorrotes  ?- — A.  Igorrotes. 

Q.  Decent  people  ? — A.  Yes;  quiet  people.  There  is  a Swiss  gen- 
tleman living  up  at  Bauog,  and  one  Englishman,  and  one  German. 

Q.  Are  there  food  supplies  to  be  had  there,  chickens  and  that  sort 
of  thing? — A.  You  can  get  vegetables  and  rice  enough,  and  all  sorts 
of  European  vegetables  grow  in  Bauog;  potatoes  and  such  things. 

Q.  Peas  and  beans? — A.  Anything. 

Q.  Is  there  anyone  in  Manila  who  has  lived  up  there? — A.  Yes;  a 
man  by  the  name  of  Donaldson-Sim. 

Q.  Do  you  know  where  he  is  living? — A.  He  has  his  office  along- 
side Calle  Anloague,  on  the  right-hand  side  as  you  go  in. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  any  temperature  records  have  ever  been 
kept  up  there  continuously,  Mr.  Higgins? — A.  No,  I don’t  think  they 
have.  I can  give  you  temperatures,  maximum  and  minimum  tempera- 
tures. I have  them  in  the  office,  but  I forget  now  what  they  arc. 
The  mercury  goes  down  to  the  freezing  point  at  Bauog. 

Q.  Is  Bauog  higher  than  Trinidad? — A.  About  500  feet  higher. 

Q.  And  the  mountains  run  up  higher  still  ? — A.  Yes,  at  Santo  Tomas 
to  about  7,000  feet — 7,500. 

Q.  Good  water  up  there,  I suppose? — A.  Very  good. 

Q.  Do  they  have  any  fever  up  there? — A.  No,  I didn’t  hear  of  any. 

Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  run  their  road  clear  up  to  Trinidad? — A.  Yes, 
but  it  is 

Q.  Is  it  really  practical  ? — A.  Yes,  it  is  practical  on  horseback  to  go 
there. 

Q.  They  were  not  planning  a railroad? — A.  No,  just  horse  roads. 
You  might  almost  go  in  a trap  up  there.  It  is  rather  difficult  in 
places;  it  is  not  wide  enough.  The  great  difficulty  up  those  hills 
with  a railway  would  be  the  sloping  nature  of  the  hills,  the  tremen- 
dous ranges.  The  soil  isj  made  of  a sort  of  clay  and  gravel  mixed,  the 
whole  place  sometimes  slips  away. 

Q.  Is  there  a place  where  it  would  be  practicable  to  run  straight  up 
on  a cog? — A.  I think  }Tou  could  from  Galiano. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  there  are  rainfall  records  for  that  place  ? — 
A.  No,  I have  no  rainfall  records,  but  it  is  very  heavy.  There  are 
terrible  storms  up  there  sometimes,  and  typhoons.  There  have  been 
two  in  Vigan  since  I have  been  here. 

Q.  Have  you  given  any  consideration  to  railroads  in  the  other 
islands? — A.  There  is  one  line  that  would  be  a very  good  one  down  in 
Negros,  a sugar  line. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Tell  us  about  that.- — A.  I have  never  been  down  there  myself, 
but  I know  about  it,  though;  it  would  bring  in  the  sugar  product. 
The  sugar  is  now  all  transported  in  these  carabao  carts. 

Q.  (Handing  witness  a map  of  Negros.)  Will  you  kindly  point  out 
to  us  on  this  map  where  this  line  should  run?  (The  witness  indicates 
route  of  the  line.) 

Q.  On  the  west  coast  or  the  east  coast? — A.  On  the  west  coast. 

Q.  From  what  point? — A.  I could  send  you  a note  that  would  show 
how  the  line  should  run. 


REPORT  OF  l'HE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


321 


Q.  I would  be  much  obliged  to  you.  That  is  the  only  island  you 
have  thought  of  in  connection  with  a railway? — A.  Yes.  Of  course, 
there  are  many  tramways  that  could  be  built  about  the  islands — light 
lines. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Has  anyone  given  any  consideration  to  the  running  of  lines  by 
electricity,  short  lines?- — A.  No;  except  here  in  Manila,  for  this  horse- 
car  line  ought  to  be  substituted  au  electric  line,  a trolley  line, 
undoubtedly. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  the  status  of  this  street  line  now? — 
A.  No;  I do  not. 

Q.  It  is  a disgrace  to  civilization. — A.  Yes;  it  is.  I think  that  line 
could  be  dropped  on  very  heavily  if  it  was  attempted.  I know  they 
have  got  several  clauses  in  their  concession  that  you  could  pick  them 
up  very  easily  on,  the  same  as  we  have — that  is,  if  you  wished  to 
enforce  the  clauses  of  the  Spanish  concession  yTou  could  easily  do  it. 

By  Colonel ’Denby: 

Q.  If  peace  were  restored  here,  do  you  believe  that  these  islands 
would  prosper? — A.  They  are  one  of  the  richest  places  in  the  East. 

Q.  And  would  be  valuable? — A.  I don’t  know  a thing  that  anybody 
owns  which  is  more  valuable. 

Q.  The  land  is  rich? — A.  The  land  is  rich  and  seems  to  produce  all 
kinds  of  things  without  the  slightest  bother. 

Q.  They  have  never  been  properly  developed  ? — A.  Never. 

Q.  Have  you  anything  else  you  would  like  to  state? — A.  I should 
like  to  add  a word  to  you,  Colonel  Denby,  about  the  labor  question. 

Q.  Well,  will  you  give  us  your  views  on  that  question?  You  don’t 
want  our  views;  we  want  jrours. — A.  It  is  a question  whether  the 
Chinese  are  to  be  admitted  or  not. 

Q.  What  do  yTou  think  of  that? — A.  I myself  do  not  like  it.  Of 
course  it  would  make  a very  considerable  difference  in  drawing  up  an 
estimate  whether  they  are  or  whether  they  are  not. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  your  views  on  the  Chinese  question,  whether 
they  ought  to  be  admitted  or  not,  and  why?  We  have  taken  a good 
deal  of  proof  on  that  subject. — A.  If  the  Chinese  come  in  here  and 
are  allowed  to  trade,  they  will  simply  spoil  everything.  If  admitted 
here  the  same  as  in  Java,  under  the  contract  system  of  three  years, 
and  used  more  or  less  as  beasts  of  burden,  for  coolie  labor,  then  it 
would  be  all  right,  for  contract  work.  It  would  be  all  right  if  they 
could  be  brought  in  here  for  contract  work. 

Q.  And  then  sent  out  when  the  contract  was  complied  with  ? — A.  Yes. 
Because  it  is  just  a question  now  .whether  the  Indian  will  work,  or  if 
he  does  work  whether  he  won't  ask  exorbitant  wages — wages  in  excess 
of  tne  amount  that  his  labor  is  worth. 

Q.  If  there  were  no  Chinese  here  would  the  Filipinos  work? — 
A.  The  Chinese  are  good  workers,  and,  of  course,  if  they  came  here 
the  Filipino  people  would  find  their  bread  was  being  taken  away  from 
them  and  they  would  be  compelled  to  work  for  almost  nothing. 

Q.  You  think  that  there  ought  to  be  a restriction,  at  least  as  to  con- 
tract labor? — A.  I think  so. 

Q.  And  as  to  the  admission  of  merchants? — A.  Yes;  most  decidedly. 
21 


p c 


322 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Most  of  the  commercial  houses  that  you  go  to  of  Chinamen  are  all 
right,  but  I have  seen  Chinamen  in  the  provinces  that  are  not  what 
you  would  call  honest  traders. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  How  was  your  road  built,  by  Chinese  labor? — A.  No;  Indian 
labor.  We  tried  the  Chinese  on  one  section  and  the}"  didn’t  do  good 
work.  They  would  not  work  in  water.  The  Indian  will  work  in  water 
better  than  a Chinaman. 

Q.  Did  you  have  difficulty  with  the  wages  of  your  laborers? — 
A.  No;  our  general  wages  ran  up  to  about  32£  cents  a day,  Mexican. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  you  feed  the  men  in  addition  to  that? — A.  No;  just  pay 
them  at  the  end  of  the  week. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Will  the  Indian  do  as  much  work  as  the  Chinaman  in  the  same 
time? — A.  On  a day  wage  they  will;  on  piece  work  the  Chinaman 
works  like  a slave,  but  put  him  on  day  work  and  he  won't  do  anything. 

Q.  Was  it  because  of  the  possibility  of  getting  Chinese  labor  that 
you  were  able  to  keep  your  Indians  at  work  ? — A.  Oh,  I don't  think  so, 
because  that  was  in  the  eighties  and  early  nineties.  We  had  no  diffi- 
culty about  labor,  except  in  Pangasinan,  where  we  had  5,000  men 
go  out,  and  the  next  day  not  a soul  was  there.  They  wouldn’t  come 
in,  and  we  brought  Tagalos  up,  people  from  this  province,  built  the 
banks  up  with  Tagalos,  and  gave  them  slightly  bigger  wages  for  work- 
ing away  from  here.  Of  course,  the  labor  question  is  very  important 
with  us.  because  we  were  using  entirely  native  labor. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Were  you  able  to  work  throughout  the  year  in  constructing 
your  road? — A.  Yes;  right  through  the  year;  of  course  we  had  a 
good  deal  of  difficulty  in  the  rainy  season,  but  we  got  men  with  suffi- 
cient grit  to  face  the  wet  weather.  There  was  no  reason  why  they 
should  stop. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  The  men  you  employ  now  are  natives? — A.  Yes,  traffic  men. 

Q.  And  native  engineers? — A.  Yes;  our  native  engineers  get  from 
$30  to  $40  a month. 

Q.  And  your  train  gangs? — A.  Are  natives. 

Q.  Can  you  trust  the  natives  at  the  stations  to  hold  the  funds  of  the 
road? — A.  Yes;  they  are  all  right;  but  here,  as  anywhere  else  in  the 
world,  you  will  find  cheating  going  on.  In  England  you  will  find 
swindling  among  the  same  class.  Taking  these  men  all  through,  they 
give  pretty  good  results.  Of  course,  they  will  have  to  be  well  looked 
after. 

Q.  You  have  native  porters? — A.  Yes;  all  of  them.  I like  the 
native.  I think  he  is  a very  good  man  in  that  position.  But  if  you 
give  them  any  administrative  power  they  won't  do.  You  can't  put 
native  inspectors  o ' ; and  you  can't  have  big  gangs  of  natives  under 
natives.  You  must  have  all  your  station  men  under  an  English  in- 
spector, and  you  must  have  all  your  drivers  under  an  English  fore- 
man, and  your  shop  must  be  under  an  English  foreman.  If  you  put 
them  under  a native  foreman  the}"  go  to  pieces. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


323 


Q.  What  is  it,  the  lack  of  administrative  ability,  or  do  they  take 
advantage  of  it  2 — A.  They  take  advantage  of  it,  and  it  generally  ends 
up  by  swindling  if  they  have  any  power.  That  is  the  great  fault  in 
the  character  of  the  native. 

Q.  They  abuse  their  power? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Will  you  briefly  give  us  your  opinion  on  the  financial  question, 
whether  we  ought  to  maintain  a silver  basis  or  not? — A.  A low 
exchange  is  good  for  an  export  country,  and  especially  a producing 
country. 

Q.  Well,  how  is  it  with  the  railroad  ? — A.  Well,  the  railroad  has  got 
to  go  with  the  place.  If  labor  can  be  kept  down  the  way  we  keep  our 
wages  down  on  a silver  basis,  the  same  as  we  are  doing  now,  there  is 
no  reason  why  we  could  not  make  a profit;  but  if  we  have  to  pay  gold 
wages  on  our  line  and  have  our  revenue  in  silver,  that  would  be  another 
thing.  You  will  never  be  able  to  employ  white  labor  here  for  your 
train  gangs  or  engines;  it  is  too  expensive.  I think  the  low  exchange 
is  favorable  to  our  traffic,  Colonel  Denby. 

Q.  There  is  no  doubt  in  the  world  that  it  is  favorable  to  exporting; 
that  means  carrying  more  goods  for  you?— A.  Yes;  getting  more  land 
under  cultivation;  that  results  in  an  expansion  of  traffic. 

Q.  And  on  the  question  of  wages,  you  pay  less  than  you  would  on  a 
gold  basis? — A.  Yes;  if  we  had  a gold  basis  here  we  would  have  to  pay 
the  same  wages  in  gold  and  get  less  traffic.  It  would  cut  both  wavs. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  What  is  your  maximum  rate  for  carrying  passengers  per  kilo- 
meter?— A.  First  class,  3 cents;  third  class,  1.03  cents. 

Q.  Have  3rou  separate  cars  for  the  foreigner? — A.  We  have  first, 
second,  and  third  class  cars,  but  if  the  Indian  pays  his  first-class  fare 
he  goes  with  the  foreigner.  We  make  no  distinction.  Would  that  be 
necessary,  you  think,  in  case  we  get  straightened  out? 

With  thanks,  the  meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  F.  H.  D0NALDS0N-SIM. 

Manila,  July  85,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  and  Mr.  MacArthur. 

F.  H.  Donaldson-Sim,  in  answer  to  the  questions  of  the  commis- 
sioners, stated: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Please  state  your  name. — A.  F.  H.  Donaldson-Sim. 

Q.  Where  is  your  residence? — A.  Bagujrn. 

Q.  What  province  is  that  in? — A.  Benguet.  It  is  in  the  highest 
part  of  Benguet,  -1,000  feet  high. 

Q.  What  is  your  occupation,  Mr.  Donaldson? — A.  I am  a tea  and 
coffee  planter. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  been  in  the  islands? — A.  It  is  over  three  and 
a half  years  now.  Three  years  I have  been  up  in  Benguet. 

Q.  Now,  will  you  tell  us  anything  you  have  to  say  about  Benguet? — 
A.  The  Spaniards  had  decided  on  Benguet  to  build  a sanitarium  up 
there  for  all  the  sick  and  wounded  troops  here.  In  fact,  they  had  settled 
on  the  site  for  the  sanitarium,  and  they  had  also  made  the  plans  of  the 


324 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


road  to  go  down  to  the  lower  provinces  by  the  coast:  Of  course  the 

til-stand  second  insurrections  coming  on.  the  whole  thing  fell  through. 
Our  highest  temperature  up  there  is  between  65  and  TO  degrees  on 
the  hottest  day,  and  our  coldest  day  I have  seen  ice  on  the  water. 

Q.  You  mean  the  hill  province? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Is  there  a 113-  special  elevation  there  suitable  for  a sanitarium?— 
A.  Yes;  right  in  front,  on  the  left  front,  of  1113-  house,  on  the  left  of 
this  village  of  Baguyo  itself,  it  rises  right  from  the  village.  Trinidad 
is  the  capital  of  the  province. 

Q.  What  size  place  is  it? — A.  It  is  not  a very  large  village.  I sup- 
pose there  are  about  3,000  inhabitants  in  the  village. 

Q.  And  this  temperature  exists  over  the  whole  province? — A.  Yes; 
over  the  whole  province. 

Q.  Then  it  is  cool  and  comfortable? — A.  Veiy  cool. 

Q.  Do  3-ou  suffer  from  the  heat  at,  all? — A.  No;  and  there  is  no 
fever  there. 

Q.  What  is  the  highest  elevation  in  the  province? — A.  There  are 
some  elevations  of  6,500  feet.  M3'  house  is  4,000  feet  above  sea  lev-el. 

Q.  Hav  e 3'ou  mosquitoes  or  any  such  things  up  there? — A.  Quite 
free  from  them.  The  air  is  pure  and  fresh  and  the  water  splendid. 
The  whole  province  is  very  rich,  quite  mountainous,  and  there  is  a 
very  fair  road  going  up  there.  I don’t  know  whether  3-011  have  it  on 
the  map  here;  perhaps  I can  explain  it.  Here  it  is  [referring  to  the 
ma}>],  Ilocos  Sur,  San  Fernando.  You  can  go  up  by  rail  as  far  as  Dagu- 
pan,  then  follow  this  road;  there  is  a road  to  Bauang,  and  then  3-011  go 
into  the  village  of  Naguilian;  that  is  about  two  and  one-half  hours’  trip; 
then  from  there  you  go  on  to  a place  called  Sablayan,  from  Sablavan 
to  La  Trinidad,  and  from  La  Trinidad  up  to  my  place  here  [indicat- 
ing]. That  is  the  site  [indicating]  that  the  Spaniards  fixed  for  their 
sanitarium.  The  nearest  way  of  going  is  by  steamer;  then  going  up 
by  road;  take  the  steamer  to  San  Fernando;  it  will  take  you  a da3-  and 
a half. 

Q.  How  would  3-ou  go  from  San  Fernando  on? — A.  Take  a team  to 
this  village  of  Bauang,  and  take  the  road  to  the  village  of  Naguilian, 
and  then  to  Sablayan,  etc.,  as  I stated  before. 

Q.  How  long  would  it  take  to  go  from  Manila  >>3-  the  ordinary 
means  of  communication  3-ou  have  now,  going  by  way  of  San  Fer- 
nando, which  you  say  is  the  nearest? — A.  Going  b3T  boat  to  San  Fer- 
nando and  taking  horses  inland  3-011  can  do  it  in  two  da3rs,  but  at  the 
very  outside  two  and  one-half  days. 

Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  propose  to  build  a railroad  to  Dagupan? — A. 
There  was  some  talk  about  it,  but  they  hadn’t  the  funds.  They  were 
going  to  run  it  from  Dagupan  right  up  along  the  coast  to  Vigan. 
You  see  there  is  quite  a village  there,  and  the3r  had  some  idea  of  run- 
ning it  to  Vigan,  but  the  thing  dropped  through.  They  hud  a stall 
of  engineers  up  there  for  six  or  seven  months. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  length  of  the  road  from  Dagupan  ? — A.  Well, 
to  San  Fernando,  to  take  it  there  first,  I suppose  50  miles. 

Q.  And  what  would  be  the  engineering  difficulties? — A.  There  are 
none.  The  engineering  difficulties  to  get  to  San  Fernando  from  there 
would  not  amount  to  anything  at  all,  because  the  whole  of  the  country 
there  is  quite  flat.  There  are  splendid  wagon  roads  up  there. 

Q.  Now? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  The  ground  is  marshy? — A.  Yes;  it  is  from  here — from  San  Fer- 
nando to  Santo  Tomas. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


325 


Q.  Have  you  been  there  recently? — A.  I was  there  in  May.  They 
have  just  thrown  up  a lot  of  trenches  there. 

Q.  What  does  that  province  of  Benguet  raise? — A.  The  chief  thing 
up  there  is  cattle.  They  are  almost  as  large  as  the  cattle  in  Europe — 
splendid  beasts  and  horses.  You  can  buy  a horse  up  there  for  $25  or 
$30  and  you  can  buy  a tine  big  bull  for  $30  or  less;  awfully  cheap. 

Q.  No  agricultural  products;  how  about  potatoes? — A.  Rice  and 
sweet  potatoes. 

Q.  Any  Irish  potatoes? — A.  Well,  I planted  some;  but  the  rebels 
pulled  them  up  for  me.  They  destroyed  a lot  of  property.  No  sugar 
up  there.  Three  hours  right  from  there  you  can  go  into  the  tobacco 
region,  in  Tabaco;  in  about  three  hours  you  get  right  into  that  prov- 
ince, and  into  La  Union,  and  then  you  get  into  tobacco,  sugar,  and 
rice  regions. 

Q.  Do  bananas  grow  there? — A.  Yes;  very  tine  bananas  do.  In 
some  parts  you  will  find  the  bananas  very  long  and  awfully  sweet. 

Q.  Any  other  fruits  there? — A.  No;  that  is  all. 

Q.  You  haven’t  tried  the  fruits  of  the  temperate  zone? — A.  I have 
tried  oranges  and  apples.  I have  pineapples  up  there.  I have  some 
apple  trees  coming  on  now  from  seed  my  father  sent  me. 

Q.  Have  vou  frost  there? — A.  Oh,  yes;  now  and  then  we  get  a frost. 
In  a severe  winter  I have  seen  snow  up  there,  and  a very  thin  coating 
of  ice  on  the  water.  We  haven’t  exactly  a rainy  season,  as  we  have 
here.  We  have  got  a rainy  season;  it  starts  about  the  end  of  April, 
but  there  is  very  little  rain  until  about  this  month  of  July,  and  it  lasts 
until  September,  and  after  that  we  get  the  cold  weather. 

Q.  What  kind  of  clothes  do  you  wear  there? — A.  You  want  flannels 
up  there;  you  want  quite  thick  clothing. 

Q.  What  about  the  health  of  the  province?— A.  It  is  extremely 
healthy. 

Q.  Is  it  populous? — A.  With  the  class  of  natives  called  the  Igor- 
rotes. 

Q.  What  are  they? — A.  They'  are  a kind  of  half-civilized  people,  and 
they  are  awfully  quiet;  very  peaceful. 

Q.  Are  there  many  of  them? — A.  Somewhere  between  ten  and 
fifteen  thousand  in  the  whole  of  the  province. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  the  population  of  the  province  would  be? — 
A.  About  20,000. 

Q.  Including  these  men? — A.  Including  all  these  natives;  yes. 

Q.  And  all  the  people  are  chiefly  engaged  in  raising  cattle? — A. 
Cattle  and  ponies,  and  there  are  some  splendid  horses  up  there,  too. 

Q.  Did  you  ascertain  before  you  left  what  their  opinion  was ? — A. 
They  did  not  want  to  have  anything  to  do  with  the  insurrection  or 
anything  else.  They  are  an  awfully  timid  people,  and  good  workers. 
They  have  no  government  at  all — no  government.  They  were  under 
Spanish  rule  formerly  in  the  towns. 

Q.  Haven’t  they  any  municipal  governments?- — A.  No,  sir;  nothing; 
but  the  commandant  manages  affairs  up  there;  he  is  supposed  to  keep 
them  under  control;  but  there  is  no  necessity  for  anybody  at  all  up 
there,  because  they  are  very  quiet. 

Q.  No  riot? — A.  No;  nothing  like  that;  very  peaceful. 

Q.  Would  they  be  glad  of  the  establishment  of  a railroad? — A. 
I am  quite  certain  of  that. 

Q.  Are  there  any  men  of  means  among  them  ? — A.  There  are  some 
very  rich  men,  and  some  of  the  natives  themselves  are  very  rich,  indeed. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


826 

Q.  How  about  education  ? — A.  They  are  not  educated. 

Q.  They  have  schools? — A.  No;  when  the}"  were  under  the  Spanish 
Government  the  Spaniards  did  not  do  anything  for  them;  nothingatall. 

Q.  Didn’t  they  have  country  schools  there ? — A.  No. 

Q.  No  schools  at  all  ? — A.  They  had  a small  school  there  about  two 
years  ago,  for  what  they  called  the  Christian  people,  but  they  never 
even  offered  to  give  any  education  to  one  of  those  people  up  there;  in 
fact,  they  didn’t  like  to  have  them  educated  at  all.  I believe  there  is 
onl\-  one  who  knows  how  to  sign  his  name — that  can  read  or  write. 

Q.  Does  the  cocoanut  grow  there ? — A.  No;  it  is  too  cold;  it  grows 
in  the  province  just  below. 

Q.  Then  what  kind  of  business  do  you  do  up  there,  Mr,  Sim  ? — A. 
We  generally  go  in  for  cattle  and  the  planting  of  tea  or  coffee. 

Q.  You  import? — A.  Yes.  There  is  any  amount  of  gold,  iron, 
copper,  and  silver  in  the  whole  province.  It  is  very  rich  in  gold. 

Q.  Do  they  work  the  mines? — A.  They  just  pan  it  out  in  a very 
primitive  sort  of  fashion  in  a cocoanut  shell. 

Q.  Is  that  pursued  by  the  natives  as  a regular  industry? — A.  Well, 
that  is,  to  a certain  extent,  in  the  villages  of  Antinoc  and  Caponga. 

Q.  Is  capital  employed  in  the  business? — A.  Not  all  all;  just  among 
the  natives  themselves. 

Q.  Has  anything  been  done  with  the  other  mines.  There  is  iron 
there,  you  say  ? — A.  No;  nothingatall. 

Q.  There  are  iron  mines? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  coal? — A.  No. 

Q.  Silver? — A.  Yes;  you  find  that  with  the  gold. 

Q.  You  find  that  in  the  mountains? — A.  Well,  in  nearly  all  of  the 
mountain  rivers  you  find  gold. 

Q.  You  think  that  gold  exists  there  in  any  quantity? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  if  properly  worked  it  would  be  remunerative? — A.  Yes;  I 
am  certain  of  that. 

Q.  The  climate  changes  after  you  leave  Benguet,  going  north? — 
A.  Yes;  it  gets  hotter. 

Q.  And  of  course  after  you  leave  it,  coming  south? — A.  Yes. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Is  there  much  variation  in  the  temperature  during  the  day,  or 
between  day  and  night? — A.  At  night  it  gets  very  much  colder — I 
suppose  there  is  a difference  of  from  8 to  10  degrees  in  the  temperature 
of  the  daytime  and  the  nighttime. 

Q.  In  your  warm  season  what  would  be  your  average  temperature  ? — 
A.  About  65°  F. 

Q.  And  in  your  winter  season  or  cold  season  ? — A.  We  go  down  to 
about  freezing  point. 

Q.  What  would  the  average  be? — A.  Take  it  all  around  it  would  be 
about  65;  that  is,  midday;  of  course  some  days  in  the  hot  season  it 
goes  up  to  75,  but  never  more  than  that. 

Q.  Have  you  ever  kept  any  systematic  record  of  the  temperature 
there? — A.  I have,  but  the  rebels  destroyed  it;  I had  a diary  that  I 
was  keeping  up  there. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  In  that  connection  tell  us  how  you  came  to  leave — if  you  were 
ordered  out. — A.  I was  ordered  out  by  General  Luna.  They  said  that 
all  the  Britishers  were  spies  of  the  Americans.  They  kept  me  shut  up 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


327 


there  for  thirteen  months,  and  I had  nothing  to  eat  but  sweet  potatoes 
and  water. 

Q.  Any  other  foreigners  prisoners? — A.  There  were  two  others, 
Germans,  foreigners,  but  they  were  mixed  up  with  the  revolution. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Were  you  kept  in  confinement? — A.  No;  but  I could  not  get 
out  one  way  or  the  other.  I asked  them  once  or  twice,  but  they  refused 
to  let  me  go  through.  They  turned  me  out  on  the  fith  day  of  May 
last,  and  I got  down  here  on  the  18th. 

Q.  Would  you  describe  the  climate  as  a European  climate,  as  a home 
climate? — A.  Yes,  certainly;  it  is  exactly  the  same  as  at  home. 

Q.  Is  the  vegetation  at  all  like  that  of  a European  country  or  an 
American  country? — A.  It  is  very  mild.  Splendid  views  up  there. 
Pine  trees  grow  there. 

Q.  In  abundance? — A.  Yes;  there  is  a great  amount  of  timber  up 
there. 

Q.  To  a good  height? — A.  I suppose  they  go  up  to  200  to  250  feet. 

Q.  Of  what  diameter? — A.  Some  of  the  largest  ones  5 to  6 feet  in 
diameter.  There  are  some  splendid' trees  up  there.  We  have  the 
white  pine  and  the  pitch  pine. 

Q.  What  other  wood  grows  up  there? — A.  That  is  the  only  wood  in 
the  mountains,  but  down  in  the  valley  you  get  the  native  woods. 

Q.  On  this  plateau  is  there  considerable  grazing  and  arable  lands,  or 
is  it  mostly  wooded  ? — A.  Mostly  woods.  Of  course,  the  natives  have 
the  lands  planted  with  sweet  potatoes,  but  on  the  site  where  the  Span- 
iards were  to  erect  their  sanitarium  there  is  nothing  at  all. 

Q.  What  is  the  character  of  the  soil? — A.  Gravel  mixed  with  iron 
and  other  things.  It  is  a sort  of  clay  soil. 

Q.  Is  there  much  sandy  soil  there?— A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  there  much  moisture  there,  such  as  here  in  Manila? — A.  No; 
much  less.  You  can  not  compare  it  with  Manila.  It  is  nothing  in  the 
rainy  season.  It  is  rather  dry  up  there. 

Q.  Do  you  know  the  rainfall  there  in  a year? — A.  No;  that  I can 
not  tell  you. 

Q.  In  the  rainy  season  have  you  many  rainy  days  together? — A. 
Sometimes  there  are  three  or  four  days  together;  then  we  have  two 
or  three  fine  days.  Last  year  in  the  rainy  season  for  about  a month  it 
rained  one  day  and  was  fine  the  next,  and  during  the  rainy  season  we 
had  a month  of  fine  weather. 

Q.  What  other  vegetation  is  there  that  is  familiar  European  vege- 
tation, if  any;  is  the  grass  like  European  grass? — A.  Yes;  it  is  very 
similar,  and  there  is  a great  amount  of  it  up  there.  That  is  the  only 
thing  they  feed  their  cattle  on  up  there,  and  they  let  them  go  in  the 
mountains. 

Q.  Have  they  any  wild  fruits  of  a European  character?— A.  No. 

Q.  Any  berries? — A.  None  at  all. 

Q.  I was  told  that  there  were  raspberries  and  strawberries? — A. 
There  were  some  years  ago,  but  that  was  not  in  Benguet;  it  was  in 
another  province  away  to  the  right  of  Benguet. 

Q.  Where  it  is  still  colder? — A.  No;  slightly  warmer.  They  belong 
to  the  priests;  but  there  is  one  mountain  there — I think  it  ought  to  be 
explored — where  there  is  any  number  of  strange  plants.  There  is  a 
petroleum  plant  there. 


328 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  that? — A.  It  is  a kind  of  small  berry. 
You  cut  it  open  and  light  it  and  you  get  a smell  of  petroleum. 

Q.  Do  they  use  that  for  lighting? — A.  No;  they  don’t  use  any  for 
light  at  all.  The  natives  themselves  use  the  pitch  pine  for  lighting 
everything,  and  of  course  they  use  this  cocoanut  oil  or  petroleum 
when  they  can  get  it  up  there. 

Q.  The  general  elevation  up  there  is  about  what? — A.  Four  thou- 
sand feet. 

Q.  Does  the  province  lay  as  a plateau,  or  is  it  undulating  or  hilly  ? — 
A.  It  is  undulating;  but  the  village  itself,  the  capital  of  the  province, 
I should  say  was  an  old  crater  of  a volcano,  and  is  surrounded  by 
mountains.  There  is  a good  road  running  around  the  village,  I sup- 
pose about  3 miles  in  circumference. 

Q.  Where  there  are  no  roads  is  it  difficult  to  traverse  the  country  ? — 
A.  They  have  got  pretty  good  roads  to  go  up  the  mountain.  From 
the  village  to  my  house  there  is  a splendid  road  to  go  up  the  mountain. 
During  the  rainy  season  they  wash  out  to  some  extent. 

Q.  What  are  the  houses  built  of? — A.  Of  pine.  They  have  a nipa 
roof.  It  is  not  really  nipa;  it  is  what  they  call  runo  in  Spanish  ; it  is 
a kind  of  rush. 

Q.  How  are  those  boards  for  the  houses  made? — A.  The  natives  cut 
them. 

Q.  You  say  they  simply  hew  the  wood  with  bolos? — A.  With  bolos 
and  native  axes.  Very  small  axes;  the  blade  is  only  about  an  inch  or 
two  inches. 

Q.  Are  you  troubled  with  the  white  ant  up  there? — A.  Not  at  all: 
I think  it  is  too  cold  for  them. 

Q.  Do  you  ever  have  a day  there  as  warm  as  it  is  to-day  in  Manila? — 
A.  No,  never;  we  never  get  up  to  this  heat. 

Q.  What  diseases  are  there  up  there? — A.  I haven’t  seen  any  dis- 
eases. In  fact,  they  go  up  there  to  be  cured. 

Q.  But  people  die  up  there? — A.  I have  seen  them  live  to  be  70  or  80 
years  of  age;  no  young  ones  die  up  there.  They  are  a splendid  race; 
they  are  much  taller.  They  are  a splendid  race  physically;  they  are 
used  as  carriers,  and  the}7  will  carry  you  up  the  mountains  in  a chair. 

Q.  How  is  produce  gotten  from  Trinidad  down  to  the  province  of 
La  Union? — A.  We  send  it  down  by  these  natives  themselves;  the}7 
carry  it  on  their  backs. 

Q.  You  don't  use  bull  carts? — A.  No;  you  can’t  use  them.  We 
can’t  use  them  unless  the  road  is  widened,  and  in  some  parts  it  is 
very  steep. 

Q.  And  in  bringing  stuff  up  you  do  the  same? — A.  Exactly  the 
same;  these  natives  carry  it  up  on  their  backs. 

Q.  If  that  is  the  case,  if  the  roads  are  so  steep,  it  would  be  difficult 
to  build  a railroad? — A.  They  would  have  to  resort  to  the  blasting 
process. 

Q.  But  you  couldn't  overcome  the  elevation  of  the  place  by  blast- 
ing.— A.  It  would  be  very  difficult  to  get  a railroad  right  up  there,  but 
you  could  go  as  far  as  Naguilian  very  easily. 

Q.  That  is  only  about  a tenth  of  the  distance,  or  a fifth  of  the  dis- 
tance?— A.  From  Naguilian  to  Benguet  you  can  go  up  there  in  about 
four  hours. 

Q.  Wasn’t  it  the  plan  of  the  Spaniards  to  build  a railroad  up  there? — 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


329 

A.  As  far  as  to  Naguilian,  and  then  to  go  up  the  rest  of  the  way  by 
bull  carts  or  coaches  or  anything. 

Q.  How  far  is  it  in  miles  or  kilometers  from  Naguilian  to  Trini- 
dad?— A.  I should  put  it  down  at  36  miles. 

Q.  Which  one  must  either  walk  or  go  in  a bull  cart? — A.  Or  on 
horseback;  or  you  can  go  by  carabao,  or  be  carried  up  by  these 
natives — they  carry  }tou  up  in  a chair  over  the  mountains. 

Q.  Under  the  Spaniards,  was  there  any  established  government  up 
there  in  Benguet? — A.  They  had  a commandant  up  there  with  a few 
of  these  native  police — six,  1 think;  that  is  all  they  had. 

Q.  Were  the  people  taxed? — A.  They  were  not  taxed,  they  were 
simply  oppressed. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  by  that? — A.  This  commandant  would  have 
a birthday,  and  the  priests  would  have  another  one,  then  the  com- 
mandant’s wife,  and  these  natives  would  have  to  bring  in  presents 
of  gold  or  cattle  or  something  like  that  on  these  birthdays;  and  in 
Spanish  feasts  they  would  have  to  do  exactly  the  same  thing.  Each 
chief,  in  fact  the  whole  of  the  natives,  would  have  to  bring  in  gold  or 
cattle  or  something  else  and  present  them  to  the  commandant. 

Q.  Was  there  a church  up  there ? — A.  Yes;  there  was;  but  it  was 
taken  around  to  the  other  village;  they  shifted  it  from  one  side  of  the 
village  to  the  other;  then  they  pulled  that  down  and  they  were  build- 
ing up  a new  one  when  I left  there;  they  were  going  on  with  it;  I sup- 
pose it  is  finished  now.  The  natives  were  doing  this. 

Q.  Are  any  monastic  orders  established  there? — A.  Not  now. 

Q.  Have  there  been  any  before  ? — A.  There  was  up  to  July  of  last 
year. 

Q.  Was  there  any  complaint  of  them  in  any  way? — A.  Well,  the 
natives  didn't  seem  to  like  the  priests  or  the  Spaniards  up  there  at 
all — that  is,  the  natives  from  the  other  provinces.  These  natives  in 
Benguet,  of  course,  were  afraid  to  say  anything  at  all.  They  dis- 
liked the  way  they  were  being  treated  by  the  Spaniards;  they  were 
simply  oppressed  by  the  Spaniards. 

Q.  Have  the  natives,  do  you  know,  any  idea  who  the  Americans 
are? — A.  Oh,  yes;  I think  so.  I have  had  several  long  talks  with 
them  up  there.  I have  explained  the  difference  between  the  Ameri- 
cans and  any  other  nation. 

Q.  And  do  you  think  they  are  favorably  disposed  toward  us?  -A. 
Oh,  yes. 

Q.  Except  from  this  outside  influence? — A.  There  is  trouble  from 
these  Tagalos,  this  tribe  down  here  in  Manila. 

Q.  Otherwise  there  would  be  no  opposition? — A.  None  whatever. 

Q.  Are  they  armed? — No;  they  have  only  these  bolos. 

Q.  Are  they  a hunting  race? — A.  Yes;  they  hunt  deer. 

Q.  How  do  they  hunt  them? — A.  They  get  the  deer  into  a sort  of 
dell  and  then  surround  it,  and,  then,  when  the\r  come  out  they  spear 
them. 

Q.  Are  there  fish  up  there  in  the  streams  ?<«— A.  No;  no  fish. 

Q.  But  there  is  plenty  of  water  there? — A.  Yes;  splendid  water; 
the  finest  water  1 have  seen  in  the  islands;  you  might  call  it  spring 
water.  It  comes  from  the  mountains;  there  must  be  a good  number 
of  springs  up  there;  it  is  as  clear  as  crystal;  good  tasting  water. 

Q.  Have  you  any  idea  of  the  temperature  in  some  of  the  streams? — 
A.  No;  but  it  is  awfully  cold.  We  have  got  some  hot  streams  up  there, 
too. 


380 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  And  are  these  streams  large  enough  to  supply  villages  with 
water? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Enough  water  for  all  the  needs  of  the  province? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  there  a stream  near  your  place? — A.  Yes:  two. 

Q.  One  at  Trinidad  ? — A.  A river  there  at  La  Trinidad,  and  a small 
lake  as  well. 

Q.  Is  gold  brought  into  Trinidad  in  any  quantity  at  all,  or  only  in 
small  amounts  ? — A.  Sometimes  1,000  or  2,000  ounces  of  refined  gold — 
gold  dust.  The  price  of  it  up  there.  I think,  is  somewhere  near  S18  an 
ounce;  that  is,  about  the  weight  of  a Mexican  dollar;  that  is  what  they 
call  an  ounce  up  there. 

Q.  Who  bu}Ts  that  gold? — A.  Any  rich  native  up  there. 

Q.  The  iron  mines  you  spoke  of,  have  they  been  explored  to  any 
extent,  and  do  you  know  whether  there  exist  any  outcroppings  of 
iron,  or  how  is  it  known  that  iron  exists  there? — A.  It  came  out  like 
this:  There  was  a Spanish  engineer  who  had  been  exploring  up 
there  for  some  time,  marking  out  this  new  road  they  were  going  to 
make,  and  he  told  me  that  he  came  across  several  parts  of  the  province 
there  where  there  was  a great  deal  of  iron  and  also  copper,  and  from 
the  nature  of  the  soil  I am  perfectly  certain  that  there  is  a good  deal 
of  iron  there. 

Q.  Where  do  the  natives  get  their  bolos  from  ? — A.  The}’  get  them 
from  the  Chinamen.  They  bring  them  from  San  Fernando,  in  the 
province  of  Union. 

Q.  Are  there  many  Chinese  in  the  province?— A.  No;  only  about 
four  or  five. 

Q.  What  do  they  do — what  business? — A.  They  have  a small  shop 
there. 

Q.  Are  there  any  native  shops  in  Trinidad? — A.  No. 

Q.  Any  shops  in  Trinidad  at  all? — A.  Not  now.  After  the  Span- 
iards left  they  all  cleared  out — came  down  to  the  lower  provinces — 
that  is,  these  Christians. 

Q.  You  mean  that  there  is  no  shop  there  now?- — A.  No;  not  when 
I left.  I left  last  May. 

Q.  What  do  the  people  wear — what  is  their  costume? — A.  Almost 
the  same  as  the  natives  down  here.  They  wear  coarser  cloth,  and 
it  is  much  thicker. 

Q.  Do  sheep  thrive  up  there? — A.  Yes;  but  I have  seen  very  few. 
I have  seen  them  up  there  in  splendid  condition.  There  was  a Span- 
iard who  had  about  a dozen,  and  he  was  breeding  them  up  pretty  well, 
and  fattening  them  up  beautifully,  too. 

Q.  What,  in  your  opinion,  is  the  extent  of  this  high  territory  you 
speak  of — how  many  miles  are  there? — A.  In  this  province? 

Q.  Of  this  high  land. — A.  That  would  be  rather  difficult  to  say. 

Q.  Well,  just  a rough  estimate.  Is  it  10  miles  square,  or  100,  or 
20? — A.  I suppose  somewhere  between  20  and  30  miles  square. 

By  Mr.  MacAkthur: 

Q.  I see  mentioned  on  this  map  as  apparently  important  towns  San 
Eduardo  and  Galiano.  Are  they  towns  of  any  importance? — A.  Well. 
Galiano  is  an  inland  town  there  which  produces  a great  deal  of  tobacco 
and  rice. 

Q.  Is  it  lower  than  Trinidad? — A.  A great  deal  lower,  rhatisatown 
in  a warm  province,  the  province  of  La  Union.  The  principal  towns 
in  the  province  of  La  Union  are  Naguilian  and  San  Fernando. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


331 


Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  the  people  in  the  province  of  La 
Union? — A.  In  the  beginning  they  supported  the  Tagalos,  but  now 
they  seem  to  be  waiting  for  the  American  troops  to  go  up  there.  I 
suppose  they  have  about  500  rifles  in  the  province  of  La  Union.  They 
are  tired  out  and  all  they  want  to  do  is  to  get  to  planting  their  corn 
and  living  quietly. 

Q.  You  think  that  if  the  Americans  were  to  appear  there  they  would 
welcome  them  ? — A.  I am  pretty  well  certain  of  it.  They  would  tire, 
perhaps,  one  or  more  shots;  they  have  seen  the  American. soldiers; 
they  had  a few  soldiers  in  the  town,  and  the  natives  all  disappeared  in 
the  mountains  on  sight  of  the  American  troops. 

Q.  La  Union  is  a rich  province? — A.  Very  rich  in  rice  and  tobacco. 

Q.  And  has  a great  population  ?— A.  Yes;  and  the  whole  of  these 
provinces  farther  north — Ilocos  Sur  and  Ilocos  Norte,  Cagayan,  and 
Isabela — are  all  very  rich  provinces,  producing  tobacco,  sugar,  rice, 
and  cotton. 

Q.  It  would  be  very  difficult  to  get  any  of  this  pine  wood  that  you 
speak  of  as  existing  in  Benguet  out  of  there,  wouldn't  it? — A.  At  pres- 
ent, well,  yes;  but  if  we  had  good  roads  up  there  I don't  think  there 
would  be  any  difficulty  about  it,  because  if  you  get  it  down  as  far  as 
Naguilian  just  at  the  commencement  of  the  wet  season,  or  just  after, 
you  can  float  it  right  down  to  the  coast.  The  river  runs  down  nearly 
into  Dagupan,  and  you  can  float  it  right  down  the  river. 

Q.  What  river  is  that  you  speak  of  ? — A.  I forget  the  name  of  the 
river. 

Q.  Is  there  a good  road,  a highway,  running  from  Dagupan  into  the 
provinces  you  have  spoken  of — Ilocos  Sur  and  Ilocos  Norte  ? — A.  A 
very  good  road  indeed.  When  I came  down  last  May  there  were  some 
parts  of  the  road  there  between  Aringay  and  Dagupan  that  were  cut 
out.  They  had  cut  trenches  across  the  road. 

Q.  Against  whom? — A.  Why,  all  the  way  down. 

Q.  Against  the  Americans  or  the  Spaniards? — A.  In  the  insurrec- 
tion against  the  Spaniards,  the  last  one;  they  had  a good  deal  of  light- 
ing up  there  against  the  Spaniards  last  year. 

Q.  Are  there  many  Spaniards  up  there  now? — A.  Some  prisoners. 

Q.  Any  peaceful  Spaniards? — A.  Very  few  indeed;  they  are  all 
practically  prisoners. 

Q.  Is  San  Fernando  a good  harbor? — A.  No;  you  have  got  to  go 
into  that  by  a sort  of  canal;  it  is  rather  rocky. 

Q.  Is  there  any  good  harbor  in  the  province  of  La  Union? — A. 
There  is  Vigan,  in  the  province  of  La  Union.  I think  Santo  Tomas  is 
the  only  one,  but  there  3^011  have  to  lay  so  far  out  from  the  coast, 
and  in  San  Fernando  only  small  vessels  can  get  in;  none  of  the  large 
ones  can.  They  have  to  go  in  there  to  load  tobacco,  and  they  have  to 
be  very  careful  in  the  canal. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Has  Benguet  ever  been  a resort  for  invalids  ? — A.  Yes;  a number 
of  Spaniards  and  rich  natives  here  went  there. 

Q.  So  it  has  been  a custom  for  the  people  to  go  up  there  to  get 
cured? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Of  what  diseases  ? — A.  Dysentery,  diarrhea,  and  fever. 

Q.  Do  they  get  cured? — A.  Yes;  after  a month  or  two,  when  they 
come  down  here  quite  fresh  men. 


332 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Did  the  Spaniards  send  any  of  their  soldiers  there? — A.  Yes; 
they  sent  up  two  batches;  in  September,  1897,  they  sent  up  about  40, 
and  in  the  following  May  the}'  sent  up  about  50,  and  but  7 of  them 
died  up  there. 

Q.  What  accommodations  were  there  for  them  ? — A.  They  had  them 
in  what  they  called  the  tribunal;  they  had  it  fixed  up  and  sent  up  beds 
from  Manila,  and  it  was  after  that  that  they  decided  on  building  a 
sanitarium  there. 

Q.  Was  there  any  hotel  there? — A.  No;  not  where  they  sent  their 
sick  soldiers.  The  sick  soldiers  were  away  to  the  back  of  my  house, 
in  the  tribunal — about  300  were.  There  was  a hotel  kept  by  a man 
named  Camps;  he  had  a hotel  in  the  village,  and  these  people  here  used 
to  go  to  his  hotel  and  get  fixed  up — I mean  people  from  Manila  who 
were  ill.  They  always  went  up  there.  He  is  here  in  Manila  now. 

Q.  How  many  of  them  are  there? — A.  I think  nearly  5,000. 

Q.  Prisoners? — A.  Yes;  priests  and  soldiers. 

Q.  Do  they  keep  them  in  confinement? — A.  No;  they  do  not  keep 
them  in  confinement,  but  they  have  taken  them  away  up  in  the  moun- 
tains. T think  they  are  in  Benguet  at  present.  They  give  them  about 
4 cents  a day.  They  have  got  to  feed  and  clothe  themselves  on  that. 

Q.  That  is  Mexican? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Is  there  a scarcity  of  food  up  there  now? — A.  They  live  on  rice. 
No;  just  now  they  are  taking  in  the  rice  crop,  largely.  They  have 
plenty  of  food  there  now.  Of  course,  beef — any  amount  of  that. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  JOSE  CAMPS. 

Manila,  July  26,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair)  and  John  R.  MacArthur,  esq., 
secretary. 

Jose  Camps  appeared  before  the  commission,  and  in  answer  to  the 
interrogatories  of  the  commission,  stated  as  follows: 

Q.  I would  like  to  ask  you  a few  questions,  and  as  we  wish  to  make 
a record  of  them,  we  will  proceed  with  questions  and  answers.  First, 
will  you  please  give  us  your  name? — A.  Jose  Camps. 

Q.  Where  do  you  live? — A.  No.  9 Calle  Nueva. 

Q.  Have  you  ever  resided  in  the  province  of  Benguet,  and  if  so, 
where? — A.  Yes,  sir;  in  Trinidad.  I lived  there  two  and  a half  years. 

Q.  What  is  your  occupation  ? — A.  I bought  there  a coffee  planta- 
tion, but  I devoted  myself  to  a sanitary  hotel. 

Q.  Was  the  hotel  well  patronized?— A.  Yes,  sir;  many  foreigners 
and  a great  many  Spaniards.  When  1 bought  the  place  I paid  $7,000 
for  it,  and  it  was  not  arranged  for  guests  at  all.  There  were  provi- 
sions there  and  1 got  along  with  people  who  came,  they  paying  $2.50 
a day.  I finally  came  out  $7,000  ahead. 

Q.  Where  did  these  people  come  from? — A.  A great  many  foreign- 
ers came  from  here,  and  afterwards  a great  many  merchants  from  here, 
and  Iloilo  also. 

Q.  What  did  they  go  there  for? — A.  To  be  cured  of  ansemia  and 
dysentery  and  also  skin  diseases. 

Q.  What  was  the  character  of  the  climate? — A.  The  maximum  tern 
perature  of  the  year  is  24°  C.  and  the  minimum  is  from  10  to  12 — 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


333 


that  is  to  say,  early  in  the  morning  10  to  12  and  in  the  hottest  part  of 
the  day  24.  In  the  months  of  January  and  February  the  thermome- 
ter goes  down  to  as  low  as  1 below  zero.  This  year  in  front  of  one 
house  it  was  1 below  zero,  and  there  is  at  times  iee. 

Q.  What  are  the  hot  months  of  the  year?— A.  Now;  in  the  rainy 
season.  In  these  months  of  rainy  weather  the  temperature  goes  from 
15  or  16  up  to  24. 

Q.  Do  they  have  a rainy  season  there  as  the}’  have  here  ? — A.  Yes,  sir; 
it  begins  a little  earlier  there  than  here,  and  ends  a little  earlier.  It 
does  not  rain  all  the  time,  for  if  it  rains  in  the  morning  it  is  good 
weather  in  the  afternoon;  but  if  it  rains  in  the  afternoon,  then  the 
morning  is  fair. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  the  rainfall  is  in  the  worst  months,  say  July  ? — 
A.  I could  not  say  what  the  rainfall  was,  because  I did  not  have 
proper  instruments.  I was  made  a commissioner  of  the  observatory 
there,  but  as  I was  very  busy  1 did  not  have  time  to  take  observations. 
In  one  house  I had  a thermometer,  but  I had  no  rain-measuring 
machine;  but  it  does  not  rain  as  much  up  there  as  it  does  here.  One 
thing  we  have  is,  that  many  thunderbolts  fall  on  the  high  mountains. 
There  is  much  pine  timber,  and  as  the  pine  timber  contains  a great 
deal  of  pitch  it  draws  the  lightning. 

Q.  Are  there  any  other  things  to  induee  sick  people  to  go  there 
besides  the  climate,  such  as  springs? — A.  Yes,  sir;  the  conditions 
there  are  much  better  than  in  any  place  in  Europe.  There  is  clear 
freestone  water;  water  containing  iron;  water  containing  sulphur; 
water  containing  magnesia,  and  also  salt  water,  which  is  stronger  and 
more  efficacious  than  the  carabana  water.  It  is  a purgative  water. 

Q.  How  are  the  sulphur  waters;  strong  or  not? — A.  Strong,  very 
strong;  some  have  a temperature  of  70  degrees,  and  there  are  others 
cold.  They  smell  very  strongly  of  sulphur,  and  from  a distance  which 
requires  half  an  hour  to  travel  you  can  smell  the  sulphur. 

Q.  Are  there  many  of  these  springs? — A.  Yes,  sir;  there  are  many. 
There  is  a volcano,  but  it  is  very  old;  there  is  nothing  more  than  the 
smoke  coming  out.  It  does  not  emit  tire,  and  there  is  a great  deal  of 
sulphur  there.  Every  piece  of  sulphur,  pure  sulphur,  is  the  size  of  a 
man’s  fist.  This  volcano  would  probably  cover  6 or  7 square  miles, 
and  in  this  area  it  is  hot  in  some  places  and  cold  in  others.  In  some 
places  it  burns  your  hand  to  put  it  on  the  ground  and  in  others  it  feels 
very  cold. 

Q.  What  is  the  name  of  this  volcano;  has  it  a name? — A.  No;  it  is 
not  known  by  any  other  name  than  that  of  the  rancheros  of  Declan. 
At  a distance  of  200  meters  farther  on  there  is  a spring  of  water,  of 
iron  water,  which  is  very  strong. 

Q.  Do  those  springs  run  all  the  year  round? — A.  Yes,  sir;  even  if 
there  were  two  years  of  all  dry  season  the  water  would  still  flow. 

Q.  How  far  from  Trinidad  are  those  springs? — A.  Some  three 
hours;  about  6 leagues. 

Q.  Are  there  any  accommodations  at  the  springs  for  people  to  live  ? — 
A.  In  the  settlements  there  and  houses;  we  call  them  rancheros;  and 
in  each  of  these  settlements  there  was  a family  of  the  mayor  and  also 
of  the  interpreter,  who  were  called  “directorcillo,”  and  who  were 
required  by  the  Spanish  Government  to  take  care  of  any  small  num- 
ber of  guests  that  might  come  along,  in  the  town  hall. 

Q.  Are  there  any  facilities  for  bathing  at  these  springs? — A.  No; 


334 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


there  are  no  good  accommodations.  The  only  thing  to  do  is  to  dig 
holes  and  let  the  water  in  there,  each  one  for  himself,  and  in  a quarter 
of  an  hour  after  the  water  gets  in  the  hole  it  is  perfectly  clean.  Fur- 
thermore, the  roads  are  very  bad. 

Q.  About  what  is  the  size  of  the  biggest  spring? — A.  I can  not  say 
exactly  how  big;  but  there  is  one  river,  the  Agno,  which  is  very  large, 
larger  than  the  Pasig;  it  comes  out  of  the  mountains  in  the  district 
between  Benguet  and  Lepanto.  There  are  very  high  mountains  there, 
and  there  is  one  place,  about  a kilometer  square,  w here  the  water  comes 
out  and  forms  rivers.  The  Agno  River  is  one  of  them,  and  flows  into 
the  Gulf  of  Lingayen. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  that  these  rivers  you  mention  come  from  the 
springs  themselves? — A.  Yes,  sir;  there  is  one  place  in  this  area  I 
mention  where  the  water  comes  up  in  a stream  about  twice  the  size  of 
this  basket  [indicating  a waste-paper  basket  of  about  10  inches  in 
diameter]. 

Q.  Is  the  water  of  these  streams  mineral  water?— A.  No;  it  is  not 
mineral  water. 

Q.  Is  the  water  cold — cold  enough  to  drink  without  ice? — A.  Yes, 
sir;  very  cold,  the  coldest  water  in  the  district,  because  the  mountains 
are  highest.  On  the  top  of  the  mountains  there  is  a plain,  and  in  that 
plain  is  a lake  which  is  formed  by  the  waters  from  the  springs,  and 
the  waters  flovr  out  from  the  lake  in  three  directions,  forming  three 
rivers  [indicating  with  books  and  other  desk  furniture  the  physical 
conditions,  etc.]. 

Q.  What  is  the  size  of  that  lake? — A.  Half  a kilometer;  small 
because  there  is  not  room  for  it,  and  the  water  immediately  goes  out. 

Q.  Are  there  any  fish  in  it? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  How  did  3rou  get  provisions  for  your  guests? — A.  From  the  prod- 
uce of  the  country  there,  and  some  European  goods  also.  Up  there 
we  have  potatoes,  tomatoes,  peppers,  peas,  cabbage,  and  all  classes  of 
vegetables,  tea,  coffee,  etc. 

Q.  Does  the  tea  and  coffee  grow  there? — A.  Yes,  sir,  and  grapes 
also.  The  grapevines  do  well  there. 

Q.  And  oranges? — A.  Yes,  sir;  some  large,  some  small;  all  kinds. 

Q.  And  lemons? — A.  Yes;  a great  many. 

Q.  Melons? — A.  Yes,  sir;  melons  and  mangoes,  but  not  right  in 
Benguet.  They  grow  in  the  lower  country. 

Q.  Apples? — A.  Yes,  sir;  everything  that  will  grow  in  Europe  will 
grow  there.  The  country  is  very  good  for  such  things,  and  1 was  one 
of  the  first  that  planted  all  these  different  fruit-bearing  trees  and  veg- 
etables, and  1 found  they  gave  very  good  results. 

Q.  How  did  you  provide  your  guests  with  meat? — A.  We  killed 
beef,  twice  a week,  and  beef  will  keep  there  four  days  hung  in  a suit- 
able place.  There  are  plenty  of  cattle.  There  are  many  cattle  ranges. 

Q.  We  have  heard  from  another  witness  that  it  is  a great  place  for 
race  horses  as  well  as  cattle? — A.  Yes,  sir;  all  sorts  of  animals. 

Q.  How  about  pigs?-— A.  We  have  many,  and  very  good  ones. 

Q.  And  sheep?- — A.  Also  sheep. 

Q.  Many  sheep? — A.  No,  there  are  not  many  sheep.  1 was  the 
first  to  have  them,  and  started  with  about  30;  but  when  the  insurgents 
came  they  took  them  away.  They  did  well  and  had  lambs. 

Q.  How  about  game? — A.  Yes,  sir;  there  are  wild  boars,  havary, 
peccaries,  and  deer. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


335 


Q.  Any  birds? — A.  There  are  ducks,  both  wild  and  tame,  and  there 
are  wild  partridges  and  quail. 

Q.  Is  there  much  game? — A.  It  is  according  to  the  locality.  In 
some  places  there  are  many  and  in  others  very  few. 

Q.  The  country  is  not  very  populous? — A.  No.  There  are  about 
8,000  Igorrotes  in  the  district  of  Benguet. 

Q.  Tell  us  about  the  Igorrotes,  their  peculiarities,  and  so  on. — A. 
I will  tell  you  first  about  the  capital  of  Benguet.  It  is  about  1,600 
meters  above  the  level  of  the  sea.  It  covers  a space  of  ground  about 
15  kilometers  in  circumference  in  round  form  on  a perfect  plane,  and 
there  is  a river  which  goes  through  the  middle  of  the  town.  It  passes 
right  by  my  house.  All  around  the  town  there  are  mountains  about 
100  meters  high  and  the  river  comes  out  between  two  of  them. 

Q.  Is  there  much  business  done  in  Trinidad? — A.  No,  there  is  little. 

Q.  Are  there  shops? — A.  There  were  three;  one  that  I had,  one 
that  a German  had,  and  one  that  another  Spaniard  had.  But  now  there 
is  nothing. 

Q.  What  is  the  general  character  of  the  business? — A.  There  is  a 
great  business  with  the  Indians  up  there — the  Igorrotes;  they  do  not 
buy  clothes  because  they  do  not  need  them,  but  they  are  great  people 
to  drink  strong  drinks.  There  is  a large  business  with  them  in  liquors 
of  all  sorts,  and  the  Igorrotes  will  pay  as  high  as  $5  or  $6  for  a bottle 
of  liquor  if  it  is  good.  In  this  he  is  different  from  every  other  Fili- 
pino tribe,  and  in  every  other  way  also.  The  leading  business  there 
is  in  gold  and  coffee.  These  are  the  most  important  branches  of  busi- 
ness, then  cattle  and  carabaos. 

Q.  Are  the  gold  mines  worked  systematically,  or  simply  by  individ- 
uals?— A.  No;  the  mines  up  there  are  worked  by  nature  itself.  There 
are  a great  many  mines  in  Benguet  that  have  never  been  opened.  The 
gold  has  always  been  found  by  the  Igorrotes  in  the  rivers.  The  mines 
have  never  been  worked. 

Q.  Do  they  find  nuggets? — A.  Yes,  sir;  they  find  small  nuggets  of 
5,  6,  or  8 grains.  The  Agno  River  produces  the  most  gold.  When 
the  river  is  high  and  backs  up,  the  Igorrotes  afterwards  go  and  get  the 
gold  which  is  left  by  the  waters.  That  is  where  they  get  the  most. 

Q.  Have  the  Igorrotes  any  schools?  Is  there  any  system  of  educa- 
tion?— A.  There  were  two  schools  up  there  carried  on  by  friars  that 
were  commissioned  from  here  to  do  so.  One  was  in  Declan,  where  the 
volcano  is  I told  you  about,  but  they  only  had  half  a dozen  scholars, 
because  the  Igorrote  does  not  wish  to  be  a Christian.  If  an  Igorrote 
father  finds  his  son  wishes  to  learn  and  become  a Christian,  as  he  has 
a little  more  knowledge  of  the  world  than  the  boy,  he  casts  him  out  of 
the  house. 

Q.  Have  they  any  religion? — A.  They  have  a religion  of  their  own. 
They  worship  images.  Their  religion  is  to  worship  a piece  of  wood  in 
the  shape  of  a man  or  a stone  in  the  shape  of  a man,  and  their  manner 
of  worship  is  to  sit  in  a cramped  position  [illustrating  it]  and  adore 
these  idols.  When  an  Igorrote  dies  they  put  him  in  this  position  in  a 
chair  and  suspend  a table  above  him  and  underneath  build  a fire  of 
pine  wood,  and  they  keep  that  up  for  four  days,  until  the  body  becomes 
dry,  as  if  embalmed,  and  then  they  put  it  in  the  ground.  They  have 
a custom  also  of  spending  a great  deal  of  money  on  their  funerals.  If 
a man  is  rich  sometimes  his  burial  will  mean  a feast  that  will  last  fif- 
teen days.  The  first  signal  in  this  feast  is  the  sounding  of  music  in 


336 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


the  house  where  the  feast  is  to  be.  This  music  consists  of  plates  which 
they  beat  with  sticks,  and  also  drums  which  look  very  much  like  an 
old-fashioned  mountain  cannon.  This  is  a signal,  and  when  a large 
number  has  gathered  at  the  house  they  bring  pigs — about  eight.  The 
owner  of  the  house  kills  the  first  pig  with  a piece  of  wood,  which  he 
thrusts  through  the  heart,  and  with  this  piece  of  wood  covered  with 
blood  lie  marks  a cross  on  each  of  his  cheeks.  When  these  pigs  are 
killed  they  are  divided  among  all  the  different  houses  of  the  neighbor- 
hood. A piece  is  left  at  each  house.  Then  they  kill  two  cows,  which 
are  divided  among  the  rich  of  the  country.  To  go  on  with  the  enter- 
tainment they  keep  on  playing  the  music  night  and  day,  and  dancing 
a dance  which  they  have  peculiar  to  themselves.  The  men  and  women 
all  attend.  The  men  dance  with  the  women. 

Q.  How  do  the  women  dress  ? — A.  The  women  are  very  well  dressed. 
They  wear  a sort  of  sash,  something  like  a shawl,  which  they  wrap 
twice  around  the  body.  They  also  wear  a tight-fitting  dress  with  tight 
sleeves,  and  they  wear  a tie,  or  something  in  front  of  their  neck.  Their 
dress  is  of  brilliant  color  and  is  to  me  the  most  pleasing  dress  of  all 
the  tribes. 

Q.  Do  they  make  these  clothes?— A.  They  did  make  all  the  cloth 
themselves,  but  now  they  are  beginning  to  buy  it.  Some  still  make 
it.  But  the  dress  they'  make  themselves — the  sash,  skirt,  and  vest. 
They  wear  a large  turban. 

Q.  What  are  these  clothes  made  of,  what  material  ? — A.  F rom  hemp. 

Q.  They  raise  hemp  there,  then,  do  they  ? — A.  No,  sir.  Farther 
down  they  do.  There  is  no  abaca  there. 

Q.  Do  the  Igorrotes  exist  in  other  provinces? — A.  They  are  in  other 
provinces,  but  they  are  not  the  same;  they  have  different  customs. 
For  instance,  those  of  Bontoc  are  different,  as  I will  explain  to  you. 
The  Igorrotes  of  Benguet  arc  the  most  advanced;  they  are  also  the 
richest  of  all  the  Igorrotes.  There  are  no  poor  among  them  on  account 
of  the  great  quantity  of  gold,  for  if  a man  has  no  money  lie  goes  to 
the  river  and  gets  some  gold.  There  are  no  real  rich  men  there,  for 
there,  if  a man  has  $1,000  he  is  considered  rich.  But  there  are,  I 
should  add,  a half  dozen  rich  men.  1 know  of  one  man  who  has  buried 
50  water  jars  full  of  gold  and  silver.  There  are  some  who  have  10 
water  jars,  some  20,  buried  away.  They  add  to  this  money  that  they 
bury  from  year  to  year,  and  at  the  end  of  five  years  they  dig  it  up  and 
count  it.  They  make  frequent  mistakes  in  counting,  and  if  they  find 
that  the  money  is  more  than  they  expected  they  say  the  money  has 
grown,  and  if  less,  they  proceed  to  count  it  again  until  they  find  the 
amount  greater  than  they  expected,  and  they  then  bury  it  again. 

Q.  What  language  do  these  people  use? — A.  It  is  different  from  the 
other  languages.  Some  of  them  speak  also  Ilocano,  for  the  language 
most  general  is  Ilocano,  it  being  the  largest  district.  The  Igorrotes 
are  in  8 provinces  and  6 districts,  and  the  Tagalogs,  whose  language 
comes  next,  have  only  3 or  -1  provinces. 

Q.  Have  they  any  written  language? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Alphabet? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Can  not  read  or  write? — A.  They  have  no  system  of  reading  or 
writing,  no  alphabet,  and  when  two  of  them  are  going  to  make  a con- 
tract they  first  get  a jar  of  “ vasi”  and  put  it  between  them,  and  then 
they  call  all  the  leading  men  of  the  different  raneheros,  who  sit  about 
them,  and  when  their  bargain  is  agreed  upon  they  drink  one  glass  ol 
“vasi,”  and  then  the  money  is  paid  over, and  then  they  drink  another 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


337 


glass  of  “vasi.”  This  is  their  method  of  making  a contract.  They 
do  this  also  with  any  other  contract,  such  as  trading  cattle,  selling 
horses,  etc. 

Q.  What  is  the  distance  from  Manila  to  this  place  by  the  ordinary 
route? — A.  1 don’t  know  exactly  the  distance  from  here  to  Dagupan, 
but  that  can  easily  be  found  out.  From  Dagupan  to  Benguet  it  is 
about  50  kilometers;  1 do  not  remember  exactly. 

Q.  How  many  days  docs  it  take  to  go  from  here  to  Benguet? — A.  I 
have  gone  in  two  days.  I left  here  in  the  morning,  arrived  in  Dagupan 
at  1 o'clock,  where  I had  a carriage  prepared,  and  went  on  that  day  to 
Arengan  for  the  night,  and  the  next  day  continued  to  Benguet.  From 
Arengan  you  have  to  go  on  horseback,  as  a vehicle  can  not  go. 

Q.  About  how  many  people  are  there  in  that  section  you  have  been 
telling  us  about? — A.  There  are  about  100  of  these  interpreters,  but 
there  are  no  other  natives  of  the  soil  than  the  Igorrotes.  There  are 
about  18,000. 

Q.  Of  these,  how  many  are  Igorrotes? — A.  They  are  all  Igorrotes. 

Q.  Have  they  taken  any  part  in  this  war? — A.  They  have  not.  The 
ones  in  Lepanto  and  Bontoc  have  done  so,  but  those  in  Benguet  have 
not. 

Q.  Have  they  sent  any  recruits  to  the  insurgent  army  ? — A.  No,  sir. 
The  Tagalogs  wished  me  to  go  up  there  and  form  a force;  they  wanted  to 
make  me  a captain,  but  I did  not  want  to  go,  and  the  Igorrotes  did  not. 

Q.  Have  they  any  arms? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  Have  they  any  native  weapons? — A.  Bolos  and  lances,  which 
they  throw. 

By  Secretary  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  What  are  the  dimensions  of  the  district  of  Benguet? — A.  I don’t 
know;  I can  not  remember;  I had  a good  plan  of  the  district  which 
was  stolen  from  me.  There  are  17  rancheros. 

Q.  How  far  can  one  travel  from  Trinidad,  keeping  on  this  high  land 
you  spoke  of  ? — A.  To  go  over  all  of  it  and  to  visit  all  the  rancheros 
it  would  take  fifteen  days,  for  it  is  all  on  horseback  or  on  foot,  because  in 
a great  many  places  a horse  can  not  travel  down  the  steep  slopes,  and 
the  forests  on  the  mountains  are  composed  entirely  of  pine  timber. 

Q.  Is  it  open  wood,  or  is  it  thick  with  brushwood? — A.  They  have 
nothing  but  pine  wood.  You  can  pass  anywhere  through  the  woods. 
It  is  very  good  pasture. 

Q.  How  are  the  roads  and  means  of  communication  between  this 
plateau  and  the  coast — San  Fernando,  San  Tomas — are  they  in  good 
condition? — A.  There  is  a good  road  from  Bauang  to  Maguilon,  from 
which  place  there  is  a good  road  on  horseback  up  the  mountain,  and 
in  dry  seasons  you  can  go  in  a cart. 

Q.  To  make  an}'  considerable  use  of  this  land  it  would  be  necessary 
to  build  good,  substantial  roads.  Can  a road  be  built  from  the  coast 
up  to  Benguet? — A.  A good  road  could  be  built,  and,  in  fact,  a wagon 
road  has  been  surveyed,  and  a railroad  could  also  be  built  by  twisting 
and  turning  about  in  the  mountains. 

Q.  Do  you  have  earthquakes  up  there? — A.  A few;  there  are  some, 
but  not  as  many  as  there  are  here. 

Q.  What  months  are  best  for  a person  to  go  there  for  his  health  ? — 
A.  The  first  part  of  April. 

With  expressions  of  thanks,  the  commission  adjourned, 
p c 22 


338 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


TESTIMONY  OF  HAROLD  ASHTON. 

Manila,  June  28,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Mr.  Worcester,  and  Mr. 
MacArthur. 

Harold  Ashton,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
stated  as  follows: 

11}"  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  is  your  name,  please  ? — A.  Harold  Ashton. 

Q.  W hat  is  your  occupation  and  residence? — A.  1 am  a partner  in 
the  firm  of  Holliday,  Wise  & Co.,  merchants,  No.  10  Anloague. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  in  Manila? — A.  Twenty-one  years. 

Q.  And  during  that  time  you  have  been  engaged  in  business? — A. 
All  the  time. 

Q.  You  are  in  the  export  and  import  business? — A.  We  do  a little 
export  business,  but  nothing  to  speak  of;  our  business  is  almost 
entirely  import. 

Q.  What  do  you  import? — A.  Everything,  except  petroleum  and 
coal. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us,  in  your  own  way,  your  views  with  regard  to 
the  currency  here;  as  to  what  is  the  currency,  and  any  changes  you 
might  think  desirable  to  be  made? — A.  Well,  as  you  can  understand, 
an  importing  house  is  in  favor  of  a high  exchange,  and  of  course  when 
we  started  off,  as  you  can  understand,  the  capital  which  we  had  to  put 
into  the  concern  was  on  a gold  basis,  and  if  exchange  falls  we  have  to 
write  our  capital  down,  but  at  the  same  time  I am  fully  convinced  in 
my  own  mind  that  to  make  any  change  in  the  currency  would  be  a great 
mistake.  A low  currency  has  been  of  great  benefit  to  the  export  trade, 
and  if  exchange  were  sent  back  to  four  shillings  it  would  be  a great 
injury  to  trade,  and  that  is  speaking  against  our  own  pockets. 

Q.  Don’t  these  fluctuations  in  exchange  make  the  business  very 
uncertain? — A.  The}^  do;  but  it  seems  as  soon  as  the  silver  went  to 
27i  we  seemed  to  have  touched  the  bottom,  and  since  this  rate  of  2 
shillings  we  have  had  the  best  possible  thing,  a steady  exchange. 

Q.  There  is  a variation  now? — A.  A farthing  one  way  or  the  other. 

Q.  And  what  is  that  caused  by  ? — A.  By  the  banks.  For  instance, 
there  being  but  little  money  in  circulation  they  have  to  get  the  metal 
money  and  they  have  to  pay  a farthing  one  way  or  the  other,  but  I can 
not  see  how  it  can  be  possibly  avoided.  Just  now,  for  instance,  in 
Manila  we  want  a lot  of  money  to  supply  to  the  government,  and  that 
is  keeping  exchange  a little  over  its  proper  rate. 

Q.  Would  the  fact  that  you  are  surrounded  here  by  silver-using 
countries  with  which  you  do  business  have  any  effect  in  your  judgment 
on  this  matter? — A.  Yes,  it  would  have,  because  we  have  to  compete 
with  them  in  such  articles  as  sugar. 

Q.  You  do  some  business  with  China? — A.  Yes;  but  the  business 
with  China,  with  the  exception  of  sugar,  is  generally  importing  stuff 
from  China. 

Q.  If  we  went  on  a gold  basis  somewhat  in  the  nature  of  what  Japan 
has  done,  fixing  the  price  of  gold,  depreciating  gold  as  it  were,  instead 
of  appreciating  silver — are  you  familiar  with  the  Japanese  system? — 
A.  1 am. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


339 


Q.  That  they  have  recently  adopted?  Will  you  explain  that  to  us 
and  then  tell  us  how  you  think  that  would  work  out  here?  If  you  can 
explain  the  Japanese  system  we  would  be  very  much  obliged  to  you. — 
A.  They  put  a gold  dollar  on  the  basis  of  2 shillings. 

Q.  That  means  50  cents  in  our  money?- — A.  Yes.  If  the  silver  that 
comes  into  the  island  represented  in  gold  value  half  a dollar,  that  would 
be  about  the  same  thing. 

Q.  And  that  is  fixed? — A.  That  is  fixed. 

Q.  Hence  there  are  no  fluctuations? — A.  It  is  this  way,  take 
France 

Q.  What  would  you  think  of  introducing  that  system  here? — A.  1 
should  think  it  would  be  extremely  good,  because 

Q.  Why?  Why  would  you  adopt  that  here — what  ratio? — A.  I 
would  have  the  ratio  as  it  is  to-day ; it  is  two  shillings  to  the  dollar, 
because  with  a gold  dollar  at  4 shillings  you  could  not  avoid  fluctua- 
tions in  exchange.  Y ou  have  got  to  take  the  sterling  value,  for  instance, 
between  France  and  England,  a pound  is  worth  25  francs — 25  to  29 — 
and  you  must  take  into  account  the  exchange  operations  between  the 
two  countries,  and  it  is  absolutely  impossible  between  two  countries  to 
keep  the  thing  steady. 

Q.  I suppose  speculation  would  induce  some  fluctuation  anyway? — 
A.  Take  tne  difference  in  exchange  between  the  States  and  England,  it 
is  always  a few  cents  one  way  or  the  other.  The  most  extraordinary 
thing  was  the  free-coinage  agitation. 

Q.  Why  do  you  think  it  would  be  a good  idea  to  introduce  the 
Japanese  system  here? — A.  Because  silver  has  got  to  what  we  consider 
in  business  to  be  its  bottom,  and  we  want  here  an  exchange  now  that 
we  can  calculate  on;  that  is  to  say,  the  Japanese  have  tried  to  fix  their 
present  system  so  conscientiously  that* it  would  represent  practically 
the  relative  value  of  the  two  metals,  but  if  there  is  another  fall  in  silver 
then  Japan  would  have  to  change  the  ratio,  and  you  would  have  to,  too, 
unless  you  had  an  absolute  gold  basis. 

Q.  How  would  an  absolute  gold  basis  do  here? — A.  If  you  put  on 
one  side  the  impossible  assumption  of  silver  going  down  to  6 pence  per 
ounce,  or  some  absurd  fall,  then  it  would  be  all  right.  Otherwise  you 
would  be  in  exactly7  the  same  position.  If  silver  fell  to  18  pence  an 
ounce  you  would  be  in  more  or  less  the  same  position,  for  you  never 
expected  three  years  ago  that  it  would  go  to  2 shillings. 

Q.  You  think  somebody  would  lose  money  ?— A.  les;  and  it  woidd 
be  the  producer  here  who,  after  all  is  said  and  done,  is  at  a disad- 
vantage. He  would  get  the  advantage  of  a still  further  fall  in  silver. 
But  the  reason  that  people  commend  the  Japanese  system  is  that  peo- 
ple'consider  that  silver  at  27  or  27i  has  about  reached  its  lowest  point. 

Q.  They7  make  their  contracts  with  reference  to  that  fact? — A.  In 
Japan. 

Q.  But  here  if  a man  buys  goods  that  he  wants  to  export? — A. 
They  go  to  the  bank  and  they  will  fix  the  exchange  forward. 

Q.  So  that  he  knows  what  he  is  going  to  get? — A.  So  that  he  knows 
what  he  is  going  to  get. 

Q.  How  would  the  gold  basis  affect  the  Filipinos  themselves,  espe- 
cially the  laborers?  I mean  how  would  it  affect  them  with  reference 
to  their  wages?  Would  they7  be  paid  in  gold  or  would  they  be  reduced 
to  the  silver  basis? — A.  I think  the  tendency  now  of  wages  in  silver- 
using countries  is  to  go  up,  but  it  is  not  on  account  of  the  proportion- 
ate fall  in  exchange,  not  by  any7  manner  of  means. 


340 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  The  wages  of  servants,  ordinary  wages,  have  they  gone  up  since 
the  fall  in  silver? — A.  Very  little;  but  at  present  the  large  influx  of 
Americans  and  others  has  had  a great  tendency  to  send  up  all  prices. 

Q.  Because  the  demand  has  become  so  great  ? — A.  Because  the 
demand  has  become  so  great. 

Q.  Were  you  here  under  the  gold  basis? — A.  I was;  we  had  an 
entirely  gold  basis. 

Q.  How  did  that  affect  things? — A.  Silver  was  then  in  the  region 
of  54  pence,  and  nobody  felt  any  uneasiness  about  a decline  in  silver; 
but  if  we  had  kept  on  the  gold  basis,  if  the  Spaniards  had  kept  us  on 
a gold  basis,  we  should  have  been  in  the  same  position  Jamaica  is 
to-day  about  sugar. 

Q.  Have  you  plenty  of  currency  here — silver  and  subsidiary  coin  ? — 
A.  Subsidiary  coin  is  a little  short,  and  especially  copper  coin. 

Q.  What  kind  of  subsidiary  coin  would  you  recommend  for  these 
islands — a decimal  currency  or  any  other? — A.  A decimal  currency. 

Q.  And  Arou  would  base  it  on  the  value  of  the  silver  dollar,  or  would 
you  base  it  on  the  value  of  the  gold  dollar? — A.  I should  have  it  as  it 
is;  but  it  is  not  a matter  of  importance  so  long  as  it  is  subsidiary  coin. 
There  is,  for  instance,  in  England  a large  amount  of  subsidiary  coin, 
but  3 011  can’t  pay  more  than  a certain  amount  of  silver  for  a debt. 

Q.  Your  silver  currency  is  as  good  as  your  gold  currency? — A. 
Certainly;  we  have  twenty  shillings  to  the  pound,  but  it  is  not  really 
worth  as  much  as  a sovereign — nothing  like  it. 

Q.  And  so  in  France  and  everywhere  else  now? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  issue  small  bank  bills  here? — A.  It  would  be 
very  convenient. 

Q.  Would  they  have  to  be  on  a silver  basis? — A.  You  would  simply 
make  them  payable  in  the  coin  of  the  country — American  coin — coin 
of  the  realm — of  the  country. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  introduce  the  American  cent  here? — A. 
Well,  the  American  cent  could  be  introduced  if  you  would  call  it  two 
cents. 

Q.  Yes,  but  if  you  introduced  the  American  cent,  it  being  the  one 
hundredth  part  of  a gold  dollar,  how  would  that  do? — A.  That  would 
not  do.  You  must  introduce  a cent  that  would  be  the  one  hundredth 
part  of  a silver  dollar. 

Q.  If  made  the  same  as  our  cents  it  would  go  home? — A.  Iteertainly 
would. 

Q.  Now,  you  got  a copper  currency  from  Spain? — A.  Yes;  now  it 
is  all  going  away.  You  know  the  dollar  in  Spain,  although  it  is  worse 
than  our  dollar,  is  kept  up  by  fictitious  means  to  54  pesetas  to  the 
pound,  and  we  have  seen  it  27  pesetas  to  the  pound. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  permit  foreign  banks  or  American  banks,  if 
they  were  established  here,  to  issue  paper? — A.  It  would  be  a very 
desirable  thing,  assuming  it  was  done  under  the  usual  system  which 
prevails  in  the  United  States. 

Q.  Of  course;  that  is  a guaranty? — A.  If  they  have  good  resources 
against  their  note  issue. 

Q.  We  wanted  to  ask  you  something  about  the  Chinese.  I suppose 
you  know  a great  deal  about  the  Chinese? — A.  I have  had  a very  long 
experience  Avith  them. 

Q.  How  many  of  them  are  here? — A.  It  has  been  estimated  that  in 
former  days  there  were  from  30,000  to  50,000,  not  more  than  that, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


341 


about  Manila,  and  about  40,000  to  50,000  to  00,000  in  the  provinces. 
It  is  almost  impossible  to  calculate,  but  according  to  Spanish  legisla- 
tion the  number  of  Chinese  were  limited;  although  owing  to  things  1 
need  not  mention,  which  used  to  go  on  under  the  Spanish  administra- 
tion, that  number  was  greatly  exceeded,  and  the  Chinese,  by  a sort  of 
system,  will  always  flourish.  But  they  were  kept  so  well  in  hand  that 
they  could  not  flourish  too  much  under  the  Spanish  rule;  but  then  that 
was  not  altogether  exactly  by  lawful  means. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  any  idea  as  to  how  many  women  there  were 
among  these  50,000  Chinese? — A.  Not  1 per  cent. 

Q.  They  marry  Filipino  women  ? — A.  They  marry  in  China  and  here. 

Q.  They  have  two  wives? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  is  their  mercantile  character  for  honesty,  honorable  deal- 
ing, and  straightforwardness? — A.  They  are  the  only  people  among 
Eastern  peoples  who  can  be  the  wheel  between  the  import  merchant, 
the  European  merchant,  and  the  native. 

Q.  You  mean  by  that A.  That  the  Filipino  can  not  do  that 

work. 

Q.  How  do  you  account  for  that? — A.  The  Filipino  has  not  got  the 
capacity  for  it.  In  the  provinces  the  Filipino  women  are  much  more 
clever  than  the  men.  For  instance,  in  the  province  of  Bulaean  the 
women  there  do  all  the  business  and  they  even  employ  the  Chinaman. 

Q.  He  is  naturally  a trader,  is  he? — A.  Yes;  when  they  get  down 
to  doing  a very  small  business  the  women  can  do  it.  We  sell  to  the 
Chinamen — the  merchants — and  they  retail  again,  and  some  of  them 
do  a business  of  $400,000  or  $500,000  or  $600,000  a year. 

Q.  And  they  sell  again? — A.  Either  to  their  own  countrymen,  or 
the}'  sell  in  certain  provinces,  like  the  province  of  Bulaean  and  Cavite, 
largely  to  the  natives,  and  that  native  is  a woman  nine  times  out  of  ten. 

Q.  Is  the  bulk  of  the  business  in  the  hands  of  the  Chinese? — A. 
They  are  the  intermediary  between  the  European  and  American 
importer,  and  the  native  is  entirely  in  the  hands  of  the  Chinese. 

Q.  You  couldn’t  very  well  get  along  without  them,  then? — A.  We 
could  not. 

Q.  What  harm,  if  any,  does  it  do  to  have  the  Chinese  do  this  busi- 
ness in  the  manner  and  form  that  you  say? — A.  It  doesn’t  do  an}'.  If 
you  take  away  the  Chinese  wheel  in  the  machinery  the  whole  thing 
would  stop. 

Q.  Are  these  people  honest;  do  they  pay  their  debts  ? — A.  Fairly  so. 
The  thing  is  this:  if  we  give  them  only  a reasonable  amount  of  credit 
they  are  fairly  honest,  but  we  have  lost  and  everybody  else  has  lost  a 
large  amount  of  money  by  them.  They  have  their  money  out  in  the 
different  provinces,  and  they  can’t  get  their  money  from  their  men 
and  they  can’t  pay  us.  But  the  Chinaman  always  overtrades;  if  he  has 
a capital  sufficient  to  do  a business  of  $10,000  he  wants  to  do  a business 
of  $20,000,  so  if  a hard  time  comes  he  goes  under,  and  we  importers 
are  always  to  blame.  We  have  been  giving  the  Chinese  too  much  credit, 
so  the  blame  is  not  entirely  theirs. 

Q.  You  wouldn’t  be  in  favor  of  excluding  the  Chinese  merchant? — 
A.  No,  certainly  not;  but  there  ought  to  be  some  restrictions  that  1 
think  might  be  very  well  imposed  on  them,  to  prevent  people  coming 
from  China,  getting  the  benefit  of  this  place  and  trade,  and  then  failing 
and  returning  to  China,  where  you  can’t  get  at  him.  You  knowhow 


342 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


the  Chinese  are,  how  corrupt  they  are;  he  gets  back,  and  lie  gives  his 
mandarin  a thousand  dollars  and  you  can't  find  him. 

Q.  They  go  back  to  China  when  they  make  money?- — A.  Yes.  Sup- 
pose a man  owes  us  money;  he  fails  and  goes  back  to  China,  and  we 
have  no  means  of  finding  out  if  he  has  not  got  $40,000  or  $50,000  of 
money  in  his  village  in  China;  so  that  some  means  ought  to  be  pro- 
vided to  facilitate  nis  identification  and  extradition. 

Q.  But  they  do  go  home  after  they  make  money  ? — A.  The}'  go  home 
for  two  or  three  }'ears. 

Q.  And  then  they  return  ? — A.  They  live  on  here  for  many,  many 
years. 

Q.  Isn’t  it  their  habit  to  go  home  to  live  in  China  after  they  have 
made  money? — A.  Oh,  no;  they  go  for  a time,  but  they  come  back 
again.  They  go  and  visit  their  families,  but  they  come  back. 

Q.  In  your  opinion,  what  action  ought  to  be  taken  in  regard  to  the 
Chinese  coming  here? — A.  I think  you  will  find  that  in  the  provinces 
you  will  have  to  treat  the  question  in  a different  way.  For  instance, 
in  the  province  of  Cavite  it  would  be  too  much  responsibility  to  pro- 
tect him  against  the  natives;  the  natives  would  murder  him. 

Q.  You  are  now  speaking  of  agricultural  laborers,  aren't  you? — A. 
I am  speaking  of  agricultural  laborers. 

Q.  When  you  are  speaking  of  provinces  do  you  mean  the  agricul- 
tural laborer? — A.  The  Chinese,  almost  without  exception,  are  not 
agricultural  laborers  here,  except  for  market  gardens  around  here.  I 
am  speaking  about  the  coolie  class — the  man  who  goes  and  peddles 
around  the  villages  with  things. 

Q.  Wasn’t  there  a restriction  by  Spain  on  the  immigration  of  the 
Chinese  coolie? — A.  He  had  to  pay  a heavy  poll  tax  to  come  in,  which 
amounted  to  about  $30  or  $40.  I don’t  know  what  the  actual  charges 
of  the  Government  were,  but  the  Chinese  used  to  charge  him  about 
$30  or  $40,  a portion  of  which  went  to  the  Chinese  boss. 

Q.  Was  that  the  only  restriction? — A.  That  was  for  the  privilege  of 
coming  into  the  country.  He  had  to  pay  so  much 

Q.  Do  you  recognize  the  fact — which  I think  is  a fact — that  the 
Chinese  are  quite  fond  of  the  Americans  and  are  fond  of  getting  on 
American  soil,  and  that  there  may  be  danger,  if  there  was  no  limita- 
tion, that  millions  of  them  might  come  here? — A.  1 certainly  do,  and 
1 think  it  would  be  better  to  make  some  restrictions  about  that  kind  of 
thing,  and  particularly  in  certain  provinces. 

Q.  The  Chinese  comprehend  perfectly  that  we  do  not  interfere  with 
anybody’s  religion — the  Chinese  or  anybody  else’s — and  that  is  differ- 
ent from  under  the  Spanish.  Isn’t  there  an  apprehension  that  they 
would  come  in  in  great  numbers  if  they  could? — A.  Certainly. 

Q.  That  would  be  disastrous? — A.  Take  Singapore;  they  let  all  who 
came  to  Singapore  in. 

Q.  Aren’t  they  overrunning  it  now?— A.  I don’t  think  they  are. 

Q.  I think  they  passed  a restriction  law. — A.  I don’t  think  so.  Singa- 
pore is  quite  near  his  home. 

Q.  At  all  events,  your  opinion  is  that  it  would  not  do  to  have  immi- 
gration here  entirely  unlimited? — A.  Certainly  not.  To  begin  with,  I 
should  adopt  something  like  what  is  called  the  contract  system. 

Q.  What  would  that  be  ?— A.  You  have  the  coolie  contractors  here, 
who  are  responsible  for  the  good  behavior  of  these  coolies.  For 
instance,  if  a man  wants  200  coolies  he  has  got  to  go  to  somebody  in 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


343 


authority  and  say  ho  wants  them;  they  thus  will  have  the  opportunity 
to  say  whether  it  is  convenient  to  let  those  Chinese  go  to  that  province 
to  work  on  the  job  he  wants  them  for.  If  it  is  convenient,  then  he  con- 
tracts for  tive  years.  The  Chinese  here,  as  in  Singapore,  have  a Chi- 
nese contractor  to  prevent  any  abuse  on  the  part  of  the  employers  of 
the  coolies.  These  coolies  are  contracted  for,  say,  for  a term  of  three 
years. 

Q.  But  never  to  do  specific  work  ? — A.  If  they  like. 

Q.  To  work  on  a railroad,  for  instance  ? — A.  Have  it  stated  in  the  con- 
tract. You  go  to  the  persons  in  authority  and  say  “I  want  500  coolies 
to  work  on  a railroad."  Personally  he  would  consider  whether  it  would 
be  to  the  interest,  to  the  well  being,  of  the  country,  and  if  he  says  yes, 
then  he  goes  to  the  Chinese  contractor  and  says,  “I  want  500  coolies, 
men,  for  three  years.”  At  the  end  of  these  three  years  he  guarantees 
to  send  those  people  back.  If  for  one  reason  or  another  the  coolies 
are  agreeable  to  prolonging  the  contract  and  the  man  wants  them  to, 
then  he  will  go  to  the  person  in  authority  and  ask  for  such  permission 
in  exactly  the  same  way. 

Q.  Yrou  don’t  regard  it  as  necessary  in  the  province  of  Luzon  to 
introduce  Chinese  labor? — A.  For  the  making  of  railroads 

Q.  For  farm  work. — A.  There  are  certain  things  the  natives  will 
not  grow,  such  as  pepper,  and  the  growing  of  tea  and  different  sorts 
of  spices.  It  is  necessary  to  have  Chinamen  to  grow  those  things; 
the  natives  will  not  take  the  pains. 

Q.  But  the  Filipino  would  resent  their  coming  in  certain  provinces  ? — 
A.  No;  not  so  long  as  it  does  not  interfere  with  his  special  industries. 
He  does  not  want  to  grow  pepper.  I brought  some  cotton  seed  from 
the  States  and  gave  it  away.  What  do  you  think?  They  said  it  was 
too  much  trouble.  In  the  north  we  had  exactly  the  same  experience. 
One  of  the  biggest  planters  wanted  to  establish  a tobacco  plantation 
up  north.  He  said  the  style  of  Manila  tobacco  was  very  good,  but  the 
leaf  was  bad.  He  said  to  get  a leaf  like  that  of  Sumatra  he  would 
have  to  have  Chinese  labor;  that  without  Chinese  labor  he  could  not 
get  a leaf  as  they  have  it  in  Sumatra. 

Q.  Then  you  would  be  in  favor  of  introducing  Chinese  labor  by  con- 
tract, but  not  in  general? — A.  By  contract;  not  in  general. 

Q Do  you  think  the  Filipino  would  do  the  labor  ordinarily  done 
here  by  the  Chinese  if  there  were  no  Chinese  here? — A.  Yes;  at  $2  a 
day. 

Q.  Is  he  physically  incapable  of  it,  or  is  it  the  climate  ? — A.  He  does 
not  care  about  saving  much  money.  His  idea  of  happiness  is  to 
have  a hut  in  the  country,  a carabao,  and  two  or  three  handfuls  of  rice, 
and  have  his  wife  and  children  do  the  work;  and  if  he  makes  both  ends 
meet,  what  does  he  care  for  more? 

Q.  He  doesn’t  wear  many  clothes  ? — A.  No. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  the  capacity  of  these  people  for  establish- 
ing a republican  form  of  government? — A.  Let  him  have  his  carabao 
in  peace;  don’t  tax  him  directly,  and  he  will  sit  in  the  sun  and  not 
bother  his  head  about  the  right  of  taxation  among  other  things.  He 
doesn’t  mind  paying  2 reals  extra  for  his  goods  so  long  as  he  doesn't 
know  it,  but  he  objects  to  a cedula  which  costs  $5  or  $0,  and  he  wants 
to  be  left  alone. 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion  as  to  his  capacity  for  self-government  ? — A. 
He  has  absolutely  none. 


344 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Are  there  not  a good  many  educated  Filipinos  ? — A.  I am  speak 
ing  of  the  rank  and  tile,  not  of  the  people  you  see  going  about  in  patent 
leather  boots. 

Q.  Talking  about  the  schools,  there  are  a good  many  educated  Fili- 
pinos around  Manila  ? — A.  Yes;  around  Manila. 

Q.  These  men  have  been  taught  by  the  Jesuits? — A.  Yes;  mostly 
to  be  lawyers  and  doctors. 

Q.  Any  merchants? — A.  No,  sir. 

Q.  No  Filipino  merchants  ? — A.  What  you  call  Filipino  merchants 
are  really  Spaniards. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  that  strictly  here  in  Manila  there  are  no  Filipino 
merchants? — A.  You  mean  Filipino  merchants  of  the  same  class  as  a 
house  like  ours 

Q.  I mean  retail  stores. — A.  Nearly  all  the  shops  in  the  Escolta  are 
Spanish  or  German.  The  shops  the  natives  have  are  down  in  San 
Fernando. 

Q.  Aren’t  there  native  shoemakers  and  tailors? — A.  The  shoe- 
makers are  nearly  entirely  Chinese;  a few  very  small  tailors  are 
Indians. 

Q.  Is  all  this  lighterage  work  here  done  for  the  ships,  is  that  all 
done  by  Chinese? — A.  No;  the  lighterage  work  is  done  by  the  Indian, 
and  it  is  one  of  the  few  hard  things  which  they  do;  but  it  has  been  the 
custom  of  the  country  for  them  to  do  it,  and  they  do  do  it. 

Q.  They  do  the  lighterage  work  ?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  they  drive  the  carabaos? — A.  In  the  last  ten  years  the  Chi- 
nese have  been  steadily  forcing  them  out  of  that  business  and  getting 
it  for  themselves;  previously,  when  I first  came  here,  every  carabao 
driver  was  a native;  now  more  than  half  are  Chinese. 

Q.  The  natives  drive  these  small  carriages? — A.  Yes;  that  is  another 
custom  of  the  country  ? 

Q.  They  prefer  light  work? — A.  Yes;  with  the  exception  of  this 
lighterage  work;  that  is  very  heavy  work;  so  heavy  that  even  the 
Chinamen  do  not  like  to  do  it. 

Q.  How  do  the  Filipinos  physically  compare  with  other  races — with 
the  Chinese  race,  or  any  other  race,  if  you  please;  what  are  their  phys- 
ical characteristics  as  to  strength  and  endurance? — A.  There  is  such  a 
wide  variation  in  the  Filipinos  it  is  hard  to  say.  The  Filipinos  around 
Manila  are  rather  a poor  lot.  In  certain  villages  in  the  country  you 
find  some  very  tine  specimens.  We  have  a gang  of  Filipinos  which 
works  in  our  godowns,  and  if  it  is  a big  job  we  have  two  gangs,  when 
it  is  very  stiff  work,  and  we  find  that  the  Filipino  gang'  does  better 
than  the  Chinese  coolies. 

Q.  How  are  the  Filipinos  in  regard  to  mechanism — mechanical 
skill? — A.  Very  good  indeed.  They  made  the  only  railroad  that  is 
here.  The  head  of  the  railroad  lately  said  to  me,  “it  is  very  surprising 
how  thev  take  to  bridge-making  and  the  rest  of  it;”  in  fact,  as  he  told 
me,  they  got  far  too  clever  for  their  work. 

Q.  They  have  some  artistic  taste,  haven’t  they,  Mr.  Ashton?— A.  Yes; 
they  do  quite  wel  1 in  carving  and  decorating  and  music.  In  fact  our 
Shanghai  house  asked  us  to  send  over  some  musicians  and  we  sent  over 
a band,  and  that  band  is  the  government  municipal  band. 

Q.  Altogether  they  are  not  a serious  race,  Mr.  Ashton,  are  they? — 
A.  They  are  volatile  and  frivolous.  We  have  native  clerks  in  our 
office  who  stick  to  their  work  and  do  what  is  called  “escribiente,”  cleri- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


845 


cal  work,  and  they  do  it  as  well  as  white  men,  if  it  is  simply  mechani- 
cal sort  of  writing.  Such  things  they  do  uncommonly  well,  if  it  is  not 
beyond  their  range  intellectually. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  What  is  their  range  intellectually  ? — A.  Of  course,  you  might  rind 
here  and  there  exceptionally  bright  men 

Q.  Do  }rou  think  them  capable  of  intellectual  advancement  to  a con- 
siderable degree? — A.  No. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Now,  the  Chinese  do  not  go  into  the  arts  at  all.  He  cares  nothing 
about  music,  at  least  he  cares  nothing  about  music  from  what  I have 
heard. — A.  At  least  his  music  does  not  suit  us. 

Q.  And  he  cares  nothing  about  arts  except  in  the  making  of  beauti- 
ful things? — A.  No. 

Q.  He  thinks  to  make  money  before  all  things? — A.  Yes. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Would  you  sa}T  that  the  Filipinos  were  incapable  of  serving  as 
middlemen,  Mr.  Ashton?  I recited  that  argument  the  other  day  and 
was  told  that  it  was  not  such  a great  many  years  since  they  actually  did 
serve  as  middlemen,  when  they  were  not  compelled  to  compete  with 
the  Chinese;  that  they  sold  everything  that  the  Chinaman  does  now, 
and  the  fact  that  the  Chinese  were  doing  it  was  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
Filipinos  could  not  live  and  compete  with  the  Chinese. — A.  I know 
that  Bonifacio  liobalo  made  a mistake  on  just  those  lines.  He  deter- 
mined to  get  this  business  of  piece  goods  out  of  the  hands  of  the  Chi- 
nese and  into  the  hands  of  the  natives,  and  I know  that  it  was  quite  a 
failure.  He  gave  them  the  support  of  money,  but  it  didn’t  succeed. 

Q.  And  the  additional  statement  was  made  that  if  the  Chinese  wrere 
shut  out  little  by  little  of  the  larger  towns  here,  it  would  be  worth 
the  while  of  Europeans  and  Americans  to  run  the  business  here,  and 
that  that  business  would  eventually  fall  into  their  hands.  What  do 
you  say  to  that? — A.  These  Chinamen  we  deal  with  generally  will 
want  credit  on  the  goods  they  purchase;  they  take  them  into  the 
provinces,  and  they  sell  them  in  such  provinces  as  Bulacan,  Cavite, 
Camarines,  Ilocos,  and  Cebu,  to  one  of  their  customers  who  owes 
them  a little  money — $200  or  $300. 

Q.  The  question  is  whether,  if  they  were  gradually  cut  off,  there 
would  be  business  for  white  men,  in  a small  way,  in  these  same  pro- 
vincial towns? — A.  And  the  answer  is  that  if  you  wipe  the  slate  out 
and  begin  all  over  again,  it  is  not  beyond  the  bounds  of  possibility  that 
that  might  happen,  but  in  the  interregnum,  which  would  be  rather 
long,  it  would  cause  considerable  inconvenience  to  business. 

Q.  Are  theVe  any  Jew  peddlers  here,  Mr.  Ashton? — A.  Yes;  jew- 
elry, mostly — Armenians. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Are  they  Jew  merchants,  or  are  they  simply  peddlers? — A. 
There  are  a few,  but  they  do  not  call  themselves  Jews.  I believe  the 
American  Commercial  Company  is  composed  entirely  and  exclusively 
of  Jewish  interests. 

Q.  What  is  your  idea  as  to  the  establishment  here  of  a court  such  as  we 
have  in  the  United  States.  In  the  United  States,  you  know,  we  call  it  the 


346 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


“Federal  court”— that  is,  the  United  States  court,  which  is  different 
from  the  State  courts,  in  which  the  foreigner  has  the  right  to  sue  and 
be  sued.  That  is  the  distinctive  difference  between  the  United  States 
system  and  the  State  system.  The  States  all  have  their  courts  and  the 
United  States  has  its  courts.  Now,  in  the  United  States  courts  the  for- 
eigner or  a man  living  in  a different  State  has  a right  to  bring  his 
action,  and  if  he  is  sued  in  a State  court  he  can  have  the  action  trans- 
ferred to  the  Federal  court.  That  is  done  in  order  to  avoid  all  pos- 
sible local  prejudice,  giving  the  foreigner  a tribunal  reserved  for  him 
practically.  Now,  how  would  it  do  to  establish  courts  of  that  kind 
here? — A.  With  American  magistrates? 

Q.  With  American  judges. — A.  That  would  certainly,  to  my  way  of 
thinking,  be  the  proper  thing. 

Q.  Has  there  been  any  talk  among  the  foreigners  here — the  mer- 
cantile people — around  the  offices,  about  the  propriety  of  having  a court 
different  from  the  Filipino  courts? — A.  I don't  think  anybody  has 
realized  that  in  case  they  have  a lawsuit  they  will  have  to  be  tried  by 
a Filipino  judge  and  jury.  I don't  think  it  has  been  realized. 

Q.  Hasn’t  it  been  talked  of  ? — A.  I haven’t  heard  it. 

Q.  Would  you  be  in  favor  of  having  a court  of  the  kind  I have 
described? — A.  Yes,  with  American  magistrates. 

Q.  Using  the  English  language  and  not  Spanish? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Having  interpreters,  of  course,  and  all  that? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  let  English  be  the  language  of  the  court?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  And  allow  these  Filipino  courts  to  go  on  as  the}"  go  now?— A. 
Yes. 

Q.  You  think  that  would  satisfy  the  foreign  community  and  that 
they  would  be  in  favor  of  it  ? — A.  I don't  think  that  the  foreign  com- 
munity have  realized  that  should  they  have  a case  it  would  be  tried 
by  a Filipino  court. 

By  Mr.  Mac  Arthur: 

Q.  Do  vou  import  cotton  goods,  piece  goods,  machinerv,  etc.  ? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  Prior  to  the  coming  of  the  Americans  and  prior  to  the  Filipino 
outbreak  against  the  Spaniards  was  there  any  tendency  toward  an 
increase  of  consumption  of  foreign  goods,  or  was  it  about  stable  in 
quantity? — A.  Oh,  no;  it  has  been  steadily  growing.  One  year  it 
might  fall  off'  a little  for  certain  causes,  but  the  increase  has  been 
steadily  growing,  both  exports  and  imports. 

Q.  Won’t  there  be  an  increased  demand  for  goods  owing  to  the 
increase  of  enterprises  and  industry  in  the  provinces? — A.  Enter- 
prises and  industry  in  the  provinces  and  the  opening  up  of  certain 
new  industries,  such  as  copra.  For  instance,  ten  years  ago  there  wasn't 
a picul  sent  out.  and  now  the  exportation  of  copra  in  normal  times  is 
about  $4,000,000. 

Q.  Which  means  a corresponding  increase  in  the  amount  of  im- 
ports?—A.  Yes. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  under  a changed  system  of  government  and 
with  the  introduction  of  modern  ideas  in  the  country  the  amount  of 
imports  of  the  country  of  foreign  goods  will  very  greatly  or  mate- 
rially increase? — A.  They  will  very  materially  increase. 

Q.  Of  what  nature  will  that  increase  be;  of  what  kind? — A.  Of 
every  possible  description. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


347 


Q.  Machinery  and  piece  goods? — A.  Machinery  and  piece  goods. 
Everything  that  you  can  mention.  It  won’t  be  one  or  two;  it  will  be 
everything. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Has  the  condition  of  the  currency,  the  silver  currency,  favorably 
affected  business?- — A.  It  has  given  a great  stimulus  to  exports  and 
imports.  It  has  given  a larger  consumption  of  imports. 

Q.  The  country,  then,  has  been  prosperous  under  this  silver  basis? — 
A.  Certainly. 

By  Professor  'Worcester: 

Q.  What  has  been  the  effect  of  the  existing  tariff  on  the  import 
business;  the  tariff  and  charges,  the  custom-house  duties,  on  the  import 
business? — A.  Of  course  there  is  no  doubt  but  that  the  cheaper  you 
can  let  the  article  down  the  more  consumption  there  is  for  it.  I con- 
sider, although  1 am  an  importer,  that  it  is  easier  for  the  Government 
to  collect  their  money  from  duties,  so  long  as  they  take  care  that  every- 
body pays,  than  by  direct  taxation,  for  a custom-house  duty'  is  paid  by 
everybody.  It  is  the  easiest  way'  of  collecting  the  duty. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  DR.  FRANK  S.  BOURNS. 

Manila,  July  29,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby,  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr.  MacArthur. 

FrankS.  Bourns,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  commissioners, 
stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  yTou  please  give  us  yrour  name  and  residence? — A.  Frank  S. 
Bourns,  Atlanta,  Ga. 

Q.  And  occupation? — A.  Practising  physician  and  surgeon. 

Q.  Have  y'ou  any  position  in  the  army  ? — A.  I have  been  since  the 
28th  of  Mayr,  1898,  in  the  service  of  the  volunteer  army'  as  chief  sur- 
geon with  the  rank  of  major. 

Q.  When  did  yrou  arrive  in  Manila? — A.  With  the  second  expedi- 
tion, which  arrived  in  Manila  the  16th  of  July',  1898. 

Q.  And  before  that  time  y'ou  had  been  in  these  islands? — A.  Yes, 
sir;  I had  been  here  twice  previously'. 

Q.  M ill  y'ou  please  tell  us  when? — A.  The  first  time  I arrived  here 
in  August,  1887,  remaining  here  until  July,  1888.  The  second  time 
I arrived  here  in  the  first  part  of  September,  1890,  and  I remained 
here  until  December,  1892. 

Q.  What  was  y’our  purpose  in  coming  to  the  islands? — A.  On  both 
occasions?  1 came  the  first  time  with  a large  party  for  the  purpose 
of  scientific  work  in  zoology,  and  especially  in  the  line  of  ornithology; 
and  the  second  time  two  of  us,  both  members  of  the  previous  expedi- 
tion, Professor  Worcester  and  I,  came  here  with  the  same  object. 

Q.  What  portions  of  the  islands  did  y'ou  visit? — A.  On  both  occa- 
sions we  visited  almost  every  island  of  any  importance  in  the  group. 
The  only'  two  large  islands  which  we  did  not  visit  were  Leyte  and 
Bohol.  On  the  first  trip  we  made  the  return  trip  among  all  the  islands 


348 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


except  these  two.  The  second  trip  this  was  repeated,  and  many  of 
the  islands  we  visited  the  second  and  some  of  them  the  third  time. 

Q.  In  general,  what  were  you  doing  all  that  time  ? — A.  "We  were  pur- 
suing our  work,  the  collection  of  the  birds  and  mammals  of  the  islands, 
and  in  order  to  make  this  collection  as  complete  as  possible  we  were 
compelled  almost  always  to  go  into  the  interior  of  the  country,  away 
frequently  from  the  settled  localities,  going  back  into  the  smaller  vil- 
lages, and  sometimes  even  away  from  the  villages  into  the  interior 
among  the  savages.  Sometimes  we  would  visit  a single  part  of  a given 
island  and  sometimes  two  or  three  parts  of  the  same  island  to  gain 
access  to  country  of  a different  character. 

Q.  Did  you  spend  the  greater  portion  of  the  time  in  any  one  island, 
or  more  in  one  island  than  in  another;  if  so,  which? — A.  We  usually 
spent  about  a month  upon  each  island,  sometimes  a longer  time;  as, 
for  instance,  in  the  island  of  Mindoro,  the  island  of  Jolo,  and  Tawi- 
tawi.  Those  are  the  only  ones,  I think,  in  which  we  spent  a greater 
time  than  a month. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Paragua? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Will  you  state  the  islands  you  visited,  and  state,  in  general,  your 
mode  of  life  in  those  islands? — A.  We,  of  course,  visited  first  Luzon, 
Mindoro,  Panay,  the  small  island  of  Guimaras  adjacent  to  Panay.  Negros, 
Cebu,  and  the  small  island  of  Sequijor,  to  the  south  of  Cebu;  Samar, 
Masbate,  Marinduque,  a small  Tagalog  island  to  the  south  of  Luzon; 
Mindanao  at  Zamboanga,  and  a small  island  adjacent  to  Zamboanga;  the 
islands  of  Basilan,  Jolo.  Tawi-tawi,  Palawan,  the  Calamianes  Islands, 
and  in  our  voyages  we  touched  at  some  smaller  islands  where  we  did 
not  stop, such  as  Cuyos  in  the  Mindoro  Sea,  Cagayan  de  Jolo,  Balabae, 
and  the  small  places  in  the  Sulu  Archipelago,  Siassi  and  Bongao.  Our 
mode  of  life  was  the  usual  life  of  travelers  in  these  islands  engaged 
in  our  kind  of  work.  We  would  usually  land  at  the  principal  town 
where  the  mail  steamer  stopped,  if  the  mail  steamer  did  stop  at  such 
a place,  or  we  would  land  in  small  boats  from  some  other  island.  If 
we  found  the  adjacent  country  suitable  for  our  work  we  would  rent 
a house  in  that  town,  using  that  as  headquarters,  and  make  daily 
excursions  into  the  surrounding  country,  taking  with  us  guides  and 
carriers  for  our  work.  If  the  country  was  not  suitable,  we  would 
make  inquiries  in  regard  to  the  locality  in  which  we  thought  we 
could  work,  and  by  whatever  transportation  was  available,  whether 
by  animals  or  by  boat,  or  by  using  coolies  as  carriers,  transport  our 
stock  of  baggage  to  that  locality,  take  a house  already  constructed,  or 
perhaps  build  our  own  house,  and  remain  there  three,  or  four,  or  six 
weeks,  as  the  case  might  demand.  In  this  way  we  were  brought  in 
contact  with  almost  every  element  among  the  people,  the  better 
educated  and  more  intelligent  ones  in  the  towns  and  villages,  likewise 
the  poorer  people  of  the  country,  and  also  the  savages  of  the  interior. 

Q.  Did  you,  in  general,  find  the  people  friendly? — A.  Yes;  quite  so. 
We  were,  however,  enabled  to  go  to  many  places  that  were  considered 
dangerous  by  the  Spaniards,  we,  being,  as  they  called  us,  “English- 
men,’' because  we  spoke  English,  so  that  we  could  go  into  any  region 
without  very  great  danger,  although  many  times  we  went  against  the 
advice  of  the  Spanish  authorities.  We  depended  upon  our  belief  that 
we  would  be  safe  among  any  people  here  if  we  followed  out  our 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


349 


polic-v  of  treatment  of  the  natives,  dealing  with  them  justly,  and  at 
the  same  time  firmly. 

Q.  Then,  when  you  came  here  as  a medical  officer,  what  were  your 
duties? — A.  When  I first  came  here  I was  serving  as  a staff  officer, 
not  doing  medical  work.  When  I came  out  I was  appointed  as  a staff 
officer  to  General  Merritt.  In  San  Francisco  he  ordered  me  to  accom- 
pany General  Greene  as  a member  of  his  staff  on  the  second  expedi- 
tion. On  my  arrival  here  General  Anderson  took  me  for  a few  days 
and  held  me  in  Cavite. 

Q.  What  time  was  that? — A.  From  the  16th  of  July  up  to  about 
the  28th;  but  as  soon  as  General  Merritt  arrived  General  Greene  asked 
that  I be  returned  to  his  staff.  I served  with  General  Greene  from 
that  time  until  the  general  left  the  Philippines,  about  the  28th  or  29th 
of  August. 

Q.  Were  you  performing  distinctly  medical  duties,  or  other  duties  ? — 
A.  I was  performing  no  medical  duties  up  to  that  time,  except  inci- 
dentally treating  the  members  of  the  staff. 

Q.  Then  you  were  furnishing  information  or  acting  as  interpreter? — 
A.  1 was  being  utilized  in  the  many  ways  in  which  a man  who  could 
speak  the  language  or  understood  the  people  would  lie.  I was  used 
as  interpreter,  and  translated  many  papers  and  documents  which 
passed  between  the  American  authorities  and  the  insurgent  authori- 
ties at  that  time.  1 was  also  frequently  sent  on  excursions  where  again 
I acted  as  an  interpreter  and  in  an  advisory  capacity.  During  our 
residence  in  Camp  Dewey,  for  instance,  questions  arising  between  the 
natives  and  the  soldiers  were  referred  to  me  for  investigation  and 
report  to  the  general,  and  he  would  then  take  such  action  as  seemed 
necessary  in  the  case.  On  the  day  we  came  into  Manila,  the  13th  of 
August,  1 was  instructed  by  orders  to  accompany  the  general  as  a 
member  of  his  staff.  I was  with  him  in  the  trenches  and  in  the 
advance  on  Manila.  When  we  arrived  here  General  Greene,  his 
adjutant,  and  I went  into  the  walled  city,  where  we  found  Lieutenant- 
Colonel  Whittier,  of  General  Merritt’s  staff.  These  two  officers  then 
made  the  demand  of  the  Spanish  officials,  the  Acting  Governor-Gen- 
eral Juandez,  for  the  surrender  of  the  city  and  the  laying  down  of 
the  arms  of  all  the  troops.  In  this  conference  I acted  as  interpreter. 
The  succeeding  day  the  articles  of  capitulation  were  elaborated.  Gen- 
eral Merritt  had  drawn  up  a rough  draft,  and  the  Spanish  Governor- 
General  and  he  signed  it.  A joint  commission  made  over  the  elabora- 
tion of  this  draft.  The  Spanish  commission  had  an  interpreter  of 
its  own,  and  I served  as  the  interpreter  of  the  American  commission. 

Q.  Then  you  assisted  in  preparing  that  draft? — A.  No,  sir.  I was 
simply  present  as  an  interpreter,  and,  of  course,  was  aware  of  all  that 
passed. 

Q.  And  after  that  what  was  your  position? — A.  For  a few  days 
after  General  Greene  left  I was  doing  double  duty,  in  the  provost  court, 
and  as  secretary  for  the  collector  of  customs,  Lieutenant-Colonel 
Whittier.  Then  on  the  10th  of  September,  1898,  General  Otis  ordered 
the  organization  of  a health  department  for  the  city  of  Manila  and  its 
suburbs,  and  I was  assigned  to  the  board  by  General  Otis,  and  by 
General  Hughes  was  named  as  chief  of  the  board. 

Q.  You  are  the  chief  of  the  medical  board? — A.  Yes,  sir;  chief 
medical  officer  of  the  city  of  Manila  in  a civil  capacity. 

Q.  Then  from  that  time  until  recently  you  have  had  charge  of  the 
health  department? — A.  1 have  been  in  charge  of  the  health  depart- 


850 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


ment  up  to  to-day,  when  I received  my  orders  relieving  me  from 
this  department;  but  since  the  8th  of  June  I have  been  away  from 
the  city. 

Q.  Yes;  I will  come  to  that  in  a minute.  In  addition  to  performing 
the  duties  of  health  officer,  if  it  is  proper  to  state  them,  what  other 
duties  did  you  perform ? — A.  After  I had  organized  the  health  depart- 
ment a considerable  amount  of  my  time  began  to  be  taken  up  with 
outside  matters.  General  Hughes  first  began  to  use  me  in  various 
ways,  treating  with  the  Filipinos,  keeping  track  of  what  was  going 
on  in  the  city  amongst  the  natives  and  also  outside  of  the  city  in  the 
insurgent  lines.  It  happened  that  in  the  organization  of  the  board  of 
health  a number  of  the  men  who  were  taken  in,  in  one  capacity  or 
another,  were  men  of  more  or  less  influence  among  the  insurgents  or 
among  the  Filipino  people.  They  were  doctors,  some  of  whom  had 
obtained  their  education  in  Europe,  men  of  education  and  intelligence. 
Some  of  them  were  even  at  that  time  holding  important  positions  in 
the  Malolos  government.  In  my  professional  relations  with  them  I, 
of  course,  became  well  acquainted  with  them,  and  before  long  found 
that  I was  more  or  less  involved  in  the  political  situation.  General 
Hughes  took  advantage  of  this  fact  and  very  frequently  assigned  to 
me  work  entirely  foreign  to  medical  work,  such  as  the  investigation 
of  this  report,  or  that  report,  in  regard  to  what  the  insurgents 
were  doing,  either  outside  of  the  city  or  in  the  formation  of  their  vari- 
ous secret  societies  and  territorial  militia,  as  they  called  it,  in  the 
city.  He  also  used  me  in  other  ways  in  his  administrative  work.  For 
instance,  he  would  use  me  to  ascertain  the  status  of  a given  public 
institution  here,  such  as  the  Leper  Hospital,  or  the  Insane  Asylum, 
or  the  Hospital  of  San  Juan  de  Dios.  He  would  ask  me  to  get  all  the 
facts  I could  in  regard  to  such  an  institution  and  submit  them  to  him, 
so  that  he  might  make  the  necessary  disposition.  Along  in  November, 
when  I had  become  better  acquainted  with  most  of  the  leading  Fili- 
pinos in  the  city^,  they  began  to  come  to  me  very  frequently  at  my 
office  in  the  morning,  ostensibly  to  consult  on  medical  matters,  but, 
as  a matter  of  fact,  to  discuss  the  political  situation  as  to  what  was 
going  on.  This  has  kept  up  until  the  present  time. 

Q.  What  were  your  relations  with  the  major-general  commanding  ? — 
A.  During  the  first  months — September  and  October — the  major- 
general  occasionally  sent  for  me,  sometimes  to  execute  some  commis- 
sion with  some  one  of  the  Filipinos  here,  or  to  ask  of  me  what  was 
taking  place  in  the  city,  he  knowing  that  I was  associated  with  these 
Filipinos.  I recall  that  he  sent  for  me  each  time  when  he  removed 
the  insurgents  from  the  city.  We  expected  some  friction  at  the  time, 
or  rather  were  fearful  of  it,  not  knowing  whether  they  would  leave. 
He  sent  for  me  to  ask  what  their  feeling  was  and  to  ask  if  they  would 
leave  without  fighting.  But  he  was  determined  that  they  should  move 
out,  though,  of  course,  he  wished  to  avoid  a conflict  if  it  was  possible 
to  do  so.  As  time  went  on  he  would  send  for  me  with  greater  fre- 
quency. Later  on  he  gave  me  instructions  to  report  to  him  whenever 
I discovered  anything  of  interest.  Up  to  this  time  I had  been  report- 
ing all  matters  of  importance  to  our  officers  and  General  Hughes,  and 
he  would  directly  communicate  what  I had  learned  to  General  Otis; 
but  in  December,  I think  it  was,  he  gave  the  instructions  that  I have 
mentioned.  This  was  probably  because  there  had  been  so  much  diffi- 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


351 

culty  in  organizing  anything  in  the  way  of  a secret  service  here.  The 
Filipino  secret  societies  had  created  here  in  the  city  what  amounted 
to  a reign  of  terror.  The  people  were  afraid  to  speak  to,  and  afraid 
of  having  anything  to  do  with,  Americans  for  fear  they  would  be 
denounced  as  American  sympathizers,  and  there  existed  here  literally 
a season  of  terrorism.  1 was  enabled  through  my  personal  acquaint- 
ance with  many  of  the  people,  especially  those  in  the  lower  and  middle 
classes,  to  gain  a good  deal  of  information  not  otherwise  obtainable, 
and  finally  the  general  gave  me  permission  to  use  such  funds  as  might 
be  necessary  to  obtain  information  in  regard  to  the  doings  of  the  insur- 
gents in  and  out  of  the  city. 

From  December  15  to  January  15  I was  confined  to  my  quarters 
with  typhoid  fever.  I returned  to  full  duty  about  the  20th  of  January, 
at  the  time  when  the  relations  between  the  American  authorities  and 
the  Filipinos  were  very  much  strained. 

After  the  outbreak  of  hostilities  I succeeded  in  establishing  a little 
spy  system,  by  which  we  were  enabled  to  keep  track,  especially  in  the 
city,  of  everything  that  was  going  on  on  the  insurgent  line,  and  occa- 
sionally we  could  get  a man  through  their  lines  and  find  out  about  the 
disposition  of  their  troops  and  what  they  were  doing  there.  Inciden- 
tally, a great  deal  of  information  came  to  me,  not  through  the  regu- 
larly employed  spies,  but  through  Filipinos  with  whom  I had  personal 
relations.  I found  among  these  people  a great  disinclination  to  talk 
through  an  interpreter,  because  they  lacked  confidence  in  the  inter- 
preter. They  would  say  things  directly  that  they  would  not  say 
through  an  interpreter,  and  many  of  the  Filipinos  who  had  means  of 
finding  out  what  was  taking  place  outside  of  the  lines  or  in  the  city 
would  come  to  me  directly  and  impart  information,  knowing  that  they 
would  not  he  found  out.  Of  course  all  of  this  information  was  duly 
given  over  to  General  Hughes  or  to  General  Otis. 

Q.  After  a time — recently — you  went  south.  Will  you  tell  us  where 
you  went? — A.  I went  from  here  to  Iloilo  on  the  8th  of  June.  Two 
days  after  my  arrival,  on  account  of  the  assassination  of  a promi- 
nent Filipino  in  Cebu,  the  military  commander  asked  for  some  troops, 
and  General  Hughes  sent  me  over  with  this  battalion  of  troops  to 
report  to  him  in  regard  to  the  situation  in  Cebu.  After  that  I went 
to  the  east  coast  of  Negros,  visiting  San  Carlos,  Bais,  Dumaguete,  and 
from  there  running  along  the  coast  of  Sequijor,  a small  island  of 
about  30,000  inhabitants,  not  yet  occupied  by  our  troops.  I returned 
to  Negros  and  there  visited  the  west  coast,  and  also  the  towns  of 
Silav,  Talisay,  and  Bacolod.  Two  of  these  towns  were  occupied  by 
our  troops. 

Q.  Then  when  did  you  return  to  Manila  ? — A.  I returned  to  Manila 
on  the  9th  of  July. 

Q.  And  afterwards  you  went  south  again  ? — A.  On  the  12th  I started 
south  for  Jolo,  being  ordered  to  accompany  General  Bates.  I visited 
Jolo,  being  there  some  five  days,  I think,  and  then  returned  to  Manila 
by  Cebu,  stopping  over  a day  in  Cebu. 

Q.  From  the  account  you  have  given  us,  Doctor,  of  your  various 
services  it  follows  that  you  have  very  large  information  as  to  the  charac- 
ter and  condition  of  these  people,  does  it  not? — A.  I think  so,  sir,  inas- 
much as  I have  always  liked  to  talk  with  the  people  wherever  I have 
been,  and  have  always  made  it  my  habit  to  do  so,  when  we  were  here  on 


352 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


our  former  trips  and  during  the  past  year.  I have  found  the  natives, 
as  a rule,  very  willing  to  talk  whenever  they  found  anyone  who  could 
speak  their  language,  sometimes  very  glad  to  do  so. 

Q.  What  can  you  say  to  us,  then,  as  to  the  general  character  of  these 
people,  and  as  to  their  disposition  toward  the  United  States,  and  as  to 
their  capacity  for  self-government? — A.  I can  best  answer  that  ques- 
tion by  stating  what  my  beliefs  have  always  been  in  regard  to  the 
people  here  in  the  islands.  The  great  masses  of  the  people  here  are 
ignorant.  They  have  a very  vague  idea  either  of  independence  or 
liberty  as  such.  I think  it  is  more  or  less  a matter  of  indifference  to 
them  what  their  government  is  so  long  as  it  is  not  oppressive,  so  long 
as  it  allows  them  to  pursue  their  daily  work  undisturbed  and  to  support 
their  families. 

The  second  class,  the  highly  educated  class,  the  wealthy  class,  I think 
are  clearly  desirous  of  peace  here — that  is,  those  who  have  money — 
because  they  wish  to  continue  in  their  business  and  make  more  money; 
also  those  of  education,  especially  those  who  have  traveled,  because 
they  appreciate  the  fact  that  an  American  government  here  would  be 
greatly  to  the  benefit  of  the  country,  and  they  know  that  they  them- 
selves are  not  as  yet  fitted  for  self-government.  The  middle  class  is 
the  class  that  is  opposed  to  us;  it  has  been  in  the  past  and  is  so  to-day. 
This  class  is  made  up  at  the  present  time  of  the  military  leaders,  and, 
to  a considerable  extent,  of  the  class  known  under  the  Spanish  rule  as 
the  empleados  del  gobierno  (employees  of  the  government),  salaried 
men  who  had  positions  paying  them  a greater  or  less  salary,  their  work 
being  rather  light  and  their  positions  affording  them  an  opportunity  to 
make  more  or  less  money  in  addition  to  their  salaries.  In  this  middle 
class,  I think,  are  found  to-day  our  greatest  opponents,  those  most 
opposed  to  American  government  in  these  islands,  andathose  who 
declare  that  the  Filipinos  are  to-day  fitted  for  self-government. 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion  as  to  whether  they  are  fitted  for  self- 
government  I mean  for  independence? — A.  I don’t  believe  they  are 
to-day  fit  for  independence.  I never  have  believed  it.  1 have  pub- 
licly stated  1 did  not  believe  they  were  to-day  fit  for  self-government, 
and  I think  the  events  of  the  past  few  months  in  places  where  they 
have  had  practical  control  has  demonstrated  that  my  opinion  is  correct. 

Q.  What  would  be  the  effect.  Doctor,  in  vour  opinion,  if  the  United 
States -were  to  move  away  from  here,  and  turn  the  government  over 
to  the  Filipinos,  giving  them  absolute  independence? — -A.  Not  con- 
sidering the  intervention  of  foreign  powers,  but  considering  that  they 
would  be  left  to  themselves,  I am  confident  that  within  a short  space 
of  time,  sav  a few  months,  there  would  be  a condition  of  anarchy  exist- 
ing here. 

Q.  Are  you  acquainted  with  the  opinions  of  foreigners  with  regard 
to  current  events,  the  English  and  Germans? — A.  Yes;  I have  talked 
with  them  here  in  Manila,  Iloilo,  and  Cebu,  and  have  seen 

Q.  What  position  do  they  occupy  in  regard  to  American  sover 
eignty — I mean  as  to  whether  they  prefer  that  we  should  establish  a 
government  here  or  turn  it  over  to  the  Filipinos? — A.  Oh.  there  is  no 
question  as  to  what  their  opinion  is  on  that  subject.  They  are  con- 
vinced themselves  that  their  business  interests  and  their  capital  would 
not  be  safe. 

Q.  And  you  share  that  opinion?- — A.  I do;  yes,  sir. 

Q.  Then  what  form  of  government  would  you  recommend  for  the 


KEPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


353 


islands  in  connection  with  the  exercise  of  our  sovereignty? — A.  With- 
out going  into  details,  it  is  my  belief  that  a government  must  be  estab- 
lished here  which  permits  of  full  American  control  where  it  is  neces- 
sary to  exercise  it.  There  are  many  among  the  Filipinos  who  can  be 
given  positions  of  greater  or  less  responsibility,  and  all  of  the  minor 
offices  can  undoubtedly  be  satisfactorily  filled  by  Filipinos.  I believe 
that  they  are  capable  of  very  great  advancement.  The  race  is  quick 
to  learn  and  has  fairly  good  natural  ability,  but  such  a class  will  have 
to  be  educated  before  great  responsibility  can  be  placed  in  their  hands. 
The  entire  direction  of  the  general  government,  in  my  opinion,  should 
remain  in  the  hands  of  the  United  States  until  such  time  as  they  can 
demonstrate  their  fitness  for  assuming  greater  responsibilities.  When 
that  time  will  be  it  is  difficult  to  state.  I myself  believe  it  will  be 
at  least  a generation  from  now,  probably  more. 

Q.  Is  it  your  opinion  that  the  Filipinos  should  be  given  all  public 
employment  for  which  they  are  capable  ? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  In  the  organization  of  a civil  government  here  wouldyou  give  any 
Filipino  a prominent  position? — A.  If  there  can  be  found  a Filipino 
fitted  by  education  and  training  for  a post  of  even  considerable  responsi- 
bility, I believe  that  it  would  be  safe  to  place  that  man  in  that  office. 

Q.  You  think  the  idea  of  exploiting  this  country  for  the  benefit  of 
adventurous  Americans  ought  to  be  discouraged  ? — A.  Entirely. 

Q.  If  a civil  government  were  established  here,  what  do  you  say, 
assuming  tnat,  for  example,  there  would  be  a governor,  and  perhaps 
some  secretaries  in  the  various  departments,  such  as  we  have  at  home — 
what  would  you  say  as  to  filling  some  of  those  offices  with  Filipinos  ? — 
A.  And  how  many  of  such  offices  could  be  supposed  to  be  in  existence? 

Q.  Well,  the  offices,  of  course,  would  be  innumerable,  almost,  in  the 
islands;  but,  beginning  at  the  beginning,  suppose  a civil  governor 
were  appointed,  he  would  want  a board  of  secretaries — of  the  interior, 
public  health,  treasury,  attorney -general,  etc. ; do  you  believe  that 
those  offices  ought  to  be  filled  exclusively  by  Americans  or  by  a mix- 
ture of  Filipinos  and  Americans? — A.  1 believe  that  it  would  be  safe 
to  place  one  or  two  or  three  Filipinos  in  such  positions,  if  suitable  men 
could  be  found  at  the  present  time.  As  a matter  of  fact,  in  the  estab- 
lishment of  the  courts  many  of  the  most  able  Filipinos  are  already 
employed,  which  reduces  the  number  of  available  men  to  a very  small 
number.  The  problem  would,  I think,  be  rather  difficult  under  exist- 
ing conditions. 

Q.  As  far  as  that  is  concerned,  of  course,  those  men  could  be  trans- 
ferred?— A.  If  those  men  could  be  transferred,  I believe  there  are 
men  here  capable  of  filling  such  positions. 

Q.  You  think  the  most  reliable  men  here  are  already  in  the  courts? — 
A.  Yes  ; there  are  still  two  or  three  Filipinos  of  ability  and  integrity 
in  the  city  within  command. 

Q.  Don’t  you  think,  Doctor,  that  the  occasion  always  produces  the 
man;  isn’t  that  an  axiom  in  history? — A.  It  certainly  does  in  very 
many  cases.  My  idea  in  regard  to  the  employment  of  Filipinos  here 
is  that  if  they  had  associated  with  them  a sufficient  number  of  Amer- 
icans who  are  honorable  and  upright  in  their  dealings,  there  would  be 
a very  strong  tendency  on  the  part  of  the  Filipinos  to  do  as  their  col- 
leagues do.  They  are  natural  imitators ; it  is  a racial  characteristic, 
and,  in  my  opinion,  if  they  saw  that  their  chief  or  their  colleagues 
were  not  just  in  his  or  their  administration,  and  were  not  entirely 
r C 23 


354 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


honest,  there  would  be  a tendency  to  follow  in  his  and  their  footsteps. 
This  applies  not  only  to  officers  of  equal  standing,  but  always  with 
greater  force  to  subordinates  in  the  different  departments. 

Q.  If  we  undertook  to  organize  an  advisory  council,  with  repre- 
sentatives from  each  one  of  the  important  islands,  could  we  find  people 
competent  to  come  here  and  discharge  those  duties? — A.  We  could 
find  suitable  men  in  several  of  the  important  islands.  I am  doubtful 
about  being  able  to  find  men  in  some  of  the  islands  of  sufficient  educa- 
tion and  experience  to  be  of  any  great  value  in  such  a body. 

Q.  Well,  now,  Doctor,  taking  the  islands  and  naming  them  as  you 
go  along,  will  you  tell  us  what  you  think  about  each  one  of  them,  in 
regard  to  the  form  of  government  which  you  think  ought  to  be  given 
it  and  the  capacity  of  the  individuals  residing  there  to  carry  out  such 
a government?  Mention,  if  you  please,  any  islands  that  }Tou  choose, 
and  give  us,  seriatim,  your  opinion  as  to  what  might  be  done  for  those 
islands  in  the  way  of  government,  and  whether  capable  men  can  be 
found  there  to  do  the  work,  and  whether  those  men  would  be  faithful. 
Take  the  island  of  Negros,  that  you  have  lately  visited. — A.  Taking 
the  islands  as  such:  Negros,  Cebu,  Panay,  and  the  island  of  Luzon  are 
sufficiently  advanced  so  that  there  could  be  found  men  able  to  carry 
out  this  proposed  work.  I do  not  mean  by  that  putting  the  entire 
government  in  their  hands,  because  I do  not  believe  that  there  is  an 
island  in  the  archipelago  where  the  entire  government  can  be  placed, 
without  restrictions,  in  the  hands  of  the  natives. 

Q.  Plainly,  you  believe  the  governor  ought  to  be  an  American  ? — 
A.  I do  most  decidedly,  and  the  government  should  be  of  such  a 
nature  as  would  allow  the  American  governor  to  exercise  control  if  it 
became  necessary. 

Q.  And  that  relation  might  be  01  might  not  be  permanent? — A. 
That  relation  might  be  or  might  not  be  permanent,  but,  in  my  opin- 
ion, would  have  to  continue  for  a number  of  years. 

Q.  Do  you  see  any  possibility — you  know,  t>f  course,  about  what 
we  have  done,  and  you  know  about  establishing  this  constitution,  and 
I presume  you  are  perfectly  familiar  with  it? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  1 mean  the  constitution  of  Negros? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  In  your  opinion,  would  it  be  possible  to  carry  out  that  scheme 
in  regard  to  Negros? — A.  You  mean  the  scheme  of  establishing  a gov- 
ernment within  the  lines  of  this  constitution  ( 

Q.  1 mean  the  scheme  of  government  as  proposed  for  the  island  of 
Negros? — A.  No,  sir;  I do  not  believe  that  it  would  be  a success. 

Q.  You  are  familiar  with  their  constitution,  are  you  not?  A.  Yes; 
I have  read  it  over. 

Q.  We  want  to  know  whether  that  constitution  as  written  would  be 
adapted  to  the  people. — A.  No,  sir;  I do  not  believe  it  would  be. 

Q.  Give  us  your  reasons. — A.  I believed  at  the  time  it  was  giving 
them  altogether  too  much,  and  1 think  that  past  events  have  demon- 
strated that. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I would  like  to  ask  the  doctor  to  give  a statement  of  the  course 
of  events  from  the  time  the  commissioners  first  came  up  here  to  turn 
that  island  over — from  the  time  the  Negros  people  began  to  organize 
themselves.  That  would  demonstrate  the  points  you  propose  to 
bring  out. 

Q.  Doctor,  will  you  follow  out  that  suggestion? — A.  In  the  first 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


355 


place,  it  is  necessary  to  go  back  to  the  time  when  the  Negros  commis- 
sion presented  itself  here.  There  is  a fundamental  difference  in  the 
revolution  as  it  took  place  in  Negros  and  the  revolution  as  it  took 
place  here.  Here,  the  revolution  began  with  the  masses  of  the  people. 
It  began  not  as  a revolution  for  independence,  but  as  a protest  against 
abuses,  largely  the  abuses  of  the  monastic  orders.  It  was  in  1896  that 
the  first  disturbance  took  place  here,  speaking  of  recent  events, 
because,  of  course,  there  had  been  incipient  revolutions  in  times  past, 
usually  for  the  same  reason. 

During  1896  and  1897  and  up  to  the  autumn  of  1898  there  was  no 
disturbance  in  Negros.  They  remained  faithful  to  the  Spanish  Gov- 
ernment. After  the  capitulation  of  Manila,  and  after  Aguinaldo  and 
his  troops  had  gained  control  of  the  greater  part  of  Luzon  and  of 
some  of  the  adjacent  islands,  the  intelligent  men  of  Negros  took  mat- 
ters into  their  own  hands  and  rose  against  the  Spanish  Government  as 
it  then  existed  in  the  island  of  Negros.  It  was  practically  a bloodless 
revolution.  They  began  it  on  one  day  and  the  next  day  the  capital 
city  capitulated.  It  was  handed  over  to  the  revolutionary  party.  All 
of  this  moArement  had  been  directed  by  the  intelligent  men,  and  the 
masses  had  practically  nothing  to  do  with  the  direction  of  the  move- 
ment. A few  days  afterwards,  as  I learned  from  men  in  Negros,  they 
sent  over  to  the  captain  of  a man-of-war  in  Iloilo  Harbor  a document 
asking  for  American  protection. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  me  how  far  that  is  from  Negros?  You  say  they  sent 
over.- — A.  Flic  capital  city,  Bacolod,  is  about  two  and  one-half  hours’ 
to  three  hours’  run  by  steamer  from  Iloilo — about  25  miles.  That 
document,  I believe,  is  in  the  hands  of  our  officers  somewhere  at  the 
present  time.  I know  they  have  a copy  of  it  in  Negros.  They  have 
refused  to  have  anything  to  do  with  the  Tagalogs;  or,  rather,  when  the 
insurgent  army  attempted  to  go  there  thejr  did  not  permit  soldiers  to 
land  in  their  island,  claiming  that  they  would  look  after  their  own  affairs. 
They  elected  their  president,  also  their  congress  and  their  president  of 
the  congress,  and  the  various  officers  of  the  government,  using  as  a 
model  the  previously  existing  Spanish  government.  They  remained 
in  this  condition  up  to,  I think,  the  22d  of  February,  when  their  com- 
mission reached  Manila;  that  is  to  say,  after  the  outbreak  of  hostilities 
between  the  American  forces  and  the  insurgent  forces,  when  a com- 
mission consisting  of  four  men  came  to  Manila  to  ask  for  American 
protection  and  American  sovereignty.  Do  you  wish  me  to  go  into 
details  in  regard  to  that? 

Q.  I don’t  care  how  many  details  you  go  into. — A.  General  Otis 
sent  for  me.  He  said  that  this  commission  had  arrived,  and  he  wished 
me  to  get  together  a committee  of  leading  Filipinos  here  in  the  city 
and  get  it  to  meet  them.  Then  thejr  were  to  be  brought  on  shore  and 
given  every  consideration.  He  asked  me  to  get  as  the  head  of  this 
reception  committee  Mr.  Arellano,  also  Mr.  Legarda,  and  another 
Filipino  whom  I desired  to  add.  This  I succeeded  in  doing,  for  hav- 
ing obtained  the  consent  of  Mr.  Arellano,  it  was  very  easy  to  obtain 
the  consent  of  the  other  two  men,  because  they  followed  in  his  lead. 
They  were  somewhat  reluctant  to  act,  as  that  was  committing  them- 
selves out  and  out  to  the  American  party.  We  went  out  to  the  boat 
and  had  some  conversation  with  them  and  welcomed  them  here,  and 
told  them  that  we  were  very  glad  they  had  come.  Lieutenant  Sladen 
went  as  the  personal  representative  of  the  General,  and  that  afternoon 


366 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


they  were  brought  into  the  city  and  lodged  in  one  of  the  hotels. 
They  were  here  some  live  or  six  days,  during  which  time  several  con- 
ferences were  held  with  the  major-general  commanding,  and  were 
then  sent  back  to  Negros  on  board  of  a Government  boat  accompanied 
by  Colonel  Smith  and  a battalion  of  the  First  California  Volunteers. 
The  four  men  on  the  commission  were  Mr.  Lacson,  the  president  of 
Negros;  Mr.  Luzuriaga,  the  president  of  the  congress,  and  two 
younger  men.  They  stated  to  General  Otis  that  they  had  come  to 
offer  unconditional  adherence  to  the  American  Government;  that  they 
wished  for  the  protection  of  the  American  Government,  and  for  the 
assistance  of  the  American  Government  in  maintaining  peace  and 
order  in  the  island.  They  wished  also  some  American  troops  to  give 
them  protection,  especially  against  the  Tagalog  insurgents,  because 
the}'  apprehended  that  their  action  would  cause  much  hatred  among  the 
insurgents,  and  that  they  would  try  to  revenge  themselves  by  attack- 
ing the  island.  They  also  asked  to  be  allowed  to  organize  a small 
body  of  native  troops  and  have  them  armed  and  trained  by  American 
officers  and  put  under  the  control  of  officers  of  their  own. 

Q.  The  main  thing  for  us  to  find  out.  Doctor — 1 understand  that 
afterwards  they  made  a start,  after  they  had  been  up  here — now,  what 
I want  to  rind  out  practically  is,  how  that  thing  worked,  and  whether 
it  was  wise  for  the  major-general  to  supersede  that  rather  curious  gov- 
ernment they  got  up,  and  which,  of  course,  could  not  be  put  in  force 
except  by  act  of  Congress,  by  his  recent  order,  which,  I suppose,  you 
are  familiar  with.  Take  your  own  way  of  describing  events. — A. 
They  asked  for  American  intervention,  and  they  got  more  than  the}' 
wanted.  They  returned  and  organized  their  government,  retaining 
the  same  officers,  I think,  they  had  previously  elected  in  the  govern- 
ment. At  least  one  member  of  the  commission  stated  that  they  wished 
a considerable  amount  of  American  control  in  the  island;  he  thought 
it  was  necessary.  They  organized  that  government  on  the  basis  indi- 
cated, and  I have  no  personal  knowledge  of  what  took  place  there, 
except  from  report  that  came  here.  We  next  heard  that  there  had 
been  a desertion,  as  it  was  reported,  by  a part  of  this  native  body  of 
troops  which  had  been  organized;  but,  as  1 afterwards  learned  in  the 
island,  this  was  not  true.  The  men  who  deserted  with  their  arms  were 
the  men  on  the  police  force,  which  they  had  organized  before,  and  they 
had  taken  for  this  force  old  members  of  the  guardia  civil,  many  of 
them  Tagalogs,  and,  of  course,  some  Visayans,  whom  they  had  as  police, 
particularly  in  the  town  of  Silay,  where  the  desertion  took  place. 
These  men  deserted  and  joined  themselves  with  the  band  of  religious 
fanatics  known  as  the  Babaylanes.  This  is  a peculiar  religious  sect, 
headed  by  a man  known  as  Papa  Isio,  a man  who  a few  years  ago  was 
a laborer  on  one  of  the  plantations.  These  men  descended  from  the 
mountains  and  began  to  attack  the  plantations  nearest  the  mountains, 
first  robbing  and  later  burning  buildings.  Those  were  the  reports  that 
came  to  Manila.  It  was  not  a matter  of  political  significance  at  all. 

When  I got  to  the  island,  however,  this  movement  had  increased  to 
(piite  a marked  extent,  and  especially  in  one  section  of  Negros,  the 
west  central  part  of  the  island,  where  there  was  a great  deal  of  burn- 
ing and  lawlessness  going  on;  and  being  on  the  ground  I found  that 
the  movement  had  gone  much  further  than  had  been  reported  in 
Manila.  The  discontented  element  on  the  plantations  had  joined  with 
these  Babaylanes,  and  the  movement  was  then  in  reality  an  organized 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


357 


movement  against  the  existing  government  in  the  island — that  is  to 
say,  against  the  native  government,  because  the  American  authorities 
had  practically  allowed  the  native  officials  to  go  on  in  their  own  way, 
of  course,  advising  them  in  regard  to  certain  matters,  especially  in 
regard  to  the  drawing  up  of  their  constitution.  This  body  of  native 
troops  had  been  under  the  control  of  General  Smith.  I found  that  the 
abuses  that  had  existed  under  the  Spanish  Government  had  continued 
under  the  native  government,  especially  away  from  the  capital  city. 
They  did  not  have  the  whole  island  under  control  that  they  thought 
they  had,  or  that  we  thought  they  had,  at  least  some  of  us.  There 
were  also  outbreaks  in  one  or  two  localities  away  from  the  western 
side  where  the  capital  is  located,  one  at  Escalante,  where  Captain  Tilley, 
of  the  Signal  Corps,  was  killed,  another  down  at  Bais,  where  the  family 
of  a wealthy  planter  was  attacked  one  night  and  several  members  of  the 
family  severely  wounded.  This  was  because  there  existed  there  a law- 
less element  which  did  not  recognize  the  Negros  government,  and  as 
the  government  had  no  force  in  that  side  of  the  island,  they  were 
allowed  to  do  about  as  they  pleased.  To  better  illustrate  this  condi- 
tion, perhaps,  I should  state  one  or  two  instances  recited  to  me.  For 
example,  an  officer  of  the  native  police  force  in  riding  along  the  road 
met  a man  who  was  also  on  horseback  and  who  had  a better  saddle 
than  he  had,  and  he  compelled  him  to  exchange  saddles.  So,  too, 
sometimes  attacks  would  lie  made  on  plantations,  the  men  disguising 
themselves  as  Babavlanes,  when  in  reality  they  did  not  belong  to  that 
sect  at  all,  but  simply  took  this  way  of  robbing  and  throwing  the 
blame  upon  the  religious  fanatics.  Then  I found,  even  up  around  the 
capital  itself  and  some  of  the  adjacent  towns,  such  as  Talisay  and  Si  lay, 
a great  deal  of  discontent  with  the  existing  government. 

Q.  I want  to  get  from  your  testimony  a statement  of  the  reason  for 
our  superseding  the  expression  of  the  will  of  those  people,  as  stated 
in  their  congress  and  constitution,  by  this  constitution  and  form  of 
government  which  have  been  adopted  and  given  to  the  island? — A. 
They  were  working  for  a change  in  the  personnel  of  the  government. 
They  said  they  wanted  a new  element,  so  as  to  have  other  men  in. 

Q.  Well,  that  is  revolution,  isn’t  it? — A.  They  wanted  a revolu- 
tion— a change  of  government.  They  said  that  they  thought  if  they 
had  other  persons  in  the  government  they  would  get  along  all  right. 
I believe  myself  that  inside  of  three  months  or  six  months  the  same 
condition  would  have  been  back  again,  and  they  would  have  wanted 
another  change,  or  another  change  of  officers,  because  I don’t  believe 
that  they  can  get  any  combination  of  officers  that  would  be  satisfac- 
tory to  them. 

Q.  Well,  you  believe,  from  your  knowledge  of  the  island  of 
Negros,  that  the  best  thing  to  do  is  what  the  General  has  done? — A. 
I most  assuredly  do — to  give  them  as  free  a government  as  poss'ble 
under  military  rule — that  is  to  say,  under  American  control  until  the 
time  comes 

Q.  I want  to  find  out  whether,  in  your  opinion,  the  form  of  govern- 
ment which  we  have  in  that  island  will  be  satisfactory  or  not,  or 
whether  we  may  apprehend  another  revolution  and  more  antagonism, 
instead  of  peaceful  acceptance? — A.  I believe  that  that  government 
will  satisfy  them  if  the  military  government  is  able  to  keep  watch  of 
the  administration  away  from  the  capital,  and  do  away  with  the 
abuses  which  are  existing  at  the  preseut  time.  There  will  be  a small 


358 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


element  in  the  capital  and  some  of  the  adjacent  towns  which  will  not 
he  altogether  satisfied,  but  I think  that  the  mass  of  the  people  will  be 
very  well  satisfied  with  the  government  if  the  governor  is  able  to  stop 
these  abuses. 

Q.  Don't  you  think  it  very  greatly  depends  upon  the  personnel  of 
the  government? — A.  Very  largely,  indeed. 

Q.  Do  you  regard  General  Smith  as  a suitable  man  for  the  place  ? — 
A.  General  Smith  is  a very  able  man,  in  my  opinion;  he  is  a man  of 
a great  deal  of  tact. 

Q.  And  a great  deal  of  influence  ? — A.  And  a great  deal  of  influence. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  of  extending  that  sjTstem  to  the  other 
islands? — A.  I do  not  believe  that  even  as  liberal  a system  as  that 
can  be  extended  to  some  of  the  islands. 

Q.  Mention  some  of  the  principal  islands.  You  spoke  frequently 
about  Cebu. — A.  1 believe  this  system  could  not  be  put  in  force  in 
Cebu. 

Q.  What  is  the  chief  town  of  Cebu. — A.  Cebu  itself  is  the  chief  city. 

Q.  What  is  the  next  important  island? — A.  Pauay.  Iloilo  is  the 
chief  city  of  Panay. 

Q.  How  far  is  Iloilo  from  Negros? — A.  About  25  miles. 

Q.  Wouldn’t  it  be  possible  to  have  those  two  under  one  govern- 
ment?— A.  No,  sir;  I don’t  think  so. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  the  population  of  Cebu  is? — A.  No,  sir;  I 
do  not.  It  is  a populous  island. 

Q.  What  about  Panay,  where  Iloilo  is? — A.  Panay  is  a different 
proposition  from  any  other  of  the  islands  at  present. 

Q.  What  are  the  principal  islands  of  the  Visayan  group  ? — A.  Panay, 
Negros,  Cebu,  Samar,  Leyte,  Bohol,  and  Masbate. 

Q.  Would  each  one  of  these  islands  have  to  have  a government  of 
its  own? — A.  All  except  possibly  Bohol  and  Masbate,  which  might  be 
attached  to  one  of  the  other  Visayan  Islands,  although  Masbate  is 
nearer  to  Luzon  than  it  is  to,  say,  Cebu  or  Panay.  I don’t  believe 
that  it  would  be  advisable  to  attach  it  to  any  Luzon  province,  because 
of  the  difference  in  race  and  language.  Bohol  is  rather  a poor  island. 

Q.  What  language  do  they  speak  in  Panay? — A.  It  is  known  gen- 
erally as  the  Visayan  language,  but  there  are  various  dialects  spoken 
in  the  island,  just  as  takes  place  in  most  of  the  islands.  In  Iloilo  they 
speak  rather  a corrupt  form  of  Visayan.  Twenty  or  thirty  miles  back 
the  language  varies  sufficiently  that  we  may  call  it  a dialect.  It  will  be 
somewhat  different  on  the  opposite  coast  or  Antique.  There  will  be  a 
variation  found  in  the  language  as  spoken  in  the  province  of  Capiz. 

Q.  Do  they  speak  Spanish  ? — A.  A certain  number  speak  Spanish 
in  all  of  the  important  towns.  In  Iloilo,  Cebu,  and  Manila,  for  instance, 
the  majority  of  the  population  speaks  Spanish,  most  of  them  very 
poorly  and  incorrectly.  When  you  go  out  into  the  provinces  and 
the  smaller  towns  you  will  not  find  more  than  three  or  four  or  half  a 
dozen  who  speak  Spanish,  sometimes  not  that  many. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  the  difference  in  dialects  would  cause  difficulty 
in  administering  the  government? — A.  No,  sir;  I do  not  think  so.  If 
we  will  use  Spanish  for  a time  as  the  official  language,  later  substitut- 
ing English  as  the  official  language,  all  papers  can  be  translated  into 
the  language  of  the  province  or  locality  to  which  they  are  sent. 

Q.  In  the  island  of  Negios  could  we  use  Spanish  with  effect  ? — A. 
Yes.  We  can  use  Spanish  in  all  of  the  islands,  because  in  every  place  of 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


359 


an}r  importance  there  will  be  those  who  can  translate  the  document 
into  the  dialect  of  that  particular  region. 

Q.  In  the  near  future  do  you  see  any  possibility  of  giving  this 
people  any  other  form  of  government  than  the  one  you  have  outlined; 
that  is,  a stronger  form  of  government  than  the  ordinary  republic? 
I)o  you  think  it  a possibility  to  give  to  these  islands  a form  of  govern- 
ment approximating  more  nearly  to  a republic  than  the  one  which  we 
have  put  there  as  a species  of  military  government? — A.  Not  in  the 
immediate  future. 

Q.  Your  advice  would  be  to  organize  these  islands,  under  some  such 
form  as  that  down  there,  at  once? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  think  that  is  a necessity  ? — A.  It  is  an  absolute  necessity,  in 
mv  opinion,  that  the  present  form  of  government  here  should  be  one 
which  gives  us  as  strong’  control  in  all  matters  of  government  as  is 
done  in  this  document  (the  Negros  constitution). 

Q.  You  think  by  adaptation  that  form  of  government  could  be  used 
in  the  various  islands  you  have  mentioned — the  important  ones? — A. 
I do. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  with  regard  to  a general  government? — A. 
That  it  should  be  along  these  same  lines;  or,  perhaps,  putting  it  in 
another  way,  the  central  government  should  be  one  that  gives  strong 
control,  and  then  from  the  central  government  could  be  modeled,  by 
the  making  of  various  modifications,  all  the  provincial  governments  to 
suit  the  provinces  or  islands  where  this  government  is  applied.  I do 
not  believe  you  can  give  exactly  the  same  degree  of  liberality  in  all 
places. 

Q.  Now,  perhaps  I am  pressing  you  on  this  point,  but  still  we  want 
to  get  a strict  opinion.  If  you  were  recommending  a form  of  govern- 
ment to  the  United  States,  would  you  recommend  that  form  of  which 
you  have  spoken  ? — A.  Yes,  sir;  at  the  present  time  I would.  Experi- 
ence will  show  certain  modifications  that  will,  perhaps,  be  necessary. 

Q.  In  the  island  of  Luzon— we  will  come  to  that  for  a while.  You 
would  have  a civil  government  here  for  the  whole  archipelago, 
wouldn’t  you  ? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Then  what  would  you  do  in  regard  to  the  local  government  in 
Luzon  ? — A.  I think,  on  account  of  the  difference  in  dialects  and  the 
difference  in  races  that  are  found  in  this  island,  which  is  very  large  and 
very  great,  and  on  account  of  the  differences  in  languages  and  racial 
differences  in  the  Yisayan  Islands,  that  there  will  have  to  be  several 
provincial  governments  in  this  island  of  Luzon,  modeled  on  the  central 
government. 

Q.  Could  the  administration  of  these  governments  be  intrusted  to 
Filipinos? — A.  Not  entirely,  sir,  in  any  case. 

Q.  In  the  island  of  Luzon  ? — A.  Not  entirely. 

Q.  How  many  governments  would  you  have  in  the  island  of  Luzon; 
how  many  provincial  governments  in  the  provinces,  as  they  were? — 
A.  I think  it  would  be  necessary  to  have  at  least  five  provincial  gov- 
ernments in  Luzon. 

Q.  And  would  you  give  to  each  one  of  these  governments  a governor 
and  an  advisory  council  and  judges?— A.  Yes;  for  the  local  adminis- 
tration. 

Q.  You  think  five  would  be  necessary? — A.  I think  probably  five 
would  be  necessary;  it  might  be  reduced  to  four. 

Q.  In  addition  to  the  general  government  located  at  Manila,  would 


360 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


you  have  any  local  government  here,  as  you  do  in  the  other  islands, 
or  in  the  other  parts  of  this  province,  or  would  you  have  the  general 
government  here  have  charge  of  local  matters  in  Manila?  There  is  a 
province  of  Manila,  is  there  not? — A.  Yes;  there  is  a province  of 
Manila  and  the  city  of  Manila — the  old  city,  the  old  municipality, 
which  had  peculiar  privileges. 

Q.  Would  you  have  that  administered  by  the  general  government, 
or  would  you  have  another  government  for  it? — A.  I would  have 
another  government  for  it.  I think  there  would  he  sufficient  to  occupy 
the  central  government  with  the  details  from  the  provinces. 

Q.  Then  you  would  add  some  other  province  to  Manila?— A.  Yes; 
I would  add  on  these  Tagalog  provinces;  there  is  a community  of  lan- 
guage which  would  make  it  feasible  to  unite  several  provinces  into 
one. 

Q.  Then  you  would  have  the  provincial  local  government  somewhere 
else  than  in  Manila? — A.  Not  necessarily;  no. 

Q.  You  would  not  have  two  governments  here,  one  general  and  one 
special.  Wouldn't  it  be  better  to  have  another  seat  of  government? — 
A.  No,  sir;  I don’t  think  it  would  be  necessary  to  have  a different  seat 
of  government. 

Q.  I was  thinking  of  the  general  government  here,  particularly  for 
Manila  province,  and  the  doing  away  with  the  necessity  of  having  a 
provincial  government  for  this  province.- — A.  I don’t  think  that  would 
do;  in  my  opinion  it  would  not  be  feasible.  For  one  reason,  we  are 
trying  to  establish  a government  here  satisfactory  to  these  people,  and 
in  the  provincial  governments  we  will  give  them  probably  more  con- 
trol than  we  shall  in  the  general  government.  There  are  a great  many 
here,  of  course,  who  are  anxious  to  hold  these  government  positions, 
and  so  if  the  provincial  government  was  done  away  with  here  in 
Manila,  and  the  provincial  government  was  put  under  the  control  of 
the  central  government,  there  would  be  a rather  large  discontented 
element  here  in  Manila  and  in  the  vicinity. 

Q.  In  what  form  of  government,  Doctor,  would  j'ou  treat  the  cus- 
toms and  the  post-office? — A.  Those  should  be,  I believe,  under  the 
control  of  the  United  States  Government  in  every  point. 

Q.  The  governor-general  and  his  government  should  not  have  the 
power  to  collect  custom  duties? — A.  No,  sir;  that  should  be  done  by 
the  United  States  officials. 

Q.  And  the  post-office? — A.  Most  assuredly,  in  the  hands  of  the 
Federal  officers,  the  Federal  Government. 

Q.  And  the  public  lands;  what  would  you  think  as  to  the  proposi- 
tion that  the  civil  government  here  should  have  the  right  to  dispose  of 
the  public  lands,  offer  them  for  sale,  and  survey  them? — A.  I think 
that  should  be  under  the  civil  government,  Colonel. 

Q.  Well,  it  is  quite  apparent,  Doctor,  that  a new  government 
organized  here  can  not  support  itself ; where  is  the  money  to  come 
from? — A.  The  provincial  governments  can  raise  at  least  a propor- 
tion of  the  money  in  their  respective  provinces.  The  rest  of  the 
money,  of  course,  will  have  to  come  from  the  United  States  funds. 

Q.  That  would  mean  the  customs  ? — A.  That  would  mean  the  customs; 
and  it  seems  to  me  that  with  a good  form  of  government  here  imports 
and  exports  shoidd  increase  to  the  extent  that  the  customs  receipts 
would  be  sufficient  to  defray  the  expenses  of  the  civil  government. 

Q.  1 would  like  to  ask  you,  Doctor,  what  reply  would  you  make,  if 


REPORT  Ob’  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


361 


any,  if  you  went  home  and  were  told  that  these  islands  were  worthless 
and  that  the  United  States  would  never  get  any  good  from  them? 
With  your  knowledge  of  the  physical  geography  and  products  of  this 
archipelago,  what  would  you  say  to  such  a suggestion  as  that  ? — A. 
Well,  in  the  first  place,  it  is  my  belief,  as  I have  just  stated,  that  the 
islands  can  be  made  self-supporting  from  the  simple  financial  point  of 
view  of  actual  expenses  and  actual  income.  I think  there  are  very 
great  possibilities  of  development  of  trade.  1 consider  the  islands 
very  rich.  The  land  is  rich  and  we  have  here  certain  products  which 
are  not  found  anywhere  else.  There  are  immense  possibilities  in 
regard  to  the  development  of  such  industries,  and  the  actual  benefit 
that  woidd  come  to  the  United  States  would  probably  be  in  the  line  of 
trade.  I do  not  see  why  a very  large  trade  should  not  be  built  up 
with  the  United  States  in  all  the  products  of  the  islands,  and  in  return 
they  taking  our  manufactures  and  other  products,  such  as  are  pro- 
duced at  home. 

Q.  You  believe  that  these  islands  will  be  of  benefit  to  the  United 
States  if  it  holds  them? — A.  I do. 

Q.  I mean  financial  benefit? — A.  1 do.  I look  at  it  in  that  way. 
They  are  capable  of  supporting  their  own  government,  and  the  trade 
would  be  of  great  benefit  to  us. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  the  Spanish  system  of  taxation  was?  A. 
Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Did  they  tax  lands? — A.  They  taxed  property  of  all  kinds  and 
industries  of  all  kinds;  very  many  direct  taxes  were  imposed,  and,  of 
course,  there  were  indirect  taxes,  such  as  came  from  the  customs  and 
internal  revenue  and  in  the  way  of  stamps. 

Q.  Spain  got  a revenue  from  these  islands?'- — A.  Spanish  officials 
have  claimed  that  not  one  cent  went  to  the  general  treasury  from 
these  islands,  but,  on  the  contrary,  there  was  occasionally  a deficit. 
But  that  was  not  because  the  islands  did  not  produce  sufficient  reve- 
nue; it  was  because  that  revenue  did  not  go  into  the  proper  channels. 

Q.  The  people  of  the  southern  islands,  for  instance,  would  not  take 
very  kindly  to  taxation?- — A.  Direct  taxation,  no,  sir;  their  poll  tax 
has  always  been  excessive  here. 

Q.  If  you  were  making  a suggestion,  Doctor,  as  to  the  qualification 
of  voters,  what  would  be  your  general  idea  ? — A.  I do  not  believe  as 
yet  that  the  mass  of  the  people  is  qualified. 

Q.  You  think  that  there  ought  to  be  a property  qualification  ? — A. 
I think  there  should  be  either  a property  or  an  educational  qualifica- 
tion, possibly  both.  At  least  one  of  these  qualifications  should  be 
imposed. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  that  we  can  successfully  inaugurate  a govern- 
ment here? — A.  I most  certainly  do,  having  great  confidence  in  the 
ability  of  the  American  people  to  do  what  they  set  themselves  out  to 
do.  I do  not  believe  that  the  system  of  government  that  we  are  using 
at  home  will  prove  a success  if  it  is  applied  to  these  islands;  that  is  to 
say,  the  constant  change  of  officials. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  that  these  people  are  peaceful  and  inclined  to 
respect  authority? — A.  I do,  and  always  have  believed  it,  and  I have 
not  changed  my  opinion  in  that  respect  owing  to  past  events.  I think 
that  there  are  explanations  which  demonstrate  the  reasons  for  the 
apparent  unwillingness  of  these  people  to  submit  to  control. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  the  fact  that  they  are  what  we  might  call,  for 


362 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


the  sake  of  the  argument,  an  “inferior race,”  would rnakean insuperable 
objection  to  our  educating  them  and  bringing  them  forward? — A.  No, 
sir;  I do  not. 

Q.  What  is  about  the  proportion  of  Tagalogs  in  these  islands? — A. 
In  numbers  I am  unable  to  answer  the  question.  The  important  Taga- 
logs, the  Tagalogs  of  influence,  are  found  in  the  six  or  seven  provinces 
immediately  about  Manila;  the  provinces  of  Manila,  Laguna,  Batau- 
gas,  Cavite,  Bulacan,  and  Morong  are  found  the  true  Tagalogs. 

Q.  Do  they  constitute  a separate  race? — A.  No,  sir;  but  they  have 
a separate  language,  or  at  least  a separate  dialect.  Take  the  province 
of  Pampanga,  to  the  north,  which  is  not  a true  Tagalog  province, 
because  they  speak  a different  language.  They  have  their  own  pro- 
vincial jealousies,  and  their  own  provincial  pride.  They  are  at  present 
in  the  insurrectionary  movement;  but,  in  my  opinion,  largely  because 
the  great  bulk  of  the  insurgent  army,  the  pure  Tagalog  army,  has  been 
either  within  the  limits  or  very  close  to  them. 

Q.  You  have  had  some  opportunities  of  judging  of  the  feelings  of 
the  people  outside  our  lines,  haven’t  you? — A.  Yes. 

Q.  Now.  what  would  you  say  as  to  the  proportion  of  the  ordinary 
people  in  Luzon  that  are  in  antagonism  to  the  United  States?  In 
other  words,  do  you  believe  that  all  the  people  are  opposed  to  the 
United  States? — A.  I do  not  believe  that  10  per  cent  of  the  people  of 
the  island  of  Luzon  are  opposed  to  the  United  States,  and  that  per- 
centage could  be  greatly  reduced  by  contact  with  the  people.  We 
have  been  unable,  up  to  the  present  time,  to  come  directly  in  contact 
with  the  people  to  disprove  the  very  large  number  of  false  statements 
that  have  been  made  about  the  Americans  by  the  Spaniards,  and  by 
the  officers  in  the  insurgent  army.  I found  that  to  be  true,  not  only 
here,  but  in  the  Visavan  provinces,  and  saw  some  very  marked 
examples  of  it.  Take  the  example  of  the  town  of  Silay,  in  Negros. 
I was  told  there,  in  a confidential  conversation,  which  I had  with  one 
of  the  most  important  men,  that  when  the  battalion  of  California 
troops  went  to  Bacolod  the  whole  town  of  Si  lay  said  that  it  did  not 
want  American  troops  to  come  near  their  place;  that  they  had  been 
told  stories  about  them;  that  the}'  were  very  cruel,  very  harsh,  and 
unjust;  that  they  would  abuse  the  people  and  violate  their  women, 
and  overturn  their  religious  rights. 

Q.  As  a matter  of  fact,  have  there  been  any  cases  of  the  violation 
of  women  here? — A.  None  that  I have  known  of,  unless  a report 
within  the  last  three  days  is  correct,  of  some  drunken  soldiers  going 
into  a house  here  in  Manila.  It  is  charged  that  they  violated  a woman. 
This  is  the  report  as  it  came  to  me.  Within  two  days  I have  been 
unable  to  investigate  it.  I don’t  know  what  became  of  it.  I did  not 
finish  my  statement  in  regard  to  the  town  of  Silay.  After  the  deser- 
tion of  the  native  police  force  at  Silay,  it  became  necessary  to  send 
American  troops  there.  The  man  with  whom  I was  talking  said  that 
three  or  four  days  after  the  arrival  of  the  troops,  the  people  began  to 
question  among  themselves,  “Why,  these  are  not  the  people  that  they 
were  reported  to  be;”  and  that  a week’s  time  was  sufficient  to  demon- 
strate to  them  that  these  reports  were  entirely  false.  And  at  the 
time  of  our  conversation,  perhaps  six  weeks  after  the  troops  had 
arrived  there,  my  informant  told  me  that  the  people  did  not  want  to 
get  along  without  our  American  troops;  that  they  wanted  them  there 
right. along  for  their  own  protection.  That  is  one  instance.  I could 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


363 

cite  several  from  my  own  personal  experience.  My  point  is,  that  as 
soon  as  we  come  directly  in  contact  with  the  people  who  are  to-day 
standing  off,  so  we  can  demonstrate  that  we  are  not  as  bad  as  we  are 
represented,  and  that  in  reality  we  are  a straightforward  people  and 
honorable,  that  then  almost  all  of  this  feeling  of  opposition  that  exists 
to-day  will  be  swept  away.  This  will  apply  to  almost  everyone, 
except  to  the  officers  of  the  insurgent  army,  because  they  will  lose 
their  positions  in  the  doing  away  of  such  army. 

Q.  What  treatment  should  we  give  to  the  army,  the  insurgent  army, 
when  peace  is  declared — A.  I believe  that  so  long  as  they  are  in  arms 
we  should  demand  unconditional  surrender,  and  continue  our  campaign 
against  them  with  great  firmness  until  the}”  have  surrendered.  When 
they  have  surrendered  I think  that  we  can  with  safety  be  very  generous 
to  them. 

Q.  Could  we  employ  some  of  them  in  our  own  service? — A.  Most 
assuredly  we  could. 

Q.  And  would  that  be  a good  thing  to  do? — A.  If  the  men  were 
fitted  for  positions  I think  that  we  could  employ  them.  I have  done 
that  very  thing  in  my  own  department,  and  with  success. 

Q.  You  have  employed  Filipino  soldiers? — A.  I was  instrumental 
in  getting  a Filipino  medical  officer  out  of  jail,  where  he  had  been 
placed  by  order  of  the  authorities.  I immediately  gave  him  a posi- 
tion in  my  office,  having  first  a long  talk  with  him,  explaining  our 
position  and  what  we  wished  to  do,  how  I would  treat  him,  and  how 
I expected  he  would  conduct  himself.  That  man  has  proved  very 
faithful  in  his  work,  has  been  promoted  from  an  inferior  position  to 
one  of  considerable  responsibility,  and  is  to-day  doing  as  conscientious 
and  efficient  work  as  almost  any  man  I have  in  that  department. 

Q.  Doctor,  in  your  former  visits  to  the  islands,  did  you  discover 
any  antagonism  to  the  friars  ? — A.  Very  marked;  very  marked  indeed, 
in  almost  every  region  that  we  visited. 

Q.  On  what  was  it  based? — A.  On  the  abuses  committed  by  the 
friars  in  all  places— moral  abuses  and  financial  abuses. 

Q.  Was  that  general  ? Was  there  any  general  sentiment  against  them, 
even  as  early  as  that  ? — A.  It  was  general  so  far  as  financial  abuses 
were  concerned,  and  in  a very  large  number  of  cases  it  was  general  so 
far  as  moral  abuses  were  concerned.  The  opposition  to  the  friars  was, 
I think,  universal. 

Q.  What  is  the  condition  of  public  sentiment  now  in  that  respect — I 
mean  Filipino  sentiment?- — A.  It  is  stronger  than  ever  in  opposition 
to  the  friars  in  every  place  I have  visited. 

Q.  Isn’t  our  position  a little  anomalous  here,  that  we  are  charged  by 
the  church  with  depriving  them  of  their  rights  and  by  the  Filipinos 
with  favoring  the  church — A.  Entirely  anomalous,  altogether  anoma- 
lous. The  opposition  of  the  Filipinos  is  not  to  the  church.  It  is  to 
the  monastic  orders;  that,  I suppose,  you  understand.  They  can  not 
appreciate,  especially  in  regions  away  from  here,  that  we  are  com- 
pelled to  proceed  in  an  entirely  legal  manner  in  all  dealings  with  these 
orders  and  the  property  possessed  by  them.  They  think  themselves — 
which  shows  their  own  appreciation  of  law — that  we  should  simply 
take  possession  of  every  bit  of  property  owned  by  the  friars  and  expel 
the  friars  from  the  islands;  and  because  we  don’t  do  that  they  have 
come  to  believe  that  we  are  in  some  way  hand  in  hand  with  the  church 
and  with  the  monastic  orders.  That  idea  is  fostered  every  time  a 


364 


REPOET  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


report  goes  out  from  Manila  of  any  dealings  with  church  property, 
as,  for  instance,  the  establishment  of  the  university.  While  1 was  in 
Negros  and  Cebu  I was  asked  the  question  as  to  whether  the  univer- 
sity was  to  be  reestablished  under  the  direction  and  supervision  of  the 
friars,  and  I told  them  that  I supposed  so,  and  the  impression  created 
was  bad.  They  took  it  as  evidence  that  we  were  protecting  the  friars. 

Q.  Do  you  regard  it  as  advisable  to  encourage  American  mission- 
aries to  come  here — I mean  Protestant  missionaries,  of  course? — A. 
Yes,  sir;  I think  in  all  regions  where  there  are  no  Mohammedans  we 
should  probably  give  encouragement  to  missionaries  to  come.  I think 
that  for  some  years  to  come  missionaries  should  not  go  to  the  Moham- 
medans. They  should  not  go  to  the  Mohammedan  regions  until  our 
own  position  is  firmly  established  there. 

Q.  What  are  the  Mohammedan  regions? — A.  First,  Jolo  and  the 
adjacent  islands,  the  greater  part  of  the  island  of  Mindanao,  the  island 
of  Basilan,  and  the  southern  part  of  the  island  of  Palawan. 

Q.  In  those  islands  you  think  that  the  military  power  ought  to  pro- 
hibit the  missionary  from  coming? — A.  I do. 

Q.  In  regard  to  the  island  of  Luzon  and  other  islands,  it  should  not 
interfere? — A.  They  should  not  interfere  in  any  way.  Let  them  tight 
it  out  between  the  churches.  I feel  quite  sure  that  the  people  will 
take  kindly  to  them  in  many  places,  because  their  own  idea  of  reli- 
gion is  not  very  well  fixed  at  the  present  time.  It  is  the  observance 
mostly  of  outward  form.  They  have  no  true  appreciation  of  Catholi- 
cism as  we  understand  it  at  home. 

Q.  You  would  not  advise,  then,  any  governmental  action  in  regard 
to  religious  questions,  but  would  let  it  work  itself  out?- — A.  So  far  as 
simply  the  religious  question  is  concerned,  I certainly  advise  that  they 
be  allowed  to  work  that  out.  The  question  as  to  the  property  of  these 
monastic  orders  is  another  question. 

Q.  Well,  that  you  think  ought  to  be  left  to  some  form  of  legal  gov- 
ernment ? — A.  Y es. 

Q.  And  not  to  be  arbitrarily  settled  by  the  military? — A.  It  is  a 
question  which,  of  course,  will  require  considerable  thought.  Just 
how  it  will  be  worked  out  is  difficult  to  foretell,  but  1 do  believe  that 
these  immense  estates  in  the  hands  of  these  friars  should  in  some  way 
be  placed  on  the  market,  so  that  they  could  be  placed  in  the  hands  of 
small  property  holders  instead  of  being  left  in  their  present  condition. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  that  the  religious  authorities  here  ought  to  be 
permitted  to  exercise  the  right  of  excommunication? — A.  I under- 
stand that  is  a religious  question. 

Q.  Is  it  a religious  question? — A.  It  is  my  understanding  that  that 
is  a question  entirely  within  the  province  of  the  Pope. 

Q.  Isn’t  excommunication  in  the  nature  of  a libel.  Suppose  I am 
a Catholic,  and  suppose  to-morrow  morning  I am  damned  forever  by 
the  bishop,  and  the  people  are  ordered  to  have  nothing  to  do  with  me, 
and  I am  not  allowed  to  go  to  church,  wouldn’t  that  under  our  form  of 
government  constitute  a legal  question? — A.  I do  not  know. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  that  these  people  are  inclined  to  throw  off  the 
subjugation  to  the  church? — A.  No,  sir;  I do  not.  The  subjugation 
to  the  church  as  such — 1 think  they  consider  themselves  good  Catholics, 
but  what  they  object  to  is  the  great  amount  of  abuse  which  exists, 
and  especially  to  the  great  amount  of  abuses  and  to  the  great  power 
which  the  monastic  orders  have  always  held  here. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


365 

Q.  Ilovr  can  we  win  the  confidence  of  these  people  and  make  them 
our  friends? — A.  By  practical  examples  of  what  we  are  going  to  do 
for  them,  and  by  personal  contact  with  them. 

Q.  They  don't  take  much  stock  in  promises,  do  they? — A.  Very 
little.  They  are  very  skeptical.  They  have  had  promises  made  to 
them  so  long  that  they  are  inclined  to  disbelieve  not  only  the  white 
races,  but  themselves. 

Q.  What  is  the  sentiment  of  the  people  of  Manila — I mean  the 
natives,  as  regards  us  ? Has  it  become  more  friendly  by  our  occupation 
or  not? — A.  Yes;  it  has  become  very  much  more  friendly.  They  are 
at  the  present  time  somewhat  discontented,  because  there  is  as  yet  no 
established  form  of  permanent  government,  everything  is  provisional, 
and"  they  are  unable  to  carry  through,  for  instance,  as  they  have  done 
in  the  past,  their  ordinary  legal  proceedings,  and  they  don’t  know 
where  to  lay  the  blame  for  this. 

Q.  Are  our  friends  here  among  the  Filipinos  a cordial  unit  or  are 
the3T  divided? — A.  Of  course,  our  friends  among  the  Filipinos  can  be 
considered  as  a unit,  but  we  can  not  as  yet  number  as  our  friends  all 
of  the  important  people  of  Manila.  I think  there  is  an  element  here 
at  present  that  is  still  holding  off  for  the  purpose  of  observation  and 
they  can  probably  be  held  in  this  condition  for  some  little  time  yet, 
but  I do  think  if  we  could  give  a permanent  form  of  government  and 
establish  it  and  demonstrate  what  we  could  do  for  them  it  would  not 
be  long  before  we  would  have  them  on  our  side. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  form  of  government  ought  to  be  at  once 
established  or  should  we  wait  until  Congress  acts? — A.  I think  it 
should  be  established  as  soon  as  is  consistent  with  the  military 
situation. 

Q.  Would  you  have  it  influenced  only  by  the  military  question? — 
A.  Yes;  only  by  that. 

Q.  If  the  military  thought  it  would  be  injurious  to  them,  and  only 
from  that  point  of  view,  you  would  not  do  it?  If  the  military  thought 
it  would  not  affect  them  one  way  or  the  other,  then  you  would  do  it  ? — ■ 
A.  I would  certainly  put  it  into  operation  if  it  was  possible  to  do  so. 
I don’t  see  why  some  form  of  government  can  not  be  established  here 
that  would  not  interfere  with  the  military  question;  but  that  there  is 
need  of  some  permanent  form  of  government  I am  convinced. 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  the  sentiment  of  the  Spaniards  is  here 
toward  us? — A.  Yes,  sir;  barring  a few  of  them;  they  have  done  us 
a great  deal  of  harm,  a great  deal  of  injury  in  this  city  and  in  all 
parts  of  the  islands  where  they  have  been.  I can  except  from  those 
who  have  harmed  us  Spaniards  who  have  property  here,  or  other  men, 
such  as  merchants,  who  really  have  large  interests  here  in  the  islands, 
and  are  anxious  for  that  reason  to  see  prosperity  return  and  order 
established.  The  rest  of  them,  the  unemployed  element,  the  foreign- 
ers who  are  left  here,  have  all  worked  against  us  for  the  most  part  in 
a quiet,  underhanded  way,  largely  by  exciting  the  Filipinos  and  instill- 
ing into  them  this  lack  of  confidence  which  we  have  been  encountering 
so  long,  and  being  able  to  talk  with  them  in  their  own  language,  they 
are  able  to  get  at  them  very  readily,  and  in  this  way  they  have  kept  up 
this  feeling  of  opposition  to  us  and  this  lack  of  confidence  in  us,  and 
that  has  done  us  a great  deal  of  harm. 

Q.  Has  any  effort  been  made  to  conciliate  these  Spaniards  in  any 
way  ? Clearly  their  interests  are  the  same  as  ours.  They  can  never 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


366 

hope  to  get  these  islands  back. — A.  I don’t  know  how  much  effort  has 
been  made  to  talk  with  them  directly.  I know  that  in  some  cases  it 
has  been  done.  The  men  connected  with  the  newspapers  have  been 
called  before  the  American  authorities  and  told  distinctly  that  they 
would  have  to  pursue  different  policies  or  accept  the  results.  1 don't 
think  that  any  general  or  organized  effort  has  been  made  to  talk  with 
them.  I can  illustrate  what  I think  represents  the  Spanish  sentiment 
here  toward  us  by  repeating  a conversation  with  a Spaniard  I know 
who  is  still  here;  he  represents  the  class  of  which  I speak — an  army 
officer.  Having  known  him  for  a number  of  years,  he  would  talk  to 
me  more  frankly  than  the  average  Spaniard  would.  He  expressed  his 
feelings  this  way  soon  after  the  outbreak  of  hostilities.  He  said,  “Of 
course,  I feel  this  way.  The  Americans  have  made  war  against  us 
and  have  deprived  us  of  our  colonies;  the  Filipinos  proved  treacherous 
to  us,  both  in  1896  and  again  when  the  Americans  came  to  these 
islands.  Now,  when  I receive  word  that  in  a given  battle  50  Filipinos 
have  been  killed  I am  much  pleased,  because  they  have  harmed  us.  If 
the  next  day  I hear  that  100  Americans  have  been  killed,  1 say,  better 
still,  and  if  the  next  day  500  Filipinos  have  been  killed,  I say,  so  much 
the  better.” 

Q.  I would  like  to  know,  in  general,  when  you  get  home  and  go 
before  the  higher  authorities — before  the  President — if  you  arc  going 
to  give  them  an  account  of  these  islands  such  as  you  have  given  us,  and 
present  your  views  in  rather  a prosperous  and  rosy  light,  holding  out 
inducements  that  it  won’t  be  long  before  we  subjugate  these  people 
and  everything  will  be  right,  or  if  you  are  going  to  be  a pessimist? — 
A.  I shall  give  mv  honest  views  in  regard  to  the  situation,  wherever  I 
find  myself  or  with  whomsoever  I am  talking.  I have  always  been  an 
optimist  in  regard  to  the  situation — not  so  much  in  regard  to  the 
military  situation,  because  long  before  the  fighting  I said  we  would  have 
to  fight.  It  is  my  opinion,  as  1 wrote  home  and  state  here,  that  the 
onl}T  thing  to  do  is  to  fight  them,  and  to  fight  hard;  but  I do  not  think 
this  is  any  reason  for  changing  my  opinion  in  regard  to  the  future 
of  these  islands,  so  long  as  a good  government  is  given  to  them. 

Q.  You  believe  that  the  public  good  requires  here  that  once  for  all 
we  should  put  down  this  rebellion  and  have  peace,  and  that  in  that 
way  only  can  order  be  restored?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  You  believe  we  have  accomplished  a good  deal? — A.  A great 
deal.  I believe  there  has  been  a slow  though  clear  gain. 

Q.  You  believe  that  in  the  fall,  when  the  dry  weather  comes,  we 
will  make  short  work  of  these  people? — A.  I believe  we  should  have 
sufficient  force  here  to  put  down  this  rebellion.  That  is  a military 
question.  We  should  have  force  enough  to  entirely  suppress  this 
revolution  during  the  next  season. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  that  inducements  should  be  held  out  to  them, 
such  as  future  independence? — A.  I don’t  believe  those  things  ought  to 
be  held  out.  I don’t  believe  that  they  should  be  promised  anything  more 
than  they  merit,  and  they  should  take  our  history  as  a people  and 
remember  that  we,  as  a people,  stand  for  freedom  and  a liberal  form 
of  government. 

Q.  If  we  once  suppress  this  rebellion,  from  their  character  and  their 
course  in  the  past,  do  you  believe  that  they  would  remain  quiet  for 
any  length  of  time,  or  that  we  would  have  other  rebellions  breaking 
out? — A.  I believe  as  soon  as  we  have  got  our  government  established 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


3(‘)7 

and  demonstrate  to  them  that  it  is  a better  form  of  government  than 
they  had  before  that  they  would  be  quiet. 

Q.  Is  there  any  doubt  in  your  mind  that  the  government  we  would 
give  them  would  be  a better  government  than  the  one  they  had — I 
mean  as  adapted  to  them? — A.  Not  so  long  as  we  did  not  adopt  in  its 
entirety  a complete  change  of  officers  with  every  change  of  adminis- 
tration; that  is,  if  this  is  to  be  on  a permanent  basis  as  a territorial 
government,  all  officers  who  prove  themselves  efficient  should  be 
retained  here  and  not  displaced  every  year  or  two.  If  that  was  done 
it  would  be  better  than  the  government  here  in  the  past.  Inevitably 
some  mistakes  will  lie  made  at  the  first,  but  I have  great  confidence  in 
the  ability  of  the  American  people  to  work  out  a successful  form  of 
government. 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion  as  to  the  admission  of  the  Chinese? — A.  I 
do  not  believe  that  the  Chinese  should  be  allowed  to  come  in  here  with- 
out restriction. 

Q.  You  can  go  on  and  state  your  restrictions,  please,  Doctor;  it  is  a 
serious  question  and  one  in  which  I am  greatly  interested,  on  account 
of  my  very  long  residence  in  China  and  my  great  desire  not  to  do  any 
injustice  to  these  people.  What  restrictions  do  you  recommend? — 
A.  We  have  promised  the  Filipinos  that  we  will  establish  a govern- 
ment here  for  the  Filipinos.  Just  at  the  present  time  there  are  some 
difficulties  on  the  labor  question  in  the  provinces  on  account  of  the 
erroneous  ideas  that  the  Filipinos  have  in  their  heads  as  to  what 
liberty  is.  They  consider  it  as  license,  and  that  equality  means  that  the 
laboring  man  is  as  good  as  the  employer — false  notions,  which  I think 
can  be  gotten  out  of  their  heads  in  a comparatively  short  time.  I believe 
that  the  result  of  our  presence  here  will  be  to  raise  the  price  of  labor 
to  a point  where  it  will  be  worth  while  to  the  Filipino  to  apply  him- 
self to  work  and  that  he  will  lie  better  contented  than  he  is  now,  and 
that  we  should  not,  therefore,  admit  without  restriction  labor  which 
tends  rather  to  make  the  Filipino’s  wages  less  than  they  are  at  present 
or  than  they  have  been.  Then,  too,  we  know  that  the  Chinaman  does 
not  leave  his  money  in  this  country.  His  object  is  to  acquire  money 
and  return  to  China,  so  that  it  is  taken  out  of  the  country  immediately. 
He  is  more  frugal  than  the  native,  although  the  native  is  ordinarily 
able  to  get  along  with  a very  small  amount.  The  native  has  higher 
aspirations  than  the  Chinaman;  he  does  like  to  live  well  if  he  can.  I 
believe,  therefore,  if  by  our  policy  we  can  better  the  condition  of  the 
Filipino  workman  that  it  would  make  him  so  much  more  contented  with 
American  rule. 

Q.  You  believe  he  would  work  if  the  Chinaman  were  not  here? — A. 
Yes;  I do.  There  will  be  some  difficulties  for  some  months. 

Q.  You  believe,  then,  that  the  labor  question  has  the  same  aspects 
here  as  at  home? — Yes.  I do  not  place  the  Chinaman  on  as  high  a 
plane  as  I do  the  native. 

Q.  Don't  you  think  our  contiguity  to  China  would  result  in  bringing 
over  many  thousands  or  millions  of  them,  if  they  were  not  restricted 
as  to  their  coming?- — Yes;  I do. 

Q.  They  are  so  close  that  they  would  come  to  what  they  regard  as 
a new  Eldorado? — Yes. 

Q.  Now,  Doctor,  have  you  given  any  attention  to  the  financial  ques- 
tion?— A.  In  what  way? 

Q.  The  currency  question.  We  have  here  a silver  basis.  What  do 


368 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


you  say  about  going  on  a gold  basis? — A.  Well,  1 am  a strong  believer 
in  the  necessity  of  a stable  monetary  system. 

Q.  I mean  as  applicable  to  these  islands;  not  politically,  as  in  the 
United  States  ? — A.  As  applying  only  to  these  islands ? 

Q.  Yes;  what  immediate  action  we  will  take  about  these  questions  now. 
It  is  not  what  we  are  going  to  do  in  the  future,  but  now.  The  problem 
is  now,  should  the  United  States  Government  issue  an  order  that  the  cur- 
rency here  shall  be  gold  and  reduce  the  silver  to  mere  barter,  or  ought 
we  to  coin  it  as  Japan  does  at  32  to  1,  or  coin  it  as  Brown  wants  us  to 
at  16  to  1;  or  ought  we  to  leave  the  question  at  present  to  work  itself 
out,  taking  into  consideration  that  the  islands  are  prosperous  and  that 
it  would  be  a grand  revolution  to  pay  a man  a gold  dollar  in  place  of 
a silver  dollar.  I am  asking  your  advice  not  as  a financier,  but  as  a 
practical  man  here,  having  seen  the  thing  work,  and  what  you  think 
as  to  the  recommendation  this  commission  ought  to  make  in  regard  to 
any  change  in  the  currency? — A.  I do  not  believe  that  at  the  present 
time  a change  in  the  currency  is  advisable.  These  people  are  accus- 
tomed to  dealing  with  small  sums  of  money.  Their  wage  is  small  and 
their  average  purchase  is  made  in  cents,  and  not  in  dollars  Then,  too, 
the  gold  money  if  it  were  here  at  present,  would  be  hidden  away  by 
the  people  on  every  occasion,  and  would  be  kept  out  of  circulation. 
When  they  had  gold  here  formerly,  a great  many  years  ago,  they  hid 
it  and  buried  it,  and  if  we  immediately  changed  to  a gold  basis  here, 
we  would  be  short  of  currency  at  present. 

Q.  Taking  the  business  of  the  country  as  you  find  it,  }’ou  believe  it 
would  be  better,  for  the  present,  to  continue  on  the  same  basis? — A. 
Yes. 

Q.  And  if  any  changes  are  to  be  made,  to  make  them  in  the 
future? — A.  Yes.  It  is  on  account  of  the  condition  of  the  people 
here.  The  negroes  in  the  south,  during  the  time  the  crops  are  being 
moved,  will  make  any  sacrifice  to  hide  gold,  and  the  banks  are  very 
reluctant  to  let  gold  go  out,  because  if  the  gold  goes  out  and  gets  into 
the  hands  of  these  people  they  will  go  through  any  kind  of  hardship  to 
save  that  shining  gold  coin.  We  have  the  fact  here  that  the  monetary 
medium  that  will  continue  circulating  must  be  small.  They  do  not 
buy  810  worth  at  a time,  but  3 or  d cents  worth;  so  if  we  attempted 
to  introduce  the  gold  system  at  present  I think  there  would  be  a great 
deal  of  trouble. 

Q.  Don't  you  think,  as  a general  thing,  we  ought  to  go  slow?— A. 
Yes.  It  is  new  work  to  us  all  through,  and  we  should  not  rush  into 
any  one  thing;  if  we  do  we  are  liable  to  encounter  grave  difficulties. 

Adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  LOYZAGA. 

Manila,  August  1,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby,  Professor  Worcester,  and  Mr.  MacArthur. 

Jose  de  Loyzaga  y Ageo,  in  response  to  the  questions  of  the  com- 
missioners, stated: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  please  tell  us  your  name,  your  occupation,  and  how 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


369 

long  you  have  lived  in  Manila? — A.  My  name  is  Jose  dc  Loyzaga  y 
Ageo;  I was  born  in  Manila;  my  profession  is  that  of  a lawyer,  and 
I have  been  the  director  of  the  newspaper  El  Comercio. 

Q.  For  how  long  a time  ? — A.  Since  the  year  1894.  The  newspaper 
was  founded  by  my  father. 

Q.  In  brief,  what  was  the  form  of  government  of  the  Spaniards  here 
before  we  came  here? — A.  An  autocratic  form. 

Q.  Will  you  please  tell  us  in  general  just  what  it  was;  a governor- 
general,  and  so  on  ? — A.  The  government,  like  all  human  affairs,  had 
its  advantages  and  its  defects. 

Q.  Did  the  governor-general  have  a cabinet? — A.  No;  he  only  had 
an  advisory  bod}’,  but  it  was  all  subject  to  the  home  government,  and 
since  the  existence  of  the  cable  it  was  absolutely  subject  to  the  home 
Government. 

Q.  How  was  the  advisory  body  selected? — A.  This  advisory  body 
was  composed,  in  the  first  place,  of  the  archbishop,  the  president  of 
the  supreme  court,  the  attorney -general,  the  treasurer,  and  the  civil 
director  of  internal  affairs,  and  the  military  governor  of  the  town,  who 
was  the  second  in  command.  The  secretary  of  this  body  was  the  sec- 
retary-general of  the  government. 

Q.  By  whom  were  these  officials  named  ? — A.  They  were  all  appointed 
by  the  home  government.  v 

Q.  How  was  the  advisory  council  selected  ?• — A.  This  is  the  advisory 
council,  but  it  held  very  few  meetings.  1 can  give  you  the  law  on  the 
subject,  and  you  can  see  it  plainly. 

Q.  Then  the  government  was  carried  on  and  decrees  made  by  the 
governor-general,  or  were  the  decrees  made  in  Spain? — A.  No;  by 
the  home  government. 

Q.  Did  they  in  Spain  have  a department  for  the  colonies,  and  did 
that  department  manage  those  colonies? — A.  Yes;  the  department  of 
foreign  affairs,  ultramer. 

Q.  Then  the  whole  government  of  the  islands  was  vested  in  the 
colonial  department  ? — A.  It  was  subject  to  this  department  of  ultra- 
mer; they  had  supervision  over  all  the  different  departments,  internal 
affairs,  and  over  the  different  departments. 

Q.  What  connection  did  the  governor-general  have  with  the  gov- 
ernments of  the  islands,  the  other  islands,  if  any? — A.  The  govern- 
ment of  the  other  islands  was  in  him;  they  were  secondary  to  the 
govenor-general  in  all  their  departments,  the  department  of  internal 
affairs  and  of  the  administration  of  justice  and  all  other  departments; 
all  of  those  governments  were  subject  to  the  governor-general. 

Q.  Were  the  governors  appointed  for  the  island? — A.  There  were 
civil  governors  and  politico-military  governors. 

Q.  By  whom  were  they  named? — A.  The  civil  governors  by  the 
home  government,  and  the  military  governors  by  the  governor- 
general. 

Q.  Was  there  in  the  islands  any  species  of  self-government,  any 
government  by  election  by  the  people? — A.  None  of  the  higher 
authorities  were  elected  by  vote;  they  were  all  appointed  by  the  gov- 
ernor-general; the  only  officers  elected  were  the  gobernadorcillos  of 
the  towns. 

Q.  Was  that  form  of  government  satisfactory  to  the  Spaniards  who 
were  living  here  ? — A.  I could  not  answer  that  exactly,  but  my  per- 
p c 24 


370 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


sonal  opinion  is  that  instead  of  the  Indians  rising  up  against  it  the 
Spaniards  should  have  risen  up  against  it. 

Q.  What  part,  if  any,  in  this  government  did  the  church  take? — A. 
In  all  the  branches  of  the  government. 

Q.  Will  you  explain  that;  did  the  priest  ex  officio  hold  office  or 
what?- — A.  Yes. 

Q.  What  did  they  do? — A.  They  formed  a part  of  the  provincial 
council  which  existed. 

Q.  The  priest,  by  virtue  of  his  occupation,  was  a member  of  the 
provincial  council,  was  he? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  the  archbishop,  by  virtue  of  his  position,  was  a member  of 
the  advisory  council  or  the  cabinet?- — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  The  government,  then,  was  to  some  extent  theocratic? — A.  Yes, 
sir;  everything  was  subject  to  the  will  of  the  church,  almost  every  thing. 

Q.  Was  that  species  of  government  satisfactory  to  the  Spaniards? — 
A.  The  friar  has  always  been  the  enemy  of  the  Spaniards  themselves. 

Q.  What  Avas  the  relation  between  the  Filipinos  and  the  church,  or 
rather  what  were  the  feelings  of  the  Filipinos  toward  this  church 
government  ? — A.  In  the  towns  in  which  the  Indian  was  the  owner  of 
most  of  the  ground  he  had  to  submit,  because  if  he  did  not  he  AATas 
subject  to  deportation;  in  the  towns  in  which  the  religious  orders  were 
the  owners  of  the  land  there  was  a disguised  slavery. 

Q.  To  what  extent  did  this  ecclesiastical  control  exist;  1 mean  as  to 
the  families  and  ordinary  family  life  of  the  people  ?- — A.  It  entered 
into  the  very  most  private  affairs  without  regard  to  the  means  it 
employed. 

Q.  How  did  it  affect  the  morality  of  the  people? — A.  It  had  no 
effect. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  to  say  that  the  priests  or  the  friars  had  no  influence 
on  the  morality  of  the  people,  for  avc  have  heard  a great  deal  of  talk 
to  the  contrary,  and  Ave  would  like  your  opinion? — A.  You  haATe  as  a 
proof  of  the  matter  the  little  desire  for  work  Avhich  the  people  have, 
which  may  be  explained  to  a certain  extent  by  the  fact  that  the  Indian 
does  not  have  many  necessities. 

Q.  I mean  to  ask  the  question — I might  as  well  ask  it  directly — 
whether  the  priests  Avere  immoral  or  not  in  their  connection  with 
the  Filipino  women? — A.  The  friars  lived  with  concubines.  I think 
that  only  5 per  cent  of  them  may  be  calculated  as  being  half  moral. 

Q.  Didn’t  that  condition  create  a good  deal  of  feeling  among  the 
Filipinos  ? — A.  Anyone  that  showed  any  such  feeling  was  deported,  so 
that  the  feeling  of  the  people  Avas  not  made  knoAvn.  The  feeling  of  the 
people  was  not  known. 

Q.  Didn’t  the  antagonism  to  the  friars  enter  largely  into  the  rebel- 
lion against  Spain? — A.  On  this  question  the  subject  must  be  entered 
into  at  length  and  a somewhat  lengthy  explanation  is  necessary.  The 
insurrection  of  189(5  began  over  a purely  agrarian  question. 

Q.  Willyou  explain  to  us  what  the  foundations  of  this  purely  agrarian 
question  were? — A.  A little  before  the  year  189(5  the  Order  of  lieco- 
letos,  which  was  the  owner  of  lands  in  Imus — three  years  before  the 
date  of  the  insurrection,  in  the  time  of  General  Weyler,  1 don’t  remem- 
ber the  exact  time,  they  imposed  the  rice  tax,  in  Calamba  they  took 
tithes  of  the  rice — and  from  this  dated  the  hostile  feeling  against  the 
friars  of  Calamba.  The  protest  of  the  people  of  Calamba,  as  well  as 
those  of  Imus,  started  public  feeling;  aroused  public  sentiment.  At 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


871 


this  time,  before  the  insurrection  of  1896,  the  number  of  Masonic 
lodges  was  very  much  increased  about  Manila,  and  was  opposed  by 
the  friars,  because  they  said  it  was  a sect  opposed  to  religion,  and  they 
opposed  these  Masonic  lodges,  mixing  up  this  affair  with  the  matter  of 
the  tithes  on  rice.  They  made  a report,  which  the  gentlemen  of  the 
Commission  can  judge  of  for  themselves,  that  there  was  a ship  in  Santa 
Mesa  with  2,000  arms  for  the  purpose  of  taking  the  capital.  This 
report  was  stirred  up  purely  by  the  friars,  and  at  this  time  (and  herein 
is  the  secret  history  of  the  revolution)  Father  Mariano  Dio  paid  half  a 
dollar  to  each  man  who  would  meet  in  Balintauag.  This  was  the 
beginning  of  the  revolution.  The  Indians,  seeing  that  there  were  men 
paid  by  the  priests  to  meet  at  this  point  with  only  bolos,  thought  the 
matter  over  and  decided  that  a revolution  could  be  made  with  bolos; 
and  with  bolos  the  revolution  was  started.  Immediately  from  the 
north  of  Sampalog,  where  Balintauag  is  situated,  the  whole  province 
of  Cavite  rose  in  insurrection  in  one  day. 

Q.  Didn’t  the  Spanish  Government  appreciate  the  gravity  of  the 
movement? — A.  Yes,  sir;  but  the  Spanish  Government  here  was  in 
the  hands  of  General  Blanco,  a man  who  was  in  the  hands  of  the 
Masons,  who  belonged  to  the  Masons;  and  inasmuch  as  the  proposition 
of  the  friars  was  to  get  General  Blanco  out  of  the  islands,  as  he 
belonged  to  the  Masons,  they  began  by  means  of  telegraph  to  Hong- 
kong, in  communication  with  the  home  Government,  to  work  against 
the  policy  of  General  Blanco;  for  in  my  opinion  General  Blanco 
appreciated  the  fact  that  it  was  not  a real  insurrection,  but  only  an 
agrarian  movement. 

Q.  Then  you  regard  as  the  cause  of  the  insurrection  this  agrarian 
movement? — A.  Yes;  it  had  been  growing  for  many  years,  from 
deportations,  executions,  and  disappearances,  even  to  the  disappearance 
of  whole  families  from  the  provinces;  and  the  moment  of  vengeance 
had  come,  which  appealed  to  the  fantastic  character  of  the  Malay  race. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  or  not  that  the  antagonism  to  the  religious  orders 
is  one  of  the  strong  elements  of  the  revolution? — A.  In  the  former 
revolution  or  the  present  revolution  ? 

Q.  I mean  the  one  against  Spain,  of  course. — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  advice  can  you  give  us  as  to  the  formation  of  a government 
here  that  would  be  satisfactory  to  the  people  living  here,  the  Spaniards 
and  the  Filipinos? — A.  A government  purely  civil — a purely  civil 
government. 

Q.  Could  you  designate  some  of  the  features  of  that  government, 
according  to  your  opinion  ? — A.  A civil  government  under  American 
authority,  absolutely  separate  from  the  military  authority.  The  cam- 
paigns should  be  separate  from  the  civil  direction. 

Q.  Our  Government,  as  you  know,  of  course,  is  a republic,  every- 
body is  elected  by  the  people.  Everybody,  from  the  highest  to  the 
lowest,  with  very  rare  exceptions,  are  elected  by  the  people.  The 
people  govern;  they  select  whom  they  please.  How  would  that  form 
of  government  do  for  the  Filipinos? — A.  On  the  question  of  self- 

fovernment  I have  very  conservative  ideas.  I do  not  think  that  the 
hilippine  people  are  in  a condition  to  govern  themselves.  The 
enlightened  classes  are  in  the  proportion  of  1 to  10,000;  1 in  10,000 
have  seen  something  of  the  world,  and  have  some  enlightenment,  the 
rest  have  seen  nothing  but  San  Mateo  and  Calamba. 

Q.  Would  the  Spaniards  here  approve  of  a strong  government  ? — 


372 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


A.  They  would  not  at  present  approve  of  a repressive  government. 
After  the  insurrection  is  finished  the  screw  might  be  put  on  and  turned, 
and  so  a strong  government  be  introduced. 

Q.  If  you  do  not  have  a strong  government  temporarily,  what  sort 
of  a government  would  you  have? — A.  I would  separate,  as  I said 
before,  the  civil  government  entirely  from  the  military  government, 
in  order  to  satisfy  the  self-love  and  aspirations  of  many  of  the  natives, 
for  there  are  many  of  them  who  wish  to  represent  different  towns 
here  in  Manila. 

Q.  Conceding,  then,  that  the  military  department  ought  to  have 
charge  of  purely  military  matters,  what  I want  to  find  out  is  what 
form  of  civil  government  you  would  recommend?  Would  you  recom- 
mend a governor-general  and  an  advisory  council,  a cabinet,  composed 
of  competent  people  of  all  nationalities,  or  what  would  you  recom- 
mend temporarily? — A.  At  present  the  military  government  should 
not  be  separate  from  the  civil  government — until  the  results  of  the 
experiments  which  the  gentlemen  of  the  Commission  have  implanted 
about  the  neighborhood  of  Manila  shall  be  seen. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  that  it  would  be  unwise  in  a short  time  to  estab- 
lish a civil  government  separate  from  the  military  government? — A. 
The  civil  government  should  be  established  immediately''  if  the  country 
is  to  be  pacified. 

Q.  Now,  when  you  say  a civil  government  ought  to  be  established, 
and  you  say’  that  we  ought  not  to  have  a republican  form  of  govern- 
ment, then  what  form  of  government  would  y’ou  have,  a governor- 
general,  some  one  to  rule  this  country,  with  an  advisory  council  and 
with  the  power  to  appoint  officers,  or  what  would  y'ou  have  ? — A.  A 
governor-general  responsible  for  his  acts  before  the  people,  the  advis- 
ory' council  would  follow  naturally,  for  there  would  be  a minister  of 
affairs  and  other  branches  of  the  government  who  could  advise;  but  it 
should  be  more  in  evidence,  in  order  to  please  the  fantastic  ideas  of  the 
Malay  race. 

Q.  Should  the  governor-general  have  the  power  to  make  appoint- 
ments or  only'  the  President  of  the  United  States? — A.  Yes,  sir;  he 
should,  for  it  would  be  better  for  the  needs  of  the  people. 

Q.  Could  there  be  found  here  enlightened  Spaniards  well  disposed 
toward  the  United  States  who  would  accept  office  under  that  Govern- 
ment?^— A.  I do  not  think  that  the  Spaniards  would  accept  appoint- 
ments at  present  on  account  of  a feeling  of  delicacy. 

Q.  Do  not  the  Spaniards  realize  that  this  country  belongs  to  us, 
that  the  war  is  over,  and  that  the  better  plan  for  them  is  to  be  friendly 
with  us  and  carry  on  business  the  best  they  can? — A.  That  would 
arouse  a question  of  great  delicacy,  greatly'  imaginary,  for  you  must 
understand  that  from  the  authorities,  the  Anglo-Saxon  writers,  which 
we  of  the  Latin  race  have  read,  we  have  absorbed  the  idea  that  your 
disposition  is  to  acquire  and  to  absorb. 

Q.  We  have  always  until  this  war  been  friendly  with  Spain;  our 
interests  here  are  identical.  Why  can’t  a public  sentiment  be  gotten 
up  here  which  would  make  the  Spaniards,  as  a body,  consider  them- 
selves practically  as  American  citizens,  if  they  are  going  to  stay  here 
in  Manila  ? — A.  Even  I,  myself,  still  remember  distinctly  the  cannonad- 
ing of  the  1st  of  May,  and  the  three  months  of  hunger  which  came  to 
pass  after  that;  and  nearly  all  the  Spaniards  are  still  in  a state  of  grief, 
not  only  on  account  of  the  destruction  of  property,  but  from  other 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


373 


private  and  personal  matters,  and  also  on  account  of  the  loss  of  those 
killed. 

Q.  That  is  all  very  natural,  but  it  is  not  compatible  with  the  ordi- 
nary course  of  men.  The  Spaniards  are  here.  They  have  the  same 
interests  as  we  have,  and  don't  you  think  that  in  a short  time  this  feel- 
ing of  jealousy  will  wear  off,  and  they  will  identify  themselves  with  our 
Government  and  with  our  people? — A.  This  will  disappear  under  an 
established  authority,  but  it  must  be  understood  that  here  we  have 
been  without  any  business  except  right  here  in  the  capital 

Q.  About  how  many  Spaniards  are  there  here? — A.  I calculate 
that  in  Manila  alone  there  are  three  or  four  thousand. 

Q.  They  are  business  people  ? — A.  The  majority  of  them  are  engaged 
in  business. 

Q.  Are  they  leaving  to  any  great  extent? — A.  Very  few  are  leaving; 
some  have  gone  to  their  properties  in  points  of  the  Islands  where  there 
was  the  most  peace,  but  very  few  in  Negros,  for  instance. 

Q.  Would  it  be  wise  for  these  3,000  people  to  remain  here  as  aliens, 
taking  no  part  in  the  government  and  taking  no  interest  in  it  ? — A. 
Yes;  they  would  be  content  to  do  so.  They  would  do  nothing;  there 
would  be  no  hostility. 

Q.  Yes;  but  they  have  a very  great  interest  and  a very  great  stake 
here.  Why  can’t  they  come  in  and  undertake  to  benefit  the  country 
the  same  as  the  American  merchants  would  do — by  their  political  influ- 
ence, I mean  ? — A.  The  Spaniards  wTio  own  extensive  properties  here 
are  no  more  than  three.  The  rest  of  them  are  engaged  in  keeping  shops, 
or  something  of  that  sort,  and  they  do  not  think  their  business  runs  to 
# any  great  improvement.  If  any  participation  by  the  peninsular  Span- 
iards here  was  taken  in  the  government,  animosity  would  be  created 
against  the  American  Government  among  the  Filipinos,  on  the  ground 
that  they  were  protecting  the  Spaniards. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  with  regard  to  whether  we  could  find  suffi- 
cient Filipinos  here  intelligent  enough  to  perform  the  ordinary  duties 
of  public  office? — A.  I think  that  the  government  could  be  filled,  all  the 
positions  of  the  government  could  be  filled,  for  the  present,  even  if  an 
elaborate  government  were  established  here.  In  the  first  place,  the 
taxes  should  be  reduced — should  be  lightened — for  the  country  has 
been  three  iTears  without  having  harvested  any  crop.  It  has  been 
greatly  to  the  gratification  of  the  people  that  the  cedula  personal  has 
been  reduced  to  a peseta.  It  is  a point  of  very  great  importance  for 
the  government  and  the  pacification  of  the  Filipinos. 

Q.  What  effect  would  pacification  have  on  business? — A.  Magnifi- 
cent. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  business  will  largely  increase? — A.  In  one 
year  alone  it  will  treble  itself,  and  if  the  American  Government  does 
away  with  the  custom-house  the  trade  of  the  Orient  will  come  here 
from  the  other  capitals  of  the  East. 

Q.  You  regard  the  location  of  Manila  as  important  to  the  commerce 
of  the  world,  do  you? — A.  Yes,  sir;  if  the  Philippine  markets  are 
opened,  the  Americans  have  the  ability  to  secure  all  the  commerce  of 
Singapore  and  the  ports  of  China. 

Q.  Do  you  contemplate  making  Manila  a free  port? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  How  would  you  support  the  government,  then  ?- — A.  By  means 
of  the  industrial  tax,  which  you  might  double.  The  territorial  taxes 
would  amount  to  millions. 


374 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Don  t you  think  that  the  Spanish  press  could  exercise  a great 
influence  here  if  it  openly  proclaimed  that  it  would  be  to  the  advantage 
of  the  people,  both  Spanish  and  Filipinos,  to  look  favorably  upon  our 
Government? — A.  The  influence  of  the  press  in  the  Philippines,  the 
people  having  been  educated  according  to  the  Spanish  system,  is 
negative. 

Q.  Is  there  an  idea  in  the  Spanish  mind  here  that  by  any  possibility 
Spain  can  ever  get  these  islands  again  ? — A.  That  is  a question  with  a 
great  many  different  views.  I have  news  that  there  is  a movement  on 
foot  at  Malolos  to  reorganize  the  Philippine  Islands  and  to  ask  for  a 
Spanish  protectorate. 

Q.  That  would  be  absolutely  impossible,  because  Spain,  by  the 
treaty,  has  ceded  the  Islands  to  us.  Hence,  it  is  not  only  impossible, 
but  it.  is  ridiculous.  Then  I repeat  the  question,  why  isn’t  it  for  the 
interest  of  the  press,  instead  of  throwing  cold  water  upon  the  Amer- 
ican Government,  as  some  of  them  do — not  notably  your  paper,  but 
some  of  the  papers  do — why  don't  they  openly  and  honorably  come 
forward  and  try  to  take  an  interest  in  public  matters,  the  same  as  other 
people  do  ? — A.  On  that  point  you  will  notice  that  there  exists  a regular 
police  system  and  political  policy  which  is  directed  against  the  Amer- 
icans on  the  part  of  the  Spaniards.  I will  put  the  problem  as  all  large 
problems  have  to  be  put.  There  are  four  Spanish  newspapers — El 
Progreso,  El  Noticiero,  La  Libertad,  and  my  paper,  El  Comercio. 
As  the  organ  of  the  Philippine  autonomist  party,  we  have  La  Demo- 
cracia,  the  Filipino  paper,  El  Libre,  and  El  Bayan  and  another  one 
just  recently  originated,  the  name  of  which  I do  not  know.  The  first 
four  papers  that  I have  mentioned  have  to  look  for  readers  not  to  the 
American  public,  but  to  the  Spanish  public.  Now,  a great  many  of 
the  political  problems  of  the  world  center  in  the  stomach.  Each  one 
of  these  papers  will  have  more  or  less  readers,  according  as  it  minis- 
ters to  the  sentiments  which  they  possess.  In  the  case  of  the  Span- 
iards, the  more  one  of  these  papers  shouts:  “Long  live  Spain,”  and 
“Death  to  America,”  the  more  popular  it  will  be  and  the  more  read- 
ers it  will  have.  It  is  a practical  problem. 

Q.  I understand  that  the  Spaniards  are  the  most  republican  people 
in  the  world.  I do  not  speak  of  the  Government,  but  of  the  individual 
Spaniard;  and  I can  not,  for  the  life  of  me,  see  why  the  Spaniards 
here  would  not  go  in  for  a free  government,  the  same  as  anyone  else 
would? — A.  I am  going  to  bring  to  the  attention  of  the  Colonel  two 
points  which  are  worthy  of  consideration.  You  may  have  seen  how 
the  Spaniards  live  in  the  Spanish- American  republics.  Not  more  than 
one  in  a million  returns  to  the  mother  country.  The  reason  that  I 
assign  for  the  attitude  of  the  Spaniards  here  in  the  city  is  their  daily 
meeting.  They  get  together  in  their  houses  or  in  their  shops  and  they 
keep  up  a constant  conspiring.  This  is  due  to  the  preeminently  ego- 
tistical character  of  the  Spanish  people. 

Q.  I believe  it  is  due  to  the  timidity  of  the  press.  I believe  that  a 
straightforward  open-talking  paper  here  that  would  present  to  the 
Spaniards  that  they  have  everything  to  gain  in  supporting  us  and 
everything  to  lose  if  they  do  not,  and  while  I understand  this  feeling, 
which  everybody  understands,  that  the  vanquished  always  feel  toward 
the  victors,  it  does  not  conform  to  the  sensible  feelings  of  the  world, 
and  it  seems  to  me  that  there  is  no  reason  why  the  Spaniards,  who  are 
the  most  republican  people  in  Europe,  would  not  assist  us  in  establish- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


375 


in  o'  a liberal  form  of  government  here.  Have  you  anything  more  to 
say  about  the  details  of  what  is  going  on  here? — A.  One  of  the  vision- 
ary ideas  of  the  Spaniards  who  are  in  the  country  is  that  Spain  may 
come  back  here,  and  that  in  that  case  they  may  get  employment  under 
the  government;  that  the  government  would  necessarily  have  to  be  an 
autonomy,  and  an  autonomy  very  much  more  liberal  than  an}rthing 
that  has  existed  in  the  past. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Concerning  the  idea  that  Colonel  Denby  expressed  as  to  the 
republican  tendency  of  the  Spaniards,  1 would  like  you  to  state  your 
personal  views.  You  were  acquainted  with  General  Arolos,  who  was 
here;  he  was  a republican? — A.  Will  you  explain  to  me  how  repub- 
lican ideas  can  be  held  by  a man  occupying  the  situation  that  he  occu- 
pied? As  for  the  Spaniards  who  remain  here  in  Manila,  they  have 
just  as  much  inclination  toward  republicanism  as  they  have  toward 
monarchy,  because  the  people  who  have  come  to  the  Philippine  Islands 
have  not,  as  a matter  of  fact,  been  politicians.  Arolos  was  a very 
noted  republican  in  politics.  To  continue,  I want  to  explain  to  you  my 
political  ideas,  which  may  be  very  peculiar;  being  a republican  I could 
not  take  the  oath  to  support  a monarchial  form  of  government,  as 
General  Arolos,  as  a matter  of  fact,  did,  for  to  me  it  would  be  a con- 
tradiction. The  explanation  of  the  attitude  of  the  Spaniards  in  Cuba 
is  that  they  are  the  owners  of  the  property,  whereas  here  they  are  only 
for  the  most  part  shopkeepers;  and  it  seems  to  me  you  have  an  expla- 
nation of  the  fact  that,  in  the  provinces  where  the  Indian — the  native — 
is  the  owner  of  the  land,  there  is  less  disposition  to  insurrection,  whereas 
in  all  the  provinces  where  he  is  not  the  owner  of  the  land  there  is  a 
greater  disposition  to  insurrection;  so  that  those  who  are  hostile  to  us 
here  are  men  who  have  no  responsibility  and  have  nothing  to  lose. 

Q.  What  do  you  think  would  be  the  best  plan  for  combating  this 
difficulty,  for  conciliating  the  Spaniards? — A.  I am  going  back  some- 
time and  bring  one  or  two  facts  to  your  consideration.  I think  it  was 
in  the  month  of  June  of  last  year  the  Spanish  Government  authorized 
the  arming  of  the  Philippine  militia  to  resist  the  American  forces.  I 
allowed  myself  to  write  to  the  captain-general  of  the  archipelago  an 
article  of  the  following  nature:  “The  King  has  given  orders  to  arm  the 
people  of  the  country,  to  resist  an  invasion  from  without.  I want  to 
make  a proposition,  to  say  to  you  that  most  of  the  people,  that  every- 
body, desires  or  ought  to  desire  peace,  and  that  in  order  to  get  it  we 
must  publish  the  pros  and  cons  of  the  various  questions  that  can  be 
settled,  and  we  must  consider  both  sides.”  If  I,  as  a result  of  having 
published  an  article  in  which  there  was  a reference  made  to  the  exter- 
mination of  the  Indians  by  the  Government  of  the  United  States,  have 
been  corrected  by  the  authorities,  what  guarantee  can  you  give  me  if 
1 publish  a discourse  of  Senator  Foraker  or  of  Mr.  Hanna,  with  anti- 
imperialistic  sentiments,  in  order  to  combat  it  in  my  argument? 

Q.  You  wouldn’t  get  those  ideas  from  either  Senator  Foraker  or 
Senator  Hanna.  You  have  got  the  names  wrong. — A.  I mentioned 
that  fact  because  you  will  see  in  the  collection  of  the  numbers  of  the 
Independencia  1 from  the  beginning  until  now  that  they  take  satisfac- 
tion in  publishing  and  republishing  the  antiimperialistic  speeches 

1 The  Independencia  was  a periodical  published  by  the  insurgents  and  circulated 
among  their  ranks. 


376 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


which  are  made  at  home,  and  that  ought  to  be  combated  here  and  that 
ought  to  be  fought.  I made  a mistake  in  the  names.  The  Indepen- 
dence has  been  publishing  these  antiimperialistic  speeches  and  they 
ought  to  be  opposed  here.  The  fact  that  none  of  these  antiimperial- 
istic  articles  have  appeared  in  the  press  here  in  Manila  has  led  out- 
siders to  believe  that  the  old  press  censorship  is  continued  up  to  the 
present  time.  They  think  otherwise  those  articles  would  have  been 
published. 

Q.  We  do  not  think  it  is  necessary  to  pubiisn  me  antiimperialistic 
arguments,  and  the  authority  to  do  so  would  have  to  be  obtained  from 
the  provost  marshal. — A.  Taking  into  account  the  ignorance  and  stu- 
pidity of  the  people  outside,  I think  it  would  have  a good  effect  to'  let 
things,  even  if  they  were  tolerably  strong  against  the  existing  policy, 
be  published  here,  so  as  to  convince  the  people  that  we  were  strong 
enough  to  do  so;  that  we  did  not  have  to  pay  attention  to  those  things; 
because  they  would  say,  if  those  things  were  allowed  to  be  published 
here  in  Manila,  in  the  sight  of  the  American  authorities,  “they  do  not 
amount  to  anything  at  all  or  they  would  not  let  them  go  on.” 

Q.  The  answer  to  that  is  that  we  do  not  control  that.  That  is  a 
matter  under  the  control  of  the  provost  marshal. — A.  I understand 
that  is  the  case  perfectly  well,  but  at  the  same  time  the  point  I have 
made  is  a point  that  it  will  be  well  enough  for  you  to  keep  in  mind 
with  reference  to  its  future  effect.  In  fact,  there  is  no  one  publishing 
a paper  here  to-dav  who  would  dare  to  go  against  the  existing 
authorities. 

With  thanks,  the  meeting  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  LEGARDA. 

Manila,  August  1 2,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair).  Professor  Worcester,  and 
John  K.  Mac  Arthur,  secretarv. 

Senor  Benito  Legarda,  residing  at  No.  16  Calle  de  San  Sebastian, 
appeared  before  the  Commission,  and,  in  response  to  its  interrogatories, 
testified  as  follows: 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I would  like  to  have  you  give  me,  in  your  own  words,  an  account 
of  the  causes  which  led  up  to  the  revolution  of  1896.  In  the  first 
place,  tell  us  what  the  Filipinos  were  fighting  for  when  that  revolu- 
tion began;  tell  us  about  the  most  important  events  in  that  revolution, 
and  afterwards  go  on  and  tell  us  about  the  events  that  occurred  after 
Dewey’s  coming  here,  and  the  causes  which  led  up  to  the  present  mis- 
understanding between  the  Filipinos  and  ourselves.  We  want  your 
account  of  that  historical  period  from  the  breaking  out  of  the  revo- 
lution of  1896  to  the  breaking  out  of  the  present  trouble  between  the 
Filipinos  and  ourselves. — A.  The  causes  of  the  revolution  of  1896  were 
closely  related  to  the  revolution  of  1872  (there  was  a little  manifesta- 
tion in  1872  in  Cavite),  and  the  principal  cause  of  both  was  the  great 
influence,  which  was  continually  increasing,  of  the  friars,  not  only  in 
the  government,  but  in  the  actual  administration  of  the  affairs  of  the 
towns.  The  uprising  of  1872  is  attributed  to  the  native  priests.  Ihe 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


877 


result  was  that  all  the  workmen  in  the  arsenal  at  Cavite  took  possession 
of  all  the  resources  of  the  armory  of  Cavite  and  made  resistance  to 
everything  Spanish.  As  a result  of  this  some  Filipinos  were  executed, 
and  soon  it  appeared  that  everything  had  quieted  down.  But  some, 
continuing  their  work,  went  on  to  Spain,  where  they  founded  a news- 
paper, which  was  called  Solidaridad.  In  this  newspaper  they  made 
known  their  desires  for  reform  in  the  Philippines;  that  administrative 
careers  should  be  opened  to  Filipinos,  and  that  they  should  be  allowed 
to  enter  into  these  careers,  and  should  have  representation  in  the 
administrative  chambers  in  Spain,  and  that  the  abuses  which  had  been 
committed  here,  especially  by  the  friars,  should  be  stopped. 

This  society  of  Filipinos  united  itself  to  the  Masonic  society  in 
Spain,  and  they  established  branches  here;  and  this  Masonic  society, 
which  was  a true  Masonic  society  with  all  the  characteristics  of 
Masonry,  converted  itself  afterwards  into  the  Katipunan  Society. 
This  society,  the  Katipunan,  made  great  progress  here  in  the  Philip- 
pines, for  the}'  had  to  do  greatly  with  the  common  people;  they  never 
had  anything  to  do  or  mixed  at  all  with  the  higher  class  of  people 
here  in  the  Philippines.  As  a result  of  this,  the  society  gained  much 
credit  and  power,  and  undermined  the  forces  which  were  in  existence, 
especially  the  native  regiments  of  Tagalogs.  This  was  in  1896;  the 
revolution  broke  out  at  San  Juan  del  Monte  in  August.  A curious 
fact  that  must  be  noted  was  that  a friar,  who  was  the  priest  of  Tondo, 
was  the  cause  of  its  breaking  out,  for  General  Blanco  knew  of  this  move- 
ment of  the  people  and  what  was  going  on,  and  General  Blanco  was  in 
favor  of  making  these  concessions  to  the  people.  This  friar  denounced 
the  society,  for  he  had  a very  intimate  friend  who  was  a Filipino,  and 
he  caused  this  friend  to  be  introduced  into  the  Katipunan  Society,  and 
this  friend  afterwards  became  the  leader  of  the  revolution  himself. 
This  Filipino  was  named  Andres  Bonifacio,  and  later  on  he  was  chief 
of  the  revolution  and  chief  of  the  Katipunan  Society.  He  took  refuge 
in  Cavite,  and  all  that  province  rose  up.  Aguinaldo,  who  was  munici- 
pal captain  in  Old  Cavite  at  that  time,  was  also  a member  of  the 
Katipunan.  When  he  heard  that  the  civil  guard  was  going  to  arrest 
him,  he  revolted,  too.  He  met  a man  who  was  his  superior  in  the 
society — that  is,  Bonifacio — and  as  his  ambition  was  his  moving  spirit, 
he  caused  Bonifacio  to  be  shot.  The  revolution  extended  to  the  prov- 
ince of  the  north  Nueva  Ecija,  etc. — in  fact,  to  all  the  Tagalog  prov- 
inces. The  revolution  came  to  an  end  because  the  Spanish  sent  large 
reenforcements  here.  They  put  down  the  revolution  completely  in  the 
province  of  Cavite.  It  took  refuge  then  in  Nueva  Ecija,  and  the 
whole  thing  wound  up  there  in  a place  called  Biac-na-bato. 

Q.  Did  it  extend  to  any  of  the  Visayan  provinces? — A.  Very,  very 
little. 

Q.  Wasn’t  there  some  trouble  in  the  island  of  Cebu? — A.  Very  lit- 
tle, especially  because  the  Spaniards  bombarded  the  place  and  destroyed 
everything  in  a barbarous  manner. 

Q.  What  was  the  conduct  of  the  Spaniards  in  this  revolution?  Did 
they  treat  the  Filipinos  in  a humane  manner  or  not? — A.  Tyrannical. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  some  illustration  of  the  way  they  treated  them  ? — 
A.  Certainly.  The  facts  are  public  in  the  Philippines.  Before  the 
revolution  simply  on  suspicion  they  hung  people,  killed  them,  burned 
them,  and  treated  them  in  a horrible  manner,  torturing  them,  burning 
their  limbs  and  different  members  of  the  body  of  suspected  persons. 


378 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Where  did  they  carry  on  such  work  ? — A.  I have  heard  that  in  the 
ayuntamiento  here  they  have  done  a great  many  of  these  things,  but 
mostly  in  the  Calle  de  Anda,  where  the  chief  of  police  is  located  at 
present,  and  where  the  headquarters  of  Veterana  was  established. 

Q.  How  did  they  treat  their  prisoners? — A.  Horribly.  They 
scarcely  gave  them  anything  to  eat  and  they  died  by  the  hundreds  in 
the  walls.  One  day  they  locked  up  in  the  fortress  of  Santiago  all  the 
people  they  had  got  in  Santa  Mesa,  and  there  was  such  a crowd  and 
the  place  so  badly  ventilated  that  in  the  morning  they  found  dO  or  50 
dead  of  suffocation. 

By  Colonel  Henry: 

Q.  W hat  vear  was  that? — A.  1896. 

Q.  Did  they  shoot  any  of  their  prisoners  ? — A.  A great  many;  a very 
great  many.  Many  prisoners  that  were  taken  into  town  simply  on 
suspicion  were  shot  in  the  roads,  on  the  pretext  that  they^  tried  to 
escape  while  being  conducted  from  one  place  to  another. 

Q.  I have  been  told  that  it  was  practically  a daily  occurrence  to 
shoot  prisoners  during  that  whole  period.  Is  that  true? — A.  It  was 
true.  They  put  the  prisoners,  the  criminals,  on  the  Luneta,  not  on 
the  sea  side  of  the  ellipse,  but  on  the  landward  side  in  the  road,  and 
the  firing  squad  stood  in  the  field  farther  inland  and  shot  the  prisoners 
that  way — toward  the  sea. 

By  Colonel  Henry: 

Q.  I have  heard  they  gave  notice  of  that  beforehand  and  that  ladies 
and  gentlemen  turned  out  to  see  the  sight.  Is  that  true? — A.  It  was 
published  in  the  newspapers. 

Q.  Did  they  have  music  in  attendance? — A.  Yes,  sir;  they  had 
music  present,  and  after  the  execution  the  troops  defiled  before  the 
dead  bodies,  playing  the  March  of  Cadiz,  which  is  peculiarly  Spanish, 
and  there  were  many  cheers  and  much  enthusiasm. 

Q.  And  ladies  and  children  were  there? — A.  Yes,  sir;  there  were 
many. 

Q.  How  often  did  that  occur? — A.  Almost  every  day  there  were 
executions  when  Polavieja  was  here. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Could  we  get  copies  of  the  newspapers  now  containing  announce- 
ments of  these  executions?— A.  They  were  published  in  the  Oceana 
Espanola,  El  Comercio,  and  El  Espanol. 

Q.  Did  they  shoot  women  as  well  as  men  ? — A.  In  the  towns  out- 
side they  did  so,  but  not  here. 

Q.  I have  heard  that  some  distance  up  the  railroad  there  wei’e  a great 
number  of  men  and  women  who  thought  they  were  going  to  be  pro- 
tected, and  they  got  on  their  knees  when  they  saw  the  troops  approach- 
ing until  the  troops  got  up  on  them,  and  then  they  were  all  massacred. 
Is  that  true? — A.  It  is  a fact, 

Q.  What  place? — A.  I think  it  was  in  Polo,  and  in  Melinta  where 
the  Dominican  friars  have  plantations.  Whenever  there  was  an  action 
they  took  no  prisoners.  They  killed  all  they  took  in  the  field. 

Q.  On  what  sort  of  charges  were  these  people — these  prisoners — 
shot  that  they  killed  here  in  the  city?— A.  The  charge  was  generally 
that  these  people  were  members  of  the  Katipunan  society,  or  that  they 


REPOET  OE  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


379 


were  in  favor  of  that  society;  and  an  accusation  was  all  that  was  nec- 
essary, and  many  times  these  accusations  were  false. 

Q.  Was  any  form  of  trial  gone  through  with  before  these  execu- 
tions?— A.  Yes,  sir;  there  was  a form  of  trial,  but  they  did  not  leave 
the  prisoners  free  to  testify.  They  established  their  accusations  many 
times  by  torture.  They  dragged  confessions  out  of  them  by  torture. 

Q.  Did  they  have  regular  instruments  of  torture  for  that  purpose? — 
A.  Yes,  sir.  The  most  common  form  of  torture  was  to  hang  the 
accused  by  the  hands,  with  their  hands  extended  straight  out  behind 
them,  and  let  them  fall.  Another  one  of  the  many  most  commonly 
employed  was  to  use  an  electrical  machine  and  to  put  the  wires  in 
connection  with  the  feet  or  hands  of  the  accused,  and  the  torture 
was  terrible.  Another  was  tire,  which  was  placed  in  a brazier.  The 
accused  had  to  stand  over  the  brazier  without  anything  on  his  feet. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Did  they  beat  him? — A.  Yes,  sir;  but  that  was  comparatively 
nothing.  That  was  the  first  thing  they  did.  They  always  did  that, 
and  a broken  arm  or  rib  was  too  insignificant  to  be  worthy  of  mention. 

Q.  Did  they  hang  them  suspended,  so  that  they  barely  touched  the 
ground? — A.  They  did,  so  that  they  could  just  touch  the  ground  with 
the  point  of  their  feet. 

Q.  What  do  }tou  think  about  the  peace  of  Biac-na-bato?  Were  the 
insurgents  bought  up?  Give  us  a full  account  of  it. — A.  The  peace 
of  Biac-na-bato  was  arranged  bv  Pedro  Paterno  with  Gen.  Primo 
de  Rivera.  I do  not  recollect  exactly  the  date — it  was  in  1897. 
The  only  one  of  the  terms  which  I have  been  told,  for  I have  not  seen 
the  treaty,  was  that  the  Spanish  Government  agreed  to  make  certain 
reforms  here  and  to  pay  a certain  sum  of  money.  The  principal 
reforms  which  were  to  be  made  were  not  specified  in  the  treaty,  but 
were  agreed  upon  by  word  of  mouth.  One  of  the  principal  reforms, 
which  was  not  stipulated  ;n  the  treaty  itself,  was  the  suppression  of 
religious  orders  and  the  taking  away  from  these  religious  orders  of 
all  intervention  in  the  administration  of  towns.  The  sum  of  money 
which  was  to  be  paid  by  the  Spanish  Government  was  $1,200,000,  to 
be  divided  into  three  payments,  as  follows:  $100,000  to  be  paid  on  the 
spot;  $100,000  when  Aguinaldo  and  other  chiefs  arrived  in  Hongkong, 
and  $100,000  to  be  divided  among  the  chiefs  who  remained  here  in  the 
Philippines  upon  the  delivery  of  all  their  arms. 

Q.  I would  like  to  know  how  many  of  these  chiefs  there  were. — A. 
Some  twenty  or  thirty,  I think;  not  more. 

Q.  What  excuse  did  Aguinaldo  and  those  officers  give  for  receiving 
that  money? — A.  He  said  that  he  was  convinced  that  he  could  not 
make  any  further  resistance  against  the  Spanish  and  that  the  people, 
in  consideration  of  these  reforms,  ought  to  drop  the  matter,  and  also 
that  he  would  be  enabled  to  go  to  Hongkong  and  prepare  for  another 
revolution  with  the  money,  provided  they  did  not  fulfill  the  reforms, 
as  the  majority  of  the  promises  were  not  stipulated  in  the  treaty,  but 
were  simply  promised  by  word  of  mouth. 

Q.  Did  they  have  at  any  time  during  the  course  of  that  revolution 
the  idea  of  fighting  for  their  independence? — A.  No;  I never  heard  this 
word  “independence  ’ spoken,  nor  do  I think  that  they  are  capable 
of  understanding  it,  even  up  to  this  time. 


380 


KEPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  Can  we  got  a copy  of  that  treaty? — A.  I will  ask  the  family  of 
Senor  Paterno  and  sec  if  they  have  one. 

Q.  Was  there  an  end  of  hostilities  then  for  some  period  of  time 
between  the  Filipinos  and  Spaniards? — A.  Not  exactly  a complete  ces- 
sation of  hostilities,  because  there  were  small  parties  of  bandits  who 
continued  to  make  trouble.  They  had  more  courage  than  a good  many 
others  and  they  would  get  together  in  small  bands  of  5 and  6 and  attack 
the  towns,  and  the  Spanish  managed  to  get  rid  of  these  small  parties 
by  means  of  money,  buying  their  guns,  etc.,  but  sometimes  shooting 
many  of  them.  This  $400,000  which  ought  to  have  been  divided  here 
was  thus  accounted  for,  and  people  say  that  Primo  de  Rivera  retained 
part  of  it  and  that  Paterno  also  got  some  of  it. 

Q.  Did  the  Philippine  people  know  that  war  was  likely  to  break  out 
between  Spain  and  the  United  States  before  the  outbreak  actually 
occurred?— A.  No;  there  were  very  few,  just  a very  few,  who  sus- 
pected it.  These  were  people  who  got  newspapers  from  abroad,  Eng- 
lish newspapers.  I myself  had  read  it  before  the  outbreak  of  war 
between  the  United  States  and  Spain  over  her  colonies,  in  the  Econo- 
mist, of  London. 

Q.  How  long  before  the  1st  of  May? — A.  A very  short  time;  it 
may  have  been  about  one  month. 

Q.  Was  the  press  censorship  here  very  strict  during  that  time? — A. 
The  newspapers  had  a great  deal  to  say  about  it.  The  censorship  was 
strict. 

Q.  Was  the  battle  of  the  1st  of  May  a great  surprise  to  most  of  the 
people  here?— A.  It  was  a very  pleasant  surprise. 

Q.  The  people,  then,  were  glad  of  the  arrival  of  the  Americans  and 
the  destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleet? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  in  your  own  way  what  followed — the  landing  of 
Aguinaldo,  his  influence  over  the  people  in  getting  his  forces  together — 
and  give  us  an  account  of  the  causes  which  led  to  the  change  of  feeling 
toward  the  Americans? 

Q.  I would  like  first  to  have  you  give  the  relations  which  existed 
between  our  troops  and  the  Filipinos-  how  they  mutually  treated  each 
other  and  how  and  when  that  led  up  to  antagonism?— A.  The  general 
in  command  here  at  the  time  of  the  destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleet 
was  a new  man,  for  Primo  de  Rivera,  as  soon  as  he  found  out  that 
hostilities  were  likely  to  break  out  between  the  United  States  and 
Spain,  made  it  his  business  to  hurry  away,  and  this  new  man  was 
appointed.  General  Augustine  called  a meeting  of  all  the  principal 
people  in  Manila  and  made  the  proposition  that  they  should  form  a 
consultive  bodv  and  he  promised  that  whatever  this  consultive  body 
should  propose  would  be  listened  to  and  given  attention  by  the  Gov- 
ernment. It  was  proposed  bir  General  Augustine  to  this  junta  that 
militia  be  formed  and  that  the  people  be  armed  to  resist  the  American 
invasion,  and,  as  a matter  of  fact,  many  militia  forces  were  called  in 
from  the  towns  and  were  called  Philippine  militia,  and  both  here  in 
Manila  and  in  the  neighboring  towns  rifles  were  issued  to  them. 
About  this  time,  somewhere  between  the  20th  and  30th  of  May, 
Aguinaldo  came  to  Cavite. 

Q.  How  did  he  come — in  a man-of-war? — A.  Yes,  sir;  an  American 
boat,  a gunboat  which  was  very  fast,  the  Me  Oulloch. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  where  he  got  aboard  that  gunboat  ? — A.  1 am 
not  sure  whether  it  was  Mirs  Pay,  Hongkong,  or  some  other  place. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


381 


I do  not  know.  Aguinaldo  had  scarcely  come  to  Cavite  when  the 
spirit  of  resistance  decreased  greatly  among  the  Spanish,  and  very 
soon  it  was  seen  that  the  militia  who  were  fighting  for  Spain  changed 
their  minds  and  went  over  to  Aguinaldo;  and  soon  the  Filipino’s 
belief  in  the  possibility  of  Spain’s  triumph  over  the  Americans  was 
very  rare. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Did  the  native  regiments  all  desert,  or  did  some  remain? — A. 
They  pretended  to  attack  the  revolutionary  forces,  but  they  shot  up  in 
the  air. 

Q.  Now,  will  }rou  tell  us  about  the  early  relations  between  our  own 
troops  and  those  of  the  Filipinos? — A.  When  I heard  that  Aguinaldo 
had  come  to  Cavite  I went  over,  for  I considered  it  a piece  of  foolish- 
ness to  continue  resistance  here,  and  1 was  appointed  subsecretary  of 
the  treasury  in  the  revolutionary  government. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  was  the  date  of  that  ? — A.  June  15.  And  a short  time  after 
I took  my  position  1 became  convinced  of  the  hostile  feeling  which 
Aguinaldo  had  toward  the  Americans. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  A' hat  reasons  did  you  have  for  thinking  so? — A.  The  first  proc- 
lamation that  he  issued  after  his  arrival  here  said  that  the  war  of  the 
great  American  nation  against  Spain  would  be  a very  humane  war  and 
that  the  liberty  of  his  country  had  been  promised.  A short  time 
afterwards,  as  soon  as  he  had  some  forces,  he  proclaimed  independence 
in  the  few  towns  which  he  had  procured,  without  the  consent  of 
Admiral  Dewej",  at  whose  orders  he  had  come,  and  the  first  time  that 
I presented  myself  to  him  I heard  from  his  own  lips  that  neither 
Admiral  Dewey  nor  any  other  American  had  ever  promised  him  such 
independence.  And  this  hostile  spirit  of  his  became  more  and  more 
pronounced  all  the  time,  and  when  the  forces  were  disembarked  at 
Paranaque  and  occupied  the  vicinity  of  Paranaque  he  became  very 
much  enraged  and  wished  to  begin  hostilities  against  the  Americans. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  What  date  was  that  ? — A.  This  was  in  J uly.  The  first  expedition 
remained  in  Cavite. 

Q.  Were  they  soldiers  or  marines? — A.  Soldiers — the  Oregons, 
Fourteenth  Infantry.  The  First  California  Regiment  arrived  June  30. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  reason  was  there  for  this  change  of  feeling? — A.  The 
reason  was  because  he  knew  that  he  could  not  obtain  independence, 
and  that  was  what  he  wanted. 

Q.  Why  did  he  want  independence  ? — A.  On  account  of  his  ambi- 
ion. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  did  he  know  he  could  not  obtain  it? — A.  I suppose  that  no 
one  promised  it  to  him.  He  had  no  promise  of  it,  and  he  had  no  hope 
of  getting  it,  and  he  would  not  have  been  able  to  make  war  at  all,  or, 
in  fact,  get  here  without  the  aid  offered  him  by  the  blockade  of  the 
American  squadron.  In  this  time  the  troops  disembarked  at  Para- 


382 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


naque,  and  he  wished  to  open  hostilities  against  the  Americans,  and 
he  again  passed  the  word  along  to  resist  in  the  different  towns  and 
give  no  aid  whatever  to  the  Americans. 

Q.  Do  you  know  that  of  your  own  knowledge? — A.  I know  that  of 
my  own  knowledge,  because  I was  there  myself.  The  great  question 
was,  he  did  not  have  any  cartridges,  and  when  the  Americans  brought 
the  troops  to  Cavite  he  lost  confidence  in  the  Americans  and  left 
Cavite  and  established  himself  in  Bacoor. 

Q.  When  did  Aguinaldo  get  arms,  what  arms  did  he  get,  and  how 
did  he  get  them? — A.  The  first  arms  that  he  got  were  the  ones  which 
he  was  able  to  get  from  the  arsenal  in  Cavite. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Tell  us  how  they  were  obtained  in  Cavite. — A.  The  Admiral 
allowed  the  people  to  enter  Cavite  and  rob  the  place,  because  he  did 
not  have  force  enough  to  occupy  it  in  a military  manner,  and  the 
people  came  there  from  other  towns  and  sacked  Cavite  completely. 
There  was  nothing  left  further  to  be  stolen  in  Cavite. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  This  means  that  they  took  the  arms  in  the  arsenal?— A.  Yes,  sir; 
they  took  the  arms  from  the  arsenal  and  they  took  up  guns  from  the 
sunken  Spanish  vessels. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Were  the  guns  from  the  Spanish  ships  in  condition  to  be  used? 
Where  were  the  breechblocks? — A.  The  breechblocks  were  missing, 
but  the  Philippine  Company  fixed  them  up  in  Cavite.  A gunboat, 
the  Com.pania  de  Filipino , was  armed  with  two  of  these  guns  taken 
from  Spanish  ships. 

Q.  Were  you  with  Aguinaldo  at  the  time  he  was  in  Bacoor? — A. 
Yes,  sir;  and  I kept  on  with  him  when  he  was  in  Malolos. 

Professor  Worcester.  Now,  will  you  go  on  with  your  story  from 
the  landing  of  the  troops  at  Paranaque  which  you  have  already  com- 
menced? 

Colonel  Denby.  What  was  done  with  our  troops  when  they  came 
ashore,  where  were  they  placed,  where  were  the  insurgent  troops,  and 
what  were  the  relations  between  them? 

Senor  Legarda.  General  Anderson,  who  1 believe  was  in  charge  of 
the  American  lines  at  this  point  (Paranaque),  asked  Aguinaldo,  by  letter, 
or  by  means  of  Major  Bell  or  Major  Bourns,  or  in  some  manner,  for 
a trench — that  is,  the  trench  of  Paranaque — and  Aguinaldo,  knowing 
well  that  this  was  the  strongest  point  the  Spanish  had,  and  that  it  was 
fortified  with  artillery,  and  that  he,  with  all  his  efforts,  could  never 
take  it,  did  not  find  it  at  all  convenient  to  let  the  Americans  have  it, 
and  when  Camp  Dewey  was  established  and  this  trench  occupied, 
Aguinaldo  was  sorry  he  had  made  this  arrangement  and  he  took  his 
troops  and  placed  them  behind  the  American  troops. 

Q.  Will  you  please  tell  us  where  Paranaque  is? — A.  On  the  seashore, 
just  beyond  Malate,  about  3 or  4 miles  from  Manila.  Although  Gen- 
eral Merritt  and  General  Anderson  had  telegraphed  Aguinaldo  a great 
many  times  not  to  attack,  nevertheless,  he  had  issued  orders  to  his 
troops  to  attack  Manila,  as  the  Spanish  were  worn  out  and  demoralized 
here,  and  on  the  surrender  of  the  Spanish  to  the  Americans  of  all  their 
different  positions  it  came  to  pass  that  as  the  American  troops  did  not 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


383 


arrive  promptly  to  occupy  these  points,  the  revolutionary  troops  came 
in  and  took  up  the  positions.  Then  Aguinaldo  transferred  his  gov- 
ernment  and  his  residence  to  Malolos  and  then  differences  arose,  for  in 
the  Spanish  surrender  they  surrendered  the  city  of  Manila  and  all 
suburbs  and  defenses,  and  some  of  these  suburbs — a large  part  of 
them — were  occupied  by  the  revolutionary  troops  and  General  Otis 
ordered  Aguinaldo  to  withdraw. 

Q.  Did  Aguinaldo  expect  to  enter  Manila  with  his  troops  witli  the 
Americans? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Was  there  any  disappointment  among  the  troops  of  Aguinaldo 
that  they  were  not  permitted  to  plunder  the  city?  Was  there  any 
plan  to  plunder  the  city? — A.  Yes,  sir;  there  had  been  such  a plan. 

Q.  Tell  us  about  that  plan. — A.  They  wished,  of  course,  to  come 
into  Manila  after  having  robbed  it,  for  there  was  a plan  to  rob  the 
whole  city.  Aguinaldo  himself,  while  in  Bacoor,  pointed  out  crowds 
of  people  to  me,  passing,  carrying  sacks,  who,  he  said,  were  on  their 
way  to  Manila  to  sack  the  city  when  they  were  able.  His  plan  was  to 
come  in  with  the  Americans  and  to  make  arrangements  to  get  the 
arms  of  the  Spanish  prisoners  and  attack  the  Americans  from  the 
inside  after  the  city  had  been  occupied,  if  Americans  didn’t  give  the 
independence  of  the  Philippines. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  How  far  is  Bacoor  from  Manila  and  Paranaque? — A.  Three  or 
d miles  from  Malate  to  Paranaque  and  3 or  d miles  from  Paranaque 
to  Bacoor. 

Q.  Bacoor  is  in  the  interior? — A.  No,  sir;  on  the  bay.  After  the 
Americans  occupied  Manila  he  made  many  propositions  to  General 
Merritt,  and  sent  a commission,  composed  of  Buencamino,  Areneta, 
and  one  other  whom  I do  not  remember,  to  make  some  arrangements 
with  General  Merritt.  Among  their  propositions  I remember,  with 
great  clearness,  these:  That  the  palace  of  Malacanan  be  given  up  to 
Aguinaldo,  also  the  churches  of  Manila,  Paco,  and  Ermita,  and  I think 
that  a part  of  the  money  which  was  taken  from  the  Spaniards  as  spoils 
of  war  was  to  be  given  up,  and  above  all,  that  he  be  given  the  arms  of  the 
Spanish  prisoners  or  troops.  This  commission  was  not  able  to  make 
any  arrangements,  for  General  Merritt  answered  that  as  far  as  the 
palace  of  Malacanan  went  he  wished  it  for  himself,  and  that  the 
churches  mentioned  were  private  property,  and  that  the  arms  could 
not  be  given  up  because  they  were  to  be  returned  to  the  Spanish,  and 
afterwards  Aguinaldo  named  another  commission,  the  same  ones  as 
before,  and  myself.  So  they  made  an  arrangement  to  give  Aguinaldo 
the  village  of  Bacoor  and  to  allow  him  to  remain  in  the  position  which 
they  had  occupied,  and  in  recognition  of  the  fact  that  the  presence  of 
the  Filipino  troops  had  been  of  great  benefit  to  the  Americans  in  the 
taking  of  Manila  and  keeping  the  Spaniards  inside,  we  asked  free 
entry  of  all  ports  for  ships  using  the  Philippine  hag,  and  asked  that 
the  positions  in  the  custom-house  and  administrative  departments  and 
in  the  courts  which,  it  was  supposed  would  be  established,  should  be 
tilled  by  appointees  who  should  be  Filipinos. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Did  Aguinaldo  still  have  the  idea  at  that  time  of  lighting  us  ? A. 


384 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Always;  he  never  gave  up  that  idea.  Afterwards  Aguinaldo,  being  in 
Malolos,  and  being  obliged  to  withdraw  his  forces  from  the  suburbs 
of  Manila,  openly  showed  acts  of  hostility  repeatedly  against  the  Amer- 
ican forces.  One  of  the  principal  reasons  for  which  General  Otis  found 
himself  obliged  to  order  the  Filipino  troops  to  retire  was  the  number 
of  barbarous  acts  which  they  committed,  which  civilization  could  not 
countenance,  such  as  kidnaping,  which  these  troops  committed  in  Paco, 
done  by  Pio  del  Pilar,  and  robberies  which  were  constantly  being  com- 
mitted in  Manila.  It  was  utterly  impossible  for  police  to  prevent 
these  occurrences,  considering  that  armed  bodies  of  men,  completely 
as  undisciplined  as  the  insurgents,  were  in  close  proximity. 

Q.  What  was  this  kidnaping  by  Pio  del  Pilar? — A.  He  ordered 
people  to  be  seized  who  favored  the  Americans,  or  even  people  who  had 
strongly  favored  the  Spanish.  Some  were  carried  away  and  flogged 
and  others  were  taken  off  in  the  hills  and  disappeared,  and  were  never 
heard  of  again.  Then,  the  principal  agitators  of  Aguinaldo,  who  were 
Sandico  and  others,  established  here  in  Manila  the  “ popular  clubs,” 
which  was  a society  similar  to  the  Katipunans,  and  this  society  became 
very  widespread  here,  and  its  principal  object  was  to  prevent  Fili- 
pinos from  getting  in  sympathy  with  the  Americans. 

Q.  What  was  the  ostensible  object  of  the  society? — A.  It  was  to 
educate  the  people.  Sandico  himself  told  me  that  the  principal  fear 
which  he  felt  was  that  the  Filipinos,  considering  the  free  spirit  which 
existed  in  American  laws  and  American  institutions,  would  become  more 
American  than  the  Americans  themselves,  and  that  he  wished  to  pre- 
vent this  by  this  means  of  “ popular  clubs.”  Sandico  and  the  other 
agitators  of  Aguinaldo  then  established  militia  with  the  same  object 
as  that  of  the  “ popular  clubs,”  hoping  to  attract  the  people  in  various 
ways,  and  amuse  them  with  the  idea  of  spreading  the  anti- American 
feeling;  and  the  militia  was  formed  with  the  idea  of  promoting  a pop- 
ular outbreak  in  the  city  ivhile  the  revolutionary  forces  were  attacking 
the  American  lines  of  the  advance  force.  This  militia  had  bolos  ready 
for  the  uprising — the  outbreak  here  in  the  city.  These  bolos  were  made 
in  all  of  the  carriage  factories  and  in  all  the  iron  foundries.  They 
stole  the  springs  of  carriages  in  houses,  which  are  made  of  steel,  the 
principal  metal  used  in  making  bolos;  and  he  (Aguinaldo)  called  a meet- 
ing of  all  the  chiefs  in  Malolos  with  the  object  of  finding  out  their 
opinion  on  the  subject  of  making  war. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  about  the  time  of  that  meeting?- — A.  It  was  in 
January  of  this  year.  The  knowledge  that  hostilities  were  going  to 
break  out  was  so  common  among  the  people  that  one  week  before  the 
outbreak  of  hostilities  Aguinaldo  sent  word  to  all  the  people  in  the  city 
that  all  who  were  friendly  to  him,  with  their  families,  should  withdraw 
from  the  city,  and  he  wrote  one  letter  to  me  myself.  Before  that  time 
I had  given  up  my  official  relations  with  the  government.  About  this 
time  a party  of  Americans,  without  arms,  who  wished  to  make  a plan  of 
a position  which  the  insurgents  had  at  La  Loma,  were  captured  and 
taken  at  the  point  of  the  bayonet  to  Malolos.  It  became  necessary 
to  send  Major  Bell  out  there  to  say  that  this  was  a markedly  hostile  act, 
and  the  next  day  these  men  were  released.  Orders  were  given  to  all  the 
Philippine  forces  not  to  let  a single  American  pass.  The  chief  of  the 
pumping  station,  an  American  officer,  who  wished  to  go  to  Santolan, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


385 


was  received  by  bayonets  in  Santa  Mesa  and  made  to  go  back.  I pre- 
sume that  on  account  of  this  General  Otis  issued  orders  that  no  Fili- 
pino soldier  under  arms  should  be  allowed  to  pass  American  lines  at 
any  hour  of  the  night,  and  I have  heard  that  some  Filipino  soldiers 
tried  to  pass  the  bridge  at  Santa  Mesa  and  a shot  was  fired,  and  the 
outbreak  of  hostilities  was  the  result. 

Q.  What  date  was  that? — A.  Saturday,  the  Ith  of  February. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Do  you  know  what  effect  the  firing  of  the  4th  and  5th  of  Feb- 
ruary had  on  the  insurgents? — A.  It  was  a horrible  slaughter. 

Q.  We  understand  that  with  the  close  proximity  of  the  two  lines 
there  was  a great  deal  of  trouble  between  the  soldiers  of  the  opposing 
forces,  and  we  would  like  to  know  the  facts? — A.  Hostile  acts  and 
demonstrations  were  the  regular  order  of  the  day  between  the  two 
lines,  and  there  were  disputes  and  other  troubles  continually,  which  did 
not  come  to  blows  by  sheer  good  fortune. 

Q.  What  did  the  Filipino  soldiers  do  here  and  on  the  lines? — A. 
The  Filipino  soldiers  were  always  committing  robberies  here.  One 
of  the  reasons  for  the  outbreak  of  hostilities  was  the  conviction  that 
the  Filipino  soldier  thought  the  American  soldier  was  a coward. 

Q.  Why  did  they  have  that  impression  ? — A.  They  said  that  when 
the  American  troops  had  the  position  at  Paranaque  they  were  attacked 
by  the  Spaniards  and  retired  from  the  position,  and  that  the  Filipinos 
saw  this  and  believed  from  this  that  they  were  cowards. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Is  it  true  that  the  Filipino  soldier  would  insult  the  Americans, 
would  point  his  gun  at  them,  would  call  them  cowards,  would  ask  them 
if  the}’  wanted  to  fight,  would  make  gestures  of  menace  toward  them  ? 
Is  that  all  true,  as  we  have  heard  here? — A.  It  is,  certainly;  and  there 
were  daily  disputes  for  this  reason,  for  the  Filipinos  thought  the 
Americans  were  cowards  and  would  never  attack,  and  what  gave  them 
reason  to  think  this  was  the  fact  that  the  Americans  avoided  trouble 
and  endeavored  to  prevent  the  outbreak  of  hostilities  here. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  as  to  whether  any  day  had  been  fixed  for 
the  commencement  of  hostilities  by  Aguinaldo  ? — A.  I think  not. 

Q.  Was  it  not  understood  that  in  a few  days  they  would  make  an 
attack  ?■ — A.  It  was  understood,  yes,  sir,  that  in  the  near  future. 

Q.  Aguinaldo  had  been  preparing  for  it,  had  he  not  ? — A.  He  was 
preparing  for  it. 

Q.  He  had  been  gathering  troops,  arms,  ammunition,  and  getting 
ready  for  war? — A.  Yes,  sir;  I think  so. 

Q.  Then  it  was  understood  long  before  February  I that  there  would 
be  war? — A.  Yes,  sir;  that  hostilities  would  be  opened  in  the  near 
future. 

Q.  Everybody  expected  that  the  Filipinos  would  attack  the  Ameri- 
cans?— A.  Yes,  sir;  both  within  the  city  and  without. 

Q.  At  that  time  there  were  Filipino  troops  in  the  city? — A.  A great 
many.  This  militia  I spoke  of  was  here. 

Q.  M ere  they  not  in  Paco? — A.  They  were  in  Santa  Ana,  and  that 
night  they  tried  to  come  to  Paco. 

Q.  Isn't  Paco  a part  of  the  city? — A.  Yes,  sir.  They  were  in  Santa 
Ana,  for  General  Otis  had  made  them  retire  from  Paco. 

p c 25 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


8<SG 

Q.  Where  Mas  their  line? — A.  They  were  in  Santa  Ana  and  from 
Santa  Ana  to  the  bridge  of  Las  Dames,  near  the  town  of  Santa  Ana. 

Q.  Hum'  far  were  the  Filipino  lines  from  our  lines? — A.  One  end  of 
the  bridge  the ‘American  lines  were  and  the  Filipino  line  at  the  other 
end  of  the  bridge. 

Q.  When  this  shot  was  fired,  firing  commenced  along  the  entire 
line? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  What  was  the  length  of  that  line?-  A.  It  was  very  long  L5  or 
20  miles. 

Q.  Just  as  soon  as  that  gun  M as  fired  the  fighting  commenced  along 
the  whole  line  ? — A.  I saMr  near  La  Loiua  the  Filipinos  were  sending 
up  red  rockets,  M'hich  was  the  signal  agreed  upon  for  the  outbreak  of 
hostilities. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  So  that  they  had  a signal  agreed  upon  beforehand  ?—  A.  Yes,  sir. 

By  Colonel  Den  by: 

Q.  Do  you  know*  that  that  signal  was  agreed  upon? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Then  there  could  not  be  any  question  but  what  this  attack  was 
preconcerted? — A.  Yes,  sir.  certainly;  "but  I can  not  sav  that  it  was 
absolutely  agreed  upon  for  the  4th,  but  it  Mas  in  the  near  future. 

Q.  They  were  all  prepared  for  it  when  the  occasion  arose? — A.  I 
suppose  so. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  effect  did  the  fighting  of  the  first  two  days  have  on  the 
insurgent  leaders?  Did  they  have  any  idea  then  at  all  of  giving  up? — 
A.  It  caused  complete  demoralization.  All  the  organization  they  had 
was  completely  broken  up  and  destroyed.  Soldiers  went  to  the  M’oods, 
threw  aM’ay  their  ammunition,  and  did  not  want  to  tight  any  more  on 
any  condition.  For  many  miles  outside  the  line  nobody  would  be  met 

Mrith. 

Q.  Was  there  any  possibility  of  making  peace  at  that  time? — A. 
It  Mould  have  been  transitory  peace,  because  the  Americans  did  not 
have  sufficient  force  here.  If  on  that  day  there  had  been  sufficient 
force  here  it  would  have  been  easily  arranged,  or  if  before  that  there 
had  been  sufficient  force  here — say  fifty  or  sixty  thousand  men — there 
would  have  been  no  M ar. 

Q.  Was  Aguinaldo  personally  present  in  the  fight  of  February  4 
and  5? — A.  No;  he  did  not  direct  it.  He  has  never  been  in  command 
in  the  field  until  now,  since  Luna  is  dead. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Now,  dropping  this  aspect  of  the  matter,  suppose  we  go  back  and 
take  up  events  in  the  Filipino  congress  prior  to  the  war,  your  own  con- 
nection therewith,  and  your  final  breaking  away  from  the  Filipinos 
and  coming  to  live  here  in  Manila.  In  the  first  place,  how  Mas  that 
congress  got  together;  was  it  elected  or  appointed;  and  if  appointed, 
by  M'hom  was  it  appointed? — A.  This  congress  Mas  made  up  by  Agui- 
naldo. All  the  members  may  be  said  to  have  been  appointed.  There 
was  not  an  election.  There  were  a very  few  members  M ho  M ere  elected 
by  the  people,  but  a great  majority  were  appointed  by  Aguinaldo  and 
naturally  the  decisions  of  the  congress  had  to  be  as  Aguinaldo  desired. 

Q.  Did  Aguinaldo  have  the  power  to  remove  members  that  did  not 
vote  to  suit  his  M’ishes? — A.  Yes,  sir. 


REPORT  Ob'  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


387 

Q.  Did  he  ever  employ  this  right? — A.  Yes,  sir;  he  appointed  me 
vice-president  of  the  congress. 

Q.  Was  the  congress  fairly  representative  of  the  various  provinces 
in  the  Philippine  Archipelago,  or  chiefly  made  up  of  Luzon-  A.  Luzon, 
exclusively. 

Q.  In  file  island  of  Luzon  were  the  various  provinces  represented 
or  mostly  Tagalog? — A.  All  Tagalog. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  You  say  you  were  vice-president  of  the  congress.  Did  you  pre- 
side ovei  the  house?  What  were  your  duties? — A.  To  act  as  substi- 
tute for  the  president,  who  was  Paterno. 

Q.  Were  there  two  houses?— A-  Only  one. 

Q.  Then  the  president  presided  over  this  house? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Was  he  named  by  Aguinaldo? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Did  you  ever  preside? — A.  I only  attended  congress  twice,  for 
the  position  did  not  suit  me.  I hardly  stopped  there.  I did  not  like 
it,  and  I did  not  swear  to  support  the  constitution. 

Q.  What  importance  did  the  congress  actually  have?  Were  its 
decrees  put  into  effect  or  were  they  overruled  by  Aguinaldo  and  his 
cabinet  when  they  were  not  pleasing  to  them? — A.  Whatever  Agui- 
naldo wished.. 

Q.  1 wish  to  know  whether  the  congress  was  dominated  by  Agui- 
naldo and  his  cabinet  or  not?— A.  Completely. 

Q.  So  he  told  them  what  they  had  to  do  in  advance? — A.  It  was  plain 
that  he  did  so;  and  one  of  the  prime  causes  of  my  leaving  it -was  the 
knowledge  that  Aguinaldo  was  going  to  declare  war  against  the  Ameri- 
cans, for  he  did  not  wish  the  power  to  declare  war  to  reside  in  con- 
gress, but  in  him,  and  the  part  of  the  constitution  relating  to  this  was 
changed  in  conformity  with  his  wish. 

Q.  W as  it  not  true  that  the  congress  passed  a measure  to  the  effect 
that  the  protection  of  the  United  States  should  be  requested  for  the 
Philippines? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  And  what  was  the  reason  that  that  resolution  was  not  carried 
out? — A.  Because  Aguinaldo  disapproved  of  it. 

Q.  Who  influenced  Aguinaldo  during  this  time?  Was  he  influenced 
by  the  members  of  his  cabinet  or  by  others  who  were  not  members  of 
the  cabinet?— A.  He  did  not  take  the  advice  of  anybody  except  of 
Mabini. 

Q.  What  were  Mabini’s  feelings  toward  the  Americans? — A.  Very 
unfavorable  to  the  Americans. 

Q.  Was  the  army  so  disposed  toward  us? — A.  Yes,  sir;  from  the 
time  in  Bacoor. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  When  was  that  congress  got  together  for  the  first  time,  and  when 
did  it  adopt  the  constitution? — A.  I do  not  remember  the  date. 

Q.  The  month  ? — A.  Nor  do  I remember  the  month,  but  I can  inform 
you  afterwards. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  if  there  is  any  way  that  we  could  procure  the 
various  proclamations,  documents,  etc.,  issued  by  Aguinaldo  since  his 
landing  at  Cavite? — A.  I will  get  together  such  as  1 have,  and  I will 
get  other  people  to  get  together  all  that  they  have.  I thought  that 
you  had  them. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


388 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  What  effect  did  it  have  when  you  and  Dr.  Tavera  and  others  left 
the  cabinet?  Was  Aguinaldo  angry  with  you  ? — A.  At  first  he  was 
very  much  pleased,  because  we  formed  the  party  that  opposed  his 
policy,  but  afterwards  he  saw  that  we  were  setting  up  means  of  estab- 
lishing order  here,  and  this  took  away  a great  deal  of  his  prestige. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  On  what  date  did  you  leave  his  cabinet? — A.  December,  1898, 
but  before  this  date  I went  very  little  to  Malolos.  General  Otis 
advised  some  of  us  to  continue  going  to  Malolos,  for  he  knew  the  effect 
that  our  presence  there  would  have. 

Q.  Who  were  the  first  members  of  the  cabinet,  the  secretaries? — A. 
War,  Baldomero  Aguinaldo;  State.  Mabini;  Interior,  Leandro  y 
Barra;  Treasury,  Mariano  Trias.  Subsecretaries:  Treasury,  Benito 
Legarda;  War,  Coronel;  Interior,  Severino  de  las  Alas. 

Q.  Of  these,  which  remain  in  office? — A.  Only  Baldomero  Agui- 
naldo, the  secretary  of  war. 

Q.  What  has  becojne  of  Mabini  ? — A.  He  is  not  in  the  cabinet  any 
more,  he  has  left  it. 

Q.  Is  Mabini  disaffected  toward  the  government? — A.  No,  sir. 

By  Mr.  MacArthur: 

Q.  Is  he  still  advising  Aguinaldo?- — A.  I don't  know. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  the  names  of  the  present  cabinet? — A.  I think 
it  would  be  better  for  me  to  bring  you  such  a list  later. 

Q.  Among  those  men  is  there  anyone  favorable  to  America? — A.  I 
think  that  even  if  he  wished  to  be  he  would  have  to  be  very  careful  or 
he  would  be  shot. 

Q.  Whom  do  you  consider  the  most  able  man  among  them? — A. 
Pedro  Paterno;  but  he  is  an  agitator. 


TESTIMONY  OF  DR.  PARDO  DE  TAVFRA. 

Manila,  August  32,  1899. 

Present : Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Professor  Worcester,  and 
Secretary  MacArthur. 

Dr.  Pardo  de  Tavf.ra  appeared  before  the  commission,  and  in 
answer  to  its  interrogatories  stated  as  follows: 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Doctor,  we  wish  to  get  a history  of  the  events  which  transpired 
here  after  the  13th  of  August,  1898. ' We  want  to  know  when  Agui- 
naldo conceived  the  idea  of  fighting  the  United  States,  what  led  up  to 
that,  how  the  idea  grew,  and  all  the  events  relating  to  the  conduct  of 
the  Americans  and  Filipinos  which  have  any  bearing  on  the  question 
of  the  breaking  out  of  hostilities. 

Professor  Worcester.  You  want  to  go  back  beyond  the  13th  of 
August,  because  things  had  progressed  a long  way  before  that  time. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  You  had  better  commence,  then,  and  give  a history  of  the  events 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


889 


from  the  time  Admiral  Dewey  came  here,  the  formation  of  the  Malolos 
government,  and  everything  connected  with  political  events. — A.  As 
soon  as  the  news  was  received  in  Manila  of  the  breaking  out  of  hostil- 
ities the  Spanish  Government  in  Manila  took  two  measures  : In  tin'  tirst 
place,  to  look  up  forces  by  arming  the  Filipinos.  For  this  purpose  the 
militia  was  created.  They  called  all  the  old  insurgents,  who  had  laid 
down  their  arms  after  the  treaty  of  Biac-na-bato,  and  asked  them  if 
they  wished  to  defend  Spain  against  America.  Naturally  the  officials 
of  th(>  Government  calumniated  America,  saying  that  it  was  a country 
that  had  destroyed  the  Indians  within  its  domain;  that  it  was  a country 
that  destroyed  religion  wherever  it  came  in  contact  with  it,  and  that  it 
was  going  to  enslave  the  people  here  and  give  them  a worse  govern- 
ment than  existed  under  the  Spanish.  The  governor-general  also 
addedthat  if  the  natives  would  defend  Spain  against  America  they  would 
afterwards  be  given  complete  autonomy. 

Further,  to  give  strength  to  his  promises,  he  issued  a decree  form- 
ing a consultive  cabinet.  This  cabinet  was  formed  of  Spanish  author- 
ities and  twelve  or  fourteen  Filipinos  appointed  by  the  governor- 
general.  I was  appointed  a member  of  this  cabinet,  and  one  day  when 
he  asked  me  my  opinion  I told  him  that  I thought  the  cabinet  was 
utterly  useless  and  that  the  militia  would  again  turn  against  Spain. 
I based  my  opinion  upon  the  fact  that  the  Filipinos  did  not  believe  the 
promises  made.  I thought  that  the  Filipinos  preferred  to  attain  their 
independence  by  arms  rather  than  to  trust  to  the  autonomy  which  Spain 
promised  to  give  them;  that  it  would  be  a shorter  road  for  them  to 
gain  their  independence  by  force  of  arms  than  to  await  the  autonomy 
which  Spain  would  give  them.  No  one  could  believe  the  promises 
of  Spain.  It  was  a systematic  policy  of  deceit,  and  their  promises 
were  completely  discredited.  Then  came  the  1st  of  May,  1898,  and  the 
destruction  of  the  Spanish  fleet,  which  was  so  complete  that  the  Span- 
ish forces  lost  a great  deal  of  prestige,  for  the  Indians  saw  that  the 
fleet  of  Spain,  which  they  had  been  led  to  believe  was  so  great  and 
powerful,  had  been  destroyed  in  an  hour.  The  Spanish  then  pro- 
ceeded to  spread  the  idea  that  on  the  seas  they  did  not  have  any  force 
to  speak  of,  but  that  on  land  it  was  impossible  for  one  force  to  conquer 
another  force  if  the  inhabitants  of  the  country  did  not  wish  it,  and  the 
press  and  the  Spanish  Government  kept  spreading  this  idea  and  assert- 
ing that  no  nation  had  ever  been  able  to  conquer  another  nation  on 
land  when  the  people  thereof  opposed  it,  if  they  opposed  it  strongly 
and  tenaciously.  Then  followed  the  coming  of  Aguinaldo,  and  the 
Filipinos,  when  they  saw  that  Aguinaldo  came  with  the  Americans 
and  that  he  was  with  the  Americans,  conceived  a great  sympathy  for 
them. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  the  date  of  his  coming? — A I do  not  remember 
exactly.  The  bombardment  was  in  May,  and  I think  it  was  in  June 
when  he  came.  When  we  "knew  that  Aguinaldo  had  come,  and  observed 
the  spirit  that  was  extant  in  the  militia,  one  day  the  archbishop  and 
governor-general  said  to  me,  “ We  believe  we  are  lost  unless  we  obtain 
reenforcements  from  Spain.”  Shortly  afterwards  we  found  out  that  the 
insurgent  forces  were  beginning  to  attack  the  Spanish;  that  is  to  say,  the 
militia  which  had  been  given  arms  revolted,  and  turned  against  Spain. 
This  was  the  time  of  the  surrender  of  San  Francisco  deMalabon,  when 
General  Pena  was  captured,  with  a little  over  1,000  soldiers  with  them. 
A short  time  after  this  General  Monet,  with  2,000  soldiers,  was  sur- 
rounded in  Macabebe,  and  while  the  Spanish  were  quiet  and  not 


390 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


moving  in  Manila,  the  Filipino  forces  extended  themselves,  and  the 
insurrection  spread  all  over  the  island  of  Luzon,  and  the  insurgents 
made  themselves  masters  of  the  entire  island.  1 do  not  know  the 
moving  spirit  of  the  Filipino  army  at  this  time,  for  I was  not  in  touch 
v i tli  them,  hut  Aguinaldo  always  said,  and  the  Filipinos  always 
believed,  that  the  Americans  came  here  to  give  them  independence  and 
to  make  him  (Aguinaldo)  president. 

After  the  13th  of  August  1 went  to  see  Aguinaldo  (for  I wished  to 
know  him)  to  see  what  political  system  he  had  in  mind;  what  ideas  he 
had.  The  only  set  idea  which  he  had  was  to  come  into  Manila;  that  was 
his  only  lixed  idea.  He  could  not  understand  why  the  Americans  did 
not  immediately  install  him  as  president  of  the  Philippine  republic, 
for  he  considered  that  the  first  duty  of  Admiral  Dewey  and  General 
Merritt.  He  was  entirely  ignorant  of  diplomatic  proceedings  and 
political  measures,  and  wished  that  he  be  made  at  once  the  chief  of  a 
government.  The  day  that  I went  to  visit  him  he  was  occupied  in 
receiving  the  homage  of  all  the  Filipinos  who  came  to  visit  him.  He 
struck  me  as  being  a modest  man  convinced  that  he  had  a providential 
mission.  His  presence  was  agreeable,  for,  on  account  of  his  humble 
manner,  he  spoke  always  in  a very  low  voice;  he  spoke  Spanish  haltingly, 
for  he  did  not  speak  it  well,  but  he  spoke  Tagalog  in  a very  pleasing 
manner,  using  words  which  were  always  flattering  to  the  person  with 
whom  he  was  talking.  He  affected  to  speak  Tagalog  very  well.  When 
he  was  spoken  to  about  victories  he  was  pleased,  but  when  he  was 
spoken  to  about  a foreign  policy  or  political  affairs  he  seemed  to  be 
entirely  at  a loss.  Thus,  when  I said  to  him  that  he  seemed  to  be  very 
much  occupied,  and  that  1 would  speak  to  Mabini.  he  said,  ‘“Yes.  yes; 
talk  over  everything  with  Mabini." 

This  first  visit  was  made  in  Bacoor.  Mabini  occupied  a room  in  the 
same  house.  Mabini  is  a young,  pure-blood  Tagalog,  a lawyer, 
undoubtedly  a man  of  talent,  but  he  introduced  his  legal  forms  into 
everything  he  did.  I knew  him.  for  I had  attended  him  as  a physi- 
cian for  a sort  of  paralysis  of  the  lower  portion  of  the  body  which  he 
had  suffered  from.  He  was  a very  active  member  of  the  Katipunan 
Society,  and  this  sickness  which  he  suffered  from  was  the  reason  that 
the  Spanish  did  not  have  him  executed — shot — for  they  had  some  con- 
sideration for  him.  Mabini  was  in  a room  near  by,  seated,  and  receiv- 
ing people,  and  it  was  evident  that  he  was  the  man  who  was  directing 
affairs  and  who  was  the  source  of  all  inspiration.  From  the  first 
moment  that  1 talked  with  him  1 saw  that  he  was  a man  who  hated  the 
Americans. 

I made  a second  visit  to  Aguinaldo  when  he  was  established  in 
Malolos.  but  was  unable  to  talk  to  him  at  length  on  the  question  of 
a foreign  policy.  1 told  him  it  would  be  very  desirable  for  us  to 
make  scfme  immediate  determination  in  regard  to  our  position  with 
America.  At  this  time  they  were  about  to  discuss  the  future  of  the 
Philippines  in  Paris,  and  1 told  him  that  1 feared  America  would 
abandon  this  country,  for  it  would  not  be  to  their  advantage  to  retain 
it.  I made  it  plain  to  him  that  it  was  not  enough  for  us  to  desire 
America  to  stay  here,  but  that  it  would  be  desirable  for  us  to  show 
America  that  it  would  be  to  her  interest  to  keep  the  country.  1 told 
him  that  it  would  be  a very  good  thing  to  end  this  separation  and  to 
bring  the  two  peoples  together  in  order  that  the  Filipinos  might 
understand  what  the  Americans  desired,  and  that  the  Americans  could 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


mu 

also  become  familiar  with  the  Philippine  people  and  understand  the 
good  conditions  which  they  enjoyed.  I advised  him  and  all  his  govern- 
ment to  write  to  President  McKinley  and  ask  what  desires  he  had 
about  the  country,  what  form  of  government  or  protectorate,  and 
what  he  wished  to  do,  and  also  to  ask  him  not  to  abandon  the  Philip- 
pines. Dr.  Gonzales  and  Sefior  Araneta  were  present  at  this  conver- 
sation. They  are  men  of  prestige  and  they  furthered  my  ideas.  At 
another  visit  which  I made  to  Aguinaldo  he  told  me  that  the  ideas 
which  I had  expressed  to  him  pleased  him,  and  he  appointed  me 
director  of  foreign  affairs  in  order  that  I might  further  develop  my 
policy.  What  I told  Aguinaldo  was  that  he  should  write  to  President 
McKinley  asking  him  under  no  circumstances  to  abandon  the  Philip- 
pines, no  matter  what  kind  of  government  should  be  established, 
whether  a republic  or  a protectorate,  or  whatever  form,  leaving  that 
as  a matter  for  future  discussion.  Aguinaldo  pretended  to  accept 
my  policy,  but  he  only  intended  to  go  on  with  his  own  ideas,  and  in 
order  to  keep  me  from  forming  a party  he  called  me  to  him.  When 
I recognized  this  attitude  of  Aguinaldo  I wished  to  present  ray  resig- 
nation, but  I feared  one  thing  in  particular,  that  is,  the  revolutionary 
forces  which  occupied  certain  important  points  in  Manila.  In  fact, 
after  I had  succeeded  in  getting  these  forces  out  of  Manila,  three  days 
afterwards,  I presented  ray  resignation  and  separated  myself  com- 
pletely from  the  Malolos  government,  and  have  never  had  anything 
to  do  with  them  since. 

During  the  time  that  1 was  in  Malolos  I observed  that  all  the  mem- 
bers of  the  cabinet,  with  one  exception,  accepted  my  proposition. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  who  that  exception  was — A.  This  exception  was 
Felipe  Buencamino.  My  proposition  was  to  ask  President  McKinley 
to  allow  a republican  constitution  in  the  Philippines  under  an  American 
protectorate.  No  other  course  had  been  proposed  with  any  hope  of 
practical  success,  for  the  idea  of  independence  and  of  a nation  having 
its  own  flag  was  very  widely  diffused  among  the  people.  Aguinaldo 
was  pleased  with  this  idea,  for  it  allowed  him  to  be  president,  and  I 
told  him  that  this  plan  would  assure  his  position  as  president  for  all 
his  life,  which  view  of  the  proposition  pleased  him  very  much.  This 
idea  was  not  only  accepted  by  the  government,  but  all  tin*,  members 
of  congress  with  whom  1 talked  were  on  ray  side,  and  I had  a very 
strong  following  in  Malolos.  Three  opposed  me,  fought  against  me, 
Paterno,  Mabini,  and  Sandico.  Paterno  always  had  the  idea  of  again 
restoring  the  sovereignty  of  Spain.  Mabini  told  me  that  he  wished 
American  sovereignty,  but  that  he  did  not  wish  to  ask  for  it;  that  he 
wished  to  wait  until  America  should  offer  it.  This  idea  I considered 
the  idea  peculiar  to  a sick  man,  for  the  sickness  which  he  had  would 
affect  his  nerves  and  might  bias  his  judgment.  His  pride,  or  the  desire 
which  he  had  that  it  should  be  his  policy  and  that  he  should  be  the 
man  who  dictated  the  policy  adopted,  may  have  been  the  cause  of  his 
opposition  to  me.  Sandico  was  my  worst  enemy.  He  was  a traitor 
who  was  working  with  General  Otis,  and  who  apparently  was  agree- 
able to  everything  said,  but  at  heart  he  was  an  enemy,  not  only  of  the 
American  race,  but  of  all  white  people.  I thought  he  was  an  American 
partisan,  but  one  day  he  told  me  openly  that  he  detested  America  and 
all  whites,  and  that  he  was  working  for  the  protection  of  Japan.  I 
said  before  that  the  sovereignty  of  America  was  acceptable  to  Aguinaldo, 
but  it  is  very  difficult  to  say  what  this  man  wanted.  He,  in  fact,  had 


392 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


said  this  to  me,  but  on  the  other  hand,  he  was  always  urging  the  mili- 
tary men  to  prepare  for  war.  1 therefore  thought  that  he  was  a man 
Avho  was  disposed  to  make  war  to  defend  certain  rights  under  American 
sovereignty,  but  now  I sometimes  believe  that  this  man  iTs  making  war 
for  his  own  benefit  and  to  make  himself  more  notable  or  more  impor- 
tant. His  character  is  essentially  hypocritical  and  dissembling,  so  that 
at  present  it  is  possible  that  he  desires  peace,  but  still  believes  that  it 
is  his  duty  to  continue  war.  He  has  not  a great  deal  of  education,  nor 
a great  deal  of  discernment  to  overcome  the  influence  of  his  false  amour 
propre. 

Sandico  conceived  the  idea  of  forming  clubs  in  Manila,  which  were 
called  “popular  €■1111)8,”  apparently  with  the  idea  of  disseminating 
information  and  allowing  the  people  to  educate  themselves  by  talking 
of  political  affairs,  but  this  was  not  the  real  motive  for  the  formation  of 
these  clubs.  Sandico  saw  that  sympathy  and  good  feeling  between  the 
two  races  were  growing  in  the  city,  and  he  wished  not  only  to  do  away 
with  this  sympathy,  but  to  create  an  antipathy  among  the  people,  and 
thought  he  could  do  so  by  means  of  these  clubs,  and  in  fact  almost  all 
the  ill  feeling  is  due  to  these  clubs.  These  clubs  were  the  nucleus  or 
the  foundation  for  the  body  from  which  Sandico  afterwards  formed  the 
militia  inside  the  city,  made  up  for  the  purpose  of  fighting  against  the 
Americans.  Aguinaldo,  in  the  meantime,  abandoned  all  the  questions 
of  the  country — only  two  things  had  any  weight  with  him — to  get 
money  and  to  buy  arms.  He  said  that  he  wished  to  surround  himself 
with  men  of  the  greatest  prestige  in  the  country,  and  he  did  so, 
although  he  never  paid  attention  to  the  advice  of  these  people,  but  to 
that  of  the  scoundrels  who  surrounded  him.  He  wished  to  show  the 
Filipinos  that  all  the  men  of  the  best  reputation  were  with  him — on 
his  side — and  he  called  them  to  him,  not  for  advice,  but  only  to  en- 
hance his  own  strength.  He  never  thought  of  justice  nor  of  reason, 
but  he  always  thought  it  would  suffice  to  make  it  appear  that  he  was  a 
man  of  good  heart. 

Q.  Was  this  proposition  of  yours  to  President  McKinley  relating  to 
the  establishment  of  a government  here  ever  sent  to  the  President — 
A.  The  cabinet  at  Malolos  decided  to  send  my  proposition  in  a tele- 
gram to  the  President,  but  Aguinaldo  did  not  wish  to  do  so.  He  first 
said  that  he  wished  to  translate  it  into  Tagalog,  and  afterwards  that 
he  wished  to  put  it  into  cipher,  and  so  delayed  a month  without 
sending  it. 

Q.  At  the  time  the  Malolos  constitution  was  formed  was  the  question 
of  a protectorate  discussed  by  the  congress? — A.  No,  sir. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Who  wrote  that  constitution  ? — A.  It  was  voted  by  the  congress. 

Q.  But  who  wrote  it? — A.  A commission. 

Q.  Who  composed  that  commission? — A.  Calderon,  Gonzalez, 
Alberto  Barreto,  Tomas  del  Rosario,  Pablo  Ocampo,  and,  I believe,  I 
was  a member  of  this  commission — I was  a member  of  all  the  com- 
missions— also  some  others  whom  I do  not  remember. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  the  date  of  the  adoption  of  this  constitution  ? — 
A.  The  discussion  of  the  constitution  lasted  some  time — it  began  in 
October  and  ended  the  middle  of  December.  Aguinaldo  sent  a mes- 
sage to  congress  in  January  proposing  changes  in  this  constitution. 


REPORT  OF1  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


393 


The  constitution  was  sent  to  Aguinalclo  by  the  congress  in  December, 
and  he  returned  it  in  January  with  a message  proposing  certain  modifi- 
cations. Then  congress  appointed  a commission,  composed  of  Gonzalez, 
Barreto,  Calderon,  and  myself,  and  it  was  our  opinion  that  the  con- 
gress could  not  accept  the  changes — the  modifications — proposed  in  the 
message  of  Aguinaldo. 

Q.  When  Aguinaldo  sent  that  message  he  knew  of  the  treaty  of 
Paris? — A.  It  had  not  yet  been  signed. 

Q.  The  treaty  of  Paris  was  signed  December  10. — A.  In  Malolos  we 
lived  outside  the  world.  Aguinaldo  did  not  pay  attention  to  what  went 
on  outside. 

Q.  At  that  time  did  Aguinaldo  make  any  allusion,  in  private  conver- 
sation or  otherwise,  to  the  Government  of  the  United  States? — A.  I 
do  not  remember. 

Q.  Did  Aguinaldo  assume  at  that  time  that  he  did  not  have  to  account 
in  any  way  to  the  United  States? — A.  He  did  not  say  so  openly,  but 
thought  so. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  what  the  conditions  were  in  Manila  at  that  time 
with  reference  to  the  troops  on  each  side — where  they  were  stationed 
and  what  they  were  doing? — A.  The  relations  were  very  good  between 
the  soldiers,  but  bad  between  the  officers.  The  officers  were  very  arro- 
gant, and  believed  that  the  Americans  were  afraid  of  the  Filipinos,  and 
they  certainly  did  a great  deal  of  talking  in  this  strain,  and  they  wished 
an  outbreak  of  hostilities,  saying  in  half  an  hour  they  would  drive  all 
the  Americans  into  the  sea.  They  were  under  the  firm  conviction  that 
the  minute  the  attack  was  sounded  they  would  drive  the  Americans 
before  them  like  a regiment  of  children. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  some  idea  where  the  Filipino  troops  were  sta- 
tioned in  December  and  January  with  reference  to  the  American 
troops? — A.  I do  not  know  where  the  American  forces  were,  but  the 
majority  of  the  Filipino  forces  were  in  Caloocan,  San  Juan  del  Monte, 
Maitubig,  Santa  Ana,  and  Pa. say. 

Q.  Practically,  then,  the  troops  of  the  Filipinos  surrounded  the 
city? — A.  Always. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  mamT  they  had? — A.  I have  heard  it  given 
sometimes  as  10,000  and  sometimes  as  16,000. 

Q.  Were  they  well  armed,  well  drilled,  and  disciplined  troops? — A. 
They  were  well  armed  and  well  drilled,  but  they  were  disgusted  men, 
because  they  were  not  paid.  Their  food  was  also  very  bad.  These 
poor  soldiers  were  thoroughly  worthy  of  admiration.  They  said  that 
this  was  the  duty  of  a patriot  and  of  a citizen,  and  they  did  it.  It  is 
undoubtedly  true  that  if  these  soldiers  had  had  better  leaders  the 
Americans  would  have  had  a great  deal  more  to  do  than  they  had. 

Q.  Do  you  know  how  they  got  their  arms? — A.  General  Augustine 
gave  the  militia  which  I spoke  of  before  12,000  Remington  rifles. 
Furthermore,  the  Filipinos  took  7,000  or  8,000  Spanish  prisoners  with 
their  arms,  which  consisted  of  Mauser  rifles,  Remington  rifles,  and 
some  cannon. 

Q.  Did  any  of  the  Filipino  militia  remain  faithful  to  the  Span 
iards?— A.  Kone. 

At  this  point,  upon  the  request  of  Dr.  Pardo  de  Tavera,  the  exami- 
nation was  postponed,  to  be  continued  upon  the  following  morning. 


394 


REPOKT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


August  23,  1899. 

Present:  Colonel  Don  by  (in  the  ehair);  Commissioner  Worcester, 
and  Secretary  MacArthur: 

SENOR  TAVERA  (recalled). 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Before  picking  up  where  we  left  off  yesterday,  I would  like  to 
have  you  give  us  a history  of  the  treaty  of  Biac-na-bato. — A.  All  the 
Filipino  forces  from  Cavite,  Bulacan.  and  from  other  places  succeeded 
in  concentrating  at  Biac-na-bato.  The  Spanish  thought  it  would  be 
very  difficult  to  attack  this  place,  for  the  Filipinos  were  very  well  for- 
tified. With  Aguinaldo  and  his  force  remaining  there  well  fortified  for 
three  months,  the  revolutionary  ideas  were  spread  among  the  people, 
for  the  people  saw  that  the  chief  of  the  revolution  was  able  to  continue 
in  his  position.  The  idea  of  the  strength  of  the  Filipinos  was  very 
exaggerated  in  the  Spanish  mind.  They  thought  there  was  a much 
greater  force  in  Biac-na-bato  than  there  really  was,  and  they  thought 
also  it  would  require  1(>0, 000  men  to  take  the  position;  so  Primo  de 
Rivera  thought  it  would  be  better  to  attain  the  victory  by  money  than 
by  arms.  Then  Paterno  intervened,  giving  the  Spanish  general  an 
exaggerated  idea  of  the  strength  of  the  Filipino  forces,  and  offering  to 
lend  his  aid,  as  a go-between,  to  find  out  under  what  conditions  he  could 
arrange  for  peace.  Paterno  was  a man  who  was  educated  in  Madrid, 
and  he  knew  the  Spaniards  personally,  and  he  also  had  written  some 
books  on  the  Philippines,  in  which  he  made  various  statements  leading 
the  natives  to  believe  that  a civilization  had  existed  herein  former  times, 
similar  to  the  civilization  which  had  once  existed  in  India,  and  also  similar 
to  the  civilization  which  existed  in  Mexico  among  the  Aztecs  and  Incas 
before  the  Spaniards  went  there.  In  this  wav  he  had  influence  with  both 
the  Filipinos  and  the  Spaniards,  and  he  was  considered  here  as  a great 
patriot  among  the  people.  So  Paterno,  when  he  came  to  the  Filipinos, 
represented  himself  as  a friend  of  theirs,  and  also  represented  himself 
to  the  Spaniards  as  a friend  of  the  Spaniards  against  the  Filipinos,  and 
in  this  way  he  was  able  to  attain  his  personal  ends.  He  advised  the 
Filipinos  to  make  peace,  accepting  this  money,  saying  that  the  Span- 
iards would  give  them  certain  concessions,  among  which  were  good 
representation  in  the  Cortes  of  Spain;  the  sending  away  of  the  friars, 
which  was  the  principal  question;  the  right  of  association,  and  a free 
press,  lie  also  said  that  with  the  money  they  got  from  the  Spaniards 
they  could  see  from  Hongkong  whether  Spain  fulfilled  her  promises  or 
not,  and  if  not,  then  with  this  money  they  could  buy  arms  with  which 
to  start  another  revolution.  In  order  to  frighten  the  Filipinos  and  to 
impress  it  properly  upon  their  minds,  he  said  it  was  the  intention  of 
Spain  to  send  loo, 000  men  here,  and  he  made  it  appear  that  it  was 
only  by  his  personal  intervention  that  the  sending  of  these  100,000 
men  had  been  given  up.  It  was  not  difficult  to  convince  Aguinaldo 
and  the  Filipinos,  for  they  were  dying  of  hunger  in  Biac-na-bato,  and 
furthermore  sickness  caused  great  losses — dysentery  and  fever  and 
general  sickness  in  the  insurgent  camp — the  mortality  was  enormous. 
The  Filipinos  did  not  have  many  arms  in  that  place;  about  800  small 
arms,  composed  of  rifles,  shotguns,  target  rides,  and  a few  cannon  of 
antiquated  models,  and  some  ammunition.  Further,  Paterno  exagger- 
ated the  strength  of  the  Filipino  forces  in  talking  to  General  Primo 
de  Rivera.  He  made  it  appear  that  they  had  a great  many  men,  a great 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


895 


many  arms,  a groat  many  cannon,  and  good  trenches  in  all  directions, 
and  a groat  concourse  of  people,  and  that  they  preferred  to  die  rather 
than  yield — that  the  spirit  of  resistance  was  very  strong  in  them.  The 
General  told  Paterno  that  he  was  inclined  to  make  the  arrange- 
ment that  they  had  talked  over,  and  that  he  was  inclined  to  make 
the  concessions  which  had  been  mentioned,  and  that,  furthermore, 
he  had  authority  from  his  ministry  to  give  $2,000,000,  Mexi- 
can, if  necessary,  in  order  to  bring  about  a cessation  of  hostilities. 
Paterno  made  several  trips,  and  finally  he  told  the  General  that  the 
Filipinos  accepted  the  conditions  and  that  $1,200,000  was  enough.  The 
General  said  that  this  money  could  not  be  paid  in  the  Philippines,  and 
he  stipulated  two  or  three  terms  I do  not  exactly  recollect  for  the 
payment  of  the  money.  The  first  term,  or  time  of  payment,  was 
when  they  should  arrive  in  Hongkong,  and  the  other  was  when  all  the 
arms  should  have  been  given  up — all  the  arms  which  were  in  the  hands 
of  the  small  parties  in  the  island  of  Luzon.  All  the  chiefs  in  Biac-na- 
bato  also  were  bound  to  leave  the  Philippines.  When  the  General  had 
arranged  everything  he  discovered  that  Paterno  had  only  offered 
Aguinaldo  $-100,000,  Mexican.  He  pur  this  in  a memorial  which  was 
presented  to  the  Spanish  Senate,  of  which  he  was  a member.  Aguinaldo 
and  his  cabinet,  his  leading  chiefs,  left  for  Hongkong,  accompanied  by 
Paterno,  where  they  were  paid  the  first  payment  of  $200,000.  Mean- 
while some  chiefs,  Macabulos,  Isidore  Torres,  Pantaleon  Garcia, 
Llaneiro,  and  others  whom  I do  not  remember,  remained  here  and 
received  nothing  from  Paterno  or  Aguinaldo,  and  they  protested  and 
refused  to  give  up  their  arms,  so  Paterno  told  them  that  the  General 
would  give  them  more  money,  and  under  this  promise  they  gave  up  their 
arms.  The  General  gave  Paterno  $200,000  for  this  purpose,  but  Paterno 
has  never  been  able  to  prove  that  he  has  given  a cent  to  these  people. 
This  arrangement  of  peace  was  not  accepted  with  pleasure  by  the  peo- 
ple. They  were  angry  because  a matter  of  business  had  been  made  out 
of  the  revolution,  and  they  also  believed  that  it  was  the  Spanish  idea,  as 
their  policy  had  always  been,  to  conciliate  the  leaders  of  the  revolution 
and  afterwards  to  do  absolutely  nothing.  As  a matter  of  fact,  a few 
days  had  scarcely  passed  before  the  friars  began  their  same  old  perse- 
cutions. The  civil  guard  began  to  whip,  and  to  shoot,  and  to  abuse  the 
people  as  before,  and  in  the  province  of  Manila  the  civil  governor, 
Colonel  Myrol,  told  me  himself,  “Oh,  you  need  have  no  fear  of  another 
revolution,  for  I have  secretly  executed  more  than  200  men  whom  I 
believe  were  revolutionists  in  the  Province  of  Manila.”  Immediately 
the  country  rose,  although  they  had  no  arms,  in  Pampanga,  Bulacan, 
part  of  Pangasinan,  and  all  of  Zambales.  In  Batangasand  La  Laguna 
the}'  also  started  to  rise.  General  Primo  de  Rivera,  seeing  plainly  that 
the  comedy  of  the  Biac-na-bato  peace  treaty  would  not  last  as  long  as 
he  had  hoped,  left  the  Philippines.  He  left  the  Philippines,  leaving 
here  the  impression  that  everything  that  he  had  done  here  was  noth- 
ing but  a farce  and  a comedy.  Naturally,  none  of  the  promises  made 
by  the  General  have  been  fulfilled.  Furthermore,  the  Filipino  politi- 
cal prisoners  sentenced  by  law  were  punished  just  the  same,  and  were 
kept  confined,  being  obliged  to  suffer  the  penalty  of  the  laws  as  before. 
What  was  the  greatest  cause  of  irritation  to  the  Filipinos  (taking  into 
consideration  that  both  the  Filipinos  and  the  Spaniards  knew  and 
understood  that  the  principal  cause  of  the  trouble  had  been  the  friars) 
was  the  attitude  of  the  friars,  which  was  one  of  triumph  and  defiance. 
Then  a thing  begun  which  had  never  happened  before  in  the  Philip- 


390 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


pines — the  assassination  of  the  friars.  In  Malolos  the  priest  was 
assassinated  in  the  street.  The  priest  of  Kingwa  was  assassinated  in 
the  railway  station  at  Bigaa.  and  three  or  four  friends  who  accom- 
panied him  were  mortally  wounded.  In  Zambales  the  friars  were 
killed,  and  the  cry  was,  “ Long-  live  Spain,  and  death  to  the  friars.” 

While  the  country  was  in  this  condition,  General  Augustin  came 
here.  He  was  an  honorable  man,  and  a man  who  came  full  of  good 
faith,  and  who  believed  that  Spain  would  be  able  to  fulfill  her  promises 
in  the  Philippines.  He  was  an  innocent  politician.  It  was  his  mis- 
fortune that  after  he  had  been  in  Manila  fifteen  days  or  a month  hos- 
tilities broke  out  between  Spain  and  America.  Here  he  did  harm  to 
no  one,  and  had  the  reputation  of  being  a man  of  good  character.  He 
was  a man  who  was  very  well  disposed,  had  good  intentions,  and  he 
took  the  measures  which  I have  spoken  of  before.  He  wished  all  the 
Filipinos  to  unite  in  the  defense  of  Spain.  I have  spoken  before  of 
the  militia  and  of  the  measures  which  he  took. 

Q.  Will  you  give  us  the  date  of  the  treaty  of  Biae-na-bato? — A.  It 
was  the  latter  part  of  December.  1897. 

Q.  How  many  men.  and  who  were  they — if  you  can  give  their  names — 
that  were  required  to  go  abroad  with  Agumaldo,  and  how  long  were 
they  to  remain  out  of  the  country? — A.  Benito  Natividad  de  la  Rosa, 
Anastasio  Francisco,  Estrella.  Isabelo  Artacho.  Gregorio  del  Pilar, 
Belarmino.  Montenegro,  Viola.  Viniegra.  Maskardo,  Diaz,  Lukban, 
Llaneira,  Ruiz  and  Pedro  and  Maximo  Paterno.  The  government  did 
not  make  any  fixed  time  for  them  to  be  out  of  the  country.  The}"  only 
stipulated  that  they  should  go  away. 

Q.  Then,  if  these  promises  were  not  fulfilled  these  men  had  the  right 
to  return? — A.  Certainly;  they  had  a perfect  right  to  return.  It  is 
very  evident.  And  Spain  was  the  first  party  to  fail  to  comply  with 
the  stipulations  of  the  treaty. 

Q.  Did  Aguinaldo  get  the  whole  $400,000? — A.  No:  he  did  not 
receive  more  than  $200,000. 

Q.  Didn't  he  get  the  other  $200,000  afterwards  by  a suit  against  the 
Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank? — A.  No;  this  suit  was  over  another 
question — about  the  other  $200,000.  General  Primo  de  Rivera  says 
that  he  gave  it  to  Paterno.  and  Aguinaldo  says  that  he  did  not  receive 
it.  and  we  do  not  know  who  is  not  telling  the  truth  about  the  matter. 
I do  not  know  who  it  was  that  forgot  he  had  this  amount  of  money  in 
his  pocket. 

Q.  I would  like  to  understand  that  matter.  When  I came  through 
Hongkong  a suit  was  pending  for  this  $200,000  in  the  English  court 
against  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank. 

Professor  Worcester.  That  was  over  this  first  $200,000. 

Q (Repeated  to  witness.) — A.  It  was  over  the  question  of  the  first 
$200,000.  Aguinaldo  put  this  money  in  his  own  name  to  his  own  credit 
in  the  Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank,  and  when  Artacho  and  some 
others  found  this  out  they  said  this  was  not  right,  for  the  money  was 
not  Aguinaldo’s  private  property,  but  it  belonged  to  all. 

Q.  Was  that  the  only  $200,000  that  was  ever  paid? — A.  Yes,  sir:  I 
do  not  remember  that  they  received  any  other  money. 

Q.  Unless  you  have  something  further  to  say  on  this,  will  you  take 
up  the  examination  where  we  left  off  yesterday? — A.  No:  I have  noth- 
ing further  to  say  on  this. 

Q.  Yesterday  we  had  from  you  everything  transpiring  immediately 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION 


397 

prior  to  the  4th  of  February,  1899,  and  now  particularly  we  would  like 
to  know  the  treatment  of  the  troops  by  each  other;  the  menaces,  insult- 
ing1 gestures,  and  the  general  conduct  of  the  two  armies  toward  each 
other. — A.  1 also  thought  that  an  outbreak  of  hostilities  was  inevitable. 
Furthermore,  I thought  it  would  be  useful  and  necessary.  It  was  inev- 
itable, for  the  Filipinos,  convinced  that  the  Americans  would  not  make 
resistance  to  them,  insulted  them  daily  and  made  disparaging  remarks 
about  them.  It  was  absolutely  necessary  for  the  Americans  to  pay 
strict  attention  to  discipline  and  to  obedience  to  the  orders  of  their 
superiors  in  order  to  avoid  daily  conflicts.  I have  said  that  an  outbreak 
would  be  both  useful  and  necessary,  for  under  this  condition  it  was 
necessary  for  America,  if  she  wished  to  be  the  sovereign  of  the  Philip- 
pines, to  demonstrate  her  superiority.  It  was  the  only  way  in  which 
she  could  dominate  the  country  and  maintain  her  prestige.  The  Fili- 
pinos continually  sought  to  invade  the  territory  occupied  by  the  Amer- 
icans. In  some  cases  the  Americans  took  them  prisoners,  but  when 
they  asked  to  be  released  they  were  released.  On  the  other  hand,  if 
the  Americans  went  into  their  lines  they  were  tried,  and  in  fact  in  some 
cases  were  immediately  made  prisoners.  The  Filipinos  wished  to  have 
the  right  to  enter  Manila  with  their  arms. 

Q.  When  did  that  condition  exist?  When  they  first  came  were  they 
not  friendly,  so  when  did  they  drift  into  this  feeling  of  hostility? — A. 
It  is  a fact  that  they  were  friendly  at  first,  but  then  antipathy  and  hos- 
tile feeling  began  in  the  month  of  October,  after  the  “popular  clubs” 
were  founded. 

Q.  Was  any  effort  made  by  the  Americans  to  come  to  an  under- 
standing with  Aguinaldo? — A.  Yes,  sir;  and  I remember  one  day  on 
which  Major  Bell  and  I tried  to  persuade  Aguinaldo  to  come  to  Manila 
and  talk  with  General  Otis,  and  we  made  him  the  offer  that  afterwards 
General  Otis  would  return  his  visit  in  Malolos.  Aguinaldo  gave  us 
the  answer  that  he  was  not  afaid  to  come,  but  that  the  Philippine 
people  woidd  not  permit  him  to  come,  for  they  feared  he  might  be 
assassinated  by  some  rascal,  some  outlaw.  Some  Americans — for  in- 
stance, General  Reeves  and  General  Whittier,  collector  of  customs — 
visited  Aguinaldo,  and  I know  that  they  made  a very  good  impression 
upon  his  mind;  but  he  did  not  wish  that  Americans  should  come,  and 
one  day  he  said  to  me,  “ Do  not  bring  so  many  Americans  to  Malolos.” 

Q.  Did  these  Americans  talk  to  him  about  the  political  situation? — 
A.  I was  not  present.  I thought  it  very  strange  that  I was  not  asked 
to  be  present  at  the  visit  of  General  Whittier  and  General  Reeves. 
But  I knew  through  Buencamino  that  General  Whittier  said  he  was 
going  to  Paris,  where  he  would  defend  the  cause  of  the  Filipinos;  that 
is,  the  cause  of  an  independent  republic  under  an  American  protector- 
ate. I knew  General  Whittier,  for  Aguinaldo  sent  a silver-mounted 
dagger  which  he  had  worn  himself,  with  the  request  that  I and  General 
Garcia  should  deliver  it  to  General  Whittier  as  a present  from  him. 

Q.  Will  you  tell  us  anything  more  you  know  about  conditions  imme- 
diately preceding  the  outbreak  of  hostilities,  and  how  these  hostilities 
commenced  ? — A.  It  had  been  about  a month  since  I had  been  to  Malo- 
los, for  I feared  a personal  attack  there,  but  on  the  31st  of  January  I 
went  to  see  Aguinaldo  in  Malolos.  He  said  that  he  wished  me  to  visit 
him,  to  stay  with  him,  but  I said,  “No;  I can  not  do  that,  for  some  day 
hostilities  will  break  out  and  I shall  not  be  able  to  go  back  to  Manila.” 
He  said  that  I should  have  no  fear  of  an  outbreak  of  hostilities,  for 


398 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


he  did  not  wish  hostilities  to  begin.  In  fact,  he  did  not  wish  an  out- 
break of  hostilities,  but  he  excited  everybody  as  far  as  possible,  and 
especially  the  military  men.  and  urged  them  on,  and  when  the  question 
of  an  outbreak  of  hostilities  came  up,  I do  not  think  it  was  in  his 
power  to  stop  it.  There  was  such  an  overbearing  spirit  and  such  a 
warlike  spirit  in  the  military  element  at  Malolos  that  I made  a resolu- 
tion not  to  go  there  again.  On  the  night  of  the  1th  of  February, 
when  I heard  the  shots,  I supposed  it  was  some  attack  of  the  Filipinos, 
for  I knew  that  the  Filipinos  who  went  to  Washington  had  some  days 
before  telegraphed  by  way  of  Hongkong  to  Aguinaldo  to  attack  imme- 
diately, before  reenforcements  came  for  the  Americans.  It  afterwards 
came  to  my  notice  that  the  outbreak  of  hostilities  was  due,  as  every 
one  expected,  to  an  act  of  imprudence  on  the  part  of  either  the  Ameri- 
cans or  the  Filipinos.  It  was  said  that  the  aggression  was  due  to  the 
Filipinos  in  San  Juan  del  Monte.  I do  not  know  as  to  that,  but  all 
the  world  knows  that  as  soon  as  the  shots  were  heard  in  San  Juan  del 
Monte  tht-  whole  Philippine  line  attacked  the  Americans. 

Q.  W as  any  reason  given  after  the  knowledge  reached  nere  that 
the  treaty  of  peace  was  made  at  Paris — for  holding  the  Philippine  army 
in  front  of  Manila? — A.  To  attack  America  if  the  Americans  did  not 
wish  to  recognize  their  independence. 

Q.  Had  Aguinaldo  in  any  way  avowed  that  intention  ? Had  he 
explained  why  he  kept  his  army,  after  he  knew  peace  had  been  made  ? — 
A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  How  did  he  make  such  a declaration? — A.  In  a public  proclama- 
tion in  answer  to  the  proclamation  of  General  Otis. 

Q.  1 mean  after  the  treaty  of  Paris  was  made ? — A.  After  that  he 
did  not  make  any  official  manifestation,  but  among  his  own  Philippine 
people  this  word  passed. 

Q.  Do  you  know  whether  any  day  was  fixed  for  the  attack  on  the 
Americans? — A.  I do  not  know. 

Q.  You  think  that  the  army  was  imbued  with  the  idea  of  attacking, 
and  was  going  to  attack  anyhow? — A.  Oh,  ves,  sir;  for  I had  been  told 
that  the  Philippine  army  had  the  order  to  attack  whenever  they  heard 
shots,  and  so  on  the  night  when  shots  were  heard  in  San  Juan  del 
Monte,  instead  of  being  confined  to  a limited  area,  the  attack  became 
general.  There  was  no  order  to  attack  at  any  fixed  time,  but  there 
was  an  order  to  attack  any  moment  they  heard  shots,  or  at  the  knowl- 
edge of  any  hostile  act. 

Q.  Will  you  be  kind  enough  to  tell  us  what  were  the  true  causes  of 
the  revolution  of  1896-97  against  the  Spaniards?  -A.  Spain  had  never 
paid  attention  to  the  claims  of  the  Philippines.  All  the  Spaniards 
were  convinced  that  in  the  Philippines  it  was  necessary  to  make 
changes  in  policy,  in  administration,  in  the  department  of  justice,  and 
in  the  manner  of  governing  the  country;  all  of  the  Spaniards  were 
convinced  that  the  influence  of  the  friars  was  fatal,  but,  nevertheless, 
nothing  was  done  to  quiet  the  Philippine  people,  nor  to  grant  them 
the  things  which  justice  demanded.  It  was  dangerous  for  a Filipino 
to  seek  justice  or  to  state  his  opinion  in  any  manner.  No  criticism 
could  be  made,  not  only  of  the  government  or  of  the  friars,  but  not 
even  of  individuals  who  were  Spaniards.  The  press,  under  a strict 
censorship,  did  nothing  but  praise  whatever  tin'  Spaniards  did,  and 
the  evil  deeds  of  men  or  of  the  government  were  hidden,  in  order  not 
to  hurt  the  prestige  of  Spain.  A general  named  Despujol  came  here 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


399 

who  understood  the,  justice  of  the  claims  of  the  Filipinos  and  who 
worked  for  their  interest,  and  immediately  the  friars  and  the  extrem- 
ists here  began  to  work  against  him,  sending  letters  and  telegrams  to 
Spain,  and  calumnies  and  slanders  against  him,  saying  he  was  danger- 
ous to  Spanish  rule  here,  and  so  the  Spanish  Government  took  him 
away.  Rizal  had  just  published  some  political  novels  which  presented 
all  the  abuses  and  horrors  which  were  committed  here.  The  result  was 
that  the  Filipinos  understood  that  they  were  badly  governed,  and  they 
also  were  convinced  that  Spain  would  never  reform.  In  fact,  it  was 
impossible  for  us  to  obtain  justice,  for  if  a Filipino  made  any  criticism 
he  was  cither  punished,  put  in  jail,  or  even  shot.  I personally  do  not 
state  this  with  any  resentment,  for  I saw  all  these  things  from  the 
point  of  view  of  a spectator,  for  I was  in  Europe  at  the  time.  The 
conviction  was  strong  among  the  Filipinos  that  they  would  not  succeed 
in  attaining  anything  by  any  other  means  than  force.  This  being  the 
case,  the  idea  occurred  to  some  Filipinos  to  found  a system  of  masonry 
here.  There  were  some  lodges  of  the  masonic  order  here,  and  the  idea 
presented  itself  to  form  a sort  of  political  masonry,  which  was  created 
and  called  the  “Katipunan.”  This  Katipunan  society  was  naturally  a 
secret  society,  and  had,  I think,  about  400,000  members,  principally 
in  the  Tagalog  provinces  and  of  the  people  of  the  valley  of  the  Pasig 
River.  I think  in  Manila  and  the  valley  of  the  Pasig  there  were  80,000. 
Naturally,  as  there  were  so  many,  and  as  they  were  so  strong,  the  idea 
of  a revolution  was  a natural  consequence.  The  principal  agitator  of 
all  this  movement  was  a man  named  Andres  Bonifacio,  who  stirred  up 
and  directed  it.  The  political  movement  in  the  Philippines  was  started, 
as  was  natural,  by  the  aristocracy  of  wealth  and  of  intelligence,  but 
the  Katipunan  society  was  formed  entirely  of  the  elements  from  the 
lowest  class  of  society.  Bonifacio  was  a man  without  education.  He 
was  employed  in  one  of  the  business  houses  at  a small  salary,  of  per- 
haps $30  or  $40  (Mexican)  a month.  They  went  on  arranging  their 
affairs  very  quietly  and  very  secretly,  awaiting  a proper  moment  for 
action,  which  they  believed  would  be  the  time  of  General  Blanco’s 
departure  from  the  Philippines.  General  Blanco  was  a man  who  was 
well  thought  of  here,  for  he  had  a great  deal  of  tolerance  for  the  peo- 
ple. He  did  tolerate  masonry,  and  they  believed  that  he  also  tolerated 
the  existence  of  the  Katipunan  society.  One  day  the  priest  of  Tondo, 
Padre  Gil,  through  the  confession  of  a woman,  learned  of  the  existence 
of  the  Katipunan  society,  for  the  woman’s  husband  was  a member. 
This  Father  Gil  informed  the  General,  and  so  the  Katipunan  society 
was  discovered. 

Now,  about  the  causes  of  this  revolution.  To  sum  the  matter  up,  it 
was  the  policy  of  Spain  to  have  here  a good  written  system  of  legisla- 
tion, but  in  actual  practice  each  Spanish  governor  did  as  he  saw  tit  with- 
out regard  to  the  written  law.  The  Filipinos  had  no  way  of  protest- 
ing, for  whoever  protested  was  put  in  jail  and  persecuted.  Every  day 
the  exactions  of  the  friar  were  greater,  and  every  day  the  hatred  of  the 
Spaniard  was  greater,  and  as  a natural  result  of  this  the  country  was 
like  a boiler  without  a safety  valve. 

By  Mr,  MacArthur: 

Q.  You  have  said  that  the  Spaniards  well  understood  that  it  was 
on  account  of  the  influence  of  the  friars  that  the  government  of  the 
Philippines  was  in  such  a wretched  state.  If  this  was  so,  why  didn’t 
the  Spaniards  themselves  oppose  this  influence  of  the  friars?— A. 


400 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


There  you  have  it.  It  was  on  account  of  the  money  of  the  friars. 
Tin'  Filipinos  have  believed  that  the  friars  governed  here  only  by 
the  force  of  their  money.  This  is  partly  true,  but  the  friars  have 
governed  here  chiefly  by  the  ignorance  and  the  fear  of  the  Spaniards 
who  came  here,  none  of  whom  knew  the  country.  Whoever  wished 
to  know  anything  about  the  country  did  not  take  the  trouble  to  study 
the  matter  himself,  but  asked  for  information  about  the  country  from 
the  friars,  and  of  course  the  friar  gave  him  the  impression  he  wanted 
to,  and  consequently  the  friar  was  his  master.  Whenever  any  man 
carried  on  his  occupation  away  from  the  friar’s  influence  and  encoun- 
tered any  difficulty,  he  always  found  the  friar  his  enemy,  and  as  he  had 
not  strength  enough  to  work  by  himself,  and  had  no  sound  personal 
judgment,  he  took  the  same  opinion  of  the  Philippines  as  the  friar  had, 
or  else  left  the  Philippines.  The  provincial  governors,  who  governed 
by  their  own  judgment,  always  were  afraid  that  there  would  be  public 
disorders,  and  they  went  to  the  friars  as  the  supreme  rulers  of  the  prov- 
ince to  calm  the  public  mind,  to  keep  things  quiet.  The  power  of  the 
friar  was  unlimited,  and  his  control  in  everything  was  inevitable.  So 
the  governors  were  partisans  of  the  friar  because  they  had  faith  in  his 
power.  Those  who  opposed  the  friar  did  not  have  strength  enough  to 
stand  alone  and  work  alone,  because  they  did  not  know  the  country 
well  enough  and  were  afraid  of  the  friar. 

Q.  Will  you  please  tell  us  what  this  man  Rizal  did.  what  became  of 
him,  and  how  he  attained  so  much  influence  here  in  the  Philippines  ? — 
A.  With  great  pleasure.  The  great  influence  of  Rizal  was  due  to  the 
fact  that  he  was  the  first  writer  to  give,  by  his  novels,  a vivid  picture 
of  the  Philippines.  In  his  novels  all  the  different  types  are  faithfully 
represented.  It  is  a collection  of  instantaneous  photographs  of  life  in 
the  Philippines,  and  as  it  is  all  true  the  consequences  are  also  true  of  the 
continual  suffering  of  the  Philippine  people  and  the  abuses  of  the  friars 
and  of  the  government.  Naturally,  a man  who  dared,  in  the  midst  of 
oppression,  to  tell  the  truth  and  to  talk  had  the  sympathy  of  all  the 
Filipinos.  Furthermore,  in  addition  to  his  talents,  he  had  the  courage 
to  present  himself  in  the  Philippines  after  he  had  written  his  first  novel. 
This  gave  him  great  popularity.  After  having  written  his  first  novel, 
Rizal  remained  in  the  Philippines  for  three  months,  but  as  he  was  per- 
secuted by  the  Spanish  Government  he  thought  it  wise  to  leave  the 
Philippines  and  he  went  to  Europe,  where  he  wrote  a second  novel,  a 
continuation  of  the  first,  called  “El  Filibustero.”  The  first  one  was 
entitled  “Noli  Ale  Tangere.”  During  this  same  time  he  edited  a new 
edition  of  a history  of  the  Philippines,  written  many  years  ago  by 
one  Morga,  of  Manila.  After  Rizal  left  here  the  friars,  because  the}’ 
could  not  seize  him,  through  revenge  persecuted  his  family.  They 
expelled  them  from  Calamba,  seized  all  their  property,  and  his  whole 
family  was  banished  bv  General  Weyler.  When  Rizal  returned  to 
the  Philippines  in  the  time  of  General  Despujol,  although  Despujol 
was  a man  of  character,  he  could  not  escape  the  influence  of  the 
friars,  and  he  ordered  Rizal  arrested  and  banished  to  Dapitan,  in  the 
island  of  Mindanao.  There  Rizal  devoted  himself  to  his  profession 
of  medicine  and  to  agricultural  pursuits.  Naturally  the  Filipinos,  as 
the}T  were  much  interested  in  political  affairs,  visited  Rizal  in  Dapitan 
a great  deal,  under  the  pretext  of  having  some  affection  of  the  eye- 
sight or  other  infirmity,  but  as  a matter  of  fact  to  get  his  advice. 
When  Bonifacio,  the  leader  of  the  Katipunau  society,  asked  Rizal  if 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


401 


it  would  ho  a good  plan  to  start  a revolution,  Iiizal  opposed  the  plan 
and  said  it  would  not  he  suitable.  He  said  what  would  do  the  country 
most  good  would  he  to  devote  themselves  to  the  improvement  and  edu- 
cation of  the  people,  and  to  look  for  reformation  in  peaceful  ways. 
Nevertheless,  Bonifacio,  instead  of  telling  the  truth,  told  the  Filipino 
people  that  Rizal,  instead  of  advising  peace,  had  advised  the  revolu- 
tion. Rizal  had  nothing  to  do  with  the  revolution,  nor  with  the  Kati- 
punan  society.  About  the  time  that  Father  Gil  discovered  the  Kati- 
punan  society,  Rizal  arrived  in  Manila,  for  he  had  offered  his  services 
to  the  Spanish  Government  as  a physician  in  Cuba,  and  his  services 
had  been  accepted,  and  he  arrived  here  on  a war  ship  on  his  way  to 
Madrid  to  put  himself  under  the  orders  of  the  Government.  Rizal 
then  went  away  in  a ship  hound  for  Spain;  but  the  friars  and  the  Span- 
iards could  not  allow  this  man,  whom  they"  hated  so,  to  escape  with  his 
life,  under  the  circumstances,  and  they  used  every  means  to  get  him 
back  to  Manila.  They  talked  to  the  governor- general,  they  sent  tele- 
grams to  Spain,  they'  influenced  the  minister  of  war,  and  one  Olibe, 
public  prosecutor,  undoubtedly  influenced  by  money,  succeeded  in 
having  Rizal  ordered  back  to  Manila;  and,  in  fact,  Rizal  was  brought 
back  to  Manila  and  a court-martial  was  held,  and  although  it  could 
not  be  proved  that  Rizal  had  anything  to  do  with  the  revolution,  as 
the  public  opinion  among  the  Spaniards  demanded  it.  he  was  sentenced 
and  shot. 

Q.  Where  yvas  he  shot? — A.  When  Rizal  came  to  Manila  he  yvas 
taken  to  Fort  Santiago,  and  from  there  he  was  taken  on  foot  to  the 
open  ground,  the  “ Bagambayan,”  adjoining  the  Luneta,  where  he  was 
shot.  Rizal  went  along,  showing  a great  deal  of  self  -possession,  and 
even  smiling  and  laughing  as  he  went  along  the  street;  not  that  he  felt 
like  laughing,  but  because  he  had  a great  deal  of  character  and  strength, 
and  he  wished  to  show  that  he  could  contain  himself.  When  he  fell 
dead  all  of  the  Spaniards  and  the  Spanish  ladies  who  were  present  cried 
“ Viva  Espana!” 

Q.  Was  there  a large  crowd  present? — A.  Enormous.  It  was  a 
Spanish  national  tiesta,  and  afterwards  the  band  passed  in  front  of  his 
body  playing  “La  Marcha  de  Cadiz,”  which  yvas  the  custom. 

Q.  Was  he  the  only  man  shot  on  that  occasion? — A.  On  that  day  he 
was  the  only*  man  to  be  shot,  and  public  opinion  demanded  that  four 
Indian  (native)  soldiers  should  be  the  ones  yvho  should  shoot  him. 

Q.  And  was  that  done  ? — A.  That  was  done.  As  a general  thing, 
all  executions  were  by  Spanish  soldiers,  except  this  one  of  Rizal. 

Q.  Were  executions  generally  made  on  the  Luneta? — A.  Always. 

Q.  Did  they  make  it  an  occasion  of  rejoicing? — A.  Yes,  sir;  it  was 
always  a reason  for  joy,  for  merriment.  It  must  be  said,  however, 
that  these  people  yvent  there  believing  that  it  was  a just  act;  that  these 
people  who  were  shot  yvere  guilty.  Although  it  seemed  a barbarous 
thing  to  us,  these  people  beliey'ed  that  what  they  saw  was  simply  the 
carrying  out  of  justice. 

Q.  Was  it  known  beforehand  when  executions  were  to  occur  ? — A. 
They  knew  that  this  would  happen  from  the  evening  before.  It  was 
published  in  the  Gazette.  Furthermore,  it  was  the  Spanish  custom  to 
give  a condemned  man  twenty-four  hours  in  which  to  be  in  the  chapel 
at  confession  in  order  to  arrange  his  matters  for  the  future.  Spanish 
justice  is  very  indulgent  in  this  respect. 

Q.  Was  it  habitual  for  the  ladies  and  gentlemen  to  go  to  see  r 11 
p c 26 


40*2 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


these  executions,  or  only  occasionally  ? — A.  Yes,  sir;  in  political  exe- 
cutions. 

Q.  Then  they  were  regarded  as  a spectacle? — A.  Yes,  sir;  a spec- 
tacle of  patriotic  character. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  any  idea  of  the  number  of  such  executions, 
say,  in  1896-97  ? If  you  can  not  give  the  actual  number,  can  you  say 
whether  they  occurred  every  day,  every  week,  or  only  once  a month; 
whether  they  were  frequent  or  not. — A.  The  executions  were  so  fre- 
quent that  when  General  Polavieja  came,  in  order  not  to  make  so  many 
executions  appear  to  the  public,  he  gave  orders  that  the  executions 
should  lie  made  in  the  different  towns  and  not  all  in  Manila. 

Q.  There  were  other  executions  in  Manila,  were  there  not?  1 have 
heard  that  many  people  wen;  shot  in  other  places  besides  the  Luneta. — 
A.  No;  only  on  the  Luneta. 

Q.  We  have  heard  to  the  contrary. — A.  Well,  they  were  secret 
shootings,  and  1 do  not  know  anything  about  them. 

Q.  Was  the  punishment  always  death,  or  were  there  confinements 
in  prison  for  political  offenses? — A.  No;  many  were  sentenced  to  ban- 
ishment and  sentences  of  different  length  in  prison. 

Q.  That  condition  of  affairs  existed  during  1896-97  ? — A.  Oh,  yes; 
this  has  always  been  the  custom. 

Q.  Were  these  people  always  tried  by  court-martial  or  by  civil 
court? — A.  By  court-martial,  always. 

AYith  expressions  of  thanks,  the  commission  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  XEREZ. 

Manila,  S eptu  liber  7,  1800. 

Present:  Colonel  Denby  (in  the  chair),  Commissioner  AVorcester. 

Manuel  Xerez  y Burgos  appeared  before  the  commission. 

Q.  Will  you  please  give  us  your  name,  residence,  and  profession? — 
A.  Manuel  Xerez  y Burgos;  Calle  Gastambide  No.  21.  Sampalog;  by 
profession,  a physician. 

Q.  How  long  have  you  lived  in  Manila? — A.  Almost  all  my  life. 

Q.  AY  ere  you  born  in  Spain? — A.  No;  in  Manila. 

Q.  You  are  a Spaniard? — A.  No;  I am  a Filipino. 

Q.  AYe  would  like  for  you  to  give  us  an  account  of  the  doings  of 
the  religious  orders,  especially  of  the  friars,  in  these  islands.  1 wish 
you  would  tell  us,  at  the  beginning,  whom  they  call  friars? — A.  In 
the  Philippines  everyone  belonging  to  the  religious  orders  are  called 
friars.  The  religious  corporations  are  Dominicans,  Augustinians, 
Paulists,  Franciscans,  Keceletos,  Capuchins,  Jesuits,  and  Benedictines. 

Q.  Of  what  'nationality  are  these  friars? — A.  All  of  them  are 
Spanish. 

Q.  Are  there  no  Italians  among  them? — A.  If  there  are  any  among 
them  who  are  not  Spaniards,  having  been  in  the  Philippines  formerly , 
they  are  considered  Spaniards. 

Q.  Will  you  proceed  and  tell  us  what  part  they  performed  in  the 
government;  how  they  stood  toward  the  people;  how  they  treated  the 
people;  how  the  people  regarded  them;  in  fact,  everything  about 
them? — A.  They  have  taken  a very  active  part  as  advisers  of  the  gov- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


403 


eminent.  It  has  been  known  for  ag’es  in  the  Catholic  countries  of 
Europe  that  the  religious  orders  have  always  tried  to  take  part  in  t he 
government. 

Q.  What  particular  part  did  the  members  of  the  religious  orders 
take  in  the  government  of  the  Islands — in  the  municipalities  as  well  as 
in  the  general  government? — A.  The  part  of  the  government  in  which 
they  were  evident  was  the  part  which  had  to  do  with  their  own  par- 
ticular interests.  They  opposed  any  instruction  to  the  Philippine 
people;  opposed  the  order  of  the  government. 

Q.  What  1 want  to  know  is,  what  official  part  they  took;  what 
offices  they  tilled,  if  any;  what  they  did  in  the  government  itself? — A. 
In  the  first  place,  they  entered  officially  into  the  government,  and 
even  went  so  far  as  to  make  governor-generals  out  of  some  archbishops. 

Q.  Did  the  archbishop  have  any  official  position  in  addition  to  his 
clerical  position  ? — A.  Yes,  sir;  when  the  governor-general  left  or  died 
he  entered  the  position  of  governor-general. 

Q.  .Was  the  archbishop  a member  of  any  council,  ex  officio? — A. 
He  was  a member  of  the  council  of  authorities. 

Q.  What  had  that  council  to  do? — A.  In  political  affairs  of  impor- 
tance it  decided  them. 

Q.  Wliat  position,  if  any,  did  the  friar  have,  ex  officio,  in  the  various 
municipalities? — A.  As  parish  priests  and  as  municipal  advisers  they 
intervened  in  the  actions  of  the  municipality.  They  acted  as  secreta- 
ries of  the  gobernadorcillos — the  petty  governors — as  these  petty  gov- 
ernors themselves  did  not  understand  Spanish,  and  they  answered  the 
official  documents  which  came  from  the  General  Government. 

Q.  They  did  that  bv  virtue  of  their  being  priests? — A.  This  was  not 
official,  but  they  forced  the  gobernadorcillos  to  consent  to  it. 

Q.  What  control  did  they  have,  if  any,  over  affairs  in  the  towns  ? — 
A.  Thej'  had  the  power  to  do  whatever  suited  them  to  preserve  their 
power  in  every  town. 

Q.  How  did  they  ti-eat  the  people? — A.  They  always  treated  them 
with  a great  deal  of  harshness;  with  blows,  with  threats,  and  with 
deportation  when  they  did  not  obey  them. 

Q.  What  had  they  to  do,  if  anything,  with  the  system  of  taxation  ? — 
A.  They  did  not  directly  have  anything  to  do  with  the  taxation,  but 
only  with  the  accounts.  They  permitted  the  gobernadorcillos  to  rob 
as  much  as  they  liked  so  long  as  they  did  not  interfere  with  the 
church.  They  allowed  them  to  do  anything  that  was  in  favor  of  the 
church. 

Q.  Did  the  church  make  any  exactions  of  the  people? — A.  Yes, 
sir;  and  although  they  had  a scale  of  fees  for  their  services  to  the  peo- 
ple, they  did  not  collect  the  fees  according  to  the  scale,  but  they  took 
two,  three,  four,  and  even  live  times  as  much  as  the  scale  allowed. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  some  of  the  items  of  this  system  of  taxation? — 
A.  I have  the  scale,  but  I could  not  say  exactly  what  they  charged 
for  each  different  'thing,  but  there  was  almost  no  friar  who  complied 
with  the  scale. 

Q.  I do  not  want  to  know  what  they  charged — the  amounts — but  what 
the  items  were  ? — A.  To  marry,  to  baptize,  to  bury;  and  they  took 
advantage  of  a great  many  things.  For  instance,  devout  private 
devotions,  sermons,  candles  which  were  used  in  masses,  and  they  also 
charged  great  prices  for  masses. 

Q.  Was  there  a direct  tax  levied  for  the  church  ? — A.  No,  sir;  the 


404 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


church  took  an  eighth  of  what  the  priest  collected,  and  the  rest 
belonged  to  him.  The  Government  did  not  impose  a direct  tax  for  the 
church.  But  although  the  Government  did  not  impose  a direct  tax  on 
the  people,  they  did  whatever  the  priest  wished.  For  instance,  if  a 
man  did  not  attend  mass  or  do  what  the  the  priest  wished,  when  the 
friar  announced  it,  the  Government  either  deported  him,  shot  him,  or 
punished  him  in  some  way;  so  that  the  demands  of  the  friar  had 
greater  force  than  a direct  tax  would  have. 

Q.  Was  it  the  rule  that  everybody  should  attend  church? — .V.  It 
was  not  obligatory,  but  it  was  a moral  obligation. 

Q.  If  a man  did  not  attend  church,  what  did  they  do  with  him ? — 
A.  They  hunted  him  up  and  had  him  beaten  for  the  first  offense;  for 
the  second  failure  to  attend  church  they  doubled  his  punishment,  and 
for  the  third  offense  he  was  deported  to  Paragua,  Jolo,  Marianas,  or 
to  Puerto  Princesa. 

Q.  Were  there  many  cases  of  such  punishment — A.  Yes,  sir;  many. 

Q.  Did  those  punishments  apply  to  women  as  well  as  to  men  ? — A. 
Sometimes.  There  was  a case  in  Tayabas  where  a priest  struck  a 
woman  in  the  church  itself  because  she  was  not  dressed  as  he  thought 
she  should  be. 

Q.  What  had  the  conduct  of  the  friars  to  do  with  the  revolution  of 
1872? — A.  The  revolution  of  1872  was  not  a Philippine  revolt.  It 
was  entirely  a military  revolution.  For  seven  or  eight  years  the  peo- 
ple had  been  asking  the  King  of  Spain  and  His  Holiness  the  Pope  to 
give  them  regularly  ordained  priests  instead  of  friars;  and  as  the 
friars  hated  the  native  priests,  they  denounced  them.  The  friars  have 
made  it  appear  that  this  was  a civil  revolution,  but  it  was  a military 
revolution  in  this  way — because  the  soldiers,  employees  of  the  arsenal 
at  Cavite  and  of  the  fleet,  revolted  because  they  wanted  their  pay 
raised. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  to  say  that  the  hate  for  the  friars  did  notenter  into 
the  revolution  of  1872? — A.  No,  sir;  in  this  revolution  no  hatred  of 
the  friar  existed,  but  the  Philippine  people  were  afraid  to  revolt. 

Q.  Then  when  was  the  first  time  that  the  conduct  of  the  friars  caused 
a revolution,  or  an  incipient  revolution ? — A.  In  1891,  when  the  Kati- 
punan  Society  was  formed,  which  united  the  Philippine  people.  It 
caused  a disappearance  of  the  differences  between  different  provinces 
and  different  races. 

Q.  Was  that  based  on  antagonism  to  the  friars? — A.  The  hatred  of 
the  friars,  nothing  else.  The  object  of  this  society  was  to  ask  for  the 
expulsion  of  the  friars  and  so  secure  liberty  for  the  Phillipine  people. 

Q.  Were  the  majority  of  the  people  in  favor  of  expelling  the  friars  ? — 
A.  The  great  mass  of  the  people;  for  if  there  was  anyone  in  favor  of 
the  friars  it  was  because,  although  secretly  an  enemy,  he  was  afraid 
to  say  so  openly. 

Q.  Was  there  any  distinction  made  by  the  people  toward  the  native 
priests  ? — A.  The  native  priests  were  united  to  the  Phillipine  people. 

Q.  Then  the  people  favored  the  native  priests? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  The  people  only  attacked  the  members  of  these  orders  ? — A.  The 
people  did  not  attack  the  Catholic  religion;  they  only  attacked  the 
religions  orders — the  friars. 

Q.  How  did  the  natives  become  priests?  Did  they  belong  to  any 
order? — A.  No,  sir;  they  did  not  belong  to  religious  orders.  In 
ancient  times  there  were  some  Filipinos  who  were  accepted  in  reli- 
gious orders,  but  that  was  a long  time  ago. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


405 


Q.  Then  these  ^native  priests  were  entirely  independent  of  the 
orders? — A.  As  cdericos  they  were  independent;  as  priests  they  were 
the  slaves  of  the  religious  orders. 

Q.  Did  the  archbishop  ordinarily  belong  to  any  order? — A.  Almost 
always. 

Q.  What  order  did  he  belong  to? — A.  Do  you  mean  the  one  who 
is  here  now? 

Q.  Yes. — A.  To  various  religious  orders.  The  present  archbishop 
is  a Dominican  friar. 

Q.  Is  he  an  old  resident  of  the  Philippines? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  He  was  here  as  a member  of  the  order,  was  he? — A.  He  has 
been  here  a number  of  years.  He  has  also  been  vice  rector  of  the 
University. 

Q.  What  complaint  did  the  people  make  against  the  government  of 
Spain,  aside  from  the  mere  religious  questions ? — A.  In  the  first  place, 
because  it  gave  too  much  protection  to  the  friars,  and  in  the  second 
place  because  institutions  were  created  here  that  were  cruel  in  the 
highest  degree  to  the  people.  For  instance,  the  guardia  civil  has 
been  an  institution  that  has  committed  a great  many  abuses  here. 
The  administration  of  justice  was  only  a name  here,  for  everything- 
concerned  with  it  was  nothing  but  robbery  and  injustice. 

Q.  Was  the  guardia  civil  a military  organization  ? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Then  besides  the  mere  antagonism  to  the  friars  other  civil  ques- 
tions entered  into  the  discontent  of  the  people? — Yes,  sir;  but  as  the 
friars  were  the  ones  who  had  the  greatest  influence  in  all  of  these  other 
questions,  and  as  they  were  the  ones  that  influenced  the  guardia  civil 
and  all  of  the  departments  of  the  Government,  it  seemed  better  to 
attack  the  friars  than  to  attack  the  Government. 

Q.  I want  to  know  whether  this  hatred  originated  from  acts  done  by 
the  friars  as  friars,  or  whether  it  was  originated  by  acts  of  the  friars 
as  agents  of  the  Government? — A.  For  both  causes. 

Q.  What  did  the  friars  do  as  friars — as  religious  heads  of  the  com- 
munity— what  did  they  do  that  the  people  objected  to? — A.  All  sorts 
of  improper  things;  all  sorts  of  immorality  and  all  sorts  of  abuses. 

Q.  I wish  you  would  specify.  What  do  3-011  mean  by  immorality  ? — 
A.  They  injured  women;  abused  the  women  of  the  country  by  making 
them  prostitutes,  and  many  times  they  caused  women  to  marry  men, 
not  to  make  them  live  with  these  men,  but  to  make  them  mistresses  of 
the  priests. 

Q.  Was  that  general,  or  only  here  and  there? — A.  It  was  quite  gen- 
eral. It  is  very  true  that  there  have  been  friars  who  were  very  good 
men,  but  the  greater  number  of  them  have  been  men  of  bad  conduct. 

Q.  Did  that  prevail  here  in  Manila? — A.  This  state  of  affairs  existed 
in  Manila,  but  not  so  scandalously  as  in  other  places,  for  here  in  Manila 
they  were  watched.  They  considered  things. 

Q.  How  did  these  men  of  the  orders  get  control  of  the  parish 
churches? — A.  In  the  first  place,  there  were  very  few  priests  here  in 
the  Philippines,  and  at  the  time  of  the  conquest  and  shortly  afterwards 
friars  came  here,  often  as  missionaries,  and  obtained  control  of  the 
parish  churches.  For  instance,  parishes  would  be  formed  in  a place 
where  a friar  had  acted  as  missionary. 

Q.  W ere  there  many  Filipino  priests  ? Outside  the  orders,  I mean. — 
A.  There  were  very  few  of  them  in  the  early  days  of  the  conquest. 

Q.  What  do  you  mean  b}’  the  conquest?  When  Spain  first  came 
here? — A.  Y"es,  sir. 


406 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Q.  But  there  were  none  here  when  the  Spaniards  «ime  ?- — A.  But  as  the 
country  increased  and  the  number  of  towns  increased  seminaries  were 
founded  here,  so  that  the  number  of  Filipino  priests  increased.  There 
were  also  Filipino  priests  in  some  places  through  the  enmity  that  the 
archbishop  had  for  some  friars.  In  the  first  place,  the  Filipinos  were 
not  made  priests  to  be  parish  priests  in  old  parishes,  but  to  assist  the 
friars;  but,  as  some  archbishops  had  serious  differences  with  the  reli- 
gious orders  and  saw  that  the  friars  abused  the  people  of  their  parishes, 
they  took  them  out  and  put  in  the  Filipino  priests.  But  it  came  about 
that  when  these  archbishops  were  removed  the  friars  complained  in 
Spain  and  were  again  put  back  in  the  parishes  from  which  they  had 
been  taken.  At  one  period,  in  the  time  of  Archbishop  Basilio  Sanchos 
de  Santa  Justa  E.  Infina,  in  the  latter  part  of  the  last  century,  the  King 
of  Spain  issued  an  order  that  the  friars  should  be  all  taken  out  of  their 
parishes  and  that  native  priests  should  be  substituted  for  them;  but 
the  friars  declared  that  in  that  case  they  would  all  leave  the  Philip- 
pines, and  the  King  of  Spain  was  frightened  at  this,  and  although  he 
did  not  issue  any  decree  repealing  the  order  mentioned,  he  allowed 
things  to  go  on  just  as  they  were  and  said  nothing.  It  was  believed 
in  Spain  that  if  this  was  not  done  the  friars  would  leave  the  Philip- 
pines; so  the  state  of  affairs  was  allowed  to  continue,  and  the  protec- 
tion given  the  friars  was  increased. 

Q.  You  spoke  in  your  last  answer  about  abuses.  Will  you  please 
tell  us  as  definitely  as  you  can  what  abuses  the  people  complained  of ? — 
A.  Abuses;  a great  many.  For  instance,  there  was  one  great  abuse — 
the  fact  that  they  denounced  Filipinos  to  the  Spanish  Government  in 
order  to  have  them  punished.  There  was  another  great  abuse  in  the 
fact  that  they  did  not  allow  the  Filipino  people  to  become  enlightened; 
and  as  the  Filipino  people  wished  to  become  enlightened  they  com- 
plained against  this. 

Q.  Will  you  please  explain  that?  Did  they  not  have  schools? — A. 
The  friars  were  inspectors  of  schools,  but  in  the  outside  towns  and  in 
Manila,  too,  they  forbade  masters  of  schools  to  teach  Spanish. 

Q.  Were  they  appointed  inspectors  of  schools  or  did  they  just 
assume  that  right? — A.  Thev  were  appointed  bv  the  Government. 
W1  ion  a schoolmaster  tried  to  obey  the  direct  orders  which  he  received 
from  the  Spanish  Government  and  started  to  teach  Spanish,  geography, 
and  history,  the  friars  denounced  him  to  the  Spanish  Government  as  a 
man  against  religion  and  against  the  Spaniards. 

Q.  And  what  became  of  him  ? — A.  Then  the  Government,  believing 
the  friar  and  not  the  schoolmaster,  deported  him.  Also  in  the  schools 
for  women  they  opposed  the  teaching  of  any  practical  work  to  the 
women  or  of  anything  that  pertained  to  civilization.  They  only 
allowed  them  to  be  taught  things  which  they  already  knew — their 
usual  customs.  There  was  a serious  event  occurred  here  in  the  time  of 
General  Weyler,  when  the  priest  wished  a schoolmistress  to  come  to 
church  with  the  children;  he  did  not  allow  her  to  answer  him  in 
Spanish,  but  in  Tagalog.  I know  this  schoolmistress,  and  cases  of 
this  nature  have  existed  in  all  the  Philippines. 


By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Were  the  natives  in  the  small  towns  who  were  able  to  speak 
Spanish  ever  punished  or  threatened  for  using  that  instead  of  their 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


407 


and  showed  that  he  had  a little  civilization,  in  spite  of  their  ridicule — - 
and  ridicule  is  a most  serious  thing-  to  a Filipino — they  persecuted  him 
even  to  death. 

By  Colonel  Dknby,  resuming: 

Q.  You  spoke  of  other  abuses.  What  pecuniary  abuses  were  there; 
what  exactions  were  there? — A.  The  rules  of  the  church  forbid  a priest 
to  collect  money  for  burying  a poor  man,  but  in  spite'  of  this  it  was  a 
very  rare  case  when  even  the  poorest  man  was  buried  without  a fee; 
and  when  the  family  of  the  dead  person  did  not  have  all  the  money 
necessary  for  the  fee  which  the  priest  demanded— for  instance,  if  the 
family  only  had  $3  and  the  fee  was  $4 — the  priest  beat  them,  and  made 
them  borrow  the  other  dollar  to  make  up  the  necessary  fee;  and  in  the 
ease  of  rich  people,  if  a very  large  fee  for  burying  was  not  paid  the 
family  was  persecuted  afterwards  and  even  deported. 

Q.  In  that  case  did  the  priest  represent  the  facts  to  the  Government, 
and  in  turn  the  Government  took  action? — A.  Yes,  sir;  the  priest 
would  go  to  the  Spanish  Government  and  denounce  a man  as  being  an 
enemy  of  religion  and  of  Spain.  Then  tin*  man  was  watched,  and  when 
the  priest  denounced  him  again  he  was  deported. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  I would  like  to  have  you  summarize  the  different  ways  the  priests 
had  of  imposing  their  will  upon  the  people.  In  the  first  place,  I under- 
stand that  ridicule  was  a strong  weapon  in  their  hands;  that  they  made 
fun  of  the  people,  held  them  up  to  contempt,  and  that  this  was  one  of 
the  mildest  means  they  employed. — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Is  that  a severe  punishment  for  a Filipino — to  hold  him  before 
the  people  of  the  town  as  an  object  of  ridicule? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Why  is  it  that  the  Filipino  objects  so  strongly  to  being  ridiculed? — 
A.  The  Filipino,  as  a general  thing,  is  very  fond  of  imitating  the  .peo- 
ple whom  he  believes  are  his  superiors  in  culture;  and  as  they  are  fond 
of  culture  the}r  are  desirous  of  obtaining  it.  When  a priest  met  a man 
who  had  any  education,  any  culture  at  all,  in  towns  where  there  was 
very  little  culture,  and  got  him  before  a great  many  people,  he  would 
say,  “O!  You  are  a Spaniard  now,  I suppose.  You  will  very  soon 
be  a Protestant  and  a heretic,  and  soon  you  will  be  excommunicated;” 
and  of  course  it  exposed  the  man  to  great  shame.  And  the  friar 
would  say,  “ You  are  a very  ugly  person  to  try  to  imitate  the  Span- 
iards; you  are  more  like  a monkey,  and  you  have  no  right  to  try  and 
separate  yourself  from  the  carabaos.”  A friar  wrote  a novel  which 
caused  a great  deal  of  hati-ed  toward  the  friars.  In  this  novel  he  said 
that  the  Filipinos  and  the  carabaos  were  brothers  and  should  never  be 
separated;  and  he  also  said  that  it  was  useless  for  the  Filipinos  to  try 
to  educate  themselves;  that  their  intelligence  was  not  sufficient  to  enable 
them  to  learn  anything  that  was  scientific,  lofty,  or  cultivated. 

Q.  I understand  that  a second  method  of  bringing  the  native  to  do 
what  the  priest  wanted  him  to  was  the  administering  of  physical  pun- 
ishment. You  have  said  that  they  beat  the  natives.  Did  it  partake  of 
a severer  form? — A.  Ordinarily  they  began  by  beating  them.  They 
would  make  a man  take  his  trousers  off  and  lie  on  a bench,  where  they 
would  beat  him  until  they  were  tired  or  broke  their  rattan  sticks. 
Many  times  the  friars  administered  these  corporal  punishments  with 
their  own  hands,  and  at  other  times  they  locked  people  up  in  a room 
.and  gave  them  nothing  but  water  for  six  or  seven  days.  They  also 


408 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


forced  a man  to  cross  his  arms,  taking  hold  of  his  ears,  and  squat  down 
and  raise  himself  up  again  for  hours  at  a time,  until  he  fell  over  faint- 
ing. And  when  they  saw  that  these  measures  were  not  sufficient  to 
attain  their  end.  and  that  any  further  persecution  on  their  part  would 
damage  their  character  as  priests,  they  turned  their  man  over  to  the 
guardia  civil,  which  did  worse  things. 

Q.  Did  serious  results  ever  follow  the  punishments  inflicted  by  the 
friars  themselves  or  under  their  immediate  supervision  ( -A.  Yes,  sir; 
very  serious  results.  There  have  been  individuals  who  have  died  from 
the  punishment  administered  by  the  friars. 

Q.  Were  women  subjected  to  severe  physical  punishment  as  well  as 
men? — A.  Yes,  sir;  the  only  difference  was  that  they  did  not  remove 
the  women’s  clothing  to  strike  them,  but  struck  their  clothing. 

Q.  You  have  said  that  one  class  of  punishment  consisted  in  denounc- 
ing the  individual  to  the  civil  or  military  authorities.  Will  you  give 
further  details  as  to  that? — A.  The  priests  denounced  some  individual 
to  the  governor,  and  the  governor  ordered  the  guardia  civil  to  take 
the  man  and  examine  him.  Then  the  guardia  civil  compelled  this  man, 
by  means  of  punishment  and  cruel  measures,  to  declare  that  what  the 
friars  said  was  true,  even  when  it  was  not  true.  Of  course,  a man 
would.  Anally,  under  the  punishments  and  cruelties  of  the  guardia  civil, 
admit  that  the  accusation  of  the  friar  was  true.  Then  he  was  brought 
to  Manila;  and  it  often  happened  that,  in  order  that  the  governor- 
general  and  the  authorities  in  Manila  should  not  know  the  abuses 
which  had  been  committed  upon  him,  the  guardia  civil  would  shoot 
the  man  on  the  way,  and  then  say  they  had  shot  him  because  he  had 
tried  to  escape.  And  in  case  a prisoner  arrived  in  Manila  without 
being  killed  on  the  road  he  was  punished  again  here;  and  furthermore 
he  was  taken  to  very  unhealthy  places  like  Puerta  Princesa.  Basilan, 
Jolo — to  places  where  there  are  had  fevers,  in  order  that  he  might 
sicken  and  die,  as  that  was  what  they  wished  to  happen. 

Q.  Were  there  any  other  ways  employed  by  the  friars? — A.  The 
friars  threatened  the  people  with  excommunication,  in.  the  tirst  place, 
if  the  people  did  not  obey  their  orders,  and  afterwards  in  the  pulpit, 
in  the  course  of  their  sermons,  they  would  call  people  by  name  and 
declare  that  they  had  been  excommunicated,  and  tell  the  people  that 
they  should  not  talk  to  them,  should  not  associate  with  them,  should 
not  give  them  anything  to  eat. 

By  Colonel  Denby,  resuming: 

Q.  Was  that  excommunication  for  offenses  against  the  church,  or 
for  what? — A.  Many  times  they  were  not  offenses  against  the  church; 
many  times  they  were  simply  for  something  that  the  friar  wanted  him- 
self. For  instance,  if  a man  opposed  the  friar,  or  threw  obstacles  in 
the  way  of  his  committing  any  abuse,  the  friar  threatened  him  with 
excommunication.  If  a friar  wished  to  make  love  to  a man’s  daughter, 
and  the  man  opposed  it  and  did  everything  in  his  power  to  keep  his 
daughter  from  being  dishonored,  the  friar  would  threaten  excommu- 
nication, and  then  hand  him  over  to  the  guardia  civil,  or  use  his  influ- 
ence in  some  other  way,  and  make  it  a condition  that  he  should  have 
possession  of  the  girl  in  order  for  the  man  to  come  home.  If  the  con- 
dition was  fulfilled  the  man  was  allowed  to  return  home;  otherwise, 
not. 

Q.  Were  these  things  done  by  the  Filipino  priests,  as  well  as  the 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


409 


others? — A.  Some  Filipino  priests  who  were  great  friends  of  the 
friars  did  these  things  also. 

Q.  In  general,  how  did  the  Filipino  priests  suit  the  people? — A. 
As  the  Philippine  people  are  a fanatical  Catholic  people  they  got  along 
better  under  the  native  priests  than  under  the  friars,  but  there  have 
been  Philippine  priests  enough  who  have  committed  these  abuses. 

Q.  Were  there  Spanish  priests  outside  the  orders? — A.  Very  few. 

Q.  Do  you  consider  that  the  Filipino  people  are  really  religious? — 
A.  No,  sir;  I consider  that  the  Filipino  people  are  thoroughly  fanati- 
cal, but  not  thoroughly  religious. 

Q.  Are  they  devoted  to  their  church — do  you  mean  that  by  calling 
them  fanatical? — A.  1 mean  to  say  that  they  are  fanatical  because 
they  believe,  not  in  the  part  of  a religion  which  is  practical,  but  in 
the  part  which  is  fantastic.  They  believe  not  so  much  in  the  practical 
part  of  religion  as  in  the  things  which  are  unbelievable;  and  this  is 
due  to  the  fact  that  the  friars  in  teaching  this  religion  taught  the 
things  which  are  most  apt  to  make  him  fanatical,  because  it  would  be 
more  lucrative  for  themselves. 

Q.  Have  the  Filipinos  any  toleration  for  any  other  religion,  or  are 
they  like  the  Moros? — A.  Which  class  do  you  refer  to — the  civilized 
or  the  other? 

Q.  The  civilized.— A.  The  civilized  class  of  Filipinos — not  the 
higher,  but  the  lower  class  of  civilized  Filipinos — have  a very  super- 
ficial knowledge  of  religion,  and  although  they  practice  the  forms  of 
the  Catholic  religion  they  still  preserve  a great  many  of  their  beliefs 
and  customs  which  they  have  retained  from  their  former  religion. 

Q.  It  is  said  that  some  of  the  countries  of  Europe  which  are  Catho- 
lic are  not  at  all  religious;  they  are  nominally  Catholic,  but  as  a matter 
of  fact  the  people  are  not  religious.  In  other  countries  they  are  essen- 
tially religious;  as,  for  instance,  Spain.  Now,  are  these  people  here 
really  attached  to  their  religion,  or  do  they  look  upon  it  as  the  ordi- 
nary result  of  custom,  habit,  and  teaching? — A.  In  my  opinion,  religion 
in  the  Philippines  is  of  great  importance  in  some  matters;  but  the 
people  of  the  lower  class  have  some  very  strong  beliefs  left  from  their 
old  religion,  and  as  they  have  this  feeling  toward  their  ancient  religion 
the  Catholic  religion  is  not  very  deep-seated,  and  it  is  not  well  under- 
stood either.  In  the  middle  class,  and  in  the  most  elevated  classes  of 
society  in  the  Philippines,  religion  is  a secondary  matter — it  is  more  a 
matter  of  form  than  anything  else. 

Q.  In  your  opinion,  would  the  Filipinos  enter  upon  a war  to  save 
their  religion? — A.  I think  not;  of  their  own  motion  they  would  not 
do  so,  unless  there  was  some  one  to  stir  them  up. 

Q.  Do  you  think  that  the  influence  of  the  church  is  antagonistic  to 
the  Americans? — A.  The  true  Philippine  Catholic  Church,  the  part  of 
the  church  which  is  thoroughly  Philippine,  is  not  against  the  Ameri- 
cans; but  the  part  which  is  governed  by  the  friars  is. 

Q.  How  does  it  happen,  if  the  Filipinos  are  so  much  opposed  to 
the  friars,  that  the  friars  on  their  side  attack  the  Americans  instead 
of  taking  part  with  them? — A.  Because  a majority  of  the  American 
people  are  Protestants,  and  because  as  a nation  they  have  separated 
church  and  state,  and  as  this  does  not  suit  the  friars  they  excited  the 
Philippine  people  against  the  Americans,  in  order  that  they  may  pre- 
serve their  power  here,  or  that  they  may  create  a new  power. 

Q.  The  Malolos  constitution  provided  that  the  friars  should  be 


410 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


expelled,  and  almost  every  gentleman  who  has  come  before  us  has 
advocated  the  idea  that  they  should  be  expelled.  Then,  knowing  that 
if  the  Filipinos  get  the  power  they  will  expel  them,  how  does  it  happen 
that  the  friars  do  not  throw  their  influence  with  the  Americans? — A. 
This  state  of  affairs  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  friars  believe  that,  in 
some  way  or  other,  the  Philippines  will  again  come  under  the  power 
of  Spain. 

Q.  In  the  debates  on  the  Malolos  constitution  there  was  a very 
strong  party  opposed  to  the  adoption  of  the  section  which  called  for 
the  deportation  of  the  friars.  Now,  isn’t  it  possible  that  the  friars 
believe  that  they  will,  in  the  end,  be  supported  by  the  people,  and  that 
this  odium  you  speak  of  does  not  go  to  the  extent  you  say  it  does? — 
A.  There  was  not  a strong  party  opposed  to  the  expulsion  of  the 
friars,  but  there  was  a very  strong  party  opposed  to  the  separation  of 
church  and  state.  It  was  so  strong  that  the  adoption  of  the  article 
providing  for  the  separation  of  church  and  state  was  only  passed  by 
one  vote. 

Q.  Were  there  a good  many  men  in  the  Malolos  assembly  who  were 
opposed  to  the  deportation,  or  was  it  unanimous? — A.  Out  of  the  80 
deputies  there  were  only  7 who  were  against  the  expulsion  of  the 
friars.  The  majority  of  the  Catholic  people  in  Malolos  voted  for  the 
expulsion  of  the  friars.  There  were  only  7 deputies  who  were  against 
their  expulsion. 

Q.  You  have  frequently  alluded  to  the  ancient  religion.  Can  you 
give  us,  briefly,  an  idea  of  what  that  was? — A.  It  was  purely  a tribal 
and  pagan  religion,  it  was  composed  of  various  strange  beliefs.  In 
no  two  places  did  they  have  the  same  beliefs.  The  only  idea  which 
they  all  had  in  common  was  the  belief  in  the  existence  of  a God  and 
in  the  existence  of  the  soul,  and,  furthermore,  they  believed  in  future 
punishments  and  future  rewards.  They  respected  their  dead  ancestors 
as  saints. 

Q.  They  got  that  from  the  Chinese? — A.  They  might  have  got  that 
idea  from  China;  they  might  also  have  gotten  it  from  Australia,  for 
the  greater  part  of  the  Australians  were  savage  people;  or  they  might 
have  gotten  it  from  the  Malay  settlements. 

Q.  Did  they  have  many  gods? — A.  Not  as  gods;  but  they  made 
secondary  gods  out  of  all  things  which  they  respected  or  feared. 

Q.  Did  they  worship  nature;  the  sun,  moon,  stars,  mountains,  and 
so  on  ? — A.  In  some  parts  of  Mindoro  there  are  Manguianes  who  even 
now  worship  the  sun. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  In  what  part? — A.  In  the  north  of  Abra  de  llog. 

Q.  How  do  you  know  this  ? — A.  I have  been  there. 

Q.  Have  you  seen  their  worship  ? — A.  They  paint  a sun  with  rays, 
and  keep  it  in  their  houses  and  places  of  worship. 

Q.  Did  they  have  regular  places  of  worship  ? — A.  They  have  certain 
places  which  are  sacred  to  them,  generally  remote  places;  and  they 
have  dark  places  in  the  forest  that  they  use  for  worshiping  their 
ancestors. 

Q.  IIow  do  the  Manguianes  women  dress  in  this  part  of  Mindoro? — 
A.  They  dress  just  like  the  men,  but  with  a bigger  clout,  and  some  of 
them  also  wear  a sort  of  handkerchief  over  their  breast. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


411 


By  Colonel  Df.nby,  resuming: 

Q.  I would  like  for  you  to  give  us  the  charaeter  of  the  people  here, 
as  to  tenacity  of  purpose,  intelligence,  courage,  vivacity,  gayety,  dis- 
position, general  contentment,  ability,  and  desire  to  work:  whether 
they  are  visionary,  and,  in  fact,  all  their  characteristics,  in  so  far  as 
they  are  quite  distinct  and  national.— A.  Ordinarily,  the  native  Filipino, 
because  he  has  been  under  the  influence  of  the  friar  for  a long  time,  is 
stoical.  They  are  fond  of  work  up  to  a certain  point.  They  will  work 
as  long  as  it  is  necessary  to  gain  a livelihood.  They  have  not  yet 
learned  to  save  what  they  earn  by  their  work,  for  they  have  always  been 
obliged,  whenever  they  had  any  money,  to  give  it  to  the  church,  and 
in  this  way  they  have  become  indifferent  to  saving.  The  imagination 
of  the  Indian,  when  he.  talks  in  his  own  language,  may  be  easily  seen 
to  be  very  active  and  easily  aroused,  considering  the  small  amount  of 
education  which  he  has.  On  account  of  the  education  in  fanaticism 
which  they  have  received,  they  regard  life  as  a transitory  state,  and 
they  are  indifferent  to  death. 

Q.  Do  you  mean  by  that  they  are  naturally  brave — couragous? — A. 
It  is  not  that  they  are  brave,  but  that  they  think  that  in  the  next 
world  they  will  enjoy  a better  life  than  here.  Watching  the  death  of 
a field  laborer  in  the  Philippines  is  like  watching  the  death  of  a saint, 
for,  although  lie  may  be  suffering  very  intensely,  he  dies  quietly, 
trusting  in  God. 

Q.  How  about  their  love  of  sport? — A.  The  children  have  their  own 
games  peculiar  to  children,  and  the  full  grown,  but  not  old  people, 
are  often  very  fond  of  entering  into  these  games  of  the  children.  They 
are  also  in  the  habit  of  holding  fiestas,  dances,  parties,  and  feasts. 

Q.  Do  you  think  they  have  these  traits  moi’e  than  other  nations? — - 
A.  1 think  so;  at  least  a little  more. 

Q.  Do  3tou  think  it  wise  to  prohibit  cockfighting? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Why? — A.  Because  it  is  immoral. 

Q.  How  has  the  prohibition  of  cock-fighting  here  been  received  by 
the  people? — A.  Very  well.  Before  the  revolution  against  Spain 
many  towns,  of  their  own  will,  without  its  being  prohibited,  sup- 
pressed cockfighting  in  their  towns,  in  order  to  change  the  cockpit 
into  a theater.  For  instance,  in  Pandacan  they  have  formed  a musi- 
cal society  to  produce  Italian  opera  by  men  and  women  of  the  country, 
and  the  people  meet  in  the  cockpit  to  hear  this  music. 

Q.  What  are  the  habits  of  the  people  in  the  matter  of  drinking? — 
A.  The  vice  of  drinking  is  very  rare  in  the  Philippines.  In  some 
towns,  where  there  are  cocoanut  trees,  they  make  a liquor  of  the  sap  of 
this  tree,  and  they  hold  meetings  where  they  drink  it;  but  it  is  only 
the  vicious  element  in  the  community,  perhaps  in  a town  only  10 
or  12,  and  they  are  looked  down  upon  by  the  rest  of  the  people. 

Q.  How  about  prostitution  as  compared  with  other  countries? — A. 
In  this  matter  the  Philippine  people  can  be  considered  one  of  the  most 
moral  of  nations. 

Q.  Is  not  that  due  to  the  fact  that  they  have  the  Catholic  religion? — - 
A.  No.  sir;  for  even  in  the  savage  tribes  there  is  no  prostitution. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Isn’t  it  true  that  there  is  less  prostitution  among  the  savage  tribes 
than  among  the  civilized  here? — A.  Yes,  sir;  less.  In  the  towns  where 


412 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


there  is  more  display  of  religion,  where  more  parade  is  made  of  religion, 
prostitution  is  greater. 

By  Colonel  Denby,  resuming: 

Q.  W hat  is  the  condition  of  the  body  of  the  people  with  respect  to 
education? — A.  As  a general  thing,  the  children  in  the  towns  cry  when 
they  are  not  able  to  go  to  school  for  any  cause — if  they  have  no  clothes 
or  can  not  go  to  school  for  any  other  cause.  There  is  a thing  going  on 
in  Sampalog  at  present,  and  which,  I suppose,  is  going  on  in  other  parts 
of  Manila.  The  children  are  going  from  house  to  house  begging  money 
with  which  to  buy  clothes  in  order  to  go  to  school. 

Q.  Has  that  always  existed  or  only  since  the  coming  of  the  Ameri- 
cans?— A.  In  Manila  the  people  avoided  going  to  school  because  of 
the  exactions  of  the  priests.  The  priests  made  them  go  to  mass,  and 
to  confession,  and  imposed  on  them  in  such  a way  that  they  did  not  go 
to  the  schools;  but  in  other  towns  where  there  were  schoolmasters, 
who,  in  spite  of  the  priests,  taught  them  Spanish  and  other  things 
according  to  the  rules  set  down,  the  people  were  all  in  the  habit  of 
attending  school. 

Q.  Has  the  attendance  been  increased  or  diminished  since  the  coming 
of  the  Americans? — A.  There  are  a great  many  more  children  in  the 
schools  now  than  before  the  coming  of  the  Americans,  because  every- 
body wishes  to  learn  English,  and  the  schools  are  crowded.  There  is 
not  room  for  the  children.  There  are  250  children  in  the  Sampalog 
school,  and  it  is  not  large  enough. 

Q.  Do  you  believe  that  these  people,  at  this  time,  are  capable,  of 
establishing  and  maintaining  a republican  form  of  government,  or  do 
you  think  it  better  to  wait  for  some  years  of  probation? — A.  1 think 
it  is  too  soon  at  present. 

Q.  W ould  you  advise  that  for  some  time  the  government  should  be 
administered  by  persons  appointed  by  the  United  States,  and  that,  by 
degrees,  a republican  form  of  government  elected  by  the  people  should 
be  established,  or  would  you  advise  that  a republican  form  of  govern- 
ment should  be  established  immediately? — A.  I think  it  should  be  a 
mixed  government;  that  the  subordinate  positions  in  towns  and  in 
provinces  could  be  filled  by  Filipinos,  but  always  under  tin*  super- 
vision of  another,  who  should  be  an  American. 

Q.  Then  do  von  think,  after  a given  number  of  years,  this  govern- 
ment might  be  turned  over  to  the  Filipinos  to  run  themselves  ? — A.  Not 
in  a few  years.  It  would  require  some  time,  for  it  would  be  neces- 
sary to  change  a great  many  evil  practices  here.  I think  that  the 
Filipinos  will  need  the  direction  of  the  Americans  for  many  years. 
They  are  educated  very  much  in  the  Spanish  wav,  and  it  is  necessary 
to  get  the  Spanish  ways  eradicated  little  by  little. 

Q.  1 would  like  to  have  your  opinion  as  to  what  proportion  of  the 
people  here,  if  the  war  were  over,  could  be  relied  upon  to  stand  by 
and  favor  and  support  an  American  form  of  government? — A.  At  first 
there  would  be  some  systematic  opposition,  but  when  the  people  saw 
that  this  system  of  government  gave  better  results  than  the  old  one, 
everybody  would  support  such  a government. 

Q.  What  is  the  sentiment  of  the  Spaniards  residing  in  the  Islands 
toward  American  rule? — A.  The  worst  possible. 

Q.  W7e  can  consider,  then,  the  church  and  the  Spaniards  as  against 
us? — A.  Yes,  sir;  the  greater  part. 


REPORT  Ob'  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


413 


Q.  Is  that  based  upon  the  idea  you  have  already  given,  that  they 
think  Spain  will  some  day  regain  control  here? — A.  It  is  not  only  due 
to  that,  but  it  is  also  due  to  the  fact  that  the  Spaniards  who  remain  in 
Manila  are  the  worst  of  the  Spaniards  who  have  been  here,  and  they 
hate  the  Filipinos  and  are  afraid  the  Filipinos  will  be  enabled  to 
govern  themselves  through  the  aid  of  the  Americans. 

By  Professor  Worcester: 

Q.  Going  back  to  the  question  of  religious  orders  for  a moment:  Are 
the  orders  represented  in  these  islands  rich  or  poor? — A.  Very  rich. 

Q.  In  what  does  their  property  consist,  and  how  have  they  acquired 
it? — A.  They  have  obtained  it  by  depredations  on  the  towns,  generally 
by  threatening  rich  people  about  to  die,  warning  them  they  are  likely 
to  go  to  hell  if  they  don’t  leave  something  to  the  church.  They  also 
gained  much  property  by  encroaching  upon  other  people’s  land.  When 
fences  were  put  up,  instead  of  putting  them  in  the  proper  place,  they 
would  pu*sh  them  over  a little  on  the  adjoining  person’s  land,  and 
every  year  they  would  push  a little  farther,  until  after  many  years 
thev  had  absorbed  all.  Then,  by'  means  of  threats,  they  obliged 
people  to  sell  them  land  for  half  or  a third  part  of  its  value.  They 
have  also  acquired  a good  deal  of  land  byT  inheritance  from  devout 
people;  but  all  these  means  have  been  illegal,  because,  under  Spanish 
law,  a father  of  a family  can  not  leave  all  of  his  possessions  to  the 
church;  he  can  leave  part,  but  not  all.  But  here  the  friars  took  all 
with  impunity,  because  the  sons  of  'such  a father  would  gain  nothing 
by  bringing  suit  against  them,  as  they'  could  never  win  the  suit.  They 
aiso  obtained  possessions  legally'  by  buy  ing  them  from  the  State. 

Q.  How  did  the  friars  administer  the  estates  they  acquired  byr  these 
various  means — justly  or  not? — A.  They  administered  them  very 
unjustly'. 

Q.  In  what  did  this  injustice  consist?  Will  you  please  explain. — A. 
They  did  this  by  paying  very  small  wages  to  the  day'  laborers,  and 
when  a man  made  a contract  to  cultivate  a piece  of  land  for  them,  and 
to  pay  a certain  amount,  they'  would  raise  the  rent  of  the  land  every 
y'ear  until  they'  finally  took  everything  that  he  had.  When  a man 
could  not  pay  everything  that  they  asked,  they  obliged  him  to  leave  the 
town;  and  sometimes,  in  part  payment  of  this  money,  they  demanded 
his  daughter. 

Q.  Are  there  any'  differences  between  the  various  orders;  are  some 
of  them  better  than  others? 

By'  Colonel  Denby,  resuming: 

Q.  Are  not  the  Recoletos  fairer  in  some  way's? — A.  No,  sir;  they' 
are  the  same,  and  y'ou  might  say'  even  worse. 

Q.  Do  they'  own  lands,  houses,  etc.,  like  the  rest? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Do  they  dress  differently' — in  coarser  clothes,  for  instance? — A. 
It  is  different,  but  not  coarser  than  the  others. 

Q.  Do  they'  perform  the  same  duties  as  others? — A.  Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Is  there  not  an  order  the  members  of  which  go  barefooted  and 
walk  all  over  the  islands? — A.  There  are  none  that  go  barefooted.  The 
Franciscans,  the  Dominicans,  and  the  Capuchins  do  not  wear  stockings, 
but  they  wear  shoes,  and,  so  far  as  walking  around  the  islands,  none  of 
them  do  that. 

Q.  Is  that  actually  the  fact?  Do  they'  really  go  without  stock- 


414 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


ings  ? — A.  No;  that  is  what  their  constitution  calls  for,  but,  as  a matter 
of  fact,  they  dress  in  shoes  and  stockings  and  as  they  like. 

Q.  When  you  speak  of  friars,  are  Ave  to  understand  you  mean  all 
these  religious  orders? — A.  Yes,  sir;  all  religious  orders. 

With  expressions  of  thanks,  the  commission  adjourned. 


TESTIMONY  OF  SENOR  LUZURIAGA. 

Manila,  September  11 , 1809. 

Present:  Colonel  Den  by  (in  the  chair)  and  Secretary  Mac  Arthur. 

Jose  Luis  he  Luzuriaga  appeared  before  the  commission. 

By  Colonel  Denby: 

Q.  Will  you  please  give  us  your  name  and  residence? — A.  Jose 
Luis  de  Luzuriaga.  At  present  I am  stopping  at  Lala  Arry’s  Hotel  on 
the  Escolta.  My  residence  is  in  Bacolod,  island  of  Negros. 

Q.  We  Avould  like,  if  you  ivill.  for  you  to  tell  us  something  about 
Negros;  the  condition  of  affairs  in  that  island;  ivhat  they  have  been 
and  what  the  prospects  are  for  the  future;  also  Avhat  position  you 
occupy  there. — A.  Since  the  revolution  against  the  Spanish  and  until 
the  present  time  1 have  held  the  position  of  president  of  the  congress 
of  the  island. 

Q.  Have  you  held  any  position  under  the  American  GoArernment?- — 
A.  When  Ave  accepted  the  American  sovereignti'  I continued  holding 
the  office  Avliich  I held  under  the  revolution.  1 was  also  one  of  the 
commission  which  came  here  to  come  to  an  understanding  Avith  General 
Otis  in  the  month  of  February  of  this  year. 

Q.  Now,  Avill  you  please  tell  us  what  are  the  conditions  in  that  island 
at  the  present  time? — A.  After  we  accepted  the  sovereignty  of  Amer- 
ica, forces  Avere  sent  there,  because  Ave  asked  for  them  to  preserve 
order,  and  everything  went  along  very  Avell  until  orders  came  from 
Malolos  by  the  way  of  Pa  nay  which  excited  the  mountain  people. 
These  orders  excited  the  people  of  the  mountains,  and  Babaylanism 
was  stirred  up.  This  is  a sect  partly  religious  and  also  anarchistic 
Avliich  existed  in  the  time  of  the  Spaniards,  and  as  the  commissioners 
from  Panay  promised  these  people  a division  of  the  property  of  the 
people  in  power  they  succeeded  in  getting  them  to  revolt  in  arms 
against  the  government.  In  consequence  of  this  houses  were  burned, 
cattle  Avere  taken  possession  of,  and  all  the  plantations  in  some  dis- 
tricts Avere  burned.  1 have  heard  that  there  were  about  100  planta- 
tions burned. 

Q.  Did  they  select  particular  plantations  to  destroy,  or  did  they 
destroy  them  all? — A.  They  burned  them  without  distinction.  They 
burned  the  plantations  of  Spaniards  and  natives  alike. 

Q.  When  was  that  done? — A.  This  happened  when  the  First  Cali- 
fornia Regiment  Avas  about  to  leave,  and  when  the  regular  regiment 
arrived  these  tires  ceased.  1 think  the  regiment  thaf  came  was  the 
Sixth.  This  regular  regiment  behaved  very  well.  They  went  to  Avork 
at  once  and  their  operations  against  the  Babs  Avere  very  successful, 
notably  at  Bobong,  Avhich  was  a military  camp  in  the  mountains,  Avhere 
70  Americans  killed  300  Babs,  including  2 generals.  This  created  such 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


415 


an  impression  there  that  a number  of  Babs  who  were  able  to  escape 
returned  to  the  towns,  saving  they  were  forced  to  go  out  by  the  Babs. 
These  were  principally  the  laboring  class. 

Q.  Were  these  Babs  all  natives  of  the  island,  or  had  some  of  them 
been  imported  from  other  islands? — A.  They  were  of  all  sorts.  The 
founders  of  Bab  were  from  the  province  of  Antique,  in  the  island  of 
Pa  nay,  but  this  was  many  years  ago. 

Q.  Are  the\  a religious  sect? — A.  In  the  beginning  it  was  a reli- 
gous  sect,  but  afterwards  it  took  up  socialism  and  anarchy,  for  they 
were  promised  a division  of  property. 

Q.  Have  they  any  particular  cause  for  complaint  against  the 
Americans? — A.  No;  the  Americans  behaved  very  well  there  in 
Negros. 

Q.  % Are  they  chiefly  influenced  by  a tendency  to  anarchy,  or  are 
they  influenced  by  political  considerations? — A.  Their  motive  prin- 
cipally is  anarchy,  and  the  commissioners  from  Panay  made  use  of 
this  spirit  to  convince  them  that  they  would  give  them  a division  of 
the  spoils;  they  made  use  of  this  anarchistic  spirit  to  secure  their  end. 

Q.  Have  they  any  well-formed  organization? — A.  No,  sir;  they  are 
mobs  of  bandits  led  by  petty  chiefs.  They  have  no  organization. 
They  existed  in  the  time  of  the  Spaniards  and  the  Spaniards  killed 
many  of  them. 

Q.  Aside  from  the  antagonism  of  the  Babaylanes,  is  there  any 
organized  opposition  to  the  Americans  in  Negros  ? — A.  No,  sir;  except 
so  far  as  difference  of  opinion  in  individuals.  In  the  first  place,  when 
we  accepted  American  sovereignty,  some  people  were  not  agreeable 
to  this,  but  afterwards,  when  they  came  in  contact  with  the  Americans 
and  came  to  know  them,  they  changed  their  views,  and  American  sov- 
ereignty has  gained  a great  deal  of  ground  and  has  created  a very 
good  feeling  in  the  island. 

Q.  IV hat  portion  of  the  island  do  the  Americans  hold? — A.  The 
entire  island,  with  the  exception  of  some  territory  in  the  interior 
where  there  are  some  bands  of  Babaylanes.  The  east,  west,  and  all 
the  rest  of  the  island  is  held  by  the  Americans,  and  all  the  towns  which 
have  a civil  organization  fly  the  American  flag. 

Q.  What  is  the  population  of  Bacolod  ? — A.  About  10,000  or  12,000 
It  is  the  capital. 

Q.  Is  it  the  largest  city? — A.  No;  there  are  some  towns  which  are 
larger,  both  with  respect  to  their  products  and  the  number  of  inhabitants; 
for  instance,  Silay,  Ginigaran,  Dumaguete.  They  are  larger  in  point 
of  number  of  inhabitants  and  also  in  the  volume  of  business,  but  they 
are  not  as  advanced  and  have  not  the  same  civilization  that  exists  in 
Bacolod. 

Q.  Are  they  occupied  by  American  troops  ? — A.  In  Bacolod  there 
is  a battalion  of  troops;  it  is  the  chief  headquarters  and  residence  of 
General  Smith.  In  Silay  there  is  a detachment  of  50  men;  there  are 
no  troops  in  Ginigaran;  in  Dumaguete  there  is  another  battalion,  and 
the  remainder  of  the  troops  are  distributed  among  the  different  towns 
in  detachments  of  20  and  25  men. 

Q.  Are  you  familiar  with  the  terms  of  the  general  order  relating  to 
the  establishment  of  a civil  government  in  Negros? — A.  1 am  familiar 
with  it. 

Q.  What  is  your  opinion  of  the  propriety  of  that  order? — A.  I 
think  that  it  is  the  proper  order  for  the  present  time,  as  just  nowr  com- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


41C> 

plete  order  is  not  restored,  and  I think  that  the  military  government 
should  have  power  over  the  civil  for  the  present. 

Q.  How  is  that  scheme  of  temporary  government  received  by  the 
people? — A.  It  has  been  received  differently  by  different  people.  The 
people  who  are  in  favor  of  peace  and  order  have  applauded  this  plan, 
but  the  partisans  of  independence  desire  that  the  civil  government  as 
contained  in  the  constitution  which  they  sent  to  Washington  be  imme- 
diately established.  It  is  my  private  opinion  and  belief  that  if  General 
Smith,  with  his  good  and  correct  judgment,  remains  there  that  this 
government  will  serve  as  a sort  of  education  for  us  and  teach  us  to 
govern  ourselves,  and  those  who  are  now  opposed  to  the  present  scheme 
will  see  the  desirability  of  it  and  change  their  present  ideas. 

Q.  You  are  familiar  with  our  territorial  form  of  government ? — 
A.  Yes,  sir;  I am  familiar  with  the  way  in  which  you  govern  your 
States,  your  Territories,  and  your  districts. 

Q.  You  understand,  then,  that  in  our  territorial  government  we 
have  a governor  and  a legislature;  that  the  country  is  divided  into 
electoral  districts,  called  “counties;’'  that  elections  are  held,  and  the 
people  govern  themselves? — A.  Yes,  sir;  I understand  that. 

Q.  These  people  are  absolutely  free  to  make  their  local  laws.  Of 
course,  they  are  governed  by  the  general  laws  of  the  United  States,  as 
are  the  States.  These  United  States  laws  are  simply  general  laws, 
which  practically  affect  no  one  in  the  ordinary  relations  of  life,  such 
as  husband  and  wife,  parent  and  child,  employer  and  employee.  All 
such  relations  are  governed  by  the  people  themselves,  and  the  United 
States  simply  passes  laws  regarding  foreign  affairs,  the  military,  the 
navy,  and  such  things  as  that.  How  would  that  form  of  government 
be  received  by  the  people  of  Negros? — A.  I think  it  would  be  very 
well  received.  That  was  our  idea  when  we  drew  up  our  plan  of  gov- 
ernment. It  is  our  aspiration  to  have  such  a government. 

Q.  The  constitution  which  you  drew  up  seemed  to  provide  for  the 
existence  of  a state.  In  our  form  of  government  there  must  first  be 
a territory,  which  must  remain  in  tutelage  until  it  has  the  necessary 
population  and  the  people  are  sufficiently  fitted,  when  it  is  made  into 
a state.  We  have  at  present  45  States  and  5 Territories,  which  are 
being  prepared  for  states. — A.  In  our  constitution  we  did  not  con- 
sider one  thing  which  is  necessary  for  a state;  that  is,  representation 
in  Washington,  which  is  enjoyed  by  a state.  We  simply  confined 
ourselves  to  our  local  affairs. 

Q.  ( )ur  Territories  are  entitled  to  representation,  but  the  representa- 
tive can  not  vote.  Do  you  think  that  the  people  of  Negros  would  be 
willing  to  go  through  this  system  until  they  are,  perhaps,  hereafter 
perfectly  prepared  for  statehood  ? — A.  There  will  be  no  objection. 

Q.  Can  you  give  us  some  idea  of  the  number  and  force  of  the 
Babay  lanes? — A.  Yes.  sir;  they  have  decreased  in  number  a great 
deal.  They  have  lost  heavily,  and  outside  those  who  have  been  killed 
by  means  of  the  recent  operations  and  the  ones  who  have  presented 
themselves  1 should  calculate  there  are  about  five  or  six  thousand 
scattered  over  the  country. 

Q.  If  they  rob  indiscriminately,  all  the  people  are  opposed  to  them, 
are  they  not? — A.  The  people  who  have  anything  to  lose  are  opposed 
to  them,  but  people  who  have  nothing,  attracted  by  the  idea  that  they 
will  share  in  the  division  of  spoils,  are  in  favor  of  them. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


417 


Q.  Are  those  Babaylanes  without  education? — A.  They  are  com- 
pletely ignorant.  It  is  one  thing  that  operates  against  thorn,  for  they  ♦ 
do  not  know  the  difference  between  justice  and  injustice. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us,  approximately,  the  population  of  Negros? — A. 
Yes,  sir;  at  present  the  island  of  Negros  has  from  300,000  to  350,000 
inhabitants.  At  present  there  are  more  than  that,  for  a great  many 
have  come  to  Negros  from  Panay  and  Cebu;  but  I do  not  count  these, 
for  as  soon  as  order  is  reestablished  in  their  island  they  will  return. 

Q.  Is  Negros  a fertile  island? — A.  One  of  the  most  fertile  in  the 
Philippines.  It  is  very  rich  in  agricultural  products,  especially  in 
sugar  cane.  Negros  is  the  island  where  the  cultivation  of  sugar  cane 
has  been  the  most  developed.  Exportation  of  sugar  cane  from  the 
port  of  Iloilo  was  greater  than  the  exportation  from  Manila,  and  Negros 
produces  more  than  all  the  island  of  Luzon.  In  addition  to  sugar 
it  produces  a great  deal  of  rice  and  some  coffee,  hemp,  chocolate,  corn, 
tobacco,  and  has  very  tine  timber  for  building  purposes  in  the  forests. 

It  also  has  many  outcroppings  of  mines.  There  is  coal  in  the  north 
and  in  the  south.  There  is  also  gold  and  a great  deal  of  sulphur. 
Mr.  Becker,  the  geologist,  can  give  an  idea  about  the  coal.  He  visited 
part  of  the  island,  but  not  all  of  it.  He  can  not  give  any  informa- 
tion about  gold,  because  he  did  not  visit  the  places  where  gold  can 
be  found. 

Q.  What  is  the  condition  of  the  people  with  regard  to  education? — 

A.  The  lower  classes  are  very  ignorant,  for  we  were  without  instruc- 
tion in  the  time  of  the  Spanish,  but  the  upper  classes  have  succeeded 
in  educating  their  sons — some  in  Europe,  Hongkong,  and  other  ports, 
but  there  is  a great  inequality  in  the  lower  and  higher  classes  in  the 
matter  of  education.  As  a general  thing  the  country  is  very  backward. 

Q.  It  would  be  a good  idea,  then,  to  introduce  common  schools  in 
the  island? — A.  Yes,  sir;  it  would  be  very  desirable,  as  I have  told 
General  Smith,  and  he  also  agrees  with  me.  In  order  to  form  good  citi- 
zens it  is  necessary  first  to  educate  them.  They  are  very  apt  scholars 
and  are  learning  English  very  readily. 

Q.  Are  there  many  natives  in  business,  or  is  the  business  done  by 
foreigners? — A.  In  the  open  ports,  where  there  are  custom  houses,  the 
owners  of  the  principal  business  houses  are  foreigners— English,  Swiss, 
Germans,  and  others- — but  as  there  are  no  ports  on  the  west  coast  and 
all  the  produce  comes  to  Iloilo,  the  merchants  there  are  natives  and 
there  are  also  some  Chinese. 

Q.  In  that  island  do  the  Chinese  do  manual  labor  or  are  they  shop- 
keepers?— A.  No,  sir;  all  the  manual  labor  there  is  done  by  natives. 
The  Chinese  are  shopkeepers.  Some  of  them  are  plantation  owners. 

In  Iloilo  some  Chinese  are  day  laborers,  but  the}'  were  brought  by 
contract  from  China. 

Q.  Will  you  please  tell  us  something  about  the  courts  ? Who  practice 
law  in  the  courts,  natives  or  Spaniards? — A.  At  present  they  are  all 
natives;  formerly  there  were  some  Spaniards,  but  now  they  are  all 
natives.  Understand,  I am  speaking  of  Negros  and  not  of  Iloilo. 

Q.  Are  there  many  lawyers? — A.  There  are  ten  native  attorneys  in 
the  island;  some  of  them  do  not  practice  their  profession,  but  engage  - 
in  agriculture. 

Q.  Are  they  educated  men  in  their  profession? — A.  Yes,  sir;  the}' 
are  graduates  of  the  University  of  Manila, 
p c 27 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


41  8 

Q.  As  to  the  judges.  Are  they  Filipinos  or  Spaniards  at  present? — 
A.  They  are  Filipinos  at  present.  No  Spaniards  remain  as  public 
functionaries. 

Q.  h'nder  Spanish  rule  were  there  any  Filipino  judges? — A.  No; 
the  regular  judges  were  all  Spaniards,  but  there  were  substitutes  who 
were  Filipinos.  T myself  was  such  a judge  in  Bacolod. 

Q.  How  is  it  as  to  the  capacity  of  the  medical  profession,  and  who 
practices  medicine  ? — A.  It  depends  upon  the  way  they  studied;  some 
good,  some  poor. 

Q.  Were  there  both  Spanish  and  Filipino  physicians — A.  In  Negros 
5 Filipino  and  2 Spanish  physicians. 

Q.  What  is  the  general  condition  of  health  in  the  island? — A.  In 
general  the  island  is  healthy.  There  are  very  few  diseases  there,  with 
the  exception  of  some  epidemics  which  have  visited  the  island  at  times, 
such  as  smallpox.  Now  they  take  much  precaution  against  it,  but 
formerly  no  hygienic  measures  were  taken  and  smallpox  prevailed 
every  year. 

Q.  How  about  leprosy? — A.  That  is  a malady  that  is  very  well 
known  there.  There  are  more  in  Bacolod  than  in  any  other  port,  for 
those  who  have  leprosy  come  from  all  the  other  towns  to  Bacolod, 
where  they  can  lie  aided;  they  beg,  and  live  in  a place  separated  from 
the  rest  of  the  population.  There  are  35  or  40  lepers  in  Bacolod. 

Q.  Are  they  allowed  to  circulate  among  the  people? — A.  Up  to  the 
present  time  they  have  been  permitted  to  come  in  on  Fridays,  when 
they  visited  the  town  to  beg. 

Q.  Don’t  they  spread  the  disease? — A.  The  people  do  not  approach 
them.  They  stand  at  a distance  and  beg.  It  is  considered  a conta- 
gious disease. 

Q.  How  is  the  climate  as  compared  with  that  of  Manila  ? — A.  Negros 
is  cooler  and  drier  than  Manila. 

Q.  Have  you  a rainy  season  there? — A.  Yes,  sir;  some  years  it  rains 
more  than  others.  For  instance,  this  year  is  a very  wet  year.  The 
rainy  season  is  June  to  November;  from  December  to  the  end  of  May 
it  is  good  weather,  and  that  is  when  sugar  is  harvested. 

Q.  How  far  is  Negros  from  Panay? — A.  From  Bacolod  to  Iloilo 
is  27  miles.  Bacolod  is  the  capital  and  Iloilo  is  the  port.  Vessels 
generally  take  three  hours  to  make  the  trip;  there  are  some  that  make 
it  in  two  hours  and  a half. 

Q.  If  Iloilo,  in  Panay,  is  the  chief  port,  then  there  is  a good  deal  of 
business  between  the  two  islands? — A.  Yes,  sir;  a great  deal. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  something  about  the  conditions  in  Panay,  the 
political  conditions,  etc.  ? — A.  In  general,  very  bad.  The  people  of 
the  interior  are  partisans  of  Aguinaldo. 

Q.  Is  that  sentiment  prevalent  generally? — A.  Yes,  sir;  it  is  gen- 
eral. Leaving  out  Iloilo,  Molo,  and  Jaro,  all  the  rest  of  the  island 
belongs  to  them. 

Q.  These  are  towns  you  name? — A.  Yes,  sir;  they  are  the  business 
towns.  Iloilo  is  in  very  bad  condition  at  present  on  account  of  the 
tire  of  February  11  last. 

Q.  Was  that  fire  started  by  the  Americans  or  bv  the  insurgents? — 
A.  The  insurgents.  1 was  there  and  left  one  hour  before  the  fire. 

Q.  Have  the  insurgents  in  Panay  a strongly  organized  force ? — A. 
Thev  have  an  organized  force,  but  it  is  not  strong.  They  probably 
have  1,200  or  1,500  men  armed  with  rifies  in  the  province  of  Santa 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


419 

Barbara,  which  is  the  province  in  which  their  government  is  located. 
The  rest  are  in  Antique  and  Capiz.  The  leading  insurgents  in  these 
provinces  are  Tagalogs. 

Q.  You  mean  they  have  gone  from  Luzon  or  are  they  native 
there?- — A.  No;  they  are  from  Luzon. 

Q.  Are  there  any  native  Tagalogs  there? — A.  No,  sir;  the  Tagalogs 
come  from  here,  but  expeditions  of  Tagalogs  were  sent  there  before 
the  Americans  came.  There  are  no  native  Tagalogs  there.  They  are 
called  Tagalogs  because  they  come  from  here.  The  owners  of  prop- 
erty down  there,  the  poor  people  and  the  Visayans,  are  thoroughly 
tired  of  the  situation.  They  preserve  the  attitude  they  are  in  on 
account  of  the  force  put  upon  them  by  the  Tagalogs. 

Q.  Then  it  is  a question  as  to  whether  America  could  protect  them? 
If  America  could  protect  them  they  would  be  loyal  ? — A.  When  proper 
operations  begin  actively  the  insurrection  will  be  over,  because  the 
insurgents  are  in  a bad  way.  Their  cattle  are  givingout,  rice  is  giving 
out,  and  mutiny  has  broken  out  in  the  ranks.  There  is  no  such  thing 
as  order  any  more.  Robberies  are  committed,  women  are  raped,  and 
murders  and  assassinations  are  common. 

Q.  Can  you  tell  us  something  about  the  island  of  Cebu? — A.  No, 
sir;  I know  nothing  except  by  hearsay.  We  are  not  in  touch  with 
Cebu.  I know  in  Cebu  it  is  said  they  have  some  400  rifles,  but  there 
is  no  certainty  as  to  that. 

Q.  Do  you  know  anything  about  conditions  in  Mindanao? — A.  I 
have  no  information  about  the  present  situation  in  Mindanao.  I have 
heard  reports,  but  they  may  be  wrong — no  dependence  can  be  placed 
upon  them;  but  I know  that  there  are  some  towns  which  desire  Amer- 
ican sovereignty  and  some  which  do  not.  As  to  Leyte,  Samar,  and 
Masbate,  and  Ticao,  it  would  be  desirable  to  take  the  islands,  for  the 
people  are  good  people  and  the  insurgents  have  very  little  strength, 
small  forces,  and  these  are  islands  which  produce  a great  deal  of  hemp 
and  a great  deal  of  tobacco.  There  are  no  American  troops  in  them 
now. 

Q.  What  is  the  feeling  of  the  people  toward  the  friars  in  Negros? — 
A.  It  is  completely  hostile.  They  are  enemies  of  the  friars.  They 
do  not  wish  to  see  a friar  there.  A great  many  people  have  been  shot 
in  N egros  through  the  unjust  and  calumnious  denunciation  of  t'  e 
friars.  Nevertheless,  the  people  of  Negros  have  behaved  with  a great 
deal  of  generosity  toward  the  friars.  When  they  took  them  prison- 
ers they  did  not  kill  a one,  in  spite  of  all.  When  the  people  of  Negros 
heard  of  the  treaty  of  peace  at  Paris  they  set  the  friars  at  liberty  at 
once. 

Q.  Qf  what  actions  of  the  friars  do  they  complain? — A.  In  the  first 
place,  they  complain  of  the  grasping  spirit  of  the  friars.  The  friars 
wished  to  lie  the  civil  authority,  the  military  authority,  and  they  were 
complete  owners  of  a man’s  bod}*  and  soul.  The  friar  was  the  personi- 
fication of  autocracy,  and  had  as  his  object  the  exploitation,  spiritually 
and  materially,  of  the  native. 

Q.  Was  any  objection  made  as  to  the  immorality  of  the  friars? — A. 
Yes,  sir;  they  have  families.  There  are  in  Negros  at  present  six 
women  who  have  been  mistresses  of  friars  and  they  have  sons  of  the 
friars  there.  There  are  friars  who  have  had  relations  with  the  women 
of  honorable  citizens. 

Q.  Does  the  friar  exercise  this  influence  over  the  people  by  virtue 


420 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


of  his  office?  Does  he  have  any  position  ex  officio? — A.  Yes,  sir;  for 
no  complaint  could  he  made  against  a priest  as  a priest.  For  instance, 
if  a priest  took  a man's  wife  away  from  him,  or  if  he  made  him  pay 
an  exorbitant  burial  or  marriage  fee,  or  if  in  the  confessional  lie  had 
induced  some  dying  person  to  leave  him  a legacy,  no  complaint  could 
be  made  against  him,  because  he  was  not  subject  to  prosecution  in  ordi- 
nary courts,  but  in  the  ecclesiastical  court,  and  there  a native  could 
never  win  his  suit,  because  the  judges  were  friars. 

Q.  Well,  did  a friar,  by  virtue  of  that  fact,  hold  any  office? — A.  As 
parish  priest  of  each  town  he  did. 

Q.  What  position  did  he  occupy  as  parish  priest  by  virtue  of  being 
a friar? — A.  He  held  office  as  parish  priest,  and  as  a parish  priest  the 
native  government  gave  him  the  right  to  intervene  in  everything 
officially.  He  intervened  in  the  affairs  of  the  municipality,  in  the 
administration  of  justice — in  everything.  The  church  acted  as  a sec- 
ular arm  of  the  Spanish  Government.  By  virtue  of  being  a priest  he 
occupied  the  position  of  representative  in  the  common  council  of  the 
municipality.  More  than  that,  he  was  the  principal  member,  for  no 
one  could  become  local  presidente  nor  take  any  office  in  the  judicial 
department  unless  it  suited  the  friar. 

Q.  Apart  from  the  antagonism  to  the  friar,  are  the  people  of  Negros 
attached  to  their  religion? — A.  Yes,  sir;  in  general  they  are  Catholic; 
among  the  higher  class  there  are  some  freethinkers. 

Q.  Then,  when  they  attack  the  friars  they  do  not  profess  to  attat'k 
religion  ? — A.  No,  sir.  They  attack  the  friars  for  their  defects,  faults, 
and  vices;  because  they  have  made  use  of  religion  to  exploit  the  coun- 
try  and  take  money  from  the  people. 

Q.  Are  any  Filipinos  members  of  these  religious  orders? — A.  They 
never  allowed  it;  they  are  all  Spaniards. 

Q.  There  are  some  as  parish  priests,  are  there  not? — A.  No;  there 
have  never  been  Filipino  parish  priests  in  Negros,  but  they  had  them 
as  assistant  priests,  with  salaries  of  $200  (Mexican)  a year.  The}'  were 
simply  assistants,  at  the  order  of  the  parish  priest. 

Q.  Do  the  people  understand  that  under  our  form  of  government 
all  religions  would  lie  equal  and  there  would  be  no  preference  given 
to  anybody  on  account  of  any  religious  belief  ?— A.  Yes,  sir;  we  under- 
stand that,  and  when  the  revolution  broke  out  we  proclaimed  liberty 
of  sects  and  adopted  the  same  system  which  you  have.  In  each  town 
there  is  a Catholic  association,  which  has  its  president,  secretary, 
treasurer,  and  its  usual  officers,  and  they  engage  the  priest;  they  pay 
him  themselves,  but  it  has  no  official  character  whatever.  There  is 
complete  separation  of  church  and  state  in  our  plan. 

Q.  Is  the  church  in  Negros  in  favor  of  the  revolution,  in  favor  of 
Aguinaldo? — A.  In  general,  the  native  priests  are  partisans  of 
Aguinaldo. 

Q.  How  do  you  explain  it  that  if  the  Filipinos  are  so  antagonistic  to 
the  friars — the  church — that  the  friars — the  church — should  favor  Agui- 
naldo?— A.  Because  they  think,  they  say,  that  Aguinaldo  will  estab- 
lish Catholicism  as  the  only  religion,  and  they  wish  to  become  the 
heirs  of  what  the  Spanish  friars  have  left  here. 

Q.  Then,  it  is  rather  a fight  against  Protestantism  than  America?— 
A.  Yes,  sir;  it  is  a religious  question.  There  are  very  few  native 
priests  in  the  Philippines  in  comparison  with  the  number  of  towns. 
They  are  of  very  little  importance,  because  they  have  very  little  edu- 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


421 


cation;  the  friars  took  care  that  in  the  seminaries  these  people  should 
have  very  little  instruction. 

Q.  Do  you  know  tluit  the  religious  orders  in  Manila  claim  that  they 
will  have  as  many  rights  under  the  Americans  as  they  had  under  the 
Spanish? — A.  For 'this  reason  a great  many  people  in  the  Philippines 
are  displeased  with  the  Americans,  for  they  say  that  they  protect  the 
friar,  and  the  friar  so  insists  himself. 

Q.  Then  is  not  it  rather  hard  that  the  friar  should  attack  us? — 
A.  Their  claims  of  American  protection  are  made  with  a view  of  excit- 
ing the  animosity  of  the  Filipinos  against  the  Americans.  They  cite  the 
fact  that  the  Americans  have  not  yet  taken  away  from  them  the  Col- 
lege of  San  Jose,  and  1 have  read  letters  in  Negros  from  friars  here 
in  Manila  saying,  “have  no  fear,  we  will  come  back  again,”  and,  in 
fact,  two  friars  did  go  back  in  order  to  prove  it,  and  we  gave  them 
fifteen  days  to  get  out. 

Q.  It  seems  that  the  friars  attack  the  Americans  because  they  are 
Protestants,  and  the  Filipinos  attack  the  Americans  because  they 
think  they  are  going  to  protect  the  friars  ? — A.  The  people  of  educa- 
tion and  intelligence  understand  that  this  absurdity  can  not  exist,  but 
the  ignorant  mass  of  the  people  believe  it  to  be  true. 

Q.  Wh  at,  in  your  opinion,  is  the  remedy  for  that  condition,  recog- 
nizing the  fact,  of  course,  that  we  are  governed  by  law  and  we  have 
to  treat  all  people  alike,  what  would  be  the  remedy? — A.  In  respect 
to  this,  and  in  considering  a remedy  for  it,  we  must  consider  the  con- 
duct of  the  members  of  these  religious  orders.  If  the  Protestant 
clergymen  do  their  duty  well  and  do  not  meddle  with  the  government, 
and  if  the  friar,  on  the  contrary,  behaves  badly  and  gives  cause  for 
his  expulsion,  this  must  be  taken  into  consideration,  and  therein  will 
be  found  a remedy. 

Q.  Of  course,  it  is  well  known  that  under  our  form  of  government 
no  man  by  virtue  of  any  religious  office  can  take  any  part  in  the 
government.  With  us,  every  one  is  elected,  and  no  man  can  assume 
any  official  position  by  being  connected  with  the  church,  and  the  ques- 
tion is,  what  we  could  do  here  to  aid  the  political  situation  with  ref- 
erence to  the  friar,  assuming  that  we  intend  to  deprive  him  of  all  his 
official  positions.  Is  it  necessary  to  drive  them  out,  or  what? — A. 
The  friars  here  have  a great  influence  over  the  minds  of  the  people. 
They  have  great  power  over  the  consciences  of  the  people,  especially 
the  women,  and  taking  this  into  consideration  I think  that  the  very 
best  means  would  be  to  attack  them  through  religion  itself  by  oppos- 
ing to  them  Protestantism  here  and  encouraging  it. 

Q.  The  idea  no  doubt  is  a . good  one,  but  it  is  entirely  outside  of  the 
duty  and  sphere  of  government.  Our  individuals  may  come  here  and 
preach  Protestantism,  but  what  we  wish  to  know  is  what  can  the 
Government  do? — A.  A governmental  action  which  would  lie  well 
would  be  to  take  measures  about  the  property  which  the  friars  hold 
in  the  towns  and  in  the  country,  as  this  is  one  of  the  great  complaints 
which  the  people  have  against  the  friars,  and  to  find  some  reasonable 
and  just  way  to  adjust  the  ownership  of  these  properties. 

Q.  As  far  as  our  general  government  is  concerned,  it  does  not  act 
on  such  questions.  Now,  a local  government  might,  by  a system  of 
heavy  taxation,  force  such  a party  to  withdraw,  but  that  would 
hardly  come  within  the  sphere  of  a general  government.  The  govern- 
ment under  general  laws  will  allow  anyone  to  test  the  right  and  title 


422 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


to  property  of  anyone? — A.  One  of  the  first  things  to  he  done  is 
for  them  to  prove  their  right  and  title  to  property. 

Q.  If  it  were  in  the  power  of  the  local  government  to  make  them 
pay  taxes  on  all  their  property  it  would  make  a great  change.  I 
understand  that  at  present  they  pay  no  taxes. — A.  No;  they  pay  noth- 
ing at  present.  The  great  cause  of  complaint  against  the  friar  here  is 
the  tremendous  rent  which  they  charge  the  man  who  works  the  ground. 
It  is  purely  an  agricultural  question,  and  a greater  part  of  the  tillable 
land  is  owned  by  the  friars — the  greater  part  of  Cavite  and  La  Laguna. 

Q.  How  would  it  do  to  allow  the  church — the  orders — to  own  a cer- 
tain amount  of  property,  taking  all  in  excess  of  that  amount? — A.  But 
when  a tax  is  put  on  they  will  be  subject  to  the  tax  the  same  as  any 
one  else.  But  it  would  always  be  a cause  of  trouble  in  the  relations 
between  the  tenant  and  the  friar  when  he  is  the  owner  of  the  land; 
there  will  never  be  any  peace  between  them.  In  the  provinces  where 
the  friars  have  been  the  owners  of  the  land  the  insurrections  have 
always  started.  This  may  be  seen  by  reading  the  history  of  the  Phil- 
ippines. Even  in  times  of  peace  bands  of  bandits  have  always  origi- 
nated in  the  plantations  of  the  friars. 

Q.  Not  being  a monarchial  government,  and  being  bound  by  laws 
applicable  equally  to  all,  it  is  a great  question  what  we  can  do  to  alle- 
viate these  wrongs.  Have  you  any  other  suggestions  you  would  like 
to  make  us? — A.  I have  nothing  else  to  suggest,  but  will  be  glad  to 
answer  any  questions.  I might  suggest  that  in  the  matter  of  com- 
merce it  would  be  a good  measure  to  establish  a bank  here,  in  order  to 
compete  with  the  English  banks,  which  now  have  a monopoly,  and 
are  somewhat  tyrannical  in  their  methods.  In  the  island  of  Negros  it 
would  be  well  to  establish  an  agricultural  bank,  and  in  doing  so  it 
would  be  necessary  to  reform  the  Spanish  law  on  the  question  of  mort- 
gages, to  make  it  more  simple.  It  is  full  of  useless  forms  at  present. 
1 might  also  suggest  the  building  of  railroads  in  the  island  of  Negros. 
There  ought  to  be  formed  a corps  of  surveyors  to  measure  our  island. 

Q.  Between  what  points  would  you  build  such  a railroad  ? — A.  That 
would  be  a question  for  study  by  some  competent  person.  He  would 
have  to  go  to  Negros  and  look  over  the  ground,  calculate  the  amount 
of  capital  necessary  to  build,  etc.  I simply  give  my  idea  in  order  that 
you  may  make  it  known.  Another  very  profitable  business  that  might 
be  established  down  there  is  interisland  shipping.  It  would  be  very 
profitable  in  times  of  peace.  Between  Iloilo  and  Negros  there  were 
two  boats  engaged  in  the  passenger  traffic;  the}’  were  very  poor  boats 
and  badly  handled,  but  yet  they  did  a good  business.  Two  sailings 
daily. 

With  expressions  of  thanks,  the  commission  adjourned. 


A 1 * 1 * F. XI ) I X. 


Exhibit  I. 

STATEMENT  FURNISHED  TO  THE  COMMIS- 
SION. 


GIVING  AN  EXAMPLE  OF  TIIE  AMOUNT  OF  TAXES  COLLECTED  BY  THE 
REVOLUTIONARY  LEADERS  AS  COMPARED  WITH  THE  PER  CAPITA 
EARNING  CAPACITY  OF  THE  INHABITANTS. 

Contributions  and  taxes  collected  by  the  Filipino  revolutionary  government  in  the  seaport 
tonm  of  Gubat  (Sorsogon  Province)  since  the  1st  of  Ortober,  1898,  to  the  28th  of  February, 
1899 — say  during  a period  of  Jive  months. 


First  expedition  of  General  Diogoro — collected  by  Maj.  Adivano  Adriatico, 

including  $1,000,  a trust  fund  for  a school  building $6,000 

Forced  subscription  by  Chinese  to  General  I ’ana 4,000 

War  contribution  in  lieu  of  “ cedilla  personal”  1 peseta  for  each  contributor.  1,  200 

Statute  labor,  paid  in  cash  instead 4,000 

Chinese  contributions  to  national  loan 2, 000 

Native  contributions  to  national  loan 12,000 

Chinese  to  the  sustenance  of  Sorsogon  forces 2,000 

Five  per  cent  ad  valorem  on  imports 7, 000 

Municipal,  or,  say,  property  taxes 150 

Trade  licenses  for  two  months 1, 400 

Market  rent,  five  months,  at  $25 125 

Slaughterhouse  tax,  at  $25 125 


40, 000 

Sundry  contributions  by  Chinese  and  natives  toward  sustenance  of  forces  in 
transit  from  neighboring  provinces 500 


40,  500 

Add  to  this  sum  the  cost  of  side  arms  which  males  over  15  years  of  age  have 

been  obliged  to  furnish  themselves  with,  say,  roughly 10,000 

Also  25  cents  each  from  6,600  people  paid  to  the  parish  priest  and  his  assist- 
ant  1,650 


Total 52, 150 


Gubat,  February  28,  1899. 


Note  of  hemp  exported  from  Gubat  during  five  months,  showing  what  corresponds  to  each 
taxpayer  and  inhabitant,  compared  with  the  taxes  during  the  same  period. 


I’iculs. 

Exported  from  Gubat  during  1808 43,888 

Less  brought  in  from  neighboring  districts 24, 888 


Total  production  of  Gubat  alone  in  1898 19, 000 


say  1,636  piculs  per  month  equals  8,180  piculs  for  the  five  months  at  a value  of  $8.25, 
which  is  a high  average  price,  equals  $67,485,  which  divided  among  13,000  inhabi- 
tants in  Gubat  gives  $1,038  per  inhabitant  per  month,  equals  $5,190  in  five  months. 

423 


424 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Fer  taxpayer,  it  gives  $2,109  per  month,  equals  $10,545  for  five  months,  or  per  mar- 
ried couple,  $4.4LS  per  month,  equals  $21,090  per  five  months. 


TAXES,  ETC. 

From  the  note  on  foregoing  sheet  it  results  that  each  inhabitant  pays  $4.01  for  the 
five  months,  or  SO  cents  per  month,  and  each  taxpayer  $8. 14  per  five  months,  or  $1.05 
per  month.  For  each  married  couple,  $16.28  in  five  months,  or  $3.30  per  month. 
Deducting  what  has  not  been  collected  to  February  28,  it  comes  out  at  $2.83  per 
inhabitant,  for  five  months,  equals  $0,566  per  month.  Per  taxpayer,  $5.75  per  five 
months  equals  $1.15  per  month.  Per  married  couple,  $11.50  per  five  months  equals 
$2.30  per  month.  In  short,  taking  as  a basis  what  has  been  collected  to  the  28th  of 
February,  it  results  that  each  inhabitant  has  a net  living  wage  of  $0,472  per  month, 
per  taxpayer  $0,959,  and  per  married  couple  $1,918. 

As  paddy  and  rice  is  at  35  cents  per  gauta,  and  hemp  at  say  an  average  (in  normal 
times)  of  $7  per  picul,  it  is  clear  that  the  people  can  not  at  present  pay  the  second 
and  third  installments  of  the  national  loan,  nor  the  statute  labor  tax  of  25  cents,  nor 
the  war  tax  of  20  cents  per  taxpayer,  not  having  enough  for  the  barest  means  of 
subsistence.  The  defunct  Spanish  Government  only  collected  in  Gubat  for  every- 
thing $18,000  per  year,  or,  say,  $3,600  per  five  months. 

Gubat,  February  28,  1899. 


George  Collingwood. 


Exhibit  IT. 


MEMORANDUM  BY  CHAN  QUIENSIEN. 


Memorandum  of  Chan  Quiensien,  mandarin  of  the  second  class 

of  the  Celestial  Empire,  and  baptized  in  these  islands  under 

the  name  of  Carlos  Palanca,  who  during  forty-three  years’ 

RESIDENCE  HERE  AS  A MERCHANT  HAS  MADE  OBSERVATIONS  AS 

HEREIN  NOTED  : 

Hemp  exported  : According-  to  a conservative  estimate,  a little  more 
or  less  than  $15,000,000  per  annum. 

Sugar  exported  : According  to  an  estimate,  a little  more  or  less  than 
$11,000,000  per  annum. 

Receipts  in  the  treasury  from  all  sources,  including  the  custom- 
house dues,  amount  to,  perhaps,  $16,000,000  or  $17,000,000,  more  or 
less. 

Local  funds  : Receipts  about  $1,500,000,  more  or  less. 

In  all  the  provinces  of  the  Philippine  Archipelago  the  languages 
are  not  the  same,  among  them  being  Spanish  and  Tagalog. 

The  city  of  Manila  and  its  suburbs : Tagalog  and  Spanish  are 
spoken.  There  are  no  products  which  are  exported,  nearly  all  the 
inhabitants  being  engaged  in  the  industries. 

Province  of  Bulacan  : Spanish  and  Tagalog  are  spoken.  Products  : 
sugar,  rice,  cane,  nipa,  cane  hats,  wine  of  the  country,  palay,  metals, 
and  tintarron. 

Nueva  Ecija:  Spanish,  Tagalog,  and  Pampango  are  spoken.  Pro- 
ducts: Rice,  sugar,  gold,  tea,  lumber,  and  tobacco. 

Bataan:  Same  language  as  in  Nueva  Ecija.  Products:  Rice,  sugar, 
lumber,  and  tintarron. 

Cavite : Spanish  and  Tagalog  are  spoken.  Products : Rice,  sugar, 
cane,  coffee. 

Batangas : The  same  language  as  Cavite.  Products  : sugar,  coffee. 

Tayabas:  Spanish  and  Tagalog.  Products:  Copra  and  cocoanut  oil. 

Languna : The  same  language.  Products  : Copra,  oil,  hats  of  calan- 
gut,  buri,  and  cuntol,  cancuan,  lumber,  rattan,  rope,  cabonegro,  beche 
de  mcr,  sugar. 

Morong:  The  same  language.  Products:  Mats,  palay,  lumber,  build- 
ing stone,  and  crushed  stone. 

Pampanga:  Spanish  and  Pampango.  Products:  Sugar,  rice,  corn, 
tintarron,  lumber,  cane,  nipa,  and  firewood. 

Tarlac:  Spanish,  Tagalog,  and  Pampango.  Products:  Sugar,  palay, 
lumber,  corn,  and  cane. 

Pangasinan:  Spanish  and  Pangasinan.  Products:  Rice,  sugar,  cigar 
cases,  cane  hats,  lumber,  tintarron,  and  mangoes. 


425 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


42() 

I loros,  south  and  north:  Spanish,  Ilocano,  and  Tinguian.  Products: 
Cigars,  rice,  indigo,  cotton  cloth,  copper,  mangoes,  and  sugar. 

Cagayan,  Isabela,  and  Nueva  Yisaya:  Ibanag,  Gaddan  and  Isinay 
Ifugaos,  and  a little  Spanish.  Products:  Cigars,  corn,  and  a little  rice. 

The  Batanes  Islands:  Batanes  and  Ibanag.  Products:  Cattle  and 
lumber. 

Mindoro:  Tagalog  and  Yisaya.  Products:  Hemp  and  corn. 

Gubut,  Camarines,  north  and  south,  Albay,  and  Sorsogon:  Tagalog, 
Vicol,  and  Spanish.  Products:  Rice,  cigars,  hemp  on  a grand  scale, 
cloth  of  the  country,  and  there  are  gold  mines  in  Mambulao. 

Iloilo:  Yisaya  and  Spanish.  Products:  Sugar,  rice,  corn,  lumber, 
firewood,  cinamay,  pina,  and  jusi. 

Cebu:  Yisaya,  Cebuano,  and  Spanish.  Products:  Sugar,  hemp,  corn, 
sinamay,  jusi,  coal,  tobacco,  shells,  beche  de  iner,  coffee. 

Samar:  Yisaya  and  a little  Spanish.  Products:  Hemp,  copra,  corn, 
rice,  sugar,  beche  de  mer. 

Leyte:  Yisaya  and  a little  Spanish.  Products;  Hemp  and  copra. 

Antique:  Yisaya.  Products;  Sugar,  rice,  and  corn. 

Negros,  east  and  west:  Yisaya,  Cebuano,  Halagaina,  and  a little 
Spanish.  Products:  Sugar,  corn,  rice,  hemp,  raw  cotton. 

Surigao,  Cagayan,  and  Isabela:  Yisaya,  Samallant,  and  Moro.  Pro- 
ducts: Hemp,  copra,  corn,  gold,  unrefined  wax,  mats. 

Zamboanga:  Spanish  and  Zamboangueno.  Products:  Hemp,  sugar, 
rice,  corn,  shells,  mother-of-pearl,  beche  de  mer,  lumber,  copra. 

Davao:  Yisaya.  Products:  Copra,  hemp,  and  lumbang  for  oil. 

Jolo:  Joloono.  Products:  Shells,  mother-of-pearl,  hemp,  pearls, 
beche  de  mer,  birds'  nests. 

Puerto  Princesa:  Tagbanua.  Products:  Resin,  rice,  cibucao,1  lum- 
ber, rattan  in  great  quantities,  shells,  and  mother-of-pearl. 

Calamianes:  Calamiano.  Products:  Beche  de  mer,  I >irds’  nests,  lum- 
ber, firewood,  rice,  corn,  cattle. 

Paragua:  Tagbaluna.  Products:  Beche  de  mer,  birds’  nests,  shells. 

Cottabato:  Maguindanas.  Iliano.  Products:  Rice  in  great  quanti- 
ties, corn,  cattle,  lumber,  crude  waxbuffalo,  hemp,  rattan,  lumbang, 
nipa. 

Masbate  andTicao:  Visayo.  Products:  Firewood,  cattle,  wax,  rattan, 
lumber,  rice. 

Zambales:  Tagalog  and  Pangasinan.  Products:  Rice,  firewood,  lum- 
ber, sugar,  corn,  and  cattle. 


1 A sort  of  red  dyewood. 


Exhibit  III. 


AGTJINALDO  TO  BROTHER  FILIPINOS,  ASKING  A 
CHRISTMAS  PRESENT  FROM  BROTHER  FILIPINOS. 


Happy  Christmas,  compatriots!  is  the  cry  of  a heart  stirred  at  real- 
izing- that  it  is  in  the  midst  of  liberty'  that  we  celebrate  the  coming  of 
the  Saviour  to  the  world. 

On  this  day  of  universal  rejoicing  I shall  announce  an  event  which 
I hope  will  increase  your  joy.  The  constitution  of  our  people,  drawn 
up  by  the  congress,  has  been  voted  and  is  in  the  hands  of  the  govern- 
ment, and  the  cabinet  is  asking  that  it  be  approved  and  promulgated 
immediately;  but  I still  keep  it  back  without  the  knowledge  of  the 
members  of  the  cabinet.  Perhaps  you  ask  why?  It  is  because  I hope 
that  first  my  beloved  compatriots  will  send  me  a Christmas  gift.  What 
this  precious  Christmas  gift  will  be  which  thus  keeps  in  suspense  an 
affair  of  such  vital  importance  as  is  our  constitution  I shall  reveal 
gradually. 

In  the  light  of  my  own  experience,  and  as  3-011  also  may-  have  under- 
stood, I am  aware  of  the  fact  that  one  of  my  humble  station  does  not 
deserve  to  be  exalted  to  so  high  a magistracy  as  is  the  presidency  of 
the  Philippine  Archipelago,  both  on  account  of  1113-  small  knowledge, 
and  for  other  causes  which  we  shall  not  enumerate;  but  as  the  con- 
gress of  representatives  chooses  me  anew  to  rule  the  destinies  of  our 
people,  it  has  seen  proper  to  me  to  come  to  my  compatriots  asking  as 
a Christmas  gift  that  they-  study-  and  consider  some  better  man  to  take 
1113-  place,  in  order  that  when  we  proclaim  the  government  of  the 
republic  we  may  also  acclaim  the  new  president  whom  we  are  to  respect. 

There  are  some  who  are  accustomed  to  ask  for  their  dismissal  from 
their  post,  sometimes  because  of  ill  feeling  against  their  colleagues, 
and  sometimes  because  their  desires  and  aspirations  have  not  been  satis- 
fied, and  from  such  we  should  not  entirely  withdraw  our  confidence, 
as  these  customs  are  as  a legacy  left  us  by  the  Spanish  and  can  not  be 
so  soon  forgotten;  but  from  this  number  I should  like  you  to  do  me 
the  honor  of  accepting  the  undersigned,  for  he  knows  well  that  per- 
sonal questions  ought  not  to  arise  to  be  a threat  of  harm  to  the  country. 

My  renunciation  is  due,  in  the  first  place,  to  the  intense  desire  which 
I have  to  see  the  country  firm  in  peace,  and,  in  the  second  place,  to 
my-  own  incapacity. 

I have  entire  confidence  that,  as  on  other  occasions  you  have  fulfilled 
m3-  desires,  you  will  not  now  fail  to  grant  this,  1113-  petition,  perhaps 
the  last  that  I shall  make  yrou;  and  this  being  so,  I anticipate  1113^  heart- 
felt appreciation  of  your  kindness,  which  I shall  never  forget. 

It  seems  that  some  may  answer,  “You  are  right,  brother;  it  is  now 
right  to  take  from  y-ou  this  burden  which  we  put  upon  y-ou,  but  whom 

427 


428 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


shall  we  elect ? We  are  not  very  wise,  and  there  is  no  one  better  able 
to  carry  this  burden  than  he  who  has  already  borne  it.”  If  it  is  so, 
thanks;  I shall  show  you  the  way. 

You  all  know  that  there  is  no  post  of  greater  excellence  than  that 
of  President  of  the  nation.  He  is  honored,  he  is  obeyed,  lie  is  the 
superior  of  all  aside  from  any  other  superiority  that  he  may  possess, 
being-  the  personification  of  order  in  the  State;  he  could  desire  no 
greater  honor,  but  if  he  is  to  act  rigorously  for  the  well-being  of  the 
nation  he  must  put  no  other  aim  on  an  equality  with  it,  for  if  he  is  to 
seek  his  own  private  wealth  there  are  other  means  more  rapid  to  attain 
greater  abundance  in  a short  time.  For  this  reason  it  were  well  to 
think  deeply  on  the  election  of  the  new  President  whom  we  are  to 
elect. 

His  antecedents  should  be  followed  step  by  step,  as  well  as  the  con- 
duct which  he  observes  at  pi-esent.  Our  votes  should  not  be  given  to 
those  who  ask  us  for  them  until  he  is  studied  and  known  to  the  bottom; 
and  if  we  can  not  deny  the  request  we  should  appear  to  assent  to  it, 
and  when  it  comes  to  the  act  to  elect  the  one  worthy,  for  we  must  not 
consent  to  any  chance  of  peril  to  the  country.  It  is  not  enough  that 
he  be  Avise,  for  there  are  Avise  men  Avho  are  unwilling  to  cast  in  their 
lot  with  their  nathe  land  while  it  is  in  peril,  because  of  their  A'ery 
wisdom,  or  because  they  are  considered  wise.  It  is  not  enough  that 
he  be  rich,  for  there  are  rich  men,  and  this  is  very  common,  who, 
although  they  see  their  native  land  threatened  by  a new  slavery,  are 
unwilling  to  aid  her  with  their  wealth,  and,  in  fact,  are  indifferent  to 
any  danger  whatever;  and  why Because  of  their  Avealth  itself,  for, 
in  any  event,  they  can  flee  to  foreign  lands.  It  is  true  that  they  have 
paid  war  taxes  and  have  subscribed  to  the  public  loan,  but  many  haA'e 
given  no  more  than  the  one-thousandth  per  cent  of  their  total  wealth, 
when  they  know  that  in  their  hands  lies  the  strength  of  the  archipelago 
and  that  they  are  the  ones  who  can  force  the  recognition  of  our  gov- 
ernment, other  nations  seeing  us  strengthened. 

They  know  well  that  in  the  majority  of  revolutions,  in  the  endeaA'or 
to  obtain  independence  in  any  nation,  the  rich  have  lead,  but  here  the 
contrary  has  come  to  pass;  here  the  poor  have  lead,  and  speaking  of 
these,  they  appear  as  true  patriots. 

But  Ave  should  not  lose  all  patience  Avith  the  rich  because  they  do  not 
join  us  heart  and  soul  in  our  endeavors  for  our  well  being,  for  Ave  can 
not  deny  that  they  are  Filipinos,  and  for  such  conduct  Ave  may  thank 
the  teachings  of  the  Spaniards,  avIio,  on  finding  themselves  rich,  turn 
to  Spain,  especially  the  priests.  But  in  the  future,  to  be  enlightened 
by  patriotism,  the  reverse  shall  come  to  pass,  for  the  people  shall  go 
to  foreign  lands,  and  when  they  lm'e  accumulated  enough,  shall  return 
to  the  country.  There  are  those  who  aspire  to  high  positions  and  can 
not  consent  to  pass  through  inferior  grades.  What  do  they  wish  in 
the  first  place?  Ah!  Their  own  well  being,  and  notthatofthe  people. 
There  are  others  who  are  pleased  with  such  posts,  and  instead  of  car- 
ing for  their  duties,  it  is  plain  that  they  seek  means  of  introducing 
their  most  beloved  partisans  little  by  little,  in  order  that  these  may 
elect  them.  But  however  their  partisans  understand  that,  they  pro- 
ceed in  this  manner  for  their  private  good  alone,  and  do  not  need  to 
be  told  what  Avill  happen.  Beware  of  such. 

The  second  motive  for  my  dismissal  I find  in  the  pain  it  causes  me 
to  still  see  among  some  of  our  military  companions  some  chiefs  who, 


REPOET  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


42(.) 

to  sav  nothing  of  odious  favoritism,  it  is  clearly  seen,  seek  to  enrich 
themselves  by  taking  bribes,  making  money  an  object  even  among  the 
prisoners,  and  that  there  arc  others,  especially  among  the  agents  of 
the  government,  who  still  mishandle  the  pay,  small  in  itself,  of  the 
soldiers.  For  all  this  the  blame  lies  upon  those  who  taught  us  such 
customs,  consequently  there  is  reason  to  hope  that  those  alluded  to 
will  change  their  customs. 

I have  a similar  reason  for  complaint  against  some  of  our  friends 
who  till  civil  positions,  especially  those  who  are  distant  from  the  seat 
of  government,  who  sacrifice  the  public  weal  to  their  private  advan- 
tage and  invent  a thousand  ways  to  enable  themselves  to  acquire  prop- 
erty, even  to  make  money  out  of  gambling.  Where  is  the  police? 
Perhaps  it  is  also  bribed!  Money  ill  spent!  They  must  know  that  in 
spite  of  all  falsehood  will  never  prevail  against  truth,  and  for  a proof 
of  that  there  are  many  of  the  rank  and  file  who  have  openly  told  the 
government  that  they  have  received  this  or  that  sum  of  moneyas  their 
share.  When  those  who  have  received  their  part  confess  the  truth, 
why  will  not  those  confess  who  were  present  and  received  nothing? 
And  so  little  by  little  some  who  had  their  eyes  closed  are  opening 
them.  Nevertheless,  I confess  that  this  fault  is  less  than  that  of  those 
who  govern,  closely  following  the  customs  of  the  former  rule.  Of 
these  we  may  hope  that  they  will  change  their  method  of  procedure 
and  cause  the  light  of  true  patriotism  to  shine  forth.  Furthermore, 
there  are  those  among  our  military  men  and  civil  employees  and  pri- 
vate parties  who  show  themselves  brave  in  the  extreme  among  the 
people  of  the  country,  but  in  the  presence  of  the  enemy  are  the  first 
in  flight  and  all  who  show  themselves  cowards  and  similar  persons  are 
those  who  suffer  fighting  to  their  last  hour. 

And  I am  proud  of  the  poor  above  all  others — the  poor  who,  with  their 
insignificant  pay  or  with  none  at  all,  knowhow  to  suffer  that  the  coun- 
try may  not -be  newly  enslaved,  and  especially  of  those  who  lend  their 
forces  to  its  defense  without  any  personal  interest,  whom  I should  like 
to  see  always  honored. 

These  scarcely  are  aware  of  any  fight  for  the  purpose  of  enslaving 
our  people  before  they  advance,  one  and  all,  to  seize  a gun,  if  there 
are  guns,  or  if  not,  to  wield  a bolo  or  hurl  a stone,  for  they  can  not 
endure  that  the  Philippine  people  should  fall  again  into  slavery  while 
they  live. 

Among  our  clergy  may  now  be  seen  many  lovers  of  their  native 
land,  and  very  just  and  righteous  persons.  To  those,  however,  who 
have  not  given  proofs  of  such  qualities  I wish  to  recommend  that  the}1, 
forget  the  accumulation  of  private  wealth  and  cease  exacting  excessive 
parochial  dues,  as  they  know  well  the  poverty  that  burdens  at  present 
the  people  of  the  country.  Let  us  not  go  back  to  putting  into  force 
the  ideas  or  oppressions  which  the  priests  taught  us. 

Let  us  take  into  account  that  as  a general  thing  the  people  of  the 
country,  although  they  live  poorly,  have  their  eyes  open,  and  if  we 
keep  up  the  evil  customs  of  the  priests,  although,  in  truth,  they  will 
not  make  much  stir  about  it,  at  the  same  time  they  will  censure  us  in 
their  hearts. 

Let  us  remember  continuously  the  martyred  members  of  our  clergy, 
Senors  Burgos,  Zamora,  Gomez,  and  others,  who  were  the  first  defend- 
ers of  our  native  land.  All  of  us,  including  the  undersigned,  and 
especially  those  poor  who  are  still  in  the  dark,  hope  from  your  charity 


480 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


the  beginning  of  our  enlightenment,  in  order  that  the  light  may  shine 
at  once,  for  all  have  a right  to  it  in  their  character  of  Filipinos.  We 
shall  not  allow  excessive  duties  and  great  fees  for  masses  to  be  exacted 
of  the  poor,  who  perhaps  have  nothing  to  eat.  Let  us  show  the  peo- 
ple that  God  has  no  thrist  for  gold  and  that  what  he  expects  is  firm 
faith  and  good  works. 

There  is  a slight  exception  made  by  some  members  of  the  clergy 
who  are  still  much  given  to  the  evil  habit  of  forming  parties,  availing 
themselves  of  their  sacred  ministry,  especially  among  the  women  who 
confess  to  them,  by  means  of  whom  they  insinuate  themselves  among 
their  respective  husbands  and  sons.  These,  nevertheless,  although  in 
need,  are  the  first  to  reveal  it  to  the  government,  for  they  know  how 
to  love  their  native  land,  and  understand  that  the  appearance  of  parties 
will  be  the  ruin  of  us  all. 

We  should  not  lose  all  respect  for  such  members  of  the  clergy,  but 
let  them  absolutely  change  their  conduct,  for  it  is  impossible  to  deny 
that  they  are  Filipinos  and  our  brothers,  and  that  if  they  behave  thus, 
it  is  only  due  to  the  long  time  during  which  they  were  at  the  side  of 
the  priests. 

All  the  above-mentioned  cases  of  evil  practices,  which  should  be 
rooted  out,  can  be  believed  on  my  word,  and  I hold  the  proofs  until 
such  time  as  the  truth  may  be  demanded  of  me,  also  if  anyone  reading 
the  above  considers  himself  unduly  alluded  to  and  resents  it,  I am 
willing  to  ask  pardon. 

But  as  in  general  there  are  many  who  can  see  the  mote  in  the  eye  of 
another  and  do  not  see  the  beam  in  their  own,  among  which  the  first 
in  rank  is  this  self-constituted  censor,  I also  ask  of  the  kindness  of  all 
that  they  censure  me  with  all  due  frankness  for  that  which  I have 
done,  or  may  do  in  the  future,  unduly.  Only  this.  I should  not  like 
indirect  criticism,  such  as  anonymous  letters,  and  in  truth  1 consider 
them  useless,  for  perhaps  the  writer  may  be  mistaken  and  may  not 
understand  the  motives  of  my  conduct,  and  not  knowing  the  author, 
how  can  I answer  the  charges  which  he  brings  against  me? 

Let  no  one  think  that  this  criticism  will  cause  ill  feeling  on  my  part, 
as  is  the  case  with  some  who  are  revengeful  on  being  censured,  for  it 
has  always  been  my  desire  to  conduct  myself  in  the  most  correct 
manner  possible  toward  my  neighbor,  deserving  your  favorable  obser- 
vations that  I might  receive  them  spontaneously  as  my  due  and  as  a 
Christmas  gift  which  I must  appreciate,  and  in  this  you  will  greatly 
honor  my  position,  to  secure  which  I have  always  striven  to  follow  in 
the  footsteps  of  my  companions  of  unquestionable  conduct  and  honor 
whom  1 envy.  Why  should  we  seek  to  establish  unity  of  purpose  if 
we  know  that  we  can  never  attain  it,  as  was  the  case  under  the  former 
rule,  when  their  bad  customs  forced  us  to  open  our  eyes? 

I earnestly  beg  that  when  we  observe  any  wrong  conduct  that  we 
shall  be  the  first  to  expose  it,  for  as  I have  said  above  we  have  some 
companions  of  strange  conduct,  who  for  love  of  money  strive  to  dis- 
simulate concerning  that  which  the}r  have  hidden  or  are  about  to  hide 
and  to  divert  suspicion  from  themselves  when  spoken  to  about  it.  They 
do  not  understand  that  thus  they  drag  their  honor  in  the  dirt,  for  their 
own  companions,  being  brave  men,  are  the  ones  who  betray  them  to  the 
government,  and  surely  neither  a brother  nor  a father  should  be  recog- 
nized when  lie  is  lacking  in  love  to  his  native  land.  And  once  having 
denounced  them,  their  denouncers  will  be  the  first  to  excuse  their  faults. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


481 


Let  us  never  say  “ It  is  too  late  to  do  it  now,”  for  to-morrow  the  harm 
will  be  greater.  Truth  will  always  prevail,  and  your  neighbor  has 
always  good  eyes  for  sudden  changes. 

Perhaps  among  the  readers  of  this  there  may  be  someone  who  will 
blame  me  for  not  having  given  their  deserts  to  those  who  are  lacking 
in  the  department  of  justice.  He  will  say  that  it  is  the  duty  of  the 
superior  to  administer  justice  and  cause  it  to  be  administered.  That 
is  the  truth,  but  what  is  a man  such  as  the  undersigned,  of  small 
ability,  and  upon  whom  such  a responsibility  is  imposed  to  do? 

It  may  also  be  said  that  those  who  elect  me,  or  are  about  to  elect  me, 
are  only  trying  to  curry  favor  with  me,  and  this  is  the  reason  why  I 
beseech  you  all  that  you  grant  me  the  Christmas  gift  which  I ask,  viz, 
dismissal  from  my  post. 

I should  only  ask  the  people  to  give  me  a document  by  virtue  of 
which  I may  count  myself  one  of  the  military  reserve,  and  whenever 
the  country  may  call  upon  me  I shall  be  anxious  to  fulfill  any  duty  they 
may  put  upon  me.  All  of  us  of  the  reserve,  if  we  see  that  anyone 
dares  to  attempt  to  enslave  anew  our  native  land,  shall  present  our- 
selves voluntarily  to  defend  our  people,  although  the  government 
may  not  notify  us,  for  truly  our  consciences  can  not  allow  our  native 
land  to  again  suffer  the  toils  which  she  has  undergone.  For  aside  from 
the  intrinsic  justice  of  her  aspiration,  she  has  sacrificed  many  lives  for 
it,  and  has  endured  sufferings  which  we  will  not  go  into  at  length.  I 
earnestly  hope  for  the  Christmas  gift  which  I beg  of  you,  for  I do  not 
wish  to  remain  in  this  position,  and  in  addition  to  what  I have  said 
before,  I do  not  wish  that  it  should  come  to  my  ears  that  among  my 
companions  there  is  anyone  who  does  not  conduct  himself  worthily, 
and  in  truth  there  is  nothing  more  bitter  to  mv  heart  than  to  see  any 
such  Filipino  punished,  especially  if  he  is  honored  with  some  public 
position. 

It  is  the  truth  which  is  told  in  a refrain  which  says  that  there  is  no 
isle  without  its  serpents  great  and  small,  but  I wish  our  Philippines  to 
be  freed  from  such  serpents,  or  at  least  from  the  great  ones,  for  my 
honor  goes  hand  in  hand  with  theirs.  I also  beg  all  the  Filipino 
brothers  that,  no  matter  who  may  be  elected  to  take  my  place  as  presi- 
dent of  these  islands,  they  pay  him  at  once  the  respect  due  him  in  con- 
sideration of  the  dignity  which  he  represents.  I also  hope  that  in  all 
branches  of  the  government  that  custom  left  us  by  our  ex  rulers  of 
idling  about  here  and  there  in  pride  may  be  discontinued,  and  that 
there  may  spring  up  a keen  desire  to  correct  anything  that  may,  at 
no  distant  day,  lead  to  the  ruin  of  our  race. 

So  then,  as  we  have  resolved  to  abandon  our  ex  rulers,  let  us  also 
abandon  all  those  vices  which  they  practiced.  To-day  the  government 
is  ours,  and  we  should  be  the  first  to  show  it  entire  respect,  and  if  we 
follow  out  this  idea  we  may  entertain  the  hope  of  one  day  counting 
our  governments  among  the  governments  which  we  admire  for  their 
peace,  their  strength,  and  their  unity. 

Aguinaldo  y Fami. 

Malolos,  Decembei — , 1899. 


Exhibit  TV. 


MEMORANDUM  ON  THE  CHINESE  IN  THE 

PHILIPPINES. 

[Presented  to  the  United  States  Commission  by  Gabriel  Garcia  Ageo,  1899.] 


THE  CHINESE  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES. 

I. 


HISTORICAL  REVIEW. — VARIOUS  OPINIONS  ANTAGONISTIC  TO  CHINESE 

IMMIGRATION. 

Since  very  ancient  times  the  Chinese  have  had  commercial  relations 
with  the  Filipinos,  said  relations  having  existed  before  Spanish  domin- 
ion in  the  islands. 

It  was  the  custom  of  the  Chinese,  as  they  had  no  personal  security 
when  they  disembarked  in  order  to  trade  on  land,  to  perform  their 
commercial  transactions  with  the  Filipinos  from  aboard  their  sampans, 
and  even  so  some  of  their  ships  were  boarded  and  plundered  by  pirates, 
who  navigated  these  waters  with  their  ships  with  impunity. 

When  Legaspi  founded  Manila,  the  Chinese  secured  personal  security 
when  they  disembarked  on  some  coasts  of  the  archipelago,  although  it 
was  still  necessary  to  administer  severe  punishment  to  ungovernable 
crowds  who  killed  and  robbed  them. 

When  the  Chinese  became  able  to  live  safely  in  the  Philippines  and 
to  do  business  with  the  natives,  they  began  to  immigrate  in  greater 
numbers,  and  this  invasion  was  the  first  cause  of  the  difficulty  of  the 
Spanish  rule. 

As  the  number  of  the  Chinese  was  continually  increasing,  and  also 
as  it  was  necessary  for  the  security  of  the  colony  to  segregate  them 
from  the  rest  of  the  population,  a large  building,  or  market,  with 
numerous  habitations  was  built  for  them  as  a measure  of  governmental 
policy.  This  market  was  called  the  “ Market  place  of  San  Fernando.” 

This  market  place  served  as  a home  for  the  Chinese,  so  that  they 
could  not  diffuse  their  religion  among  the  natives,  and  it  was  situated 
on  the  other  side  of  the  Pasig  River  under  the  fire  of  “Citadel,”  as 
Fort  Santiago  was  formerly  called. 

At  that  time,  in  which  one  of  the  main  objects  of  the  Kings  of  Spain 
was  the  dissemination  of  the  Apostolic  Roman  Catholic  religion,  the 
Chinese  were  separated  from  the  remainder  of  the  population  for  fear 
that  the  natives  would  change  their  belief,  and  the  Chinese  were  only 
tolerated  in  the  Philippines  in  order  not  to  deprive  Manila,  then  a grow 
ing  Spanish  colony,  from  the  great  advantages  which  the  services  of 
the  Chinese  afforded  it,  not  only  by  their  active  participation  in  all 
sorts  of  manual  labor,  but  also  by  the  benefits  which  the  people  derived 
from  the  cheapness  of  some  of  their  small  manufactured  articles, 
although  their  extensive  entrance  into  foreign  and  domestic  trade  could 
not  be  avoided. 

The}*  made  good  profits,  and  in  a few  years  the  market  place  or 
432 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


433 


“aleaiceria,”  which  was  theirs  exclusively,  proved  too  small  to  accom- 
modate all  who  came  from  China,  and  another  building'  called  the 
“Parian”  was  constructed  fora  like  purpose.  “ Parian”  is  a Mexi- 
can word,  which  means  market  place,  and  the  new  building,  which  was 
made  for  the  Chinese  was  situated  where  at  present  the  ruined  botan- 
ical gardens  are,  although  some  historians  confound  this  “Parian”  with 
the  one  which  existed  in  Intramuros,  at  the  end  of  Victoria  street, 
where  the  municipal  school  for  girls  is  at  present. 

The  Chinese  immigration  kept  on  growing  in  numbers  and  became 
a sort  of  invasion,  and  the  time  came  when  there  were  not  enough 
habitations  in  both  the  alcaiceria  and  the  parian  to  accommodate  them. 
In  the  middle  of  the  seventeenth  century  there  were  some  30,000  in 
the  neighborhood  of  Manila  alone. 

Although  historians  affirm  that  at  this  time  the  principal  occupation 
of  this  great  number  of  Chinese  was  agriculture,  nevertheless  it  is  to 
be  supposed  that  many  of  them  did  not  have  any  visible  work  or  means 
of  acquiring  it,  and  they  audaciously  revolted  against  Spanish  sover- 
eignty in  the  islands.  Although  there  were,  as  has  been  said,  some 
30,000  of  them,  they  carried  their  audacity  to  such  an  extreme  that 
they  had  Manila  in  a state  of  siege  for  some  days,  and,  although  they 
were  repulsed  a number  of  times,  they  persisted  in  their  project  of 
taking  the  capital  of  the  archipelago  by  assault. 

After  various  futile  attempts  they  were  convinced  that  they  could 
not  conquer  in  the  Philippines  and  finally  withdrew,  raising  the  siege, 
and  then  those  who  had  been  besieged  pursued  them  to  a point  beyond 
Kainta,  slaughtering  them  without  pity  until  they  were  in  a state  of 
complete  and  shameful  defeat. 

As  a result  of  this  Chinese  revolt  against  the  sovereignty  of  Spain 
in  the  archipelago  greater  restrictions  on  their  immigration  were 
imposed. 

In  spite  of  these  restrictions  the  Chinese  colony  gained  in  strength 
what  it  had  lost  in  extent,  because  these  restrictions  gave  the  Chinese 
the  undeniable  right  to  manage  their  own  commercial  affairs  and  enabled 
them  to  always  corrupt  the  administrative  elements  in  the  Philippines, 
and  this  was  the  natural  consequence  of  the  Spanish  rules’ and  royal 
orders  referring  to  the  Chinese. 

Some  years  back  a Spanish  historian,  referring  to  this  continual 
corruption,  said: 

A very  curious  custom  has  been  established,  which  was  regarded  as  a lawful  profit 
and  did  not  seem  strange  to  anyone  in  the  times  which  we  may  call  the  times  of 
depression  in  Manila — that  is,  the  time  between  the  government  of  Corcuera  (1644) 
and  the  English  invasion  (1762),  which  produced  the  effect  of  a'  revolution  in  that 
cramped  society.  The  result  of  this  custom  was  that,  at  the  expense  of  the  Chinese, 
all  people  of  official  rank  who  came  to  Manila  had  their  own  houses,  with  good  house- 
hold furniture  and  suitable  to  their  respective  positions. 

On  our  part  we  may  say  that  this  custom,  although  it  continued  to 
be  in  force  until  the  1st  of  May,  1898,  was  principally  limited,  as  far 
as  the  giving  of  household  furniture  and  things  of  value  is  concerned, 
to  a few  persons,  those  who  had  the  highest  official  rank  and  who  were 
capable  of  receiving  such  attention. 

These  presents  were  principally  made  to  the  Governor-General,  the 
general  director  of  civil  administration,  the  controller  of  the  treasury, 
and  other  chiefs  of  the  army,  and  also  to  officers  of  the  guardia  civil 
and  the  veteran  guard,  and  to  judges,  magistrates,  etc. 

It  was  necessary  to  punish  the  Chinese  for  their  attempt  to  take 
p c 28 


434 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


Manila  and  for  the -innumerable  acts  of  treason  which  they  were 
accused  of,  and  consequently,  in  the  time  of  Don  Simon  de  Anda 
(1762-1764),  it  is  calculated  that  someS, 000  died  in  the  central  provinces 
of  Luzon,  who  were  exterminated  in  those  towns  by  the  order  of  that 
Governor-General,  only  those  who  lived  in  Manila  and  its  suburbs 
remaining  alive. 

As  a consequence  of  this  anti-Chinese  campaign  many  of  them  who 
survived  this  assassination  emigrated  to  their  own  country,  and  the 
number  of  Chinese  established  in  these  islands  diminished  little  by 
little. 

Only  those  remained  in  the  Philippines  who  were  secure  in  doing 
their  business  and  making  a living  freely  and  with  more  security  than 
in  their  native  country. 

This  noteworthy  diminution  continued,  until  from  1840-1846  there 
were  only  5,000  in  all  the  Philippines,  a small  number  as  compared 
with  other  times. 

According  to  statistics  which  have  been  made  there  were  500  natives 
of  Macao  among  these  5,000  Chinese,  and  these  natives  of  Macao 
devoted  themselves  exclusively  to  the  trades  of  cooks,  shoemakers, 
and  cabinetmakers. 

We  may  note  as  a curious  detail  that  the  natives  of  Macao  have 
always  been  completely  separate  from  the  other  Chinese  and  that  up 
to  the  present  time  they  have  always  had  better  public  and  private 
customs  than  the  others,  and  as  yet  they  have  not  given  cause  for  any 
restriction  by  the  governments  of  the  Philippines. 

Lastly,  the  Chinese  have  always  been  the  preeminent  question  with 
the  Governors-General,  and  when  Senor  Norzagaray  gave  up  his  com- 
mand in  the  Philippines  in  1859  he  wrote  an  extensive  paper,  in  which, 
among  other  things,  the  seven  or  eight  thousand  Chinese  who  were  in 
the  archipelago  were  spoken  of. 

This  Governor-General,  referring  to  the  Chinese,  said  : 

One  of  the  most  difficult  questions  remains  to  lie  solved  on  my  giving  up  of  my 
command — that  of  the  commerce  carried  on  by  the  Chinese  in  the  provinces. 

The  clamor  against  these  Asiatics  is  general  in  the  country,  because  competition 
with  them  is  not  possible;  Spaniards,  Mestizos,  Indians,  all  give  them  a free  field  in 
retail  business  when  they  enter. 

Their  few  needs,  their  patience  under  every  insult  and  vexation  and  sacrifice,  and  per- 
sonal labor  which  they  can  utilize,  except  agriculture,  the  ease  with  which  they  adapt 
themselves  to  the  customs  of  the  natives  and  to  the  exchange  of  produce  and  to  all 
the  needs  of  the  consumer;  the  insignificance  of  their  personal  expenses;  the  manner 
of  their  life;  the  close  cooperation  which  they  maintain  among  themselves,  all  place 
them  in  a situation  advantageous  to  them,  hut  not  always  to  commercial  progress. 

The  truth  is  that  they  have  monopolized  retail  business;  they  make  the  employ- 
ment of  capital  by  individuals  of  other  races  impossible.  It  is  also  true  that  they  do 
not  start  any  enterprise  nor  undertaking  of  importance.  They  hoard  by  instinct,  and 
hide  or  take  away  their  capital  from  the  country,  which  capital  in  other  hands  would 
he  a powerful  element  of  progress  and  advancement,  but  is  it  possible  and  would  it 
be  prudent  to  at  once  reverse  the  customs  of  the  country  which  is  now  accustomed 
to  the  services  of  the  Chinese  in  the  retail  business  referred  to? 

Are  the  complaints  of  thousands  of  individuals  of  other  races  sufficient  warrant 
for  the  prevention  of  their  invading  activity  in  all  industries? 

An  energetic  reaction  against  the  Chinese  has  existed  during  the  last  two  years  in 
Java,  in  Australia,  and  in  California. 

In  the  voluminous  report,  to  which  I referred  in  the  beginning,  it  is  set  forth  by 
approval  and  by  some  royal  orders  that  they  be  protected.  I believe  that  it  would 
be  possible  to  establish  a means  of  quieting  these  complaints  and  at  the  same  time 
avoiding  tl\e  consequent  setback  in  business,  to  wit,  to  take  the  prohibitive  meas- 
ures which  have  been  adopted  in  the  countries  mentioned. 

The  commercial  invasion  of  the  provinces  by  the  Chinese  could  only  be  advanta- 
geous under  certain  restrictions. 

The  gathering  of  the  fruits  of  the  country  for  exportation,  which  up  to  the  present 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


485 


has  been  done  by  Spaniards,  natives,  and  mestizos,  should  continue  in  their  hands, 
for  this  tendency  to  fraud,  to  adulteration,  and  to  monopoly,  which  is  characteristic 
of  the  Chinese,  would  be  prejudicial  to  their  production. 

The  industrial  tax  is  called  upon  to  establish  a just  balance  in  trade  and  protection 
in  favor  of  the  national  races  in  the  Philippines.  The  industrial  tax  which  the  Chi- 
nese pay  at  present  is  insufficient  for  the  purpose,  on  account  of  the  insignificant 
rates  which  it  fixes. 

One  of  the  greatest  difficulties  which  this  question  presents  is  the  great  amount 
which  has  been  written  upon  this  subject  and  the  impossibility  of  the  superior 
authorities  of  the  best  judgment  understanding  it  in  all  its  phases  and  all  the  details' 
which  should  be  known. 

This  is  the  most  interesting  part  of  the  paper  of  Senor  Norzagaray, 
in  which  he  makes  it  clear  that  it  would  be  better  for  Spain  to  be 
impoverished  by  taking  energetic  and  saving  measures  against  these 
Asiatics  than  that  these  Philippines  should  be  ruined  by  foreign  com- 
mercial absorption,  of  which  one  Spanish  colony  was  the  victim. 

Since  the  administration  of  said  Senor  Norzagaray  up  to  the  begin- 
ning of  the  war  between  the  United  States  of  America  and  Spain,  the 
influence  of  the  Chinese  in  the  Philippines  has  been  increasing,  both 
in  commerce  and  industry,  and  in  their  wealth  and  the  volume  of  their 
production. 

When  any  individual  or  collection  of  individuals  opposed  or  thought 
of  opposing  the  superior  power  of  the  Chinese  the  latter  were  always 
provided  for  by  powerful  friends  and  were  able,  by  means  of  their 
valuable  presents,  to  overcome  any  opinion  unfavorable  to  them,  both 
in  the  government  of  the  islands  and  in  Madrid. 

By  means  of  this  peculiar  policy  they  triumphed  over  the  anti-Chinese 
report  which  was  sent  to  the  Government  of  Spain,  signed  by  many 
merchants  and  manufacturers  of  the  Philippines,  both  natives  of  the 
islands  and  of  the  peninsula,  in  June,  1886.  The  anti-Chinese  report 
referred  to  said  among  other  things: 

Legislation  relative  to  the  Chinese,  being  superficial,  confused,  and  contradictory, 
offers  in  this  country  a singular  motive  for  reflection.  While  the  former  colony, 
daughter  of  costly  experience,  acquired  by  much  bloodshed,  restricted  immigration, 
limited  it  and  did  not  wish  it  to  exist  unless  confined  and  under  our  cannons  in 
Manila  or  scattered  about  the  country  in  agricultural  pursuits,  the  modern  colony, 
the  daughter  of  vague  ideas,  essentially  narrow-minded,  impressionable,  impetuous, 
recommends  the  encouragement  of  this  immigration,  whose  growth  can  not  be 
prevented. 

The  undersigned,  natives  and  persons  from  the  peninsula,  on  having  the  honor  of 
presenting  this  report  to  Your  Majesty,  are  inspired  by  the  most  ardent  patriotism  and 
a desire  to  better  and  consolidate  the  sources  of  wealth  of  this  country,  being  identi- 
fied with  its  interests,  which  are  also  the  interest  of  the  metropolis,  and  with  the 
immense  majority  of  the  inhabitants. 

In  setting  forth  the  difficulties  by  which  the  natural  march  of  progress  is  impeded, 
it  is  not  their  intention  to  deprive  the  Chinese  of  certain  liberties  compatible  with 
their  manner  of  life,  with  natural  right,  and  also  compatible  with  the  mutual  bene- 
fits derived  from  commerce  between  Spain  and  China. 

They  are  only  moved  by  a desire  to  modify  those  excessive  liberties,  through 
which  evil  conditions  generally  among  the  middle  and  lower  classes  of  the  -country 
are  visibly  being  established — evil  conditions  which  will  continue  increasing  irre- 
sistibly according  as  Chinese  immigration  increases,  which  is  stimulated  in  China  by 
a large  number  of  business  men,  whose  sole  occupation  is  collecting  them  and  shipping 
them  to  Manila,  from  which  business  they  derive  great  profits.  There  is  no  room 
for  doubt  that  the  Chinese  merchant  corrodes  and  sterilizes  the  most  valuable  germs 
of  national  wealth  everywhere,  being  the  personification  of  the  ignorant  man  in  the 
fable  who  killed  the  hen  that  laid  the  golden  eggs. 

When  the  signers  put  forward  what  they  believe  to  be  an  echo  of  the  people,  they 
sound  the  alarm  to  the  public  power  in  order  that  a preventive  measure  may  be 
adopted  to  attack,  at  an  opportune  time,  the  excess  of  Chinese  and  the  excessive 
liberty  with  which  this  soil  is  exploited  by  a race  which,  although  it  is  called  indus- 
trious, refuses  all  productive  labor,  such  as  agriculture  or  any  other  day  labor;  a race 
which  corrupts  and  dries  up  every  place  through  which  it  passes,  whose  enumeration 


480 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


lias  always  defrauded  the  administration,  for  by  fraud  only  about  25  or  30  per  eentof 
them  are  calculated;  a race  which  is  excessively  stubborn  in  persisting  in  maintain- 
ing their  own  peculiar  customs  and  manner  of  life;  which  is  stubborn  in  resisting 
everything  pertaining  to  good  government,  public  hygiene,  and  the  police;  which 
threatens  us  within  a few  years  with  a radical  transformation  in  our  population  and 
customs;  which,  altogether,  is  a permanent  menace  to  all  the  principles  of  the  eco- 
nomic vitality  of  the  country. 

Therefore  the  undersigned,  at  the  royal  feet  of  Your  Majesty,  ask  that  a law  to  sus- 
pend Chinese  immigration  shall  be  put  in  force  in  the  Philippines,  and  that  in  this 
law  provision  shall  be  made  (and  this  provision  constitutes  the  true  reciprocity  of  the 
treaty)  that  Chinese  shall  not  engage  in  manufacture  and  in  commerce  except  in 
the  open  ports  of  the  Philippines,  they  being  granted  a short  space  of  time  to  liqui- 
date their  business  pending  in  the  interior  and  in  ports  which  are  not  open;  also  that 
in  the  interior  Chinese  shall  only  be  admitted  to  engage  in  agriculture  and  mechan- 
ical trades  exclusively;  and  that  the  Chinese  shall  not  be  bidders  for  contracts  for  the 
administration;  and,  finally,  that  strict  provision  shall  be  made  for  Chinese  merchants 
to  enroll  themselves  in  the  public  register,  and  for  them  to  present  their  accounts  and 
other  formalities  of  their  affairs  according  to  the  prescriptions  of  the  commercial  code. 

In  this  same  year,  1886,  the  press  in  Manila  published  spirited 
polemics  in  favor  of  this  report  against  Chinese  immigration. 

Complaints  to  the  Sovereign,  the  campaign  in  the  press,  and  other 
manifestations  against  Chinese  immigration  reveal,  it  is  certain,  a 
unanimous  aversion  to  these  Asiatics,  hut  it  is  true  that  this  aversion 
was  caused  by  a passionate  spirit  which  deprives  its  arguments  of  the 
appearance  of  impartial  judgment  which  they  should  possess.  The 
investigation  made  was  always  directed  by  the  idea  ot  looking  for 
arguments  antagonistic  to  the  Chinese,  and  the  contrary  was  never  the 
case,  nor  was  any  investigation  made  to  bring  out  arguments  in  their 
favor. 

Thousands  of  defects  which  are  attributed  to  the  Chinese,  as  well  as 
their  supposed  faults,  are  only  faults  which  may  be  attributed  to  the 
ignorance,  the  idleness,  the  venality,  and  the  unscrupulousness  of  the 
Span  iards  themselves. 

La  Oceania  Espanola,  a daily  paper  which  pretended  at  that  time  to 
be  the  official  organ  of  the  anti-Chinese  party,  after  presenting  the 
disadvantages  which  the  Chinese  brought  to  the  Philippines,  concluded 
its  polemic  against  their  defenders  with  the  following  paragraph: 

We,  convinced  that  it  is  our  duty  to  indicate  urgent  measures  to  remedy  the  pres- 
ent alarming  state  of  affairs  which  has  resulted  from  the  considerable  Chinese  immi- 
gration, and  in  order  that  no  one  may  consider  them  a collection  of  improper  measures 
when  they  are  set  forth,  with  the  most  profound  conviction  that  we  are  inspired  by 
a desire  for  the  national  good,  and  with  a clear  conscience  because  of  the  great  gulf 
which  separates  us  from  any  other  idea,  and  from  passion  and  improper  interests 
which  might  cloud  our  clear  judgment,  point  out  the  urgency  of  the  following  meas- 
ures as  an  absolute  need  of  the  moment,  and  as  the  fruit  of  observation  during  many 
years,  conducive  to  better  administration  of  this  country  and  the  welfare  and  pros- 
perity of  its  inhabitants  unless  the  legislative  power  agrees  upon  more  radical  measures. 

First.  We  believe  that  the  Chinese  should  not  be  permitted  to  bid  upon  public  con- 
tracts or  services  of  any  description,  and  especially  those  of  local  administration,  to 
wit,  the  collection  of  taxes  on  and  rearrangement  of  weights  and  measures,  public 
markets,  street  cleaning  and  slaughterhouses,  fords  and  bridges,  taxes  on  horses  and 
carriages,  etc.  These  antiquated  taxes  and  ill-considered  bases  for  taxes  have  by 
their  very  existence  a great  effect  upon  trade,  and  the  Chinese,  perfectly  organized 
for  the  purposes  of  investment,  produce  conditions  in  these  matters  which  completely 
alter  their  nature  and  distort  them  for  the  sake  of  increasing  their  own  profits,  to  gen- 
eral disadvantage.  Furthermore,  it  is  a fact  that  the  Chinese  are  making  their  rela- 
tions more  intimate  with  the  subaltern  members  of  the  administration  and  munici- 
palities, who  are  generally  susceptible  to  the  corrupt  means  which  constitutes  the 
greatest  reliance  of  the  Chinese  to  overcome  obstacles  in  the  way  of  their  interests. 

Second.  The  employment  of  Chinese  laborers  upon  public  works,  which  has  never 
been  necessary,  should  be  absolutely  prohibited,  notwithstanding  the  convenience 
which  results  in  keeping  the  pay  rolls,  the  Chinese  always  receiving  their  pay  through 
a foreman  instead  of  being  paid  man  by  man  according  to  the  list,  as  is  the  custom 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


437 


with  the  natives.  In  this  way  the  lower  classes  are  defrauded  of  their  livelihood,  and 
the  small  industries  which  they  maintain  are  ruined.  The  employment  of  Chinese 
laborers  causes  the  head  men  of  that  race  to  bring  coolies  into  the  country  in  great 
numbers.  They  make  contracts  with  these  coolies  in  China,  from  which  they  derive 
great  profits,  and  afterwards  the  coolies  remain  in  the  country,  which  is  not  desirable 
or  advantageous  in  any  way,  as  the  Chinaman  does  not  devote  himself  to  agriculture, 
nor  does  he  bring  here  the  industries  of  his  own  country. 

Third.  It  is  very  necessary  to  reform,  as  soon  as  possible,  the  organization  of  the 
Chinese  population  in  the  capital,  which  to-day  places  forty  or  fifty  thousand  men 
under  the  orders  of  the  so-called  petty  governor  of  the  Chinese,  which  special  admin- 
istrative office  has  no  right  to  exist.  In  his  place  headmen  could  he  appointed,  as 
the  natives  have,  or  perhaps  it  would  be  better  to  have  lieutenants  of  wards,  so  that 
in  each  street  or  ward  in  which  25  or  more  Chinese  live  there  should  be  someone 
responsible  for  their  register  and  in  charge  of  the  collection  of  their  personal  taxes. 
The  same  could  be  done  in  each  town  to  keep  account  of  deaths  and  births,  thus 
leaving  to  the  administration  only  the  direct  dealings  with  those  enrolled  in  the  lists 
of  taxpayers  under  industrial  patents.  These  lieutenants  should  be  subordinate  to 
the  governmental  authorities  in  the  town. 

Furthermore,  a commissioner  of  Chinese  should  be  created  in  charge  of  the  general 
register,  and  chief  of  all  the  lieutenants  or  municipal  chiefs  of  the  Chinese.  This 
commissioner  should  be  directly  and  immediately  responsible  to  the  governor-general 
to  keep  him  informed  of  the  movements  of  these  immigrants  and  to  give  to  the 
public  in  the  Gazette  statistics  of  the  number  of  Chinese  in  the  capital  and  in  the 
provinces. 

Fourth.  Every  Chinese  who  comes  to  the  country  should,  as  well  as  anyone  who 
leaves  the  country,  pay  one  or  two  dollars  for  a special  fund  to  be  kept  in  the  Chi- 
nese department,  and  a subtax  of  10  or  more  per  centshould  be  charged  all  taxpayers 
who  hold  industrial  patents  for  the  same  purpose.  The  object  of  this  fund  should 
be  to  pay  for  [daces  in  the  hospital  for  Chinese  who  are  paupers  or  sick,  of  which 
there  are  always  70  or  80  in  said  establishment  ; to  procure  aid  and  return  passage  to 
their  country  for  poor  and  vagabond  Chinese,  and  for  those  who  have  completed 
terms  of  sentences  in  penal  establishments,  and  to  indemnify  the  treasury  for  the 
taxes  of  insolvent  Chinese  taxpayers.  The  condition  of  this  special  fund  should  be 
published  weekly  in  the  Gazette. 

If  these  measures  are  not  adopted,  Chinese  maybe  required,  for  the  same  purpose, 
to  furnish  a resident  bondsman  before  he  is  allowed  permission  to  remain  and  reside 
in  the  country,  as  is  done  with  Spaniards  and  foreigners. 

Fifth.  The  Chinese  must  be  required,  with  the  due  strictness  and  perseverance 
which  is  so  difficult  to  maintain  here,  to  observe  general  rules  of  good  public  order 
and  hygiene  in  their  houses  in  which  neither  the  accumulation  of  people  nor  the  filth 
which  exists  should  be  permitted,  and  to  remove  from  the  populous  places  the  unde- 
sirable, perilous,  and  unhealthy  industries  to  which  many  of  them  devote  themselves. 
They  should  be  made  responsible  to  the  owners  of  houses,  not  only  for  the  crowding 
together  of  the  people,  but  for  the  lack  of  whitewash  on  the  walls  and  for  other  care 
which  neutralizes  the  evil  effect  of  Chinese  shiftlessness  which  is  so  perilous  to  pub- 
lic health.  In  addition  to  these  permanent  regulating  measures  and  whatever  pro- 
visional measures  may  be  adopted,  the  supreme  government  might  dictate  other 
measures  more  or  less  radical  to  counteract  the  attraction  which  this  country  has  for 
the  Chinese.  This  attraction  will  grow  from  day  to  day,  since  Australia  and  Califor- 
nia shut  them  out. 

With  slight  differences  this  has  been  the  opinion  of  the  most  advanced 
classes  concerning  the  Chinese  in  the  Philippines,  to  maintain  the 
status  quo  of  Chinese  immigration,  and  by  means  of  this  immigration 
to  increase  the  income  of  the  treasury  even  at  the  cost  of  converting 
the  archipelago  into  a Chinese  colony  with  the  Spanish  Hag. 

II. 

THEIR  CUSTOMS — IMPORTANCE  OF  THEIR  COMMERCE  IN  THE  PHILIP- 
PINES— THEIR  RECIPROCAL  PROTECTION. 

The  Chinese  have  never  had  any  theoretical,  much  less  practical, 
idea  of  colonization,  and  for  that  reason  when  they  emigrate  to  foreign 
countries  to  gain  a livelihood  they  only  seek  their  own  gain,  without 
considering  that  it  is  sensible  and  necessary  to  protect,  even  indirectly, 


438 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


the  commerce  and  industries  of  the  country  which  is  their  second 
home. 

If  the  Chinese  had  been  inspired  by  this  elementary  principle  of 
political  economy,  perhaps  China  might  be  to-day  one  of  the  most 
powerful  nations  of  the  world,  and  by  its  excessively  active  commer- 
cial spirit  and  its  never-failing  unity  of  purpose  it  might  have  absorbed 
some  of  the  colonies  of  the  European  powers. 

The  Chinese  have  very  few  necessities,  and  endure  with  patience 
any  insult  or  persecution  whatever  if  they  can  turn  it  to  any  use  or 
can  escape  thereby  any  greater  harm. 

They  have  a great  love  for  their  native  land,  where  they  hope  to 
live  when  they  have  obtained  their  fortune,  that  they  may  not  be 
separated  from  the  remains  of  their  ancestors. 

This  sentiment  of  remembrance  and  veneration  for  their  dead  ances- 
tors is  so  deep  seated  that  many  of  the  steamers  of  the  lines  of  the 
Pacific  Ocean  carry  cases  of  Chinese  who  have  died  in  America  to 
China,  the  bodies  having  been  specially  prepared. 

It  is  seldom  that  one  is  found  who  does  not  know  how  to  read  and 
write,  and  the  facility  with  which  they  learn  to  speak  the  language  of 
the  country  to  which  they  emigrate  is  worthy  of  note.  This  shows 
that  they  were  able  to  become  what  they  wished  in  the  Philippines, 
for  they  counted  upon  their  own  ability  and  the  protection  of  their 
countrymen,  and  also  upon  the  well-proven  forbearance  of  the  Spanish 
administration. 

Although  the  Chinese  are  fond  of  their  native  land,  this  has  not  been 
an  obstacle  to  some  of  them  forming  homes  here,  although  those  who 
have  been  married  here  according  to  the  forms  of  the  Catholic  Church 
have  naturally  been  obliged  to  first  become  Christians. 

The  Chinese  who  have  made  the  Philippines  their  home  have  been 
considerate  of  their  new  families,  for  in  addition  to  being  model  hus- 
bands and  fathers  they  have  in  all  circumstances  of  life  known  howto 
keep  their  words  like  gentlemen  in  regard  to  what  they  promised 
before  marriage. 

A Chinese  had  two  principal  motives  for  entering  the  Catholic 
Church:  That  of  possessing  a godfather  in  baptism,  who  became  a sort 
of  protector  for  him;  and  also  marriage  with  the  woman  whom  he 
loved  and  who  would  refuse  to  live  with  him  without  the  guarantee  of 
Christian  marriage. 

Becoming  a Christian  might  be  considered  a luxury  with  the  Chi- 
nese, for  in  order  to  do  so  it  is  necessary  for  the  Chinese  to  have  a 
considerable  fortune  in  order  to  give  his  godfather,  as  is  the  custom, 
handsome  presents,  and  to  pay  the  dues  of  the  church,  and  afterwards 
to  pay  the  expenses  of  his  house  in  his  new  condition. 

Once  a Christian  the  Chinese  found  himself  in  favorable  circum- 
stances, on  account  of  the  influence  of  his  godfather,  who  was  always 
chosen  from  among  the  Spaniards  of  most  prestige  and  best  position  in 
the  country.  To  be  a Christian  was  enough  to  insure  that  his  business 
would  progress  with  greater  security. 

All  the  Chinese  who  have  obtained  importance  in  the  Philippines 
have  been  Christians;  their  baptism  was  their  initiation  into  power. 

Those  already  established  in  the  country  with  families  take  no  part, 
although  they  are  Christians,  in  the  prayers  and  devotion  of  their 
wives  and  children,  although  they  respect  their  customs  with  that 
tolerance  which  is  usually  met  with  in  individuals  of  the  highest 
education. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


439 

Furthermore,  the  Chinese  is  very  superstitious,  and  although  he 
invokes  his  divinities  whom  he  worships  even  when  he  has  become  a 
Christian,  allot  them,  with  very  few  exceptions,  have  a certain  respect 
for  the  Virgin  of  Antipolo,  and  many  of  them  join  in  pilgrimages  to 
her  shrine  and  to  the  shrine  of  the  Virgin  of  Guadalupe  for  the  pur- 
pose of  dedicating  candles  to  them  in  these  Christian  festivals.  There 
is  another  curious  thing:  That  in  a certain  place  in  the  suburbs  there 
were  many  Chinese,  not  Christians,  who  maintained  in  turn  the  illu- 
mination of  a Catholic  image  because,  according  to  tradition,  a Chinese 
who  maintained  this  light  once  won  the  capital  prize  in  the  Philippine 
lottery. 

The  Chinese  engage  in  a variety  of  industries  and  mercantile  pur- 
suits in  the  Philippines,  and  in  1830  the  administration  classified  them 
as  follows:  (1)  Wholesale  merchants;  (2)  retail  merchants  with  dry 
goods  shops;  silk  merchants,  shoemakers,  druggists,  ink  manufactur- 
ers, soapmakers,  barbers,  blacksmiths,  carpenters,  and  dealers  in 
notions;  (3)  water  carriers,  boatmen,  cooks,  and  dealers  in  firewood; 
(4)  workmen  and  servants  of  all  those  comprised  in  the  three  preced- 
ing classes.  Those  of  the  first  class  paid  a tax  of  $10  a month;  those 
of  the  second,  $4;  those  of  the  third,  $2,  and  those  of  the  fourth,  $1. 

It  requires  but  little  study  of  this  classification  to  perceive  one  of 
the  many  stupidities  committed  by  the  administration.  That  of  mak- 
ing a carpenter,  for  example,  pay  the  same  as  a barber,  when  the 
former  makes  some  hundreds  of  dollars  more  than  the  latter. 

The  Chinese  are  very  expert  in  the  business  of  money  changing, 
especially  as  the  Spanish  administration  gave  them  an  opportunity  of 
speculating  in  the  different  sorts  of  coin  in  circulation.  A profit  of  1 
per  cent  was  sufficient  inducement  for  a Chinese  to  devote  all  his  energy 
to  this  business,  and  the  Spaniards  unjustly  accused  them  of  being 
responsible  for  the  monetary  crisis  which  existed  here  from  1855  to 
1861  and  in  the  year  1876.  The  Spanish  administration  was  to  blame 
for  these  crises. 

The  business  of  trading  in  rice  is  very  profitable  to  the  Chinese  and 
they  are  especially  adapted  to  it,  both  in  its  importation  and  in  the 
coastwise  trade  and  in  dealing  in  it  at  retail. 

The}’  have  the  same  skill  in  classifying  foreign  rice,  procuring  a large 
portion  of  the  rice  of  a class  which  is  common  in  Saigon.  They  whiten 
it  and  sort  the  grain,  mix  it  with  superior  classes,  and  sell  it.  thus 
making  good  profit. 

They  buy  up  hemp  in  the  towns  which  produce  it  with  great  dili- 
gence, especially  in  Albay,  Leyte,  Cebu,  Camiguin,  Misamis,  Marin- 
duque,  etc.,  and  nearly  always  get  the  better  of  other  buyers  who  are 
not  Chinese,  for  the  Chinese  are  in  the  habit  of  exploiting  the  ground 
where  hemp  is  grown  (lates),  both  advancing  money  to  the  producers 
of  this  fiber  and  furnishing  them  with  necessary  articles,  taking  a lien 
on  the  future  crops. 

Indigo,  sugar,  coffee,  tobacco,  dyewood,  mother-of-pearl,  tortoise 
shell,  shellac,  and  elemi  gum  are  other  products  of  the  country  from 
which  the  Chinese  derive  profits  by  collecting  them  and  by  the  rapidity 
with  which  they  sell  them. 

As  if  these  industrial  and  commercial  advantages  which  they  enjoyed 
were  not  sufficient,  the  Spanish  administration  gave  them  the  right  to 
farm  out  the  provincial  taxes  and  other  services  offered  for  public  bid- 
ding belonging  to  the  State  under  the  former  sovereignty,  such  as 


440 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


public  markets,  slaughterhouse  privileges,  fords,  the  inspection  of 
weights  and  measures,  taxes  on  cart  sand  horses,  cockpits,  places  for 
smoking  opium,  etc. 

What  we  have  said  is  enough  to  show  that  the  Chinese  took  good 
advantage  of  the  commercial  and  industrial  privileges  and  preroga- 
tives, which  the  fact  that  they  were  born  in  China  and  the  Spanish 
dominion  afforded  them,  and  the  concessions  granted  them  by  the  lat- 
ter appear  all  the  more  censurable  when  we  consider  the  treaty  which 
Spain  made  with  China  October  10,  1864,  signed  in  Tientsin. 

The  treaty,  referring  to  Chinese  immigration,  reads  as  follows: 

Art.  47.  Chinese  merchant  vessels,  without  limitation  as  to  their  number,  shall 
have  the  right  to  go  to  the  Philippines  and  to  do  business  with  them,  and  shall  be 
treated  as  those  of  the  most-favored  nations.  If  Spain  should  later  grant  other 
advantages  to  the  merchants  of  any  other  nation,  Chinese  traders  shall  also  enjoy 
them  as  traders  of  the  most-favored  nation. 

Is  there  anything  in  this  article  which  explains,  in  the  slightest 
degree,  the  concessions  which  were  granted  here  to  Chinese  immigrants 
who  came  to  the  Philippines  bv  thousands,  and  in  ships  which  were 
not  Chinese  ships? 

We  shall  now  make  a short  study  of  the  importance  of  Chinese 
commerce  in  the  Philippines,  especially  in  some  of  the  richest  provinces. 

In  Isabela  and  Cagayan,  a short  time  before  the  governmental 
tobacco  monopoly  was  abolished,  there  were  very  few  Chinese,  and 
their  action  in  business  was  insignificant,  and  the  Spanish  Government 
paid  the  owners  of  the  tobacco  crops  punctually. 

Nevertheless,  a time  came  in  which  the  Spanish  administration  was 
behind  in  nearly  all  of  its  payments — principally  in  the  most  impor- 
tant ones — and  the  planters  of  these  provinces  were  among  the  many 
victims  of  these  delays. 

The  Chinese  then  took  advantage  of  the  precarious  situation  by  mak- 
ing usurious  loans  to  those  who  lacked  the  means  of  realizing  on  their 
crops,  thus  securing  the  business  of  those  fertile  provinces,  both  by 
means  of  the  capital  which  they  advanced,  and  in  the  handling  and 
monopoly  of  tobacco. 

Their  commercial  supremacy  reached  such  a point  that  once  they  had 
monopolized  tobacco,  almost  every  leaf  which  came  to  Manila  from 
Cagayan  and  Isabela  was  their  property,  and  they  stored  it  in  ware- 
houses and  sold  it  later  to  the  factories  already  established  in  the 
capital  at  a good  profit. 

They  were  not  contented  with  the  sale  of  tobacco  in  the  leaf  alone, 
but  they  also  established  factories  to  manufacture  it,  thus  causing 
other  factories  which  had  been  in  operation  to  close  up  by  the  ruinous 
competition  which  the  Chinese  raised  against  them. 

As  they  had  monopolized  tobacco  in  the  leaf,  they  raised  the  price 
of  that  commodity  to  a fabulous  height,  thus  insuring  the  ruin  of  the 
other  manufacturers,  their  commercial  adversaries. 

Nevertheless,  it  must  be  mentioned  that  cigars  made  by  Chinese 
factories  soon  lost  credit  in  foreign  markets  through  the  poor  work- 
manship and  the  detestable  manner  in  which  the}r  mixed  the  different 
classes  of  leaves. 

The  Chinese  were  not  discouraged  by  this,  and  although  the  sales  of 
the  products  of  their  factories  did  not  gain  them  the  profits  which  they 
expected,  they  continued  acquiring  lands  in  the  provinces  mentioned, 
both  by  loaning  on  mortgages  and  by  making  contracts  of  sale  in 
advance. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


441 


Ii)  the  provinces  of  llocos  and  Pangasinan  the  Chinese,  by  their  com- 
mercial influence,  succeeded  in  paralyzing  to  a certain  extent  the  prog- 
ress which  was  noticeable  some  years  before  in  the  production  of  said 
provinces. 

All  the  interior  trade  of  Camarines  Sur  is  monopolized  by  them,  and 
both  that  province  and  llocos  Sur  seem,  for  this  reason,  to  be  stationary 
as  regards  the  ordinary  march  of  commerce  and  industry. 

In  Batangas  the  Chinese  have  not  been  able  to  overcome  the  natives 
in  this  unequal  struggle  for  life,  for  although  the  inhabitants  of  Batan- 
gas  were  beaten  in  the  trade  of  the  interior  they  did  not  lose  heart  on 
this  account,  and  devoted  themselves  with  great  diligence  to  the  pro- 
duction of  coffee  and  sugar,  and  to  the  breeding  of  beef  cattle  and 
swine,  and  the  Chinese  were  not  able  to  outdo  them. 

In  Albay,  also,  the  Chinese  extended  their  business,  especially  in 
hemp,  and  were  the  cause,  as  some  merchants  assert,  of  the  discredit 
which  that  valuable  fiber  suffered  from  in  the  markets  of  America  and 
Europe  by  the  bad  faith  with  which  they  separated  the  different  classes 
for  which  there  was  a demand  in  the  foreign  markets. 

Since  ISfiO  the  Chinese  have  been  prosperous  in  Iloilo  and  the  island 
of  Negros,  which  islands  have  always  been  of  great  commercial  and 
agricultural  importance,  even  before  the  Chinese  came  there. 

In  Jolo,  Cottabato,  and  Zamboanga  the  Chinese  have  also  done 
business,  both  in  trading  with  the  natives  of  said  islands  and  with  the 
Philippine  and  Spanish  troops  in  garrison  there,  and  in  dealing  with 
the  Moros  in  shells,  pearls,  and  other  valuable  products. 

The  town  of  Taal  merits  especial  mention,  for  the  natives  there 
have  not  allowed  the  Chinese  to  establish  themselves  in  that  town,  in 
spite  of  their  vigorous  persistence. 

The  Chinese  were  assassinated  there  and  the  criminals  were  never 
detected,  for  which  reason  the  Chinese  decided  not  to  oppose  the 
determination  of  the  people  of  Taal,  who  carry  on  a comparatively 
prosperous  commercial  life  without  necessity  for  foreigners  to  trade 
in  the  products. 

We  can  now  judge  how  it  is  that  the  Chinese  were  always  successful 
in  the  commercial  competition  which  they  raised  in  the  Philippines. 

To  put  it  in  one  word,  they  were  successful  because  there  exists 
among  them  a cooperative  protection  incapable  of  being  destroyed 
either  by  law  or  by  any  measures  which  may  be  taken  to  counteract  it. 

In  fact,  they  succeed  everywhere  in  obtaining  a monopoly  of  whole- 
sale and  retail  trade,  becoming  by  the  unity  of  purpose  which  they 
possess  the  proprietors  of  mechanic  arts  and  trades  in  the  country. 
They  lend  each  other  cooperative  aid  and  all  work  together  for  the 
same  end,  thus  forming  a vast  commercial  society  with  which  it  is 
impossible  for  other  merchants  who  work  separately  to  compete. 

Some  foreign  business  houses  established  in  Manila  import  dry 
goods  from  Europe  and  turn  them  over  for  prompt  and  certain  sale  to 
a small  number  of  Chinese  merchants,  in  whose  power  to  collect  the 
value  of  the  merchandise  they  have  confidence. 

These  merchants  divide  the  articles  received  among  the  shops  of  their 
countrymen  and  also  send  quantities  of  the  goods  to  their  principal 
agents  in  the  provinces,  who  in  turn  distribute  them  among  the  differ- 
ent Chinese  who  have  open  shops  in  the  towns  and  provincial  capitals. 

They  previously  mark  the  prices  on  the  articles  and  the  shopkeepers 
are  not  allowed  to  reduce  them  under  any  pretext. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


U2 

Under  this  system  the  result  is  that  although  there  may  be  many 
Chinese  establishments  in  one  town,  the  same  article  exists  or  may  be 
secured  in  all  of  them,  and  the  price  is  uniform  in  high  and  low  alike 
and  only  follows  a general  rule,  whether  the  article  is  plenty  or  scarce 
in  the  place. 

When  a Chinese  immigrant  lands  in  Manila  he  comes  under  the 
management  of  .a  headman,  who  lends  him  §30  or  more  and  to  whom 
the  future  merchant  is  directly  responsible. 

He  then  begins  to  work  in  the  most  laborious  and  humble  employ- 
ment, but  in  spite  of  his  small  compensation  he  is  able,  by  force  of 
self-denial,  to  saye  a quantity  sufficient  to  free  him  from  the  power  of 
the  headman,  to  whom  he  returns  the  quantity  advanced  to  him. 
From  that  time  on  he  works  on  his  own  account,  protecting  and  being 
protected  by  his  countrymen,  until  he  accumulates  sufficient  capital  to 
return  to  his  country  and  there  enjoy  his  savings  for  the  rest  of  his 
life. 

The  principle  of  political  economy  is  well  known  which  lays  down 
the  rule  that  in  order  for  a country  to  obtain  advantages  from  immi- 
gration the  immigrants  should  bring  in  capital,  new  industries,  or 
superior  knowledge  to  perfect  industries  already  in  existence,  or  at 
least  that  said  immigrants  should  apply  their  energies  to  pursuits  pro- 
ductive of  gain,  not  only  to  the  immigrants  themselves,  but  to  society 
in  general  in  the  country  in  which  they  have  established  themselves, 
or  that  they  finally  become  assimilated  with  the  people  of  the  country, 
thus  giving,  although  indirectly,  stimulus  to  certain  professions  and 
industries,  whose  progress  is  a consequence  of  the  increase  of  the 
number  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  town.  Chinese,  on  coming  to  the 
Philippines,  do  not  comply  with  any  of  the  conditions  of  this  well- 
known  principle  of  political  economy,  which  are  desirable  points  to  be 
looked  for  in  immigrants. 

Why,  then,  should  they  be  allowed  to  immigrate  in  such  groat  num- 
bers. when  their  presence  in  the  Philippines  is  not  a guaranty  of  pros- 
perity and  progress  for  tin*  rest  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  archipelago? 

III. 

STATISTICS. 

According  to  the  census  which  was  published  in  1876,  there  were 
30,797  Chinese  in  this  archipelago.  In  ten  years  this  number  grew  to 
99,15!?,  as  the  following  table  shows: 

Fluctuation  in  Chinese  immigration,  according  to  the  office  Of  the  captain  of  the  jiort,  from 

1870  to  1886. 


Register. 

Entries. 

Depar- 

tures. 

Increase. 

1875 

30, 797 
2,066 
3,462 
7, 569 
7,574 
5,412 
4,208 
5,292 
11,621 
10, 415 
7,122 
3,614 

1870 

(1, 410 
7, 582 
11,907 
10,352 
8,994 
9,  111 
9,903 
16,809 
1 1,881 
11,893 
5,513 

4,344 
4,120 
4,338 
2,  778 
3,582 
5,203 
4,611 
5,188 
4,466 
4,771 
1,899 

1877 

1878 

1879 

1880 

1881 

1882 

1883 

1884 

1885 

1880  (May  23) 

99,152 

REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


443 


Statisticians  attribute  this  increase  in  immigration  to  the  facilities 
for  doing  business  in  the  Philippines  afforded  the  Chinese  since  tobacco 
has  ceased  to  be  a government  monopoly.  The  monopolization  of 
tobacco,  according  to  some  authorities,  has  been  a source  of  many 
thousands  of  dollars  clear  profit  to  them.  In  1886,  both  in  Manila  and 
in  the  most  populous  suburbs,  there  was  a great  decrease  in  the  native 
population,  which  was  attributed  to  the  commercial  and  industrial 
supremacy  of  the  Chinese,  who  by  monopolizing  business  made  the 
struggle  for  existence  more  difficult  for  the  lower  class  and  forced 
them  to  go  to  neighboring  provinces  to  gain  a livelihood. 

The  following  table  shows  how  the  Chinese  population  was  distrib- 
uted in  the  archipelago  in  the  year  1886,  and  how  they  were  classified 
according  to  their  occupations: 


Number 

of 

Chinese. 

Contributors  of  industrial  tax. 

Provinces. 

First 

class 

(3100). 

Second 

class 

(SCO). 

Third 

class 

(330). 

Fourth 

class 

(312). 

18 

8 

Albay  

1,329 

120 

53 

313 

90 

22 

Antique 

13 

5 

1 

Batalin 

107 

14 

Batangas 

171 

1 

49 

19 

109 

Bulacan 

1,072 

GO 

19 

37 

97 

6 

9 

2 

100 

37 

4 

5 

Cagayan 

563 

21 

26 

1 

10 

28 

87 

Cebu 

983 

22 

96 

17 

Capiz 

151 

32 

5 

19 

153 

13 

i 

3 

824 

182 

8 

113 

86 

13 

43 

9 

i 

29 

231 

n 

19 

22 

I locos  Sur 

85 

8 

17 

15 

Iloilo 

1,154 

501 

18 

72 

138 

26 

39 

40 

26 

ii 

Laguna T 

717 

•> 

57 

24 

1,316 

47 

6 

198 

215 

6 

13 

4 

3 

21 

347 

1 

49 

1 

52 

51,348 

194 

15 

410 

871 

10 

17 

40 

12 

138 

40 

42 

2 

1.317 

538 

48 

46 

138 

i 

71 

9 

27 

17 

625 

102 

10 

117 

400 

44 

13 

92 

86 

i 

14 

3 

112 

10 

3 

27 

500 

75 

45 

29 

According  to  these  figures  the  total  number  of  Chinese  was  56,504, 
while  according  to  the  statistics  taken  in  the  office  of  the  captain  of 
the  port  there  were  99,152.  This  great  difference  brings  out  two  facts: 
First,  the  great  difficulty  which  this  administration  encountered,  on 
account  of  bribery,  in  making  an  exact  census  of  the  Chinese  in  order 
to  collect  their  tributes  and  contributions.  Second,  the  considerable 
losses  which  the  treasury  sustained  bv  not  collecting  these  deficits. 

The  following  shows  the  number  of  Filipinos  resident  in  Manila  and 


444 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


its  suburbs  during  the  years  1855  and  1876,  according  to  the  registers 
furnished  by  the  parishers: 


Census:  Mestizosand  natives. 

Totals. 

Census:  Mestizosand  natives. 

Totals. 

1855. 

1876. 

1855. 

1876. 

Binondo 

31.455 
10, 439 
5,079 
G,  4:10 
0,941 

23,467 

11,500 

0,480 

3,943 

7.090 

30,271 

7,551 

10,983 

5,823 

21,058 
7,051 
17.  U8 
4,020 

Santa  Cruz 

Quiapo 

San  Miguel 

Malate  and  Pineda 

Sampalog 

The  decrease  in  the  number  of  souls  is  notable,  especially  in  Tondo 
and  Binondo,  where  the  Chinese  have  preferred  to  establish  themselves 
and  their  commerce  and  industry.  This  decrease  calls  attention  to  the 
fact  that,  according  to  other  statistics,  in  the  same  length  of  time  the 
number  of  inhabitants  in  other  towns  has  been  doubled,  especially  in 
the  provinces  of  Luzon  itself. 

I also  add  that  this  decrease  of  the  population  is  not  noticeable  in 
the  registers  of  Iloilo,  Batangas,  and  other  provinces  where  there  are 
fewer  Chinese  established  and  where  their  commercial  operations  are 
comparatively  less  extensive. 

In  every  society  there  is  an  unfailing  balance  established  between 
services  and  remuneration  by  the  economic  laws  of  supply  and  demand 
as  well  as  by  professional  necessities. 

The  harmonious  application  of  this  balance  brings  about  public  order 
and  general  prosperity.  The  deficiency  or  excess  in  any  of  the  num- 
ber of  either  employers  or  employees  disturbs  this  balance,  which, 
under  proper  conditions,  makes  the  social  edifice  symmetrical. 

In  a people  like  the  Filipino  people,  whose  wholesale  business  is 
almost  entirely  in  the  hands  of  the  Chinese,  one  can  not  hope  for  the 
creation  of  small  capitals,  which,  being  added  to  by  labor  and  economy, 
serve  as  a means  of  improving  city  property,  and  for  the  extension  of 
agriculture,  and  many  for  useful  undertakings  which  are  not  known 
in  the  Philippines  as  yet  and  which  undoubtedly  will  never  be  known 
through  steps  taken  by  the  Chinese  capitalists. 

Those  who  devote  themselves  to  retail  business  are,  in  all  countries 
of  the  world,  those  who  are  stockholders  in  small  enterprises  which 
promise  profits  to  small  capitals  when  associated,  and  here  this  class  of 
merchants  is  almost  entirely  Chinese,  and  consequently  hostile  to  the 
most  useful  projects  for  the  material  progress  and  general  improve- 
ment of  these  islands. 

The  Chinese  are  one  of  the  principal  causes  of  the  commercial  and 
industrial  backwardness  of  the  archipelago.  It  is  impossible  here,  on 
account  of  the  competition  which  they  make,  to  attain  a position  in  the 
middle  class  of  society.  This  class  is  the  protector  and  promoter  of 
great  enterprises  which  do  not  promise  immediate  dividends  and  which 
must  be  perfected  by  means  of  shares  which  represent  a great  capital, 
that  is  to  say,  by  the  collection  of  the  funds  of  many  contributors. 

IV. 

CONCLUSIONS. 

After  having  read  what  we  have  set  forth  in  reference  to  what  was 
formerly  called  “the  Chinese  problem,”  the  following  conclusions, 
briefly,  may  be  deduced:  (1)  The  Chinese  were  protected  here  with 
undue  liberality  by  the  Spanish  Government  to  the  prejudice  of  Spain 
herself  and  of  the  Philippines;  (2)  furthermore,  the  losses  which  the 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


415 


Philippines  suffer  arc  considerable,  because  it  is  the  custom  of  the 
Chinese  to  consume,  as  far  as  the  necessaries  of  life  are  concerned, 
the  food,  clothing,  and  other  articles  which  they  import  from  their 
own  country  for  this  purpose. 

The  first  of  these  conclusions  is  now  a matter  of  history,  for  the 
American  Government,  on  taking  the  place  of  the  Spanish  Govern- 
ment here,  will  not  allow  the  Chinese  or  their  attorneys  to  bid  upon 
contracts  with  the  State,  nor  will  it  tolerate  frauds  upon  the  adminis- 
tration, which  the  Chinese  commit  by  concealing  their  industries  or 
their  numbers.  The  second  conclusion  which  refers  to  the  losses 
which  the  country  suffers  by  the  spirit  of  monopoly  of  the  Chinese, 
which  is  shown  by  their  use  of  imported  articles  from  their  own  nation, 
must  also  be  taken  into  account,  and  these  losses  may  be  counteracted 
by  the  following  means:  (1)  To  make  all  articles  coming  from  China, 
which  are  designed  for  the  individual  consumption  of  these  Asiatics, 
such  as  fresh  or  preserved  provisions,  fruit,  clothing,  shoes,  and  others, 
pa}’  heavy  duties  in  the  custom-house.  (2)  To  raise  the  customs  duty  on 
opium  to  a very  high  rate,  in  order  that  the  smoker  of  this  extract  may 
pay  the  country  indirectly  for  the  use  of  it.  Opium  smokers  will  be 
done  away  with  in  this  manner.  (3)  To  prevent  the  Chinese  from 
engaging  in  agriculture,  which  the  Spanish  desired  them  to  do,  for 
they  would  not  perceive  that  apart  from  the  cultivation  of  the  soil  it 
is  the  surest  guaranty  of  the  future  of  the  Philippines,  since  the  sov- 
ereignty of  Spain  and  the  absorption  of  this  colony  by  the  friars  has 
ceased  to  exist.  Horticulture  and  floriculture  alone  should  be  allowed 
to  the  Chinese. 

Better  still,  obstacles  should  be  put  in  the  way  of  the  Chinese  to 
prevent  their  entering  into  agricultural  pursuits.  Such  pursuits  are 
beneficial  in  a high  degree.  They  develop  sentiment  of  ownership, 
economy,  and  of  individual  liberty.  They  are  beneficial  to  health  and 
constitute  a firm  basis  for  public  wealth. 

The  Filipinos  should  devote  themselves  to  these  pursuits,  and  on  the 
other  hand  should  leave  the  work  of  the  cities — that  of  workmen  in  the 
industries,  of  doers  of  odd  jobs,  of  laborers  of  all  sorts  in  occupations 
which  impair  health  and  strength — to  the  Chinese;  thus  it  would  be, 
so  to  speak,  a disgrace  for  those  who  found  it  necessary  to  gain  a liv- 
ing in  this  manner,  for  such  persons  are  like  human  machines. 

This  sort  of  occupation  being  left  to  the  Chinese,  and  the  Filipinos 
engaging  in  the  work  of  the  fields,  industry  and  agriculture  would 
progress  rapidly,  and  social  crises,  which  are  the  more  terrible  in  pro- 
portion as  the  number  of  discontented  and  unoccupied  workmen  is 
greater,  would  be  avoided. 

We  have  shown  the  disadvantages  which  the  Chinese  question  pre- 
sents, and  the  way  to  avoid  them.  Before  concluding  this  memoran- 
dum we  ought  to  point  out  two  necessities  of  the  present  historical 
period,  which  are  worthy  of  consideration: 

First.  Chinese  immigration  to-day  fills  a need  in  the  Philippines. 

Second.  Nevertheless,  it  is  absolutely  necessary  to  limit  this  immi- 
gration, and  a plan  should  be  made  for  this  purpose  from  the  data 
given  by  statistics  and  a careful  consideration  of  supply  and  demand 
in  the  labor  market.  It  is  also  urgently  necessary  to  establish  a sys- 
tem to  make  personal  identification  of  the  Chinese  possible,  for  which 
purpose  nothing  appears  as  efficacious  as  the  anthropological  method 
employed  in  Paris  by  M.  Bertilon,  which  has  been  adopted  by  the 
police  everywhere. 


Exhibit  V. 


MEMORANDUM  ON  THE  PHILIPPINES. 


These  islands,  large  and  small,  number,  if  we  take  in  the  Sulu  Archi- 
pelago and  Paragua,  over  a thousand,  the  largest  and  most  important 
being  Luzon.  Mindoro,  Panay,  Negros,  Cebu,  Leyte,  Samar,  and  Min- 
danao, with  a population  variously  estimated  at  eight  to  nine  millions, 
not  including  the  unsubdued  semisavages  that  inhabit  the  interior  of 
almost  all  of  them,  particularly  Luzon,  Mindoro,  and  Mindanao,  of 
which  no  census  has  been  possible,  as  they  acknowledge  no  civilized 
rule,  paying  no  tribute  to  anyone. 

The  first  European  of  whom  there  is  any  authentic  record  to  land  in 
the  Philippines  was  Magellan,  after  his  celebrated  discovery  of  the 
straits  called  by  his  name.  In  the  spring  of  1521  Magellan  reached 
the  Butuan  River,  north  coast  of  Mindanao,  and  being  Easter  week, 
and  finding  the  natives  very  friendly,  he  celebrated  his  first  mass  on 
the  river  bank,  formally  taking  possession  of  the  islands  for  King 
Charles  of  Spain.  After  this,  he,  accompanied  by  the  chief  of  the 
district,  set  sail  for  Cebu,  where  early  in  April  he  appeared,  but  find- 
ing the  Cebu  men  in  strong  force  to  oppose  his  landing,  the  Butuan 
chief  was  deputed  to  explain  that  Magellan’s  mission  was  peaceable 
and  mainly  seeking  supplies  of  provisions.  The  king  of  Cebu  received 
him  favorably  and  a treaty  was  entered  into  between  them.  Mass  was 
said  in  a hut  on  the  beach,  the  king,  queen,  and  headmen  adopting  the 
Christian  religious  rites,  receiving  baptism,  and  at  the  same  time  swear- 
ing allegiance  to  the  King  of  Spain.  Cebu  was  at  war  with  the  Maetan 
men  just  opposite,  and  Magellan,  who  was  bound  to  the  former,  went 
over  the  strait  to  Maetan,  and  was  mortally  wounded  bv  an  arrow  three 
weeks  afterwards.  From  the  north  entrance  to  Cebu  a monument  is 
visible,  showing  the  spot  where  he  was  supposed  to  have  fallen  and 
was  buried.  His  second  man,  named  Barbosa,  who  succeeded  to  the 
command  of  the  expedition,  did  not  keep  up  the  friendship  very  long, 
and  he  with  over  twenty  of  his  followers,  who  were  invited  by  the 
king  to  a banquet,  were  massacred  in  cold  blood.  The  survivors  con- 
sidered it  prudent  to  leave  the  place,  finding  their  way  home  via  Bor- 
neo and  Mollucas  by  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  arriving  in  Spain  in 
about  three  years  after  date  of  their  departure. 

No  further  attempt  was  made  to  take  the  Philippines  until  late  in 
1561,  when  Legaspi,  with  Ordaneta,  an  Augustinian  monk,  and  five 
other  Spanish  priests  set  sail  from  Mexico  in  November  of  that  year, 
reaching  these  waters  in  the  spring  of  1565,  and  calling  for  provisions 
at  the  islands  of  Camiguin  and  Bohol,  to  the  northwest  of  Mindanao. 
From  there  a small  vessel  of  their  fleet  was  sent  to  Cebu,  where  the 
natives  were  found  to  be  still  hostile  to  Europeans,  one  of  the  crew 
446 


REPORT  OF'  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


447 


being  murdered  while  bathing.  This  notwithstanding,  Lcgaspi  made 
for  Cebu,  making  calls  on  his  way  at  Limasaua,  south  of  Leyte,  and 
in  Dapitan,  west  coast  of  Mindanao.  Here  they  were  amply  supplied 
with  provisions  in  exchange  for  European  goods,  and  the  chieftain 
gave  valuable  information  respecting  Cebu,  which  Legaspi  had  made 
up  his  mind  to  annex  to  Spain  if  possible.  He  landed  there  in  April, 
1565,  occupying  the  town  by  force  and  sacking  it.  They,  however,  had 
their  work  cutout  for  them  in  keeping  off  the  hostile  tribes,  each  with 
its  little  king  (Reyezuelo)  and  occupying  its  own  little  plot  from  time 
immemorial.  Legaspi,  little  by  little,  got  to  be  on  good  terms  with 
the  natives,  who  were  eventually  declared  Spanish  subjects.  The 
pacification  of  Cebu  and  the  surrounding  islands  went  on  apace,  “the 
confidence  of  the  natives  was  assured,  the  king  accepting  Christian 
baptism  and  giving  his  daughter  in  marriage  to  a Spaniard.”  Here- 
upon the  Spaniards,  powerfully  aided  by  their  priests,  began  to  mark 
out  the  most  desirable  plots  of  land  for  residences,  no  doubt  without 
consulting  the  convenience  of  the  holders,  and  at  this  early  stage  of 
their  domination  began  the  very  causes  of  subsequent  and  recent 
rebellions  against  Spanish  rule  in  the  islands. 

Legaspi’s  men  continued  their  conquests, ' taking  Manila  shortly 
after,  naming  it  the  capital  of  the  archipelago,  and  proclaiming  the 
sovereignty  of  the  King  of  Spain  over  all  the  islands.  A conquest  so 
easy,  apparently — the  Europeans  under  Legaspi  were  under  500 — ought 
to  have  given  a more  permanently  peaceable  result,  but  the  capacity 
of  the  priests  in  squeezing  the  poor  native  was  overdone,  bringing 
about  in  the  end  the  present  deplorable  state  of  things.  The  priests 
meantime  accumulating  wealth  rapidly,  became  governors  each  in  his 
province,  practically  of  the  whole  archipelago,  and  they  persuaded  the 
governments  of  Manila  and  Madrid  to  believe  that  their  permanent 
domination  over  the  Indian  constituted  the  only  guaranty  of  the  natives 
remaining  loyal  to  Spain.  Being  all-powerful  in  money  power,  they 
arranged  at  headquarters  that  the  ruling  authorities  should  be  of  their 
way  of  thinking,  a policy  which  they  pursued  successfully  for  over 
th  ree  hundred  years. 

At  length,  however,  their  abuses  became  intolerable,  criminal  in 
fact;  so  much  so  that  their  acts  and  acts  committed  with  their  con- 
nivance have  often  been  too  horrible  to  put  on  paper.  It  is,  then,  lit- 
tle wonder  that  “the  worm  turned,”  and  the  animosity  of  the  natives 
against  the  priests  extended  itself  to  the  Spanish  ruling  power  for 
their  persistence  in  maintaining  the  clergy,  which  did  everything  but 
their  duty  to  the  church,  in  the  country  against  the  strong  remon- 
strances from  all. 

The  power  of  the  priests  is  now  gone  forever,  and  Spanish  rule  fol- 
lows in  its  wake  as  an  impossibility  under  the  present  circumstances. 
From  the  foregoing,  and  owing  to  the  innate  corruption  in  the  admin- 
istration of  the  colony’s  resources,  the  rebellion  of  August,  1896,  in 
progress  for  ten  years  previously,  broke  out,  and  might  have  over- 
turned the  government  then  but  for  weak  leading  and  the  unprepared- 
ness of  the  rebels  to  tight,  as  the  Spanish  in  all  the  islands,  a large 
proportion  of  them  in  Mindanao,  only  numbered  about  3,000,  their 
other  forces  consisting  of  some  14,000  natives  all  told.  A strong  hand 
could,  however,  have  nipped  the  thing  in  the  bud  there  and  then,  but 
the  governor-general,  Blanco,  was  mildly  disposed,  and  with  the  few 
whites  at  his  command,  and  fearing  a rising  among  his  natives,  he 


448 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


looked  upon  discretion  as  the  better  part  of  valor  until  he  should  get 
reenforcements  from  the  mother  country  to  enable  him  to  dispense  with 
the  services  of  the  native  troops,  the  disaffected  among  them  being  in 
the  meantime  disarmed. 

His  policy  was  not  universally  approved,  and  his  opponents  plotted 
at  court  and  got  him  removed.  Shortly  thereafter  his  successor, 
Polavieja,  turned  up  with  some  reinforcements,  but  they  were  raw 
recruits  that  had  to  be  drilled  into  shape,  and  while  they  were  being 
prepared  the  rebels  were  strongly  intrenching  themselves,  chiefly  in 
the  province  of  Cavite.  It  required  energetic  measures  to  dislodge 
them,  but  Polavieja  was  equal  to  the  occasion,  and  after  going  at  them 
vigorously,  a hue  and  cry  of  “cruelty”  was  put  forth  by  the  priests 
and  their  friends,  and  he  in  his  turn  was  recalled. 

Then  followed  the  famous  Primo  de  Rivera,  Avho  arrived  in  April, 
1897.  He  took  effective  measures  to  quell  the  insurrection  and  suc- 
ceeded well,  but  his  finishing  stroke  was  most  unfortunate.  He  got 
tired  of  the  country  and  wished  to  go  to  Spain,  but  with  a feather  in 
his  cap  for  effectually  closing  up  the  rebellion.  He  got  instructions 
from  Madrid  to  adopt,  at  his  discretion,  one  of  two  alternatives,  force, 
or  buying  off  the  rebels  for  laying  down  their  arms.  As  bad  luck 
would  have  it  he  chose  the  latter,  while  the  other  was  quite  feasible, 
the  few  undisbanded  insurgents  having  been  reduced  almost  to  the  last 
extremity,  no  food,  but  few  arms,  and  no  money  to  go  on  with.  A 
more  favorable  opportunity  to  settle  the  thing  for  many  years  couid 
rarely  present  itself;  but,  as  is  “charitably”  surmised,  the  paying  off 
suited  Primo’s  pocket  better  than  the  other  alternative,  and  he  con- 
cluded the  celebrated  “Pacto  de  Biac-na-Bato,”  the  full  text  of  which 
was  kept  a secret,  but  the  contents  oozed  out  gradually,  the  principal 
item  being,  after  the  expulsion  of  the  friars,  a cash  payment  of  8800,000, 
one-half  in  Hongkong  and  the  balance  in  the  Philippines,  upon  the  few 
remaining  rebels  laying  down  their  arms,  the  leaders,  35  to  40  in 
number,  agreeing  to  reside  outside  the  islands  and  not  to  return  with- 
out the  consent  of  the  Philippine  government  in  due  form,  six  months 
from  December,  1897,  being  allowed  to  either  side  to  complete  the 
contract.  The  Government  placed  the  Hongkong  half  of  the  money 
at  Aguinaldo’s  disposal  in  due  course,  but  how  the  other  half  went 
seems  not  to  have  been  satisfactorily  explained;  possibly  Primo  or 
some  tarry -fingered  gentleman  in  his  confidence  could  tell.  Anyhow', 
the  money  is  said  to  have  left  the  treasury,  and  many  of  the  rebels  are 
said  to  have  complained  of  not  getting  their  share.  The  expulsion  of 
the  friars  was  vetoed  from  Madrid  (by  filched  Philippine  money,  of 
course),  and  the  Hongkong  portion  of  the  “bribe”  was  used,  partly 
at  least,  by  the  rebels  to  purchase  fresh  arms  with  which  to  prosecute 
the  rebellion.  A more  unfortunate  result  could  not  well  be  imagined. 

Before  the  six  months  were  up,  each  side  accusing  the  other  of  non- 
fulfillment of  the  compact,  the  rebellion  started  again  with  more  vigor 
than  ever.  Meantime  Don  Primo  was  relieved,  but  ordered  to  await 
the  arrival  of  his  successor,  Signor  Augustin,  and  after  Augustin’s 
arrival  was,  in  view  of  his  having  cried  “peace,  peace,  when  there  was 
no  peace,  ordered  to  await  further  instructions  from  the  Supreme 
Government  before  quitting  the  country.  Don  Primo  telegraphed, 
asking  if  the  order  was  imperative,  but  without  giving  time  fora  reply 
he  embarked  by  the  direct  boat  for  Spain,  leaving  poor  Augustin  in 
the  pickle  of  having  to  cope  with  the  rebels  and  the  declaration  of  war 


REPORT  OK  TIIK  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


449 

by  America  a few  hours  later.  The  man  naturally  considered  himself 
“sold,”  and  Primo  landed  in  Barcelona  “incog,”  his  present  where- 
abouts being  uncertain.  He  is  said  to  have  denied,  at  home,  having 
made  an  alleged  compact  with  the  rebels,  but  that  he  did  make  it  there 
is  no  doubt  whatever,  while  he  funked  facing  the  consequences. 

The  next  big  mistake  made  in  this  rebel  business  was  by  the  Ameri- 
cans in  having  had  anything  whatever  to  do  with  Aguinaldo,  and  the 
mistake  will  at  once  be  apparent  when  it  can  be  demonstrated  as  clear  as 
daylight  that  the  Americans  could  have  done  all  they  did  without  any 
rebel  aid.  Now,  however,  it  is  not  quite  so  easy  to  get  rid  of  the  incon- 
venient connection — Aguinaldo,  a deified,  ignorant  Indian,  with  a 
swollen  head,  but  empty  for  all  practical  purposes.  Timidity  verging 
on  cowardice  is  his  chief  characteristic.  He  never  fought  a battle  in  his 
life,  and  is  afraid  to  leave  his  room  for  fear  of  being  “knifed”  by  some 
kind  countryman  whom  he  has  wronged.  A further  mistake  was  in 
letting  him  have  any  part  in  reducing  the  Spaniards  in  their  trenches 
or  in  the  entrance  upon  the  taking  of  Manila  on  the  13th  of  August. 
Before  this  day  the  rebels  should  have  been  ordered  away  at  least  ten 
miles  and  their  arms  taken  from  them,  fastening  them  down  to  accom- 
plished facts,  as  they  are  no  more  fit  to  govern  than  “a  flock  of  goats” 
would  be. 

The  chiefs  of  the  rebels  are  pettifogging  lawyers,  known  among 
themselves  as  “abogadillos,”  hangers  on  at  the  petty  courts,  stirring 
up  strife  among  the  litigants  to  encourage  suits,  and  considered  a “pest 
to  the  colony,”  as  their  aifn  is  to  squeeze  as  much  money  as  possible 
out  of  the  iieges  with  the  least  possible  labor  to  themselves.  This 
life  has  inured  them  to  the  idea  that  as  they  are  of  the  “learned  pro- 
fessions,” and  therefore  it  would  be  infra  dig.  to  work.  It  •would 
be  a fine  thing  to  have  a native  government  with  a post  in  it  where 
the}'  could  rob  and  steal  ad  lib.,  and  live  on  the  fat  of  the  land  at 
the  public  expense.  It  is  needless  to  say  that  the  end  would  be  very 
shortly  that  of  the  “Kilkenny  cats,”  without  a doubt.  It  would  be  "a 
mistake  to  temporize  with  people  of  such  low  intelligence,  as  they  can 
not  understand  leniency  from  Europeans  unless  on  the  supposition  that 
it  is  due  to  fear.  In  the  great  Indian  mutiny  the  British  were  severely 
criticised  the  world  over  for  blowing  rebels  from  the  cannon’s  mouth, 
but  it  was  the  only  way,  and  their  sway  has  been  ever  since  undis- 
turbed, practically  governing  250,000,000  with  an  army  of  only  70,000, 
including  Sepoys,  Sikhs.  Goorkhas,  and  Europeans.  The  Spaniards 
should  have  been  severer  in  discipline  w hile  just  in  treatment,  and  then 
these  wretched  semisavages  would  not  have  got  the  upper  hand. 

The  proportions  reached  by  the  present  rising  is  without  a doubt 
due  to  encouragement  at  the  beginning  from  the  Americans,  and  the 
situation  thus  created  imposes  upon  them  the  obligation  of  restoring 
order  and  of  not  leaving  the  islands  unless  replaced  by  a strong  gov- 
ernment of  Europeans,  that  of  Spain  being  out  of  the  question,  and 
the  natives  might  be  ripe  for  such  a responsibility  about  the  year  2000, 
i.  e.,  when  the  present  and  three  more  generations  shall  have  disap- 
peared, it  being  calculated  that  this  time  is  necessary  to  eradicate  the 
pernicious  effects  of  priestly  rule,  a uniformly  immoral  administration 
in  church  and  state,  and  to  spread  sound  education  and  teach  habits  of 
honest  industry  among  the  people. 

A great  writer  described  the  Spaniard  generally  as  “full  of  honor 
without  honesty,  full  of  religion  without  morality,  and  full  of  pride 
p c 29 


450 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


without  anything  to  be  proud  of,"  and  the  average  native  may  be  said 
to  have  picked  up  and  appropriated  all  that  is  bad  in  the  European  and 
nothing  of  the  good,  being  an  adept  at  lying,  stealing,  gambling,  and 
all  other  vices  imaginable,  with  indolence  to  a fault,  good  dancers,  and 
a very  good  ear  for  music.  There  are  a good  few,  it  is  true,  who  are 
peaceable  workers,  and  these  are  an  exception  to  the  general  descrip- 
tion here  given.  Many  make  useful  and  efficient  clerks  in  merchants’ 
offices,  banks,  and  other  places  of  business.  Some  are  capital  imitators 
of  European  art  in  silver  and  gold  work,  wood  carving,  etc.,  and  there 
are  thousands  of  good  agricultural  laborers  throughout  the  islands.  As 
a tighter  not  much  can  be  said  for  him  in  a face  to  face  encounter, 
his  “forte”  being  the  “bolo"  and  stabbing  in  the  back,  and  why  the 
Spaniards  did  not  put  down  the  rising  at  the  outset  can  be  only  due  to 
the  latter  having  forgotten,  if  they  ever  knew,  what  modern  warfare 
is,  as  in  the  last  live  months  their  bravery,  so  much  lauded,  consisted 
in  their  hiding  in  trenches,  much  of  their  time  up  to  their  hinder  parts 
in  water,  to  be  “sniped"  by  the  rebels,  who  from  behind  clumps  of 
bamboos  drew  their  fiercest  fire  by  letting  oil'  Chinese  crackers  at  night- 
time, never  showing  face  during  the  day.  The  Spaniards  at  starting, 
in  the  most  innocent  fashion,  allowed  themselves  to  be  surrounded  by 
the  rebels,  who  made  prisoners  of  the  big  half  of  their  force  of  about 
12,000,  and  then  they  “had  too  few  left  to  attack,  and  could  only  be 
on  the  defensive,"  and  retiring  from  trench  to  trench  before  the  Indian, 
the  cry  of  the  latter  being,  “ the  Spaniards  retreating,  retreating — the 
natives  advancing,  advancing. 

To  eyewitnesses  this  “guerilla  warfare,"  in  the  circumstances  when 
Spain  had  to  “do  or  die,"  seems  most  ridiculous,  and  a Kitchener  with 
a handful  of  Soudanese  would  have  driven  these  niggers  before  them 
like  “mosquitoes  before  the  wind.”  All  that  can  be  said  is  that  a 
country  that  will  not  tight  in  defense  of  her  colonies  has  no  right  to 
have  any  and  deserves  to  lose  them  if  she  has. 

Now  the  Americans  are  in  possession  of  these  much  coveted  islands, 
the  problem  comes  to  be  how  best  to  turn  these  valuable  acquisitions  to 
account,  and  at  a glance  it  will  be  seen  that  the  rebellion  once  got  under 
and  the  rebels  disarmed,  a sine  qua  non — as  at  present  there  are  two 
governments  in  full  swing,  the  rebels  ruling  and  collecting  all  taxes  from 
the  outskirts  of  Manila  into  the  interior,  and  the  Americans  the  few  taxes 
of  the  city  and  port,  a state  of  things  that  can  not  be  allowed  to  last  much 
longer — it  will  not  answer  to  attempt  a government  on  western  lines 
and  ideas  right  off,  as  habits  and  customs  of  over  three  centuries  old 
can  not  well  be  changed  in  a day,  and  it  will  be  necessary  in  introducing 
western  reforms  to  do  so  gradually  and  in  the  light  of  acquired  expe- 
rience, dovetailing  such  as  far  as  possible  with  existing  systems. 

What  would,  of  course,  suit  this  country  is  the  “open  door”  so  much 
insisted  upon  by  Great  Britain  in  all  her  acquisitions,  and  which  has 
given  such  admirable  results  in  Singapore,  the  Straits  Settlements,  and 
Hongkong,  the  last  named,  though  only  fifty -five  years  in  the  hands 
of  the  English,  and  at  the  start  only  a barren  rock,  being  now  the 
third  shipping  port  of  the  world.  No  custom-house  means,  of  course, 
no  restriction  to  traffic,  no  coast  guard,  and  no  expense,  opium  being 
the  only  valuable  article  in  small  bulk  imported,  being  reduced  to  rev- 
enue by  “farming  it  out.”  as  is  done  in  Hongkong  and  has  been  done 
all  along  here.  To  put  an  import  duty  on  it  of  so  much  a pound  as  at 
present  proposed  would,  it  is  feared,  bring  little  or  no  revenue,  owing 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


451 


to  the  great  facilities  for  smuggling  in  so  extensive  a coast  line  an  arti- 
cle of  little  bulk,  and  if  the  suggestions  further  on  as  to  the  ingress  of 
Chinese  be  adopted,  the  consumption  of  opium  would,  at  once,  be 
largely  increased  to  make  the  contract  in  a short  time  worth  two  or 
three  times  its  present  value.  The  policy  recommended  would,  there- 
fore, be  no  custom-house,  no  coast  guard,  thus  saving  considerable 
money  involved  in  keeping  up  the  required  machinery,  everything 
being  done  to  facilitate  the  promptest  dispatch  for  all  vessels  arriving 
and  departing,  time,  if  “money’’  in  Europe,  being  worth  40  shillings 
to  the  pound  sterling  in  these  parts,  where  the  natural  span  of  life  may 
be  reduced  by  one-half. 

Port  and  light  dues  would  be  collected  from  all  vessels  on  an  equita- 
ble scale,  and  for  revenue,  internal  taxes  of,  say,  $2  to  $5  on  all  natives 
and  Chinese,  or  on  the  latter  only,  a land,  stamp,  and  license  tax  on 
Hongkong  and  Singapore  lines,  and  opium  farming,  with  a tax  on 
tobacco,  manufactured  and  exported,  but  freedom  for  export  of  all 
other  produce.  Additional  revenue  could  at  once  be  raised  by  demol- 
ishing the  obsolete  city  walls,  tilling  up  the  moat  all  around,  and  dis- 
posing of  all  the  available  ground  and  material  for  building  purposes 
to  allow  of  city  expansion.  This  would  produce  a good  many  millions, 
land  in  this  position  being  very  valuable.  There  is  also  all  the  land 
and  property  in  the  hands  of  the  religious  corporations,  virtually  the 
property  of  the  Government,  that  would  bring  in  a very  large  amount, 
and  which,  with  $5  or  $10  a head  on  two  or  three  millions  of  Chinese 
laborers,  that  will  be  found  necessary  for  cooly  work,  road-making 
and  railroad  building,  farming,  and  other  employment  that  is  now 
completely  neglected,  as  soon  as  the  place  is  in  full  swing.  These 
resources  would  enable  Government  to  give  the  open  port  plan  a year 
or  two  years  trial  for  a test. 

Now,  to  come  to  the  question  of  importing  foreign  labor.  There  is 
no  question  of  competing  with  American  labor  here,  there  being  no 
such  in  the  country,  nor  can  there  be,  the  climate  prohibiting  that,  so 
the  reported  prohibition  of  Chinese  immigration  seems  inexplicable, 
and  the  law  in  force  in  the  States  is  certainly  misapplied  in  the  Philip- 
pines, where  cheap  labor  and  plenty  of  it  is  their  lifeblood.  This 
will  be  seen  when  it  is  every  year  the  same;  a large  proportion  of  the 
crops,  sugar,  and  other  produce  is  left  in  the  field  from  want  of  hands 
to  gather  them.  This  year  it  is  especially  the  case,  and  as  the  opera- 
tions of  cutting  the  old  cane  and  planting  the  new  shoots  are  simulta- 
neous, it  follows  that  when  it  is  impossible  to  harvest  the  mature  cane 
no  new  planting  takes  place,  thus  diminishing  the  next  crop’s  yield  as 
well  as  losing  so  much  of  the  present — a double  murder,  so  to  speak. 

These  islands,  as  will  be  seen,  are  very  sparsely  populated,  Luzon, 
of  a larger  area  than  England,  having  only  about  3 .j  millions  all  told, 
or  a,  little  over  one-tenth  of  England’s  figure.  Panay  will  have  some  two 
millions;  Negros  and  Cebu  about  one  and  a half  millions,  and  Mindanao 
and  the  rest  some  two  millions  among  them.  There  is  room  for  three 
to  four  millions  of  Chinese  comfortably,  whilst  only  about  200,000  are 
the  present  estimate.  Chinese  coolies  and  the  buffalo  are  two  essen- 
tials. The  place  can  not  get  on  without  them,  and  were  any  roadmaking, 
railway,  or  agricultural  work  being  done,  at  least  a million  of  Chinese 
would  be  absorbed  right  off,  and  next  year  another  million,  and  so  on 
until  the  population  be  half  Chinese,  to  make  the  natives  come  to  their 
senses  and  work  for  a reasonable  “living  wage.”  It  seems  ridiculous 


452 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


that  when  the  Hongkong  scale  of  wages  is  about  as  follows,  viz,  coolies, 
25  to  30  cents  a day;  carpenters,  50  to  60  cents;  mechanics,  blacksmiths, 
and  engine  drivers,  TO  to  75  cents;  engineers  and  boilermakers,  80  to  90 
cents;  the  rates  are  for  these  classes,  respectively,  75  cents,  $1.25,  $1.40, 
and  $1.50  since  immigration  has  been  stopped.  Before  April  we  were 
about  the  same  as  in  Hongkong,  and  it  speaks  volumes  for  the  admi- 
rable management  of  labor  in  that  colony,  the  fact  that  while  in  the  past 
twenty  years  or  so  silver  has  fallen  bv  one-half,  or  some  hundred  per 
cent  on  present  value  of  the  Mexican  dollar,  the  currency  rate  of  wages 
has  not  advanced  more  than  25  to  30  per  cent  all  round,  the  employers 
of  labor  getting  a benefit  of  70  to  75  per  cent  more  than  would  be  the 
case  on  a gold  basis.  This,  however,  has  been  made  possible  by  the 
almost  stationary  value  of  commodities  of-  Chinese  consumption  from 
year  to  year,  and  it  is  no  hardship  for  the  Chinaman  to  work  cheaply, 
as  his  living  runs  into  very  little  money,  and  he  is  happy.  A first-class 
Chinese  cook  at  the  moment  requires  $12  to  $15  a month  in  Hongkong. 
Here  an  indifferent  one  gets  $30  to  $35,  and  a good  one  $40,  $45,  and 
$50. 

This  state  of  things  can  not  last,  but  there  is  no  cure  for  extortion 
except  solid  competition,  and  coolies,  mechanics,  and  cooks  will  have  to 
come  in,  and  quickly,  or  the  place  will  be  ruined  instead  of  going  ahead 
under  the  new  regime.  Availing  of  the  present  abnormal  circum- 
stances, the  native,  who,  as  a rule,  lives  upon  his  wife’s  earnings,  will 
not  work  at  all,  and  the  few  that  will  condescend  to  do  anything  light 
and  easy  that  is  going,  demand  a dollar  a day  pay  against  25  to  374  cents 
last  April.  As  before  said,  cheap  labor  is  the  lifeblood  of  this  country, 
and  the  natives  being  few,  and  these  few  being  disinclined  to  work, 
there  is  no  solution  of  the  difficulty  except  a free  admission  of  Chinese 
labor,  and  the  Chinaman  is  the  most  industrious  and  most  economical  of 
known  Asiatics.  Special  legislation  must,  of  course,  be  adopted  for 
Chinese,  traders’  licenses  being  restricted  and  confined  to  those  already 
established,  all  new  arrivals  being  admitted  on  condition  of  their  being 
or  becoming  coolies,  agricultural  laborers,  mechanics,  carpenters,  and 
other  skilled  workmen,  cooks,  servants,  house  boys,  nurses,  etc.  The 
Chinaman  is  a good  sailor,  stoker,  and  steward  on  steamers,  and  gener- 
ally useful  and  willing  to  work,  and  as  soon  as  it  be  found  that  a suffi 
cient  number  for  all  requirements  shall  have  been  admitted  it  will  be 
easy  to  lessen  the  import  by  gradually  increasing  the  head  tax  as  may 
be  found  necessary. 

To  give  a faint  idea,  however,  of  the  very  large  number  that  can  at 
once  be  employed  on  the  works  that  will,  to  a go-ahead  colony,  appear 
to  be  peremptory,  the  following  must  at  once  be  attacked:  Road 
making  on  scientific  lines,  street  cleaning,  and  everything  in  this  line 
required  to  improve  sanitation,  demolishing  the  obsolete  city  walls, 
filling  up  of  moat,  planting  of  trees,  gardens,  plants,  and  flower  beds, 
and  then  a network  of  railways  all  over  the  islands,  as  a 20-mile  line 
in  any  direction  from  Manila  will  give  a climate  “to  order.”  A hy 
should  there  be  any  sickness  in  this  most  healthy  of  tropical  climates 
when  by  an  hour  morning  and  evening  in  the  train  one  can  sleep  in  a 
temperature  of  40°,  50  y or  60“  Far.  to  his  liking  'i 

The  river  Pasig,  dredged  out  to  the  mouth  of  the  lake  and  points 
cut  down  to  make  the  navigation  easy  for  decent  passenger  steamers, 
would  immediately  attract  capital  to  put  on  daily,  morning,  and  even- 
ing service,  which  the  populace  could  and  would  gladly  avail  of  to 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


453 


pass  their  nights  in  the  many  cool  spots  fringing  the  lake,  enjoying 
the  freshest  of  country  air  the  larger  half  of  tin'  twenty-four  hours. 
No  heat  in  the  daytime  would  he  felt  after  a cool  night,  and  in  a very 
short  time  this  desirable  basin  of  water,  the  “Laguna  de  Bay,”  25 
by  20  miles  in  its  greatest  dimensions,  would  be  studded  over  with 
yachts  and  pleasure  craft  of  every  kind,  to  afford  pleasurable  recrea- 
tion to  all  who  could  afford  the  time  and  expense.  With  capital  and 
enterprise  the  nearest  approach  to  an  earthly  paradise  is  here  at  beck 
and  call,  and  it  is  perfectly  amazing  the  strides  made  by  progress  in 
the  past  30  years  since  province  steamers  began  to  run  in  the  islands. 
Some  of  the  promoters,  now  in  the  country,  can  recall  the  time  (up  to 
1863)  when  it  took  two  weeks  or  more  in  one  of  the  small  schooners 
then  employed  in  bringing  in  outside  produce  to  the  shipping  ports, 
to  make  a voyage  of  250  miles,  and  in  that  year  a group  of  12,  prin- 
eipallv  foreigners,  got  together  a sum  of  860,000,  $5,000  each,  to  bring 
out  a small  boat  to  make  trips  to  the  open  ports  of  Iloilo  and  Cebu, 
the  result  being  so  satisfactory  that  boat  after  boat  followed  until 
they  now  number  over  50  province  steamers,  large  and  small,  running 
in  the  islands.  There  was  not  a solitary  steam  launch  in  the  place  and 
the  Government  had  only  half  a dozen  craft,  obsolete  gunboats,  in  the 
whole  of  the  archipelago. 

So  much  for  what  steamers  through  private  enterprise  have  done 
under  a rotten  dog-in-the-manger  government.  What  more  could  not 
have  been  done  under  an  enlightened  administration  2 The  short  120- 
mile  railway  put  down  by  English  capitalists  gives  but  a faint  idea  of 
what  a network  of  railroads  could  do,  but  quite  enough  to  show  what 
a profitable  investment  such  roads  can  be  in  this  country  under  a liberal 
up-to-date  government.  What  applies  to  Luzon  applies  equally  to 
all  the  other  islands,  where  the  produce,  as  already  said,  is  in  many 
cases  left  in  the  field  to  rot  from  want  of  adequate  means  of  convey- 
ance. Roads — good  roads — and  railroads  would  send  these  islands 
ahead  by  leaps  and  bounds  and  material  progress  would  be  the  sure 
precursor  of  the  light  of  civilization  shut  out  from  these  unfortunate 
parts  by  the  most  selfish  and  despotic  of  governments,  that  of  the 
priest  and  his  dupes.  Why  European  governments  who  have  been  for 
centuries  opening  up  and  civilizing  the  darkest  countries  should  have 
overlooked  the  Philippines  without  having  a look  in  to,  if  necessary, 
force  reform  upon  the  ruling  powers,  seems  inexplicable,  and  now 
that  at  last  an  enlightened  power  has  taken  hold  it  is  fervently  to  be 
hoped  that  they  will  open  up  the  country  until  the  light  of  the  age 
shall  have  penetrated  the  remotest  crevice  of  these  most  fertile  and 
valuable  islands.  There  would  then  be  no  rebellion  nor  the  thought 
of  one,  and  the  vast  resources  of  the  country,  still  dormant,  would  be 
utilized  for  the  benefit  of  mankind  far  and  wide. 

These  resources  are  practically  unlimited,  and  when  the  islands  shall 
have  been  fully  explored  and  brought  under  subjection  to  modern 
rule,  the  country  will  probably  be  found  to  be  the  richest  unexplored 
territory  in  the  known  world.  When  we  think  of  the  immense  sums 
constantly  being  spent  in  prospecting  unknown  lands,  and  in  many 
cases  wdthout  locating  a “find”  worth  following  up,  it  is  simply 
amazing  that  here,  where  untold  riches  are  staring  us  in  the  face,  cap- 
italists should  have  so  long  held  aloof  and  fought  shy  of  the  place. 
The  explanation  is  the  cursed  priest-ridden  government  that  sucked 
the  lifeblood  out  of  the  ccuntrv,  now  happily  driven  out  forever,  but 


454 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


unfortunately  to  enjoy  the  stolen  millions  securely  invested  in  every 
safe  country  we  know  of. 

Let  us  take  Luzon  first  to  give  a faint  idea  of  known  resources.  In 
the  north  a rich  and  extensive  tobacco  country,  where  qualities  equal 
to  Cuba  can  he  produced,  and  coining  south  the  two  Iloeos  provinces 
are  rich  sugar  and  rice  lands.  Indigo  used  also  to  he  largely  pro- 
duced, and  with  more  labor  could  no  doubt  he  done  again  in  increased 
quantities  and  better  quality. 

In  the  long  range  of  mountains  practically  unexplored,  copper,  iron, 
gold,  and  other  metals  and  minerals  are  known  to  exist,  and  without 
doubt  in  considerable  quantities.  Copper  has  been  worked  for  many 
years  in  the  mountains  of  South  Iloeos,  Mancayan,  Lepanto.  want  of 
communication  being  the  great  obstacle  to  the  mining  not  being  on  a 
larger  scale.  In  this  neighborhood  we  have  the  district  of  Benguet, 
over  4,000  feet  above  the  sea  level,  with  a climate  not  to  lie  beaten  in 
Europe,  in  winter  bordering  upon  frost  and  in  summer  never  over  65 
Far.  There  is  an  extensive  pine  forest  there,  and  exquisite  potatoes 
and  home  vegetables  of  all  kinds  can  be  grown  to  any  extent.  The 
Spanish  Government  had  arranged  to  put  a sanatorium  up  there  to 
save  sending  invalided  troops  and  employees  to  Europe  to  recruit. 
A mountain  line  of  railway  for  the  ascent  and  a short,  level  line  to 
connect  with  the  terminus  of  the  Manila-Dagupan  line  would  take 
passengers  from  Manila  in  about  12  hours  to  this  desirable  retreat.  In 
the  provinces  of  Union,  Zambales,  Pangasinan,  and  Bulaean,  tobacco, 
sugar,  rice,  etc.,  are  largely  produced,  and  in  the  Angat  Mountain, 
Bulaean,  and  Bosoboso,  only  a fewr  miles  from  Manila,  iron  ore  yield- 
ing 75  per  cent  of  pure  metal  has  been  worked,  unsuccessfully,  owing 
to  the  opposition  of  the  priests  and  obstacles  by  the  Government,  who 
would  not  have  the  mines  worked  by  Chinese  laborers  because  they 
were  infidels.  Some  iron  ore  from  Angat  is  stated  to  have  produced  85 
per  cent  of  pure  metal,  and  it  exists  in  very  large  quantity,  only  requir- 
ing capital  and  enterprise  to  develop  a big  production.  Lead,  silver, 
gold,  and  coal  are  to  be  found  in  many  parts  of  Luzon,  while  hemp  and 
sugar  and  some  coffee  are  produced,  the  two  first  in  large  quantities, 
and  the  last  capable  of  being  developed  of  excellent  quality  when  suit- 
able localities  are  chosen  for  the  plant.  Mindoro,  close  to  Manila,  is 
only  occupied  by  Europeans  in  small  spots  here  and  there,  and  this 
large  island  is  practically  unknown  in  the  interior.  It  is  covered,  as 
well  as  many  parts  of  Luzon,  with  valuable  timber,  from  the  water's 
edge  to  mountain  top  the  varieties  of  hard  wood  and  other  kinds  num- 
bering about  seventy  of  known  good  woods.  The  highest  mountain 
in  the  group,  Halcon,  8,868  feet  above  sea  level,  is  in  Mindoro,  where 
valuable  coal  beds  exist,  but  undeveloped. 

We  next  come  to  Romblon,  which  is  all  over  marble  and  covered 
with  cocoanut  trees,  only  partially  explored.  A number  of  islands, 
Tablas,  Masbate,  Burias,  Marinduque,  etc.,  are  good  timber  producers 
and  excellent  pasture  lands.  The  large  and  fertile  island  of  Panay  pro- 
duces sugar,  rice,  sapanwood  in  abundance,  and  there  are  indications 
of  petroleum  and  coal  in  some  places,  but  the  island  is  so  destitute  of 
roads  that  it  is  next  to  impossible  to  bring  the  produce  to  the  shipping 
port,  Iloilo,  unless  at  an  exorbitant  and  prohibitive  cost.  Much  of  the 
land  is  thus  left  to  waste,  uncultivated.  This,  of  all  others,  and  its 
neighbor,  Negros,  are  a most  promising  field  for  railways,  the  port  of 
Iloilo  bidding  fair  to  be  tin'  principal  exporting  center  of  the  archi- 


455 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 

pel  ago  at  no  distant  date.  In  1850  Negros  and  Iloilo  exported  about 
(300  tons  of  sugar.  In  1807  the  production  was  close  upon  200,000  tons, 
and  rapid  communications  would  increase  the  yield  fourfold  very 
shortly. 

Now  we  come  to  Cebu,  Leyte,  Samar,  and  Bohol,  all  producing  sugar, 
hemp,  rice,  maize,  and  tobacco,  several  giving  excellent  cattle.  Cebu 
is  very  full  of  coal,  and  in  one  mountain  side,  Cling,  the  outcrops  indi- 
cate an  existence  of  millions  of  tons,  at  least  a couple  of  millions  being 
extractable  with  very  little  mining,  according  to  the  best  authorities. 
This  is  the'largest  coal  bed  so  far  discovered,  and  with  15  miles  of  rail- 
way the  mineral  can  be  put  down  in  the  port  of  Cebu  at  a cost  of  rather 
under  than  over  os.  sterling  per  ton,  of  a good  steaming  quality,  found 
by  the  local  steamer  owners  to  he  fully  as  good  (2  per  cent  better)  as 
the  best  Japan  lump.  With  abundance  of  cheap  labor,  coal  and  iron 
within  reach,  many  enterprises,  having  the  raw  material  on  the  spot, 
could  be  at  once  proceeded  with,  such  as  rope  works,  sugar  refineries, 
cement  and  brick  works,  docks,  wharves,  reclamations,  port  improve- 
ments, dredging,  etc.,  for  which  there  is  almost  an  unlimited  field  all 
over  the  group. 

Most  of  the  above  industries  give  handsome  returns  in  Hongkong, 
etc.,  even  after  payment  of  freight  and  charges  on  raw  material  imported 
from  Manila,  Java,  Japan,  etc. 

And  last  of  all  comes  the  large  island  of  Mindanao,  practically  unex- 
plored and  unconquered,  and  occupied  by  the  Spaniards  only  to  a small 
extent,  a fringe  in  a few  spots  around  the  coast.  It  is  timbered  from 
water’s  edge  to  mountain  top  (the  highest,  Apo,  8,800  feet),  produces 
hemp,  gold,  etc.,  and  coal  exists  at  different  points,  but  so  far  unworked. 

. Am  i.  uicls. 


Octohkk,  1808. 


Exhibit  VI. 


PUBLIC  INSTRUCTION  IN  THE  PHILIPPINES 
DURING  THE  TIME  OF  SPANISH  SOVER- 
EIGNTY. 


Public  education  in  the  Philippines  is  one  of  the  branches  of  the 
administration  which  was  most  neglected  by  the  Spanish  Government. 

It  is,  without  doubt,  a fact  that  this  is  not  demonstrated  by  the  state 
in  which  education  has  been  for  some  ten  years  past,  for  it  must  be 
admitted  that,  although  no  great  amount  of  progress  has  been  made 
in  instruction,  still  it  has  advanced  considerably.  Still,  the  sort  of 
education  given  can  not  in  any  way  be  considered  proportionate  to  the 
length  of  time  in  which  Spain  has  been  governing  tin*  Philippines  and 
the  degree  of  aptitude  shown  by  the  Philippine  people. 

One  of  the  few  good  things  which  General  Weyler  did  here  was  to 
increase  the  number  of  primary  schools  to  a suitable  number,  whether 
for  his  private  ends  or  not  we  do  not  know. 

In  order  to  make  a thorough  study  of  this  subject  we  shall  examine 
the  different  studies  which  were  taught  in  the  different  official  and 
private  centers  of  education. 

For  the  better  conduct  of  our  investigation  on  this  subject  we  shall 
arrange  the  studies  under  the  following  heads:  Primary  instruction; 
secondary  or  second  education;  higher  education,  or  education  in  pro- 
fessions; the  education  of  schoolmasters  in  the  normal  school;  educa- 
tion in  arts  and  trades,  or  courses  in  skilled  labor;  education  in  agri- 
culture. in  the  school  of  agriculture;  nautical  education  in  the  nautical 
school:  education  in  painting,  sculpture,  and  engraving  in  the  academy 
or  superior  school. 

This  is  all  that  there  was  that  could  be  considered  civil  education. 
As  regards  religious  education,  there  were  various  seminaries,  and  in 
the  military  profession  there  was  a preparatory  academy. 

I. 

PRIMARY  'EDUCATION. 

Primarv  education  or  instruction,  which  is  the  first  instruction  that 
a child  reecives  as  soon  as  it  attains  the  age  of  reason,  is  conducted  in 
the  Philippines  by  schoolmasters,  teachers  of  both  sexes,  from  the  nor- 
mal and  superior  school,  except  in  Intremuras,  where  it  is  administered 
by  Jesuit  fathers  and  Sisters  of  Charity,  which  is  an  inexplicable 
anomoly.  The  number  of  primary  schools  in  the  whole  archipelago, 
according  to  the  statistics  of  the  year  1896,  is  2,167  for  both  sexes, 
there  being  two  schools  for  each  sex  in  every  town  of  5,000  inhabit- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


457 


ants,  three  for  each  sox  in  towns  of  10,000  inhabitants,  and  so  on,  the 
number  of  schools  increasing  in  the  ratio  of  one  schoolmaster  and  one 
schoolmistress  for  each  5,000  inhabitants. 

The  schools  were  classified  according  to  the  importance  of  the  towns 
in  the  following  manner,  the  corresponding  salary  being  given: 


Masters:  Per  month. 

Highest  grade  (first  class) §40 

1 1 ighest  grade  (second  class) 30 

Intermediate  grade 25 

Lowest  grade 20 

Assistants 15 

Mistresses: 

Highest  grade  (first  class) 25 

Highest  grade  (second  class) 20 

Intermediate  grade 15 

Lowest  grade 12 

Assistants 10 

There  was  competition  for  the  position  of  teacher  of  the  highest 
grade,  both  first  and  second  class.  The  position  in  the  lowest  and 
intermediate  grade  were  filled  by  means  of  competitive  examinations 
between  holders  of  teachers’  titles.  Assistants,  in  default  of  others, 
might  be  persons  not  holding  titles. 


The  governor  of  each  province  was  the  inspector-general  of  all  the 
schools  in  his  province. 

The  local  inspector,  or  “ nato,”  was  formally  the  friar  who  was  priest 
of  the  town;  and,  although  in  the  municipal  reform  of  Minister  Maura 
it  was  provided  that  the  municipal  captain  should  be  local  inspector  of 
schools,  we  have  understood  that  this  provision  was  not  carried  out, 
and  that  the  parish  priest  has  remained  in  his  office  of  inspector. 
From  this  we  may  judge  the  sort  of  instruction  that  school  masters 
and  mistresses  were  forced  to  give. 

The  courses  taught  in  these  schools  are  found  in  a set  of  regulations 
devoted  to  “elements  of  pedagogism,”  a text-book  in  the  normal 
schools  for  male  and  female  school-teachers  published  in  Manila  in 
1890. 

This  set  of  regulations,  approved  bv  the  Government  of  His  Majesty, 
contains  the  following: 

Art.  1.  Instruction  in  schools  for  natives  shall  he  reduced  for  the  present  to  ele- 
mentary primary  instruction,  and  shall  consist  of  Christian  doctrine  and  principles 
of  moralty  and  sacred  history  suitable  for  children;  (2)  reading;  (3)  writing;  (4) 
practical  instruction,  in  Spanish,  Spanish  grammar,  and  orthography;  (5)  principles 
of  arithmetic,  comprising  the  four  rules  for  figures,  common  fractions,  decimals,  and 
instruction  in  the  decimal  metric  system  and  its  equivalents  in  ordinary  weights  and 
measures;  (6)  instruction  in  general  geography  and  Spanish  history;  (7)  instruction 
in  practical  agriculture  as  applied  to  the  products  of  the  country;  (8)  rules  of  deport- 
ment; (9)  vocal  music. 

Primary  education  of  girls  shall  comprise  the  subjects  mentioned  in 
numbers  1,  2,  3,  4,  5,  8,  and  9 of  this  article,  and  instruction  in  employ- 
ments suitable  to  their  sex. 

It  requires  but  little  reflection  to  see  the  deficiency  of  this  arrange- 
ment. The  first  fault  that  presents  itself  to  view  is  the  mistaken  idea 
of  putting  instruction  in  Christian  doctrine  before  reading  and  writing. 

Regarding  the  instruction  in  Spanish,  it  must  be  said  that  it  was 
purely  imaginary,  because  the  local  inspectors,  the  parish  priests,  pro- 
hibited it  for  the  children,  especially  in  those  towns  in  which,  on 
account  of  their  remote  situation,  the  governor  rarely  intervened. 
The  instruction  in  geography  was  so  superficial  that  there  was  not  a 


458 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


single  child  who  was  given  any  real  knowledge  on  this  subject,  which 
was  due,  principally,  to  the  very  bad  method  of  instruction  adopted, 
in  which  a geographical  chart  was  rarely  seen,  and  everything  was  left 
to  memory. 

The  only  history  taught  was  that  of  Spain,  and  that  under  conven- 
tional censorship.  The  history  of  the  rest  of  the  world  was,  of  course, 
unknown. 

The  course  in  vocal  music  was  only  a pretense,  for  it  was  not  taught. 
This  plan  did  not  include  gymnastic  exercise  nor  any  physical  exer- 
cise. which  gives  an  idea  of  the  sort  of  education  which  was  given  in 
the  Philippines. 

The  second  article  of  the  same  set  of  regulations  reads  as  follows: 

Art.  2.  Primary  instruction  is  obligatory  for  all  natives.  The  fathers,  tutors,  or 
guardians  of  children  shall  send  them  to  the  public  schools  between  the  ages  of  10 
and  12  years,  unless  they  prove  that  they  give  them  sufficient  instruction  in  their 
homes  or  in  private  schools.  Those  who  do  not  obey  this  rule  shall  be  admonished 
and  compelled  to  do  so  by  the  authorities  by  a tine  of  from  one-half  real  to  2 
reals,  when  there  is  a school  in  the  town  at  such  distance  that  the  children  can  con- 
veniently attend.  The  fathers  and  guardians  of  children  may  also  send  them  to  the 
schools  between  the  ages  of  6 and  14  years. 

This  article  appears  to  be  based  upon  the  wisest  principles,  but  it 
was  very  far  from  being  carried  out,  for  this  branch  of  administration, 
or  to  put  it  better,  of  police,  was  more  neglected  in  towns  than  any- 
thing else,  and  there  were  cases  in  which  schools  had  scarcely  a dozen 
scholars. 

The  municipal  school  for  boys,  and  in  particular  the  municipal 
atheneum,  although  it  also  suffered  from  the  defects  mentioned,  may 
be  mentioned  as  better  equipped  schools.  In  this  class  the  schools  for 
girls  are  much  more  numerous  than  the  schools  for  boys.  In  Manila 
are  the  normal  schools  for  schoolmistresses,  of  which  we  shall  speak 
hereafter,  in  charge  of  the  Ascensionist  Nuns;  the  School  of  Santa 
Isabel,  in  charge  of  the  Sisters  of  Charity,  which  has  turned  out  to  be 
a grotesque  imitation  of  well-organized  colleges;  the  Concordia  School; 
the  Santa  Rosa  and  Lo  Oban  schools,  also  in  charge  of  the  Sisters  of 
Charity,  which  turned  out  somewhat  better  than  the  second  in  point 
of  morality  and  gave  the  same  grade  of  instruction.  In  Jaro  and  Cebu 
these  sisters  have  other  schools  similarly  organized. 

The  Dominican  Sisters  have  their  college  of  Santa  Catelina  in  Manila, 
and  others  in  Lingayen  Bigan  and  Tuguegararo,  like  the  others  but 
more  strictly  devoted  to  religious  instruction.  In  all  of  these,  privacy 
like  that  of  the  cloister  prevails  and  scholars  go  out  on  the  street  at 
certain  times.  To  all  of  this  it  must  be  added  that  these  colleges 
possess  none  of  the  hygienic  conditions  exacted  from  every  college, 
with  the  exception  of  the  Concordia  and  some  in  the  provinces. 

In  regard  to  private  primary  schools,  there  are  many,  especially  in 
the  capital,  which  are  not  carried  on  strictly  according  to  law,  and  from 
which  excessive  abuses  arise,  but  in  such  cases  the  school  is  sufficiently 
punished  by  the  bad  reputation  which  it  acquires. 

II. 

SE( ION  DA  RY  E 1 >U<  'ATION. 

Secondary  education  in  the  Philippines  is  administered  by  the  Col- 
lege of  San  Juan  de  Letran,  tin*  only  official  institution,  in  charge  of 
the  Dominican  Friars.  This  grade  of  instruction  is  under  the  control 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


459 


of  tho  Dominican  Friars  in  the  municipal  athcneum  of  the  Jesuit  fathers 
also;  in  the  private  colleges  of  the  first  class  in  Dagupan  and  Bigan,  in 
charge  of  Dominican  Friars;  in  those  of  Cebu,  Jaro,  and  NuevaCaceres, 
in  charge  of  the  Paulists;  in  Guinobatan,  in  charge  of  the  Franciscan 
Friars;  and  in  Bakolod,  in  charge  of  the  Recoletos  Friars,  and  in  the 
so-called  private  Latin  schools,  in  charge  of  private  or  secular  persons, 
for  the  most  part  Filipinos,  which  existed  to  the  number  of  25  in 
Manila  and  to  the  number  of  44  in  the  other  parts  of  the  archipelago. 

The  control  or  intervention  exercised  by  the  Dominicans  consisted 
of  the  absorption  of  the  marticulation  fees  of  the  schools,  but  not  of 
those  of  the  colleges,  and  the  right  to  hold  examinations  in  all  these 
colleges  and  schools,  including  the  municipal  atheneum  itself. 

It  should  be  noted  that  the  colleges  of  the  first  class  were  in  charge 
of  Spanish  friars  and  priests,  such  as  the  Paulists,  and  that  the  schools 
were  in  the  hands  of  Filipinos,  who  were  required  in  order  to  establish 
schools  to  pass  examinations  and  give  strong  evidence  of  their  ability, 
although  the  friars  and  Paulists  have  never  fulfilled  any  such  condition. 

We  pass  on  to  examine  the  plan  of  education  of  the  official  institu- 
tion, San  Juan  de  Letran: 

First  term,  one  year:  Spanish  and  Latin  grammar,  Christian  doctrine, 
sacred  history. 

Second  term,  one  year:  Spanish  and  Latin  grammar  (second  course), 
instruction  in  general  geography,  and  in  particular  in  that  of  Spain 
and  of  the  Philippines,  Christian  morality. 

Third  term,  one  year:  Latin  analysis  and  translation,  rudiments  of 
the  Greek  language,  and  Christian  morality,  universal  history  and  the 
history  of  Spain  and  of  the  Philippines,  arithmetic,  and  algebra. 

Fourth  term,  one  year:  Elements  of  rhetoric  and  poetry  and  social 
ethics;  elements  of  geometry  and  plane  trigonometry;  psychology, 
philosophy,  and  logic. 

Fifth  term,  one  year:  Physics  and  chemistry;  natural  history. 

The  first  thing  that  is  apparent  in  this  plan  is  the  scarcity  of  courses, 
considering  that  the  idea  is  to  provide  studies  intended  to  prepare  the 
young  for  higher  studies. 

Even  so,  the  Philippines  might  have  been  considered  fortunate  if 
this  plan  of  study  had  been  scrupulously  followed  out.  The  subject 
of  letters  in  this  plan  is  comparatively  well  handled,  and  yet  the 
students  live  in  complete  ignorance  of  them,  excepting  the  little 
knowledge  that  they  acquired  of  rhetoric  and  history. 

The  study  of  the  sciences  was  entirely  neglected — to  such  an  extent 
that  scholars  were  graduated  as  past  in  natural  history,  physics,  and 
chemistry,  without  ever  having  seen  a museum,  nor  studied  apparatus, 
nor  observed  a chemical  reaction. 

In  more  than  strictly  educational  matters  were  scholars  neglected, 
for  the  only  text-book  in  use  on  Christian  doctrine  and  Christian  and 
social  ethics  is  the  catechism  of  Father  Astete. 

The  same  course  of  instruction  was  followed  in  the  other  colleges. 

The  municipal  atheneum  of  the  Jesuits  may  be  said  to  have  given 
more  thorough  instruction,  although  it  suffered  from  its  somewhat 
exaggeratedly  old-fashioned  methods. 

It  must  be  noted,  also,  that  all  these  friars  and  Spaniards  occupying 
professorships  were  not  required  to  pass  any  examination  in  order  to 
take  their  position  as  masters,  while  the  Filipinos  were  required  to 
pass  strict  examination  in  order  to  teach  courses  assigned  to  the  first 
two.  three,  or  four  vears.  Thev  wore  not  allowed  to  teach  the  courses 


460 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


of  the  last  year,  under  the  pretext  that  no  school  here  had  a zoological 
museum  nor  a physical  laboratory. 

In  concluding  this  chapter  we  may  say  that  the  number  of  scholars 
attending  schools  of  this  grade  was  from  18,000  to  19,000  youths  or 
boys,  for  these  studies  were  forbidden  to  women,  except  by  special 
license  of  the  governor.  In  none  of  these  colleges  was  gymnastic 
exercise  given  except  to  boarders. 

As  an  appendix  to  this  chapter  on  secondary  education  we  copy  the 
studies  which  the  university,  as  well  as  other  colleges  and  schools, 
prescribe  for  scholars  in  secondary  education,  although  the  rule  for 
their  management  was  less  strict  than  the  rules  in  the  department  of 
higher  education. 


ARTICLES  OF  THE  REGULATIONS. 

Art.  94.  From  the  day  on  which  the  scholar  matriculated  he  is  subject  to  scholastic 
authority  both  within  and  without  the  establishment. 

Art.  95.  Every  scholar  is  required  to  attend  classes  punctually  and  to  conduct 
himself  therein  with  due  application  and  circumspection. 

Anyone  committing  sixteen  offenses  in  attendance  on  a class  holding  daily  recita- 
tions, eight  in  a class  holding  recitations  on  alternate  days,  or  four  in  a class  holding 
less  than  three  recitations  (?)  shall  be  stricken  off  the  list  of  the  class,  and  the  pro- 
fessor shall  immediately  bring  the  case  to  the  knowledge  of  the  director,  that  he  may 
make  it  known  to  the  guardian  of  the  scholar. 

Offenses  in  attendance  caused  by  sickness  or  other  causes  which  in  the  judgment 
of  the  professor  are  sufficient  to  excuse  the  scholar,  shall  be  considered  involuntary 
offenses,  and  shall  count  only  as  half  offenses  in  respect  to  the  operation  of  the  pre- 
ceding article. 

The  professor  shall  take  care,  being  responsible,  not  to  give  the  character  of  invol- 
untary offenses  to  offenses  which  are  not  of  this  sort.  If  the  scholar  wishes  the 
rector  to  exercise  in  his  case  the  power  given  him  in  article  3,  No.  10,  he  shall  put  in 
a statement  within  three  days  after  his  name  has  been  taken  from  the  list  of  his 
class. 

Art.  96.  Involuntary  offenses  and  ignorance  of  lessons  shall  be  reputed  half 
offenses  for  the  effects  of  the  preceding  article. 

Art.  97.  Scholars  are  obliged  to  obey  and  respect  the  rector  and  professors,  both 
within  and  without  the  establishment. 

Art.  98.  Scholars  are  forbidden  to  address  their  superiors  collectively,  either  orally 
orin  writing.  Those  infringing  this  rule  shall  be  considered  guilty  of  insubordination. 

Art.  99.  Students  shall  dress  in  a proper  manner,  wearing  the  Spanish  dress  from 
their  fifth  year,  inclusive.  The  director  and  professors  are  authorized  to  forbid  any 
garment  prejudicial  to  good  conduct  and  decorum,  such  as  shirts  of  pina  and  other 
materials  unduly  transparent,  rings,  f«-hes,  and  other  valuable  jewelry. 

We  believe  that  these  articles  need  r.o  comment,  for  no  matter  how 
superficially  they  may  be  examined,  despotism,  absorption,  arrogance, 
and  intolerance  are  apparent. 


III. 

HIGHER  EDUCATION. 

The  only  higher  education  which  has  been  taught  in  tin'  Philippines 
has  been  in  the  higher  sciences  and  professions,  which  were  taught  in 
the  university  at  Santo  Tomas,  which  was  royal  and  pontifical,  and  in 
the  royal  college  at  San  dose. 

These  courses  were  as  follows:  Theology,  canonical  law,  philosophy 
and  letters,  jurisprudence,  and  physical  and  chemical  science  in  the 
university,  and  medicine  and  pharmacy  in  San  dose.  In  this  chapter 
we  shall  not  enter  into  the  study  of  theology  and  canonical  law  in  the 
seminaries. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


461 


The  course  in  philosophy  and  letters,  we  ought  to  say,  has  only 
lately  consisted  of  both  branches,  it  having  been  formerly  called  sim- 
ply philosophy,  and,  although  in  the  first  place  in  was  opened  to  all, 
afterwards  only  friars  could  become  graduates  and  doctors  in  it. 

However,  since  the  year  1896,  this  course,  like  the  courses  in 
physics  and  chemistry,  has  been  embodied  in  the  plan  of  education  and 
all  have  been  permitted  to  matriculate  in  it,  although  it  has  been 
observed  that  few  did  so,  because  students  in  philosophy  had  no  other 
future  than  a professorship,  while  those  studying  the  sciences,  on  the 
other  hand,  could  get  employment  as  chemists  and  analysts. 

Let  us  study  the  plan  of  education  in  other  branches: 


I.AW  COURSES. 


One  year  preparatory  course:  Chairs. 

Metaphysics 1 

General  Spanish  literature 1 

History  Of  Spain  (thorough) 1 

First  term,  one  year: 

Elements  of  natural  laws 1 

Institutions  of  canonical  law 1 

Economy  and  statistics 1 

Second  term,  one  year: 

Institutions  of  Roman  law 1 

Patronage  of  the  Indies  and  ecclesiastical  discipline 1 

Third  term,  one  year: 

Common  and  statute  civil  Spanish  law  (first  course)  and  general  history  of 

Spanish  law - 1 

Penal  law,  political  law,  administrative  law,  colonial  legislation 1 

Fourth  term,  one  year: 

Common  and  statute  civil  Spanish  law  (second  course) 1 

Mercantile  law  of  Spain  and  of  the  principal  nations  of  Europe;  elements  of 

finance 1 

Fifth  term,  one  year: 

Law  of  procedure;  civil,  criminal,  canonical,  and  administrative  law  (first 

course) 1 

Theory  and  practice  of  the  drawing  up  of  public  instruments  (first  course)  and 

public  international  law 1 

Sixth  term,  one  year: 

Law  of  procedure;  civil,  criminal,  canonical,  and  administrative  law  (second 

course)  1 

Theory  and  practice  of  the  drawing  up  of  public  instruments  (second  course) ; 
personal  international  law 1 


In  this  plan,  when  courses  are  assigned  singly  to  one  professor,  a 
text-book  is  not  used,  but  if  two  or  more  are  assigned  to  one  professor 
a comprehensive  text-book  is  used. 

It  may  be  judged  in  what  manner  the  courses  in  the  third  and  fourth 
terms  were  taught,  which,  although  so  many,  were  in  charge  of  only 
four  professors.  Again,  we  ought  to  notice  that  the  courses  of  the 
fifth  and  sixth  terms  were  in  charge  of  only  two  professors,  so  that  in 
these  two  terms  the  scholars  attended  only  one  class  of  one  professor 
and  another  of  the  other,  and  from  this  we  may  judge  how  much 
instruction  was  given  in  these  courses.  We  shall  better  see  these 
deficiencies  more  readily  by  examining  the  plan  group  by  group. 

Thus,  in  the  third  group  we  find  a course  in  the  general  history  of 
Spanish  law,  of  which  only  the  most  superficial  notions  were  taught, 
and  not  one  word  of  political  administrative  law  or  commercial 
legislation. 

Of  finance  and  international  law  very  vague  ideas  were  given,  and 
in  regard  to  the  other  courses  it  may  be  said,  speaking  conscientiously, 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


462 

that  instruction  in  the  material  which  a term  ought  to  cover  was  never 
tinished  in  one  term,  which  was  due  to  the  fact  that  the  professors 
(with  very  few  exceptions)  never  observed  the  hours  for  classes  and 
were  obliged  to  resort  to  the  excuse  that  the  duration  of  terms  in 
educational  centers  in  charge  of  friars  was  discretional  with  them  and 
they  shortened  them  more  or  less  accordingly  as  Holy  Week  came 
early  or  late  in  the  calendar.  The  result  of  this  was  that  some  terms 
lasted  scarcely  eight  months. 

Assigned  to  this  department  is  the  study  in  the  business  of  a notary 
in  which,  although  it  is  not  a profession,  nevertheless  examinations 
must  be  passed  in  all  the  courses  of  the  secondary  instruction.  The 
courses  studied  by  notaries  are  the  same  as  the  plan  from  the  second 
term  until  the  last,  with  some  exceptions,  such  as  ecclesiastical  disci- 
pline, international  law,  and  one  other. 

The  professors  in  the  law  faculty  conducted  their  courses  in  person. 
From  1,200  to  1,400  young  men  attended  the  school  of  law  and  for 
notaries. 


THE  MEDICAL  SCHOOL. 


Its  plan  was  as  follows  : 


Preparatory  term : Chairs. 

Advanced  physics 1 

Advanced  chemistry 1 

Mineralogy,  botany,  anti  zoology 1 

First  term : 

Descriptive  anatomy  (first  course) ) 

Histology  and  normal  histo-chemistry 1 

Technical  anatomy  (first  course) ) 

Second  term : 

Descriptive  anatomy  (second  course) 

Embryology;  technical  anatomy 1 

Human  physiology;  personal  hygiene 1 

Third  term : 

General  pathology  and  clinic;  pathological  anatomy;  therapeutics  and  materia 

medica 1 

Fourth  term : 

Surgical  pathology 1 

Medical  pathology 1 

Obstetrics  and  gynecology,  and  course  in  infant  disease  with  clinic 1 

Fifth  term: 

Topographical  anatomy;  operative  medicine  and  clinic;  art  of  applications  and 

bandages 1 

Obstetrical  and  gynecological  clinic 1 

Surgical  clinic  (first  course) 1 

Medical  clinic  (first  course) 1 

Sixth  term: 

Public  and  statistical  hygiene,  sanitary  legislation,  legal  and  toxilogical  medi- 
cine   1 

Surgical  clinic 1 

Medical  clinic 1 


We  must  t^ke  into  account  the  fact  that,  in  addition  to  the  courses 
set  down  as  taught  by  a single  professor,  there  are  other  courses  in 
which  this  is  not  mentioned.  For  example,  obstetrics  and  clinic,  sur- 
gical clinic  (first  and  second  courses),  and  the  medical  clinic  (first  and 
second  courses),  have  only  one  professor. 

In  regard  to  the  instruction  given,  we  may  say  that  it  was  deficient 
in  the  highest  degree.  This  was  due  in  the  first  place  to  tlv  fact  that 
practical  instruction  was  not  given,  except  in  a very  poor  wav,  as  was 
noticeable  iu  technical  anatomy,  in  classes  in  which,  until  lately,  the 


REPORT  OP  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


463 

use  of  women's  cadavers  was  prohibited,  and  in  the  second  place  to  the 
fact  that  the  scarcity  of  supplies  in  the  surgical  stores  prevented 
the  surgical  clinic  and  operations  from  amounting  to  anything,  and  in 
the  third  place,  to  the  lack  of  permanence  in  their  positions  of  the 
professors  and  their  unfitness  for  the  duties  imposed  upon  them,  for 
they  took  their  positions  by  favor  and  not  bv  merit. 

Examining  the  courses  of  this  school  in  detail,  we  may  divide  them 
as  follows: 

(a)  Courses  which  are  not  taught,  although  they  figure  in  the  plan  and 
in  matriculation.  These  are  normal  histology  and  histo-ehemistry, 
embryology,  personal  hygiene,  clinic  of  general  pathology,  pathologi- 
cal anatomy,  diseases  of  children  with  clinic,  sanitary  and  toxicological 
legislation. 

(b)  Courses  which  were  taught  as  follows  : Easy  technical  anatomy, 
first  and  second  courses;  gynecology  with  its  clinic,  obstetrical  clinic, 
operative  medicine,  and  applications  and  bandages. 

(c)  Courses  which  were  studied  during  the  whole  course,  but  which, 
for  the  reasons  hitherto  expressed,  did  not  finish  the  whole  matter  of 
their  subjects,  and  these  comprised  all  the  remaining  courses. 

In  the  medical  school  instruction  was  given  by  medical  practitioners, 
or  assistant  surgeons,  and  the  four  groups  of  courses,  which  were  given 
in  four  terms,  were  in  charge  of  one  chair  of  medicine,  the  holder  of 
which  was  always  a man  well  recommended,  or  of  great  influence,  for 
the  chair  carried  with  it  an  additional  salary  of  $30  per  month. 

The  case  is  the  same  with  the  midwives,  whose  courses  of  study  were 
arranged  in  the  same  number  of  groups,  required  the  same  time  of 
study,  and  were  also  under  the  direction  of  another  chair. 

Let  us  now  pass  on  to  the  examination  of  the  school  of  pharmacy. 
The  preparatory  course  is  identical  with  that  of  medicine: 


First  term : cnairs. 

Instruments  and  apparatus  used  in  physics  and  their  operation 

Mineralogy  and  zoology  as  applied  to  pharmacy;  pharmaceutical  materia,  and 

laboratory  work 1 

Second  term: 

Descriptive  botany;  pharmaceutical  materia;  investigations  of  plants;  labora- 
tory work 1 

Third  term: 

Inorganic  chemistry  as  applied  to  pharmacy  and  laboratory  work 1 

Fourth  term: 

Organic  chemistry  as  applied  to  pharmacy  and  laboratory  work 1 

Fifth  term: 

Chemical  analysis 1 

Practical  pharmacy,  pharmaceutical  law 1 


We  ought  to  state  that  chemical  analysis  and  instructions  in  the  use 
of  physical  instruments  were  taught  by  one  professor.  In  this  school 
also  there  were  courses  of  instruction  which  were  not  taught,  as  fol- 
lows: Practice  in  the  study  of  plants  and  mineralogy  and  pharmaceu- 
tical law.  The  first  because  the  professor  in  charge  absolutely  lacked 
time,  and  the  other  two  because  of  the  ignorance  or  negligence  of  the 
instructors. 

The  other  courses  were  taught  as  far  as  the  course  of  an  always 
incomplete  hour  per  day  permitted. 

The  professorship  of  pharmacy  has  always  been  very  badly  filled,  on 
account  of  the  persistence  of  the  Dominican  friars  in  appointing  Span- 
iards, and  in  justice  it  must  be  said  that  with  few  exceptions  all  were 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


404 

very  ignorant,  and  as  proof  of  this  the  fact  may  be  cited  that  the  last 
incumbent  i:i  the  chair  of  inorganic  chemistry  still  used  double  and 
not  single  notation. 

The  only  very  notable  men  whom  this  faculty  has  contained  were 
Senor  Anacleto  del  Rosario,  an  eminent  chemist,  now  dead,  and  Senor 
Leon  Guerre ra,  a notable  botanist,  both  Filipinos.  In  the  Philippines 
six  or  seven  hundred  students  attended  the  department  alone,  and  only 
about  170,  more  or  less,  the  department  of  pharmacy  alone. 

In  closing  this  chapter  I wish  to  add  two  words  in  regard  to  the 
capacity  of  the  persons  who  occupy  the  chairs  of  the  faculty. 

These  must  be  divided  into  two  classes — friars  and  secular  persons. 

The  friars  on  taking  assignments  in  the  faculty,  as  general  knowl- 
edge was  attributed  to  them,  were  required  to  pass  only  one  final 
examination,  in  philosophy,  although  the  laymen  were  obliged  to  pass 
examinations  in  all  the  courses,  course  by  course,  and  two  final  exam- 
inations. This  was  also  the  case  in  the  departments  of  canons  and 
theology.  After  one  year,  without  taking  any  course  of  study  nor 
passing  any  further  examination,  by  virtue  of  an  article  in  the  regula- 
tions of  the  university,  approved  by  the  Spanish  Government,  ai  1 by 
virtue  of  a concession  from  the  same,  they  (the  friars)  assumed  and 
wore  the  distinctive  hats  of  doctors  in  one  or  more  branches,  and  became 
in  fact  governing  professors  of  the  branches  indicated,  but  that  was  a 
matter  of  indifference.  They  were  not  compelled  to  meet  laymen  in 
competitive  examinations.  A strong  recommendation  from  any  author- 
ity, the  general,  the  second  in  command,  the  archbishop,  or  the  presi- 
dent of  the  supreme  court,  or  intimate  friendship  with  the  friars,  were 
enough  to  secure  appointment  to  a chair  in  the  faculty. 

It  must  be  kept  in  mind,  nevertheless,  that  the  regulations  of  the 
university  make  express  provision,  as  follows: 

Art.  5.  Vacancies  in  the  other  faculties  shall  he  filled  by  the  colonial  department, 
after  competitive  examinations  before  an  examining  board  of  professors  constituted 
in  the  University  of  Manila. 

Art.  9.  Professors  holding  chairs  shall  receive  the  following  salaries:  Those  of  the 
lowest  grade,  5,000  pesetas  per  year;  those  of  the  intermediate  grade,  6,000  pesetas, 
and  those  of  the  highest  grade,  7,000.  (Royal  order  dated  October  29,  1875.) 

We  ought  above  all  to  say  that  no  occupant  of  a chair  has  ever  re- 
ceived a greater  salary  than  $1,000  per  year,  for  all  held  their  positions 
provisionally  until  the  sovereighty  of  Spain  ceased  to  exist,  and  com- 
petitive examinations  were  never  held,  for  reasons  hereinafter  stated, 
although  the  royal  decree  cited  was  of  an  obligatory  character,  as  is 
shown  in  article  3 of  the  same. 

The  reasons  why  competitive  examinations  should  have  been  held  in 
Manila  and  not  in  Madrid  may  be  understood  by  reading  the  follow- 
ing paragraphs  of  the  memorial  presented  at  the  general  Philippine 
Island  Exposition  in  Madrid  in  1887: 

The  special  reasons  which  prove  the  necessity  of  holding  the  competitive  examina- 
tions in  Manila,  and  not  in  the  Peninsula,  are  so  worthy  of  the  attention  of  the 
supreme  government  of  the  nation  that  it  will  suffice  simply  to  state  them  in  order 
to  convince  the  most  prejudiced  mind.  The  Philippine  Islandsare  a count  ry  reclaimed 
from  barbarism  by  the  Catholic  religion.  Catholicism  is  the  only  religion  of  its 
inhabitants,  and  also  has  been  the  aost.  effective  cause  of  the  submission  of  the  dif- 
ferent races  to  the  metropolis. 

Liberty  of  creeds  is  not  permitted  here,  and  for  these  reasons  it  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary that  the  Government  which  is  called  upon  to  look  upon  this  country  from  the 
lofty  position  of  a father  should,  for  the  best  interest  of  the  Philippine  Archipelago, 
adopt  all  necessary  measures  to  prevent  its  ideas  from  drifting  away  from  the  Catholic 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION.  465 


faith  and  the  professors  from  converting  their  position  into  a school  of  systems  or 
opinions  contrary  to  Catholic  dogma. 

We  can  confidently  assert,  judging  from  other  grave  evils  in  social  and  private  affairs 
sufficiently  apparent  in  1870,  when  the  secularization  of  education  was  considered, 
that  from  the  moment  in  which  education  is  put  in  the  hands  of  agnostic  professors 
the  Philippines  would  take  gigantic  strides  toward  their  separation  from  the  metrop- 
olis and  perhaps  toward  their  disappearance  from  the  list  of  civilized  nations. 

For  this  reason  it  is  necessary  to  make  an  express  or  implied  rule  that  every  person 
who  wishes  to  compete  for  any  vacant  chair  in  this  university  should  profess  the 
Catholic  religion  and  be  known  to  hold  ideas  in  complete  accord  with  the  dogmatic 
decisions  of  the  church,  a condition  which  can  not  be  made  in  the  Peninsula  for  con- 
stitutional reasons. 

Furthermore,  as  all  the  expenses  of  the  university  are  defrayed  by  the  funds  of  cor- 
porations or  establishments  which  owe  their  origin  or  existence  to  theCatholic  faith, 
it  is  just  that  the  professors  conform  to  the  religious  character  of  these  institutions, 
and  that  the  Government  grant  these  institutions  intervention  in  the  appointment  of 
the  professors  and  in  the  formation  of  the  examination  board,  regulations,  etc.,  and 
this  can  only  be  done  by  holding  the  competitive  examinations  in  Manila,  for  said 
corporations  are  situated  there. 

In  conclusion  we  may  add  another  reason  worthy  of  consideration.  There  have 
always  been  in  the  Philippines  graduates  of  the  university  engaged  in  scientific 
professions  who  have  been  distinguished  for  their  talent  and  culture,  and  without 
doubt  some  of  them  have  been  fit  to  fill  professorships,  and  as  the  university  is 
situated  in  the  Philippines  it  is  not  just  to  shut  these  graduates  out  of  competitive 
examinations,  as  they  would  be  practically  shut  out  by  the  great  expense  which 
they  would  be  under  if  obliged  to  take  the  examinations  in  the  Peninsula. 

This  can  not  be  said  of  persons  from  the  Peninsula,  foi  they  either  come  to  the 
Philippines  in  an  official  capacity,  or  when  private  persons  are  of  such  a grade  of 
special  fitness  that  the  success  of  their  journey  is  assured. 

It  is  a fact,  nevertheless,  that  there  have  never  been  competitive 
examinations  held  in  the  Philippines,  and  in  all  the  time  in  which 
these  courses  of  study  have  been  in  existence  onl}r  one  Filipino  has 
occupied  a chair  in  medicine  and  only  one  in  pharmacy. 

This  shows  us  that  all  the  reports  forwarded  by  the  Dominican 
friars  have  been  nothing  but  clever  evasions  of  the  laws  made  by  the 
Spanish  Government  (which  never  protested)  designed  to  operate  to 
their  own  advantage. 

As  an  appendix  to  this  chapter  let  us  set  forth  the  subject-matter 
which  was  (hypothetically)  required  of  aspirants  to  the  position  of 
practitioners  in  medicine  and  pharmacy  and  of  apprentices  to  midwives. 
On  page  12  the  fidl  course  for  these  professions  is  shown. 

Programme  of  studies  for  the  school  of  midwives,  assistant  surgeons, 
and  practitioners  in  pharmacy,  approved  bv  the  general  government 
of  these  islands  March  4,  1879,  and  December  22,  1879,  respectively, 
and  confirmed  by  the  supreme  government  of  the  metropolis. 

PRACTITIONERS  IN'  MEDICINE. 

First  term,  general  ideas  of  anatomy  and  physiology. 

Second  term,  general  ideas  of  therapeutics  and  a general  knowledge 
of  those  remedies  which,  on  account  of  their  easy  application,  can  be 
used  without  trouble  by  assistant  surgeons. 

The  use  of  external  medicine  in  its  various  forms. 

Third  term,  external  applications  and  bandages  and  the  so-called 
operations  in  minor  surgery. 

Fourth  term,  dentistry  and  chiropody;  the  extraction  of  teeth  and 
care  of  the  feet. 

General  review  of  all  the  courses.  Both  this  term  and  the  preceding 
shall  be  accompanied  by  practical  work  in  the  clinics  of  the  school  of 
medicine. 


I*  c 


30 


REPORT  OK  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


466 


PRACTITIONERS  IX  PHARMACY. 

First  term,  preliminary  ideas  of  physics  and  general  ideas  of  phar- 
maceutical chemistry. 

Second  term,  general  ideas  of  natural  pharmacology  or  the  study, 
knowledge  of,  and  practical  work  in  determining  the  different  sub- 
stances in  the  three  kingdoms  of  nature. 

Third  term,  studies  preliminary  to  operations.  Practical  work  in 
determining  chemical  products  and  knowledge  of  the  principal  phar- 
maceutical incompatibilities. 

Fourth  term,  practical  work  in  operations,  pharmaceutical  tariff',  and 
legislation. 

To  obtain  the  title  both  of  midwives  and  of  practitioners  of  medi- 
cine and  pharmacy,  a final  examination  must  be  passed  in  theory  and 
another  in  practice.  The  first  lasts  half  an  hour  and  the  second  an  hour 
and  a half  for  midwives,  and  each  examination  lasts  one  hour  for  prac- 
titioners in  pharmacy  and  half  an  hour  for  practitioners  in  medicine. 
Practitioners  in  pharmacy  can  not  exercise  their  profession  without 
having  proved  in  due  form  that  they  have  served  during  the  last  three 
terms  in  some  pharmacy. 


MimvivES. 

First  term:  (1)  A general  anatomical  and  physiological  idea  of  the 
human  body,  and  especially  of  that  of  woman.  Conditions  of  a body 
of  a woman  in  the  different  stages  of  infancy,  marriageable  age,  youth, 
critical  period,  and  old  age. 

(2)  The  pelvis  of  a woman,  its  bones,  articulations,  and  normal  diam- 
eters of  its  cavities.  The  variations  and  most  usual  abnormal  condi- 
tions of  the  parts  adjoining  the  pelvis,  the  manner  of  ascertaining  their 
proper  or  improper  formation. 

(3)  Functional  organs  of  generation,  external  and  internal,  and  their 
physiology,  especially  of  the  uterus  and  the  breasts. 

(4)  Functions  of  reproduction,  marriageable  age  in  woman,  menstru- 
ation and  its  stoppage,  conception,  product  of  the  conception,  the 
embryo  or  fetus,  successive  development  of  the  embryo  or  fetus  dur- 
ing the  months  of  pregnancy. 

(5)  General  ideas  of  diatetie  therapeutics  and  pharmaeopea,  and 
medical  substances  which  may  be  employed  by  midwives  in  cases  within 
their  jurisdiction  without  producing  serious  reverses. 

Second  term:  (1)  Pregnancy,  uterine  pregnancy,  equivocal  signs  and 
certain  signs  of  pregnancy,  both  those  apparent  to  observation  and 
those  given  by  the  fetus,  difficulties  peculiar  to  ordinary  pregnancy, 
and  the  course  that  midwives  should  pursue  regarding  them. 

(2)  Childbirth,  what  childbirth  consists  of,  conditions  which  exi>t 
both  in  the  mother  and  the  fetus,  practical  classification  of  deliveries, 
natural  delivery,  causes  of  delivery,  preliminary  phenomena  of  dilation 
and  expulsion,  duration  of  natural  delivery,  vital  phenomena  of  deliv- 
ery, true  pains,  pains  of  the  kidneys  and  false  pain,  mechanical  phe- 
nomena of  natural  delivery,  dilation  of  the  neck  of  the  womb,  water 
sack,  slime,  spasms,  and  retrocession  of  the  head  of  the  fetus,  different 
presentations  of  the  fetus  in  natural  delivery,  course  to  be  pursued  by 
midwife  with  patient  m delivery,  position  in  which  she  should  place 
patient,  preparations  for  delivery,  examination  of  patient  by  midwife, 
care  given  patient  by  midwife,  course  to  be  followed  by  midwife  iu 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


4(17 


simple  or  ordinary  eases,  conduct  of  extraordinary  cases  of  relaxation 
or  suspension  of  uterine  contraction  and  in  those  of  excess  of  energy 
or  irregularity  in  said  contraction. 

Third  term:  (L)  Artificial  delivery,  artificial  delivery  through  acci- 
dent of  the  mother,  obliquity  of  the  uterus,  weakness  of  the  woman, 
cessation  or  suspension  of  contraction  convulsions,  syncope  and  organic 
lesions.  The  fetus,  origin,  shortness  and  twisting  of  the  cord  and 
location  of  different  fetus,  artificial  deliveries,  through  malformation 
of  the  mother  or  of  the  fetus,  signs  showing  the  deatli  of  the  fetus 
in  the  womb,  conduct  and  duties  of  the  midwife  in  said  cases  of  artificial 
delivery. 

(2)  Expulsion  of  after  birth,  circumstances  which  may  retard  it, 
such  as  binding  of  the  placeta,  hemorrhages,  syncope,  and  convulsions; 
course  of  the  midwife  in  these  serious  cases. 

(3)  Care  midwife  should  take  of  newly  delivered  women,  phe- 
nomena consequent  on  delivery,  loches,  after  pains  and  lacteal  fever, 
hygiene  for  newly  delivered  women,  care  the  midwife  should  take  of 
newly  born  child,  tieing  of  the  cord,  asphyxia  and  apoplexy  in  new- 
born children,  first  and  urgent  aims  on  the  part  of  the  midwife  in 
these  cases,  cleanliness,  clothing,  and  nourishment  of  the  child  during 
the  first  day;  cicatrization  of  the  cord,  hygiene  of  the  child. 

(4)  Manner  of  administering  baptism  to  new-born  children  in  dan- 
ger of  death,  points  on  the  duties  of  midwives  in  the  proper  exercise 
of  their  profession,  laws  of  the  criminal  code  which  provide  penalties 
for  their  infraction. 

(5)  Practice  or  clinic  in  deliveries  with  daily  attendants. 

Fourth  and  last  term:  (1)  General  review  of  former  studies. 

(2)  Clinic  and  deliveries  with  daily  attendants.  Every  term  provides 
for  a course  of  daily  lessons. 


IV. 

SCHOOLS  FOR  MALE  AND  FEMALE  SCHOOL-TEACHERS. 

Following  the  order  of  their  creation,  we  must  first  take  up  the  school 
for  male  teachers.  The  normal  superior  school  for  male  teachers  has 
two  different  characters. 

When  it  was  created  by  royal  decree,  dated  December  2<>,  18t>3,  and 
its  management  committed  to  the  Jesuit  fathers,  it  had  only  the  "nor- 
mal" character,  but  by  another  decree  of  the  General  Government, 
dated  November  10,  1893,  and  approved  by  royal  order  dated  April 
11.  1894,  it  entered  the  “superior”  category.  Education  in  this  school 
comprises  two  grades,  elementary  and  superior.  By  the  elementary 
education  the  title  of  teacher  of  primary  elementary  instruction  is 
acquired,  and  it  is  divided  into  three  terms.  More  complete  education 
is  required  in  order  to  obtain  the  title  of  superior  teacher.  In  addition 
to  said  titles  the  title  of  assistant  teacher  of  primary  instruction  is 
obtained  in  this  establishment  by  those  who  pass  special  examinations 
which  are  held  four  times  a year. 

In  this  same  school  there  is  a school  of  primary  instruction  for  boys 
not  living  in  the  school,  which  is  conducted  l»y  scholars  in  the  advanced 
courses  under  the  direction  of  a professor,  and  thus  the  practice  neces- 
sary to  the  profession  of  teacher  is  acquired.  Article  9 of  the  regula- 
tions of  this  school  reads  as  follows:  “Both  boarding  and  day  scholars 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


4(18 


in  the  normal  school  must  possess  the  following  qualities  in  order  to  be 
admitted:  First,  to  be  natives  of  Spanish  dominions;  second,  to  be  13 
years  of  age.  which  must  lie  proved  by  certificate  of  baptism  or  other 
■public  document  of  equal  validity:  third,  to  be  free  from  contagious 
disease  and  to  be  sufficiently  vigorous  to  perform  the  tasks  and  duties 
of  a school-teacher;  fourth,  to  have  observed  good  conduct,  whit h must 
be  proven  by  certificate  of  the  parish  priest  of  the  town  of  their  birth 
and  home;  fifth,  to  speak  Spanish,  have  some  knowledge  of  Christian 
doctrine,  read  and  write  ordinarily  well,  know  something  of  Spanish 
grammar,  including  regular  verbs,  and  to  know  the  four  fundamental 
rules  of  arithmetic,  all  of  which  shall  be  required  of  them  in  a previous 
examination  held  by  the  examining  board  appointed  by  the  director.” 
The  courses  studied  were  as  follows: 


FIRST  ELEMENTAL  COURSE. 

Christian  doctrine  expounded;  elements  of  sacred  history;  the 
Spanish  language;  theory  and  practice  of  reading;  theory  and  practice 
of  writing;  arithmetic:  principles  of  general  geography  and  the 
geography  of  the  Philippines;  plain  drawing. 


SECOND  ELEMENTAL  COURSE. 

Expounded  catechism;  sacred  history  (third  grade):  history  of  Spain: 
theory  and  practice  of  reading;  theory  and  practice  of  writing;  arith- 
metic; Spanish  grammar;  plain  drawing. 

THIRD  ELEMENTAL  COURSE. 

Expounded  catechism;  Spanish  grammar;  geometry;  surveying; 
pedagogy:  agriculture:  plain  drawing;  deportment. 

SUPERIOR  COURSE. 

Advanced  pedagogy;  legislation  in  force  in  primary  instruction; 
ideas  of  religion  and  morality;  universal  history;  algebra;  industry 
and  commerce;  common  phenomena  of  nature. 

Instruction  given  boarding  scholars  was  more  complete  than  that 
given  day  scholars,  for  the  former  had  an  academy  of  music  and  a 
gymnasium,  classes  in  which  the  day  scholars  did  not  have  the  benefit  of. 

Still,  it  may  be  said  that  the  instruction  was  good,  although  the  plan 
of  studies  left  much  to  be  desired,  for  it  had  the  same  detects  as  the 
school  for  female  teachers,  as  will  be  seen  hereafter.  Between  board- 
ing and  day  scholars  about  500  youths  attended  the  classes  of  this 
school,  half  of  whom  were  boarders. 

The  normal  school  for  schoolmistresses  had  a double  character  like 
that  for  masters,  but  its  conditions  were  different. 

Until  the  year  1893  the  title  of  elemental  schoolmistress  was  con- 
ferred by  the  director  of  civil  administration,  after  an  examination 
which  was  undergone  by  the  graduates  of  the  different  colleges  in 
Manila  and  in  the  diff  erent  provinces  before  an  examining  board  organ- 
ized by  the  civil  governor  and  the  corregidor  of  Manila. 

These  examining  boards  were  composed  of  seven  persons,  among 
whom  were  the  civil  governor,  who  was  president,  the  rector  of  the 
cathedral,  the  director  of  the  normal  school,  and  the  directress  of  the 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


KVJ 

municipal  school  for  girls,  who  was  a Sister  of  Charity.  The  other 
two  members  were  elected  and  changed  every  two  years. 

The  examinations  were  not  strict,  for  they  dealt  with  subject-matter 
which  was  scarce  on  account  of  the  deficient  programme  of  studies. 

The  courses  on  which  these  examinations  were  held  were  the  courses 
of  the  whole  primary  instruction. 

The  education  of  schoolmistresses  from  said  year  181>3  until  the 
termination  of  Spanish  sovereignty  was  very  different. 

In  fact,  by  royal  decree  dated  March  11, 1892,  and  put  into  force  in 
the  following  year,  the  superior  normal  school  for  schoolmistresses  was 
established  in  Manila,  in  charge  of  the  Augustin  Nuns  of  the  Ascen- 
sion, who  came  from  the  Royal  College  of  Santa  Isabel  in  Madrid. 
This  school  also  issued  titles  of  schoolmistress  of  two  grades,  elemental 
and  superior. 

The  ancient  college  of  Santa  Isabel  in  Neuva  Caceres,  in  charge  of 
the  Sisters  of  Charity,  can  also  issue  titles  of  normal-school  mistress, 
for  this  right  was  granted  them  by  royal  decree  of  the  general  govern- 
ment of  June  9, 1875,  and  approved  by  royal  order  September  27, 1880. 
The  college  at  Bigan,  in  charge  of  Dominican  nuns,  was  granted  the 
same  right  by  a decree  whose  date  we  forget. 

The  subject-matter  of  the  instruction  in  both  branches  of  this  school 
comprises  the  following  courses: 

(1)  Religion  and  morality  (expounded  catechism  and  sacred  history): 
(2)  Spanish  grammar;  (3)  elocution;  (1)  arithmetic;  (5)  penmanship; 
(6)  general  geography  and  geography  of  Spain  in  the  Philippines;  (7) 
history  of  Spain  and  of  the  Philippines;  (8)  hygiene  and  domestic 
economy;  (9)  practical  industry;  (10)  geometry;  (11)  indoor  exercise; 
(12)  pedagogy;  (13)  natural  science;  (11)  music,  vocal  and  instru- 
mental; (15)  practical  instruction  in  teaching;  (16)  literature;  (17) 
drawing  as  applied  to  practical  work;  (18)  ideas  of  law  and  its  appli- 
cation to  the  ordinary  uses  of  life;  (19)  French;  (20)  English;  (21)  the 
teaching  of  deaf  mutes  and  the  blind;  (22)  finance. 

We  shall  limit  our  criticism  of  this  school  to  pointing  out  the  courses 
which  should  appear  in  the  list,  to  point  out  which  were  of  no  value 
as  some  were,  and  finally  we  shall  refer  to  the  method  in  which  instruc- 
tion was  given  in  the  others.  This  scheme  of  education  is  very  pre- 
tentious. Thus,  for  example,  the  natural  sciences  and  ideas  of  law  and 
literature  are  courses  which  should  be  given  much  less  importance  than 
others.  We  do  not  say,  however,  that  they  are  entirely  useless,  for 
their  usefulness  can  not  be  denied,  but  they  are  not  entirely  necessary 
to  a practical  education. 

In  regard  to  the  arrangement  of  courses,  we  may  say  that  in  some 
courses,  such  as  geography  and  history,  it  was  very  poor. 

The  ideas  of  law  were  not  taught,  and  the  course  was  only  used  for 
the  purpose  of  presenting  an  extensive  plan  to  the  public,  which  was 
also  true  of  the  courses  of  instruction  to  deaf  mutes  and  the  blind,  fine 
arts.  French,  and  English. 

Let  us  explain;  The  scholars  who  lived  in  the  school — that  is  to  say, 
the  boarders- — say  that  they  studied  these  languages,  but  the  fact  is 
that  they  rarely  learned  to  speak  any  words  in  French  and  never  any 
English.  The  Filipino  girls  who  attend  these  colleges  do  not  learn 
either  Spanish  or  French.  There  is  a rather  good  joke,  which  has 
occurred  several  times  on  feast  days,  that  boarding  scholars  in  this 
school  have  performed  comedies  in  French  before  the  public. 


470  REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 

For  the  rest,  the  instruction  given,  if  not  complete,  was  sufficient. 
Studies  for  the  elemental  grade  lasted  three  years  and  comprised  the 
courses  stated  as  far  as  No.  11.  inclusive,  for  the  first  and  second  year, 
and  from  courses  12  to  15  for  the  third  year. 

For  the  superior  grade  the  courses  of  the  former  years  were  studied 
more  extensively,  and  courses  Nos.  16,  17  were  added,  and  geometry 
substituted  for  drawing.  The  remaining  courses.  Nos.  18  to  22,  are 
optional  with  scholars  who  have  passed  the  fourth  year,  but  up  to  the 
present  time  there  has  not  been  any  case  of  any  scholar  having  passed 
examinations  in  them. 


V. 

SCHOOL  OF  ARTS  AND  TRADES. 

This  has  been  recently  created  in  the  Philippines,  and  dates  from 
the  month  of  March,  1891. 

By  a superior  decree  of  November  24.  1893,  the  instruction  given 
and  titles  issued  in  this  school  are  as  follows  : Some  of  this  instruction 
and  some  titles  were  also  in  existence  in  the  schools  of  Iloilo  and  Pam- 
panga. 

DEPARTMENT  OF  APPRENTICES. 


First  group. — Elements  of  arithmetic  and  elemental  geometry;  plain 
drawing;  work  in  the  workshops  of  the  school  in  the  trade  in  which 
the  apprentice  has  been  matriculated. 

Second  group. — Elements  of  physics;  study  of  materials  relating  to 
the  trade  in  which  the  student  has  matriculated;  industrial  drawing; 
work  in  the  shops  of  the  school  relating  to  the  trade  in  which  the 
student  has  matriculated. 

Third  group. — Elements  of  mechanics;  ornamental  drawing:  work 
in  the  workshops  (third  course). 

General  course  for  workmen  and  artisans,  without  reference  to  any 
particular  trade: 

Elements  of  arithmetic  and  geometry  and  their  application  to  arts 
and  trades;  elements  of  physics  and  chemistry  applied;  elements  of 
mechanics;  study  of  materials;  principles  of  construction;  industrial 
geometrical  drawing  with  instruments,  and  free-hand;  ornamental  fig- 
ure drawing  and  the  use  of  color  for  ornamental  purposes;  modeling 
and  carving;  mercantile  arithmetic;  bookkeeping  and  commercial  cor- 
respondence; French;  English;  final  instruction  in  practical  work  for 
horseshoers,  molders,  founders,  locksmiths,  wheelwrights,  cutters, 
boiler  maker,  carpenter,  cabinetmaker,  engraver,  compositor,  lithog- 
raphers, masons,  stonecutters,  and  potters. 


MECHANIC.* I.  ENGINEER. 

First  group>. — Elements  of  arithmetic  and  applied  geometry;  indus- 
trial drawing  of  machines;  setting-up  shop;  and  work  with  a tile. 

Second  group. — Elements  of  applied  physics;  industrial  drawing; 
setting-up  shop;  work  with  a lathe. 

Third  group. — Elements  of  mechanics,  comprising  static,  cinematic, 
dynamic,  and  hydraulic;  industrial  drawing;  and  the  making  of  plans 
of  machines. 

Fourth  group. — Motive  machines;  management  and  care  of  machines; 


REPORT  Ob'  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


471 


repairs;  practical  work  in  the  setting  up  and  mounting  of  machines; 
visits  to  industrial  establishments. 

EI  EfTRICIANS. 

First  group. — Elements  of  arithmetic  and  geometry:  industrial 
drawing  as  applied  to  electrical  machines;  elemental  work  with  a tile. 

Second  group. — Elements  of  applied  physics  and  chemistry;  applied 
industrial  drawing;  elemental  work  in  carpentering. 

Third  group. — Practical  electricity  (first  course);  electrical  unities 
and  measures;  study  of  plans. 

Fourth  gj'oup. — Practical  electricity  (second  course);  industrial  elec- 
trical motors;  settingup  electric  plants;  overhauling  electrical  plants. 

MASTERS  OF  WORKS. 

First  group. — (1)  Elements  of  arithmetic;* (2)  elements  of  geometry; 
lineal  and  topographical  drawing;  practical  work  in  stonecutting  and 
masonry. 

Second  group. — (1)  Elements  of  plane  trigonometry ; (2)  elements  of 
descriptive  geometry;  (3)  elements  of  topography;  ornamental  draw- 
ing: practical  work  in  carpentering. 

Third  group). — (1)  Elements  of  physics;  (2)  elements  of  static 
mechanics  and  study  of  the  durability  of  materials;  (3)  study  of  mate- 
rials; architectural  drawing;  practical  work  at  the  forge  and  in  setting 
up  machines. 

Fourth  group. — (1)  Elements  of  stereotyping;  (2)  construction; 
(3)  hygiene  of  construction;  legislation  on  city  property. 

MERCANTILE  PERITOS.1 

First  group. — (1)  Mercantile  arithmetic;  (2)  descriptive  geography; 
(3)  French  (first  course). 

Second  group. — (1)  Geography  and  commercial  statistics;  (2)  accounts 
and  bookkeeping;  (3)  English  (first  course);  (4)  French  (second  course). 

Third  group. — (1)  Elements  of  political  economy ; (2)  mercantile  and 
industrial  legislation;  (3)  practice  in  mercantile  correspondence  and 
operations;  (4)  English  (second  course). 

Anyone  seeing  nothing  but  the  handsome  plan  which  we  have  just 
set  forth  would  acquire  an  exalted  idea  of  this  school,  which  would, 
without  any  doubt,  be  a veritable  illusion. 

In  the  first  place,  the  decree  creating  it  did  not  provide  for  a staff  of 
more  than  11  professors  and  9 assistants  to  teach  the  courses  enu- 
merated, and  although  many  of  them  are  mentioned  more  than  once, 
it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that  the'-  are  to  be  applied  to  manv  different 
trades. 

In  the  second  place,  if  that  could  be  overlooked,  the  despicable  instruc- 
tion of  this  institution  was  influenced  and  determined  by  the  lack  of 
ability  of  the  faculty,  and  the  faculty,  it  is  but  just  to  say,  was  made 
up  of  favorites  of  the  Government,  and  was  of  a provisional  character, 
by  virtue  of  the  order  of  the  General  Government  dated  November 
24.  1893,  which  reads: 

Fifth.  The  positions  of  provisional  professors  and  assistants  shall,  for  the  present, 
be  filled  by  able  functionaries,  who  belong  to  civil  or  military  bodies  in  the  service 
of  the  State,  or  by  professors  of  the  same  course  in  other  educational  establishments, 
who  shall  receive  for  such  services  the  remuneration  assigned  in  the  budget. 


Peritos — Graduates  in  a mercantile  course  who  have  passed  final  examination. 


472 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


The  result  of  this  was  that  the  governor  gave  the  position  of  pro- 
fessor to  anyone  whom  he  wished  to  favor  with  a recompense,  whether 
he  had  ability  or  not;  and  in  the  majority  of  eases  the  men  appointed 
were  military  men. 

The  amount  of  service  which  this  school  could  render  may  be  judged 
by  the  following:  In  181*4.  2,833  scholars  matriculated,  and  of  these, 
out  of  309  who  were  examined,  only  268  were  passed.  In  the  work- 
shops 615  matriculated,  and  of  these  76  were  examined  and  35  passed. 

In  said  year  one  title  of  master  workman,  one  of  a skilled  man  in 
commerce,  one  of  a mine  foreman,  and  two  of  skilled  mechanics  were 
issued. 

Regarding  titles  of  men  skilled  in  commerce  and  mechanics,  we 
ought  to  say  that  they  were  also  issued  in  the  municipal  atheneum  and 
the  University  of  Santo  Tomas. 

The  title  of  mechanic  was  conferred  after  the  study  of  the  courses 
in  mathematics,  physics,  French,  and  one  in  applied  mechanics,  with- 
out any  practical  experience,  and  it  may  be  said  that  scholars  left  both 
centers  of  education  with  a purely  nominal  skill. 

Regarding  those  holding  titles  of  men  skilled  in  commerce  (peritos) 
we  must  do  those  from  the  municipal  atheneum  the  justice  to  say  that 
they  were  sufficiently  expert,  although  they  had  no  knowledge  of 
languages,  while  the  education  of  those  from  the  university  was  very 
deficient. 

The  plan  of  instruction  in  this  occupation  was  alike  in  all  these 
centers  of  learning. 

Nevertheless,  from  these  two  latter  establishments  about  seven  have 
graduated  with  the  title  of  "peritos,”  and  the  same  number  with  the 
title  of  skilled  mechanics. 


VI. 

SCHOOL  OF  AGRICULTURE. 

AVe  must  not  confound  this  school  with  the  agricultural  society  of 
the  Philippines,  an  institution  created  November  15,  1881,  and  a 
dependency  of  the  department  of  general  inspection  of  forests,  espe- 
cially  as  the  separation  of  these  two  institutions  was  effected  in  July, 
1884. 

The  school  of  agriculture  of  Manila,  theonlv  one  in  the  Philippines, 
was  created  by  royal  decree  dated  November  29,  1887,  and  its  objects 
were,  first,  the  necessary  theoretical  and  practical  education  of  skilled 
farmers.  Second,  education  of  overseers.  Third,  to  promote,  by 
means  of  observation,  experiment,  and  investigation,  the  agricultural 
progress  of  the  Philippines.  In  order  to  enter  officially  in  the  study 
of  scientific  agriculture  it  was  necessary  to  be  vouched  for  by  a valid 
certificate,  to  be  of  healthy  and  robust  appearance,  and  to  have  studied 
and  passed  examinations  in  the  following  courses  in  some  establish- 
ment of  the  secondary  education  or  other  properly  ac  "edited  estab- 
lishments : 


FIRST  YEAR. 

Elements  of  agriculture;  mathematical  problems;  practical  work  in 
topography;  linear  and  topographical  drawing. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


473 


SECOND  YEAR. 

Special  methods  of  cultivation;  element."  of  stock  breeding;  agri- 
cultural arts;  practical  work  in  cultivation  and  the  industries;  setting 
up  and  management  of  machines;  drawings  applied  to  machines  and 
to  plants. 

THIRD  YEAR. 

Elements  of  rural  economy;  accounts  and  agricultural  legislation; 
general  practical  work  in  cultivation,  stock  breeding,  and  industry; 
drawing  of  plans. 

The  education  of  overseers  was  carried  on  in  the  agricultural  sta- 
tions, also  created  at  the  same  time  as  the  school  in  Manila,  for  the 
purpose  of  doing  technical  work  in  analyses  of  earth,  systems  of  irri- 
gation, studies  of  seed,  acclimatization  of  vegetables  and  animals, 
study  and  treatment  of  epizootic,  epiphysis,  etc. 

There  were  agricultural  stations  in  Isabela  de  Luzon,  Ilocos,  Albay, 
Cebu,  Iloilo,  Mindinoa,  Jolo,  and  Leyte.  The  last  two  were  abolished 
by  royal  decrees  dated,  respectively,  September  10,  1888,  and  Decem- 
ber 7,  1891. 

The  professors  in  the  school  were  agricultural  engineers  and  their 
assistants  skilled  farmers.  In  the  first  term  of  this  school,  which  was 
begun  on  July  7,  1887,  as  this  branch  of  education  was  a new  thing, 
33  scholars  matriculated  in  the  course  for  skilled  farmers  and  22  in 
the  course  for  overseers. 

The  University  of  Santo  Tomas,  both  of  itself  and  through  the 
municipal  atheneum,  issued  certificates  to  skilled  farmers  and  sur- 
veyors, for  which  it  required  mathematics,  physics  and  chemistry, 
natural  history,  agriculture,  topography,  and  linear  and  topographical 
drawings. 

An  equal  number  of  skilled  farmers  graduated  from  each  of  these 
two  institutions  and  from  the  school  of  agriculture  simultaneously, 
and  when  the  school  was  not  in  existence  these  institutions  had  a much 
greater  attendance  in  these  branches. 

Without  guaranteeing  the  truth  of  the  following  detail,  we  put  it 
down:  Upon  its  establishment  the  school  of  agriculture  tried  to  secure 
the  exclusive  right  to  issue  titles  of  skilled  farmers,  but  it  seems  that 
it  did  not  prevail  against  the  influence  of  the  friars. 

VII. 

NAUTICAL  SCHOOL. 

m 

This  school  is  under  the  direction  of  the  commanding  general  of  the 
navy.  The  profession  of  pilot  of  merchant  marine  is  studied  in  this 
school.  Theoretical  instruction  is  given  in  the  school  and  practical 
instruction  in  navigation. 

The  courses,  which  covered  three  years’  study,  were  as  follows: 
Theory  and  practice  of  arithmetic  (first  year) ; algebra,  geometry,  and 
plane  trigonometry  (second  year);  spherical  trigonometry,  cosmog- 
raphy, and  pilotage  (third  year);  topography  and  topographical  and 
hydrographical  drawing  (third  year). 

The  education  acquired  in  this  school  was  very  good,  for  its  staff  of 
professors  was  excellent,  the  majority  being  Filipinos.  From  this 
school  many  pilots  of  the  present  merchant  marine  have  graduated. 


474 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


VIII. 

SUPERIOR  SCHOOL  OF  PAINTING,  SCULPTURE,  AND  ENGRAVING. 

The  reorganization,  of  this  school,  formerly  called  the  Academy  of 
Drawing,  dates  from  the  year  1892,  approximately. 

From  this  school,  in  spite  of  the  miserable  artistic  instruction  given, 
young  Filipinos  have  graduated  greatly  benefited,  and  some  of  them 
have  won  in  competitive  trials  the  prize  of  a scholarship  and  pension  in 
Madrid,  which  the  municipality  of  Manila  gave  every  four  years. 

In  the  new  organization  this  school  was  separated  from  the  school 
of  arts  and  trades,  their  union  being  impossible,  and  assumed  from 
that  time  the  name  by  which  it  has  been  known  since  the  year  1898. 
The  courses  taught  were  the  following: 

Principles  of  the  figure,  including  the  entire  body,  the  antique, 
drapery,  and  the  nude. 

Color,  composition. 

Landscape,  elemental  from  nature. 

Water  colors,  from  nature. 

Sculpture. 

Engraving  on  soft  substances. 

Engraving  in  intaglio. 

Pictorial  anatomy. 

History  and  theory  of  fine  art. 

Perspective. 

Drawing. 

The  professors  were  sufficiently  capable  personas,  and  some  Filipinos 
were  numbered  among  them. 

Two  hundred  to  three  hundred  youths  attended  this  school. 


IX. 


SEMINARIES. 

The  seminaries  which  existed  in  the  Philippines  for  the  purpose  of 
giving  priestly  education  to  the  youths  who  desired  to  receive  this 
catholic  sacrament  were  the  following: 

San  Carlos,  in  Manila,  in  charge  of  the  Jesuit  fathers;  that  of  the 
congregation  of  San  Vicente  de  Paul;  the  Seminary  of  Cebu,  in  charge 
of  the  same;  that  of  Nueva  Caceres  (Camarines),  under  the  direction 
of  the  same;  that  of  Jaro,  under  the  same  direction,  and  that  of  Bigan, 
in  charge  of  the  Augustinian  fathers. 

All  these  seminaries  were  governed  by  priests,  and  all  belonged  to 
the  secular  clergy. 

These  seminaries  operated  in  two  wavs:  They  taught  all  the  courses 
of  the  secondary  education,  and  in  order  to  take  orders  the  scholars 
were  taught  the  following  courses  more  or  less  extensively,  after  Inn  - 
ing passed  examinations  in  all  of  the  courses  of  the  secondary  educa- 
tion: Metaphysics,  moral  theology,  liturgy,  rubrics,  Gregorian  chant- 
ing, dogmatic  theology,  and  theological  topics. 

We  have  been  given  to  understand  that  the  last  two  couvses  were  not 
obligatory  in  order  to  take  orders. 

It  is  without  doubt  due  to  this  fact  that  the  education  of  the  Philip- 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


475 


pine  priests  could  not  congratulate  itself  upon  any  of  its  preceptors, 
but  rather  upon  its  own  original  spirit.  Not  much  could  be  expected 
of  it,  considering  the  sad  future  of  the  Philippine  priests  and  that  the 
finished  education  of  their  future  rivals  did  not  suit  the  Spanish  friars. 
It  is  certain  that,  with  some  very  honorable  exceptions,  Philippine 
priests  have  not  reached  in  their  ministry  the  same  grade  of  perfection 
which  their  compatriots  have  reached  in  other  careers. 

As  it  is  our  intention  to  talk  only  of  education,  we  refer  the  reader 
to  one  of  the  many  works  which  have  been  written  on  this  much- 
debated  matter  for  information  on  this  subject. 

The  number  of  scholars  in  the  seminaries  of  Manila  amounted  to  60 
or  80,  and  there  were  a great  many  more  in  the  provinces. 

X. 

MILITARY  ACADEMY. 

The  object  of  this  academy,  which  has  now  been  in  existence  a long 
time,  was  to  allow  sons  of  military  men  resident  in  the  colonies  to 
enter  the  militia,  and  to  enable  soldiers  and  noncommissioned  officers 
of  the  army  to  become  officers. 

To  attain  this  end  great  influence  was  necessary  for  a son  of  a 
native — and  generally  sons  of  natives  had  to  enlist  as  soldiers,  more 
especially  since  the  age  limit  has  been  lowered. 

Formerly,  when  the  scale  of  ages  was  different  in  the  colonies  from 
the  scale  in  Spain,  officers  graduated  from  this  academy,  but  afterwards 
when  the  scales  were  made  uniform  this  academy  was  closed,  and  opened 
again  later  under  different  conditions. 

The  scholars  who  finally  graduated  in  this  academy  were  entered  in 
the  general  military  academy  of  Spain,  in  Toledo,  which  annually  gave 
notice  to  the  academy  of  Manila  of  the  number  of  scholars  which  it 
could  accommodate. . 

This  highly  liberal  conduct  which  Spain  has  observed  in  this  colony 
in  spite  of  the  revolutions  which  she  has  had  to  put  down  here  has 
been  duly  responded  to  by  the  Philippine  military  men  who  have 
sworn  fidelity  to  Spain,  and  a good  proof  of  this  is  the  increased  num- 
ber of  military  Filipinos  who  have  gone  to  the  Peninsula. 

The  courses  which  were  taught  in  the  academy,  for  those  who  had 
formerly  been  examined  in  any  college  in  Spain  in  geography  and 
history,  were: 

Arithmetic  and  algebra,  geometry  and  trigonometry,  French,  lineal 
and  topographical  drawing. 

The  faculty  of  the  academy  was  very  able,  being  formed  from  offi- 
cers and  chiefs  of  learned  bodies,  and  those  who  graduated  had  been 
properly  educated. 

Examinations  were  comparatively  strict,  although  influence  also  was 
used  in  favor  of  some. 

About  a hundred  youths,  more  or  less,  attended  this  academy  each 
year. 

After  having  read  this  memorial,  even  an  unobservant  mind  may 
acquire  an  approximate  idea  of  the  state  of  education  in  the  Philip- 
pines when  they  became  subject  to  America.  By  reading  this  memo- 
rial the  deficiencies  of  education  may  be  appreciated,  its  irregularity 
comprehended,  and  its  thousand  anomalies  observed. 


REPORT  OF  THE  PHILIPPINE  COMMISSION. 


47b 

What  will  1)0  the  result  of  reading  this  memorial' 

It  would  he  of  great  benefit  to  the  Philippines  if  the  American  Gov- 
ernment should  establish  a radical  reform  in  education,  in  the  first 
place  giving  it  the  form  prevailing  in  America  and  Europe,  further 
systematizing  the  secondary  education,  giving  pecuniary  aid  to  young 
Filipinos  who  are  studying  the  different  professions,  which  have  been 
comparatively  undeveloped  in  the  Philippines,  in  order  .that  they  may 
finish  their  studies  in  America  and  Europe,  completely  reforming  the 
schools  of  agriculture  and  arts  and  trades,  for  in  them  rests  all  hope 
of  the  future  wealth  of  the  Philippines,  and.  above  all,  establishing, 
as  soon  as  possible,  schools  of  engineering  in  its  different  branches 
which  would  contribute  greatly  to  the  prosperity  of  this  country. 

Manila,  July  3-29,  1899. 


1 1ST  I)  E X . 


Names  of  leitnexxes  aypearivy  before  the.  Commission  ami  the  svlyects  testified  ahovt  by  each. 


Witnesses. 


Subjects. 


McLeod,. T.  F. 


Warner,  Edwin  H 


Arellano,  Senor  Cayetano  S 


Aguinaldo,  communication  with 

American  army  operations 

naval  operations 

Control  of  islands,  better  element  desires  United  States  to  i 
retain. 

Finances,  Americans  must  control  the 

Government,  form  of 

self,  capacity  of  natives  for 

natives  should  be  supervised  for  a time 

Governors,  provincial,  how  appointed 

capability  of  native 

I nsurgents,  advisability  of  offering  terms  to 

Indians  in  Manila,  increased  number  of 

character  of 

Licenses,  business 

Meeting  in  Manila,  advisability  of  inviting  better  element 
to. 

Native  officials,  corruption  of 

forces,  not  advisable  to  raise  now 

provincial  governors 

Negros,  rebellion  in 

Peace  commission , advisability  of 

Population 

Priests,  influence  of 

Spaniards,  influence  and  sentiment  of 

Subjugated  places, only  small  garrisons  necessary  for 

United  States,  form  of  government  of,  unknown  to  natives. 

relinquishment  of  control  by 


Bulacan  should  be  occupied 

Capital,  will  be  available  when  good  government  is 
established. 

Chinese,  remarks  concerning  the 

Coffee  raising  on  island  of  Orbera 

Currency,  remarks  concerning  the 

Food,  scarcity  of 

Government,  self,  capacity  of  natives  for 

Governor-general  should  have  veto  power 

Insurgents,  advisability  of  issuing  proclamation  to 

Labor,  wages  of,  will  increase 

Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway 

Public  works,  desirability  of  starting 

Railways,  lines  that  would  be  profitable 

promotion  of,  under  Spanish  rule 

Rice,  production  of 

some  years  has  to  be  imported 

formerly  exported 

planting,  crops,  and  harvesting 

Sugar,  brings  good  prices 

would  pay  to  engage  in  production  of 

Troops,  number  of,  required 

Water  power,  plenty  of 


Administration  of  justice  and  of  the  treasury,  people  com- 
plained of. 

Administrative  council,  the 

Advisory  general  council  should  be  suppressed 

Business  forms,  changes  needed  in 

Church,  participation  of,  in  government 

relation  of,  to  state 

Cortes  at  Madrid,  natives  desired  representative  in 

Courts 

present  system  of,  not  bad 

judicial  procedure,  changes  needed  in 


Page. 


1 

4, 12 
4 

4 
9 

12 

1,2 

5-7-9-12 

11 

5 
10 

7 

8 

10,11,12 

6 
9 

11 

13 

10 

6 

4 

2 

4 

8 

13 

8 

9 

13 

13 
16 

17,13,19 

16 

17 

14 
13 
13 

13 
16 

15 

15 

16 
16 

14 

15 
15 

15 

16 
16 
14 
16 
19 
22 

21,22 

24 

24.25 
22 

25.26 
22 

25 
25 


477 


478 


INDEX. 


.V mms  iif  irihii'KKin  appritrini / Injure  llic  ( 'ommixxiiin,  ile. — Continued. 


Witnesses. 


Subjects. 


Arellano  Senor  Cayetano  S.. 


Courts,  penal  code  should  be  reformed 

civil  and  commercial  codes  very  good 

language  used  in  difficult  to  change 

interpreters  embarrassing 

administration  of  justice, people  complained  of... 

judges  and  magistrates 

Government,  natives  desired  a representative  in  the  Cortes 

independence,  question  of,  not  raised 

autonomy,  natives  capable  of  small  amount. 

participation  of  church  in 

system  good  but  officials  bad 

administrative  functions 

republican  form  of, acceptable  to  Filipinos., 
general  parliament,  capable  men  could  be 

found  to  send  to 

provinces  to  a certain  extent  able  to  govern 
themselves 


composition  of,  under  Spanish  rule 

Laws,  all  made  in  Madrid 

could  be  intelligently  passed  by  natives  under 

American  supervision 

Taxes,  many  complaints  of 

question  of,  should  be  studied 

Revolution,  how  caused 

McLeod,  Neil 


1-age. 


25 

25 

25 

25 
22 
21 
22 
22 
23 
22 
22 

24,25,26,27 

26 


23 


23 

20 

20,21 

23 

26 

26 

22 

27 


Aguinaldo  a mere  puppet 

Americas,  article  signed  by 

Bar,  dredging  of 

Becker,  Professor,  mine  report  by 

Camphor  produced 

Chinese,  remarks  concerning 

the  mestizos 

Courts,  Filipinos  should  not  be  appointed  judges 

could  be  appointed  to  subordinate  posi- 
tions   

Customs  duties 


27 

446 

31 

31 

33 

33, 31,35,36 

41 

44 

44 

48 


Disturbing  element  is  of  mixed  blood 

Forman,  John, on  reputation  of  Tagalog  native 

Government,  self,  natives  could  be  intrusted  with  only 

minimum  amount 

Filipinos  in  subordinate  positions 

independence  impossible 

natives  should  be  ruled  with  a strong  hand, 
should  be  entirely  under  American  control., 
under  Americans, wealth  would  increase  ... 

municipal 

Hemp,  largely  exported  to  the  United  States 

Japanese,  but  few  families  in  the  islands 

Laws,  how  they  should  be  made 

Machinery,  a primitive  kind  used 

improved  varieties  greatly  demanded 

used  in  production  of  sugar 

Mestizos  resemble  the  Japanese 

Mineral  resources  plentiful 

coal  mines  abundant 

where  ‘ound 

have  never  been  worked  . . . 

Mines,  concessions  from  Spanish  Government 

skill,  capital,  and  railways  necessary  to  develop- 
ment of 

Natives,  necessary  to  subdue 

only  a handful  troublesome 

principal  producers  of  hemp  and  sugar  in  the 

southern  islands 

wives  of,  engaged  in  hand  weaving 

send  product  to  the  United  States 

I’riests, a disturbing  element 

Railroads,  country  well  adapted  to 

cost  of  Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway 

where  their  construction  would  pay 

lack  of  communication  causeof  country’s  poor 

development 

pilgrim  travel  very  profitable 

tobacco  provinces  could  be  tapped  at  Aparri . . . 

natives  fond  of  travel 

Rebellion,  prior  to  the,  Spaniards  governed  the  islands 

with  small  number  of  troops 

Religious  orders,  The 

The  Jesuits 

Roads,  much  needed 

suitable  stone  available  for  making 

Spaniards  constructed  some  good  highway* 


41 

42,43 

43 
41 

47,48 
50 
48 
49,50 
46, 47 

32 
41 

44 

33 

33 

34 

41 
28 

28,31 

29 

29 
29. 30 

30 
27 
27 

32 

33 

33 
42, 43 

36.37 

36 

2.7 , 38, 39, 40 

37 

37.38 

38 

40 

42 
42,43 
42,43 

45 

45 

46 


INDEX. 


479 


.Xaiihs  of  irilni'vxi  K iiji/iKii'iin / tirforc  the  ( 'oiiiiiiixsioii,  i/e. — Oonliiuu'il. 


Witnesses. 


McLeod.  Neil 


Loyez.  Knriijue 


Martinez,  Senor 


Tavera  ami  Tolentino.Senores 


Sulrjeets. 


Sanitariums  at  Benguet  ntui  Mayjayjay 

Sugar  exported  to  the  I'nited  States 

Schools,  a new  system  should  be  introduced 

manual  training  important 

general  remarks  eoneerning 

Tagalogsa  disturbing  clement 

should  be  kept  on  their  own  grounds 

have  no  government 

Taxes,  Americans  should  have  charge  of  collection 

Tariff  not  needed 

Troops,  number  required  to  preserve  order 

Spaniards  utilized  the  natives 

when  rebellion  occurred  two-thirds  deserted 

Government,  form  of 

governor-general  should  be  an  American  ... 

appointed  by  United  States 

Government 

voters  should  have  property  qualification. . . 

Property, amount  of,  owned  by  natives 

none  owned  by  insurgents 

Ibices  of  the  archipelago 

languages  of 

Tagalogs,  the  worst  race  in  the  islands 

demoralized  since  insurrection  against  Spaniards 

began  

Courts,  how  constituted 

judges,  salaries  of 

magistrates,  salaries  and  duties  of 

criminal  eases,  jury  system  suitable  to 

jurors,  qualifications  of 

partly  American  and  partly  Filipino, a good  system 

judges  of  the  peace 

Filipino  lawyers,  many  practiced 

fees 

Government,  fundamental  laws  of  Spanish  system  good.. 

Philippine  people  not  capable  of  self  rule., 
a limited  number  of  intelligent  men  could 

be  found  to  form  a legislature 

a freerformthan  formerly  could  be  granted. 

Laws,  how  and  where  made '. 

mortgages 

••  Laws  of  the  Indies” 

Property,  registration  of 

amount  of, owned  by  the  natives 

owners  intelligent  enough  to  vote  for  officers  .. 


Filipino  peace  commission 

Rosario,  Scnor,  vice-president  of  Filipino  congress 

remarks  of,  relative  to  securing  peace  and 

autonomous  government 

the  Philippine  assembly 

Tavern,  I)r.,  written  statement  presented  to,  by  Philippine 
Commission,  relative  to  proposed  form  of 

government 

Tolentino.  Senor,  torture  of,  by  Spaniards 

remarks  of,  on  the  war 

commissioned  to  carry  messages  t i 
Aguinaldo. 

Torres,  Senor,  remarks  on  universal  suffrage 

form  of  government 

taxes 


Calderon, Scnor  Felipe 


A rchipelago,  characteristics  of  inhabitants 
Education,  remarks  concerning 


Lope/.,  Senor  Angel 


Filipinos,  civil  war  among, and  rebellion  against  Aguin- 
aldo  

Friars  must  be  expelled  in  interest  of  peace 

Luna,  General,  declared  himself  dictator 

effect  of,  bad  for  revolution 

Priests,  native,  proposed  circular  to,  in  interest*  f peace  .. 

Pacification  of  the  people,  remarks  concerning 

Proportion  of  people  of  Batangas  who  can  read  ai  d writ  ■. 


Abra,  the  river 

Aparri,  attitude  of  natives  toward  United  States. . 

Cocoanut  trees,  many,  grow  on  the  islands 

Deported  men .’. 

Government,  remarks  concerning  form  of 

much  corruption  under  the  old  form 
J Gold,  brought  down  by  the  Ilpcanos , , 


Page. 


32 

•16 

46 

16 

34 

41 

11 

44 

49 

44 

45 
45 

50,51,52 

51 

51 

51 

52.53 
53 
53 

53.54 
51 


51 

51,55,56,57 

55 

56 

56 
56’ 
59 

57 
57 

57 

58 
58 


58 

59 

59 
55 
58 

55 

56 
56 

60 

60, 62 
62,63 

62,63,64 
66,  67 


63 

60, 61 
61 
61 


65 
65, 66 
67 

67,135 
68, 89 
257,258,259, 
260,261,262, 
263,364,265, 
266 

146 
146 
135 
135, 136 
144 
69, 70 
67 

70 

74 

71 
77 
76 

72 
72 

75 


480 


INDEX. 


Name*  of  witnesses  appearing  before  the  Omnmmon,  eta. — Continued. 


Witnesses. 


Subjects. 


Lopez,  Seiinr  Angel 


Collins,  Thomas . 


Melliza,  Sefior  . 


Sastron,  Sefior  Manuel 


Von  Boseli,  Adolph. 


Gold,  unexploited  mines  of,  in  Benguet 

Guardia  civil,  the 

Head  hunters  (Gaddanes) 

Igorrotes,  the 

llocos,  governmentof,  well  disposed  toward  United  States. 

Judiciary,  the  system  of 

judges,  number  of 

how  appointed 

salaries 

appeals 

system  was  satisfactory  to  the  people 

a jury  system  desirable 

Medicinal  plants 

Mineral  deposits 

Police,  pay  of , 

Products  of  the  islands 

Pueblos,  how  the  people  of,  are  disposed 

Shops,  licenses  of 

Taxes,  amount  of,  per  year 

where  sent 

the  eedula  persona! 

fishing  tax 

slaughter  tax 

toll  tax  on  bridges 

certificates  of  property  in  animals 

house-property  tax 

timber-cutting  tax 

Union,  province  of,  ownership  of  land  in 


Coffee  trees,  period  required  to  grow 

Medicinal  plants 

Mineral  deposits — gold, iron, and  coal 

Gum  trees 

Native  woods 

used  in  house  construction  and  shipbuild- 
ing   

firewood,  mangrove  used  for 

suitable  for  fine  furniture 

islands  well  wooded 

Timber  cutting 


Catholics,  influence  of 

Church  and  state,  separation  of 

Consular  jurisdiction 

Courts 

judges,  appointment  of 

Filipinos  distrustful  of  Americans 

should  not  be  separated  from  America 

hospitality  of 

Friars,  the 

cause  of  resistance  to  American  authority. 

property  of 

expulsion  of 

Rosario,  Sefior,  remarks  of,  concerning 

Government,  form  of 

proposed  constitution 

Indian, character  of  the 

Peace,  method  of  securing 

Spanish  newspapers,  influence  of 

War,  causes  of  the 


Page. 


Courts,  the 

judges  were  Spaniards  and  Filipinos  .. 

salaries  of 

how  appointed 

justices  of  the  peace 

appeals 

Government,  Filipinos  capable  of  larger  share  in. 

Governor,  council  of  the 

regulations  proposed  by 

Governor-General,  powers  of  the 

Governors  of  provinces,  duties 

salaries  

perquisites 

Filipinos  not  appointed  . 

Laws,  no  changes  to  suggest 

Provincial  junta,  powers  of 


Burcas,  port  of 

timber  in 

no  government  there 
Coffee,  planting  of 


75 

78 

75 

75 

71 
73 
73 
73 

73 
73,74 

74 

74 
75, 76 

75 
78 
74 

72 
78 

76 
76 
7(i 

76 

77 
77 
77 

77 

78 

78.79 

79 
88 

91 

92 
91 

79-92 

79.80 

80 

81,82,89 

91 

82, 83,84,85, 
86 

92 
100 

99 

96 

95.96.97 

96 

94.98 

97 
99 

93. 99 

93 
93 
99 

99, 100 

94. 95. 97 

101,102 

99 

92.93.98 

98 
98 

102 

106 

106 

106 

106 

106 

106 

106 

102, 103, 104 

103 

104 
105,106 

105 
105 
105 
107 

107 

108 
110 
110 
110 
116 


INDEX. 


481 


Names  of  witnesses  appearing  before  the  Commission , etc. — Continued. 


Witnesses. 


Subjects. 


rage. 


Von  Bosch,  Adolph 


Friars,  harsh  treatment  of 

Government,  Vicols  and  Tagalogs  capable  of  subordinate 

positions  in 

Americans  should  control 

overthrow  of  Spanish 

Natives  who  have  interests  favor  the  Americans 

Spaniards,  harsh  treatment  of 

Tagalogs,  a troublesome  race 

had  no  regular  government 

extorted  money 

were  oppressive 

Timber  cutting,  best  business  in  Philippines 


110 

110 

110 

109 

109 

111 

108 

109 

109 

109 

111,112,113, 

111,115 


Gonzaga,  Pilar,  Barreto,  and 
Zialcita,  Seiiores 


Aguinaldo,  emissaries  of 

anxious  to  finish  war 

Counselors  and  judges,  Filipinos  lit  to  serve  as. 

Courts 

Government,  proposed  form  of 

proposed  meeting 

provisional 


116 

116 

117,118 

126 

127 

117,118 

117 

119, 120, 121, 
122,123,124, 
125, 126 


Albert,  Sefior  Jos<5 

Aguinaldo,  position  occupied  under 

American  sovereignty,  vote  to  recognize 

Congress,  the  revolutionary 

purpose  of  was  to  form  a constitution 

Courts,  organization  of 

judges, appointment  of 

Government,  proposed  autonomous  constitution 

Luna,  General,  movements  of 

Mabina,  government  of 

Paterno  chosen  head  of  new  cabinet 

Peace,  committee  appointed  to  negotiate 

Property  rights,  protection  of 

Religious  orders,  expulsion  of 

confiscation  of  property 

Suspension  of  hostilities 

Fabie,  Angel 

Aguinaldo,  appointed  captain  of  the  port  by 

Aguinaldo,  Thomas,  organized  a gang  to  plunder  the 

towns 

American  domination  preferred 

all  the  sound-minded  natives  in 

favor  of 

Filipino  man-of-war,  offered  command  of  the  first 

Filipinos  get  their  ideas  from  their  leaders 

Germany,  reported  sale  of  islands  to 

Government,  when  Americans  succeed  in  establishing, 
“ Filipinos  will  be  more  American  than 

the  Americans” 

natives  not  now  capable  of  self-rule 

officials,  number  required 

Katapunin,  the,  a secret  society 

Manguianes,  the 

Manila,  people  of,  desire  to  learn  English 

Mindoro,  population  of 

rich  in  resources 

fever  there 

quinine  efficacious 

native  cattle  very  good 

Religious  orders 


Zialcita,  Sefior  Arcadio 


friars,  opposition  to 

expulsion  of 

Revolution,  review  of 

Sambon,  insurgent  governor  of  Mindoro 

Schools  should  be  established  and  English  taught 

Timurao,  a species  of  buffalo 

Tulisanes  lived  by  plunder  under  Spanish  rule,  but  are 
now  honest  people 


127 

128 
128, 129 

128 

128 

131,132 

132 
130,131 

129 
128 
129 
129, 134 

133 
132 
132 

134 
136 
136 

136,137 

138 

141 

139 
146 

140 


142 

142 

142. 143 
138 

142 

143 
138 
143 

143 

144 
144 
143 

143 

144 
266,267 

138 

143 

141.144 

142 

146 


Filipinos,  best  element  of,  favor  the  Americans. . . 

Government,  temporary  form 

autonomy  should  be  accepted 

Insurgent  territory,  description  of  visit  to 

Interview  with,  requests  that  it  be  not  published 

Leyte,  island  of,  conditions  in 

peace,  how  to  bring  about 

Luna,  General,  killing  of 

Paterno,  Pedro,  meeting  with 

Rice,  distribution  of 


150, 152 
151 

146 

147 

146 
149 
149 

148 

147 
150,151 


p c — voL,  2 31 


482 


INDEX, 


Xamss  of  witnesses  appearing  before  the  Commission,  etc. — Continued. 


Witnesses. 


Subjects. 


Page. 


Baibas.  Sefior  Bemaneio . 


Baland.  William  A 


Legat'd  a,  Senor  Benito. 


Barnes,  Charles  Tlderton. 


Warner,  Edwin  H 


Brown,  R.  W 


Jones.  H.  B.  C . 


Ongcakwe,  A.  R.  M 


Banking,  remarks  on 

Banco  Espanol-Filipino 

shareholders  of 

stock,  where  held  . 

capital 

Currency,  general  remarks  concerning 

Freight,  high  rate  of,  in  Philippines 

Hemp,  almost  all  of,  exported  to  America 

Sugar,  largely  exported  to  China  and  Japan 


American  trade,  prospect  of 

Agricultural  implements 

Banking 

Chinese,  remarks  concerning 

mestizo  or  half-caste  a bad  race 

Aguinaldo  a mestizo 

exclusion,  effect  of 

Cotton,  would  be  a good  market  for,  in  China  and  Japan. 

Courts,  establishment  of 

personnel  of 

Beath,  causes  of,  in  Philippines 

Government,  should  be  administered  by  Vnited  States. . . 

municipal 

civil  form  should  be  speedily  established  . . 

Health  of  foreigners  in  Philippines 

Hemp,  a sufficient  quantity  now  raised 

Machinery ’ 

Police,  corruption  of,  a cause  of  the  revolution 

Railroads 

Typhoons  and  earthquakes 


Chinese,  remarks  concerning. . . 

mestizo,  the 

Currency,  remarks  concerning  . 
Government: 

Civil 

Municipal 


Chinese,  remarks  concerning 

Currency,  general  remarks  on 

Exportation,  sugar  and  hemp  principal  articles  of  . 
Natives,  a sufficient  number  of  laborers  i 


> among 

brought  up  in  a bad  school 

many  capable  of  taking  part  in  public  affairs 

Railway,  the  Manila  and  Bagupan,  increased  rice  produc- 
tion 100  per  cent 


Chinese,  remarks  concerning . 


Cotuts,  establishment  of 

Currency,  remarks  concerning. 


Flour,  importations  of 

Native  as  a workman 

Petroleum,  importations  of 

Railway,  the  Manila  and  Bagupan,  has  increased  rice  pro- 
duction 50  per  cent 

the  Manila  and  Bagupan, built  by  the  natives... 


Banks  and  banking 

Chartered  Bank  of  India,  China,  and  Australia,  agent  of. 

Chinese,  remarks  concerning 

mestizos 

Courts,  establishment  of 

Foreigners  who  control  trade  of  the  islands 


Banking 

Chinese,  remarks  concerning  . . 

mestizos,  the 

Courts,  establishment  of 

Currency,  remarks  concerning. 


Hemp  centers 

Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank,  in  charge  of . 


Chinese,  remarks  concerning . 
Sugar,  exporter  of 


152 

158,159 

159 

160 
ICO 
ICO 

152-158 

157 

157 

157 

ICO 

1G9 

169 
162, 163 

163, 164, 165, 
167,168 

167 

168 
172, 173 

172 

173 

174 
172 

174 

175 

175 
172 

170,171,172 
169, 170 
174, 175 

170 
170 

176 

178, 179, 180 
179 

176,177,178 

181 

180,181 

182 

187,188,189 
182, 183, 184, 
185,180, 187 
182 

190 

190 

190 

188 

191 

198, 199,200, 
201 

200,201 
192, 193, 194, 
195, 196,197 
194 
200 
194 

200 

200 

201 

208,209 

201 

204,205,206 

205 

206,207 

207 

209 

212,213,214. 

215 

215,216,217 

216 

217.218 
210,211,212, 
213,214,215 

218 

209 

218 

218.219 
218 


INDEX. 


488 


Nam  fit  of  witnesses  appearing  before  the  Commission,  etc. — -Continued. 


Witnesses. 


Subjects. 


Page. 


Palancft,  Carlos 


Business  engaged  in 

Chinese  name  of 

remarks  concerning 


mestizos,  the 

Mines — gold,  copper,  iron,  tin,  and  coal 
Products  of  the  Philippines 

Knensle,  A 


219 

219 

219 

220,221,222, 

223,224,225, 

224 

223, 272, 275 
271,272,273, 
274,276,277 

225 


Flexner,  Dr.  Simon 


Chinese,  remarks  concerning 

mestizos,  the 

Courts,  establishment  of 

Currency,  remarks  on 

Filipinos,  will  not  work 

insurgents  not  worth  much 

government  by  them  would  be  worse  than  under 

the  Spaniards 

Government,  Filipinos  not  capable  of  self-rule 

could  be  educated  for 

form  adapted  to  

municipal 


Diseases  prevalent  in  Philippines 

fevers— malarial  and  typhoid. 

“ dengue” 

intestinal 


Barker,  Dr.  L.  F. 


diarrhea  and  dysentery  most  fatal 

beriberi 

leprosy 

tuberculosis 

venereal 

Pathology,  professor  of 

Residence,  Philadelphia,  Pa 


Anaemia,  a common  complaint  in  Philippines 
Climate,  nature  of  the 


228, 229 

229 

230 
226, 227 

229 

229 


229 

230 
230 

230 

231 

231 

232 
232 
232 
232 
232 

232.233 
235, 236 

233. 234 

235 
231 
231 

236 

237 
237 


effect  on  Americans 


237 


Paya,  Santiago. 


Cholera,  protection  against 

Health,  rules  for  preserving  in  Philippines 

Heat  prostration 

Leprosy,  transmission  of 

Malaria 

Morgue,  necessity  of  a public 

Pathological  anatomy,  professor  of 

Rainy  season  a cause  of  dysentery 

Soldiers,  health  of  the 

Sun,  effect  of  the 

Venereal  diseases 


Williams,  O.F.. United  States 
consul,  Manila. 


Municipal  Atheneum,  the 

Natives  readily  learn  to  read  and  write 

Normal  school,  the 

San  Juan  de  Letran,  College  of 

University  of  Santo  Tomas,  rector  of 

foundation  of,  and  courses 


Chinese,  remarks  concerning. 

Education  of  the  natives 

Insurrection,  a review  of  the  . 


Saderra,  Miguel 


Self-government,  capacity  of  natives  for. 
United  States  courts,  establishment  of. . . 
Education,  remarks  concerning 


Torra,  Pedro 


Education,  remarks  concerning. 


McLeod,  J.T.B 


Banks  and  banking 

Chinese,  the 

Commerce 

Compania  Maritima 

Currency,  remarks  on 

Mail  contract  and  routes 

Mines,  coal 

gold 

Native  woods 

Navigation,  dangers  to,  very  great 

Manila  observatory  an  aid  to 

rivers  and  harbors,  improvement  of. 


242 

237, 238, 239 
237 
237 

239. 240 
241, 242 

237 
239 

240.241 

238 

241 

242 
245 
249 
245 

243, 244 
242 
243,244 
249 

252,253,254 

256 

249,250,251, 
252 
256 
255, 256 
278, 279, 280, 
281,282,283, 
287,288 
284,285,286, 
287, 288, 289, 
290 
308, 309 
309 
290 

294 

306, 307, 308 
290,291,292, 

OQQ 

303, 304 
305 

295 
300, 301 

301 

301,302,303 


484 


iNDEX. 


Names  of  vntnesses  appearing  before  the  Commission,  etc. — Continued. 


Witnesses. 


McLeod,  J.T.B 


Kline,  William 


Higgins,  H.  L 


Donaldson-Sim,F.  H 


Camps,  Jose 


Ashton,  Harold 


Bourns,  Dr.  Frank  S 


IjOyzaga,  Sen  or 


Legarda, Sefior  Benito 


Subjects. 


Page. 


Peace,  effect  of 

Railroads,  building  of 

Sailing  vessels,  manned  by  Filipinos 
Steamers,  lines  of 


296 
304, 305 
299 

291,292,294, 
295, 296, 297, 


New  York  and  Java  Trading  Company,  member  of  firm... 
Railways,  proposed  new  lines 


298 

310 

310,311,312, 


313 


cost  of  construction 

Manila  and  Ilagupan  Railway,  general  manager  of 

when  constructed 

has  increased  production. 

cost  of  construction 

not  a pecuniary  success. . . 
proposed  new  lines 


312 

313 

313 

314 

314,318,319 

314 

315,316,318, 


320 


products  carried 

natives  fond  of  travel 

passenger  and  freight  rates 

Chinese,  remarks  concerning 

Self-government,  natives  no  capacity  for 

Tea  and  coffee  planter 

Benguet,  proposed  sanitarium 

agricultural  products 

mineral  resources 

temperature 

general  description  of  province,  its  inhabitants 
and  products 


317 

317 
318,319 
321,322 

318 
323 

323,324 

325 

326 
326,327 


327,328,329, 

330,331,332 


Trinidad,  province  of  Benguet,  proprietor  of  sanitary 

hotel  in 

a resort  for  invailds 

climate 

medicinal  waters — 

native  fruits 

population 

Benguet,  province  of,  has  many  mines 

Igorrotes,  the 

religion  of 

furnished  no  recruits  t o insurgen  t arm y 

earthquakes 

Holiday,  Wise  & Co.,  member  of  firm 

Chinese,  remarks  concerning 

Currency,  general  remarks  on 


332 

332 

333 
333,334 

334 

335 
335 

335, 336 
335 
' 337 

337 

338 

340,341,342, 
343, 344, 345 
338,339,340, 
347 


Courts,  establishment  of 

Filipinos,  physical  characteristics 

Importation  of  cotton  goods,  machinery, etc 

Jews,  a few  peddlers  in  Manila 

Self-government,  natives  no  capacity  for 

Tariff,  the 

Chief  Surgeon  Volunteer  Army  with  rank  of  major 

Chinese,  immigration  of,  should  be  restricted 

Currency 

Description  of  former  visits  to  Philippines 

Duties  performed  by 

Foreigners,  attitude  of,  toward  American  sovereignty  — 

Friars,  antagonism  to  the 

Government,  form  of 


345, 346 
344 

346 
315 

343,344 

347 
347 

367 

368 
347 

349,350,351 

352 

363 

353,354,358, 
359, 360 


independence,  natives  not  fit  for. 

anarchy  would  result. 
Negros,  constitution  of 


352 

352 


354, 355, 356, 
357 


Insurgent  army,  treatment  of,  when  peace  is  restored 

Missionaries  should  be  encouraged  to  come 

Natives  peaceful  and  inclined  to  respect  authority 

Spaniards,  sentiment  of,  toward  Americans 

Tagalogs,  where  found 

Taxation,  Spanish  system  of 

Visayan  gronp,  principal  islands 

El  Comcrcio,  director  of 

Friars,  immorality  of _ 

antagonism  to,  a cause  of  the  revolution 

Government,  form  of,  under  Spanish  rule 

the  church  took  part  in  all  branches 

form  of,  suited  to  the  Filipino 

Spanish  press,  influenceof 

Aguinaido,  money  received  by,  from  Spain 

hostility  of,  toward  Americans 


363 

364 

361 
366 

362 
361 
358 

369 

370 

371 

369 

370 

371,372,373 
374,375, 376 
376 
379 
381,382 


INDEX. 


485 


Names  of  witnesses  appearing  before  the  Commission,  etc. — Continued. 


Witnesses. 


Subjects. 


Page. 


Legarda, Sefior  Benito. 


Aguinaldo,  proclaims  independence 

admission  of,  that  he  was  not  promised  inde- 
pendence   

where  he  procured  arms 

expected  to  enter  Manila  with  Americans 

planned  to  plunder  city  and  attack  the  Amer- 
icans   

showed  repeated  acts  of  hostility 

called  a meeting  of  chiefs  for  purpose  of  mak- 
ing war 

prepared  for  attack 

Biac-na-Bato,  peace  treaty  of 

Destruction  of  Spanish  fleet,  natives  glad  of 

Filipino  soldiers  committed  robberies 

thought  the  Americans  cowards 

congress  dominated  by  Aguinaldo 

Hostilities,  outbreak  of 

Americans  tried  to  prevent 

signal  agreed  upon 

Independence  not  thought  of 

Insurgent  cabinet 

Katipunan  Society,  the 

Aguinaldo  a member 

“ Popular  clubs,”  formation  of,  for  spreading  anti-Ameri- 
can feeling 

Revolution  of  1896,  causes  of 

Spanish  treatment  of  Filipino  prisoners 


381 

381 

382 

383 


383 

384 

384 

385 

379 

380 
385 
385 

387 
385, 386 

385 

386 
379 

388 
377, 384 

377 


384 
376, 377 
377,378,379 


Tavera,  Dr.  Pardo  de 


Aguinaldo,  personality  of 

American  sovereignty  acceptable  to 

efforts  to  arrive  at  settlement  with 

American  protectorate  for  Philippines 

soldiers  insulted 

Biac-na-Bato  peace  treaty,  history  of 

Executions,  political,  occasions  for  merriment 

ladies  attended 

regarded  as  a patriotic  spectacle 

Filipino  revolution,  review  of  events  leading  up  to 

troops,  officers  of,  regarded  the  Americans  as 

cowards 

Friars  a great  cause  of  irritation  to  Filipinos 

assassination  of 


388 

390. 392 

391.392 
397 
391 
397 

394,395,396 

401 

402 
402 

389,390 

393 
395, 399 
396 


Xerez,  Sefior 


Luzuriaga,  Sefior 


Hostilties,  outbreak  of,  necessary  and  inevitable 

Aguinaldo  advised  to  start  them  before  arrival 

of  American  reenforcements 

Katipunan  Society,  the 

membership 

Malolos  constitution,  the 

native  commission  prepared  by 

government 

“Popular  clubs”  organized  to  promote  anti-American 

sentiment 

Revolution,  causes  of  the  uprising  against  the  Spaniards  . . 

Rizal,a  political  novelist 

influence  of 

arrested  and  banisned  at  friars’  instance 

opposed  to  the  revolution 

executed  by  the  Spaniards  

Physician 

Education 

Filipino  priests 

Friars,  the 

part  taken  by,  in  government 

treated  the  people  harshly 

system  of  taxation 

ridiculed  natives  who  spoke  Spanish 

expulsion  of 

are  very  rich 

Natives,  character  of 

are  abstemious 

dress  of  the  women 

ancient  religion  of,  still  preserved 

Self-government,  natives  not  capable  of 

Negros,  island  of,  president  of  the  Congress 

conditions  in 

Babaylanes,  the 

civil  government 

constitution  of 

education 

Chinese,  the 

courts,  the 

climate  healthy 


397, 398 

398 

399 
399 

392, 393 
392 
391,392 


392 
398, 399 

399 

400 

400 

401 

401 

402 

412 
405,406 

402 

403 

403,404,408 
403, 404, 407 
407 

410 

413 

411 
411 
410 

409,410 
412, 413 

414 

414.415.416 

415.416.417 
416 

416 

417 
417 

417 

418 


486 


INDEX. 


Names  of  witnesses  appearing  before  the  Commission,  etc. — Continued. 


Witnesses. 

Subjects. 

Page. 

419 

Friars,  hostility  to 

419,420,421 

property,  taxation  of 

422 

banks,  establishment  of 

422 

railroads 

422 

shipping 

422 

INDEX  OF  EXHIBITS. 


■ Page. 


Exhibit  I.  Taxes  collected  by  the  revolutionary  leaders 423 

II.  Memorandum  of  Chan  Quiensien  (Carlos  Palanca) 425 

III.  Aguinaldo  to  brother  Filipinos  asking  a Christmas  present 427 

IV.  Memorandum  on  the  Chinese  in  the  Philippines  by  Gabriel 

Garcia  Ageo 432 

V.  Memorandum  on  the  Philippines  by  “Americus” 446 

VI.  Public  instruction  in  the  Philippines  during  the  time  of  Spanish 

sovereignty 456 


SUBJECT  INDEX. 


Principal  matters  testified  to  by  witnesses  whose  testimony  is  presented  herein. 


Page. 

Aguiualdo,  communication  with 4, 12 

a mere  puppet 27 

Albert,  Senor  Jos4,  position  occupied  by,  under 128 

Gonzaga,  Pilar,  Barreto,  Zialcita,  Senores,  emissaries 116, 117, 118 

Fabie,  Angel,  appointed  captain  of  the  port  by 136 

a mestizo 168 

money  received  by,  from  Spain 379 

hostility  of,  toward  Americans 381 

proclaims  independence 381 

admission  of,  that  he  was  not  promised  independence 381 

where  he  procured  arms 382 

expected  to  enter  Manila  with  Americans 383 

planned  to  plunder  city  and  attack  Americans 383 

showed  repeated  acts  of  hostility 384 

called  a meeting  of  chiefs  for  purpose  of  making  war 384 

prepared  for  attack 385 

personality  of 390, 392 

American  sovereignty  acceptable  to 391, 392 

efforts  to  arrive  at  settlement  with 397 


to  brother  Filipinos  asking  a Christmas  present 427 

anxious  to  finish  the  war 117 

Aguinaldo,  Thomas,  organized  a gang  to  plunder  the  towns 136, 137 

Administrative  council,  the 21, 22 

Advisory  general  council  should  be  suppressed 24 

American  army  operations 4 

naval  operations 4 4 

control  of  the  islands,  better  native  element  desires 9 

sovereignty,  vote  to  recognize 128, 129 

domination  preferred 138 

all  sound-minded  natives  in  favor  of 141 

trade,  prospect  of 169 

protectorate  for  Philippines 391 

soldiers  insulted 397 

“Americus,”  article  signed  by 446 

Archipelago  Philippine,  characteristics  of  inhabitants 68,  69 

Agricultural  implements 169 

Banks  and  banking,  Baibas,  Senor  Bernancio,  remarks  of,  concerning 158, 159 

Banco  Espanol-Filipino 159, 160 

Daland,  'William  A.,  remarks  of,  concerning 162, 163 

Brown,  R.  W.,  remarks  of,  concerning 208,209 

Jones,  H.  D.  C.,  remarks  of,  concerning 212,213,214,215 

McLeod,  J.  T.  B.,  remarks  of 308,309 

Luzuriaga,  Senor,  remarks  of 422 

Chartered  Bank  of  India,  China,  and  Australia 201 

Benguet,  province  of 323-337 

Biac-na-bato,  peace  treaty  of 379 

history  of 394,395,396 

Camphor  produced .• 33 

Capacity  of  Natives  for  self-government,  etc.  (See  Government.) 

Capital  will  be  available  when  good  government  is  established 16 

Catholics,  influence  of,  in  the  islands 100 

Chartered  Bank  of  India,  China,  and  Australia 201 


487 


488 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Chinese,  useful  but  unpopular 17 

a great  drain  on  the  country 17 

good  distributers  of  merchandise 17 

remit  all  their  earnings  to  China 17, 187 

natives  will  do  coolie  work 18 

unpopular  in  Samar 18 

much  given  to  cheating 18 

many  places  won’t  have  them 18 

Spaniards  allowed  entry  of,  only  as  coolies  for  field  work 18 

head  tax  under  Spanish  rule 18, 34, 35, 201, 221 , 222 

set  up  small  shops  after  accumulating  a little  money 19 

if  excluded  work  would  be  done  by  natives 19 

women  not  allowed  to  enter 19 

troublesome  half-breed  population 19 

Aguinaldo  has  Chinese  blood 19 

work  the  hemp  plantations 33 

are  industrious  people 33 

more  of  them  wanted 33 

work  on  the  sugar  plantations 34 

supplanted  the  Indians  in  hard  work 34 

to-day  do  all  the  work 34 

should  not  be  excluded 34 

should  be  allowed  free  entrance 34, 223, 228, 229 

orderly  and  easily  governed 35 

have  taken  no  part  in  the  war 35 

the  Indios  have  maltreated  them 35 

do  not  bring  their  wives 35 

a big  source  of  revenue  to  the  Spaniards 35 

trading  licenses  for,  should  be  restricted 35 

needed  only  to  take  the  place  of  the  Tagalogs 36 

mestizos  all  bad 41, 167 

resemble  the  Japanese 41 

number  of,  in  Manila 163,  218 

day  laborers  and  storekeepers 163, 164 

pay  of 164 

Filipinos  trade  with 163 

remain  in  the  cities 164 

character  of 164 

Spaniards  regarded  them  favorably 164 

Filipinos  against  them 165, 179, 188, 198 

entry  of,  should  be  restricted 165, 166, 167, 179, 180 

after  making  money  they  return  home 165 

women,  coming  of,  desirable 167 

education  of 167, 168 

prefer  rule  of  white  men 168 

Aguinaldo  a mestizo 168 

exclusion,  effect  of 172, 173, 188, 254 

not  honest  merchants 178, 322 

work  better  than  the  Indian 178 

engage  in  commerce : 178 

number  of,  in  Manila 178 

a demoralizing  people 178 

have  their  own  laws 178 

should  not  be  allowed  suffrage 179 

mestizo  a good  citizen  and  hard  worker 179 

not  desirable  citizens 187 

intermarry  and  produce  a bad  race — the  mestizos 187, 190 

will  not  become  agriculturists 188 

mestizos  unreliable 188 

natives  slaughtered  them 189, 222 

are  good  citizens  generally,  but  dishonest 198 

first-rate  coolies 498 

save  their  money  and  start  small  stores 198 

take  no  part  in  government — a quiet  people 198 

mestizos,  the 199 

admission  of,  as  contract  laborers 199 


INDEX. 


48(.) 


Page. 

Chinese,  regard  the  United  States  with  more  favor  than  other  governments. . 199,  254 

their  exclusion  would  not  affect  industries 201 

of  great  service  to  importing  firms 204 

many  have  become  rich  and  important  merchants 205 

as  laborers,  are  necessary  for  the  country’s  advancement 205 

Filipinos  opposed  to  them 205,  217 

character  of,  in  business 205 

take  no  interest  in  politics 205 

mestizos  are  very  tricky 205 

necessary  to  let  the  coolies  in 205, 206 

superior  to  Filipinos  as  workmen . 34, 206 

entry  of,  should  be  restricted 215, 216, 217 

more  skilled  than  the  native 215 

their  labor  necessary 216 

are  great  merchants 216 

the  mestizos  a bad  lot 216 

are  merchants  and  peddlers 218 

are  good  people 218 

number  of,  in  Philippine  Islands 219,  220,  339 

are  engaged  in  agriculture 219 

friendly  toward  the  United  States. 219 

are  law  abiding 219 

they  should  be  admitted 219 

Palanca,  Carlos,  head  man  of  Chinese  under  Spanish  rule 20 

mortality  among 220,  221 

number  coming  yearly - 221 

industrious  and  good  workmen 222 

wages  of,  per  day 224 

mestizos  are  very  wealthy 224 

those  coming  to  the  Philippines  are  uneducated 224 

registration  of 225 

under  good  laws  would  be  good  people 228 

do  not  perform  much  agricultural  work 228 

anxious  to  locate  under  any  civilized  government 228 

Filipinos  will  not  work 229 

get  along  well  with  the  Filipinos 229 

mestizos  or  half  castes  dangerous 229 

character  of 252, 309 

cooly  system 252 

should  be  admitted  only  for  contract  work 321 

are  traders 340 

fairly  honest 340 

immigration,  restriction  of 340, 341,  342,  344,  367 

occupations  of,  in  island  of  Negros 417 

memorandum  of  Chan  Quiensien  (Carlos  Palanca) 425 

memorandum  on  the  Chinese  in  the  Philippines  by  Gabriel  Garcia 

Ageo 432 

Church  and  state,  separation  of 99 

relation  of,  to  state 25,26 

participation  of,  in  government 22 

Cholera,  protection  against,  remarks  of  Dr.  L.  F.  Barker 242 

Climate,  effect  of,  on  Americans,  remarks  of  Dr.  L.  F.  Barker 237 

Coffee  raising 16. 116 

trees,  period  required  to  grow ’. 88 

Consular  jurisdiction 96 

Control  of  islands,  better  native  element  desires  United  States  to  retain 9 

Congress,  the  revolutionary  congress 128 

Cortes,  natives  desired  a representative  in 22 

Cotton,  would  be  a good  market  for,  in  China  and  Japan. 172 

Cocoanut  trees,  many  grow  in  the  islands 77 

Counselors  and  judges,  Filipinos  fit  to  serve  as 126 

Commerce 290 

Compania  Maritima 294 

Courts,  present  system  of,  not  bad 25 

judicial  procedure,  changes  needed  in 24, 25 

penal  code  should  be  reformed 25 


490 


INDEX. 


Papa 

Courts,  civil  and  commercial  codes  are  very  good 25 

language  used  in,  difficult  to  change 25 

interpreters  embarrassing 25 

administration  of  justice,  people  complained  of 22 

judges  and  magistrates 21 

Filipinos  should  not  be  appointed  judges 44 

could  be  appointed  to  subordinate  positions 44 

how  constituted 55, 56, 57,  73 

judges,  salaries  of 55 

magistrates,  salaries  and  duties 56 

criminal  cases,  jury  system  suitable  to 56 

jurors,  qualifications  of 56 

partly  American  and  partly  Filipino  a good  system 59 

judges  of  the  peace " 57 

Filipino  lawyers,  many  practiced 57 

fees 57 

judges,  number  of 73 

how  appointed  and  salaries 73, 96, 106, 132 

appeals 73,  74, 106 

system  was  satisfactory  to  the  people 74 

a jury  system  desirable 74 

judges  were  Spaniards  and  Filipinos 106 

justices  of  the  peace 106 

establishment  of 173, 200, 201,  206, 207, 217, 218, 230, 344, 345, 417 

Currency,  remarks  of  Edwin  H.  Warner 17, 192, 193, 194, 195, 196, 197 

Sehor  Bernancio  Baibas 152, 153, 154, 155, 156, 157, 158 

Senor  Benito  Legarda 176, 177, 178 

Charles  Ilderton  Barnes 182, 183, 184, 185, 186, 187 


A.  Kuensle 226,  227 

J.  T.  B.  McLeod 306, 307, 308 

Harold  Ashton 338,339,340,347 

Dr.  Frank  S.  Bourns 368 

Customs  duties 48 

Death,  causes  of,  in  Philippines 172 

Deported  men 76 

Destruction  of  Spanish  fleet  by  Americans,  natives  glad  of 380 

Disturbing  element  is  of  mixed  blood 41 

Diseases  prevalent  in  Philippines 232 

fevers,  malarial  and  typhoid 232, 239, 240 

“dengue” 232 

intestinal 232 

. diarrhea  and  dysentery  most  fatal 232 


beriberi , 232,233 

leprosy 235, 236 

transmission  of 237 

tuberculosis 233, 234 

venereal 235, 241 

anaemia,  a common  complaint 237 

rainy  season  a cause  of  dysentery 239 

Earthquakes 170,336 

Education,  was  under  the  control  of  the  religious  orders 46, 456 

a new  system  should  be.  introduced 46 

manual  training  important 46 

remarks  of  Senor  Felipe  Calderon  concerning 257, 

258,  259,  260,  261,  262,  263,  264,  265,  266 

new  schools  should  be  established  and  English  taught 143 

natives  readily  learn  to  read  and  write 249 

municipal  atheneum,  the 245 

normal  school,  the 245 

San  Juan  de  Letran,  College  of 243,  244 

Santo  Tomas,  University  of 242, 243, 244 

remarks  of  United  States  Consul  0.  F.  Williams 256 

Miguel  Saderra 278,  279, 280,  281,  282, 283, 287, 288 

Pedro  Torra 284,  285,  286,  287,  288,  289,  290 

Senor  Xerez 412 


INDEX. 


491 

Page. 

Education,  remarks  of  Sefior  Luzuriaga 417 

public  instruction  in  the  Philippines  during  the  time  of  Spanish 

sovereignty 456 

Executions,  political,  occasions  for  merriment 401 

Spanish  ladies  attended 402 

regarded  as  a patriotic  spectacle 402 

Exportation,  sugar  and  hemp  principal  articles  of 182 

Filipinos,  civil  war  among,  and  rebellion  against  Aguinaldo 146 

distrustful  of  Americans 94,  98 

should  not  be  separated  from  America 97 

hospitality  of 99 

get  their  ideas  from  their  leaders 146 

best  element  of,  favor  the  Americans 150, 152 

will  not  work 229 

the  insurgents  not  worth  much 229 

government  by  them  would  be  worse  than  under  the  Spaniards 229 

physical  characteristics 344 

their  soldiers  committed  robberies 385 

thought  the  Americans  cowards 385, 393 

congress  of,  dominated  by  Aguinaldo 387 

revolution  of,  review  of  events  leading  up  to 389, 390 

native  priests 405, 406 

character  of 411 

are  abstemious 411 

dress  of  the  women 410 

ancient  religion  of,  still  preserved 409, 410 

Aguinaldo  to,  asking  a Christmas  present 427 

peace  commission  of 60,62 

Finances,  Americans  must  control  the 12 

Food,  scarcity  of 14 

Forman,  John,  on  reputation  of  Tagalog  native 42, 43 

Flour,  importation  of 194 

Foreigners  who  control  trade  of  the  islands 207 

attitude  of,  toward  American  sovereignty 352 

Freight,  high  rate  of,  in  Philippines 157 

Friars.  (See  Religious  orders. ) 

Germany,  reported  sale  of  islands  to 140 

Government: 

Self-government,  capacity  of  natives  for 5, 6,  7, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 23, 43, 

58, 59,  72, 142, 190,  230,  256,  318,  3.44,  352, 371, 372, 373,  412, 413 

natives  should  be  supervised  for  a time 11 

desired  a representative  in  the  Cortes 22 

independence,  question  of,  not  raised 22 

impossible 47,  48 

not  thought  of 379 

natives  not  fit  for 352 

anarchy  would  result 352 

would  be  worse  than  under  the  Spaniards.  229 

plan  proposed  by  President  of  the  United  States 117 

proposed  form  of 1, 

2,  59,  63,  65,  66,  72,  94,  95,  97,  110, 117, 118, 151, 
174, 230,  231,  353,  354,  358,  359,  360,  371,  372,  373 

autonomy,  natives  capable  of  small  amount 23 

should  be  accepted 146 

constitution  of  Negros 354, 355,  356,  357 

republican  form  acceptable  to  Filipinos 26 

participation  of  church  in 22 

administrative  functions 24,  25,  26, 27 

general  parliament,  capable  men  could  be  found  to  send  to  23 

natives  could  be  intrusted  with  only  a minimum  amount 

of  self-rule 43 

Filipinos  in  subordinate  positions  under 44, 110 

should  be  ruled  with  a strong  hand 50 

should  be  entirely  under  American  control 48 

American  control  of,  wealth  would  increase  under 49,  50, 110 

governor-general 51 


492 


INDEX. 


Government — Continued.  P 

Former  system  good,  but  officials  bad 

Municipal 4G,  47, 175, 180, 181, 

Voters  should  have  a property  qualification 

Spanish  system,  fundamental  laws  of,  good 

Legislature, a limited  number  of  intelligent  men  could  be  found  to  form.. 

A freer  form  than  formerly  could  be  granted 

Much  corruption  under  the  old  form 

Filipinos  capable  of  larger  share  in 

Americans  should  control 

Spanish,  overthrow  of 

Proposed  meeting  concerning 

Provisional 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 125, 

Proposed  autonomous  constitution 62, 03,  64, 130, 

When  Americans  succeed  in  establishing,  “Filipinos  will  be  more  Ameri- 
can than  the  Americans” 

Officials,  number  required 142, 

Temporary  form 

Should  be  administered  by  United  States 

Civil  form  should  be  speedily  established 175, 

Filipinos  could  be  educated  for 

Form  under  Spanish  rule 

Church  took  part  in  all  branches 

Civil  government 

Governors,  provincial,  how  appointed 

capability  of  native t 

Governor-general  should  be  an  American 

should  have  veto  power 

powers  of 

Governors  of  provinces,  duties 105, 

salaries 

perquisites 

Filipinos  not  appointed 

Governor,  council  of  the - 102,  103, 

regulations  proposed  by 

Head  hunters  (Gaddanes) 

Health  of  foreigners  in  Philippines 

the  soldiers 240, 

rules  for  preserving 237,  238, 

Heat  prostration 

Hemp,  largely  exported  to  the  United  States 32, 

a sufficient  quantity  raised 170, 171, 

centers  of 

Hongkong  and  Shanghai  Bank 

Hostilities,  outbreak  of 385, 

Americans  tried  to  prevent 

signal  agreed  upon 

necessary  and  inevitable 397, 

Aguinaldo  advised  to  start  them  before  arrival  of  Amer- 
ican reenforcements 

proposed  suspension  of 

Importation  of  cotton  goods,  machinery,  etc 

Insurgents,  advisability  of  offering  terms  to.  . 

issuing  proclamation  to 

army  of,  treatment  when  peace  is  restored 

cabinet  of - 

territory  of,  Senor  Zialcita  describes  visit  to 

own  no  property 

Insurrection,  a review  of  the 249, 250, 

Japanese,  but  few  families  in  the  Philippines 

Jews,  a few  peddlers  in  Manila  — 

Judiciary.  (See  Courts.) 

Katapuiiin,  the,  a secret  society 138, 377, 384, 

Aguinaldo  a member 

“Laws  of  the  Indies” 

Laws,  how  and  where  made 59, 

could  be  intelligently  passed  by  natives  under  American  supervision 


npe. 

22 

231 

51 

58 

58 

59 
72 

106 

110 

109 

117 

126 

131 

142 

143 
151 
174 
181 
230 

369 

370 
416 

5 

10 

51 

13 

104 
106 

105 
105 
105 
104 
103 

75 

172 

241 

239 

237 

157 

172 

218 

205 

386 

385 

386 
398 

398 
134 
345 

7 

13 

363 

388 

147 

53 

251 

41 

345 

399 
377 

58 

107 

23 


INDEX. 


493 


Tago. 


Leyte,  island  of,  conditions  in 149 

Luna,  General,  declared  himself  dictator 135, 136 

movements  of 129 

killing  of 148 

Mabina,  government  of 128 

Machinery,  improved  varieties  greatly  demanded 33, 34, 169, 170 

Mail  contract  and  routes 290, 291, 292 

Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway 15, 188, 200, 313, 314, 315, 316, 317, 318,  319, 320 

Medicinal  plants 75, 76 

Meeting  in  Manila,  advisability  of  inviting  better  element  to 9 

Mineral  resources: 

Mines,  coal  abundant 28,31 

where  found 29,92,303,304,335 

concessions  from  Spanish  Government 29, 30 

skill,  capital,  and  railways  necessary  to  develop 30 

gold 75,  92,  305 

copper,  iron,  and  tin 223, 272,  275 

Missionaries,  Protestant,  should  be  encouraged  to  come 364 

Morgue,  necessity  of  a public 241,242 

Mortgages 55 

Natives,  officials  corrupt 11 

necessary  to  subdue 27 

only  a handful  troublesome 27 

principal  producers  of  hemp  and  sugar  in  the  southern  islands 32 

wives  of,  engaged  in  hand  weaving 33 

product  sent  to  the  LTnited  States 33 

those  who  have  interests  favor  the  Americans 109 

capacity  of,  as  workmen 200 

many  capable  of  taking  part  in  public  affairs 190 

character  of 411 

are  abstemious : 411 

ancient  religion  of,  still  preserved 409, 410 

peaceable  and  inclined  to  respect  authority 303, 361 

not  advisable  to  raise  forces  of,  now 13 

Native  woods 295 


used  in  house  construction  and  shipbuilding 79,  80 

suitable  for  fine  furniture 81, 82,  89 

Negros,  island  of,  conditions  in 414, 415, 416, 417,  418,  419,  420, 421, 422 

rebellion  in 5 

Pacification  of  the  people,  remarks  of  Senor  Calderon 69,  70 

Paterno,  Pedro,  chosen  head  of  new  cabinet 129 

Peace  commission,  advisability  of . 4 

method  of  securing 92, 93,  98 

effect  of  restoration 296 

committee  appointed  to  negotiate 129, 134 

Petroleum,  importation  of 194 

Philippines,  memorandum  on  by  “Americus” 446 

Police,  corruption  of  a cause  of  the  revolution 174, 175 

pay  of 78 

Population 2 

“ Popular  clubs,”  organization  of,  to  promote  anti-American  sentiment 384,392 

Priests,  influence  of 4 

a disturbing  element 42, 43 

native,  proposed  circular  to,  in  interest  of  peace 144 

Products  of  the  islands 74,  271,  272, 273,  274,  276, 277 

Property,  amount  of,  owned  by  natives 52,  53, 56 

none  owned  by  insurgents 53 

registration  of 55 

owners  intelligent  enough  to  vote 56 

rights,  protection  of 133 

Provincial  junta,  powers  of 107 

Proportion  of  people  of  Batangas  able  to  read  and  write 67 

Public  instruction  in  the  Philippines  during  the  time  of  Spanish  sovereignty  . 456 

works,  desirability  of  starting 15 

Races  of  the  archipelago 53 

Railways,  lines  that  would  be  profitable 16,  37,  38,  39,  40, 170 


494 


INDEX.. 


Pase. 


Railways,  promotion  of,  under  Spanish  rule 16 

necessary  to  develop  the  mines 30 

the  Manila  and  Dagupan. . . 15, 188,  200,  313,  314, 315, 316, 317,  318,  319,  320 

passenger  and  freight  rates 318, 319 

lack  of  communication  cause  of  country’s  poor  development 37 

country  well  adapted  to  building  of 36,37 

pilgrim  travel  very  profitable 37, 38 

natives  fond  of  travel 40 

proposed  new  lines 304, 305, 310, 311, 312, 313 

Rebellion,  prior  to,  Spain  governed  the  islands  with  a small  number  of  troops.  42 

Religious  orders  controlled  the  system  of  education 46,456 

priests,  influence  of 4 

a disturbing  element 42, 43 

Jesuits,  the 42,43 

friars,  cause  of  resistance  to  American  authority 93 

expulsion  of 99, 132, 144 

Rosario,  remarks  of,  concerning 99, 100 

property  of 93 

confiscation  of 132 

taxation  of 422 

hostility  to 143, 363, 419,  420,  421 

a great  cause  of  irritation 395, 399 


assassination  of 396 

part  taken  by,  in  government 403 

treated  the  people  harshly 403, 404, 408 

immorality  of 370,  419, 420, 421 

a cause  of  the  revolution 371 

Revolution,  cause  of  the  uprising  against  the  Spaniards 22, 376, 377 

a review  of 266, 267, 389, 390 

Rice,  production  of 14 

importation  of 15 

formerly  exported 15 

planting,  crops  and  harvesting 15 

distribution  of 150,151 

Manila  and  Dagupan  Railway  increased  the  production  of 188,  200, 314 

Rizal,  a political  novelist 399 

arrested  and  banished  at  friars’  instance 400 

executed  by  the  Spaniards *. 401 

Roads  much  needed 45 

suitable  stone  available  for  making 45 

Spaniards  constructed  some  good  highways 46 

Sanitariums 39, 40 

Schools.  (See  Education.) 

Soldiers,  health  of  the 240, 241 

Spaniards,  influence  and  sentiment  of 8 

newspapers  of,  influence 98 

harsh  treatment  of  prisoners  by  Filipinos Ill 

Spanish  treatment  of  Filipino  prisoners 377, 378, 379 

Steamers,  lines  of 291, 292, 294, 295, 296,  297, 298 

Subjugated  places,  only  small  garrisons  necessary  for 13 

Sugar,  brings  good  prices 16 

would  pay  to  engage  in  production  of 16 

exported  to  the  United  States 32 

China  and  Japan 157 

Sun,  effect  of  the 238 

Tagalogs,  a disturbing  element 41, 108 

should  be  kept  on  their  own  grounds 41 

have  no  government 41, 109 

worst  race  in  the  islands 51 

demoralized  since  insurrection  against  Spaniards  began 54 

extorted  money 109 

were  oppressive - 109 

where  found 362,419 

Tariff,  the 10 

Taxation,  many  complaints  of 26 

question  should  be  studied 26 


INDEX. 


495 


Tago. 

Taxation,  Americans  should  have  charge  of  collection 44 

amount  collected  per  year j 76 

where  sent 76 

the  cedula  personal 76 

fishing  tax ; 76 

slaughter  tax 76 

toll  tax  on  bridges 77 

certificates  of  property  in  animals 77 

house-property  tax 77 

timber-cutting  tax 78 

taxes  collected  by  the  revolutionary  leaders 423 

Spanish  system 361 

Timber  cutting 82,  83, 84,  85, 86,  111,  112, 113, 114, 115 

best  business  in  the  Philippines 114 

Trinidad,  climate,  products,  and  population 332, 333, 334, 335 

Typhoons 17o 

United  States,  form  of  government  of  unknown  to  natives 8 

opinion  of  relinquishment  of  control  of  islands  by 9 

Union,  province  of,  ownership  of  land  in 78,  79 

Visayan  group,  principal  islands ' 358 

War,  causes  of  the 98 


Date  Due 

Mrr- 

1 D 

PRINTED 

IN  U.  S.  A. 

